\n", argv[0]);
+ return 1;
+ }
+
+ av_register_all();
+ avfilter_register_all();
+
+ if ((ret = open_input_file(argv[1])) < 0)
+ goto end;
+ if ((ret = open_output_file(argv[2])) < 0)
+ goto end;
+ if ((ret = init_filters()) < 0)
+ goto end;
+
+ /* read all packets */
+ while (1) {
+ if ((ret = av_read_frame(ifmt_ctx, &packet)) < 0)
+ break;
+ stream_index = packet.stream_index;
+ type = ifmt_ctx->streams[packet.stream_index]->codec->codec_type;
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_DEBUG, "Demuxer gave frame of stream_index %u\n",
+ stream_index);
+
+ if (filter_ctx[stream_index].filter_graph) {
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_DEBUG, "Going to reencode&filter the frame\n");
+ frame = av_frame_alloc();
+ if (!frame) {
+ ret = AVERROR(ENOMEM);
+ break;
+ }
+ av_packet_rescale_ts(&packet,
+ ifmt_ctx->streams[stream_index]->time_base,
+ ifmt_ctx->streams[stream_index]->codec->time_base);
+ dec_func = (type == AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO) ? avcodec_decode_video2 :
+ avcodec_decode_audio4;
+ ret = dec_func(ifmt_ctx->streams[stream_index]->codec, frame,
+ &got_frame, &packet);
+ if (ret < 0) {
+ av_frame_free(&frame);
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_ERROR, "Decoding failed\n");
+ break;
+ }
+
+ if (got_frame) {
+ frame->pts = av_frame_get_best_effort_timestamp(frame);
+ ret = filter_encode_write_frame(frame, stream_index);
+ av_frame_free(&frame);
+ if (ret < 0)
+ goto end;
+ } else {
+ av_frame_free(&frame);
+ }
+ } else {
+ /* remux this frame without reencoding */
+ av_packet_rescale_ts(&packet,
+ ifmt_ctx->streams[stream_index]->time_base,
+ ofmt_ctx->streams[stream_index]->time_base);
+
+ ret = av_interleaved_write_frame(ofmt_ctx, &packet);
+ if (ret < 0)
+ goto end;
+ }
+ av_free_packet(&packet);
+ }
+
+ /* flush filters and encoders */
+ for (i = 0; i < ifmt_ctx->nb_streams; i++) {
+ /* flush filter */
+ if (!filter_ctx[i].filter_graph)
+ continue;
+ ret = filter_encode_write_frame(NULL, i);
+ if (ret < 0) {
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_ERROR, "Flushing filter failed\n");
+ goto end;
+ }
+
+ /* flush encoder */
+ ret = flush_encoder(i);
+ if (ret < 0) {
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_ERROR, "Flushing encoder failed\n");
+ goto end;
+ }
+ }
+
+ av_write_trailer(ofmt_ctx);
+end:
+ av_free_packet(&packet);
+ av_frame_free(&frame);
+ for (i = 0; i < ifmt_ctx->nb_streams; i++) {
+ avcodec_close(ifmt_ctx->streams[i]->codec);
+ if (ofmt_ctx && ofmt_ctx->nb_streams > i && ofmt_ctx->streams[i] && ofmt_ctx->streams[i]->codec)
+ avcodec_close(ofmt_ctx->streams[i]->codec);
+ if (filter_ctx && filter_ctx[i].filter_graph)
+ avfilter_graph_free(&filter_ctx[i].filter_graph);
+ }
+ av_free(filter_ctx);
+ avformat_close_input(&ifmt_ctx);
+ if (ofmt_ctx && !(ofmt_ctx->oformat->flags & AVFMT_NOFILE))
+ avio_closep(&ofmt_ctx->pb);
+ avformat_free_context(ofmt_ctx);
+
+ if (ret < 0)
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_ERROR, "Error occurred: %s\n", av_err2str(ret));
+
+ return ret ? 1 : 0;
+}
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/doc/faq.html b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/doc/faq.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..be6ea62995
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/doc/faq.html
@@ -0,0 +1,719 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg FAQ
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg FAQ
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 General Questions# TOC
+
+
+
1.1 Why doesn’t FFmpeg support feature [xyz]?# TOC
+
+
Because no one has taken on that task yet. FFmpeg development is
+driven by the tasks that are important to the individual developers.
+If there is a feature that is important to you, the best way to get
+it implemented is to undertake the task yourself or sponsor a developer.
+
+
+
1.2 FFmpeg does not support codec XXX. Can you include a Windows DLL loader to support it?# TOC
+
+
No. Windows DLLs are not portable, bloated and often slow.
+Moreover FFmpeg strives to support all codecs natively.
+A DLL loader is not conducive to that goal.
+
+
+
1.3 I cannot read this file although this format seems to be supported by ffmpeg.# TOC
+
+
Even if ffmpeg can read the container format, it may not support all its
+codecs. Please consult the supported codec list in the ffmpeg
+documentation.
+
+
+
1.4 Which codecs are supported by Windows?# TOC
+
+
Windows does not support standard formats like MPEG very well, unless you
+install some additional codecs.
+
+
The following list of video codecs should work on most Windows systems:
+
+msmpeg4v2 .avi/.asf
+
msmpeg4 .asf only
+
wmv1 .asf only
+
wmv2 .asf only
+
mpeg4 Only if you have some MPEG-4 codec like ffdshow or Xvid installed.
+
mpeg1video .mpg only
+
+
Note, ASF files often have .wmv or .wma extensions in Windows. It should also
+be mentioned that Microsoft claims a patent on the ASF format, and may sue
+or threaten users who create ASF files with non-Microsoft software. It is
+strongly advised to avoid ASF where possible.
+
+
The following list of audio codecs should work on most Windows systems:
+
+adpcm_ima_wav adpcm_ms pcm_s16le always
+
libmp3lame If some MP3 codec like LAME is installed.
+
+
+
+
+
2 Compilation# TOC
+
+
+
2.1 error: can't find a register in class 'GENERAL_REGS' while reloading 'asm'# TOC
+
+
This is a bug in gcc. Do not report it to us. Instead, please report it to
+the gcc developers. Note that we will not add workarounds for gcc bugs.
+
+
Also note that (some of) the gcc developers believe this is not a bug or
+not a bug they should fix:
+http://gcc.gnu.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=11203 .
+Then again, some of them do not know the difference between an undecidable
+problem and an NP-hard problem...
+
+
+
2.2 I have installed this library with my distro’s package manager. Why does configure not see it?# TOC
+
+
Distributions usually split libraries in several packages. The main package
+contains the files necessary to run programs using the library. The
+development package contains the files necessary to build programs using the
+library. Sometimes, docs and/or data are in a separate package too.
+
+
To build FFmpeg, you need to install the development package. It is usually
+called libfoo-dev or libfoo-devel . You can remove it after the
+build is finished, but be sure to keep the main package.
+
+
+
2.3 How do I make pkg-config find my libraries?# TOC
+
+
Somewhere along with your libraries, there is a .pc file (or several)
+in a pkgconfig directory. You need to set environment variables to
+point pkg-config to these files.
+
+
If you need to add directories to pkg-config’s search list
+(typical use case: library installed separately), add it to
+$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:
+
+
+
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=/opt/x264/lib/pkgconfig:/opt/opus/lib/pkgconfig
+
+
+
If you need to replace pkg-config’s search list
+(typical use case: cross-compiling), set it in
+$PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR:
+
+
+
export PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR=/home/me/cross/usr/lib/pkgconfig:/home/me/cross/usr/local/lib/pkgconfig
+
+
+
If you need to know the library’s internal dependencies (typical use: static
+linking), add the --static option to pkg-config:
+
+
+
./configure --pkg-config-flags=--static
+
+
+
+
2.4 How do I use pkg-config when cross-compiling?# TOC
+
+
The best way is to install pkg-config in your cross-compilation
+environment. It will automatically use the cross-compilation libraries.
+
+
You can also use pkg-config from the host environment by
+specifying explicitly --pkg-config=pkg-config to configure.
+In that case, you must point pkg-config to the correct directories
+using the PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR, as explained in the previous entry.
+
+
As an intermediate solution, you can place in your cross-compilation
+environment a script that calls the host pkg-config with
+PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR set. That script can look like that:
+
+
+
#!/bin/sh
+PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR=/path/to/cross/lib/pkgconfig
+export PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR
+exec /usr/bin/pkg-config "$@"
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3.1 ffmpeg does not work; what is wrong?# TOC
+
+
Try a make distclean in the ffmpeg source directory before the build.
+If this does not help see
+(http://ffmpeg.org/bugreports.html ).
+
+
+
3.2 How do I encode single pictures into movies?# TOC
+
+
First, rename your pictures to follow a numerical sequence.
+For example, img1.jpg, img2.jpg, img3.jpg,...
+Then you may run:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -i img%d.jpg /tmp/a.mpg
+
+
+
Notice that ‘%d ’ is replaced by the image number.
+
+
img%03d.jpg means the sequence img001.jpg , img002.jpg , etc.
+
+
Use the -start_number option to declare a starting number for
+the sequence. This is useful if your sequence does not start with
+img001.jpg but is still in a numerical order. The following
+example will start with img100.jpg :
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -start_number 100 -i img%d.jpg /tmp/a.mpg
+
+
+
If you have large number of pictures to rename, you can use the
+following command to ease the burden. The command, using the bourne
+shell syntax, symbolically links all files in the current directory
+that match *jpg to the /tmp directory in the sequence of
+img001.jpg , img002.jpg and so on.
+
+
+
x=1; for i in *jpg; do counter=$(printf %03d $x); ln -s "$i" /tmp/img"$counter".jpg; x=$(($x+1)); done
+
+
+
If you want to sequence them by oldest modified first, substitute
+$(ls -r -t *jpg) in place of *jpg.
+
+
Then run:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -i /tmp/img%03d.jpg /tmp/a.mpg
+
+
+
The same logic is used for any image format that ffmpeg reads.
+
+
You can also use cat to pipe images to ffmpeg:
+
+
+
cat *.jpg | ffmpeg -f image2pipe -c:v mjpeg -i - output.mpg
+
+
+
+
3.3 How do I encode movie to single pictures?# TOC
+
+
Use:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i movie.mpg movie%d.jpg
+
+
+
The movie.mpg used as input will be converted to
+movie1.jpg , movie2.jpg , etc...
+
+
Instead of relying on file format self-recognition, you may also use
+
+-c:v ppm -c:v png -c:v mjpeg
+
to force the encoding.
+
+
Applying that to the previous example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i movie.mpg -f image2 -c:v mjpeg menu%d.jpg
+
+
+
Beware that there is no "jpeg" codec. Use "mjpeg" instead.
+
+
+
3.4 Why do I see a slight quality degradation with multithreaded MPEG* encoding?# TOC
+
+
For multithreaded MPEG* encoding, the encoded slices must be independent,
+otherwise thread n would practically have to wait for n-1 to finish, so it’s
+quite logical that there is a small reduction of quality. This is not a bug.
+
+
+
3.5 How can I read from the standard input or write to the standard output?# TOC
+
+
Use - as file name.
+
+
+
3.6 -f jpeg doesn’t work.# TOC
+
+
Try ’-f image2 test%d.jpg’.
+
+
+
3.7 Why can I not change the frame rate?# TOC
+
+
Some codecs, like MPEG-1/2, only allow a small number of fixed frame rates.
+Choose a different codec with the -c:v command line option.
+
+
+
3.8 How do I encode Xvid or DivX video with ffmpeg?# TOC
+
+
Both Xvid and DivX (version 4+) are implementations of the ISO MPEG-4
+standard (note that there are many other coding formats that use this
+same standard). Thus, use ’-c:v mpeg4’ to encode in these formats. The
+default fourcc stored in an MPEG-4-coded file will be ’FMP4’. If you want
+a different fourcc, use the ’-vtag’ option. E.g., ’-vtag xvid’ will
+force the fourcc ’xvid’ to be stored as the video fourcc rather than the
+default.
+
+
+
3.9 Which are good parameters for encoding high quality MPEG-4?# TOC
+
+
’-mbd rd -flags +mv4+aic -trellis 2 -cmp 2 -subcmp 2 -g 300 -pass 1/2’,
+things to try: ’-bf 2’, ’-flags qprd’, ’-flags mv0’, ’-flags skiprd’.
+
+
+
3.10 Which are good parameters for encoding high quality MPEG-1/MPEG-2?# TOC
+
+
’-mbd rd -trellis 2 -cmp 2 -subcmp 2 -g 100 -pass 1/2’
+but beware the ’-g 100’ might cause problems with some decoders.
+Things to try: ’-bf 2’, ’-flags qprd’, ’-flags mv0’, ’-flags skiprd.
+
+
+
3.11 Interlaced video looks very bad when encoded with ffmpeg, what is wrong?# TOC
+
+
You should use ’-flags +ilme+ildct’ and maybe ’-flags +alt’ for interlaced
+material, and try ’-top 0/1’ if the result looks really messed-up.
+
+
+
3.12 How can I read DirectShow files?# TOC
+
+
If you have built FFmpeg with ./configure --enable-avisynth
+(only possible on MinGW/Cygwin platforms),
+then you may use any file that DirectShow can read as input.
+
+
Just create an "input.avs" text file with this single line ...
+
+
DirectShowSource("C:\path to your file\yourfile.asf")
+
+
... and then feed that text file to ffmpeg:
+
+
+
For ANY other help on AviSynth, please visit the
+AviSynth homepage .
+
+
+
3.13 How can I join video files?# TOC
+
+
To "join" video files is quite ambiguous. The following list explains the
+different kinds of "joining" and points out how those are addressed in
+FFmpeg. To join video files may mean:
+
+
+ To put them one after the other: this is called to concatenate them
+(in short: concat) and is addressed
+in this very faq .
+
+ To put them together in the same file, to let the user choose between the
+different versions (example: different audio languages): this is called to
+multiplex them together (in short: mux), and is done by simply
+invoking ffmpeg with several -i options.
+
+ For audio, to put all channels together in a single stream (example: two
+mono streams into one stereo stream): this is sometimes called to
+merge them, and can be done using the
+amerge For audio, to play one on top of the other: this is called to mix
+them, and can be done by first merging them into a single stream and then
+using the pan For video, to display both together, side by side or one on top of a part of
+the other; it can be done using the
+overlay
+
+
+
3.14 How can I concatenate video files?# TOC
+
+
There are several solutions, depending on the exact circumstances.
+
+
+
3.14.1 Concatenating using the concat filter # TOC
+
+
FFmpeg has a concat
+
+
3.14.2 Concatenating using the concat demuxer # TOC
+
+
FFmpeg has a concat
+
+
3.14.3 Concatenating using the concat protocol (file level)# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg has a concat
+
A few multimedia containers (MPEG-1, MPEG-2 PS, DV) allow to concatenate
+video by merely concatenating the files containing them.
+
+
Hence you may concatenate your multimedia files by first transcoding them to
+these privileged formats, then using the humble cat command (or the
+equally humble copy under Windows), and finally transcoding back to your
+format of choice.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input1.avi -qscale:v 1 intermediate1.mpg
+ffmpeg -i input2.avi -qscale:v 1 intermediate2.mpg
+cat intermediate1.mpg intermediate2.mpg > intermediate_all.mpg
+ffmpeg -i intermediate_all.mpg -qscale:v 2 output.avi
+
+
+
Additionally, you can use the concat protocol instead of cat or
+copy which will avoid creation of a potentially huge intermediate file.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input1.avi -qscale:v 1 intermediate1.mpg
+ffmpeg -i input2.avi -qscale:v 1 intermediate2.mpg
+ffmpeg -i concat:"intermediate1.mpg|intermediate2.mpg" -c copy intermediate_all.mpg
+ffmpeg -i intermediate_all.mpg -qscale:v 2 output.avi
+
+
+
Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for many
+shells.
+
+
Another option is usage of named pipes, should your platform support it:
+
+
+
mkfifo intermediate1.mpg
+mkfifo intermediate2.mpg
+ffmpeg -i input1.avi -qscale:v 1 -y intermediate1.mpg < /dev/null &
+ffmpeg -i input2.avi -qscale:v 1 -y intermediate2.mpg < /dev/null &
+cat intermediate1.mpg intermediate2.mpg |\
+ffmpeg -f mpeg -i - -c:v mpeg4 -acodec libmp3lame output.avi
+
+
+
+
3.14.4 Concatenating using raw audio and video# TOC
+
+
Similarly, the yuv4mpegpipe format, and the raw video, raw audio codecs also
+allow concatenation, and the transcoding step is almost lossless.
+When using multiple yuv4mpegpipe(s), the first line needs to be discarded
+from all but the first stream. This can be accomplished by piping through
+tail as seen below. Note that when piping through tail you
+must use command grouping, { ;}, to background properly.
+
+
For example, let’s say we want to concatenate two FLV files into an
+output.flv file:
+
+
+
mkfifo temp1.a
+mkfifo temp1.v
+mkfifo temp2.a
+mkfifo temp2.v
+mkfifo all.a
+mkfifo all.v
+ffmpeg -i input1.flv -vn -f u16le -acodec pcm_s16le -ac 2 -ar 44100 - > temp1.a < /dev/null &
+ffmpeg -i input2.flv -vn -f u16le -acodec pcm_s16le -ac 2 -ar 44100 - > temp2.a < /dev/null &
+ffmpeg -i input1.flv -an -f yuv4mpegpipe - > temp1.v < /dev/null &
+{ ffmpeg -i input2.flv -an -f yuv4mpegpipe - < /dev/null | tail -n +2 > temp2.v ; } &
+cat temp1.a temp2.a > all.a &
+cat temp1.v temp2.v > all.v &
+ffmpeg -f u16le -acodec pcm_s16le -ac 2 -ar 44100 -i all.a \
+ -f yuv4mpegpipe -i all.v \
+ -y output.flv
+rm temp[12].[av] all.[av]
+
+
+
+
3.15 Using -f lavfi , audio becomes mono for no apparent reason.# TOC
+
+
Use -dumpgraph - to find out exactly where the channel layout is
+lost.
+
+
Most likely, it is through auto-inserted aresample. Try to understand
+why the converting filter was needed at that place.
+
+
Just before the output is a likely place, as -f lavfi currently
+only support packed S16.
+
+
Then insert the correct aformat explicitly in the filtergraph,
+specifying the exact format.
+
+
+
aformat=sample_fmts=s16:channel_layouts=stereo
+
+
+
+
3.16 Why does FFmpeg not see the subtitles in my VOB file?# TOC
+
+
VOB and a few other formats do not have a global header that describes
+everything present in the file. Instead, applications are supposed to scan
+the file to see what it contains. Since VOB files are frequently large, only
+the beginning is scanned. If the subtitles happen only later in the file,
+they will not be initially detected.
+
+
Some applications, including the ffmpeg command-line tool, can only
+work with streams that were detected during the initial scan; streams that
+are detected later are ignored.
+
+
The size of the initial scan is controlled by two options: probesize
+(default ~5 Mo) and analyzeduration (default 5,000,000 µs = 5 s). For
+the subtitle stream to be detected, both values must be large enough.
+
+
+
3.17 Why was the ffmpeg -sameq option removed? What to use instead?# TOC
+
+
The -sameq option meant "same quantizer", and made sense only in a
+very limited set of cases. Unfortunately, a lot of people mistook it for
+"same quality" and used it in places where it did not make sense: it had
+roughly the expected visible effect, but achieved it in a very inefficient
+way.
+
+
Each encoder has its own set of options to set the quality-vs-size balance,
+use the options for the encoder you are using to set the quality level to a
+point acceptable for your tastes. The most common options to do that are
+-qscale and -qmax , but you should peruse the documentation
+of the encoder you chose.
+
+
+
4 Development# TOC
+
+
+
4.1 Are there examples illustrating how to use the FFmpeg libraries, particularly libavcodec and libavformat?# TOC
+
+
Yes. Check the doc/examples directory in the source
+repository, also available online at:
+https://github.com/FFmpeg/FFmpeg/tree/master/doc/examples .
+
+
Examples are also installed by default, usually in
+$PREFIX/share/ffmpeg/examples.
+
+
Also you may read the Developers Guide of the FFmpeg documentation. Alternatively,
+examine the source code for one of the many open source projects that
+already incorporate FFmpeg at (projects.html ).
+
+
+
4.2 Can you support my C compiler XXX?# TOC
+
+
It depends. If your compiler is C99-compliant, then patches to support
+it are likely to be welcome if they do not pollute the source code
+with #ifdefs related to the compiler.
+
+
+
4.3 Is Microsoft Visual C++ supported?# TOC
+
+
Yes. Please see the Microsoft Visual C++
+section in the FFmpeg documentation.
+
+
+
4.4 Can you add automake, libtool or autoconf support?# TOC
+
+
No. These tools are too bloated and they complicate the build.
+
+
+
4.5 Why not rewrite FFmpeg in object-oriented C++?# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is already organized in a highly modular manner and does not need to
+be rewritten in a formal object language. Further, many of the developers
+favor straight C; it works for them. For more arguments on this matter,
+read "Programming Religion" .
+
+
+
4.6 Why are the ffmpeg programs devoid of debugging symbols?# TOC
+
+
The build process creates ffmpeg_g, ffplay_g, etc. which
+contain full debug information. Those binaries are stripped to create
+ffmpeg, ffplay, etc. If you need the debug information, use
+the *_g versions.
+
+
+
4.7 I do not like the LGPL, can I contribute code under the GPL instead?# TOC
+
+
Yes, as long as the code is optional and can easily and cleanly be placed
+under #if CONFIG_GPL without breaking anything. So, for example, a new codec
+or filter would be OK under GPL while a bug fix to LGPL code would not.
+
+
+
4.8 I’m using FFmpeg from within my C application but the linker complains about missing symbols from the libraries themselves.# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg builds static libraries by default. In static libraries, dependencies
+are not handled. That has two consequences. First, you must specify the
+libraries in dependency order: -lavdevice must come before
+-lavformat, -lavutil must come after everything else, etc.
+Second, external libraries that are used in FFmpeg have to be specified too.
+
+
An easy way to get the full list of required libraries in dependency order
+is to use pkg-config.
+
+
+
c99 -o program program.c $(pkg-config --cflags --libs libavformat libavcodec)
+
+
+
See doc/example/Makefile and doc/example/pc-uninstalled for
+more details.
+
+
+
4.9 I’m using FFmpeg from within my C++ application but the linker complains about missing symbols which seem to be available.# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is a pure C project, so to use the libraries within your C++ application
+you need to explicitly state that you are using a C library. You can do this by
+encompassing your FFmpeg includes using extern "C".
+
+
See http://www.parashift.com/c++-faq-lite/mixing-c-and-cpp.html#faq-32.3
+
+
+
4.10 I’m using libavutil from within my C++ application but the compiler complains about ’UINT64_C’ was not declared in this scope# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is a pure C project using C99 math features, in order to enable C++
+to use them you have to append -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS to your CXXFLAGS
+
+
+
4.11 I have a file in memory / a API different from *open/*read/ libc how do I use it with libavformat?# TOC
+
+
You have to create a custom AVIOContext using avio_alloc_context,
+see libavformat/aviobuf.c in FFmpeg and libmpdemux/demux_lavf.c in MPlayer or MPlayer2 sources.
+
+
+
4.12 Where is the documentation about ffv1, msmpeg4, asv1, 4xm?# TOC
+
+
see http://www.ffmpeg.org/~michael/
+
+
+
4.13 How do I feed H.263-RTP (and other codecs in RTP) to libavcodec?# TOC
+
+
Even if peculiar since it is network oriented, RTP is a container like any
+other. You have to demux RTP before feeding the payload to libavcodec.
+In this specific case please look at RFC 4629 to see how it should be done.
+
+
+
4.14 AVStream.r_frame_rate is wrong, it is much larger than the frame rate.# TOC
+
+
r_frame_rate is NOT the average frame rate, it is the smallest frame rate
+that can accurately represent all timestamps. So no, it is not
+wrong if it is larger than the average!
+For example, if you have mixed 25 and 30 fps content, then r_frame_rate
+will be 150 (it is the least common multiple).
+If you are looking for the average frame rate, see AVStream.avg_frame_rate.
+
+
+
4.15 Why is make fate not running all tests?# TOC
+
+
Make sure you have the fate-suite samples and the SAMPLES Make variable
+or FATE_SAMPLES environment variable or the --samples
+configure option is set to the right path.
+
+
+
4.16 Why is make fate not finding the samples?# TOC
+
+
Do you happen to have a ~ character in the samples path to indicate a
+home directory? The value is used in ways where the shell cannot expand it,
+causing FATE to not find files. Just replace ~ by the full path.
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Automated Testing Environment
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Automated Testing Environment
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Introduction# TOC
+
+
FATE is an extended regression suite on the client-side and a means
+for results aggregation and presentation on the server-side.
+
+
The first part of this document explains how you can use FATE from
+your FFmpeg source directory to test your ffmpeg binary. The second
+part describes how you can run FATE to submit the results to FFmpeg’s
+FATE server.
+
+
In any way you can have a look at the publicly viewable FATE results
+by visiting this website:
+
+
http://fate.ffmpeg.org/
+
+
This is especially recommended for all people contributing source
+code to FFmpeg, as it can be seen if some test on some platform broke
+with their recent contribution. This usually happens on the platforms
+the developers could not test on.
+
+
The second part of this document describes how you can run FATE to
+submit your results to FFmpeg’s FATE server. If you want to submit your
+results be sure to check that your combination of CPU, OS and compiler
+is not already listed on the above mentioned website.
+
+
In the third part you can find a comprehensive listing of FATE makefile
+targets and variables.
+
+
+
+
2 Using FATE from your FFmpeg source directory# TOC
+
+
If you want to run FATE on your machine you need to have the samples
+in place. You can get the samples via the build target fate-rsync.
+Use this command from the top-level source directory:
+
+
+
make fate-rsync SAMPLES=fate-suite/
+make fate SAMPLES=fate-suite/
+
+
+
The above commands set the samples location by passing a makefile
+variable via command line. It is also possible to set the samples
+location at source configuration time by invoking configure with
+‘–samples=<path to the samples directory>’. Afterwards you can
+invoke the makefile targets without setting the SAMPLES makefile
+variable. This is illustrated by the following commands:
+
+
+
./configure --samples=fate-suite/
+make fate-rsync
+make fate
+
+
+
Yet another way to tell FATE about the location of the sample
+directory is by making sure the environment variable FATE_SAMPLES
+contains the path to your samples directory. This can be achieved
+by e.g. putting that variable in your shell profile or by setting
+it in your interactive session.
+
+
+
FATE_SAMPLES=fate-suite/ make fate
+
+
+
+
Do not put a ’~’ character in the samples path to indicate a home
+directory. Because of shell nuances, this will cause FATE to fail.
+
+
To use a custom wrapper to run the test, pass --target-exec to
+configure or set the TARGET_EXEC Make variable.
+
+
+
+
3 Submitting the results to the FFmpeg result aggregation server# TOC
+
+
To submit your results to the server you should run fate through the
+shell script tests/fate.sh from the FFmpeg sources. This script needs
+to be invoked with a configuration file as its first argument.
+
+
+
tests/fate.sh /path/to/fate_config
+
+
+
A configuration file template with comments describing the individual
+configuration variables can be found at doc/fate_config.sh.template .
+
+
The mentioned configuration template is also available here:
+
slot= # some unique identifier
+repo=git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg.git # the source repository
+samples= # path to samples directory
+workdir= # directory in which to do all the work
+#fate_recv="ssh -T fate@fate.ffmpeg.org" # command to submit report
+comment= # optional description
+build_only= # set to "yes" for a compile-only instance that skips tests
+
+# the following are optional and map to configure options
+arch=
+cpu=
+cross_prefix=
+as=
+cc=
+ld=
+target_os=
+sysroot=
+target_exec=
+target_path=
+target_samples=
+extra_cflags=
+extra_ldflags=
+extra_libs=
+extra_conf= # extra configure options not covered above
+
+#make= # name of GNU make if not 'make'
+makeopts= # extra options passed to 'make'
+#tar= # command to create a tar archive from its arguments on stdout,
+ # defaults to 'tar c'
+
+
Create a configuration that suits your needs, based on the configuration
+template. The ‘slot’ configuration variable can be any string that is not
+yet used, but it is suggested that you name it adhering to the following
+pattern <arch>-<os>-<compiler>-<compiler version>. The configuration file
+itself will be sourced in a shell script, therefore all shell features may
+be used. This enables you to setup the environment as you need it for your
+build.
+
+
For your first test runs the ‘fate_recv’ variable should be empty or
+commented out. This will run everything as normal except that it will omit
+the submission of the results to the server. The following files should be
+present in $workdir as specified in the configuration file:
+
+
+ configure.log
+ compile.log
+ test.log
+ report
+ version
+
+
+
When you have everything working properly you can create an SSH key pair
+and send the public key to the FATE server administrator who can be contacted
+at the email address fate-admin@ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Configure your SSH client to use public key authentication with that key
+when connecting to the FATE server. Also do not forget to check the identity
+of the server and to accept its host key. This can usually be achieved by
+running your SSH client manually and killing it after you accepted the key.
+The FATE server’s fingerprint is:
+
+
+RSA d3:f1:83:97:a4:75:2b:a6:fb:d6:e8:aa:81:93:97:51
+
ECDSA 76:9f:68:32:04:1e:d5:d4:ec:47:3f:dc:fc:18:17:86
+
+
+
If you have problems connecting to the FATE server, it may help to try out
+the ssh command with one or more -v options. You should
+get detailed output concerning your SSH configuration and the authentication
+process.
+
+
The only thing left is to automate the execution of the fate.sh script and
+the synchronisation of the samples directory.
+
+
+
+
4 FATE makefile targets and variables# TOC
+
+
+
4.1 Makefile targets# TOC
+
+
+fate-rsync Download/synchronize sample files to the configured samples directory.
+
+fate-list Will list all fate/regression test targets.
+
+fate Run the FATE test suite (requires the fate-suite dataset).
+
+
+
+
4.2 Makefile variables# TOC
+
+
+V Verbosity level, can be set to 0, 1 or 2.
+
+ 0: show just the test arguments
+ 1: show just the command used in the test
+ 2: show everything
+
+
+SAMPLES Specify or override the path to the FATE samples at make time, it has a
+meaning only while running the regression tests.
+
+THREADS Specify how many threads to use while running regression tests, it is
+quite useful to detect thread-related regressions.
+
+THREAD_TYPE Specify which threading strategy test, either slice or frame ,
+by default slice+frame
+
+CPUFLAGS Specify CPU flags.
+
+TARGET_EXEC Specify or override the wrapper used to run the tests.
+The TARGET_EXEC option provides a way to run FATE wrapped in
+valgrind, qemu-user or wine or on remote targets
+through ssh.
+
+GEN Set to 1 to generate the missing or mismatched references.
+
+
+
+
4.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
make V=1 SAMPLES=/var/fate/samples THREADS=2 CPUFLAGS=mmx fate
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffmpeg Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffmpeg Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg [global_options ] {[input_file_options ] -i input_file } ... {[output_file_options ] output_file } ...
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg is a very fast video and audio converter that can also grab from
+a live audio/video source. It can also convert between arbitrary sample
+rates and resize video on the fly with a high quality polyphase filter.
+
+
ffmpeg reads from an arbitrary number of input "files" (which can be regular
+files, pipes, network streams, grabbing devices, etc.), specified by the
+-i option, and writes to an arbitrary number of output "files", which are
+specified by a plain output filename. Anything found on the command line which
+cannot be interpreted as an option is considered to be an output filename.
+
+
Each input or output file can, in principle, contain any number of streams of
+different types (video/audio/subtitle/attachment/data). The allowed number and/or
+types of streams may be limited by the container format. Selecting which
+streams from which inputs will go into which output is either done automatically
+or with the -map option (see the Stream selection chapter).
+
+
To refer to input files in options, you must use their indices (0-based). E.g.
+the first input file is 0, the second is 1, etc. Similarly, streams
+within a file are referred to by their indices. E.g. 2:3 refers to the
+fourth stream in the third input file. Also see the Stream specifiers chapter.
+
+
As a general rule, options are applied to the next specified
+file. Therefore, order is important, and you can have the same
+option on the command line multiple times. Each occurrence is
+then applied to the next input or output file.
+Exceptions from this rule are the global options (e.g. verbosity level),
+which should be specified first.
+
+
Do not mix input and output files – first specify all input files, then all
+output files. Also do not mix options which belong to different files. All
+options apply ONLY to the next input or output file and are reset between files.
+
+
+ To set the video bitrate of the output file to 64 kbit/s:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.avi -b:v 64k -bufsize 64k output.avi
+ To force the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.avi -r 24 output.avi
+ To force the frame rate of the input file (valid for raw formats only)
+to 1 fps and the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
+
+
ffmpeg -r 1 -i input.m2v -r 24 output.avi
+
+
+
The format option may be needed for raw input files.
+
+
+
+
3 Detailed description# TOC
+
+
The transcoding process in ffmpeg for each output can be described by
+the following diagram:
+
+
+
_______ ______________
+| | | |
+| input | demuxer | encoded data | decoder
+| file | ---------> | packets | -----+
+|_______| |______________| |
+ v
+ _________
+ | |
+ | decoded |
+ | frames |
+ |_________|
+ ________ ______________ |
+| | | | |
+| output | <-------- | encoded data | <----+
+| file | muxer | packets | encoder
+|________| |______________|
+
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg calls the libavformat library (containing demuxers) to read
+input files and get packets containing encoded data from them. When there are
+multiple input files, ffmpeg tries to keep them synchronized by
+tracking lowest timestamp on any active input stream.
+
+
Encoded packets are then passed to the decoder (unless streamcopy is selected
+for the stream, see further for a description). The decoder produces
+uncompressed frames (raw video/PCM audio/...) which can be processed further by
+filtering (see next section). After filtering, the frames are passed to the
+encoder, which encodes them and outputs encoded packets. Finally those are
+passed to the muxer, which writes the encoded packets to the output file.
+
+
+
3.1 Filtering# TOC
+
Before encoding, ffmpeg can process raw audio and video frames using
+filters from the libavfilter library. Several chained filters form a filter
+graph. ffmpeg distinguishes between two types of filtergraphs:
+simple and complex.
+
+
+
3.1.1 Simple filtergraphs# TOC
+
Simple filtergraphs are those that have exactly one input and output, both of
+the same type. In the above diagram they can be represented by simply inserting
+an additional step between decoding and encoding:
+
+
+
_________ ______________
+| | | |
+| decoded | | encoded data |
+| frames |\ _ | packets |
+|_________| \ /||______________|
+ \ __________ /
+ simple _\|| | / encoder
+ filtergraph | filtered |/
+ | frames |
+ |__________|
+
+
+
+
Simple filtergraphs are configured with the per-stream -filter option
+(with -vf and -af aliases for video and audio respectively).
+A simple filtergraph for video can look for example like this:
+
+
+
_______ _____________ _______ ________
+| | | | | | | |
+| input | ---> | deinterlace | ---> | scale | ---> | output |
+|_______| |_____________| |_______| |________|
+
+
+
+
Note that some filters change frame properties but not frame contents. E.g. the
+fps filter in the example above changes number of frames, but does not
+touch the frame contents. Another example is the setpts filter, which
+only sets timestamps and otherwise passes the frames unchanged.
+
+
+
3.1.2 Complex filtergraphs# TOC
+
Complex filtergraphs are those which cannot be described as simply a linear
+processing chain applied to one stream. This is the case, for example, when the graph has
+more than one input and/or output, or when output stream type is different from
+input. They can be represented with the following diagram:
+
+
+
_________
+| |
+| input 0 |\ __________
+|_________| \ | |
+ \ _________ /| output 0 |
+ \ | | / |__________|
+ _________ \| complex | /
+| | | |/
+| input 1 |---->| filter |\
+|_________| | | \ __________
+ /| graph | \ | |
+ / | | \| output 1 |
+ _________ / |_________| |__________|
+| | /
+| input 2 |/
+|_________|
+
+
+
+
Complex filtergraphs are configured with the -filter_complex option.
+Note that this option is global, since a complex filtergraph, by its nature,
+cannot be unambiguously associated with a single stream or file.
+
+
The -lavfi option is equivalent to -filter_complex .
+
+
A trivial example of a complex filtergraph is the overlay filter, which
+has two video inputs and one video output, containing one video overlaid on top
+of the other. Its audio counterpart is the amix filter.
+
+
+
3.2 Stream copy# TOC
+
Stream copy is a mode selected by supplying the copy parameter to the
+-codec option. It makes ffmpeg omit the decoding and encoding
+step for the specified stream, so it does only demuxing and muxing. It is useful
+for changing the container format or modifying container-level metadata. The
+diagram above will, in this case, simplify to this:
+
+
+
_______ ______________ ________
+| | | | | |
+| input | demuxer | encoded data | muxer | output |
+| file | ---------> | packets | -------> | file |
+|_______| |______________| |________|
+
+
+
+
Since there is no decoding or encoding, it is very fast and there is no quality
+loss. However, it might not work in some cases because of many factors. Applying
+filters is obviously also impossible, since filters work on uncompressed data.
+
+
+
+
4 Stream selection# TOC
+
+
By default, ffmpeg includes only one stream of each type (video, audio, subtitle)
+present in the input files and adds them to each output file. It picks the
+"best" of each based upon the following criteria: for video, it is the stream
+with the highest resolution, for audio, it is the stream with the most channels, for
+subtitles, it is the first subtitle stream. In the case where several streams of
+the same type rate equally, the stream with the lowest index is chosen.
+
+
You can disable some of those defaults by using the -vn/-an/-sn options. For
+full manual control, use the -map option, which disables the defaults just
+described.
+
+
+
+
5 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
5.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
5.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
5.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
5.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-f fmt (input/output ) Force input or output file format. The format is normally auto detected for input
+files and guessed from the file extension for output files, so this option is not
+needed in most cases.
+
+-i filename (input ) input file name
+
+-y (global ) Overwrite output files without asking.
+
+-n (global ) Do not overwrite output files, and exit immediately if a specified
+output file already exists.
+
+-c[:stream_specifier ] codec (input/output,per-stream ) -codec[:stream_specifier ] codec (input/output,per-stream ) Select an encoder (when used before an output file) or a decoder (when used
+before an input file) for one or more streams. codec is the name of a
+decoder/encoder or a special value copy (output only) to indicate that
+the stream is not to be re-encoded.
+
+For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c:v libx264 -c:a copy OUTPUT
+ encodes all video streams with libx264 and copies all audio streams.
+
+For each stream, the last matching c option is applied, so
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c copy -c:v:1 libx264 -c:a:137 libvorbis OUTPUT
+ will copy all the streams except the second video, which will be encoded with
+libx264, and the 138th audio, which will be encoded with libvorbis.
+
+-t duration (input/output ) When used as an input option (before -i), limit the duration of
+data read from the input file.
+
+When used as an output option (before an output filename), stop writing the
+output after its duration reaches duration .
+
+duration may be a number in seconds, or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.
+
+-to position (output ) Stop writing the output at position .
+position may be a number in seconds, or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.
+
+-fs limit_size (output ) Set the file size limit, expressed in bytes.
+
+-ss position (input/output ) When used as an input option (before -i), seeks in this input file to
+position . Note the in most formats it is not possible to seek exactly, so
+ffmpeg will seek to the closest seek point before position .
+When transcoding and -accurate_seek is enabled (the default), this
+extra segment between the seek point and position will be decoded and
+discarded. When doing stream copy or when -noaccurate_seek is used, it
+will be preserved.
+
+When used as an output option (before an output filename), decodes but discards
+input until the timestamps reach position .
+
+position may be either in seconds or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-itsoffset offset (input ) Set the input time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added to the timestamps of the input files. Specifying
+a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are delayed by
+the time duration specified in offset .
+
+-timestamp date (output ) Set the recording timestamp in the container.
+
+date must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Date section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+-metadata[:metadata_specifier] key =value (output,per-metadata ) Set a metadata key/value pair.
+
+An optional metadata_specifier may be given to set metadata
+on streams or chapters. See -map_metadata documentation for
+details.
+
+This option overrides metadata set with -map_metadata. It is
+also possible to delete metadata by using an empty value.
+
+For example, for setting the title in the output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -metadata title="my title" out.flv
+ To set the language of the first audio stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -metadata:s:a:0 language=eng OUTPUT
+ -target type (output ) Specify target file type (vcd, svcd, dvd, dv,
+dv50). type may be prefixed with pal-, ntsc- or
+film- to use the corresponding standard. All the format options
+(bitrate, codecs, buffer sizes) are then set automatically. You can just type:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd /tmp/vcd.mpg
+ Nevertheless you can specify additional options as long as you know
+they do not conflict with the standard, as in:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd -bf 2 /tmp/vcd.mpg
+ -dframes number (output ) Set the number of data frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:d.
+
+-frames[:stream_specifier ] framecount (output,per-stream ) Stop writing to the stream after framecount frames.
+
+-q[:stream_specifier ] q (output,per-stream ) -qscale[:stream_specifier ] q (output,per-stream ) Use fixed quality scale (VBR). The meaning of q /qscale is
+codec-dependent.
+If qscale is used without a stream_specifier then it applies only
+to the video stream, this is to maintain compatibility with previous behavior
+and as specifying the same codec specific value to 2 different codecs that is
+audio and video generally is not what is intended when no stream_specifier is
+used.
+
+-filter[:stream_specifier ] filtergraph (output,per-stream ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the stream, and must have a single input and a single output of the
+same type of the stream. In the filtergraph, the input is associated
+to the label in, and the output to the label out. See
+the ffmpeg-filters manual for more information about the filtergraph
+syntax.
+
+See the -filter_complex option if you
+want to create filtergraphs with multiple inputs and/or outputs.
+
+-filter_script[:stream_specifier ] filename (output,per-stream ) This option is similar to -filter , the only difference is that its
+argument is the name of the file from which a filtergraph description is to be
+read.
+
+-pre[:stream_specifier ] preset_name (output,per-stream ) Specify the preset for matching stream(s).
+
+-stats (global ) Print encoding progress/statistics. It is on by default, to explicitly
+disable it you need to specify -nostats.
+
+-progress url (global ) Send program-friendly progress information to url .
+
+Progress information is written approximately every second and at the end of
+the encoding process. It is made of "key =value " lines. key
+consists of only alphanumeric characters. The last key of a sequence of
+progress information is always "progress".
+
+-stdin Enable interaction on standard input. On by default unless standard input is
+used as an input. To explicitly disable interaction you need to specify
+-nostdin.
+
+Disabling interaction on standard input is useful, for example, if
+ffmpeg is in the background process group. Roughly the same result can
+be achieved with ffmpeg ... < /dev/null but it requires a
+shell.
+
+-debug_ts (global ) Print timestamp information. It is off by default. This option is
+mostly useful for testing and debugging purposes, and the output
+format may change from one version to another, so it should not be
+employed by portable scripts.
+
+See also the option -fdebug ts.
+
+-attach filename (output ) Add an attachment to the output file. This is supported by a few formats
+like Matroska for e.g. fonts used in rendering subtitles. Attachments
+are implemented as a specific type of stream, so this option will add
+a new stream to the file. It is then possible to use per-stream options
+on this stream in the usual way. Attachment streams created with this
+option will be created after all the other streams (i.e. those created
+with -map or automatic mappings).
+
+Note that for Matroska you also have to set the mimetype metadata tag:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -attach DejaVuSans.ttf -metadata:s:2 mimetype=application/x-truetype-font out.mkv
+ (assuming that the attachment stream will be third in the output file).
+
+-dump_attachment[:stream_specifier ] filename (input,per-stream ) Extract the matching attachment stream into a file named filename . If
+filename is empty, then the value of the filename metadata tag
+will be used.
+
+E.g. to extract the first attachment to a file named ’out.ttf’:
+
+
ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t:0 out.ttf -i INPUT
+ To extract all attachments to files determined by the filename tag:
+
+
ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t "" -i INPUT
+ Technical note – attachments are implemented as codec extradata, so this
+option can actually be used to extract extradata from any stream, not just
+attachments.
+
+
+
+
+
5.5 Video Options# TOC
+
+
+-vframes number (output ) Set the number of video frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:v.
+
-r[:stream_specifier ] fps (input/output,per-stream ) Set frame rate (Hz value, fraction or abbreviation).
+
+As an input option, ignore any timestamps stored in the file and instead
+generate timestamps assuming constant frame rate fps .
+This is not the same as the -framerate option used for some input formats
+like image2 or v4l2 (it used to be the same in older versions of FFmpeg).
+If in doubt use -framerate instead of the input option -r .
+
+As an output option, duplicate or drop input frames to achieve constant output
+frame rate fps .
+
+-s[:stream_specifier ] size (input/output,per-stream ) Set frame size.
+
+As an input option, this is a shortcut for the video_size private
+option, recognized by some demuxers for which the frame size is either not
+stored in the file or is configurable – e.g. raw video or video grabbers.
+
+As an output option, this inserts the scale video filter to the
+end of the corresponding filtergraph. Please use the scale filter
+directly to insert it at the beginning or some other place.
+
+The format is ‘wxh ’ (default - same as source).
+
+-aspect[:stream_specifier ] aspect (output,per-stream ) Set the video display aspect ratio specified by aspect .
+
+aspect can be a floating point number string, or a string of the
+form num :den , where num and den are the
+numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. For example "4:3",
+"16:9", "1.3333", and "1.7777" are valid argument values.
+
+If used together with -vcodec copy , it will affect the aspect ratio
+stored at container level, but not the aspect ratio stored in encoded
+frames, if it exists.
+
+-vn (output ) Disable video recording.
+
+-vcodec codec (output ) Set the video codec. This is an alias for -codec:v.
+
+-pass[:stream_specifier ] n (output,per-stream ) Select the pass number (1 or 2). It is used to do two-pass
+video encoding. The statistics of the video are recorded in the first
+pass into a log file (see also the option -passlogfile),
+and in the second pass that log file is used to generate the video
+at the exact requested bitrate.
+On pass 1, you may just deactivate audio and set output to null,
+examples for Windows and Unix:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y NUL
+ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y /dev/null
+ -passlogfile[:stream_specifier ] prefix (output,per-stream ) Set two-pass log file name prefix to prefix , the default file name
+prefix is “ffmpeg2pass”. The complete file name will be
+PREFIX-N.log , where N is a number specific to the output
+stream
+
+-vf filtergraph (output ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+This is an alias for -filter:v, see the -filter option .
+
+
+
+
5.6 Advanced Video options# TOC
+
+
+-pix_fmt[:stream_specifier ] format (input/output,per-stream ) Set pixel format. Use -pix_fmts to show all the supported
+pixel formats.
+If the selected pixel format can not be selected, ffmpeg will print a
+warning and select the best pixel format supported by the encoder.
+If pix_fmt is prefixed by a +, ffmpeg will exit with an error
+if the requested pixel format can not be selected, and automatic conversions
+inside filtergraphs are disabled.
+If pix_fmt is a single +, ffmpeg selects the same pixel format
+as the input (or graph output) and automatic conversions are disabled.
+
+-sws_flags flags (input/output ) Set SwScaler flags.
+
-vdt n Discard threshold.
+
+-rc_override[:stream_specifier ] override (output,per-stream ) Rate control override for specific intervals, formatted as "int,int,int"
+list separated with slashes. Two first values are the beginning and
+end frame numbers, last one is quantizer to use if positive, or quality
+factor if negative.
+
+-ilme Force interlacing support in encoder (MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 only).
+Use this option if your input file is interlaced and you want
+to keep the interlaced format for minimum losses.
+The alternative is to deinterlace the input stream with
+-deinterlace , but deinterlacing introduces losses.
+
-psnr Calculate PSNR of compressed frames.
+
-vstats Dump video coding statistics to vstats_HHMMSS.log .
+
-vstats_file file Dump video coding statistics to file .
+
-top[:stream_specifier ] n (output,per-stream ) top=1/bottom=0/auto=-1 field first
+
-dc precision Intra_dc_precision.
+
-vtag fourcc/tag (output ) Force video tag/fourcc. This is an alias for -tag:v.
+
-qphist (global ) Show QP histogram
+
-vbsf bitstream_filter Deprecated see -bsf
+
+-force_key_frames[:stream_specifier ] time [,time ...] (output,per-stream ) -force_key_frames[:stream_specifier ] expr:expr (output,per-stream ) Force key frames at the specified timestamps, more precisely at the first
+frames after each specified time.
+
+If the argument is prefixed with expr:, the string expr
+is interpreted like an expression and is evaluated for each frame. A
+key frame is forced in case the evaluation is non-zero.
+
+If one of the times is "chapters[delta ]", it is expanded into
+the time of the beginning of all chapters in the file, shifted by
+delta , expressed as a time in seconds.
+This option can be useful to ensure that a seek point is present at a
+chapter mark or any other designated place in the output file.
+
+For example, to insert a key frame at 5 minutes, plus key frames 0.1 second
+before the beginning of every chapter:
+
+
-force_key_frames 0:05:00,chapters-0.1
+ The expression in expr can contain the following constants:
+
+n the number of current processed frame, starting from 0
+
n_forced the number of forced frames
+
prev_forced_n the number of the previous forced frame, it is NAN when no
+keyframe was forced yet
+
prev_forced_t the time of the previous forced frame, it is NAN when no
+keyframe was forced yet
+
t the time of the current processed frame
+
+
+For example to force a key frame every 5 seconds, you can specify:
+
+
-force_key_frames expr:gte(t,n_forced*5)
+ To force a key frame 5 seconds after the time of the last forced one,
+starting from second 13:
+
+
-force_key_frames expr:if(isnan(prev_forced_t),gte(t,13),gte(t,prev_forced_t+5))
+ Note that forcing too many keyframes is very harmful for the lookahead
+algorithms of certain encoders: using fixed-GOP options or similar
+would be more efficient.
+
+-copyinkf[:stream_specifier ] (output,per-stream ) When doing stream copy, copy also non-key frames found at the
+beginning.
+
+-hwaccel[:stream_specifier ] hwaccel (input,per-stream ) Use hardware acceleration to decode the matching stream(s). The allowed values
+of hwaccel are:
+
+none Do not use any hardware acceleration (the default).
+
+auto Automatically select the hardware acceleration method.
+
+vda Use Apple VDA hardware acceleration.
+
+vdpau Use VDPAU (Video Decode and Presentation API for Unix) hardware acceleration.
+
+dxva2 Use DXVA2 (DirectX Video Acceleration) hardware acceleration.
+
+
+This option has no effect if the selected hwaccel is not available or not
+supported by the chosen decoder.
+
+Note that most acceleration methods are intended for playback and will not be
+faster than software decoding on modern CPUs. Additionally, ffmpeg
+will usually need to copy the decoded frames from the GPU memory into the system
+memory, resulting in further performance loss. This option is thus mainly
+useful for testing.
+
+-hwaccel_device[:stream_specifier ] hwaccel_device (input,per-stream ) Select a device to use for hardware acceleration.
+
+This option only makes sense when the -hwaccel option is also
+specified. Its exact meaning depends on the specific hardware acceleration
+method chosen.
+
+
+vdpau For VDPAU, this option specifies the X11 display/screen to use. If this option
+is not specified, the value of the DISPLAY environment variable is used
+
+dxva2 For DXVA2, this option should contain the number of the display adapter to use.
+If this option is not specified, the default adapter is used.
+
+
+
+
+
5.7 Audio Options# TOC
+
+
+-aframes number (output ) Set the number of audio frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:a.
+
-ar[:stream_specifier ] freq (input/output,per-stream ) Set the audio sampling frequency. For output streams it is set by
+default to the frequency of the corresponding input stream. For input
+streams this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw
+demuxers and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.
+
-aq q (output ) Set the audio quality (codec-specific, VBR). This is an alias for -q:a.
+
-ac[:stream_specifier ] channels (input/output,per-stream ) Set the number of audio channels. For output streams it is set by
+default to the number of input audio channels. For input streams
+this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw demuxers
+and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.
+
-an (output ) Disable audio recording.
+
-acodec codec (input/output ) Set the audio codec. This is an alias for -codec:a.
+
-sample_fmt[:stream_specifier ] sample_fmt (output,per-stream ) Set the audio sample format. Use -sample_fmts to get a list
+of supported sample formats.
+
+-af filtergraph (output ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+This is an alias for -filter:a, see the -filter option .
+
+
+
+
5.8 Advanced Audio options# TOC
+
+
+-atag fourcc/tag (output ) Force audio tag/fourcc. This is an alias for -tag:a.
+
-absf bitstream_filter Deprecated, see -bsf
+
-guess_layout_max channels (input,per-stream ) If some input channel layout is not known, try to guess only if it
+corresponds to at most the specified number of channels. For example, 2
+tells to ffmpeg to recognize 1 channel as mono and 2 channels as
+stereo but not 6 channels as 5.1. The default is to always try to guess. Use
+0 to disable all guessing.
+
+
+
+
5.9 Subtitle options# TOC
+
+
+-scodec codec (input/output ) Set the subtitle codec. This is an alias for -codec:s.
+
-sn (output ) Disable subtitle recording.
+
-sbsf bitstream_filter Deprecated, see -bsf
+
+
+
+
5.10 Advanced Subtitle options# TOC
+
+
+-fix_sub_duration Fix subtitles durations. For each subtitle, wait for the next packet in the
+same stream and adjust the duration of the first to avoid overlap. This is
+necessary with some subtitles codecs, especially DVB subtitles, because the
+duration in the original packet is only a rough estimate and the end is
+actually marked by an empty subtitle frame. Failing to use this option when
+necessary can result in exaggerated durations or muxing failures due to
+non-monotonic timestamps.
+
+Note that this option will delay the output of all data until the next
+subtitle packet is decoded: it may increase memory consumption and latency a
+lot.
+
+-canvas_size size Set the size of the canvas used to render subtitles.
+
+
+
+
+
5.11 Advanced options# TOC
+
+
+-map [-]input_file_id [:stream_specifier ][,sync_file_id [:stream_specifier ]] | [linklabel] (output )
+Designate one or more input streams as a source for the output file. Each input
+stream is identified by the input file index input_file_id and
+the input stream index input_stream_id within the input
+file. Both indices start at 0. If specified,
+sync_file_id :stream_specifier sets which input stream
+is used as a presentation sync reference.
+
+The first -map option on the command line specifies the
+source for output stream 0, the second -map option specifies
+the source for output stream 1, etc.
+
+A - character before the stream identifier creates a "negative" mapping.
+It disables matching streams from already created mappings.
+
+An alternative [linklabel] form will map outputs from complex filter
+graphs (see the -filter_complex option) to the output file.
+linklabel must correspond to a defined output link label in the graph.
+
+For example, to map ALL streams from the first input file to output
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 output
+ For example, if you have two audio streams in the first input file,
+these streams are identified by "0:0" and "0:1". You can use
+-map to select which streams to place in an output file. For
+example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:1 out.wav
+ will map the input stream in INPUT identified by "0:1" to
+the (single) output stream in out.wav .
+
+For example, to select the stream with index 2 from input file
+a.mov (specified by the identifier "0:2"), and stream with
+index 6 from input b.mov (specified by the identifier "1:6"),
+and copy them to the output file out.mov :
+
+
ffmpeg -i a.mov -i b.mov -c copy -map 0:2 -map 1:6 out.mov
+ To select all video and the third audio stream from an input file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:v -map 0:a:2 OUTPUT
+ To map all the streams except the second audio, use negative mappings
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -map -0:a:1 OUTPUT
+ To pick the English audio stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:m:language:eng OUTPUT
+ Note that using this option disables the default mappings for this output file.
+
+
+-map_channel [input_file_id .stream_specifier .channel_id |-1][:output_file_id .stream_specifier ] Map an audio channel from a given input to an output. If
+output_file_id .stream_specifier is not set, the audio channel will
+be mapped on all the audio streams.
+
+Using "-1" instead of
+input_file_id .stream_specifier .channel_id will map a muted
+channel.
+
+For example, assuming INPUT is a stereo audio file, you can switch the
+two audio channels with the following command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel 0.0.1 -map_channel 0.0.0 OUTPUT
+ If you want to mute the first channel and keep the second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel -1 -map_channel 0.0.1 OUTPUT
+ The order of the "-map_channel" option specifies the order of the channels in
+the output stream. The output channel layout is guessed from the number of
+channels mapped (mono if one "-map_channel", stereo if two, etc.). Using "-ac"
+in combination of "-map_channel" makes the channel gain levels to be updated if
+input and output channel layouts don’t match (for instance two "-map_channel"
+options and "-ac 6").
+
+You can also extract each channel of an input to specific outputs; the following
+command extracts two channels of the INPUT audio stream (file 0, stream 0)
+to the respective OUTPUT_CH0 and OUTPUT_CH1 outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel 0.0.0 OUTPUT_CH0 -map_channel 0.0.1 OUTPUT_CH1
+ The following example splits the channels of a stereo input into two separate
+streams, which are put into the same output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -map 0:0 -map 0:0 -map_channel 0.0.0:0.0 -map_channel 0.0.1:0.1 -y out.ogg
+ Note that currently each output stream can only contain channels from a single
+input stream; you can’t for example use "-map_channel" to pick multiple input
+audio channels contained in different streams (from the same or different files)
+and merge them into a single output stream. It is therefore not currently
+possible, for example, to turn two separate mono streams into a single stereo
+stream. However splitting a stereo stream into two single channel mono streams
+is possible.
+
+If you need this feature, a possible workaround is to use the amerge
+filter. For example, if you need to merge a media (here input.mkv ) with 2
+mono audio streams into one single stereo channel audio stream (and keep the
+video stream), you can use the following command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1] [0:2] amerge" -c:a pcm_s16le -c:v copy output.mkv
+ -map_metadata[:metadata_spec_out ] infile [:metadata_spec_in ] (output,per-metadata ) Set metadata information of the next output file from infile . Note that
+those are file indices (zero-based), not filenames.
+Optional metadata_spec_in/out parameters specify, which metadata to copy.
+A metadata specifier can have the following forms:
+
+g global metadata, i.e. metadata that applies to the whole file
+
+s [:stream_spec ]per-stream metadata. stream_spec is a stream specifier as described
+in the Stream specifiers chapter. In an input metadata specifier, the first
+matching stream is copied from. In an output metadata specifier, all matching
+streams are copied to.
+
+c :chapter_index per-chapter metadata. chapter_index is the zero-based chapter index.
+
+p :program_index per-program metadata. program_index is the zero-based program index.
+
+If metadata specifier is omitted, it defaults to global.
+
+By default, global metadata is copied from the first input file,
+per-stream and per-chapter metadata is copied along with streams/chapters. These
+default mappings are disabled by creating any mapping of the relevant type. A negative
+file index can be used to create a dummy mapping that just disables automatic copying.
+
+For example to copy metadata from the first stream of the input file to global metadata
+of the output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.ogg -map_metadata 0:s:0 out.mp3
+ To do the reverse, i.e. copy global metadata to all audio streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mkv -map_metadata:s:a 0:g out.mkv
+ Note that simple 0 would work as well in this example, since global
+metadata is assumed by default.
+
+-map_chapters input_file_index (output ) Copy chapters from input file with index input_file_index to the next
+output file. If no chapter mapping is specified, then chapters are copied from
+the first input file with at least one chapter. Use a negative file index to
+disable any chapter copying.
+
+-benchmark (global ) Show benchmarking information at the end of an encode.
+Shows CPU time used and maximum memory consumption.
+Maximum memory consumption is not supported on all systems,
+it will usually display as 0 if not supported.
+
-benchmark_all (global ) Show benchmarking information during the encode.
+Shows CPU time used in various steps (audio/video encode/decode).
+
-timelimit duration (global ) Exit after ffmpeg has been running for duration seconds.
+
-dump (global ) Dump each input packet to stderr.
+
-hex (global ) When dumping packets, also dump the payload.
+
-re (input ) Read input at native frame rate. Mainly used to simulate a grab device.
+or live input stream (e.g. when reading from a file). Should not be used
+with actual grab devices or live input streams (where it can cause packet
+loss).
+By default ffmpeg attempts to read the input(s) as fast as possible.
+This option will slow down the reading of the input(s) to the native frame rate
+of the input(s). It is useful for real-time output (e.g. live streaming).
+
-loop_input Loop over the input stream. Currently it works only for image
+streams. This option is used for automatic FFserver testing.
+This option is deprecated, use -loop 1.
+
-loop_output number_of_times Repeatedly loop output for formats that support looping such as animated GIF
+(0 will loop the output infinitely).
+This option is deprecated, use -loop.
+
-vsync parameter Video sync method.
+For compatibility reasons old values can be specified as numbers.
+Newly added values will have to be specified as strings always.
+
+
+0, passthrough Each frame is passed with its timestamp from the demuxer to the muxer.
+
1, cfr Frames will be duplicated and dropped to achieve exactly the requested
+constant frame rate.
+
2, vfr Frames are passed through with their timestamp or dropped so as to
+prevent 2 frames from having the same timestamp.
+
drop As passthrough but destroys all timestamps, making the muxer generate
+fresh timestamps based on frame-rate.
+
-1, auto Chooses between 1 and 2 depending on muxer capabilities. This is the
+default method.
+
+
+Note that the timestamps may be further modified by the muxer, after this.
+For example, in the case that the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled.
+
+With -map you can select from which stream the timestamps should be
+taken. You can leave either video or audio unchanged and sync the
+remaining stream(s) to the unchanged one.
+
+-async samples_per_second Audio sync method. "Stretches/squeezes" the audio stream to match the timestamps,
+the parameter is the maximum samples per second by which the audio is changed.
+-async 1 is a special case where only the start of the audio stream is corrected
+without any later correction.
+
+Note that the timestamps may be further modified by the muxer, after this.
+For example, in the case that the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled.
+
+This option has been deprecated. Use the aresample audio filter instead.
+
+-copyts Do not process input timestamps, but keep their values without trying
+to sanitize them. In particular, do not remove the initial start time
+offset value.
+
+Note that, depending on the vsync option or on specific muxer
+processing (e.g. in case the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled) the output timestamps may mismatch with the input
+timestamps even when this option is selected.
+
+-start_at_zero When used with copyts , shift input timestamps so they start at zero.
+
+This means that using e.g. -ss 50 will make output timestamps start at
+50 seconds, regardless of what timestamp the input file started at.
+
+-copytb mode Specify how to set the encoder timebase when stream copying. mode is an
+integer numeric value, and can assume one of the following values:
+
+
+1 Use the demuxer timebase.
+
+The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
+demuxer. This is sometimes required to avoid non monotonically increasing
+timestamps when copying video streams with variable frame rate.
+
+0 Use the decoder timebase.
+
+The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
+decoder.
+
+-1 Try to make the choice automatically, in order to generate a sane output.
+
+
+Default value is -1.
+
+-shortest (output ) Finish encoding when the shortest input stream ends.
+
-dts_delta_threshold Timestamp discontinuity delta threshold.
+
-muxdelay seconds (input ) Set the maximum demux-decode delay.
+
-muxpreload seconds (input ) Set the initial demux-decode delay.
+
-streamid output-stream-index :new-value (output ) Assign a new stream-id value to an output stream. This option should be
+specified prior to the output filename to which it applies.
+For the situation where multiple output files exist, a streamid
+may be reassigned to a different value.
+
+For example, to set the stream 0 PID to 33 and the stream 1 PID to 36 for
+an output mpegts file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -streamid 0:33 -streamid 1:36 out.ts
+ -bsf[:stream_specifier ] bitstream_filters (output,per-stream ) Set bitstream filters for matching streams. bitstream_filters is
+a comma-separated list of bitstream filters. Use the -bsfs option
+to get the list of bitstream filters.
+
+
ffmpeg -i h264.mp4 -c:v copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb -an out.h264
+
+
ffmpeg -i file.mov -an -vn -bsf:s mov2textsub -c:s copy -f rawvideo sub.txt
+ -tag[:stream_specifier ] codec_tag (input/output,per-stream ) Force a tag/fourcc for matching streams.
+
+-timecode hh :mm :ss SEPff Specify Timecode for writing. SEP is ’:’ for non drop timecode and ’;’
+(or ’.’) for drop.
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mpg -timecode 01:02:03.04 -r 30000/1001 -s ntsc output.mpg
+ -filter_complex filtergraph (global ) Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
+outputs. For simple graphs – those with one input and one output of the same
+type – see the -filter options. filtergraph is a description of
+the filtergraph, as described in the “Filtergraph syntax” section of the
+ffmpeg-filters manual.
+
+Input link labels must refer to input streams using the
+[file_index:stream_specifier] syntax (i.e. the same as -map
+uses). If stream_specifier matches multiple streams, the first one will be
+used. An unlabeled input will be connected to the first unused input stream of
+the matching type.
+
+Output link labels are referred to with -map . Unlabeled outputs are
+added to the first output file.
+
+Note that with this option it is possible to use only lavfi sources without
+normal input files.
+
+For example, to overlay an image over video
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex '[0:v][1:v]overlay[out]' -map
+'[out]' out.mkv
+ Here [0:v] refers to the first video stream in the first input file,
+which is linked to the first (main) input of the overlay filter. Similarly the
+first video stream in the second input is linked to the second (overlay) input
+of overlay.
+
+Assuming there is only one video stream in each input file, we can omit input
+labels, so the above is equivalent to
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay[out]' -map
+'[out]' out.mkv
+ Furthermore we can omit the output label and the single output from the filter
+graph will be added to the output file automatically, so we can simply write
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay' out.mkv
+ To generate 5 seconds of pure red video using lavfi color source:
+
+
ffmpeg -filter_complex 'color=c=red' -t 5 out.mkv
+ -lavfi filtergraph (global ) Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
+outputs. Equivalent to -filter_complex .
+
+-filter_complex_script filename (global ) This option is similar to -filter_complex , the only difference is that
+its argument is the name of the file from which a complex filtergraph
+description is to be read.
+
+-accurate_seek (input ) This option enables or disables accurate seeking in input files with the
+-ss option. It is enabled by default, so seeking is accurate when
+transcoding. Use -noaccurate_seek to disable it, which may be useful
+e.g. when copying some streams and transcoding the others.
+
+-override_ffserver (global ) Overrides the input specifications from ffserver. Using this
+option you can map any input stream to ffserver and control
+many aspects of the encoding from ffmpeg. Without this
+option ffmpeg will transmit to ffserver what is
+requested by ffserver.
+
+The option is intended for cases where features are needed that cannot be
+specified to ffserver but can be to ffmpeg.
+
+-sdp_file file (global ) Print sdp information to file .
+This allows dumping sdp information when at least one output isn’t an
+rtp stream.
+
+-discard (input ) Allows discarding specific streams or frames of streams at the demuxer.
+Not all demuxers support this.
+
+
+none Discard no frame.
+
+default Default, which discards no frames.
+
+noref Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+bidir Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+nokey Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+all Discard all frames.
+
+
+
+
+
As a special exception, you can use a bitmap subtitle stream as input: it
+will be converted into a video with the same size as the largest video in
+the file, or 720x576 if no video is present. Note that this is an
+experimental and temporary solution. It will be removed once libavfilter has
+proper support for subtitles.
+
+
For example, to hardcode subtitles on top of a DVB-T recording stored in
+MPEG-TS format, delaying the subtitles by 1 second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.ts -filter_complex \
+ '[#0x2ef] setpts=PTS+1/TB [sub] ; [#0x2d0] [sub] overlay' \
+ -sn -map '#0x2dc' output.mkv
+
+
(0x2d0, 0x2dc and 0x2ef are the MPEG-TS PIDs of respectively the video,
+audio and subtitles streams; 0:0, 0:3 and 0:7 would have worked too)
+
+
+
5.12 Preset files# TOC
+
A preset file contains a sequence of option =value pairs,
+one for each line, specifying a sequence of options which would be
+awkward to specify on the command line. Lines starting with the hash
+(’#’) character are ignored and are used to provide comments. Check
+the presets directory in the FFmpeg source tree for examples.
+
+
There are two types of preset files: ffpreset and avpreset files.
+
+
+
5.12.1 ffpreset files# TOC
+
ffpreset files are specified with the vpre, apre,
+spre, and fpre options. The fpre option takes the
+filename of the preset instead of a preset name as input and can be
+used for any kind of codec. For the vpre, apre, and
+spre options, the options specified in a preset file are
+applied to the currently selected codec of the same type as the preset
+option.
+
+
The argument passed to the vpre, apre, and spre
+preset options identifies the preset file to use according to the
+following rules:
+
+
First ffmpeg searches for a file named arg .ffpreset in the
+directories $FFMPEG_DATADIR (if set), and $HOME/.ffmpeg , and in
+the datadir defined at configuration time (usually PREFIX/share/ffmpeg )
+or in a ffpresets folder along the executable on win32,
+in that order. For example, if the argument is libvpx-1080p, it will
+search for the file libvpx-1080p.ffpreset .
+
+
If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
+codec_name -arg .ffpreset in the above-mentioned
+directories, where codec_name is the name of the codec to which
+the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select
+the video codec with -vcodec libvpx and use -vpre 1080p,
+then it will search for the file libvpx-1080p.ffpreset .
+
+
+
5.12.2 avpreset files# TOC
+
avpreset files are specified with the pre option. They work similar to
+ffpreset files, but they only allow encoder- specific options. Therefore, an
+option =value pair specifying an encoder cannot be used.
+
+
When the pre option is specified, ffmpeg will look for files with the
+suffix .avpreset in the directories $AVCONV_DATADIR (if set), and
+$HOME/.avconv , and in the datadir defined at configuration time (usually
+PREFIX/share/ffmpeg ), in that order.
+
+
First ffmpeg searches for a file named codec_name -arg .avpreset in
+the above-mentioned directories, where codec_name is the name of the codec
+to which the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select the
+video codec with -vcodec libvpx and use -pre 1080p, then it will
+search for the file libvpx-1080p.avpreset .
+
+
If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
+arg .avpreset in the same directories.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ For streaming at very low bitrates, use a low frame rate
+and a small GOP size. This is especially true for RealVideo where
+the Linux player does not seem to be very fast, so it can miss
+frames. An example is:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -g 3 -r 3 -t 10 -b:v 50k -s qcif -f rv10 /tmp/b.rm
+ The parameter ’q’ which is displayed while encoding is the current
+quantizer. The value 1 indicates that a very good quality could
+be achieved. The value 31 indicates the worst quality. If q=31 appears
+too often, it means that the encoder cannot compress enough to meet
+your bitrate. You must either increase the bitrate, decrease the
+frame rate or decrease the frame size.
+
+ If your computer is not fast enough, you can speed up the
+compression at the expense of the compression ratio. You can use
+’-me zero’ to speed up motion estimation, and ’-g 0’ to disable
+motion estimation completely (you have only I-frames, which means it
+is about as good as JPEG compression).
+
+ To have very low audio bitrates, reduce the sampling frequency
+(down to 22050 Hz for MPEG audio, 22050 or 11025 for AC-3).
+
+ To have a constant quality (but a variable bitrate), use the option
+’-qscale n’ when ’n’ is between 1 (excellent quality) and 31 (worst
+quality).
+
+
+
+
+
7 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
7.1 Video and Audio grabbing# TOC
+
+
If you specify the input format and device then ffmpeg can grab video
+and audio directly.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
Or with an ALSA audio source (mono input, card id 1) instead of OSS:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -ac 1 -i hw:1 -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
Note that you must activate the right video source and channel before
+launching ffmpeg with any TV viewer such as
+xawtv by Gerd Knorr. You also
+have to set the audio recording levels correctly with a
+standard mixer.
+
+
+
7.2 X11 grabbing# TOC
+
+
Grab the X11 display with ffmpeg via
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as
+the DISPLAY environment variable.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0+10,20 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as the DISPLAY environment
+variable. 10 is the x-offset and 20 the y-offset for the grabbing.
+
+
+
7.3 Video and Audio file format conversion# TOC
+
+
Any supported file format and protocol can serve as input to ffmpeg:
+
+
Examples:
+
+ You can use YUV files as input:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/test%d.Y /tmp/out.mpg
+ It will use the files:
+
+
/tmp/test0.Y, /tmp/test0.U, /tmp/test0.V,
+/tmp/test1.Y, /tmp/test1.U, /tmp/test1.V, etc...
+ The Y files use twice the resolution of the U and V files. They are
+raw files, without header. They can be generated by all decent video
+decoders. You must specify the size of the image with the -s option
+if ffmpeg cannot guess it.
+
+ You can input from a raw YUV420P file:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/test.yuv /tmp/out.avi
+ test.yuv is a file containing raw YUV planar data. Each frame is composed
+of the Y plane followed by the U and V planes at half vertical and
+horizontal resolution.
+
+ You can output to a raw YUV420P file:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mydivx.avi hugefile.yuv
+ You can set several input files and output files:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -s 640x480 -i /tmp/a.yuv /tmp/a.mpg
+ Converts the audio file a.wav and the raw YUV video file a.yuv
+to MPEG file a.mpg.
+
+ You can also do audio and video conversions at the same time:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -ar 22050 /tmp/a.mp2
+ Converts a.wav to MPEG audio at 22050 Hz sample rate.
+
+ You can encode to several formats at the same time and define a
+mapping from input stream to output streams:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -map 0:a -b:a 64k /tmp/a.mp2 -map 0:a -b:a 128k /tmp/b.mp2
+ Converts a.wav to a.mp2 at 64 kbits and to b.mp2 at 128 kbits. ’-map
+file:index’ specifies which input stream is used for each output
+stream, in the order of the definition of output streams.
+
+ You can transcode decrypted VOBs:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i snatch_1.vob -f avi -c:v mpeg4 -b:v 800k -g 300 -bf 2 -c:a libmp3lame -b:a 128k snatch.avi
+ This is a typical DVD ripping example; the input is a VOB file, the
+output an AVI file with MPEG-4 video and MP3 audio. Note that in this
+command we use B-frames so the MPEG-4 stream is DivX5 compatible, and
+GOP size is 300 which means one intra frame every 10 seconds for 29.97fps
+input video. Furthermore, the audio stream is MP3-encoded so you need
+to enable LAME support by passing --enable-libmp3lame to configure.
+The mapping is particularly useful for DVD transcoding
+to get the desired audio language.
+
+NOTE: To see the supported input formats, use ffmpeg -formats.
+
+ You can extract images from a video, or create a video from many images:
+
+For extracting images from a video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.avi -r 1 -s WxH -f image2 foo-%03d.jpeg
+ This will extract one video frame per second from the video and will
+output them in files named foo-001.jpeg , foo-002.jpeg ,
+etc. Images will be rescaled to fit the new WxH values.
+
+If you want to extract just a limited number of frames, you can use the
+above command in combination with the -vframes or -t option, or in
+combination with -ss to start extracting from a certain point in time.
+
+For creating a video from many images:
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -i foo-%03d.jpeg -r 12 -s WxH foo.avi
+ The syntax foo-%03d.jpeg specifies to use a decimal number
+composed of three digits padded with zeroes to express the sequence
+number. It is the same syntax supported by the C printf function, but
+only formats accepting a normal integer are suitable.
+
+When importing an image sequence, -i also supports expanding
+shell-like wildcard patterns (globbing) internally, by selecting the
+image2-specific -pattern_type glob option.
+
+For example, for creating a video from filenames matching the glob pattern
+foo-*.jpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -pattern_type glob -i 'foo-*.jpeg' -r 12 -s WxH foo.avi
+ You can put many streams of the same type in the output:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i test1.avi -i test2.avi -map 1:1 -map 1:0 -map 0:1 -map 0:0 -c copy -y test12.nut
+ The resulting output file test12.nut will contain the first four streams
+from the input files in reverse order.
+
+ To force CBR video output:
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -b 4000k -minrate 4000k -maxrate 4000k -bufsize 1835k out.m2v
+ The four options lmin, lmax, mblmin and mblmax use ’lambda’ units,
+but you may use the QP2LAMBDA constant to easily convert from ’q’ units:
+
+
ffmpeg -i src.ext -lmax 21*QP2LAMBDA dst.ext
+
+
+
+
8 Syntax# TOC
+
+
This section documents the syntax and formats employed by the FFmpeg
+libraries and tools.
+
+
+
8.1 Quoting and escaping# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg adopts the following quoting and escaping mechanism, unless
+explicitly specified. The following rules are applied:
+
+
+ ' and \ are special characters (respectively used for
+quoting and escaping). In addition to them, there might be other
+special characters depending on the specific syntax where the escaping
+and quoting are employed.
+
+ A special character is escaped by prefixing it with a ’\’.
+
+ All characters enclosed between ” are included literally in the
+parsed string. The quote character ' itself cannot be quoted,
+so you may need to close the quote and escape it.
+
+ Leading and trailing whitespaces, unless escaped or quoted, are
+removed from the parsed string.
+
+
+
Note that you may need to add a second level of escaping when using
+the command line or a script, which depends on the syntax of the
+adopted shell language.
+
+
The function av_get_token defined in
+libavutil/avstring.h can be used to parse a token quoted or
+escaped according to the rules defined above.
+
+
The tool tools/ffescape in the FFmpeg source tree can be used
+to automatically quote or escape a string in a script.
+
+
+
8.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Escape the string Crime d'Amour containing the ' special
+character:
+
+
+ The string above contains a quote, so the ' needs to be escaped
+when quoting it:
+
+
+ Include leading or trailing whitespaces using quoting:
+
+
' this string starts and ends with whitespaces '
+ Escaping and quoting can be mixed together:
+
+
' The string '\'string\'' is a string '
+ To include a literal \ you can use either escaping or quoting:
+
+
'c:\foo' can be written as c:\\foo
+
+
+
+
8.2 Date# TOC
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
[(YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD)[T|t| ]]((HH:MM:SS[.m...]]])|(HHMMSS[.m...]]]))[Z]
+now
+
+
+
If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+
+
Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+interpreted as UTC.
+If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+year-month-day.
+
+
+
8.3 Time duration# TOC
+
+
There are two accepted syntaxes for expressing time duration.
+
+
+
+
HH expresses the number of hours, MM the number of minutes
+for a maximum of 2 digits, and SS the number of seconds for a
+maximum of 2 digits. The m at the end expresses decimal value for
+SS .
+
+
or
+
+
+
+
S expresses the number of seconds, with the optional decimal part
+m .
+
+
In both expressions, the optional ‘- ’ indicates negative duration.
+
+
+
8.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples are all valid time duration:
+
+
+‘55 ’
+55 seconds
+
+‘12:03:45 ’
+12 hours, 03 minutes and 45 seconds
+
+‘23.189 ’
+23.189 seconds
+
+
+
+
8.4 Video size# TOC
+
Specify the size of the sourced video, it may be a string of the form
+width xheight , or the name of a size abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+720x480
+
‘pal ’
+720x576
+
‘qntsc ’
+352x240
+
‘qpal ’
+352x288
+
‘sntsc ’
+640x480
+
‘spal ’
+768x576
+
‘film ’
+352x240
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+352x240
+
‘sqcif ’
+128x96
+
‘qcif ’
+176x144
+
‘cif ’
+352x288
+
‘4cif ’
+704x576
+
‘16cif ’
+1408x1152
+
‘qqvga ’
+160x120
+
‘qvga ’
+320x240
+
‘vga ’
+640x480
+
‘svga ’
+800x600
+
‘xga ’
+1024x768
+
‘uxga ’
+1600x1200
+
‘qxga ’
+2048x1536
+
‘sxga ’
+1280x1024
+
‘qsxga ’
+2560x2048
+
‘hsxga ’
+5120x4096
+
‘wvga ’
+852x480
+
‘wxga ’
+1366x768
+
‘wsxga ’
+1600x1024
+
‘wuxga ’
+1920x1200
+
‘woxga ’
+2560x1600
+
‘wqsxga ’
+3200x2048
+
‘wquxga ’
+3840x2400
+
‘whsxga ’
+6400x4096
+
‘whuxga ’
+7680x4800
+
‘cga ’
+320x200
+
‘ega ’
+640x350
+
‘hd480 ’
+852x480
+
‘hd720 ’
+1280x720
+
‘hd1080 ’
+1920x1080
+
‘2k ’
+2048x1080
+
‘2kflat ’
+1998x1080
+
‘2kscope ’
+2048x858
+
‘4k ’
+4096x2160
+
‘4kflat ’
+3996x2160
+
‘4kscope ’
+4096x1716
+
‘nhd ’
+640x360
+
‘hqvga ’
+240x160
+
‘wqvga ’
+400x240
+
‘fwqvga ’
+432x240
+
‘hvga ’
+480x320
+
‘qhd ’
+960x540
+
+
+
+
8.5 Video rate# TOC
+
+
Specify the frame rate of a video, expressed as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a float
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘pal ’
+25/1
+
‘qntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘qpal ’
+25/1
+
‘sntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘spal ’
+25/1
+
‘film ’
+24/1
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+24000/1001
+
+
+
+
8.6 Ratio# TOC
+
+
A ratio can be expressed as an expression, or in the form
+numerator :denominator .
+
+
Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+want to exclude those values.
+
+
The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+
+
+
8.7 Color# TOC
+
+
It can be the name of a color as defined below (case insensitive match) or a
+[0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence, possibly followed by @ and a string
+representing the alpha component.
+
+
The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+represents the opacity value (‘0x00 ’ or ‘0.0 ’ means completely
+transparent, ‘0xff ’ or ‘1.0 ’ completely opaque). If the alpha
+component is not specified then ‘0xff ’ is assumed.
+
+
The string ‘random ’ will result in a random color.
+
+
The following names of colors are recognized:
+
+‘AliceBlue ’
+0xF0F8FF
+
‘AntiqueWhite ’
+0xFAEBD7
+
‘Aqua ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘Aquamarine ’
+0x7FFFD4
+
‘Azure ’
+0xF0FFFF
+
‘Beige ’
+0xF5F5DC
+
‘Bisque ’
+0xFFE4C4
+
‘Black ’
+0x000000
+
‘BlanchedAlmond ’
+0xFFEBCD
+
‘Blue ’
+0x0000FF
+
‘BlueViolet ’
+0x8A2BE2
+
‘Brown ’
+0xA52A2A
+
‘BurlyWood ’
+0xDEB887
+
‘CadetBlue ’
+0x5F9EA0
+
‘Chartreuse ’
+0x7FFF00
+
‘Chocolate ’
+0xD2691E
+
‘Coral ’
+0xFF7F50
+
‘CornflowerBlue ’
+0x6495ED
+
‘Cornsilk ’
+0xFFF8DC
+
‘Crimson ’
+0xDC143C
+
‘Cyan ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘DarkBlue ’
+0x00008B
+
‘DarkCyan ’
+0x008B8B
+
‘DarkGoldenRod ’
+0xB8860B
+
‘DarkGray ’
+0xA9A9A9
+
‘DarkGreen ’
+0x006400
+
‘DarkKhaki ’
+0xBDB76B
+
‘DarkMagenta ’
+0x8B008B
+
‘DarkOliveGreen ’
+0x556B2F
+
‘Darkorange ’
+0xFF8C00
+
‘DarkOrchid ’
+0x9932CC
+
‘DarkRed ’
+0x8B0000
+
‘DarkSalmon ’
+0xE9967A
+
‘DarkSeaGreen ’
+0x8FBC8F
+
‘DarkSlateBlue ’
+0x483D8B
+
‘DarkSlateGray ’
+0x2F4F4F
+
‘DarkTurquoise ’
+0x00CED1
+
‘DarkViolet ’
+0x9400D3
+
‘DeepPink ’
+0xFF1493
+
‘DeepSkyBlue ’
+0x00BFFF
+
‘DimGray ’
+0x696969
+
‘DodgerBlue ’
+0x1E90FF
+
‘FireBrick ’
+0xB22222
+
‘FloralWhite ’
+0xFFFAF0
+
‘ForestGreen ’
+0x228B22
+
‘Fuchsia ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Gainsboro ’
+0xDCDCDC
+
‘GhostWhite ’
+0xF8F8FF
+
‘Gold ’
+0xFFD700
+
‘GoldenRod ’
+0xDAA520
+
‘Gray ’
+0x808080
+
‘Green ’
+0x008000
+
‘GreenYellow ’
+0xADFF2F
+
‘HoneyDew ’
+0xF0FFF0
+
‘HotPink ’
+0xFF69B4
+
‘IndianRed ’
+0xCD5C5C
+
‘Indigo ’
+0x4B0082
+
‘Ivory ’
+0xFFFFF0
+
‘Khaki ’
+0xF0E68C
+
‘Lavender ’
+0xE6E6FA
+
‘LavenderBlush ’
+0xFFF0F5
+
‘LawnGreen ’
+0x7CFC00
+
‘LemonChiffon ’
+0xFFFACD
+
‘LightBlue ’
+0xADD8E6
+
‘LightCoral ’
+0xF08080
+
‘LightCyan ’
+0xE0FFFF
+
‘LightGoldenRodYellow ’
+0xFAFAD2
+
‘LightGreen ’
+0x90EE90
+
‘LightGrey ’
+0xD3D3D3
+
‘LightPink ’
+0xFFB6C1
+
‘LightSalmon ’
+0xFFA07A
+
‘LightSeaGreen ’
+0x20B2AA
+
‘LightSkyBlue ’
+0x87CEFA
+
‘LightSlateGray ’
+0x778899
+
‘LightSteelBlue ’
+0xB0C4DE
+
‘LightYellow ’
+0xFFFFE0
+
‘Lime ’
+0x00FF00
+
‘LimeGreen ’
+0x32CD32
+
‘Linen ’
+0xFAF0E6
+
‘Magenta ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Maroon ’
+0x800000
+
‘MediumAquaMarine ’
+0x66CDAA
+
‘MediumBlue ’
+0x0000CD
+
‘MediumOrchid ’
+0xBA55D3
+
‘MediumPurple ’
+0x9370D8
+
‘MediumSeaGreen ’
+0x3CB371
+
‘MediumSlateBlue ’
+0x7B68EE
+
‘MediumSpringGreen ’
+0x00FA9A
+
‘MediumTurquoise ’
+0x48D1CC
+
‘MediumVioletRed ’
+0xC71585
+
‘MidnightBlue ’
+0x191970
+
‘MintCream ’
+0xF5FFFA
+
‘MistyRose ’
+0xFFE4E1
+
‘Moccasin ’
+0xFFE4B5
+
‘NavajoWhite ’
+0xFFDEAD
+
‘Navy ’
+0x000080
+
‘OldLace ’
+0xFDF5E6
+
‘Olive ’
+0x808000
+
‘OliveDrab ’
+0x6B8E23
+
‘Orange ’
+0xFFA500
+
‘OrangeRed ’
+0xFF4500
+
‘Orchid ’
+0xDA70D6
+
‘PaleGoldenRod ’
+0xEEE8AA
+
‘PaleGreen ’
+0x98FB98
+
‘PaleTurquoise ’
+0xAFEEEE
+
‘PaleVioletRed ’
+0xD87093
+
‘PapayaWhip ’
+0xFFEFD5
+
‘PeachPuff ’
+0xFFDAB9
+
‘Peru ’
+0xCD853F
+
‘Pink ’
+0xFFC0CB
+
‘Plum ’
+0xDDA0DD
+
‘PowderBlue ’
+0xB0E0E6
+
‘Purple ’
+0x800080
+
‘Red ’
+0xFF0000
+
‘RosyBrown ’
+0xBC8F8F
+
‘RoyalBlue ’
+0x4169E1
+
‘SaddleBrown ’
+0x8B4513
+
‘Salmon ’
+0xFA8072
+
‘SandyBrown ’
+0xF4A460
+
‘SeaGreen ’
+0x2E8B57
+
‘SeaShell ’
+0xFFF5EE
+
‘Sienna ’
+0xA0522D
+
‘Silver ’
+0xC0C0C0
+
‘SkyBlue ’
+0x87CEEB
+
‘SlateBlue ’
+0x6A5ACD
+
‘SlateGray ’
+0x708090
+
‘Snow ’
+0xFFFAFA
+
‘SpringGreen ’
+0x00FF7F
+
‘SteelBlue ’
+0x4682B4
+
‘Tan ’
+0xD2B48C
+
‘Teal ’
+0x008080
+
‘Thistle ’
+0xD8BFD8
+
‘Tomato ’
+0xFF6347
+
‘Turquoise ’
+0x40E0D0
+
‘Violet ’
+0xEE82EE
+
‘Wheat ’
+0xF5DEB3
+
‘White ’
+0xFFFFFF
+
‘WhiteSmoke ’
+0xF5F5F5
+
‘Yellow ’
+0xFFFF00
+
‘YellowGreen ’
+0x9ACD32
+
+
+
+
8.8 Channel Layout# TOC
+
+
A channel layout specifies the spatial disposition of the channels in
+a multi-channel audio stream. To specify a channel layout, FFmpeg
+makes use of a special syntax.
+
+
Individual channels are identified by an id, as given by the table
+below:
+
+‘FL ’
+front left
+
‘FR ’
+front right
+
‘FC ’
+front center
+
‘LFE ’
+low frequency
+
‘BL ’
+back left
+
‘BR ’
+back right
+
‘FLC ’
+front left-of-center
+
‘FRC ’
+front right-of-center
+
‘BC ’
+back center
+
‘SL ’
+side left
+
‘SR ’
+side right
+
‘TC ’
+top center
+
‘TFL ’
+top front left
+
‘TFC ’
+top front center
+
‘TFR ’
+top front right
+
‘TBL ’
+top back left
+
‘TBC ’
+top back center
+
‘TBR ’
+top back right
+
‘DL ’
+downmix left
+
‘DR ’
+downmix right
+
‘WL ’
+wide left
+
‘WR ’
+wide right
+
‘SDL ’
+surround direct left
+
‘SDR ’
+surround direct right
+
‘LFE2 ’
+low frequency 2
+
+
+
Standard channel layout compositions can be specified by using the
+following identifiers:
+
+‘mono ’
+FC
+
‘stereo ’
+FL+FR
+
‘2.1 ’
+FL+FR+LFE
+
‘3.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC
+
‘3.0(back) ’
+FL+FR+BC
+
‘4.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC
+
‘quad ’
+FL+FR+BL+BR
+
‘quad(side) ’
+FL+FR+SL+SR
+
‘3.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE
+
‘5.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR
+
‘5.0(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+SL+SR
+
‘4.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC
+
‘5.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR
+
‘5.1(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+SL+SR
+
‘6.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘hexagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1(front) ’
+FL+FR+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FC+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.1(wide) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC
+
‘7.1(wide-side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘octagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR
+
‘downmix ’
+DL+DR
+
+
+
A custom channel layout can be specified as a sequence of terms, separated by
+’+’ or ’|’. Each term can be:
+
+ the name of a standard channel layout (e.g. ‘mono ’,
+‘stereo ’, ‘4.0 ’, ‘quad ’, ‘5.0 ’, etc.)
+
+ the name of a single channel (e.g. ‘FL ’, ‘FR ’, ‘FC ’, ‘LFE ’, etc.)
+
+ a number of channels, in decimal, optionally followed by ’c’, yielding
+the default channel layout for that number of channels (see the
+function av_get_default_channel_layout)
+
+ a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+AV_CH_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
Starting from libavutil version 53 the trailing character "c" to
+specify a number of channels will be required, while a channel layout
+mask could also be specified as a decimal number (if and only if not
+followed by "c").
+
+
See also the function av_get_channel_layout defined in
+libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
9 Expression Evaluation# TOC
+
+
When evaluating an arithmetic expression, FFmpeg uses an internal
+formula evaluator, implemented through the libavutil/eval.h
+interface.
+
+
An expression may contain unary, binary operators, constants, and
+functions.
+
+
Two expressions expr1 and expr2 can be combined to form
+another expression "expr1 ;expr2 ".
+expr1 and expr2 are evaluated in turn, and the new
+expression evaluates to the value of expr2 .
+
+
The following binary operators are available: +, -,
+*, /, ^.
+
+
The following unary operators are available: +, -.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+abs(x) Compute absolute value of x .
+
+acos(x) Compute arccosine of x .
+
+asin(x) Compute arcsine of x .
+
+atan(x) Compute arctangent of x .
+
+between(x, min, max) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to min and lesser than or
+equal to max , 0 otherwise.
+
+bitand(x, y) bitor(x, y) Compute bitwise and/or operation on x and y .
+
+The results of the evaluation of x and y are converted to
+integers before executing the bitwise operation.
+
+Note that both the conversion to integer and the conversion back to
+floating point can lose precision. Beware of unexpected results for
+large numbers (usually 2^53 and larger).
+
+ceil(expr) Round the value of expression expr upwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "ceil(1.5)" is "2.0".
+
+clip(x, min, max) Return the value of x clipped between min and max .
+
+cos(x) Compute cosine of x .
+
+cosh(x) Compute hyperbolic cosine of x .
+
+eq(x, y) Return 1 if x and y are equivalent, 0 otherwise.
+
+exp(x) Compute exponential of x (with base e, the Euler’s number).
+
+floor(expr) Round the value of expression expr downwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "floor(-1.5)" is "-2.0".
+
+gauss(x) Compute Gauss function of x , corresponding to
+exp(-x*x/2) / sqrt(2*PI).
+
+gcd(x, y) Return the greatest common divisor of x and y . If both x and
+y are 0 or either or both are less than zero then behavior is undefined.
+
+gt(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+gte(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+hypot(x, y) This function is similar to the C function with the same name; it returns
+"sqrt(x *x + y *y )", the length of the hypotenuse of a
+right triangle with sides of length x and y , or the distance of the
+point (x , y ) from the origin.
+
+if(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the result of
+the evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+if(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+ifnot(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the result of the
+evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+ifnot(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+isinf(x) Return 1.0 if x is +/-INFINITY, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+isnan(x) Return 1.0 if x is NAN, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+ld(var) Allow to load the value of the internal variable with number
+var , which was previously stored with st(var , expr ).
+The function returns the loaded value.
+
+log(x) Compute natural logarithm of x .
+
+lt(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+lte(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+max(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+min(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+mod(x, y) Compute the remainder of division of x by y .
+
+not(expr) Return 1.0 if expr is zero, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+pow(x, y) Compute the power of x elevated y , it is equivalent to
+"(x )^(y )".
+
+print(t) print(t, l) Print the value of expression t with loglevel l . If
+l is not specified then a default log level is used.
+Returns the value of the expression printed.
+
+Prints t with loglevel l
+
+random(x) Return a pseudo random value between 0.0 and 1.0. x is the index of the
+internal variable which will be used to save the seed/state.
+
+root(expr, max) Find an input value for which the function represented by expr
+with argument ld(0) is 0 in the interval 0..max .
+
+The expression in expr must denote a continuous function or the
+result is undefined.
+
+ld(0) is used to represent the function input value, which means
+that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times with
+various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(0). When the expression evaluates to 0 then the
+corresponding input value will be returned.
+
+sin(x) Compute sine of x .
+
+sinh(x) Compute hyperbolic sine of x .
+
+sqrt(expr) Compute the square root of expr . This is equivalent to
+"(expr )^.5".
+
+squish(x) Compute expression 1/(1 + exp(4*x)).
+
+st(var, expr) Allow to store the value of the expression expr in an internal
+variable. var specifies the number of the variable where to
+store the value, and it is a value ranging from 0 to 9. The function
+returns the value stored in the internal variable.
+Note, Variables are currently not shared between expressions.
+
+tan(x) Compute tangent of x .
+
+tanh(x) Compute hyperbolic tangent of x .
+
+taylor(expr, x) taylor(expr, x, id) Evaluate a Taylor series at x , given an expression representing
+the ld(id)-th derivative of a function at 0.
+
+When the series does not converge the result is undefined.
+
+ld(id) is used to represent the derivative order in expr ,
+which means that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times
+with various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(id). If id is not specified then 0 is assumed.
+
+Note, when you have the derivatives at y instead of 0,
+taylor(expr, x-y) can be used.
+
+time(0) Return the current (wallclock) time in seconds.
+
+trunc(expr) Round the value of expression expr towards zero to the nearest
+integer. For example, "trunc(-1.5)" is "-1.0".
+
+while(cond, expr) Evaluate expression expr while the expression cond is
+non-zero, and returns the value of the last expr evaluation, or
+NAN if cond was always false.
+
+
+
The following constants are available:
+
+PI area of the unit disc, approximately 3.14
+
E exp(1) (Euler’s number), approximately 2.718
+
PHI golden ratio (1+sqrt(5))/2, approximately 1.618
+
+
+
Assuming that an expression is considered "true" if it has a non-zero
+value, note that:
+
+
* works like AND
+
+
+ works like OR
+
+
For example the construct:
+
+
is equivalent to:
+
+
+
In your C code, you can extend the list of unary and binary functions,
+and define recognized constants, so that they are available for your
+expressions.
+
+
The evaluator also recognizes the International System unit prefixes.
+If ’i’ is appended after the prefix, binary prefixes are used, which
+are based on powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000.
+The ’B’ postfix multiplies the value by 8, and can be appended after a
+unit prefix or used alone. This allows using for example ’KB’, ’MiB’,
+’G’ and ’B’ as number postfix.
+
+
The list of available International System prefixes follows, with
+indication of the corresponding powers of 10 and of 2.
+
+y 10^-24 / 2^-80
+
z 10^-21 / 2^-70
+
a 10^-18 / 2^-60
+
f 10^-15 / 2^-50
+
p 10^-12 / 2^-40
+
n 10^-9 / 2^-30
+
u 10^-6 / 2^-20
+
m 10^-3 / 2^-10
+
c 10^-2
+
d 10^-1
+
h 10^2
+
k 10^3 / 2^10
+
K 10^3 / 2^10
+
M 10^6 / 2^20
+
G 10^9 / 2^30
+
T 10^12 / 2^40
+
P 10^15 / 2^40
+
E 10^18 / 2^50
+
Z 10^21 / 2^60
+
Y 10^24 / 2^70
+
+
+
+
+
10 OpenCL Options# TOC
+
+
When FFmpeg is configured with --enable-opencl, it is possible
+to set the options for the global OpenCL context.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+build_options Set build options used to compile the registered kernels.
+
+See reference "OpenCL Specification Version: 1.2 chapter 5.6.4".
+
+platform_idx Select the index of the platform to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list
+which can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+device_idx Select the index of the device used to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list which
+can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+
+
+
+
11 Codec Options# TOC
+
+
libavcodec provides some generic global options, which can be set on
+all the encoders and decoders. In addition each codec may support
+so-called private options, which are specific for a given codec.
+
+
Sometimes, a global option may only affect a specific kind of codec,
+and may be nonsensical or ignored by another, so you need to be aware
+of the meaning of the specified options. Also some options are
+meant only for decoding or encoding.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVCodecContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follow:
+
+
+b integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Default value is 200K.
+
+ab integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio bitrate (in bits/s). Default value is 128K.
+
+bt integer (encoding,video ) Set video bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). In 1-pass mode, bitrate
+tolerance specifies how far ratecontrol is willing to deviate from the
+target average bitrate value. This is not related to min/max
+bitrate. Lowering tolerance too much has an adverse effect on quality.
+
+flags flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Set generic flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock (mpeg4).
+
‘qpel ’
+Use 1/4 pel motion compensation.
+
‘loop ’
+Use loop filter.
+
‘qscale ’
+Use fixed qscale.
+
‘gmc ’
+Use gmc.
+
‘mv0 ’
+Always try a mb with mv=<0,0>.
+
‘input_preserved ’
+‘pass1 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+
‘pass2 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+
‘gray ’
+Only decode/encode grayscale.
+
‘emu_edge ’
+Do not draw edges.
+
‘psnr ’
+Set error[?] variables during encoding.
+
‘truncated ’
+‘naq ’
+Normalize adaptive quantization.
+
‘ildct ’
+Use interlaced DCT.
+
‘low_delay ’
+Force low delay.
+
‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data. (except (I)DCT).
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
‘aic ’
+Apply H263 advanced intra coding / mpeg4 ac prediction.
+
‘cbp ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘qprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘ilme ’
+Apply interlaced motion estimation.
+
‘cgop ’
+Use closed gop.
+
+
+me_method integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘zero ’
+zero motion estimation (fastest)
+
‘full ’
+full motion estimation (slowest)
+
‘epzs ’
+EPZS motion estimation (default)
+
‘esa ’
+esa motion estimation (alias for full)
+
‘tesa ’
+tesa motion estimation
+
‘dia ’
+dia motion estimation (alias for epzs)
+
‘log ’
+log motion estimation
+
‘phods ’
+phods motion estimation
+
‘x1 ’
+X1 motion estimation
+
‘hex ’
+hex motion estimation
+
‘umh ’
+umh motion estimation
+
‘iter ’
+iter motion estimation
+
+
+extradata_size integer Set extradata size.
+
+time_base rational number Set codec time base.
+
+It is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms of which
+frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content, timebase
+should be 1 / frame_rate and timestamp increments should be
+identically 1.
+
+g integer (encoding,video ) Set the group of picture size. Default value is 12.
+
+ar integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff integer (encoding,audio ) Set cutoff bandwidth.
+
+frame_size integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio frame size.
+
+Each submitted frame except the last must contain exactly frame_size
+samples per channel. May be 0 when the codec has
+CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, in that case the frame size is not
+restricted. It is set by some decoders to indicate constant frame
+size.
+
+frame_number integer Set the frame number.
+
+delay integer qcomp float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale compression (VBR). It is used as a constant
+in the ratecontrol equation. Recommended range for default rc_eq:
+0.0-1.0.
+
+qblur float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale blur (VBR).
+
+qmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+69, default value is 2.
+
+qmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+1024, default value is 31.
+
+qdiff integer (encoding,video ) Set max difference between the quantizer scale (VBR).
+
+bf integer (encoding,video ) Set max number of B frames between non-B-frames.
+
+Must be an integer between -1 and 16. 0 means that B-frames are
+disabled. If a value of -1 is used, it will choose an automatic value
+depending on the encoder.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+b_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set qp factor between P and B frames.
+
+rc_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set ratecontrol method.
+
+b_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set strategy to choose between I/P/B-frames.
+
+ps integer (encoding,video ) Set RTP payload size in bytes.
+
+mv_bits integer header_bits integer i_tex_bits integer p_tex_bits integer i_count integer p_count integer skip_count integer misc_bits integer frame_bits integer codec_tag integer bug flags (decoding,video ) Workaround not auto detected encoder bugs.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘autodetect ’
+‘old_msmpeg4 ’
+some old lavc generated msmpeg4v3 files (no autodetection)
+
‘xvid_ilace ’
+Xvid interlacing bug (autodetected if fourcc==XVIX)
+
‘ump4 ’
+(autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)
+
‘no_padding ’
+padding bug (autodetected)
+
‘amv ’
+‘ac_vlc ’
+illegal vlc bug (autodetected per fourcc)
+
‘qpel_chroma ’
+‘std_qpel ’
+old standard qpel (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘qpel_chroma2 ’
+‘direct_blocksize ’
+direct-qpel-blocksize bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘edge ’
+edge padding bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘hpel_chroma ’
+‘dc_clip ’
+‘ms ’
+Workaround various bugs in microsoft broken decoders.
+
‘trunc ’
+trancated frames
+
+
+lelim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for luminance (negative
+values also consider DC coefficient).
+
+celim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for chrominance (negative
+values also consider dc coefficient)
+
+strict integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) Specify how strictly to follow the standards.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘very ’
+strictly conform to a older more strict version of the spec or reference software
+
‘strict ’
+strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences
+
‘normal ’
+‘unofficial ’
+allow unofficial extensions
+
‘experimental ’
+allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
+(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
+Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
+decoding untrusted input.
+
+
+b_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and B frames.
+
+err_detect flags (decoding,audio,video ) Set error detection flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+verify embedded CRCs
+
‘bitstream ’
+detect bitstream specification deviations
+
‘buffer ’
+detect improper bitstream length
+
‘explode ’
+abort decoding on minor error detection
+
‘ignore_err ’
+ignore decoding errors, and continue decoding.
+This is useful if you want to analyze the content of a video and thus want
+everything to be decoded no matter what. This option will not result in a video
+that is pleasing to watch in case of errors.
+
‘careful ’
+consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+
‘compliant ’
+consider all spec non compliancies as errors
+
‘aggressive ’
+consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error
+
+
+has_b_frames integer block_align integer mpeg_quant integer (encoding,video ) Use MPEG quantizers instead of H.263.
+
+qsquish float (encoding,video ) How to keep quantizer between qmin and qmax (0 = clip, 1 = use
+differentiable function).
+
+rc_qmod_amp float (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_qmod_freq integer (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_override_count integer rc_eq string (encoding,video ) Set rate control equation. When computing the expression, besides the
+standard functions defined in the section ’Expression Evaluation’, the
+following functions are available: bits2qp(bits), qp2bits(qp). Also
+the following constants are available: iTex pTex tex mv fCode iCount
+mcVar var isI isP isB avgQP qComp avgIITex avgPITex avgPPTex avgBPTex
+avgTex.
+
+maxrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set max bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Requires bufsize to be set.
+
+minrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set min bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Most useful in setting up a CBR
+encode. It is of little use elsewise.
+
+bufsize integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits).
+
+rc_buf_aggressivity float (encoding,video ) Currently useless.
+
+i_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set QP factor between P and I frames.
+
+i_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and I frames.
+
+rc_init_cplx float (encoding,video ) Set initial complexity for 1-pass encoding.
+
+dct integer (encoding,video ) Set DCT algorithm.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+autoselect a good one (default)
+
‘fastint ’
+fast integer
+
‘int ’
+accurate integer
+
‘mmx ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘faan ’
+floating point AAN DCT
+
+
+lumi_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress bright areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+tcplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set temporal complexity masking.
+
+scplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set spatial complexity masking.
+
+p_mask float (encoding,video ) Set inter masking.
+
+dark_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress dark areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+idct integer (decoding/encoding,video ) Select IDCT implementation.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+‘int ’
+‘simple ’
+‘simplemmx ’
+‘simpleauto ’
+Automatically pick a IDCT compatible with the simple one
+
+‘arm ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘sh4 ’
+‘simplearm ’
+‘simplearmv5te ’
+‘simplearmv6 ’
+‘simpleneon ’
+‘simplealpha ’
+‘ipp ’
+‘xvidmmx ’
+‘faani ’
+floating point AAN IDCT
+
+
+slice_count integer ec flags (decoding,video ) Set error concealment strategy.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘guess_mvs ’
+iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)
+
‘deblock ’
+use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs
+
‘favor_inter ’
+favor predicting from the previous frame instead of the current
+
+
+bits_per_coded_sample integer pred integer (encoding,video ) Set prediction method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘left ’
+‘plane ’
+‘median ’
+
+
+aspect rational number (encoding,video ) Set sample aspect ratio.
+
+debug flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pict ’
+picture info
+
‘rc ’
+rate control
+
‘bitstream ’
+‘mb_type ’
+macroblock (MB) type
+
‘qp ’
+per-block quantization parameter (QP)
+
‘mv ’
+motion vector
+
‘dct_coeff ’
+‘skip ’
+‘startcode ’
+‘pts ’
+‘er ’
+error recognition
+
‘mmco ’
+memory management control operations (H.264)
+
‘bugs ’
+‘vis_qp ’
+visualize quantization parameter (QP), lower QP are tinted greener
+
‘vis_mb_type ’
+visualize block types
+
‘buffers ’
+picture buffer allocations
+
‘thread_ops ’
+threading operations
+
‘nomc ’
+skip motion compensation
+
+
+vismv integer (decoding,video ) Visualize motion vectors (MVs).
+
+This option is deprecated, see the codecview filter instead.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+cmp integer (encoding,video ) Set full pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+subcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+mbcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+ildctcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set interlaced dct compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation.
+
+last_pred integer (encoding,video ) Set amount of motion predictors from the previous frame.
+
+preme integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation.
+
+precmp integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+pre_dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation pre-pass.
+
+subq integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel motion estimation quality.
+
+dtg_active_format integer me_range integer (encoding,video ) Set limit motion vectors range (1023 for DivX player).
+
+ibias integer (encoding,video ) Set intra quant bias.
+
+pbias integer (encoding,video ) Set inter quant bias.
+
+color_table_id integer global_quality integer (encoding,audio,video ) coder integer (encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘vlc ’
+variable length coder / huffman coder
+
‘ac ’
+arithmetic coder
+
‘raw ’
+raw (no encoding)
+
‘rle ’
+run-length coder
+
‘deflate ’
+deflate-based coder
+
+
+
+context integer (encoding,video ) Set context model.
+
+slice_flags integer xvmc_acceleration integer mbd integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock decision algorithm (high quality mode).
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘simple ’
+use mbcmp (default)
+
‘bits ’
+use fewest bits
+
‘rd ’
+use best rate distortion
+
+
+stream_codec_tag integer sc_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set scene change threshold.
+
+lmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+lmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+nr integer (encoding,video ) Set noise reduction.
+
+rc_init_occupancy integer (encoding,video ) Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before
+decoding starts.
+
+flags2 flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘fast ’
+Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+
‘sgop ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘noout ’
+Skip bitstream encoding.
+
‘ignorecrop ’
+Ignore cropping information from sps.
+
‘local_header ’
+Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+
‘chunks ’
+Frame data might be split into multiple chunks.
+
‘showall ’
+Show all frames before the first keyframe.
+
‘skiprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘export_mvs ’
+Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS)
+for codecs that support it. See also doc/examples/export_mvs.c .
+
+
+
+error integer (encoding,video ) qns integer (encoding,video ) Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
+threads integer (decoding/encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+detect a good number of threads
+
+
+
+me_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation threshold.
+
+mb_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock threshold.
+
+dc integer (encoding,video ) Set intra_dc_precision.
+
+nssew integer (encoding,video ) Set nsse weight.
+
+skip_top integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+
+skip_bottom integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+
+profile integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+‘aac_main ’
+‘aac_low ’
+‘aac_ssr ’
+‘aac_ltp ’
+‘aac_he ’
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+‘aac_ld ’
+‘aac_eld ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_low ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_he ’
+‘mpeg4_sp ’
+‘mpeg4_core ’
+‘mpeg4_main ’
+‘mpeg4_asp ’
+‘dts ’
+‘dts_es ’
+‘dts_96_24 ’
+‘dts_hd_hra ’
+‘dts_hd_ma ’
+
+
+
+level integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+
+
+
+lowres integer (decoding,audio,video ) Decode at 1= 1/2, 2=1/4, 3=1/8 resolutions.
+
+skip_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip threshold.
+
+skip_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip factor.
+
+skip_exp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip exponent.
+Negative values behave identical to the corresponding positive ones, except
+that the score is normalized.
+Positive values exist primarily for compatibility reasons and are not so useful.
+
+skipcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+border_mask float (encoding,video ) Increase the quantizer for macroblocks close to borders.
+
+mblmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mblmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mepc integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation bitrate penalty compensation (1.0 = 256).
+
+skip_loop_filter integer (decoding,video ) skip_idct integer (decoding,video ) skip_frame integer (decoding,video )
+Make decoder discard processing depending on the frame type selected
+by the option value.
+
+skip_loop_filter skips frame loop filtering, skip_idct
+skips frame IDCT/dequantization, skip_frame skips decoding.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘none ’
+Discard no frame.
+
+‘default ’
+Discard useless frames like 0-sized frames.
+
+‘noref ’
+Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+‘bidir ’
+Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+‘nokey ’
+Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+‘all ’
+Discard all frames.
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+
+bidir_refine integer (encoding,video ) Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks.
+
+brd_scale integer (encoding,video ) Downscale frames for dynamic B-frame decision.
+
+keyint_min integer (encoding,video ) Set minimum interval between IDR-frames.
+
+refs integer (encoding,video ) Set reference frames to consider for motion compensation.
+
+chromaoffset integer (encoding,video ) Set chroma qp offset from luma.
+
+trellis integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.
+
+sc_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set value multiplied by qscale for each frame and added to
+scene_change_score.
+
+mv0_threshold integer (encoding,video ) b_sensitivity integer (encoding,video ) Adjust sensitivity of b_frame_strategy 1.
+
+compression_level integer (encoding,audio,video ) min_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) max_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) timecode_frame_start integer (encoding,video ) Set GOP timecode frame start number, in non drop frame format.
+
+request_channels integer (decoding,audio ) Set desired number of audio channels.
+
+bits_per_raw_sample integer channel_layout integer (decoding/encoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+request_channel_layout integer (decoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+rc_max_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) rc_min_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) ticks_per_frame integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) color_primaries integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_trc integer (decoding/encoding,video ) colorspace integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_range integer (decoding/encoding,video ) chroma_sample_location integer (decoding/encoding,video ) log_level_offset integer Set the log level offset.
+
+slices integer (encoding,video ) Number of slices, used in parallelized encoding.
+
+thread_type flags (decoding/encoding,video ) Select which multithreading methods to use.
+
+Use of ‘frame ’ will increase decoding delay by one frame per
+thread, so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use
+it.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘slice ’
+Decode more than one part of a single frame at once.
+
+Multithreading using slices works only when the video was encoded with
+slices.
+
+‘frame ’
+Decode more than one frame at once.
+
+
+Default value is ‘slice+frame ’.
+
+audio_service_type integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio service type.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ma ’
+Main Audio Service
+
‘ef ’
+Effects
+
‘vi ’
+Visually Impaired
+
‘hi ’
+Hearing Impaired
+
‘di ’
+Dialogue
+
‘co ’
+Commentary
+
‘em ’
+Emergency
+
‘vo ’
+Voice Over
+
‘ka ’
+Karaoke
+
+
+request_sample_fmt sample_fmt (decoding,audio ) Set sample format audio decoders should prefer. Default value is
+none.
+
+pkt_timebase rational number sub_charenc encoding (decoding,subtitles ) Set the input subtitles character encoding.
+
+field_order field_order (video ) Set/override the field order of the video.
+Possible values:
+
+‘progressive ’
+Progressive video
+
‘tt ’
+Interlaced video, top field coded and displayed first
+
‘bb ’
+Interlaced video, bottom field coded and displayed first
+
‘tb ’
+Interlaced video, top coded first, bottom displayed first
+
‘bt ’
+Interlaced video, bottom coded first, top displayed first
+
+
+skip_alpha integer (decoding,video ) Set to 1 to disable processing alpha (transparency). This works like the
+‘gray ’ flag in the flags option which skips chroma information
+instead of alpha. Default is 0.
+
+codec_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed decoders. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
12 Decoders# TOC
+
+
Decoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the decoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native decoders
+are enabled by default. Decoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available decoders using the configure option --list-decoders.
+
+
You can disable all the decoders with the configure option
+--disable-decoders and selectively enable / disable single decoders
+with the options --enable-decoder=DECODER /
+--disable-decoder=DECODER .
+
+
The option -decoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled decoders.
+
+
+
+
13 Video Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
13.1 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video decoder.
+
+
This decoder decodes rawvideo streams.
+
+
+
13.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+top top_field_first Specify the assumed field type of the input video.
+
+-1 the video is assumed to be progressive (default)
+
0 bottom-field-first is assumed
+
1 top-field-first is assumed
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
14 Audio Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
14.1 ac3# TOC
+
+
AC-3 audio decoder.
+
+
This decoder implements part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
+
14.1.1 AC-3 Decoder Options# TOC
+
+
+-drc_scale value Dynamic Range Scale Factor. The factor to apply to dynamic range values
+from the AC-3 stream. This factor is applied exponentially.
+There are 3 notable scale factor ranges:
+
+drc_scale == 0 DRC disabled. Produces full range audio.
+
0 < drc_scale <= 1 DRC enabled. Applies a fraction of the stream DRC value.
+Audio reproduction is between full range and full compression.
+
drc_scale > 1 DRC enabled. Applies drc_scale asymmetrically.
+Loud sounds are fully compressed. Soft sounds are enhanced.
+
+
+
+
+
+
14.2 ffwavesynth# TOC
+
+
Internal wave synthetizer.
+
+
This decoder generates wave patterns according to predefined sequences. Its
+use is purely internal and the format of the data it accepts is not publicly
+documented.
+
+
+
14.3 libcelt# TOC
+
+
libcelt decoder wrapper.
+
+
libcelt allows libavcodec to decode the Xiph CELT ultra-low delay audio codec.
+Requires the presence of the libcelt headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libcelt.
+
+
+
14.4 libgsm# TOC
+
+
libgsm decoder wrapper.
+
+
libgsm allows libavcodec to decode the GSM full rate audio codec. Requires
+the presence of the libgsm headers and library during configuration. You need
+to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libgsm.
+
+
This decoder supports both the ordinary GSM and the Microsoft variant.
+
+
+
14.5 libilbc# TOC
+
+
libilbc decoder wrapper.
+
+
libilbc allows libavcodec to decode the Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC)
+audio codec. Requires the presence of the libilbc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libilbc.
+
+
+
14.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following option is supported by the libilbc wrapper.
+
+
+enhance
+Enable the enhancement of the decoded audio when set to 1. The default
+value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
+
14.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrnb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrnb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Narrowband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrnb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrnb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-NB exists, so users can decode AMR-NB
+without this library.
+
+
+
14.7 libopencore-amrwb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrwb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrwb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Wideband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrwb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrwb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-WB exists, so users can decode AMR-WB
+without this library.
+
+
+
14.8 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopus allows libavcodec to decode the Opus Interactive Audio Codec.
+Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for Opus exists, so users can decode Opus
+without this library.
+
+
+
+
15 Subtitles Decoders# TOC
+
+
+
15.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec decodes the bitmap subtitles used in DVDs; the same subtitles can
+also be found in VobSub file pairs and in some Matroska files.
+
+
+
15.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+palette Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps. When stored in VobSub, the
+palette is normally specified in the index file; in Matroska, the palette is
+stored in the codec extra-data in the same format as in VobSub. In DVDs, the
+palette is stored in the IFO file, and therefore not available when reading
+from dumped VOB files.
+
+The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
+numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by comas, for example 0d00ee,
+ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
+7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b.
+
+ifo_palette Specify the IFO file from which the global palette is obtained.
+(experimental)
+
+forced_subs_only Only decode subtitle entries marked as forced. Some titles have forced
+and non-forced subtitles in the same track. Setting this flag to 1
+will only keep the forced subtitles. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
15.2 libzvbi-teletext# TOC
+
+
Libzvbi allows libavcodec to decode DVB teletext pages and DVB teletext
+subtitles. Requires the presence of the libzvbi headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libzvbi.
+
+
+
15.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+txt_page List of teletext page numbers to decode. You may use the special * string to
+match all pages. Pages that do not match the specified list are dropped.
+Default value is *.
+
txt_chop_top Discards the top teletext line. Default value is 1.
+
txt_format Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles. The teletext decoder is capable
+of decoding the teletext pages to bitmaps or to simple text, you should use
+"bitmap" for teletext pages, because certain graphics and colors cannot be
+expressed in simple text. You might use "text" for teletext based subtitles if
+your application can handle simple text based subtitles. Default value is
+bitmap.
+
txt_left X offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_top Y offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_chop_spaces Chops leading and trailing spaces and removes empty lines from the generated
+text. This option is useful for teletext based subtitles where empty spaces may
+be present at the start or at the end of the lines or empty lines may be
+present between the subtitle lines because of double-sized teletext charactes.
+Default value is 1.
+
txt_duration Sets the display duration of the decoded teletext pages or subtitles in
+miliseconds. Default value is 30000 which is 30 seconds.
+
txt_transparent Force transparent background of the generated teletext bitmaps. Default value
+is 0 which means an opaque (black) background.
+
+
+
+
16 Encoders# TOC
+
+
Encoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the encoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native encoders
+are enabled by default. Encoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available encoders using the configure option --list-encoders.
+
+
You can disable all the encoders with the configure option
+--disable-encoders and selectively enable / disable single encoders
+with the options --enable-encoder=ENCODER /
+--disable-encoder=ENCODER .
+
+
The option -encoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled encoders.
+
+
+
+
17 Audio Encoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio encoders
+follows.
+
+
+
17.1 aac# TOC
+
+
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) encoder.
+
+
This encoder is an experimental FFmpeg-native AAC encoder. Currently only the
+low complexity (AAC-LC) profile is supported. To use this encoder, you must set
+strict option to ‘experimental ’ or lower.
+
+
As this encoder is experimental, unexpected behavior may exist from time to
+time. For a more stable AAC encoder, see libvo-aacenc . However, be warned
+that it has a worse quality reported by some users.
+
+
See also libfdk_aac and libfaac .
+
+
+
17.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s. Setting this automatically activates constant bit rate
+(CBR) mode.
+
+q Set quality for variable bit rate (VBR) mode. This option is valid only using
+the ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface users, use
+global_quality .
+
+stereo_mode Set stereo encoding mode. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatically selected by the encoder.
+
+‘ms_off ’
+Disable middle/side encoding. This is the default.
+
+‘ms_force ’
+Force middle/side encoding.
+
+
+aac_coder Set AAC encoder coding method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘faac ’
+FAAC-inspired method.
+
+This method is a simplified reimplementation of the method used in FAAC, which
+sets thresholds proportional to the band energies, and then decreases all the
+thresholds with quantizer steps to find the appropriate quantization with
+distortion below threshold band by band.
+
+The quality of this method is comparable to the two loop searching method
+described below, but somewhat a little better and slower.
+
+‘anmr ’
+Average noise to mask ratio (ANMR) trellis-based solution.
+
+This has a theoretic best quality out of all the coding methods, but at the
+cost of the slowest speed.
+
+‘twoloop ’
+Two loop searching (TLS) method.
+
+This method first sets quantizers depending on band thresholds and then tries
+to find an optimal combination by adding or subtracting a specific value from
+all quantizers and adjusting some individual quantizer a little.
+
+This method produces similar quality with the FAAC method and is the default.
+
+‘fast ’
+Constant quantizer method.
+
+This method sets a constant quantizer for all bands. This is the fastest of all
+the methods, yet produces the worst quality.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2 ac3 and ac3_fixed# TOC
+
+
AC-3 audio encoders.
+
+
These encoders implement part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
The ac3 encoder uses floating-point math, while the ac3_fixed
+encoder only uses fixed-point integer math. This does not mean that one is
+always faster, just that one or the other may be better suited to a
+particular system. The floating-point encoder will generally produce better
+quality audio for a given bitrate. The ac3_fixed encoder is not the
+default codec for any of the output formats, so it must be specified explicitly
+using the option -acodec ac3_fixed in order to use it.
+
+
+
17.2.1 AC-3 Metadata# TOC
+
+
The AC-3 metadata options are used to set parameters that describe the audio,
+but in most cases do not affect the audio encoding itself. Some of the options
+do directly affect or influence the decoding and playback of the resulting
+bitstream, while others are just for informational purposes. A few of the
+options will add bits to the output stream that could otherwise be used for
+audio data, and will thus affect the quality of the output. Those will be
+indicated accordingly with a note in the option list below.
+
+
These parameters are described in detail in several publicly-available
+documents.
+
+
+
+
17.2.1.1 Metadata Control Options# TOC
+
+
+-per_frame_metadata boolean Allow Per-Frame Metadata. Specifies if the encoder should check for changing
+metadata for each frame.
+
+0 The metadata values set at initialization will be used for every frame in the
+stream. (default)
+
1 Metadata values can be changed before encoding each frame.
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.1.2 Downmix Levels# TOC
+
+
+-center_mixlev level Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the center
+channel when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
+bitstream if a center channel is present. The value is specified as a scale
+factor. There are 3 valid values:
+
+0.707 Apply -3dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6dB gain
+
+
+-surround_mixlev level Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the surround
+channel(s) when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
+bitstream if one or more surround channels are present. The value is specified
+as a scale factor. There are 3 valid values:
+
+0.707 Apply -3dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.1.3 Audio Production Information# TOC
+
Audio Production Information is optional information describing the mixing
+environment. Either none or both of the fields are written to the bitstream.
+
+
+-mixing_level number Mixing Level. Specifies peak sound pressure level (SPL) in the production
+environment when the mix was mastered. Valid values are 80 to 111, or -1 for
+unknown or not indicated. The default value is -1, but that value cannot be
+used if the Audio Production Information is written to the bitstream. Therefore,
+if the room_type option is not the default value, the mixing_level
+option must not be -1.
+
+-room_type type Room Type. Describes the equalization used during the final mixing session at
+the studio or on the dubbing stage. A large room is a dubbing stage with the
+industry standard X-curve equalization; a small room has flat equalization.
+This field will not be written to the bitstream if both the mixing_level
+option and the room_type option have the default values.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 large Large Room
+
2 small Small Room
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.1.4 Other Metadata Options# TOC
+
+
+-copyright boolean Copyright Indicator. Specifies whether a copyright exists for this audio.
+
+0 off No Copyright Exists (default)
+
1 on Copyright Exists
+
+
+-dialnorm value Dialogue Normalization. Indicates how far the average dialogue level of the
+program is below digital 100% full scale (0 dBFS). This parameter determines a
+level shift during audio reproduction that sets the average volume of the
+dialogue to a preset level. The goal is to match volume level between program
+sources. A value of -31dB will result in no volume level change, relative to
+the source volume, during audio reproduction. Valid values are whole numbers in
+the range -31 to -1, with -31 being the default.
+
+-dsur_mode mode Dolby Surround Mode. Specifies whether the stereo signal uses Dolby Surround
+(Pro Logic). This field will only be written to the bitstream if the audio
+stream is stereo. Using this option does NOT mean the encoder will actually
+apply Dolby Surround processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 off Not Dolby Surround Encoded
+
2 on Dolby Surround Encoded
+
+
+-original boolean Original Bit Stream Indicator. Specifies whether this audio is from the
+original source and not a copy.
+
+0 off Not Original Source
+
1 on Original Source (default)
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.2 Extended Bitstream Information# TOC
+
The extended bitstream options are part of the Alternate Bit Stream Syntax as
+specified in Annex D of the A/52:2010 standard. It is grouped into 2 parts.
+If any one parameter in a group is specified, all values in that group will be
+written to the bitstream. Default values are used for those that are written
+but have not been specified. If the mixing levels are written, the decoder
+will use these values instead of the ones specified in the center_mixlev
+and surround_mixlev options if it supports the Alternate Bit Stream
+Syntax.
+
+
+
17.2.2.1 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 1# TOC
+
+
+-dmix_mode mode Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode. Allows the user to select either Lt/Rt
+(Dolby Surround) or Lo/Ro (normal stereo) as the preferred stereo downmix mode.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 ltrt Lt/Rt Downmix Preferred
+
2 loro Lo/Ro Downmix Preferred
+
+
+-ltrt_cmixlev level Lt/Rt Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.
+
+1.414 Apply +3dB gain
+
1.189 Apply +1.5dB gain
+
1.000 Apply 0dB gain
+
0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain
+
0.000 Silence Center Channel
+
+
+-ltrt_surmixlev level Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.
+
+0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+-loro_cmixlev level Lo/Ro Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.
+
+1.414 Apply +3dB gain
+
1.189 Apply +1.5dB gain
+
1.000 Apply 0dB gain
+
0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain
+
0.000 Silence Center Channel
+
+
+-loro_surmixlev level Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.
+
+0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.2.2 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 2# TOC
+
+
+-dsurex_mode mode Dolby Surround EX Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Surround EX
+(7.1 matrixed to 5.1). Using this option does NOT mean the encoder will actually
+apply Dolby Surround EX processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 on Dolby Surround EX Off
+
2 off Dolby Surround EX On
+
+
+-dheadphone_mode mode Dolby Headphone Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Headphone
+encoding (multi-channel matrixed to 2.0 for use with headphones). Using this
+option does NOT mean the encoder will actually apply Dolby Headphone
+processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 on Dolby Headphone Off
+
2 off Dolby Headphone On
+
+
+-ad_conv_type type A/D Converter Type. Indicates whether the audio has passed through HDCD A/D
+conversion.
+
+0 standard Standard A/D Converter (default)
+
1 hdcd HDCD A/D Converter
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.3 Other AC-3 Encoding Options# TOC
+
+
+-stereo_rematrixing boolean Stereo Rematrixing. Enables/Disables use of rematrixing for stereo input. This
+is an optional AC-3 feature that increases quality by selectively encoding
+the left/right channels as mid/side. This option is enabled by default, and it
+is highly recommended that it be left as enabled except for testing purposes.
+
+
+
+
+
17.2.4 Floating-Point-Only AC-3 Encoding Options# TOC
+
+
These options are only valid for the floating-point encoder and do not exist
+for the fixed-point encoder due to the corresponding features not being
+implemented in fixed-point.
+
+
+-channel_coupling boolean Enables/Disables use of channel coupling, which is an optional AC-3 feature
+that increases quality by combining high frequency information from multiple
+channels into a single channel. The per-channel high frequency information is
+sent with less accuracy in both the frequency and time domains. This allows
+more bits to be used for lower frequencies while preserving enough information
+to reconstruct the high frequencies. This option is enabled by default for the
+floating-point encoder and should generally be left as enabled except for
+testing purposes or to increase encoding speed.
+
+-1 auto Selected by Encoder (default)
+
0 off Disable Channel Coupling
+
1 on Enable Channel Coupling
+
+
+-cpl_start_band number Coupling Start Band. Sets the channel coupling start band, from 1 to 15. If a
+value higher than the bandwidth is used, it will be reduced to 1 less than the
+coupling end band. If auto is used, the start band will be determined by
+the encoder based on the bit rate, sample rate, and channel layout. This option
+has no effect if channel coupling is disabled.
+
+-1 auto Selected by Encoder (default)
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.3 libfaac# TOC
+
+
libfaac AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libfaac headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libfaac --enable-nonfree.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be of higher quality with respect to the
+the native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder .
+
+
For more information see the libfaac project at
+http://www.audiocoding.com/faac.html/ .
+
+
+
17.3.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following shared FFmpeg codec options are recognized.
+
+
The following options are supported by the libfaac wrapper. The
+faac-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bit rate in bits/s for ABR (Average Bit Rate) mode. If the bit rate
+is not explicitly specified, it is automatically set to a suitable
+value depending on the selected profile. faac bitrate is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+Note that libfaac does not support CBR (Constant Bit Rate) but only
+ABR (Average Bit Rate).
+
+If VBR mode is enabled this option is ignored.
+
+ar (-R ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac (-c ) Set the number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff (-C ) Set cutoff frequency. If not specified (or explicitly set to 0) it
+will use a value automatically computed by the library. Default value
+is 0.
+
+profile Set audio profile.
+
+The following profiles are recognized:
+
+‘aac_main ’
+Main AAC (Main)
+
+‘aac_low ’
+Low Complexity AAC (LC)
+
+‘aac_ssr ’
+Scalable Sample Rate (SSR)
+
+‘aac_ltp ’
+Long Term Prediction (LTP)
+
+
+If not specified it is set to ‘aac_low ’.
+
+flags +qscale Set constant quality VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
+
+global_quality Set quality in VBR mode as an integer number of lambda units.
+
+Only relevant when VBR mode is enabled with flags +qscale. The
+value is converted to QP units by dividing it by FF_QP2LAMBDA,
+and used to set the quality value used by libfaac. A reasonable range
+for the option value in QP units is [10-500], the higher the value the
+higher the quality.
+
+q (-q ) Enable VBR mode when set to a non-negative value, and set constant
+quality value as a double floating point value in QP units.
+
+The value sets the quality value used by libfaac. A reasonable range
+for the option value is [10-500], the higher the value the higher the
+quality.
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line
+tool. For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+
+
+
17.3.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to ABR 128 kbps AAC in an M4A (MP4)
+container:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -codec:a libfaac -b:a 128k -output.m4a
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to VBR AAC, using the
+LTP AAC profile:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -c:a libfaac -profile:a aac_ltp -q:a 100 output.m4a
+
+
+
+
17.4 libfdk_aac# TOC
+
+
libfdk-aac AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder wrapper.
+
+
The libfdk-aac library is based on the Fraunhofer FDK AAC code from
+the Android project.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libfdk-aac headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libfdk-aac. The library is also incompatible with GPL,
+so if you allow the use of GPL, you should configure with
+--enable-gpl --enable-nonfree --enable-libfdk-aac.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be of higher quality with respect to
+both the native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder and
+libfaac .
+
+
VBR encoding, enabled through the vbr or flags
++qscale options, is experimental and only works with some
+combinations of parameters.
+
+
Support for encoding 7.1 audio is only available with libfdk-aac 0.1.3 or
+higher.
+
+
For more information see the fdk-aac project at
+http://sourceforge.net/p/opencore-amr/fdk-aac/ .
+
+
+
17.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are mapped on the shared FFmpeg codec options.
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s. If the bitrate is not explicitly specified, it
+is automatically set to a suitable value depending on the selected
+profile.
+
+In case VBR mode is enabled the option is ignored.
+
+ar Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+channels Set the number of audio channels.
+
+flags +qscale Enable fixed quality, VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
+Note that VBR is implicitly enabled when the vbr value is
+positive.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency. If not specified (or explicitly set to 0) it
+will use a value automatically computed by the library. Default value
+is 0.
+
+profile Set audio profile.
+
+The following profiles are recognized:
+
+‘aac_low ’
+Low Complexity AAC (LC)
+
+‘aac_he ’
+High Efficiency AAC (HE-AAC)
+
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+High Efficiency AAC version 2 (HE-AACv2)
+
+‘aac_ld ’
+Low Delay AAC (LD)
+
+‘aac_eld ’
+Enhanced Low Delay AAC (ELD)
+
+
+If not specified it is set to ‘aac_low ’.
+
+
+
The following are private options of the libfdk_aac encoder.
+
+
+afterburner Enable afterburner feature if set to 1, disabled if set to 0. This
+improves the quality but also the required processing power.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+eld_sbr Enable SBR (Spectral Band Replication) for ELD if set to 1, disabled
+if set to 0.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+signaling Set SBR/PS signaling style.
+
+It can assume one of the following values:
+
+‘default ’
+choose signaling implicitly (explicit hierarchical by default,
+implicit if global header is disabled)
+
+‘implicit ’
+implicit backwards compatible signaling
+
+‘explicit_sbr ’
+explicit SBR, implicit PS signaling
+
+‘explicit_hierarchical ’
+explicit hierarchical signaling
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+latm Output LATM/LOAS encapsulated data if set to 1, disabled if set to 0.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+header_period Set StreamMuxConfig and PCE repetition period (in frames) for sending
+in-band configuration buffers within LATM/LOAS transport layer.
+
+Must be a 16-bits non-negative integer.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+vbr Set VBR mode, from 1 to 5. 1 is lowest quality (though still pretty
+good) and 5 is highest quality. A value of 0 will disable VBR, and CBR
+(Constant Bit Rate) is enabled.
+
+Currently only the ‘aac_low ’ profile supports VBR encoding.
+
+VBR modes 1-5 correspond to roughly the following average bit rates:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+32 kbps/channel
+
‘2 ’
+40 kbps/channel
+
‘3 ’
+48-56 kbps/channel
+
‘4 ’
+64 kbps/channel
+
‘5 ’
+about 80-96 kbps/channel
+
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
17.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to VBR AAC in an M4A (MP4)
+container:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -codec:a libfdk_aac -vbr 3 output.m4a
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to CBR 64k kbps AAC, using the
+High-Efficiency AAC profile:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -c:a libfdk_aac -profile:a aac_he -b:a 64k output.m4a
+
+
+
+
17.5 libmp3lame# TOC
+
+
LAME (Lame Ain’t an MP3 Encoder) MP3 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libmp3lame headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libmp3lame.
+
+
See libshine for a fixed-point MP3 encoder, although with a
+lower quality.
+
+
+
17.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libmp3lame wrapper. The
+lame-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR or ABR. LAME bitrate is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+q (-V ) Set constant quality setting for VBR. This option is valid only
+using the ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface
+users, use global_quality .
+
+compression_level (-q ) Set algorithm quality. Valid arguments are integers in the 0-9 range,
+with 0 meaning highest quality but slowest, and 9 meaning fastest
+while producing the worst quality.
+
+reservoir Enable use of bit reservoir when set to 1. Default value is 1. LAME
+has this enabled by default, but can be overridden by use
+--nores option.
+
+joint_stereo (-m j ) Enable the encoder to use (on a frame by frame basis) either L/R
+stereo or mid/side stereo. Default value is 1.
+
+abr (--abr ) Enable the encoder to use ABR when set to 1. The lame
+--abr sets the target bitrate, while this options only
+tells FFmpeg to use ABR still relies on b to set bitrate.
+
+
+
+
+
17.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
OpenCORE Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libopencore-amrnb headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopencore-amrnb --enable-version3.
+
+
This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 8000Hz sample rate,
+but you can override it by setting strict to ‘unofficial ’ or
+lower.
+
+
+
17.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bitrate in bits per second. Only the following bitrates are supported,
+otherwise libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.
+
+
+4750 5150 5900 6700 7400 7950 10200 12200
+
+dtx Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
+default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
17.7 libshine# TOC
+
+
Shine Fixed-Point MP3 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Shine is a fixed-point MP3 encoder. It has a far better performance on
+platforms without an FPU, e.g. armel CPUs, and some phones and tablets.
+However, as it is more targeted on performance than quality, it is not on par
+with LAME and other production-grade encoders quality-wise. Also, according to
+the project’s homepage, this encoder may not be free of bugs as the code was
+written a long time ago and the project was dead for at least 5 years.
+
+
This encoder only supports stereo and mono input. This is also CBR-only.
+
+
The original project (last updated in early 2007) is at
+http://sourceforge.net/projects/libshine-fxp/ . We only support the
+updated fork by the Savonet/Liquidsoap project at https://github.com/savonet/shine .
+
+
Requires the presence of the libshine headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libshine.
+
+
See also libmp3lame .
+
+
+
17.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libshine wrapper. The
+shineenc-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. shineenc -b option
+is expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+
+
+
+
17.8 libtwolame# TOC
+
+
TwoLAME MP2 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libtwolame headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libtwolame.
+
+
+
17.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libtwolame wrapper. The
+twolame-equivalent options follow the FFmpeg ones and are in
+parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. twolame b
+option is expressed in kilobits/s. Default value is 128k.
+
+q (-V ) Set quality for experimental VBR support. Maximum value range is
+from -50 to 50, useful range is from -10 to 10. The higher the
+value, the better the quality. This option is valid only using the
+ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface users,
+use global_quality .
+
+mode (--mode ) Set the mode of the resulting audio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose mode automatically based on the input. This is the default.
+
‘stereo ’
+Stereo
+
‘joint_stereo ’
+Joint stereo
+
‘dual_channel ’
+Dual channel
+
‘mono ’
+Mono
+
+
+psymodel (--psyc-mode ) Set psychoacoustic model to use in encoding. The argument must be
+an integer between -1 and 4, inclusive. The higher the value, the
+better the quality. The default value is 3.
+
+energy_levels (--energy ) Enable energy levels extensions when set to 1. The default value is
+0 (disabled).
+
+error_protection (--protect ) Enable CRC error protection when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+copyright (--copyright ) Set MPEG audio copyright flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+original (--original ) Set MPEG audio original flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
17.9 libvo-aacenc# TOC
+
+
VisualOn AAC encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvo-aacenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvo-aacenc --enable-version3.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be worse than the
+native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder , according to
+multiple sources.
+
+
+
17.9.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The VisualOn AAC encoder only support encoding AAC-LC and up to 2
+channels. It is also CBR-only.
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s.
+
+
+
+
+
17.10 libvo-amrwbenc# TOC
+
+
VisualOn Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvo-amrwbenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvo-amrwbenc --enable-version3.
+
+
This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 16000Hz sample
+rate, but you can override it by setting strict to
+‘unofficial ’ or lower.
+
+
+
17.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bitrate in bits/s. Only the following bitrates are supported, otherwise
+libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.
+
+
+‘6600 ’
+‘8850 ’
+‘12650 ’
+‘14250 ’
+‘15850 ’
+‘18250 ’
+‘19850 ’
+‘23050 ’
+‘23850 ’
+
+
+dtx Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
+default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
17.11 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus Opus Interactive Audio Codec encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
+
17.11.1 Option Mapping# TOC
+
+
Most libopus options are modelled after the opusenc utility from
+opus-tools. The following is an option mapping chart describing options
+supported by the libopus wrapper, and their opusenc-equivalent
+in parentheses.
+
+
+b (bitrate ) Set the bit rate in bits/s. FFmpeg’s b option is
+expressed in bits/s, while opusenc’s bitrate in
+kilobits/s.
+
+vbr (vbr , hard-cbr , and cvbr ) Set VBR mode. The FFmpeg vbr option has the following
+valid arguments, with the their opusenc equivalent options
+in parentheses:
+
+
+‘off (hard-cbr ) ’
+Use constant bit rate encoding.
+
+‘on (vbr ) ’
+Use variable bit rate encoding (the default).
+
+‘constrained (cvbr ) ’
+Use constrained variable bit rate encoding.
+
+
+compression_level (comp ) Set encoding algorithm complexity. Valid options are integers in
+the 0-10 range. 0 gives the fastest encodes but lower quality, while 10
+gives the highest quality but slowest encoding. The default is 10.
+
+frame_duration (framesize ) Set maximum frame size, or duration of a frame in milliseconds. The
+argument must be exactly the following: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60. Smaller
+frame sizes achieve lower latency but less quality at a given bitrate.
+Sizes greater than 20ms are only interesting at fairly low bitrates.
+The default is 20ms.
+
+packet_loss (expect-loss ) Set expected packet loss percentage. The default is 0.
+
+application (N.A.) Set intended application type. Valid options are listed below:
+
+
+‘voip ’
+Favor improved speech intelligibility.
+
‘audio ’
+Favor faithfulness to the input (the default).
+
‘lowdelay ’
+Restrict to only the lowest delay modes.
+
+
+cutoff (N.A.) Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz. The argument must be exactly one of the
+following: 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, or 20000, corresponding to
+narrowband, mediumband, wideband, super wideband, and fullband
+respectively. The default is 0 (cutoff disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
17.12 libvorbis# TOC
+
+
libvorbis encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvorbisenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvorbis.
+
+
+
17.12.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libvorbis wrapper. The
+oggenc-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libvorbis
+options, consult the libvorbisenc’s and oggenc’s documentations.
+See http://xiph.org/vorbis/ ,
+http://wiki.xiph.org/Vorbis-tools , and oggenc(1).
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for ABR. oggenc -b is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+q (-q ) Set constant quality setting for VBR. The value should be a float
+number in the range of -1.0 to 10.0. The higher the value, the better
+the quality. The default value is ‘3.0 ’.
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line tool.
+For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+cutoff (--advanced-encode-option lowpass_frequency=N ) Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz, a value of 0 disables cutoff. oggenc’s
+related option is expressed in kHz. The default value is ‘0 ’ (cutoff
+disabled).
+
+minrate (-m ) Set minimum bitrate expressed in bits/s. oggenc -m is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+maxrate (-M ) Set maximum bitrate expressed in bits/s. oggenc -M is
+expressed in kilobits/s. This only has effect on ABR mode.
+
+iblock (--advanced-encode-option impulse_noisetune=N ) Set noise floor bias for impulse blocks. The value is a float number from
+-15.0 to 0.0. A negative bias instructs the encoder to pay special attention
+to the crispness of transients in the encoded audio. The tradeoff for better
+transient response is a higher bitrate.
+
+
+
+
+
17.13 libwavpack# TOC
+
+
A wrapper providing WavPack encoding through libwavpack.
+
+
Only lossless mode using 32-bit integer samples is supported currently.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libwavpack headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libwavpack.
+
+
Note that a libavcodec-native encoder for the WavPack codec exists so users can
+encode audios with this codec without using this encoder. See wavpackenc .
+
+
+
17.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
wavpack command line utility’s corresponding options are listed in
+parentheses, if any.
+
+
+frame_size (--blocksize ) Default is 32768.
+
+compression_level Set speed vs. compression tradeoff. Acceptable arguments are listed below:
+
+
+‘0 (-f ) ’
+Fast mode.
+
+‘1 ’
+Normal (default) settings.
+
+‘2 (-h ) ’
+High quality.
+
+‘3 (-hh ) ’
+Very high quality.
+
+‘4-8 (-hh -x EXTRAPROC ) ’
+Same as ‘3 ’, but with extra processing enabled.
+
+‘4 ’ is the same as -x2 and ‘8 ’ is the same as -x6 .
+
+
+
+
+
+
17.14 wavpack# TOC
+
+
WavPack lossless audio encoder.
+
+
This is a libavcodec-native WavPack encoder. There is also an encoder based on
+libwavpack, but there is virtually no reason to use that encoder.
+
+
See also libwavpack .
+
+
+
17.14.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The equivalent options for wavpack command line utility are listed in
+parentheses.
+
+
+
17.14.1.1 Shared options# TOC
+
+
The following shared options are effective for this encoder. Only special notes
+about this particular encoder will be documented here. For the general meaning
+of the options, see the Codec Options chapter .
+
+
+frame_size (--blocksize ) For this encoder, the range for this option is between 128 and 131072. Default
+is automatically decided based on sample rate and number of channel.
+
+For the complete formula of calculating default, see
+libavcodec/wavpackenc.c .
+
+compression_level (-f , -h , -hh , and -x ) This option’s syntax is consistent with libwavpack ’s.
+
+
+
+
17.14.1.2 Private options# TOC
+
+
+joint_stereo (-j ) Set whether to enable joint stereo. Valid values are:
+
+
+‘on (1 ) ’
+Force mid/side audio encoding.
+
‘off (0 ) ’
+Force left/right audio encoding.
+
‘auto ’
+Let the encoder decide automatically.
+
+
+optimize_mono Set whether to enable optimization for mono. This option is only effective for
+non-mono streams. Available values:
+
+
+‘on ’
+enabled
+
‘off ’
+disabled
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
18 Video Encoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video encoders
+follows.
+
+
+
18.1 libtheora# TOC
+
+
libtheora Theora encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libtheora headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libtheora.
+
+
For more information about the libtheora project see
+http://www.theora.org/ .
+
+
+
18.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following global options are mapped to internal libtheora options
+which affect the quality and the bitrate of the encoded stream.
+
+
+b Set the video bitrate in bit/s for CBR (Constant Bit Rate) mode. In
+case VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode is enabled this option is ignored.
+
+flags Used to enable constant quality mode (VBR) encoding through the
+qscale flag, and to enable the pass1 and pass2
+modes.
+
+g Set the GOP size.
+
+global_quality Set the global quality as an integer in lambda units.
+
+Only relevant when VBR mode is enabled with flags +qscale. The
+value is converted to QP units by dividing it by FF_QP2LAMBDA,
+clipped in the [0 - 10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3 to get a
+value in the native libtheora range [0-63]. A higher value corresponds
+to a higher quality.
+
+q Enable VBR mode when set to a non-negative value, and set constant
+quality value as a double floating point value in QP units.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0-10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3
+to get a value in the native libtheora range [0-63].
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line
+tool. For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+
+
+
18.1.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set maximum constant quality (VBR) encoding with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -q:v 10 OUTPUT.ogg
+ Use ffmpeg to convert a CBR 1000 kbps Theora video stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -b:v 1000k OUTPUT.ogg
+
+
+
+
18.2 libvpx# TOC
+
+
VP8/VP9 format supported through libvpx.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvpx headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libvpx.
+
+
+
18.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
Mapping from FFmpeg to libvpx options with conversion notes in parentheses.
+
+
+threads g_threads
+
+profile g_profile
+
+vb rc_target_bitrate
+
+g kf_max_dist
+
+keyint_min kf_min_dist
+
+qmin rc_min_quantizer
+
+qmax rc_max_quantizer
+
+bufsize, vb rc_buf_sz
+(bufsize * 1000 / vb)
+
+rc_buf_optimal_sz
+(bufsize * 1000 / vb * 5 / 6)
+
+rc_init_occupancy, vb rc_buf_initial_sz
+(rc_init_occupancy * 1000 / vb)
+
+rc_buffer_aggressivity rc_undershoot_pct
+
+skip_threshold rc_dropframe_thresh
+
+qcomp rc_2pass_vbr_bias_pct
+
+maxrate, vb rc_2pass_vbr_maxsection_pct
+(maxrate * 100 / vb)
+
+minrate, vb rc_2pass_vbr_minsection_pct
+(minrate * 100 / vb)
+
+minrate, maxrate, vb VPX_CBR
+(minrate == maxrate == vb)
+
+crf VPX_CQ, VP8E_SET_CQ_LEVEL
+
+quality
+best VPX_DL_BEST_QUALITY
+
good VPX_DL_GOOD_QUALITY
+
realtime VPX_DL_REALTIME
+
+
+speed VP8E_SET_CPUUSED
+
+nr VP8E_SET_NOISE_SENSITIVITY
+
+mb_threshold VP8E_SET_STATIC_THRESHOLD
+
+slices VP8E_SET_TOKEN_PARTITIONS
+
+max-intra-rate VP8E_SET_MAX_INTRA_BITRATE_PCT
+
+force_key_frames VPX_EFLAG_FORCE_KF
+
+Alternate reference frame related
+vp8flags altref VP8E_SET_ENABLEAUTOALTREF
+
arnr_max_frames VP8E_SET_ARNR_MAXFRAMES
+
arnr_type VP8E_SET_ARNR_TYPE
+
arnr_strength VP8E_SET_ARNR_STRENGTH
+
rc_lookahead g_lag_in_frames
+
+
+vp8flags error_resilient g_error_resilient
+
+aq_mode VP9E_SET_AQ_MODE
+
+
+
+
For more information about libvpx see:
+http://www.webmproject.org/
+
+
+
+
18.3 libwebp# TOC
+
+
libwebp WebP Image encoder wrapper
+
+
libwebp is Google’s official encoder for WebP images. It can encode in either
+lossy or lossless mode. Lossy images are essentially a wrapper around a VP8
+frame. Lossless images are a separate codec developed by Google.
+
+
+
18.3.1 Pixel Format# TOC
+
+
Currently, libwebp only supports YUV420 for lossy and RGB for lossless due
+to limitations of the format and libwebp. Alpha is supported for either mode.
+Because of API limitations, if RGB is passed in when encoding lossy or YUV is
+passed in for encoding lossless, the pixel format will automatically be
+converted using functions from libwebp. This is not ideal and is done only for
+convenience.
+
+
+
18.3.2 Options# TOC
+
+
+-lossless boolean Enables/Disables use of lossless mode. Default is 0.
+
+-compression_level integer For lossy, this is a quality/speed tradeoff. Higher values give better quality
+for a given size at the cost of increased encoding time. For lossless, this is
+a size/speed tradeoff. Higher values give smaller size at the cost of increased
+encoding time. More specifically, it controls the number of extra algorithms
+and compression tools used, and varies the combination of these tools. This
+maps to the method option in libwebp. The valid range is 0 to 6.
+Default is 4.
+
+-qscale float For lossy encoding, this controls image quality, 0 to 100. For lossless
+encoding, this controls the effort and time spent at compressing more. The
+default value is 75. Note that for usage via libavcodec, this option is called
+global_quality and must be multiplied by FF_QP2LAMBDA .
+
+-preset type Configuration preset. This does some automatic settings based on the general
+type of the image.
+
+none Do not use a preset.
+
default Use the encoder default.
+
picture Digital picture, like portrait, inner shot
+
photo Outdoor photograph, with natural lighting
+
drawing Hand or line drawing, with high-contrast details
+
icon Small-sized colorful images
+
text Text-like
+
+
+
+
+
+
18.4 libx264, libx264rgb# TOC
+
+
x264 H.264/MPEG-4 AVC encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libx264 headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libx264.
+
+
libx264 supports an impressive number of features, including 8x8 and
+4x4 adaptive spatial transform, adaptive B-frame placement, CAVLC/CABAC
+entropy coding, interlacing (MBAFF), lossless mode, psy optimizations
+for detail retention (adaptive quantization, psy-RD, psy-trellis).
+
+
Many libx264 encoder options are mapped to FFmpeg global codec
+options, while unique encoder options are provided through private
+options. Additionally the x264opts and x264-params
+private options allows one to pass a list of key=value tuples as accepted
+by the libx264 x264_param_parse function.
+
+
The x264 project website is at
+http://www.videolan.org/developers/x264.html .
+
+
The libx264rgb encoder is the same as libx264, except it accepts packed RGB
+pixel formats as input instead of YUV.
+
+
+
18.4.1 Supported Pixel Formats# TOC
+
+
x264 supports 8- to 10-bit color spaces. The exact bit depth is controlled at
+x264’s configure time. FFmpeg only supports one bit depth in one particular
+build. In other words, it is not possible to build one FFmpeg with multiple
+versions of x264 with different bit depths.
+
+
+
18.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libx264 wrapper. The
+x264-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses
+for easy migration.
+
+
To reduce the duplication of documentation, only the private options
+and some others requiring special attention are documented here. For
+the documentation of the undocumented generic options, see
+the Codec Options chapter .
+
+
To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libx264
+options, invoke the command x264 --full-help or consult
+the libx264 documentation.
+
+
+b (bitrate ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Note that FFmpeg’s b option is
+expressed in bits/s, while x264’s bitrate is in
+kilobits/s.
+
+bf (bframes ) g (keyint ) qmin (qpmin ) Minimum quantizer scale.
+
+qmax (qpmax ) Maximum quantizer scale.
+
+qdiff (qpstep ) Maximum difference between quantizer scales.
+
+qblur (qblur ) Quantizer curve blur
+
+qcomp (qcomp ) Quantizer curve compression factor
+
+refs (ref ) Number of reference frames each P-frame can use. The range is from 0-16 .
+
+sc_threshold (scenecut ) Sets the threshold for the scene change detection.
+
+trellis (trellis ) Performs Trellis quantization to increase efficiency. Enabled by default.
+
+nr (nr ) me_range (merange ) Maximum range of the motion search in pixels.
+
+me_method (me ) Set motion estimation method. Possible values in the decreasing order
+of speed:
+
+
+‘dia (dia ) ’
+‘epzs (dia ) ’
+Diamond search with radius 1 (fastest). ‘epzs ’ is an alias for
+‘dia ’.
+
‘hex (hex ) ’
+Hexagonal search with radius 2.
+
‘umh (umh ) ’
+Uneven multi-hexagon search.
+
‘esa (esa ) ’
+Exhaustive search.
+
‘tesa (tesa ) ’
+Hadamard exhaustive search (slowest).
+
+
+subq (subme ) Sub-pixel motion estimation method.
+
+b_strategy (b-adapt ) Adaptive B-frame placement decision algorithm. Use only on first-pass.
+
+keyint_min (min-keyint ) Minimum GOP size.
+
+coder Set entropy encoder. Possible values:
+
+
+‘ac ’
+Enable CABAC.
+
+‘vlc ’
+Enable CAVLC and disable CABAC. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --no-cabac option.
+
+
+cmp Set full pixel motion estimation comparation algorithm. Possible values:
+
+
+‘chroma ’
+Enable chroma in motion estimation.
+
+‘sad ’
+Ignore chroma in motion estimation. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --no-chroma-me option.
+
+
+threads (threads ) Number of encoding threads.
+
+thread_type Set multithreading technique. Possible values:
+
+
+‘slice ’
+Slice-based multithreading. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --sliced-threads option.
+
‘frame ’
+Frame-based multithreading.
+
+
+flags Set encoding flags. It can be used to disable closed GOP and enable
+open GOP by setting it to -cgop. The result is similar to
+the behavior of x264’s --open-gop option.
+
+rc_init_occupancy (vbv-init ) preset (preset ) Set the encoding preset.
+
+tune (tune ) Set tuning of the encoding params.
+
+profile (profile ) Set profile restrictions.
+
+fastfirstpass Enable fast settings when encoding first pass, when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect of x264’s
+--slow-firstpass option.
+
+crf (crf ) Set the quality for constant quality mode.
+
+crf_max (crf-max ) In CRF mode, prevents VBV from lowering quality beyond this point.
+
+qp (qp ) Set constant quantization rate control method parameter.
+
+aq-mode (aq-mode ) Set AQ method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (0 ) ’
+Disabled.
+
+‘variance (1 ) ’
+Variance AQ (complexity mask).
+
+‘autovariance (2 ) ’
+Auto-variance AQ (experimental).
+
+
+aq-strength (aq-strength ) Set AQ strength, reduce blocking and blurring in flat and textured areas.
+
+psy Use psychovisual optimizations when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
+same effect as x264’s --no-psy option.
+
+psy-rd (psy-rd ) Set strength of psychovisual optimization, in
+psy-rd :psy-trellis format.
+
+rc-lookahead (rc-lookahead ) Set number of frames to look ahead for frametype and ratecontrol.
+
+weightb Enable weighted prediction for B-frames when set to 1. When set to 0,
+it has the same effect as x264’s --no-weightb option.
+
+weightp (weightp ) Set weighted prediction method for P-frames. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (0 ) ’
+Disabled
+
‘simple (1 ) ’
+Enable only weighted refs
+
‘smart (2 ) ’
+Enable both weighted refs and duplicates
+
+
+ssim (ssim ) Enable calculation and printing SSIM stats after the encoding.
+
+intra-refresh (intra-refresh ) Enable the use of Periodic Intra Refresh instead of IDR frames when set
+to 1.
+
+avcintra-class (class ) Configure the encoder to generate AVC-Intra.
+Valid values are 50,100 and 200
+
+bluray-compat (bluray-compat ) Configure the encoder to be compatible with the bluray standard.
+It is a shorthand for setting "bluray-compat=1 force-cfr=1".
+
+b-bias (b-bias ) Set the influence on how often B-frames are used.
+
+b-pyramid (b-pyramid ) Set method for keeping of some B-frames as references. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disabled.
+
‘strict (strict ) ’
+Strictly hierarchical pyramid.
+
‘normal (normal ) ’
+Non-strict (not Blu-ray compatible).
+
+
+mixed-refs Enable the use of one reference per partition, as opposed to one
+reference per macroblock when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
+same effect as x264’s --no-mixed-refs option.
+
+8x8dct Enable adaptive spatial transform (high profile 8x8 transform)
+when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the same effect as
+x264’s --no-8x8dct option.
+
+fast-pskip Enable early SKIP detection on P-frames when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect as x264’s
+--no-fast-pskip option.
+
+aud (aud ) Enable use of access unit delimiters when set to 1.
+
+mbtree Enable use macroblock tree ratecontrol when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect as x264’s
+--no-mbtree option.
+
+deblock (deblock ) Set loop filter parameters, in alpha :beta form.
+
+cplxblur (cplxblur ) Set fluctuations reduction in QP (before curve compression).
+
+partitions (partitions ) Set partitions to consider as a comma-separated list of. Possible
+values in the list:
+
+
+‘p8x8 ’
+8x8 P-frame partition.
+
‘p4x4 ’
+4x4 P-frame partition.
+
‘b8x8 ’
+4x4 B-frame partition.
+
‘i8x8 ’
+8x8 I-frame partition.
+
‘i4x4 ’
+4x4 I-frame partition.
+(Enabling ‘p4x4 ’ requires ‘p8x8 ’ to be enabled. Enabling
+‘i8x8 ’ requires adaptive spatial transform (8x8dct
+option) to be enabled.)
+
‘none (none ) ’
+Do not consider any partitions.
+
‘all (all ) ’
+Consider every partition.
+
+
+direct-pred (direct ) Set direct MV prediction mode. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disable MV prediction.
+
‘spatial (spatial ) ’
+Enable spatial predicting.
+
‘temporal (temporal ) ’
+Enable temporal predicting.
+
‘auto (auto ) ’
+Automatically decided.
+
+
+slice-max-size (slice-max-size ) Set the limit of the size of each slice in bytes. If not specified
+but RTP payload size (ps ) is specified, that is used.
+
+stats (stats ) Set the file name for multi-pass stats.
+
+nal-hrd (nal-hrd ) Set signal HRD information (requires vbv-bufsize to be set).
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disable HRD information signaling.
+
‘vbr (vbr ) ’
+Variable bit rate.
+
‘cbr (cbr ) ’
+Constant bit rate (not allowed in MP4 container).
+
+
+x264opts (N.A.) Set any x264 option, see x264 --fullhelp for a list.
+
+Argument is a list of key =value couples separated by
+":". In filter and psy-rd options that use ":" as a separator
+themselves, use "," instead. They accept it as well since long ago but this
+is kept undocumented for some reason.
+
+For example to specify libx264 encoding options with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.mpg -vcodec libx264 -x264opts keyint=123:min-keyint=20 -an out.mkv
+ x264-params (N.A.) Override the x264 configuration using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters.
+
+This option is functionally the same as the x264opts , but is
+duplicated for compatibility with the Libav fork.
+
+For example to specify libx264 encoding options with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v libx264 -x264-params level=30:bframes=0:weightp=0:\
+cabac=0:ref=1:vbv-maxrate=768:vbv-bufsize=2000:analyse=all:me=umh:\
+no-fast-pskip=1:subq=6:8x8dct=0:trellis=0 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Encoding ffpresets for common usages are provided so they can be used with the
+general presets system (e.g. passing the pre option).
+
+
+
18.5 libx265# TOC
+
+
x265 H.265/HEVC encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libx265 headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libx265 .
+
+
+
18.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+preset Set the x265 preset.
+
+tune Set the x265 tune parameter.
+
+x265-params Set x265 options using a list of key =value couples separated
+by ":". See x265 --help for a list of options.
+
+For example to specify libx265 encoding options with -x265-params :
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -c:v libx265 -x265-params crf=26:psy-rd=1 output.mp4
+
+
+
+
18.6 libxvid# TOC
+
+
Xvid MPEG-4 Part 2 encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libxvidcore headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libxvid --enable-gpl.
+
+
The native mpeg4 encoder supports the MPEG-4 Part 2 format, so
+users can encode to this format without this library.
+
+
+
18.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libxvid wrapper. Some of
+the following options are listed but are not documented, and
+correspond to shared codec options. See the Codec
+Options chapter for their documentation. The other shared options
+which are not listed have no effect for the libxvid encoder.
+
+
+b g qmin qmax mpeg_quant threads bf b_qfactor b_qoffset flags Set specific encoding flags. Possible values:
+
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock.
+
+‘aic ’
+Enable high quality AC prediction.
+
+‘gray ’
+Only encode grayscale.
+
+‘gmc ’
+Enable the use of global motion compensation (GMC).
+
+‘qpel ’
+Enable quarter-pixel motion compensation.
+
+‘cgop ’
+Enable closed GOP.
+
+‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
+
+
+trellis me_method Set motion estimation method. Possible values in decreasing order of
+speed and increasing order of quality:
+
+
+‘zero ’
+Use no motion estimation (default).
+
+‘phods ’
+‘x1 ’
+‘log ’
+Enable advanced diamond zonal search for 16x16 blocks and half-pixel
+refinement for 16x16 blocks. ‘x1 ’ and ‘log ’ are aliases for
+‘phods ’.
+
+‘epzs ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus advanced diamond zonal
+search for 8x8 blocks, half-pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, and motion
+estimation on chroma planes.
+
+‘full ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus extended 16x16 and 8x8
+blocks search.
+
+
+mbd Set macroblock decision algorithm. Possible values in the increasing
+order of quality:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Use macroblock comparing function algorithm (default).
+
+‘bits ’
+Enable rate distortion-based half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for
+16x16 blocks.
+
+‘rd ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus rate distortion-based
+half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, and rate
+distortion-based search using square pattern.
+
+
+lumi_aq Enable lumi masking adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
+(disabled).
+
+variance_aq Enable variance adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
+(disabled).
+
+When combined with lumi_aq , the resulting quality will not
+be better than any of the two specified individually. In other
+words, the resulting quality will be the worse one of the two
+effects.
+
+ssim Set structural similarity (SSIM) displaying method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘off ’
+Disable displaying of SSIM information.
+
+‘avg ’
+Output average SSIM at the end of encoding to stdout. The format of
+showing the average SSIM is:
+
+
+
+For users who are not familiar with C, %f means a float number, or
+a decimal (e.g. 0.939232).
+
+‘frame ’
+Output both per-frame SSIM data during encoding and average SSIM at
+the end of encoding to stdout. The format of per-frame information
+is:
+
+
+
SSIM: avg: %1.3f min: %1.3f max: %1.3f
+ For users who are not familiar with C, %1.3f means a float number
+rounded to 3 digits after the dot (e.g. 0.932).
+
+
+
+ssim_acc Set SSIM accuracy. Valid options are integers within the range of
+0-4, while 0 gives the most accurate result and 4 computes the
+fastest.
+
+
+
+
+
18.7 mpeg2# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 video encoder.
+
+
+
18.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+seq_disp_ext integer Specifies if the encoder should write a sequence_display_extension to the
+output.
+
+-1 auto Decide automatically to write it or not (this is the default) by checking if
+the data to be written is different from the default or unspecified values.
+
0 never Never write it.
+
1 always Always write it.
+
+
+
+
+
18.8 png# TOC
+
+
PNG image encoder.
+
+
+
18.8.1 Private options# TOC
+
+
+dpi integer Set physical density of pixels, in dots per inch, unset by default
+
dpm integer Set physical density of pixels, in dots per meter, unset by default
+
+
+
+
18.9 ProRes# TOC
+
+
Apple ProRes encoder.
+
+
FFmpeg contains 2 ProRes encoders, the prores-aw and prores-ks encoder.
+The used encoder can be chosen with the -vcodec option.
+
+
+
18.9.1 Private Options for prores-ks# TOC
+
+
+profile integer Select the ProRes profile to encode
+
+‘proxy ’
+‘lt ’
+‘standard ’
+‘hq ’
+‘4444 ’
+
+
+quant_mat integer Select quantization matrix.
+
+‘auto ’
+‘default ’
+‘proxy ’
+‘lt ’
+‘standard ’
+‘hq ’
+
+If set to auto , the matrix matching the profile will be picked.
+If not set, the matrix providing the highest quality, default , will be
+picked.
+
+bits_per_mb integer How many bits to allot for coding one macroblock. Different profiles use
+between 200 and 2400 bits per macroblock, the maximum is 8000.
+
+mbs_per_slice integer Number of macroblocks in each slice (1-8); the default value (8)
+should be good in almost all situations.
+
+vendor string Override the 4-byte vendor ID.
+A custom vendor ID like apl0 would claim the stream was produced by
+the Apple encoder.
+
+alpha_bits integer Specify number of bits for alpha component.
+Possible values are 0 , 8 and 16 .
+Use 0 to disable alpha plane coding.
+
+
+
+
+
18.9.2 Speed considerations# TOC
+
+
In the default mode of operation the encoder has to honor frame constraints
+(i.e. not produce frames with size bigger than requested) while still making
+output picture as good as possible.
+A frame containing a lot of small details is harder to compress and the encoder
+would spend more time searching for appropriate quantizers for each slice.
+
+
Setting a higher bits_per_mb limit will improve the speed.
+
+
For the fastest encoding speed set the qscale parameter (4 is the
+recommended value) and do not set a size constraint.
+
+
+
+
19 Subtitles Encoders# TOC
+
+
+
19.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec encodes the bitmap subtitle format that is used in DVDs.
+Typically they are stored in VOBSUB file pairs (*.idx + *.sub),
+and they can also be used in Matroska files.
+
+
+
19.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+even_rows_fix When set to 1, enable a work-around that makes the number of pixel rows
+even in all subtitles. This fixes a problem with some players that
+cut off the bottom row if the number is odd. The work-around just adds
+a fully transparent row if needed. The overhead is low, typically
+one byte per subtitle on average.
+
+By default, this work-around is disabled.
+
+
+
+
20 Bitstream Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported bitstream
+filters are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using
+the configure option --list-bsfs.
+
+
You can disable all the bitstream filters using the configure option
+--disable-bsfs, and selectively enable any bitstream filter using
+the option --enable-bsf=BSF, or you can disable a particular
+bitstream filter using the option --disable-bsf=BSF.
+
+
The option -bsfs of the ff* tools will display the list of
+all the supported bitstream filters included in your build.
+
+
The ff* tools have a -bsf option applied per stream, taking a
+comma-separated list of filters, whose parameters follow the filter
+name after a ’=’.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v filter1[=opt1=str1/opt2=str2][,filter2] OUTPUT
+
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available bitstream filters,
+with their parameters, if any.
+
+
+
20.1 aac_adtstoasc# TOC
+
+
Convert MPEG-2/4 AAC ADTS to MPEG-4 Audio Specific Configuration
+bitstream filter.
+
+
This filter creates an MPEG-4 AudioSpecificConfig from an MPEG-2/4
+ADTS header and removes the ADTS header.
+
+
This is required for example when copying an AAC stream from a raw
+ADTS AAC container to a FLV or a MOV/MP4 file.
+
+
+
20.2 chomp# TOC
+
+
Remove zero padding at the end of a packet.
+
+
+
20.3 dump_extra# TOC
+
+
Add extradata to the beginning of the filtered packets.
+
+
The additional argument specifies which packets should be filtered.
+It accepts the values:
+
+‘a ’
+add extradata to all key packets, but only if local_header is
+set in the flags2 codec context field
+
+‘k ’
+add extradata to all key packets
+
+‘e ’
+add extradata to all packets
+
+
+
If not specified it is assumed ‘k ’.
+
+
For example the following ffmpeg command forces a global
+header (thus disabling individual packet headers) in the H.264 packets
+generated by the libx264 encoder, but corrects them by adding
+the header stored in extradata to the key packets:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -flags:v +global_header -c:v libx264 -bsf:v dump_extra out.ts
+
+
+
+
20.4 h264_mp4toannexb# TOC
+
+
Convert an H.264 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
+prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.264
+specification).
+
+
This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
+transport stream format ("mpegts").
+
+
For example to remux an MP4 file containing an H.264 stream to mpegts
+format with ffmpeg, you can use the command:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts
+
+
+
+
20.5 imxdump# TOC
+
+
Modifies the bitstream to fit in MOV and to be usable by the Final Cut
+Pro decoder. This filter only applies to the mpeg2video codec, and is
+likely not needed for Final Cut Pro 7 and newer with the appropriate
+-tag:v .
+
+
For example, to remux 30 MB/sec NTSC IMX to MOV:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mxf -c copy -bsf:v imxdump -tag:v mx3n output.mov
+
+
+
+
20.6 mjpeg2jpeg# TOC
+
+
Convert MJPEG/AVI1 packets to full JPEG/JFIF packets.
+
+
MJPEG is a video codec wherein each video frame is essentially a
+JPEG image. The individual frames can be extracted without loss,
+e.g. by
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i ../some_mjpeg.avi -c:v copy frames_%d.jpg
+
+
+
Unfortunately, these chunks are incomplete JPEG images, because
+they lack the DHT segment required for decoding. Quoting from
+http://www.digitalpreservation.gov/formats/fdd/fdd000063.shtml :
+
+
Avery Lee, writing in the rec.video.desktop newsgroup in 2001,
+commented that "MJPEG, or at least the MJPEG in AVIs having the
+MJPG fourcc, is restricted JPEG with a fixed – and *omitted* –
+Huffman table. The JPEG must be YCbCr colorspace, it must be 4:2:2,
+and it must use basic Huffman encoding, not arithmetic or
+progressive. . . . You can indeed extract the MJPEG frames and
+decode them with a regular JPEG decoder, but you have to prepend
+the DHT segment to them, or else the decoder won’t have any idea
+how to decompress the data. The exact table necessary is given in
+the OpenDML spec."
+
+
This bitstream filter patches the header of frames extracted from an MJPEG
+stream (carrying the AVI1 header ID and lacking a DHT segment) to
+produce fully qualified JPEG images.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mjpeg-movie.avi -c:v copy -bsf:v mjpeg2jpeg frame_%d.jpg
+exiftran -i -9 frame*.jpg
+ffmpeg -i frame_%d.jpg -c:v copy rotated.avi
+
+
+
+
20.7 mjpega_dump_header# TOC
+
+
+
20.8 movsub# TOC
+
+
+
20.9 mp3_header_decompress# TOC
+
+
+
20.10 noise# TOC
+
+
Damages the contents of packets without damaging the container. Can be
+used for fuzzing or testing error resilience/concealment.
+
+
Parameters:
+A numeral string, whose value is related to how often output bytes will
+be modified. Therefore, values below or equal to 0 are forbidden, and
+the lower the more frequent bytes will be modified, with 1 meaning
+every byte is modified.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf noise[=1] output.mkv
+
+
applies the modification to every byte.
+
+
+
20.11 remove_extra# TOC
+
+
+
21 Format Options# TOC
+
+
The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
+can be set on all the muxers and demuxers. In addition each muxer or
+demuxer may support so-called private options, which are specific for
+that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+avioflags flags (input/output ) Possible values:
+
+‘direct ’
+Reduce buffering.
+
+
+probesize integer (input ) Set probing size in bytes, i.e. the size of the data to analyze to get
+stream information. A higher value will allow to detect more
+information in case it is dispersed into the stream, but will increase
+latency. Must be an integer not lesser than 32. It is 5000000 by default.
+
+packetsize integer (output ) Set packet size.
+
+fflags flags (input/output ) Set format flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ignidx ’
+Ignore index.
+
‘genpts ’
+Generate PTS.
+
‘nofillin ’
+Do not fill in missing values that can be exactly calculated.
+
‘noparse ’
+Disable AVParsers, this needs +nofillin too.
+
‘igndts ’
+Ignore DTS.
+
‘discardcorrupt ’
+Discard corrupted frames.
+
‘sortdts ’
+Try to interleave output packets by DTS.
+
‘keepside ’
+Do not merge side data.
+
‘latm ’
+Enable RTP MP4A-LATM payload.
+
‘nobuffer ’
+Reduce the latency introduced by optional buffering
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data.
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
+
+seek2any integer (input ) Allow seeking to non-keyframes on demuxer level when supported if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+analyzeduration integer (input ) Specify how many microseconds are analyzed to probe the input. A
+higher value will allow to detect more accurate information, but will
+increase latency. It defaults to 5,000,000 microseconds = 5 seconds.
+
+cryptokey hexadecimal string (input ) Set decryption key.
+
+indexmem integer (input ) Set max memory used for timestamp index (per stream).
+
+rtbufsize integer (input ) Set max memory used for buffering real-time frames.
+
+fdebug flags (input/output ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ts ’
+
+
+max_delay integer (input/output ) Set maximum muxing or demuxing delay in microseconds.
+
+fpsprobesize integer (input ) Set number of frames used to probe fps.
+
+audio_preload integer (output ) Set microseconds by which audio packets should be interleaved earlier.
+
+chunk_duration integer (output ) Set microseconds for each chunk.
+
+chunk_size integer (output ) Set size in bytes for each chunk.
+
+err_detect, f_err_detect flags (input ) Set error detection flags. f_err_detect is deprecated and
+should be used only via the ffmpeg tool.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+Verify embedded CRCs.
+
‘bitstream ’
+Detect bitstream specification deviations.
+
‘buffer ’
+Detect improper bitstream length.
+
‘explode ’
+Abort decoding on minor error detection.
+
‘careful ’
+Consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the
+wild as errors.
+
‘compliant ’
+Consider all spec non compliancies as errors.
+
‘aggressive ’
+Consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error.
+
+
+use_wallclock_as_timestamps integer (input ) Use wallclock as timestamps.
+
+avoid_negative_ts integer (output )
+Possible values:
+
+‘make_non_negative ’
+Shift timestamps to make them non-negative.
+Also note that this affects only leading negative timestamps, and not
+non-monotonic negative timestamps.
+
‘make_zero ’
+Shift timestamps so that the first timestamp is 0.
+
‘auto (default) ’
+Enables shifting when required by the target format.
+
‘disabled ’
+Disables shifting of timestamp.
+
+
+When shifting is enabled, all output timestamps are shifted by the
+same amount. Audio, video, and subtitles desynching and relative
+timestamp differences are preserved compared to how they would have
+been without shifting.
+
+
+skip_initial_bytes integer (input ) Set number of bytes to skip before reading header and frames if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+correct_ts_overflow integer (input ) Correct single timestamp overflows if set to 1. Default is 1.
+
+flush_packets integer (output ) Flush the underlying I/O stream after each packet. Default 1 enables it, and
+has the effect of reducing the latency; 0 disables it and may slightly
+increase performance in some cases.
+
+output_ts_offset offset (output ) Set the output time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added by the muxer to the output timestamps.
+
+Specifying a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are
+delayed bt the time duration specified in offset . Default value
+is 0 (meaning that no offset is applied).
+
+format_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed demuxers. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
21.1 Format stream specifiers# TOC
+
+
Format stream specifiers allow selection of one or more streams that
+match specific properties.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index.
+
+stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio,
+’s’ for subtitle, ’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If
+stream_index is given, then it matches the stream number
+stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all streams of
+this type.
+
+p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number
+stream_index in the program with the id
+program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the program.
+
+#stream_id Matches the stream by a format-specific ID.
+
+
+
The exact semantics of stream specifiers is defined by the
+avformat_match_stream_specifier() function declared in the
+libavformat/avformat.h header.
+
+
+
22 Demuxers# TOC
+
+
Demuxers are configured elements in FFmpeg that can read the
+multimedia streams from a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported demuxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option --list-demuxers.
+
+
You can disable all the demuxers using the configure option
+--disable-demuxers, and selectively enable a single demuxer with
+the option --enable-demuxer=DEMUXER , or disable it
+with the option --disable-demuxer=DEMUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled demuxers.
+
+
The description of some of the currently available demuxers follows.
+
+
+
22.1 applehttp# TOC
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer presents all AVStreams from all variant streams.
+The id field is set to the bitrate variant index number. By setting
+the discard flags on AVStreams (by pressing ’a’ or ’v’ in ffplay),
+the caller can decide which variant streams to actually receive.
+The total bitrate of the variant that the stream belongs to is
+available in a metadata key named "variant_bitrate".
+
+
+
22.2 apng# TOC
+
+
Animated Portable Network Graphics demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux APNG files.
+All headers, but the PNG signature, up to (but not including) the first
+fcTL chunk are transmitted as extradata.
+Frames are then split as being all the chunks between two fcTL ones, or
+between the last fcTL and IEND chunks.
+
+
+-ignore_loop bool Ignore the loop variable in the file if set.
+
-max_fps int Maximum framerate in frames per second (0 for no limit).
+
-default_fps int Default framerate in frames per second when none is specified in the file
+(0 meaning as fast as possible).
+
+
+
+
22.3 asf# TOC
+
+
Advanced Systems Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux ASF files and MMS network streams.
+
+
+-no_resync_search bool Do not try to resynchronize by looking for a certain optional start code.
+
+
+
+
22.4 concat# TOC
+
+
Virtual concatenation script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads a list of files and other directives from a text file and
+demuxes them one after the other, as if all their packet had been muxed
+together.
+
+
The timestamps in the files are adjusted so that the first file starts at 0
+and each next file starts where the previous one finishes. Note that it is
+done globally and may cause gaps if all streams do not have exactly the same
+length.
+
+
All files must have the same streams (same codecs, same time base, etc.).
+
+
The duration of each file is used to adjust the timestamps of the next file:
+if the duration is incorrect (because it was computed using the bit-rate or
+because the file is truncated, for example), it can cause artifacts. The
+duration directive can be used to override the duration stored in
+each file.
+
+
+
22.4.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
The script is a text file in extended-ASCII, with one directive per line.
+Empty lines, leading spaces and lines starting with ’#’ are ignored. The
+following directive is recognized:
+
+
+file path Path to a file to read; special characters and spaces must be escaped with
+backslash or single quotes.
+
+All subsequent file-related directives apply to that file.
+
+ffconcat version 1.0Identify the script type and version. It also sets the safe option
+to 1 if it was to its default -1.
+
+To make FFmpeg recognize the format automatically, this directive must
+appears exactly as is (no extra space or byte-order-mark) on the very first
+line of the script.
+
+duration dur Duration of the file. This information can be specified from the file;
+specifying it here may be more efficient or help if the information from the
+file is not available or accurate.
+
+If the duration is set for all files, then it is possible to seek in the
+whole concatenated video.
+
+streamIntroduce a stream in the virtual file.
+All subsequent stream-related directives apply to the last introduced
+stream.
+Some streams properties must be set in order to allow identifying the
+matching streams in the subfiles.
+If no streams are defined in the script, the streams from the first file are
+copied.
+
+exact_stream_id id Set the id of the stream.
+If this directive is given, the string with the corresponding id in the
+subfiles will be used.
+This is especially useful for MPEG-PS (VOB) files, where the order of the
+streams is not reliable.
+
+
+
+
+
22.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+
+safe If set to 1, reject unsafe file paths. A file path is considered safe if it
+does not contain a protocol specification and is relative and all components
+only contain characters from the portable character set (letters, digits,
+period, underscore and hyphen) and have no period at the beginning of a
+component.
+
+If set to 0, any file name is accepted.
+
+The default is -1, it is equivalent to 1 if the format was automatically
+probed and 0 otherwise.
+
+auto_convert If set to 1, try to perform automatic conversions on packet data to make the
+streams concatenable.
+
+Currently, the only conversion is adding the h264_mp4toannexb bitstream
+filter to H.264 streams in MP4 format. This is necessary in particular if
+there are resolution changes.
+
+
+
+
+
22.5 flv# TOC
+
+
Adobe Flash Video Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux FLV files and RTMP network streams.
+
+
+-flv_metadata bool Allocate the streams according to the onMetaData array content.
+
+
+
+
22.6 libgme# TOC
+
+
The Game Music Emu library is a collection of video game music file emulators.
+
+
See http://code.google.com/p/game-music-emu/ for more information.
+
+
Some files have multiple tracks. The demuxer will pick the first track by
+default. The track_index option can be used to select a different
+track. Track indexes start at 0. The demuxer exports the number of tracks as
+tracks meta data entry.
+
+
For very large files, the max_size option may have to be adjusted.
+
+
+
22.7 libquvi# TOC
+
+
Play media from Internet services using the quvi project.
+
+
The demuxer accepts a format option to request a specific quality. It
+is by default set to best .
+
+
See http://quvi.sourceforge.net/ for more information.
+
+
FFmpeg needs to be built with --enable-libquvi for this demuxer to be
+enabled.
+
+
+
22.8 gif# TOC
+
+
Animated GIF demuxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+min_delay Set the minimum valid delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 2.
+
+default_delay Set the default delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 10.
+
+ignore_loop GIF files can contain information to loop a certain number of times (or
+infinitely). If ignore_loop is set to 1, then the loop setting
+from the input will be ignored and looping will not occur. If set to 0,
+then looping will occur and will cycle the number of times according to
+the GIF. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, with the overlay filter, place an infinitely looping GIF
+over another video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -ignore_loop 0 -i input.gif -filter_complex overlay=shortest=1 out.mkv
+
+
+
Note that in the above example the shortest option for overlay filter is
+used to end the output video at the length of the shortest input file,
+which in this case is input.mp4 as the GIF in this example loops
+infinitely.
+
+
+
22.9 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads from a list of image files specified by a pattern.
+The syntax and meaning of the pattern is specified by the
+option pattern_type .
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the images contained in the files.
+
+
The size, the pixel format, and the format of each image must be the
+same for all the files in the sequence.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set the frame rate for the video stream. It defaults to 25.
+
loop If set to 1, loop over the input. Default value is 0.
+
pattern_type Select the pattern type used to interpret the provided filename.
+
+pattern_type accepts one of the following values.
+
+sequence Select a sequence pattern type, used to specify a sequence of files
+indexed by sequential numbers.
+
+A sequence pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", which
+specifies the position of the characters representing a sequential
+number in each filename matched by the pattern. If the form
+"%d0N d" is used, the string representing the number in each
+filename is 0-padded and N is the total number of 0-padded
+digits representing the number. The literal character ’%’ can be
+specified in the pattern with the string "%%".
+
+If the sequence pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified by the pattern must contain a number
+inclusively contained between start_number and
+start_number +start_number_range -1, and all the following
+numbers must be sequential.
+
+For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will match a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.; the pattern "i%%m%%g-%d.jpg" will match a
+sequence of filenames of the form i%m%g-1.jpg ,
+i%m%g-2.jpg , ..., i%m%g-10.jpg , etc.
+
+Note that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to convert a single image file
+img.jpeg you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i img.jpeg img.png
+ glob Select a glob wildcard pattern type.
+
+The pattern is interpreted like a glob() pattern. This is only
+selectable if libavformat was compiled with globbing support.
+
+glob_sequence (deprecated, will be removed) Select a mixed glob wildcard/sequence pattern.
+
+If your version of libavformat was compiled with globbing support, and
+the provided pattern contains at least one glob meta character among
+%*?[]{} that is preceded by an unescaped "%", the pattern is
+interpreted like a glob() pattern, otherwise it is interpreted
+like a sequence pattern.
+
+All glob special characters %*?[]{} must be prefixed
+with "%". To escape a literal "%" you shall use "%%".
+
+For example the pattern foo-%*.jpeg will match all the
+filenames prefixed by "foo-" and terminating with ".jpeg", and
+foo-%?%?%?.jpeg will match all the filenames prefixed with
+"foo-", followed by a sequence of three characters, and terminating
+with ".jpeg".
+
+This pattern type is deprecated in favor of glob and
+sequence .
+
+
+Default value is glob_sequence .
+
pixel_format Set the pixel format of the images to read. If not specified the pixel
+format is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
start_number Set the index of the file matched by the image file pattern to start
+to read from. Default value is 0.
+
start_number_range Set the index interval range to check when looking for the first image
+file in the sequence, starting from start_number . Default value
+is 5.
+
ts_from_file If set to 1, will set frame timestamp to modification time of image file. Note
+that monotonity of timestamps is not provided: images go in the same order as
+without this option. Default value is 0.
+If set to 2, will set frame timestamp to the modification time of the image file in
+nanosecond precision.
+
video_size Set the video size of the images to read. If not specified the video
+size is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
+
+
+
22.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg for creating a video from the images in the file
+sequence img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ..., assuming an
+input frame rate of 10 frames per second:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ As above, but start by reading from a file with index 100 in the sequence:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -start_number 100 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ Read images matching the "*.png" glob pattern , that is all the files
+terminating with the ".png" suffix:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -pattern_type glob -i "*.png" out.mkv
+
+
+
+
22.10 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 transport stream demuxer.
+
+
+fix_teletext_pts Overrides teletext packet PTS and DTS values with the timestamps calculated
+from the PCR of the first program which the teletext stream is part of and is
+not discarded. Default value is 1, set this option to 0 if you want your
+teletext packet PTS and DTS values untouched.
+
+
+
+
22.11 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer allows one to read raw video data. Since there is no header
+specifying the assumed video parameters, the user must specify them
+in order to be able to decode the data correctly.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set input video frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+pixel_format Set the input video pixel format. Default value is yuv420p.
+
+video_size Set the input video size. This value must be specified explicitly.
+
+
+
For example to read a rawvideo file input.raw with
+ffplay, assuming a pixel format of rgb24, a video
+size of 320x240, and a frame rate of 10 images per second, use
+the command:
+
+
ffplay -f rawvideo -pixel_format rgb24 -video_size 320x240 -framerate 10 input.raw
+
+
+
+
22.12 sbg# TOC
+
+
SBaGen script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads the script language used by SBaGen
+http://uazu.net/sbagen/ to generate binaural beats sessions. A SBG
+script looks like that:
+
+
-SE
+a: 300-2.5/3 440+4.5/0
+b: 300-2.5/0 440+4.5/3
+off: -
+NOW == a
++0:07:00 == b
++0:14:00 == a
++0:21:00 == b
++0:30:00 off
+
+
+
A SBG script can mix absolute and relative timestamps. If the script uses
+either only absolute timestamps (including the script start time) or only
+relative ones, then its layout is fixed, and the conversion is
+straightforward. On the other hand, if the script mixes both kind of
+timestamps, then the NOW reference for relative timestamps will be
+taken from the current time of day at the time the script is read, and the
+script layout will be frozen according to that reference. That means that if
+the script is directly played, the actual times will match the absolute
+timestamps up to the sound controller’s clock accuracy, but if the user
+somehow pauses the playback or seeks, all times will be shifted accordingly.
+
+
+
22.13 tedcaptions# TOC
+
+
JSON captions used for TED Talks .
+
+
TED does not provide links to the captions, but they can be guessed from the
+page. The file tools/bookmarklets.html from the FFmpeg source tree
+contains a bookmarklet to expose them.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+start_time Set the start time of the TED talk, in milliseconds. The default is 15000
+(15s). It is used to sync the captions with the downloadable videos, because
+they include a 15s intro.
+
+
+
Example: convert the captions to a format most players understand:
+
+
ffmpeg -i http://www.ted.com/talks/subtitles/id/1/lang/en talk1-en.srt
+
+
+
+
23 Muxers# TOC
+
+
Muxers are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow writing
+multimedia streams to a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported muxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available muxers using the
+configure option --list-muxers.
+
+
You can disable all the muxers with the configure option
+--disable-muxers and selectively enable / disable single muxers
+with the options --enable-muxer=MUXER /
+--disable-muxer=MUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled muxers.
+
+
A description of some of the currently available muxers follows.
+
+
+
23.1 aiff# TOC
+
+
Audio Interchange File Format muxer.
+
+
+
23.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+write_id3v2 Enable ID3v2 tags writing when set to 1. Default is 0 (disabled).
+
+id3v2_version Select ID3v2 version to write. Currently only version 3 and 4 (aka.
+ID3v2.3 and ID3v2.4) are supported. The default is version 4.
+
+
+
+
+
23.2 crc# TOC
+
+
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC of all the input audio
+and video frames. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+CRC.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
+CRC=0xCRC , where CRC is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to
+8 digits containing the CRC for all the decoded input frames.
+
+
See also the framecrc muxer.
+
+
+
23.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the CRC of the input, and store it in the file
+out.crc :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc out.crc
+
+
+
You can print the CRC to stdout with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc -
+
+
+
You can select the output format of each frame with ffmpeg by
+specifying the audio and video codec and format. For example to
+compute the CRC of the input audio converted to PCM unsigned 8-bit
+and the input video converted to MPEG-2 video, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f crc -
+
+
+
+
23.3 framecrc# TOC
+
+
Per-packet CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC for each audio
+and video packet. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+CRC.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
+packet of the form:
+
+
stream_index , packet_dts , packet_pts , packet_duration , packet_size , 0xCRC
+
+
+
CRC is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to 8 digits containing the
+CRC of the packet.
+
+
+
23.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the CRC of the audio and video frames in
+INPUT , converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it
+in the file out.crc :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc out.crc
+
+
+
To print the information to stdout, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc -
+
+
+
With ffmpeg, you can select the output format to which the
+audio and video frames are encoded before computing the CRC for each
+packet by specifying the audio and video codec. For example, to
+compute the CRC of each decoded input audio frame converted to PCM
+unsigned 8-bit and of each decoded input video frame converted to
+MPEG-2 video, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f framecrc -
+
+
+
See also the crc muxer.
+
+
+
23.4 framemd5# TOC
+
+
Per-packet MD5 testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the MD5 hash for each audio
+and video packet. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+hash.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
+packet of the form:
+
+
stream_index , packet_dts , packet_pts , packet_duration , packet_size , MD5
+
+
+
MD5 is a hexadecimal number representing the computed MD5 hash
+for the packet.
+
+
+
23.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the MD5 of the audio and video frames in
+INPUT , converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it
+in the file out.md5 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 out.md5
+
+
+
To print the information to stdout, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 -
+
+
+
See also the md5 muxer.
+
+
+
23.5 gif# TOC
+
+
Animated GIF muxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+loop Set the number of times to loop the output. Use -1 for no loop, 0
+for looping indefinitely (default).
+
+final_delay Force the delay (expressed in centiseconds) after the last frame. Each frame
+ends with a delay until the next frame. The default is -1, which is a
+special value to tell the muxer to re-use the previous delay. In case of a
+loop, you might want to customize this value to mark a pause for instance.
+
+
+
For example, to encode a gif looping 10 times, with a 5 seconds delay between
+the loops:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -loop 10 -final_delay 500 out.gif
+
+
+
Note 1: if you wish to extract the frames in separate GIF files, you need to
+force the image2 muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v gif -f image2 "out%d.gif"
+
+
+
Note 2: the GIF format has a very small time base: the delay between two frames
+can not be smaller than one centi second.
+
+
+
23.6 hls# TOC
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming muxer that segments MPEG-TS according to
+the HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) specification.
+
+
It creates a playlist file, and one or more segment files. The output filename
+specifies the playlist filename.
+
+
By default, the muxer creates a file for each segment produced. These files
+have the same name as the playlist, followed by a sequential number and a
+.ts extension.
+
+
For example, to convert an input file with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.nut out.m3u8
+
+
This example will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and segment files:
+out0.ts , out1.ts , out2.ts , etc.
+
+
See also the segment muxer, which provides a more generic and
+flexible implementation of a segmenter, and can be used to perform HLS
+segmentation.
+
+
+
23.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+hls_time seconds Set the segment length in seconds. Default value is 2.
+
+hls_list_size size Set the maximum number of playlist entries. If set to 0 the list file
+will contain all the segments. Default value is 5.
+
+hls_ts_options options_list Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters. Values containing : special characters must be
+escaped.
+
+hls_wrap wrap Set the number after which the segment filename number (the number
+specified in each segment file) wraps. If set to 0 the number will be
+never wrapped. Default value is 0.
+
+This option is useful to avoid to fill the disk with many segment
+files, and limits the maximum number of segment files written to disk
+to wrap .
+
+start_number number Start the playlist sequence number from number . Default value is
+0.
+
+hls_allow_cache allowcache Explicitly set whether the client MAY (1) or MUST NOT (0) cache media segments.
+
+hls_base_url baseurl Append baseurl to every entry in the playlist.
+Useful to generate playlists with absolute paths.
+
+Note that the playlist sequence number must be unique for each segment
+and it is not to be confused with the segment filename sequence number
+which can be cyclic, for example if the wrap option is
+specified.
+
+hls_segment_filename filename Set the segment filename. Unless hls_flags single_file is set filename
+is used as a string format with the segment number:
+
+
ffmpeg in.nut -hls_segment_filename 'file%03d.ts' out.m3u8
+ This example will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and segment files:
+file000.ts , file001.ts , file002.ts , etc.
+
+hls_flags single_file If this flag is set, the muxer will store all segments in a single MPEG-TS
+file, and will use byte ranges in the playlist. HLS playlists generated with
+this way will have the version number 4.
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.nut -hls_flags single_file out.m3u8
+ Will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and a single segment file,
+out.ts .
+
+hls_flags delete_segments Segment files removed from the playlist are deleted after a period of time
+equal to the duration of the segment plus the duration of the playlist.
+
+
+
+
23.7 ico# TOC
+
+
ICO file muxer.
+
+
Microsoft’s icon file format (ICO) has some strict limitations that should be noted:
+
+
+ Size cannot exceed 256 pixels in any dimension
+
+ Only BMP and PNG images can be stored
+
+ If a BMP image is used, it must be one of the following pixel formats:
+
+
BMP Bit Depth FFmpeg Pixel Format
+1bit pal8
+4bit pal8
+8bit pal8
+16bit rgb555le
+24bit bgr24
+32bit bgra
+ If a BMP image is used, it must use the BITMAPINFOHEADER DIB header
+
+ If a PNG image is used, it must use the rgba pixel format
+
+
+
+
23.8 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file muxer.
+
+
The image file muxer writes video frames to image files.
+
+
The output filenames are specified by a pattern, which can be used to
+produce sequentially numbered series of files.
+The pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", this string
+specifies the position of the characters representing a numbering in
+the filenames. If the form "%0N d" is used, the string
+representing the number in each filename is 0-padded to N
+digits. The literal character ’%’ can be specified in the pattern with
+the string "%%".
+
+
If the pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified will contain the number 1, all the following
+numbers will be sequential.
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the image files to write.
+
+
For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will specify a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.
+The pattern "img%%-%d.jpg" will specify a sequence of filenames of the
+form img%-1.jpg , img%-2.jpg , ..., img%-10.jpg ,
+etc.
+
+
+
23.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following example shows how to use ffmpeg for creating a
+sequence of files img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ...,
+taking one image every second from the input video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync 1 -r 1 -f image2 'img-%03d.jpeg'
+
+
+
Note that with ffmpeg, if the format is not specified with the
+-f option and the output filename specifies an image file
+format, the image2 muxer is automatically selected, so the previous
+command can be written as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync 1 -r 1 'img-%03d.jpeg'
+
+
+
Note also that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to create a single image file
+img.jpeg from the input video you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -f image2 -frames:v 1 img.jpeg
+
+
+
The strftime option allows you to expand the filename with
+date and time information. Check the documentation of
+the strftime() function for the syntax.
+
+
For example to generate image files from the strftime()
+"%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S" pattern, the following ffmpeg command
+can be used:
+
+
ffmpeg -f v4l2 -r 1 -i /dev/video0 -f image2 -strftime 1 "%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S.jpg"
+
+
+
+
23.8.2 Options# TOC
+
+
+start_number Start the sequence from the specified number. Default value is 1. Must
+be a non-negative number.
+
+update If set to 1, the filename will always be interpreted as just a
+filename, not a pattern, and the corresponding file will be continuously
+overwritten with new images. Default value is 0.
+
+strftime If set to 1, expand the filename with date and time information from
+strftime(). Default value is 0.
+
+
+
The image muxer supports the .Y.U.V image file format. This format is
+special in that that each image frame consists of three files, for
+each of the YUV420P components. To read or write this image file format,
+specify the name of the ’.Y’ file. The muxer will automatically open the
+’.U’ and ’.V’ files as required.
+
+
+
23.9 matroska# TOC
+
+
Matroska container muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements the matroska and webm container specs.
+
+
+
23.9.1 Metadata# TOC
+
+
The recognized metadata settings in this muxer are:
+
+
+title Set title name provided to a single track.
+
+language Specify the language of the track in the Matroska languages form.
+
+The language can be either the 3 letters bibliographic ISO-639-2 (ISO
+639-2/B) form (like "fre" for French), or a language code mixed with a
+country code for specialities in languages (like "fre-ca" for Canadian
+French).
+
+stereo_mode Set stereo 3D video layout of two views in a single video track.
+
+The following values are recognized:
+
+‘mono ’
+video is not stereo
+
‘left_right ’
+Both views are arranged side by side, Left-eye view is on the left
+
‘bottom_top ’
+Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is at bottom
+
‘top_bottom ’
+Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is on top
+
‘checkerboard_rl ’
+Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Left-eye view being first
+
‘checkerboard_lr ’
+Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Right-eye view being first
+
‘row_interleaved_rl ’
+Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Right-eye view is first row
+
‘row_interleaved_lr ’
+Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Left-eye view is first row
+
‘col_interleaved_rl ’
+Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Right-eye view is first column
+
‘col_interleaved_lr ’
+Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Left-eye view is first column
+
‘anaglyph_cyan_red ’
+All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through red-cyan filters
+
‘right_left ’
+Both views are arranged side by side, Right-eye view is on the left
+
‘anaglyph_green_magenta ’
+All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through green-magenta filters
+
‘block_lr ’
+Both eyes laced in one Block, Left-eye view is first
+
‘block_rl ’
+Both eyes laced in one Block, Right-eye view is first
+
+
+
+
For example a 3D WebM clip can be created using the following command line:
+
+
ffmpeg -i sample_left_right_clip.mpg -an -c:v libvpx -metadata stereo_mode=left_right -y stereo_clip.webm
+
+
+
+
23.9.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+reserve_index_space By default, this muxer writes the index for seeking (called cues in Matroska
+terms) at the end of the file, because it cannot know in advance how much space
+to leave for the index at the beginning of the file. However for some use cases
+– e.g. streaming where seeking is possible but slow – it is useful to put the
+index at the beginning of the file.
+
+If this option is set to a non-zero value, the muxer will reserve a given amount
+of space in the file header and then try to write the cues there when the muxing
+finishes. If the available space does not suffice, muxing will fail. A safe size
+for most use cases should be about 50kB per hour of video.
+
+Note that cues are only written if the output is seekable and this option will
+have no effect if it is not.
+
+
+
+
23.10 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the MD5 hash of all the input audio
+and video frames. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+hash.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
+MD5=MD5 , where MD5 is a hexadecimal number representing
+the computed MD5 hash.
+
+
For example to compute the MD5 hash of the input converted to raw
+audio and video, and store it in the file out.md5 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 out.md5
+
+
+
You can print the MD5 to stdout with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 -
+
+
+
See also the framemd5 muxer.
+
+
+
23.11 mov, mp4, ismv# TOC
+
+
MOV/MP4/ISMV (Smooth Streaming) muxer.
+
+
The mov/mp4/ismv muxer supports fragmentation. Normally, a MOV/MP4
+file has all the metadata about all packets stored in one location
+(written at the end of the file, it can be moved to the start for
+better playback by adding faststart to the movflags , or
+using the qt-faststart tool). A fragmented
+file consists of a number of fragments, where packets and metadata
+about these packets are stored together. Writing a fragmented
+file has the advantage that the file is decodable even if the
+writing is interrupted (while a normal MOV/MP4 is undecodable if
+it is not properly finished), and it requires less memory when writing
+very long files (since writing normal MOV/MP4 files stores info about
+every single packet in memory until the file is closed). The downside
+is that it is less compatible with other applications.
+
+
+
23.11.1 Options# TOC
+
+
Fragmentation is enabled by setting one of the AVOptions that define
+how to cut the file into fragments:
+
+
+-moov_size bytes Reserves space for the moov atom at the beginning of the file instead of placing the
+moov atom at the end. If the space reserved is insufficient, muxing will fail.
+
-movflags frag_keyframe Start a new fragment at each video keyframe.
+
-frag_duration duration Create fragments that are duration microseconds long.
+
-frag_size size Create fragments that contain up to size bytes of payload data.
+
-movflags frag_custom Allow the caller to manually choose when to cut fragments, by
+calling av_write_frame(ctx, NULL) to write a fragment with
+the packets written so far. (This is only useful with other
+applications integrating libavformat, not from ffmpeg.)
+
-min_frag_duration duration Don’t create fragments that are shorter than duration microseconds long.
+
+
+
If more than one condition is specified, fragments are cut when
+one of the specified conditions is fulfilled. The exception to this is
+-min_frag_duration, which has to be fulfilled for any of the other
+conditions to apply.
+
+
Additionally, the way the output file is written can be adjusted
+through a few other options:
+
+
+-movflags empty_moov Write an initial moov atom directly at the start of the file, without
+describing any samples in it. Generally, an mdat/moov pair is written
+at the start of the file, as a normal MOV/MP4 file, containing only
+a short portion of the file. With this option set, there is no initial
+mdat atom, and the moov atom only describes the tracks but has
+a zero duration.
+
+This option is implicitly set when writing ismv (Smooth Streaming) files.
+
-movflags separate_moof Write a separate moof (movie fragment) atom for each track. Normally,
+packets for all tracks are written in a moof atom (which is slightly
+more efficient), but with this option set, the muxer writes one moof/mdat
+pair for each track, making it easier to separate tracks.
+
+This option is implicitly set when writing ismv (Smooth Streaming) files.
+
-movflags faststart Run a second pass moving the index (moov atom) to the beginning of the file.
+This operation can take a while, and will not work in various situations such
+as fragmented output, thus it is not enabled by default.
+
-movflags rtphint Add RTP hinting tracks to the output file.
+
-movflags disable_chpl Disable Nero chapter markers (chpl atom). Normally, both Nero chapters
+and a QuickTime chapter track are written to the file. With this option
+set, only the QuickTime chapter track will be written. Nero chapters can
+cause failures when the file is reprocessed with certain tagging programs, like
+mp3Tag 2.61a and iTunes 11.3, most likely other versions are affected as well.
+
-movflags omit_tfhd_offset Do not write any absolute base_data_offset in tfhd atoms. This avoids
+tying fragments to absolute byte positions in the file/streams.
+
-movflags default_base_moof Similarly to the omit_tfhd_offset, this flag avoids writing the
+absolute base_data_offset field in tfhd atoms, but does so by using
+the new default-base-is-moof flag instead. This flag is new from
+14496-12:2012. This may make the fragments easier to parse in certain
+circumstances (avoiding basing track fragment location calculations
+on the implicit end of the previous track fragment).
+
+
+
+
23.11.2 Example# TOC
+
+
Smooth Streaming content can be pushed in real time to a publishing
+point on IIS with this muxer. Example:
+
+
ffmpeg -re <normal input/transcoding options> -movflags isml+frag_keyframe -f ismv http://server/publishingpoint.isml/Streams(Encoder1)
+
+
+
+
23.12 mp3# TOC
+
+
The MP3 muxer writes a raw MP3 stream with the following optional features:
+
+ An ID3v2 metadata header at the beginning (enabled by default). Versions 2.3 and
+2.4 are supported, the id3v2_version private option controls which one is
+used (3 or 4). Setting id3v2_version to 0 disables the ID3v2 header
+completely.
+
+The muxer supports writing attached pictures (APIC frames) to the ID3v2 header.
+The pictures are supplied to the muxer in form of a video stream with a single
+packet. There can be any number of those streams, each will correspond to a
+single APIC frame. The stream metadata tags title and comment map
+to APIC description and picture type respectively. See
+http://id3.org/id3v2.4.0-frames for allowed picture types.
+
+Note that the APIC frames must be written at the beginning, so the muxer will
+buffer the audio frames until it gets all the pictures. It is therefore advised
+to provide the pictures as soon as possible to avoid excessive buffering.
+
+ A Xing/LAME frame right after the ID3v2 header (if present). It is enabled by
+default, but will be written only if the output is seekable. The
+write_xing private option can be used to disable it. The frame contains
+various information that may be useful to the decoder, like the audio duration
+or encoder delay.
+
+ A legacy ID3v1 tag at the end of the file (disabled by default). It may be
+enabled with the write_id3v1 private option, but as its capabilities are
+very limited, its usage is not recommended.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Write an mp3 with an ID3v2.3 header and an ID3v1 footer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -id3v2_version 3 -write_id3v1 1 out.mp3
+
+
+
To attach a picture to an mp3 file select both the audio and the picture stream
+with map:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp3 -i cover.png -c copy -map 0 -map 1
+-metadata:s:v title="Album cover" -metadata:s:v comment="Cover (Front)" out.mp3
+
+
+
Write a "clean" MP3 without any extra features:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -write_xing 0 -id3v2_version 0 out.mp3
+
+
+
+
23.13 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG transport stream muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements ISO 13818-1 and part of ETSI EN 300 468.
+
+
The recognized metadata settings in mpegts muxer are service_provider
+and service_name. If they are not set the default for
+service_provider is "FFmpeg" and the default for
+service_name is "Service01".
+
+
+
23.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The muxer options are:
+
+
+-mpegts_original_network_id number Set the original_network_id (default 0x0001). This is unique identifier
+of a network in DVB. Its main use is in the unique identification of a
+service through the path Original_Network_ID, Transport_Stream_ID.
+
-mpegts_transport_stream_id number Set the transport_stream_id (default 0x0001). This identifies a
+transponder in DVB.
+
-mpegts_service_id number Set the service_id (default 0x0001) also known as program in DVB.
+
-mpegts_pmt_start_pid number Set the first PID for PMT (default 0x1000, max 0x1f00).
+
-mpegts_start_pid number Set the first PID for data packets (default 0x0100, max 0x0f00).
+
-mpegts_m2ts_mode number Enable m2ts mode if set to 1. Default value is -1 which disables m2ts mode.
+
-muxrate number Set a constant muxrate (default VBR).
+
-pcr_period numer Override the default PCR retransmission time (default 20ms), ignored
+if variable muxrate is selected.
+
-pes_payload_size number Set minimum PES packet payload in bytes.
+
-mpegts_flags flags Set flags (see below).
+
-mpegts_copyts number Preserve original timestamps, if value is set to 1. Default value is -1, which
+results in shifting timestamps so that they start from 0.
+
-tables_version number Set PAT, PMT and SDT version (default 0, valid values are from 0 to 31, inclusively).
+This option allows updating stream structure so that standard consumer may
+detect the change. To do so, reopen output AVFormatContext (in case of API
+usage) or restart ffmpeg instance, cyclically changing tables_version value:
+
+
ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+...
+ffmpeg -i source3.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 31 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+...
+
+
+
Option mpegts_flags may take a set of such flags:
+
+
+resend_headers Reemit PAT/PMT before writing the next packet.
+
latm Use LATM packetization for AAC.
+
+
+
+
23.13.2 Example# TOC
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i file.mpg -c copy \
+ -mpegts_original_network_id 0x1122 \
+ -mpegts_transport_stream_id 0x3344 \
+ -mpegts_service_id 0x5566 \
+ -mpegts_pmt_start_pid 0x1500 \
+ -mpegts_start_pid 0x150 \
+ -metadata service_provider="Some provider" \
+ -metadata service_name="Some Channel" \
+ -y out.ts
+
+
+
+
23.14 null# TOC
+
+
Null muxer.
+
+
This muxer does not generate any output file, it is mainly useful for
+testing or benchmarking purposes.
+
+
For example to benchmark decoding with ffmpeg you can use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null out.null
+
+
+
Note that the above command does not read or write the out.null
+file, but specifying the output file is required by the ffmpeg
+syntax.
+
+
Alternatively you can write the command as:
+
+
ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null -
+
+
+
+
23.15 nut# TOC
+
+
+-syncpoints flags Change the syncpoint usage in nut:
+
+default use the normal low-overhead seeking aids.none do not use the syncpoints at all, reducing the overhead but making the stream non-seekable;Use of this option is not recommended, as the resulting files are very damage
+ sensitive and seeking is not possible. Also in general the overhead from
+ syncpoints is negligible. Note, -write_index 0 can be used to disable
+ all growing data tables, allowing to mux endless streams with limited memory
+ and without these disadvantages.
+
timestamped extend the syncpoint with a wallclock field.
+The none and timestamped flags are experimental.
+
-write_index bool Write index at the end, the default is to write an index.
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f_strict experimental -syncpoints none - | processor
+
+
+
+
23.16 ogg# TOC
+
+
Ogg container muxer.
+
+
+-page_duration duration Preferred page duration, in microseconds. The muxer will attempt to create
+pages that are approximately duration microseconds long. This allows the
+user to compromise between seek granularity and container overhead. The default
+is 1 second. A value of 0 will fill all segments, making pages as large as
+possible. A value of 1 will effectively use 1 packet-per-page in most
+situations, giving a small seek granularity at the cost of additional container
+overhead.
+
+
+
+
23.17 segment, stream_segment, ssegment# TOC
+
+
Basic stream segmenter.
+
+
This muxer outputs streams to a number of separate files of nearly
+fixed duration. Output filename pattern can be set in a fashion similar to
+image2 .
+
+
stream_segment is a variant of the muxer used to write to
+streaming output formats, i.e. which do not require global headers,
+and is recommended for outputting e.g. to MPEG transport stream segments.
+ssegment is a shorter alias for stream_segment.
+
+
Every segment starts with a keyframe of the selected reference stream,
+which is set through the reference_stream option.
+
+
Note that if you want accurate splitting for a video file, you need to
+make the input key frames correspond to the exact splitting times
+expected by the segmenter, or the segment muxer will start the new
+segment with the key frame found next after the specified start
+time.
+
+
The segment muxer works best with a single constant frame rate video.
+
+
Optionally it can generate a list of the created segments, by setting
+the option segment_list . The list type is specified by the
+segment_list_type option. The entry filenames in the segment
+list are set by default to the basename of the corresponding segment
+files.
+
+
See also the hls muxer, which provides a more specific
+implementation for HLS segmentation.
+
+
+
23.17.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The segment muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+reference_stream specifier Set the reference stream, as specified by the string specifier .
+If specifier is set to auto, the reference is chosen
+automatically. Otherwise it must be a stream specifier (see the “Stream
+specifiers” chapter in the ffmpeg manual) which specifies the
+reference stream. The default value is auto.
+
+segment_format format Override the inner container format, by default it is guessed by the filename
+extension.
+
+segment_format_options options_list Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters. Values containing the : special character must be
+escaped.
+
+segment_list name Generate also a listfile named name . If not specified no
+listfile is generated.
+
+segment_list_flags flags Set flags affecting the segment list generation.
+
+It currently supports the following flags:
+
+‘cache ’
+Allow caching (only affects M3U8 list files).
+
+‘live ’
+Allow live-friendly file generation.
+
+
+segment_list_type type Select the listing format.
+
+flat use a simple flat list of entries.hls use a m3u8-like structure.
+
+segment_list_size size Update the list file so that it contains at most size
+segments. If 0 the list file will contain all the segments. Default
+value is 0.
+
+segment_list_entry_prefix prefix Prepend prefix to each entry. Useful to generate absolute paths.
+By default no prefix is applied.
+
+The following values are recognized:
+
+‘flat ’
+Generate a flat list for the created segments, one segment per line.
+
+‘csv, ext ’
+Generate a list for the created segments, one segment per line,
+each line matching the format (comma-separated values):
+
+
segment_filename ,segment_start_time ,segment_end_time
+segment_filename is the name of the output file generated by the
+muxer according to the provided pattern. CSV escaping (according to
+RFC4180) is applied if required.
+
+segment_start_time and segment_end_time specify
+the segment start and end time expressed in seconds.
+
+A list file with the suffix ".csv" or ".ext" will
+auto-select this format.
+
+‘ext ’ is deprecated in favor or ‘csv ’.
+
+‘ffconcat ’
+Generate an ffconcat file for the created segments. The resulting file
+can be read using the FFmpeg concat demuxer.
+
+A list file with the suffix ".ffcat" or ".ffconcat" will
+auto-select this format.
+
+‘m3u8 ’
+Generate an extended M3U8 file, version 3, compliant with
+http://tools.ietf.org/id/draft-pantos-http-live-streaming .
+
+A list file with the suffix ".m3u8" will auto-select this format.
+
+
+If not specified the type is guessed from the list file name suffix.
+
+segment_time time Set segment duration to time , the value must be a duration
+specification. Default value is "2". See also the
+segment_times option.
+
+Note that splitting may not be accurate, unless you force the
+reference stream key-frames at the given time. See the introductory
+notice and the examples below.
+
+segment_atclocktime 1|0 If set to "1" split at regular clock time intervals starting from 00:00
+o’clock. The time value specified in segment_time is
+used for setting the length of the splitting interval.
+
+For example with segment_time set to "900" this makes it possible
+to create files at 12:00 o’clock, 12:15, 12:30, etc.
+
+Default value is "0".
+
+segment_time_delta delta Specify the accuracy time when selecting the start time for a
+segment, expressed as a duration specification. Default value is "0".
+
+When delta is specified a key-frame will start a new segment if its
+PTS satisfies the relation:
+
+
PTS >= start_time - time_delta
+ This option is useful when splitting video content, which is always
+split at GOP boundaries, in case a key frame is found just before the
+specified split time.
+
+In particular may be used in combination with the ffmpeg option
+force_key_frames . The key frame times specified by
+force_key_frames may not be set accurately because of rounding
+issues, with the consequence that a key frame time may result set just
+before the specified time. For constant frame rate videos a value of
+1/(2*frame_rate ) should address the worst case mismatch between
+the specified time and the time set by force_key_frames .
+
+segment_times times Specify a list of split points. times contains a list of comma
+separated duration specifications, in increasing order. See also
+the segment_time option.
+
+segment_frames frames Specify a list of split video frame numbers. frames contains a
+list of comma separated integer numbers, in increasing order.
+
+This option specifies to start a new segment whenever a reference
+stream key frame is found and the sequential number (starting from 0)
+of the frame is greater or equal to the next value in the list.
+
+segment_wrap limit Wrap around segment index once it reaches limit .
+
+segment_start_number number Set the sequence number of the first segment. Defaults to 0.
+
+reset_timestamps 1|0 Reset timestamps at the begin of each segment, so that each segment
+will start with near-zero timestamps. It is meant to ease the playback
+of the generated segments. May not work with some combinations of
+muxers/codecs. It is set to 0 by default.
+
+initial_offset offset Specify timestamp offset to apply to the output packet timestamps. The
+argument must be a time duration specification, and defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
23.17.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
23.18 smoothstreaming# TOC
+
+
Smooth Streaming muxer generates a set of files (Manifest, chunks) suitable for serving with conventional web server.
+
+
+window_size Specify the number of fragments kept in the manifest. Default 0 (keep all).
+
+extra_window_size Specify the number of fragments kept outside of the manifest before removing from disk. Default 5.
+
+lookahead_count Specify the number of lookahead fragments. Default 2.
+
+min_frag_duration Specify the minimum fragment duration (in microseconds). Default 5000000.
+
+remove_at_exit Specify whether to remove all fragments when finished. Default 0 (do not remove).
+
+
+
+
+
23.19 tee# TOC
+
+
The tee muxer can be used to write the same data to several files or any
+other kind of muxer. It can be used, for example, to both stream a video to
+the network and save it to disk at the same time.
+
+
It is different from specifying several outputs to the ffmpeg
+command-line tool because the audio and video data will be encoded only once
+with the tee muxer; encoding can be a very expensive process. It is not
+useful when using the libavformat API directly because it is then possible
+to feed the same packets to several muxers directly.
+
+
The slave outputs are specified in the file name given to the muxer,
+separated by ’|’. If any of the slave name contains the ’|’ separator,
+leading or trailing spaces or any special character, it must be
+escaped (see (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual ).
+
+
Muxer options can be specified for each slave by prepending them as a list of
+key =value pairs separated by ’:’, between square brackets. If
+the options values contain a special character or the ’:’ separator, they
+must be escaped; note that this is a second level escaping.
+
+
The following special options are also recognized:
+
+f Specify the format name. Useful if it cannot be guessed from the
+output name suffix.
+
+bsfs[/spec ] Specify a list of bitstream filters to apply to the specified
+output.
+
+It is possible to specify to which streams a given bitstream filter
+applies, by appending a stream specifier to the option separated by
+/. spec must be a stream specifier (see Format stream specifiers ). If the stream specifier is not specified, the
+bitstream filters will be applied to all streams in the output.
+
+Several bitstream filters can be specified, separated by ",".
+
+select Select the streams that should be mapped to the slave output,
+specified by a stream specifier. If not specified, this defaults to
+all the input streams.
+
+
+
+
23.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Encode something and both archive it in a WebM file and stream it
+as MPEG-TS over UDP (the streams need to be explicitly mapped):
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -c:v libx264 -c:a mp2 -f tee -map 0:v -map 0:a
+ "archive-20121107.mkv|[f=mpegts]udp://10.0.1.255:1234/"
+ Use ffmpeg to encode the input, and send the output
+to three different destinations. The dump_extra bitstream
+filter is used to add extradata information to all the output video
+keyframes packets, as requested by the MPEG-TS format. The select
+option is applied to out.aac in order to make it contain only
+audio packets.
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac -strict experimental
+ -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=a]out.aac"
+ As below, but select only stream a:1 for the audio output. Note
+that a second level escaping must be performed, as ":" is a special
+character used to separate options.
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac -strict experimental
+ -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=\'a:1\']out.aac"
+
+
+
Note: some codecs may need different options depending on the output format;
+the auto-detection of this can not work with the tee muxer. The main example
+is the global_header flag.
+
+
+
23.20 webm_dash_manifest# TOC
+
+
WebM DASH Manifest muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements the WebM DASH Manifest specification to generate the DASH manifest XML.
+
+
+
23.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+adaptation_sets This option has the following syntax: "id=x,streams=a,b,c id=y,streams=d,e" where x and y are the
+unique identifiers of the adaptation sets and a,b,c,d and e are the indices of the corresponding
+audio and video streams. Any number of adaptation sets can be added using this option.
+
+
+
+
23.20.2 Example# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg -f webm_dash_manifest -i video1.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i video2.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio1.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio2.webm \
+ -map 0 -map 1 -map 2 -map 3 \
+ -c copy \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest \
+ -adaptation_sets "id=0,streams=0,1 id=1,streams=2,3" \
+ manifest.xml
+
+
+
+
24 Metadata# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is able to dump metadata from media files into a simple UTF-8-encoded
+INI-like text file and then load it back using the metadata muxer/demuxer.
+
+
The file format is as follows:
+
+ A file consists of a header and a number of metadata tags divided into sections,
+each on its own line.
+
+ The header is a ’;FFMETADATA’ string, followed by a version number (now 1).
+
+ Metadata tags are of the form ’key=value’
+
+ Immediately after header follows global metadata
+
+ After global metadata there may be sections with per-stream/per-chapter
+metadata.
+
+ A section starts with the section name in uppercase (i.e. STREAM or CHAPTER) in
+brackets (’[’, ’]’) and ends with next section or end of file.
+
+ At the beginning of a chapter section there may be an optional timebase to be
+used for start/end values. It must be in form ’TIMEBASE=num/den’, where num and
+den are integers. If the timebase is missing then start/end times are assumed to
+be in milliseconds.
+Next a chapter section must contain chapter start and end times in form
+’START=num’, ’END=num’, where num is a positive integer.
+
+ Empty lines and lines starting with ’;’ or ’#’ are ignored.
+
+ Metadata keys or values containing special characters (’=’, ’;’, ’#’, ’\’ and a
+newline) must be escaped with a backslash ’\’.
+
+ Note that whitespace in metadata (e.g. foo = bar) is considered to be a part of
+the tag (in the example above key is ’foo ’, value is ’ bar’).
+
+
+
A ffmetadata file might look like this:
+
+
;FFMETADATA1
+title=bike\\shed
+;this is a comment
+artist=FFmpeg troll team
+
+[CHAPTER]
+TIMEBASE=1/1000
+START=0
+#chapter ends at 0:01:00
+END=60000
+title=chapter \#1
+[STREAM]
+title=multi\
+line
+
+
+
By using the ffmetadata muxer and demuxer it is possible to extract
+metadata from an input file to an ffmetadata file, and then transcode
+the file into an output file with the edited ffmetadata file.
+
+
Extracting an ffmetadata file with ffmpeg goes as follows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata FFMETADATAFILE
+
+
+
Reinserting edited metadata information from the FFMETADATAFILE file can
+be done as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -i FFMETADATAFILE -map_metadata 1 -codec copy OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
25 Protocols# TOC
+
+
Protocols are configured elements in FFmpeg that enable access to
+resources that require specific protocols.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported protocols are
+enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-protocols".
+
+
You can disable all the protocols using the configure option
+"–disable-protocols", and selectively enable a protocol using the
+option "–enable-protocol=PROTOCOL ", or you can disable a
+particular protocol using the option
+"–disable-protocol=PROTOCOL ".
+
+
The option "-protocols" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported protocols.
+
+
A description of the currently available protocols follows.
+
+
+
25.1 bluray# TOC
+
+
Read BluRay playlist.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+angle BluRay angle
+
+chapter Start chapter (1...N)
+
+playlist Playlist to read (BDMV/PLAYLIST/?????.mpls)
+
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Read longest playlist from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray:
+
+
+
Read angle 2 of playlist 4 from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray, start from chapter 2:
+
+
-playlist 4 -angle 2 -chapter 2 bluray:/mnt/bluray
+
+
+
+
25.2 cache# TOC
+
+
Caching wrapper for input stream.
+
+
Cache the input stream to temporary file. It brings seeking capability to live streams.
+
+
+
+
+
25.3 concat# TOC
+
+
Physical concatenation protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and seek from many resource in sequence as if they were
+a unique resource.
+
+
A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
+
+
concat:URL1 |URL2 |...|URLN
+
+
+
where URL1 , URL2 , ..., URLN are the urls of the
+resource to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
+protocol.
+
+
For example to read a sequence of files split1.mpeg ,
+split2.mpeg , split3.mpeg with ffplay use the
+command:
+
+
ffplay concat:split1.mpeg\|split2.mpeg\|split3.mpeg
+
+
+
Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for
+many shells.
+
+
+
25.4 crypto# TOC
+
+
AES-encrypted stream reading protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+key Set the AES decryption key binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+iv Set the AES decryption initialization vector binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+
+
Accepted URL formats:
+
+
crypto:URL
+crypto+URL
+
+
+
+
25.5 data# TOC
+
+
Data in-line in the URI. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_URI_scheme .
+
+
For example, to convert a GIF file given inline with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i "data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODdhCAAIAMIEAAAAAAAA//8AAP//AP///////////////ywAAAAACAAIAAADF0gEDLojDgdGiJdJqUX02iB4E8Q9jUMkADs=" smiley.png
+
+
+
+
25.6 file# TOC
+
+
File access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read from or write to a file.
+
+
A file URL can have the form:
+
+
+
where filename is the path of the file to read.
+
+
An URL that does not have a protocol prefix will be assumed to be a
+file URL. Depending on the build, an URL that looks like a Windows
+path with the drive letter at the beginning will also be assumed to be
+a file URL (usually not the case in builds for unix-like systems).
+
+
For example to read from a file input.mpeg with ffmpeg
+use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i file:input.mpeg output.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable for files on slow medium.
+
+
+
+
25.7 ftp# TOC
+
+
FTP (File Transfer Protocol).
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using FTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
ftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+ftp-anonymous-password Password used when login as anonymous user. Typically an e-mail address
+should be used.
+
+ftp-write-seekable Control seekability of connection during encoding. If set to 1 the
+resource is supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not
+to be seekable. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
NOTE: Protocol can be used as output, but it is recommended to not do
+it, unless special care is taken (tests, customized server configuration
+etc.). Different FTP servers behave in different way during seek
+operation. ff* tools may produce incomplete content due to server limitations.
+
+
+
25.8 gopher# TOC
+
+
Gopher protocol.
+
+
+
25.9 hls# TOC
+
+
Read Apple HTTP Live Streaming compliant segmented stream as
+a uniform one. The M3U8 playlists describing the segments can be
+remote HTTP resources or local files, accessed using the standard
+file protocol.
+The nested protocol is declared by specifying
+"+proto " after the hls URI scheme name, where proto
+is either "file" or "http".
+
+
+
hls+http://host/path/to/remote/resource.m3u8
+hls+file://path/to/local/resource.m3u8
+
+
+
Using this protocol is discouraged - the hls demuxer should work
+just as well (if not, please report the issues) and is more complete.
+To use the hls demuxer instead, simply use the direct URLs to the
+m3u8 files.
+
+
+
25.10 http# TOC
+
+
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+seekable Control seekability of connection. If set to 1 the resource is
+supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not to be seekable,
+if set to -1 it will try to autodetect if it is seekable. Default
+value is -1.
+
+chunked_post If set to 1 use chunked Transfer-Encoding for posts, default is 1.
+
+content_type Set a specific content type for the POST messages.
+
+headers Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. The
+value must be a string encoding the headers.
+
+multiple_requests Use persistent connections if set to 1, default is 0.
+
+post_data Set custom HTTP post data.
+
+user-agent user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified the protocol will use a
+string describing the libavformat build. ("Lavf/<version>")
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+mime_type Export the MIME type.
+
+icy If set to 1 request ICY (SHOUTcast) metadata from the server. If the server
+supports this, the metadata has to be retrieved by the application by reading
+the icy_metadata_headers and icy_metadata_packet options.
+The default is 1.
+
+icy_metadata_headers If the server supports ICY metadata, this contains the ICY-specific HTTP reply
+headers, separated by newline characters.
+
+icy_metadata_packet If the server supports ICY metadata, and icy was set to 1, this
+contains the last non-empty metadata packet sent by the server. It should be
+polled in regular intervals by applications interested in mid-stream metadata
+updates.
+
+cookies Set the cookies to be sent in future requests. The format of each cookie is the
+same as the value of a Set-Cookie HTTP response field. Multiple cookies can be
+delimited by a newline character.
+
+offset Set initial byte offset.
+
+end_offset Try to limit the request to bytes preceding this offset.
+
+
+
+
25.10.1 HTTP Cookies# TOC
+
+
Some HTTP requests will be denied unless cookie values are passed in with the
+request. The cookies option allows these cookies to be specified. At
+the very least, each cookie must specify a value along with a path and domain.
+HTTP requests that match both the domain and path will automatically include the
+cookie value in the HTTP Cookie header field. Multiple cookies can be delimited
+by a newline.
+
+
The required syntax to play a stream specifying a cookie is:
+
+
ffplay -cookies "nlqptid=nltid=tsn; path=/; domain=somedomain.com;" http://somedomain.com/somestream.m3u8
+
+
+
+
25.11 Icecast# TOC
+
+
Icecast protocol (stream to Icecast servers)
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+ice_genre Set the stream genre.
+
+ice_name Set the stream name.
+
+ice_description Set the stream description.
+
+ice_url Set the stream website URL.
+
+ice_public Set if the stream should be public.
+The default is 0 (not public).
+
+user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified a string of the form
+"Lavf/<version>" will be used.
+
+password Set the Icecast mountpoint password.
+
+content_type Set the stream content type. This must be set if it is different from
+audio/mpeg.
+
+legacy_icecast This enables support for Icecast versions < 2.4.0, that do not support the
+HTTP PUT method but the SOURCE method.
+
+
+
+
+
icecast://[username [:password ]@]server :port /mountpoint
+
+
+
+
25.12 mmst# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over TCP.
+
+
+
25.13 mmsh# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over HTTP.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
mmsh://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
+
25.14 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 output protocol.
+
+
Computes the MD5 hash of the data to be written, and on close writes
+this to the designated output or stdout if none is specified. It can
+be used to test muxers without writing an actual file.
+
+
Some examples follow.
+
+
# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to the file output.avi.md5.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:output.avi.md5
+
+# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to stdout.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV) require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the MD5 output protocol.
+
+
+
25.15 pipe# TOC
+
+
UNIX pipe access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and write from UNIX pipes.
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
+
number is the number corresponding to the file descriptor of the
+pipe (e.g. 0 for stdin, 1 for stdout, 2 for stderr). If number
+is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be used
+for writing, stdin for reading.
+
+
For example to read from stdin with ffmpeg:
+
+
cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:0
+# ...this is the same as...
+cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:
+
+
+
For writing to stdout with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe:1 | cat > test.avi
+# ...this is the same as...
+ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe: | cat > test.avi
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV), require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the pipe output protocol.
+
+
+
25.16 rtmp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is used for streaming multimedia
+content across a TCP/IP network.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp://[username :password @]server [:port ][/app ][/instance ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
The accepted parameters are:
+
+username An optional username (mostly for publishing).
+
+password An optional password (mostly for publishing).
+
+server The address of the RTMP server.
+
+port The number of the TCP port to use (by default is 1935).
+
+app It is the name of the application to access. It usually corresponds to
+the path where the application is installed on the RTMP server
+(e.g. /ondemand/ , /flash/live/ , etc.). You can override
+the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_app option, too.
+
+playpath It is the path or name of the resource to play with reference to the
+application specified in app , may be prefixed by "mp4:". You
+can override the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_playpath
+option, too.
+
+listen Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
+timeout Maximum time to wait for the incoming connection. Implies listen.
+
+
+
Additionally, the following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+rtmp_app Name of application to connect on the RTMP server. This option
+overrides the parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_buffer Set the client buffer time in milliseconds. The default is 3000.
+
+rtmp_conn Extra arbitrary AMF connection parameters, parsed from a string,
+e.g. like B:1 S:authMe O:1 NN:code:1.23 NS:flag:ok O:0.
+Each value is prefixed by a single character denoting the type,
+B for Boolean, N for number, S for string, O for object, or Z for null,
+followed by a colon. For Booleans the data must be either 0 or 1 for
+FALSE or TRUE, respectively. Likewise for Objects the data must be 0 or
+1 to end or begin an object, respectively. Data items in subobjects may
+be named, by prefixing the type with ’N’ and specifying the name before
+the value (i.e. NB:myFlag:1). This option may be used multiple
+times to construct arbitrary AMF sequences.
+
+rtmp_flashver Version of the Flash plugin used to run the SWF player. The default
+is LNX 9,0,124,2. (When publishing, the default is FMLE/3.0 (compatible;
+<libavformat version>).)
+
+rtmp_flush_interval Number of packets flushed in the same request (RTMPT only). The default
+is 10.
+
+rtmp_live Specify that the media is a live stream. No resuming or seeking in
+live streams is possible. The default value is any, which means the
+subscriber first tries to play the live stream specified in the
+playpath. If a live stream of that name is not found, it plays the
+recorded stream. The other possible values are live and
+recorded.
+
+rtmp_pageurl URL of the web page in which the media was embedded. By default no
+value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_playpath Stream identifier to play or to publish. This option overrides the
+parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_subscribe Name of live stream to subscribe to. By default no value will be sent.
+It is only sent if the option is specified or if rtmp_live
+is set to live.
+
+rtmp_swfhash SHA256 hash of the decompressed SWF file (32 bytes).
+
+rtmp_swfsize Size of the decompressed SWF file, required for SWFVerification.
+
+rtmp_swfurl URL of the SWF player for the media. By default no value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_swfverify URL to player swf file, compute hash/size automatically.
+
+rtmp_tcurl URL of the target stream. Defaults to proto://host[:port]/app.
+
+
+
+
For example to read with ffplay a multimedia resource named
+"sample" from the application "vod" from an RTMP server "myserver":
+
+
ffplay rtmp://myserver/vod/sample
+
+
+
To publish to a password protected server, passing the playpath and
+app names separately:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f flv -rtmp_playpath some/long/path -rtmp_app long/app/name rtmp://username:password@myserver/
+
+
+
+
25.17 rtmpe# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) is used for
+streaming multimedia content within standard cryptographic primitives,
+consisting of Diffie-Hellman key exchange and HMACSHA256, generating
+a pair of RC4 keys.
+
+
+
25.18 rtmps# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol over a secure SSL connection.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPS) is used for streaming
+multimedia content across an encrypted connection.
+
+
+
25.19 rtmpt# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPT) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
25.20 rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPTE)
+is used for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
25.21 rtmpts# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS (RTMPTS) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTPS requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
25.22 libsmbclient# TOC
+
+
libsmbclient permits one to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
smb://[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in miliseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying
+low level operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+workgroup Set the workgroup used for making connections. By default workgroup is not specified.
+
+
+
+
For more information see: http://www.samba.org/ .
+
+
+
25.23 libssh# TOC
+
+
Secure File Transfer Protocol via libssh
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using SFTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
sftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+private_key Specify the path of the file containing private key to use during authorization.
+By default libssh searches for keys in the ~/.ssh/ directory.
+
+
+
+
Example: Play a file stored on remote server.
+
+
+
ffplay sftp://user:password@server_address:22/home/user/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
+
25.24 librtmp rtmp, rtmpe, rtmps, rtmpt, rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol and its variants supported through
+librtmp.
+
+
Requires the presence of the librtmp headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+"–enable-librtmp". If enabled this will replace the native RTMP
+protocol.
+
+
This protocol provides most client functions and a few server
+functions needed to support RTMP, RTMP tunneled in HTTP (RTMPT),
+encrypted RTMP (RTMPE), RTMP over SSL/TLS (RTMPS) and tunneled
+variants of these encrypted types (RTMPTE, RTMPTS).
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp_proto ://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ] options
+
+
+
where rtmp_proto is one of the strings "rtmp", "rtmpt", "rtmpe",
+"rtmps", "rtmpte", "rtmpts" corresponding to each RTMP variant, and
+server , port , app and playpath have the same
+meaning as specified for the RTMP native protocol.
+options contains a list of space-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
See the librtmp manual page (man 3 librtmp) for more information.
+
+
For example, to stream a file in real-time to an RTMP server using
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i myfile -f flv rtmp://myserver/live/mystream
+
+
+
To play the same stream using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay "rtmp://myserver/live/mystream live=1"
+
+
+
+
25.25 rtp# TOC
+
+
Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an RTP URL is:
+rtp://hostname [:port ][?option =val ...]
+
+
port specifies the RTP port to use.
+
+
The following URL options are supported:
+
+
+ttl=n Set the TTL (Time-To-Live) value (for multicast only).
+
+rtcpport=n Set the remote RTCP port to n .
+
+localrtpport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+localrtcpport=n ' Set the local RTCP port to n .
+
+pkt_size=n Set max packet size (in bytes) to n .
+
+connect=0|1 Do a connect() on the UDP socket (if set to 1) or not (if set
+to 0).
+
+sources=ip [,ip ] List allowed source IP addresses.
+
+block=ip [,ip ] List disallowed (blocked) source IP addresses.
+
+write_to_source=0|1 Send packets to the source address of the latest received packet (if
+set to 1) or to a default remote address (if set to 0).
+
+localport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+This is a deprecated option. Instead, localrtpport should be
+used.
+
+
+
+
Important notes:
+
+
+ If rtcpport is not set the RTCP port will be set to the RTP
+port value plus 1.
+
+ If localrtpport (the local RTP port) is not set any available
+port will be used for the local RTP and RTCP ports.
+
+ If localrtcpport (the local RTCP port) is not set it will be
+set to the local RTP port value plus 1.
+
+
+
+
25.26 rtsp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Streaming Protocol.
+
+
RTSP is not technically a protocol handler in libavformat, it is a demuxer
+and muxer. The demuxer supports both normal RTSP (with data transferred
+over RTP; this is used by e.g. Apple and Microsoft) and Real-RTSP (with
+data transferred over RDT).
+
+
The muxer can be used to send a stream using RTSP ANNOUNCE to a server
+supporting it (currently Darwin Streaming Server and Mischa Spiegelmock’s
+RTSP server ).
+
+
The required syntax for a RTSP url is:
+
+
rtsp://hostname [:port ]/path
+
+
+
Options can be set on the ffmpeg/ffplay command
+line, or set in code via AVOptions or in
+avformat_open_input.
+
+
The following options are supported.
+
+
+initial_pause Do not start playing the stream immediately if set to 1. Default value
+is 0.
+
+rtsp_transport Set RTSP transport protocols.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘udp ’
+Use UDP as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘tcp ’
+Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
+transport protocol.
+
+‘udp_multicast ’
+Use UDP multicast as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘http ’
+Use HTTP tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
+passing proxies.
+
+
+Multiple lower transport protocols may be specified, in that case they are
+tried one at a time (if the setup of one fails, the next one is tried).
+For the muxer, only the ‘tcp ’ and ‘udp ’ options are supported.
+
+rtsp_flags Set RTSP flags.
+
+The following values are accepted:
+
+‘filter_src ’
+Accept packets only from negotiated peer address and port.
+
‘listen ’
+Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
‘prefer_tcp ’
+Try TCP for RTP transport first, if TCP is available as RTSP RTP transport.
+
+
+Default value is ‘none ’.
+
+allowed_media_types Set media types to accept from the server.
+
+The following flags are accepted:
+
+‘video ’
+‘audio ’
+‘data ’
+
+
+By default it accepts all media types.
+
+min_port Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.
+
+max_port Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.
+
+timeout Set maximum timeout (in seconds) to wait for incoming connections.
+
+A value of -1 means infinite (default). This option implies the
+rtsp_flags set to ‘listen ’.
+
+reorder_queue_size Set number of packets to buffer for handling of reordered packets.
+
+stimeout Set socket TCP I/O timeout in microseconds.
+
+user-agent Override User-Agent header. If not specified, it defaults to the
+libavformat identifier string.
+
+
+
When receiving data over UDP, the demuxer tries to reorder received packets
+(since they may arrive out of order, or packets may get lost totally). This
+can be disabled by setting the maximum demuxing delay to zero (via
+the max_delay field of AVFormatContext).
+
+
When watching multi-bitrate Real-RTSP streams with ffplay, the
+streams to display can be chosen with -vst n and
+-ast n for video and audio respectively, and can be switched
+on the fly by pressing v and a.
+
+
+
25.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples all make use of the ffplay and
+ffmpeg tools.
+
+
+ Watch a stream over UDP, with a max reordering delay of 0.5 seconds:
+
+
ffplay -max_delay 500000 -rtsp_transport udp rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Watch a stream tunneled over HTTP:
+
+
ffplay -rtsp_transport http rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Send a stream in realtime to a RTSP server, for others to watch:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f rtsp -muxdelay 0.1 rtsp://server/live.sdp
+ Receive a stream in realtime:
+
+
ffmpeg -rtsp_flags listen -i rtsp://ownaddress/live.sdp output
+
+
+
+
25.27 sap# TOC
+
+
Session Announcement Protocol (RFC 2974). This is not technically a
+protocol handler in libavformat, it is a muxer and demuxer.
+It is used for signalling of RTP streams, by announcing the SDP for the
+streams regularly on a separate port.
+
+
+
25.27.1 Muxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the muxer is:
+
+
sap://destination [:port ][?options ]
+
+
+
The RTP packets are sent to destination on port port ,
+or to port 5004 if no port is specified.
+options is a &-separated list. The following options
+are supported:
+
+
+announce_addr=address Specify the destination IP address for sending the announcements to.
+If omitted, the announcements are sent to the commonly used SAP
+announcement multicast address 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net), or
+ff0e::2:7ffe if destination is an IPv6 address.
+
+announce_port=port Specify the port to send the announcements on, defaults to
+9875 if not specified.
+
+ttl=ttl Specify the time to live value for the announcements and RTP packets,
+defaults to 255.
+
+same_port=0|1 If set to 1, send all RTP streams on the same port pair. If zero (the
+default), all streams are sent on unique ports, with each stream on a
+port 2 numbers higher than the previous.
+VLC/Live555 requires this to be set to 1, to be able to receive the stream.
+The RTP stack in libavformat for receiving requires all streams to be sent
+on unique ports.
+
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To broadcast a stream on the local subnet, for watching in VLC:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255?same_port=1
+
+
+
Similarly, for watching in ffplay:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255
+
+
+
And for watching in ffplay, over IPv6:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://[ff0e::1:2:3:4]
+
+
+
+
25.27.2 Demuxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the demuxer is:
+
+
sap://[address ][:port ]
+
+
+
address is the multicast address to listen for announcements on,
+if omitted, the default 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net) is used. port
+is the port that is listened on, 9875 if omitted.
+
+
The demuxers listens for announcements on the given address and port.
+Once an announcement is received, it tries to receive that particular stream.
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on the normal SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on one the default IPv6 SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
ffplay sap://[ff0e::2:7ffe]
+
+
+
+
25.28 sctp# TOC
+
+
Stream Control Transmission Protocol.
+
+
The accepted URL syntax is:
+
+
sctp://host :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The protocol accepts the following options:
+
+listen If set to any value, listen for an incoming connection. Outgoing connection is done by default.
+
+max_streams Set the maximum number of streams. By default no limit is set.
+
+
+
+
25.29 srtp# TOC
+
+
Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+srtp_in_suite srtp_out_suite Select input and output encoding suites.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+
+
+srtp_in_params srtp_out_params Set input and output encoding parameters, which are expressed by a
+base64-encoded representation of a binary block. The first 16 bytes of
+this binary block are used as master key, the following 14 bytes are
+used as master salt.
+
+
+
+
25.30 subfile# TOC
+
+
Virtually extract a segment of a file or another stream.
+The underlying stream must be seekable.
+
+
Accepted options:
+
+start Start offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
end End offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Extract a chapter from a DVD VOB file (start and end sectors obtained
+externally and multiplied by 2048):
+
+
subfile,,start,153391104,end,268142592,,:/media/dvd/VIDEO_TS/VTS_08_1.VOB
+
+
+
Play an AVI file directly from a TAR archive:
+subfile,,start,183241728,end,366490624,,:archive.tar
+
+
+
25.31 tcp# TOC
+
+
Transmission Control Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for a TCP url is:
+
+
tcp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+listen=1|0 Listen for an incoming connection. Default value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+listen_timeout=microseconds Set listen timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+
+
The following example shows how to setup a listening TCP connection
+with ffmpeg, which is then accessed with ffplay:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tcp://hostname :port ?listen
+ffplay tcp://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
25.32 tls# TOC
+
+
Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
+
+
The required syntax for a TLS/SSL url is:
+
+
tls://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+ca_file, cafile=filename A file containing certificate authority (CA) root certificates to treat
+as trusted. If the linked TLS library contains a default this might not
+need to be specified for verification to work, but not all libraries and
+setups have defaults built in.
+The file must be in OpenSSL PEM format.
+
+tls_verify=1|0 If enabled, try to verify the peer that we are communicating with.
+Note, if using OpenSSL, this currently only makes sure that the
+peer certificate is signed by one of the root certificates in the CA
+database, but it does not validate that the certificate actually
+matches the host name we are trying to connect to. (With GnuTLS,
+the host name is validated as well.)
+
+This is disabled by default since it requires a CA database to be
+provided by the caller in many cases.
+
+cert_file, cert=filename A file containing a certificate to use in the handshake with the peer.
+(When operating as server, in listen mode, this is more often required
+by the peer, while client certificates only are mandated in certain
+setups.)
+
+key_file, key=filename A file containing the private key for the certificate.
+
+listen=1|0 If enabled, listen for connections on the provided port, and assume
+the server role in the handshake instead of the client role.
+
+
+
+
Example command lines:
+
+
To create a TLS/SSL server that serves an input stream.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tls://hostname :port ?listen&cert=server.crt &key=server.key
+
+
+
To play back a stream from the TLS/SSL server using ffplay:
+
+
+
ffplay tls://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
25.33 udp# TOC
+
+
User Datagram Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an UDP URL is:
+
+
udp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form key =val .
+
+
In case threading is enabled on the system, a circular buffer is used
+to store the incoming data, which allows one to reduce loss of data due to
+UDP socket buffer overruns. The fifo_size and
+overrun_nonfatal options are related to this buffer.
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+buffer_size=size Set the UDP maximum socket buffer size in bytes. This is used to set either
+the receive or send buffer size, depending on what the socket is used for.
+Default is 64KB. See also fifo_size .
+
+localport=port Override the local UDP port to bind with.
+
+localaddr=addr Choose the local IP address. This is useful e.g. if sending multicast
+and the host has multiple interfaces, where the user can choose
+which interface to send on by specifying the IP address of that interface.
+
+pkt_size=size Set the size in bytes of UDP packets.
+
+reuse=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow reusing UDP sockets.
+
+ttl=ttl Set the time to live value (for multicast only).
+
+connect=1|0 Initialize the UDP socket with connect(). In this case, the
+destination address can’t be changed with ff_udp_set_remote_url later.
+If the destination address isn’t known at the start, this option can
+be specified in ff_udp_set_remote_url, too.
+This allows finding out the source address for the packets with getsockname,
+and makes writes return with AVERROR(ECONNREFUSED) if "destination
+unreachable" is received.
+For receiving, this gives the benefit of only receiving packets from
+the specified peer address/port.
+
+sources=address [,address ] Only receive packets sent to the multicast group from one of the
+specified sender IP addresses.
+
+block=address [,address ] Ignore packets sent to the multicast group from the specified
+sender IP addresses.
+
+fifo_size=units Set the UDP receiving circular buffer size, expressed as a number of
+packets with size of 188 bytes. If not specified defaults to 7*4096.
+
+overrun_nonfatal=1|0 Survive in case of UDP receiving circular buffer overrun. Default
+value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+broadcast=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow UDP broadcasting.
+
+Note that broadcasting may not work properly on networks having
+a broadcast storm protection.
+
+
+
+
25.33.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to stream over UDP to a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format udp://hostname :port
+ Use ffmpeg to stream in mpegts format over UDP using 188
+sized UDP packets, using a large input buffer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f mpegts udp://hostname :port ?pkt_size=188&buffer_size=65535
+ Use ffmpeg to receive over UDP from a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i udp://[multicast-address ]:port ...
+
+
+
+
25.34 unix# TOC
+
+
Unix local socket
+
+
The required syntax for a Unix socket URL is:
+
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+timeout Timeout in ms.
+
listen Create the Unix socket in listening mode.
+
+
+
+
26 Device Options# TOC
+
+
The libavdevice library provides the same interface as
+libavformat. Namely, an input device is considered like a demuxer, and
+an output device like a muxer, and the interface and generic device
+options are the same provided by libavformat (see the ffmpeg-formats
+manual).
+
+
In addition each input or output device may support so-called private
+options, which are specific for that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the device
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
+
+
27 Input Devices# TOC
+
+
Input devices are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow to access
+the data coming from a multimedia device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported input devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-indevs".
+
+
You can disable all the input devices using the configure option
+"–disable-indevs", and selectively enable an input device using the
+option "–enable-indev=INDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-indev=INDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported input devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available input devices follows.
+
+
+
27.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libasound
+installed on your system.
+
+
This device allows capturing from an ALSA device. The name of the
+device to capture has to be an ALSA card identifier.
+
+
An ALSA identifier has the syntax:
+
+
hw:CARD [,DEV [,SUBDEV ]]
+
+
+
where the DEV and SUBDEV components are optional.
+
+
The three arguments (in order: CARD ,DEV ,SUBDEV )
+specify card number or identifier, device number and subdevice number
+(-1 means any).
+
+
To see the list of cards currently recognized by your system check the
+files /proc/asound/cards and /proc/asound/devices .
+
+
For example to capture with ffmpeg from an ALSA device with
+card id 0, you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -i hw:0 alsaout.wav
+
+
+
For more information see:
+http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/alsa-lib/pcm.html
+
+
+
27.2 avfoundation# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation input device.
+
+
AVFoundation is the currently recommended framework by Apple for streamgrabbing on OSX >= 10.7 as well as on iOS.
+The older QTKit framework has been marked deprecated since OSX version 10.7.
+
+
The input filename has to be given in the following syntax:
+
+
-i "[[VIDEO]:[AUDIO]]"
+
+
The first entry selects the video input while the latter selects the audio input.
+The stream has to be specified by the device name or the device index as shown by the device list.
+Alternatively, the video and/or audio input device can be chosen by index using the
+
+ -video_device_index <INDEX>
+
+and/or
+
+ -audio_device_index <INDEX>
+
+, overriding any
+device name or index given in the input filename.
+
+
All available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices true , listing
+all device names and corresponding indices.
+
+
There are two device name aliases:
+
+defaultSelect the AVFoundation default device of the corresponding type.
+
+noneDo not record the corresponding media type.
+This is equivalent to specifying an empty device name or index.
+
+
+
+
+
27.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation supports the following options:
+
+
+-list_devices <TRUE|FALSE> If set to true, a list of all available input devices is given showing all
+device names and indices.
+
+-video_device_index <INDEX> Specify the video device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-audio_device_index <INDEX> Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-pixel_format <FORMAT> Request the video device to use a specific pixel format.
+If the specified format is not supported, a list of available formats is given
+und the first one in this list is used instead. Available pixel formats are:
+monob, rgb555be, rgb555le, rgb565be, rgb565le, rgb24, bgr24, 0rgb, bgr0, 0bgr, rgb0,
+ bgr48be, uyvy422, yuva444p, yuva444p16le, yuv444p, yuv422p16, yuv422p10, yuv444p10,
+ yuv420p, nv12, yuyv422, gray
+
+
+
+
+
27.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of AVFoundation supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -list_devices true -i ""
+ Record video from video device 0 and audio from audio device 0 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -i "0:0" out.avi
+ Record video from video device 2 and audio from audio device 1 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -video_device_index 2 -i ":1" out.avi
+ Record video from the system default video device using the pixel format bgr0 and do not record any audio into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -pixel_format bgr0 -i "default:none" out.avi
+
+
+
+
27.3 bktr# TOC
+
+
BSD video input device.
+
+
+
27.4 dshow# TOC
+
+
Windows DirectShow input device.
+
+
DirectShow support is enabled when FFmpeg is built with the mingw-w64 project.
+Currently only audio and video devices are supported.
+
+
Multiple devices may be opened as separate inputs, but they may also be
+opened on the same input, which should improve synchronism between them.
+
+
The input name should be in the format:
+
+
+
+
where TYPE can be either audio or video ,
+and NAME is the device’s name.
+
+
+
27.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
If no options are specified, the device’s defaults are used.
+If the device does not support the requested options, it will
+fail to open.
+
+
+video_size Set the video size in the captured video.
+
+framerate Set the frame rate in the captured video.
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio.
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio.
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+
+list_options If set to true , print a list of selected device’s options
+and exit.
+
+video_device_number Set video device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+audio_device_number Set audio device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+pixel_format Select pixel format to be used by DirectShow. This may only be set when
+the video codec is not set or set to rawvideo.
+
+audio_buffer_size Set audio device buffer size in milliseconds (which can directly
+impact latency, depending on the device).
+Defaults to using the audio device’s
+default buffer size (typically some multiple of 500ms).
+Setting this value too low can degrade performance.
+See also
+http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd377582(v=vs.85).aspx
+
+
+
+
+
27.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of DirectShow supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f dshow -i dummy
+ Open video device Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+ Open second video device with name Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -video_device_number 1 -i video="Camera"
+ Open video device Camera and audio device Microphone :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera":audio="Microphone"
+ Print the list of supported options in selected device and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+
+
+
+
27.5 dv1394# TOC
+
+
Linux DV 1394 input device.
+
+
+
27.6 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer input device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
To record from the framebuffer device /dev/fb0 with
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -r 10 -i /dev/fb0 out.avi
+
+
+
You can take a single screenshot image with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -frames:v 1 -r 1 -i /dev/fb0 screenshot.jpeg
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
27.7 gdigrab# TOC
+
+
Win32 GDI-based screen capture device.
+
+
This device allows you to capture a region of the display on Windows.
+
+
There are two options for the input filename:
+
+
or
+
+
+
The first option will capture the entire desktop, or a fixed region of the
+desktop. The second option will instead capture the contents of a single
+window, regardless of its position on the screen.
+
+
For example, to grab the entire desktop using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab a 640x480 region at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -video_size vga -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab the contents of the window named "Calculator"
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i title=Calculator out.mpg
+
+
+
+
27.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. Use the value 0 to
+not draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+Note that show_region is incompatible with grabbing the contents
+of a single window.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -show_region 1 -framerate 6 -video_size cif -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -i desktop out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. The default is to capture the full screen if desktop is selected, or the full window size if title=window_title is selected.
+
+offset_x When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the left edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned to the left of your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_x value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+offset_y When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the top edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned above your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_y value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+
+
+
+
27.8 iec61883# TOC
+
+
FireWire DV/HDV input device using libiec61883.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need libiec61883, libraw1394 and
+libavc1394 installed on your system. Use the configure option
+--enable-libiec61883 to compile with the device enabled.
+
+
The iec61883 capture device supports capturing from a video device
+connected via IEEE1394 (FireWire), using libiec61883 and the new Linux
+FireWire stack (juju). This is the default DV/HDV input method in Linux
+Kernel 2.6.37 and later, since the old FireWire stack was removed.
+
+
Specify the FireWire port to be used as input file, or "auto"
+to choose the first port connected.
+
+
+
27.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+dvtype Override autodetection of DV/HDV. This should only be used if auto
+detection does not work, or if usage of a different device type
+should be prohibited. Treating a DV device as HDV (or vice versa) will
+not work and result in undefined behavior.
+The values auto , dv and hdv are supported.
+
+dvbuffer Set maximum size of buffer for incoming data, in frames. For DV, this
+is an exact value. For HDV, it is not frame exact, since HDV does
+not have a fixed frame size.
+
+dvguid Select the capture device by specifying it’s GUID. Capturing will only
+be performed from the specified device and fails if no device with the
+given GUID is found. This is useful to select the input if multiple
+devices are connected at the same time.
+Look at /sys/bus/firewire/devices to find out the GUIDs.
+
+
+
+
+
27.8.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Grab and show the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device.
+
+
ffplay -f iec61883 -i auto
+ Grab and record the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device,
+using a packet buffer of 100000 packets if the source is HDV.
+
+
ffmpeg -f iec61883 -i auto -hdvbuffer 100000 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
27.9 jack# TOC
+
+
JACK input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libjack
+installed on your system.
+
+
A JACK input device creates one or more JACK writable clients, one for
+each audio channel, with name client_name :input_N , where
+client_name is the name provided by the application, and N
+is a number which identifies the channel.
+Each writable client will send the acquired data to the FFmpeg input
+device.
+
+
Once you have created one or more JACK readable clients, you need to
+connect them to one or more JACK writable clients.
+
+
To connect or disconnect JACK clients you can use the jack_connect
+and jack_disconnect programs, or do it through a graphical interface,
+for example with qjackctl.
+
+
To list the JACK clients and their properties you can invoke the command
+jack_lsp.
+
+
Follows an example which shows how to capture a JACK readable client
+with ffmpeg.
+
+
# Create a JACK writable client with name "ffmpeg".
+$ ffmpeg -f jack -i ffmpeg -y out.wav
+
+# Start the sample jack_metro readable client.
+$ jack_metro -b 120 -d 0.2 -f 4000
+
+# List the current JACK clients.
+$ jack_lsp -c
+system:capture_1
+system:capture_2
+system:playback_1
+system:playback_2
+ffmpeg:input_1
+metro:120_bpm
+
+# Connect metro to the ffmpeg writable client.
+$ jack_connect metro:120_bpm ffmpeg:input_1
+
+
+
For more information read:
+http://jackaudio.org/
+
+
+
27.10 lavfi# TOC
+
+
Libavfilter input virtual device.
+
+
This input device reads data from the open output pads of a libavfilter
+filtergraph.
+
+
For each filtergraph open output, the input device will create a
+corresponding stream which is mapped to the generated output. Currently
+only video data is supported. The filtergraph is specified through the
+option graph .
+
+
+
27.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+graph Specify the filtergraph to use as input. Each video open output must be
+labelled by a unique string of the form "outN ", where N is a
+number starting from 0 corresponding to the mapped input stream
+generated by the device.
+The first unlabelled output is automatically assigned to the "out0"
+label, but all the others need to be specified explicitly.
+
+The suffix "+subcc" can be appended to the output label to create an extra
+stream with the closed captions packets attached to that output
+(experimental; only for EIA-608 / CEA-708 for now).
+The subcc streams are created after all the normal streams, in the order of
+the corresponding stream.
+For example, if there is "out19+subcc", "out7+subcc" and up to "out42", the
+stream #43 is subcc for stream #7 and stream #44 is subcc for stream #19.
+
+If not specified defaults to the filename specified for the input
+device.
+
+graph_file Set the filename of the filtergraph to be read and sent to the other
+filters. Syntax of the filtergraph is the same as the one specified by
+the option graph .
+
+
+
+
+
27.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create a color video stream and play it back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "color=c=pink [out0]" dummy
+ As the previous example, but use filename for specifying the graph
+description, and omit the "out0" label:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi color=c=pink
+ Create three different video test filtered sources and play them:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "testsrc [out0]; testsrc,hflip [out1]; testsrc,negate [out2]" test3
+ Read an audio stream from a file using the amovie source and play it
+back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "amovie=test.wav"
+ Read an audio stream and a video stream and play it back with
+ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "movie=test.avi[out0];amovie=test.wav[out1]"
+ Dump decoded frames to images and closed captions to a file (experimental):
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=test.ts[out0+subcc]" -map v frame%08d.png -map s -c copy -f rawvideo subcc.bin
+
+
+
+
27.11 libcdio# TOC
+
+
Audio-CD input device based on cdio.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libcdio
+installed on your system. Requires the configure option
+--enable-libcdio.
+
+
This device allows playing and grabbing from an Audio-CD.
+
+
For example to copy with ffmpeg the entire Audio-CD in /dev/sr0,
+you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f libcdio -i /dev/sr0 cd.wav
+
+
+
+
27.12 libdc1394# TOC
+
+
IIDC1394 input device, based on libdc1394 and libraw1394.
+
+
Requires the configure option --enable-libdc1394.
+
+
+
27.13 openal# TOC
+
+
The OpenAL input device provides audio capture on all systems with a
+working OpenAL 1.1 implementation.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration, you need OpenAL
+headers and libraries installed on your system, and need to configure
+FFmpeg with --enable-openal.
+
+
OpenAL headers and libraries should be provided as part of your OpenAL
+implementation, or as an additional download (an SDK). Depending on your
+installation you may need to specify additional flags via the
+--extra-cflags and --extra-ldflags for allowing the build
+system to locate the OpenAL headers and libraries.
+
+
An incomplete list of OpenAL implementations follows:
+
+
+Creative The official Windows implementation, providing hardware acceleration
+with supported devices and software fallback.
+See http://openal.org/ .
+
OpenAL Soft Portable, open source (LGPL) software implementation. Includes
+backends for the most common sound APIs on the Windows, Linux,
+Solaris, and BSD operating systems.
+See http://kcat.strangesoft.net/openal.html .
+
Apple OpenAL is part of Core Audio, the official Mac OS X Audio interface.
+See http://developer.apple.com/technologies/mac/audio-and-video.html
+
+
+
This device allows one to capture from an audio input device handled
+through OpenAL.
+
+
You need to specify the name of the device to capture in the provided
+filename. If the empty string is provided, the device will
+automatically select the default device. You can get the list of the
+supported devices by using the option list_devices .
+
+
+
27.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio. Only the values
+1 (monaural) and 2 (stereo) are currently supported.
+Defaults to 2 .
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio. Only the values
+8 and 16 are currently supported. Defaults to
+16 .
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+Defaults to 44.1k .
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
27.13.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Print the list of OpenAL supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f openal -i dummy out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the OpenAL device DR-BT101 via PulseAudio :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the default device (note the empty string ” as filename):
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i '' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from two devices simultaneously, writing to two different files,
+within the same ffmpeg command:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out1.ogg -f openal -i 'ALSA Default' out2.ogg
+
+
Note: not all OpenAL implementations support multiple simultaneous capture -
+try the latest OpenAL Soft if the above does not work.
+
+
+
27.14 oss# TOC
+
+
Open Sound System input device.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the OSS input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/dsp .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/dsp using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
For more information about OSS see:
+http://manuals.opensound.com/usersguide/dsp.html
+
+
+
27.15 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio input device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is a source device or the
+string "default"
+
+
To list the PulseAudio source devices and their properties you can invoke
+the command pactl list sources.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org .
+
+
+
27.15.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is "record".
+
+sample_rate Specify the samplerate in Hz, by default 48kHz is used.
+
+channels Specify the channels in use, by default 2 (stereo) is set.
+
+frame_size Specify the number of bytes per frame, by default it is set to 1024.
+
+fragment_size Specify the minimal buffering fragment in PulseAudio, it will affect the
+audio latency. By default it is unset.
+
+
+
+
27.15.2 Examples# TOC
+
Record a stream from default device:
+
+
ffmpeg -f pulse -i default /tmp/pulse.wav
+
+
+
+
27.16 qtkit# TOC
+
+
QTKit input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is parsed to contain either a device name or index.
+The device index can also be given by using -video_device_index.
+A given device index will override any given device name.
+If the desired device consists of numbers only, use -video_device_index to identify it.
+The default device will be chosen if an empty string or the device name "default" is given.
+The available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "0" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -video_device_index 0 -i "" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "default" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -list_devices true -i ""
+
+
+
+
27.17 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libsndio
+installed on your system.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the sndio input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/audio0 .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/audio0 using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f sndio -i /dev/audio0 /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
+
27.18 video4linux2, v4l2# TOC
+
+
Video4Linux2 input video device.
+
+
"v4l2" can be used as alias for "video4linux2".
+
+
If FFmpeg is built with v4l-utils support (by using the
+--enable-libv4l2 configure option), it is possible to use it with the
+-use_libv4l2 input device option.
+
+
The name of the device to grab is a file device node, usually Linux
+systems tend to automatically create such nodes when the device
+(e.g. an USB webcam) is plugged into the system, and has a name of the
+kind /dev/videoN , where N is a number associated to
+the device.
+
+
Video4Linux2 devices usually support a limited set of
+width xheight sizes and frame rates. You can check which are
+supported using -list_formats all for Video4Linux2 devices.
+Some devices, like TV cards, support one or more standards. It is possible
+to list all the supported standards using -list_standards all.
+
+
The time base for the timestamps is 1 microsecond. Depending on the kernel
+version and configuration, the timestamps may be derived from the real time
+clock (origin at the Unix Epoch) or the monotonic clock (origin usually at
+boot time, unaffected by NTP or manual changes to the clock). The
+-timestamps abs or -ts abs option can be used to force
+conversion into the real time clock.
+
+
Some usage examples of the video4linux2 device with ffmpeg
+and ffplay:
+
+ Grab and show the input of a video4linux2 device:
+
+
ffplay -f video4linux2 -framerate 30 -video_size hd720 /dev/video0
+ Grab and record the input of a video4linux2 device, leave the
+frame rate and size as previously set:
+
+
ffmpeg -f video4linux2 -input_format mjpeg -i /dev/video0 out.mpeg
+
+
+
For more information about Video4Linux, check http://linuxtv.org/ .
+
+
+
27.18.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+standard Set the standard. Must be the name of a supported standard. To get a
+list of the supported standards, use the list_standards
+option.
+
+channel Set the input channel number. Default to -1, which means using the
+previously selected channel.
+
+video_size Set the video frame size. The argument must be a string in the form
+WIDTH xHEIGHT or a valid size abbreviation.
+
+pixel_format Select the pixel format (only valid for raw video input).
+
+input_format Set the preferred pixel format (for raw video) or a codec name.
+This option allows one to select the input format, when several are
+available.
+
+framerate Set the preferred video frame rate.
+
+list_formats List available formats (supported pixel formats, codecs, and frame
+sizes) and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all available (compressed and non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘raw ’
+Show only raw video (non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘compressed ’
+Show only compressed formats.
+
+
+list_standards List supported standards and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all supported standards.
+
+
+timestamps, ts Set type of timestamps for grabbed frames.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘default ’
+Use timestamps from the kernel.
+
+‘abs ’
+Use absolute timestamps (wall clock).
+
+‘mono2abs ’
+Force conversion from monotonic to absolute timestamps.
+
+
+Default value is default.
+
+
+
+
27.19 vfwcap# TOC
+
+
VfW (Video for Windows) capture input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is the capture driver number, ranging from
+0 to 9. You may use "list" as filename to print a list of drivers. Any
+other filename will be interpreted as device number 0.
+
+
+
27.20 x11grab# TOC
+
+
X11 video input device.
+
+
Depends on X11, Xext, and Xfixes. Requires the configure option
+--enable-x11grab.
+
+
This device allows one to capture a region of an X11 display.
+
+
The filename passed as input has the syntax:
+
+
[hostname ]:display_number .screen_number [+x_offset ,y_offset ]
+
+
+
hostname :display_number .screen_number specifies the
+X11 display name of the screen to grab from. hostname can be
+omitted, and defaults to "localhost". The environment variable
+DISPLAY contains the default display name.
+
+
x_offset and y_offset specify the offsets of the grabbed
+area with respect to the top-left border of the X11 screen. They
+default to 0.
+
+
Check the X11 documentation (e.g. man X) for more detailed information.
+
+
Use the dpyinfo program for getting basic information about the
+properties of your X11 display (e.g. grep for "name" or "dimensions").
+
+
For example to grab from :0.0 using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
27.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. A value of 0 specify
+not to draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+follow_mouse Make the grabbed area follow the mouse. The argument can be
+centered or a number of pixels PIXELS .
+
+When it is specified with "centered", the grabbing region follows the mouse
+pointer and keeps the pointer at the center of region; otherwise, the region
+follows only when the mouse pointer reaches within PIXELS (greater than
+zero) to the edge of region.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ To follow only when the mouse pointer reaches within 100 pixels to edge:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse 100 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+ With follow_mouse :
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. Default value is vga.
+
+use_shm Use the MIT-SHM extension for shared memory. Default value is 1.
+It may be necessary to disable it for remote displays.
+
+
+
+
27.21 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink input device provides capture capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz and the number
+of channels currently is limited to 2 (stereo).
+
+
+
27.21.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
27.21.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List input devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_devices 1 -i dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_formats 1 -i 'Intensity Pro'
+ Capture video clip at 1080i50 (format 11):
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -i 'Intensity Pro@11' -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
+
+
+
+
+
28 Output Devices# TOC
+
+
Output devices are configured elements in FFmpeg that can write
+multimedia data to an output device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported output devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-outdevs".
+
+
You can disable all the output devices using the configure option
+"–disable-outdevs", and selectively enable an output device using the
+option "–enable-outdev=OUTDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-outdev=OUTDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled output devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available output devices follows.
+
+
+
28.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) output device.
+
+
+
28.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Play a file on default ALSA device:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa default
+ Play a file on soundcard 1, audio device 7:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa hw:1,7
+
+
+
+
28.2 caca# TOC
+
+
CACA output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in CACA window.
+Only one CACA window is allowed per application, so you can
+have only one instance of this output device in an application.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libcaca.
+libcaca is a graphics library that outputs text instead of pixels.
+
+
For more information about libcaca, check:
+http://caca.zoy.org/wiki/libcaca
+
+
+
28.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+window_title Set the CACA window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device.
+
+window_size Set the CACA window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video.
+
+driver Set display driver.
+
+algorithm Set dithering algorithm. Dithering is necessary
+because the picture being rendered has usually far more colours than
+the available palette.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither algorithms.
+
+antialias Set antialias method. Antialiasing smoothens the rendered
+image and avoids the commonly seen staircase effect.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither antialiases.
+
+charset Set which characters are going to be used when rendering text.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither charsets.
+
+color Set color to be used when rendering text.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither colors.
+
+list_drivers If set to true , print a list of available drivers and exit.
+
+list_dither List available dither options related to the argument.
+The argument must be one of algorithms, antialiases,
+charsets, colors.
+
+
+
+
28.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following command shows the ffmpeg output is an
+CACA window, forcing its size to 80x25:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt rgb24 -window_size 80x25 -f caca -
+ Show the list of available drivers and exit:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_drivers true -
+ Show the list of available dither colors and exit:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_dither colors -
+
+
+
+
28.3 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink output device provides playback capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this output device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz.
+
+
+
28.3.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+preroll Amount of time to preroll video in seconds.
+Defaults to 0.5 .
+
+
+
+
+
28.3.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List output devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -list_devices 1 dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -list_formats 1 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+ Play video clip:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+ Play video clip with non-standard framerate or video size:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 -s 720x486 -r 24000/1001 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+
+
+
+
28.4 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer output device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
+
28.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+xoffset yoffset Set x/y coordinate of top left corner. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
28.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on framebuffer device /dev/fb0 .
+Required pixel format depends on current framebuffer settings.
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt bgra -f fbdev /dev/fb0
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
28.5 opengl# TOC
+
OpenGL output device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-opengl.
+
+
This output device allows one to render to OpenGL context.
+Context may be provided by application or default SDL window is created.
+
+
When device renders to external context, application must implement handlers for following messages:
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_CREATE_WINDOW_BUFFER - create OpenGL context on current thread.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_PREPARE_WINDOW_BUFFER - make OpenGL context current.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_DISPLAY_WINDOW_BUFFER - swap buffers.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_DESTROY_WINDOW_BUFFER - destroy OpenGL context.
+Application is also required to inform a device about current resolution by sending AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_SIZE message.
+
+
+
28.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+background Set background color. Black is a default.
+
no_window Disables default SDL window when set to non-zero value.
+Application must provide OpenGL context and both window_size_cb and window_swap_buffers_cb callbacks when set.
+
window_title Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename specified for the output device.
+Ignored when no_window is set.
+
window_size Set preferred window size, can be a string of the form widthxheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video, downscaled according to the aspect ratio.
+Mostly usable when no_window is not set.
+
+
+
+
+
28.5.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on SDL window using OpenGL rendering:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f opengl "window title"
+
+
+
+
28.6 oss# TOC
+
+
OSS (Open Sound System) output device.
+
+
+
28.7 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio output device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org
+
+
+
28.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is set to the specified output name.
+
+device Specify the device to use. Default device is used when not provided.
+List of output devices can be obtained with command pactl list sinks.
+
+buffer_size buffer_duration Control the size and duration of the PulseAudio buffer. A small buffer
+gives more control, but requires more frequent updates.
+
+buffer_size specifies size in bytes while
+buffer_duration specifies duration in milliseconds.
+
+When both options are provided then the highest value is used
+(duration is recalculated to bytes using stream parameters). If they
+are set to 0 (which is default), the device will use the default
+PulseAudio duration value. By default PulseAudio set buffer duration
+to around 2 seconds.
+
+prebuf Specify pre-buffering size in bytes. The server does not start with
+playback before at least prebuf bytes are available in the
+buffer. By default this option is initialized to the same value as
+buffer_size or buffer_duration (whichever is bigger).
+
+minreq Specify minimum request size in bytes. The server does not request less
+than minreq bytes from the client, instead waits until the buffer
+is free enough to request more bytes at once. It is recommended to not set
+this option, which will initialize this to a value that is deemed sensible
+by the server.
+
+
+
+
+
28.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on default device on default server:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f pulse "stream name"
+
+
+
+
28.8 sdl# TOC
+
+
SDL (Simple DirectMedia Layer) output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in an SDL
+window. Only one SDL window is allowed per application, so you can
+have only one instance of this output device in an application.
+
+
To enable this output device you need libsdl installed on your system
+when configuring your build.
+
+
For more information about SDL, check:
+http://www.libsdl.org/
+
+
+
28.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+window_title Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device.
+
+icon_title Set the name of the iconified SDL window, if not specified it is set
+to the same value of window_title .
+
+window_size Set the SDL window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video,
+downscaled according to the aspect ratio.
+
+window_fullscreen Set fullscreen mode when non-zero value is provided.
+Default value is zero.
+
+
+
+
28.8.2 Interactive commands# TOC
+
+
The window created by the device can be controlled through the
+following interactive commands.
+
+
+q, ESC Quit the device immediately.
+
+
+
+
28.8.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following command shows the ffmpeg output is an
+SDL window, forcing its size to the qcif format:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt yuv420p -window_size qcif -f sdl "SDL output"
+
+
+
+
28.9 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio audio output device.
+
+
+
28.10 xv# TOC
+
+
XV (XVideo) output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in a X Window System
+window.
+
+
+
28.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+display_name Specify the hardware display name, which determines the display and
+communications domain to be used.
+
+The display name or DISPLAY environment variable can be a string in
+the format hostname [:number [.screen_number ]].
+
+hostname specifies the name of the host machine on which the
+display is physically attached. number specifies the number of
+the display server on that host machine. screen_number specifies
+the screen to be used on that server.
+
+If unspecified, it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment
+variable.
+
+For example, dual-headed:0.1 would specify screen 1 of display
+0 on the machine named “dual-headed”.
+
+Check the X11 specification for more detailed information about the
+display name format.
+
+window_id When set to non-zero value then device doesn’t create new window,
+but uses existing one with provided window_id . By default
+this options is set to zero and device creates its own window.
+
+window_size Set the created window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation. If not
+specified it defaults to the size of the input video.
+Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+window_x window_y Set the X and Y window offsets for the created window. They are both
+set to 0 by default. The values may be ignored by the window manager.
+Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+window_title Set the window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device. Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+
+
For more information about XVideo see http://www.x.org/ .
+
+
+
28.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Decode, display and encode video input with ffmpeg at the
+same time:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT OUTPUT -f xv display
+ Decode and display the input video to multiple X11 windows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f xv normal -vf negate -f xv negated
+
+
+
+
29 Resampler Options# TOC
+
+
The audio resampler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, option =value for the aresample filter,
+by setting the value explicitly in the
+SwrContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API for
+programmatic use.
+
+
+ich, in_channel_count Set the number of input channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+in_channel_layout is set.
+
+och, out_channel_count Set the number of output channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+out_channel_layout is set.
+
+uch, used_channel_count Set the number of used input channels. Default value is 0. This option is
+only used for special remapping.
+
+isr, in_sample_rate Set the input sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+osr, out_sample_rate Set the output sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+isf, in_sample_fmt Specify the input sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+osf, out_sample_fmt Specify the output sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+tsf, internal_sample_fmt Set the internal sample format. Default value is none.
+This will automatically be chosen when it is not explicitly set.
+
+icl, in_channel_layout ocl, out_channel_layout Set the input/output channel layout.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+clev, center_mix_level Set the center mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must be
+in the interval [-32,32].
+
+slev, surround_mix_level Set the surround mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+lfe_mix_level Set LFE mix into non LFE level. It is used when there is a LFE input but no
+LFE output. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+rmvol, rematrix_volume Set rematrix volume. Default value is 1.0.
+
+rematrix_maxval Set maximum output value for rematrixing.
+This can be used to prevent clipping vs. preventing volumn reduction
+A value of 1.0 prevents cliping.
+
+flags, swr_flags Set flags used by the converter. Default value is 0.
+
+It supports the following individual flags:
+
+res force resampling, this flag forces resampling to be used even when the
+input and output sample rates match.
+
+
+dither_scale Set the dither scale. Default value is 1.
+
+dither_method Set dither method. Default value is 0.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘rectangular ’
+select rectangular dither
+
‘triangular ’
+select triangular dither
+
‘triangular_hp ’
+select triangular dither with high pass
+
‘lipshitz ’
+select lipshitz noise shaping dither
+
‘shibata ’
+select shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘low_shibata ’
+select low shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘high_shibata ’
+select high shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘f_weighted ’
+select f-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘modified_e_weighted ’
+select modified-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘improved_e_weighted ’
+select improved-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
+
+
+resampler Set resampling engine. Default value is swr.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘swr ’
+select the native SW Resampler; filter options precision and cheby are not
+applicable in this case.
+
‘soxr ’
+select the SoX Resampler (where available); compensation, and filter options
+filter_size, phase_shift, filter_type & kaiser_beta, are not applicable in this
+case.
+
+
+filter_size For swr only, set resampling filter size, default value is 32.
+
+phase_shift For swr only, set resampling phase shift, default value is 10, and must be in
+the interval [0,30].
+
+linear_interp Use Linear Interpolation if set to 1, default value is 0.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency (swr: 6dB point; soxr: 0dB point) ratio; must be a float
+value between 0 and 1. Default value is 0.97 with swr, and 0.91 with soxr
+(which, with a sample-rate of 44100, preserves the entire audio band to 20kHz).
+
+precision For soxr only, the precision in bits to which the resampled signal will be
+calculated. The default value of 20 (which, with suitable dithering, is
+appropriate for a destination bit-depth of 16) gives SoX’s ’High Quality’; a
+value of 28 gives SoX’s ’Very High Quality’.
+
+cheby For soxr only, selects passband rolloff none (Chebyshev) & higher-precision
+approximation for ’irrational’ ratios. Default value is 0.
+
+async For swr only, simple 1 parameter audio sync to timestamps using stretching,
+squeezing, filling and trimming. Setting this to 1 will enable filling and
+trimming, larger values represent the maximum amount in samples that the data
+may be stretched or squeezed for each second.
+Default value is 0, thus no compensation is applied to make the samples match
+the audio timestamps.
+
+first_pts For swr only, assume the first pts should be this value. The time unit is 1 / sample rate.
+This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
+assumption is made about the first frame’s expected pts, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative pts due to encoder delay.
+
+min_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger stretching/squeezing/filling or trimming of the
+data to make it match the timestamps. The default is that
+stretching/squeezing/filling and trimming is disabled
+(min_comp = FLT_MAX).
+
+min_hard_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger adding/dropping samples to make it match the
+timestamps. This option effectively is a threshold to select between
+hard (trim/fill) and soft (squeeze/stretch) compensation. Note that
+all compensation is by default disabled through min_comp .
+The default is 0.1.
+
+comp_duration For swr only, set duration (in seconds) over which data is stretched/squeezed
+to make it match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value,
+default value is 1.0.
+
+max_soft_comp For swr only, set maximum factor by which data is stretched/squeezed to make it
+match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value, default value
+is 0.
+
+matrix_encoding Select matrixed stereo encoding.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+select none
+
‘dolby ’
+select Dolby
+
‘dplii ’
+select Dolby Pro Logic II
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+filter_type For swr only, select resampling filter type. This only affects resampling
+operations.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘cubic ’
+select cubic
+
‘blackman_nuttall ’
+select Blackman Nuttall Windowed Sinc
+
‘kaiser ’
+select Kaiser Windowed Sinc
+
+
+kaiser_beta For swr only, set Kaiser Window Beta value. Must be an integer in the
+interval [2,16], default value is 9.
+
+output_sample_bits For swr only, set number of used output sample bits for dithering. Must be an integer in the
+interval [0,64], default value is 0, which means it’s not used.
+
+
+
+
+
30 Scaler Options# TOC
+
+
The video scaler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools. For programmatic use, they can be set explicitly in the
+SwsContext options or through the libavutil/opt.h API.
+
+
+
+
+sws_flags Set the scaler flags. This is also used to set the scaling
+algorithm. Only a single algorithm should be selected.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘fast_bilinear ’
+Select fast bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bilinear ’
+Select bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicubic ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm.
+
+‘experimental ’
+Select experimental scaling algorithm.
+
+‘neighbor ’
+Select nearest neighbor rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘area ’
+Select averaging area rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicublin ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm for the luma component, bilinear for
+chroma components.
+
+‘gauss ’
+Select Gaussian rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘sinc ’
+Select sinc rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘lanczos ’
+Select lanczos rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘spline ’
+Select natural bicubic spline rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘print_info ’
+Enable printing/debug logging.
+
+‘accurate_rnd ’
+Enable accurate rounding.
+
+‘full_chroma_int ’
+Enable full chroma interpolation.
+
+‘full_chroma_inp ’
+Select full chroma input.
+
+‘bitexact ’
+Enable bitexact output.
+
+
+srcw Set source width.
+
+srch Set source height.
+
+dstw Set destination width.
+
+dsth Set destination height.
+
+src_format Set source pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+dst_format Set destination pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+src_range Select source range.
+
+dst_range Select destination range.
+
+param0, param1 Set scaling algorithm parameters. The specified values are specific of
+some scaling algorithms and ignored by others. The specified values
+are floating point number values.
+
+sws_dither Set the dithering algorithm. Accepts one of the following
+values. Default value is ‘auto ’.
+
+
+‘auto ’
+automatic choice
+
+‘none ’
+no dithering
+
+‘bayer ’
+bayer dither
+
+‘ed ’
+error diffusion dither
+
+‘a_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using addition
+
+‘x_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using xor (more random/less apparent patterning that
+a_dither).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
31 Filtering Introduction# TOC
+
+
Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
+
+
In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
+outputs.
+To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
+following filtergraph.
+
+
+
[main]
+input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
+ | ^
+ |[tmp] [flip]|
+ +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
+
+
+
This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
+stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
+back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
+following command to achieve this:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
+
+
+
The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
+onto the bottom half of the output video.
+
+
Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
+linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
+crop,vflip are in one linear chain, split and
+overlay are separately in another. The points where the linear
+chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
+example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
+the labels [main] and [tmp] .
+
+
The stream sent to the second output of split , labelled as
+[tmp] , is processed through the crop filter, which crops
+away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
+overlay filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
+split filter (which was labelled as [main] ), and overlay on its
+lower half the output generated by the crop,vflip filterchain.
+
+
Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
+after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
+by a colon.
+
+
There exist so-called source filters that do not have an
+audio/video input, and sink filters that will not have audio/video
+output.
+
+
+
+
32 graph2dot# TOC
+
+
The graph2dot program included in the FFmpeg tools
+directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
+corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
+
+
Invoke the command:
+
+
+
to see how to use graph2dot .
+
+
You can then pass the dot description to the dot program (from
+the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
+of the filtergraph.
+
+
For example the sequence of commands:
+
+
echo GRAPH_DESCRIPTION | \
+tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
+dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
+display graph.png
+
+
+
can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
+described by the GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string. Note that this string must be
+a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
+For example if your command line is of the form:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
+
+
your GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string will need to be of the form:
+
+
nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
+
+
you may also need to set the nullsrc parameters and add a format
+filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
+
+
+
+
33 Filtergraph description# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
+cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
+filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
+filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
+side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
+
+
Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
+registered in the application, which defines the features and the
+number of input and output pads of the filter.
+
+
A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
+output pads is called a "sink".
+
+
+
33.1 Filtergraph syntax# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
+recognized by the -filter /-vf and -filter_complex
+options in ffmpeg and -vf in ffplay, and by the
+avfilter_graph_parse()/avfilter_graph_parse2() functions defined in
+libavfilter/avfilter.h .
+
+
A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
+connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
+represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
+
+
A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
+filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
+descriptions.
+
+
A filter is represented by a string of the form:
+[in_link_1 ]...[in_link_N ]filter_name =arguments [out_link_1 ]...[out_link_M ]
+
+
filter_name is the name of the filter class of which the
+described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
+the filter classes registered in the program.
+The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
+"=arguments ".
+
+
arguments is a string which contains the parameters used to
+initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of key=value pairs.
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of value . In this case, the keys are assumed to be
+the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the fade filter
+declares three options in this order – type , start_frame and
+nb_frames . Then the parameter list in:0:30 means that the value
+in is assigned to the option type , 0 to
+start_frame and 30 to nb_frames .
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of mixed direct value and long key=value
+pairs. The direct value must precede the key=value pairs, and
+follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
+key=value pairs can be set in any preferred order.
+
+
+
+
If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the format filter
+takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
+’|’.
+
+
The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "’" as initial
+and ending mark, and the character ’\’ for escaping the characters
+within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
+terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
+"[]=;,") is encountered.
+
+
The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
+followed by a list of link labels.
+A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
+or input pad. The preceding labels in_link_1
+... in_link_N , are associated to the filter input pads,
+the following labels out_link_1 ... out_link_M , are
+associated to the output pads.
+
+
When two link labels with the same name are found in the
+filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
+created.
+
+
If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
+unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
+For example in the filterchain
+
+
nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
+
+
the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
+instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
+"L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
+output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
+which are both unlabelled.
+
+
In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
+pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
+filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
+
+
Libavfilter will automatically insert scale filters where format
+conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
+for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
+sws_flags=flags ;
+to the filtergraph description.
+
+
Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
+
+
NAME ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
+LINKLABEL ::= "[" NAME "]"
+LINKLABELS ::= LINKLABEL [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTER_ARGUMENTS ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
+FILTER ::= [LINKLABELS ] NAME ["=" FILTER_ARGUMENTS ] [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTERCHAIN ::= FILTER [,FILTERCHAIN ]
+FILTERGRAPH ::= [sws_flags=flags ;] FILTERCHAIN [;FILTERGRAPH ]
+
+
+
+
33.2 Notes on filtergraph escaping# TOC
+
+
Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
+escaping. See (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual for more
+information about the employed escaping procedure.
+
+
A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
+value, which may contain the special character : used to
+separate values, or one of the escaping characters \'.
+
+
A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
+may contain the escaping characters \' or the special
+characters [],; used by the filtergraph description.
+
+
Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
+need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
+characters contained within it.
+
+
For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
+the drawtext filter description text value:
+
+
this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
This string contains the ' special escaping character, and the
+: special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
+
+
text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
+description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
+filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
+
+
drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
+
+
(note that in addition to the \' escaping special characters,
+also , needs to be escaped).
+
+
Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
+filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
+escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
+\ is special and needs to be escaped with another \, the
+previous string will finally result in:
+
+
-vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
+
+
+
+
34 Timeline editing# TOC
+
+
Some filters support a generic enable option. For the filters
+supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
+evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
+the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
+next filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The expression accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+‘n ’
+sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
+
+‘pos ’
+the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+‘w ’
+‘h ’
+width and height of the input frame if video
+
+
+
Additionally, these filters support an enable command that can be used
+to re-define the expression.
+
+
Like any other filtering option, the enable option follows the same
+rules.
+
+
For example, to enable a blur filter (smartblur ) from 10 seconds to 3
+minutes, and a curves filter starting at 3 seconds:
+
+
smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
+curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
+
+
+
+
+
35 Audio Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
+
+
+
35.1 adelay# TOC
+
+
Delay one or more audio channels.
+
+
Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+delays Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by ’|’.
+At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
+Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
+smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
+
+
+
+
35.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
+the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
+
+
+
+
+
35.2 aecho# TOC
+
+
Apply echoing to the input audio.
+
+
Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
+(and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
+effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
+sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
+original signal and the reflection is the delay, and the
+loudness of the reflected signal is the decay.
+Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.6.
+
+out_gain Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.3.
+
+delays Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
+separated by ’|’. Allowed range for each delay is (0 - 90000.0].
+Default is 1000.
+
+decays Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by ’|’.
+Allowed range for each decay is (0 - 1.0].
+Default is 0.5.
+
+
+
+
35.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
+
+
+ If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
+
+
+ A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
+ Same as above but with one more mountain:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
+
+
+
+
35.3 aeval# TOC
+
+
Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
+
+
This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
+which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
+the number of input channels is greater than the number of
+expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
+output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
+specified by the number of expressions. If set to ‘same ’, it will
+use by default the same input channel layout.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+ch channel number of the current expression
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
+
+nb_in_channels nb_out_channels input and output number of channels
+
+val(CH) the value of input channel with number CH
+
+
+
Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
+dedicated filter.
+
+
+
35.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Half volume:
+
+
aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
+ Invert phase of the second channel:
+
+
+
+
+
35.4 afade# TOC
+
+
Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+type, t Specify the effect type, can be either in for fade-in, or
+out for a fade-out effect. Default is in.
+
+start_sample, ss Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
+effect. Default is 0.
+
+nb_samples, ns Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
+the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
+
+start_time, st Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
+The value must be specified as a time duration; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+If set this option is used instead of start_sample .
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence.
+By default the duration is determined by nb_samples .
+If set this option is used instead of nb_samples .
+
+curve Set curve for fade transition.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+tri select triangular, linear slope (default)
+
qsin select quarter of sine wave
+
hsin select half of sine wave
+
esin select exponential sine wave
+
log select logarithmic
+
par select inverted parabola
+
qua select quadratic
+
cub select cubic
+
squ select square root
+
cbr select cubic root
+
+
+
+
+
35.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
+
+
+ Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
+
+
afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
+
+
+
+
35.5 aformat# TOC
+
+
Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
+negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+sample_fmts A ’|’-separated list of requested sample formats.
+
+sample_rates A ’|’-separated list of requested sample rates.
+
+channel_layouts A ’|’-separated list of requested channel layouts.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+
+
If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
+
+
Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
+
+
aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
+
+
+
+
35.6 allpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
+frequency , and filter-width width .
+An all-pass filter changes the audio’s frequency to phase relationship
+without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
35.7 amerge# TOC
+
+
Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+inputs Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
+
+
+
+
If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
+the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
+will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
+disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
+the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
+the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
+channels.
+
+
For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
+is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
+following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
+first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
+
+
On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
+in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
+arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
+
+
All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
+
+
If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
+shortest.
+
+
+
35.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
+
+
amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
+ Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in input.mkv :
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
+
+
+
+
35.8 amix# TOC
+
+
Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
+
+
Note that this filter only supports float samples (the amerge
+and pan audio filters support many formats). If the amix
+input has integer samples then aresample will be automatically
+inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
+
+
For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
+
+
will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
+first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+duration How to determine the end-of-stream.
+
+longest The duration of the longest input. (default)
+
+shortest The duration of the shortest input.
+
+first The duration of the first input.
+
+
+
+dropout_transition The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
+stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
35.9 anull# TOC
+
+
Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
35.10 apad# TOC
+
+
Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
+
+
This can be used together with ffmpeg -shortest to
+extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+packet_size Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
+
+pad_len Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
+value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
+exclusive with whole_len .
+
+whole_len Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
+the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
+the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
+with pad_len .
+
+
+
If neither the pad_len nor the whole_len option is
+set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
+indefinitely.
+
+
+
35.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
+
+
+ Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
+the input with silence if required:
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
+video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
+until the end in the output file when using the shortest
+option:
+
+
ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
35.11 aphaser# TOC
+
Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
+
+
A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
+The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
+
+out_gain Set output gain. Default is 0.74
+
+delay Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
+
+decay Set decay. Default is 0.4.
+
+speed Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
+
+type Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘triangular, t ’
+‘sinusoidal, s ’
+
+
+
+
+
35.12 aresample# TOC
+
+
Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
+libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
+automatically convert between its input and output.
+
+
This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
+the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
+timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
+
+
The filter accepts the syntax
+[sample_rate :]resampler_options , where sample_rate
+expresses a sample rate and resampler_options is a list of
+key =value pairs, separated by ":". See the
+ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
+
+
+
35.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
+
+
+ Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
+samples per second compensation:
+
+
+
+
+
35.13 asetnsamples# TOC
+
+
Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
+
+
The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
+the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
+signal its end.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+nb_out_samples, n Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
+intended as the number of samples per each channel .
+Default value is 1024.
+
+pad, p If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
+that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
+previous ones. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
+disable padding for the last frame, use:
+
+
asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
+
+
+
+
35.14 asetrate# TOC
+
+
Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
+This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sample_rate, r Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
+
+
+
+
35.15 ashowinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
+The input audio is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
+depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/sample_rate .
+
+pts_time The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
+
+pos position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
+
+fmt The sample format.
+
+chlayout The channel layout.
+
+rate The sample rate for the audio frame.
+
+nb_samples The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
+audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
+
+plane_checksums A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
+
+
+
+
35.16 astats# TOC
+
+
Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
+Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
+where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+length Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
+Default is 0.05 (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is [0.1 - 10].
+
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+DC offset Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
+
+Min level Minimal sample level.
+
+Max level Maximal sample level.
+
+Peak level dB RMS level dB Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
+
+RMS peak dB RMS trough dB Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
+
+Crest factor Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
+
+Flat factor Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
+(i.e. either Min level or Max level ).
+
+Peak count Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
+Min level or Max level .
+
+
+
+
35.17 astreamsync# TOC
+
+
Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set the expression deciding which stream should be
+forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
+the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
+the following variables:
+
+
+b1 b2 number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
+
s1 s2 number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
+
t1 t2 current timestamp of each stream
+
+
+The default value is t1-t2, which means to always forward the stream
+that has a smaller timestamp.
+
+
+
+
35.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Stress-test amerge by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
+input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
+
+
amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
+[a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
+[a2] [b2] amerge
+
+
+
+
35.18 asyncts# TOC
+
+
Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
+dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
+
+
This filter is not built by default, please use aresample to do squeezing/stretching.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+compensate Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
+by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
+
+min_delta The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
+adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
+sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
+
+max_comp The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
+The default value is 500.
+
+first_pts Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
+rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
+no assumption is made about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
+
+
+
+
+
35.19 atempo# TOC
+
+
Adjust audio tempo.
+
+
The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
+specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
+be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
+
+
+
35.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
+
+
+ To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
+
+
+
+
+
35.20 atrim# TOC
+
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
+sample with the timestamp start will be the first sample in the output.
+
+end Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
+audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be
+the last sample in the output.
+
+start_pts Same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
+instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts Same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
+of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_sample The number of the first sample that should be output.
+
+end_sample The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
+samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
+give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
+zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
+to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
+atrim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
+ Keep only the first 1000 samples:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
+
+
+
+
35.21 bandpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width.
+The csg option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
+instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+csg Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
35.22 bandreject# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width .
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
35.23 bass# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
+(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 100 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
35.24 biquad# TOC
+
+
Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
+Where b0 , b1 , b2 and a0 , a1 , a2
+are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
+
+
+
35.25 bs2b# TOC
+
Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
+stereo audio records.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+profile Pre-defined crossfeed level.
+
+default Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
+
+cmoy Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
+
+jmeier Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
+
+
+
+fcut Cut frequency (in Hz).
+
+feed Feed level (in Hz).
+
+
+
+
+
35.26 channelmap# TOC
+
+
Remap input channels to new locations.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the output stream.
+
+map Map channels from input to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the in_channel -out_channel in_channel form. in_channel can be either the name of the input
+channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
+out_channel is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
+channel layout. If out_channel is not given then it is implicitly an
+index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
+
+
+
If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
+output channels, preserving indices.
+
+
For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
+
+
will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
+the input.
+
+
To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC’s native channel order
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
+
+
+
+
35.27 channelsplit# TOC
+
+
Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
+
+
+
For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
+
+
will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
+the left channel and the other the right channel.
+
+
Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
+'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
+-map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
+front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
+side_right.wav
+
+
+
+
35.28 compand# TOC
+
Compress or expand the audio’s dynamic range.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+attacks decays A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
+of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. attacks refers to
+increase of volume and decays refers to decrease of volume. For most
+situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
+shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
+loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
+a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
+
+points A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
+maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
+the following syntax: x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|.... or
+x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
+does not have to be monotonically rising. The point 0/0 is assumed but
+may be overridden (by 0/out-dBn). Typical values for the transfer
+function are -70/-70|-60/-20.
+
+soft-knee Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
+
+gain Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
+function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
+It defaults to 0.
+
+volume Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
+starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
+example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
+companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
+quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
+
+delay Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
+delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
+approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
+operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
+
35.28.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
+noisy environment:
+
+
compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
+ A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
+ Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
+than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
+
+
+
+
35.29 earwax# TOC
+
+
Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
+
+
This filter adds ‘cues’ to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
+so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
+inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
+the listener (standard for speakers).
+
+
Ported from SoX.
+
+
+
35.30 equalizer# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
+filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
+be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
+filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
+
+
In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
+be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+gain, g Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+
+
+
35.30.1 Examples# TOC
+
+ Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
+ Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
+
+
+
+
35.31 flanger# TOC
+
Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+delay Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
+
+depth Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
+
+regen Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
+Default value is 0.
+
+width Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 71.
+
+speed Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
+
+shape Set swept wave shape, can be triangular or sinusoidal .
+Default value is sinusoidal .
+
+phase Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 25.
+
+interp Set delay-line interpolation, linear or quadratic .
+Default is linear .
+
+
+
+
35.32 highpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
35.33 join# TOC
+
+
Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
+
+channel_layout The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
+
+map Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the input_idx .in_channel -out_channel input_idx is the 0-based index of the input stream. in_channel
+can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
+index in the specified input stream. out_channel is the name of the output
+channel.
+
+
+
The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
+explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
+and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
+
+
Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
+'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
+out
+
+
+
+
35.34 ladspa# TOC
+
+
Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer’s Simple Plugin API) plugin.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-ladspa.
+
+
+file, f Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
+variable LADSPA_PATH is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
+each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
+LADSPA_PATH, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
+this order: HOME/.ladspa/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/ladspa/ ,
+/usr/lib/ladspa/ .
+
+plugin, p Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
+one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
+will list all available plugins within the specified library.
+
+controls, c Set the ’|’ separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
+values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
+threshold or gain).
+Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
+c0=value0 |c1=value1 |c2=value2 |..., where
+valuei is the value set on the i -th control.
+If controls is set to help, all available controls and
+their valid ranges are printed.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
+zero inputs.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
+is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
+as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+
+
+
+
35.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
+
+
+ List all available controls and their valid ranges for vcf_notch
+plugin from VCF library:
+
+
ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
+ Simulate low quality audio equipment using Computer Music Toolkit (CMT)
+plugin library:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
+ Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
+(Tom’s Audio Processing plugins):
+
+
ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
+ Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
+ Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin C* Click - Metronome from the
+C* Audio Plugin Suite (CAPS) library:
+
+
ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
+ Apply C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser effect:
+
+
ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
+
+
+
+
35.34.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+cN Modify the N -th control value.
+
+If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
+
+
+
+
35.35 lowpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
35.36 pan# TOC
+
+
Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
+channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
+
+
This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
+stream.
+
+
The filter accepts parameters of the form:
+"l |outdef |outdef |..."
+
+
+l output channel layout or number of channels
+
+outdef output channel specification, of the form:
+"out_name =[gain *]in_name [+[gain *]in_name ...]"
+
+out_name output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
+number (c0, c1, etc.)
+
+gain multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
+
+in_name input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
+named and numbered input channels
+
+
+
If the ‘=’ in a channel specification is replaced by ‘<’, then the gains for
+that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
+avoiding clipping noise.
+
+
+
35.36.1 Mixing examples# TOC
+
+
For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
+factor for the left channel:
+
+
pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
+
+
+
A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
+7-channels surround:
+
+
pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
+
+
+
Note that ffmpeg integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
+that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
+needs.
+
+
+
35.36.2 Remapping examples# TOC
+
+
The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
+
+
+ gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
+ only one input per channel output,
+
+
+
If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
+channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
+remapping.
+
+
For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
+dropping the extra channels:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
+
+
+
Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
+and keep the input channel layout:
+
+
pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
+
+
+
If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
+still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
+
+
+
Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
+front left and right:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
+
+
+
+
35.37 replaygain# TOC
+
+
ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
+outputs it unchanged.
+At end of filtering it displays track_gain and track_peak.
+
+
+
35.38 resample# TOC
+
+
Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
+not meant to be used directly.
+
+
+
35.39 silencedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect silence in an audio stream.
+
+
This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
+or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
+minimum detected noise duration.
+
+
The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+duration, d Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
+
+noise, n Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
+specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
+
+
+
+
35.39.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
+
+
silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
+ Complete example with ffmpeg to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
+tolerance in silence.mp3 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
+
+
+
+
35.40 silenceremove# TOC
+
+
Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+start_periods This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
+the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
+beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
+finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
+the start_periods will be 1 but it can be increased to higher
+values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_duration Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
+trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
+as silence and trimmed off. Default value is 0.
+
+start_threshold This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
+audio, a value of 0 may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
+you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+stop_periods Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
+To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a stop_periods
+that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
+used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
+start_periods , making it suitable for removing periods of silence
+in the middle of the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_duration Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
+more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
+the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_threshold This is the same as start_threshold but for trimming silence from
+the end of audio.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+leave_silence This indicate that stop_duration length of audio should be left intact
+at the beginning of each period of silence.
+For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
+to remove the pauses completely. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
35.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
+that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
+pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
+
+
silenceremove=1:5:0.02
+
+
+
+
35.41 treble# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
+Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
+to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 3000 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
35.42 volume# TOC
+
+
Adjust the input audio volume.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+volume Set audio volume expression.
+
+Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
+
+The output audio volume is given by the relation:
+
+
output_volume = volume * input_volume
+The default value for volume is "1.0".
+
+precision This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
+
+It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
+precision of the volume scaling.
+
+
+fixed 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
+
float 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
+
double 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
+
+
+replaygain Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
+
+
+drop Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
+
+ignore Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
+
+track Prefer the track gain, if present.
+
+album Prefer the album gain, if present.
+
+
+replaygain_preamp Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
+
+Default value for replaygain_preamp is 0.0.
+
+eval Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘once ’
+only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
+when the ‘volume ’ command is sent
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expression for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘once ’.
+
+
+
The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
+
+
+n frame number (starting at zero)
+
nb_channels number of channels
+
nb_consumed_samples number of samples consumed by the filter
+
nb_samples number of samples in the current frame
+
pos original frame position in the file
+
pts frame PTS
+
sample_rate sample rate
+
startpts PTS at start of stream
+
startt time at start of stream
+
t frame time
+
tb timestamp timebase
+
volume last set volume value
+
+
+
Note that when eval is set to ‘once ’ only the
+sample_rate and tb variables are available, all other
+variables will evaluate to NAN.
+
+
+
35.42.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+volume Modify the volume expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
replaygain_noclip Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
+
+Default value for replaygain_noclip is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
35.42.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
35.43 volumedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect the volume of the input video.
+
+
The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
+the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
+
+
In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
+volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
+registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
+the samples).
+
+
All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
+
+
+
35.43.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Here is an excerpt of the output:
+
+
[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
+
+
+
It means that:
+
+ The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
+ The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
+ There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
+
+
+
In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
+raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
+
+
+
+
36 Audio Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
+
+
+
36.1 abuffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+time_base The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
+either a floating-point number or in numerator /denominator form.
+
+sample_rate The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
+
+sample_fmt The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
+the enum AVSampleFormat in libavutil/samplefmt.h
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c or its corresponding integer representation
+from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h
+
+channels The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
+If both channels and channel_layout are specified, then they
+must be consistent.
+
+
+
+
+
36.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
+Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
+6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
+equivalent to:
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
+
+
+
+
36.2 aevalsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
+
+
This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
+channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
+audio signal.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
+channel_layout option is not specified, the selected channel layout
+depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
+specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
+must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
+duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
+complete frame.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
+default to 1024.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+
+
+
+
36.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate silence:
+
+
+ Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
+8000 Hz:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
+ Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
+Center + Back Center) explicitly:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
+ Generate white noise:
+
+
aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
+ Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
+ Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
+
+
aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
+
+
+
+
36.3 anullsrc# TOC
+
+
The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
+as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
+the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
+synth filter).
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+channel_layout, cl
+Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
+representing a channel layout. The default value of channel_layout
+is "stereo".
+
+Check the channel_layout_map definition in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c for the mapping between strings and
+channel layout values.
+
+
+sample_rate, r Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per requested frames.
+
+
+
+
+
36.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
+
+
+ Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
+
+
anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
+
+
+
All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
+
+
+
36.4 flite# TOC
+
+
Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libflite.
+
+
Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+list_voices If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
+immediately. Default value is 0.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
+
+textfile Set the filename containing the text to speak.
+
+text Set the text to speak.
+
+voice, v Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
+kal. See also the list_voices option.
+
+
+
+
36.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read from file speech.txt , and synthesize the text using the
+standard flite voice:
+
+
flite=textfile=speech.txt
+ Read the specified text selecting the slt voice:
+
+
flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Input text to ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Make ffplay speak the specified text, using flite and
+the lavfi device:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
+
+
+
For more information about libflite, check:
+http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/
+
+
+
36.5 sine# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
+
+
The audio signal is bit-exact.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
+
+beep_factor, b Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency beep_factor times
+the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
+
+sample_rate, r Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
+
+samples_per_frame Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
+
+
+
+
36.5.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
+
+
+ Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
+
+
sine=220:4:d=5
+sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
+sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
+
+
+
+
+
37 Audio Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
+
+
+
37.1 abuffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
37.2 anullsink# TOC
+
+
Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
38 Video Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the video filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
+
+
+
38.1 alphaextract# TOC
+
+
Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
+is especially useful with the alphamerge filter.
+
+
+
38.2 alphamerge# TOC
+
+
Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
+grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
+alphaextract to allow the transmission or storage of frame
+sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn’t support an alpha
+channel.
+
+
For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
+and a separate video created with alphaextract , you might use:
+
+
movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
+
+
+
Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
+sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
+input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
+pipeline drops frames. If you’re trying to apply an image as an
+overlay to a video stream, consider the overlay filter instead.
+
+
+
38.3 ass# TOC
+
+
Same as the subtitles filter, except that it doesn’t require libavcodec
+and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
+Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
+the subtitles filter:
+
+
+shaping Set the shaping engine
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘auto ’
+The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
+
‘simple ’
+Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
+
‘complex ’
+Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
+
+
+The default is auto.
+
+
+
+
38.4 bbox# TOC
+
+
Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
+luminance plane.
+
+
This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
+luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
+The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
+log.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+min_val Set the minimal luminance value. Default is 16.
+
+
+
+
38.5 blackdetect# TOC
+
+
Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
+useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
+recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
+duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+black_min_duration, d Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
+be a non-negative floating point number.
+
+Default value is 2.0.
+
+picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
+Express the minimum value for the ratio:
+
+
nb_black_pixels / nb_pixels
+for which a picture is considered black.
+Default value is 0.98.
+
+pixel_black_th, pix_th Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
+
+The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
+pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
+the following equation:
+
+
absolute_threshold = luminance_minimum_value + pixel_black_th * luminance_range_size
+luminance_range_size and luminance_minimum_value depend on
+the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
+formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
+
+Default value is 0.10.
+
+
+
The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
+value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
+
+
blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
+
+
+
+
38.6 blackframe# TOC
+
+
Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
+detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
+the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
+the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+amount The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
+98.
+
+threshold, thresh The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
+32.
+
+
+
+
+
38.7 blend, tblend# TOC
+
+
Blend two video frames into each other.
+
+
The blend filter takes two input streams and outputs one
+stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
+"bottom" layer. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
+
+
The tblend (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
+from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
+the new frame on top of the old frame.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+c0_mode c1_mode c2_mode c3_mode all_mode Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_mode . Default value is normal.
+
+Available values for component modes are:
+
+‘addition ’
+‘and ’
+‘average ’
+‘burn ’
+‘darken ’
+‘difference ’
+‘difference128 ’
+‘divide ’
+‘dodge ’
+‘exclusion ’
+‘hardlight ’
+‘lighten ’
+‘multiply ’
+‘negation ’
+‘normal ’
+‘or ’
+‘overlay ’
+‘phoenix ’
+‘pinlight ’
+‘reflect ’
+‘screen ’
+‘softlight ’
+‘subtract ’
+‘vividlight ’
+‘xor ’
+
+
+c0_opacity c1_opacity c2_opacity c3_opacity all_opacity Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_opacity . Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
+
+c0_expr c1_expr c2_expr c3_expr all_expr Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_expr . Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y the coordinates of the current sample
+
+W H the width and height of currently filtered plane
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+TOP, A Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
+
+BOTTOM, B Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is
+0. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+repeatlast Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
+Default is 1. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+
+
+
38.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
+
+
blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
+ Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover down effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover up-left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
+ Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
+
+
tblend=all_mode=difference128
+
+
+
+
38.8 boxblur# TOC
+
+
Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr luma_power, lp chroma_radius, cr chroma_power, cp alpha_radius, ar alpha_power, ap
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+luma_radius, lr chroma_radius, cr alpha_radius, ar Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
+corresponding input plane.
+
+The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
+greater than the value of the expression min(w,h)/2 for the
+luma and alpha planes, and of min(cw,ch)/2 for the chroma
+planes.
+
+Default value for luma_radius is "2". If not specified,
+chroma_radius and alpha_radius default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_radius .
+
+The expressions can contain the following constants:
+
+w h The input width and height in pixels.
+
+cw ch The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p", hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+luma_power, lp chroma_power, cp alpha_power, ap Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
+corresponding plane.
+
+Default value for luma_power is 2. If not specified,
+chroma_power and alpha_power default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_power .
+
+A value of 0 will disable the effect.
+
+
+
+
38.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
+set to 2:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
+boxblur=2:1
+ Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
+
+
+ Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
+
+
+
+
38.9 codecview# TOC
+
+
Visualize information exported by some codecs.
+
+
Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
+means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
+export_mvs flag in the codec flags2 option.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+mv Set motion vectors to visualize.
+
+Available flags for mv are:
+
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+
+
+
38.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
+
+
+
+
38.10 colorbalance# TOC
+
Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
+
+
The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
+regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
+
+
A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
+value towards the complementary color.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rs gs bs Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
+
+rm gm bm Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
+
+rh gh bh Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+
+
+
38.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add red color cast to shadows:
+
+
+
+
+
38.11 colorlevels# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames using levels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rimin gimin bimin aimin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+rimax gimax bimax aimax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
+(dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
+
+romin gomin bomin aomin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+romax gomax bomax aomax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
+
+
+
+
38.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make video output darker:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
+ Increase contrast:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
+ Make video output lighter:
+
+
colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
+ Increase brightness:
+
+
colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
+
+
+
+
38.12 colorchannelmixer# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
+
+
This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
+the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
+modify is red, the output value will be:
+
+
red =red *rr + blue *rb + green *rg + alpha *ra
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rr rg rb ra Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
+Default is 1 for rr , and 0 for rg , rb and ra .
+
+gr gg gb ga Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
+Default is 1 for gg , and 0 for gr , gb and ga .
+
+br bg bb ba Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
+Default is 1 for bb , and 0 for br , bg and ba .
+
+ar ag ab aa Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
+Default is 1 for aa , and 0 for ar , ag and ab .
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-2.0, 2.0].
+
+
+
+
38.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert source to grayscale:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
+ Simulate sepia tones:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
+
+
+
+
38.13 colormatrix# TOC
+
+
Convert color matrix.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+src dst Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
+specified.
+
+The accepted values are:
+
+‘bt709 ’
+BT.709
+
+‘bt601 ’
+BT.601
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+SMPTE-240M
+
+‘fcc ’
+FCC
+
+
+
+
For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
+
+
colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
+
+
+
+
38.14 copy# TOC
+
+
Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
+testing purposes.
+
+
+
38.15 crop# TOC
+
+
Crop the input video to given dimensions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+w, out_w The width of the output video. It defaults to iw.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+h, out_h The height of the output video. It defaults to ih.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+x The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
+video. It defaults to (in_w-out_w)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+y The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
+It defaults to (in_h-out_h)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+keep_aspect If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
+to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
+ratio. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
The out_w , out_h , x , y parameters are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (cropped) width and height.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+n The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
The expression for out_w may depend on the value of out_h ,
+and the expression for out_h may depend on out_w , but they
+cannot depend on x and y , as x and y are
+evaluated after out_w and out_h .
+
+
The x and y parameters specify the expressions for the
+position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
+are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
+is approximated to the nearest valid value.
+
+
The expression for x may depend on y , and the expression
+for y may depend on x .
+
+
+
38.15.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.16 cropdetect# TOC
+
+
Auto-detect the crop size.
+
+
It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
+recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
+correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+limit Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
+from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8bit based formats). An intensity
+value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
+You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
+on the bitdepth of the pixel format.
+
+round The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
+16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
+get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
+encoding to most video codecs.
+
+reset_count, reset Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
+reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
+detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
+
+This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
+indicates ’never reset’, and returns the largest area encountered during
+playback.
+
+
+
+
38.17 curves# TOC
+
+
Apply color adjustments using curves.
+
+
This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
+component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by N key points
+tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
+values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
+the output frame.
+
+
By default, a component curve is defined by the two points (0;0) and
+(1;1) . This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
+"adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
+
+
The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
+curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
+smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
+strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their x and y values must
+be in the [0;1] interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
+the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
+
+
If there is no key point defined in x=0, the filter will automatically
+insert a (0;0) point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
+in x=1, the filter will automatically insert a (1;1) point.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+preset Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
+to the r , g , b parameters; in this case, the later
+options takes priority on the preset values.
+Available presets are:
+
+‘none ’
+‘color_negative ’
+‘cross_process ’
+‘darker ’
+‘increase_contrast ’
+‘lighter ’
+‘linear_contrast ’
+‘medium_contrast ’
+‘negative ’
+‘strong_contrast ’
+‘vintage ’
+
+Default is none.
+
master, m Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
+is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
+r , g , b or all since it acts like a
+post-processing LUT.
+
red, r Set the key points for the red component.
+
green, g Set the key points for the green component.
+
blue, b Set the key points for the blue component.
+
all Set the key points for all components (not including master).
+Can be used in addition to the other key points component
+options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
+all setting.
+
psfile Specify a Photoshop curves file (.asv) to import the settings from.
+
+
+
To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
+defined using the following syntax: x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+
+
38.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.18 dctdnoiz# TOC
+
+
Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
+
+
This filter is not designed for real time.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sigma, s Set the noise sigma constant.
+
+This sigma defines a hard threshold of 3 * sigma; every DCT
+coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
+
+If you need a more advanced filtering, see expr .
+
+Default is 0.
+
+overlap Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
+may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
+risk of various artefacts.
+
+If the overlapping value doesn’t allow to process the whole input width or
+height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won’t be denoised.
+
+Default value is blocksize -1, which is the best possible setting.
+
+expr, e Set the coefficient factor expression.
+
+For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
+multiplier value for the coefficient.
+
+If this is option is set, the sigma option will be ignored.
+
+The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the c
+variable.
+
+n Set the blocksize using the number of bits. 1<<n defines the
+blocksize , which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
+
+The default value is 3 (8x8) and can be raised to 4 for a
+blocksize of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
+on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
+better de-noising.
+
+
+
+
38.18.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Apply a denoise with a sigma of 4.5:
+
+
+
The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
+
+
dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
+
+
+
Violent denoise using a block size of 16x16:
+
+
+
+
38.19 decimate# TOC
+
+
Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cycle Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
+N means one frame in every batch of N frames will be dropped.
+Default is 5.
+
+dupthresh Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
+is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
+is 1.1
+
+scthresh Set scene change threshold. Default is 15.
+
+blockx blocky Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
+Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
+small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is 32.
+
+ppsrc Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
+stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
+the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
+1, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
+stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
+0.
+
+chroma Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
+1.
+
+
+
+
38.20 dejudder# TOC
+
+
Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
+
+
Judder can be introduced, for instance, by pullup filter. If the original
+source was partially telecined content then the output of pullup,dejudder
+will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
+container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
+rate video.
+
+
The option available in this filter is:
+
+cycle Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
+
+Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
+
+‘4 ’
+If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
+
+‘5 ’
+If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
+
+‘20 ’
+If a mixture of the two.
+
+
+The default is ‘4 ’.
+
+
+
+
38.21 delogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
+pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
+(and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+x y Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
+specified.
+
+w h Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
+specified.
+
+band, t Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
+w and h ). The default value is 4.
+
+show When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
+finding the right x , y , w , and h parameters.
+The default value is 0.
+
+The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
+replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
+immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
+compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
+
+
+
+
+
38.21.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
+and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
+
+
delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
+
+
+
+
38.22 deshake# TOC
+
+
Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
+filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
+tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+x y w h Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
+vectors.
+If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
+rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
+and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
+filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
+box.
+
+This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
+might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
+
+If any or all of x , y , w and h are set to -1
+then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
+without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
+
+Default - search the whole frame.
+
+rx ry Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
+range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
+
+edge Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
+frame. Available values are:
+
+‘blank, 0 ’
+Fill zeroes at blank locations
+
‘original, 1 ’
+Original image at blank locations
+
‘clamp, 2 ’
+Extruded edge value at blank locations
+
‘mirror, 3 ’
+Mirrored edge at blank locations
+
+Default value is ‘mirror ’.
+
+blocksize Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
+default 8.
+
+contrast Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
+the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
+pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
+
+search Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
+
+‘exhaustive, 0 ’
+Set exhaustive search
+
‘less, 1 ’
+Set less exhaustive search.
+
+Default value is ‘exhaustive ’.
+
+filename If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
+specified file.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
38.23 drawbox# TOC
+
+
Draw a colored box on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
+the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the box edge color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is 3.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn box.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn box.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
38.23.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.24 drawgrid# TOC
+
+
Draw a grid on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
+input width and height, respectively, minus thickness, so image gets
+framed. Default to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the grid color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is 1.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input grid cell width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn cell.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn cell.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
38.24.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@0.5
+ Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@0.5
+
+
+
+
38.25 drawtext# TOC
+
+
Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
+libfreetype library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfreetype.
+To enable default font fallback and the font option you need to
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libfontconfig.
+To enable the text_shaping option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfribidi.
+
+
+
38.25.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+box Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
+The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
+The default value of box is 0.
+
+boxcolor The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of boxcolor is "white".
+
+borderw Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using bordercolor .
+The default value of borderw is 0.
+
+bordercolor Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of bordercolor is "black".
+
+expansion Select how the text is expanded. Can be either none,
+strftime (deprecated) or
+normal (default). See the Text expansion section
+below for details.
+
+fix_bounds If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
+
+fontcolor The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of fontcolor is "black".
+
+fontcolor_expr String which is expanded the same way as text to obtain dynamic
+fontcolor value. By default this option has empty value and is not
+processed. When this option is set, it overrides fontcolor option.
+
+font The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
+
+fontfile The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
+This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
+
+fontsize The font size to be used for drawing text.
+The default value of fontsize is 16.
+
+text_shaping If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
+right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
+Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
+By default 1 (if supported).
+
+ft_load_flags The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
+
+The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
+a combination of the following values:
+
+default no_scale no_hinting render no_bitmap vertical_layout force_autohint crop_bitmap pedantic ignore_global_advance_width no_recurse ignore_transform monochrome linear_design no_autohint
+
+Default value is "default".
+
+For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
+libfreetype flags.
+
+shadowcolor The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of shadowcolor is "black".
+
+shadowx shadowy The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
+position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
+values. The default value for both is "0".
+
+start_number The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
+is "0".
+
+tabsize The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
+Default value is 4.
+
+timecode Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
+format. It can be used with or without text parameter. timecode_rate
+option must be specified.
+
+timecode_rate, rate, r Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
+
+text The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
+encoded characters.
+This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
+textfile .
+
+textfile A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
+of UTF-8 encoded characters.
+
+This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
+parameter text .
+
+If both text and textfile are specified, an error is thrown.
+
+reload If set to 1, the textfile will be reloaded before each frame.
+Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
+
+x y The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
+within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
+output image.
+
+The default value of x and y is "0".
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
+
+
+
The parameters for x and y are expressions containing the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+line_h, lh the height of each text line
+
+main_h, h, H the input height
+
+main_w, w, W the input width
+
+max_glyph_a, ascent the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
+coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
+glyphs.
+It is a positive value, due to the grid’s orientation with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_d, descent the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
+used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
+This is a negative value, due to the grid’s orientation, with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_h maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to ascent -
+descent .
+
+max_glyph_w maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+rand(min, max) return a random number included between min and max
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+text_h, th the height of the rendered text
+
+text_w, tw the width of the rendered text
+
+x y the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
+
+These parameters allow the x and y expressions to refer
+each other, so you can for example specify y=x/dar.
+
+
+
+
38.25.2 Text expansion# TOC
+
+
If expansion is set to strftime,
+the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
+expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
+feature is deprecated.
+
+
If expansion is set to none, the text is printed verbatim.
+
+
If expansion is set to normal (which is the default),
+the following expansion mechanism is used.
+
+
The backslash character ’\’, followed by any character, always expands to
+the second character.
+
+
Sequence of the form %{...} are expanded. The text between the
+braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ’:’.
+If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (’:’ or ’}’),
+they should be escaped.
+
+
Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
+text option in the filter argument string and as the filter
+argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
+that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
+problems.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+
+expr, eThe expression evaluation result.
+
+It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
+which accepts the same constants and functions as the x and
+y values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
+example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
+the constants text_w and text_h will have an undefined
+value.
+
+expr_int_format, eifEvaluate the expression’s value and output as formatted integer.
+
+The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the expr function.
+The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are ’x’, ’X’, ’d’ and
+’u’. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
+The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
+It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
+
+gmtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+localtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+metadataFrame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
+
+n, frame_numThe frame number, starting from 0.
+
+pict_typeA 1 character description of the current picture type.
+
+ptsThe timestamp of the current frame.
+It can take up to two arguments.
+
+The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to flt
+for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; hms stands
+for a formatted [-]HH:MM:SS.mmm timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
+
+The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
+
+
+
+
+
38.25.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
For more information about libfreetype, check:
+http://www.freetype.org/ .
+
+
For more information about fontconfig, check:
+http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html .
+
+
For more information about libfribidi, check:
+http://fribidi.org/ .
+
+
+
38.26 edgedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+low high Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
+algorithm.
+
+The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
+connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
+by the low threshold.
+
+low and high threshold values must be chosen in the range
+[0,1], and low should be lesser or equal to high .
+
+Default value for low is 20/255, and default value for high
+is 50/255.
+
+mode Define the drawing mode.
+
+
+‘wires ’
+Draw white/gray wires on black background.
+
+‘colormix ’
+Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
+
+
+Default value is wires .
+
+
+
+
38.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
+ Painting effect without thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
+
+
+
+
38.27 extractplanes# TOC
+
+
Extract color channel components from input video stream into
+separate grayscale video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+planes Set plane(s) to extract.
+
+Available values for planes are:
+
+‘y ’
+‘u ’
+‘v ’
+‘a ’
+‘r ’
+‘g ’
+‘b ’
+
+
+Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
+That means you cannot select r, g, b planes
+with y, u, v planes at same time.
+
+
+
+
38.27.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
+into 3 grayscale outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
+
+
+
+
38.28 elbg# TOC
+
+
Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
+
+
For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
+the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
+of distinct output colors.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options.
+
+
+codebook_length, l Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
+represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
+
+nb_steps, n Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
+mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
+computation time. Default value is 1.
+
+seed, s Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
+UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
+will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
+
+
+
+
38.29 fade# TOC
+
+
Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+type, t The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
+effect.
+Default is in.
+
+start_frame, s Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
+effect at. Default is 0.
+
+nb_frames, n The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
+fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
+At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+Default is 25.
+
+alpha If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_time, st Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
+effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
+whichever comes last. Default is 0.
+
+duration, d The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
+fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
+at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
+
+
+
+
38.29.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.30 field# TOC
+
+
Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
+arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
+non-interlaced.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+type Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is 0 or
+top) or the bottom field (if the value is 1 or
+bottom).
+
+
+
+
38.31 fieldmatch# TOC
+
+
Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
+progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
+frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine fieldmatch needs to be
+followed by a decimation filter such as decimate in the filtergraph.
+
+
The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
+the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
+If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
+fieldmatch will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
+But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
+de-interlaced by a later filter such as yadif before decimation.
+
+
In addition to the various configuration options, fieldmatch can take an
+optional second stream, activated through the ppsrc option. If
+enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
+this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
+help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
+(assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
+or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
+
+
Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
+and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
+which fieldmatch is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
+close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
+
+
The decimate filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
+Do not use fieldmatch and decimate if your input has mixed
+telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+order Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg’s internal parity value).
+
‘bff ’
+Assume bottom field first.
+
‘tff ’
+Assume top field first.
+
+
+Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
+stream.
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mode Set the matching mode or strategy to use. pc mode is the safest in the
+sense that it won’t risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
+possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
+outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
+hand, pcn_ub mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
+but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
+all somewhere in between pc and pcn_ub in terms of risking
+jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
+with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
+
+More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in p/c/n/u/b meaning section.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘pc ’
+2-way matching (p/c)
+
‘pc_n ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
+
‘pc_u ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
+
‘pc_n_ub ’
+2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
+still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
+
‘pcn ’
+3-way matching (p/c/n)
+
‘pcn_ub ’
+3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
+detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
+
+
+The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
+mode assuming order =tff (and field on auto or
+top ).
+
+In terms of speed pc mode is by far the fastest and pcn_ub is
+the slowest.
+
+Default value is pc_n .
+
+ppsrc Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
+input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
+introduction for more details. It is similar to the clip2 feature from
+VFM/TFM.
+
+Default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+field Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
+order unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
+certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
+large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatic (same value as order ).
+
‘bottom ’
+Match from the bottom field.
+
‘top ’
+Match from the top field.
+
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mchroma Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
+cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to 0
+only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
+artifacts. Setting this to 0 could also be used to speed things up at
+the cost of some accuracy.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+y0 y1 These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between y0 and
+y1 from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
+band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
+interfere with the matching. y0 sets the starting scan line and
+y1 sets the ending line; all lines in between y0 and
+y1 (including y0 and y1 ) will be ignored. Setting
+y0 and y1 to the same value will disable the feature.
+y0 and y1 defaults to 0.
+
+scthresh Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
+the luma plane. Good values are in the [8.0, 14.0] range. Scene change
+detection is only relevant in case combmatch =sc . The range for
+scthresh is [0.0, 100.0].
+
+Default value is 12.0.
+
+combmatch When combatch is not none , fieldmatch will take into
+account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
+final match. Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No final matching based on combed scores.
+
‘sc ’
+Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
+
‘full ’
+Use combed scores all the time.
+
+
+Default is sc .
+
+combdbg Force fieldmatch to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
+print them. This setting is known as micout in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No forced calculation.
+
‘pcn ’
+Force p/c/n calculations.
+
‘pcnub ’
+Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
+
+
+Default value is none .
+
+cthresh This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
+essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
+Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
+can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
+-1 (every pixel will be detected as combed) to 255 (no pixel will
+be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
+range is [8, 12].
+
+Default value is 9.
+
+chroma Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
+disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
+causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
+using chroma =0 is usually more reliable, except for the case
+where there is chroma only combing in the source.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+blockx blocky Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
+frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
+combpel pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
+declared combed. See the combpel parameter description for more info.
+Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
+to 512.
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+combpel The number of combed pixels inside any of the blocky by
+blockx size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
+combed. While cthresh controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
+setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
+window defined by the blockx and blocky settings) on the
+frame. Minimum value is 0 and maximum is blocky x blockx (at
+which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
+as MI in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+
+Default value is 80.
+
+
+
+
38.31.1 p/c/n/u/b meaning# TOC
+
+
+
38.31.1.1 p/c/n# TOC
+
+
We assume the following telecined stream:
+
+
+
Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
+Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
+first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
+
+
When fieldmatch is configured to run a matching from bottom
+(field =bottom ) this is how this input stream get transformed:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
+
+Matches: c c n n c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 3 4 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
+To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
+after this operation. See for instance the decimate filter.
+
+
The same operation now matching from top fields (field =top )
+looks like this:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+Matches: c c p p c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 2 3 4
+
+
+
In these examples, we can see what p , c and n mean;
+basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
+
+
+ p matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
+ c matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
+ n matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
+
+
+
+
38.31.1.2 u/b# TOC
+
+
The u and b matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
+from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
+currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
+’x’ is placed above and below each matched fields.
+
+
With bottom matching (field =bottom ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 1 2 2 2
+ 2 2 2 1 3
+
+
+
With top matching (field =top ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 2 2 1 2
+ 2 1 3 2 2
+
+
+
+
38.31.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
+
+
+
Advanced IVTC, with fallback on yadif for still combed frames:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
+
+
+
+
38.32 fieldorder# TOC
+
+
Transform the field order of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+order The output field order. Valid values are tff for top field first or bff
+for bottom field first.
+
+
+
The default value is ‘tff ’.
+
+
The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
+by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
+This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
+
+
If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
+flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
+not alter the incoming video.
+
+
It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
+which is bottom field first.
+
+
For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
+
+
+
+
38.33 fifo# TOC
+
+
Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
+
+
It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
+framework.
+
+
It does not take parameters.
+
+
+
38.34 format# TOC
+
+
Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
+Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
+the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+"pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
38.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.35 fps# TOC
+
+
Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
+frames as necessary.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+fps The desired output frame rate. The default is 25.
+
+round Rounding method.
+
+Possible values are:
+
+zero zero round towards 0
+
inf round away from 0
+
down round towards -infinity
+
up round towards +infinity
+
near round to nearest
+
+The default is near.
+
+start_time Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
+padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
+about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
+For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
+the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
+frames with a negative PTS.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+fps [:round ].
+
+
See also the setpts filter.
+
+
+
38.35.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
+
+
+ Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
+
+
fps=fps=film:round=near
+
+
+
+
38.36 framepack# TOC
+
+
Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
+metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
+framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
+that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the scale and
+fps filters.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+format The desired packing format. Supported values are:
+
+
+sbs The views are next to each other (default).
+
+tab The views are on top of each other.
+
+lines The views are packed by line.
+
+columns The views are packed by column.
+
+frameseq The views are temporally interleaved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
# Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
+
+# Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
38.37 framestep# TOC
+
+
Select one frame every N-th frame.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option:
+
+step Select frame after every step frames.
+Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
38.38 frei0r# TOC
+
+
Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
+
+
To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
+FREI0R_PATH is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
+directories specified by the colon-separated list in FREIOR_PATH.
+Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
+HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/ ,
+/usr/lib/frei0r-1/ .
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
+
+
+
+
A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
+"y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
+R /G /B , where R , G , and B are floating point
+numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as X /Y , where
+X and Y are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
+
+
The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
+effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
+
+
+
38.38.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
+
+
frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
+ Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
+
+
frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
+frei0r=colordistance:violet
+frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
+ Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
+positions:
+
+
frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
+
+
+
For more information, see
+http://frei0r.dyne.org
+
+
+
38.39 fspp# TOC
+
+
Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of spp .
+
+
It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
+processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
+This allows for much higher speed.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is 4.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
+If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
+
+strength Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
+more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
+but also blurrier. Default value is 0 − PSNR optimal.
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
+
38.40 geq# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+lum_expr, lum Set the luminance expression.
+
cb_expr, cb Set the chrominance blue expression.
+
cr_expr, cr Set the chrominance red expression.
+
alpha_expr, a Set the alpha expression.
+
red_expr, r Set the red expression.
+
green_expr, g Set the green expression.
+
blue_expr, b Set the blue expression.
+
+
+
The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
+of the lum_expr , cb_expr , or cr_expr
+options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
+colorspace. If one of the red_expr , green_expr , or
+blue_expr options is specified, it will select an RGB
+colorspace.
+
+
If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
+one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
+If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
+to the luminance expression.
+
+
The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y The coordinates of the current sample.
+
+W H The width and height of the image.
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+p(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the current
+plane.
+
+lum(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the luminance
+plane.
+
+cb(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+cr(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+r(x, y) g(x, y) b(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
+
+alpha(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the alpha
+plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+
+
For functions, if x and y are outside the area, the value will be
+automatically clipped to the closer edge.
+
+
+
38.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Flip the image horizontally:
+
+
+ Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle PI/3 and a
+wavelength of 100 pixels:
+
+
geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
+ Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
+ Generate a quick emboss effect:
+
+
format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
+ Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
+
+
geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
+ Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
+the vignette filter):
+
+
geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
+ Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
+compose with overlay . In this example the video will gradually
+become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
+by the linear gradient:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
+
+
+
+
38.41 gradfun# TOC
+
+
Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
+regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
+Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
+dither them.
+
+
It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
+lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
+bring back the bands.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+strength The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
+the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
+.51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
+valid range.
+
+radius The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
+gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
+regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
+values will be clipped to the valid range.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+strength [:radius ]
+
+
+
38.41.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the filter with a 3.5 strength and radius of 8:
+
+
+ Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
+value):
+
+
+
+
+
+
38.42 haldclut# TOC
+
+
Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
+
+
First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
+The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is 0.
+
repeatlast Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
+Default is 1.
+
+
+
haldclut also has the same interpolation options as lut3d (both
+filters share the same internals).
+
+
More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg’s website
+(Hald CLUT author) at http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html .
+
+
+
38.42.1 Workflow examples# TOC
+
+
+
38.42.1.1 Hald CLUT video stream# TOC
+
+
Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
+
+
+
Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
+
+
Then use it with haldclut to apply it on some random stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
+
+
+
The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
+clut.nut ), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
+to the remaining frames of the mandelbrot stream.
+
+
+
38.42.1.2 Hald CLUT with preview# TOC
+
+
A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of Level*Level*Level by
+Level*Level*Level pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
+biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
+padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
+a preview of the Hald CLUT.
+
+
Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
+haldclut filter:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "
+ pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
+ smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
+ [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
+ [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
+
+
+
It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
+bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
+the color changes.
+
+
Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
+
+
ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
+
+
+
+
38.43 hflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video horizontally.
+
+
For example, to horizontally flip the input video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
38.44 histeq# TOC
+
This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
+per-frame basis.
+
+
It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
+intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
+equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
+viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
+useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
+video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+strength Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
+is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
+approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
+in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
+
+intensity Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
+values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
+the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
+must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
+
+antibanding Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
+the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
+the histogram. Possible values are none, weak or
+strong. It defaults to none.
+
+
+
+
38.45 histogram# TOC
+
+
Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
+
+
The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
+distribution in an image.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Set histogram mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘levels ’
+Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
+image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
+the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
+current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
+
+‘color ’
+Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
+graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
+vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
+(i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
+the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
+side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
+with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
+
+The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
+a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
+(color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
+the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
+square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
+color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
+colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
+the edge of the square.
+
+‘color2 ’
+Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as color but actual chroma values
+are displayed.
+
+‘waveform ’
+Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
+represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
+In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
+side represents value = 255.
+
+Default value is levels.
+
+level_height Set height of level in levels. Default value is 200.
+Allowed range is [50, 2048].
+
+scale_height Set height of color scale in levels. Default value is 12.
+Allowed range is [0, 40].
+
+step Set step for waveform mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
+many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
+Default value is 10. Allowed range is [1, 255].
+
+waveform_mode Set mode for waveform. Can be either row, or column.
+Default is row.
+
+waveform_mirror Set mirroring mode for waveform. 0 means unmirrored, 1
+means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
+side for row mode and at the top for column mode. Default is
+0 (unmirrored).
+
+display_mode Set display mode for waveform and levels.
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘parade ’
+Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
+row waveform mode or one below the other in column waveform mode
+for waveform histogram mode. For levels histogram mode,
+per color component graphs are placed below each other.
+
+Using this display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easy to
+spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
+contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
+grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
+and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
+roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
+making level adjustments the three waveforms.
+
+‘overlay ’
+Presents information identical to that in the parade, except
+that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
+over one another.
+
+This display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easier to spot
+relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
+components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
+or blacks.
+
+Default is parade.
+
+levels_mode Set mode for levels. Can be either linear, or logarithmic.
+Default is linear.
+
+
+
+
38.45.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Calculate and draw histogram:
+
+
ffplay -i input -vf histogram
+
+
+
+
38.46 hqdn3d# TOC
+
+
This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
+image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
+still. It should enhance compressibility.
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+luma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
+It defaults to 4.0.
+
+chroma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
+It defaults to 3.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+luma_tmp A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
+6.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+chroma_tmp A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
+luma_tmp *chroma_spatial /luma_spatial .
+
+
+
+
38.47 hqx# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
+was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for hq2x, 3 for
+hq3x and 4 for hq4x.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
38.48 hue# TOC
+
+
Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+h Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
+and defaults to "0".
+
+s Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "1".
+
+H Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
+expression, and defaults to "0".
+
+b Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "0".
+
+
+
h and H are mutually exclusive, and can’t be
+specified at the same time.
+
+
The b , h , H and s option values are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+n frame count of the input frame starting from 0
+
+pts presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
38.48.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.48.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+b s h H Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
38.49 idet# TOC
+
+
Detect video interlacing type.
+
+
This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
+top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
+repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
+
+
Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
+Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
+
+
The filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+single.current_frame Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+single.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.current_frame Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+multiple.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
+
+repeated.current_frame Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of “neither”, “top”, or “bottom”.
+
+repeated.neither Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
+
+repeated.top Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame’s top field.
+
+repeated.bottom Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame’s bottom field.
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+intl_thres Set interlacing threshold.
+
prog_thres Set progressive threshold.
+
repeat_thres Threshold for repeated field detection.
+
half_life Number of frames after which a given frame’s contribution to the
+statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it’s
+classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
+full weight of 1.0 forever.
+
analyze_interlaced_flag When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
+if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
+If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
+computations, if it is found to be inaccuarte it will be cleared without any
+further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
+method to clean up the interlaced flag
+
+
+
+
38.50 il# TOC
+
+
Deinterleave or interleave fields.
+
+
This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
+deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
+fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
+half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
+You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_mode, l chroma_mode, c alpha_mode, a Available values for luma_mode , chroma_mode and
+alpha_mode are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing.
+
+‘deinterleave, d ’
+Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
+
+‘interleave, i ’
+Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
+
+Default value is none.
+
+luma_swap, ls chroma_swap, cs alpha_swap, as Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
38.51 interlace# TOC
+
+
Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
+lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
+halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
+
+
+
Original Original New Frame
+ Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
+ ========== =========== ==================
+ Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
+ Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
+ Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
+ Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
+ ... ... ...
+New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
+
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+scan This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
+(tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
+
+lowpass Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
+interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
+
+
+
+
38.52 kerndeint# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft’s adaptive kernel
+deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
+progressive frames.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+thresh Set the threshold which affects the filter’s tolerance when
+determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
+in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
+applying the process on every pixels.
+
+map Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+order Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
+0. Default is 0.
+
+sharp Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+twoway Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
38.52.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply default values:
+
+
kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
+ Enable additional sharpening:
+
+
+ Paint processed pixels in white:
+
+
+
+
+
38.53 lenscorrection# TOC
+
+
Correct radial lens distortion
+
+
This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
+of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
+one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
+To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
+and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
+
+
Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
+Digikam from the KDE project.
+
+
In contrast to the vignette filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
+this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas vignette corrects the
+brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
+cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
+be applied before or after lens correction.
+
+
+
38.53.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cx Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+width.
+
cy Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+height.
+
k1 Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
k2 Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
+
+
The formula that generates the correction is:
+
+
r_src = r_tgt * (1 + k1 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^2 + k2 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^4)
+
+
where r_0 is halve of the image diagonal and r_src and r_tgt are the
+distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
+
+
+
38.54 lut3d# TOC
+
+
Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+file Set the 3D LUT file name.
+
+Currently supported formats:
+
+‘3dl ’
+AfterEffects
+
‘cube ’
+Iridas
+
‘dat ’
+DaVinci
+
‘m3d ’
+Pandora
+
+interp Select interpolation mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘nearest ’
+Use values from the nearest defined point.
+
‘trilinear ’
+Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
+
‘tetrahedral ’
+Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
+
+
+
+
+
38.55 lut, lutrgb, lutyuv# TOC
+
+
Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
+to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
+
+
lutyuv applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, lutrgb
+to an RGB input video.
+
+
These filters accept the following parameters:
+
+c0 set first pixel component expression
+
c1 set second pixel component expression
+
c2 set third pixel component expression
+
c3 set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
+
+r set red component expression
+
g set green component expression
+
b set blue component expression
+
a alpha component expression
+
+y set Y/luminance component expression
+
u set U/Cb component expression
+
v set V/Cr component expression
+
+
+
Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
+the corresponding pixel component values.
+
+
The exact component associated to each of the c* options depends on the
+format in input.
+
+
The lut filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
+lutrgb requires RGB pixel formats in input, and lutyuv requires YUV.
+
+
The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+w h The input width and height.
+
+val The input value for the pixel component.
+
+clipval The input value, clipped to the minval -maxval range.
+
+maxval The maximum value for the pixel component.
+
+minval The minimum value for the pixel component.
+
+negval The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
+minval -maxval range; it corresponds to the expression
+"maxval-clipval+minval".
+
+clip(val) The computed value in val , clipped to the
+minval -maxval range.
+
+gammaval(gamma) The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
+clipped to the minval -maxval range. It corresponds to the
+expression
+"pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,gamma )*(maxval-minval)+minval"
+
+
+
+
All expressions default to "val".
+
+
+
38.55.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.56 mergeplanes# TOC
+
+
Merge color channel components from several video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
+planes to the output video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mapping Set input to output plane mapping. Default is 0.
+
+The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
+hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. ’Aa’ describes the
+mapping for the first plane of the output stream. ’A’ sets the number of
+the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and ’a’ the plane number of the
+corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
+similar, ’Bb’ describes the mapping for the output stream second
+plane, ’Cc’ describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
+’Dd’ describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
+
+format Set output pixel format. Default is yuva444p.
+
+
+
+
38.56.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
+ Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
+ Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
+
+
format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
+ Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
+
+
format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
+ Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
+
+
format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
+
+
+
+
38.57 mcdeint# TOC
+
+
Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
+
+
It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
+with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mode Set the deinterlacing mode.
+
+It accepts one of the following values:
+
+‘fast ’
+‘medium ’
+‘slow ’
+use iterative motion estimation
+
‘extra_slow ’
+like ‘slow ’, but use multiple reference frames.
+
+Default value is ‘fast ’.
+
+parity Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
+one of the following values:
+
+
+‘0, tff ’
+assume top field first
+
‘1, bff ’
+assume bottom field first
+
+
+Default value is ‘bff ’.
+
+qp Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
+encoder.
+
+Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
+optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
38.58 mp# TOC
+
+
Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
+
+
This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
+MPlayer/MEncoder.
+
+
This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
+may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
+be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
+depending on them when writing portable scripts.
+
+
The filter accepts the parameters:
+filter_name [:=]filter_params
+
+
filter_name is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
+filter_params is a string containing the parameters accepted by
+the named filter.
+
+
The list of the currently supported filters follows:
+
+eq2 eq ilpack softpulldown
+
+
The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
+of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
+the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
+
+
+
38.58.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
+
+
+
+
See also mplayer(1), http://www.mplayerhq.hu/ .
+
+
+
38.59 mpdecimate# TOC
+
+
Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
+order to reduce frame rate.
+
+
The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
+(e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
+fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+max Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
+positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
+negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
+number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+hi lo frac Set the dropping threshold values.
+
+Values for hi and lo are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
+represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
+corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
+out differently over the block.
+
+A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
+than a threshold of hi , and if no more than frac blocks (1
+meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of lo .
+
+Default value for hi is 64*12, default value for lo is
+64*5, and default value for frac is 0.33.
+
+
+
+
+
38.60 negate# TOC
+
+
Negate input video.
+
+
It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
+alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
+
+
+
38.61 noformat# TOC
+
+
Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
+input to the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
38.61.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Force libavfilter to use a format different from yuv420p for the
+input to the vflip filter:
+
+
noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
+ Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
+
+
noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
+
+
+
+
38.62 noise# TOC
+
+
Add noise on video input frame.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+all_seed c0_seed c1_seed c2_seed c3_seed Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_seed . Default value is 123457.
+
+all_strength, alls c0_strength, c0s c1_strength, c1s c2_strength, c2s c3_strength, c3s Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+all_strength . Default value is 0. Allowed range is [0, 100].
+
+all_flags, allf c0_flags, c0f c1_flags, c1f c2_flags, c2f c3_flags, c3f Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if all_flags .
+Available values for component flags are:
+
+‘a ’
+averaged temporal noise (smoother)
+
‘p ’
+mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
+
‘t ’
+temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
+
‘u ’
+uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
+
+
+
+
+
38.62.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
+
+
noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
+
+
+
+
38.63 null# TOC
+
+
Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
38.64 ocv# TOC
+
+
Apply a video transform using libopencv.
+
+
To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libopencv.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
+
+filter_params The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
+values are assumed.
+
+
+
+
Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
+information:
+http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html
+
+
Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
+
+
+
38.64.1 dilate# TOC
+
+
Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvDilate.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el |nb_iterations .
+
+
struct_el represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
+cols xrows +anchor_x xanchor_y /shape
+
+
cols and rows represent the number of columns and rows of
+the structuring element, anchor_x and anchor_y the anchor
+point, and shape the shape for the structuring element. shape
+must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
+
+
If the value for shape is "custom", it must be followed by a
+string of the form "=filename ". The file with name
+filename is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
+printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
+shape is used, cols and rows are ignored, the number
+or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
+
+
The default value for struct_el is "3x3+0x0/rect".
+
+
nb_iterations specifies the number of times the transform is
+applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
# Use the default values
+ocv=dilate
+
+# Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
+ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
+
+# Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
+# The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
+# *
+# ***
+# *****
+# ***
+# *
+# The specified columns and rows are ignored
+# but the anchor point coordinates are not
+ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
+
+
+
+
38.64.2 erode# TOC
+
+
Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvErode.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el :nb_iterations ,
+with the same syntax and semantics as the dilate filter.
+
+
+
38.64.3 smooth# TOC
+
+
Smooth the input video.
+
+
The filter takes the following parameters:
+type |param1 |param2 |param3 |param4 .
+
+
type is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
+the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
+or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
+
+
The meaning of param1 , param2 , param3 , and param4
+depend on the smooth type. param1 and
+param2 accept integer positive values or 0. param3 and
+param4 accept floating point values.
+
+
The default value for param1 is 3. The default value for the
+other parameters is 0.
+
+
These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
+libopencv function cvSmooth.
+
+
+
38.65 overlay# TOC
+
+
Overlay one video on top of another.
+
+
It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
+video on which the second input is overlaid.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+x y Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
+on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
+the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
+overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
+
+eof_action The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
+one of the following values:
+
+
+repeat Repeat the last frame (the default).
+
endall End both streams.
+
pass Pass the main input through.
+
+
+eval Set when the expressions for x , and y are evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
+when a command is processed
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘frame ’.
+
+shortest If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
+terminates. Default value is 0.
+
+format Set the format for the output video.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘yuv420 ’
+force YUV420 output
+
+‘yuv422 ’
+force YUV422 output
+
+‘yuv444 ’
+force YUV444 output
+
+‘rgb ’
+force RGB output
+
+
+Default value is ‘yuv420 ’.
+
+rgb (deprecated) If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
+color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
+format instead.
+
+repeatlast If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
+main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
+behavior. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The x , and y expressions can contain the following
+parameters.
+
+
+main_w, W main_h, H The main input width and height.
+
+overlay_w, w overlay_h, h The overlay input width and height.
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
+format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and
+vsub is 1.
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
Note that the n , pos , t variables are available only
+when evaluation is done per frame , and will evaluate to NAN
+when eval is set to ‘init ’.
+
+
Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
+order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
+to pass the two inputs through a setpts=PTS-STARTPTS filter to
+have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
+the movie filter does.
+
+
You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
+efficiency of such approach.
+
+
+
38.65.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+x y Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
38.65.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.66 owdenoise# TOC
+
+
Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+depth Set depth.
+
+Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
+slow down filtering.
+
+Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is 8.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+
+
+
38.67 pad# TOC
+
+
Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
+provided x , y coordinates.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+width, w height, h Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
+paddings added. If the value for width or height is 0, the
+corresponding input size is used for the output.
+
+The width expression can reference the value set by the
+height expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of width and height is 0.
+
+x y Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
+with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
+
+The x expression can reference the value set by the y
+expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of x and y is 0.
+
+color Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of color is "black".
+
+
+
The value for the width , height , x , and y
+options are expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input video width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
+specified by the width and height expressions.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+x y The x and y offsets as specified by the x and y
+expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
38.67.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.68 perspective# TOC
+
+
Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
+Default values are 0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H with which perspective will remain unchanged.
+If the sense option is set to source, then the specified points will be sent
+to the corners of the destination. If the sense option is set to destination,
+then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+W H the width and height of video frame.
+
+
+interpolation Set interpolation for perspective correction.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘linear ’
+‘cubic ’
+
+
+Default value is ‘linear ’.
+
+sense Set interpretation of coordinate options.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘0, source ’
+
+Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
+the corners of the destination.
+
+
+‘1, destination ’
+
+Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
+by the given coordinates.
+
+Default value is ‘source ’.
+
+
+
+
+
+
38.69 phase# TOC
+
+
Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
+
+
The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
+opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+mode Set phase mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
+Filter will delay the bottom field.
+
+‘b ’
+Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
+Filter will delay the top field.
+
+‘p ’
+Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
+for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
+actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
+
+‘a ’
+Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
+opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ modes on a frame by frame
+basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
+then this works just like ‘u ’.
+
+‘u ’
+Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ on a frame by frame basis by
+analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
+match between the fields.
+
+‘T ’
+Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘B ’
+Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘A ’
+Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using field flags and
+image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
+like ‘U ’. This is the default mode.
+
+‘U ’
+Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis only.
+
+
+
+
+
38.70 pixdesctest# TOC
+
+
Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
+testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
+
+
For example:
+
+
format=monow, pixdesctest
+
+
+
can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
+
+
+
38.71 pp# TOC
+
+
Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
+library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (--enable-gpl).
+Subfilters must be separated by ’/’ and can be disabled by prepending a ’-’.
+Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
+interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+subfilters Set postprocessing subfilters string.
+
+
+
All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
+
+
+a/autoq Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
+
+c/chrom Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
+
+y/nochrom Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
+
+n/noluma Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
+
+
+
These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a ’|’.
+
+
Available subfilters are:
+
+
+hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+
+
The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
+flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
+thresholds.
+
+
+h1/x1hdeblock Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
+
+v1/x1vdeblock Experimental vertical deblocking filter
+
+dr/dering Deringing filter
+
+tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
+threshold1 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold2 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold3 larger -> stronger filtering
+
+
+al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
+f/fullyrange Stretch luminance to 0-255.
+
+
+lb/linblenddeint Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+filtering all lines with a (1 2 1) filter.
+
+li/linipoldeint Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+linearly interpolating every second line.
+
+ci/cubicipoldeint Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
+cubically interpolating every second line.
+
+md/mediandeint Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
+median filter to every second line.
+
+fd/ffmpegdeint FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
+second line with a (-1 4 2 4 -1) filter.
+
+l5/lowpass5 Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
+block by filtering all lines with a (-1 2 6 2 -1) filter.
+
+fq/forceQuant[|quantizer] Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
+specify.
+
+quantizer Quantizer to use
+
+
+de/default Default pp filter combination (hb|a,vb|a,dr|a)
+
+fa/fast Fast pp filter combination (h1|a,v1|a,dr|a)
+
+ac High quality pp filter combination (ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a)
+
+
+
+
38.71.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
+brightness/contrast:
+
+
+ Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
+
+
+ Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
+
+
pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
+ Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
+automatically depending on available CPU time:
+
+
+
+
+
38.72 pp7# TOC
+
Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the spp filter,
+similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
+used after IDCT.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
+0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
+(if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding.
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
‘medium ’
+Set medium thresholding (good results, default).
+
+
+
+
+
38.73 psnr# TOC
+
+
Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
+Ratio) between two input videos.
+
+
This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
+considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
+output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
+the PSNR.
+
+
Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
+this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
+have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
+
+
The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
+
+
The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
+frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
+equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
+
+
+
PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
+
+
+
Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
+image.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+stats_file, f If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
+each individual frame.
+
+
+
The file printed if stats_file is selected, contains a sequence of
+key/value pairs of the form key :value for each compared
+couple of frames.
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
+
+mse_avg Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames, averaged over all the image components.
+
+mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames for the component specified by the suffix.
+
+psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
+specified by the suffix.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
+
+
+
On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
+reference file ref_movie.mpg . The PSNR of each individual frame
+is stored in stats.log .
+
+
+
38.74 pullup# TOC
+
+
Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
+hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
+content.
+
+
The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
+its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
+onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
+fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
+
+
To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
+pullup, use fps=24000/1001 if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
+fps=24 for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+jl jr jt jb These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
+bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
+while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
+The default is 8 pixels on each side.
+
+sb Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
+filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
+excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
+Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
+This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
+the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
+Default value is 0.
+
+mp Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘l ’
+Use luma plane.
+
+‘u ’
+Use chroma blue plane.
+
+‘v ’
+Use chroma red plane.
+
+
+This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
+for doing filter’s computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
+source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
+is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
+The main purpose of setting mp to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
+load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
+
+
+
For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
+necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
+telecine NTSC input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
+
+
+
+
38.75 qp# TOC
+
+
Change video quantization parameters (QP).
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+qp Set expression for quantization parameter.
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
+the following constants:
+
+
+known 1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.
+
+qp Sequentional index starting from -129 to 128.
+
+
+
+
38.75.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Some equation like:
+
+
+
+
+
38.76 removelogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
+pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
+comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
+libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
+video stream being processed.
+
+
+
Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
+considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
+the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
+rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
+recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
+visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
+filter once or twice.
+
+
If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
+logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
+reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
+much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
+the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
+pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
+
+
+
38.77 rotate# TOC
+
+
Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
A description of the optional parameters follows.
+
+angle, a Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
+clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
+result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
+
+This expression is evaluated for each frame.
+
+out_w, ow Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+out_h, oh Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+bilinear Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
+it. Default value is 1.
+
+fillcolor, c Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
+image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
+background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
+
+Default value is "black".
+
+
+
The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
+before the first frame is filtered.
+
+t time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
+configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_w, iw in_h, ih the input video width and height
+
+out_w, ow out_h, oh the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
+specified by the width and height expressions
+
+rotw(a) roth(a) the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
+video rotated by a radians.
+
+These are only available when computing the out_w and
+out_h expressions.
+
+
+
+
38.77.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
+
+
+ Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
+
+
+ Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
+seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
+
+
rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
+ Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
+input video is always completely contained in the output:
+
+
rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
+ Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
+shown:
+
+
rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
+
+
+
+
38.77.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
The filter supports the following commands:
+
+
+a, angle Set the angle expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
38.78 sab# TOC
+
+
Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
+value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
+in slower processing.
+
+luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
+value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
+be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
+greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
+processing.
+
+chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
+must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
+
+
+
Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
+corresponding luma option value.
+
+
+
38.79 scale# TOC
+
+
Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
+
+
The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
+of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
+
+
If the input image format is different from the format requested by
+the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
+requested format.
+
+
+
38.79.1 Options# TOC
+
The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
+supported by the libswscale scaler.
+
+
See (ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for
+the complete list of scaler options.
+
+
+width, w height, h Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
+dimension.
+
+If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
+
+If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
+maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
+other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
+used
+
+If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
+that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
+specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
+dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
+expression.
+
+interl Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+Force interlaced aware scaling.
+
+‘0 ’
+Do not apply interlaced scaling.
+
+‘-1 ’
+Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
+are flagged as interlaced or not.
+
+
+Default value is ‘0 ’.
+
+flags Set libswscale scaling flags. See
+(ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for the
+complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
+the default flags.
+
+size, s Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+in_color_matrix out_color_matrix Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder.
+
+If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
+
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘bt709 ’
+Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
+Recommendation BT.709.
+
+‘fcc ’
+Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
+Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
+
+‘bt601 ’
+Set color space conforming to:
+
+
+ ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
+
+ ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
+
+ Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
+
+
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
+
+
+in_range out_range Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
+range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘jpeg/full/pc ’
+Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+‘mpeg/tv ’
+Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+
+force_original_aspect_ratio Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
+keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘disable ’
+Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
+
+‘decrease ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
+
+‘increase ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
+
+
+
+One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device’s
+maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
+that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
+1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
+decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
+1280x533.
+
+Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for w
+or h , you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
+to work.
+
+
+
+
The values of the w and h options are expressions
+containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (scaled) width and height
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h
+
+a The same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from (iw / ih) * sar.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+ohsub ovsub horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
38.79.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.80 separatefields# TOC
+
+
The separatefields takes a frame-based video input and splits
+each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
+with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
+
+
This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
+of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
+If it gets it wrong use setfield filter before separatefields filter.
+
+
+
38.81 setdar, setsar# TOC
+
+
The setdar filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
+output video.
+
+
This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
+Ratio, according to the following equation:
+
+
DAR = HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION / VERTICAL_RESOLUTION * SAR
+
+
+
Keep in mind that the setdar filter does not modify the pixel
+dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
+this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
+e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
+applied.
+
+
The setsar filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
+the filter output video.
+
+
Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
+output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
+above.
+
+
Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the setsar
+filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
+another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+r, ratio, dar (setdar only), sar (setsar only) Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
+
+The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
+a string of the form num :den , where num and
+den are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
+the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
+In case the form "num :den " is used, the : character
+should be escaped.
+
+max Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
+denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
+Default value is 100.
+
+
+
+
The parameter sar is an expression containing
+the following constants:
+
+
+E, PI, PHI These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
+(Euler’s number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
+
+w, h The input width and height.
+
+a These are the same as w / h .
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
+(w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub, vsub Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
38.81.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
+
+
setdar=dar=1.77777
+setdar=dar=16/9
+setdar=dar=1.77777
+ To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
+
+
+ To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
+1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
+
+
setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
+
+
+
+
38.82 setfield# TOC
+
+
Force field for the output video frame.
+
+
The setfield filter marks the interlace type field for the
+output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
+corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
+following filters (e.g. fieldorder or yadif).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Keep the same field property.
+
+‘bff ’
+Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
+
+‘tff ’
+Mark the frame as top-field-first.
+
+‘prog ’
+Mark the frame as progressive.
+
+
+
+
+
38.83 showinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
+The input video is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
+
+pts_time The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+seconds.
+
+pos The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
+
+fmt The pixel format name.
+
+sar The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
+num /den .
+
+s The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+i The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
+for bottom field first).
+
+iskey This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+type The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
+P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
+Also refer to the documentation of the AVPictureType enum and of
+the av_get_picture_type_char function defined in
+libavutil/avutil.h .
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
+
+plane_checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
+expressed in the form "[c0 c1 c2 c3 ]".
+
+
+
+
38.84 shuffleplanes# TOC
+
+
Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+map0 The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
+
+map1 The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
+
+map2 The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
+
+map3 The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
+
+
+
+
The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
+
+
Swap the second and third planes of the input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
38.85 signalstats# TOC
+
Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
+with the digitization of analog video media.
+
+
By default the filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+YMIN Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YLOW Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YAVG Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+YHIGH Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YMAX Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMIN Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+ULOW Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UAVG Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+UHIGH Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMAX Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMIN Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VLOW Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VAVG Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+VHIGH Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMAX Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+SATMIN Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATLOW Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATAVG Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
+of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATHIGH Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATMAX Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+HUEMED Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+HUEAVG Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+YDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+UDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+VDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+stat out
+stat specify an additional form of image analysis.
+out output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
+
+Both options accept the following values:
+
+
+‘tout ’
+Identify temporal outliers pixels. A temporal outlier is a pixel
+unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
+include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
+
+‘vrep ’
+Identify vertical line repetition . Vertical line repetition includes
+similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
+repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
+analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
+analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
+
+‘brng ’
+Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
+
+
+
+color, c Set the highlight color for the out option. The default color is
+yellow.
+
+
+
+
38.85.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.86 smartblur# TOC
+
+
Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_threshold, lt Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_threshold, ct Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
+is set.
+
+
+
38.87 stereo3d# TOC
+
+
Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+in Set stereoscopic image format of input.
+
+Available values for input image formats are:
+
+‘sbsl ’
+side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbsr ’
+side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘sbs2l ’
+side by side parallel with half width resolution
+(left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbs2r ’
+side by side crosseye with half width resolution
+(right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘abl ’
+above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘abr ’
+above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘ab2l ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘ab2r ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘al ’
+alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
+
+‘ar ’
+alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
+
+Default value is ‘sbsl ’.
+
+
+out Set stereoscopic image format of output.
+
+Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
+
+‘arbg ’
+anaglyph red/blue gray
+(red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘argg ’
+anaglyph red/green gray
+(red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcg ’
+anaglyph red/cyan gray
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arch ’
+anaglyph red/cyan half colored
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcc ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcd ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmg ’
+anaglyph green/magenta gray
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmh ’
+anaglyph green/magenta half colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmc ’
+anaglyph green/magenta colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmd ’
+anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybg ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue gray
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybh ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybc ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybd ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘irl ’
+interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
+
+‘irr ’
+interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
+
+‘ml ’
+mono output (left eye only)
+
+‘mr ’
+mono output (right eye only)
+
+
+Default value is ‘arcd ’.
+
+
+
+
38.87.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
+
+
+ Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
+
+
+
+
+
38.88 spp# TOC
+
+
Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
+at several (or - in the case of quality level 6 - all) shifts
+and average the results.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-6. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 6 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding (default).
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
38.89 subtitles# TOC
+
+
Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libass. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
+libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
+Alpha) subtitles format.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
+
+original_size Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
+was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
+the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
+this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
+changed.
+
+charenc Set subtitles input character encoding. subtitles filter only. Only
+useful if not UTF-8.
+
+stream_index, si Set subtitles stream index. subtitles filter only.
+
+
+
If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
+specifies the filename .
+
+
For example, to render the file sub.srt on top of the input
+video, use the command:
+
+
+
which is equivalent to:
+
+
subtitles=filename=sub.srt
+
+
+
To render the default subtitles stream from file video.mkv , use:
+
+
+
To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
+
+
subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
+
+
+
+
38.90 super2xsai# TOC
+
+
Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
+Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
+
+
Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
+
+
+
38.91 swapuv# TOC
+
Swap U & V plane.
+
+
+
38.92 telecine# TOC
+
+
Apply telecine process to the video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+first_field
+‘top, t ’
+top field first
+
‘bottom, b ’
+bottom field first
+The default value is top.
+
+
+pattern A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
+The default value is 23.
+
+
+
+
Some typical patterns:
+
+NTSC output (30i):
+27.5p: 32222
+24p: 23 (classic)
+24p: 2332 (preferred)
+20p: 33
+18p: 334
+16p: 3444
+
+PAL output (25i):
+27.5p: 12222
+24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
+16.67p: 33
+16p: 33333334
+
+
+
+
38.93 thumbnail# TOC
+
Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of n frames, the filter
+will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of n frames until
+the end. Default is 100.
+
+
+
Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger n
+value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
+
+
+
38.93.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract one picture each 50 frames:
+
+
+ Complete example of a thumbnail creation with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
+
+
+
+
38.94 tile# TOC
+
+
Tile several successive frames together.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+layout Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
+this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+nb_frames Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
+than or equal to w xh . The default value is 0, meaning all
+the area will be used.
+
+margin Set the outer border margin in pixels.
+
+padding Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
+more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
+refer to the pad video filter.
+
+color Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of color
+is "black".
+
+
+
+
38.94.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.95 tinterlace# TOC
+
+
Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
+
+
Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
+considered odd.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
+as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘merge, 0 ’
+Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
+generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘drop_odd, 1 ’
+Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ ‘drop_even, 2 ’
+Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+ ‘pad, 3 ’
+Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
+generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+ ‘interleave_top, 4 ’
+Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘interleave_bottom, 5 ’
+Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+
+Output:
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+ ‘interlacex2, 6 ’
+Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
+containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
+the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
+the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
+field synchronisation.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+
+
+Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
+compatibility reasons.
+
+Default mode is merge.
+
+flags Specify flags influencing the filter process.
+
+Available value for flags is:
+
+
+low_pass_filter, vlfp Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
+Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
+destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
+vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace ’twitter’ and Moire
+patterning.
+
+Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for mode
+interleave_top and interleave_bottom .
+
+
+
+
+
+
38.96 transpose# TOC
+
+
Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+dir Specify the transposition direction.
+
+Can assume the following values:
+
+‘0, 4, cclock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
+
+
L.R L.l
+. . -> . .
+l.r R.r
+ ‘1, 5, clock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R l.L
+. . -> . .
+l.r r.R
+ ‘2, 6, cclock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R R.r
+. . -> . .
+l.r L.l
+ ‘3, 7, clock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
+
+
L.R r.R
+. . -> . .
+l.r l.L
+
+
+For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
+video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
+deprecated, the passthrough option should be used instead.
+
+Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
+symbolic constants.
+
+passthrough Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
+specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Always apply transposition.
+
‘portrait ’
+Preserve portrait geometry (when height >= width ).
+
‘landscape ’
+Preserve landscape geometry (when width >= height ).
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+
+
For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
+layout:
+
+
transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
+
+
+
The command above can also be specified as:
+
+
+
+
38.97 trim# TOC
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
+timestamp start will be the first frame in the output.
+
+end Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
+immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be the last
+frame in the output.
+
+start_pts This is the same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts This is the same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_frame The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
+
+end_frame The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
+frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
+the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
+setpts filter after the trim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
+ Keep only the first second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
+
+
+
+
+
38.98 unsharp# TOC
+
+
Sharpen or blur the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_msize_x, lx Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
+3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_msize_y, ly Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
+and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_amount, la Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_msize_x, cx Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_msize_y, cy Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_amount, ca Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 0.0.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
+string ’5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0’.
+
+
+
38.98.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
+
+
unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
+ Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
+
+
+
+
+
38.99 uspp# TOC
+
+
Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
+the image at several (or - in the case of quality level 8 - all)
+shifts and average the results.
+
+
The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
+decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
+DCT similar to MJPEG.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-8. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 8 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+
+
+
38.100 vidstabdetect# TOC
+
+
Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
+vidstabtransform for pass 2.
+
+
This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
+transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
+the vidstabtransform filter.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+result Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
+Default value is transforms.trf .
+
+shakiness Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
+integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
+value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
+
+accuracy Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
+range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
+accuracy. Default value is 15.
+
+stepsize Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
+scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
+
+mincontrast Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
+discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
+value is 0.3.
+
+tripod Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
+
+If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
+in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
+is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
+the camera view absolutely still.
+
+If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
+
+show Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
+integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
+visualization.
+
+
+
+
38.100.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use default values:
+
+
+ Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
+mytransforms.trf :
+
+
vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
+ Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
+video:
+
+
+ Analyze a video with medium shakiness using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
+
+
+
+
38.101 vidstabtransform# TOC
+
+
Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
+see vidstabdetect for pass 1.
+
+
Read a file with transform information for each frame and
+apply/compensate them. Together with the vidstabdetect
+filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
+http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab . It is important to also use
+the unsharp filter, see below.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
+
38.101.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+input Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
+transforms.trf .
+
+smoothing Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
+camera movements. Default value is 10.
+
+For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
+past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
+larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
+the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
+camera is simulated.
+
+optalgo Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘gauss ’
+gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
+
‘avg ’
+averaging on transformations
+
+
+maxshift Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
+meaning no limit.
+
+maxangle Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
+value is -1, meaning no limit.
+
+crop Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
+compensation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘keep ’
+keep image information from previous frame (default)
+
‘black ’
+fill the border black
+
+
+invert Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
+
+relative Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
+absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
+
+zoom Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
+effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
+zoom).
+
+optzoom Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘0 ’
+disabled
+
‘1 ’
+optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
+will lead to visible borders) (default)
+
‘2 ’
+optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
+visible), see zoomspeed
+
+
+Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
+
+zoomspeed Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
+optzoom is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
+0.25.
+
+interpol Specify type of interpolation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘no ’
+no interpolation
+
‘linear ’
+linear only horizontal
+
‘bilinear ’
+linear in both directions (default)
+
‘bicubic ’
+cubic in both directions (slow)
+
+
+tripod Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
+relative=0:smoothing=0. Default value is 0.
+
+Use also tripod option of vidstabdetect .
+
+debug Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
+are written to the temporary file global_motions.trf . Default
+value is 0.
+
+
+
+
38.101.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
38.102 vflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video vertically.
+
+
For example, to vertically flip a video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
38.103 vignette# TOC
+
+
Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+angle, a Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0,PI/2] range.
+
+Default value: "PI/5"
+
+x0 y0 Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively "w/2" and "h/2"
+by default.
+
+mode Set forward/backward mode.
+
+Available modes are:
+
+‘forward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
+
+‘backward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
+This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
+detection to extract the lens angle and other settings (yet). It can
+also be used to create a burning effect.
+
+
+Default value is ‘forward ’.
+
+eval Set evaluation mode for the expressions (angle , x0 , y0 ).
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
+
+‘frame ’
+Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
+‘init ’ mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
+allows advanced dynamic expressions.
+
+
+Default value is ‘init ’.
+
+dither Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is 1
+(enabled).
+
+aspect Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
+Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
+following the dimensions of the video.
+
+Default is 1/1.
+
+
+
+
38.103.1 Expressions# TOC
+
+
The alpha , x0 and y0 expressions can contain the
+following parameters.
+
+
+w h input width and height
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pts the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
+TB units, NAN if undefined
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
+
38.103.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
+
+
+ Make a flickering vignetting:
+
+
vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
+
+
+
+
38.104 w3fdif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
+Deinterlacing Filter").
+
+
Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
+implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
+Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
+uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
+
+
There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
+and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
+be set by passing an optional parameter:
+
+
+filter Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Simple filter coefficient set.
+
‘complex ’
+More-complex filter coefficient set.
+
+Default value is ‘complex ’.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
+
+
+‘all ’
+Deinterlace all frames,
+
‘interlaced ’
+Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+Default value is ‘all ’.
+
+
+
+
38.105 xbr# TOC
+
Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
+art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
+http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134 .
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for 2xBR, 3 for
+3xBR and 4 for 4xBR.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
38.106 yadif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
+filter").
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+
+mode The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+0, send_frame Output one frame for each frame.
+
1, send_field Output one frame for each field.
+
2, send_frame_nospatial Like send_frame, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
3, send_field_nospatial Like send_field, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
+
+The default value is send_frame.
+
+parity The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
+of the following values:
+
+
+0, tff Assume the top field is first.
+
1, bff Assume the bottom field is first.
+
-1, auto Enable automatic detection of field parity.
+
+
+The default value is auto.
+If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
+top field first will be assumed.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
+values:
+
+
+0, all Deinterlace all frames.
+
1, interlaced Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+The default value is all.
+
+
+
+
38.107 zoompan# TOC
+
+
Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+zoom, z Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
+
+x y Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
+
+d Set the duration expression in number of frames.
+This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
+single input image.
+
+s Set the output image size, default is ’hd720’.
+
+
+
Each expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+in_w, iw Input width.
+
+in_h, ih Input height.
+
+out_w, ow Output width.
+
+out_h, oh Output height.
+
+in Input frame count.
+
+on Output frame count.
+
+x y Last calculated ’x’ and ’y’ position from ’x’ and ’y’ expression
+for current input frame.
+
+px py ’x’ and ’y’ of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
+not yet such frame (first input frame).
+
+zoom Last calculated zoom from ’z’ expression for current input frame.
+
+pzoom Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
+
+duration Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from ’d’ expression
+for each input frame.
+
+pduration number of output frames created for previous input frame
+
+a Rational number: input width / input height
+
+sar sample aspect ratio
+
+dar display aspect ratio
+
+
+
+
+
38.107.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
+
+
zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
+
+
+
+
+
39 Video Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
+
+
+
39.1 buffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+video_size Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
+manual.
+
+width The input video width.
+
+height The input video height.
+
+pix_fmt A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
+It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
+name.
+
+time_base Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
+
+frame_rate Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
+
+pixel_aspect, sar The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
+
+sws_param Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
+is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
+input size or format.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
+with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
+square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
+Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
+(check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in libavutil/pixfmt.h ),
+this example corresponds to:
+
+
buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
+syntax is deprecated:
+
+
width :height :pix_fmt :time_base.num :time_base.den :pixel_aspect.num :pixel_aspect.den [:sws_param ]
+
+
+
39.2 cellauto# TOC
+
+
Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
+
+
The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
+filename , and pattern options. If such options are
+not specified an initial state is created randomly.
+
+
At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
+the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
+frame is filled is defined by the scroll option.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified file.
+In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+file will be ignored.
+
+pattern, p Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified string.
+
+Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+string will be ignored.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
+is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
+1/PHI.
+
+This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
+Default value is 110.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename or pattern is specified, the size is set
+by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
+height is set to width * PHI.
+
+If size is set, it must contain the width of the specified
+pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
+larger row.
+
+If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
+defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
+
+scroll If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
+have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
+written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
+Defaults to 1.
+
+start_full, full If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
+outputting the first frame.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+
+
+
39.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read the initial state from pattern , and specify an output of
+size 200x400.
+
+
cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
+ Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
+ratio of 2/3:
+
+
cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
+centered on an initial row with width 100:
+
+
cellauto=p=@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+ Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
+
+
cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+
+
+
+
39.3 mandelbrot# TOC
+
+
Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
+point specified with start_x and start_y .
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+end_pts Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
+
+end_scale Set the terminal scale value.
+Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
+
+inner Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
+Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
+
+It shall assume one of the following values:
+
+black Set black mode.
+
convergence Show time until convergence.
+
mincol Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
+
period Set period mode.
+
+
+Default value is mincol .
+
+bailout Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
+
+maxiter Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
+algorithm. Default value is 7189.
+
+outer Set outer coloring mode.
+It shall assume one of following values:
+
+iteration_count Set iteration cound mode.
+
normalized_iteration_count set normalized iteration count mode.
+
+Default value is normalized_iteration_count .
+
+rate, r Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
+value is "25".
+
+size, s Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
+size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
+
+start_scale Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
+
+start_x Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
+
+start_y Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
+
+
+
+
39.4 mptestsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
+
+
The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
+This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+test, t
+Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
+
+dc_luma dc_chroma freq_luma freq_chroma amp_luma amp_chroma cbp mv ring1 ring2 all
+
+Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
+
+
+
39.5 frei0r_src# TOC
+
+
Provide a frei0r source.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
This source accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+size The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+framerate The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
+num /den or a frame rate abbreviation.
+
+filter_name The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
+how to set the parameters, read the frei0r section in the video filters
+documentation.
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
+
+
+
+
For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
+and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
+
+
frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
+
+
+
+
39.6 life# TOC
+
+
Generate a life pattern.
+
+
This source is based on a generalization of John Conway’s life game.
+
+
The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
+which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
+interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
+horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
+
+
At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
+which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
+cell stay alive or born. The rule option allows one to specify
+the rule to adopt.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
+each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
+is used to delimit the end of each row.
+
+If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
+randomly.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
+floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
+It is ignored when a file is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the life rule.
+
+A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "SNS /BNB ",
+where NS and NB are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
+NS specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
+live cell stay alive, and NB the number of alive neighbor cells
+which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
+"s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
+
+Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
+high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
+for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
+the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
+higher number of neighbor cells.
+For example the number 6153 = (12<<9)+9 specifies a stay alive
+rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
+
+Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway’s game of life
+rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
+cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
+a dead cell.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename is specified, the size is set by default to the
+same size of the input file. If size is set, it must contain
+the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
+that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
+
+If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
+(used for a randomly generated initial grid).
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
+top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
+
+mold Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from death_color to
+mold_color with a step of mold . mold can have a
+value from 0 to 255.
+
+life_color Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
+
+death_color Set the color of dead cells. If mold is set, this is the first color
+used to represent a dead cell.
+
+mold_color Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
+
+For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+
+
+
39.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read a grid from pattern , and center it on a grid of size
+300x300 pixels:
+
+
life=f=pattern:s=300x300
+ Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
+
+
life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
+
+
+ Full example with slow death effect (mold) using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
+
+
+
+
39.7 color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc# TOC
+
+
The color source provides an uniformly colored input.
+
+
The haldclutsrc source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
+haldclut filter.
+
+
The nullsrc source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
+mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
+source for filters which ignore the input data.
+
+
The rgbtestsrc source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
+detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
+stripe from top to bottom.
+
+
The smptebars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
+
+
The smptehdbars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
+
+
The testsrc source generates a test video pattern, showing a
+color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
+intended for testing purposes.
+
+
The sources accept the following parameters:
+
+
+color, c Specify the color of the source, only available in the color
+source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+level Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the haldclutsrc
+source. A level of N generates a picture of N*N*N by N*N*N
+pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
+coded on a 1/(N*N) scale.
+
+size, s Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
+"320x240".
+
+This option is not available with the haldclutsrc filter.
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+sar Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+decimals, n Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
+testsrc source.
+
+The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
+timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
+value. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For example the following:
+
+
testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
+
+
+
will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
+176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
+
+
The following graph description will generate a red source
+with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
+frames per second.
+
+
color=c=red@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
+
+
+
If the input content is to be ignored, nullsrc can be used. The
+following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
+the geq filter:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
+
+
+
+
39.7.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
The color source supports the following commands:
+
+
+c, color Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
+corresponding color option.
+
+
+
+
+
40 Video Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
+
+
+
40.1 buffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
+graph.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
+
40.2 nullsink# TOC
+
+
Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
41 Multimedia Filters# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
+
+
+
41.1 avectorscope# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
+scope.
+
+
The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
+audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
+signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
+as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
+If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
+indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode, m Set the vectorscope mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘lissajous ’
+Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
+
+‘lissajous_xy ’
+Same as above but not rotated.
+
+
+Default value is ‘lissajous ’.
+
+size, s Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is 400x400.
+
+rate, r Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+rc gc bc Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are 40, 160 and 80.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+rf gf bf Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are 15, 10 and 5.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+zoom Set the zoom factor. Default value is 1. Allowed range is [1, 10].
+
+
+
+
41.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Complete example using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
+
+
+
+
41.2 concat# TOC
+
+
Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
+other.
+
+
The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
+segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
+also be the number of streams at output.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
+
+v Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
+streams in each segment. Default is 1.
+
+a Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
+streams in each segment. Default is 0.
+
+unsafe Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
+
+
+
+
The filter has v +a outputs: first v video outputs, then
+a audio outputs.
+
+
There are n x(v +a ) inputs: first the inputs for the first
+segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
+segment, etc.
+
+
Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
+reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
+related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
+concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
+stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
+audio streams with silence.
+
+
For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
+
+
All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
+filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
+streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
+audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
+explicitly by the user.
+
+
Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
+at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
+
+
+
41.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
41.3 ebur128# TOC
+
+
EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
+it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
+Momentary loudness (identified by M), Short-term loudness (S),
+Integrated loudness (I) and Loudness Range (LRA).
+
+
The filter also has a video output (see the video option) with a real
+time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
+message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
+unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
+short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
+the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
+
+
More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
+http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness .
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+video Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
+option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
+activated. Default is 0.
+
+size Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
+and minimum resolution is 640x480.
+
+meter Set the EBU scale meter. Default is 9. Common values are 9 and
+18, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
+other integer value between this range is allowed.
+
+metadata Set metadata injection. If set to 1, the audio input will be segmented
+into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
+in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with lavfi.r128..
+
+Default is 0.
+
+framelog Force the frame logging level.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘info ’
+information logging level
+
‘verbose ’
+verbose logging level
+
+
+By default, the logging level is set to info . If the video or
+the metadata options are set, it switches to verbose .
+
+peak Set peak mode(s).
+
+Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a flag type). Possible
+values are:
+
+‘none ’
+Disable any peak mode (default).
+
‘sample ’
+Enable sample-peak mode.
+
+Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
+for sample-peak (identified by SPK).
+
‘true ’
+Enable true-peak mode.
+
+If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
+stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
+(identified by TPK) and true-peak per frame (identified by FTPK).
+This mode requires a build with libswresample.
+
+
+
+
+
+
41.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Real-time graph using ffplay, with a EBU scale meter +18:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
+ Run an analysis with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
+
+
+
+
41.4 interleave, ainterleave# TOC
+
+
Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
+
+
interleave works with video inputs, ainterleave with audio.
+
+
These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
+queued frame to the output.
+
+
Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
+timestamp values.
+
+
In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
+at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
+input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
+
+
For example consider the case when one input is a select filter
+which always drop input frames. The interleave filter will keep
+reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
+to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
+
+
Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
+frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
+the queue is already filled.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+
+nb_inputs, n Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
+
+
+
+
41.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Interleave frames belonging to different streams using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
+ Add flickering blur effect:
+
+
select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
+
+
+
+
41.5 perms, aperms# TOC
+
+
Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
+
+
These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
+following filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+mode Select the permissions mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing. This is the default.
+
‘ro ’
+Set all the output frames read-only.
+
‘rw ’
+Set all the output frames directly writable.
+
‘toggle ’
+Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
+
‘random ’
+Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
+
+
+seed Set the seed for the random mode, must be an integer included between
+0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
+-1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
+basis.
+
+
+
Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
+following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
+following filter. Inserting a format or aformat filter before the
+perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
+
+
+
41.6 select, aselect# TOC
+
+
Select frames to pass in output.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
+
+If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
+
+If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
+first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
+ceil(val)-1, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
+
+For example a value of 1.2 corresponds to the output with index
+ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1, that is the second output.
+
+outputs, n Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
+frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+selected_n The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
+
+prev_selected_n The sequential number of the last selected frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+pts The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in TB units. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+t The PTS of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_pts The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_pts The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_t The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_pts The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_t The time of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+pict_type (video only) The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
+values:
+
+I P B S SI SP BI
+
+interlace_type (video only) The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
+
+PROGRESSIVE The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
+
TOPFIRST The frame is top-field-first.
+
BOTTOMFIRST The frame is bottom-field-first.
+
+
+consumed_sample_n (audio only) the number of selected samples before the current frame
+
+samples_n (audio only) the number of samples in the current frame
+
+sample_rate (audio only) the input sample rate
+
+key This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+pos the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
+is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
+
+scene (video only) value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
+probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
+value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
+
+
+
+
The default value of the select expression is "1".
+
+
+
41.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
41.7 sendcmd, asendcmd# TOC
+
+
Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
+filtergraph.
+
+
sendcmd must be inserted between two video filters,
+asendcmd must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
+from that they act the same way.
+
+
The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
+with the commands option, or in a file specified by the
+filename option.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+commands, c Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
+
filename, f Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
+filters.
+
+
+
+
41.7.1 Commands syntax# TOC
+
+
A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
+specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
+particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
+is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
+interval.
+
+
An interval is specified by the following syntax:
+
+
+
The time interval is specified by the START and END times.
+END is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
+
+
The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
+it is included in the interval [START , END ), that is when
+the time is greater or equal to START and is lesser than
+END .
+
+
COMMANDS consists of a sequence of one or more command
+specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
+syntax of a command specification is given by:
+
+
[FLAGS ] TARGET COMMAND ARG
+
+
+
FLAGS is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
+the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
+be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
+enclosed between "[" and "]".
+
+
The following flags are recognized:
+
+enter The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
+current is.
+
+leave The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
+current is not.
+
+
+
If FLAGS is not specified, a default value of [enter] is
+assumed.
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
+the given COMMAND .
+
+
Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
+sequences of characters starting with # until the end of line,
+are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
+
+
A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
+follows:
+
+
COMMAND_FLAG ::= "enter" | "leave"
+COMMAND_FLAGS ::= COMMAND_FLAG [(+|"|")COMMAND_FLAG ]
+COMMAND ::= ["[" COMMAND_FLAGS "]"] TARGET COMMAND [ARG ]
+COMMANDS ::= COMMAND [,COMMANDS ]
+INTERVAL ::= START [-END ] COMMANDS
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [;INTERVALS ]
+
+
+
+
41.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
41.8 setpts, asetpts# TOC
+
+
Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
+
+
setpts works on video frames, asetpts on audio frames.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
+
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
+constants:
+
+
+FRAME_RATE frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
+
+PTS The presentation timestamp in input
+
+N The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
+not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
+
+NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
+audio)
+
+NB_SAMPLES, S The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
+
+SAMPLE_RATE, SR The audio sample rate.
+
+STARTPTS The PTS of the first frame.
+
+STARTT the time in seconds of the first frame
+
+INTERLACED State whether the current frame is interlaced.
+
+T the time in seconds of the current frame
+
+POS original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
+for the current frame
+
+PREV_INPTS The previous input PTS.
+
+PREV_INT previous input time in seconds
+
+PREV_OUTPTS The previous output PTS.
+
+PREV_OUTT previous output time in seconds
+
+RTCTIME The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
+instead.
+
+RTCSTART The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+
+
+
+
41.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Start counting PTS from zero
+
+
+ Apply fast motion effect:
+
+
+ Apply slow motion effect:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
+
+
setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
+ Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
+
+
+ Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
+
+
setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
+ Generate timestamps by counting samples:
+
+
+
+
+
+
41.9 settb, asettb# TOC
+
+
Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
+It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+expr, tb The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
+
+
+
+
The value for tb is an arithmetic expression representing a
+rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
+timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
+audio only). Default value is "intb".
+
+
+
41.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/25:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/10:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 2*intb:
+
+
+ Set the default timebase value:
+
+
+
+
+
41.10 showcqt# TOC
+
Convert input audio to a video output representing
+frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
+Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+volume Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
+variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+a_weighting(f) A-weighting of equal loudness
+
b_weighting(f) B-weighting of equal loudness
+
c_weighting(f) C-weighting of equal loudness
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+tlength Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+Default value is 384/f*tc/(384/f+tc).
+
+timeclamp Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
+accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
+event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
+otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
+(such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is 0.17.
+
+coeffclamp Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
+more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+gamma Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
+makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
+Default value is 3.0.
+
+fontfile Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
+
+fontcolor Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
+integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+midi(f) midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
+
r(x), g(x), b(x) red, green, and blue value of intensity x
+
+Default value is st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
+st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
+r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))
+
+fullhd If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
+if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
+
+fps Specify video fps. Default value is 25.
+
+count Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
+per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
+Default value is 6.
+
+
+
+
+
41.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
+ Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
+ A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
+ B-weighting of equal loudness
+
+
volume=16*b_weighting(f)
+ Lower Q factor
+
+
tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
+ Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
+
+
fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
+
+
+
+
41.11 showspectrum# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
+spectrum.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
+640x512.
+
+slide Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘replace ’
+the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
+
‘scroll ’
+the samples scroll from right to left
+
‘fullframe ’
+frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
+
+
+Default value is replace.
+
+mode Specify display mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘combined ’
+all channels are displayed in the same row
+
‘separate ’
+all channels are displayed in separate rows
+
+
+Default value is ‘combined ’.
+
+color Specify display color mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘channel ’
+each channel is displayed in a separate color
+
‘intensity ’
+each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
+
+
+Default value is ‘channel ’.
+
+scale Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘lin ’
+linear
+
‘sqrt ’
+square root, default
+
‘cbrt ’
+cubic root
+
‘log ’
+logarithmic
+
+
+Default value is ‘sqrt ’.
+
+saturation Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
+alternative color scheme. 0 is no saturation at all.
+Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
+Default value is 1.
+
+win_func Set window function.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
+
‘hann ’
+Hann window
+
‘hamming ’
+Hamming window
+
‘blackman ’
+Blackman window
+
+
+Default value is hann.
+
+
+
The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
+section.
+
+
+
41.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
+
+
showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
+ Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
+
+
+
+
41.12 showwaves# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
+is "600x240".
+
+mode Set display mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘point ’
+Draw a point for each sample.
+
+‘line ’
+Draw a vertical line for each sample.
+
+‘p2p ’
+Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
+
+‘cline ’
+Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
+
+
+Default value is point.
+
+n Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
+larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
+integer. This option can be set only if the value for rate
+is not explicitly specified.
+
+rate, r Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
+option n . Default value is "25".
+
+split_channels Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
41.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
+at the same time:
+
+
amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
+ Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
+frame rate of 30 frames per second:
+
+
aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
+
+
+
+
41.13 split, asplit# TOC
+
+
Split input into several identical outputs.
+
+
asplit works with audio input, split with video.
+
+
The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
+unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+
+
41.13.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input:
+
+
[in] split [out0][out1]
+ To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
+outputs, like in:
+
+
[in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
+one padded:
+
+
[in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
+[splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
+[splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
+ Create 5 copies of the input audio with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
41.14 zmq, azmq# TOC
+
+
Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
+filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
zmq and azmq work as a pass-through filters. zmq
+must be inserted between two video filters, azmq between two
+audio filters.
+
+
To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
+headers and configure FFmpeg with --enable-libzmq.
+
+
For more information about libzmq see:
+http://www.zeromq.org/
+
+
The zmq and azmq filters work as a libzmq server, which
+receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
+bind_address option.
+
+
The received message must be in the form:
+
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
+given COMMAND .
+
+
Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
+is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
+will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
+
+
ERROR_CODE ERROR_REASON
+MESSAGE
+
+
+
MESSAGE is optional.
+
+
+
41.14.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Look at tools/zmqsend for an example of a zmq client which can
+be used to send commands processed by these filters.
+
+
Consider the following filtergraph generated by ffplay
+
+
ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
+color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
+color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
+nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
+[bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
+[bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
+
+
+
To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
+command can be used:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
To change the right side:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
+
+
42 Multimedia Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
+
+
+
42.1 amovie# TOC
+
+
This is the same as movie source, except it selects an audio
+stream by default.
+
+
+
42.2 movie# TOC
+
+
Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filename The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
+device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
+
+format_name, f Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
+the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
+format is guessed from movie_name or by probing.
+
+seek_point, sp Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
+starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
+av_strtod, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
+postfix. The default value is "0".
+
+streams, s Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
+separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
+same order. The syntax is explained in the “Stream specifiers”
+section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
+respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
+is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
+
+stream_index, si Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
+the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
+value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
+audio instead of video.
+
+loop Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
+If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
+Default value is "1".
+
+Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
+changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
+
+
+
It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
+a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
+
+
input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
+ ^
+ |
+movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
+
+
+
42.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
+on top of the input labelled "in":
+
+
movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
+labelled "in":
+
+
movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
+dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
+connected to the pad named "audio":
+
+
movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
+
+
+
+
+
43 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg
+ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
44 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Bitstream Filters Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Bitstream Filters Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes the bitstream filters provided by the
+libavcodec library.
+
+
A bitstream filter operates on the encoded stream data, and performs
+bitstream level modifications without performing decoding.
+
+
+
+
2 Bitstream Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported bitstream
+filters are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using
+the configure option --list-bsfs.
+
+
You can disable all the bitstream filters using the configure option
+--disable-bsfs, and selectively enable any bitstream filter using
+the option --enable-bsf=BSF, or you can disable a particular
+bitstream filter using the option --disable-bsf=BSF.
+
+
The option -bsfs of the ff* tools will display the list of
+all the supported bitstream filters included in your build.
+
+
The ff* tools have a -bsf option applied per stream, taking a
+comma-separated list of filters, whose parameters follow the filter
+name after a ’=’.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v filter1[=opt1=str1/opt2=str2][,filter2] OUTPUT
+
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available bitstream filters,
+with their parameters, if any.
+
+
+
2.1 aac_adtstoasc# TOC
+
+
Convert MPEG-2/4 AAC ADTS to MPEG-4 Audio Specific Configuration
+bitstream filter.
+
+
This filter creates an MPEG-4 AudioSpecificConfig from an MPEG-2/4
+ADTS header and removes the ADTS header.
+
+
This is required for example when copying an AAC stream from a raw
+ADTS AAC container to a FLV or a MOV/MP4 file.
+
+
+
2.2 chomp# TOC
+
+
Remove zero padding at the end of a packet.
+
+
+
2.3 dump_extra# TOC
+
+
Add extradata to the beginning of the filtered packets.
+
+
The additional argument specifies which packets should be filtered.
+It accepts the values:
+
+‘a ’
+add extradata to all key packets, but only if local_header is
+set in the flags2 codec context field
+
+‘k ’
+add extradata to all key packets
+
+‘e ’
+add extradata to all packets
+
+
+
If not specified it is assumed ‘k ’.
+
+
For example the following ffmpeg command forces a global
+header (thus disabling individual packet headers) in the H.264 packets
+generated by the libx264 encoder, but corrects them by adding
+the header stored in extradata to the key packets:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -flags:v +global_header -c:v libx264 -bsf:v dump_extra out.ts
+
+
+
+
2.4 h264_mp4toannexb# TOC
+
+
Convert an H.264 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
+prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.264
+specification).
+
+
This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
+transport stream format ("mpegts").
+
+
For example to remux an MP4 file containing an H.264 stream to mpegts
+format with ffmpeg, you can use the command:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts
+
+
+
+
2.5 imxdump# TOC
+
+
Modifies the bitstream to fit in MOV and to be usable by the Final Cut
+Pro decoder. This filter only applies to the mpeg2video codec, and is
+likely not needed for Final Cut Pro 7 and newer with the appropriate
+-tag:v .
+
+
For example, to remux 30 MB/sec NTSC IMX to MOV:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mxf -c copy -bsf:v imxdump -tag:v mx3n output.mov
+
+
+
+
2.6 mjpeg2jpeg# TOC
+
+
Convert MJPEG/AVI1 packets to full JPEG/JFIF packets.
+
+
MJPEG is a video codec wherein each video frame is essentially a
+JPEG image. The individual frames can be extracted without loss,
+e.g. by
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i ../some_mjpeg.avi -c:v copy frames_%d.jpg
+
+
+
Unfortunately, these chunks are incomplete JPEG images, because
+they lack the DHT segment required for decoding. Quoting from
+http://www.digitalpreservation.gov/formats/fdd/fdd000063.shtml :
+
+
Avery Lee, writing in the rec.video.desktop newsgroup in 2001,
+commented that "MJPEG, or at least the MJPEG in AVIs having the
+MJPG fourcc, is restricted JPEG with a fixed – and *omitted* –
+Huffman table. The JPEG must be YCbCr colorspace, it must be 4:2:2,
+and it must use basic Huffman encoding, not arithmetic or
+progressive. . . . You can indeed extract the MJPEG frames and
+decode them with a regular JPEG decoder, but you have to prepend
+the DHT segment to them, or else the decoder won’t have any idea
+how to decompress the data. The exact table necessary is given in
+the OpenDML spec."
+
+
This bitstream filter patches the header of frames extracted from an MJPEG
+stream (carrying the AVI1 header ID and lacking a DHT segment) to
+produce fully qualified JPEG images.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mjpeg-movie.avi -c:v copy -bsf:v mjpeg2jpeg frame_%d.jpg
+exiftran -i -9 frame*.jpg
+ffmpeg -i frame_%d.jpg -c:v copy rotated.avi
+
+
+
+
2.7 mjpega_dump_header# TOC
+
+
+
2.8 movsub# TOC
+
+
+
2.9 mp3_header_decompress# TOC
+
+
+
2.10 noise# TOC
+
+
Damages the contents of packets without damaging the container. Can be
+used for fuzzing or testing error resilience/concealment.
+
+
Parameters:
+A numeral string, whose value is related to how often output bytes will
+be modified. Therefore, values below or equal to 0 are forbidden, and
+the lower the more frequent bytes will be modified, with 1 meaning
+every byte is modified.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf noise[=1] output.mkv
+
+
applies the modification to every byte.
+
+
+
2.11 remove_extra# TOC
+
+
+
+
3 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavcodec
+
+
+
+
4 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Codecs Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Codecs Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes the codecs (decoders and encoders) provided by
+the libavcodec library.
+
+
+
+
2 Codec Options# TOC
+
+
libavcodec provides some generic global options, which can be set on
+all the encoders and decoders. In addition each codec may support
+so-called private options, which are specific for a given codec.
+
+
Sometimes, a global option may only affect a specific kind of codec,
+and may be nonsensical or ignored by another, so you need to be aware
+of the meaning of the specified options. Also some options are
+meant only for decoding or encoding.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVCodecContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follow:
+
+
+b integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Default value is 200K.
+
+ab integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio bitrate (in bits/s). Default value is 128K.
+
+bt integer (encoding,video ) Set video bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). In 1-pass mode, bitrate
+tolerance specifies how far ratecontrol is willing to deviate from the
+target average bitrate value. This is not related to min/max
+bitrate. Lowering tolerance too much has an adverse effect on quality.
+
+flags flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Set generic flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock (mpeg4).
+
‘qpel ’
+Use 1/4 pel motion compensation.
+
‘loop ’
+Use loop filter.
+
‘qscale ’
+Use fixed qscale.
+
‘gmc ’
+Use gmc.
+
‘mv0 ’
+Always try a mb with mv=<0,0>.
+
‘input_preserved ’
+‘pass1 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+
‘pass2 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+
‘gray ’
+Only decode/encode grayscale.
+
‘emu_edge ’
+Do not draw edges.
+
‘psnr ’
+Set error[?] variables during encoding.
+
‘truncated ’
+‘naq ’
+Normalize adaptive quantization.
+
‘ildct ’
+Use interlaced DCT.
+
‘low_delay ’
+Force low delay.
+
‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data. (except (I)DCT).
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
‘aic ’
+Apply H263 advanced intra coding / mpeg4 ac prediction.
+
‘cbp ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘qprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘ilme ’
+Apply interlaced motion estimation.
+
‘cgop ’
+Use closed gop.
+
+
+me_method integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘zero ’
+zero motion estimation (fastest)
+
‘full ’
+full motion estimation (slowest)
+
‘epzs ’
+EPZS motion estimation (default)
+
‘esa ’
+esa motion estimation (alias for full)
+
‘tesa ’
+tesa motion estimation
+
‘dia ’
+dia motion estimation (alias for epzs)
+
‘log ’
+log motion estimation
+
‘phods ’
+phods motion estimation
+
‘x1 ’
+X1 motion estimation
+
‘hex ’
+hex motion estimation
+
‘umh ’
+umh motion estimation
+
‘iter ’
+iter motion estimation
+
+
+extradata_size integer Set extradata size.
+
+time_base rational number Set codec time base.
+
+It is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms of which
+frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content, timebase
+should be 1 / frame_rate and timestamp increments should be
+identically 1.
+
+g integer (encoding,video ) Set the group of picture size. Default value is 12.
+
+ar integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff integer (encoding,audio ) Set cutoff bandwidth.
+
+frame_size integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio frame size.
+
+Each submitted frame except the last must contain exactly frame_size
+samples per channel. May be 0 when the codec has
+CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, in that case the frame size is not
+restricted. It is set by some decoders to indicate constant frame
+size.
+
+frame_number integer Set the frame number.
+
+delay integer qcomp float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale compression (VBR). It is used as a constant
+in the ratecontrol equation. Recommended range for default rc_eq:
+0.0-1.0.
+
+qblur float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale blur (VBR).
+
+qmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+69, default value is 2.
+
+qmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+1024, default value is 31.
+
+qdiff integer (encoding,video ) Set max difference between the quantizer scale (VBR).
+
+bf integer (encoding,video ) Set max number of B frames between non-B-frames.
+
+Must be an integer between -1 and 16. 0 means that B-frames are
+disabled. If a value of -1 is used, it will choose an automatic value
+depending on the encoder.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+b_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set qp factor between P and B frames.
+
+rc_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set ratecontrol method.
+
+b_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set strategy to choose between I/P/B-frames.
+
+ps integer (encoding,video ) Set RTP payload size in bytes.
+
+mv_bits integer header_bits integer i_tex_bits integer p_tex_bits integer i_count integer p_count integer skip_count integer misc_bits integer frame_bits integer codec_tag integer bug flags (decoding,video ) Workaround not auto detected encoder bugs.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘autodetect ’
+‘old_msmpeg4 ’
+some old lavc generated msmpeg4v3 files (no autodetection)
+
‘xvid_ilace ’
+Xvid interlacing bug (autodetected if fourcc==XVIX)
+
‘ump4 ’
+(autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)
+
‘no_padding ’
+padding bug (autodetected)
+
‘amv ’
+‘ac_vlc ’
+illegal vlc bug (autodetected per fourcc)
+
‘qpel_chroma ’
+‘std_qpel ’
+old standard qpel (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘qpel_chroma2 ’
+‘direct_blocksize ’
+direct-qpel-blocksize bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘edge ’
+edge padding bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘hpel_chroma ’
+‘dc_clip ’
+‘ms ’
+Workaround various bugs in microsoft broken decoders.
+
‘trunc ’
+trancated frames
+
+
+lelim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for luminance (negative
+values also consider DC coefficient).
+
+celim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for chrominance (negative
+values also consider dc coefficient)
+
+strict integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) Specify how strictly to follow the standards.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘very ’
+strictly conform to a older more strict version of the spec or reference software
+
‘strict ’
+strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences
+
‘normal ’
+‘unofficial ’
+allow unofficial extensions
+
‘experimental ’
+allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
+(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
+Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
+decoding untrusted input.
+
+
+b_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and B frames.
+
+err_detect flags (decoding,audio,video ) Set error detection flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+verify embedded CRCs
+
‘bitstream ’
+detect bitstream specification deviations
+
‘buffer ’
+detect improper bitstream length
+
‘explode ’
+abort decoding on minor error detection
+
‘ignore_err ’
+ignore decoding errors, and continue decoding.
+This is useful if you want to analyze the content of a video and thus want
+everything to be decoded no matter what. This option will not result in a video
+that is pleasing to watch in case of errors.
+
‘careful ’
+consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+
‘compliant ’
+consider all spec non compliancies as errors
+
‘aggressive ’
+consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error
+
+
+has_b_frames integer block_align integer mpeg_quant integer (encoding,video ) Use MPEG quantizers instead of H.263.
+
+qsquish float (encoding,video ) How to keep quantizer between qmin and qmax (0 = clip, 1 = use
+differentiable function).
+
+rc_qmod_amp float (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_qmod_freq integer (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_override_count integer rc_eq string (encoding,video ) Set rate control equation. When computing the expression, besides the
+standard functions defined in the section ’Expression Evaluation’, the
+following functions are available: bits2qp(bits), qp2bits(qp). Also
+the following constants are available: iTex pTex tex mv fCode iCount
+mcVar var isI isP isB avgQP qComp avgIITex avgPITex avgPPTex avgBPTex
+avgTex.
+
+maxrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set max bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Requires bufsize to be set.
+
+minrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set min bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Most useful in setting up a CBR
+encode. It is of little use elsewise.
+
+bufsize integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits).
+
+rc_buf_aggressivity float (encoding,video ) Currently useless.
+
+i_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set QP factor between P and I frames.
+
+i_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and I frames.
+
+rc_init_cplx float (encoding,video ) Set initial complexity for 1-pass encoding.
+
+dct integer (encoding,video ) Set DCT algorithm.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+autoselect a good one (default)
+
‘fastint ’
+fast integer
+
‘int ’
+accurate integer
+
‘mmx ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘faan ’
+floating point AAN DCT
+
+
+lumi_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress bright areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+tcplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set temporal complexity masking.
+
+scplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set spatial complexity masking.
+
+p_mask float (encoding,video ) Set inter masking.
+
+dark_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress dark areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+idct integer (decoding/encoding,video ) Select IDCT implementation.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+‘int ’
+‘simple ’
+‘simplemmx ’
+‘simpleauto ’
+Automatically pick a IDCT compatible with the simple one
+
+‘arm ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘sh4 ’
+‘simplearm ’
+‘simplearmv5te ’
+‘simplearmv6 ’
+‘simpleneon ’
+‘simplealpha ’
+‘ipp ’
+‘xvidmmx ’
+‘faani ’
+floating point AAN IDCT
+
+
+slice_count integer ec flags (decoding,video ) Set error concealment strategy.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘guess_mvs ’
+iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)
+
‘deblock ’
+use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs
+
‘favor_inter ’
+favor predicting from the previous frame instead of the current
+
+
+bits_per_coded_sample integer pred integer (encoding,video ) Set prediction method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘left ’
+‘plane ’
+‘median ’
+
+
+aspect rational number (encoding,video ) Set sample aspect ratio.
+
+debug flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pict ’
+picture info
+
‘rc ’
+rate control
+
‘bitstream ’
+‘mb_type ’
+macroblock (MB) type
+
‘qp ’
+per-block quantization parameter (QP)
+
‘mv ’
+motion vector
+
‘dct_coeff ’
+‘skip ’
+‘startcode ’
+‘pts ’
+‘er ’
+error recognition
+
‘mmco ’
+memory management control operations (H.264)
+
‘bugs ’
+‘vis_qp ’
+visualize quantization parameter (QP), lower QP are tinted greener
+
‘vis_mb_type ’
+visualize block types
+
‘buffers ’
+picture buffer allocations
+
‘thread_ops ’
+threading operations
+
‘nomc ’
+skip motion compensation
+
+
+vismv integer (decoding,video ) Visualize motion vectors (MVs).
+
+This option is deprecated, see the codecview filter instead.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+cmp integer (encoding,video ) Set full pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+subcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+mbcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+ildctcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set interlaced dct compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation.
+
+last_pred integer (encoding,video ) Set amount of motion predictors from the previous frame.
+
+preme integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation.
+
+precmp integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+pre_dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation pre-pass.
+
+subq integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel motion estimation quality.
+
+dtg_active_format integer me_range integer (encoding,video ) Set limit motion vectors range (1023 for DivX player).
+
+ibias integer (encoding,video ) Set intra quant bias.
+
+pbias integer (encoding,video ) Set inter quant bias.
+
+color_table_id integer global_quality integer (encoding,audio,video ) coder integer (encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘vlc ’
+variable length coder / huffman coder
+
‘ac ’
+arithmetic coder
+
‘raw ’
+raw (no encoding)
+
‘rle ’
+run-length coder
+
‘deflate ’
+deflate-based coder
+
+
+
+context integer (encoding,video ) Set context model.
+
+slice_flags integer xvmc_acceleration integer mbd integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock decision algorithm (high quality mode).
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘simple ’
+use mbcmp (default)
+
‘bits ’
+use fewest bits
+
‘rd ’
+use best rate distortion
+
+
+stream_codec_tag integer sc_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set scene change threshold.
+
+lmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+lmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+nr integer (encoding,video ) Set noise reduction.
+
+rc_init_occupancy integer (encoding,video ) Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before
+decoding starts.
+
+flags2 flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘fast ’
+Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+
‘sgop ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘noout ’
+Skip bitstream encoding.
+
‘ignorecrop ’
+Ignore cropping information from sps.
+
‘local_header ’
+Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+
‘chunks ’
+Frame data might be split into multiple chunks.
+
‘showall ’
+Show all frames before the first keyframe.
+
‘skiprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘export_mvs ’
+Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS)
+for codecs that support it. See also doc/examples/export_mvs.c .
+
+
+
+error integer (encoding,video ) qns integer (encoding,video ) Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
+threads integer (decoding/encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+detect a good number of threads
+
+
+
+me_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation threshold.
+
+mb_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock threshold.
+
+dc integer (encoding,video ) Set intra_dc_precision.
+
+nssew integer (encoding,video ) Set nsse weight.
+
+skip_top integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+
+skip_bottom integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+
+profile integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+‘aac_main ’
+‘aac_low ’
+‘aac_ssr ’
+‘aac_ltp ’
+‘aac_he ’
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+‘aac_ld ’
+‘aac_eld ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_low ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_he ’
+‘mpeg4_sp ’
+‘mpeg4_core ’
+‘mpeg4_main ’
+‘mpeg4_asp ’
+‘dts ’
+‘dts_es ’
+‘dts_96_24 ’
+‘dts_hd_hra ’
+‘dts_hd_ma ’
+
+
+
+level integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+
+
+
+lowres integer (decoding,audio,video ) Decode at 1= 1/2, 2=1/4, 3=1/8 resolutions.
+
+skip_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip threshold.
+
+skip_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip factor.
+
+skip_exp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip exponent.
+Negative values behave identical to the corresponding positive ones, except
+that the score is normalized.
+Positive values exist primarily for compatibility reasons and are not so useful.
+
+skipcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+border_mask float (encoding,video ) Increase the quantizer for macroblocks close to borders.
+
+mblmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mblmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mepc integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation bitrate penalty compensation (1.0 = 256).
+
+skip_loop_filter integer (decoding,video ) skip_idct integer (decoding,video ) skip_frame integer (decoding,video )
+Make decoder discard processing depending on the frame type selected
+by the option value.
+
+skip_loop_filter skips frame loop filtering, skip_idct
+skips frame IDCT/dequantization, skip_frame skips decoding.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘none ’
+Discard no frame.
+
+‘default ’
+Discard useless frames like 0-sized frames.
+
+‘noref ’
+Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+‘bidir ’
+Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+‘nokey ’
+Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+‘all ’
+Discard all frames.
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+
+bidir_refine integer (encoding,video ) Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks.
+
+brd_scale integer (encoding,video ) Downscale frames for dynamic B-frame decision.
+
+keyint_min integer (encoding,video ) Set minimum interval between IDR-frames.
+
+refs integer (encoding,video ) Set reference frames to consider for motion compensation.
+
+chromaoffset integer (encoding,video ) Set chroma qp offset from luma.
+
+trellis integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.
+
+sc_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set value multiplied by qscale for each frame and added to
+scene_change_score.
+
+mv0_threshold integer (encoding,video ) b_sensitivity integer (encoding,video ) Adjust sensitivity of b_frame_strategy 1.
+
+compression_level integer (encoding,audio,video ) min_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) max_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) timecode_frame_start integer (encoding,video ) Set GOP timecode frame start number, in non drop frame format.
+
+request_channels integer (decoding,audio ) Set desired number of audio channels.
+
+bits_per_raw_sample integer channel_layout integer (decoding/encoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+request_channel_layout integer (decoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+rc_max_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) rc_min_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) ticks_per_frame integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) color_primaries integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_trc integer (decoding/encoding,video ) colorspace integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_range integer (decoding/encoding,video ) chroma_sample_location integer (decoding/encoding,video ) log_level_offset integer Set the log level offset.
+
+slices integer (encoding,video ) Number of slices, used in parallelized encoding.
+
+thread_type flags (decoding/encoding,video ) Select which multithreading methods to use.
+
+Use of ‘frame ’ will increase decoding delay by one frame per
+thread, so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use
+it.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘slice ’
+Decode more than one part of a single frame at once.
+
+Multithreading using slices works only when the video was encoded with
+slices.
+
+‘frame ’
+Decode more than one frame at once.
+
+
+Default value is ‘slice+frame ’.
+
+audio_service_type integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio service type.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ma ’
+Main Audio Service
+
‘ef ’
+Effects
+
‘vi ’
+Visually Impaired
+
‘hi ’
+Hearing Impaired
+
‘di ’
+Dialogue
+
‘co ’
+Commentary
+
‘em ’
+Emergency
+
‘vo ’
+Voice Over
+
‘ka ’
+Karaoke
+
+
+request_sample_fmt sample_fmt (decoding,audio ) Set sample format audio decoders should prefer. Default value is
+none.
+
+pkt_timebase rational number sub_charenc encoding (decoding,subtitles ) Set the input subtitles character encoding.
+
+field_order field_order (video ) Set/override the field order of the video.
+Possible values:
+
+‘progressive ’
+Progressive video
+
‘tt ’
+Interlaced video, top field coded and displayed first
+
‘bb ’
+Interlaced video, bottom field coded and displayed first
+
‘tb ’
+Interlaced video, top coded first, bottom displayed first
+
‘bt ’
+Interlaced video, bottom coded first, top displayed first
+
+
+skip_alpha integer (decoding,video ) Set to 1 to disable processing alpha (transparency). This works like the
+‘gray ’ flag in the flags option which skips chroma information
+instead of alpha. Default is 0.
+
+codec_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed decoders. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
3 Decoders# TOC
+
+
Decoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the decoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native decoders
+are enabled by default. Decoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available decoders using the configure option --list-decoders.
+
+
You can disable all the decoders with the configure option
+--disable-decoders and selectively enable / disable single decoders
+with the options --enable-decoder=DECODER /
+--disable-decoder=DECODER .
+
+
The option -decoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled decoders.
+
+
+
+
4 Video Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
4.1 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video decoder.
+
+
This decoder decodes rawvideo streams.
+
+
+
4.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+top top_field_first Specify the assumed field type of the input video.
+
+-1 the video is assumed to be progressive (default)
+
0 bottom-field-first is assumed
+
1 top-field-first is assumed
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
5 Audio Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
+
+
AC-3 audio decoder.
+
+
This decoder implements part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
+
5.1.1 AC-3 Decoder Options# TOC
+
+
+-drc_scale value Dynamic Range Scale Factor. The factor to apply to dynamic range values
+from the AC-3 stream. This factor is applied exponentially.
+There are 3 notable scale factor ranges:
+
+drc_scale == 0 DRC disabled. Produces full range audio.
+
0 < drc_scale <= 1 DRC enabled. Applies a fraction of the stream DRC value.
+Audio reproduction is between full range and full compression.
+
drc_scale > 1 DRC enabled. Applies drc_scale asymmetrically.
+Loud sounds are fully compressed. Soft sounds are enhanced.
+
+
+
+
+
+
5.2 ffwavesynth# TOC
+
+
Internal wave synthetizer.
+
+
This decoder generates wave patterns according to predefined sequences. Its
+use is purely internal and the format of the data it accepts is not publicly
+documented.
+
+
+
5.3 libcelt# TOC
+
+
libcelt decoder wrapper.
+
+
libcelt allows libavcodec to decode the Xiph CELT ultra-low delay audio codec.
+Requires the presence of the libcelt headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libcelt.
+
+
+
5.4 libgsm# TOC
+
+
libgsm decoder wrapper.
+
+
libgsm allows libavcodec to decode the GSM full rate audio codec. Requires
+the presence of the libgsm headers and library during configuration. You need
+to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libgsm.
+
+
This decoder supports both the ordinary GSM and the Microsoft variant.
+
+
+
5.5 libilbc# TOC
+
+
libilbc decoder wrapper.
+
+
libilbc allows libavcodec to decode the Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC)
+audio codec. Requires the presence of the libilbc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libilbc.
+
+
+
5.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following option is supported by the libilbc wrapper.
+
+
+enhance
+Enable the enhancement of the decoded audio when set to 1. The default
+value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
+
5.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrnb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrnb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Narrowband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrnb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrnb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-NB exists, so users can decode AMR-NB
+without this library.
+
+
+
5.7 libopencore-amrwb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrwb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrwb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Wideband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrwb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrwb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-WB exists, so users can decode AMR-WB
+without this library.
+
+
+
5.8 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopus allows libavcodec to decode the Opus Interactive Audio Codec.
+Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for Opus exists, so users can decode Opus
+without this library.
+
+
+
+
6 Subtitles Decoders# TOC
+
+
+
6.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec decodes the bitmap subtitles used in DVDs; the same subtitles can
+also be found in VobSub file pairs and in some Matroska files.
+
+
+
6.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+palette Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps. When stored in VobSub, the
+palette is normally specified in the index file; in Matroska, the palette is
+stored in the codec extra-data in the same format as in VobSub. In DVDs, the
+palette is stored in the IFO file, and therefore not available when reading
+from dumped VOB files.
+
+The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
+numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by comas, for example 0d00ee,
+ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
+7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b.
+
+ifo_palette Specify the IFO file from which the global palette is obtained.
+(experimental)
+
+forced_subs_only Only decode subtitle entries marked as forced. Some titles have forced
+and non-forced subtitles in the same track. Setting this flag to 1
+will only keep the forced subtitles. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
6.2 libzvbi-teletext# TOC
+
+
Libzvbi allows libavcodec to decode DVB teletext pages and DVB teletext
+subtitles. Requires the presence of the libzvbi headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libzvbi.
+
+
+
6.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+txt_page List of teletext page numbers to decode. You may use the special * string to
+match all pages. Pages that do not match the specified list are dropped.
+Default value is *.
+
txt_chop_top Discards the top teletext line. Default value is 1.
+
txt_format Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles. The teletext decoder is capable
+of decoding the teletext pages to bitmaps or to simple text, you should use
+"bitmap" for teletext pages, because certain graphics and colors cannot be
+expressed in simple text. You might use "text" for teletext based subtitles if
+your application can handle simple text based subtitles. Default value is
+bitmap.
+
txt_left X offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_top Y offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_chop_spaces Chops leading and trailing spaces and removes empty lines from the generated
+text. This option is useful for teletext based subtitles where empty spaces may
+be present at the start or at the end of the lines or empty lines may be
+present between the subtitle lines because of double-sized teletext charactes.
+Default value is 1.
+
txt_duration Sets the display duration of the decoded teletext pages or subtitles in
+miliseconds. Default value is 30000 which is 30 seconds.
+
txt_transparent Force transparent background of the generated teletext bitmaps. Default value
+is 0 which means an opaque (black) background.
+
+
+
+
7 Encoders# TOC
+
+
Encoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the encoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native encoders
+are enabled by default. Encoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available encoders using the configure option --list-encoders.
+
+
You can disable all the encoders with the configure option
+--disable-encoders and selectively enable / disable single encoders
+with the options --enable-encoder=ENCODER /
+--disable-encoder=ENCODER .
+
+
The option -encoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled encoders.
+
+
+
+
8 Audio Encoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio encoders
+follows.
+
+
+
+
+
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) encoder.
+
+
This encoder is an experimental FFmpeg-native AAC encoder. Currently only the
+low complexity (AAC-LC) profile is supported. To use this encoder, you must set
+strict option to ‘experimental ’ or lower.
+
+
As this encoder is experimental, unexpected behavior may exist from time to
+time. For a more stable AAC encoder, see libvo-aacenc . However, be warned
+that it has a worse quality reported by some users.
+
+
See also libfdk_aac and libfaac .
+
+
+
8.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s. Setting this automatically activates constant bit rate
+(CBR) mode.
+
+q Set quality for variable bit rate (VBR) mode. This option is valid only using
+the ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface users, use
+global_quality .
+
+stereo_mode Set stereo encoding mode. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatically selected by the encoder.
+
+‘ms_off ’
+Disable middle/side encoding. This is the default.
+
+‘ms_force ’
+Force middle/side encoding.
+
+
+aac_coder Set AAC encoder coding method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘faac ’
+FAAC-inspired method.
+
+This method is a simplified reimplementation of the method used in FAAC, which
+sets thresholds proportional to the band energies, and then decreases all the
+thresholds with quantizer steps to find the appropriate quantization with
+distortion below threshold band by band.
+
+The quality of this method is comparable to the two loop searching method
+described below, but somewhat a little better and slower.
+
+‘anmr ’
+Average noise to mask ratio (ANMR) trellis-based solution.
+
+This has a theoretic best quality out of all the coding methods, but at the
+cost of the slowest speed.
+
+‘twoloop ’
+Two loop searching (TLS) method.
+
+This method first sets quantizers depending on band thresholds and then tries
+to find an optimal combination by adding or subtracting a specific value from
+all quantizers and adjusting some individual quantizer a little.
+
+This method produces similar quality with the FAAC method and is the default.
+
+‘fast ’
+Constant quantizer method.
+
+This method sets a constant quantizer for all bands. This is the fastest of all
+the methods, yet produces the worst quality.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2 ac3 and ac3_fixed# TOC
+
+
AC-3 audio encoders.
+
+
These encoders implement part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
The ac3 encoder uses floating-point math, while the ac3_fixed
+encoder only uses fixed-point integer math. This does not mean that one is
+always faster, just that one or the other may be better suited to a
+particular system. The floating-point encoder will generally produce better
+quality audio for a given bitrate. The ac3_fixed encoder is not the
+default codec for any of the output formats, so it must be specified explicitly
+using the option -acodec ac3_fixed in order to use it.
+
+
+
8.2.1 AC-3 Metadata# TOC
+
+
The AC-3 metadata options are used to set parameters that describe the audio,
+but in most cases do not affect the audio encoding itself. Some of the options
+do directly affect or influence the decoding and playback of the resulting
+bitstream, while others are just for informational purposes. A few of the
+options will add bits to the output stream that could otherwise be used for
+audio data, and will thus affect the quality of the output. Those will be
+indicated accordingly with a note in the option list below.
+
+
These parameters are described in detail in several publicly-available
+documents.
+
+
+
+
8.2.1.1 Metadata Control Options# TOC
+
+
+-per_frame_metadata boolean Allow Per-Frame Metadata. Specifies if the encoder should check for changing
+metadata for each frame.
+
+0 The metadata values set at initialization will be used for every frame in the
+stream. (default)
+
1 Metadata values can be changed before encoding each frame.
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.1.2 Downmix Levels# TOC
+
+
+-center_mixlev level Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the center
+channel when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
+bitstream if a center channel is present. The value is specified as a scale
+factor. There are 3 valid values:
+
+0.707 Apply -3dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6dB gain
+
+
+-surround_mixlev level Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the surround
+channel(s) when downmixing to stereo. This field will only be written to the
+bitstream if one or more surround channels are present. The value is specified
+as a scale factor. There are 3 valid values:
+
+0.707 Apply -3dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.1.3 Audio Production Information# TOC
+
Audio Production Information is optional information describing the mixing
+environment. Either none or both of the fields are written to the bitstream.
+
+
+-mixing_level number Mixing Level. Specifies peak sound pressure level (SPL) in the production
+environment when the mix was mastered. Valid values are 80 to 111, or -1 for
+unknown or not indicated. The default value is -1, but that value cannot be
+used if the Audio Production Information is written to the bitstream. Therefore,
+if the room_type option is not the default value, the mixing_level
+option must not be -1.
+
+-room_type type Room Type. Describes the equalization used during the final mixing session at
+the studio or on the dubbing stage. A large room is a dubbing stage with the
+industry standard X-curve equalization; a small room has flat equalization.
+This field will not be written to the bitstream if both the mixing_level
+option and the room_type option have the default values.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 large Large Room
+
2 small Small Room
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.1.4 Other Metadata Options# TOC
+
+
+-copyright boolean Copyright Indicator. Specifies whether a copyright exists for this audio.
+
+0 off No Copyright Exists (default)
+
1 on Copyright Exists
+
+
+-dialnorm value Dialogue Normalization. Indicates how far the average dialogue level of the
+program is below digital 100% full scale (0 dBFS). This parameter determines a
+level shift during audio reproduction that sets the average volume of the
+dialogue to a preset level. The goal is to match volume level between program
+sources. A value of -31dB will result in no volume level change, relative to
+the source volume, during audio reproduction. Valid values are whole numbers in
+the range -31 to -1, with -31 being the default.
+
+-dsur_mode mode Dolby Surround Mode. Specifies whether the stereo signal uses Dolby Surround
+(Pro Logic). This field will only be written to the bitstream if the audio
+stream is stereo. Using this option does NOT mean the encoder will actually
+apply Dolby Surround processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 off Not Dolby Surround Encoded
+
2 on Dolby Surround Encoded
+
+
+-original boolean Original Bit Stream Indicator. Specifies whether this audio is from the
+original source and not a copy.
+
+0 off Not Original Source
+
1 on Original Source (default)
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.2 Extended Bitstream Information# TOC
+
The extended bitstream options are part of the Alternate Bit Stream Syntax as
+specified in Annex D of the A/52:2010 standard. It is grouped into 2 parts.
+If any one parameter in a group is specified, all values in that group will be
+written to the bitstream. Default values are used for those that are written
+but have not been specified. If the mixing levels are written, the decoder
+will use these values instead of the ones specified in the center_mixlev
+and surround_mixlev options if it supports the Alternate Bit Stream
+Syntax.
+
+
+
8.2.2.1 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 1# TOC
+
+
+-dmix_mode mode Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode. Allows the user to select either Lt/Rt
+(Dolby Surround) or Lo/Ro (normal stereo) as the preferred stereo downmix mode.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 ltrt Lt/Rt Downmix Preferred
+
2 loro Lo/Ro Downmix Preferred
+
+
+-ltrt_cmixlev level Lt/Rt Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.
+
+1.414 Apply +3dB gain
+
1.189 Apply +1.5dB gain
+
1.000 Apply 0dB gain
+
0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain
+
0.000 Silence Center Channel
+
+
+-ltrt_surmixlev level Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lt/Rt mode.
+
+0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+-loro_cmixlev level Lo/Ro Center Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+center channel when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.
+
+1.414 Apply +3dB gain
+
1.189 Apply +1.5dB gain
+
1.000 Apply 0dB gain
+
0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain (default)
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain
+
0.000 Silence Center Channel
+
+
+-loro_surmixlev level Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level. The amount of gain the decoder should apply to the
+surround channel(s) when downmixing to stereo in Lo/Ro mode.
+
+0.841 Apply -1.5dB gain
+
0.707 Apply -3.0dB gain
+
0.595 Apply -4.5dB gain
+
0.500 Apply -6.0dB gain (default)
+
0.000 Silence Surround Channel(s)
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.2.2 Extended Bitstream Information - Part 2# TOC
+
+
+-dsurex_mode mode Dolby Surround EX Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Surround EX
+(7.1 matrixed to 5.1). Using this option does NOT mean the encoder will actually
+apply Dolby Surround EX processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 on Dolby Surround EX Off
+
2 off Dolby Surround EX On
+
+
+-dheadphone_mode mode Dolby Headphone Mode. Indicates whether the stream uses Dolby Headphone
+encoding (multi-channel matrixed to 2.0 for use with headphones). Using this
+option does NOT mean the encoder will actually apply Dolby Headphone
+processing.
+
+0 notindicated Not Indicated (default)
+
1 on Dolby Headphone Off
+
2 off Dolby Headphone On
+
+
+-ad_conv_type type A/D Converter Type. Indicates whether the audio has passed through HDCD A/D
+conversion.
+
+0 standard Standard A/D Converter (default)
+
1 hdcd HDCD A/D Converter
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.3 Other AC-3 Encoding Options# TOC
+
+
+-stereo_rematrixing boolean Stereo Rematrixing. Enables/Disables use of rematrixing for stereo input. This
+is an optional AC-3 feature that increases quality by selectively encoding
+the left/right channels as mid/side. This option is enabled by default, and it
+is highly recommended that it be left as enabled except for testing purposes.
+
+
+
+
+
8.2.4 Floating-Point-Only AC-3 Encoding Options# TOC
+
+
These options are only valid for the floating-point encoder and do not exist
+for the fixed-point encoder due to the corresponding features not being
+implemented in fixed-point.
+
+
+-channel_coupling boolean Enables/Disables use of channel coupling, which is an optional AC-3 feature
+that increases quality by combining high frequency information from multiple
+channels into a single channel. The per-channel high frequency information is
+sent with less accuracy in both the frequency and time domains. This allows
+more bits to be used for lower frequencies while preserving enough information
+to reconstruct the high frequencies. This option is enabled by default for the
+floating-point encoder and should generally be left as enabled except for
+testing purposes or to increase encoding speed.
+
+-1 auto Selected by Encoder (default)
+
0 off Disable Channel Coupling
+
1 on Enable Channel Coupling
+
+
+-cpl_start_band number Coupling Start Band. Sets the channel coupling start band, from 1 to 15. If a
+value higher than the bandwidth is used, it will be reduced to 1 less than the
+coupling end band. If auto is used, the start band will be determined by
+the encoder based on the bit rate, sample rate, and channel layout. This option
+has no effect if channel coupling is disabled.
+
+-1 auto Selected by Encoder (default)
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.3 libfaac# TOC
+
+
libfaac AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libfaac headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libfaac --enable-nonfree.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be of higher quality with respect to the
+the native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder .
+
+
For more information see the libfaac project at
+http://www.audiocoding.com/faac.html/ .
+
+
+
8.3.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following shared FFmpeg codec options are recognized.
+
+
The following options are supported by the libfaac wrapper. The
+faac-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bit rate in bits/s for ABR (Average Bit Rate) mode. If the bit rate
+is not explicitly specified, it is automatically set to a suitable
+value depending on the selected profile. faac bitrate is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+Note that libfaac does not support CBR (Constant Bit Rate) but only
+ABR (Average Bit Rate).
+
+If VBR mode is enabled this option is ignored.
+
+ar (-R ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac (-c ) Set the number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff (-C ) Set cutoff frequency. If not specified (or explicitly set to 0) it
+will use a value automatically computed by the library. Default value
+is 0.
+
+profile Set audio profile.
+
+The following profiles are recognized:
+
+‘aac_main ’
+Main AAC (Main)
+
+‘aac_low ’
+Low Complexity AAC (LC)
+
+‘aac_ssr ’
+Scalable Sample Rate (SSR)
+
+‘aac_ltp ’
+Long Term Prediction (LTP)
+
+
+If not specified it is set to ‘aac_low ’.
+
+flags +qscale Set constant quality VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
+
+global_quality Set quality in VBR mode as an integer number of lambda units.
+
+Only relevant when VBR mode is enabled with flags +qscale. The
+value is converted to QP units by dividing it by FF_QP2LAMBDA,
+and used to set the quality value used by libfaac. A reasonable range
+for the option value in QP units is [10-500], the higher the value the
+higher the quality.
+
+q (-q ) Enable VBR mode when set to a non-negative value, and set constant
+quality value as a double floating point value in QP units.
+
+The value sets the quality value used by libfaac. A reasonable range
+for the option value is [10-500], the higher the value the higher the
+quality.
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line
+tool. For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+
+
+
8.3.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to ABR 128 kbps AAC in an M4A (MP4)
+container:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -codec:a libfaac -b:a 128k -output.m4a
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to VBR AAC, using the
+LTP AAC profile:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -c:a libfaac -profile:a aac_ltp -q:a 100 output.m4a
+
+
+
+
8.4 libfdk_aac# TOC
+
+
libfdk-aac AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoder wrapper.
+
+
The libfdk-aac library is based on the Fraunhofer FDK AAC code from
+the Android project.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libfdk-aac headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libfdk-aac. The library is also incompatible with GPL,
+so if you allow the use of GPL, you should configure with
+--enable-gpl --enable-nonfree --enable-libfdk-aac.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be of higher quality with respect to
+both the native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder and
+libfaac .
+
+
VBR encoding, enabled through the vbr or flags
++qscale options, is experimental and only works with some
+combinations of parameters.
+
+
Support for encoding 7.1 audio is only available with libfdk-aac 0.1.3 or
+higher.
+
+
For more information see the fdk-aac project at
+http://sourceforge.net/p/opencore-amr/fdk-aac/ .
+
+
+
8.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are mapped on the shared FFmpeg codec options.
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s. If the bitrate is not explicitly specified, it
+is automatically set to a suitable value depending on the selected
+profile.
+
+In case VBR mode is enabled the option is ignored.
+
+ar Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+channels Set the number of audio channels.
+
+flags +qscale Enable fixed quality, VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
+Note that VBR is implicitly enabled when the vbr value is
+positive.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency. If not specified (or explicitly set to 0) it
+will use a value automatically computed by the library. Default value
+is 0.
+
+profile Set audio profile.
+
+The following profiles are recognized:
+
+‘aac_low ’
+Low Complexity AAC (LC)
+
+‘aac_he ’
+High Efficiency AAC (HE-AAC)
+
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+High Efficiency AAC version 2 (HE-AACv2)
+
+‘aac_ld ’
+Low Delay AAC (LD)
+
+‘aac_eld ’
+Enhanced Low Delay AAC (ELD)
+
+
+If not specified it is set to ‘aac_low ’.
+
+
+
The following are private options of the libfdk_aac encoder.
+
+
+afterburner Enable afterburner feature if set to 1, disabled if set to 0. This
+improves the quality but also the required processing power.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+eld_sbr Enable SBR (Spectral Band Replication) for ELD if set to 1, disabled
+if set to 0.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+signaling Set SBR/PS signaling style.
+
+It can assume one of the following values:
+
+‘default ’
+choose signaling implicitly (explicit hierarchical by default,
+implicit if global header is disabled)
+
+‘implicit ’
+implicit backwards compatible signaling
+
+‘explicit_sbr ’
+explicit SBR, implicit PS signaling
+
+‘explicit_hierarchical ’
+explicit hierarchical signaling
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+latm Output LATM/LOAS encapsulated data if set to 1, disabled if set to 0.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+header_period Set StreamMuxConfig and PCE repetition period (in frames) for sending
+in-band configuration buffers within LATM/LOAS transport layer.
+
+Must be a 16-bits non-negative integer.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+vbr Set VBR mode, from 1 to 5. 1 is lowest quality (though still pretty
+good) and 5 is highest quality. A value of 0 will disable VBR, and CBR
+(Constant Bit Rate) is enabled.
+
+Currently only the ‘aac_low ’ profile supports VBR encoding.
+
+VBR modes 1-5 correspond to roughly the following average bit rates:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+32 kbps/channel
+
‘2 ’
+40 kbps/channel
+
‘3 ’
+48-56 kbps/channel
+
‘4 ’
+64 kbps/channel
+
‘5 ’
+about 80-96 kbps/channel
+
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
8.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to VBR AAC in an M4A (MP4)
+container:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -codec:a libfdk_aac -vbr 3 output.m4a
+ Use ffmpeg to convert an audio file to CBR 64k kbps AAC, using the
+High-Efficiency AAC profile:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -c:a libfdk_aac -profile:a aac_he -b:a 64k output.m4a
+
+
+
+
8.5 libmp3lame# TOC
+
+
LAME (Lame Ain’t an MP3 Encoder) MP3 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libmp3lame headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libmp3lame.
+
+
See libshine for a fixed-point MP3 encoder, although with a
+lower quality.
+
+
+
8.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libmp3lame wrapper. The
+lame-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR or ABR. LAME bitrate is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+q (-V ) Set constant quality setting for VBR. This option is valid only
+using the ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface
+users, use global_quality .
+
+compression_level (-q ) Set algorithm quality. Valid arguments are integers in the 0-9 range,
+with 0 meaning highest quality but slowest, and 9 meaning fastest
+while producing the worst quality.
+
+reservoir Enable use of bit reservoir when set to 1. Default value is 1. LAME
+has this enabled by default, but can be overridden by use
+--nores option.
+
+joint_stereo (-m j ) Enable the encoder to use (on a frame by frame basis) either L/R
+stereo or mid/side stereo. Default value is 1.
+
+abr (--abr ) Enable the encoder to use ABR when set to 1. The lame
+--abr sets the target bitrate, while this options only
+tells FFmpeg to use ABR still relies on b to set bitrate.
+
+
+
+
+
8.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
OpenCORE Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libopencore-amrnb headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopencore-amrnb --enable-version3.
+
+
This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 8000Hz sample rate,
+but you can override it by setting strict to ‘unofficial ’ or
+lower.
+
+
+
8.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bitrate in bits per second. Only the following bitrates are supported,
+otherwise libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.
+
+
+4750 5150 5900 6700 7400 7950 10200 12200
+
+dtx Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
+default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
8.7 libshine# TOC
+
+
Shine Fixed-Point MP3 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Shine is a fixed-point MP3 encoder. It has a far better performance on
+platforms without an FPU, e.g. armel CPUs, and some phones and tablets.
+However, as it is more targeted on performance than quality, it is not on par
+with LAME and other production-grade encoders quality-wise. Also, according to
+the project’s homepage, this encoder may not be free of bugs as the code was
+written a long time ago and the project was dead for at least 5 years.
+
+
This encoder only supports stereo and mono input. This is also CBR-only.
+
+
The original project (last updated in early 2007) is at
+http://sourceforge.net/projects/libshine-fxp/ . We only support the
+updated fork by the Savonet/Liquidsoap project at https://github.com/savonet/shine .
+
+
Requires the presence of the libshine headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libshine.
+
+
See also libmp3lame .
+
+
+
8.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libshine wrapper. The
+shineenc-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. shineenc -b option
+is expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+
+
+
+
8.8 libtwolame# TOC
+
+
TwoLAME MP2 encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libtwolame headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libtwolame.
+
+
+
8.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libtwolame wrapper. The
+twolame-equivalent options follow the FFmpeg ones and are in
+parentheses.
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for CBR. twolame b
+option is expressed in kilobits/s. Default value is 128k.
+
+q (-V ) Set quality for experimental VBR support. Maximum value range is
+from -50 to 50, useful range is from -10 to 10. The higher the
+value, the better the quality. This option is valid only using the
+ffmpeg command-line tool. For library interface users,
+use global_quality .
+
+mode (--mode ) Set the mode of the resulting audio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose mode automatically based on the input. This is the default.
+
‘stereo ’
+Stereo
+
‘joint_stereo ’
+Joint stereo
+
‘dual_channel ’
+Dual channel
+
‘mono ’
+Mono
+
+
+psymodel (--psyc-mode ) Set psychoacoustic model to use in encoding. The argument must be
+an integer between -1 and 4, inclusive. The higher the value, the
+better the quality. The default value is 3.
+
+energy_levels (--energy ) Enable energy levels extensions when set to 1. The default value is
+0 (disabled).
+
+error_protection (--protect ) Enable CRC error protection when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+copyright (--copyright ) Set MPEG audio copyright flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+original (--original ) Set MPEG audio original flag when set to 1. The default value is 0
+(disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
8.9 libvo-aacenc# TOC
+
+
VisualOn AAC encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvo-aacenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvo-aacenc --enable-version3.
+
+
This encoder is considered to be worse than the
+native experimental FFmpeg AAC encoder , according to
+multiple sources.
+
+
+
8.9.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The VisualOn AAC encoder only support encoding AAC-LC and up to 2
+channels. It is also CBR-only.
+
+
+b Set bit rate in bits/s.
+
+
+
+
+
8.10 libvo-amrwbenc# TOC
+
+
VisualOn Adaptive Multi-Rate Wideband encoder.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvo-amrwbenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvo-amrwbenc --enable-version3.
+
+
This is a mono-only encoder. Officially it only supports 16000Hz sample
+rate, but you can override it by setting strict to
+‘unofficial ’ or lower.
+
+
+
8.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+b Set bitrate in bits/s. Only the following bitrates are supported, otherwise
+libavcodec will round to the nearest valid bitrate.
+
+
+‘6600 ’
+‘8850 ’
+‘12650 ’
+‘14250 ’
+‘15850 ’
+‘18250 ’
+‘19850 ’
+‘23050 ’
+‘23850 ’
+
+
+dtx Allow discontinuous transmission (generate comfort noise) when set to 1. The
+default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
8.11 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus Opus Interactive Audio Codec encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
+
8.11.1 Option Mapping# TOC
+
+
Most libopus options are modelled after the opusenc utility from
+opus-tools. The following is an option mapping chart describing options
+supported by the libopus wrapper, and their opusenc-equivalent
+in parentheses.
+
+
+b (bitrate ) Set the bit rate in bits/s. FFmpeg’s b option is
+expressed in bits/s, while opusenc’s bitrate in
+kilobits/s.
+
+vbr (vbr , hard-cbr , and cvbr ) Set VBR mode. The FFmpeg vbr option has the following
+valid arguments, with the their opusenc equivalent options
+in parentheses:
+
+
+‘off (hard-cbr ) ’
+Use constant bit rate encoding.
+
+‘on (vbr ) ’
+Use variable bit rate encoding (the default).
+
+‘constrained (cvbr ) ’
+Use constrained variable bit rate encoding.
+
+
+compression_level (comp ) Set encoding algorithm complexity. Valid options are integers in
+the 0-10 range. 0 gives the fastest encodes but lower quality, while 10
+gives the highest quality but slowest encoding. The default is 10.
+
+frame_duration (framesize ) Set maximum frame size, or duration of a frame in milliseconds. The
+argument must be exactly the following: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 40, 60. Smaller
+frame sizes achieve lower latency but less quality at a given bitrate.
+Sizes greater than 20ms are only interesting at fairly low bitrates.
+The default is 20ms.
+
+packet_loss (expect-loss ) Set expected packet loss percentage. The default is 0.
+
+application (N.A.) Set intended application type. Valid options are listed below:
+
+
+‘voip ’
+Favor improved speech intelligibility.
+
‘audio ’
+Favor faithfulness to the input (the default).
+
‘lowdelay ’
+Restrict to only the lowest delay modes.
+
+
+cutoff (N.A.) Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz. The argument must be exactly one of the
+following: 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, or 20000, corresponding to
+narrowband, mediumband, wideband, super wideband, and fullband
+respectively. The default is 0 (cutoff disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
8.12 libvorbis# TOC
+
+
libvorbis encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvorbisenc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libvorbis.
+
+
+
8.12.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libvorbis wrapper. The
+oggenc-equivalent of the options are listed in parentheses.
+
+
To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libvorbis
+options, consult the libvorbisenc’s and oggenc’s documentations.
+See http://xiph.org/vorbis/ ,
+http://wiki.xiph.org/Vorbis-tools , and oggenc(1).
+
+
+b (-b ) Set bitrate expressed in bits/s for ABR. oggenc -b is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+q (-q ) Set constant quality setting for VBR. The value should be a float
+number in the range of -1.0 to 10.0. The higher the value, the better
+the quality. The default value is ‘3.0 ’.
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line tool.
+For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+cutoff (--advanced-encode-option lowpass_frequency=N ) Set cutoff bandwidth in Hz, a value of 0 disables cutoff. oggenc’s
+related option is expressed in kHz. The default value is ‘0 ’ (cutoff
+disabled).
+
+minrate (-m ) Set minimum bitrate expressed in bits/s. oggenc -m is
+expressed in kilobits/s.
+
+maxrate (-M ) Set maximum bitrate expressed in bits/s. oggenc -M is
+expressed in kilobits/s. This only has effect on ABR mode.
+
+iblock (--advanced-encode-option impulse_noisetune=N ) Set noise floor bias for impulse blocks. The value is a float number from
+-15.0 to 0.0. A negative bias instructs the encoder to pay special attention
+to the crispness of transients in the encoded audio. The tradeoff for better
+transient response is a higher bitrate.
+
+
+
+
+
8.13 libwavpack# TOC
+
+
A wrapper providing WavPack encoding through libwavpack.
+
+
Only lossless mode using 32-bit integer samples is supported currently.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libwavpack headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libwavpack.
+
+
Note that a libavcodec-native encoder for the WavPack codec exists so users can
+encode audios with this codec without using this encoder. See wavpackenc .
+
+
+
8.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
wavpack command line utility’s corresponding options are listed in
+parentheses, if any.
+
+
+frame_size (--blocksize ) Default is 32768.
+
+compression_level Set speed vs. compression tradeoff. Acceptable arguments are listed below:
+
+
+‘0 (-f ) ’
+Fast mode.
+
+‘1 ’
+Normal (default) settings.
+
+‘2 (-h ) ’
+High quality.
+
+‘3 (-hh ) ’
+Very high quality.
+
+‘4-8 (-hh -x EXTRAPROC ) ’
+Same as ‘3 ’, but with extra processing enabled.
+
+‘4 ’ is the same as -x2 and ‘8 ’ is the same as -x6 .
+
+
+
+
+
+
8.14 wavpack# TOC
+
+
WavPack lossless audio encoder.
+
+
This is a libavcodec-native WavPack encoder. There is also an encoder based on
+libwavpack, but there is virtually no reason to use that encoder.
+
+
See also libwavpack .
+
+
+
8.14.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The equivalent options for wavpack command line utility are listed in
+parentheses.
+
+
+
8.14.1.1 Shared options# TOC
+
+
The following shared options are effective for this encoder. Only special notes
+about this particular encoder will be documented here. For the general meaning
+of the options, see the Codec Options chapter .
+
+
+frame_size (--blocksize ) For this encoder, the range for this option is between 128 and 131072. Default
+is automatically decided based on sample rate and number of channel.
+
+For the complete formula of calculating default, see
+libavcodec/wavpackenc.c .
+
+compression_level (-f , -h , -hh , and -x ) This option’s syntax is consistent with libwavpack ’s.
+
+
+
+
8.14.1.2 Private options# TOC
+
+
+joint_stereo (-j ) Set whether to enable joint stereo. Valid values are:
+
+
+‘on (1 ) ’
+Force mid/side audio encoding.
+
‘off (0 ) ’
+Force left/right audio encoding.
+
‘auto ’
+Let the encoder decide automatically.
+
+
+optimize_mono Set whether to enable optimization for mono. This option is only effective for
+non-mono streams. Available values:
+
+
+‘on ’
+enabled
+
‘off ’
+disabled
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
9 Video Encoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video encoders
+follows.
+
+
+
9.1 libtheora# TOC
+
+
libtheora Theora encoder wrapper.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libtheora headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libtheora.
+
+
For more information about the libtheora project see
+http://www.theora.org/ .
+
+
+
9.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following global options are mapped to internal libtheora options
+which affect the quality and the bitrate of the encoded stream.
+
+
+b Set the video bitrate in bit/s for CBR (Constant Bit Rate) mode. In
+case VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode is enabled this option is ignored.
+
+flags Used to enable constant quality mode (VBR) encoding through the
+qscale flag, and to enable the pass1 and pass2
+modes.
+
+g Set the GOP size.
+
+global_quality Set the global quality as an integer in lambda units.
+
+Only relevant when VBR mode is enabled with flags +qscale. The
+value is converted to QP units by dividing it by FF_QP2LAMBDA,
+clipped in the [0 - 10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3 to get a
+value in the native libtheora range [0-63]. A higher value corresponds
+to a higher quality.
+
+q Enable VBR mode when set to a non-negative value, and set constant
+quality value as a double floating point value in QP units.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0-10] range, and then multiplied by 6.3
+to get a value in the native libtheora range [0-63].
+
+This option is valid only using the ffmpeg command-line
+tool. For library interface users, use global_quality .
+
+
+
+
9.1.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set maximum constant quality (VBR) encoding with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -q:v 10 OUTPUT.ogg
+ Use ffmpeg to convert a CBR 1000 kbps Theora video stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -codec:v libtheora -b:v 1000k OUTPUT.ogg
+
+
+
+
9.2 libvpx# TOC
+
+
VP8/VP9 format supported through libvpx.
+
+
Requires the presence of the libvpx headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libvpx.
+
+
+
9.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
Mapping from FFmpeg to libvpx options with conversion notes in parentheses.
+
+
+threads g_threads
+
+profile g_profile
+
+vb rc_target_bitrate
+
+g kf_max_dist
+
+keyint_min kf_min_dist
+
+qmin rc_min_quantizer
+
+qmax rc_max_quantizer
+
+bufsize, vb rc_buf_sz
+(bufsize * 1000 / vb)
+
+rc_buf_optimal_sz
+(bufsize * 1000 / vb * 5 / 6)
+
+rc_init_occupancy, vb rc_buf_initial_sz
+(rc_init_occupancy * 1000 / vb)
+
+rc_buffer_aggressivity rc_undershoot_pct
+
+skip_threshold rc_dropframe_thresh
+
+qcomp rc_2pass_vbr_bias_pct
+
+maxrate, vb rc_2pass_vbr_maxsection_pct
+(maxrate * 100 / vb)
+
+minrate, vb rc_2pass_vbr_minsection_pct
+(minrate * 100 / vb)
+
+minrate, maxrate, vb VPX_CBR
+(minrate == maxrate == vb)
+
+crf VPX_CQ, VP8E_SET_CQ_LEVEL
+
+quality
+best VPX_DL_BEST_QUALITY
+
good VPX_DL_GOOD_QUALITY
+
realtime VPX_DL_REALTIME
+
+
+speed VP8E_SET_CPUUSED
+
+nr VP8E_SET_NOISE_SENSITIVITY
+
+mb_threshold VP8E_SET_STATIC_THRESHOLD
+
+slices VP8E_SET_TOKEN_PARTITIONS
+
+max-intra-rate VP8E_SET_MAX_INTRA_BITRATE_PCT
+
+force_key_frames VPX_EFLAG_FORCE_KF
+
+Alternate reference frame related
+vp8flags altref VP8E_SET_ENABLEAUTOALTREF
+
arnr_max_frames VP8E_SET_ARNR_MAXFRAMES
+
arnr_type VP8E_SET_ARNR_TYPE
+
arnr_strength VP8E_SET_ARNR_STRENGTH
+
rc_lookahead g_lag_in_frames
+
+
+vp8flags error_resilient g_error_resilient
+
+aq_mode VP9E_SET_AQ_MODE
+
+
+
+
For more information about libvpx see:
+http://www.webmproject.org/
+
+
+
+
9.3 libwebp# TOC
+
+
libwebp WebP Image encoder wrapper
+
+
libwebp is Google’s official encoder for WebP images. It can encode in either
+lossy or lossless mode. Lossy images are essentially a wrapper around a VP8
+frame. Lossless images are a separate codec developed by Google.
+
+
+
9.3.1 Pixel Format# TOC
+
+
Currently, libwebp only supports YUV420 for lossy and RGB for lossless due
+to limitations of the format and libwebp. Alpha is supported for either mode.
+Because of API limitations, if RGB is passed in when encoding lossy or YUV is
+passed in for encoding lossless, the pixel format will automatically be
+converted using functions from libwebp. This is not ideal and is done only for
+convenience.
+
+
+
9.3.2 Options# TOC
+
+
+-lossless boolean Enables/Disables use of lossless mode. Default is 0.
+
+-compression_level integer For lossy, this is a quality/speed tradeoff. Higher values give better quality
+for a given size at the cost of increased encoding time. For lossless, this is
+a size/speed tradeoff. Higher values give smaller size at the cost of increased
+encoding time. More specifically, it controls the number of extra algorithms
+and compression tools used, and varies the combination of these tools. This
+maps to the method option in libwebp. The valid range is 0 to 6.
+Default is 4.
+
+-qscale float For lossy encoding, this controls image quality, 0 to 100. For lossless
+encoding, this controls the effort and time spent at compressing more. The
+default value is 75. Note that for usage via libavcodec, this option is called
+global_quality and must be multiplied by FF_QP2LAMBDA .
+
+-preset type Configuration preset. This does some automatic settings based on the general
+type of the image.
+
+none Do not use a preset.
+
default Use the encoder default.
+
picture Digital picture, like portrait, inner shot
+
photo Outdoor photograph, with natural lighting
+
drawing Hand or line drawing, with high-contrast details
+
icon Small-sized colorful images
+
text Text-like
+
+
+
+
+
+
9.4 libx264, libx264rgb# TOC
+
+
x264 H.264/MPEG-4 AVC encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libx264 headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libx264.
+
+
libx264 supports an impressive number of features, including 8x8 and
+4x4 adaptive spatial transform, adaptive B-frame placement, CAVLC/CABAC
+entropy coding, interlacing (MBAFF), lossless mode, psy optimizations
+for detail retention (adaptive quantization, psy-RD, psy-trellis).
+
+
Many libx264 encoder options are mapped to FFmpeg global codec
+options, while unique encoder options are provided through private
+options. Additionally the x264opts and x264-params
+private options allows one to pass a list of key=value tuples as accepted
+by the libx264 x264_param_parse function.
+
+
The x264 project website is at
+http://www.videolan.org/developers/x264.html .
+
+
The libx264rgb encoder is the same as libx264, except it accepts packed RGB
+pixel formats as input instead of YUV.
+
+
+
9.4.1 Supported Pixel Formats# TOC
+
+
x264 supports 8- to 10-bit color spaces. The exact bit depth is controlled at
+x264’s configure time. FFmpeg only supports one bit depth in one particular
+build. In other words, it is not possible to build one FFmpeg with multiple
+versions of x264 with different bit depths.
+
+
+
9.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libx264 wrapper. The
+x264-equivalent options or values are listed in parentheses
+for easy migration.
+
+
To reduce the duplication of documentation, only the private options
+and some others requiring special attention are documented here. For
+the documentation of the undocumented generic options, see
+the Codec Options chapter .
+
+
To get a more accurate and extensive documentation of the libx264
+options, invoke the command x264 --full-help or consult
+the libx264 documentation.
+
+
+b (bitrate ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Note that FFmpeg’s b option is
+expressed in bits/s, while x264’s bitrate is in
+kilobits/s.
+
+bf (bframes ) g (keyint ) qmin (qpmin ) Minimum quantizer scale.
+
+qmax (qpmax ) Maximum quantizer scale.
+
+qdiff (qpstep ) Maximum difference between quantizer scales.
+
+qblur (qblur ) Quantizer curve blur
+
+qcomp (qcomp ) Quantizer curve compression factor
+
+refs (ref ) Number of reference frames each P-frame can use. The range is from 0-16 .
+
+sc_threshold (scenecut ) Sets the threshold for the scene change detection.
+
+trellis (trellis ) Performs Trellis quantization to increase efficiency. Enabled by default.
+
+nr (nr ) me_range (merange ) Maximum range of the motion search in pixels.
+
+me_method (me ) Set motion estimation method. Possible values in the decreasing order
+of speed:
+
+
+‘dia (dia ) ’
+‘epzs (dia ) ’
+Diamond search with radius 1 (fastest). ‘epzs ’ is an alias for
+‘dia ’.
+
‘hex (hex ) ’
+Hexagonal search with radius 2.
+
‘umh (umh ) ’
+Uneven multi-hexagon search.
+
‘esa (esa ) ’
+Exhaustive search.
+
‘tesa (tesa ) ’
+Hadamard exhaustive search (slowest).
+
+
+subq (subme ) Sub-pixel motion estimation method.
+
+b_strategy (b-adapt ) Adaptive B-frame placement decision algorithm. Use only on first-pass.
+
+keyint_min (min-keyint ) Minimum GOP size.
+
+coder Set entropy encoder. Possible values:
+
+
+‘ac ’
+Enable CABAC.
+
+‘vlc ’
+Enable CAVLC and disable CABAC. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --no-cabac option.
+
+
+cmp Set full pixel motion estimation comparation algorithm. Possible values:
+
+
+‘chroma ’
+Enable chroma in motion estimation.
+
+‘sad ’
+Ignore chroma in motion estimation. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --no-chroma-me option.
+
+
+threads (threads ) Number of encoding threads.
+
+thread_type Set multithreading technique. Possible values:
+
+
+‘slice ’
+Slice-based multithreading. It generates the same effect as
+x264’s --sliced-threads option.
+
‘frame ’
+Frame-based multithreading.
+
+
+flags Set encoding flags. It can be used to disable closed GOP and enable
+open GOP by setting it to -cgop. The result is similar to
+the behavior of x264’s --open-gop option.
+
+rc_init_occupancy (vbv-init ) preset (preset ) Set the encoding preset.
+
+tune (tune ) Set tuning of the encoding params.
+
+profile (profile ) Set profile restrictions.
+
+fastfirstpass Enable fast settings when encoding first pass, when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect of x264’s
+--slow-firstpass option.
+
+crf (crf ) Set the quality for constant quality mode.
+
+crf_max (crf-max ) In CRF mode, prevents VBV from lowering quality beyond this point.
+
+qp (qp ) Set constant quantization rate control method parameter.
+
+aq-mode (aq-mode ) Set AQ method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (0 ) ’
+Disabled.
+
+‘variance (1 ) ’
+Variance AQ (complexity mask).
+
+‘autovariance (2 ) ’
+Auto-variance AQ (experimental).
+
+
+aq-strength (aq-strength ) Set AQ strength, reduce blocking and blurring in flat and textured areas.
+
+psy Use psychovisual optimizations when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
+same effect as x264’s --no-psy option.
+
+psy-rd (psy-rd ) Set strength of psychovisual optimization, in
+psy-rd :psy-trellis format.
+
+rc-lookahead (rc-lookahead ) Set number of frames to look ahead for frametype and ratecontrol.
+
+weightb Enable weighted prediction for B-frames when set to 1. When set to 0,
+it has the same effect as x264’s --no-weightb option.
+
+weightp (weightp ) Set weighted prediction method for P-frames. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (0 ) ’
+Disabled
+
‘simple (1 ) ’
+Enable only weighted refs
+
‘smart (2 ) ’
+Enable both weighted refs and duplicates
+
+
+ssim (ssim ) Enable calculation and printing SSIM stats after the encoding.
+
+intra-refresh (intra-refresh ) Enable the use of Periodic Intra Refresh instead of IDR frames when set
+to 1.
+
+avcintra-class (class ) Configure the encoder to generate AVC-Intra.
+Valid values are 50,100 and 200
+
+bluray-compat (bluray-compat ) Configure the encoder to be compatible with the bluray standard.
+It is a shorthand for setting "bluray-compat=1 force-cfr=1".
+
+b-bias (b-bias ) Set the influence on how often B-frames are used.
+
+b-pyramid (b-pyramid ) Set method for keeping of some B-frames as references. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disabled.
+
‘strict (strict ) ’
+Strictly hierarchical pyramid.
+
‘normal (normal ) ’
+Non-strict (not Blu-ray compatible).
+
+
+mixed-refs Enable the use of one reference per partition, as opposed to one
+reference per macroblock when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the
+same effect as x264’s --no-mixed-refs option.
+
+8x8dct Enable adaptive spatial transform (high profile 8x8 transform)
+when set to 1. When set to 0, it has the same effect as
+x264’s --no-8x8dct option.
+
+fast-pskip Enable early SKIP detection on P-frames when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect as x264’s
+--no-fast-pskip option.
+
+aud (aud ) Enable use of access unit delimiters when set to 1.
+
+mbtree Enable use macroblock tree ratecontrol when set to 1. When set
+to 0, it has the same effect as x264’s
+--no-mbtree option.
+
+deblock (deblock ) Set loop filter parameters, in alpha :beta form.
+
+cplxblur (cplxblur ) Set fluctuations reduction in QP (before curve compression).
+
+partitions (partitions ) Set partitions to consider as a comma-separated list of. Possible
+values in the list:
+
+
+‘p8x8 ’
+8x8 P-frame partition.
+
‘p4x4 ’
+4x4 P-frame partition.
+
‘b8x8 ’
+4x4 B-frame partition.
+
‘i8x8 ’
+8x8 I-frame partition.
+
‘i4x4 ’
+4x4 I-frame partition.
+(Enabling ‘p4x4 ’ requires ‘p8x8 ’ to be enabled. Enabling
+‘i8x8 ’ requires adaptive spatial transform (8x8dct
+option) to be enabled.)
+
‘none (none ) ’
+Do not consider any partitions.
+
‘all (all ) ’
+Consider every partition.
+
+
+direct-pred (direct ) Set direct MV prediction mode. Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disable MV prediction.
+
‘spatial (spatial ) ’
+Enable spatial predicting.
+
‘temporal (temporal ) ’
+Enable temporal predicting.
+
‘auto (auto ) ’
+Automatically decided.
+
+
+slice-max-size (slice-max-size ) Set the limit of the size of each slice in bytes. If not specified
+but RTP payload size (ps ) is specified, that is used.
+
+stats (stats ) Set the file name for multi-pass stats.
+
+nal-hrd (nal-hrd ) Set signal HRD information (requires vbv-bufsize to be set).
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘none (none ) ’
+Disable HRD information signaling.
+
‘vbr (vbr ) ’
+Variable bit rate.
+
‘cbr (cbr ) ’
+Constant bit rate (not allowed in MP4 container).
+
+
+x264opts (N.A.) Set any x264 option, see x264 --fullhelp for a list.
+
+Argument is a list of key =value couples separated by
+":". In filter and psy-rd options that use ":" as a separator
+themselves, use "," instead. They accept it as well since long ago but this
+is kept undocumented for some reason.
+
+For example to specify libx264 encoding options with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.mpg -vcodec libx264 -x264opts keyint=123:min-keyint=20 -an out.mkv
+ x264-params (N.A.) Override the x264 configuration using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters.
+
+This option is functionally the same as the x264opts , but is
+duplicated for compatibility with the Libav fork.
+
+For example to specify libx264 encoding options with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v libx264 -x264-params level=30:bframes=0:weightp=0:\
+cabac=0:ref=1:vbv-maxrate=768:vbv-bufsize=2000:analyse=all:me=umh:\
+no-fast-pskip=1:subq=6:8x8dct=0:trellis=0 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Encoding ffpresets for common usages are provided so they can be used with the
+general presets system (e.g. passing the pre option).
+
+
+
9.5 libx265# TOC
+
+
x265 H.265/HEVC encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libx265 headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libx265 .
+
+
+
9.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+preset Set the x265 preset.
+
+tune Set the x265 tune parameter.
+
+x265-params Set x265 options using a list of key =value couples separated
+by ":". See x265 --help for a list of options.
+
+For example to specify libx265 encoding options with -x265-params :
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -c:v libx265 -x265-params crf=26:psy-rd=1 output.mp4
+
+
+
+
9.6 libxvid# TOC
+
+
Xvid MPEG-4 Part 2 encoder wrapper.
+
+
This encoder requires the presence of the libxvidcore headers and library
+during configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libxvid --enable-gpl.
+
+
The native mpeg4 encoder supports the MPEG-4 Part 2 format, so
+users can encode to this format without this library.
+
+
+
9.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following options are supported by the libxvid wrapper. Some of
+the following options are listed but are not documented, and
+correspond to shared codec options. See the Codec
+Options chapter for their documentation. The other shared options
+which are not listed have no effect for the libxvid encoder.
+
+
+b g qmin qmax mpeg_quant threads bf b_qfactor b_qoffset flags Set specific encoding flags. Possible values:
+
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock.
+
+‘aic ’
+Enable high quality AC prediction.
+
+‘gray ’
+Only encode grayscale.
+
+‘gmc ’
+Enable the use of global motion compensation (GMC).
+
+‘qpel ’
+Enable quarter-pixel motion compensation.
+
+‘cgop ’
+Enable closed GOP.
+
+‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
+
+
+trellis me_method Set motion estimation method. Possible values in decreasing order of
+speed and increasing order of quality:
+
+
+‘zero ’
+Use no motion estimation (default).
+
+‘phods ’
+‘x1 ’
+‘log ’
+Enable advanced diamond zonal search for 16x16 blocks and half-pixel
+refinement for 16x16 blocks. ‘x1 ’ and ‘log ’ are aliases for
+‘phods ’.
+
+‘epzs ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus advanced diamond zonal
+search for 8x8 blocks, half-pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, and motion
+estimation on chroma planes.
+
+‘full ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus extended 16x16 and 8x8
+blocks search.
+
+
+mbd Set macroblock decision algorithm. Possible values in the increasing
+order of quality:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Use macroblock comparing function algorithm (default).
+
+‘bits ’
+Enable rate distortion-based half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for
+16x16 blocks.
+
+‘rd ’
+Enable all of the things described above, plus rate distortion-based
+half pixel and quarter pixel refinement for 8x8 blocks, and rate
+distortion-based search using square pattern.
+
+
+lumi_aq Enable lumi masking adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
+(disabled).
+
+variance_aq Enable variance adaptive quantization when set to 1. Default is 0
+(disabled).
+
+When combined with lumi_aq , the resulting quality will not
+be better than any of the two specified individually. In other
+words, the resulting quality will be the worse one of the two
+effects.
+
+ssim Set structural similarity (SSIM) displaying method. Possible values:
+
+
+‘off ’
+Disable displaying of SSIM information.
+
+‘avg ’
+Output average SSIM at the end of encoding to stdout. The format of
+showing the average SSIM is:
+
+
+
+For users who are not familiar with C, %f means a float number, or
+a decimal (e.g. 0.939232).
+
+‘frame ’
+Output both per-frame SSIM data during encoding and average SSIM at
+the end of encoding to stdout. The format of per-frame information
+is:
+
+
+
SSIM: avg: %1.3f min: %1.3f max: %1.3f
+ For users who are not familiar with C, %1.3f means a float number
+rounded to 3 digits after the dot (e.g. 0.932).
+
+
+
+ssim_acc Set SSIM accuracy. Valid options are integers within the range of
+0-4, while 0 gives the most accurate result and 4 computes the
+fastest.
+
+
+
+
+
9.7 mpeg2# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 video encoder.
+
+
+
9.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+seq_disp_ext integer Specifies if the encoder should write a sequence_display_extension to the
+output.
+
+-1 auto Decide automatically to write it or not (this is the default) by checking if
+the data to be written is different from the default or unspecified values.
+
0 never Never write it.
+
1 always Always write it.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
PNG image encoder.
+
+
+
9.8.1 Private options# TOC
+
+
+dpi integer Set physical density of pixels, in dots per inch, unset by default
+
dpm integer Set physical density of pixels, in dots per meter, unset by default
+
+
+
+
9.9 ProRes# TOC
+
+
Apple ProRes encoder.
+
+
FFmpeg contains 2 ProRes encoders, the prores-aw and prores-ks encoder.
+The used encoder can be chosen with the -vcodec option.
+
+
+
9.9.1 Private Options for prores-ks# TOC
+
+
+profile integer Select the ProRes profile to encode
+
+‘proxy ’
+‘lt ’
+‘standard ’
+‘hq ’
+‘4444 ’
+
+
+quant_mat integer Select quantization matrix.
+
+‘auto ’
+‘default ’
+‘proxy ’
+‘lt ’
+‘standard ’
+‘hq ’
+
+If set to auto , the matrix matching the profile will be picked.
+If not set, the matrix providing the highest quality, default , will be
+picked.
+
+bits_per_mb integer How many bits to allot for coding one macroblock. Different profiles use
+between 200 and 2400 bits per macroblock, the maximum is 8000.
+
+mbs_per_slice integer Number of macroblocks in each slice (1-8); the default value (8)
+should be good in almost all situations.
+
+vendor string Override the 4-byte vendor ID.
+A custom vendor ID like apl0 would claim the stream was produced by
+the Apple encoder.
+
+alpha_bits integer Specify number of bits for alpha component.
+Possible values are 0 , 8 and 16 .
+Use 0 to disable alpha plane coding.
+
+
+
+
+
9.9.2 Speed considerations# TOC
+
+
In the default mode of operation the encoder has to honor frame constraints
+(i.e. not produce frames with size bigger than requested) while still making
+output picture as good as possible.
+A frame containing a lot of small details is harder to compress and the encoder
+would spend more time searching for appropriate quantizers for each slice.
+
+
Setting a higher bits_per_mb limit will improve the speed.
+
+
For the fastest encoding speed set the qscale parameter (4 is the
+recommended value) and do not set a size constraint.
+
+
+
+
10 Subtitles Encoders# TOC
+
+
+
10.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec encodes the bitmap subtitle format that is used in DVDs.
+Typically they are stored in VOBSUB file pairs (*.idx + *.sub),
+and they can also be used in Matroska files.
+
+
+
10.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+even_rows_fix When set to 1, enable a work-around that makes the number of pixel rows
+even in all subtitles. This fixes a problem with some players that
+cut off the bottom row if the number is odd. The work-around just adds
+a fully transparent row if needed. The overhead is low, typically
+one byte per subtitle on average.
+
+By default, this work-around is disabled.
+
+
+
+
+
11 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavcodec
+
+
+
+
12 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Devices Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Devices Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes the input and output devices provided by the
+libavdevice library.
+
+
+
+
2 Device Options# TOC
+
+
The libavdevice library provides the same interface as
+libavformat. Namely, an input device is considered like a demuxer, and
+an output device like a muxer, and the interface and generic device
+options are the same provided by libavformat (see the ffmpeg-formats
+manual).
+
+
In addition each input or output device may support so-called private
+options, which are specific for that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the device
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
+
+
3 Input Devices# TOC
+
+
Input devices are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow to access
+the data coming from a multimedia device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported input devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-indevs".
+
+
You can disable all the input devices using the configure option
+"–disable-indevs", and selectively enable an input device using the
+option "–enable-indev=INDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-indev=INDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported input devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available input devices follows.
+
+
+
3.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libasound
+installed on your system.
+
+
This device allows capturing from an ALSA device. The name of the
+device to capture has to be an ALSA card identifier.
+
+
An ALSA identifier has the syntax:
+
+
hw:CARD [,DEV [,SUBDEV ]]
+
+
+
where the DEV and SUBDEV components are optional.
+
+
The three arguments (in order: CARD ,DEV ,SUBDEV )
+specify card number or identifier, device number and subdevice number
+(-1 means any).
+
+
To see the list of cards currently recognized by your system check the
+files /proc/asound/cards and /proc/asound/devices .
+
+
For example to capture with ffmpeg from an ALSA device with
+card id 0, you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -i hw:0 alsaout.wav
+
+
+
For more information see:
+http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/alsa-lib/pcm.html
+
+
+
3.2 avfoundation# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation input device.
+
+
AVFoundation is the currently recommended framework by Apple for streamgrabbing on OSX >= 10.7 as well as on iOS.
+The older QTKit framework has been marked deprecated since OSX version 10.7.
+
+
The input filename has to be given in the following syntax:
+
+
-i "[[VIDEO]:[AUDIO]]"
+
+
The first entry selects the video input while the latter selects the audio input.
+The stream has to be specified by the device name or the device index as shown by the device list.
+Alternatively, the video and/or audio input device can be chosen by index using the
+
+ -video_device_index <INDEX>
+
+and/or
+
+ -audio_device_index <INDEX>
+
+, overriding any
+device name or index given in the input filename.
+
+
All available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices true , listing
+all device names and corresponding indices.
+
+
There are two device name aliases:
+
+defaultSelect the AVFoundation default device of the corresponding type.
+
+noneDo not record the corresponding media type.
+This is equivalent to specifying an empty device name or index.
+
+
+
+
+
3.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation supports the following options:
+
+
+-list_devices <TRUE|FALSE> If set to true, a list of all available input devices is given showing all
+device names and indices.
+
+-video_device_index <INDEX> Specify the video device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-audio_device_index <INDEX> Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-pixel_format <FORMAT> Request the video device to use a specific pixel format.
+If the specified format is not supported, a list of available formats is given
+und the first one in this list is used instead. Available pixel formats are:
+monob, rgb555be, rgb555le, rgb565be, rgb565le, rgb24, bgr24, 0rgb, bgr0, 0bgr, rgb0,
+ bgr48be, uyvy422, yuva444p, yuva444p16le, yuv444p, yuv422p16, yuv422p10, yuv444p10,
+ yuv420p, nv12, yuyv422, gray
+
+
+
+
+
3.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of AVFoundation supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -list_devices true -i ""
+ Record video from video device 0 and audio from audio device 0 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -i "0:0" out.avi
+ Record video from video device 2 and audio from audio device 1 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -video_device_index 2 -i ":1" out.avi
+ Record video from the system default video device using the pixel format bgr0 and do not record any audio into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -pixel_format bgr0 -i "default:none" out.avi
+
+
+
+
3.3 bktr# TOC
+
+
BSD video input device.
+
+
+
3.4 dshow# TOC
+
+
Windows DirectShow input device.
+
+
DirectShow support is enabled when FFmpeg is built with the mingw-w64 project.
+Currently only audio and video devices are supported.
+
+
Multiple devices may be opened as separate inputs, but they may also be
+opened on the same input, which should improve synchronism between them.
+
+
The input name should be in the format:
+
+
+
+
where TYPE can be either audio or video ,
+and NAME is the device’s name.
+
+
+
3.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
If no options are specified, the device’s defaults are used.
+If the device does not support the requested options, it will
+fail to open.
+
+
+video_size Set the video size in the captured video.
+
+framerate Set the frame rate in the captured video.
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio.
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio.
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+
+list_options If set to true , print a list of selected device’s options
+and exit.
+
+video_device_number Set video device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+audio_device_number Set audio device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+pixel_format Select pixel format to be used by DirectShow. This may only be set when
+the video codec is not set or set to rawvideo.
+
+audio_buffer_size Set audio device buffer size in milliseconds (which can directly
+impact latency, depending on the device).
+Defaults to using the audio device’s
+default buffer size (typically some multiple of 500ms).
+Setting this value too low can degrade performance.
+See also
+http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd377582(v=vs.85).aspx
+
+
+
+
+
3.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of DirectShow supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f dshow -i dummy
+ Open video device Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+ Open second video device with name Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -video_device_number 1 -i video="Camera"
+ Open video device Camera and audio device Microphone :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera":audio="Microphone"
+ Print the list of supported options in selected device and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+
+
+
+
3.5 dv1394# TOC
+
+
Linux DV 1394 input device.
+
+
+
3.6 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer input device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
To record from the framebuffer device /dev/fb0 with
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -r 10 -i /dev/fb0 out.avi
+
+
+
You can take a single screenshot image with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -frames:v 1 -r 1 -i /dev/fb0 screenshot.jpeg
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
3.7 gdigrab# TOC
+
+
Win32 GDI-based screen capture device.
+
+
This device allows you to capture a region of the display on Windows.
+
+
There are two options for the input filename:
+
+
or
+
+
+
The first option will capture the entire desktop, or a fixed region of the
+desktop. The second option will instead capture the contents of a single
+window, regardless of its position on the screen.
+
+
For example, to grab the entire desktop using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab a 640x480 region at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -video_size vga -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab the contents of the window named "Calculator"
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i title=Calculator out.mpg
+
+
+
+
3.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. Use the value 0 to
+not draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+Note that show_region is incompatible with grabbing the contents
+of a single window.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -show_region 1 -framerate 6 -video_size cif -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -i desktop out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. The default is to capture the full screen if desktop is selected, or the full window size if title=window_title is selected.
+
+offset_x When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the left edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned to the left of your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_x value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+offset_y When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the top edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned above your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_y value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+
+
+
+
3.8 iec61883# TOC
+
+
FireWire DV/HDV input device using libiec61883.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need libiec61883, libraw1394 and
+libavc1394 installed on your system. Use the configure option
+--enable-libiec61883 to compile with the device enabled.
+
+
The iec61883 capture device supports capturing from a video device
+connected via IEEE1394 (FireWire), using libiec61883 and the new Linux
+FireWire stack (juju). This is the default DV/HDV input method in Linux
+Kernel 2.6.37 and later, since the old FireWire stack was removed.
+
+
Specify the FireWire port to be used as input file, or "auto"
+to choose the first port connected.
+
+
+
3.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+dvtype Override autodetection of DV/HDV. This should only be used if auto
+detection does not work, or if usage of a different device type
+should be prohibited. Treating a DV device as HDV (or vice versa) will
+not work and result in undefined behavior.
+The values auto , dv and hdv are supported.
+
+dvbuffer Set maximum size of buffer for incoming data, in frames. For DV, this
+is an exact value. For HDV, it is not frame exact, since HDV does
+not have a fixed frame size.
+
+dvguid Select the capture device by specifying it’s GUID. Capturing will only
+be performed from the specified device and fails if no device with the
+given GUID is found. This is useful to select the input if multiple
+devices are connected at the same time.
+Look at /sys/bus/firewire/devices to find out the GUIDs.
+
+
+
+
+
3.8.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Grab and show the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device.
+
+
ffplay -f iec61883 -i auto
+ Grab and record the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device,
+using a packet buffer of 100000 packets if the source is HDV.
+
+
ffmpeg -f iec61883 -i auto -hdvbuffer 100000 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
3.9 jack# TOC
+
+
JACK input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libjack
+installed on your system.
+
+
A JACK input device creates one or more JACK writable clients, one for
+each audio channel, with name client_name :input_N , where
+client_name is the name provided by the application, and N
+is a number which identifies the channel.
+Each writable client will send the acquired data to the FFmpeg input
+device.
+
+
Once you have created one or more JACK readable clients, you need to
+connect them to one or more JACK writable clients.
+
+
To connect or disconnect JACK clients you can use the jack_connect
+and jack_disconnect programs, or do it through a graphical interface,
+for example with qjackctl.
+
+
To list the JACK clients and their properties you can invoke the command
+jack_lsp.
+
+
Follows an example which shows how to capture a JACK readable client
+with ffmpeg.
+
+
# Create a JACK writable client with name "ffmpeg".
+$ ffmpeg -f jack -i ffmpeg -y out.wav
+
+# Start the sample jack_metro readable client.
+$ jack_metro -b 120 -d 0.2 -f 4000
+
+# List the current JACK clients.
+$ jack_lsp -c
+system:capture_1
+system:capture_2
+system:playback_1
+system:playback_2
+ffmpeg:input_1
+metro:120_bpm
+
+# Connect metro to the ffmpeg writable client.
+$ jack_connect metro:120_bpm ffmpeg:input_1
+
+
+
For more information read:
+http://jackaudio.org/
+
+
+
3.10 lavfi# TOC
+
+
Libavfilter input virtual device.
+
+
This input device reads data from the open output pads of a libavfilter
+filtergraph.
+
+
For each filtergraph open output, the input device will create a
+corresponding stream which is mapped to the generated output. Currently
+only video data is supported. The filtergraph is specified through the
+option graph .
+
+
+
3.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+graph Specify the filtergraph to use as input. Each video open output must be
+labelled by a unique string of the form "outN ", where N is a
+number starting from 0 corresponding to the mapped input stream
+generated by the device.
+The first unlabelled output is automatically assigned to the "out0"
+label, but all the others need to be specified explicitly.
+
+The suffix "+subcc" can be appended to the output label to create an extra
+stream with the closed captions packets attached to that output
+(experimental; only for EIA-608 / CEA-708 for now).
+The subcc streams are created after all the normal streams, in the order of
+the corresponding stream.
+For example, if there is "out19+subcc", "out7+subcc" and up to "out42", the
+stream #43 is subcc for stream #7 and stream #44 is subcc for stream #19.
+
+If not specified defaults to the filename specified for the input
+device.
+
+graph_file Set the filename of the filtergraph to be read and sent to the other
+filters. Syntax of the filtergraph is the same as the one specified by
+the option graph .
+
+
+
+
+
3.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create a color video stream and play it back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "color=c=pink [out0]" dummy
+ As the previous example, but use filename for specifying the graph
+description, and omit the "out0" label:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi color=c=pink
+ Create three different video test filtered sources and play them:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "testsrc [out0]; testsrc,hflip [out1]; testsrc,negate [out2]" test3
+ Read an audio stream from a file using the amovie source and play it
+back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "amovie=test.wav"
+ Read an audio stream and a video stream and play it back with
+ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "movie=test.avi[out0];amovie=test.wav[out1]"
+ Dump decoded frames to images and closed captions to a file (experimental):
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=test.ts[out0+subcc]" -map v frame%08d.png -map s -c copy -f rawvideo subcc.bin
+
+
+
+
3.11 libcdio# TOC
+
+
Audio-CD input device based on cdio.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libcdio
+installed on your system. Requires the configure option
+--enable-libcdio.
+
+
This device allows playing and grabbing from an Audio-CD.
+
+
For example to copy with ffmpeg the entire Audio-CD in /dev/sr0,
+you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f libcdio -i /dev/sr0 cd.wav
+
+
+
+
3.12 libdc1394# TOC
+
+
IIDC1394 input device, based on libdc1394 and libraw1394.
+
+
Requires the configure option --enable-libdc1394.
+
+
+
3.13 openal# TOC
+
+
The OpenAL input device provides audio capture on all systems with a
+working OpenAL 1.1 implementation.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration, you need OpenAL
+headers and libraries installed on your system, and need to configure
+FFmpeg with --enable-openal.
+
+
OpenAL headers and libraries should be provided as part of your OpenAL
+implementation, or as an additional download (an SDK). Depending on your
+installation you may need to specify additional flags via the
+--extra-cflags and --extra-ldflags for allowing the build
+system to locate the OpenAL headers and libraries.
+
+
An incomplete list of OpenAL implementations follows:
+
+
+Creative The official Windows implementation, providing hardware acceleration
+with supported devices and software fallback.
+See http://openal.org/ .
+
OpenAL Soft Portable, open source (LGPL) software implementation. Includes
+backends for the most common sound APIs on the Windows, Linux,
+Solaris, and BSD operating systems.
+See http://kcat.strangesoft.net/openal.html .
+
Apple OpenAL is part of Core Audio, the official Mac OS X Audio interface.
+See http://developer.apple.com/technologies/mac/audio-and-video.html
+
+
+
This device allows one to capture from an audio input device handled
+through OpenAL.
+
+
You need to specify the name of the device to capture in the provided
+filename. If the empty string is provided, the device will
+automatically select the default device. You can get the list of the
+supported devices by using the option list_devices .
+
+
+
3.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio. Only the values
+1 (monaural) and 2 (stereo) are currently supported.
+Defaults to 2 .
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio. Only the values
+8 and 16 are currently supported. Defaults to
+16 .
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+Defaults to 44.1k .
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
3.13.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Print the list of OpenAL supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f openal -i dummy out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the OpenAL device DR-BT101 via PulseAudio :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the default device (note the empty string ” as filename):
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i '' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from two devices simultaneously, writing to two different files,
+within the same ffmpeg command:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out1.ogg -f openal -i 'ALSA Default' out2.ogg
+
+
Note: not all OpenAL implementations support multiple simultaneous capture -
+try the latest OpenAL Soft if the above does not work.
+
+
+
3.14 oss# TOC
+
+
Open Sound System input device.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the OSS input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/dsp .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/dsp using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
For more information about OSS see:
+http://manuals.opensound.com/usersguide/dsp.html
+
+
+
3.15 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio input device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is a source device or the
+string "default"
+
+
To list the PulseAudio source devices and their properties you can invoke
+the command pactl list sources.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org .
+
+
+
3.15.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is "record".
+
+sample_rate Specify the samplerate in Hz, by default 48kHz is used.
+
+channels Specify the channels in use, by default 2 (stereo) is set.
+
+frame_size Specify the number of bytes per frame, by default it is set to 1024.
+
+fragment_size Specify the minimal buffering fragment in PulseAudio, it will affect the
+audio latency. By default it is unset.
+
+
+
+
3.15.2 Examples# TOC
+
Record a stream from default device:
+
+
ffmpeg -f pulse -i default /tmp/pulse.wav
+
+
+
+
3.16 qtkit# TOC
+
+
QTKit input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is parsed to contain either a device name or index.
+The device index can also be given by using -video_device_index.
+A given device index will override any given device name.
+If the desired device consists of numbers only, use -video_device_index to identify it.
+The default device will be chosen if an empty string or the device name "default" is given.
+The available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "0" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -video_device_index 0 -i "" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "default" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -list_devices true -i ""
+
+
+
+
3.17 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libsndio
+installed on your system.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the sndio input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/audio0 .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/audio0 using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f sndio -i /dev/audio0 /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
+
3.18 video4linux2, v4l2# TOC
+
+
Video4Linux2 input video device.
+
+
"v4l2" can be used as alias for "video4linux2".
+
+
If FFmpeg is built with v4l-utils support (by using the
+--enable-libv4l2 configure option), it is possible to use it with the
+-use_libv4l2 input device option.
+
+
The name of the device to grab is a file device node, usually Linux
+systems tend to automatically create such nodes when the device
+(e.g. an USB webcam) is plugged into the system, and has a name of the
+kind /dev/videoN , where N is a number associated to
+the device.
+
+
Video4Linux2 devices usually support a limited set of
+width xheight sizes and frame rates. You can check which are
+supported using -list_formats all for Video4Linux2 devices.
+Some devices, like TV cards, support one or more standards. It is possible
+to list all the supported standards using -list_standards all.
+
+
The time base for the timestamps is 1 microsecond. Depending on the kernel
+version and configuration, the timestamps may be derived from the real time
+clock (origin at the Unix Epoch) or the monotonic clock (origin usually at
+boot time, unaffected by NTP or manual changes to the clock). The
+-timestamps abs or -ts abs option can be used to force
+conversion into the real time clock.
+
+
Some usage examples of the video4linux2 device with ffmpeg
+and ffplay:
+
+ Grab and show the input of a video4linux2 device:
+
+
ffplay -f video4linux2 -framerate 30 -video_size hd720 /dev/video0
+ Grab and record the input of a video4linux2 device, leave the
+frame rate and size as previously set:
+
+
ffmpeg -f video4linux2 -input_format mjpeg -i /dev/video0 out.mpeg
+
+
+
For more information about Video4Linux, check http://linuxtv.org/ .
+
+
+
3.18.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+standard Set the standard. Must be the name of a supported standard. To get a
+list of the supported standards, use the list_standards
+option.
+
+channel Set the input channel number. Default to -1, which means using the
+previously selected channel.
+
+video_size Set the video frame size. The argument must be a string in the form
+WIDTH xHEIGHT or a valid size abbreviation.
+
+pixel_format Select the pixel format (only valid for raw video input).
+
+input_format Set the preferred pixel format (for raw video) or a codec name.
+This option allows one to select the input format, when several are
+available.
+
+framerate Set the preferred video frame rate.
+
+list_formats List available formats (supported pixel formats, codecs, and frame
+sizes) and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all available (compressed and non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘raw ’
+Show only raw video (non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘compressed ’
+Show only compressed formats.
+
+
+list_standards List supported standards and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all supported standards.
+
+
+timestamps, ts Set type of timestamps for grabbed frames.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘default ’
+Use timestamps from the kernel.
+
+‘abs ’
+Use absolute timestamps (wall clock).
+
+‘mono2abs ’
+Force conversion from monotonic to absolute timestamps.
+
+
+Default value is default.
+
+
+
+
3.19 vfwcap# TOC
+
+
VfW (Video for Windows) capture input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is the capture driver number, ranging from
+0 to 9. You may use "list" as filename to print a list of drivers. Any
+other filename will be interpreted as device number 0.
+
+
+
3.20 x11grab# TOC
+
+
X11 video input device.
+
+
Depends on X11, Xext, and Xfixes. Requires the configure option
+--enable-x11grab.
+
+
This device allows one to capture a region of an X11 display.
+
+
The filename passed as input has the syntax:
+
+
[hostname ]:display_number .screen_number [+x_offset ,y_offset ]
+
+
+
hostname :display_number .screen_number specifies the
+X11 display name of the screen to grab from. hostname can be
+omitted, and defaults to "localhost". The environment variable
+DISPLAY contains the default display name.
+
+
x_offset and y_offset specify the offsets of the grabbed
+area with respect to the top-left border of the X11 screen. They
+default to 0.
+
+
Check the X11 documentation (e.g. man X) for more detailed information.
+
+
Use the dpyinfo program for getting basic information about the
+properties of your X11 display (e.g. grep for "name" or "dimensions").
+
+
For example to grab from :0.0 using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
3.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. A value of 0 specify
+not to draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+follow_mouse Make the grabbed area follow the mouse. The argument can be
+centered or a number of pixels PIXELS .
+
+When it is specified with "centered", the grabbing region follows the mouse
+pointer and keeps the pointer at the center of region; otherwise, the region
+follows only when the mouse pointer reaches within PIXELS (greater than
+zero) to the edge of region.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ To follow only when the mouse pointer reaches within 100 pixels to edge:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse 100 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+ With follow_mouse :
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. Default value is vga.
+
+use_shm Use the MIT-SHM extension for shared memory. Default value is 1.
+It may be necessary to disable it for remote displays.
+
+
+
+
3.21 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink input device provides capture capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz and the number
+of channels currently is limited to 2 (stereo).
+
+
+
3.21.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
3.21.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List input devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_devices 1 -i dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_formats 1 -i 'Intensity Pro'
+ Capture video clip at 1080i50 (format 11):
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -i 'Intensity Pro@11' -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
+
+
+
+
+
4 Output Devices# TOC
+
+
Output devices are configured elements in FFmpeg that can write
+multimedia data to an output device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported output devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-outdevs".
+
+
You can disable all the output devices using the configure option
+"–disable-outdevs", and selectively enable an output device using the
+option "–enable-outdev=OUTDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-outdev=OUTDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled output devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available output devices follows.
+
+
+
4.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) output device.
+
+
+
4.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Play a file on default ALSA device:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa default
+ Play a file on soundcard 1, audio device 7:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f alsa hw:1,7
+
+
+
+
4.2 caca# TOC
+
+
CACA output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in CACA window.
+Only one CACA window is allowed per application, so you can
+have only one instance of this output device in an application.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libcaca.
+libcaca is a graphics library that outputs text instead of pixels.
+
+
For more information about libcaca, check:
+http://caca.zoy.org/wiki/libcaca
+
+
+
4.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+window_title Set the CACA window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device.
+
+window_size Set the CACA window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video.
+
+driver Set display driver.
+
+algorithm Set dithering algorithm. Dithering is necessary
+because the picture being rendered has usually far more colours than
+the available palette.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither algorithms.
+
+antialias Set antialias method. Antialiasing smoothens the rendered
+image and avoids the commonly seen staircase effect.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither antialiases.
+
+charset Set which characters are going to be used when rendering text.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither charsets.
+
+color Set color to be used when rendering text.
+The accepted values are listed with -list_dither colors.
+
+list_drivers If set to true , print a list of available drivers and exit.
+
+list_dither List available dither options related to the argument.
+The argument must be one of algorithms, antialiases,
+charsets, colors.
+
+
+
+
4.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following command shows the ffmpeg output is an
+CACA window, forcing its size to 80x25:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt rgb24 -window_size 80x25 -f caca -
+ Show the list of available drivers and exit:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_drivers true -
+ Show the list of available dither colors and exit:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -pix_fmt rgb24 -f caca -list_dither colors -
+
+
+
+
4.3 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink output device provides playback capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this output device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz.
+
+
+
4.3.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+preroll Amount of time to preroll video in seconds.
+Defaults to 0.5 .
+
+
+
+
+
4.3.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List output devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -list_devices 1 dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -list_formats 1 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+ Play video clip:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+ Play video clip with non-standard framerate or video size:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.avi -f decklink -pix_fmt uyvy422 -s 720x486 -r 24000/1001 'DeckLink Mini Monitor'
+
+
+
+
4.4 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer output device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
+
4.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+xoffset yoffset Set x/y coordinate of top left corner. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
4.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on framebuffer device /dev/fb0 .
+Required pixel format depends on current framebuffer settings.
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt bgra -f fbdev /dev/fb0
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
4.5 opengl# TOC
+
OpenGL output device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-opengl.
+
+
This output device allows one to render to OpenGL context.
+Context may be provided by application or default SDL window is created.
+
+
When device renders to external context, application must implement handlers for following messages:
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_CREATE_WINDOW_BUFFER - create OpenGL context on current thread.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_PREPARE_WINDOW_BUFFER - make OpenGL context current.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_DISPLAY_WINDOW_BUFFER - swap buffers.
+AV_DEV_TO_APP_DESTROY_WINDOW_BUFFER - destroy OpenGL context.
+Application is also required to inform a device about current resolution by sending AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_SIZE message.
+
+
+
4.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+background Set background color. Black is a default.
+
no_window Disables default SDL window when set to non-zero value.
+Application must provide OpenGL context and both window_size_cb and window_swap_buffers_cb callbacks when set.
+
window_title Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename specified for the output device.
+Ignored when no_window is set.
+
window_size Set preferred window size, can be a string of the form widthxheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video, downscaled according to the aspect ratio.
+Mostly usable when no_window is not set.
+
+
+
+
+
4.5.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on SDL window using OpenGL rendering:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f opengl "window title"
+
+
+
+
+
+
OSS (Open Sound System) output device.
+
+
+
4.7 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio output device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org
+
+
+
4.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is set to the specified output name.
+
+device Specify the device to use. Default device is used when not provided.
+List of output devices can be obtained with command pactl list sinks.
+
+buffer_size buffer_duration Control the size and duration of the PulseAudio buffer. A small buffer
+gives more control, but requires more frequent updates.
+
+buffer_size specifies size in bytes while
+buffer_duration specifies duration in milliseconds.
+
+When both options are provided then the highest value is used
+(duration is recalculated to bytes using stream parameters). If they
+are set to 0 (which is default), the device will use the default
+PulseAudio duration value. By default PulseAudio set buffer duration
+to around 2 seconds.
+
+prebuf Specify pre-buffering size in bytes. The server does not start with
+playback before at least prebuf bytes are available in the
+buffer. By default this option is initialized to the same value as
+buffer_size or buffer_duration (whichever is bigger).
+
+minreq Specify minimum request size in bytes. The server does not request less
+than minreq bytes from the client, instead waits until the buffer
+is free enough to request more bytes at once. It is recommended to not set
+this option, which will initialize this to a value that is deemed sensible
+by the server.
+
+
+
+
+
4.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
Play a file on default device on default server:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f pulse "stream name"
+
+
+
+
+
+
SDL (Simple DirectMedia Layer) output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in an SDL
+window. Only one SDL window is allowed per application, so you can
+have only one instance of this output device in an application.
+
+
To enable this output device you need libsdl installed on your system
+when configuring your build.
+
+
For more information about SDL, check:
+http://www.libsdl.org/
+
+
+
4.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+window_title Set the SDL window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device.
+
+icon_title Set the name of the iconified SDL window, if not specified it is set
+to the same value of window_title .
+
+window_size Set the SDL window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation.
+If not specified it defaults to the size of the input video,
+downscaled according to the aspect ratio.
+
+window_fullscreen Set fullscreen mode when non-zero value is provided.
+Default value is zero.
+
+
+
+
4.8.2 Interactive commands# TOC
+
+
The window created by the device can be controlled through the
+following interactive commands.
+
+
+q, ESC Quit the device immediately.
+
+
+
+
4.8.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following command shows the ffmpeg output is an
+SDL window, forcing its size to the qcif format:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vcodec rawvideo -pix_fmt yuv420p -window_size qcif -f sdl "SDL output"
+
+
+
+
4.9 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio audio output device.
+
+
+
+
+
XV (XVideo) output device.
+
+
This output device allows one to show a video stream in a X Window System
+window.
+
+
+
4.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+display_name Specify the hardware display name, which determines the display and
+communications domain to be used.
+
+The display name or DISPLAY environment variable can be a string in
+the format hostname [:number [.screen_number ]].
+
+hostname specifies the name of the host machine on which the
+display is physically attached. number specifies the number of
+the display server on that host machine. screen_number specifies
+the screen to be used on that server.
+
+If unspecified, it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment
+variable.
+
+For example, dual-headed:0.1 would specify screen 1 of display
+0 on the machine named “dual-headed”.
+
+Check the X11 specification for more detailed information about the
+display name format.
+
+window_id When set to non-zero value then device doesn’t create new window,
+but uses existing one with provided window_id . By default
+this options is set to zero and device creates its own window.
+
+window_size Set the created window size, can be a string of the form
+width xheight or a video size abbreviation. If not
+specified it defaults to the size of the input video.
+Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+window_x window_y Set the X and Y window offsets for the created window. They are both
+set to 0 by default. The values may be ignored by the window manager.
+Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+window_title Set the window title, if not specified default to the filename
+specified for the output device. Ignored when window_id is set.
+
+
+
For more information about XVideo see http://www.x.org/ .
+
+
+
4.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Decode, display and encode video input with ffmpeg at the
+same time:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT OUTPUT -f xv display
+ Decode and display the input video to multiple X11 windows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f xv normal -vf negate -f xv negated
+
+
+
+
+
5 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavdevice
+
+
+
+
6 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Filters Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Filters Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes filters, sources, and sinks provided by the
+libavfilter library.
+
+
+
+
2 Filtering Introduction# TOC
+
+
Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
+
+
In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
+outputs.
+To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
+following filtergraph.
+
+
+
[main]
+input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
+ | ^
+ |[tmp] [flip]|
+ +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
+
+
+
This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
+stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
+back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
+following command to achieve this:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
+
+
+
The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
+onto the bottom half of the output video.
+
+
Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
+linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
+crop,vflip are in one linear chain, split and
+overlay are separately in another. The points where the linear
+chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
+example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
+the labels [main] and [tmp] .
+
+
The stream sent to the second output of split , labelled as
+[tmp] , is processed through the crop filter, which crops
+away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
+overlay filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
+split filter (which was labelled as [main] ), and overlay on its
+lower half the output generated by the crop,vflip filterchain.
+
+
Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
+after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
+by a colon.
+
+
There exist so-called source filters that do not have an
+audio/video input, and sink filters that will not have audio/video
+output.
+
+
+
+
3 graph2dot# TOC
+
+
The graph2dot program included in the FFmpeg tools
+directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
+corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
+
+
Invoke the command:
+
+
+
to see how to use graph2dot .
+
+
You can then pass the dot description to the dot program (from
+the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
+of the filtergraph.
+
+
For example the sequence of commands:
+
+
echo GRAPH_DESCRIPTION | \
+tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
+dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
+display graph.png
+
+
+
can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
+described by the GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string. Note that this string must be
+a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
+For example if your command line is of the form:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
+
+
your GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string will need to be of the form:
+
+
nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
+
+
you may also need to set the nullsrc parameters and add a format
+filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
+
+
+
+
4 Filtergraph description# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
+cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
+filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
+filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
+side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
+
+
Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
+registered in the application, which defines the features and the
+number of input and output pads of the filter.
+
+
A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
+output pads is called a "sink".
+
+
+
4.1 Filtergraph syntax# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
+recognized by the -filter /-vf and -filter_complex
+options in ffmpeg and -vf in ffplay, and by the
+avfilter_graph_parse()/avfilter_graph_parse2() functions defined in
+libavfilter/avfilter.h .
+
+
A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
+connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
+represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
+
+
A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
+filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
+descriptions.
+
+
A filter is represented by a string of the form:
+[in_link_1 ]...[in_link_N ]filter_name =arguments [out_link_1 ]...[out_link_M ]
+
+
filter_name is the name of the filter class of which the
+described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
+the filter classes registered in the program.
+The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
+"=arguments ".
+
+
arguments is a string which contains the parameters used to
+initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of key=value pairs.
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of value . In this case, the keys are assumed to be
+the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the fade filter
+declares three options in this order – type , start_frame and
+nb_frames . Then the parameter list in:0:30 means that the value
+in is assigned to the option type , 0 to
+start_frame and 30 to nb_frames .
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of mixed direct value and long key=value
+pairs. The direct value must precede the key=value pairs, and
+follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
+key=value pairs can be set in any preferred order.
+
+
+
+
If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the format filter
+takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
+’|’.
+
+
The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "’" as initial
+and ending mark, and the character ’\’ for escaping the characters
+within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
+terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
+"[]=;,") is encountered.
+
+
The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
+followed by a list of link labels.
+A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
+or input pad. The preceding labels in_link_1
+... in_link_N , are associated to the filter input pads,
+the following labels out_link_1 ... out_link_M , are
+associated to the output pads.
+
+
When two link labels with the same name are found in the
+filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
+created.
+
+
If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
+unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
+For example in the filterchain
+
+
nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
+
+
the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
+instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
+"L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
+output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
+which are both unlabelled.
+
+
In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
+pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
+filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
+
+
Libavfilter will automatically insert scale filters where format
+conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
+for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
+sws_flags=flags ;
+to the filtergraph description.
+
+
Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
+
+
NAME ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
+LINKLABEL ::= "[" NAME "]"
+LINKLABELS ::= LINKLABEL [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTER_ARGUMENTS ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
+FILTER ::= [LINKLABELS ] NAME ["=" FILTER_ARGUMENTS ] [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTERCHAIN ::= FILTER [,FILTERCHAIN ]
+FILTERGRAPH ::= [sws_flags=flags ;] FILTERCHAIN [;FILTERGRAPH ]
+
+
+
+
4.2 Notes on filtergraph escaping# TOC
+
+
Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
+escaping. See (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual for more
+information about the employed escaping procedure.
+
+
A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
+value, which may contain the special character : used to
+separate values, or one of the escaping characters \'.
+
+
A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
+may contain the escaping characters \' or the special
+characters [],; used by the filtergraph description.
+
+
Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
+need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
+characters contained within it.
+
+
For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
+the drawtext filter description text value:
+
+
this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
This string contains the ' special escaping character, and the
+: special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
+
+
text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
+description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
+filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
+
+
drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
+
+
(note that in addition to the \' escaping special characters,
+also , needs to be escaped).
+
+
Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
+filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
+escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
+\ is special and needs to be escaped with another \, the
+previous string will finally result in:
+
+
-vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
+
+
+
+
5 Timeline editing# TOC
+
+
Some filters support a generic enable option. For the filters
+supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
+evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
+the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
+next filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The expression accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+‘n ’
+sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
+
+‘pos ’
+the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+‘w ’
+‘h ’
+width and height of the input frame if video
+
+
+
Additionally, these filters support an enable command that can be used
+to re-define the expression.
+
+
Like any other filtering option, the enable option follows the same
+rules.
+
+
For example, to enable a blur filter (smartblur ) from 10 seconds to 3
+minutes, and a curves filter starting at 3 seconds:
+
+
smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
+curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
+
+
+
+
+
6 Audio Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
+
+
+
6.1 adelay# TOC
+
+
Delay one or more audio channels.
+
+
Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+delays Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by ’|’.
+At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
+Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
+smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
+
+
+
+
6.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
+the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
+
+
+
+
+
6.2 aecho# TOC
+
+
Apply echoing to the input audio.
+
+
Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
+(and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
+effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
+sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
+original signal and the reflection is the delay, and the
+loudness of the reflected signal is the decay.
+Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.6.
+
+out_gain Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.3.
+
+delays Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
+separated by ’|’. Allowed range for each delay is (0 - 90000.0].
+Default is 1000.
+
+decays Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by ’|’.
+Allowed range for each decay is (0 - 1.0].
+Default is 0.5.
+
+
+
+
6.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
+
+
+ If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
+
+
+ A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
+ Same as above but with one more mountain:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
+
+
+
+
6.3 aeval# TOC
+
+
Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
+
+
This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
+which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
+the number of input channels is greater than the number of
+expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
+output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
+specified by the number of expressions. If set to ‘same ’, it will
+use by default the same input channel layout.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+ch channel number of the current expression
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
+
+nb_in_channels nb_out_channels input and output number of channels
+
+val(CH) the value of input channel with number CH
+
+
+
Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
+dedicated filter.
+
+
+
6.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Half volume:
+
+
aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
+ Invert phase of the second channel:
+
+
+
+
+
6.4 afade# TOC
+
+
Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+type, t Specify the effect type, can be either in for fade-in, or
+out for a fade-out effect. Default is in.
+
+start_sample, ss Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
+effect. Default is 0.
+
+nb_samples, ns Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
+the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
+
+start_time, st Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
+The value must be specified as a time duration; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+If set this option is used instead of start_sample .
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence.
+By default the duration is determined by nb_samples .
+If set this option is used instead of nb_samples .
+
+curve Set curve for fade transition.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+tri select triangular, linear slope (default)
+
qsin select quarter of sine wave
+
hsin select half of sine wave
+
esin select exponential sine wave
+
log select logarithmic
+
par select inverted parabola
+
qua select quadratic
+
cub select cubic
+
squ select square root
+
cbr select cubic root
+
+
+
+
+
6.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
+
+
+ Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
+
+
afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
+
+
+
+
6.5 aformat# TOC
+
+
Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
+negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+sample_fmts A ’|’-separated list of requested sample formats.
+
+sample_rates A ’|’-separated list of requested sample rates.
+
+channel_layouts A ’|’-separated list of requested channel layouts.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+
+
If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
+
+
Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
+
+
aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
+
+
+
+
6.6 allpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
+frequency , and filter-width width .
+An all-pass filter changes the audio’s frequency to phase relationship
+without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
6.7 amerge# TOC
+
+
Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+inputs Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
+
+
+
+
If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
+the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
+will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
+disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
+the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
+the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
+channels.
+
+
For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
+is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
+following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
+first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
+
+
On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
+in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
+arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
+
+
All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
+
+
If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
+shortest.
+
+
+
6.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
+
+
amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
+ Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in input.mkv :
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
+
+
+
+
6.8 amix# TOC
+
+
Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
+
+
Note that this filter only supports float samples (the amerge
+and pan audio filters support many formats). If the amix
+input has integer samples then aresample will be automatically
+inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
+
+
For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
+
+
will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
+first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+duration How to determine the end-of-stream.
+
+longest The duration of the longest input. (default)
+
+shortest The duration of the shortest input.
+
+first The duration of the first input.
+
+
+
+dropout_transition The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
+stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
6.9 anull# TOC
+
+
Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
6.10 apad# TOC
+
+
Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
+
+
This can be used together with ffmpeg -shortest to
+extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+packet_size Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
+
+pad_len Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
+value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
+exclusive with whole_len .
+
+whole_len Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
+the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
+the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
+with pad_len .
+
+
+
If neither the pad_len nor the whole_len option is
+set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
+indefinitely.
+
+
+
6.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
+
+
+ Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
+the input with silence if required:
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
+video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
+until the end in the output file when using the shortest
+option:
+
+
ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
6.11 aphaser# TOC
+
Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
+
+
A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
+The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
+
+out_gain Set output gain. Default is 0.74
+
+delay Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
+
+decay Set decay. Default is 0.4.
+
+speed Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
+
+type Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘triangular, t ’
+‘sinusoidal, s ’
+
+
+
+
+
6.12 aresample# TOC
+
+
Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
+libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
+automatically convert between its input and output.
+
+
This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
+the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
+timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
+
+
The filter accepts the syntax
+[sample_rate :]resampler_options , where sample_rate
+expresses a sample rate and resampler_options is a list of
+key =value pairs, separated by ":". See the
+ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
+
+
+
6.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
+
+
+ Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
+samples per second compensation:
+
+
+
+
+
6.13 asetnsamples# TOC
+
+
Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
+
+
The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
+the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
+signal its end.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+nb_out_samples, n Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
+intended as the number of samples per each channel .
+Default value is 1024.
+
+pad, p If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
+that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
+previous ones. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
+disable padding for the last frame, use:
+
+
asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
+
+
+
+
6.14 asetrate# TOC
+
+
Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
+This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sample_rate, r Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
+
+
+
+
6.15 ashowinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
+The input audio is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
+depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/sample_rate .
+
+pts_time The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
+
+pos position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
+
+fmt The sample format.
+
+chlayout The channel layout.
+
+rate The sample rate for the audio frame.
+
+nb_samples The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
+audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
+
+plane_checksums A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
+
+
+
+
6.16 astats# TOC
+
+
Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
+Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
+where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+length Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
+Default is 0.05 (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is [0.1 - 10].
+
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+DC offset Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
+
+Min level Minimal sample level.
+
+Max level Maximal sample level.
+
+Peak level dB RMS level dB Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
+
+RMS peak dB RMS trough dB Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
+
+Crest factor Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
+
+Flat factor Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
+(i.e. either Min level or Max level ).
+
+Peak count Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
+Min level or Max level .
+
+
+
+
6.17 astreamsync# TOC
+
+
Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set the expression deciding which stream should be
+forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
+the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
+the following variables:
+
+
+b1 b2 number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
+
s1 s2 number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
+
t1 t2 current timestamp of each stream
+
+
+The default value is t1-t2, which means to always forward the stream
+that has a smaller timestamp.
+
+
+
+
6.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Stress-test amerge by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
+input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
+
+
amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
+[a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
+[a2] [b2] amerge
+
+
+
+
6.18 asyncts# TOC
+
+
Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
+dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
+
+
This filter is not built by default, please use aresample to do squeezing/stretching.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+compensate Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
+by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
+
+min_delta The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
+adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
+sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
+
+max_comp The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
+The default value is 500.
+
+first_pts Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
+rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
+no assumption is made about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
+
+
+
+
+
6.19 atempo# TOC
+
+
Adjust audio tempo.
+
+
The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
+specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
+be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
+
+
+
6.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
+
+
+ To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
+
+
+
+
+
6.20 atrim# TOC
+
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
+sample with the timestamp start will be the first sample in the output.
+
+end Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
+audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be
+the last sample in the output.
+
+start_pts Same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
+instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts Same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
+of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_sample The number of the first sample that should be output.
+
+end_sample The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
+samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
+give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
+zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
+to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
+atrim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
+ Keep only the first 1000 samples:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
+
+
+
+
6.21 bandpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width.
+The csg option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
+instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+csg Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
6.22 bandreject# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width .
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
6.23 bass# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
+(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 100 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
6.24 biquad# TOC
+
+
Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
+Where b0 , b1 , b2 and a0 , a1 , a2
+are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
+
+
+
6.25 bs2b# TOC
+
Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
+stereo audio records.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+profile Pre-defined crossfeed level.
+
+default Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
+
+cmoy Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
+
+jmeier Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
+
+
+
+fcut Cut frequency (in Hz).
+
+feed Feed level (in Hz).
+
+
+
+
+
6.26 channelmap# TOC
+
+
Remap input channels to new locations.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the output stream.
+
+map Map channels from input to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the in_channel -out_channel in_channel form. in_channel can be either the name of the input
+channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
+out_channel is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
+channel layout. If out_channel is not given then it is implicitly an
+index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
+
+
+
If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
+output channels, preserving indices.
+
+
For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
+
+
will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
+the input.
+
+
To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC’s native channel order
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
+
+
+
+
6.27 channelsplit# TOC
+
+
Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
+
+
+
For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
+
+
will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
+the left channel and the other the right channel.
+
+
Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
+'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
+-map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
+front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
+side_right.wav
+
+
+
+
6.28 compand# TOC
+
Compress or expand the audio’s dynamic range.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+attacks decays A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
+of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. attacks refers to
+increase of volume and decays refers to decrease of volume. For most
+situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
+shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
+loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
+a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
+
+points A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
+maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
+the following syntax: x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|.... or
+x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
+does not have to be monotonically rising. The point 0/0 is assumed but
+may be overridden (by 0/out-dBn). Typical values for the transfer
+function are -70/-70|-60/-20.
+
+soft-knee Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
+
+gain Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
+function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
+It defaults to 0.
+
+volume Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
+starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
+example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
+companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
+quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
+
+delay Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
+delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
+approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
+operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
+
6.28.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
+noisy environment:
+
+
compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
+ A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
+ Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
+than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
+
+
+
+
6.29 earwax# TOC
+
+
Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
+
+
This filter adds ‘cues’ to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
+so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
+inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
+the listener (standard for speakers).
+
+
Ported from SoX.
+
+
+
6.30 equalizer# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
+filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
+be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
+filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
+
+
In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
+be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+gain, g Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+
+
+
6.30.1 Examples# TOC
+
+ Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
+ Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
+
+
+
+
6.31 flanger# TOC
+
Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+delay Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
+
+depth Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
+
+regen Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
+Default value is 0.
+
+width Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 71.
+
+speed Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
+
+shape Set swept wave shape, can be triangular or sinusoidal .
+Default value is sinusoidal .
+
+phase Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 25.
+
+interp Set delay-line interpolation, linear or quadratic .
+Default is linear .
+
+
+
+
6.32 highpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
6.33 join# TOC
+
+
Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
+
+channel_layout The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
+
+map Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the input_idx .in_channel -out_channel input_idx is the 0-based index of the input stream. in_channel
+can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
+index in the specified input stream. out_channel is the name of the output
+channel.
+
+
+
The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
+explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
+and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
+
+
Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
+'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
+out
+
+
+
+
6.34 ladspa# TOC
+
+
Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer’s Simple Plugin API) plugin.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-ladspa.
+
+
+file, f Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
+variable LADSPA_PATH is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
+each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
+LADSPA_PATH, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
+this order: HOME/.ladspa/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/ladspa/ ,
+/usr/lib/ladspa/ .
+
+plugin, p Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
+one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
+will list all available plugins within the specified library.
+
+controls, c Set the ’|’ separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
+values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
+threshold or gain).
+Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
+c0=value0 |c1=value1 |c2=value2 |..., where
+valuei is the value set on the i -th control.
+If controls is set to help, all available controls and
+their valid ranges are printed.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
+zero inputs.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
+is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
+as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+
+
+
+
6.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
+
+
+ List all available controls and their valid ranges for vcf_notch
+plugin from VCF library:
+
+
ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
+ Simulate low quality audio equipment using Computer Music Toolkit (CMT)
+plugin library:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
+ Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
+(Tom’s Audio Processing plugins):
+
+
ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
+ Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
+ Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin C* Click - Metronome from the
+C* Audio Plugin Suite (CAPS) library:
+
+
ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
+ Apply C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser effect:
+
+
ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
+
+
+
+
6.34.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+cN Modify the N -th control value.
+
+If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
+
+
+
+
6.35 lowpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
6.36 pan# TOC
+
+
Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
+channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
+
+
This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
+stream.
+
+
The filter accepts parameters of the form:
+"l |outdef |outdef |..."
+
+
+l output channel layout or number of channels
+
+outdef output channel specification, of the form:
+"out_name =[gain *]in_name [+[gain *]in_name ...]"
+
+out_name output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
+number (c0, c1, etc.)
+
+gain multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
+
+in_name input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
+named and numbered input channels
+
+
+
If the ‘=’ in a channel specification is replaced by ‘<’, then the gains for
+that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
+avoiding clipping noise.
+
+
+
6.36.1 Mixing examples# TOC
+
+
For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
+factor for the left channel:
+
+
pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
+
+
+
A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
+7-channels surround:
+
+
pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
+
+
+
Note that ffmpeg integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
+that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
+needs.
+
+
+
6.36.2 Remapping examples# TOC
+
+
The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
+
+
+ gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
+ only one input per channel output,
+
+
+
If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
+channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
+remapping.
+
+
For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
+dropping the extra channels:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
+
+
+
Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
+and keep the input channel layout:
+
+
pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
+
+
+
If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
+still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
+
+
+
Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
+front left and right:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
+
+
+
+
6.37 replaygain# TOC
+
+
ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
+outputs it unchanged.
+At end of filtering it displays track_gain and track_peak.
+
+
+
6.38 resample# TOC
+
+
Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
+not meant to be used directly.
+
+
+
6.39 silencedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect silence in an audio stream.
+
+
This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
+or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
+minimum detected noise duration.
+
+
The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+duration, d Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
+
+noise, n Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
+specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
+
+
+
+
6.39.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
+
+
silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
+ Complete example with ffmpeg to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
+tolerance in silence.mp3 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
+
+
+
+
6.40 silenceremove# TOC
+
+
Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+start_periods This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
+the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
+beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
+finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
+the start_periods will be 1 but it can be increased to higher
+values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_duration Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
+trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
+as silence and trimmed off. Default value is 0.
+
+start_threshold This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
+audio, a value of 0 may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
+you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+stop_periods Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
+To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a stop_periods
+that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
+used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
+start_periods , making it suitable for removing periods of silence
+in the middle of the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_duration Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
+more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
+the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_threshold This is the same as start_threshold but for trimming silence from
+the end of audio.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+leave_silence This indicate that stop_duration length of audio should be left intact
+at the beginning of each period of silence.
+For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
+to remove the pauses completely. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
6.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
+that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
+pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
+
+
silenceremove=1:5:0.02
+
+
+
+
6.41 treble# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
+Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
+to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 3000 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
6.42 volume# TOC
+
+
Adjust the input audio volume.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+volume Set audio volume expression.
+
+Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
+
+The output audio volume is given by the relation:
+
+
output_volume = volume * input_volume
+The default value for volume is "1.0".
+
+precision This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
+
+It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
+precision of the volume scaling.
+
+
+fixed 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
+
float 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
+
double 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
+
+
+replaygain Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
+
+
+drop Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
+
+ignore Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
+
+track Prefer the track gain, if present.
+
+album Prefer the album gain, if present.
+
+
+replaygain_preamp Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
+
+Default value for replaygain_preamp is 0.0.
+
+eval Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘once ’
+only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
+when the ‘volume ’ command is sent
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expression for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘once ’.
+
+
+
The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
+
+
+n frame number (starting at zero)
+
nb_channels number of channels
+
nb_consumed_samples number of samples consumed by the filter
+
nb_samples number of samples in the current frame
+
pos original frame position in the file
+
pts frame PTS
+
sample_rate sample rate
+
startpts PTS at start of stream
+
startt time at start of stream
+
t frame time
+
tb timestamp timebase
+
volume last set volume value
+
+
+
Note that when eval is set to ‘once ’ only the
+sample_rate and tb variables are available, all other
+variables will evaluate to NAN.
+
+
+
6.42.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+volume Modify the volume expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
replaygain_noclip Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
+
+Default value for replaygain_noclip is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
6.42.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
6.43 volumedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect the volume of the input video.
+
+
The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
+the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
+
+
In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
+volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
+registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
+the samples).
+
+
All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
+
+
+
6.43.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Here is an excerpt of the output:
+
+
[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
+
+
+
It means that:
+
+ The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
+ The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
+ There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
+
+
+
In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
+raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
+
+
+
+
7 Audio Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
+
+
+
7.1 abuffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+time_base The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
+either a floating-point number or in numerator /denominator form.
+
+sample_rate The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
+
+sample_fmt The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
+the enum AVSampleFormat in libavutil/samplefmt.h
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c or its corresponding integer representation
+from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h
+
+channels The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
+If both channels and channel_layout are specified, then they
+must be consistent.
+
+
+
+
+
7.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
+Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
+6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
+equivalent to:
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
+
+
+
+
7.2 aevalsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
+
+
This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
+channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
+audio signal.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
+channel_layout option is not specified, the selected channel layout
+depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
+specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
+must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
+duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
+complete frame.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
+default to 1024.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+
+
+
+
7.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate silence:
+
+
+ Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
+8000 Hz:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
+ Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
+Center + Back Center) explicitly:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
+ Generate white noise:
+
+
aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
+ Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
+ Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
+
+
aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
+
+
+
+
7.3 anullsrc# TOC
+
+
The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
+as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
+the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
+synth filter).
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+channel_layout, cl
+Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
+representing a channel layout. The default value of channel_layout
+is "stereo".
+
+Check the channel_layout_map definition in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c for the mapping between strings and
+channel layout values.
+
+
+sample_rate, r Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per requested frames.
+
+
+
+
+
7.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
+
+
+ Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
+
+
anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
+
+
+
All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
+
+
+
7.4 flite# TOC
+
+
Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libflite.
+
+
Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+list_voices If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
+immediately. Default value is 0.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
+
+textfile Set the filename containing the text to speak.
+
+text Set the text to speak.
+
+voice, v Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
+kal. See also the list_voices option.
+
+
+
+
7.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read from file speech.txt , and synthesize the text using the
+standard flite voice:
+
+
flite=textfile=speech.txt
+ Read the specified text selecting the slt voice:
+
+
flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Input text to ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Make ffplay speak the specified text, using flite and
+the lavfi device:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
+
+
+
For more information about libflite, check:
+http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/
+
+
+
7.5 sine# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
+
+
The audio signal is bit-exact.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
+
+beep_factor, b Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency beep_factor times
+the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
+
+sample_rate, r Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
+
+samples_per_frame Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
+
+
+
+
7.5.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
+
+
+ Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
+
+
sine=220:4:d=5
+sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
+sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
+
+
+
+
+
8 Audio Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
+
+
+
8.1 abuffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
8.2 anullsink# TOC
+
+
Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
9 Video Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the video filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
+
+
+
9.1 alphaextract# TOC
+
+
Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
+is especially useful with the alphamerge filter.
+
+
+
9.2 alphamerge# TOC
+
+
Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
+grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
+alphaextract to allow the transmission or storage of frame
+sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn’t support an alpha
+channel.
+
+
For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
+and a separate video created with alphaextract , you might use:
+
+
movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
+
+
+
Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
+sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
+input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
+pipeline drops frames. If you’re trying to apply an image as an
+overlay to a video stream, consider the overlay filter instead.
+
+
+
+
+
Same as the subtitles filter, except that it doesn’t require libavcodec
+and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
+Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
+the subtitles filter:
+
+
+shaping Set the shaping engine
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘auto ’
+The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
+
‘simple ’
+Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
+
‘complex ’
+Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
+
+
+The default is auto.
+
+
+
+
9.4 bbox# TOC
+
+
Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
+luminance plane.
+
+
This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
+luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
+The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
+log.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+min_val Set the minimal luminance value. Default is 16.
+
+
+
+
9.5 blackdetect# TOC
+
+
Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
+useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
+recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
+duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+black_min_duration, d Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
+be a non-negative floating point number.
+
+Default value is 2.0.
+
+picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
+Express the minimum value for the ratio:
+
+
nb_black_pixels / nb_pixels
+for which a picture is considered black.
+Default value is 0.98.
+
+pixel_black_th, pix_th Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
+
+The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
+pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
+the following equation:
+
+
absolute_threshold = luminance_minimum_value + pixel_black_th * luminance_range_size
+luminance_range_size and luminance_minimum_value depend on
+the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
+formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
+
+Default value is 0.10.
+
+
+
The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
+value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
+
+
blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
+
+
+
+
9.6 blackframe# TOC
+
+
Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
+detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
+the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
+the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+amount The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
+98.
+
+threshold, thresh The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
+32.
+
+
+
+
+
9.7 blend, tblend# TOC
+
+
Blend two video frames into each other.
+
+
The blend filter takes two input streams and outputs one
+stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
+"bottom" layer. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
+
+
The tblend (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
+from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
+the new frame on top of the old frame.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+c0_mode c1_mode c2_mode c3_mode all_mode Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_mode . Default value is normal.
+
+Available values for component modes are:
+
+‘addition ’
+‘and ’
+‘average ’
+‘burn ’
+‘darken ’
+‘difference ’
+‘difference128 ’
+‘divide ’
+‘dodge ’
+‘exclusion ’
+‘hardlight ’
+‘lighten ’
+‘multiply ’
+‘negation ’
+‘normal ’
+‘or ’
+‘overlay ’
+‘phoenix ’
+‘pinlight ’
+‘reflect ’
+‘screen ’
+‘softlight ’
+‘subtract ’
+‘vividlight ’
+‘xor ’
+
+
+c0_opacity c1_opacity c2_opacity c3_opacity all_opacity Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_opacity . Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
+
+c0_expr c1_expr c2_expr c3_expr all_expr Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_expr . Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y the coordinates of the current sample
+
+W H the width and height of currently filtered plane
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+TOP, A Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
+
+BOTTOM, B Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is
+0. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+repeatlast Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
+Default is 1. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+
+
+
9.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
+
+
blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
+ Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover down effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover up-left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
+ Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
+
+
tblend=all_mode=difference128
+
+
+
+
9.8 boxblur# TOC
+
+
Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr luma_power, lp chroma_radius, cr chroma_power, cp alpha_radius, ar alpha_power, ap
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+luma_radius, lr chroma_radius, cr alpha_radius, ar Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
+corresponding input plane.
+
+The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
+greater than the value of the expression min(w,h)/2 for the
+luma and alpha planes, and of min(cw,ch)/2 for the chroma
+planes.
+
+Default value for luma_radius is "2". If not specified,
+chroma_radius and alpha_radius default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_radius .
+
+The expressions can contain the following constants:
+
+w h The input width and height in pixels.
+
+cw ch The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p", hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+luma_power, lp chroma_power, cp alpha_power, ap Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
+corresponding plane.
+
+Default value for luma_power is 2. If not specified,
+chroma_power and alpha_power default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_power .
+
+A value of 0 will disable the effect.
+
+
+
+
9.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
+set to 2:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
+boxblur=2:1
+ Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
+
+
+ Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
+
+
+
+
9.9 codecview# TOC
+
+
Visualize information exported by some codecs.
+
+
Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
+means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
+export_mvs flag in the codec flags2 option.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+mv Set motion vectors to visualize.
+
+Available flags for mv are:
+
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+
+
+
9.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
+
+
+
+
9.10 colorbalance# TOC
+
Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
+
+
The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
+regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
+
+
A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
+value towards the complementary color.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rs gs bs Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
+
+rm gm bm Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
+
+rh gh bh Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+
+
+
9.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add red color cast to shadows:
+
+
+
+
+
9.11 colorlevels# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames using levels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rimin gimin bimin aimin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+rimax gimax bimax aimax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
+(dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
+
+romin gomin bomin aomin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+romax gomax bomax aomax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
+
+
+
+
9.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make video output darker:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
+ Increase contrast:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
+ Make video output lighter:
+
+
colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
+ Increase brightness:
+
+
colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
+
+
+
+
9.12 colorchannelmixer# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
+
+
This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
+the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
+modify is red, the output value will be:
+
+
red =red *rr + blue *rb + green *rg + alpha *ra
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rr rg rb ra Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
+Default is 1 for rr , and 0 for rg , rb and ra .
+
+gr gg gb ga Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
+Default is 1 for gg , and 0 for gr , gb and ga .
+
+br bg bb ba Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
+Default is 1 for bb , and 0 for br , bg and ba .
+
+ar ag ab aa Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
+Default is 1 for aa , and 0 for ar , ag and ab .
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-2.0, 2.0].
+
+
+
+
9.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert source to grayscale:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
+ Simulate sepia tones:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
+
+
+
+
9.13 colormatrix# TOC
+
+
Convert color matrix.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+src dst Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
+specified.
+
+The accepted values are:
+
+‘bt709 ’
+BT.709
+
+‘bt601 ’
+BT.601
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+SMPTE-240M
+
+‘fcc ’
+FCC
+
+
+
+
For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
+
+
colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
+
+
+
+
9.14 copy# TOC
+
+
Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
+testing purposes.
+
+
+
9.15 crop# TOC
+
+
Crop the input video to given dimensions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+w, out_w The width of the output video. It defaults to iw.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+h, out_h The height of the output video. It defaults to ih.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+x The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
+video. It defaults to (in_w-out_w)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+y The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
+It defaults to (in_h-out_h)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+keep_aspect If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
+to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
+ratio. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
The out_w , out_h , x , y parameters are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (cropped) width and height.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+n The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
The expression for out_w may depend on the value of out_h ,
+and the expression for out_h may depend on out_w , but they
+cannot depend on x and y , as x and y are
+evaluated after out_w and out_h .
+
+
The x and y parameters specify the expressions for the
+position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
+are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
+is approximated to the nearest valid value.
+
+
The expression for x may depend on y , and the expression
+for y may depend on x .
+
+
+
9.15.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.16 cropdetect# TOC
+
+
Auto-detect the crop size.
+
+
It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
+recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
+correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+limit Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
+from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8bit based formats). An intensity
+value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
+You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
+on the bitdepth of the pixel format.
+
+round The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
+16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
+get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
+encoding to most video codecs.
+
+reset_count, reset Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
+reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
+detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
+
+This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
+indicates ’never reset’, and returns the largest area encountered during
+playback.
+
+
+
+
9.17 curves# TOC
+
+
Apply color adjustments using curves.
+
+
This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
+component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by N key points
+tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
+values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
+the output frame.
+
+
By default, a component curve is defined by the two points (0;0) and
+(1;1) . This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
+"adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
+
+
The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
+curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
+smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
+strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their x and y values must
+be in the [0;1] interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
+the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
+
+
If there is no key point defined in x=0, the filter will automatically
+insert a (0;0) point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
+in x=1, the filter will automatically insert a (1;1) point.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+preset Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
+to the r , g , b parameters; in this case, the later
+options takes priority on the preset values.
+Available presets are:
+
+‘none ’
+‘color_negative ’
+‘cross_process ’
+‘darker ’
+‘increase_contrast ’
+‘lighter ’
+‘linear_contrast ’
+‘medium_contrast ’
+‘negative ’
+‘strong_contrast ’
+‘vintage ’
+
+Default is none.
+
master, m Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
+is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
+r , g , b or all since it acts like a
+post-processing LUT.
+
red, r Set the key points for the red component.
+
green, g Set the key points for the green component.
+
blue, b Set the key points for the blue component.
+
all Set the key points for all components (not including master).
+Can be used in addition to the other key points component
+options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
+all setting.
+
psfile Specify a Photoshop curves file (.asv) to import the settings from.
+
+
+
To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
+defined using the following syntax: x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+
+
9.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.18 dctdnoiz# TOC
+
+
Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
+
+
This filter is not designed for real time.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sigma, s Set the noise sigma constant.
+
+This sigma defines a hard threshold of 3 * sigma; every DCT
+coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
+
+If you need a more advanced filtering, see expr .
+
+Default is 0.
+
+overlap Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
+may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
+risk of various artefacts.
+
+If the overlapping value doesn’t allow to process the whole input width or
+height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won’t be denoised.
+
+Default value is blocksize -1, which is the best possible setting.
+
+expr, e Set the coefficient factor expression.
+
+For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
+multiplier value for the coefficient.
+
+If this is option is set, the sigma option will be ignored.
+
+The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the c
+variable.
+
+n Set the blocksize using the number of bits. 1<<n defines the
+blocksize , which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
+
+The default value is 3 (8x8) and can be raised to 4 for a
+blocksize of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
+on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
+better de-noising.
+
+
+
+
9.18.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Apply a denoise with a sigma of 4.5:
+
+
+
The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
+
+
dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
+
+
+
Violent denoise using a block size of 16x16:
+
+
+
+
9.19 decimate# TOC
+
+
Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cycle Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
+N means one frame in every batch of N frames will be dropped.
+Default is 5.
+
+dupthresh Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
+is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
+is 1.1
+
+scthresh Set scene change threshold. Default is 15.
+
+blockx blocky Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
+Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
+small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is 32.
+
+ppsrc Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
+stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
+the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
+1, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
+stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
+0.
+
+chroma Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
+1.
+
+
+
+
9.20 dejudder# TOC
+
+
Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
+
+
Judder can be introduced, for instance, by pullup filter. If the original
+source was partially telecined content then the output of pullup,dejudder
+will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
+container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
+rate video.
+
+
The option available in this filter is:
+
+cycle Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
+
+Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
+
+‘4 ’
+If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
+
+‘5 ’
+If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
+
+‘20 ’
+If a mixture of the two.
+
+
+The default is ‘4 ’.
+
+
+
+
9.21 delogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
+pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
+(and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+x y Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
+specified.
+
+w h Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
+specified.
+
+band, t Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
+w and h ). The default value is 4.
+
+show When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
+finding the right x , y , w , and h parameters.
+The default value is 0.
+
+The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
+replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
+immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
+compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
+
+
+
+
+
9.21.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
+and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
+
+
delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
+
+
+
+
9.22 deshake# TOC
+
+
Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
+filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
+tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+x y w h Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
+vectors.
+If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
+rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
+and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
+filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
+box.
+
+This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
+might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
+
+If any or all of x , y , w and h are set to -1
+then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
+without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
+
+Default - search the whole frame.
+
+rx ry Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
+range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
+
+edge Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
+frame. Available values are:
+
+‘blank, 0 ’
+Fill zeroes at blank locations
+
‘original, 1 ’
+Original image at blank locations
+
‘clamp, 2 ’
+Extruded edge value at blank locations
+
‘mirror, 3 ’
+Mirrored edge at blank locations
+
+Default value is ‘mirror ’.
+
+blocksize Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
+default 8.
+
+contrast Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
+the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
+pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
+
+search Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
+
+‘exhaustive, 0 ’
+Set exhaustive search
+
‘less, 1 ’
+Set less exhaustive search.
+
+Default value is ‘exhaustive ’.
+
+filename If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
+specified file.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
9.23 drawbox# TOC
+
+
Draw a colored box on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
+the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the box edge color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is 3.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn box.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn box.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
9.23.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.24 drawgrid# TOC
+
+
Draw a grid on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
+input width and height, respectively, minus thickness, so image gets
+framed. Default to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the grid color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is 1.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input grid cell width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn cell.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn cell.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
9.24.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@0.5
+ Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@0.5
+
+
+
+
9.25 drawtext# TOC
+
+
Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
+libfreetype library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfreetype.
+To enable default font fallback and the font option you need to
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libfontconfig.
+To enable the text_shaping option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfribidi.
+
+
+
9.25.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+box Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
+The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
+The default value of box is 0.
+
+boxcolor The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of boxcolor is "white".
+
+borderw Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using bordercolor .
+The default value of borderw is 0.
+
+bordercolor Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of bordercolor is "black".
+
+expansion Select how the text is expanded. Can be either none,
+strftime (deprecated) or
+normal (default). See the Text expansion section
+below for details.
+
+fix_bounds If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
+
+fontcolor The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of fontcolor is "black".
+
+fontcolor_expr String which is expanded the same way as text to obtain dynamic
+fontcolor value. By default this option has empty value and is not
+processed. When this option is set, it overrides fontcolor option.
+
+font The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
+
+fontfile The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
+This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
+
+fontsize The font size to be used for drawing text.
+The default value of fontsize is 16.
+
+text_shaping If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
+right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
+Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
+By default 1 (if supported).
+
+ft_load_flags The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
+
+The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
+a combination of the following values:
+
+default no_scale no_hinting render no_bitmap vertical_layout force_autohint crop_bitmap pedantic ignore_global_advance_width no_recurse ignore_transform monochrome linear_design no_autohint
+
+Default value is "default".
+
+For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
+libfreetype flags.
+
+shadowcolor The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of shadowcolor is "black".
+
+shadowx shadowy The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
+position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
+values. The default value for both is "0".
+
+start_number The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
+is "0".
+
+tabsize The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
+Default value is 4.
+
+timecode Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
+format. It can be used with or without text parameter. timecode_rate
+option must be specified.
+
+timecode_rate, rate, r Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
+
+text The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
+encoded characters.
+This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
+textfile .
+
+textfile A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
+of UTF-8 encoded characters.
+
+This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
+parameter text .
+
+If both text and textfile are specified, an error is thrown.
+
+reload If set to 1, the textfile will be reloaded before each frame.
+Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
+
+x y The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
+within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
+output image.
+
+The default value of x and y is "0".
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
+
+
+
The parameters for x and y are expressions containing the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+line_h, lh the height of each text line
+
+main_h, h, H the input height
+
+main_w, w, W the input width
+
+max_glyph_a, ascent the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
+coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
+glyphs.
+It is a positive value, due to the grid’s orientation with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_d, descent the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
+used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
+This is a negative value, due to the grid’s orientation, with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_h maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to ascent -
+descent .
+
+max_glyph_w maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+rand(min, max) return a random number included between min and max
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+text_h, th the height of the rendered text
+
+text_w, tw the width of the rendered text
+
+x y the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
+
+These parameters allow the x and y expressions to refer
+each other, so you can for example specify y=x/dar.
+
+
+
+
9.25.2 Text expansion# TOC
+
+
If expansion is set to strftime,
+the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
+expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
+feature is deprecated.
+
+
If expansion is set to none, the text is printed verbatim.
+
+
If expansion is set to normal (which is the default),
+the following expansion mechanism is used.
+
+
The backslash character ’\’, followed by any character, always expands to
+the second character.
+
+
Sequence of the form %{...} are expanded. The text between the
+braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ’:’.
+If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (’:’ or ’}’),
+they should be escaped.
+
+
Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
+text option in the filter argument string and as the filter
+argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
+that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
+problems.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+
+expr, eThe expression evaluation result.
+
+It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
+which accepts the same constants and functions as the x and
+y values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
+example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
+the constants text_w and text_h will have an undefined
+value.
+
+expr_int_format, eifEvaluate the expression’s value and output as formatted integer.
+
+The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the expr function.
+The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are ’x’, ’X’, ’d’ and
+’u’. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
+The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
+It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
+
+gmtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+localtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+metadataFrame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
+
+n, frame_numThe frame number, starting from 0.
+
+pict_typeA 1 character description of the current picture type.
+
+ptsThe timestamp of the current frame.
+It can take up to two arguments.
+
+The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to flt
+for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; hms stands
+for a formatted [-]HH:MM:SS.mmm timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
+
+The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
+
+
+
+
+
9.25.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
For more information about libfreetype, check:
+http://www.freetype.org/ .
+
+
For more information about fontconfig, check:
+http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html .
+
+
For more information about libfribidi, check:
+http://fribidi.org/ .
+
+
+
9.26 edgedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+low high Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
+algorithm.
+
+The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
+connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
+by the low threshold.
+
+low and high threshold values must be chosen in the range
+[0,1], and low should be lesser or equal to high .
+
+Default value for low is 20/255, and default value for high
+is 50/255.
+
+mode Define the drawing mode.
+
+
+‘wires ’
+Draw white/gray wires on black background.
+
+‘colormix ’
+Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
+
+
+Default value is wires .
+
+
+
+
9.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
+ Painting effect without thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
+
+
+
+
9.27 extractplanes# TOC
+
+
Extract color channel components from input video stream into
+separate grayscale video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+planes Set plane(s) to extract.
+
+Available values for planes are:
+
+‘y ’
+‘u ’
+‘v ’
+‘a ’
+‘r ’
+‘g ’
+‘b ’
+
+
+Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
+That means you cannot select r, g, b planes
+with y, u, v planes at same time.
+
+
+
+
9.27.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
+into 3 grayscale outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
+
+
+
+
9.28 elbg# TOC
+
+
Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
+
+
For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
+the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
+of distinct output colors.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options.
+
+
+codebook_length, l Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
+represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
+
+nb_steps, n Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
+mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
+computation time. Default value is 1.
+
+seed, s Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
+UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
+will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
+
+
+
+
9.29 fade# TOC
+
+
Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+type, t The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
+effect.
+Default is in.
+
+start_frame, s Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
+effect at. Default is 0.
+
+nb_frames, n The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
+fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
+At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+Default is 25.
+
+alpha If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_time, st Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
+effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
+whichever comes last. Default is 0.
+
+duration, d The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
+fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
+at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
+
+
+
+
9.29.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.30 field# TOC
+
+
Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
+arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
+non-interlaced.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+type Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is 0 or
+top) or the bottom field (if the value is 1 or
+bottom).
+
+
+
+
9.31 fieldmatch# TOC
+
+
Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
+progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
+frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine fieldmatch needs to be
+followed by a decimation filter such as decimate in the filtergraph.
+
+
The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
+the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
+If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
+fieldmatch will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
+But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
+de-interlaced by a later filter such as yadif before decimation.
+
+
In addition to the various configuration options, fieldmatch can take an
+optional second stream, activated through the ppsrc option. If
+enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
+this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
+help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
+(assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
+or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
+
+
Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
+and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
+which fieldmatch is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
+close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
+
+
The decimate filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
+Do not use fieldmatch and decimate if your input has mixed
+telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+order Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg’s internal parity value).
+
‘bff ’
+Assume bottom field first.
+
‘tff ’
+Assume top field first.
+
+
+Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
+stream.
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mode Set the matching mode or strategy to use. pc mode is the safest in the
+sense that it won’t risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
+possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
+outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
+hand, pcn_ub mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
+but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
+all somewhere in between pc and pcn_ub in terms of risking
+jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
+with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
+
+More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in p/c/n/u/b meaning section.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘pc ’
+2-way matching (p/c)
+
‘pc_n ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
+
‘pc_u ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
+
‘pc_n_ub ’
+2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
+still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
+
‘pcn ’
+3-way matching (p/c/n)
+
‘pcn_ub ’
+3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
+detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
+
+
+The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
+mode assuming order =tff (and field on auto or
+top ).
+
+In terms of speed pc mode is by far the fastest and pcn_ub is
+the slowest.
+
+Default value is pc_n .
+
+ppsrc Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
+input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
+introduction for more details. It is similar to the clip2 feature from
+VFM/TFM.
+
+Default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+field Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
+order unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
+certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
+large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatic (same value as order ).
+
‘bottom ’
+Match from the bottom field.
+
‘top ’
+Match from the top field.
+
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mchroma Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
+cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to 0
+only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
+artifacts. Setting this to 0 could also be used to speed things up at
+the cost of some accuracy.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+y0 y1 These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between y0 and
+y1 from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
+band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
+interfere with the matching. y0 sets the starting scan line and
+y1 sets the ending line; all lines in between y0 and
+y1 (including y0 and y1 ) will be ignored. Setting
+y0 and y1 to the same value will disable the feature.
+y0 and y1 defaults to 0.
+
+scthresh Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
+the luma plane. Good values are in the [8.0, 14.0] range. Scene change
+detection is only relevant in case combmatch =sc . The range for
+scthresh is [0.0, 100.0].
+
+Default value is 12.0.
+
+combmatch When combatch is not none , fieldmatch will take into
+account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
+final match. Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No final matching based on combed scores.
+
‘sc ’
+Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
+
‘full ’
+Use combed scores all the time.
+
+
+Default is sc .
+
+combdbg Force fieldmatch to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
+print them. This setting is known as micout in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No forced calculation.
+
‘pcn ’
+Force p/c/n calculations.
+
‘pcnub ’
+Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
+
+
+Default value is none .
+
+cthresh This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
+essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
+Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
+can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
+-1 (every pixel will be detected as combed) to 255 (no pixel will
+be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
+range is [8, 12].
+
+Default value is 9.
+
+chroma Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
+disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
+causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
+using chroma =0 is usually more reliable, except for the case
+where there is chroma only combing in the source.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+blockx blocky Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
+frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
+combpel pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
+declared combed. See the combpel parameter description for more info.
+Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
+to 512.
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+combpel The number of combed pixels inside any of the blocky by
+blockx size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
+combed. While cthresh controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
+setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
+window defined by the blockx and blocky settings) on the
+frame. Minimum value is 0 and maximum is blocky x blockx (at
+which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
+as MI in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+
+Default value is 80.
+
+
+
+
9.31.1 p/c/n/u/b meaning# TOC
+
+
+
9.31.1.1 p/c/n# TOC
+
+
We assume the following telecined stream:
+
+
+
Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
+Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
+first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
+
+
When fieldmatch is configured to run a matching from bottom
+(field =bottom ) this is how this input stream get transformed:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
+
+Matches: c c n n c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 3 4 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
+To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
+after this operation. See for instance the decimate filter.
+
+
The same operation now matching from top fields (field =top )
+looks like this:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+Matches: c c p p c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 2 3 4
+
+
+
In these examples, we can see what p , c and n mean;
+basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
+
+
+ p matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
+ c matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
+ n matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
+
+
+
+
9.31.1.2 u/b# TOC
+
+
The u and b matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
+from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
+currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
+’x’ is placed above and below each matched fields.
+
+
With bottom matching (field =bottom ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 1 2 2 2
+ 2 2 2 1 3
+
+
+
With top matching (field =top ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 2 2 1 2
+ 2 1 3 2 2
+
+
+
+
9.31.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
+
+
+
Advanced IVTC, with fallback on yadif for still combed frames:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
+
+
+
+
9.32 fieldorder# TOC
+
+
Transform the field order of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+order The output field order. Valid values are tff for top field first or bff
+for bottom field first.
+
+
+
The default value is ‘tff ’.
+
+
The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
+by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
+This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
+
+
If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
+flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
+not alter the incoming video.
+
+
It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
+which is bottom field first.
+
+
For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
+
+
+
+
9.33 fifo# TOC
+
+
Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
+
+
It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
+framework.
+
+
It does not take parameters.
+
+
+
9.34 format# TOC
+
+
Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
+Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
+the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+"pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
9.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.35 fps# TOC
+
+
Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
+frames as necessary.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+fps The desired output frame rate. The default is 25.
+
+round Rounding method.
+
+Possible values are:
+
+zero zero round towards 0
+
inf round away from 0
+
down round towards -infinity
+
up round towards +infinity
+
near round to nearest
+
+The default is near.
+
+start_time Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
+padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
+about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
+For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
+the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
+frames with a negative PTS.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+fps [:round ].
+
+
See also the setpts filter.
+
+
+
9.35.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
+
+
+ Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
+
+
fps=fps=film:round=near
+
+
+
+
9.36 framepack# TOC
+
+
Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
+metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
+framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
+that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the scale and
+fps filters.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+format The desired packing format. Supported values are:
+
+
+sbs The views are next to each other (default).
+
+tab The views are on top of each other.
+
+lines The views are packed by line.
+
+columns The views are packed by column.
+
+frameseq The views are temporally interleaved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
# Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
+
+# Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
9.37 framestep# TOC
+
+
Select one frame every N-th frame.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option:
+
+step Select frame after every step frames.
+Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
9.38 frei0r# TOC
+
+
Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
+
+
To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
+FREI0R_PATH is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
+directories specified by the colon-separated list in FREIOR_PATH.
+Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
+HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/ ,
+/usr/lib/frei0r-1/ .
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
+
+
+
+
A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
+"y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
+R /G /B , where R , G , and B are floating point
+numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as X /Y , where
+X and Y are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
+
+
The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
+effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
+
+
+
9.38.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
+
+
frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
+ Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
+
+
frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
+frei0r=colordistance:violet
+frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
+ Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
+positions:
+
+
frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
+
+
+
For more information, see
+http://frei0r.dyne.org
+
+
+
9.39 fspp# TOC
+
+
Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of spp .
+
+
It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
+processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
+This allows for much higher speed.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is 4.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
+If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
+
+strength Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
+more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
+but also blurrier. Default value is 0 − PSNR optimal.
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
+
9.40 geq# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+lum_expr, lum Set the luminance expression.
+
cb_expr, cb Set the chrominance blue expression.
+
cr_expr, cr Set the chrominance red expression.
+
alpha_expr, a Set the alpha expression.
+
red_expr, r Set the red expression.
+
green_expr, g Set the green expression.
+
blue_expr, b Set the blue expression.
+
+
+
The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
+of the lum_expr , cb_expr , or cr_expr
+options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
+colorspace. If one of the red_expr , green_expr , or
+blue_expr options is specified, it will select an RGB
+colorspace.
+
+
If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
+one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
+If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
+to the luminance expression.
+
+
The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y The coordinates of the current sample.
+
+W H The width and height of the image.
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+p(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the current
+plane.
+
+lum(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the luminance
+plane.
+
+cb(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+cr(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+r(x, y) g(x, y) b(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
+
+alpha(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the alpha
+plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+
+
For functions, if x and y are outside the area, the value will be
+automatically clipped to the closer edge.
+
+
+
9.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Flip the image horizontally:
+
+
+ Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle PI/3 and a
+wavelength of 100 pixels:
+
+
geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
+ Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
+ Generate a quick emboss effect:
+
+
format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
+ Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
+
+
geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
+ Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
+the vignette filter):
+
+
geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
+ Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
+compose with overlay . In this example the video will gradually
+become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
+by the linear gradient:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
+
+
+
+
9.41 gradfun# TOC
+
+
Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
+regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
+Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
+dither them.
+
+
It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
+lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
+bring back the bands.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+strength The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
+the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
+.51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
+valid range.
+
+radius The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
+gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
+regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
+values will be clipped to the valid range.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+strength [:radius ]
+
+
+
9.41.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the filter with a 3.5 strength and radius of 8:
+
+
+ Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
+value):
+
+
+
+
+
+
9.42 haldclut# TOC
+
+
Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
+
+
First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
+The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is 0.
+
repeatlast Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
+Default is 1.
+
+
+
haldclut also has the same interpolation options as lut3d (both
+filters share the same internals).
+
+
More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg’s website
+(Hald CLUT author) at http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html .
+
+
+
9.42.1 Workflow examples# TOC
+
+
+
9.42.1.1 Hald CLUT video stream# TOC
+
+
Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
+
+
+
Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
+
+
Then use it with haldclut to apply it on some random stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
+
+
+
The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
+clut.nut ), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
+to the remaining frames of the mandelbrot stream.
+
+
+
9.42.1.2 Hald CLUT with preview# TOC
+
+
A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of Level*Level*Level by
+Level*Level*Level pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
+biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
+padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
+a preview of the Hald CLUT.
+
+
Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
+haldclut filter:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "
+ pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
+ smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
+ [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
+ [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
+
+
+
It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
+bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
+the color changes.
+
+
Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
+
+
ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
+
+
+
+
9.43 hflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video horizontally.
+
+
For example, to horizontally flip the input video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
9.44 histeq# TOC
+
This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
+per-frame basis.
+
+
It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
+intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
+equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
+viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
+useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
+video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+strength Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
+is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
+approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
+in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
+
+intensity Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
+values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
+the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
+must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
+
+antibanding Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
+the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
+the histogram. Possible values are none, weak or
+strong. It defaults to none.
+
+
+
+
9.45 histogram# TOC
+
+
Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
+
+
The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
+distribution in an image.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Set histogram mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘levels ’
+Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
+image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
+the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
+current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
+
+‘color ’
+Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
+graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
+vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
+(i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
+the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
+side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
+with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
+
+The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
+a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
+(color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
+the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
+square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
+color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
+colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
+the edge of the square.
+
+‘color2 ’
+Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as color but actual chroma values
+are displayed.
+
+‘waveform ’
+Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
+represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
+In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
+side represents value = 255.
+
+Default value is levels.
+
+level_height Set height of level in levels. Default value is 200.
+Allowed range is [50, 2048].
+
+scale_height Set height of color scale in levels. Default value is 12.
+Allowed range is [0, 40].
+
+step Set step for waveform mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
+many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
+Default value is 10. Allowed range is [1, 255].
+
+waveform_mode Set mode for waveform. Can be either row, or column.
+Default is row.
+
+waveform_mirror Set mirroring mode for waveform. 0 means unmirrored, 1
+means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
+side for row mode and at the top for column mode. Default is
+0 (unmirrored).
+
+display_mode Set display mode for waveform and levels.
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘parade ’
+Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
+row waveform mode or one below the other in column waveform mode
+for waveform histogram mode. For levels histogram mode,
+per color component graphs are placed below each other.
+
+Using this display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easy to
+spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
+contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
+grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
+and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
+roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
+making level adjustments the three waveforms.
+
+‘overlay ’
+Presents information identical to that in the parade, except
+that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
+over one another.
+
+This display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easier to spot
+relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
+components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
+or blacks.
+
+Default is parade.
+
+levels_mode Set mode for levels. Can be either linear, or logarithmic.
+Default is linear.
+
+
+
+
9.45.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Calculate and draw histogram:
+
+
ffplay -i input -vf histogram
+
+
+
+
9.46 hqdn3d# TOC
+
+
This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
+image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
+still. It should enhance compressibility.
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+luma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
+It defaults to 4.0.
+
+chroma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
+It defaults to 3.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+luma_tmp A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
+6.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+chroma_tmp A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
+luma_tmp *chroma_spatial /luma_spatial .
+
+
+
+
9.47 hqx# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
+was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for hq2x, 3 for
+hq3x and 4 for hq4x.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
9.48 hue# TOC
+
+
Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+h Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
+and defaults to "0".
+
+s Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "1".
+
+H Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
+expression, and defaults to "0".
+
+b Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "0".
+
+
+
h and H are mutually exclusive, and can’t be
+specified at the same time.
+
+
The b , h , H and s option values are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+n frame count of the input frame starting from 0
+
+pts presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
9.48.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.48.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+b s h H Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
9.49 idet# TOC
+
+
Detect video interlacing type.
+
+
This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
+top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
+repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
+
+
Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
+Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
+
+
The filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+single.current_frame Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+single.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.current_frame Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+multiple.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
+
+repeated.current_frame Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of “neither”, “top”, or “bottom”.
+
+repeated.neither Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
+
+repeated.top Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame’s top field.
+
+repeated.bottom Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame’s bottom field.
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+intl_thres Set interlacing threshold.
+
prog_thres Set progressive threshold.
+
repeat_thres Threshold for repeated field detection.
+
half_life Number of frames after which a given frame’s contribution to the
+statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it’s
+classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
+full weight of 1.0 forever.
+
analyze_interlaced_flag When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
+if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
+If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
+computations, if it is found to be inaccuarte it will be cleared without any
+further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
+method to clean up the interlaced flag
+
+
+
+
+
+
Deinterleave or interleave fields.
+
+
This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
+deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
+fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
+half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
+You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_mode, l chroma_mode, c alpha_mode, a Available values for luma_mode , chroma_mode and
+alpha_mode are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing.
+
+‘deinterleave, d ’
+Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
+
+‘interleave, i ’
+Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
+
+Default value is none.
+
+luma_swap, ls chroma_swap, cs alpha_swap, as Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
9.51 interlace# TOC
+
+
Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
+lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
+halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
+
+
+
Original Original New Frame
+ Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
+ ========== =========== ==================
+ Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
+ Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
+ Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
+ Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
+ ... ... ...
+New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
+
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+scan This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
+(tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
+
+lowpass Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
+interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
+
+
+
+
9.52 kerndeint# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft’s adaptive kernel
+deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
+progressive frames.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+thresh Set the threshold which affects the filter’s tolerance when
+determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
+in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
+applying the process on every pixels.
+
+map Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+order Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
+0. Default is 0.
+
+sharp Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+twoway Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
9.52.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply default values:
+
+
kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
+ Enable additional sharpening:
+
+
+ Paint processed pixels in white:
+
+
+
+
+
9.53 lenscorrection# TOC
+
+
Correct radial lens distortion
+
+
This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
+of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
+one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
+To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
+and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
+
+
Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
+Digikam from the KDE project.
+
+
In contrast to the vignette filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
+this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas vignette corrects the
+brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
+cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
+be applied before or after lens correction.
+
+
+
9.53.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cx Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+width.
+
cy Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+height.
+
k1 Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
k2 Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
+
+
The formula that generates the correction is:
+
+
r_src = r_tgt * (1 + k1 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^2 + k2 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^4)
+
+
where r_0 is halve of the image diagonal and r_src and r_tgt are the
+distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
+
+
+
9.54 lut3d# TOC
+
+
Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+file Set the 3D LUT file name.
+
+Currently supported formats:
+
+‘3dl ’
+AfterEffects
+
‘cube ’
+Iridas
+
‘dat ’
+DaVinci
+
‘m3d ’
+Pandora
+
+interp Select interpolation mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘nearest ’
+Use values from the nearest defined point.
+
‘trilinear ’
+Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
+
‘tetrahedral ’
+Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
+
+
+
+
+
9.55 lut, lutrgb, lutyuv# TOC
+
+
Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
+to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
+
+
lutyuv applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, lutrgb
+to an RGB input video.
+
+
These filters accept the following parameters:
+
+c0 set first pixel component expression
+
c1 set second pixel component expression
+
c2 set third pixel component expression
+
c3 set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
+
+r set red component expression
+
g set green component expression
+
b set blue component expression
+
a alpha component expression
+
+y set Y/luminance component expression
+
u set U/Cb component expression
+
v set V/Cr component expression
+
+
+
Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
+the corresponding pixel component values.
+
+
The exact component associated to each of the c* options depends on the
+format in input.
+
+
The lut filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
+lutrgb requires RGB pixel formats in input, and lutyuv requires YUV.
+
+
The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+w h The input width and height.
+
+val The input value for the pixel component.
+
+clipval The input value, clipped to the minval -maxval range.
+
+maxval The maximum value for the pixel component.
+
+minval The minimum value for the pixel component.
+
+negval The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
+minval -maxval range; it corresponds to the expression
+"maxval-clipval+minval".
+
+clip(val) The computed value in val , clipped to the
+minval -maxval range.
+
+gammaval(gamma) The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
+clipped to the minval -maxval range. It corresponds to the
+expression
+"pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,gamma )*(maxval-minval)+minval"
+
+
+
+
All expressions default to "val".
+
+
+
9.55.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.56 mergeplanes# TOC
+
+
Merge color channel components from several video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
+planes to the output video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mapping Set input to output plane mapping. Default is 0.
+
+The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
+hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. ’Aa’ describes the
+mapping for the first plane of the output stream. ’A’ sets the number of
+the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and ’a’ the plane number of the
+corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
+similar, ’Bb’ describes the mapping for the output stream second
+plane, ’Cc’ describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
+’Dd’ describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
+
+format Set output pixel format. Default is yuva444p.
+
+
+
+
9.56.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
+ Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
+ Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
+
+
format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
+ Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
+
+
format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
+ Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
+
+
format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
+
+
+
+
9.57 mcdeint# TOC
+
+
Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
+
+
It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
+with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mode Set the deinterlacing mode.
+
+It accepts one of the following values:
+
+‘fast ’
+‘medium ’
+‘slow ’
+use iterative motion estimation
+
‘extra_slow ’
+like ‘slow ’, but use multiple reference frames.
+
+Default value is ‘fast ’.
+
+parity Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
+one of the following values:
+
+
+‘0, tff ’
+assume top field first
+
‘1, bff ’
+assume bottom field first
+
+
+Default value is ‘bff ’.
+
+qp Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
+encoder.
+
+Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
+optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
+
+
This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
+MPlayer/MEncoder.
+
+
This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
+may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
+be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
+depending on them when writing portable scripts.
+
+
The filter accepts the parameters:
+filter_name [:=]filter_params
+
+
filter_name is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
+filter_params is a string containing the parameters accepted by
+the named filter.
+
+
The list of the currently supported filters follows:
+
+eq2 eq ilpack softpulldown
+
+
The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
+of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
+the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
+
+
+
9.58.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
+
+
+
+
See also mplayer(1), http://www.mplayerhq.hu/ .
+
+
+
9.59 mpdecimate# TOC
+
+
Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
+order to reduce frame rate.
+
+
The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
+(e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
+fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+max Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
+positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
+negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
+number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+hi lo frac Set the dropping threshold values.
+
+Values for hi and lo are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
+represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
+corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
+out differently over the block.
+
+A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
+than a threshold of hi , and if no more than frac blocks (1
+meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of lo .
+
+Default value for hi is 64*12, default value for lo is
+64*5, and default value for frac is 0.33.
+
+
+
+
+
9.60 negate# TOC
+
+
Negate input video.
+
+
It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
+alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
+
+
+
9.61 noformat# TOC
+
+
Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
+input to the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
9.61.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Force libavfilter to use a format different from yuv420p for the
+input to the vflip filter:
+
+
noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
+ Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
+
+
noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
+
+
+
+
9.62 noise# TOC
+
+
Add noise on video input frame.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+all_seed c0_seed c1_seed c2_seed c3_seed Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_seed . Default value is 123457.
+
+all_strength, alls c0_strength, c0s c1_strength, c1s c2_strength, c2s c3_strength, c3s Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+all_strength . Default value is 0. Allowed range is [0, 100].
+
+all_flags, allf c0_flags, c0f c1_flags, c1f c2_flags, c2f c3_flags, c3f Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if all_flags .
+Available values for component flags are:
+
+‘a ’
+averaged temporal noise (smoother)
+
‘p ’
+mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
+
‘t ’
+temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
+
‘u ’
+uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
+
+
+
+
+
9.62.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
+
+
noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
+
+
+
+
9.63 null# TOC
+
+
Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
9.64 ocv# TOC
+
+
Apply a video transform using libopencv.
+
+
To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libopencv.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
+
+filter_params The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
+values are assumed.
+
+
+
+
Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
+information:
+http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html
+
+
Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
+
+
+
9.64.1 dilate# TOC
+
+
Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvDilate.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el |nb_iterations .
+
+
struct_el represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
+cols xrows +anchor_x xanchor_y /shape
+
+
cols and rows represent the number of columns and rows of
+the structuring element, anchor_x and anchor_y the anchor
+point, and shape the shape for the structuring element. shape
+must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
+
+
If the value for shape is "custom", it must be followed by a
+string of the form "=filename ". The file with name
+filename is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
+printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
+shape is used, cols and rows are ignored, the number
+or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
+
+
The default value for struct_el is "3x3+0x0/rect".
+
+
nb_iterations specifies the number of times the transform is
+applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
# Use the default values
+ocv=dilate
+
+# Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
+ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
+
+# Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
+# The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
+# *
+# ***
+# *****
+# ***
+# *
+# The specified columns and rows are ignored
+# but the anchor point coordinates are not
+ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
+
+
+
+
9.64.2 erode# TOC
+
+
Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvErode.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el :nb_iterations ,
+with the same syntax and semantics as the dilate filter.
+
+
+
9.64.3 smooth# TOC
+
+
Smooth the input video.
+
+
The filter takes the following parameters:
+type |param1 |param2 |param3 |param4 .
+
+
type is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
+the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
+or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
+
+
The meaning of param1 , param2 , param3 , and param4
+depend on the smooth type. param1 and
+param2 accept integer positive values or 0. param3 and
+param4 accept floating point values.
+
+
The default value for param1 is 3. The default value for the
+other parameters is 0.
+
+
These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
+libopencv function cvSmooth.
+
+
+
9.65 overlay# TOC
+
+
Overlay one video on top of another.
+
+
It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
+video on which the second input is overlaid.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+x y Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
+on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
+the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
+overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
+
+eof_action The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
+one of the following values:
+
+
+repeat Repeat the last frame (the default).
+
endall End both streams.
+
pass Pass the main input through.
+
+
+eval Set when the expressions for x , and y are evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
+when a command is processed
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘frame ’.
+
+shortest If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
+terminates. Default value is 0.
+
+format Set the format for the output video.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘yuv420 ’
+force YUV420 output
+
+‘yuv422 ’
+force YUV422 output
+
+‘yuv444 ’
+force YUV444 output
+
+‘rgb ’
+force RGB output
+
+
+Default value is ‘yuv420 ’.
+
+rgb (deprecated) If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
+color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
+format instead.
+
+repeatlast If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
+main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
+behavior. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The x , and y expressions can contain the following
+parameters.
+
+
+main_w, W main_h, H The main input width and height.
+
+overlay_w, w overlay_h, h The overlay input width and height.
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
+format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and
+vsub is 1.
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
Note that the n , pos , t variables are available only
+when evaluation is done per frame , and will evaluate to NAN
+when eval is set to ‘init ’.
+
+
Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
+order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
+to pass the two inputs through a setpts=PTS-STARTPTS filter to
+have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
+the movie filter does.
+
+
You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
+efficiency of such approach.
+
+
+
9.65.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+x y Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
9.65.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.66 owdenoise# TOC
+
+
Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+depth Set depth.
+
+Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
+slow down filtering.
+
+Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is 8.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+
+
+
9.67 pad# TOC
+
+
Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
+provided x , y coordinates.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+width, w height, h Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
+paddings added. If the value for width or height is 0, the
+corresponding input size is used for the output.
+
+The width expression can reference the value set by the
+height expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of width and height is 0.
+
+x y Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
+with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
+
+The x expression can reference the value set by the y
+expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of x and y is 0.
+
+color Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of color is "black".
+
+
+
The value for the width , height , x , and y
+options are expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input video width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
+specified by the width and height expressions.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+x y The x and y offsets as specified by the x and y
+expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
9.67.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.68 perspective# TOC
+
+
Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
+Default values are 0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H with which perspective will remain unchanged.
+If the sense option is set to source, then the specified points will be sent
+to the corners of the destination. If the sense option is set to destination,
+then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+W H the width and height of video frame.
+
+
+interpolation Set interpolation for perspective correction.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘linear ’
+‘cubic ’
+
+
+Default value is ‘linear ’.
+
+sense Set interpretation of coordinate options.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘0, source ’
+
+Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
+the corners of the destination.
+
+
+‘1, destination ’
+
+Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
+by the given coordinates.
+
+Default value is ‘source ’.
+
+
+
+
+
+
9.69 phase# TOC
+
+
Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
+
+
The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
+opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+mode Set phase mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
+Filter will delay the bottom field.
+
+‘b ’
+Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
+Filter will delay the top field.
+
+‘p ’
+Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
+for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
+actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
+
+‘a ’
+Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
+opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ modes on a frame by frame
+basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
+then this works just like ‘u ’.
+
+‘u ’
+Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ on a frame by frame basis by
+analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
+match between the fields.
+
+‘T ’
+Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘B ’
+Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘A ’
+Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using field flags and
+image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
+like ‘U ’. This is the default mode.
+
+‘U ’
+Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis only.
+
+
+
+
+
9.70 pixdesctest# TOC
+
+
Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
+testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
+
+
For example:
+
+
format=monow, pixdesctest
+
+
+
can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
+
+
+
+
+
Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
+library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (--enable-gpl).
+Subfilters must be separated by ’/’ and can be disabled by prepending a ’-’.
+Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
+interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+subfilters Set postprocessing subfilters string.
+
+
+
All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
+
+
+a/autoq Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
+
+c/chrom Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
+
+y/nochrom Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
+
+n/noluma Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
+
+
+
These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a ’|’.
+
+
Available subfilters are:
+
+
+hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+
+
The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
+flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
+thresholds.
+
+
+h1/x1hdeblock Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
+
+v1/x1vdeblock Experimental vertical deblocking filter
+
+dr/dering Deringing filter
+
+tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
+threshold1 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold2 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold3 larger -> stronger filtering
+
+
+al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
+f/fullyrange Stretch luminance to 0-255.
+
+
+lb/linblenddeint Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+filtering all lines with a (1 2 1) filter.
+
+li/linipoldeint Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+linearly interpolating every second line.
+
+ci/cubicipoldeint Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
+cubically interpolating every second line.
+
+md/mediandeint Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
+median filter to every second line.
+
+fd/ffmpegdeint FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
+second line with a (-1 4 2 4 -1) filter.
+
+l5/lowpass5 Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
+block by filtering all lines with a (-1 2 6 2 -1) filter.
+
+fq/forceQuant[|quantizer] Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
+specify.
+
+quantizer Quantizer to use
+
+
+de/default Default pp filter combination (hb|a,vb|a,dr|a)
+
+fa/fast Fast pp filter combination (h1|a,v1|a,dr|a)
+
+ac High quality pp filter combination (ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a)
+
+
+
+
9.71.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
+brightness/contrast:
+
+
+ Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
+
+
+ Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
+
+
pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
+ Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
+automatically depending on available CPU time:
+
+
+
+
+
9.72 pp7# TOC
+
Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the spp filter,
+similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
+used after IDCT.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
+0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
+(if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding.
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
‘medium ’
+Set medium thresholding (good results, default).
+
+
+
+
+
9.73 psnr# TOC
+
+
Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
+Ratio) between two input videos.
+
+
This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
+considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
+output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
+the PSNR.
+
+
Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
+this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
+have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
+
+
The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
+
+
The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
+frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
+equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
+
+
+
PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
+
+
+
Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
+image.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+stats_file, f If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
+each individual frame.
+
+
+
The file printed if stats_file is selected, contains a sequence of
+key/value pairs of the form key :value for each compared
+couple of frames.
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
+
+mse_avg Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames, averaged over all the image components.
+
+mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames for the component specified by the suffix.
+
+psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
+specified by the suffix.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
+
+
+
On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
+reference file ref_movie.mpg . The PSNR of each individual frame
+is stored in stats.log .
+
+
+
9.74 pullup# TOC
+
+
Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
+hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
+content.
+
+
The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
+its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
+onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
+fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
+
+
To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
+pullup, use fps=24000/1001 if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
+fps=24 for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+jl jr jt jb These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
+bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
+while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
+The default is 8 pixels on each side.
+
+sb Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
+filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
+excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
+Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
+This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
+the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
+Default value is 0.
+
+mp Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘l ’
+Use luma plane.
+
+‘u ’
+Use chroma blue plane.
+
+‘v ’
+Use chroma red plane.
+
+
+This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
+for doing filter’s computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
+source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
+is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
+The main purpose of setting mp to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
+load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
+
+
+
For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
+necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
+telecine NTSC input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
+
+
+
+
+
+
Change video quantization parameters (QP).
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+qp Set expression for quantization parameter.
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
+the following constants:
+
+
+known 1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.
+
+qp Sequentional index starting from -129 to 128.
+
+
+
+
9.75.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Some equation like:
+
+
+
+
+
9.76 removelogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
+pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
+comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
+libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
+video stream being processed.
+
+
+
Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
+considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
+the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
+rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
+recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
+visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
+filter once or twice.
+
+
If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
+logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
+reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
+much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
+the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
+pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
+
+
+
9.77 rotate# TOC
+
+
Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
A description of the optional parameters follows.
+
+angle, a Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
+clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
+result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
+
+This expression is evaluated for each frame.
+
+out_w, ow Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+out_h, oh Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+bilinear Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
+it. Default value is 1.
+
+fillcolor, c Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
+image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
+background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
+
+Default value is "black".
+
+
+
The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
+before the first frame is filtered.
+
+t time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
+configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_w, iw in_h, ih the input video width and height
+
+out_w, ow out_h, oh the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
+specified by the width and height expressions
+
+rotw(a) roth(a) the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
+video rotated by a radians.
+
+These are only available when computing the out_w and
+out_h expressions.
+
+
+
+
9.77.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
+
+
+ Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
+
+
+ Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
+seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
+
+
rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
+ Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
+input video is always completely contained in the output:
+
+
rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
+ Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
+shown:
+
+
rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
+
+
+
+
9.77.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
The filter supports the following commands:
+
+
+a, angle Set the angle expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
9.78 sab# TOC
+
+
Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
+value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
+in slower processing.
+
+luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
+value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
+be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
+greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
+processing.
+
+chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
+must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
+
+
+
Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
+corresponding luma option value.
+
+
+
9.79 scale# TOC
+
+
Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
+
+
The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
+of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
+
+
If the input image format is different from the format requested by
+the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
+requested format.
+
+
+
9.79.1 Options# TOC
+
The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
+supported by the libswscale scaler.
+
+
See (ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for
+the complete list of scaler options.
+
+
+width, w height, h Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
+dimension.
+
+If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
+
+If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
+maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
+other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
+used
+
+If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
+that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
+specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
+dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
+expression.
+
+interl Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+Force interlaced aware scaling.
+
+‘0 ’
+Do not apply interlaced scaling.
+
+‘-1 ’
+Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
+are flagged as interlaced or not.
+
+
+Default value is ‘0 ’.
+
+flags Set libswscale scaling flags. See
+(ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for the
+complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
+the default flags.
+
+size, s Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+in_color_matrix out_color_matrix Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder.
+
+If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
+
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘bt709 ’
+Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
+Recommendation BT.709.
+
+‘fcc ’
+Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
+Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
+
+‘bt601 ’
+Set color space conforming to:
+
+
+ ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
+
+ ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
+
+ Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
+
+
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
+
+
+in_range out_range Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
+range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘jpeg/full/pc ’
+Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+‘mpeg/tv ’
+Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+
+force_original_aspect_ratio Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
+keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘disable ’
+Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
+
+‘decrease ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
+
+‘increase ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
+
+
+
+One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device’s
+maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
+that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
+1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
+decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
+1280x533.
+
+Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for w
+or h , you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
+to work.
+
+
+
+
The values of the w and h options are expressions
+containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (scaled) width and height
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h
+
+a The same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from (iw / ih) * sar.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+ohsub ovsub horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
9.79.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.80 separatefields# TOC
+
+
The separatefields takes a frame-based video input and splits
+each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
+with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
+
+
This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
+of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
+If it gets it wrong use setfield filter before separatefields filter.
+
+
+
9.81 setdar, setsar# TOC
+
+
The setdar filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
+output video.
+
+
This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
+Ratio, according to the following equation:
+
+
DAR = HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION / VERTICAL_RESOLUTION * SAR
+
+
+
Keep in mind that the setdar filter does not modify the pixel
+dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
+this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
+e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
+applied.
+
+
The setsar filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
+the filter output video.
+
+
Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
+output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
+above.
+
+
Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the setsar
+filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
+another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+r, ratio, dar (setdar only), sar (setsar only) Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
+
+The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
+a string of the form num :den , where num and
+den are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
+the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
+In case the form "num :den " is used, the : character
+should be escaped.
+
+max Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
+denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
+Default value is 100.
+
+
+
+
The parameter sar is an expression containing
+the following constants:
+
+
+E, PI, PHI These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
+(Euler’s number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
+
+w, h The input width and height.
+
+a These are the same as w / h .
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
+(w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub, vsub Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
9.81.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
+
+
setdar=dar=1.77777
+setdar=dar=16/9
+setdar=dar=1.77777
+ To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
+
+
+ To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
+1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
+
+
setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
+
+
+
+
9.82 setfield# TOC
+
+
Force field for the output video frame.
+
+
The setfield filter marks the interlace type field for the
+output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
+corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
+following filters (e.g. fieldorder or yadif).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Keep the same field property.
+
+‘bff ’
+Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
+
+‘tff ’
+Mark the frame as top-field-first.
+
+‘prog ’
+Mark the frame as progressive.
+
+
+
+
+
9.83 showinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
+The input video is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
+
+pts_time The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+seconds.
+
+pos The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
+
+fmt The pixel format name.
+
+sar The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
+num /den .
+
+s The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+i The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
+for bottom field first).
+
+iskey This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+type The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
+P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
+Also refer to the documentation of the AVPictureType enum and of
+the av_get_picture_type_char function defined in
+libavutil/avutil.h .
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
+
+plane_checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
+expressed in the form "[c0 c1 c2 c3 ]".
+
+
+
+
9.84 shuffleplanes# TOC
+
+
Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+map0 The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
+
+map1 The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
+
+map2 The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
+
+map3 The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
+
+
+
+
The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
+
+
Swap the second and third planes of the input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
9.85 signalstats# TOC
+
Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
+with the digitization of analog video media.
+
+
By default the filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+YMIN Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YLOW Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YAVG Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+YHIGH Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YMAX Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMIN Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+ULOW Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UAVG Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+UHIGH Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMAX Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMIN Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VLOW Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VAVG Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+VHIGH Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMAX Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+SATMIN Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATLOW Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATAVG Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
+of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATHIGH Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATMAX Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+HUEMED Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+HUEAVG Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+YDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+UDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+VDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+stat out
+stat specify an additional form of image analysis.
+out output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
+
+Both options accept the following values:
+
+
+‘tout ’
+Identify temporal outliers pixels. A temporal outlier is a pixel
+unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
+include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
+
+‘vrep ’
+Identify vertical line repetition . Vertical line repetition includes
+similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
+repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
+analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
+analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
+
+‘brng ’
+Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
+
+
+
+color, c Set the highlight color for the out option. The default color is
+yellow.
+
+
+
+
9.85.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.86 smartblur# TOC
+
+
Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_threshold, lt Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_threshold, ct Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
+is set.
+
+
+
9.87 stereo3d# TOC
+
+
Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+in Set stereoscopic image format of input.
+
+Available values for input image formats are:
+
+‘sbsl ’
+side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbsr ’
+side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘sbs2l ’
+side by side parallel with half width resolution
+(left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbs2r ’
+side by side crosseye with half width resolution
+(right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘abl ’
+above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘abr ’
+above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘ab2l ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘ab2r ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘al ’
+alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
+
+‘ar ’
+alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
+
+Default value is ‘sbsl ’.
+
+
+out Set stereoscopic image format of output.
+
+Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
+
+‘arbg ’
+anaglyph red/blue gray
+(red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘argg ’
+anaglyph red/green gray
+(red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcg ’
+anaglyph red/cyan gray
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arch ’
+anaglyph red/cyan half colored
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcc ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcd ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmg ’
+anaglyph green/magenta gray
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmh ’
+anaglyph green/magenta half colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmc ’
+anaglyph green/magenta colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmd ’
+anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybg ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue gray
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybh ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybc ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybd ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘irl ’
+interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
+
+‘irr ’
+interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
+
+‘ml ’
+mono output (left eye only)
+
+‘mr ’
+mono output (right eye only)
+
+
+Default value is ‘arcd ’.
+
+
+
+
9.87.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
+
+
+ Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
+
+
+
+
+
9.88 spp# TOC
+
+
Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
+at several (or - in the case of quality level 6 - all) shifts
+and average the results.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-6. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 6 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding (default).
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
9.89 subtitles# TOC
+
+
Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libass. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
+libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
+Alpha) subtitles format.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
+
+original_size Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
+was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
+the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
+this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
+changed.
+
+charenc Set subtitles input character encoding. subtitles filter only. Only
+useful if not UTF-8.
+
+stream_index, si Set subtitles stream index. subtitles filter only.
+
+
+
If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
+specifies the filename .
+
+
For example, to render the file sub.srt on top of the input
+video, use the command:
+
+
+
which is equivalent to:
+
+
subtitles=filename=sub.srt
+
+
+
To render the default subtitles stream from file video.mkv , use:
+
+
+
To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
+
+
subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
+
+
+
+
9.90 super2xsai# TOC
+
+
Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
+Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
+
+
Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
+
+
+
9.91 swapuv# TOC
+
Swap U & V plane.
+
+
+
9.92 telecine# TOC
+
+
Apply telecine process to the video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+first_field
+‘top, t ’
+top field first
+
‘bottom, b ’
+bottom field first
+The default value is top.
+
+
+pattern A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
+The default value is 23.
+
+
+
+
Some typical patterns:
+
+NTSC output (30i):
+27.5p: 32222
+24p: 23 (classic)
+24p: 2332 (preferred)
+20p: 33
+18p: 334
+16p: 3444
+
+PAL output (25i):
+27.5p: 12222
+24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
+16.67p: 33
+16p: 33333334
+
+
+
+
9.93 thumbnail# TOC
+
Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of n frames, the filter
+will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of n frames until
+the end. Default is 100.
+
+
+
Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger n
+value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
+
+
+
9.93.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract one picture each 50 frames:
+
+
+ Complete example of a thumbnail creation with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
+
+
+
+
9.94 tile# TOC
+
+
Tile several successive frames together.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+layout Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
+this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+nb_frames Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
+than or equal to w xh . The default value is 0, meaning all
+the area will be used.
+
+margin Set the outer border margin in pixels.
+
+padding Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
+more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
+refer to the pad video filter.
+
+color Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of color
+is "black".
+
+
+
+
9.94.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.95 tinterlace# TOC
+
+
Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
+
+
Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
+considered odd.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
+as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘merge, 0 ’
+Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
+generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘drop_odd, 1 ’
+Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ ‘drop_even, 2 ’
+Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+ ‘pad, 3 ’
+Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
+generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+ ‘interleave_top, 4 ’
+Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘interleave_bottom, 5 ’
+Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+
+Output:
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+ ‘interlacex2, 6 ’
+Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
+containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
+the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
+the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
+field synchronisation.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+
+
+Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
+compatibility reasons.
+
+Default mode is merge.
+
+flags Specify flags influencing the filter process.
+
+Available value for flags is:
+
+
+low_pass_filter, vlfp Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
+Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
+destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
+vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace ’twitter’ and Moire
+patterning.
+
+Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for mode
+interleave_top and interleave_bottom .
+
+
+
+
+
+
9.96 transpose# TOC
+
+
Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+dir Specify the transposition direction.
+
+Can assume the following values:
+
+‘0, 4, cclock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
+
+
L.R L.l
+. . -> . .
+l.r R.r
+ ‘1, 5, clock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R l.L
+. . -> . .
+l.r r.R
+ ‘2, 6, cclock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R R.r
+. . -> . .
+l.r L.l
+ ‘3, 7, clock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
+
+
L.R r.R
+. . -> . .
+l.r l.L
+
+
+For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
+video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
+deprecated, the passthrough option should be used instead.
+
+Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
+symbolic constants.
+
+passthrough Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
+specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Always apply transposition.
+
‘portrait ’
+Preserve portrait geometry (when height >= width ).
+
‘landscape ’
+Preserve landscape geometry (when width >= height ).
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+
+
For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
+layout:
+
+
transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
+
+
+
The command above can also be specified as:
+
+
+
+
9.97 trim# TOC
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
+timestamp start will be the first frame in the output.
+
+end Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
+immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be the last
+frame in the output.
+
+start_pts This is the same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts This is the same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_frame The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
+
+end_frame The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
+frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
+the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
+setpts filter after the trim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
+ Keep only the first second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
+
+
+
+
+
9.98 unsharp# TOC
+
+
Sharpen or blur the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_msize_x, lx Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
+3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_msize_y, ly Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
+and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_amount, la Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_msize_x, cx Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_msize_y, cy Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_amount, ca Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 0.0.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
+string ’5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0’.
+
+
+
9.98.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
+
+
unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
+ Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
+
+
+
+
+
9.99 uspp# TOC
+
+
Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
+the image at several (or - in the case of quality level 8 - all)
+shifts and average the results.
+
+
The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
+decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
+DCT similar to MJPEG.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-8. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 8 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+
+
+
9.100 vidstabdetect# TOC
+
+
Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
+vidstabtransform for pass 2.
+
+
This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
+transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
+the vidstabtransform filter.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+result Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
+Default value is transforms.trf .
+
+shakiness Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
+integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
+value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
+
+accuracy Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
+range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
+accuracy. Default value is 15.
+
+stepsize Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
+scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
+
+mincontrast Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
+discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
+value is 0.3.
+
+tripod Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
+
+If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
+in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
+is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
+the camera view absolutely still.
+
+If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
+
+show Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
+integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
+visualization.
+
+
+
+
9.100.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use default values:
+
+
+ Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
+mytransforms.trf :
+
+
vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
+ Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
+video:
+
+
+ Analyze a video with medium shakiness using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
+
+
+
+
9.101 vidstabtransform# TOC
+
+
Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
+see vidstabdetect for pass 1.
+
+
Read a file with transform information for each frame and
+apply/compensate them. Together with the vidstabdetect
+filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
+http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab . It is important to also use
+the unsharp filter, see below.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
+
9.101.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+input Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
+transforms.trf .
+
+smoothing Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
+camera movements. Default value is 10.
+
+For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
+past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
+larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
+the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
+camera is simulated.
+
+optalgo Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘gauss ’
+gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
+
‘avg ’
+averaging on transformations
+
+
+maxshift Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
+meaning no limit.
+
+maxangle Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
+value is -1, meaning no limit.
+
+crop Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
+compensation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘keep ’
+keep image information from previous frame (default)
+
‘black ’
+fill the border black
+
+
+invert Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
+
+relative Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
+absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
+
+zoom Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
+effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
+zoom).
+
+optzoom Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘0 ’
+disabled
+
‘1 ’
+optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
+will lead to visible borders) (default)
+
‘2 ’
+optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
+visible), see zoomspeed
+
+
+Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
+
+zoomspeed Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
+optzoom is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
+0.25.
+
+interpol Specify type of interpolation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘no ’
+no interpolation
+
‘linear ’
+linear only horizontal
+
‘bilinear ’
+linear in both directions (default)
+
‘bicubic ’
+cubic in both directions (slow)
+
+
+tripod Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
+relative=0:smoothing=0. Default value is 0.
+
+Use also tripod option of vidstabdetect .
+
+debug Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
+are written to the temporary file global_motions.trf . Default
+value is 0.
+
+
+
+
9.101.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
9.102 vflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video vertically.
+
+
For example, to vertically flip a video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
9.103 vignette# TOC
+
+
Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+angle, a Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0,PI/2] range.
+
+Default value: "PI/5"
+
+x0 y0 Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively "w/2" and "h/2"
+by default.
+
+mode Set forward/backward mode.
+
+Available modes are:
+
+‘forward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
+
+‘backward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
+This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
+detection to extract the lens angle and other settings (yet). It can
+also be used to create a burning effect.
+
+
+Default value is ‘forward ’.
+
+eval Set evaluation mode for the expressions (angle , x0 , y0 ).
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
+
+‘frame ’
+Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
+‘init ’ mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
+allows advanced dynamic expressions.
+
+
+Default value is ‘init ’.
+
+dither Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is 1
+(enabled).
+
+aspect Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
+Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
+following the dimensions of the video.
+
+Default is 1/1.
+
+
+
+
9.103.1 Expressions# TOC
+
+
The alpha , x0 and y0 expressions can contain the
+following parameters.
+
+
+w h input width and height
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pts the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
+TB units, NAN if undefined
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
+
9.103.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
+
+
+ Make a flickering vignetting:
+
+
vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
+
+
+
+
9.104 w3fdif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
+Deinterlacing Filter").
+
+
Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
+implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
+Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
+uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
+
+
There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
+and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
+be set by passing an optional parameter:
+
+
+filter Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Simple filter coefficient set.
+
‘complex ’
+More-complex filter coefficient set.
+
+Default value is ‘complex ’.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
+
+
+‘all ’
+Deinterlace all frames,
+
‘interlaced ’
+Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+Default value is ‘all ’.
+
+
+
+
9.105 xbr# TOC
+
Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
+art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
+http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134 .
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for 2xBR, 3 for
+3xBR and 4 for 4xBR.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
9.106 yadif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
+filter").
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+
+mode The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+0, send_frame Output one frame for each frame.
+
1, send_field Output one frame for each field.
+
2, send_frame_nospatial Like send_frame, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
3, send_field_nospatial Like send_field, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
+
+The default value is send_frame.
+
+parity The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
+of the following values:
+
+
+0, tff Assume the top field is first.
+
1, bff Assume the bottom field is first.
+
-1, auto Enable automatic detection of field parity.
+
+
+The default value is auto.
+If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
+top field first will be assumed.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
+values:
+
+
+0, all Deinterlace all frames.
+
1, interlaced Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+The default value is all.
+
+
+
+
9.107 zoompan# TOC
+
+
Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+zoom, z Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
+
+x y Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
+
+d Set the duration expression in number of frames.
+This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
+single input image.
+
+s Set the output image size, default is ’hd720’.
+
+
+
Each expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+in_w, iw Input width.
+
+in_h, ih Input height.
+
+out_w, ow Output width.
+
+out_h, oh Output height.
+
+in Input frame count.
+
+on Output frame count.
+
+x y Last calculated ’x’ and ’y’ position from ’x’ and ’y’ expression
+for current input frame.
+
+px py ’x’ and ’y’ of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
+not yet such frame (first input frame).
+
+zoom Last calculated zoom from ’z’ expression for current input frame.
+
+pzoom Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
+
+duration Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from ’d’ expression
+for each input frame.
+
+pduration number of output frames created for previous input frame
+
+a Rational number: input width / input height
+
+sar sample aspect ratio
+
+dar display aspect ratio
+
+
+
+
+
9.107.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
+
+
zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
+
+
+
+
+
10 Video Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
+
+
+
10.1 buffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+video_size Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
+manual.
+
+width The input video width.
+
+height The input video height.
+
+pix_fmt A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
+It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
+name.
+
+time_base Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
+
+frame_rate Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
+
+pixel_aspect, sar The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
+
+sws_param Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
+is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
+input size or format.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
+with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
+square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
+Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
+(check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in libavutil/pixfmt.h ),
+this example corresponds to:
+
+
buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
+syntax is deprecated:
+
+
width :height :pix_fmt :time_base.num :time_base.den :pixel_aspect.num :pixel_aspect.den [:sws_param ]
+
+
+
10.2 cellauto# TOC
+
+
Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
+
+
The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
+filename , and pattern options. If such options are
+not specified an initial state is created randomly.
+
+
At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
+the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
+frame is filled is defined by the scroll option.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified file.
+In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+file will be ignored.
+
+pattern, p Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified string.
+
+Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+string will be ignored.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
+is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
+1/PHI.
+
+This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
+Default value is 110.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename or pattern is specified, the size is set
+by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
+height is set to width * PHI.
+
+If size is set, it must contain the width of the specified
+pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
+larger row.
+
+If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
+defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
+
+scroll If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
+have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
+written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
+Defaults to 1.
+
+start_full, full If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
+outputting the first frame.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+
+
+
10.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read the initial state from pattern , and specify an output of
+size 200x400.
+
+
cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
+ Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
+ratio of 2/3:
+
+
cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
+centered on an initial row with width 100:
+
+
cellauto=p=@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+ Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
+
+
cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+
+
+
+
10.3 mandelbrot# TOC
+
+
Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
+point specified with start_x and start_y .
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+end_pts Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
+
+end_scale Set the terminal scale value.
+Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
+
+inner Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
+Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
+
+It shall assume one of the following values:
+
+black Set black mode.
+
convergence Show time until convergence.
+
mincol Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
+
period Set period mode.
+
+
+Default value is mincol .
+
+bailout Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
+
+maxiter Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
+algorithm. Default value is 7189.
+
+outer Set outer coloring mode.
+It shall assume one of following values:
+
+iteration_count Set iteration cound mode.
+
normalized_iteration_count set normalized iteration count mode.
+
+Default value is normalized_iteration_count .
+
+rate, r Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
+value is "25".
+
+size, s Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
+size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
+
+start_scale Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
+
+start_x Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
+
+start_y Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
+
+
+
+
10.4 mptestsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
+
+
The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
+This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+test, t
+Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
+
+dc_luma dc_chroma freq_luma freq_chroma amp_luma amp_chroma cbp mv ring1 ring2 all
+
+Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
+
+
+
10.5 frei0r_src# TOC
+
+
Provide a frei0r source.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
This source accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+size The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+framerate The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
+num /den or a frame rate abbreviation.
+
+filter_name The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
+how to set the parameters, read the frei0r section in the video filters
+documentation.
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
+
+
+
+
For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
+and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
+
+
frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
+
+
+
+
10.6 life# TOC
+
+
Generate a life pattern.
+
+
This source is based on a generalization of John Conway’s life game.
+
+
The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
+which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
+interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
+horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
+
+
At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
+which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
+cell stay alive or born. The rule option allows one to specify
+the rule to adopt.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
+each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
+is used to delimit the end of each row.
+
+If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
+randomly.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
+floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
+It is ignored when a file is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the life rule.
+
+A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "SNS /BNB ",
+where NS and NB are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
+NS specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
+live cell stay alive, and NB the number of alive neighbor cells
+which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
+"s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
+
+Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
+high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
+for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
+the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
+higher number of neighbor cells.
+For example the number 6153 = (12<<9)+9 specifies a stay alive
+rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
+
+Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway’s game of life
+rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
+cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
+a dead cell.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename is specified, the size is set by default to the
+same size of the input file. If size is set, it must contain
+the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
+that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
+
+If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
+(used for a randomly generated initial grid).
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
+top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
+
+mold Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from death_color to
+mold_color with a step of mold . mold can have a
+value from 0 to 255.
+
+life_color Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
+
+death_color Set the color of dead cells. If mold is set, this is the first color
+used to represent a dead cell.
+
+mold_color Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
+
+For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+
+
+
10.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read a grid from pattern , and center it on a grid of size
+300x300 pixels:
+
+
life=f=pattern:s=300x300
+ Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
+
+
life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
+
+
+ Full example with slow death effect (mold) using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
+
+
+
+
10.7 color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc# TOC
+
+
The color source provides an uniformly colored input.
+
+
The haldclutsrc source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
+haldclut filter.
+
+
The nullsrc source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
+mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
+source for filters which ignore the input data.
+
+
The rgbtestsrc source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
+detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
+stripe from top to bottom.
+
+
The smptebars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
+
+
The smptehdbars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
+
+
The testsrc source generates a test video pattern, showing a
+color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
+intended for testing purposes.
+
+
The sources accept the following parameters:
+
+
+color, c Specify the color of the source, only available in the color
+source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+level Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the haldclutsrc
+source. A level of N generates a picture of N*N*N by N*N*N
+pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
+coded on a 1/(N*N) scale.
+
+size, s Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
+"320x240".
+
+This option is not available with the haldclutsrc filter.
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+sar Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+decimals, n Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
+testsrc source.
+
+The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
+timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
+value. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For example the following:
+
+
testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
+
+
+
will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
+176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
+
+
The following graph description will generate a red source
+with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
+frames per second.
+
+
color=c=red@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
+
+
+
If the input content is to be ignored, nullsrc can be used. The
+following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
+the geq filter:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
+
+
+
+
10.7.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
The color source supports the following commands:
+
+
+c, color Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
+corresponding color option.
+
+
+
+
+
11 Video Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
+
+
+
11.1 buffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
+graph.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
+
11.2 nullsink# TOC
+
+
Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
12 Multimedia Filters# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
+
+
+
12.1 avectorscope# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
+scope.
+
+
The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
+audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
+signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
+as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
+If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
+indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode, m Set the vectorscope mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘lissajous ’
+Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
+
+‘lissajous_xy ’
+Same as above but not rotated.
+
+
+Default value is ‘lissajous ’.
+
+size, s Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is 400x400.
+
+rate, r Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+rc gc bc Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are 40, 160 and 80.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+rf gf bf Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are 15, 10 and 5.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+zoom Set the zoom factor. Default value is 1. Allowed range is [1, 10].
+
+
+
+
12.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Complete example using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
+
+
+
+
12.2 concat# TOC
+
+
Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
+other.
+
+
The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
+segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
+also be the number of streams at output.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
+
+v Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
+streams in each segment. Default is 1.
+
+a Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
+streams in each segment. Default is 0.
+
+unsafe Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
+
+
+
+
The filter has v +a outputs: first v video outputs, then
+a audio outputs.
+
+
There are n x(v +a ) inputs: first the inputs for the first
+segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
+segment, etc.
+
+
Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
+reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
+related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
+concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
+stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
+audio streams with silence.
+
+
For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
+
+
All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
+filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
+streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
+audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
+explicitly by the user.
+
+
Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
+at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
+
+
+
12.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
12.3 ebur128# TOC
+
+
EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
+it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
+Momentary loudness (identified by M), Short-term loudness (S),
+Integrated loudness (I) and Loudness Range (LRA).
+
+
The filter also has a video output (see the video option) with a real
+time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
+message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
+unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
+short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
+the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
+
+
More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
+http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness .
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+video Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
+option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
+activated. Default is 0.
+
+size Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
+and minimum resolution is 640x480.
+
+meter Set the EBU scale meter. Default is 9. Common values are 9 and
+18, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
+other integer value between this range is allowed.
+
+metadata Set metadata injection. If set to 1, the audio input will be segmented
+into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
+in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with lavfi.r128..
+
+Default is 0.
+
+framelog Force the frame logging level.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘info ’
+information logging level
+
‘verbose ’
+verbose logging level
+
+
+By default, the logging level is set to info . If the video or
+the metadata options are set, it switches to verbose .
+
+peak Set peak mode(s).
+
+Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a flag type). Possible
+values are:
+
+‘none ’
+Disable any peak mode (default).
+
‘sample ’
+Enable sample-peak mode.
+
+Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
+for sample-peak (identified by SPK).
+
‘true ’
+Enable true-peak mode.
+
+If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
+stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
+(identified by TPK) and true-peak per frame (identified by FTPK).
+This mode requires a build with libswresample.
+
+
+
+
+
+
12.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Real-time graph using ffplay, with a EBU scale meter +18:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
+ Run an analysis with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
+
+
+
+
12.4 interleave, ainterleave# TOC
+
+
Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
+
+
interleave works with video inputs, ainterleave with audio.
+
+
These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
+queued frame to the output.
+
+
Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
+timestamp values.
+
+
In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
+at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
+input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
+
+
For example consider the case when one input is a select filter
+which always drop input frames. The interleave filter will keep
+reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
+to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
+
+
Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
+frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
+the queue is already filled.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+
+nb_inputs, n Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
+
+
+
+
12.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Interleave frames belonging to different streams using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
+ Add flickering blur effect:
+
+
select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
+
+
+
+
12.5 perms, aperms# TOC
+
+
Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
+
+
These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
+following filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+mode Select the permissions mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing. This is the default.
+
‘ro ’
+Set all the output frames read-only.
+
‘rw ’
+Set all the output frames directly writable.
+
‘toggle ’
+Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
+
‘random ’
+Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
+
+
+seed Set the seed for the random mode, must be an integer included between
+0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
+-1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
+basis.
+
+
+
Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
+following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
+following filter. Inserting a format or aformat filter before the
+perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
+
+
+
12.6 select, aselect# TOC
+
+
Select frames to pass in output.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
+
+If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
+
+If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
+first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
+ceil(val)-1, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
+
+For example a value of 1.2 corresponds to the output with index
+ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1, that is the second output.
+
+outputs, n Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
+frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+selected_n The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
+
+prev_selected_n The sequential number of the last selected frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+pts The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in TB units. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+t The PTS of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_pts The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_pts The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_t The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_pts The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_t The time of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+pict_type (video only) The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
+values:
+
+I P B S SI SP BI
+
+interlace_type (video only) The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
+
+PROGRESSIVE The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
+
TOPFIRST The frame is top-field-first.
+
BOTTOMFIRST The frame is bottom-field-first.
+
+
+consumed_sample_n (audio only) the number of selected samples before the current frame
+
+samples_n (audio only) the number of samples in the current frame
+
+sample_rate (audio only) the input sample rate
+
+key This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+pos the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
+is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
+
+scene (video only) value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
+probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
+value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
+
+
+
+
The default value of the select expression is "1".
+
+
+
12.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
12.7 sendcmd, asendcmd# TOC
+
+
Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
+filtergraph.
+
+
sendcmd must be inserted between two video filters,
+asendcmd must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
+from that they act the same way.
+
+
The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
+with the commands option, or in a file specified by the
+filename option.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+commands, c Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
+
filename, f Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
+filters.
+
+
+
+
12.7.1 Commands syntax# TOC
+
+
A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
+specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
+particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
+is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
+interval.
+
+
An interval is specified by the following syntax:
+
+
+
The time interval is specified by the START and END times.
+END is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
+
+
The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
+it is included in the interval [START , END ), that is when
+the time is greater or equal to START and is lesser than
+END .
+
+
COMMANDS consists of a sequence of one or more command
+specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
+syntax of a command specification is given by:
+
+
[FLAGS ] TARGET COMMAND ARG
+
+
+
FLAGS is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
+the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
+be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
+enclosed between "[" and "]".
+
+
The following flags are recognized:
+
+enter The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
+current is.
+
+leave The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
+current is not.
+
+
+
If FLAGS is not specified, a default value of [enter] is
+assumed.
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
+the given COMMAND .
+
+
Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
+sequences of characters starting with # until the end of line,
+are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
+
+
A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
+follows:
+
+
COMMAND_FLAG ::= "enter" | "leave"
+COMMAND_FLAGS ::= COMMAND_FLAG [(+|"|")COMMAND_FLAG ]
+COMMAND ::= ["[" COMMAND_FLAGS "]"] TARGET COMMAND [ARG ]
+COMMANDS ::= COMMAND [,COMMANDS ]
+INTERVAL ::= START [-END ] COMMANDS
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [;INTERVALS ]
+
+
+
+
12.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
12.8 setpts, asetpts# TOC
+
+
Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
+
+
setpts works on video frames, asetpts on audio frames.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
+
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
+constants:
+
+
+FRAME_RATE frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
+
+PTS The presentation timestamp in input
+
+N The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
+not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
+
+NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
+audio)
+
+NB_SAMPLES, S The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
+
+SAMPLE_RATE, SR The audio sample rate.
+
+STARTPTS The PTS of the first frame.
+
+STARTT the time in seconds of the first frame
+
+INTERLACED State whether the current frame is interlaced.
+
+T the time in seconds of the current frame
+
+POS original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
+for the current frame
+
+PREV_INPTS The previous input PTS.
+
+PREV_INT previous input time in seconds
+
+PREV_OUTPTS The previous output PTS.
+
+PREV_OUTT previous output time in seconds
+
+RTCTIME The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
+instead.
+
+RTCSTART The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+
+
+
+
12.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Start counting PTS from zero
+
+
+ Apply fast motion effect:
+
+
+ Apply slow motion effect:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
+
+
setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
+ Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
+
+
+ Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
+
+
setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
+ Generate timestamps by counting samples:
+
+
+
+
+
+
12.9 settb, asettb# TOC
+
+
Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
+It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+expr, tb The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
+
+
+
+
The value for tb is an arithmetic expression representing a
+rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
+timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
+audio only). Default value is "intb".
+
+
+
12.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/25:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/10:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 2*intb:
+
+
+ Set the default timebase value:
+
+
+
+
+
12.10 showcqt# TOC
+
Convert input audio to a video output representing
+frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
+Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+volume Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
+variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+a_weighting(f) A-weighting of equal loudness
+
b_weighting(f) B-weighting of equal loudness
+
c_weighting(f) C-weighting of equal loudness
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+tlength Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+Default value is 384/f*tc/(384/f+tc).
+
+timeclamp Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
+accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
+event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
+otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
+(such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is 0.17.
+
+coeffclamp Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
+more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+gamma Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
+makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
+Default value is 3.0.
+
+fontfile Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
+
+fontcolor Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
+integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+midi(f) midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
+
r(x), g(x), b(x) red, green, and blue value of intensity x
+
+Default value is st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
+st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
+r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))
+
+fullhd If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
+if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
+
+fps Specify video fps. Default value is 25.
+
+count Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
+per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
+Default value is 6.
+
+
+
+
+
12.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
+ Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
+ A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
+ B-weighting of equal loudness
+
+
volume=16*b_weighting(f)
+ Lower Q factor
+
+
tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
+ Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
+
+
fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
+
+
+
+
12.11 showspectrum# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
+spectrum.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
+640x512.
+
+slide Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘replace ’
+the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
+
‘scroll ’
+the samples scroll from right to left
+
‘fullframe ’
+frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
+
+
+Default value is replace.
+
+mode Specify display mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘combined ’
+all channels are displayed in the same row
+
‘separate ’
+all channels are displayed in separate rows
+
+
+Default value is ‘combined ’.
+
+color Specify display color mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘channel ’
+each channel is displayed in a separate color
+
‘intensity ’
+each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
+
+
+Default value is ‘channel ’.
+
+scale Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘lin ’
+linear
+
‘sqrt ’
+square root, default
+
‘cbrt ’
+cubic root
+
‘log ’
+logarithmic
+
+
+Default value is ‘sqrt ’.
+
+saturation Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
+alternative color scheme. 0 is no saturation at all.
+Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
+Default value is 1.
+
+win_func Set window function.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
+
‘hann ’
+Hann window
+
‘hamming ’
+Hamming window
+
‘blackman ’
+Blackman window
+
+
+Default value is hann.
+
+
+
The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
+section.
+
+
+
12.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
+
+
showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
+ Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
+
+
+
+
12.12 showwaves# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
+is "600x240".
+
+mode Set display mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘point ’
+Draw a point for each sample.
+
+‘line ’
+Draw a vertical line for each sample.
+
+‘p2p ’
+Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
+
+‘cline ’
+Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
+
+
+Default value is point.
+
+n Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
+larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
+integer. This option can be set only if the value for rate
+is not explicitly specified.
+
+rate, r Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
+option n . Default value is "25".
+
+split_channels Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
12.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
+at the same time:
+
+
amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
+ Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
+frame rate of 30 frames per second:
+
+
aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
+
+
+
+
12.13 split, asplit# TOC
+
+
Split input into several identical outputs.
+
+
asplit works with audio input, split with video.
+
+
The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
+unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+
+
12.13.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input:
+
+
[in] split [out0][out1]
+ To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
+outputs, like in:
+
+
[in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
+one padded:
+
+
[in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
+[splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
+[splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
+ Create 5 copies of the input audio with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
12.14 zmq, azmq# TOC
+
+
Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
+filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
zmq and azmq work as a pass-through filters. zmq
+must be inserted between two video filters, azmq between two
+audio filters.
+
+
To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
+headers and configure FFmpeg with --enable-libzmq.
+
+
For more information about libzmq see:
+http://www.zeromq.org/
+
+
The zmq and azmq filters work as a libzmq server, which
+receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
+bind_address option.
+
+
The received message must be in the form:
+
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
+given COMMAND .
+
+
Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
+is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
+will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
+
+
ERROR_CODE ERROR_REASON
+MESSAGE
+
+
+
MESSAGE is optional.
+
+
+
12.14.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Look at tools/zmqsend for an example of a zmq client which can
+be used to send commands processed by these filters.
+
+
Consider the following filtergraph generated by ffplay
+
+
ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
+color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
+color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
+nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
+[bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
+[bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
+
+
+
To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
+command can be used:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
To change the right side:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
+
+
13 Multimedia Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
+
+
+
13.1 amovie# TOC
+
+
This is the same as movie source, except it selects an audio
+stream by default.
+
+
+
13.2 movie# TOC
+
+
Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filename The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
+device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
+
+format_name, f Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
+the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
+format is guessed from movie_name or by probing.
+
+seek_point, sp Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
+starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
+av_strtod, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
+postfix. The default value is "0".
+
+streams, s Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
+separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
+same order. The syntax is explained in the “Stream specifiers”
+section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
+respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
+is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
+
+stream_index, si Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
+the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
+value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
+audio instead of video.
+
+loop Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
+If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
+Default value is "1".
+
+Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
+changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
+
+
+
It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
+a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
+
+
input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
+ ^
+ |
+movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
+
+
+
13.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
+on top of the input labelled "in":
+
+
movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
+labelled "in":
+
+
movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
+dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
+connected to the pad named "audio":
+
+
movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
+
+
+
+
+
14 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavfilter
+
+
+
+
15 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Formats Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Formats Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes the supported formats (muxers and demuxers)
+provided by the libavformat library.
+
+
+
+
2 Format Options# TOC
+
+
The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
+can be set on all the muxers and demuxers. In addition each muxer or
+demuxer may support so-called private options, which are specific for
+that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+avioflags flags (input/output ) Possible values:
+
+‘direct ’
+Reduce buffering.
+
+
+probesize integer (input ) Set probing size in bytes, i.e. the size of the data to analyze to get
+stream information. A higher value will allow to detect more
+information in case it is dispersed into the stream, but will increase
+latency. Must be an integer not lesser than 32. It is 5000000 by default.
+
+packetsize integer (output ) Set packet size.
+
+fflags flags (input/output ) Set format flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ignidx ’
+Ignore index.
+
‘genpts ’
+Generate PTS.
+
‘nofillin ’
+Do not fill in missing values that can be exactly calculated.
+
‘noparse ’
+Disable AVParsers, this needs +nofillin too.
+
‘igndts ’
+Ignore DTS.
+
‘discardcorrupt ’
+Discard corrupted frames.
+
‘sortdts ’
+Try to interleave output packets by DTS.
+
‘keepside ’
+Do not merge side data.
+
‘latm ’
+Enable RTP MP4A-LATM payload.
+
‘nobuffer ’
+Reduce the latency introduced by optional buffering
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data.
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
+
+seek2any integer (input ) Allow seeking to non-keyframes on demuxer level when supported if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+analyzeduration integer (input ) Specify how many microseconds are analyzed to probe the input. A
+higher value will allow to detect more accurate information, but will
+increase latency. It defaults to 5,000,000 microseconds = 5 seconds.
+
+cryptokey hexadecimal string (input ) Set decryption key.
+
+indexmem integer (input ) Set max memory used for timestamp index (per stream).
+
+rtbufsize integer (input ) Set max memory used for buffering real-time frames.
+
+fdebug flags (input/output ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ts ’
+
+
+max_delay integer (input/output ) Set maximum muxing or demuxing delay in microseconds.
+
+fpsprobesize integer (input ) Set number of frames used to probe fps.
+
+audio_preload integer (output ) Set microseconds by which audio packets should be interleaved earlier.
+
+chunk_duration integer (output ) Set microseconds for each chunk.
+
+chunk_size integer (output ) Set size in bytes for each chunk.
+
+err_detect, f_err_detect flags (input ) Set error detection flags. f_err_detect is deprecated and
+should be used only via the ffmpeg tool.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+Verify embedded CRCs.
+
‘bitstream ’
+Detect bitstream specification deviations.
+
‘buffer ’
+Detect improper bitstream length.
+
‘explode ’
+Abort decoding on minor error detection.
+
‘careful ’
+Consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the
+wild as errors.
+
‘compliant ’
+Consider all spec non compliancies as errors.
+
‘aggressive ’
+Consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error.
+
+
+use_wallclock_as_timestamps integer (input ) Use wallclock as timestamps.
+
+avoid_negative_ts integer (output )
+Possible values:
+
+‘make_non_negative ’
+Shift timestamps to make them non-negative.
+Also note that this affects only leading negative timestamps, and not
+non-monotonic negative timestamps.
+
‘make_zero ’
+Shift timestamps so that the first timestamp is 0.
+
‘auto (default) ’
+Enables shifting when required by the target format.
+
‘disabled ’
+Disables shifting of timestamp.
+
+
+When shifting is enabled, all output timestamps are shifted by the
+same amount. Audio, video, and subtitles desynching and relative
+timestamp differences are preserved compared to how they would have
+been without shifting.
+
+
+skip_initial_bytes integer (input ) Set number of bytes to skip before reading header and frames if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+correct_ts_overflow integer (input ) Correct single timestamp overflows if set to 1. Default is 1.
+
+flush_packets integer (output ) Flush the underlying I/O stream after each packet. Default 1 enables it, and
+has the effect of reducing the latency; 0 disables it and may slightly
+increase performance in some cases.
+
+output_ts_offset offset (output ) Set the output time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added by the muxer to the output timestamps.
+
+Specifying a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are
+delayed bt the time duration specified in offset . Default value
+is 0 (meaning that no offset is applied).
+
+format_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed demuxers. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
2.1 Format stream specifiers# TOC
+
+
Format stream specifiers allow selection of one or more streams that
+match specific properties.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index.
+
+stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio,
+’s’ for subtitle, ’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If
+stream_index is given, then it matches the stream number
+stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all streams of
+this type.
+
+p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number
+stream_index in the program with the id
+program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the program.
+
+#stream_id Matches the stream by a format-specific ID.
+
+
+
The exact semantics of stream specifiers is defined by the
+avformat_match_stream_specifier() function declared in the
+libavformat/avformat.h header.
+
+
+
3 Demuxers# TOC
+
+
Demuxers are configured elements in FFmpeg that can read the
+multimedia streams from a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported demuxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option --list-demuxers.
+
+
You can disable all the demuxers using the configure option
+--disable-demuxers, and selectively enable a single demuxer with
+the option --enable-demuxer=DEMUXER , or disable it
+with the option --disable-demuxer=DEMUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled demuxers.
+
+
The description of some of the currently available demuxers follows.
+
+
+
3.1 applehttp# TOC
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer presents all AVStreams from all variant streams.
+The id field is set to the bitrate variant index number. By setting
+the discard flags on AVStreams (by pressing ’a’ or ’v’ in ffplay),
+the caller can decide which variant streams to actually receive.
+The total bitrate of the variant that the stream belongs to is
+available in a metadata key named "variant_bitrate".
+
+
+
3.2 apng# TOC
+
+
Animated Portable Network Graphics demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux APNG files.
+All headers, but the PNG signature, up to (but not including) the first
+fcTL chunk are transmitted as extradata.
+Frames are then split as being all the chunks between two fcTL ones, or
+between the last fcTL and IEND chunks.
+
+
+-ignore_loop bool Ignore the loop variable in the file if set.
+
-max_fps int Maximum framerate in frames per second (0 for no limit).
+
-default_fps int Default framerate in frames per second when none is specified in the file
+(0 meaning as fast as possible).
+
+
+
+
+
+
Advanced Systems Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux ASF files and MMS network streams.
+
+
+-no_resync_search bool Do not try to resynchronize by looking for a certain optional start code.
+
+
+
+
3.4 concat# TOC
+
+
Virtual concatenation script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads a list of files and other directives from a text file and
+demuxes them one after the other, as if all their packet had been muxed
+together.
+
+
The timestamps in the files are adjusted so that the first file starts at 0
+and each next file starts where the previous one finishes. Note that it is
+done globally and may cause gaps if all streams do not have exactly the same
+length.
+
+
All files must have the same streams (same codecs, same time base, etc.).
+
+
The duration of each file is used to adjust the timestamps of the next file:
+if the duration is incorrect (because it was computed using the bit-rate or
+because the file is truncated, for example), it can cause artifacts. The
+duration directive can be used to override the duration stored in
+each file.
+
+
+
3.4.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
The script is a text file in extended-ASCII, with one directive per line.
+Empty lines, leading spaces and lines starting with ’#’ are ignored. The
+following directive is recognized:
+
+
+file path Path to a file to read; special characters and spaces must be escaped with
+backslash or single quotes.
+
+All subsequent file-related directives apply to that file.
+
+ffconcat version 1.0Identify the script type and version. It also sets the safe option
+to 1 if it was to its default -1.
+
+To make FFmpeg recognize the format automatically, this directive must
+appears exactly as is (no extra space or byte-order-mark) on the very first
+line of the script.
+
+duration dur Duration of the file. This information can be specified from the file;
+specifying it here may be more efficient or help if the information from the
+file is not available or accurate.
+
+If the duration is set for all files, then it is possible to seek in the
+whole concatenated video.
+
+streamIntroduce a stream in the virtual file.
+All subsequent stream-related directives apply to the last introduced
+stream.
+Some streams properties must be set in order to allow identifying the
+matching streams in the subfiles.
+If no streams are defined in the script, the streams from the first file are
+copied.
+
+exact_stream_id id Set the id of the stream.
+If this directive is given, the string with the corresponding id in the
+subfiles will be used.
+This is especially useful for MPEG-PS (VOB) files, where the order of the
+streams is not reliable.
+
+
+
+
+
3.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+
+safe If set to 1, reject unsafe file paths. A file path is considered safe if it
+does not contain a protocol specification and is relative and all components
+only contain characters from the portable character set (letters, digits,
+period, underscore and hyphen) and have no period at the beginning of a
+component.
+
+If set to 0, any file name is accepted.
+
+The default is -1, it is equivalent to 1 if the format was automatically
+probed and 0 otherwise.
+
+auto_convert If set to 1, try to perform automatic conversions on packet data to make the
+streams concatenable.
+
+Currently, the only conversion is adding the h264_mp4toannexb bitstream
+filter to H.264 streams in MP4 format. This is necessary in particular if
+there are resolution changes.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Adobe Flash Video Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux FLV files and RTMP network streams.
+
+
+-flv_metadata bool Allocate the streams according to the onMetaData array content.
+
+
+
+
3.6 libgme# TOC
+
+
The Game Music Emu library is a collection of video game music file emulators.
+
+
See http://code.google.com/p/game-music-emu/ for more information.
+
+
Some files have multiple tracks. The demuxer will pick the first track by
+default. The track_index option can be used to select a different
+track. Track indexes start at 0. The demuxer exports the number of tracks as
+tracks meta data entry.
+
+
For very large files, the max_size option may have to be adjusted.
+
+
+
3.7 libquvi# TOC
+
+
Play media from Internet services using the quvi project.
+
+
The demuxer accepts a format option to request a specific quality. It
+is by default set to best .
+
+
See http://quvi.sourceforge.net/ for more information.
+
+
FFmpeg needs to be built with --enable-libquvi for this demuxer to be
+enabled.
+
+
+
+
+
Animated GIF demuxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+min_delay Set the minimum valid delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 2.
+
+default_delay Set the default delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 10.
+
+ignore_loop GIF files can contain information to loop a certain number of times (or
+infinitely). If ignore_loop is set to 1, then the loop setting
+from the input will be ignored and looping will not occur. If set to 0,
+then looping will occur and will cycle the number of times according to
+the GIF. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, with the overlay filter, place an infinitely looping GIF
+over another video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -ignore_loop 0 -i input.gif -filter_complex overlay=shortest=1 out.mkv
+
+
+
Note that in the above example the shortest option for overlay filter is
+used to end the output video at the length of the shortest input file,
+which in this case is input.mp4 as the GIF in this example loops
+infinitely.
+
+
+
3.9 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads from a list of image files specified by a pattern.
+The syntax and meaning of the pattern is specified by the
+option pattern_type .
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the images contained in the files.
+
+
The size, the pixel format, and the format of each image must be the
+same for all the files in the sequence.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set the frame rate for the video stream. It defaults to 25.
+
loop If set to 1, loop over the input. Default value is 0.
+
pattern_type Select the pattern type used to interpret the provided filename.
+
+pattern_type accepts one of the following values.
+
+sequence Select a sequence pattern type, used to specify a sequence of files
+indexed by sequential numbers.
+
+A sequence pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", which
+specifies the position of the characters representing a sequential
+number in each filename matched by the pattern. If the form
+"%d0N d" is used, the string representing the number in each
+filename is 0-padded and N is the total number of 0-padded
+digits representing the number. The literal character ’%’ can be
+specified in the pattern with the string "%%".
+
+If the sequence pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified by the pattern must contain a number
+inclusively contained between start_number and
+start_number +start_number_range -1, and all the following
+numbers must be sequential.
+
+For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will match a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.; the pattern "i%%m%%g-%d.jpg" will match a
+sequence of filenames of the form i%m%g-1.jpg ,
+i%m%g-2.jpg , ..., i%m%g-10.jpg , etc.
+
+Note that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to convert a single image file
+img.jpeg you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i img.jpeg img.png
+ glob Select a glob wildcard pattern type.
+
+The pattern is interpreted like a glob() pattern. This is only
+selectable if libavformat was compiled with globbing support.
+
+glob_sequence (deprecated, will be removed) Select a mixed glob wildcard/sequence pattern.
+
+If your version of libavformat was compiled with globbing support, and
+the provided pattern contains at least one glob meta character among
+%*?[]{} that is preceded by an unescaped "%", the pattern is
+interpreted like a glob() pattern, otherwise it is interpreted
+like a sequence pattern.
+
+All glob special characters %*?[]{} must be prefixed
+with "%". To escape a literal "%" you shall use "%%".
+
+For example the pattern foo-%*.jpeg will match all the
+filenames prefixed by "foo-" and terminating with ".jpeg", and
+foo-%?%?%?.jpeg will match all the filenames prefixed with
+"foo-", followed by a sequence of three characters, and terminating
+with ".jpeg".
+
+This pattern type is deprecated in favor of glob and
+sequence .
+
+
+Default value is glob_sequence .
+
pixel_format Set the pixel format of the images to read. If not specified the pixel
+format is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
start_number Set the index of the file matched by the image file pattern to start
+to read from. Default value is 0.
+
start_number_range Set the index interval range to check when looking for the first image
+file in the sequence, starting from start_number . Default value
+is 5.
+
ts_from_file If set to 1, will set frame timestamp to modification time of image file. Note
+that monotonity of timestamps is not provided: images go in the same order as
+without this option. Default value is 0.
+If set to 2, will set frame timestamp to the modification time of the image file in
+nanosecond precision.
+
video_size Set the video size of the images to read. If not specified the video
+size is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
+
+
+
3.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg for creating a video from the images in the file
+sequence img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ..., assuming an
+input frame rate of 10 frames per second:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ As above, but start by reading from a file with index 100 in the sequence:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -start_number 100 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ Read images matching the "*.png" glob pattern , that is all the files
+terminating with the ".png" suffix:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -pattern_type glob -i "*.png" out.mkv
+
+
+
+
3.10 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 transport stream demuxer.
+
+
+fix_teletext_pts Overrides teletext packet PTS and DTS values with the timestamps calculated
+from the PCR of the first program which the teletext stream is part of and is
+not discarded. Default value is 1, set this option to 0 if you want your
+teletext packet PTS and DTS values untouched.
+
+
+
+
3.11 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer allows one to read raw video data. Since there is no header
+specifying the assumed video parameters, the user must specify them
+in order to be able to decode the data correctly.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set input video frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+pixel_format Set the input video pixel format. Default value is yuv420p.
+
+video_size Set the input video size. This value must be specified explicitly.
+
+
+
For example to read a rawvideo file input.raw with
+ffplay, assuming a pixel format of rgb24, a video
+size of 320x240, and a frame rate of 10 images per second, use
+the command:
+
+
ffplay -f rawvideo -pixel_format rgb24 -video_size 320x240 -framerate 10 input.raw
+
+
+
+
3.12 sbg# TOC
+
+
SBaGen script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads the script language used by SBaGen
+http://uazu.net/sbagen/ to generate binaural beats sessions. A SBG
+script looks like that:
+
+
-SE
+a: 300-2.5/3 440+4.5/0
+b: 300-2.5/0 440+4.5/3
+off: -
+NOW == a
++0:07:00 == b
++0:14:00 == a
++0:21:00 == b
++0:30:00 off
+
+
+
A SBG script can mix absolute and relative timestamps. If the script uses
+either only absolute timestamps (including the script start time) or only
+relative ones, then its layout is fixed, and the conversion is
+straightforward. On the other hand, if the script mixes both kind of
+timestamps, then the NOW reference for relative timestamps will be
+taken from the current time of day at the time the script is read, and the
+script layout will be frozen according to that reference. That means that if
+the script is directly played, the actual times will match the absolute
+timestamps up to the sound controller’s clock accuracy, but if the user
+somehow pauses the playback or seeks, all times will be shifted accordingly.
+
+
+
3.13 tedcaptions# TOC
+
+
JSON captions used for TED Talks .
+
+
TED does not provide links to the captions, but they can be guessed from the
+page. The file tools/bookmarklets.html from the FFmpeg source tree
+contains a bookmarklet to expose them.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+start_time Set the start time of the TED talk, in milliseconds. The default is 15000
+(15s). It is used to sync the captions with the downloadable videos, because
+they include a 15s intro.
+
+
+
Example: convert the captions to a format most players understand:
+
+
ffmpeg -i http://www.ted.com/talks/subtitles/id/1/lang/en talk1-en.srt
+
+
+
+
4 Muxers# TOC
+
+
Muxers are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow writing
+multimedia streams to a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported muxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available muxers using the
+configure option --list-muxers.
+
+
You can disable all the muxers with the configure option
+--disable-muxers and selectively enable / disable single muxers
+with the options --enable-muxer=MUXER /
+--disable-muxer=MUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled muxers.
+
+
A description of some of the currently available muxers follows.
+
+
+
4.1 aiff# TOC
+
+
Audio Interchange File Format muxer.
+
+
+
4.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+write_id3v2 Enable ID3v2 tags writing when set to 1. Default is 0 (disabled).
+
+id3v2_version Select ID3v2 version to write. Currently only version 3 and 4 (aka.
+ID3v2.3 and ID3v2.4) are supported. The default is version 4.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC of all the input audio
+and video frames. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+CRC.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
+CRC=0xCRC , where CRC is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to
+8 digits containing the CRC for all the decoded input frames.
+
+
See also the framecrc muxer.
+
+
+
4.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the CRC of the input, and store it in the file
+out.crc :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc out.crc
+
+
+
You can print the CRC to stdout with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f crc -
+
+
+
You can select the output format of each frame with ffmpeg by
+specifying the audio and video codec and format. For example to
+compute the CRC of the input audio converted to PCM unsigned 8-bit
+and the input video converted to MPEG-2 video, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f crc -
+
+
+
+
4.3 framecrc# TOC
+
+
Per-packet CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the Adler-32 CRC for each audio
+and video packet. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+CRC.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
+packet of the form:
+
+
stream_index , packet_dts , packet_pts , packet_duration , packet_size , 0xCRC
+
+
+
CRC is a hexadecimal number 0-padded to 8 digits containing the
+CRC of the packet.
+
+
+
4.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the CRC of the audio and video frames in
+INPUT , converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it
+in the file out.crc :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc out.crc
+
+
+
To print the information to stdout, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framecrc -
+
+
+
With ffmpeg, you can select the output format to which the
+audio and video frames are encoded before computing the CRC for each
+packet by specifying the audio and video codec. For example, to
+compute the CRC of each decoded input audio frame converted to PCM
+unsigned 8-bit and of each decoded input video frame converted to
+MPEG-2 video, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:a pcm_u8 -c:v mpeg2video -f framecrc -
+
+
+
See also the crc muxer.
+
+
+
4.4 framemd5# TOC
+
+
Per-packet MD5 testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the MD5 hash for each audio
+and video packet. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+hash.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a line for each audio and video
+packet of the form:
+
+
stream_index , packet_dts , packet_pts , packet_duration , packet_size , MD5
+
+
+
MD5 is a hexadecimal number representing the computed MD5 hash
+for the packet.
+
+
+
4.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
For example to compute the MD5 of the audio and video frames in
+INPUT , converted to raw audio and video packets, and store it
+in the file out.md5 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 out.md5
+
+
+
To print the information to stdout, use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f framemd5 -
+
+
+
See also the md5 muxer.
+
+
+
+
+
Animated GIF muxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+loop Set the number of times to loop the output. Use -1 for no loop, 0
+for looping indefinitely (default).
+
+final_delay Force the delay (expressed in centiseconds) after the last frame. Each frame
+ends with a delay until the next frame. The default is -1, which is a
+special value to tell the muxer to re-use the previous delay. In case of a
+loop, you might want to customize this value to mark a pause for instance.
+
+
+
For example, to encode a gif looping 10 times, with a 5 seconds delay between
+the loops:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -loop 10 -final_delay 500 out.gif
+
+
+
Note 1: if you wish to extract the frames in separate GIF files, you need to
+force the image2 muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v gif -f image2 "out%d.gif"
+
+
+
Note 2: the GIF format has a very small time base: the delay between two frames
+can not be smaller than one centi second.
+
+
+
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming muxer that segments MPEG-TS according to
+the HTTP Live Streaming (HLS) specification.
+
+
It creates a playlist file, and one or more segment files. The output filename
+specifies the playlist filename.
+
+
By default, the muxer creates a file for each segment produced. These files
+have the same name as the playlist, followed by a sequential number and a
+.ts extension.
+
+
For example, to convert an input file with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.nut out.m3u8
+
+
This example will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and segment files:
+out0.ts , out1.ts , out2.ts , etc.
+
+
See also the segment muxer, which provides a more generic and
+flexible implementation of a segmenter, and can be used to perform HLS
+segmentation.
+
+
+
4.6.1 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+hls_time seconds Set the segment length in seconds. Default value is 2.
+
+hls_list_size size Set the maximum number of playlist entries. If set to 0 the list file
+will contain all the segments. Default value is 5.
+
+hls_ts_options options_list Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters. Values containing : special characters must be
+escaped.
+
+hls_wrap wrap Set the number after which the segment filename number (the number
+specified in each segment file) wraps. If set to 0 the number will be
+never wrapped. Default value is 0.
+
+This option is useful to avoid to fill the disk with many segment
+files, and limits the maximum number of segment files written to disk
+to wrap .
+
+start_number number Start the playlist sequence number from number . Default value is
+0.
+
+hls_allow_cache allowcache Explicitly set whether the client MAY (1) or MUST NOT (0) cache media segments.
+
+hls_base_url baseurl Append baseurl to every entry in the playlist.
+Useful to generate playlists with absolute paths.
+
+Note that the playlist sequence number must be unique for each segment
+and it is not to be confused with the segment filename sequence number
+which can be cyclic, for example if the wrap option is
+specified.
+
+hls_segment_filename filename Set the segment filename. Unless hls_flags single_file is set filename
+is used as a string format with the segment number:
+
+
ffmpeg in.nut -hls_segment_filename 'file%03d.ts' out.m3u8
+ This example will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and segment files:
+file000.ts , file001.ts , file002.ts , etc.
+
+hls_flags single_file If this flag is set, the muxer will store all segments in a single MPEG-TS
+file, and will use byte ranges in the playlist. HLS playlists generated with
+this way will have the version number 4.
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.nut -hls_flags single_file out.m3u8
+ Will produce the playlist, out.m3u8 , and a single segment file,
+out.ts .
+
+hls_flags delete_segments Segment files removed from the playlist are deleted after a period of time
+equal to the duration of the segment plus the duration of the playlist.
+
+
+
+
+
+
ICO file muxer.
+
+
Microsoft’s icon file format (ICO) has some strict limitations that should be noted:
+
+
+ Size cannot exceed 256 pixels in any dimension
+
+ Only BMP and PNG images can be stored
+
+ If a BMP image is used, it must be one of the following pixel formats:
+
+
BMP Bit Depth FFmpeg Pixel Format
+1bit pal8
+4bit pal8
+8bit pal8
+16bit rgb555le
+24bit bgr24
+32bit bgra
+ If a BMP image is used, it must use the BITMAPINFOHEADER DIB header
+
+ If a PNG image is used, it must use the rgba pixel format
+
+
+
+
4.8 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file muxer.
+
+
The image file muxer writes video frames to image files.
+
+
The output filenames are specified by a pattern, which can be used to
+produce sequentially numbered series of files.
+The pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", this string
+specifies the position of the characters representing a numbering in
+the filenames. If the form "%0N d" is used, the string
+representing the number in each filename is 0-padded to N
+digits. The literal character ’%’ can be specified in the pattern with
+the string "%%".
+
+
If the pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified will contain the number 1, all the following
+numbers will be sequential.
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the image files to write.
+
+
For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will specify a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.
+The pattern "img%%-%d.jpg" will specify a sequence of filenames of the
+form img%-1.jpg , img%-2.jpg , ..., img%-10.jpg ,
+etc.
+
+
+
4.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following example shows how to use ffmpeg for creating a
+sequence of files img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ...,
+taking one image every second from the input video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync 1 -r 1 -f image2 'img-%03d.jpeg'
+
+
+
Note that with ffmpeg, if the format is not specified with the
+-f option and the output filename specifies an image file
+format, the image2 muxer is automatically selected, so the previous
+command can be written as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vsync 1 -r 1 'img-%03d.jpeg'
+
+
+
Note also that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to create a single image file
+img.jpeg from the input video you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -f image2 -frames:v 1 img.jpeg
+
+
+
The strftime option allows you to expand the filename with
+date and time information. Check the documentation of
+the strftime() function for the syntax.
+
+
For example to generate image files from the strftime()
+"%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S" pattern, the following ffmpeg command
+can be used:
+
+
ffmpeg -f v4l2 -r 1 -i /dev/video0 -f image2 -strftime 1 "%Y-%m-%d_%H-%M-%S.jpg"
+
+
+
+
4.8.2 Options# TOC
+
+
+start_number Start the sequence from the specified number. Default value is 1. Must
+be a non-negative number.
+
+update If set to 1, the filename will always be interpreted as just a
+filename, not a pattern, and the corresponding file will be continuously
+overwritten with new images. Default value is 0.
+
+strftime If set to 1, expand the filename with date and time information from
+strftime(). Default value is 0.
+
+
+
The image muxer supports the .Y.U.V image file format. This format is
+special in that that each image frame consists of three files, for
+each of the YUV420P components. To read or write this image file format,
+specify the name of the ’.Y’ file. The muxer will automatically open the
+’.U’ and ’.V’ files as required.
+
+
+
4.9 matroska# TOC
+
+
Matroska container muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements the matroska and webm container specs.
+
+
+
4.9.1 Metadata# TOC
+
+
The recognized metadata settings in this muxer are:
+
+
+title Set title name provided to a single track.
+
+language Specify the language of the track in the Matroska languages form.
+
+The language can be either the 3 letters bibliographic ISO-639-2 (ISO
+639-2/B) form (like "fre" for French), or a language code mixed with a
+country code for specialities in languages (like "fre-ca" for Canadian
+French).
+
+stereo_mode Set stereo 3D video layout of two views in a single video track.
+
+The following values are recognized:
+
+‘mono ’
+video is not stereo
+
‘left_right ’
+Both views are arranged side by side, Left-eye view is on the left
+
‘bottom_top ’
+Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is at bottom
+
‘top_bottom ’
+Both views are arranged in top-bottom orientation, Left-eye view is on top
+
‘checkerboard_rl ’
+Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Left-eye view being first
+
‘checkerboard_lr ’
+Each view is arranged in a checkerboard interleaved pattern, Right-eye view being first
+
‘row_interleaved_rl ’
+Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Right-eye view is first row
+
‘row_interleaved_lr ’
+Each view is constituted by a row based interleaving, Left-eye view is first row
+
‘col_interleaved_rl ’
+Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Right-eye view is first column
+
‘col_interleaved_lr ’
+Both views are arranged in a column based interleaving manner, Left-eye view is first column
+
‘anaglyph_cyan_red ’
+All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through red-cyan filters
+
‘right_left ’
+Both views are arranged side by side, Right-eye view is on the left
+
‘anaglyph_green_magenta ’
+All frames are in anaglyph format viewable through green-magenta filters
+
‘block_lr ’
+Both eyes laced in one Block, Left-eye view is first
+
‘block_rl ’
+Both eyes laced in one Block, Right-eye view is first
+
+
+
+
For example a 3D WebM clip can be created using the following command line:
+
+
ffmpeg -i sample_left_right_clip.mpg -an -c:v libvpx -metadata stereo_mode=left_right -y stereo_clip.webm
+
+
+
+
4.9.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+reserve_index_space By default, this muxer writes the index for seeking (called cues in Matroska
+terms) at the end of the file, because it cannot know in advance how much space
+to leave for the index at the beginning of the file. However for some use cases
+– e.g. streaming where seeking is possible but slow – it is useful to put the
+index at the beginning of the file.
+
+If this option is set to a non-zero value, the muxer will reserve a given amount
+of space in the file header and then try to write the cues there when the muxing
+finishes. If the available space does not suffice, muxing will fail. A safe size
+for most use cases should be about 50kB per hour of video.
+
+Note that cues are only written if the output is seekable and this option will
+have no effect if it is not.
+
+
+
+
4.10 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 testing format.
+
+
This muxer computes and prints the MD5 hash of all the input audio
+and video frames. By default audio frames are converted to signed
+16-bit raw audio and video frames to raw video before computing the
+hash.
+
+
The output of the muxer consists of a single line of the form:
+MD5=MD5 , where MD5 is a hexadecimal number representing
+the computed MD5 hash.
+
+
For example to compute the MD5 hash of the input converted to raw
+audio and video, and store it in the file out.md5 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 out.md5
+
+
+
You can print the MD5 to stdout with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f md5 -
+
+
+
See also the framemd5 muxer.
+
+
+
4.11 mov, mp4, ismv# TOC
+
+
MOV/MP4/ISMV (Smooth Streaming) muxer.
+
+
The mov/mp4/ismv muxer supports fragmentation. Normally, a MOV/MP4
+file has all the metadata about all packets stored in one location
+(written at the end of the file, it can be moved to the start for
+better playback by adding faststart to the movflags , or
+using the qt-faststart tool). A fragmented
+file consists of a number of fragments, where packets and metadata
+about these packets are stored together. Writing a fragmented
+file has the advantage that the file is decodable even if the
+writing is interrupted (while a normal MOV/MP4 is undecodable if
+it is not properly finished), and it requires less memory when writing
+very long files (since writing normal MOV/MP4 files stores info about
+every single packet in memory until the file is closed). The downside
+is that it is less compatible with other applications.
+
+
+
4.11.1 Options# TOC
+
+
Fragmentation is enabled by setting one of the AVOptions that define
+how to cut the file into fragments:
+
+
+-moov_size bytes Reserves space for the moov atom at the beginning of the file instead of placing the
+moov atom at the end. If the space reserved is insufficient, muxing will fail.
+
-movflags frag_keyframe Start a new fragment at each video keyframe.
+
-frag_duration duration Create fragments that are duration microseconds long.
+
-frag_size size Create fragments that contain up to size bytes of payload data.
+
-movflags frag_custom Allow the caller to manually choose when to cut fragments, by
+calling av_write_frame(ctx, NULL) to write a fragment with
+the packets written so far. (This is only useful with other
+applications integrating libavformat, not from ffmpeg.)
+
-min_frag_duration duration Don’t create fragments that are shorter than duration microseconds long.
+
+
+
If more than one condition is specified, fragments are cut when
+one of the specified conditions is fulfilled. The exception to this is
+-min_frag_duration, which has to be fulfilled for any of the other
+conditions to apply.
+
+
Additionally, the way the output file is written can be adjusted
+through a few other options:
+
+
+-movflags empty_moov Write an initial moov atom directly at the start of the file, without
+describing any samples in it. Generally, an mdat/moov pair is written
+at the start of the file, as a normal MOV/MP4 file, containing only
+a short portion of the file. With this option set, there is no initial
+mdat atom, and the moov atom only describes the tracks but has
+a zero duration.
+
+This option is implicitly set when writing ismv (Smooth Streaming) files.
+
-movflags separate_moof Write a separate moof (movie fragment) atom for each track. Normally,
+packets for all tracks are written in a moof atom (which is slightly
+more efficient), but with this option set, the muxer writes one moof/mdat
+pair for each track, making it easier to separate tracks.
+
+This option is implicitly set when writing ismv (Smooth Streaming) files.
+
-movflags faststart Run a second pass moving the index (moov atom) to the beginning of the file.
+This operation can take a while, and will not work in various situations such
+as fragmented output, thus it is not enabled by default.
+
-movflags rtphint Add RTP hinting tracks to the output file.
+
-movflags disable_chpl Disable Nero chapter markers (chpl atom). Normally, both Nero chapters
+and a QuickTime chapter track are written to the file. With this option
+set, only the QuickTime chapter track will be written. Nero chapters can
+cause failures when the file is reprocessed with certain tagging programs, like
+mp3Tag 2.61a and iTunes 11.3, most likely other versions are affected as well.
+
-movflags omit_tfhd_offset Do not write any absolute base_data_offset in tfhd atoms. This avoids
+tying fragments to absolute byte positions in the file/streams.
+
-movflags default_base_moof Similarly to the omit_tfhd_offset, this flag avoids writing the
+absolute base_data_offset field in tfhd atoms, but does so by using
+the new default-base-is-moof flag instead. This flag is new from
+14496-12:2012. This may make the fragments easier to parse in certain
+circumstances (avoiding basing track fragment location calculations
+on the implicit end of the previous track fragment).
+
+
+
+
4.11.2 Example# TOC
+
+
Smooth Streaming content can be pushed in real time to a publishing
+point on IIS with this muxer. Example:
+
+
ffmpeg -re <normal input/transcoding options> -movflags isml+frag_keyframe -f ismv http://server/publishingpoint.isml/Streams(Encoder1)
+
+
+
+
4.12 mp3# TOC
+
+
The MP3 muxer writes a raw MP3 stream with the following optional features:
+
+ An ID3v2 metadata header at the beginning (enabled by default). Versions 2.3 and
+2.4 are supported, the id3v2_version private option controls which one is
+used (3 or 4). Setting id3v2_version to 0 disables the ID3v2 header
+completely.
+
+The muxer supports writing attached pictures (APIC frames) to the ID3v2 header.
+The pictures are supplied to the muxer in form of a video stream with a single
+packet. There can be any number of those streams, each will correspond to a
+single APIC frame. The stream metadata tags title and comment map
+to APIC description and picture type respectively. See
+http://id3.org/id3v2.4.0-frames for allowed picture types.
+
+Note that the APIC frames must be written at the beginning, so the muxer will
+buffer the audio frames until it gets all the pictures. It is therefore advised
+to provide the pictures as soon as possible to avoid excessive buffering.
+
+ A Xing/LAME frame right after the ID3v2 header (if present). It is enabled by
+default, but will be written only if the output is seekable. The
+write_xing private option can be used to disable it. The frame contains
+various information that may be useful to the decoder, like the audio duration
+or encoder delay.
+
+ A legacy ID3v1 tag at the end of the file (disabled by default). It may be
+enabled with the write_id3v1 private option, but as its capabilities are
+very limited, its usage is not recommended.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Write an mp3 with an ID3v2.3 header and an ID3v1 footer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -id3v2_version 3 -write_id3v1 1 out.mp3
+
+
+
To attach a picture to an mp3 file select both the audio and the picture stream
+with map:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp3 -i cover.png -c copy -map 0 -map 1
+-metadata:s:v title="Album cover" -metadata:s:v comment="Cover (Front)" out.mp3
+
+
+
Write a "clean" MP3 without any extra features:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.wav -write_xing 0 -id3v2_version 0 out.mp3
+
+
+
+
4.13 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG transport stream muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements ISO 13818-1 and part of ETSI EN 300 468.
+
+
The recognized metadata settings in mpegts muxer are service_provider
+and service_name. If they are not set the default for
+service_provider is "FFmpeg" and the default for
+service_name is "Service01".
+
+
+
4.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The muxer options are:
+
+
+-mpegts_original_network_id number Set the original_network_id (default 0x0001). This is unique identifier
+of a network in DVB. Its main use is in the unique identification of a
+service through the path Original_Network_ID, Transport_Stream_ID.
+
-mpegts_transport_stream_id number Set the transport_stream_id (default 0x0001). This identifies a
+transponder in DVB.
+
-mpegts_service_id number Set the service_id (default 0x0001) also known as program in DVB.
+
-mpegts_pmt_start_pid number Set the first PID for PMT (default 0x1000, max 0x1f00).
+
-mpegts_start_pid number Set the first PID for data packets (default 0x0100, max 0x0f00).
+
-mpegts_m2ts_mode number Enable m2ts mode if set to 1. Default value is -1 which disables m2ts mode.
+
-muxrate number Set a constant muxrate (default VBR).
+
-pcr_period numer Override the default PCR retransmission time (default 20ms), ignored
+if variable muxrate is selected.
+
-pes_payload_size number Set minimum PES packet payload in bytes.
+
-mpegts_flags flags Set flags (see below).
+
-mpegts_copyts number Preserve original timestamps, if value is set to 1. Default value is -1, which
+results in shifting timestamps so that they start from 0.
+
-tables_version number Set PAT, PMT and SDT version (default 0, valid values are from 0 to 31, inclusively).
+This option allows updating stream structure so that standard consumer may
+detect the change. To do so, reopen output AVFormatContext (in case of API
+usage) or restart ffmpeg instance, cyclically changing tables_version value:
+
+
ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+...
+ffmpeg -i source3.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 31 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source1.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 0 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+ffmpeg -i source2.ts -codec copy -f mpegts -tables_version 1 udp://1.1.1.1:1111
+...
+
+
+
Option mpegts_flags may take a set of such flags:
+
+
+resend_headers Reemit PAT/PMT before writing the next packet.
+
latm Use LATM packetization for AAC.
+
+
+
+
4.13.2 Example# TOC
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i file.mpg -c copy \
+ -mpegts_original_network_id 0x1122 \
+ -mpegts_transport_stream_id 0x3344 \
+ -mpegts_service_id 0x5566 \
+ -mpegts_pmt_start_pid 0x1500 \
+ -mpegts_start_pid 0x150 \
+ -metadata service_provider="Some provider" \
+ -metadata service_name="Some Channel" \
+ -y out.ts
+
+
+
+
4.14 null# TOC
+
+
Null muxer.
+
+
This muxer does not generate any output file, it is mainly useful for
+testing or benchmarking purposes.
+
+
For example to benchmark decoding with ffmpeg you can use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null out.null
+
+
+
Note that the above command does not read or write the out.null
+file, but specifying the output file is required by the ffmpeg
+syntax.
+
+
Alternatively you can write the command as:
+
+
ffmpeg -benchmark -i INPUT -f null -
+
+
+
+
4.15 nut# TOC
+
+
+-syncpoints flags Change the syncpoint usage in nut:
+
+default use the normal low-overhead seeking aids.none do not use the syncpoints at all, reducing the overhead but making the stream non-seekable;Use of this option is not recommended, as the resulting files are very damage
+ sensitive and seeking is not possible. Also in general the overhead from
+ syncpoints is negligible. Note, -write_index 0 can be used to disable
+ all growing data tables, allowing to mux endless streams with limited memory
+ and without these disadvantages.
+
timestamped extend the syncpoint with a wallclock field.
+The none and timestamped flags are experimental.
+
-write_index bool Write index at the end, the default is to write an index.
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f_strict experimental -syncpoints none - | processor
+
+
+
+
4.16 ogg# TOC
+
+
Ogg container muxer.
+
+
+-page_duration duration Preferred page duration, in microseconds. The muxer will attempt to create
+pages that are approximately duration microseconds long. This allows the
+user to compromise between seek granularity and container overhead. The default
+is 1 second. A value of 0 will fill all segments, making pages as large as
+possible. A value of 1 will effectively use 1 packet-per-page in most
+situations, giving a small seek granularity at the cost of additional container
+overhead.
+
+
+
+
4.17 segment, stream_segment, ssegment# TOC
+
+
Basic stream segmenter.
+
+
This muxer outputs streams to a number of separate files of nearly
+fixed duration. Output filename pattern can be set in a fashion similar to
+image2 .
+
+
stream_segment is a variant of the muxer used to write to
+streaming output formats, i.e. which do not require global headers,
+and is recommended for outputting e.g. to MPEG transport stream segments.
+ssegment is a shorter alias for stream_segment.
+
+
Every segment starts with a keyframe of the selected reference stream,
+which is set through the reference_stream option.
+
+
Note that if you want accurate splitting for a video file, you need to
+make the input key frames correspond to the exact splitting times
+expected by the segmenter, or the segment muxer will start the new
+segment with the key frame found next after the specified start
+time.
+
+
The segment muxer works best with a single constant frame rate video.
+
+
Optionally it can generate a list of the created segments, by setting
+the option segment_list . The list type is specified by the
+segment_list_type option. The entry filenames in the segment
+list are set by default to the basename of the corresponding segment
+files.
+
+
See also the hls muxer, which provides a more specific
+implementation for HLS segmentation.
+
+
+
4.17.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The segment muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+reference_stream specifier Set the reference stream, as specified by the string specifier .
+If specifier is set to auto, the reference is chosen
+automatically. Otherwise it must be a stream specifier (see the “Stream
+specifiers” chapter in the ffmpeg manual) which specifies the
+reference stream. The default value is auto.
+
+segment_format format Override the inner container format, by default it is guessed by the filename
+extension.
+
+segment_format_options options_list Set output format options using a :-separated list of key=value
+parameters. Values containing the : special character must be
+escaped.
+
+segment_list name Generate also a listfile named name . If not specified no
+listfile is generated.
+
+segment_list_flags flags Set flags affecting the segment list generation.
+
+It currently supports the following flags:
+
+‘cache ’
+Allow caching (only affects M3U8 list files).
+
+‘live ’
+Allow live-friendly file generation.
+
+
+segment_list_type type Select the listing format.
+
+flat use a simple flat list of entries.hls use a m3u8-like structure.
+
+segment_list_size size Update the list file so that it contains at most size
+segments. If 0 the list file will contain all the segments. Default
+value is 0.
+
+segment_list_entry_prefix prefix Prepend prefix to each entry. Useful to generate absolute paths.
+By default no prefix is applied.
+
+The following values are recognized:
+
+‘flat ’
+Generate a flat list for the created segments, one segment per line.
+
+‘csv, ext ’
+Generate a list for the created segments, one segment per line,
+each line matching the format (comma-separated values):
+
+
segment_filename ,segment_start_time ,segment_end_time
+segment_filename is the name of the output file generated by the
+muxer according to the provided pattern. CSV escaping (according to
+RFC4180) is applied if required.
+
+segment_start_time and segment_end_time specify
+the segment start and end time expressed in seconds.
+
+A list file with the suffix ".csv" or ".ext" will
+auto-select this format.
+
+‘ext ’ is deprecated in favor or ‘csv ’.
+
+‘ffconcat ’
+Generate an ffconcat file for the created segments. The resulting file
+can be read using the FFmpeg concat demuxer.
+
+A list file with the suffix ".ffcat" or ".ffconcat" will
+auto-select this format.
+
+‘m3u8 ’
+Generate an extended M3U8 file, version 3, compliant with
+http://tools.ietf.org/id/draft-pantos-http-live-streaming .
+
+A list file with the suffix ".m3u8" will auto-select this format.
+
+
+If not specified the type is guessed from the list file name suffix.
+
+segment_time time Set segment duration to time , the value must be a duration
+specification. Default value is "2". See also the
+segment_times option.
+
+Note that splitting may not be accurate, unless you force the
+reference stream key-frames at the given time. See the introductory
+notice and the examples below.
+
+segment_atclocktime 1|0 If set to "1" split at regular clock time intervals starting from 00:00
+o’clock. The time value specified in segment_time is
+used for setting the length of the splitting interval.
+
+For example with segment_time set to "900" this makes it possible
+to create files at 12:00 o’clock, 12:15, 12:30, etc.
+
+Default value is "0".
+
+segment_time_delta delta Specify the accuracy time when selecting the start time for a
+segment, expressed as a duration specification. Default value is "0".
+
+When delta is specified a key-frame will start a new segment if its
+PTS satisfies the relation:
+
+
PTS >= start_time - time_delta
+ This option is useful when splitting video content, which is always
+split at GOP boundaries, in case a key frame is found just before the
+specified split time.
+
+In particular may be used in combination with the ffmpeg option
+force_key_frames . The key frame times specified by
+force_key_frames may not be set accurately because of rounding
+issues, with the consequence that a key frame time may result set just
+before the specified time. For constant frame rate videos a value of
+1/(2*frame_rate ) should address the worst case mismatch between
+the specified time and the time set by force_key_frames .
+
+segment_times times Specify a list of split points. times contains a list of comma
+separated duration specifications, in increasing order. See also
+the segment_time option.
+
+segment_frames frames Specify a list of split video frame numbers. frames contains a
+list of comma separated integer numbers, in increasing order.
+
+This option specifies to start a new segment whenever a reference
+stream key frame is found and the sequential number (starting from 0)
+of the frame is greater or equal to the next value in the list.
+
+segment_wrap limit Wrap around segment index once it reaches limit .
+
+segment_start_number number Set the sequence number of the first segment. Defaults to 0.
+
+reset_timestamps 1|0 Reset timestamps at the begin of each segment, so that each segment
+will start with near-zero timestamps. It is meant to ease the playback
+of the generated segments. May not work with some combinations of
+muxers/codecs. It is set to 0 by default.
+
+initial_offset offset Specify timestamp offset to apply to the output packet timestamps. The
+argument must be a time duration specification, and defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
4.17.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
4.18 smoothstreaming# TOC
+
+
Smooth Streaming muxer generates a set of files (Manifest, chunks) suitable for serving with conventional web server.
+
+
+window_size Specify the number of fragments kept in the manifest. Default 0 (keep all).
+
+extra_window_size Specify the number of fragments kept outside of the manifest before removing from disk. Default 5.
+
+lookahead_count Specify the number of lookahead fragments. Default 2.
+
+min_frag_duration Specify the minimum fragment duration (in microseconds). Default 5000000.
+
+remove_at_exit Specify whether to remove all fragments when finished. Default 0 (do not remove).
+
+
+
+
+
4.19 tee# TOC
+
+
The tee muxer can be used to write the same data to several files or any
+other kind of muxer. It can be used, for example, to both stream a video to
+the network and save it to disk at the same time.
+
+
It is different from specifying several outputs to the ffmpeg
+command-line tool because the audio and video data will be encoded only once
+with the tee muxer; encoding can be a very expensive process. It is not
+useful when using the libavformat API directly because it is then possible
+to feed the same packets to several muxers directly.
+
+
The slave outputs are specified in the file name given to the muxer,
+separated by ’|’. If any of the slave name contains the ’|’ separator,
+leading or trailing spaces or any special character, it must be
+escaped (see (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual ).
+
+
Muxer options can be specified for each slave by prepending them as a list of
+key =value pairs separated by ’:’, between square brackets. If
+the options values contain a special character or the ’:’ separator, they
+must be escaped; note that this is a second level escaping.
+
+
The following special options are also recognized:
+
+f Specify the format name. Useful if it cannot be guessed from the
+output name suffix.
+
+bsfs[/spec ] Specify a list of bitstream filters to apply to the specified
+output.
+
+It is possible to specify to which streams a given bitstream filter
+applies, by appending a stream specifier to the option separated by
+/. spec must be a stream specifier (see Format stream specifiers ). If the stream specifier is not specified, the
+bitstream filters will be applied to all streams in the output.
+
+Several bitstream filters can be specified, separated by ",".
+
+select Select the streams that should be mapped to the slave output,
+specified by a stream specifier. If not specified, this defaults to
+all the input streams.
+
+
+
+
4.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Encode something and both archive it in a WebM file and stream it
+as MPEG-TS over UDP (the streams need to be explicitly mapped):
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -c:v libx264 -c:a mp2 -f tee -map 0:v -map 0:a
+ "archive-20121107.mkv|[f=mpegts]udp://10.0.1.255:1234/"
+ Use ffmpeg to encode the input, and send the output
+to three different destinations. The dump_extra bitstream
+filter is used to add extradata information to all the output video
+keyframes packets, as requested by the MPEG-TS format. The select
+option is applied to out.aac in order to make it contain only
+audio packets.
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac -strict experimental
+ -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=a]out.aac"
+ As below, but select only stream a:1 for the audio output. Note
+that a second level escaping must be performed, as ":" is a special
+character used to separate options.
+
+
ffmpeg -i ... -map 0 -flags +global_header -c:v libx264 -c:a aac -strict experimental
+ -f tee "[bsfs/v=dump_extra]out.ts|[movflags=+faststart]out.mp4|[select=\'a:1\']out.aac"
+
+
+
Note: some codecs may need different options depending on the output format;
+the auto-detection of this can not work with the tee muxer. The main example
+is the global_header flag.
+
+
+
4.20 webm_dash_manifest# TOC
+
+
WebM DASH Manifest muxer.
+
+
This muxer implements the WebM DASH Manifest specification to generate the DASH manifest XML.
+
+
+
4.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
This muxer supports the following options:
+
+
+adaptation_sets This option has the following syntax: "id=x,streams=a,b,c id=y,streams=d,e" where x and y are the
+unique identifiers of the adaptation sets and a,b,c,d and e are the indices of the corresponding
+audio and video streams. Any number of adaptation sets can be added using this option.
+
+
+
+
4.20.2 Example# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg -f webm_dash_manifest -i video1.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i video2.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio1.webm \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest -i audio2.webm \
+ -map 0 -map 1 -map 2 -map 3 \
+ -c copy \
+ -f webm_dash_manifest \
+ -adaptation_sets "id=0,streams=0,1 id=1,streams=2,3" \
+ manifest.xml
+
+
+
+
5 Metadata# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is able to dump metadata from media files into a simple UTF-8-encoded
+INI-like text file and then load it back using the metadata muxer/demuxer.
+
+
The file format is as follows:
+
+ A file consists of a header and a number of metadata tags divided into sections,
+each on its own line.
+
+ The header is a ’;FFMETADATA’ string, followed by a version number (now 1).
+
+ Metadata tags are of the form ’key=value’
+
+ Immediately after header follows global metadata
+
+ After global metadata there may be sections with per-stream/per-chapter
+metadata.
+
+ A section starts with the section name in uppercase (i.e. STREAM or CHAPTER) in
+brackets (’[’, ’]’) and ends with next section or end of file.
+
+ At the beginning of a chapter section there may be an optional timebase to be
+used for start/end values. It must be in form ’TIMEBASE=num/den’, where num and
+den are integers. If the timebase is missing then start/end times are assumed to
+be in milliseconds.
+Next a chapter section must contain chapter start and end times in form
+’START=num’, ’END=num’, where num is a positive integer.
+
+ Empty lines and lines starting with ’;’ or ’#’ are ignored.
+
+ Metadata keys or values containing special characters (’=’, ’;’, ’#’, ’\’ and a
+newline) must be escaped with a backslash ’\’.
+
+ Note that whitespace in metadata (e.g. foo = bar) is considered to be a part of
+the tag (in the example above key is ’foo ’, value is ’ bar’).
+
+
+
A ffmetadata file might look like this:
+
+
;FFMETADATA1
+title=bike\\shed
+;this is a comment
+artist=FFmpeg troll team
+
+[CHAPTER]
+TIMEBASE=1/1000
+START=0
+#chapter ends at 0:01:00
+END=60000
+title=chapter \#1
+[STREAM]
+title=multi\
+line
+
+
+
By using the ffmetadata muxer and demuxer it is possible to extract
+metadata from an input file to an ffmetadata file, and then transcode
+the file into an output file with the edited ffmetadata file.
+
+
Extracting an ffmetadata file with ffmpeg goes as follows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata FFMETADATAFILE
+
+
+
Reinserting edited metadata information from the FFMETADATAFILE file can
+be done as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -i FFMETADATAFILE -map_metadata 1 -codec copy OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
+
6 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavformat
+
+
+
+
7 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Protocols Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Protocols Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes the input and output protocols provided by the
+libavformat library.
+
+
+
+
2 Protocols# TOC
+
+
Protocols are configured elements in FFmpeg that enable access to
+resources that require specific protocols.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported protocols are
+enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-protocols".
+
+
You can disable all the protocols using the configure option
+"–disable-protocols", and selectively enable a protocol using the
+option "–enable-protocol=PROTOCOL ", or you can disable a
+particular protocol using the option
+"–disable-protocol=PROTOCOL ".
+
+
The option "-protocols" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported protocols.
+
+
A description of the currently available protocols follows.
+
+
+
2.1 bluray# TOC
+
+
Read BluRay playlist.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+angle BluRay angle
+
+chapter Start chapter (1...N)
+
+playlist Playlist to read (BDMV/PLAYLIST/?????.mpls)
+
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Read longest playlist from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray:
+
+
+
Read angle 2 of playlist 4 from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray, start from chapter 2:
+
+
-playlist 4 -angle 2 -chapter 2 bluray:/mnt/bluray
+
+
+
+
2.2 cache# TOC
+
+
Caching wrapper for input stream.
+
+
Cache the input stream to temporary file. It brings seeking capability to live streams.
+
+
+
+
+
2.3 concat# TOC
+
+
Physical concatenation protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and seek from many resource in sequence as if they were
+a unique resource.
+
+
A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
+
+
concat:URL1 |URL2 |...|URLN
+
+
+
where URL1 , URL2 , ..., URLN are the urls of the
+resource to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
+protocol.
+
+
For example to read a sequence of files split1.mpeg ,
+split2.mpeg , split3.mpeg with ffplay use the
+command:
+
+
ffplay concat:split1.mpeg\|split2.mpeg\|split3.mpeg
+
+
+
Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for
+many shells.
+
+
+
2.4 crypto# TOC
+
+
AES-encrypted stream reading protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+key Set the AES decryption key binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+iv Set the AES decryption initialization vector binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+
+
Accepted URL formats:
+
+
crypto:URL
+crypto+URL
+
+
+
+
2.5 data# TOC
+
+
Data in-line in the URI. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_URI_scheme .
+
+
For example, to convert a GIF file given inline with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i "data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODdhCAAIAMIEAAAAAAAA//8AAP//AP///////////////ywAAAAACAAIAAADF0gEDLojDgdGiJdJqUX02iB4E8Q9jUMkADs=" smiley.png
+
+
+
+
2.6 file# TOC
+
+
File access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read from or write to a file.
+
+
A file URL can have the form:
+
+
+
where filename is the path of the file to read.
+
+
An URL that does not have a protocol prefix will be assumed to be a
+file URL. Depending on the build, an URL that looks like a Windows
+path with the drive letter at the beginning will also be assumed to be
+a file URL (usually not the case in builds for unix-like systems).
+
+
For example to read from a file input.mpeg with ffmpeg
+use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i file:input.mpeg output.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable for files on slow medium.
+
+
+
+
+
+
FTP (File Transfer Protocol).
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using FTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
ftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+ftp-anonymous-password Password used when login as anonymous user. Typically an e-mail address
+should be used.
+
+ftp-write-seekable Control seekability of connection during encoding. If set to 1 the
+resource is supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not
+to be seekable. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
NOTE: Protocol can be used as output, but it is recommended to not do
+it, unless special care is taken (tests, customized server configuration
+etc.). Different FTP servers behave in different way during seek
+operation. ff* tools may produce incomplete content due to server limitations.
+
+
+
2.8 gopher# TOC
+
+
Gopher protocol.
+
+
+
+
+
Read Apple HTTP Live Streaming compliant segmented stream as
+a uniform one. The M3U8 playlists describing the segments can be
+remote HTTP resources or local files, accessed using the standard
+file protocol.
+The nested protocol is declared by specifying
+"+proto " after the hls URI scheme name, where proto
+is either "file" or "http".
+
+
+
hls+http://host/path/to/remote/resource.m3u8
+hls+file://path/to/local/resource.m3u8
+
+
+
Using this protocol is discouraged - the hls demuxer should work
+just as well (if not, please report the issues) and is more complete.
+To use the hls demuxer instead, simply use the direct URLs to the
+m3u8 files.
+
+
+
2.10 http# TOC
+
+
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+seekable Control seekability of connection. If set to 1 the resource is
+supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not to be seekable,
+if set to -1 it will try to autodetect if it is seekable. Default
+value is -1.
+
+chunked_post If set to 1 use chunked Transfer-Encoding for posts, default is 1.
+
+content_type Set a specific content type for the POST messages.
+
+headers Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. The
+value must be a string encoding the headers.
+
+multiple_requests Use persistent connections if set to 1, default is 0.
+
+post_data Set custom HTTP post data.
+
+user-agent user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified the protocol will use a
+string describing the libavformat build. ("Lavf/<version>")
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+mime_type Export the MIME type.
+
+icy If set to 1 request ICY (SHOUTcast) metadata from the server. If the server
+supports this, the metadata has to be retrieved by the application by reading
+the icy_metadata_headers and icy_metadata_packet options.
+The default is 1.
+
+icy_metadata_headers If the server supports ICY metadata, this contains the ICY-specific HTTP reply
+headers, separated by newline characters.
+
+icy_metadata_packet If the server supports ICY metadata, and icy was set to 1, this
+contains the last non-empty metadata packet sent by the server. It should be
+polled in regular intervals by applications interested in mid-stream metadata
+updates.
+
+cookies Set the cookies to be sent in future requests. The format of each cookie is the
+same as the value of a Set-Cookie HTTP response field. Multiple cookies can be
+delimited by a newline character.
+
+offset Set initial byte offset.
+
+end_offset Try to limit the request to bytes preceding this offset.
+
+
+
+
2.10.1 HTTP Cookies# TOC
+
+
Some HTTP requests will be denied unless cookie values are passed in with the
+request. The cookies option allows these cookies to be specified. At
+the very least, each cookie must specify a value along with a path and domain.
+HTTP requests that match both the domain and path will automatically include the
+cookie value in the HTTP Cookie header field. Multiple cookies can be delimited
+by a newline.
+
+
The required syntax to play a stream specifying a cookie is:
+
+
ffplay -cookies "nlqptid=nltid=tsn; path=/; domain=somedomain.com;" http://somedomain.com/somestream.m3u8
+
+
+
+
2.11 Icecast# TOC
+
+
Icecast protocol (stream to Icecast servers)
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+ice_genre Set the stream genre.
+
+ice_name Set the stream name.
+
+ice_description Set the stream description.
+
+ice_url Set the stream website URL.
+
+ice_public Set if the stream should be public.
+The default is 0 (not public).
+
+user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified a string of the form
+"Lavf/<version>" will be used.
+
+password Set the Icecast mountpoint password.
+
+content_type Set the stream content type. This must be set if it is different from
+audio/mpeg.
+
+legacy_icecast This enables support for Icecast versions < 2.4.0, that do not support the
+HTTP PUT method but the SOURCE method.
+
+
+
+
+
icecast://[username [:password ]@]server :port /mountpoint
+
+
+
+
2.12 mmst# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over TCP.
+
+
+
2.13 mmsh# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over HTTP.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
mmsh://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
+
2.14 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 output protocol.
+
+
Computes the MD5 hash of the data to be written, and on close writes
+this to the designated output or stdout if none is specified. It can
+be used to test muxers without writing an actual file.
+
+
Some examples follow.
+
+
# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to the file output.avi.md5.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:output.avi.md5
+
+# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to stdout.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV) require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the MD5 output protocol.
+
+
+
2.15 pipe# TOC
+
+
UNIX pipe access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and write from UNIX pipes.
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
+
number is the number corresponding to the file descriptor of the
+pipe (e.g. 0 for stdin, 1 for stdout, 2 for stderr). If number
+is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be used
+for writing, stdin for reading.
+
+
For example to read from stdin with ffmpeg:
+
+
cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:0
+# ...this is the same as...
+cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:
+
+
+
For writing to stdout with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe:1 | cat > test.avi
+# ...this is the same as...
+ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe: | cat > test.avi
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV), require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the pipe output protocol.
+
+
+
2.16 rtmp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is used for streaming multimedia
+content across a TCP/IP network.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp://[username :password @]server [:port ][/app ][/instance ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
The accepted parameters are:
+
+username An optional username (mostly for publishing).
+
+password An optional password (mostly for publishing).
+
+server The address of the RTMP server.
+
+port The number of the TCP port to use (by default is 1935).
+
+app It is the name of the application to access. It usually corresponds to
+the path where the application is installed on the RTMP server
+(e.g. /ondemand/ , /flash/live/ , etc.). You can override
+the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_app option, too.
+
+playpath It is the path or name of the resource to play with reference to the
+application specified in app , may be prefixed by "mp4:". You
+can override the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_playpath
+option, too.
+
+listen Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
+timeout Maximum time to wait for the incoming connection. Implies listen.
+
+
+
Additionally, the following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+rtmp_app Name of application to connect on the RTMP server. This option
+overrides the parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_buffer Set the client buffer time in milliseconds. The default is 3000.
+
+rtmp_conn Extra arbitrary AMF connection parameters, parsed from a string,
+e.g. like B:1 S:authMe O:1 NN:code:1.23 NS:flag:ok O:0.
+Each value is prefixed by a single character denoting the type,
+B for Boolean, N for number, S for string, O for object, or Z for null,
+followed by a colon. For Booleans the data must be either 0 or 1 for
+FALSE or TRUE, respectively. Likewise for Objects the data must be 0 or
+1 to end or begin an object, respectively. Data items in subobjects may
+be named, by prefixing the type with ’N’ and specifying the name before
+the value (i.e. NB:myFlag:1). This option may be used multiple
+times to construct arbitrary AMF sequences.
+
+rtmp_flashver Version of the Flash plugin used to run the SWF player. The default
+is LNX 9,0,124,2. (When publishing, the default is FMLE/3.0 (compatible;
+<libavformat version>).)
+
+rtmp_flush_interval Number of packets flushed in the same request (RTMPT only). The default
+is 10.
+
+rtmp_live Specify that the media is a live stream. No resuming or seeking in
+live streams is possible. The default value is any, which means the
+subscriber first tries to play the live stream specified in the
+playpath. If a live stream of that name is not found, it plays the
+recorded stream. The other possible values are live and
+recorded.
+
+rtmp_pageurl URL of the web page in which the media was embedded. By default no
+value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_playpath Stream identifier to play or to publish. This option overrides the
+parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_subscribe Name of live stream to subscribe to. By default no value will be sent.
+It is only sent if the option is specified or if rtmp_live
+is set to live.
+
+rtmp_swfhash SHA256 hash of the decompressed SWF file (32 bytes).
+
+rtmp_swfsize Size of the decompressed SWF file, required for SWFVerification.
+
+rtmp_swfurl URL of the SWF player for the media. By default no value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_swfverify URL to player swf file, compute hash/size automatically.
+
+rtmp_tcurl URL of the target stream. Defaults to proto://host[:port]/app.
+
+
+
+
For example to read with ffplay a multimedia resource named
+"sample" from the application "vod" from an RTMP server "myserver":
+
+
ffplay rtmp://myserver/vod/sample
+
+
+
To publish to a password protected server, passing the playpath and
+app names separately:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f flv -rtmp_playpath some/long/path -rtmp_app long/app/name rtmp://username:password@myserver/
+
+
+
+
2.17 rtmpe# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) is used for
+streaming multimedia content within standard cryptographic primitives,
+consisting of Diffie-Hellman key exchange and HMACSHA256, generating
+a pair of RC4 keys.
+
+
+
2.18 rtmps# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol over a secure SSL connection.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPS) is used for streaming
+multimedia content across an encrypted connection.
+
+
+
2.19 rtmpt# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPT) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
2.20 rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPTE)
+is used for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
2.21 rtmpts# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS (RTMPTS) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTPS requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
2.22 libsmbclient# TOC
+
+
libsmbclient permits one to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
smb://[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in miliseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying
+low level operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+workgroup Set the workgroup used for making connections. By default workgroup is not specified.
+
+
+
+
For more information see: http://www.samba.org/ .
+
+
+
2.23 libssh# TOC
+
+
Secure File Transfer Protocol via libssh
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using SFTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
sftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+private_key Specify the path of the file containing private key to use during authorization.
+By default libssh searches for keys in the ~/.ssh/ directory.
+
+
+
+
Example: Play a file stored on remote server.
+
+
+
ffplay sftp://user:password@server_address:22/home/user/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
+
2.24 librtmp rtmp, rtmpe, rtmps, rtmpt, rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol and its variants supported through
+librtmp.
+
+
Requires the presence of the librtmp headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+"–enable-librtmp". If enabled this will replace the native RTMP
+protocol.
+
+
This protocol provides most client functions and a few server
+functions needed to support RTMP, RTMP tunneled in HTTP (RTMPT),
+encrypted RTMP (RTMPE), RTMP over SSL/TLS (RTMPS) and tunneled
+variants of these encrypted types (RTMPTE, RTMPTS).
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp_proto ://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ] options
+
+
+
where rtmp_proto is one of the strings "rtmp", "rtmpt", "rtmpe",
+"rtmps", "rtmpte", "rtmpts" corresponding to each RTMP variant, and
+server , port , app and playpath have the same
+meaning as specified for the RTMP native protocol.
+options contains a list of space-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
See the librtmp manual page (man 3 librtmp) for more information.
+
+
For example, to stream a file in real-time to an RTMP server using
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i myfile -f flv rtmp://myserver/live/mystream
+
+
+
To play the same stream using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay "rtmp://myserver/live/mystream live=1"
+
+
+
+
2.25 rtp# TOC
+
+
Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an RTP URL is:
+rtp://hostname [:port ][?option =val ...]
+
+
port specifies the RTP port to use.
+
+
The following URL options are supported:
+
+
+ttl=n Set the TTL (Time-To-Live) value (for multicast only).
+
+rtcpport=n Set the remote RTCP port to n .
+
+localrtpport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+localrtcpport=n ' Set the local RTCP port to n .
+
+pkt_size=n Set max packet size (in bytes) to n .
+
+connect=0|1 Do a connect() on the UDP socket (if set to 1) or not (if set
+to 0).
+
+sources=ip [,ip ] List allowed source IP addresses.
+
+block=ip [,ip ] List disallowed (blocked) source IP addresses.
+
+write_to_source=0|1 Send packets to the source address of the latest received packet (if
+set to 1) or to a default remote address (if set to 0).
+
+localport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+This is a deprecated option. Instead, localrtpport should be
+used.
+
+
+
+
Important notes:
+
+
+ If rtcpport is not set the RTCP port will be set to the RTP
+port value plus 1.
+
+ If localrtpport (the local RTP port) is not set any available
+port will be used for the local RTP and RTCP ports.
+
+ If localrtcpport (the local RTCP port) is not set it will be
+set to the local RTP port value plus 1.
+
+
+
+
2.26 rtsp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Streaming Protocol.
+
+
RTSP is not technically a protocol handler in libavformat, it is a demuxer
+and muxer. The demuxer supports both normal RTSP (with data transferred
+over RTP; this is used by e.g. Apple and Microsoft) and Real-RTSP (with
+data transferred over RDT).
+
+
The muxer can be used to send a stream using RTSP ANNOUNCE to a server
+supporting it (currently Darwin Streaming Server and Mischa Spiegelmock’s
+RTSP server ).
+
+
The required syntax for a RTSP url is:
+
+
rtsp://hostname [:port ]/path
+
+
+
Options can be set on the ffmpeg/ffplay command
+line, or set in code via AVOptions or in
+avformat_open_input.
+
+
The following options are supported.
+
+
+initial_pause Do not start playing the stream immediately if set to 1. Default value
+is 0.
+
+rtsp_transport Set RTSP transport protocols.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘udp ’
+Use UDP as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘tcp ’
+Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
+transport protocol.
+
+‘udp_multicast ’
+Use UDP multicast as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘http ’
+Use HTTP tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
+passing proxies.
+
+
+Multiple lower transport protocols may be specified, in that case they are
+tried one at a time (if the setup of one fails, the next one is tried).
+For the muxer, only the ‘tcp ’ and ‘udp ’ options are supported.
+
+rtsp_flags Set RTSP flags.
+
+The following values are accepted:
+
+‘filter_src ’
+Accept packets only from negotiated peer address and port.
+
‘listen ’
+Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
‘prefer_tcp ’
+Try TCP for RTP transport first, if TCP is available as RTSP RTP transport.
+
+
+Default value is ‘none ’.
+
+allowed_media_types Set media types to accept from the server.
+
+The following flags are accepted:
+
+‘video ’
+‘audio ’
+‘data ’
+
+
+By default it accepts all media types.
+
+min_port Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.
+
+max_port Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.
+
+timeout Set maximum timeout (in seconds) to wait for incoming connections.
+
+A value of -1 means infinite (default). This option implies the
+rtsp_flags set to ‘listen ’.
+
+reorder_queue_size Set number of packets to buffer for handling of reordered packets.
+
+stimeout Set socket TCP I/O timeout in microseconds.
+
+user-agent Override User-Agent header. If not specified, it defaults to the
+libavformat identifier string.
+
+
+
When receiving data over UDP, the demuxer tries to reorder received packets
+(since they may arrive out of order, or packets may get lost totally). This
+can be disabled by setting the maximum demuxing delay to zero (via
+the max_delay field of AVFormatContext).
+
+
When watching multi-bitrate Real-RTSP streams with ffplay, the
+streams to display can be chosen with -vst n and
+-ast n for video and audio respectively, and can be switched
+on the fly by pressing v and a.
+
+
+
2.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples all make use of the ffplay and
+ffmpeg tools.
+
+
+ Watch a stream over UDP, with a max reordering delay of 0.5 seconds:
+
+
ffplay -max_delay 500000 -rtsp_transport udp rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Watch a stream tunneled over HTTP:
+
+
ffplay -rtsp_transport http rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Send a stream in realtime to a RTSP server, for others to watch:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f rtsp -muxdelay 0.1 rtsp://server/live.sdp
+ Receive a stream in realtime:
+
+
ffmpeg -rtsp_flags listen -i rtsp://ownaddress/live.sdp output
+
+
+
+
2.27 sap# TOC
+
+
Session Announcement Protocol (RFC 2974). This is not technically a
+protocol handler in libavformat, it is a muxer and demuxer.
+It is used for signalling of RTP streams, by announcing the SDP for the
+streams regularly on a separate port.
+
+
+
2.27.1 Muxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the muxer is:
+
+
sap://destination [:port ][?options ]
+
+
+
The RTP packets are sent to destination on port port ,
+or to port 5004 if no port is specified.
+options is a &-separated list. The following options
+are supported:
+
+
+announce_addr=address Specify the destination IP address for sending the announcements to.
+If omitted, the announcements are sent to the commonly used SAP
+announcement multicast address 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net), or
+ff0e::2:7ffe if destination is an IPv6 address.
+
+announce_port=port Specify the port to send the announcements on, defaults to
+9875 if not specified.
+
+ttl=ttl Specify the time to live value for the announcements and RTP packets,
+defaults to 255.
+
+same_port=0|1 If set to 1, send all RTP streams on the same port pair. If zero (the
+default), all streams are sent on unique ports, with each stream on a
+port 2 numbers higher than the previous.
+VLC/Live555 requires this to be set to 1, to be able to receive the stream.
+The RTP stack in libavformat for receiving requires all streams to be sent
+on unique ports.
+
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To broadcast a stream on the local subnet, for watching in VLC:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255?same_port=1
+
+
+
Similarly, for watching in ffplay:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255
+
+
+
And for watching in ffplay, over IPv6:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://[ff0e::1:2:3:4]
+
+
+
+
2.27.2 Demuxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the demuxer is:
+
+
sap://[address ][:port ]
+
+
+
address is the multicast address to listen for announcements on,
+if omitted, the default 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net) is used. port
+is the port that is listened on, 9875 if omitted.
+
+
The demuxers listens for announcements on the given address and port.
+Once an announcement is received, it tries to receive that particular stream.
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on the normal SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on one the default IPv6 SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
ffplay sap://[ff0e::2:7ffe]
+
+
+
+
2.28 sctp# TOC
+
+
Stream Control Transmission Protocol.
+
+
The accepted URL syntax is:
+
+
sctp://host :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The protocol accepts the following options:
+
+listen If set to any value, listen for an incoming connection. Outgoing connection is done by default.
+
+max_streams Set the maximum number of streams. By default no limit is set.
+
+
+
+
2.29 srtp# TOC
+
+
Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+srtp_in_suite srtp_out_suite Select input and output encoding suites.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+
+
+srtp_in_params srtp_out_params Set input and output encoding parameters, which are expressed by a
+base64-encoded representation of a binary block. The first 16 bytes of
+this binary block are used as master key, the following 14 bytes are
+used as master salt.
+
+
+
+
2.30 subfile# TOC
+
+
Virtually extract a segment of a file or another stream.
+The underlying stream must be seekable.
+
+
Accepted options:
+
+start Start offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
end End offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Extract a chapter from a DVD VOB file (start and end sectors obtained
+externally and multiplied by 2048):
+
+
subfile,,start,153391104,end,268142592,,:/media/dvd/VIDEO_TS/VTS_08_1.VOB
+
+
+
Play an AVI file directly from a TAR archive:
+subfile,,start,183241728,end,366490624,,:archive.tar
+
+
+
2.31 tcp# TOC
+
+
Transmission Control Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for a TCP url is:
+
+
tcp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+listen=1|0 Listen for an incoming connection. Default value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+listen_timeout=microseconds Set listen timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+
+
The following example shows how to setup a listening TCP connection
+with ffmpeg, which is then accessed with ffplay:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tcp://hostname :port ?listen
+ffplay tcp://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
2.32 tls# TOC
+
+
Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
+
+
The required syntax for a TLS/SSL url is:
+
+
tls://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+ca_file, cafile=filename A file containing certificate authority (CA) root certificates to treat
+as trusted. If the linked TLS library contains a default this might not
+need to be specified for verification to work, but not all libraries and
+setups have defaults built in.
+The file must be in OpenSSL PEM format.
+
+tls_verify=1|0 If enabled, try to verify the peer that we are communicating with.
+Note, if using OpenSSL, this currently only makes sure that the
+peer certificate is signed by one of the root certificates in the CA
+database, but it does not validate that the certificate actually
+matches the host name we are trying to connect to. (With GnuTLS,
+the host name is validated as well.)
+
+This is disabled by default since it requires a CA database to be
+provided by the caller in many cases.
+
+cert_file, cert=filename A file containing a certificate to use in the handshake with the peer.
+(When operating as server, in listen mode, this is more often required
+by the peer, while client certificates only are mandated in certain
+setups.)
+
+key_file, key=filename A file containing the private key for the certificate.
+
+listen=1|0 If enabled, listen for connections on the provided port, and assume
+the server role in the handshake instead of the client role.
+
+
+
+
Example command lines:
+
+
To create a TLS/SSL server that serves an input stream.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tls://hostname :port ?listen&cert=server.crt &key=server.key
+
+
+
To play back a stream from the TLS/SSL server using ffplay:
+
+
+
ffplay tls://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
2.33 udp# TOC
+
+
User Datagram Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an UDP URL is:
+
+
udp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form key =val .
+
+
In case threading is enabled on the system, a circular buffer is used
+to store the incoming data, which allows one to reduce loss of data due to
+UDP socket buffer overruns. The fifo_size and
+overrun_nonfatal options are related to this buffer.
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+buffer_size=size Set the UDP maximum socket buffer size in bytes. This is used to set either
+the receive or send buffer size, depending on what the socket is used for.
+Default is 64KB. See also fifo_size .
+
+localport=port Override the local UDP port to bind with.
+
+localaddr=addr Choose the local IP address. This is useful e.g. if sending multicast
+and the host has multiple interfaces, where the user can choose
+which interface to send on by specifying the IP address of that interface.
+
+pkt_size=size Set the size in bytes of UDP packets.
+
+reuse=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow reusing UDP sockets.
+
+ttl=ttl Set the time to live value (for multicast only).
+
+connect=1|0 Initialize the UDP socket with connect(). In this case, the
+destination address can’t be changed with ff_udp_set_remote_url later.
+If the destination address isn’t known at the start, this option can
+be specified in ff_udp_set_remote_url, too.
+This allows finding out the source address for the packets with getsockname,
+and makes writes return with AVERROR(ECONNREFUSED) if "destination
+unreachable" is received.
+For receiving, this gives the benefit of only receiving packets from
+the specified peer address/port.
+
+sources=address [,address ] Only receive packets sent to the multicast group from one of the
+specified sender IP addresses.
+
+block=address [,address ] Ignore packets sent to the multicast group from the specified
+sender IP addresses.
+
+fifo_size=units Set the UDP receiving circular buffer size, expressed as a number of
+packets with size of 188 bytes. If not specified defaults to 7*4096.
+
+overrun_nonfatal=1|0 Survive in case of UDP receiving circular buffer overrun. Default
+value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+broadcast=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow UDP broadcasting.
+
+Note that broadcasting may not work properly on networks having
+a broadcast storm protection.
+
+
+
+
2.33.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to stream over UDP to a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format udp://hostname :port
+ Use ffmpeg to stream in mpegts format over UDP using 188
+sized UDP packets, using a large input buffer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f mpegts udp://hostname :port ?pkt_size=188&buffer_size=65535
+ Use ffmpeg to receive over UDP from a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i udp://[multicast-address ]:port ...
+
+
+
+
2.34 unix# TOC
+
+
Unix local socket
+
+
The required syntax for a Unix socket URL is:
+
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+timeout Timeout in ms.
+
listen Create the Unix socket in listening mode.
+
+
+
+
+
3 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavformat
+
+
+
+
4 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Resampler Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Resampler Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg resampler provides a high-level interface to the
+libswresample library audio resampling utilities. In particular it
+allows one to perform audio resampling, audio channel layout rematrixing,
+and convert audio format and packing layout.
+
+
+
+
2 Resampler Options# TOC
+
+
The audio resampler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, option =value for the aresample filter,
+by setting the value explicitly in the
+SwrContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API for
+programmatic use.
+
+
+ich, in_channel_count Set the number of input channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+in_channel_layout is set.
+
+och, out_channel_count Set the number of output channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+out_channel_layout is set.
+
+uch, used_channel_count Set the number of used input channels. Default value is 0. This option is
+only used for special remapping.
+
+isr, in_sample_rate Set the input sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+osr, out_sample_rate Set the output sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+isf, in_sample_fmt Specify the input sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+osf, out_sample_fmt Specify the output sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+tsf, internal_sample_fmt Set the internal sample format. Default value is none.
+This will automatically be chosen when it is not explicitly set.
+
+icl, in_channel_layout ocl, out_channel_layout Set the input/output channel layout.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+clev, center_mix_level Set the center mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must be
+in the interval [-32,32].
+
+slev, surround_mix_level Set the surround mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+lfe_mix_level Set LFE mix into non LFE level. It is used when there is a LFE input but no
+LFE output. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+rmvol, rematrix_volume Set rematrix volume. Default value is 1.0.
+
+rematrix_maxval Set maximum output value for rematrixing.
+This can be used to prevent clipping vs. preventing volumn reduction
+A value of 1.0 prevents cliping.
+
+flags, swr_flags Set flags used by the converter. Default value is 0.
+
+It supports the following individual flags:
+
+res force resampling, this flag forces resampling to be used even when the
+input and output sample rates match.
+
+
+dither_scale Set the dither scale. Default value is 1.
+
+dither_method Set dither method. Default value is 0.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘rectangular ’
+select rectangular dither
+
‘triangular ’
+select triangular dither
+
‘triangular_hp ’
+select triangular dither with high pass
+
‘lipshitz ’
+select lipshitz noise shaping dither
+
‘shibata ’
+select shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘low_shibata ’
+select low shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘high_shibata ’
+select high shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘f_weighted ’
+select f-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘modified_e_weighted ’
+select modified-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘improved_e_weighted ’
+select improved-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
+
+
+resampler Set resampling engine. Default value is swr.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘swr ’
+select the native SW Resampler; filter options precision and cheby are not
+applicable in this case.
+
‘soxr ’
+select the SoX Resampler (where available); compensation, and filter options
+filter_size, phase_shift, filter_type & kaiser_beta, are not applicable in this
+case.
+
+
+filter_size For swr only, set resampling filter size, default value is 32.
+
+phase_shift For swr only, set resampling phase shift, default value is 10, and must be in
+the interval [0,30].
+
+linear_interp Use Linear Interpolation if set to 1, default value is 0.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency (swr: 6dB point; soxr: 0dB point) ratio; must be a float
+value between 0 and 1. Default value is 0.97 with swr, and 0.91 with soxr
+(which, with a sample-rate of 44100, preserves the entire audio band to 20kHz).
+
+precision For soxr only, the precision in bits to which the resampled signal will be
+calculated. The default value of 20 (which, with suitable dithering, is
+appropriate for a destination bit-depth of 16) gives SoX’s ’High Quality’; a
+value of 28 gives SoX’s ’Very High Quality’.
+
+cheby For soxr only, selects passband rolloff none (Chebyshev) & higher-precision
+approximation for ’irrational’ ratios. Default value is 0.
+
+async For swr only, simple 1 parameter audio sync to timestamps using stretching,
+squeezing, filling and trimming. Setting this to 1 will enable filling and
+trimming, larger values represent the maximum amount in samples that the data
+may be stretched or squeezed for each second.
+Default value is 0, thus no compensation is applied to make the samples match
+the audio timestamps.
+
+first_pts For swr only, assume the first pts should be this value. The time unit is 1 / sample rate.
+This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
+assumption is made about the first frame’s expected pts, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative pts due to encoder delay.
+
+min_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger stretching/squeezing/filling or trimming of the
+data to make it match the timestamps. The default is that
+stretching/squeezing/filling and trimming is disabled
+(min_comp = FLT_MAX).
+
+min_hard_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger adding/dropping samples to make it match the
+timestamps. This option effectively is a threshold to select between
+hard (trim/fill) and soft (squeeze/stretch) compensation. Note that
+all compensation is by default disabled through min_comp .
+The default is 0.1.
+
+comp_duration For swr only, set duration (in seconds) over which data is stretched/squeezed
+to make it match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value,
+default value is 1.0.
+
+max_soft_comp For swr only, set maximum factor by which data is stretched/squeezed to make it
+match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value, default value
+is 0.
+
+matrix_encoding Select matrixed stereo encoding.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+select none
+
‘dolby ’
+select Dolby
+
‘dplii ’
+select Dolby Pro Logic II
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+filter_type For swr only, select resampling filter type. This only affects resampling
+operations.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘cubic ’
+select cubic
+
‘blackman_nuttall ’
+select Blackman Nuttall Windowed Sinc
+
‘kaiser ’
+select Kaiser Windowed Sinc
+
+
+kaiser_beta For swr only, set Kaiser Window Beta value. Must be an integer in the
+interval [2,16], default value is 9.
+
+output_sample_bits For swr only, set number of used output sample bits for dithering. Must be an integer in the
+interval [0,64], default value is 0, which means it’s not used.
+
+
+
+
+
+
3 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libswresample
+
+
+
+
4 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Scaler Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Scaler Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg rescaler provides a high-level interface to the libswscale
+library image conversion utilities. In particular it allows one to perform
+image rescaling and pixel format conversion.
+
+
+
+
2 Scaler Options# TOC
+
+
The video scaler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools. For programmatic use, they can be set explicitly in the
+SwsContext options or through the libavutil/opt.h API.
+
+
+
+
+sws_flags Set the scaler flags. This is also used to set the scaling
+algorithm. Only a single algorithm should be selected.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘fast_bilinear ’
+Select fast bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bilinear ’
+Select bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicubic ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm.
+
+‘experimental ’
+Select experimental scaling algorithm.
+
+‘neighbor ’
+Select nearest neighbor rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘area ’
+Select averaging area rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicublin ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm for the luma component, bilinear for
+chroma components.
+
+‘gauss ’
+Select Gaussian rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘sinc ’
+Select sinc rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘lanczos ’
+Select lanczos rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘spline ’
+Select natural bicubic spline rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘print_info ’
+Enable printing/debug logging.
+
+‘accurate_rnd ’
+Enable accurate rounding.
+
+‘full_chroma_int ’
+Enable full chroma interpolation.
+
+‘full_chroma_inp ’
+Select full chroma input.
+
+‘bitexact ’
+Enable bitexact output.
+
+
+srcw Set source width.
+
+srch Set source height.
+
+dstw Set destination width.
+
+dsth Set destination height.
+
+src_format Set source pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+dst_format Set destination pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+src_range Select source range.
+
+dst_range Select destination range.
+
+param0, param1 Set scaling algorithm parameters. The specified values are specific of
+some scaling algorithms and ignored by others. The specified values
+are floating point number values.
+
+sws_dither Set the dithering algorithm. Accepts one of the following
+values. Default value is ‘auto ’.
+
+
+‘auto ’
+automatic choice
+
+‘none ’
+no dithering
+
+‘bayer ’
+bayer dither
+
+‘ed ’
+error diffusion dither
+
+‘a_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using addition
+
+‘x_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using xor (more random/less apparent patterning that
+a_dither).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libswscale
+
+
+
+
4 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ FFmpeg Utilities Documentation
+
+
+
+ FFmpeg Utilities Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
This document describes some generic features and utilities provided
+by the libavutil library.
+
+
+
+
2 Syntax# TOC
+
+
This section documents the syntax and formats employed by the FFmpeg
+libraries and tools.
+
+
+
2.1 Quoting and escaping# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg adopts the following quoting and escaping mechanism, unless
+explicitly specified. The following rules are applied:
+
+
+ ' and \ are special characters (respectively used for
+quoting and escaping). In addition to them, there might be other
+special characters depending on the specific syntax where the escaping
+and quoting are employed.
+
+ A special character is escaped by prefixing it with a ’\’.
+
+ All characters enclosed between ” are included literally in the
+parsed string. The quote character ' itself cannot be quoted,
+so you may need to close the quote and escape it.
+
+ Leading and trailing whitespaces, unless escaped or quoted, are
+removed from the parsed string.
+
+
+
Note that you may need to add a second level of escaping when using
+the command line or a script, which depends on the syntax of the
+adopted shell language.
+
+
The function av_get_token defined in
+libavutil/avstring.h can be used to parse a token quoted or
+escaped according to the rules defined above.
+
+
The tool tools/ffescape in the FFmpeg source tree can be used
+to automatically quote or escape a string in a script.
+
+
+
2.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Escape the string Crime d'Amour containing the ' special
+character:
+
+
+ The string above contains a quote, so the ' needs to be escaped
+when quoting it:
+
+
+ Include leading or trailing whitespaces using quoting:
+
+
' this string starts and ends with whitespaces '
+ Escaping and quoting can be mixed together:
+
+
' The string '\'string\'' is a string '
+ To include a literal \ you can use either escaping or quoting:
+
+
'c:\foo' can be written as c:\\foo
+
+
+
+
2.2 Date# TOC
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
[(YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD)[T|t| ]]((HH:MM:SS[.m...]]])|(HHMMSS[.m...]]]))[Z]
+now
+
+
+
If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+
+
Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+interpreted as UTC.
+If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+year-month-day.
+
+
+
2.3 Time duration# TOC
+
+
There are two accepted syntaxes for expressing time duration.
+
+
+
+
HH expresses the number of hours, MM the number of minutes
+for a maximum of 2 digits, and SS the number of seconds for a
+maximum of 2 digits. The m at the end expresses decimal value for
+SS .
+
+
or
+
+
+
+
S expresses the number of seconds, with the optional decimal part
+m .
+
+
In both expressions, the optional ‘- ’ indicates negative duration.
+
+
+
2.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples are all valid time duration:
+
+
+‘55 ’
+55 seconds
+
+‘12:03:45 ’
+12 hours, 03 minutes and 45 seconds
+
+‘23.189 ’
+23.189 seconds
+
+
+
+
2.4 Video size# TOC
+
Specify the size of the sourced video, it may be a string of the form
+width xheight , or the name of a size abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+720x480
+
‘pal ’
+720x576
+
‘qntsc ’
+352x240
+
‘qpal ’
+352x288
+
‘sntsc ’
+640x480
+
‘spal ’
+768x576
+
‘film ’
+352x240
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+352x240
+
‘sqcif ’
+128x96
+
‘qcif ’
+176x144
+
‘cif ’
+352x288
+
‘4cif ’
+704x576
+
‘16cif ’
+1408x1152
+
‘qqvga ’
+160x120
+
‘qvga ’
+320x240
+
‘vga ’
+640x480
+
‘svga ’
+800x600
+
‘xga ’
+1024x768
+
‘uxga ’
+1600x1200
+
‘qxga ’
+2048x1536
+
‘sxga ’
+1280x1024
+
‘qsxga ’
+2560x2048
+
‘hsxga ’
+5120x4096
+
‘wvga ’
+852x480
+
‘wxga ’
+1366x768
+
‘wsxga ’
+1600x1024
+
‘wuxga ’
+1920x1200
+
‘woxga ’
+2560x1600
+
‘wqsxga ’
+3200x2048
+
‘wquxga ’
+3840x2400
+
‘whsxga ’
+6400x4096
+
‘whuxga ’
+7680x4800
+
‘cga ’
+320x200
+
‘ega ’
+640x350
+
‘hd480 ’
+852x480
+
‘hd720 ’
+1280x720
+
‘hd1080 ’
+1920x1080
+
‘2k ’
+2048x1080
+
‘2kflat ’
+1998x1080
+
‘2kscope ’
+2048x858
+
‘4k ’
+4096x2160
+
‘4kflat ’
+3996x2160
+
‘4kscope ’
+4096x1716
+
‘nhd ’
+640x360
+
‘hqvga ’
+240x160
+
‘wqvga ’
+400x240
+
‘fwqvga ’
+432x240
+
‘hvga ’
+480x320
+
‘qhd ’
+960x540
+
+
+
+
2.5 Video rate# TOC
+
+
Specify the frame rate of a video, expressed as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a float
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘pal ’
+25/1
+
‘qntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘qpal ’
+25/1
+
‘sntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘spal ’
+25/1
+
‘film ’
+24/1
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+24000/1001
+
+
+
+
2.6 Ratio# TOC
+
+
A ratio can be expressed as an expression, or in the form
+numerator :denominator .
+
+
Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+want to exclude those values.
+
+
The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+
+
+
2.7 Color# TOC
+
+
It can be the name of a color as defined below (case insensitive match) or a
+[0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence, possibly followed by @ and a string
+representing the alpha component.
+
+
The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+represents the opacity value (‘0x00 ’ or ‘0.0 ’ means completely
+transparent, ‘0xff ’ or ‘1.0 ’ completely opaque). If the alpha
+component is not specified then ‘0xff ’ is assumed.
+
+
The string ‘random ’ will result in a random color.
+
+
The following names of colors are recognized:
+
+‘AliceBlue ’
+0xF0F8FF
+
‘AntiqueWhite ’
+0xFAEBD7
+
‘Aqua ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘Aquamarine ’
+0x7FFFD4
+
‘Azure ’
+0xF0FFFF
+
‘Beige ’
+0xF5F5DC
+
‘Bisque ’
+0xFFE4C4
+
‘Black ’
+0x000000
+
‘BlanchedAlmond ’
+0xFFEBCD
+
‘Blue ’
+0x0000FF
+
‘BlueViolet ’
+0x8A2BE2
+
‘Brown ’
+0xA52A2A
+
‘BurlyWood ’
+0xDEB887
+
‘CadetBlue ’
+0x5F9EA0
+
‘Chartreuse ’
+0x7FFF00
+
‘Chocolate ’
+0xD2691E
+
‘Coral ’
+0xFF7F50
+
‘CornflowerBlue ’
+0x6495ED
+
‘Cornsilk ’
+0xFFF8DC
+
‘Crimson ’
+0xDC143C
+
‘Cyan ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘DarkBlue ’
+0x00008B
+
‘DarkCyan ’
+0x008B8B
+
‘DarkGoldenRod ’
+0xB8860B
+
‘DarkGray ’
+0xA9A9A9
+
‘DarkGreen ’
+0x006400
+
‘DarkKhaki ’
+0xBDB76B
+
‘DarkMagenta ’
+0x8B008B
+
‘DarkOliveGreen ’
+0x556B2F
+
‘Darkorange ’
+0xFF8C00
+
‘DarkOrchid ’
+0x9932CC
+
‘DarkRed ’
+0x8B0000
+
‘DarkSalmon ’
+0xE9967A
+
‘DarkSeaGreen ’
+0x8FBC8F
+
‘DarkSlateBlue ’
+0x483D8B
+
‘DarkSlateGray ’
+0x2F4F4F
+
‘DarkTurquoise ’
+0x00CED1
+
‘DarkViolet ’
+0x9400D3
+
‘DeepPink ’
+0xFF1493
+
‘DeepSkyBlue ’
+0x00BFFF
+
‘DimGray ’
+0x696969
+
‘DodgerBlue ’
+0x1E90FF
+
‘FireBrick ’
+0xB22222
+
‘FloralWhite ’
+0xFFFAF0
+
‘ForestGreen ’
+0x228B22
+
‘Fuchsia ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Gainsboro ’
+0xDCDCDC
+
‘GhostWhite ’
+0xF8F8FF
+
‘Gold ’
+0xFFD700
+
‘GoldenRod ’
+0xDAA520
+
‘Gray ’
+0x808080
+
‘Green ’
+0x008000
+
‘GreenYellow ’
+0xADFF2F
+
‘HoneyDew ’
+0xF0FFF0
+
‘HotPink ’
+0xFF69B4
+
‘IndianRed ’
+0xCD5C5C
+
‘Indigo ’
+0x4B0082
+
‘Ivory ’
+0xFFFFF0
+
‘Khaki ’
+0xF0E68C
+
‘Lavender ’
+0xE6E6FA
+
‘LavenderBlush ’
+0xFFF0F5
+
‘LawnGreen ’
+0x7CFC00
+
‘LemonChiffon ’
+0xFFFACD
+
‘LightBlue ’
+0xADD8E6
+
‘LightCoral ’
+0xF08080
+
‘LightCyan ’
+0xE0FFFF
+
‘LightGoldenRodYellow ’
+0xFAFAD2
+
‘LightGreen ’
+0x90EE90
+
‘LightGrey ’
+0xD3D3D3
+
‘LightPink ’
+0xFFB6C1
+
‘LightSalmon ’
+0xFFA07A
+
‘LightSeaGreen ’
+0x20B2AA
+
‘LightSkyBlue ’
+0x87CEFA
+
‘LightSlateGray ’
+0x778899
+
‘LightSteelBlue ’
+0xB0C4DE
+
‘LightYellow ’
+0xFFFFE0
+
‘Lime ’
+0x00FF00
+
‘LimeGreen ’
+0x32CD32
+
‘Linen ’
+0xFAF0E6
+
‘Magenta ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Maroon ’
+0x800000
+
‘MediumAquaMarine ’
+0x66CDAA
+
‘MediumBlue ’
+0x0000CD
+
‘MediumOrchid ’
+0xBA55D3
+
‘MediumPurple ’
+0x9370D8
+
‘MediumSeaGreen ’
+0x3CB371
+
‘MediumSlateBlue ’
+0x7B68EE
+
‘MediumSpringGreen ’
+0x00FA9A
+
‘MediumTurquoise ’
+0x48D1CC
+
‘MediumVioletRed ’
+0xC71585
+
‘MidnightBlue ’
+0x191970
+
‘MintCream ’
+0xF5FFFA
+
‘MistyRose ’
+0xFFE4E1
+
‘Moccasin ’
+0xFFE4B5
+
‘NavajoWhite ’
+0xFFDEAD
+
‘Navy ’
+0x000080
+
‘OldLace ’
+0xFDF5E6
+
‘Olive ’
+0x808000
+
‘OliveDrab ’
+0x6B8E23
+
‘Orange ’
+0xFFA500
+
‘OrangeRed ’
+0xFF4500
+
‘Orchid ’
+0xDA70D6
+
‘PaleGoldenRod ’
+0xEEE8AA
+
‘PaleGreen ’
+0x98FB98
+
‘PaleTurquoise ’
+0xAFEEEE
+
‘PaleVioletRed ’
+0xD87093
+
‘PapayaWhip ’
+0xFFEFD5
+
‘PeachPuff ’
+0xFFDAB9
+
‘Peru ’
+0xCD853F
+
‘Pink ’
+0xFFC0CB
+
‘Plum ’
+0xDDA0DD
+
‘PowderBlue ’
+0xB0E0E6
+
‘Purple ’
+0x800080
+
‘Red ’
+0xFF0000
+
‘RosyBrown ’
+0xBC8F8F
+
‘RoyalBlue ’
+0x4169E1
+
‘SaddleBrown ’
+0x8B4513
+
‘Salmon ’
+0xFA8072
+
‘SandyBrown ’
+0xF4A460
+
‘SeaGreen ’
+0x2E8B57
+
‘SeaShell ’
+0xFFF5EE
+
‘Sienna ’
+0xA0522D
+
‘Silver ’
+0xC0C0C0
+
‘SkyBlue ’
+0x87CEEB
+
‘SlateBlue ’
+0x6A5ACD
+
‘SlateGray ’
+0x708090
+
‘Snow ’
+0xFFFAFA
+
‘SpringGreen ’
+0x00FF7F
+
‘SteelBlue ’
+0x4682B4
+
‘Tan ’
+0xD2B48C
+
‘Teal ’
+0x008080
+
‘Thistle ’
+0xD8BFD8
+
‘Tomato ’
+0xFF6347
+
‘Turquoise ’
+0x40E0D0
+
‘Violet ’
+0xEE82EE
+
‘Wheat ’
+0xF5DEB3
+
‘White ’
+0xFFFFFF
+
‘WhiteSmoke ’
+0xF5F5F5
+
‘Yellow ’
+0xFFFF00
+
‘YellowGreen ’
+0x9ACD32
+
+
+
+
2.8 Channel Layout# TOC
+
+
A channel layout specifies the spatial disposition of the channels in
+a multi-channel audio stream. To specify a channel layout, FFmpeg
+makes use of a special syntax.
+
+
Individual channels are identified by an id, as given by the table
+below:
+
+‘FL ’
+front left
+
‘FR ’
+front right
+
‘FC ’
+front center
+
‘LFE ’
+low frequency
+
‘BL ’
+back left
+
‘BR ’
+back right
+
‘FLC ’
+front left-of-center
+
‘FRC ’
+front right-of-center
+
‘BC ’
+back center
+
‘SL ’
+side left
+
‘SR ’
+side right
+
‘TC ’
+top center
+
‘TFL ’
+top front left
+
‘TFC ’
+top front center
+
‘TFR ’
+top front right
+
‘TBL ’
+top back left
+
‘TBC ’
+top back center
+
‘TBR ’
+top back right
+
‘DL ’
+downmix left
+
‘DR ’
+downmix right
+
‘WL ’
+wide left
+
‘WR ’
+wide right
+
‘SDL ’
+surround direct left
+
‘SDR ’
+surround direct right
+
‘LFE2 ’
+low frequency 2
+
+
+
Standard channel layout compositions can be specified by using the
+following identifiers:
+
+‘mono ’
+FC
+
‘stereo ’
+FL+FR
+
‘2.1 ’
+FL+FR+LFE
+
‘3.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC
+
‘3.0(back) ’
+FL+FR+BC
+
‘4.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC
+
‘quad ’
+FL+FR+BL+BR
+
‘quad(side) ’
+FL+FR+SL+SR
+
‘3.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE
+
‘5.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR
+
‘5.0(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+SL+SR
+
‘4.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC
+
‘5.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR
+
‘5.1(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+SL+SR
+
‘6.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘hexagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1(front) ’
+FL+FR+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FC+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.1(wide) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC
+
‘7.1(wide-side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘octagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR
+
‘downmix ’
+DL+DR
+
+
+
A custom channel layout can be specified as a sequence of terms, separated by
+’+’ or ’|’. Each term can be:
+
+ the name of a standard channel layout (e.g. ‘mono ’,
+‘stereo ’, ‘4.0 ’, ‘quad ’, ‘5.0 ’, etc.)
+
+ the name of a single channel (e.g. ‘FL ’, ‘FR ’, ‘FC ’, ‘LFE ’, etc.)
+
+ a number of channels, in decimal, optionally followed by ’c’, yielding
+the default channel layout for that number of channels (see the
+function av_get_default_channel_layout)
+
+ a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+AV_CH_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
Starting from libavutil version 53 the trailing character "c" to
+specify a number of channels will be required, while a channel layout
+mask could also be specified as a decimal number (if and only if not
+followed by "c").
+
+
See also the function av_get_channel_layout defined in
+libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
3 Expression Evaluation# TOC
+
+
When evaluating an arithmetic expression, FFmpeg uses an internal
+formula evaluator, implemented through the libavutil/eval.h
+interface.
+
+
An expression may contain unary, binary operators, constants, and
+functions.
+
+
Two expressions expr1 and expr2 can be combined to form
+another expression "expr1 ;expr2 ".
+expr1 and expr2 are evaluated in turn, and the new
+expression evaluates to the value of expr2 .
+
+
The following binary operators are available: +, -,
+*, /, ^.
+
+
The following unary operators are available: +, -.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+abs(x) Compute absolute value of x .
+
+acos(x) Compute arccosine of x .
+
+asin(x) Compute arcsine of x .
+
+atan(x) Compute arctangent of x .
+
+between(x, min, max) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to min and lesser than or
+equal to max , 0 otherwise.
+
+bitand(x, y) bitor(x, y) Compute bitwise and/or operation on x and y .
+
+The results of the evaluation of x and y are converted to
+integers before executing the bitwise operation.
+
+Note that both the conversion to integer and the conversion back to
+floating point can lose precision. Beware of unexpected results for
+large numbers (usually 2^53 and larger).
+
+ceil(expr) Round the value of expression expr upwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "ceil(1.5)" is "2.0".
+
+clip(x, min, max) Return the value of x clipped between min and max .
+
+cos(x) Compute cosine of x .
+
+cosh(x) Compute hyperbolic cosine of x .
+
+eq(x, y) Return 1 if x and y are equivalent, 0 otherwise.
+
+exp(x) Compute exponential of x (with base e, the Euler’s number).
+
+floor(expr) Round the value of expression expr downwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "floor(-1.5)" is "-2.0".
+
+gauss(x) Compute Gauss function of x , corresponding to
+exp(-x*x/2) / sqrt(2*PI).
+
+gcd(x, y) Return the greatest common divisor of x and y . If both x and
+y are 0 or either or both are less than zero then behavior is undefined.
+
+gt(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+gte(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+hypot(x, y) This function is similar to the C function with the same name; it returns
+"sqrt(x *x + y *y )", the length of the hypotenuse of a
+right triangle with sides of length x and y , or the distance of the
+point (x , y ) from the origin.
+
+if(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the result of
+the evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+if(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+ifnot(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the result of the
+evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+ifnot(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+isinf(x) Return 1.0 if x is +/-INFINITY, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+isnan(x) Return 1.0 if x is NAN, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+ld(var) Allow to load the value of the internal variable with number
+var , which was previously stored with st(var , expr ).
+The function returns the loaded value.
+
+log(x) Compute natural logarithm of x .
+
+lt(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+lte(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+max(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+min(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+mod(x, y) Compute the remainder of division of x by y .
+
+not(expr) Return 1.0 if expr is zero, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+pow(x, y) Compute the power of x elevated y , it is equivalent to
+"(x )^(y )".
+
+print(t) print(t, l) Print the value of expression t with loglevel l . If
+l is not specified then a default log level is used.
+Returns the value of the expression printed.
+
+Prints t with loglevel l
+
+random(x) Return a pseudo random value between 0.0 and 1.0. x is the index of the
+internal variable which will be used to save the seed/state.
+
+root(expr, max) Find an input value for which the function represented by expr
+with argument ld(0) is 0 in the interval 0..max .
+
+The expression in expr must denote a continuous function or the
+result is undefined.
+
+ld(0) is used to represent the function input value, which means
+that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times with
+various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(0). When the expression evaluates to 0 then the
+corresponding input value will be returned.
+
+sin(x) Compute sine of x .
+
+sinh(x) Compute hyperbolic sine of x .
+
+sqrt(expr) Compute the square root of expr . This is equivalent to
+"(expr )^.5".
+
+squish(x) Compute expression 1/(1 + exp(4*x)).
+
+st(var, expr) Allow to store the value of the expression expr in an internal
+variable. var specifies the number of the variable where to
+store the value, and it is a value ranging from 0 to 9. The function
+returns the value stored in the internal variable.
+Note, Variables are currently not shared between expressions.
+
+tan(x) Compute tangent of x .
+
+tanh(x) Compute hyperbolic tangent of x .
+
+taylor(expr, x) taylor(expr, x, id) Evaluate a Taylor series at x , given an expression representing
+the ld(id)-th derivative of a function at 0.
+
+When the series does not converge the result is undefined.
+
+ld(id) is used to represent the derivative order in expr ,
+which means that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times
+with various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(id). If id is not specified then 0 is assumed.
+
+Note, when you have the derivatives at y instead of 0,
+taylor(expr, x-y) can be used.
+
+time(0) Return the current (wallclock) time in seconds.
+
+trunc(expr) Round the value of expression expr towards zero to the nearest
+integer. For example, "trunc(-1.5)" is "-1.0".
+
+while(cond, expr) Evaluate expression expr while the expression cond is
+non-zero, and returns the value of the last expr evaluation, or
+NAN if cond was always false.
+
+
+
The following constants are available:
+
+PI area of the unit disc, approximately 3.14
+
E exp(1) (Euler’s number), approximately 2.718
+
PHI golden ratio (1+sqrt(5))/2, approximately 1.618
+
+
+
Assuming that an expression is considered "true" if it has a non-zero
+value, note that:
+
+
* works like AND
+
+
+ works like OR
+
+
For example the construct:
+
+
is equivalent to:
+
+
+
In your C code, you can extend the list of unary and binary functions,
+and define recognized constants, so that they are available for your
+expressions.
+
+
The evaluator also recognizes the International System unit prefixes.
+If ’i’ is appended after the prefix, binary prefixes are used, which
+are based on powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000.
+The ’B’ postfix multiplies the value by 8, and can be appended after a
+unit prefix or used alone. This allows using for example ’KB’, ’MiB’,
+’G’ and ’B’ as number postfix.
+
+
The list of available International System prefixes follows, with
+indication of the corresponding powers of 10 and of 2.
+
+y 10^-24 / 2^-80
+
z 10^-21 / 2^-70
+
a 10^-18 / 2^-60
+
f 10^-15 / 2^-50
+
p 10^-12 / 2^-40
+
n 10^-9 / 2^-30
+
u 10^-6 / 2^-20
+
m 10^-3 / 2^-10
+
c 10^-2
+
d 10^-1
+
h 10^2
+
k 10^3 / 2^10
+
K 10^3 / 2^10
+
M 10^6 / 2^20
+
G 10^9 / 2^30
+
T 10^12 / 2^40
+
P 10^15 / 2^40
+
E 10^18 / 2^50
+
Z 10^21 / 2^60
+
Y 10^24 / 2^70
+
+
+
+
+
4 OpenCL Options# TOC
+
+
When FFmpeg is configured with --enable-opencl, it is possible
+to set the options for the global OpenCL context.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+build_options Set build options used to compile the registered kernels.
+
+See reference "OpenCL Specification Version: 1.2 chapter 5.6.4".
+
+platform_idx Select the index of the platform to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list
+which can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+device_idx Select the index of the device used to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list which
+can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+
+
+
+
+
5 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+libavutil
+
+
+
+
6 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffmpeg Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffmpeg Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg [global_options ] {[input_file_options ] -i input_file } ... {[output_file_options ] output_file } ...
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg is a very fast video and audio converter that can also grab from
+a live audio/video source. It can also convert between arbitrary sample
+rates and resize video on the fly with a high quality polyphase filter.
+
+
ffmpeg reads from an arbitrary number of input "files" (which can be regular
+files, pipes, network streams, grabbing devices, etc.), specified by the
+-i option, and writes to an arbitrary number of output "files", which are
+specified by a plain output filename. Anything found on the command line which
+cannot be interpreted as an option is considered to be an output filename.
+
+
Each input or output file can, in principle, contain any number of streams of
+different types (video/audio/subtitle/attachment/data). The allowed number and/or
+types of streams may be limited by the container format. Selecting which
+streams from which inputs will go into which output is either done automatically
+or with the -map option (see the Stream selection chapter).
+
+
To refer to input files in options, you must use their indices (0-based). E.g.
+the first input file is 0, the second is 1, etc. Similarly, streams
+within a file are referred to by their indices. E.g. 2:3 refers to the
+fourth stream in the third input file. Also see the Stream specifiers chapter.
+
+
As a general rule, options are applied to the next specified
+file. Therefore, order is important, and you can have the same
+option on the command line multiple times. Each occurrence is
+then applied to the next input or output file.
+Exceptions from this rule are the global options (e.g. verbosity level),
+which should be specified first.
+
+
Do not mix input and output files – first specify all input files, then all
+output files. Also do not mix options which belong to different files. All
+options apply ONLY to the next input or output file and are reset between files.
+
+
+ To set the video bitrate of the output file to 64 kbit/s:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.avi -b:v 64k -bufsize 64k output.avi
+ To force the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.avi -r 24 output.avi
+ To force the frame rate of the input file (valid for raw formats only)
+to 1 fps and the frame rate of the output file to 24 fps:
+
+
ffmpeg -r 1 -i input.m2v -r 24 output.avi
+
+
+
The format option may be needed for raw input files.
+
+
+
+
3 Detailed description# TOC
+
+
The transcoding process in ffmpeg for each output can be described by
+the following diagram:
+
+
+
_______ ______________
+| | | |
+| input | demuxer | encoded data | decoder
+| file | ---------> | packets | -----+
+|_______| |______________| |
+ v
+ _________
+ | |
+ | decoded |
+ | frames |
+ |_________|
+ ________ ______________ |
+| | | | |
+| output | <-------- | encoded data | <----+
+| file | muxer | packets | encoder
+|________| |______________|
+
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg calls the libavformat library (containing demuxers) to read
+input files and get packets containing encoded data from them. When there are
+multiple input files, ffmpeg tries to keep them synchronized by
+tracking lowest timestamp on any active input stream.
+
+
Encoded packets are then passed to the decoder (unless streamcopy is selected
+for the stream, see further for a description). The decoder produces
+uncompressed frames (raw video/PCM audio/...) which can be processed further by
+filtering (see next section). After filtering, the frames are passed to the
+encoder, which encodes them and outputs encoded packets. Finally those are
+passed to the muxer, which writes the encoded packets to the output file.
+
+
+
3.1 Filtering# TOC
+
Before encoding, ffmpeg can process raw audio and video frames using
+filters from the libavfilter library. Several chained filters form a filter
+graph. ffmpeg distinguishes between two types of filtergraphs:
+simple and complex.
+
+
+
3.1.1 Simple filtergraphs# TOC
+
Simple filtergraphs are those that have exactly one input and output, both of
+the same type. In the above diagram they can be represented by simply inserting
+an additional step between decoding and encoding:
+
+
+
_________ ______________
+| | | |
+| decoded | | encoded data |
+| frames |\ _ | packets |
+|_________| \ /||______________|
+ \ __________ /
+ simple _\|| | / encoder
+ filtergraph | filtered |/
+ | frames |
+ |__________|
+
+
+
+
Simple filtergraphs are configured with the per-stream -filter option
+(with -vf and -af aliases for video and audio respectively).
+A simple filtergraph for video can look for example like this:
+
+
+
_______ _____________ _______ ________
+| | | | | | | |
+| input | ---> | deinterlace | ---> | scale | ---> | output |
+|_______| |_____________| |_______| |________|
+
+
+
+
Note that some filters change frame properties but not frame contents. E.g. the
+fps filter in the example above changes number of frames, but does not
+touch the frame contents. Another example is the setpts filter, which
+only sets timestamps and otherwise passes the frames unchanged.
+
+
+
3.1.2 Complex filtergraphs# TOC
+
Complex filtergraphs are those which cannot be described as simply a linear
+processing chain applied to one stream. This is the case, for example, when the graph has
+more than one input and/or output, or when output stream type is different from
+input. They can be represented with the following diagram:
+
+
+
_________
+| |
+| input 0 |\ __________
+|_________| \ | |
+ \ _________ /| output 0 |
+ \ | | / |__________|
+ _________ \| complex | /
+| | | |/
+| input 1 |---->| filter |\
+|_________| | | \ __________
+ /| graph | \ | |
+ / | | \| output 1 |
+ _________ / |_________| |__________|
+| | /
+| input 2 |/
+|_________|
+
+
+
+
Complex filtergraphs are configured with the -filter_complex option.
+Note that this option is global, since a complex filtergraph, by its nature,
+cannot be unambiguously associated with a single stream or file.
+
+
The -lavfi option is equivalent to -filter_complex .
+
+
A trivial example of a complex filtergraph is the overlay filter, which
+has two video inputs and one video output, containing one video overlaid on top
+of the other. Its audio counterpart is the amix filter.
+
+
+
3.2 Stream copy# TOC
+
Stream copy is a mode selected by supplying the copy parameter to the
+-codec option. It makes ffmpeg omit the decoding and encoding
+step for the specified stream, so it does only demuxing and muxing. It is useful
+for changing the container format or modifying container-level metadata. The
+diagram above will, in this case, simplify to this:
+
+
+
_______ ______________ ________
+| | | | | |
+| input | demuxer | encoded data | muxer | output |
+| file | ---------> | packets | -------> | file |
+|_______| |______________| |________|
+
+
+
+
Since there is no decoding or encoding, it is very fast and there is no quality
+loss. However, it might not work in some cases because of many factors. Applying
+filters is obviously also impossible, since filters work on uncompressed data.
+
+
+
+
4 Stream selection# TOC
+
+
By default, ffmpeg includes only one stream of each type (video, audio, subtitle)
+present in the input files and adds them to each output file. It picks the
+"best" of each based upon the following criteria: for video, it is the stream
+with the highest resolution, for audio, it is the stream with the most channels, for
+subtitles, it is the first subtitle stream. In the case where several streams of
+the same type rate equally, the stream with the lowest index is chosen.
+
+
You can disable some of those defaults by using the -vn/-an/-sn options. For
+full manual control, use the -map option, which disables the defaults just
+described.
+
+
+
+
5 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
5.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
5.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
5.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
5.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-f fmt (input/output ) Force input or output file format. The format is normally auto detected for input
+files and guessed from the file extension for output files, so this option is not
+needed in most cases.
+
+-i filename (input ) input file name
+
+-y (global ) Overwrite output files without asking.
+
+-n (global ) Do not overwrite output files, and exit immediately if a specified
+output file already exists.
+
+-c[:stream_specifier ] codec (input/output,per-stream ) -codec[:stream_specifier ] codec (input/output,per-stream ) Select an encoder (when used before an output file) or a decoder (when used
+before an input file) for one or more streams. codec is the name of a
+decoder/encoder or a special value copy (output only) to indicate that
+the stream is not to be re-encoded.
+
+For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c:v libx264 -c:a copy OUTPUT
+ encodes all video streams with libx264 and copies all audio streams.
+
+For each stream, the last matching c option is applied, so
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -c copy -c:v:1 libx264 -c:a:137 libvorbis OUTPUT
+ will copy all the streams except the second video, which will be encoded with
+libx264, and the 138th audio, which will be encoded with libvorbis.
+
+-t duration (input/output ) When used as an input option (before -i), limit the duration of
+data read from the input file.
+
+When used as an output option (before an output filename), stop writing the
+output after its duration reaches duration .
+
+duration may be a number in seconds, or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.
+
+-to position (output ) Stop writing the output at position .
+position may be a number in seconds, or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-to and -t are mutually exclusive and -t has priority.
+
+-fs limit_size (output ) Set the file size limit, expressed in bytes.
+
+-ss position (input/output ) When used as an input option (before -i), seeks in this input file to
+position . Note the in most formats it is not possible to seek exactly, so
+ffmpeg will seek to the closest seek point before position .
+When transcoding and -accurate_seek is enabled (the default), this
+extra segment between the seek point and position will be decoded and
+discarded. When doing stream copy or when -noaccurate_seek is used, it
+will be preserved.
+
+When used as an output option (before an output filename), decodes but discards
+input until the timestamps reach position .
+
+position may be either in seconds or in hh:mm:ss[.xxx] form.
+
+-itsoffset offset (input ) Set the input time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added to the timestamps of the input files. Specifying
+a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are delayed by
+the time duration specified in offset .
+
+-timestamp date (output ) Set the recording timestamp in the container.
+
+date must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Date section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+-metadata[:metadata_specifier] key =value (output,per-metadata ) Set a metadata key/value pair.
+
+An optional metadata_specifier may be given to set metadata
+on streams or chapters. See -map_metadata documentation for
+details.
+
+This option overrides metadata set with -map_metadata. It is
+also possible to delete metadata by using an empty value.
+
+For example, for setting the title in the output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -metadata title="my title" out.flv
+ To set the language of the first audio stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -metadata:s:a:0 language=eng OUTPUT
+ -target type (output ) Specify target file type (vcd, svcd, dvd, dv,
+dv50). type may be prefixed with pal-, ntsc- or
+film- to use the corresponding standard. All the format options
+(bitrate, codecs, buffer sizes) are then set automatically. You can just type:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd /tmp/vcd.mpg
+ Nevertheless you can specify additional options as long as you know
+they do not conflict with the standard, as in:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -target vcd -bf 2 /tmp/vcd.mpg
+ -dframes number (output ) Set the number of data frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:d.
+
+-frames[:stream_specifier ] framecount (output,per-stream ) Stop writing to the stream after framecount frames.
+
+-q[:stream_specifier ] q (output,per-stream ) -qscale[:stream_specifier ] q (output,per-stream ) Use fixed quality scale (VBR). The meaning of q /qscale is
+codec-dependent.
+If qscale is used without a stream_specifier then it applies only
+to the video stream, this is to maintain compatibility with previous behavior
+and as specifying the same codec specific value to 2 different codecs that is
+audio and video generally is not what is intended when no stream_specifier is
+used.
+
+-filter[:stream_specifier ] filtergraph (output,per-stream ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the stream, and must have a single input and a single output of the
+same type of the stream. In the filtergraph, the input is associated
+to the label in, and the output to the label out. See
+the ffmpeg-filters manual for more information about the filtergraph
+syntax.
+
+See the -filter_complex option if you
+want to create filtergraphs with multiple inputs and/or outputs.
+
+-filter_script[:stream_specifier ] filename (output,per-stream ) This option is similar to -filter , the only difference is that its
+argument is the name of the file from which a filtergraph description is to be
+read.
+
+-pre[:stream_specifier ] preset_name (output,per-stream ) Specify the preset for matching stream(s).
+
+-stats (global ) Print encoding progress/statistics. It is on by default, to explicitly
+disable it you need to specify -nostats.
+
+-progress url (global ) Send program-friendly progress information to url .
+
+Progress information is written approximately every second and at the end of
+the encoding process. It is made of "key =value " lines. key
+consists of only alphanumeric characters. The last key of a sequence of
+progress information is always "progress".
+
+-stdin Enable interaction on standard input. On by default unless standard input is
+used as an input. To explicitly disable interaction you need to specify
+-nostdin.
+
+Disabling interaction on standard input is useful, for example, if
+ffmpeg is in the background process group. Roughly the same result can
+be achieved with ffmpeg ... < /dev/null but it requires a
+shell.
+
+-debug_ts (global ) Print timestamp information. It is off by default. This option is
+mostly useful for testing and debugging purposes, and the output
+format may change from one version to another, so it should not be
+employed by portable scripts.
+
+See also the option -fdebug ts.
+
+-attach filename (output ) Add an attachment to the output file. This is supported by a few formats
+like Matroska for e.g. fonts used in rendering subtitles. Attachments
+are implemented as a specific type of stream, so this option will add
+a new stream to the file. It is then possible to use per-stream options
+on this stream in the usual way. Attachment streams created with this
+option will be created after all the other streams (i.e. those created
+with -map or automatic mappings).
+
+Note that for Matroska you also have to set the mimetype metadata tag:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -attach DejaVuSans.ttf -metadata:s:2 mimetype=application/x-truetype-font out.mkv
+ (assuming that the attachment stream will be third in the output file).
+
+-dump_attachment[:stream_specifier ] filename (input,per-stream ) Extract the matching attachment stream into a file named filename . If
+filename is empty, then the value of the filename metadata tag
+will be used.
+
+E.g. to extract the first attachment to a file named ’out.ttf’:
+
+
ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t:0 out.ttf -i INPUT
+ To extract all attachments to files determined by the filename tag:
+
+
ffmpeg -dump_attachment:t "" -i INPUT
+ Technical note – attachments are implemented as codec extradata, so this
+option can actually be used to extract extradata from any stream, not just
+attachments.
+
+
+
+
+
5.5 Video Options# TOC
+
+
+-vframes number (output ) Set the number of video frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:v.
+
-r[:stream_specifier ] fps (input/output,per-stream ) Set frame rate (Hz value, fraction or abbreviation).
+
+As an input option, ignore any timestamps stored in the file and instead
+generate timestamps assuming constant frame rate fps .
+This is not the same as the -framerate option used for some input formats
+like image2 or v4l2 (it used to be the same in older versions of FFmpeg).
+If in doubt use -framerate instead of the input option -r .
+
+As an output option, duplicate or drop input frames to achieve constant output
+frame rate fps .
+
+-s[:stream_specifier ] size (input/output,per-stream ) Set frame size.
+
+As an input option, this is a shortcut for the video_size private
+option, recognized by some demuxers for which the frame size is either not
+stored in the file or is configurable – e.g. raw video or video grabbers.
+
+As an output option, this inserts the scale video filter to the
+end of the corresponding filtergraph. Please use the scale filter
+directly to insert it at the beginning or some other place.
+
+The format is ‘wxh ’ (default - same as source).
+
+-aspect[:stream_specifier ] aspect (output,per-stream ) Set the video display aspect ratio specified by aspect .
+
+aspect can be a floating point number string, or a string of the
+form num :den , where num and den are the
+numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. For example "4:3",
+"16:9", "1.3333", and "1.7777" are valid argument values.
+
+If used together with -vcodec copy , it will affect the aspect ratio
+stored at container level, but not the aspect ratio stored in encoded
+frames, if it exists.
+
+-vn (output ) Disable video recording.
+
+-vcodec codec (output ) Set the video codec. This is an alias for -codec:v.
+
+-pass[:stream_specifier ] n (output,per-stream ) Select the pass number (1 or 2). It is used to do two-pass
+video encoding. The statistics of the video are recorded in the first
+pass into a log file (see also the option -passlogfile),
+and in the second pass that log file is used to generate the video
+at the exact requested bitrate.
+On pass 1, you may just deactivate audio and set output to null,
+examples for Windows and Unix:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y NUL
+ffmpeg -i foo.mov -c:v libxvid -pass 1 -an -f rawvideo -y /dev/null
+ -passlogfile[:stream_specifier ] prefix (output,per-stream ) Set two-pass log file name prefix to prefix , the default file name
+prefix is “ffmpeg2pass”. The complete file name will be
+PREFIX-N.log , where N is a number specific to the output
+stream
+
+-vf filtergraph (output ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+This is an alias for -filter:v, see the -filter option .
+
+
+
+
5.6 Advanced Video options# TOC
+
+
+-pix_fmt[:stream_specifier ] format (input/output,per-stream ) Set pixel format. Use -pix_fmts to show all the supported
+pixel formats.
+If the selected pixel format can not be selected, ffmpeg will print a
+warning and select the best pixel format supported by the encoder.
+If pix_fmt is prefixed by a +, ffmpeg will exit with an error
+if the requested pixel format can not be selected, and automatic conversions
+inside filtergraphs are disabled.
+If pix_fmt is a single +, ffmpeg selects the same pixel format
+as the input (or graph output) and automatic conversions are disabled.
+
+-sws_flags flags (input/output ) Set SwScaler flags.
+
-vdt n Discard threshold.
+
+-rc_override[:stream_specifier ] override (output,per-stream ) Rate control override for specific intervals, formatted as "int,int,int"
+list separated with slashes. Two first values are the beginning and
+end frame numbers, last one is quantizer to use if positive, or quality
+factor if negative.
+
+-ilme Force interlacing support in encoder (MPEG-2 and MPEG-4 only).
+Use this option if your input file is interlaced and you want
+to keep the interlaced format for minimum losses.
+The alternative is to deinterlace the input stream with
+-deinterlace , but deinterlacing introduces losses.
+
-psnr Calculate PSNR of compressed frames.
+
-vstats Dump video coding statistics to vstats_HHMMSS.log .
+
-vstats_file file Dump video coding statistics to file .
+
-top[:stream_specifier ] n (output,per-stream ) top=1/bottom=0/auto=-1 field first
+
-dc precision Intra_dc_precision.
+
-vtag fourcc/tag (output ) Force video tag/fourcc. This is an alias for -tag:v.
+
-qphist (global ) Show QP histogram
+
-vbsf bitstream_filter Deprecated see -bsf
+
+-force_key_frames[:stream_specifier ] time [,time ...] (output,per-stream ) -force_key_frames[:stream_specifier ] expr:expr (output,per-stream ) Force key frames at the specified timestamps, more precisely at the first
+frames after each specified time.
+
+If the argument is prefixed with expr:, the string expr
+is interpreted like an expression and is evaluated for each frame. A
+key frame is forced in case the evaluation is non-zero.
+
+If one of the times is "chapters[delta ]", it is expanded into
+the time of the beginning of all chapters in the file, shifted by
+delta , expressed as a time in seconds.
+This option can be useful to ensure that a seek point is present at a
+chapter mark or any other designated place in the output file.
+
+For example, to insert a key frame at 5 minutes, plus key frames 0.1 second
+before the beginning of every chapter:
+
+
-force_key_frames 0:05:00,chapters-0.1
+ The expression in expr can contain the following constants:
+
+n the number of current processed frame, starting from 0
+
n_forced the number of forced frames
+
prev_forced_n the number of the previous forced frame, it is NAN when no
+keyframe was forced yet
+
prev_forced_t the time of the previous forced frame, it is NAN when no
+keyframe was forced yet
+
t the time of the current processed frame
+
+
+For example to force a key frame every 5 seconds, you can specify:
+
+
-force_key_frames expr:gte(t,n_forced*5)
+ To force a key frame 5 seconds after the time of the last forced one,
+starting from second 13:
+
+
-force_key_frames expr:if(isnan(prev_forced_t),gte(t,13),gte(t,prev_forced_t+5))
+ Note that forcing too many keyframes is very harmful for the lookahead
+algorithms of certain encoders: using fixed-GOP options or similar
+would be more efficient.
+
+-copyinkf[:stream_specifier ] (output,per-stream ) When doing stream copy, copy also non-key frames found at the
+beginning.
+
+-hwaccel[:stream_specifier ] hwaccel (input,per-stream ) Use hardware acceleration to decode the matching stream(s). The allowed values
+of hwaccel are:
+
+none Do not use any hardware acceleration (the default).
+
+auto Automatically select the hardware acceleration method.
+
+vda Use Apple VDA hardware acceleration.
+
+vdpau Use VDPAU (Video Decode and Presentation API for Unix) hardware acceleration.
+
+dxva2 Use DXVA2 (DirectX Video Acceleration) hardware acceleration.
+
+
+This option has no effect if the selected hwaccel is not available or not
+supported by the chosen decoder.
+
+Note that most acceleration methods are intended for playback and will not be
+faster than software decoding on modern CPUs. Additionally, ffmpeg
+will usually need to copy the decoded frames from the GPU memory into the system
+memory, resulting in further performance loss. This option is thus mainly
+useful for testing.
+
+-hwaccel_device[:stream_specifier ] hwaccel_device (input,per-stream ) Select a device to use for hardware acceleration.
+
+This option only makes sense when the -hwaccel option is also
+specified. Its exact meaning depends on the specific hardware acceleration
+method chosen.
+
+
+vdpau For VDPAU, this option specifies the X11 display/screen to use. If this option
+is not specified, the value of the DISPLAY environment variable is used
+
+dxva2 For DXVA2, this option should contain the number of the display adapter to use.
+If this option is not specified, the default adapter is used.
+
+
+
+
+
5.7 Audio Options# TOC
+
+
+-aframes number (output ) Set the number of audio frames to output. This is an alias for -frames:a.
+
-ar[:stream_specifier ] freq (input/output,per-stream ) Set the audio sampling frequency. For output streams it is set by
+default to the frequency of the corresponding input stream. For input
+streams this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw
+demuxers and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.
+
-aq q (output ) Set the audio quality (codec-specific, VBR). This is an alias for -q:a.
+
-ac[:stream_specifier ] channels (input/output,per-stream ) Set the number of audio channels. For output streams it is set by
+default to the number of input audio channels. For input streams
+this option only makes sense for audio grabbing devices and raw demuxers
+and is mapped to the corresponding demuxer options.
+
-an (output ) Disable audio recording.
+
-acodec codec (input/output ) Set the audio codec. This is an alias for -codec:a.
+
-sample_fmt[:stream_specifier ] sample_fmt (output,per-stream ) Set the audio sample format. Use -sample_fmts to get a list
+of supported sample formats.
+
+-af filtergraph (output ) Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the stream.
+
+This is an alias for -filter:a, see the -filter option .
+
+
+
+
5.8 Advanced Audio options# TOC
+
+
+-atag fourcc/tag (output ) Force audio tag/fourcc. This is an alias for -tag:a.
+
-absf bitstream_filter Deprecated, see -bsf
+
-guess_layout_max channels (input,per-stream ) If some input channel layout is not known, try to guess only if it
+corresponds to at most the specified number of channels. For example, 2
+tells to ffmpeg to recognize 1 channel as mono and 2 channels as
+stereo but not 6 channels as 5.1. The default is to always try to guess. Use
+0 to disable all guessing.
+
+
+
+
5.9 Subtitle options# TOC
+
+
+-scodec codec (input/output ) Set the subtitle codec. This is an alias for -codec:s.
+
-sn (output ) Disable subtitle recording.
+
-sbsf bitstream_filter Deprecated, see -bsf
+
+
+
+
5.10 Advanced Subtitle options# TOC
+
+
+-fix_sub_duration Fix subtitles durations. For each subtitle, wait for the next packet in the
+same stream and adjust the duration of the first to avoid overlap. This is
+necessary with some subtitles codecs, especially DVB subtitles, because the
+duration in the original packet is only a rough estimate and the end is
+actually marked by an empty subtitle frame. Failing to use this option when
+necessary can result in exaggerated durations or muxing failures due to
+non-monotonic timestamps.
+
+Note that this option will delay the output of all data until the next
+subtitle packet is decoded: it may increase memory consumption and latency a
+lot.
+
+-canvas_size size Set the size of the canvas used to render subtitles.
+
+
+
+
+
5.11 Advanced options# TOC
+
+
+-map [-]input_file_id [:stream_specifier ][,sync_file_id [:stream_specifier ]] | [linklabel] (output )
+Designate one or more input streams as a source for the output file. Each input
+stream is identified by the input file index input_file_id and
+the input stream index input_stream_id within the input
+file. Both indices start at 0. If specified,
+sync_file_id :stream_specifier sets which input stream
+is used as a presentation sync reference.
+
+The first -map option on the command line specifies the
+source for output stream 0, the second -map option specifies
+the source for output stream 1, etc.
+
+A - character before the stream identifier creates a "negative" mapping.
+It disables matching streams from already created mappings.
+
+An alternative [linklabel] form will map outputs from complex filter
+graphs (see the -filter_complex option) to the output file.
+linklabel must correspond to a defined output link label in the graph.
+
+For example, to map ALL streams from the first input file to output
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 output
+ For example, if you have two audio streams in the first input file,
+these streams are identified by "0:0" and "0:1". You can use
+-map to select which streams to place in an output file. For
+example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:1 out.wav
+ will map the input stream in INPUT identified by "0:1" to
+the (single) output stream in out.wav .
+
+For example, to select the stream with index 2 from input file
+a.mov (specified by the identifier "0:2"), and stream with
+index 6 from input b.mov (specified by the identifier "1:6"),
+and copy them to the output file out.mov :
+
+
ffmpeg -i a.mov -i b.mov -c copy -map 0:2 -map 1:6 out.mov
+ To select all video and the third audio stream from an input file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:v -map 0:a:2 OUTPUT
+ To map all the streams except the second audio, use negative mappings
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -map -0:a:1 OUTPUT
+ To pick the English audio stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0:m:language:eng OUTPUT
+ Note that using this option disables the default mappings for this output file.
+
+
+-map_channel [input_file_id .stream_specifier .channel_id |-1][:output_file_id .stream_specifier ] Map an audio channel from a given input to an output. If
+output_file_id .stream_specifier is not set, the audio channel will
+be mapped on all the audio streams.
+
+Using "-1" instead of
+input_file_id .stream_specifier .channel_id will map a muted
+channel.
+
+For example, assuming INPUT is a stereo audio file, you can switch the
+two audio channels with the following command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel 0.0.1 -map_channel 0.0.0 OUTPUT
+ If you want to mute the first channel and keep the second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel -1 -map_channel 0.0.1 OUTPUT
+ The order of the "-map_channel" option specifies the order of the channels in
+the output stream. The output channel layout is guessed from the number of
+channels mapped (mono if one "-map_channel", stereo if two, etc.). Using "-ac"
+in combination of "-map_channel" makes the channel gain levels to be updated if
+input and output channel layouts don’t match (for instance two "-map_channel"
+options and "-ac 6").
+
+You can also extract each channel of an input to specific outputs; the following
+command extracts two channels of the INPUT audio stream (file 0, stream 0)
+to the respective OUTPUT_CH0 and OUTPUT_CH1 outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map_channel 0.0.0 OUTPUT_CH0 -map_channel 0.0.1 OUTPUT_CH1
+ The following example splits the channels of a stereo input into two separate
+streams, which are put into the same output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i stereo.wav -map 0:0 -map 0:0 -map_channel 0.0.0:0.0 -map_channel 0.0.1:0.1 -y out.ogg
+ Note that currently each output stream can only contain channels from a single
+input stream; you can’t for example use "-map_channel" to pick multiple input
+audio channels contained in different streams (from the same or different files)
+and merge them into a single output stream. It is therefore not currently
+possible, for example, to turn two separate mono streams into a single stereo
+stream. However splitting a stereo stream into two single channel mono streams
+is possible.
+
+If you need this feature, a possible workaround is to use the amerge
+filter. For example, if you need to merge a media (here input.mkv ) with 2
+mono audio streams into one single stereo channel audio stream (and keep the
+video stream), you can use the following command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1] [0:2] amerge" -c:a pcm_s16le -c:v copy output.mkv
+ -map_metadata[:metadata_spec_out ] infile [:metadata_spec_in ] (output,per-metadata ) Set metadata information of the next output file from infile . Note that
+those are file indices (zero-based), not filenames.
+Optional metadata_spec_in/out parameters specify, which metadata to copy.
+A metadata specifier can have the following forms:
+
+g global metadata, i.e. metadata that applies to the whole file
+
+s [:stream_spec ]per-stream metadata. stream_spec is a stream specifier as described
+in the Stream specifiers chapter. In an input metadata specifier, the first
+matching stream is copied from. In an output metadata specifier, all matching
+streams are copied to.
+
+c :chapter_index per-chapter metadata. chapter_index is the zero-based chapter index.
+
+p :program_index per-program metadata. program_index is the zero-based program index.
+
+If metadata specifier is omitted, it defaults to global.
+
+By default, global metadata is copied from the first input file,
+per-stream and per-chapter metadata is copied along with streams/chapters. These
+default mappings are disabled by creating any mapping of the relevant type. A negative
+file index can be used to create a dummy mapping that just disables automatic copying.
+
+For example to copy metadata from the first stream of the input file to global metadata
+of the output file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.ogg -map_metadata 0:s:0 out.mp3
+ To do the reverse, i.e. copy global metadata to all audio streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mkv -map_metadata:s:a 0:g out.mkv
+ Note that simple 0 would work as well in this example, since global
+metadata is assumed by default.
+
+-map_chapters input_file_index (output ) Copy chapters from input file with index input_file_index to the next
+output file. If no chapter mapping is specified, then chapters are copied from
+the first input file with at least one chapter. Use a negative file index to
+disable any chapter copying.
+
+-benchmark (global ) Show benchmarking information at the end of an encode.
+Shows CPU time used and maximum memory consumption.
+Maximum memory consumption is not supported on all systems,
+it will usually display as 0 if not supported.
+
-benchmark_all (global ) Show benchmarking information during the encode.
+Shows CPU time used in various steps (audio/video encode/decode).
+
-timelimit duration (global ) Exit after ffmpeg has been running for duration seconds.
+
-dump (global ) Dump each input packet to stderr.
+
-hex (global ) When dumping packets, also dump the payload.
+
-re (input ) Read input at native frame rate. Mainly used to simulate a grab device.
+or live input stream (e.g. when reading from a file). Should not be used
+with actual grab devices or live input streams (where it can cause packet
+loss).
+By default ffmpeg attempts to read the input(s) as fast as possible.
+This option will slow down the reading of the input(s) to the native frame rate
+of the input(s). It is useful for real-time output (e.g. live streaming).
+
-loop_input Loop over the input stream. Currently it works only for image
+streams. This option is used for automatic FFserver testing.
+This option is deprecated, use -loop 1.
+
-loop_output number_of_times Repeatedly loop output for formats that support looping such as animated GIF
+(0 will loop the output infinitely).
+This option is deprecated, use -loop.
+
-vsync parameter Video sync method.
+For compatibility reasons old values can be specified as numbers.
+Newly added values will have to be specified as strings always.
+
+
+0, passthrough Each frame is passed with its timestamp from the demuxer to the muxer.
+
1, cfr Frames will be duplicated and dropped to achieve exactly the requested
+constant frame rate.
+
2, vfr Frames are passed through with their timestamp or dropped so as to
+prevent 2 frames from having the same timestamp.
+
drop As passthrough but destroys all timestamps, making the muxer generate
+fresh timestamps based on frame-rate.
+
-1, auto Chooses between 1 and 2 depending on muxer capabilities. This is the
+default method.
+
+
+Note that the timestamps may be further modified by the muxer, after this.
+For example, in the case that the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled.
+
+With -map you can select from which stream the timestamps should be
+taken. You can leave either video or audio unchanged and sync the
+remaining stream(s) to the unchanged one.
+
+-async samples_per_second Audio sync method. "Stretches/squeezes" the audio stream to match the timestamps,
+the parameter is the maximum samples per second by which the audio is changed.
+-async 1 is a special case where only the start of the audio stream is corrected
+without any later correction.
+
+Note that the timestamps may be further modified by the muxer, after this.
+For example, in the case that the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled.
+
+This option has been deprecated. Use the aresample audio filter instead.
+
+-copyts Do not process input timestamps, but keep their values without trying
+to sanitize them. In particular, do not remove the initial start time
+offset value.
+
+Note that, depending on the vsync option or on specific muxer
+processing (e.g. in case the format option avoid_negative_ts
+is enabled) the output timestamps may mismatch with the input
+timestamps even when this option is selected.
+
+-start_at_zero When used with copyts , shift input timestamps so they start at zero.
+
+This means that using e.g. -ss 50 will make output timestamps start at
+50 seconds, regardless of what timestamp the input file started at.
+
+-copytb mode Specify how to set the encoder timebase when stream copying. mode is an
+integer numeric value, and can assume one of the following values:
+
+
+1 Use the demuxer timebase.
+
+The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
+demuxer. This is sometimes required to avoid non monotonically increasing
+timestamps when copying video streams with variable frame rate.
+
+0 Use the decoder timebase.
+
+The time base is copied to the output encoder from the corresponding input
+decoder.
+
+-1 Try to make the choice automatically, in order to generate a sane output.
+
+
+Default value is -1.
+
+-shortest (output ) Finish encoding when the shortest input stream ends.
+
-dts_delta_threshold Timestamp discontinuity delta threshold.
+
-muxdelay seconds (input ) Set the maximum demux-decode delay.
+
-muxpreload seconds (input ) Set the initial demux-decode delay.
+
-streamid output-stream-index :new-value (output ) Assign a new stream-id value to an output stream. This option should be
+specified prior to the output filename to which it applies.
+For the situation where multiple output files exist, a streamid
+may be reassigned to a different value.
+
+For example, to set the stream 0 PID to 33 and the stream 1 PID to 36 for
+an output mpegts file:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -streamid 0:33 -streamid 1:36 out.ts
+ -bsf[:stream_specifier ] bitstream_filters (output,per-stream ) Set bitstream filters for matching streams. bitstream_filters is
+a comma-separated list of bitstream filters. Use the -bsfs option
+to get the list of bitstream filters.
+
+
ffmpeg -i h264.mp4 -c:v copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb -an out.h264
+
+
ffmpeg -i file.mov -an -vn -bsf:s mov2textsub -c:s copy -f rawvideo sub.txt
+ -tag[:stream_specifier ] codec_tag (input/output,per-stream ) Force a tag/fourcc for matching streams.
+
+-timecode hh :mm :ss SEPff Specify Timecode for writing. SEP is ’:’ for non drop timecode and ’;’
+(or ’.’) for drop.
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mpg -timecode 01:02:03.04 -r 30000/1001 -s ntsc output.mpg
+ -filter_complex filtergraph (global ) Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
+outputs. For simple graphs – those with one input and one output of the same
+type – see the -filter options. filtergraph is a description of
+the filtergraph, as described in the “Filtergraph syntax” section of the
+ffmpeg-filters manual.
+
+Input link labels must refer to input streams using the
+[file_index:stream_specifier] syntax (i.e. the same as -map
+uses). If stream_specifier matches multiple streams, the first one will be
+used. An unlabeled input will be connected to the first unused input stream of
+the matching type.
+
+Output link labels are referred to with -map . Unlabeled outputs are
+added to the first output file.
+
+Note that with this option it is possible to use only lavfi sources without
+normal input files.
+
+For example, to overlay an image over video
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex '[0:v][1:v]overlay[out]' -map
+'[out]' out.mkv
+ Here [0:v] refers to the first video stream in the first input file,
+which is linked to the first (main) input of the overlay filter. Similarly the
+first video stream in the second input is linked to the second (overlay) input
+of overlay.
+
+Assuming there is only one video stream in each input file, we can omit input
+labels, so the above is equivalent to
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay[out]' -map
+'[out]' out.mkv
+ Furthermore we can omit the output label and the single output from the filter
+graph will be added to the output file automatically, so we can simply write
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.mkv -i image.png -filter_complex 'overlay' out.mkv
+ To generate 5 seconds of pure red video using lavfi color source:
+
+
ffmpeg -filter_complex 'color=c=red' -t 5 out.mkv
+ -lavfi filtergraph (global ) Define a complex filtergraph, i.e. one with arbitrary number of inputs and/or
+outputs. Equivalent to -filter_complex .
+
+-filter_complex_script filename (global ) This option is similar to -filter_complex , the only difference is that
+its argument is the name of the file from which a complex filtergraph
+description is to be read.
+
+-accurate_seek (input ) This option enables or disables accurate seeking in input files with the
+-ss option. It is enabled by default, so seeking is accurate when
+transcoding. Use -noaccurate_seek to disable it, which may be useful
+e.g. when copying some streams and transcoding the others.
+
+-override_ffserver (global ) Overrides the input specifications from ffserver. Using this
+option you can map any input stream to ffserver and control
+many aspects of the encoding from ffmpeg. Without this
+option ffmpeg will transmit to ffserver what is
+requested by ffserver.
+
+The option is intended for cases where features are needed that cannot be
+specified to ffserver but can be to ffmpeg.
+
+-sdp_file file (global ) Print sdp information to file .
+This allows dumping sdp information when at least one output isn’t an
+rtp stream.
+
+-discard (input ) Allows discarding specific streams or frames of streams at the demuxer.
+Not all demuxers support this.
+
+
+none Discard no frame.
+
+default Default, which discards no frames.
+
+noref Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+bidir Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+nokey Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+all Discard all frames.
+
+
+
+
+
As a special exception, you can use a bitmap subtitle stream as input: it
+will be converted into a video with the same size as the largest video in
+the file, or 720x576 if no video is present. Note that this is an
+experimental and temporary solution. It will be removed once libavfilter has
+proper support for subtitles.
+
+
For example, to hardcode subtitles on top of a DVB-T recording stored in
+MPEG-TS format, delaying the subtitles by 1 second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.ts -filter_complex \
+ '[#0x2ef] setpts=PTS+1/TB [sub] ; [#0x2d0] [sub] overlay' \
+ -sn -map '#0x2dc' output.mkv
+
+
(0x2d0, 0x2dc and 0x2ef are the MPEG-TS PIDs of respectively the video,
+audio and subtitles streams; 0:0, 0:3 and 0:7 would have worked too)
+
+
+
5.12 Preset files# TOC
+
A preset file contains a sequence of option =value pairs,
+one for each line, specifying a sequence of options which would be
+awkward to specify on the command line. Lines starting with the hash
+(’#’) character are ignored and are used to provide comments. Check
+the presets directory in the FFmpeg source tree for examples.
+
+
There are two types of preset files: ffpreset and avpreset files.
+
+
+
5.12.1 ffpreset files# TOC
+
ffpreset files are specified with the vpre, apre,
+spre, and fpre options. The fpre option takes the
+filename of the preset instead of a preset name as input and can be
+used for any kind of codec. For the vpre, apre, and
+spre options, the options specified in a preset file are
+applied to the currently selected codec of the same type as the preset
+option.
+
+
The argument passed to the vpre, apre, and spre
+preset options identifies the preset file to use according to the
+following rules:
+
+
First ffmpeg searches for a file named arg .ffpreset in the
+directories $FFMPEG_DATADIR (if set), and $HOME/.ffmpeg , and in
+the datadir defined at configuration time (usually PREFIX/share/ffmpeg )
+or in a ffpresets folder along the executable on win32,
+in that order. For example, if the argument is libvpx-1080p, it will
+search for the file libvpx-1080p.ffpreset .
+
+
If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
+codec_name -arg .ffpreset in the above-mentioned
+directories, where codec_name is the name of the codec to which
+the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select
+the video codec with -vcodec libvpx and use -vpre 1080p,
+then it will search for the file libvpx-1080p.ffpreset .
+
+
+
5.12.2 avpreset files# TOC
+
avpreset files are specified with the pre option. They work similar to
+ffpreset files, but they only allow encoder- specific options. Therefore, an
+option =value pair specifying an encoder cannot be used.
+
+
When the pre option is specified, ffmpeg will look for files with the
+suffix .avpreset in the directories $AVCONV_DATADIR (if set), and
+$HOME/.avconv , and in the datadir defined at configuration time (usually
+PREFIX/share/ffmpeg ), in that order.
+
+
First ffmpeg searches for a file named codec_name -arg .avpreset in
+the above-mentioned directories, where codec_name is the name of the codec
+to which the preset file options will be applied. For example, if you select the
+video codec with -vcodec libvpx and use -pre 1080p, then it will
+search for the file libvpx-1080p.avpreset .
+
+
If no such file is found, then ffmpeg will search for a file named
+arg .avpreset in the same directories.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ For streaming at very low bitrates, use a low frame rate
+and a small GOP size. This is especially true for RealVideo where
+the Linux player does not seem to be very fast, so it can miss
+frames. An example is:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -g 3 -r 3 -t 10 -b:v 50k -s qcif -f rv10 /tmp/b.rm
+ The parameter ’q’ which is displayed while encoding is the current
+quantizer. The value 1 indicates that a very good quality could
+be achieved. The value 31 indicates the worst quality. If q=31 appears
+too often, it means that the encoder cannot compress enough to meet
+your bitrate. You must either increase the bitrate, decrease the
+frame rate or decrease the frame size.
+
+ If your computer is not fast enough, you can speed up the
+compression at the expense of the compression ratio. You can use
+’-me zero’ to speed up motion estimation, and ’-g 0’ to disable
+motion estimation completely (you have only I-frames, which means it
+is about as good as JPEG compression).
+
+ To have very low audio bitrates, reduce the sampling frequency
+(down to 22050 Hz for MPEG audio, 22050 or 11025 for AC-3).
+
+ To have a constant quality (but a variable bitrate), use the option
+’-qscale n’ when ’n’ is between 1 (excellent quality) and 31 (worst
+quality).
+
+
+
+
+
7 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
7.1 Video and Audio grabbing# TOC
+
+
If you specify the input format and device then ffmpeg can grab video
+and audio directly.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
Or with an ALSA audio source (mono input, card id 1) instead of OSS:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -ac 1 -i hw:1 -f video4linux2 -i /dev/video0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
Note that you must activate the right video source and channel before
+launching ffmpeg with any TV viewer such as
+xawtv by Gerd Knorr. You also
+have to set the audio recording levels correctly with a
+standard mixer.
+
+
+
7.2 X11 grabbing# TOC
+
+
Grab the X11 display with ffmpeg via
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as
+the DISPLAY environment variable.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -video_size cif -framerate 25 -i :0.0+10,20 /tmp/out.mpg
+
+
+
0.0 is display.screen number of your X11 server, same as the DISPLAY environment
+variable. 10 is the x-offset and 20 the y-offset for the grabbing.
+
+
+
7.3 Video and Audio file format conversion# TOC
+
+
Any supported file format and protocol can serve as input to ffmpeg:
+
+
Examples:
+
+ You can use YUV files as input:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/test%d.Y /tmp/out.mpg
+ It will use the files:
+
+
/tmp/test0.Y, /tmp/test0.U, /tmp/test0.V,
+/tmp/test1.Y, /tmp/test1.U, /tmp/test1.V, etc...
+ The Y files use twice the resolution of the U and V files. They are
+raw files, without header. They can be generated by all decent video
+decoders. You must specify the size of the image with the -s option
+if ffmpeg cannot guess it.
+
+ You can input from a raw YUV420P file:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/test.yuv /tmp/out.avi
+ test.yuv is a file containing raw YUV planar data. Each frame is composed
+of the Y plane followed by the U and V planes at half vertical and
+horizontal resolution.
+
+ You can output to a raw YUV420P file:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mydivx.avi hugefile.yuv
+ You can set several input files and output files:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -s 640x480 -i /tmp/a.yuv /tmp/a.mpg
+ Converts the audio file a.wav and the raw YUV video file a.yuv
+to MPEG file a.mpg.
+
+ You can also do audio and video conversions at the same time:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -ar 22050 /tmp/a.mp2
+ Converts a.wav to MPEG audio at 22050 Hz sample rate.
+
+ You can encode to several formats at the same time and define a
+mapping from input stream to output streams:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i /tmp/a.wav -map 0:a -b:a 64k /tmp/a.mp2 -map 0:a -b:a 128k /tmp/b.mp2
+ Converts a.wav to a.mp2 at 64 kbits and to b.mp2 at 128 kbits. ’-map
+file:index’ specifies which input stream is used for each output
+stream, in the order of the definition of output streams.
+
+ You can transcode decrypted VOBs:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i snatch_1.vob -f avi -c:v mpeg4 -b:v 800k -g 300 -bf 2 -c:a libmp3lame -b:a 128k snatch.avi
+ This is a typical DVD ripping example; the input is a VOB file, the
+output an AVI file with MPEG-4 video and MP3 audio. Note that in this
+command we use B-frames so the MPEG-4 stream is DivX5 compatible, and
+GOP size is 300 which means one intra frame every 10 seconds for 29.97fps
+input video. Furthermore, the audio stream is MP3-encoded so you need
+to enable LAME support by passing --enable-libmp3lame to configure.
+The mapping is particularly useful for DVD transcoding
+to get the desired audio language.
+
+NOTE: To see the supported input formats, use ffmpeg -formats.
+
+ You can extract images from a video, or create a video from many images:
+
+For extracting images from a video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i foo.avi -r 1 -s WxH -f image2 foo-%03d.jpeg
+ This will extract one video frame per second from the video and will
+output them in files named foo-001.jpeg , foo-002.jpeg ,
+etc. Images will be rescaled to fit the new WxH values.
+
+If you want to extract just a limited number of frames, you can use the
+above command in combination with the -vframes or -t option, or in
+combination with -ss to start extracting from a certain point in time.
+
+For creating a video from many images:
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -i foo-%03d.jpeg -r 12 -s WxH foo.avi
+ The syntax foo-%03d.jpeg specifies to use a decimal number
+composed of three digits padded with zeroes to express the sequence
+number. It is the same syntax supported by the C printf function, but
+only formats accepting a normal integer are suitable.
+
+When importing an image sequence, -i also supports expanding
+shell-like wildcard patterns (globbing) internally, by selecting the
+image2-specific -pattern_type glob option.
+
+For example, for creating a video from filenames matching the glob pattern
+foo-*.jpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f image2 -pattern_type glob -i 'foo-*.jpeg' -r 12 -s WxH foo.avi
+ You can put many streams of the same type in the output:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i test1.avi -i test2.avi -map 1:1 -map 1:0 -map 0:1 -map 0:0 -c copy -y test12.nut
+ The resulting output file test12.nut will contain the first four streams
+from the input files in reverse order.
+
+ To force CBR video output:
+
+
ffmpeg -i myfile.avi -b 4000k -minrate 4000k -maxrate 4000k -bufsize 1835k out.m2v
+ The four options lmin, lmax, mblmin and mblmax use ’lambda’ units,
+but you may use the QP2LAMBDA constant to easily convert from ’q’ units:
+
+
ffmpeg -i src.ext -lmax 21*QP2LAMBDA dst.ext
+
+
+
+
+
8 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg-all ,
+ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
9 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffplay Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffplay Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffplay [options ] [input_file ]
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
FFplay is a very simple and portable media player using the FFmpeg
+libraries and the SDL library. It is mostly used as a testbed for the
+various FFmpeg APIs.
+
+
+
3 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
3.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
3.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
3.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
3.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-x width Force displayed width.
+
-y height Force displayed height.
+
-s size Set frame size (WxH or abbreviation), needed for videos which do
+not contain a header with the frame size like raw YUV. This option
+has been deprecated in favor of private options, try -video_size.
+
-fs Start in fullscreen mode.
+
-an Disable audio.
+
-vn Disable video.
+
-sn Disable subtitles.
+
-ss pos Seek to a given position in seconds.
+
-t duration play <duration> seconds of audio/video
+
-bytes Seek by bytes.
+
-nodisp Disable graphical display.
+
-f fmt Force format.
+
-window_title title Set window title (default is the input filename).
+
-loop number Loops movie playback <number> times. 0 means forever.
+
-showmode mode Set the show mode to use.
+Available values for mode are:
+
+‘0, video ’
+show video
+
‘1, waves ’
+show audio waves
+
‘2, rdft ’
+show audio frequency band using RDFT ((Inverse) Real Discrete Fourier Transform)
+
+
+Default value is "video", if video is not present or cannot be played
+"rdft" is automatically selected.
+
+You can interactively cycle through the available show modes by
+pressing the key w .
+
+-vf filtergraph Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the video stream.
+
+filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the stream, and must have a single video input and a single video
+output. In the filtergraph, the input is associated to the label
+in, and the output to the label out. See the
+ffmpeg-filters manual for more information about the filtergraph
+syntax.
+
+You can specify this parameter multiple times and cycle through the specified
+filtergraphs along with the show modes by pressing the key w .
+
+-af filtergraph filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the input audio.
+Use the option "-filters" to show all the available filters (including
+sources and sinks).
+
+-i input_file Read input_file .
+
+
+
+
3.5 Advanced options# TOC
+
+-pix_fmt format Set pixel format.
+This option has been deprecated in favor of private options, try -pixel_format.
+
+-stats Print several playback statistics, in particular show the stream
+duration, the codec parameters, the current position in the stream and
+the audio/video synchronisation drift. It is on by default, to
+explicitly disable it you need to specify -nostats.
+
+-fast Non-spec-compliant optimizations.
+
-genpts Generate pts.
+
-sync type Set the master clock to audio (type=audio), video
+(type=video) or external (type=ext). Default is audio. The
+master clock is used to control audio-video synchronization. Most media
+players use audio as master clock, but in some cases (streaming or high
+quality broadcast) it is necessary to change that. This option is mainly
+used for debugging purposes.
+
-ast audio_stream_specifier Select the desired audio stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" audio stream is selected in the program of the
+already selected video stream.
+
-vst video_stream_specifier Select the desired video stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" video stream is selected.
+
-sst subtitle_stream_specifier Select the desired subtitle stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" subtitle stream is selected in the program of the
+already selected video or audio stream.
+
-autoexit Exit when video is done playing.
+
-exitonkeydown Exit if any key is pressed.
+
-exitonmousedown Exit if any mouse button is pressed.
+
+-codec:media_specifier codec_name Force a specific decoder implementation for the stream identified by
+media_specifier , which can assume the values a (audio),
+v (video), and s subtitle.
+
+-acodec codec_name Force a specific audio decoder.
+
+-vcodec codec_name Force a specific video decoder.
+
+-scodec codec_name Force a specific subtitle decoder.
+
+-autorotate Automatically rotate the video according to presentation metadata. Enabled by
+default, use -noautorotate to disable it.
+
+-framedrop Drop video frames if video is out of sync. Enabled by default if the master
+clock is not set to video. Use this option to enable frame dropping for all
+master clock sources, use -noframedrop to disable it.
+
+-infbuf Do not limit the input buffer size, read as much data as possible from the
+input as soon as possible. Enabled by default for realtime streams, where data
+may be dropped if not read in time. Use this option to enable infinite buffers
+for all inputs, use -noinfbuf to disable it.
+
+
+
+
+
3.6 While playing# TOC
+
+
+q, ESC Quit.
+
+f Toggle full screen.
+
+p, SPC Pause.
+
+a Cycle audio channel in the current program.
+
+v Cycle video channel.
+
+t Cycle subtitle channel in the current program.
+
+c Cycle program.
+
+w Cycle video filters or show modes.
+
+s Step to the next frame.
+
+Pause if the stream is not already paused, step to the next video
+frame, and pause.
+
+left/right Seek backward/forward 10 seconds.
+
+down/up Seek backward/forward 1 minute.
+
+page down/page up Seek to the previous/next chapter.
+or if there are no chapters
+Seek backward/forward 10 minutes.
+
+mouse click Seek to percentage in file corresponding to fraction of width.
+
+
+
+
+
+
4 Syntax# TOC
+
+
This section documents the syntax and formats employed by the FFmpeg
+libraries and tools.
+
+
+
4.1 Quoting and escaping# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg adopts the following quoting and escaping mechanism, unless
+explicitly specified. The following rules are applied:
+
+
+ ' and \ are special characters (respectively used for
+quoting and escaping). In addition to them, there might be other
+special characters depending on the specific syntax where the escaping
+and quoting are employed.
+
+ A special character is escaped by prefixing it with a ’\’.
+
+ All characters enclosed between ” are included literally in the
+parsed string. The quote character ' itself cannot be quoted,
+so you may need to close the quote and escape it.
+
+ Leading and trailing whitespaces, unless escaped or quoted, are
+removed from the parsed string.
+
+
+
Note that you may need to add a second level of escaping when using
+the command line or a script, which depends on the syntax of the
+adopted shell language.
+
+
The function av_get_token defined in
+libavutil/avstring.h can be used to parse a token quoted or
+escaped according to the rules defined above.
+
+
The tool tools/ffescape in the FFmpeg source tree can be used
+to automatically quote or escape a string in a script.
+
+
+
4.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Escape the string Crime d'Amour containing the ' special
+character:
+
+
+ The string above contains a quote, so the ' needs to be escaped
+when quoting it:
+
+
+ Include leading or trailing whitespaces using quoting:
+
+
' this string starts and ends with whitespaces '
+ Escaping and quoting can be mixed together:
+
+
' The string '\'string\'' is a string '
+ To include a literal \ you can use either escaping or quoting:
+
+
'c:\foo' can be written as c:\\foo
+
+
+
+
4.2 Date# TOC
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
[(YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD)[T|t| ]]((HH:MM:SS[.m...]]])|(HHMMSS[.m...]]]))[Z]
+now
+
+
+
If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+
+
Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+interpreted as UTC.
+If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+year-month-day.
+
+
+
4.3 Time duration# TOC
+
+
There are two accepted syntaxes for expressing time duration.
+
+
+
+
HH expresses the number of hours, MM the number of minutes
+for a maximum of 2 digits, and SS the number of seconds for a
+maximum of 2 digits. The m at the end expresses decimal value for
+SS .
+
+
or
+
+
+
+
S expresses the number of seconds, with the optional decimal part
+m .
+
+
In both expressions, the optional ‘- ’ indicates negative duration.
+
+
+
4.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples are all valid time duration:
+
+
+‘55 ’
+55 seconds
+
+‘12:03:45 ’
+12 hours, 03 minutes and 45 seconds
+
+‘23.189 ’
+23.189 seconds
+
+
+
+
4.4 Video size# TOC
+
Specify the size of the sourced video, it may be a string of the form
+width xheight , or the name of a size abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+720x480
+
‘pal ’
+720x576
+
‘qntsc ’
+352x240
+
‘qpal ’
+352x288
+
‘sntsc ’
+640x480
+
‘spal ’
+768x576
+
‘film ’
+352x240
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+352x240
+
‘sqcif ’
+128x96
+
‘qcif ’
+176x144
+
‘cif ’
+352x288
+
‘4cif ’
+704x576
+
‘16cif ’
+1408x1152
+
‘qqvga ’
+160x120
+
‘qvga ’
+320x240
+
‘vga ’
+640x480
+
‘svga ’
+800x600
+
‘xga ’
+1024x768
+
‘uxga ’
+1600x1200
+
‘qxga ’
+2048x1536
+
‘sxga ’
+1280x1024
+
‘qsxga ’
+2560x2048
+
‘hsxga ’
+5120x4096
+
‘wvga ’
+852x480
+
‘wxga ’
+1366x768
+
‘wsxga ’
+1600x1024
+
‘wuxga ’
+1920x1200
+
‘woxga ’
+2560x1600
+
‘wqsxga ’
+3200x2048
+
‘wquxga ’
+3840x2400
+
‘whsxga ’
+6400x4096
+
‘whuxga ’
+7680x4800
+
‘cga ’
+320x200
+
‘ega ’
+640x350
+
‘hd480 ’
+852x480
+
‘hd720 ’
+1280x720
+
‘hd1080 ’
+1920x1080
+
‘2k ’
+2048x1080
+
‘2kflat ’
+1998x1080
+
‘2kscope ’
+2048x858
+
‘4k ’
+4096x2160
+
‘4kflat ’
+3996x2160
+
‘4kscope ’
+4096x1716
+
‘nhd ’
+640x360
+
‘hqvga ’
+240x160
+
‘wqvga ’
+400x240
+
‘fwqvga ’
+432x240
+
‘hvga ’
+480x320
+
‘qhd ’
+960x540
+
+
+
+
4.5 Video rate# TOC
+
+
Specify the frame rate of a video, expressed as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a float
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘pal ’
+25/1
+
‘qntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘qpal ’
+25/1
+
‘sntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘spal ’
+25/1
+
‘film ’
+24/1
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+24000/1001
+
+
+
+
4.6 Ratio# TOC
+
+
A ratio can be expressed as an expression, or in the form
+numerator :denominator .
+
+
Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+want to exclude those values.
+
+
The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+
+
+
4.7 Color# TOC
+
+
It can be the name of a color as defined below (case insensitive match) or a
+[0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence, possibly followed by @ and a string
+representing the alpha component.
+
+
The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+represents the opacity value (‘0x00 ’ or ‘0.0 ’ means completely
+transparent, ‘0xff ’ or ‘1.0 ’ completely opaque). If the alpha
+component is not specified then ‘0xff ’ is assumed.
+
+
The string ‘random ’ will result in a random color.
+
+
The following names of colors are recognized:
+
+‘AliceBlue ’
+0xF0F8FF
+
‘AntiqueWhite ’
+0xFAEBD7
+
‘Aqua ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘Aquamarine ’
+0x7FFFD4
+
‘Azure ’
+0xF0FFFF
+
‘Beige ’
+0xF5F5DC
+
‘Bisque ’
+0xFFE4C4
+
‘Black ’
+0x000000
+
‘BlanchedAlmond ’
+0xFFEBCD
+
‘Blue ’
+0x0000FF
+
‘BlueViolet ’
+0x8A2BE2
+
‘Brown ’
+0xA52A2A
+
‘BurlyWood ’
+0xDEB887
+
‘CadetBlue ’
+0x5F9EA0
+
‘Chartreuse ’
+0x7FFF00
+
‘Chocolate ’
+0xD2691E
+
‘Coral ’
+0xFF7F50
+
‘CornflowerBlue ’
+0x6495ED
+
‘Cornsilk ’
+0xFFF8DC
+
‘Crimson ’
+0xDC143C
+
‘Cyan ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘DarkBlue ’
+0x00008B
+
‘DarkCyan ’
+0x008B8B
+
‘DarkGoldenRod ’
+0xB8860B
+
‘DarkGray ’
+0xA9A9A9
+
‘DarkGreen ’
+0x006400
+
‘DarkKhaki ’
+0xBDB76B
+
‘DarkMagenta ’
+0x8B008B
+
‘DarkOliveGreen ’
+0x556B2F
+
‘Darkorange ’
+0xFF8C00
+
‘DarkOrchid ’
+0x9932CC
+
‘DarkRed ’
+0x8B0000
+
‘DarkSalmon ’
+0xE9967A
+
‘DarkSeaGreen ’
+0x8FBC8F
+
‘DarkSlateBlue ’
+0x483D8B
+
‘DarkSlateGray ’
+0x2F4F4F
+
‘DarkTurquoise ’
+0x00CED1
+
‘DarkViolet ’
+0x9400D3
+
‘DeepPink ’
+0xFF1493
+
‘DeepSkyBlue ’
+0x00BFFF
+
‘DimGray ’
+0x696969
+
‘DodgerBlue ’
+0x1E90FF
+
‘FireBrick ’
+0xB22222
+
‘FloralWhite ’
+0xFFFAF0
+
‘ForestGreen ’
+0x228B22
+
‘Fuchsia ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Gainsboro ’
+0xDCDCDC
+
‘GhostWhite ’
+0xF8F8FF
+
‘Gold ’
+0xFFD700
+
‘GoldenRod ’
+0xDAA520
+
‘Gray ’
+0x808080
+
‘Green ’
+0x008000
+
‘GreenYellow ’
+0xADFF2F
+
‘HoneyDew ’
+0xF0FFF0
+
‘HotPink ’
+0xFF69B4
+
‘IndianRed ’
+0xCD5C5C
+
‘Indigo ’
+0x4B0082
+
‘Ivory ’
+0xFFFFF0
+
‘Khaki ’
+0xF0E68C
+
‘Lavender ’
+0xE6E6FA
+
‘LavenderBlush ’
+0xFFF0F5
+
‘LawnGreen ’
+0x7CFC00
+
‘LemonChiffon ’
+0xFFFACD
+
‘LightBlue ’
+0xADD8E6
+
‘LightCoral ’
+0xF08080
+
‘LightCyan ’
+0xE0FFFF
+
‘LightGoldenRodYellow ’
+0xFAFAD2
+
‘LightGreen ’
+0x90EE90
+
‘LightGrey ’
+0xD3D3D3
+
‘LightPink ’
+0xFFB6C1
+
‘LightSalmon ’
+0xFFA07A
+
‘LightSeaGreen ’
+0x20B2AA
+
‘LightSkyBlue ’
+0x87CEFA
+
‘LightSlateGray ’
+0x778899
+
‘LightSteelBlue ’
+0xB0C4DE
+
‘LightYellow ’
+0xFFFFE0
+
‘Lime ’
+0x00FF00
+
‘LimeGreen ’
+0x32CD32
+
‘Linen ’
+0xFAF0E6
+
‘Magenta ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Maroon ’
+0x800000
+
‘MediumAquaMarine ’
+0x66CDAA
+
‘MediumBlue ’
+0x0000CD
+
‘MediumOrchid ’
+0xBA55D3
+
‘MediumPurple ’
+0x9370D8
+
‘MediumSeaGreen ’
+0x3CB371
+
‘MediumSlateBlue ’
+0x7B68EE
+
‘MediumSpringGreen ’
+0x00FA9A
+
‘MediumTurquoise ’
+0x48D1CC
+
‘MediumVioletRed ’
+0xC71585
+
‘MidnightBlue ’
+0x191970
+
‘MintCream ’
+0xF5FFFA
+
‘MistyRose ’
+0xFFE4E1
+
‘Moccasin ’
+0xFFE4B5
+
‘NavajoWhite ’
+0xFFDEAD
+
‘Navy ’
+0x000080
+
‘OldLace ’
+0xFDF5E6
+
‘Olive ’
+0x808000
+
‘OliveDrab ’
+0x6B8E23
+
‘Orange ’
+0xFFA500
+
‘OrangeRed ’
+0xFF4500
+
‘Orchid ’
+0xDA70D6
+
‘PaleGoldenRod ’
+0xEEE8AA
+
‘PaleGreen ’
+0x98FB98
+
‘PaleTurquoise ’
+0xAFEEEE
+
‘PaleVioletRed ’
+0xD87093
+
‘PapayaWhip ’
+0xFFEFD5
+
‘PeachPuff ’
+0xFFDAB9
+
‘Peru ’
+0xCD853F
+
‘Pink ’
+0xFFC0CB
+
‘Plum ’
+0xDDA0DD
+
‘PowderBlue ’
+0xB0E0E6
+
‘Purple ’
+0x800080
+
‘Red ’
+0xFF0000
+
‘RosyBrown ’
+0xBC8F8F
+
‘RoyalBlue ’
+0x4169E1
+
‘SaddleBrown ’
+0x8B4513
+
‘Salmon ’
+0xFA8072
+
‘SandyBrown ’
+0xF4A460
+
‘SeaGreen ’
+0x2E8B57
+
‘SeaShell ’
+0xFFF5EE
+
‘Sienna ’
+0xA0522D
+
‘Silver ’
+0xC0C0C0
+
‘SkyBlue ’
+0x87CEEB
+
‘SlateBlue ’
+0x6A5ACD
+
‘SlateGray ’
+0x708090
+
‘Snow ’
+0xFFFAFA
+
‘SpringGreen ’
+0x00FF7F
+
‘SteelBlue ’
+0x4682B4
+
‘Tan ’
+0xD2B48C
+
‘Teal ’
+0x008080
+
‘Thistle ’
+0xD8BFD8
+
‘Tomato ’
+0xFF6347
+
‘Turquoise ’
+0x40E0D0
+
‘Violet ’
+0xEE82EE
+
‘Wheat ’
+0xF5DEB3
+
‘White ’
+0xFFFFFF
+
‘WhiteSmoke ’
+0xF5F5F5
+
‘Yellow ’
+0xFFFF00
+
‘YellowGreen ’
+0x9ACD32
+
+
+
+
4.8 Channel Layout# TOC
+
+
A channel layout specifies the spatial disposition of the channels in
+a multi-channel audio stream. To specify a channel layout, FFmpeg
+makes use of a special syntax.
+
+
Individual channels are identified by an id, as given by the table
+below:
+
+‘FL ’
+front left
+
‘FR ’
+front right
+
‘FC ’
+front center
+
‘LFE ’
+low frequency
+
‘BL ’
+back left
+
‘BR ’
+back right
+
‘FLC ’
+front left-of-center
+
‘FRC ’
+front right-of-center
+
‘BC ’
+back center
+
‘SL ’
+side left
+
‘SR ’
+side right
+
‘TC ’
+top center
+
‘TFL ’
+top front left
+
‘TFC ’
+top front center
+
‘TFR ’
+top front right
+
‘TBL ’
+top back left
+
‘TBC ’
+top back center
+
‘TBR ’
+top back right
+
‘DL ’
+downmix left
+
‘DR ’
+downmix right
+
‘WL ’
+wide left
+
‘WR ’
+wide right
+
‘SDL ’
+surround direct left
+
‘SDR ’
+surround direct right
+
‘LFE2 ’
+low frequency 2
+
+
+
Standard channel layout compositions can be specified by using the
+following identifiers:
+
+‘mono ’
+FC
+
‘stereo ’
+FL+FR
+
‘2.1 ’
+FL+FR+LFE
+
‘3.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC
+
‘3.0(back) ’
+FL+FR+BC
+
‘4.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC
+
‘quad ’
+FL+FR+BL+BR
+
‘quad(side) ’
+FL+FR+SL+SR
+
‘3.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE
+
‘5.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR
+
‘5.0(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+SL+SR
+
‘4.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC
+
‘5.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR
+
‘5.1(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+SL+SR
+
‘6.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘hexagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1(front) ’
+FL+FR+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FC+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.1(wide) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC
+
‘7.1(wide-side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘octagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR
+
‘downmix ’
+DL+DR
+
+
+
A custom channel layout can be specified as a sequence of terms, separated by
+’+’ or ’|’. Each term can be:
+
+ the name of a standard channel layout (e.g. ‘mono ’,
+‘stereo ’, ‘4.0 ’, ‘quad ’, ‘5.0 ’, etc.)
+
+ the name of a single channel (e.g. ‘FL ’, ‘FR ’, ‘FC ’, ‘LFE ’, etc.)
+
+ a number of channels, in decimal, optionally followed by ’c’, yielding
+the default channel layout for that number of channels (see the
+function av_get_default_channel_layout)
+
+ a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+AV_CH_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
Starting from libavutil version 53 the trailing character "c" to
+specify a number of channels will be required, while a channel layout
+mask could also be specified as a decimal number (if and only if not
+followed by "c").
+
+
See also the function av_get_channel_layout defined in
+libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
5 Expression Evaluation# TOC
+
+
When evaluating an arithmetic expression, FFmpeg uses an internal
+formula evaluator, implemented through the libavutil/eval.h
+interface.
+
+
An expression may contain unary, binary operators, constants, and
+functions.
+
+
Two expressions expr1 and expr2 can be combined to form
+another expression "expr1 ;expr2 ".
+expr1 and expr2 are evaluated in turn, and the new
+expression evaluates to the value of expr2 .
+
+
The following binary operators are available: +, -,
+*, /, ^.
+
+
The following unary operators are available: +, -.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+abs(x) Compute absolute value of x .
+
+acos(x) Compute arccosine of x .
+
+asin(x) Compute arcsine of x .
+
+atan(x) Compute arctangent of x .
+
+between(x, min, max) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to min and lesser than or
+equal to max , 0 otherwise.
+
+bitand(x, y) bitor(x, y) Compute bitwise and/or operation on x and y .
+
+The results of the evaluation of x and y are converted to
+integers before executing the bitwise operation.
+
+Note that both the conversion to integer and the conversion back to
+floating point can lose precision. Beware of unexpected results for
+large numbers (usually 2^53 and larger).
+
+ceil(expr) Round the value of expression expr upwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "ceil(1.5)" is "2.0".
+
+clip(x, min, max) Return the value of x clipped between min and max .
+
+cos(x) Compute cosine of x .
+
+cosh(x) Compute hyperbolic cosine of x .
+
+eq(x, y) Return 1 if x and y are equivalent, 0 otherwise.
+
+exp(x) Compute exponential of x (with base e, the Euler’s number).
+
+floor(expr) Round the value of expression expr downwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "floor(-1.5)" is "-2.0".
+
+gauss(x) Compute Gauss function of x , corresponding to
+exp(-x*x/2) / sqrt(2*PI).
+
+gcd(x, y) Return the greatest common divisor of x and y . If both x and
+y are 0 or either or both are less than zero then behavior is undefined.
+
+gt(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+gte(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+hypot(x, y) This function is similar to the C function with the same name; it returns
+"sqrt(x *x + y *y )", the length of the hypotenuse of a
+right triangle with sides of length x and y , or the distance of the
+point (x , y ) from the origin.
+
+if(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the result of
+the evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+if(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+ifnot(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the result of the
+evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+ifnot(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+isinf(x) Return 1.0 if x is +/-INFINITY, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+isnan(x) Return 1.0 if x is NAN, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+ld(var) Allow to load the value of the internal variable with number
+var , which was previously stored with st(var , expr ).
+The function returns the loaded value.
+
+log(x) Compute natural logarithm of x .
+
+lt(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+lte(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+max(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+min(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+mod(x, y) Compute the remainder of division of x by y .
+
+not(expr) Return 1.0 if expr is zero, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+pow(x, y) Compute the power of x elevated y , it is equivalent to
+"(x )^(y )".
+
+print(t) print(t, l) Print the value of expression t with loglevel l . If
+l is not specified then a default log level is used.
+Returns the value of the expression printed.
+
+Prints t with loglevel l
+
+random(x) Return a pseudo random value between 0.0 and 1.0. x is the index of the
+internal variable which will be used to save the seed/state.
+
+root(expr, max) Find an input value for which the function represented by expr
+with argument ld(0) is 0 in the interval 0..max .
+
+The expression in expr must denote a continuous function or the
+result is undefined.
+
+ld(0) is used to represent the function input value, which means
+that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times with
+various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(0). When the expression evaluates to 0 then the
+corresponding input value will be returned.
+
+sin(x) Compute sine of x .
+
+sinh(x) Compute hyperbolic sine of x .
+
+sqrt(expr) Compute the square root of expr . This is equivalent to
+"(expr )^.5".
+
+squish(x) Compute expression 1/(1 + exp(4*x)).
+
+st(var, expr) Allow to store the value of the expression expr in an internal
+variable. var specifies the number of the variable where to
+store the value, and it is a value ranging from 0 to 9. The function
+returns the value stored in the internal variable.
+Note, Variables are currently not shared between expressions.
+
+tan(x) Compute tangent of x .
+
+tanh(x) Compute hyperbolic tangent of x .
+
+taylor(expr, x) taylor(expr, x, id) Evaluate a Taylor series at x , given an expression representing
+the ld(id)-th derivative of a function at 0.
+
+When the series does not converge the result is undefined.
+
+ld(id) is used to represent the derivative order in expr ,
+which means that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times
+with various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(id). If id is not specified then 0 is assumed.
+
+Note, when you have the derivatives at y instead of 0,
+taylor(expr, x-y) can be used.
+
+time(0) Return the current (wallclock) time in seconds.
+
+trunc(expr) Round the value of expression expr towards zero to the nearest
+integer. For example, "trunc(-1.5)" is "-1.0".
+
+while(cond, expr) Evaluate expression expr while the expression cond is
+non-zero, and returns the value of the last expr evaluation, or
+NAN if cond was always false.
+
+
+
The following constants are available:
+
+PI area of the unit disc, approximately 3.14
+
E exp(1) (Euler’s number), approximately 2.718
+
PHI golden ratio (1+sqrt(5))/2, approximately 1.618
+
+
+
Assuming that an expression is considered "true" if it has a non-zero
+value, note that:
+
+
* works like AND
+
+
+ works like OR
+
+
For example the construct:
+
+
is equivalent to:
+
+
+
In your C code, you can extend the list of unary and binary functions,
+and define recognized constants, so that they are available for your
+expressions.
+
+
The evaluator also recognizes the International System unit prefixes.
+If ’i’ is appended after the prefix, binary prefixes are used, which
+are based on powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000.
+The ’B’ postfix multiplies the value by 8, and can be appended after a
+unit prefix or used alone. This allows using for example ’KB’, ’MiB’,
+’G’ and ’B’ as number postfix.
+
+
The list of available International System prefixes follows, with
+indication of the corresponding powers of 10 and of 2.
+
+y 10^-24 / 2^-80
+
z 10^-21 / 2^-70
+
a 10^-18 / 2^-60
+
f 10^-15 / 2^-50
+
p 10^-12 / 2^-40
+
n 10^-9 / 2^-30
+
u 10^-6 / 2^-20
+
m 10^-3 / 2^-10
+
c 10^-2
+
d 10^-1
+
h 10^2
+
k 10^3 / 2^10
+
K 10^3 / 2^10
+
M 10^6 / 2^20
+
G 10^9 / 2^30
+
T 10^12 / 2^40
+
P 10^15 / 2^40
+
E 10^18 / 2^50
+
Z 10^21 / 2^60
+
Y 10^24 / 2^70
+
+
+
+
+
6 OpenCL Options# TOC
+
+
When FFmpeg is configured with --enable-opencl, it is possible
+to set the options for the global OpenCL context.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+build_options Set build options used to compile the registered kernels.
+
+See reference "OpenCL Specification Version: 1.2 chapter 5.6.4".
+
+platform_idx Select the index of the platform to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list
+which can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+device_idx Select the index of the device used to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list which
+can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+
+
+
+
7 Codec Options# TOC
+
+
libavcodec provides some generic global options, which can be set on
+all the encoders and decoders. In addition each codec may support
+so-called private options, which are specific for a given codec.
+
+
Sometimes, a global option may only affect a specific kind of codec,
+and may be nonsensical or ignored by another, so you need to be aware
+of the meaning of the specified options. Also some options are
+meant only for decoding or encoding.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVCodecContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follow:
+
+
+b integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Default value is 200K.
+
+ab integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio bitrate (in bits/s). Default value is 128K.
+
+bt integer (encoding,video ) Set video bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). In 1-pass mode, bitrate
+tolerance specifies how far ratecontrol is willing to deviate from the
+target average bitrate value. This is not related to min/max
+bitrate. Lowering tolerance too much has an adverse effect on quality.
+
+flags flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Set generic flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock (mpeg4).
+
‘qpel ’
+Use 1/4 pel motion compensation.
+
‘loop ’
+Use loop filter.
+
‘qscale ’
+Use fixed qscale.
+
‘gmc ’
+Use gmc.
+
‘mv0 ’
+Always try a mb with mv=<0,0>.
+
‘input_preserved ’
+‘pass1 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+
‘pass2 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+
‘gray ’
+Only decode/encode grayscale.
+
‘emu_edge ’
+Do not draw edges.
+
‘psnr ’
+Set error[?] variables during encoding.
+
‘truncated ’
+‘naq ’
+Normalize adaptive quantization.
+
‘ildct ’
+Use interlaced DCT.
+
‘low_delay ’
+Force low delay.
+
‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data. (except (I)DCT).
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
‘aic ’
+Apply H263 advanced intra coding / mpeg4 ac prediction.
+
‘cbp ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘qprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘ilme ’
+Apply interlaced motion estimation.
+
‘cgop ’
+Use closed gop.
+
+
+me_method integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘zero ’
+zero motion estimation (fastest)
+
‘full ’
+full motion estimation (slowest)
+
‘epzs ’
+EPZS motion estimation (default)
+
‘esa ’
+esa motion estimation (alias for full)
+
‘tesa ’
+tesa motion estimation
+
‘dia ’
+dia motion estimation (alias for epzs)
+
‘log ’
+log motion estimation
+
‘phods ’
+phods motion estimation
+
‘x1 ’
+X1 motion estimation
+
‘hex ’
+hex motion estimation
+
‘umh ’
+umh motion estimation
+
‘iter ’
+iter motion estimation
+
+
+extradata_size integer Set extradata size.
+
+time_base rational number Set codec time base.
+
+It is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms of which
+frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content, timebase
+should be 1 / frame_rate and timestamp increments should be
+identically 1.
+
+g integer (encoding,video ) Set the group of picture size. Default value is 12.
+
+ar integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff integer (encoding,audio ) Set cutoff bandwidth.
+
+frame_size integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio frame size.
+
+Each submitted frame except the last must contain exactly frame_size
+samples per channel. May be 0 when the codec has
+CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, in that case the frame size is not
+restricted. It is set by some decoders to indicate constant frame
+size.
+
+frame_number integer Set the frame number.
+
+delay integer qcomp float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale compression (VBR). It is used as a constant
+in the ratecontrol equation. Recommended range for default rc_eq:
+0.0-1.0.
+
+qblur float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale blur (VBR).
+
+qmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+69, default value is 2.
+
+qmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+1024, default value is 31.
+
+qdiff integer (encoding,video ) Set max difference between the quantizer scale (VBR).
+
+bf integer (encoding,video ) Set max number of B frames between non-B-frames.
+
+Must be an integer between -1 and 16. 0 means that B-frames are
+disabled. If a value of -1 is used, it will choose an automatic value
+depending on the encoder.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+b_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set qp factor between P and B frames.
+
+rc_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set ratecontrol method.
+
+b_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set strategy to choose between I/P/B-frames.
+
+ps integer (encoding,video ) Set RTP payload size in bytes.
+
+mv_bits integer header_bits integer i_tex_bits integer p_tex_bits integer i_count integer p_count integer skip_count integer misc_bits integer frame_bits integer codec_tag integer bug flags (decoding,video ) Workaround not auto detected encoder bugs.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘autodetect ’
+‘old_msmpeg4 ’
+some old lavc generated msmpeg4v3 files (no autodetection)
+
‘xvid_ilace ’
+Xvid interlacing bug (autodetected if fourcc==XVIX)
+
‘ump4 ’
+(autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)
+
‘no_padding ’
+padding bug (autodetected)
+
‘amv ’
+‘ac_vlc ’
+illegal vlc bug (autodetected per fourcc)
+
‘qpel_chroma ’
+‘std_qpel ’
+old standard qpel (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘qpel_chroma2 ’
+‘direct_blocksize ’
+direct-qpel-blocksize bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘edge ’
+edge padding bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘hpel_chroma ’
+‘dc_clip ’
+‘ms ’
+Workaround various bugs in microsoft broken decoders.
+
‘trunc ’
+trancated frames
+
+
+lelim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for luminance (negative
+values also consider DC coefficient).
+
+celim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for chrominance (negative
+values also consider dc coefficient)
+
+strict integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) Specify how strictly to follow the standards.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘very ’
+strictly conform to a older more strict version of the spec or reference software
+
‘strict ’
+strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences
+
‘normal ’
+‘unofficial ’
+allow unofficial extensions
+
‘experimental ’
+allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
+(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
+Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
+decoding untrusted input.
+
+
+b_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and B frames.
+
+err_detect flags (decoding,audio,video ) Set error detection flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+verify embedded CRCs
+
‘bitstream ’
+detect bitstream specification deviations
+
‘buffer ’
+detect improper bitstream length
+
‘explode ’
+abort decoding on minor error detection
+
‘ignore_err ’
+ignore decoding errors, and continue decoding.
+This is useful if you want to analyze the content of a video and thus want
+everything to be decoded no matter what. This option will not result in a video
+that is pleasing to watch in case of errors.
+
‘careful ’
+consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+
‘compliant ’
+consider all spec non compliancies as errors
+
‘aggressive ’
+consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error
+
+
+has_b_frames integer block_align integer mpeg_quant integer (encoding,video ) Use MPEG quantizers instead of H.263.
+
+qsquish float (encoding,video ) How to keep quantizer between qmin and qmax (0 = clip, 1 = use
+differentiable function).
+
+rc_qmod_amp float (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_qmod_freq integer (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_override_count integer rc_eq string (encoding,video ) Set rate control equation. When computing the expression, besides the
+standard functions defined in the section ’Expression Evaluation’, the
+following functions are available: bits2qp(bits), qp2bits(qp). Also
+the following constants are available: iTex pTex tex mv fCode iCount
+mcVar var isI isP isB avgQP qComp avgIITex avgPITex avgPPTex avgBPTex
+avgTex.
+
+maxrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set max bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Requires bufsize to be set.
+
+minrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set min bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Most useful in setting up a CBR
+encode. It is of little use elsewise.
+
+bufsize integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits).
+
+rc_buf_aggressivity float (encoding,video ) Currently useless.
+
+i_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set QP factor between P and I frames.
+
+i_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and I frames.
+
+rc_init_cplx float (encoding,video ) Set initial complexity for 1-pass encoding.
+
+dct integer (encoding,video ) Set DCT algorithm.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+autoselect a good one (default)
+
‘fastint ’
+fast integer
+
‘int ’
+accurate integer
+
‘mmx ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘faan ’
+floating point AAN DCT
+
+
+lumi_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress bright areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+tcplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set temporal complexity masking.
+
+scplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set spatial complexity masking.
+
+p_mask float (encoding,video ) Set inter masking.
+
+dark_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress dark areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+idct integer (decoding/encoding,video ) Select IDCT implementation.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+‘int ’
+‘simple ’
+‘simplemmx ’
+‘simpleauto ’
+Automatically pick a IDCT compatible with the simple one
+
+‘arm ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘sh4 ’
+‘simplearm ’
+‘simplearmv5te ’
+‘simplearmv6 ’
+‘simpleneon ’
+‘simplealpha ’
+‘ipp ’
+‘xvidmmx ’
+‘faani ’
+floating point AAN IDCT
+
+
+slice_count integer ec flags (decoding,video ) Set error concealment strategy.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘guess_mvs ’
+iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)
+
‘deblock ’
+use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs
+
‘favor_inter ’
+favor predicting from the previous frame instead of the current
+
+
+bits_per_coded_sample integer pred integer (encoding,video ) Set prediction method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘left ’
+‘plane ’
+‘median ’
+
+
+aspect rational number (encoding,video ) Set sample aspect ratio.
+
+debug flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pict ’
+picture info
+
‘rc ’
+rate control
+
‘bitstream ’
+‘mb_type ’
+macroblock (MB) type
+
‘qp ’
+per-block quantization parameter (QP)
+
‘mv ’
+motion vector
+
‘dct_coeff ’
+‘skip ’
+‘startcode ’
+‘pts ’
+‘er ’
+error recognition
+
‘mmco ’
+memory management control operations (H.264)
+
‘bugs ’
+‘vis_qp ’
+visualize quantization parameter (QP), lower QP are tinted greener
+
‘vis_mb_type ’
+visualize block types
+
‘buffers ’
+picture buffer allocations
+
‘thread_ops ’
+threading operations
+
‘nomc ’
+skip motion compensation
+
+
+vismv integer (decoding,video ) Visualize motion vectors (MVs).
+
+This option is deprecated, see the codecview filter instead.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+cmp integer (encoding,video ) Set full pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+subcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+mbcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+ildctcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set interlaced dct compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation.
+
+last_pred integer (encoding,video ) Set amount of motion predictors from the previous frame.
+
+preme integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation.
+
+precmp integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+pre_dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation pre-pass.
+
+subq integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel motion estimation quality.
+
+dtg_active_format integer me_range integer (encoding,video ) Set limit motion vectors range (1023 for DivX player).
+
+ibias integer (encoding,video ) Set intra quant bias.
+
+pbias integer (encoding,video ) Set inter quant bias.
+
+color_table_id integer global_quality integer (encoding,audio,video ) coder integer (encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘vlc ’
+variable length coder / huffman coder
+
‘ac ’
+arithmetic coder
+
‘raw ’
+raw (no encoding)
+
‘rle ’
+run-length coder
+
‘deflate ’
+deflate-based coder
+
+
+
+context integer (encoding,video ) Set context model.
+
+slice_flags integer xvmc_acceleration integer mbd integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock decision algorithm (high quality mode).
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘simple ’
+use mbcmp (default)
+
‘bits ’
+use fewest bits
+
‘rd ’
+use best rate distortion
+
+
+stream_codec_tag integer sc_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set scene change threshold.
+
+lmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+lmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+nr integer (encoding,video ) Set noise reduction.
+
+rc_init_occupancy integer (encoding,video ) Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before
+decoding starts.
+
+flags2 flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘fast ’
+Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+
‘sgop ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘noout ’
+Skip bitstream encoding.
+
‘ignorecrop ’
+Ignore cropping information from sps.
+
‘local_header ’
+Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+
‘chunks ’
+Frame data might be split into multiple chunks.
+
‘showall ’
+Show all frames before the first keyframe.
+
‘skiprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘export_mvs ’
+Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS)
+for codecs that support it. See also doc/examples/export_mvs.c .
+
+
+
+error integer (encoding,video ) qns integer (encoding,video ) Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
+threads integer (decoding/encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+detect a good number of threads
+
+
+
+me_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation threshold.
+
+mb_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock threshold.
+
+dc integer (encoding,video ) Set intra_dc_precision.
+
+nssew integer (encoding,video ) Set nsse weight.
+
+skip_top integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+
+skip_bottom integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+
+profile integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+‘aac_main ’
+‘aac_low ’
+‘aac_ssr ’
+‘aac_ltp ’
+‘aac_he ’
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+‘aac_ld ’
+‘aac_eld ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_low ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_he ’
+‘mpeg4_sp ’
+‘mpeg4_core ’
+‘mpeg4_main ’
+‘mpeg4_asp ’
+‘dts ’
+‘dts_es ’
+‘dts_96_24 ’
+‘dts_hd_hra ’
+‘dts_hd_ma ’
+
+
+
+level integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+
+
+
+lowres integer (decoding,audio,video ) Decode at 1= 1/2, 2=1/4, 3=1/8 resolutions.
+
+skip_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip threshold.
+
+skip_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip factor.
+
+skip_exp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip exponent.
+Negative values behave identical to the corresponding positive ones, except
+that the score is normalized.
+Positive values exist primarily for compatibility reasons and are not so useful.
+
+skipcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+border_mask float (encoding,video ) Increase the quantizer for macroblocks close to borders.
+
+mblmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mblmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mepc integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation bitrate penalty compensation (1.0 = 256).
+
+skip_loop_filter integer (decoding,video ) skip_idct integer (decoding,video ) skip_frame integer (decoding,video )
+Make decoder discard processing depending on the frame type selected
+by the option value.
+
+skip_loop_filter skips frame loop filtering, skip_idct
+skips frame IDCT/dequantization, skip_frame skips decoding.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘none ’
+Discard no frame.
+
+‘default ’
+Discard useless frames like 0-sized frames.
+
+‘noref ’
+Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+‘bidir ’
+Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+‘nokey ’
+Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+‘all ’
+Discard all frames.
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+
+bidir_refine integer (encoding,video ) Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks.
+
+brd_scale integer (encoding,video ) Downscale frames for dynamic B-frame decision.
+
+keyint_min integer (encoding,video ) Set minimum interval between IDR-frames.
+
+refs integer (encoding,video ) Set reference frames to consider for motion compensation.
+
+chromaoffset integer (encoding,video ) Set chroma qp offset from luma.
+
+trellis integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.
+
+sc_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set value multiplied by qscale for each frame and added to
+scene_change_score.
+
+mv0_threshold integer (encoding,video ) b_sensitivity integer (encoding,video ) Adjust sensitivity of b_frame_strategy 1.
+
+compression_level integer (encoding,audio,video ) min_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) max_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) timecode_frame_start integer (encoding,video ) Set GOP timecode frame start number, in non drop frame format.
+
+request_channels integer (decoding,audio ) Set desired number of audio channels.
+
+bits_per_raw_sample integer channel_layout integer (decoding/encoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+request_channel_layout integer (decoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+rc_max_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) rc_min_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) ticks_per_frame integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) color_primaries integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_trc integer (decoding/encoding,video ) colorspace integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_range integer (decoding/encoding,video ) chroma_sample_location integer (decoding/encoding,video ) log_level_offset integer Set the log level offset.
+
+slices integer (encoding,video ) Number of slices, used in parallelized encoding.
+
+thread_type flags (decoding/encoding,video ) Select which multithreading methods to use.
+
+Use of ‘frame ’ will increase decoding delay by one frame per
+thread, so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use
+it.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘slice ’
+Decode more than one part of a single frame at once.
+
+Multithreading using slices works only when the video was encoded with
+slices.
+
+‘frame ’
+Decode more than one frame at once.
+
+
+Default value is ‘slice+frame ’.
+
+audio_service_type integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio service type.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ma ’
+Main Audio Service
+
‘ef ’
+Effects
+
‘vi ’
+Visually Impaired
+
‘hi ’
+Hearing Impaired
+
‘di ’
+Dialogue
+
‘co ’
+Commentary
+
‘em ’
+Emergency
+
‘vo ’
+Voice Over
+
‘ka ’
+Karaoke
+
+
+request_sample_fmt sample_fmt (decoding,audio ) Set sample format audio decoders should prefer. Default value is
+none.
+
+pkt_timebase rational number sub_charenc encoding (decoding,subtitles ) Set the input subtitles character encoding.
+
+field_order field_order (video ) Set/override the field order of the video.
+Possible values:
+
+‘progressive ’
+Progressive video
+
‘tt ’
+Interlaced video, top field coded and displayed first
+
‘bb ’
+Interlaced video, bottom field coded and displayed first
+
‘tb ’
+Interlaced video, top coded first, bottom displayed first
+
‘bt ’
+Interlaced video, bottom coded first, top displayed first
+
+
+skip_alpha integer (decoding,video ) Set to 1 to disable processing alpha (transparency). This works like the
+‘gray ’ flag in the flags option which skips chroma information
+instead of alpha. Default is 0.
+
+codec_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed decoders. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
8 Decoders# TOC
+
+
Decoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the decoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native decoders
+are enabled by default. Decoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available decoders using the configure option --list-decoders.
+
+
You can disable all the decoders with the configure option
+--disable-decoders and selectively enable / disable single decoders
+with the options --enable-decoder=DECODER /
+--disable-decoder=DECODER .
+
+
The option -decoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled decoders.
+
+
+
+
9 Video Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
9.1 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video decoder.
+
+
This decoder decodes rawvideo streams.
+
+
+
9.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+top top_field_first Specify the assumed field type of the input video.
+
+-1 the video is assumed to be progressive (default)
+
0 bottom-field-first is assumed
+
1 top-field-first is assumed
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
10 Audio Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
10.1 ac3# TOC
+
+
AC-3 audio decoder.
+
+
This decoder implements part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
+
10.1.1 AC-3 Decoder Options# TOC
+
+
+-drc_scale value Dynamic Range Scale Factor. The factor to apply to dynamic range values
+from the AC-3 stream. This factor is applied exponentially.
+There are 3 notable scale factor ranges:
+
+drc_scale == 0 DRC disabled. Produces full range audio.
+
0 < drc_scale <= 1 DRC enabled. Applies a fraction of the stream DRC value.
+Audio reproduction is between full range and full compression.
+
drc_scale > 1 DRC enabled. Applies drc_scale asymmetrically.
+Loud sounds are fully compressed. Soft sounds are enhanced.
+
+
+
+
+
+
10.2 ffwavesynth# TOC
+
+
Internal wave synthetizer.
+
+
This decoder generates wave patterns according to predefined sequences. Its
+use is purely internal and the format of the data it accepts is not publicly
+documented.
+
+
+
10.3 libcelt# TOC
+
+
libcelt decoder wrapper.
+
+
libcelt allows libavcodec to decode the Xiph CELT ultra-low delay audio codec.
+Requires the presence of the libcelt headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libcelt.
+
+
+
10.4 libgsm# TOC
+
+
libgsm decoder wrapper.
+
+
libgsm allows libavcodec to decode the GSM full rate audio codec. Requires
+the presence of the libgsm headers and library during configuration. You need
+to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libgsm.
+
+
This decoder supports both the ordinary GSM and the Microsoft variant.
+
+
+
10.5 libilbc# TOC
+
+
libilbc decoder wrapper.
+
+
libilbc allows libavcodec to decode the Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC)
+audio codec. Requires the presence of the libilbc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libilbc.
+
+
+
10.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following option is supported by the libilbc wrapper.
+
+
+enhance
+Enable the enhancement of the decoded audio when set to 1. The default
+value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
+
10.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrnb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrnb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Narrowband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrnb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrnb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-NB exists, so users can decode AMR-NB
+without this library.
+
+
+
10.7 libopencore-amrwb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrwb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrwb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Wideband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrwb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrwb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-WB exists, so users can decode AMR-WB
+without this library.
+
+
+
10.8 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopus allows libavcodec to decode the Opus Interactive Audio Codec.
+Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for Opus exists, so users can decode Opus
+without this library.
+
+
+
+
11 Subtitles Decoders# TOC
+
+
+
11.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec decodes the bitmap subtitles used in DVDs; the same subtitles can
+also be found in VobSub file pairs and in some Matroska files.
+
+
+
11.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+palette Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps. When stored in VobSub, the
+palette is normally specified in the index file; in Matroska, the palette is
+stored in the codec extra-data in the same format as in VobSub. In DVDs, the
+palette is stored in the IFO file, and therefore not available when reading
+from dumped VOB files.
+
+The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
+numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by comas, for example 0d00ee,
+ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
+7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b.
+
+ifo_palette Specify the IFO file from which the global palette is obtained.
+(experimental)
+
+forced_subs_only Only decode subtitle entries marked as forced. Some titles have forced
+and non-forced subtitles in the same track. Setting this flag to 1
+will only keep the forced subtitles. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
11.2 libzvbi-teletext# TOC
+
+
Libzvbi allows libavcodec to decode DVB teletext pages and DVB teletext
+subtitles. Requires the presence of the libzvbi headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libzvbi.
+
+
+
11.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+txt_page List of teletext page numbers to decode. You may use the special * string to
+match all pages. Pages that do not match the specified list are dropped.
+Default value is *.
+
txt_chop_top Discards the top teletext line. Default value is 1.
+
txt_format Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles. The teletext decoder is capable
+of decoding the teletext pages to bitmaps or to simple text, you should use
+"bitmap" for teletext pages, because certain graphics and colors cannot be
+expressed in simple text. You might use "text" for teletext based subtitles if
+your application can handle simple text based subtitles. Default value is
+bitmap.
+
txt_left X offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_top Y offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_chop_spaces Chops leading and trailing spaces and removes empty lines from the generated
+text. This option is useful for teletext based subtitles where empty spaces may
+be present at the start or at the end of the lines or empty lines may be
+present between the subtitle lines because of double-sized teletext charactes.
+Default value is 1.
+
txt_duration Sets the display duration of the decoded teletext pages or subtitles in
+miliseconds. Default value is 30000 which is 30 seconds.
+
txt_transparent Force transparent background of the generated teletext bitmaps. Default value
+is 0 which means an opaque (black) background.
+
+
+
+
12 Bitstream Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported bitstream
+filters are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using
+the configure option --list-bsfs.
+
+
You can disable all the bitstream filters using the configure option
+--disable-bsfs, and selectively enable any bitstream filter using
+the option --enable-bsf=BSF, or you can disable a particular
+bitstream filter using the option --disable-bsf=BSF.
+
+
The option -bsfs of the ff* tools will display the list of
+all the supported bitstream filters included in your build.
+
+
The ff* tools have a -bsf option applied per stream, taking a
+comma-separated list of filters, whose parameters follow the filter
+name after a ’=’.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v filter1[=opt1=str1/opt2=str2][,filter2] OUTPUT
+
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available bitstream filters,
+with their parameters, if any.
+
+
+
12.1 aac_adtstoasc# TOC
+
+
Convert MPEG-2/4 AAC ADTS to MPEG-4 Audio Specific Configuration
+bitstream filter.
+
+
This filter creates an MPEG-4 AudioSpecificConfig from an MPEG-2/4
+ADTS header and removes the ADTS header.
+
+
This is required for example when copying an AAC stream from a raw
+ADTS AAC container to a FLV or a MOV/MP4 file.
+
+
+
12.2 chomp# TOC
+
+
Remove zero padding at the end of a packet.
+
+
+
12.3 dump_extra# TOC
+
+
Add extradata to the beginning of the filtered packets.
+
+
The additional argument specifies which packets should be filtered.
+It accepts the values:
+
+‘a ’
+add extradata to all key packets, but only if local_header is
+set in the flags2 codec context field
+
+‘k ’
+add extradata to all key packets
+
+‘e ’
+add extradata to all packets
+
+
+
If not specified it is assumed ‘k ’.
+
+
For example the following ffmpeg command forces a global
+header (thus disabling individual packet headers) in the H.264 packets
+generated by the libx264 encoder, but corrects them by adding
+the header stored in extradata to the key packets:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -flags:v +global_header -c:v libx264 -bsf:v dump_extra out.ts
+
+
+
+
12.4 h264_mp4toannexb# TOC
+
+
Convert an H.264 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
+prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.264
+specification).
+
+
This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
+transport stream format ("mpegts").
+
+
For example to remux an MP4 file containing an H.264 stream to mpegts
+format with ffmpeg, you can use the command:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts
+
+
+
+
12.5 imxdump# TOC
+
+
Modifies the bitstream to fit in MOV and to be usable by the Final Cut
+Pro decoder. This filter only applies to the mpeg2video codec, and is
+likely not needed for Final Cut Pro 7 and newer with the appropriate
+-tag:v .
+
+
For example, to remux 30 MB/sec NTSC IMX to MOV:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mxf -c copy -bsf:v imxdump -tag:v mx3n output.mov
+
+
+
+
12.6 mjpeg2jpeg# TOC
+
+
Convert MJPEG/AVI1 packets to full JPEG/JFIF packets.
+
+
MJPEG is a video codec wherein each video frame is essentially a
+JPEG image. The individual frames can be extracted without loss,
+e.g. by
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i ../some_mjpeg.avi -c:v copy frames_%d.jpg
+
+
+
Unfortunately, these chunks are incomplete JPEG images, because
+they lack the DHT segment required for decoding. Quoting from
+http://www.digitalpreservation.gov/formats/fdd/fdd000063.shtml :
+
+
Avery Lee, writing in the rec.video.desktop newsgroup in 2001,
+commented that "MJPEG, or at least the MJPEG in AVIs having the
+MJPG fourcc, is restricted JPEG with a fixed – and *omitted* –
+Huffman table. The JPEG must be YCbCr colorspace, it must be 4:2:2,
+and it must use basic Huffman encoding, not arithmetic or
+progressive. . . . You can indeed extract the MJPEG frames and
+decode them with a regular JPEG decoder, but you have to prepend
+the DHT segment to them, or else the decoder won’t have any idea
+how to decompress the data. The exact table necessary is given in
+the OpenDML spec."
+
+
This bitstream filter patches the header of frames extracted from an MJPEG
+stream (carrying the AVI1 header ID and lacking a DHT segment) to
+produce fully qualified JPEG images.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mjpeg-movie.avi -c:v copy -bsf:v mjpeg2jpeg frame_%d.jpg
+exiftran -i -9 frame*.jpg
+ffmpeg -i frame_%d.jpg -c:v copy rotated.avi
+
+
+
+
12.7 mjpega_dump_header# TOC
+
+
+
12.8 movsub# TOC
+
+
+
12.9 mp3_header_decompress# TOC
+
+
+
12.10 noise# TOC
+
+
Damages the contents of packets without damaging the container. Can be
+used for fuzzing or testing error resilience/concealment.
+
+
Parameters:
+A numeral string, whose value is related to how often output bytes will
+be modified. Therefore, values below or equal to 0 are forbidden, and
+the lower the more frequent bytes will be modified, with 1 meaning
+every byte is modified.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf noise[=1] output.mkv
+
+
applies the modification to every byte.
+
+
+
12.11 remove_extra# TOC
+
+
+
13 Format Options# TOC
+
+
The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
+can be set on all the muxers and demuxers. In addition each muxer or
+demuxer may support so-called private options, which are specific for
+that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+avioflags flags (input/output ) Possible values:
+
+‘direct ’
+Reduce buffering.
+
+
+probesize integer (input ) Set probing size in bytes, i.e. the size of the data to analyze to get
+stream information. A higher value will allow to detect more
+information in case it is dispersed into the stream, but will increase
+latency. Must be an integer not lesser than 32. It is 5000000 by default.
+
+packetsize integer (output ) Set packet size.
+
+fflags flags (input/output ) Set format flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ignidx ’
+Ignore index.
+
‘genpts ’
+Generate PTS.
+
‘nofillin ’
+Do not fill in missing values that can be exactly calculated.
+
‘noparse ’
+Disable AVParsers, this needs +nofillin too.
+
‘igndts ’
+Ignore DTS.
+
‘discardcorrupt ’
+Discard corrupted frames.
+
‘sortdts ’
+Try to interleave output packets by DTS.
+
‘keepside ’
+Do not merge side data.
+
‘latm ’
+Enable RTP MP4A-LATM payload.
+
‘nobuffer ’
+Reduce the latency introduced by optional buffering
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data.
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
+
+seek2any integer (input ) Allow seeking to non-keyframes on demuxer level when supported if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+analyzeduration integer (input ) Specify how many microseconds are analyzed to probe the input. A
+higher value will allow to detect more accurate information, but will
+increase latency. It defaults to 5,000,000 microseconds = 5 seconds.
+
+cryptokey hexadecimal string (input ) Set decryption key.
+
+indexmem integer (input ) Set max memory used for timestamp index (per stream).
+
+rtbufsize integer (input ) Set max memory used for buffering real-time frames.
+
+fdebug flags (input/output ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ts ’
+
+
+max_delay integer (input/output ) Set maximum muxing or demuxing delay in microseconds.
+
+fpsprobesize integer (input ) Set number of frames used to probe fps.
+
+audio_preload integer (output ) Set microseconds by which audio packets should be interleaved earlier.
+
+chunk_duration integer (output ) Set microseconds for each chunk.
+
+chunk_size integer (output ) Set size in bytes for each chunk.
+
+err_detect, f_err_detect flags (input ) Set error detection flags. f_err_detect is deprecated and
+should be used only via the ffmpeg tool.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+Verify embedded CRCs.
+
‘bitstream ’
+Detect bitstream specification deviations.
+
‘buffer ’
+Detect improper bitstream length.
+
‘explode ’
+Abort decoding on minor error detection.
+
‘careful ’
+Consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the
+wild as errors.
+
‘compliant ’
+Consider all spec non compliancies as errors.
+
‘aggressive ’
+Consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error.
+
+
+use_wallclock_as_timestamps integer (input ) Use wallclock as timestamps.
+
+avoid_negative_ts integer (output )
+Possible values:
+
+‘make_non_negative ’
+Shift timestamps to make them non-negative.
+Also note that this affects only leading negative timestamps, and not
+non-monotonic negative timestamps.
+
‘make_zero ’
+Shift timestamps so that the first timestamp is 0.
+
‘auto (default) ’
+Enables shifting when required by the target format.
+
‘disabled ’
+Disables shifting of timestamp.
+
+
+When shifting is enabled, all output timestamps are shifted by the
+same amount. Audio, video, and subtitles desynching and relative
+timestamp differences are preserved compared to how they would have
+been without shifting.
+
+
+skip_initial_bytes integer (input ) Set number of bytes to skip before reading header and frames if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+correct_ts_overflow integer (input ) Correct single timestamp overflows if set to 1. Default is 1.
+
+flush_packets integer (output ) Flush the underlying I/O stream after each packet. Default 1 enables it, and
+has the effect of reducing the latency; 0 disables it and may slightly
+increase performance in some cases.
+
+output_ts_offset offset (output ) Set the output time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added by the muxer to the output timestamps.
+
+Specifying a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are
+delayed bt the time duration specified in offset . Default value
+is 0 (meaning that no offset is applied).
+
+format_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed demuxers. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
13.1 Format stream specifiers# TOC
+
+
Format stream specifiers allow selection of one or more streams that
+match specific properties.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index.
+
+stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio,
+’s’ for subtitle, ’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If
+stream_index is given, then it matches the stream number
+stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all streams of
+this type.
+
+p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number
+stream_index in the program with the id
+program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the program.
+
+#stream_id Matches the stream by a format-specific ID.
+
+
+
The exact semantics of stream specifiers is defined by the
+avformat_match_stream_specifier() function declared in the
+libavformat/avformat.h header.
+
+
+
14 Demuxers# TOC
+
+
Demuxers are configured elements in FFmpeg that can read the
+multimedia streams from a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported demuxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option --list-demuxers.
+
+
You can disable all the demuxers using the configure option
+--disable-demuxers, and selectively enable a single demuxer with
+the option --enable-demuxer=DEMUXER , or disable it
+with the option --disable-demuxer=DEMUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled demuxers.
+
+
The description of some of the currently available demuxers follows.
+
+
+
14.1 applehttp# TOC
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer presents all AVStreams from all variant streams.
+The id field is set to the bitrate variant index number. By setting
+the discard flags on AVStreams (by pressing ’a’ or ’v’ in ffplay),
+the caller can decide which variant streams to actually receive.
+The total bitrate of the variant that the stream belongs to is
+available in a metadata key named "variant_bitrate".
+
+
+
14.2 apng# TOC
+
+
Animated Portable Network Graphics demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux APNG files.
+All headers, but the PNG signature, up to (but not including) the first
+fcTL chunk are transmitted as extradata.
+Frames are then split as being all the chunks between two fcTL ones, or
+between the last fcTL and IEND chunks.
+
+
+-ignore_loop bool Ignore the loop variable in the file if set.
+
-max_fps int Maximum framerate in frames per second (0 for no limit).
+
-default_fps int Default framerate in frames per second when none is specified in the file
+(0 meaning as fast as possible).
+
+
+
+
14.3 asf# TOC
+
+
Advanced Systems Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux ASF files and MMS network streams.
+
+
+-no_resync_search bool Do not try to resynchronize by looking for a certain optional start code.
+
+
+
+
14.4 concat# TOC
+
+
Virtual concatenation script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads a list of files and other directives from a text file and
+demuxes them one after the other, as if all their packet had been muxed
+together.
+
+
The timestamps in the files are adjusted so that the first file starts at 0
+and each next file starts where the previous one finishes. Note that it is
+done globally and may cause gaps if all streams do not have exactly the same
+length.
+
+
All files must have the same streams (same codecs, same time base, etc.).
+
+
The duration of each file is used to adjust the timestamps of the next file:
+if the duration is incorrect (because it was computed using the bit-rate or
+because the file is truncated, for example), it can cause artifacts. The
+duration directive can be used to override the duration stored in
+each file.
+
+
+
14.4.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
The script is a text file in extended-ASCII, with one directive per line.
+Empty lines, leading spaces and lines starting with ’#’ are ignored. The
+following directive is recognized:
+
+
+file path Path to a file to read; special characters and spaces must be escaped with
+backslash or single quotes.
+
+All subsequent file-related directives apply to that file.
+
+ffconcat version 1.0Identify the script type and version. It also sets the safe option
+to 1 if it was to its default -1.
+
+To make FFmpeg recognize the format automatically, this directive must
+appears exactly as is (no extra space or byte-order-mark) on the very first
+line of the script.
+
+duration dur Duration of the file. This information can be specified from the file;
+specifying it here may be more efficient or help if the information from the
+file is not available or accurate.
+
+If the duration is set for all files, then it is possible to seek in the
+whole concatenated video.
+
+streamIntroduce a stream in the virtual file.
+All subsequent stream-related directives apply to the last introduced
+stream.
+Some streams properties must be set in order to allow identifying the
+matching streams in the subfiles.
+If no streams are defined in the script, the streams from the first file are
+copied.
+
+exact_stream_id id Set the id of the stream.
+If this directive is given, the string with the corresponding id in the
+subfiles will be used.
+This is especially useful for MPEG-PS (VOB) files, where the order of the
+streams is not reliable.
+
+
+
+
+
14.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+
+safe If set to 1, reject unsafe file paths. A file path is considered safe if it
+does not contain a protocol specification and is relative and all components
+only contain characters from the portable character set (letters, digits,
+period, underscore and hyphen) and have no period at the beginning of a
+component.
+
+If set to 0, any file name is accepted.
+
+The default is -1, it is equivalent to 1 if the format was automatically
+probed and 0 otherwise.
+
+auto_convert If set to 1, try to perform automatic conversions on packet data to make the
+streams concatenable.
+
+Currently, the only conversion is adding the h264_mp4toannexb bitstream
+filter to H.264 streams in MP4 format. This is necessary in particular if
+there are resolution changes.
+
+
+
+
+
14.5 flv# TOC
+
+
Adobe Flash Video Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux FLV files and RTMP network streams.
+
+
+-flv_metadata bool Allocate the streams according to the onMetaData array content.
+
+
+
+
14.6 libgme# TOC
+
+
The Game Music Emu library is a collection of video game music file emulators.
+
+
See http://code.google.com/p/game-music-emu/ for more information.
+
+
Some files have multiple tracks. The demuxer will pick the first track by
+default. The track_index option can be used to select a different
+track. Track indexes start at 0. The demuxer exports the number of tracks as
+tracks meta data entry.
+
+
For very large files, the max_size option may have to be adjusted.
+
+
+
14.7 libquvi# TOC
+
+
Play media from Internet services using the quvi project.
+
+
The demuxer accepts a format option to request a specific quality. It
+is by default set to best .
+
+
See http://quvi.sourceforge.net/ for more information.
+
+
FFmpeg needs to be built with --enable-libquvi for this demuxer to be
+enabled.
+
+
+
14.8 gif# TOC
+
+
Animated GIF demuxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+min_delay Set the minimum valid delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 2.
+
+default_delay Set the default delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 10.
+
+ignore_loop GIF files can contain information to loop a certain number of times (or
+infinitely). If ignore_loop is set to 1, then the loop setting
+from the input will be ignored and looping will not occur. If set to 0,
+then looping will occur and will cycle the number of times according to
+the GIF. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, with the overlay filter, place an infinitely looping GIF
+over another video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -ignore_loop 0 -i input.gif -filter_complex overlay=shortest=1 out.mkv
+
+
+
Note that in the above example the shortest option for overlay filter is
+used to end the output video at the length of the shortest input file,
+which in this case is input.mp4 as the GIF in this example loops
+infinitely.
+
+
+
14.9 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads from a list of image files specified by a pattern.
+The syntax and meaning of the pattern is specified by the
+option pattern_type .
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the images contained in the files.
+
+
The size, the pixel format, and the format of each image must be the
+same for all the files in the sequence.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set the frame rate for the video stream. It defaults to 25.
+
loop If set to 1, loop over the input. Default value is 0.
+
pattern_type Select the pattern type used to interpret the provided filename.
+
+pattern_type accepts one of the following values.
+
+sequence Select a sequence pattern type, used to specify a sequence of files
+indexed by sequential numbers.
+
+A sequence pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", which
+specifies the position of the characters representing a sequential
+number in each filename matched by the pattern. If the form
+"%d0N d" is used, the string representing the number in each
+filename is 0-padded and N is the total number of 0-padded
+digits representing the number. The literal character ’%’ can be
+specified in the pattern with the string "%%".
+
+If the sequence pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified by the pattern must contain a number
+inclusively contained between start_number and
+start_number +start_number_range -1, and all the following
+numbers must be sequential.
+
+For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will match a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.; the pattern "i%%m%%g-%d.jpg" will match a
+sequence of filenames of the form i%m%g-1.jpg ,
+i%m%g-2.jpg , ..., i%m%g-10.jpg , etc.
+
+Note that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to convert a single image file
+img.jpeg you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i img.jpeg img.png
+ glob Select a glob wildcard pattern type.
+
+The pattern is interpreted like a glob() pattern. This is only
+selectable if libavformat was compiled with globbing support.
+
+glob_sequence (deprecated, will be removed) Select a mixed glob wildcard/sequence pattern.
+
+If your version of libavformat was compiled with globbing support, and
+the provided pattern contains at least one glob meta character among
+%*?[]{} that is preceded by an unescaped "%", the pattern is
+interpreted like a glob() pattern, otherwise it is interpreted
+like a sequence pattern.
+
+All glob special characters %*?[]{} must be prefixed
+with "%". To escape a literal "%" you shall use "%%".
+
+For example the pattern foo-%*.jpeg will match all the
+filenames prefixed by "foo-" and terminating with ".jpeg", and
+foo-%?%?%?.jpeg will match all the filenames prefixed with
+"foo-", followed by a sequence of three characters, and terminating
+with ".jpeg".
+
+This pattern type is deprecated in favor of glob and
+sequence .
+
+
+Default value is glob_sequence .
+
pixel_format Set the pixel format of the images to read. If not specified the pixel
+format is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
start_number Set the index of the file matched by the image file pattern to start
+to read from. Default value is 0.
+
start_number_range Set the index interval range to check when looking for the first image
+file in the sequence, starting from start_number . Default value
+is 5.
+
ts_from_file If set to 1, will set frame timestamp to modification time of image file. Note
+that monotonity of timestamps is not provided: images go in the same order as
+without this option. Default value is 0.
+If set to 2, will set frame timestamp to the modification time of the image file in
+nanosecond precision.
+
video_size Set the video size of the images to read. If not specified the video
+size is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
+
+
+
14.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg for creating a video from the images in the file
+sequence img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ..., assuming an
+input frame rate of 10 frames per second:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ As above, but start by reading from a file with index 100 in the sequence:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -start_number 100 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ Read images matching the "*.png" glob pattern , that is all the files
+terminating with the ".png" suffix:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -pattern_type glob -i "*.png" out.mkv
+
+
+
+
14.10 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 transport stream demuxer.
+
+
+fix_teletext_pts Overrides teletext packet PTS and DTS values with the timestamps calculated
+from the PCR of the first program which the teletext stream is part of and is
+not discarded. Default value is 1, set this option to 0 if you want your
+teletext packet PTS and DTS values untouched.
+
+
+
+
14.11 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer allows one to read raw video data. Since there is no header
+specifying the assumed video parameters, the user must specify them
+in order to be able to decode the data correctly.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set input video frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+pixel_format Set the input video pixel format. Default value is yuv420p.
+
+video_size Set the input video size. This value must be specified explicitly.
+
+
+
For example to read a rawvideo file input.raw with
+ffplay, assuming a pixel format of rgb24, a video
+size of 320x240, and a frame rate of 10 images per second, use
+the command:
+
+
ffplay -f rawvideo -pixel_format rgb24 -video_size 320x240 -framerate 10 input.raw
+
+
+
+
14.12 sbg# TOC
+
+
SBaGen script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads the script language used by SBaGen
+http://uazu.net/sbagen/ to generate binaural beats sessions. A SBG
+script looks like that:
+
+
-SE
+a: 300-2.5/3 440+4.5/0
+b: 300-2.5/0 440+4.5/3
+off: -
+NOW == a
++0:07:00 == b
++0:14:00 == a
++0:21:00 == b
++0:30:00 off
+
+
+
A SBG script can mix absolute and relative timestamps. If the script uses
+either only absolute timestamps (including the script start time) or only
+relative ones, then its layout is fixed, and the conversion is
+straightforward. On the other hand, if the script mixes both kind of
+timestamps, then the NOW reference for relative timestamps will be
+taken from the current time of day at the time the script is read, and the
+script layout will be frozen according to that reference. That means that if
+the script is directly played, the actual times will match the absolute
+timestamps up to the sound controller’s clock accuracy, but if the user
+somehow pauses the playback or seeks, all times will be shifted accordingly.
+
+
+
14.13 tedcaptions# TOC
+
+
JSON captions used for TED Talks .
+
+
TED does not provide links to the captions, but they can be guessed from the
+page. The file tools/bookmarklets.html from the FFmpeg source tree
+contains a bookmarklet to expose them.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+start_time Set the start time of the TED talk, in milliseconds. The default is 15000
+(15s). It is used to sync the captions with the downloadable videos, because
+they include a 15s intro.
+
+
+
Example: convert the captions to a format most players understand:
+
+
ffmpeg -i http://www.ted.com/talks/subtitles/id/1/lang/en talk1-en.srt
+
+
+
+
15 Metadata# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is able to dump metadata from media files into a simple UTF-8-encoded
+INI-like text file and then load it back using the metadata muxer/demuxer.
+
+
The file format is as follows:
+
+ A file consists of a header and a number of metadata tags divided into sections,
+each on its own line.
+
+ The header is a ’;FFMETADATA’ string, followed by a version number (now 1).
+
+ Metadata tags are of the form ’key=value’
+
+ Immediately after header follows global metadata
+
+ After global metadata there may be sections with per-stream/per-chapter
+metadata.
+
+ A section starts with the section name in uppercase (i.e. STREAM or CHAPTER) in
+brackets (’[’, ’]’) and ends with next section or end of file.
+
+ At the beginning of a chapter section there may be an optional timebase to be
+used for start/end values. It must be in form ’TIMEBASE=num/den’, where num and
+den are integers. If the timebase is missing then start/end times are assumed to
+be in milliseconds.
+Next a chapter section must contain chapter start and end times in form
+’START=num’, ’END=num’, where num is a positive integer.
+
+ Empty lines and lines starting with ’;’ or ’#’ are ignored.
+
+ Metadata keys or values containing special characters (’=’, ’;’, ’#’, ’\’ and a
+newline) must be escaped with a backslash ’\’.
+
+ Note that whitespace in metadata (e.g. foo = bar) is considered to be a part of
+the tag (in the example above key is ’foo ’, value is ’ bar’).
+
+
+
A ffmetadata file might look like this:
+
+
;FFMETADATA1
+title=bike\\shed
+;this is a comment
+artist=FFmpeg troll team
+
+[CHAPTER]
+TIMEBASE=1/1000
+START=0
+#chapter ends at 0:01:00
+END=60000
+title=chapter \#1
+[STREAM]
+title=multi\
+line
+
+
+
By using the ffmetadata muxer and demuxer it is possible to extract
+metadata from an input file to an ffmetadata file, and then transcode
+the file into an output file with the edited ffmetadata file.
+
+
Extracting an ffmetadata file with ffmpeg goes as follows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata FFMETADATAFILE
+
+
+
Reinserting edited metadata information from the FFMETADATAFILE file can
+be done as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -i FFMETADATAFILE -map_metadata 1 -codec copy OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
16 Protocols# TOC
+
+
Protocols are configured elements in FFmpeg that enable access to
+resources that require specific protocols.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported protocols are
+enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-protocols".
+
+
You can disable all the protocols using the configure option
+"–disable-protocols", and selectively enable a protocol using the
+option "–enable-protocol=PROTOCOL ", or you can disable a
+particular protocol using the option
+"–disable-protocol=PROTOCOL ".
+
+
The option "-protocols" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported protocols.
+
+
A description of the currently available protocols follows.
+
+
+
16.1 bluray# TOC
+
+
Read BluRay playlist.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+angle BluRay angle
+
+chapter Start chapter (1...N)
+
+playlist Playlist to read (BDMV/PLAYLIST/?????.mpls)
+
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Read longest playlist from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray:
+
+
+
Read angle 2 of playlist 4 from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray, start from chapter 2:
+
+
-playlist 4 -angle 2 -chapter 2 bluray:/mnt/bluray
+
+
+
+
16.2 cache# TOC
+
+
Caching wrapper for input stream.
+
+
Cache the input stream to temporary file. It brings seeking capability to live streams.
+
+
+
+
+
16.3 concat# TOC
+
+
Physical concatenation protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and seek from many resource in sequence as if they were
+a unique resource.
+
+
A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
+
+
concat:URL1 |URL2 |...|URLN
+
+
+
where URL1 , URL2 , ..., URLN are the urls of the
+resource to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
+protocol.
+
+
For example to read a sequence of files split1.mpeg ,
+split2.mpeg , split3.mpeg with ffplay use the
+command:
+
+
ffplay concat:split1.mpeg\|split2.mpeg\|split3.mpeg
+
+
+
Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for
+many shells.
+
+
+
16.4 crypto# TOC
+
+
AES-encrypted stream reading protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+key Set the AES decryption key binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+iv Set the AES decryption initialization vector binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+
+
Accepted URL formats:
+
+
crypto:URL
+crypto+URL
+
+
+
+
16.5 data# TOC
+
+
Data in-line in the URI. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_URI_scheme .
+
+
For example, to convert a GIF file given inline with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i "data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODdhCAAIAMIEAAAAAAAA//8AAP//AP///////////////ywAAAAACAAIAAADF0gEDLojDgdGiJdJqUX02iB4E8Q9jUMkADs=" smiley.png
+
+
+
+
16.6 file# TOC
+
+
File access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read from or write to a file.
+
+
A file URL can have the form:
+
+
+
where filename is the path of the file to read.
+
+
An URL that does not have a protocol prefix will be assumed to be a
+file URL. Depending on the build, an URL that looks like a Windows
+path with the drive letter at the beginning will also be assumed to be
+a file URL (usually not the case in builds for unix-like systems).
+
+
For example to read from a file input.mpeg with ffmpeg
+use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i file:input.mpeg output.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable for files on slow medium.
+
+
+
+
16.7 ftp# TOC
+
+
FTP (File Transfer Protocol).
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using FTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
ftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+ftp-anonymous-password Password used when login as anonymous user. Typically an e-mail address
+should be used.
+
+ftp-write-seekable Control seekability of connection during encoding. If set to 1 the
+resource is supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not
+to be seekable. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
NOTE: Protocol can be used as output, but it is recommended to not do
+it, unless special care is taken (tests, customized server configuration
+etc.). Different FTP servers behave in different way during seek
+operation. ff* tools may produce incomplete content due to server limitations.
+
+
+
16.8 gopher# TOC
+
+
Gopher protocol.
+
+
+
16.9 hls# TOC
+
+
Read Apple HTTP Live Streaming compliant segmented stream as
+a uniform one. The M3U8 playlists describing the segments can be
+remote HTTP resources or local files, accessed using the standard
+file protocol.
+The nested protocol is declared by specifying
+"+proto " after the hls URI scheme name, where proto
+is either "file" or "http".
+
+
+
hls+http://host/path/to/remote/resource.m3u8
+hls+file://path/to/local/resource.m3u8
+
+
+
Using this protocol is discouraged - the hls demuxer should work
+just as well (if not, please report the issues) and is more complete.
+To use the hls demuxer instead, simply use the direct URLs to the
+m3u8 files.
+
+
+
16.10 http# TOC
+
+
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+seekable Control seekability of connection. If set to 1 the resource is
+supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not to be seekable,
+if set to -1 it will try to autodetect if it is seekable. Default
+value is -1.
+
+chunked_post If set to 1 use chunked Transfer-Encoding for posts, default is 1.
+
+content_type Set a specific content type for the POST messages.
+
+headers Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. The
+value must be a string encoding the headers.
+
+multiple_requests Use persistent connections if set to 1, default is 0.
+
+post_data Set custom HTTP post data.
+
+user-agent user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified the protocol will use a
+string describing the libavformat build. ("Lavf/<version>")
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+mime_type Export the MIME type.
+
+icy If set to 1 request ICY (SHOUTcast) metadata from the server. If the server
+supports this, the metadata has to be retrieved by the application by reading
+the icy_metadata_headers and icy_metadata_packet options.
+The default is 1.
+
+icy_metadata_headers If the server supports ICY metadata, this contains the ICY-specific HTTP reply
+headers, separated by newline characters.
+
+icy_metadata_packet If the server supports ICY metadata, and icy was set to 1, this
+contains the last non-empty metadata packet sent by the server. It should be
+polled in regular intervals by applications interested in mid-stream metadata
+updates.
+
+cookies Set the cookies to be sent in future requests. The format of each cookie is the
+same as the value of a Set-Cookie HTTP response field. Multiple cookies can be
+delimited by a newline character.
+
+offset Set initial byte offset.
+
+end_offset Try to limit the request to bytes preceding this offset.
+
+
+
+
16.10.1 HTTP Cookies# TOC
+
+
Some HTTP requests will be denied unless cookie values are passed in with the
+request. The cookies option allows these cookies to be specified. At
+the very least, each cookie must specify a value along with a path and domain.
+HTTP requests that match both the domain and path will automatically include the
+cookie value in the HTTP Cookie header field. Multiple cookies can be delimited
+by a newline.
+
+
The required syntax to play a stream specifying a cookie is:
+
+
ffplay -cookies "nlqptid=nltid=tsn; path=/; domain=somedomain.com;" http://somedomain.com/somestream.m3u8
+
+
+
+
16.11 Icecast# TOC
+
+
Icecast protocol (stream to Icecast servers)
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+ice_genre Set the stream genre.
+
+ice_name Set the stream name.
+
+ice_description Set the stream description.
+
+ice_url Set the stream website URL.
+
+ice_public Set if the stream should be public.
+The default is 0 (not public).
+
+user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified a string of the form
+"Lavf/<version>" will be used.
+
+password Set the Icecast mountpoint password.
+
+content_type Set the stream content type. This must be set if it is different from
+audio/mpeg.
+
+legacy_icecast This enables support for Icecast versions < 2.4.0, that do not support the
+HTTP PUT method but the SOURCE method.
+
+
+
+
+
icecast://[username [:password ]@]server :port /mountpoint
+
+
+
+
16.12 mmst# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over TCP.
+
+
+
16.13 mmsh# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over HTTP.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
mmsh://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
+
16.14 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 output protocol.
+
+
Computes the MD5 hash of the data to be written, and on close writes
+this to the designated output or stdout if none is specified. It can
+be used to test muxers without writing an actual file.
+
+
Some examples follow.
+
+
# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to the file output.avi.md5.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:output.avi.md5
+
+# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to stdout.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV) require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the MD5 output protocol.
+
+
+
16.15 pipe# TOC
+
+
UNIX pipe access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and write from UNIX pipes.
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
+
number is the number corresponding to the file descriptor of the
+pipe (e.g. 0 for stdin, 1 for stdout, 2 for stderr). If number
+is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be used
+for writing, stdin for reading.
+
+
For example to read from stdin with ffmpeg:
+
+
cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:0
+# ...this is the same as...
+cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:
+
+
+
For writing to stdout with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe:1 | cat > test.avi
+# ...this is the same as...
+ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe: | cat > test.avi
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV), require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the pipe output protocol.
+
+
+
16.16 rtmp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is used for streaming multimedia
+content across a TCP/IP network.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp://[username :password @]server [:port ][/app ][/instance ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
The accepted parameters are:
+
+username An optional username (mostly for publishing).
+
+password An optional password (mostly for publishing).
+
+server The address of the RTMP server.
+
+port The number of the TCP port to use (by default is 1935).
+
+app It is the name of the application to access. It usually corresponds to
+the path where the application is installed on the RTMP server
+(e.g. /ondemand/ , /flash/live/ , etc.). You can override
+the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_app option, too.
+
+playpath It is the path or name of the resource to play with reference to the
+application specified in app , may be prefixed by "mp4:". You
+can override the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_playpath
+option, too.
+
+listen Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
+timeout Maximum time to wait for the incoming connection. Implies listen.
+
+
+
Additionally, the following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+rtmp_app Name of application to connect on the RTMP server. This option
+overrides the parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_buffer Set the client buffer time in milliseconds. The default is 3000.
+
+rtmp_conn Extra arbitrary AMF connection parameters, parsed from a string,
+e.g. like B:1 S:authMe O:1 NN:code:1.23 NS:flag:ok O:0.
+Each value is prefixed by a single character denoting the type,
+B for Boolean, N for number, S for string, O for object, or Z for null,
+followed by a colon. For Booleans the data must be either 0 or 1 for
+FALSE or TRUE, respectively. Likewise for Objects the data must be 0 or
+1 to end or begin an object, respectively. Data items in subobjects may
+be named, by prefixing the type with ’N’ and specifying the name before
+the value (i.e. NB:myFlag:1). This option may be used multiple
+times to construct arbitrary AMF sequences.
+
+rtmp_flashver Version of the Flash plugin used to run the SWF player. The default
+is LNX 9,0,124,2. (When publishing, the default is FMLE/3.0 (compatible;
+<libavformat version>).)
+
+rtmp_flush_interval Number of packets flushed in the same request (RTMPT only). The default
+is 10.
+
+rtmp_live Specify that the media is a live stream. No resuming or seeking in
+live streams is possible. The default value is any, which means the
+subscriber first tries to play the live stream specified in the
+playpath. If a live stream of that name is not found, it plays the
+recorded stream. The other possible values are live and
+recorded.
+
+rtmp_pageurl URL of the web page in which the media was embedded. By default no
+value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_playpath Stream identifier to play or to publish. This option overrides the
+parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_subscribe Name of live stream to subscribe to. By default no value will be sent.
+It is only sent if the option is specified or if rtmp_live
+is set to live.
+
+rtmp_swfhash SHA256 hash of the decompressed SWF file (32 bytes).
+
+rtmp_swfsize Size of the decompressed SWF file, required for SWFVerification.
+
+rtmp_swfurl URL of the SWF player for the media. By default no value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_swfverify URL to player swf file, compute hash/size automatically.
+
+rtmp_tcurl URL of the target stream. Defaults to proto://host[:port]/app.
+
+
+
+
For example to read with ffplay a multimedia resource named
+"sample" from the application "vod" from an RTMP server "myserver":
+
+
ffplay rtmp://myserver/vod/sample
+
+
+
To publish to a password protected server, passing the playpath and
+app names separately:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f flv -rtmp_playpath some/long/path -rtmp_app long/app/name rtmp://username:password@myserver/
+
+
+
+
16.17 rtmpe# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) is used for
+streaming multimedia content within standard cryptographic primitives,
+consisting of Diffie-Hellman key exchange and HMACSHA256, generating
+a pair of RC4 keys.
+
+
+
16.18 rtmps# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol over a secure SSL connection.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPS) is used for streaming
+multimedia content across an encrypted connection.
+
+
+
16.19 rtmpt# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPT) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
16.20 rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPTE)
+is used for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
16.21 rtmpts# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS (RTMPTS) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTPS requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
16.22 libsmbclient# TOC
+
+
libsmbclient permits one to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
smb://[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in miliseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying
+low level operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+workgroup Set the workgroup used for making connections. By default workgroup is not specified.
+
+
+
+
For more information see: http://www.samba.org/ .
+
+
+
16.23 libssh# TOC
+
+
Secure File Transfer Protocol via libssh
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using SFTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
sftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+private_key Specify the path of the file containing private key to use during authorization.
+By default libssh searches for keys in the ~/.ssh/ directory.
+
+
+
+
Example: Play a file stored on remote server.
+
+
+
ffplay sftp://user:password@server_address:22/home/user/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
+
16.24 librtmp rtmp, rtmpe, rtmps, rtmpt, rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol and its variants supported through
+librtmp.
+
+
Requires the presence of the librtmp headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+"–enable-librtmp". If enabled this will replace the native RTMP
+protocol.
+
+
This protocol provides most client functions and a few server
+functions needed to support RTMP, RTMP tunneled in HTTP (RTMPT),
+encrypted RTMP (RTMPE), RTMP over SSL/TLS (RTMPS) and tunneled
+variants of these encrypted types (RTMPTE, RTMPTS).
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp_proto ://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ] options
+
+
+
where rtmp_proto is one of the strings "rtmp", "rtmpt", "rtmpe",
+"rtmps", "rtmpte", "rtmpts" corresponding to each RTMP variant, and
+server , port , app and playpath have the same
+meaning as specified for the RTMP native protocol.
+options contains a list of space-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
See the librtmp manual page (man 3 librtmp) for more information.
+
+
For example, to stream a file in real-time to an RTMP server using
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i myfile -f flv rtmp://myserver/live/mystream
+
+
+
To play the same stream using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay "rtmp://myserver/live/mystream live=1"
+
+
+
+
16.25 rtp# TOC
+
+
Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an RTP URL is:
+rtp://hostname [:port ][?option =val ...]
+
+
port specifies the RTP port to use.
+
+
The following URL options are supported:
+
+
+ttl=n Set the TTL (Time-To-Live) value (for multicast only).
+
+rtcpport=n Set the remote RTCP port to n .
+
+localrtpport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+localrtcpport=n ' Set the local RTCP port to n .
+
+pkt_size=n Set max packet size (in bytes) to n .
+
+connect=0|1 Do a connect() on the UDP socket (if set to 1) or not (if set
+to 0).
+
+sources=ip [,ip ] List allowed source IP addresses.
+
+block=ip [,ip ] List disallowed (blocked) source IP addresses.
+
+write_to_source=0|1 Send packets to the source address of the latest received packet (if
+set to 1) or to a default remote address (if set to 0).
+
+localport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+This is a deprecated option. Instead, localrtpport should be
+used.
+
+
+
+
Important notes:
+
+
+ If rtcpport is not set the RTCP port will be set to the RTP
+port value plus 1.
+
+ If localrtpport (the local RTP port) is not set any available
+port will be used for the local RTP and RTCP ports.
+
+ If localrtcpport (the local RTCP port) is not set it will be
+set to the local RTP port value plus 1.
+
+
+
+
16.26 rtsp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Streaming Protocol.
+
+
RTSP is not technically a protocol handler in libavformat, it is a demuxer
+and muxer. The demuxer supports both normal RTSP (with data transferred
+over RTP; this is used by e.g. Apple and Microsoft) and Real-RTSP (with
+data transferred over RDT).
+
+
The muxer can be used to send a stream using RTSP ANNOUNCE to a server
+supporting it (currently Darwin Streaming Server and Mischa Spiegelmock’s
+RTSP server ).
+
+
The required syntax for a RTSP url is:
+
+
rtsp://hostname [:port ]/path
+
+
+
Options can be set on the ffmpeg/ffplay command
+line, or set in code via AVOptions or in
+avformat_open_input.
+
+
The following options are supported.
+
+
+initial_pause Do not start playing the stream immediately if set to 1. Default value
+is 0.
+
+rtsp_transport Set RTSP transport protocols.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘udp ’
+Use UDP as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘tcp ’
+Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
+transport protocol.
+
+‘udp_multicast ’
+Use UDP multicast as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘http ’
+Use HTTP tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
+passing proxies.
+
+
+Multiple lower transport protocols may be specified, in that case they are
+tried one at a time (if the setup of one fails, the next one is tried).
+For the muxer, only the ‘tcp ’ and ‘udp ’ options are supported.
+
+rtsp_flags Set RTSP flags.
+
+The following values are accepted:
+
+‘filter_src ’
+Accept packets only from negotiated peer address and port.
+
‘listen ’
+Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
‘prefer_tcp ’
+Try TCP for RTP transport first, if TCP is available as RTSP RTP transport.
+
+
+Default value is ‘none ’.
+
+allowed_media_types Set media types to accept from the server.
+
+The following flags are accepted:
+
+‘video ’
+‘audio ’
+‘data ’
+
+
+By default it accepts all media types.
+
+min_port Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.
+
+max_port Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.
+
+timeout Set maximum timeout (in seconds) to wait for incoming connections.
+
+A value of -1 means infinite (default). This option implies the
+rtsp_flags set to ‘listen ’.
+
+reorder_queue_size Set number of packets to buffer for handling of reordered packets.
+
+stimeout Set socket TCP I/O timeout in microseconds.
+
+user-agent Override User-Agent header. If not specified, it defaults to the
+libavformat identifier string.
+
+
+
When receiving data over UDP, the demuxer tries to reorder received packets
+(since they may arrive out of order, or packets may get lost totally). This
+can be disabled by setting the maximum demuxing delay to zero (via
+the max_delay field of AVFormatContext).
+
+
When watching multi-bitrate Real-RTSP streams with ffplay, the
+streams to display can be chosen with -vst n and
+-ast n for video and audio respectively, and can be switched
+on the fly by pressing v and a.
+
+
+
16.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples all make use of the ffplay and
+ffmpeg tools.
+
+
+ Watch a stream over UDP, with a max reordering delay of 0.5 seconds:
+
+
ffplay -max_delay 500000 -rtsp_transport udp rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Watch a stream tunneled over HTTP:
+
+
ffplay -rtsp_transport http rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Send a stream in realtime to a RTSP server, for others to watch:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f rtsp -muxdelay 0.1 rtsp://server/live.sdp
+ Receive a stream in realtime:
+
+
ffmpeg -rtsp_flags listen -i rtsp://ownaddress/live.sdp output
+
+
+
+
16.27 sap# TOC
+
+
Session Announcement Protocol (RFC 2974). This is not technically a
+protocol handler in libavformat, it is a muxer and demuxer.
+It is used for signalling of RTP streams, by announcing the SDP for the
+streams regularly on a separate port.
+
+
+
16.27.1 Muxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the muxer is:
+
+
sap://destination [:port ][?options ]
+
+
+
The RTP packets are sent to destination on port port ,
+or to port 5004 if no port is specified.
+options is a &-separated list. The following options
+are supported:
+
+
+announce_addr=address Specify the destination IP address for sending the announcements to.
+If omitted, the announcements are sent to the commonly used SAP
+announcement multicast address 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net), or
+ff0e::2:7ffe if destination is an IPv6 address.
+
+announce_port=port Specify the port to send the announcements on, defaults to
+9875 if not specified.
+
+ttl=ttl Specify the time to live value for the announcements and RTP packets,
+defaults to 255.
+
+same_port=0|1 If set to 1, send all RTP streams on the same port pair. If zero (the
+default), all streams are sent on unique ports, with each stream on a
+port 2 numbers higher than the previous.
+VLC/Live555 requires this to be set to 1, to be able to receive the stream.
+The RTP stack in libavformat for receiving requires all streams to be sent
+on unique ports.
+
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To broadcast a stream on the local subnet, for watching in VLC:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255?same_port=1
+
+
+
Similarly, for watching in ffplay:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255
+
+
+
And for watching in ffplay, over IPv6:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://[ff0e::1:2:3:4]
+
+
+
+
16.27.2 Demuxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the demuxer is:
+
+
sap://[address ][:port ]
+
+
+
address is the multicast address to listen for announcements on,
+if omitted, the default 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net) is used. port
+is the port that is listened on, 9875 if omitted.
+
+
The demuxers listens for announcements on the given address and port.
+Once an announcement is received, it tries to receive that particular stream.
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on the normal SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on one the default IPv6 SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
ffplay sap://[ff0e::2:7ffe]
+
+
+
+
16.28 sctp# TOC
+
+
Stream Control Transmission Protocol.
+
+
The accepted URL syntax is:
+
+
sctp://host :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The protocol accepts the following options:
+
+listen If set to any value, listen for an incoming connection. Outgoing connection is done by default.
+
+max_streams Set the maximum number of streams. By default no limit is set.
+
+
+
+
16.29 srtp# TOC
+
+
Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+srtp_in_suite srtp_out_suite Select input and output encoding suites.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+
+
+srtp_in_params srtp_out_params Set input and output encoding parameters, which are expressed by a
+base64-encoded representation of a binary block. The first 16 bytes of
+this binary block are used as master key, the following 14 bytes are
+used as master salt.
+
+
+
+
16.30 subfile# TOC
+
+
Virtually extract a segment of a file or another stream.
+The underlying stream must be seekable.
+
+
Accepted options:
+
+start Start offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
end End offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Extract a chapter from a DVD VOB file (start and end sectors obtained
+externally and multiplied by 2048):
+
+
subfile,,start,153391104,end,268142592,,:/media/dvd/VIDEO_TS/VTS_08_1.VOB
+
+
+
Play an AVI file directly from a TAR archive:
+subfile,,start,183241728,end,366490624,,:archive.tar
+
+
+
16.31 tcp# TOC
+
+
Transmission Control Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for a TCP url is:
+
+
tcp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+listen=1|0 Listen for an incoming connection. Default value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+listen_timeout=microseconds Set listen timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+
+
The following example shows how to setup a listening TCP connection
+with ffmpeg, which is then accessed with ffplay:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tcp://hostname :port ?listen
+ffplay tcp://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
16.32 tls# TOC
+
+
Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
+
+
The required syntax for a TLS/SSL url is:
+
+
tls://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+ca_file, cafile=filename A file containing certificate authority (CA) root certificates to treat
+as trusted. If the linked TLS library contains a default this might not
+need to be specified for verification to work, but not all libraries and
+setups have defaults built in.
+The file must be in OpenSSL PEM format.
+
+tls_verify=1|0 If enabled, try to verify the peer that we are communicating with.
+Note, if using OpenSSL, this currently only makes sure that the
+peer certificate is signed by one of the root certificates in the CA
+database, but it does not validate that the certificate actually
+matches the host name we are trying to connect to. (With GnuTLS,
+the host name is validated as well.)
+
+This is disabled by default since it requires a CA database to be
+provided by the caller in many cases.
+
+cert_file, cert=filename A file containing a certificate to use in the handshake with the peer.
+(When operating as server, in listen mode, this is more often required
+by the peer, while client certificates only are mandated in certain
+setups.)
+
+key_file, key=filename A file containing the private key for the certificate.
+
+listen=1|0 If enabled, listen for connections on the provided port, and assume
+the server role in the handshake instead of the client role.
+
+
+
+
Example command lines:
+
+
To create a TLS/SSL server that serves an input stream.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tls://hostname :port ?listen&cert=server.crt &key=server.key
+
+
+
To play back a stream from the TLS/SSL server using ffplay:
+
+
+
ffplay tls://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
16.33 udp# TOC
+
+
User Datagram Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an UDP URL is:
+
+
udp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form key =val .
+
+
In case threading is enabled on the system, a circular buffer is used
+to store the incoming data, which allows one to reduce loss of data due to
+UDP socket buffer overruns. The fifo_size and
+overrun_nonfatal options are related to this buffer.
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+buffer_size=size Set the UDP maximum socket buffer size in bytes. This is used to set either
+the receive or send buffer size, depending on what the socket is used for.
+Default is 64KB. See also fifo_size .
+
+localport=port Override the local UDP port to bind with.
+
+localaddr=addr Choose the local IP address. This is useful e.g. if sending multicast
+and the host has multiple interfaces, where the user can choose
+which interface to send on by specifying the IP address of that interface.
+
+pkt_size=size Set the size in bytes of UDP packets.
+
+reuse=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow reusing UDP sockets.
+
+ttl=ttl Set the time to live value (for multicast only).
+
+connect=1|0 Initialize the UDP socket with connect(). In this case, the
+destination address can’t be changed with ff_udp_set_remote_url later.
+If the destination address isn’t known at the start, this option can
+be specified in ff_udp_set_remote_url, too.
+This allows finding out the source address for the packets with getsockname,
+and makes writes return with AVERROR(ECONNREFUSED) if "destination
+unreachable" is received.
+For receiving, this gives the benefit of only receiving packets from
+the specified peer address/port.
+
+sources=address [,address ] Only receive packets sent to the multicast group from one of the
+specified sender IP addresses.
+
+block=address [,address ] Ignore packets sent to the multicast group from the specified
+sender IP addresses.
+
+fifo_size=units Set the UDP receiving circular buffer size, expressed as a number of
+packets with size of 188 bytes. If not specified defaults to 7*4096.
+
+overrun_nonfatal=1|0 Survive in case of UDP receiving circular buffer overrun. Default
+value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+broadcast=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow UDP broadcasting.
+
+Note that broadcasting may not work properly on networks having
+a broadcast storm protection.
+
+
+
+
16.33.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to stream over UDP to a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format udp://hostname :port
+ Use ffmpeg to stream in mpegts format over UDP using 188
+sized UDP packets, using a large input buffer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f mpegts udp://hostname :port ?pkt_size=188&buffer_size=65535
+ Use ffmpeg to receive over UDP from a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i udp://[multicast-address ]:port ...
+
+
+
+
16.34 unix# TOC
+
+
Unix local socket
+
+
The required syntax for a Unix socket URL is:
+
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+timeout Timeout in ms.
+
listen Create the Unix socket in listening mode.
+
+
+
+
17 Device Options# TOC
+
+
The libavdevice library provides the same interface as
+libavformat. Namely, an input device is considered like a demuxer, and
+an output device like a muxer, and the interface and generic device
+options are the same provided by libavformat (see the ffmpeg-formats
+manual).
+
+
In addition each input or output device may support so-called private
+options, which are specific for that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the device
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
+
+
18 Input Devices# TOC
+
+
Input devices are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow to access
+the data coming from a multimedia device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported input devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-indevs".
+
+
You can disable all the input devices using the configure option
+"–disable-indevs", and selectively enable an input device using the
+option "–enable-indev=INDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-indev=INDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported input devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available input devices follows.
+
+
+
18.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libasound
+installed on your system.
+
+
This device allows capturing from an ALSA device. The name of the
+device to capture has to be an ALSA card identifier.
+
+
An ALSA identifier has the syntax:
+
+
hw:CARD [,DEV [,SUBDEV ]]
+
+
+
where the DEV and SUBDEV components are optional.
+
+
The three arguments (in order: CARD ,DEV ,SUBDEV )
+specify card number or identifier, device number and subdevice number
+(-1 means any).
+
+
To see the list of cards currently recognized by your system check the
+files /proc/asound/cards and /proc/asound/devices .
+
+
For example to capture with ffmpeg from an ALSA device with
+card id 0, you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -i hw:0 alsaout.wav
+
+
+
For more information see:
+http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/alsa-lib/pcm.html
+
+
+
18.2 avfoundation# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation input device.
+
+
AVFoundation is the currently recommended framework by Apple for streamgrabbing on OSX >= 10.7 as well as on iOS.
+The older QTKit framework has been marked deprecated since OSX version 10.7.
+
+
The input filename has to be given in the following syntax:
+
+
-i "[[VIDEO]:[AUDIO]]"
+
+
The first entry selects the video input while the latter selects the audio input.
+The stream has to be specified by the device name or the device index as shown by the device list.
+Alternatively, the video and/or audio input device can be chosen by index using the
+
+ -video_device_index <INDEX>
+
+and/or
+
+ -audio_device_index <INDEX>
+
+, overriding any
+device name or index given in the input filename.
+
+
All available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices true , listing
+all device names and corresponding indices.
+
+
There are two device name aliases:
+
+defaultSelect the AVFoundation default device of the corresponding type.
+
+noneDo not record the corresponding media type.
+This is equivalent to specifying an empty device name or index.
+
+
+
+
+
18.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation supports the following options:
+
+
+-list_devices <TRUE|FALSE> If set to true, a list of all available input devices is given showing all
+device names and indices.
+
+-video_device_index <INDEX> Specify the video device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-audio_device_index <INDEX> Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-pixel_format <FORMAT> Request the video device to use a specific pixel format.
+If the specified format is not supported, a list of available formats is given
+und the first one in this list is used instead. Available pixel formats are:
+monob, rgb555be, rgb555le, rgb565be, rgb565le, rgb24, bgr24, 0rgb, bgr0, 0bgr, rgb0,
+ bgr48be, uyvy422, yuva444p, yuva444p16le, yuv444p, yuv422p16, yuv422p10, yuv444p10,
+ yuv420p, nv12, yuyv422, gray
+
+
+
+
+
18.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of AVFoundation supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -list_devices true -i ""
+ Record video from video device 0 and audio from audio device 0 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -i "0:0" out.avi
+ Record video from video device 2 and audio from audio device 1 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -video_device_index 2 -i ":1" out.avi
+ Record video from the system default video device using the pixel format bgr0 and do not record any audio into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -pixel_format bgr0 -i "default:none" out.avi
+
+
+
+
18.3 bktr# TOC
+
+
BSD video input device.
+
+
+
18.4 dshow# TOC
+
+
Windows DirectShow input device.
+
+
DirectShow support is enabled when FFmpeg is built with the mingw-w64 project.
+Currently only audio and video devices are supported.
+
+
Multiple devices may be opened as separate inputs, but they may also be
+opened on the same input, which should improve synchronism between them.
+
+
The input name should be in the format:
+
+
+
+
where TYPE can be either audio or video ,
+and NAME is the device’s name.
+
+
+
18.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
If no options are specified, the device’s defaults are used.
+If the device does not support the requested options, it will
+fail to open.
+
+
+video_size Set the video size in the captured video.
+
+framerate Set the frame rate in the captured video.
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio.
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio.
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+
+list_options If set to true , print a list of selected device’s options
+and exit.
+
+video_device_number Set video device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+audio_device_number Set audio device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+pixel_format Select pixel format to be used by DirectShow. This may only be set when
+the video codec is not set or set to rawvideo.
+
+audio_buffer_size Set audio device buffer size in milliseconds (which can directly
+impact latency, depending on the device).
+Defaults to using the audio device’s
+default buffer size (typically some multiple of 500ms).
+Setting this value too low can degrade performance.
+See also
+http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd377582(v=vs.85).aspx
+
+
+
+
+
18.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of DirectShow supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f dshow -i dummy
+ Open video device Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+ Open second video device with name Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -video_device_number 1 -i video="Camera"
+ Open video device Camera and audio device Microphone :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera":audio="Microphone"
+ Print the list of supported options in selected device and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+
+
+
+
18.5 dv1394# TOC
+
+
Linux DV 1394 input device.
+
+
+
18.6 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer input device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
To record from the framebuffer device /dev/fb0 with
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -r 10 -i /dev/fb0 out.avi
+
+
+
You can take a single screenshot image with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -frames:v 1 -r 1 -i /dev/fb0 screenshot.jpeg
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
18.7 gdigrab# TOC
+
+
Win32 GDI-based screen capture device.
+
+
This device allows you to capture a region of the display on Windows.
+
+
There are two options for the input filename:
+
+
or
+
+
+
The first option will capture the entire desktop, or a fixed region of the
+desktop. The second option will instead capture the contents of a single
+window, regardless of its position on the screen.
+
+
For example, to grab the entire desktop using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab a 640x480 region at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -video_size vga -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab the contents of the window named "Calculator"
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i title=Calculator out.mpg
+
+
+
+
18.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. Use the value 0 to
+not draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+Note that show_region is incompatible with grabbing the contents
+of a single window.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -show_region 1 -framerate 6 -video_size cif -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -i desktop out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. The default is to capture the full screen if desktop is selected, or the full window size if title=window_title is selected.
+
+offset_x When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the left edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned to the left of your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_x value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+offset_y When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the top edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned above your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_y value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+
+
+
+
18.8 iec61883# TOC
+
+
FireWire DV/HDV input device using libiec61883.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need libiec61883, libraw1394 and
+libavc1394 installed on your system. Use the configure option
+--enable-libiec61883 to compile with the device enabled.
+
+
The iec61883 capture device supports capturing from a video device
+connected via IEEE1394 (FireWire), using libiec61883 and the new Linux
+FireWire stack (juju). This is the default DV/HDV input method in Linux
+Kernel 2.6.37 and later, since the old FireWire stack was removed.
+
+
Specify the FireWire port to be used as input file, or "auto"
+to choose the first port connected.
+
+
+
18.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+dvtype Override autodetection of DV/HDV. This should only be used if auto
+detection does not work, or if usage of a different device type
+should be prohibited. Treating a DV device as HDV (or vice versa) will
+not work and result in undefined behavior.
+The values auto , dv and hdv are supported.
+
+dvbuffer Set maximum size of buffer for incoming data, in frames. For DV, this
+is an exact value. For HDV, it is not frame exact, since HDV does
+not have a fixed frame size.
+
+dvguid Select the capture device by specifying it’s GUID. Capturing will only
+be performed from the specified device and fails if no device with the
+given GUID is found. This is useful to select the input if multiple
+devices are connected at the same time.
+Look at /sys/bus/firewire/devices to find out the GUIDs.
+
+
+
+
+
18.8.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Grab and show the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device.
+
+
ffplay -f iec61883 -i auto
+ Grab and record the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device,
+using a packet buffer of 100000 packets if the source is HDV.
+
+
ffmpeg -f iec61883 -i auto -hdvbuffer 100000 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
18.9 jack# TOC
+
+
JACK input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libjack
+installed on your system.
+
+
A JACK input device creates one or more JACK writable clients, one for
+each audio channel, with name client_name :input_N , where
+client_name is the name provided by the application, and N
+is a number which identifies the channel.
+Each writable client will send the acquired data to the FFmpeg input
+device.
+
+
Once you have created one or more JACK readable clients, you need to
+connect them to one or more JACK writable clients.
+
+
To connect or disconnect JACK clients you can use the jack_connect
+and jack_disconnect programs, or do it through a graphical interface,
+for example with qjackctl.
+
+
To list the JACK clients and their properties you can invoke the command
+jack_lsp.
+
+
Follows an example which shows how to capture a JACK readable client
+with ffmpeg.
+
+
# Create a JACK writable client with name "ffmpeg".
+$ ffmpeg -f jack -i ffmpeg -y out.wav
+
+# Start the sample jack_metro readable client.
+$ jack_metro -b 120 -d 0.2 -f 4000
+
+# List the current JACK clients.
+$ jack_lsp -c
+system:capture_1
+system:capture_2
+system:playback_1
+system:playback_2
+ffmpeg:input_1
+metro:120_bpm
+
+# Connect metro to the ffmpeg writable client.
+$ jack_connect metro:120_bpm ffmpeg:input_1
+
+
+
For more information read:
+http://jackaudio.org/
+
+
+
18.10 lavfi# TOC
+
+
Libavfilter input virtual device.
+
+
This input device reads data from the open output pads of a libavfilter
+filtergraph.
+
+
For each filtergraph open output, the input device will create a
+corresponding stream which is mapped to the generated output. Currently
+only video data is supported. The filtergraph is specified through the
+option graph .
+
+
+
18.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+graph Specify the filtergraph to use as input. Each video open output must be
+labelled by a unique string of the form "outN ", where N is a
+number starting from 0 corresponding to the mapped input stream
+generated by the device.
+The first unlabelled output is automatically assigned to the "out0"
+label, but all the others need to be specified explicitly.
+
+The suffix "+subcc" can be appended to the output label to create an extra
+stream with the closed captions packets attached to that output
+(experimental; only for EIA-608 / CEA-708 for now).
+The subcc streams are created after all the normal streams, in the order of
+the corresponding stream.
+For example, if there is "out19+subcc", "out7+subcc" and up to "out42", the
+stream #43 is subcc for stream #7 and stream #44 is subcc for stream #19.
+
+If not specified defaults to the filename specified for the input
+device.
+
+graph_file Set the filename of the filtergraph to be read and sent to the other
+filters. Syntax of the filtergraph is the same as the one specified by
+the option graph .
+
+
+
+
+
18.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create a color video stream and play it back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "color=c=pink [out0]" dummy
+ As the previous example, but use filename for specifying the graph
+description, and omit the "out0" label:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi color=c=pink
+ Create three different video test filtered sources and play them:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "testsrc [out0]; testsrc,hflip [out1]; testsrc,negate [out2]" test3
+ Read an audio stream from a file using the amovie source and play it
+back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "amovie=test.wav"
+ Read an audio stream and a video stream and play it back with
+ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "movie=test.avi[out0];amovie=test.wav[out1]"
+ Dump decoded frames to images and closed captions to a file (experimental):
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=test.ts[out0+subcc]" -map v frame%08d.png -map s -c copy -f rawvideo subcc.bin
+
+
+
+
18.11 libcdio# TOC
+
+
Audio-CD input device based on cdio.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libcdio
+installed on your system. Requires the configure option
+--enable-libcdio.
+
+
This device allows playing and grabbing from an Audio-CD.
+
+
For example to copy with ffmpeg the entire Audio-CD in /dev/sr0,
+you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f libcdio -i /dev/sr0 cd.wav
+
+
+
+
18.12 libdc1394# TOC
+
+
IIDC1394 input device, based on libdc1394 and libraw1394.
+
+
Requires the configure option --enable-libdc1394.
+
+
+
18.13 openal# TOC
+
+
The OpenAL input device provides audio capture on all systems with a
+working OpenAL 1.1 implementation.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration, you need OpenAL
+headers and libraries installed on your system, and need to configure
+FFmpeg with --enable-openal.
+
+
OpenAL headers and libraries should be provided as part of your OpenAL
+implementation, or as an additional download (an SDK). Depending on your
+installation you may need to specify additional flags via the
+--extra-cflags and --extra-ldflags for allowing the build
+system to locate the OpenAL headers and libraries.
+
+
An incomplete list of OpenAL implementations follows:
+
+
+Creative The official Windows implementation, providing hardware acceleration
+with supported devices and software fallback.
+See http://openal.org/ .
+
OpenAL Soft Portable, open source (LGPL) software implementation. Includes
+backends for the most common sound APIs on the Windows, Linux,
+Solaris, and BSD operating systems.
+See http://kcat.strangesoft.net/openal.html .
+
Apple OpenAL is part of Core Audio, the official Mac OS X Audio interface.
+See http://developer.apple.com/technologies/mac/audio-and-video.html
+
+
+
This device allows one to capture from an audio input device handled
+through OpenAL.
+
+
You need to specify the name of the device to capture in the provided
+filename. If the empty string is provided, the device will
+automatically select the default device. You can get the list of the
+supported devices by using the option list_devices .
+
+
+
18.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio. Only the values
+1 (monaural) and 2 (stereo) are currently supported.
+Defaults to 2 .
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio. Only the values
+8 and 16 are currently supported. Defaults to
+16 .
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+Defaults to 44.1k .
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
18.13.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Print the list of OpenAL supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f openal -i dummy out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the OpenAL device DR-BT101 via PulseAudio :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the default device (note the empty string ” as filename):
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i '' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from two devices simultaneously, writing to two different files,
+within the same ffmpeg command:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out1.ogg -f openal -i 'ALSA Default' out2.ogg
+
+
Note: not all OpenAL implementations support multiple simultaneous capture -
+try the latest OpenAL Soft if the above does not work.
+
+
+
18.14 oss# TOC
+
+
Open Sound System input device.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the OSS input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/dsp .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/dsp using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
For more information about OSS see:
+http://manuals.opensound.com/usersguide/dsp.html
+
+
+
18.15 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio input device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is a source device or the
+string "default"
+
+
To list the PulseAudio source devices and their properties you can invoke
+the command pactl list sources.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org .
+
+
+
18.15.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is "record".
+
+sample_rate Specify the samplerate in Hz, by default 48kHz is used.
+
+channels Specify the channels in use, by default 2 (stereo) is set.
+
+frame_size Specify the number of bytes per frame, by default it is set to 1024.
+
+fragment_size Specify the minimal buffering fragment in PulseAudio, it will affect the
+audio latency. By default it is unset.
+
+
+
+
18.15.2 Examples# TOC
+
Record a stream from default device:
+
+
ffmpeg -f pulse -i default /tmp/pulse.wav
+
+
+
+
18.16 qtkit# TOC
+
+
QTKit input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is parsed to contain either a device name or index.
+The device index can also be given by using -video_device_index.
+A given device index will override any given device name.
+If the desired device consists of numbers only, use -video_device_index to identify it.
+The default device will be chosen if an empty string or the device name "default" is given.
+The available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "0" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -video_device_index 0 -i "" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "default" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -list_devices true -i ""
+
+
+
+
18.17 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libsndio
+installed on your system.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the sndio input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/audio0 .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/audio0 using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f sndio -i /dev/audio0 /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
+
18.18 video4linux2, v4l2# TOC
+
+
Video4Linux2 input video device.
+
+
"v4l2" can be used as alias for "video4linux2".
+
+
If FFmpeg is built with v4l-utils support (by using the
+--enable-libv4l2 configure option), it is possible to use it with the
+-use_libv4l2 input device option.
+
+
The name of the device to grab is a file device node, usually Linux
+systems tend to automatically create such nodes when the device
+(e.g. an USB webcam) is plugged into the system, and has a name of the
+kind /dev/videoN , where N is a number associated to
+the device.
+
+
Video4Linux2 devices usually support a limited set of
+width xheight sizes and frame rates. You can check which are
+supported using -list_formats all for Video4Linux2 devices.
+Some devices, like TV cards, support one or more standards. It is possible
+to list all the supported standards using -list_standards all.
+
+
The time base for the timestamps is 1 microsecond. Depending on the kernel
+version and configuration, the timestamps may be derived from the real time
+clock (origin at the Unix Epoch) or the monotonic clock (origin usually at
+boot time, unaffected by NTP or manual changes to the clock). The
+-timestamps abs or -ts abs option can be used to force
+conversion into the real time clock.
+
+
Some usage examples of the video4linux2 device with ffmpeg
+and ffplay:
+
+ Grab and show the input of a video4linux2 device:
+
+
ffplay -f video4linux2 -framerate 30 -video_size hd720 /dev/video0
+ Grab and record the input of a video4linux2 device, leave the
+frame rate and size as previously set:
+
+
ffmpeg -f video4linux2 -input_format mjpeg -i /dev/video0 out.mpeg
+
+
+
For more information about Video4Linux, check http://linuxtv.org/ .
+
+
+
18.18.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+standard Set the standard. Must be the name of a supported standard. To get a
+list of the supported standards, use the list_standards
+option.
+
+channel Set the input channel number. Default to -1, which means using the
+previously selected channel.
+
+video_size Set the video frame size. The argument must be a string in the form
+WIDTH xHEIGHT or a valid size abbreviation.
+
+pixel_format Select the pixel format (only valid for raw video input).
+
+input_format Set the preferred pixel format (for raw video) or a codec name.
+This option allows one to select the input format, when several are
+available.
+
+framerate Set the preferred video frame rate.
+
+list_formats List available formats (supported pixel formats, codecs, and frame
+sizes) and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all available (compressed and non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘raw ’
+Show only raw video (non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘compressed ’
+Show only compressed formats.
+
+
+list_standards List supported standards and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all supported standards.
+
+
+timestamps, ts Set type of timestamps for grabbed frames.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘default ’
+Use timestamps from the kernel.
+
+‘abs ’
+Use absolute timestamps (wall clock).
+
+‘mono2abs ’
+Force conversion from monotonic to absolute timestamps.
+
+
+Default value is default.
+
+
+
+
18.19 vfwcap# TOC
+
+
VfW (Video for Windows) capture input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is the capture driver number, ranging from
+0 to 9. You may use "list" as filename to print a list of drivers. Any
+other filename will be interpreted as device number 0.
+
+
+
18.20 x11grab# TOC
+
+
X11 video input device.
+
+
Depends on X11, Xext, and Xfixes. Requires the configure option
+--enable-x11grab.
+
+
This device allows one to capture a region of an X11 display.
+
+
The filename passed as input has the syntax:
+
+
[hostname ]:display_number .screen_number [+x_offset ,y_offset ]
+
+
+
hostname :display_number .screen_number specifies the
+X11 display name of the screen to grab from. hostname can be
+omitted, and defaults to "localhost". The environment variable
+DISPLAY contains the default display name.
+
+
x_offset and y_offset specify the offsets of the grabbed
+area with respect to the top-left border of the X11 screen. They
+default to 0.
+
+
Check the X11 documentation (e.g. man X) for more detailed information.
+
+
Use the dpyinfo program for getting basic information about the
+properties of your X11 display (e.g. grep for "name" or "dimensions").
+
+
For example to grab from :0.0 using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
18.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. A value of 0 specify
+not to draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+follow_mouse Make the grabbed area follow the mouse. The argument can be
+centered or a number of pixels PIXELS .
+
+When it is specified with "centered", the grabbing region follows the mouse
+pointer and keeps the pointer at the center of region; otherwise, the region
+follows only when the mouse pointer reaches within PIXELS (greater than
+zero) to the edge of region.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ To follow only when the mouse pointer reaches within 100 pixels to edge:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse 100 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+ With follow_mouse :
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. Default value is vga.
+
+use_shm Use the MIT-SHM extension for shared memory. Default value is 1.
+It may be necessary to disable it for remote displays.
+
+
+
+
18.21 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink input device provides capture capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz and the number
+of channels currently is limited to 2 (stereo).
+
+
+
18.21.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
18.21.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List input devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_devices 1 -i dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_formats 1 -i 'Intensity Pro'
+ Capture video clip at 1080i50 (format 11):
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -i 'Intensity Pro@11' -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
+
+
+
+
+
19 Resampler Options# TOC
+
+
The audio resampler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, option =value for the aresample filter,
+by setting the value explicitly in the
+SwrContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API for
+programmatic use.
+
+
+ich, in_channel_count Set the number of input channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+in_channel_layout is set.
+
+och, out_channel_count Set the number of output channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+out_channel_layout is set.
+
+uch, used_channel_count Set the number of used input channels. Default value is 0. This option is
+only used for special remapping.
+
+isr, in_sample_rate Set the input sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+osr, out_sample_rate Set the output sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+isf, in_sample_fmt Specify the input sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+osf, out_sample_fmt Specify the output sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+tsf, internal_sample_fmt Set the internal sample format. Default value is none.
+This will automatically be chosen when it is not explicitly set.
+
+icl, in_channel_layout ocl, out_channel_layout Set the input/output channel layout.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+clev, center_mix_level Set the center mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must be
+in the interval [-32,32].
+
+slev, surround_mix_level Set the surround mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+lfe_mix_level Set LFE mix into non LFE level. It is used when there is a LFE input but no
+LFE output. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+rmvol, rematrix_volume Set rematrix volume. Default value is 1.0.
+
+rematrix_maxval Set maximum output value for rematrixing.
+This can be used to prevent clipping vs. preventing volumn reduction
+A value of 1.0 prevents cliping.
+
+flags, swr_flags Set flags used by the converter. Default value is 0.
+
+It supports the following individual flags:
+
+res force resampling, this flag forces resampling to be used even when the
+input and output sample rates match.
+
+
+dither_scale Set the dither scale. Default value is 1.
+
+dither_method Set dither method. Default value is 0.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘rectangular ’
+select rectangular dither
+
‘triangular ’
+select triangular dither
+
‘triangular_hp ’
+select triangular dither with high pass
+
‘lipshitz ’
+select lipshitz noise shaping dither
+
‘shibata ’
+select shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘low_shibata ’
+select low shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘high_shibata ’
+select high shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘f_weighted ’
+select f-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘modified_e_weighted ’
+select modified-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘improved_e_weighted ’
+select improved-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
+
+
+resampler Set resampling engine. Default value is swr.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘swr ’
+select the native SW Resampler; filter options precision and cheby are not
+applicable in this case.
+
‘soxr ’
+select the SoX Resampler (where available); compensation, and filter options
+filter_size, phase_shift, filter_type & kaiser_beta, are not applicable in this
+case.
+
+
+filter_size For swr only, set resampling filter size, default value is 32.
+
+phase_shift For swr only, set resampling phase shift, default value is 10, and must be in
+the interval [0,30].
+
+linear_interp Use Linear Interpolation if set to 1, default value is 0.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency (swr: 6dB point; soxr: 0dB point) ratio; must be a float
+value between 0 and 1. Default value is 0.97 with swr, and 0.91 with soxr
+(which, with a sample-rate of 44100, preserves the entire audio band to 20kHz).
+
+precision For soxr only, the precision in bits to which the resampled signal will be
+calculated. The default value of 20 (which, with suitable dithering, is
+appropriate for a destination bit-depth of 16) gives SoX’s ’High Quality’; a
+value of 28 gives SoX’s ’Very High Quality’.
+
+cheby For soxr only, selects passband rolloff none (Chebyshev) & higher-precision
+approximation for ’irrational’ ratios. Default value is 0.
+
+async For swr only, simple 1 parameter audio sync to timestamps using stretching,
+squeezing, filling and trimming. Setting this to 1 will enable filling and
+trimming, larger values represent the maximum amount in samples that the data
+may be stretched or squeezed for each second.
+Default value is 0, thus no compensation is applied to make the samples match
+the audio timestamps.
+
+first_pts For swr only, assume the first pts should be this value. The time unit is 1 / sample rate.
+This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
+assumption is made about the first frame’s expected pts, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative pts due to encoder delay.
+
+min_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger stretching/squeezing/filling or trimming of the
+data to make it match the timestamps. The default is that
+stretching/squeezing/filling and trimming is disabled
+(min_comp = FLT_MAX).
+
+min_hard_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger adding/dropping samples to make it match the
+timestamps. This option effectively is a threshold to select between
+hard (trim/fill) and soft (squeeze/stretch) compensation. Note that
+all compensation is by default disabled through min_comp .
+The default is 0.1.
+
+comp_duration For swr only, set duration (in seconds) over which data is stretched/squeezed
+to make it match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value,
+default value is 1.0.
+
+max_soft_comp For swr only, set maximum factor by which data is stretched/squeezed to make it
+match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value, default value
+is 0.
+
+matrix_encoding Select matrixed stereo encoding.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+select none
+
‘dolby ’
+select Dolby
+
‘dplii ’
+select Dolby Pro Logic II
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+filter_type For swr only, select resampling filter type. This only affects resampling
+operations.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘cubic ’
+select cubic
+
‘blackman_nuttall ’
+select Blackman Nuttall Windowed Sinc
+
‘kaiser ’
+select Kaiser Windowed Sinc
+
+
+kaiser_beta For swr only, set Kaiser Window Beta value. Must be an integer in the
+interval [2,16], default value is 9.
+
+output_sample_bits For swr only, set number of used output sample bits for dithering. Must be an integer in the
+interval [0,64], default value is 0, which means it’s not used.
+
+
+
+
+
20 Scaler Options# TOC
+
+
The video scaler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools. For programmatic use, they can be set explicitly in the
+SwsContext options or through the libavutil/opt.h API.
+
+
+
+
+sws_flags Set the scaler flags. This is also used to set the scaling
+algorithm. Only a single algorithm should be selected.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘fast_bilinear ’
+Select fast bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bilinear ’
+Select bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicubic ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm.
+
+‘experimental ’
+Select experimental scaling algorithm.
+
+‘neighbor ’
+Select nearest neighbor rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘area ’
+Select averaging area rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicublin ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm for the luma component, bilinear for
+chroma components.
+
+‘gauss ’
+Select Gaussian rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘sinc ’
+Select sinc rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘lanczos ’
+Select lanczos rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘spline ’
+Select natural bicubic spline rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘print_info ’
+Enable printing/debug logging.
+
+‘accurate_rnd ’
+Enable accurate rounding.
+
+‘full_chroma_int ’
+Enable full chroma interpolation.
+
+‘full_chroma_inp ’
+Select full chroma input.
+
+‘bitexact ’
+Enable bitexact output.
+
+
+srcw Set source width.
+
+srch Set source height.
+
+dstw Set destination width.
+
+dsth Set destination height.
+
+src_format Set source pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+dst_format Set destination pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+src_range Select source range.
+
+dst_range Select destination range.
+
+param0, param1 Set scaling algorithm parameters. The specified values are specific of
+some scaling algorithms and ignored by others. The specified values
+are floating point number values.
+
+sws_dither Set the dithering algorithm. Accepts one of the following
+values. Default value is ‘auto ’.
+
+
+‘auto ’
+automatic choice
+
+‘none ’
+no dithering
+
+‘bayer ’
+bayer dither
+
+‘ed ’
+error diffusion dither
+
+‘a_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using addition
+
+‘x_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using xor (more random/less apparent patterning that
+a_dither).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
21 Filtering Introduction# TOC
+
+
Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
+
+
In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
+outputs.
+To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
+following filtergraph.
+
+
+
[main]
+input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
+ | ^
+ |[tmp] [flip]|
+ +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
+
+
+
This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
+stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
+back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
+following command to achieve this:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
+
+
+
The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
+onto the bottom half of the output video.
+
+
Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
+linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
+crop,vflip are in one linear chain, split and
+overlay are separately in another. The points where the linear
+chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
+example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
+the labels [main] and [tmp] .
+
+
The stream sent to the second output of split , labelled as
+[tmp] , is processed through the crop filter, which crops
+away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
+overlay filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
+split filter (which was labelled as [main] ), and overlay on its
+lower half the output generated by the crop,vflip filterchain.
+
+
Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
+after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
+by a colon.
+
+
There exist so-called source filters that do not have an
+audio/video input, and sink filters that will not have audio/video
+output.
+
+
+
+
22 graph2dot# TOC
+
+
The graph2dot program included in the FFmpeg tools
+directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
+corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
+
+
Invoke the command:
+
+
+
to see how to use graph2dot .
+
+
You can then pass the dot description to the dot program (from
+the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
+of the filtergraph.
+
+
For example the sequence of commands:
+
+
echo GRAPH_DESCRIPTION | \
+tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
+dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
+display graph.png
+
+
+
can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
+described by the GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string. Note that this string must be
+a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
+For example if your command line is of the form:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
+
+
your GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string will need to be of the form:
+
+
nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
+
+
you may also need to set the nullsrc parameters and add a format
+filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
+
+
+
+
23 Filtergraph description# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
+cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
+filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
+filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
+side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
+
+
Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
+registered in the application, which defines the features and the
+number of input and output pads of the filter.
+
+
A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
+output pads is called a "sink".
+
+
+
23.1 Filtergraph syntax# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
+recognized by the -filter /-vf and -filter_complex
+options in ffmpeg and -vf in ffplay, and by the
+avfilter_graph_parse()/avfilter_graph_parse2() functions defined in
+libavfilter/avfilter.h .
+
+
A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
+connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
+represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
+
+
A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
+filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
+descriptions.
+
+
A filter is represented by a string of the form:
+[in_link_1 ]...[in_link_N ]filter_name =arguments [out_link_1 ]...[out_link_M ]
+
+
filter_name is the name of the filter class of which the
+described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
+the filter classes registered in the program.
+The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
+"=arguments ".
+
+
arguments is a string which contains the parameters used to
+initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of key=value pairs.
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of value . In this case, the keys are assumed to be
+the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the fade filter
+declares three options in this order – type , start_frame and
+nb_frames . Then the parameter list in:0:30 means that the value
+in is assigned to the option type , 0 to
+start_frame and 30 to nb_frames .
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of mixed direct value and long key=value
+pairs. The direct value must precede the key=value pairs, and
+follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
+key=value pairs can be set in any preferred order.
+
+
+
+
If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the format filter
+takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
+’|’.
+
+
The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "’" as initial
+and ending mark, and the character ’\’ for escaping the characters
+within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
+terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
+"[]=;,") is encountered.
+
+
The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
+followed by a list of link labels.
+A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
+or input pad. The preceding labels in_link_1
+... in_link_N , are associated to the filter input pads,
+the following labels out_link_1 ... out_link_M , are
+associated to the output pads.
+
+
When two link labels with the same name are found in the
+filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
+created.
+
+
If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
+unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
+For example in the filterchain
+
+
nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
+
+
the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
+instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
+"L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
+output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
+which are both unlabelled.
+
+
In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
+pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
+filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
+
+
Libavfilter will automatically insert scale filters where format
+conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
+for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
+sws_flags=flags ;
+to the filtergraph description.
+
+
Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
+
+
NAME ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
+LINKLABEL ::= "[" NAME "]"
+LINKLABELS ::= LINKLABEL [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTER_ARGUMENTS ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
+FILTER ::= [LINKLABELS ] NAME ["=" FILTER_ARGUMENTS ] [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTERCHAIN ::= FILTER [,FILTERCHAIN ]
+FILTERGRAPH ::= [sws_flags=flags ;] FILTERCHAIN [;FILTERGRAPH ]
+
+
+
+
23.2 Notes on filtergraph escaping# TOC
+
+
Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
+escaping. See (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual for more
+information about the employed escaping procedure.
+
+
A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
+value, which may contain the special character : used to
+separate values, or one of the escaping characters \'.
+
+
A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
+may contain the escaping characters \' or the special
+characters [],; used by the filtergraph description.
+
+
Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
+need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
+characters contained within it.
+
+
For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
+the drawtext filter description text value:
+
+
this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
This string contains the ' special escaping character, and the
+: special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
+
+
text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
+description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
+filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
+
+
drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
+
+
(note that in addition to the \' escaping special characters,
+also , needs to be escaped).
+
+
Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
+filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
+escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
+\ is special and needs to be escaped with another \, the
+previous string will finally result in:
+
+
-vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
+
+
+
+
24 Timeline editing# TOC
+
+
Some filters support a generic enable option. For the filters
+supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
+evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
+the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
+next filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The expression accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+‘n ’
+sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
+
+‘pos ’
+the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+‘w ’
+‘h ’
+width and height of the input frame if video
+
+
+
Additionally, these filters support an enable command that can be used
+to re-define the expression.
+
+
Like any other filtering option, the enable option follows the same
+rules.
+
+
For example, to enable a blur filter (smartblur ) from 10 seconds to 3
+minutes, and a curves filter starting at 3 seconds:
+
+
smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
+curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
+
+
+
+
+
25 Audio Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
+
+
+
25.1 adelay# TOC
+
+
Delay one or more audio channels.
+
+
Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+delays Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by ’|’.
+At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
+Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
+smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
+
+
+
+
25.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
+the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
+
+
+
+
+
25.2 aecho# TOC
+
+
Apply echoing to the input audio.
+
+
Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
+(and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
+effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
+sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
+original signal and the reflection is the delay, and the
+loudness of the reflected signal is the decay.
+Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.6.
+
+out_gain Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.3.
+
+delays Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
+separated by ’|’. Allowed range for each delay is (0 - 90000.0].
+Default is 1000.
+
+decays Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by ’|’.
+Allowed range for each decay is (0 - 1.0].
+Default is 0.5.
+
+
+
+
25.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
+
+
+ If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
+
+
+ A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
+ Same as above but with one more mountain:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
+
+
+
+
25.3 aeval# TOC
+
+
Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
+
+
This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
+which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
+the number of input channels is greater than the number of
+expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
+output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
+specified by the number of expressions. If set to ‘same ’, it will
+use by default the same input channel layout.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+ch channel number of the current expression
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
+
+nb_in_channels nb_out_channels input and output number of channels
+
+val(CH) the value of input channel with number CH
+
+
+
Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
+dedicated filter.
+
+
+
25.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Half volume:
+
+
aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
+ Invert phase of the second channel:
+
+
+
+
+
25.4 afade# TOC
+
+
Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+type, t Specify the effect type, can be either in for fade-in, or
+out for a fade-out effect. Default is in.
+
+start_sample, ss Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
+effect. Default is 0.
+
+nb_samples, ns Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
+the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
+
+start_time, st Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
+The value must be specified as a time duration; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+If set this option is used instead of start_sample .
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence.
+By default the duration is determined by nb_samples .
+If set this option is used instead of nb_samples .
+
+curve Set curve for fade transition.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+tri select triangular, linear slope (default)
+
qsin select quarter of sine wave
+
hsin select half of sine wave
+
esin select exponential sine wave
+
log select logarithmic
+
par select inverted parabola
+
qua select quadratic
+
cub select cubic
+
squ select square root
+
cbr select cubic root
+
+
+
+
+
25.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
+
+
+ Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
+
+
afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
+
+
+
+
25.5 aformat# TOC
+
+
Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
+negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+sample_fmts A ’|’-separated list of requested sample formats.
+
+sample_rates A ’|’-separated list of requested sample rates.
+
+channel_layouts A ’|’-separated list of requested channel layouts.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+
+
If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
+
+
Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
+
+
aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
+
+
+
+
25.6 allpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
+frequency , and filter-width width .
+An all-pass filter changes the audio’s frequency to phase relationship
+without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
25.7 amerge# TOC
+
+
Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+inputs Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
+
+
+
+
If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
+the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
+will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
+disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
+the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
+the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
+channels.
+
+
For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
+is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
+following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
+first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
+
+
On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
+in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
+arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
+
+
All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
+
+
If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
+shortest.
+
+
+
25.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
+
+
amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
+ Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in input.mkv :
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
+
+
+
+
25.8 amix# TOC
+
+
Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
+
+
Note that this filter only supports float samples (the amerge
+and pan audio filters support many formats). If the amix
+input has integer samples then aresample will be automatically
+inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
+
+
For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
+
+
will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
+first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+duration How to determine the end-of-stream.
+
+longest The duration of the longest input. (default)
+
+shortest The duration of the shortest input.
+
+first The duration of the first input.
+
+
+
+dropout_transition The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
+stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
25.9 anull# TOC
+
+
Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
25.10 apad# TOC
+
+
Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
+
+
This can be used together with ffmpeg -shortest to
+extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+packet_size Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
+
+pad_len Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
+value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
+exclusive with whole_len .
+
+whole_len Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
+the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
+the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
+with pad_len .
+
+
+
If neither the pad_len nor the whole_len option is
+set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
+indefinitely.
+
+
+
25.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
+
+
+ Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
+the input with silence if required:
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
+video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
+until the end in the output file when using the shortest
+option:
+
+
ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
25.11 aphaser# TOC
+
Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
+
+
A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
+The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
+
+out_gain Set output gain. Default is 0.74
+
+delay Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
+
+decay Set decay. Default is 0.4.
+
+speed Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
+
+type Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘triangular, t ’
+‘sinusoidal, s ’
+
+
+
+
+
25.12 aresample# TOC
+
+
Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
+libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
+automatically convert between its input and output.
+
+
This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
+the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
+timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
+
+
The filter accepts the syntax
+[sample_rate :]resampler_options , where sample_rate
+expresses a sample rate and resampler_options is a list of
+key =value pairs, separated by ":". See the
+ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
+
+
+
25.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
+
+
+ Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
+samples per second compensation:
+
+
+
+
+
25.13 asetnsamples# TOC
+
+
Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
+
+
The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
+the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
+signal its end.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+nb_out_samples, n Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
+intended as the number of samples per each channel .
+Default value is 1024.
+
+pad, p If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
+that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
+previous ones. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
+disable padding for the last frame, use:
+
+
asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
+
+
+
+
25.14 asetrate# TOC
+
+
Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
+This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sample_rate, r Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
+
+
+
+
25.15 ashowinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
+The input audio is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
+depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/sample_rate .
+
+pts_time The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
+
+pos position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
+
+fmt The sample format.
+
+chlayout The channel layout.
+
+rate The sample rate for the audio frame.
+
+nb_samples The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
+audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
+
+plane_checksums A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
+
+
+
+
25.16 astats# TOC
+
+
Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
+Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
+where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+length Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
+Default is 0.05 (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is [0.1 - 10].
+
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+DC offset Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
+
+Min level Minimal sample level.
+
+Max level Maximal sample level.
+
+Peak level dB RMS level dB Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
+
+RMS peak dB RMS trough dB Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
+
+Crest factor Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
+
+Flat factor Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
+(i.e. either Min level or Max level ).
+
+Peak count Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
+Min level or Max level .
+
+
+
+
25.17 astreamsync# TOC
+
+
Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set the expression deciding which stream should be
+forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
+the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
+the following variables:
+
+
+b1 b2 number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
+
s1 s2 number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
+
t1 t2 current timestamp of each stream
+
+
+The default value is t1-t2, which means to always forward the stream
+that has a smaller timestamp.
+
+
+
+
25.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Stress-test amerge by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
+input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
+
+
amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
+[a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
+[a2] [b2] amerge
+
+
+
+
25.18 asyncts# TOC
+
+
Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
+dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
+
+
This filter is not built by default, please use aresample to do squeezing/stretching.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+compensate Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
+by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
+
+min_delta The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
+adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
+sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
+
+max_comp The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
+The default value is 500.
+
+first_pts Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
+rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
+no assumption is made about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
+
+
+
+
+
25.19 atempo# TOC
+
+
Adjust audio tempo.
+
+
The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
+specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
+be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
+
+
+
25.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
+
+
+ To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
+
+
+
+
+
25.20 atrim# TOC
+
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
+sample with the timestamp start will be the first sample in the output.
+
+end Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
+audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be
+the last sample in the output.
+
+start_pts Same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
+instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts Same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
+of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_sample The number of the first sample that should be output.
+
+end_sample The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
+samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
+give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
+zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
+to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
+atrim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
+ Keep only the first 1000 samples:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
+
+
+
+
25.21 bandpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width.
+The csg option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
+instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+csg Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
25.22 bandreject# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width .
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
25.23 bass# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
+(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 100 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
25.24 biquad# TOC
+
+
Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
+Where b0 , b1 , b2 and a0 , a1 , a2
+are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
+
+
+
25.25 bs2b# TOC
+
Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
+stereo audio records.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+profile Pre-defined crossfeed level.
+
+default Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
+
+cmoy Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
+
+jmeier Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
+
+
+
+fcut Cut frequency (in Hz).
+
+feed Feed level (in Hz).
+
+
+
+
+
25.26 channelmap# TOC
+
+
Remap input channels to new locations.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the output stream.
+
+map Map channels from input to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the in_channel -out_channel in_channel form. in_channel can be either the name of the input
+channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
+out_channel is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
+channel layout. If out_channel is not given then it is implicitly an
+index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
+
+
+
If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
+output channels, preserving indices.
+
+
For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
+
+
will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
+the input.
+
+
To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC’s native channel order
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
+
+
+
+
25.27 channelsplit# TOC
+
+
Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
+
+
+
For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
+
+
will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
+the left channel and the other the right channel.
+
+
Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
+'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
+-map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
+front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
+side_right.wav
+
+
+
+
25.28 compand# TOC
+
Compress or expand the audio’s dynamic range.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+attacks decays A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
+of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. attacks refers to
+increase of volume and decays refers to decrease of volume. For most
+situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
+shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
+loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
+a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
+
+points A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
+maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
+the following syntax: x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|.... or
+x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
+does not have to be monotonically rising. The point 0/0 is assumed but
+may be overridden (by 0/out-dBn). Typical values for the transfer
+function are -70/-70|-60/-20.
+
+soft-knee Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
+
+gain Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
+function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
+It defaults to 0.
+
+volume Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
+starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
+example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
+companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
+quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
+
+delay Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
+delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
+approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
+operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
+
25.28.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
+noisy environment:
+
+
compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
+ A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
+ Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
+than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
+
+
+
+
25.29 earwax# TOC
+
+
Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
+
+
This filter adds ‘cues’ to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
+so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
+inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
+the listener (standard for speakers).
+
+
Ported from SoX.
+
+
+
25.30 equalizer# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
+filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
+be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
+filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
+
+
In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
+be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+gain, g Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+
+
+
25.30.1 Examples# TOC
+
+ Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
+ Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
+
+
+
+
25.31 flanger# TOC
+
Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+delay Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
+
+depth Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
+
+regen Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
+Default value is 0.
+
+width Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 71.
+
+speed Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
+
+shape Set swept wave shape, can be triangular or sinusoidal .
+Default value is sinusoidal .
+
+phase Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 25.
+
+interp Set delay-line interpolation, linear or quadratic .
+Default is linear .
+
+
+
+
25.32 highpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
25.33 join# TOC
+
+
Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
+
+channel_layout The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
+
+map Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the input_idx .in_channel -out_channel input_idx is the 0-based index of the input stream. in_channel
+can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
+index in the specified input stream. out_channel is the name of the output
+channel.
+
+
+
The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
+explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
+and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
+
+
Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
+'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
+out
+
+
+
+
25.34 ladspa# TOC
+
+
Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer’s Simple Plugin API) plugin.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-ladspa.
+
+
+file, f Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
+variable LADSPA_PATH is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
+each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
+LADSPA_PATH, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
+this order: HOME/.ladspa/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/ladspa/ ,
+/usr/lib/ladspa/ .
+
+plugin, p Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
+one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
+will list all available plugins within the specified library.
+
+controls, c Set the ’|’ separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
+values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
+threshold or gain).
+Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
+c0=value0 |c1=value1 |c2=value2 |..., where
+valuei is the value set on the i -th control.
+If controls is set to help, all available controls and
+their valid ranges are printed.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
+zero inputs.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
+is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
+as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+
+
+
+
25.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
+
+
+ List all available controls and their valid ranges for vcf_notch
+plugin from VCF library:
+
+
ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
+ Simulate low quality audio equipment using Computer Music Toolkit (CMT)
+plugin library:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
+ Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
+(Tom’s Audio Processing plugins):
+
+
ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
+ Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
+ Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin C* Click - Metronome from the
+C* Audio Plugin Suite (CAPS) library:
+
+
ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
+ Apply C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser effect:
+
+
ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
+
+
+
+
25.34.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+cN Modify the N -th control value.
+
+If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
+
+
+
+
25.35 lowpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
25.36 pan# TOC
+
+
Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
+channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
+
+
This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
+stream.
+
+
The filter accepts parameters of the form:
+"l |outdef |outdef |..."
+
+
+l output channel layout or number of channels
+
+outdef output channel specification, of the form:
+"out_name =[gain *]in_name [+[gain *]in_name ...]"
+
+out_name output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
+number (c0, c1, etc.)
+
+gain multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
+
+in_name input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
+named and numbered input channels
+
+
+
If the ‘=’ in a channel specification is replaced by ‘<’, then the gains for
+that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
+avoiding clipping noise.
+
+
+
25.36.1 Mixing examples# TOC
+
+
For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
+factor for the left channel:
+
+
pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
+
+
+
A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
+7-channels surround:
+
+
pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
+
+
+
Note that ffmpeg integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
+that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
+needs.
+
+
+
25.36.2 Remapping examples# TOC
+
+
The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
+
+
+ gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
+ only one input per channel output,
+
+
+
If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
+channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
+remapping.
+
+
For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
+dropping the extra channels:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
+
+
+
Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
+and keep the input channel layout:
+
+
pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
+
+
+
If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
+still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
+
+
+
Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
+front left and right:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
+
+
+
+
25.37 replaygain# TOC
+
+
ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
+outputs it unchanged.
+At end of filtering it displays track_gain and track_peak.
+
+
+
25.38 resample# TOC
+
+
Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
+not meant to be used directly.
+
+
+
25.39 silencedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect silence in an audio stream.
+
+
This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
+or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
+minimum detected noise duration.
+
+
The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+duration, d Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
+
+noise, n Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
+specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
+
+
+
+
25.39.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
+
+
silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
+ Complete example with ffmpeg to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
+tolerance in silence.mp3 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
+
+
+
+
25.40 silenceremove# TOC
+
+
Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+start_periods This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
+the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
+beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
+finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
+the start_periods will be 1 but it can be increased to higher
+values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_duration Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
+trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
+as silence and trimmed off. Default value is 0.
+
+start_threshold This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
+audio, a value of 0 may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
+you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+stop_periods Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
+To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a stop_periods
+that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
+used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
+start_periods , making it suitable for removing periods of silence
+in the middle of the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_duration Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
+more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
+the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_threshold This is the same as start_threshold but for trimming silence from
+the end of audio.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+leave_silence This indicate that stop_duration length of audio should be left intact
+at the beginning of each period of silence.
+For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
+to remove the pauses completely. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
25.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
+that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
+pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
+
+
silenceremove=1:5:0.02
+
+
+
+
25.41 treble# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
+Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
+to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 3000 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
25.42 volume# TOC
+
+
Adjust the input audio volume.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+volume Set audio volume expression.
+
+Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
+
+The output audio volume is given by the relation:
+
+
output_volume = volume * input_volume
+The default value for volume is "1.0".
+
+precision This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
+
+It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
+precision of the volume scaling.
+
+
+fixed 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
+
float 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
+
double 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
+
+
+replaygain Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
+
+
+drop Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
+
+ignore Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
+
+track Prefer the track gain, if present.
+
+album Prefer the album gain, if present.
+
+
+replaygain_preamp Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
+
+Default value for replaygain_preamp is 0.0.
+
+eval Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘once ’
+only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
+when the ‘volume ’ command is sent
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expression for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘once ’.
+
+
+
The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
+
+
+n frame number (starting at zero)
+
nb_channels number of channels
+
nb_consumed_samples number of samples consumed by the filter
+
nb_samples number of samples in the current frame
+
pos original frame position in the file
+
pts frame PTS
+
sample_rate sample rate
+
startpts PTS at start of stream
+
startt time at start of stream
+
t frame time
+
tb timestamp timebase
+
volume last set volume value
+
+
+
Note that when eval is set to ‘once ’ only the
+sample_rate and tb variables are available, all other
+variables will evaluate to NAN.
+
+
+
25.42.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+volume Modify the volume expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
replaygain_noclip Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
+
+Default value for replaygain_noclip is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
25.42.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
25.43 volumedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect the volume of the input video.
+
+
The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
+the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
+
+
In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
+volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
+registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
+the samples).
+
+
All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
+
+
+
25.43.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Here is an excerpt of the output:
+
+
[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
+
+
+
It means that:
+
+ The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
+ The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
+ There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
+
+
+
In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
+raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
+
+
+
+
26 Audio Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
+
+
+
26.1 abuffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+time_base The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
+either a floating-point number or in numerator /denominator form.
+
+sample_rate The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
+
+sample_fmt The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
+the enum AVSampleFormat in libavutil/samplefmt.h
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c or its corresponding integer representation
+from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h
+
+channels The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
+If both channels and channel_layout are specified, then they
+must be consistent.
+
+
+
+
+
26.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
+Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
+6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
+equivalent to:
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
+
+
+
+
26.2 aevalsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
+
+
This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
+channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
+audio signal.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
+channel_layout option is not specified, the selected channel layout
+depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
+specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
+must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
+duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
+complete frame.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
+default to 1024.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+
+
+
+
26.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate silence:
+
+
+ Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
+8000 Hz:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
+ Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
+Center + Back Center) explicitly:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
+ Generate white noise:
+
+
aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
+ Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
+ Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
+
+
aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
+
+
+
+
26.3 anullsrc# TOC
+
+
The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
+as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
+the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
+synth filter).
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+channel_layout, cl
+Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
+representing a channel layout. The default value of channel_layout
+is "stereo".
+
+Check the channel_layout_map definition in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c for the mapping between strings and
+channel layout values.
+
+
+sample_rate, r Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per requested frames.
+
+
+
+
+
26.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
+
+
+ Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
+
+
anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
+
+
+
All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
+
+
+
26.4 flite# TOC
+
+
Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libflite.
+
+
Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+list_voices If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
+immediately. Default value is 0.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
+
+textfile Set the filename containing the text to speak.
+
+text Set the text to speak.
+
+voice, v Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
+kal. See also the list_voices option.
+
+
+
+
26.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read from file speech.txt , and synthesize the text using the
+standard flite voice:
+
+
flite=textfile=speech.txt
+ Read the specified text selecting the slt voice:
+
+
flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Input text to ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Make ffplay speak the specified text, using flite and
+the lavfi device:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
+
+
+
For more information about libflite, check:
+http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/
+
+
+
26.5 sine# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
+
+
The audio signal is bit-exact.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
+
+beep_factor, b Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency beep_factor times
+the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
+
+sample_rate, r Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
+
+samples_per_frame Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
+
+
+
+
26.5.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
+
+
+ Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
+
+
sine=220:4:d=5
+sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
+sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
+
+
+
+
+
27 Audio Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
+
+
+
27.1 abuffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
27.2 anullsink# TOC
+
+
Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
28 Video Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the video filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
+
+
+
28.1 alphaextract# TOC
+
+
Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
+is especially useful with the alphamerge filter.
+
+
+
28.2 alphamerge# TOC
+
+
Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
+grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
+alphaextract to allow the transmission or storage of frame
+sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn’t support an alpha
+channel.
+
+
For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
+and a separate video created with alphaextract , you might use:
+
+
movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
+
+
+
Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
+sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
+input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
+pipeline drops frames. If you’re trying to apply an image as an
+overlay to a video stream, consider the overlay filter instead.
+
+
+
28.3 ass# TOC
+
+
Same as the subtitles filter, except that it doesn’t require libavcodec
+and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
+Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
+the subtitles filter:
+
+
+shaping Set the shaping engine
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘auto ’
+The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
+
‘simple ’
+Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
+
‘complex ’
+Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
+
+
+The default is auto.
+
+
+
+
28.4 bbox# TOC
+
+
Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
+luminance plane.
+
+
This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
+luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
+The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
+log.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+min_val Set the minimal luminance value. Default is 16.
+
+
+
+
28.5 blackdetect# TOC
+
+
Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
+useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
+recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
+duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+black_min_duration, d Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
+be a non-negative floating point number.
+
+Default value is 2.0.
+
+picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
+Express the minimum value for the ratio:
+
+
nb_black_pixels / nb_pixels
+for which a picture is considered black.
+Default value is 0.98.
+
+pixel_black_th, pix_th Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
+
+The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
+pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
+the following equation:
+
+
absolute_threshold = luminance_minimum_value + pixel_black_th * luminance_range_size
+luminance_range_size and luminance_minimum_value depend on
+the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
+formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
+
+Default value is 0.10.
+
+
+
The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
+value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
+
+
blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
+
+
+
+
28.6 blackframe# TOC
+
+
Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
+detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
+the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
+the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+amount The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
+98.
+
+threshold, thresh The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
+32.
+
+
+
+
+
28.7 blend, tblend# TOC
+
+
Blend two video frames into each other.
+
+
The blend filter takes two input streams and outputs one
+stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
+"bottom" layer. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
+
+
The tblend (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
+from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
+the new frame on top of the old frame.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+c0_mode c1_mode c2_mode c3_mode all_mode Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_mode . Default value is normal.
+
+Available values for component modes are:
+
+‘addition ’
+‘and ’
+‘average ’
+‘burn ’
+‘darken ’
+‘difference ’
+‘difference128 ’
+‘divide ’
+‘dodge ’
+‘exclusion ’
+‘hardlight ’
+‘lighten ’
+‘multiply ’
+‘negation ’
+‘normal ’
+‘or ’
+‘overlay ’
+‘phoenix ’
+‘pinlight ’
+‘reflect ’
+‘screen ’
+‘softlight ’
+‘subtract ’
+‘vividlight ’
+‘xor ’
+
+
+c0_opacity c1_opacity c2_opacity c3_opacity all_opacity Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_opacity . Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
+
+c0_expr c1_expr c2_expr c3_expr all_expr Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_expr . Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y the coordinates of the current sample
+
+W H the width and height of currently filtered plane
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+TOP, A Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
+
+BOTTOM, B Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is
+0. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+repeatlast Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
+Default is 1. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+
+
+
28.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
+
+
blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
+ Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover down effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover up-left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
+ Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
+
+
tblend=all_mode=difference128
+
+
+
+
28.8 boxblur# TOC
+
+
Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr luma_power, lp chroma_radius, cr chroma_power, cp alpha_radius, ar alpha_power, ap
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+luma_radius, lr chroma_radius, cr alpha_radius, ar Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
+corresponding input plane.
+
+The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
+greater than the value of the expression min(w,h)/2 for the
+luma and alpha planes, and of min(cw,ch)/2 for the chroma
+planes.
+
+Default value for luma_radius is "2". If not specified,
+chroma_radius and alpha_radius default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_radius .
+
+The expressions can contain the following constants:
+
+w h The input width and height in pixels.
+
+cw ch The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p", hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+luma_power, lp chroma_power, cp alpha_power, ap Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
+corresponding plane.
+
+Default value for luma_power is 2. If not specified,
+chroma_power and alpha_power default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_power .
+
+A value of 0 will disable the effect.
+
+
+
+
28.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
+set to 2:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
+boxblur=2:1
+ Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
+
+
+ Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
+
+
+
+
28.9 codecview# TOC
+
+
Visualize information exported by some codecs.
+
+
Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
+means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
+export_mvs flag in the codec flags2 option.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+mv Set motion vectors to visualize.
+
+Available flags for mv are:
+
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+
+
+
28.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
+
+
+
+
28.10 colorbalance# TOC
+
Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
+
+
The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
+regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
+
+
A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
+value towards the complementary color.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rs gs bs Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
+
+rm gm bm Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
+
+rh gh bh Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+
+
+
28.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add red color cast to shadows:
+
+
+
+
+
28.11 colorlevels# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames using levels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rimin gimin bimin aimin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+rimax gimax bimax aimax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
+(dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
+
+romin gomin bomin aomin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+romax gomax bomax aomax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
+
+
+
+
28.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make video output darker:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
+ Increase contrast:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
+ Make video output lighter:
+
+
colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
+ Increase brightness:
+
+
colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
+
+
+
+
28.12 colorchannelmixer# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
+
+
This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
+the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
+modify is red, the output value will be:
+
+
red =red *rr + blue *rb + green *rg + alpha *ra
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rr rg rb ra Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
+Default is 1 for rr , and 0 for rg , rb and ra .
+
+gr gg gb ga Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
+Default is 1 for gg , and 0 for gr , gb and ga .
+
+br bg bb ba Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
+Default is 1 for bb , and 0 for br , bg and ba .
+
+ar ag ab aa Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
+Default is 1 for aa , and 0 for ar , ag and ab .
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-2.0, 2.0].
+
+
+
+
28.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert source to grayscale:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
+ Simulate sepia tones:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
+
+
+
+
28.13 colormatrix# TOC
+
+
Convert color matrix.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+src dst Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
+specified.
+
+The accepted values are:
+
+‘bt709 ’
+BT.709
+
+‘bt601 ’
+BT.601
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+SMPTE-240M
+
+‘fcc ’
+FCC
+
+
+
+
For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
+
+
colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
+
+
+
+
28.14 copy# TOC
+
+
Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
+testing purposes.
+
+
+
28.15 crop# TOC
+
+
Crop the input video to given dimensions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+w, out_w The width of the output video. It defaults to iw.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+h, out_h The height of the output video. It defaults to ih.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+x The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
+video. It defaults to (in_w-out_w)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+y The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
+It defaults to (in_h-out_h)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+keep_aspect If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
+to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
+ratio. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
The out_w , out_h , x , y parameters are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (cropped) width and height.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+n The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
The expression for out_w may depend on the value of out_h ,
+and the expression for out_h may depend on out_w , but they
+cannot depend on x and y , as x and y are
+evaluated after out_w and out_h .
+
+
The x and y parameters specify the expressions for the
+position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
+are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
+is approximated to the nearest valid value.
+
+
The expression for x may depend on y , and the expression
+for y may depend on x .
+
+
+
28.15.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.16 cropdetect# TOC
+
+
Auto-detect the crop size.
+
+
It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
+recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
+correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+limit Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
+from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8bit based formats). An intensity
+value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
+You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
+on the bitdepth of the pixel format.
+
+round The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
+16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
+get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
+encoding to most video codecs.
+
+reset_count, reset Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
+reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
+detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
+
+This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
+indicates ’never reset’, and returns the largest area encountered during
+playback.
+
+
+
+
28.17 curves# TOC
+
+
Apply color adjustments using curves.
+
+
This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
+component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by N key points
+tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
+values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
+the output frame.
+
+
By default, a component curve is defined by the two points (0;0) and
+(1;1) . This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
+"adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
+
+
The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
+curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
+smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
+strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their x and y values must
+be in the [0;1] interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
+the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
+
+
If there is no key point defined in x=0, the filter will automatically
+insert a (0;0) point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
+in x=1, the filter will automatically insert a (1;1) point.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+preset Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
+to the r , g , b parameters; in this case, the later
+options takes priority on the preset values.
+Available presets are:
+
+‘none ’
+‘color_negative ’
+‘cross_process ’
+‘darker ’
+‘increase_contrast ’
+‘lighter ’
+‘linear_contrast ’
+‘medium_contrast ’
+‘negative ’
+‘strong_contrast ’
+‘vintage ’
+
+Default is none.
+
master, m Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
+is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
+r , g , b or all since it acts like a
+post-processing LUT.
+
red, r Set the key points for the red component.
+
green, g Set the key points for the green component.
+
blue, b Set the key points for the blue component.
+
all Set the key points for all components (not including master).
+Can be used in addition to the other key points component
+options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
+all setting.
+
psfile Specify a Photoshop curves file (.asv) to import the settings from.
+
+
+
To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
+defined using the following syntax: x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+
+
28.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.18 dctdnoiz# TOC
+
+
Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
+
+
This filter is not designed for real time.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sigma, s Set the noise sigma constant.
+
+This sigma defines a hard threshold of 3 * sigma; every DCT
+coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
+
+If you need a more advanced filtering, see expr .
+
+Default is 0.
+
+overlap Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
+may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
+risk of various artefacts.
+
+If the overlapping value doesn’t allow to process the whole input width or
+height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won’t be denoised.
+
+Default value is blocksize -1, which is the best possible setting.
+
+expr, e Set the coefficient factor expression.
+
+For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
+multiplier value for the coefficient.
+
+If this is option is set, the sigma option will be ignored.
+
+The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the c
+variable.
+
+n Set the blocksize using the number of bits. 1<<n defines the
+blocksize , which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
+
+The default value is 3 (8x8) and can be raised to 4 for a
+blocksize of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
+on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
+better de-noising.
+
+
+
+
28.18.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Apply a denoise with a sigma of 4.5:
+
+
+
The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
+
+
dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
+
+
+
Violent denoise using a block size of 16x16:
+
+
+
+
28.19 decimate# TOC
+
+
Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cycle Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
+N means one frame in every batch of N frames will be dropped.
+Default is 5.
+
+dupthresh Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
+is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
+is 1.1
+
+scthresh Set scene change threshold. Default is 15.
+
+blockx blocky Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
+Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
+small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is 32.
+
+ppsrc Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
+stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
+the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
+1, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
+stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
+0.
+
+chroma Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
+1.
+
+
+
+
28.20 dejudder# TOC
+
+
Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
+
+
Judder can be introduced, for instance, by pullup filter. If the original
+source was partially telecined content then the output of pullup,dejudder
+will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
+container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
+rate video.
+
+
The option available in this filter is:
+
+cycle Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
+
+Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
+
+‘4 ’
+If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
+
+‘5 ’
+If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
+
+‘20 ’
+If a mixture of the two.
+
+
+The default is ‘4 ’.
+
+
+
+
28.21 delogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
+pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
+(and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+x y Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
+specified.
+
+w h Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
+specified.
+
+band, t Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
+w and h ). The default value is 4.
+
+show When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
+finding the right x , y , w , and h parameters.
+The default value is 0.
+
+The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
+replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
+immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
+compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
+
+
+
+
+
28.21.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
+and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
+
+
delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
+
+
+
+
28.22 deshake# TOC
+
+
Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
+filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
+tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+x y w h Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
+vectors.
+If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
+rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
+and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
+filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
+box.
+
+This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
+might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
+
+If any or all of x , y , w and h are set to -1
+then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
+without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
+
+Default - search the whole frame.
+
+rx ry Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
+range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
+
+edge Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
+frame. Available values are:
+
+‘blank, 0 ’
+Fill zeroes at blank locations
+
‘original, 1 ’
+Original image at blank locations
+
‘clamp, 2 ’
+Extruded edge value at blank locations
+
‘mirror, 3 ’
+Mirrored edge at blank locations
+
+Default value is ‘mirror ’.
+
+blocksize Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
+default 8.
+
+contrast Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
+the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
+pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
+
+search Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
+
+‘exhaustive, 0 ’
+Set exhaustive search
+
‘less, 1 ’
+Set less exhaustive search.
+
+Default value is ‘exhaustive ’.
+
+filename If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
+specified file.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
28.23 drawbox# TOC
+
+
Draw a colored box on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
+the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the box edge color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is 3.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn box.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn box.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
28.23.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.24 drawgrid# TOC
+
+
Draw a grid on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
+input width and height, respectively, minus thickness, so image gets
+framed. Default to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the grid color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is 1.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input grid cell width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn cell.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn cell.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
28.24.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@0.5
+ Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@0.5
+
+
+
+
28.25 drawtext# TOC
+
+
Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
+libfreetype library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfreetype.
+To enable default font fallback and the font option you need to
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libfontconfig.
+To enable the text_shaping option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfribidi.
+
+
+
28.25.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+box Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
+The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
+The default value of box is 0.
+
+boxcolor The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of boxcolor is "white".
+
+borderw Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using bordercolor .
+The default value of borderw is 0.
+
+bordercolor Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of bordercolor is "black".
+
+expansion Select how the text is expanded. Can be either none,
+strftime (deprecated) or
+normal (default). See the Text expansion section
+below for details.
+
+fix_bounds If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
+
+fontcolor The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of fontcolor is "black".
+
+fontcolor_expr String which is expanded the same way as text to obtain dynamic
+fontcolor value. By default this option has empty value and is not
+processed. When this option is set, it overrides fontcolor option.
+
+font The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
+
+fontfile The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
+This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
+
+fontsize The font size to be used for drawing text.
+The default value of fontsize is 16.
+
+text_shaping If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
+right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
+Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
+By default 1 (if supported).
+
+ft_load_flags The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
+
+The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
+a combination of the following values:
+
+default no_scale no_hinting render no_bitmap vertical_layout force_autohint crop_bitmap pedantic ignore_global_advance_width no_recurse ignore_transform monochrome linear_design no_autohint
+
+Default value is "default".
+
+For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
+libfreetype flags.
+
+shadowcolor The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of shadowcolor is "black".
+
+shadowx shadowy The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
+position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
+values. The default value for both is "0".
+
+start_number The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
+is "0".
+
+tabsize The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
+Default value is 4.
+
+timecode Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
+format. It can be used with or without text parameter. timecode_rate
+option must be specified.
+
+timecode_rate, rate, r Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
+
+text The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
+encoded characters.
+This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
+textfile .
+
+textfile A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
+of UTF-8 encoded characters.
+
+This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
+parameter text .
+
+If both text and textfile are specified, an error is thrown.
+
+reload If set to 1, the textfile will be reloaded before each frame.
+Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
+
+x y The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
+within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
+output image.
+
+The default value of x and y is "0".
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
+
+
+
The parameters for x and y are expressions containing the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+line_h, lh the height of each text line
+
+main_h, h, H the input height
+
+main_w, w, W the input width
+
+max_glyph_a, ascent the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
+coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
+glyphs.
+It is a positive value, due to the grid’s orientation with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_d, descent the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
+used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
+This is a negative value, due to the grid’s orientation, with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_h maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to ascent -
+descent .
+
+max_glyph_w maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+rand(min, max) return a random number included between min and max
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+text_h, th the height of the rendered text
+
+text_w, tw the width of the rendered text
+
+x y the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
+
+These parameters allow the x and y expressions to refer
+each other, so you can for example specify y=x/dar.
+
+
+
+
28.25.2 Text expansion# TOC
+
+
If expansion is set to strftime,
+the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
+expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
+feature is deprecated.
+
+
If expansion is set to none, the text is printed verbatim.
+
+
If expansion is set to normal (which is the default),
+the following expansion mechanism is used.
+
+
The backslash character ’\’, followed by any character, always expands to
+the second character.
+
+
Sequence of the form %{...} are expanded. The text between the
+braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ’:’.
+If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (’:’ or ’}’),
+they should be escaped.
+
+
Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
+text option in the filter argument string and as the filter
+argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
+that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
+problems.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+
+expr, eThe expression evaluation result.
+
+It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
+which accepts the same constants and functions as the x and
+y values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
+example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
+the constants text_w and text_h will have an undefined
+value.
+
+expr_int_format, eifEvaluate the expression’s value and output as formatted integer.
+
+The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the expr function.
+The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are ’x’, ’X’, ’d’ and
+’u’. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
+The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
+It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
+
+gmtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+localtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+metadataFrame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
+
+n, frame_numThe frame number, starting from 0.
+
+pict_typeA 1 character description of the current picture type.
+
+ptsThe timestamp of the current frame.
+It can take up to two arguments.
+
+The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to flt
+for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; hms stands
+for a formatted [-]HH:MM:SS.mmm timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
+
+The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
+
+
+
+
+
28.25.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
For more information about libfreetype, check:
+http://www.freetype.org/ .
+
+
For more information about fontconfig, check:
+http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html .
+
+
For more information about libfribidi, check:
+http://fribidi.org/ .
+
+
+
28.26 edgedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+low high Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
+algorithm.
+
+The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
+connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
+by the low threshold.
+
+low and high threshold values must be chosen in the range
+[0,1], and low should be lesser or equal to high .
+
+Default value for low is 20/255, and default value for high
+is 50/255.
+
+mode Define the drawing mode.
+
+
+‘wires ’
+Draw white/gray wires on black background.
+
+‘colormix ’
+Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
+
+
+Default value is wires .
+
+
+
+
28.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
+ Painting effect without thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
+
+
+
+
28.27 extractplanes# TOC
+
+
Extract color channel components from input video stream into
+separate grayscale video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+planes Set plane(s) to extract.
+
+Available values for planes are:
+
+‘y ’
+‘u ’
+‘v ’
+‘a ’
+‘r ’
+‘g ’
+‘b ’
+
+
+Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
+That means you cannot select r, g, b planes
+with y, u, v planes at same time.
+
+
+
+
28.27.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
+into 3 grayscale outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
+
+
+
+
28.28 elbg# TOC
+
+
Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
+
+
For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
+the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
+of distinct output colors.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options.
+
+
+codebook_length, l Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
+represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
+
+nb_steps, n Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
+mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
+computation time. Default value is 1.
+
+seed, s Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
+UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
+will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
+
+
+
+
28.29 fade# TOC
+
+
Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+type, t The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
+effect.
+Default is in.
+
+start_frame, s Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
+effect at. Default is 0.
+
+nb_frames, n The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
+fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
+At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+Default is 25.
+
+alpha If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_time, st Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
+effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
+whichever comes last. Default is 0.
+
+duration, d The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
+fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
+at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
+
+
+
+
28.29.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.30 field# TOC
+
+
Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
+arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
+non-interlaced.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+type Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is 0 or
+top) or the bottom field (if the value is 1 or
+bottom).
+
+
+
+
28.31 fieldmatch# TOC
+
+
Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
+progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
+frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine fieldmatch needs to be
+followed by a decimation filter such as decimate in the filtergraph.
+
+
The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
+the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
+If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
+fieldmatch will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
+But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
+de-interlaced by a later filter such as yadif before decimation.
+
+
In addition to the various configuration options, fieldmatch can take an
+optional second stream, activated through the ppsrc option. If
+enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
+this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
+help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
+(assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
+or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
+
+
Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
+and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
+which fieldmatch is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
+close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
+
+
The decimate filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
+Do not use fieldmatch and decimate if your input has mixed
+telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+order Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg’s internal parity value).
+
‘bff ’
+Assume bottom field first.
+
‘tff ’
+Assume top field first.
+
+
+Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
+stream.
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mode Set the matching mode or strategy to use. pc mode is the safest in the
+sense that it won’t risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
+possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
+outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
+hand, pcn_ub mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
+but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
+all somewhere in between pc and pcn_ub in terms of risking
+jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
+with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
+
+More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in p/c/n/u/b meaning section.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘pc ’
+2-way matching (p/c)
+
‘pc_n ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
+
‘pc_u ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
+
‘pc_n_ub ’
+2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
+still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
+
‘pcn ’
+3-way matching (p/c/n)
+
‘pcn_ub ’
+3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
+detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
+
+
+The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
+mode assuming order =tff (and field on auto or
+top ).
+
+In terms of speed pc mode is by far the fastest and pcn_ub is
+the slowest.
+
+Default value is pc_n .
+
+ppsrc Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
+input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
+introduction for more details. It is similar to the clip2 feature from
+VFM/TFM.
+
+Default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+field Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
+order unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
+certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
+large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatic (same value as order ).
+
‘bottom ’
+Match from the bottom field.
+
‘top ’
+Match from the top field.
+
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mchroma Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
+cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to 0
+only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
+artifacts. Setting this to 0 could also be used to speed things up at
+the cost of some accuracy.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+y0 y1 These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between y0 and
+y1 from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
+band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
+interfere with the matching. y0 sets the starting scan line and
+y1 sets the ending line; all lines in between y0 and
+y1 (including y0 and y1 ) will be ignored. Setting
+y0 and y1 to the same value will disable the feature.
+y0 and y1 defaults to 0.
+
+scthresh Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
+the luma plane. Good values are in the [8.0, 14.0] range. Scene change
+detection is only relevant in case combmatch =sc . The range for
+scthresh is [0.0, 100.0].
+
+Default value is 12.0.
+
+combmatch When combatch is not none , fieldmatch will take into
+account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
+final match. Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No final matching based on combed scores.
+
‘sc ’
+Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
+
‘full ’
+Use combed scores all the time.
+
+
+Default is sc .
+
+combdbg Force fieldmatch to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
+print them. This setting is known as micout in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No forced calculation.
+
‘pcn ’
+Force p/c/n calculations.
+
‘pcnub ’
+Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
+
+
+Default value is none .
+
+cthresh This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
+essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
+Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
+can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
+-1 (every pixel will be detected as combed) to 255 (no pixel will
+be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
+range is [8, 12].
+
+Default value is 9.
+
+chroma Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
+disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
+causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
+using chroma =0 is usually more reliable, except for the case
+where there is chroma only combing in the source.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+blockx blocky Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
+frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
+combpel pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
+declared combed. See the combpel parameter description for more info.
+Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
+to 512.
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+combpel The number of combed pixels inside any of the blocky by
+blockx size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
+combed. While cthresh controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
+setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
+window defined by the blockx and blocky settings) on the
+frame. Minimum value is 0 and maximum is blocky x blockx (at
+which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
+as MI in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+
+Default value is 80.
+
+
+
+
28.31.1 p/c/n/u/b meaning# TOC
+
+
+
28.31.1.1 p/c/n# TOC
+
+
We assume the following telecined stream:
+
+
+
Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
+Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
+first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
+
+
When fieldmatch is configured to run a matching from bottom
+(field =bottom ) this is how this input stream get transformed:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
+
+Matches: c c n n c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 3 4 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
+To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
+after this operation. See for instance the decimate filter.
+
+
The same operation now matching from top fields (field =top )
+looks like this:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+Matches: c c p p c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 2 3 4
+
+
+
In these examples, we can see what p , c and n mean;
+basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
+
+
+ p matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
+ c matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
+ n matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
+
+
+
+
28.31.1.2 u/b# TOC
+
+
The u and b matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
+from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
+currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
+’x’ is placed above and below each matched fields.
+
+
With bottom matching (field =bottom ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 1 2 2 2
+ 2 2 2 1 3
+
+
+
With top matching (field =top ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 2 2 1 2
+ 2 1 3 2 2
+
+
+
+
28.31.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
+
+
+
Advanced IVTC, with fallback on yadif for still combed frames:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
+
+
+
+
28.32 fieldorder# TOC
+
+
Transform the field order of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+order The output field order. Valid values are tff for top field first or bff
+for bottom field first.
+
+
+
The default value is ‘tff ’.
+
+
The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
+by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
+This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
+
+
If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
+flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
+not alter the incoming video.
+
+
It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
+which is bottom field first.
+
+
For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
+
+
+
+
28.33 fifo# TOC
+
+
Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
+
+
It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
+framework.
+
+
It does not take parameters.
+
+
+
28.34 format# TOC
+
+
Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
+Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
+the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+"pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
28.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.35 fps# TOC
+
+
Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
+frames as necessary.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+fps The desired output frame rate. The default is 25.
+
+round Rounding method.
+
+Possible values are:
+
+zero zero round towards 0
+
inf round away from 0
+
down round towards -infinity
+
up round towards +infinity
+
near round to nearest
+
+The default is near.
+
+start_time Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
+padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
+about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
+For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
+the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
+frames with a negative PTS.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+fps [:round ].
+
+
See also the setpts filter.
+
+
+
28.35.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
+
+
+ Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
+
+
fps=fps=film:round=near
+
+
+
+
28.36 framepack# TOC
+
+
Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
+metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
+framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
+that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the scale and
+fps filters.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+format The desired packing format. Supported values are:
+
+
+sbs The views are next to each other (default).
+
+tab The views are on top of each other.
+
+lines The views are packed by line.
+
+columns The views are packed by column.
+
+frameseq The views are temporally interleaved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
# Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
+
+# Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
28.37 framestep# TOC
+
+
Select one frame every N-th frame.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option:
+
+step Select frame after every step frames.
+Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
28.38 frei0r# TOC
+
+
Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
+
+
To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
+FREI0R_PATH is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
+directories specified by the colon-separated list in FREIOR_PATH.
+Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
+HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/ ,
+/usr/lib/frei0r-1/ .
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
+
+
+
+
A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
+"y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
+R /G /B , where R , G , and B are floating point
+numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as X /Y , where
+X and Y are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
+
+
The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
+effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
+
+
+
28.38.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
+
+
frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
+ Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
+
+
frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
+frei0r=colordistance:violet
+frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
+ Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
+positions:
+
+
frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
+
+
+
For more information, see
+http://frei0r.dyne.org
+
+
+
28.39 fspp# TOC
+
+
Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of spp .
+
+
It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
+processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
+This allows for much higher speed.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is 4.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
+If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
+
+strength Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
+more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
+but also blurrier. Default value is 0 − PSNR optimal.
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
+
28.40 geq# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+lum_expr, lum Set the luminance expression.
+
cb_expr, cb Set the chrominance blue expression.
+
cr_expr, cr Set the chrominance red expression.
+
alpha_expr, a Set the alpha expression.
+
red_expr, r Set the red expression.
+
green_expr, g Set the green expression.
+
blue_expr, b Set the blue expression.
+
+
+
The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
+of the lum_expr , cb_expr , or cr_expr
+options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
+colorspace. If one of the red_expr , green_expr , or
+blue_expr options is specified, it will select an RGB
+colorspace.
+
+
If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
+one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
+If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
+to the luminance expression.
+
+
The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y The coordinates of the current sample.
+
+W H The width and height of the image.
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+p(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the current
+plane.
+
+lum(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the luminance
+plane.
+
+cb(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+cr(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+r(x, y) g(x, y) b(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
+
+alpha(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the alpha
+plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+
+
For functions, if x and y are outside the area, the value will be
+automatically clipped to the closer edge.
+
+
+
28.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Flip the image horizontally:
+
+
+ Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle PI/3 and a
+wavelength of 100 pixels:
+
+
geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
+ Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
+ Generate a quick emboss effect:
+
+
format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
+ Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
+
+
geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
+ Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
+the vignette filter):
+
+
geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
+ Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
+compose with overlay . In this example the video will gradually
+become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
+by the linear gradient:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
+
+
+
+
28.41 gradfun# TOC
+
+
Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
+regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
+Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
+dither them.
+
+
It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
+lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
+bring back the bands.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+strength The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
+the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
+.51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
+valid range.
+
+radius The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
+gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
+regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
+values will be clipped to the valid range.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+strength [:radius ]
+
+
+
28.41.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the filter with a 3.5 strength and radius of 8:
+
+
+ Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
+value):
+
+
+
+
+
+
28.42 haldclut# TOC
+
+
Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
+
+
First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
+The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is 0.
+
repeatlast Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
+Default is 1.
+
+
+
haldclut also has the same interpolation options as lut3d (both
+filters share the same internals).
+
+
More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg’s website
+(Hald CLUT author) at http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html .
+
+
+
28.42.1 Workflow examples# TOC
+
+
+
28.42.1.1 Hald CLUT video stream# TOC
+
+
Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
+
+
+
Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
+
+
Then use it with haldclut to apply it on some random stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
+
+
+
The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
+clut.nut ), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
+to the remaining frames of the mandelbrot stream.
+
+
+
28.42.1.2 Hald CLUT with preview# TOC
+
+
A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of Level*Level*Level by
+Level*Level*Level pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
+biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
+padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
+a preview of the Hald CLUT.
+
+
Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
+haldclut filter:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "
+ pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
+ smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
+ [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
+ [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
+
+
+
It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
+bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
+the color changes.
+
+
Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
+
+
ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
+
+
+
+
28.43 hflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video horizontally.
+
+
For example, to horizontally flip the input video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
28.44 histeq# TOC
+
This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
+per-frame basis.
+
+
It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
+intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
+equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
+viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
+useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
+video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+strength Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
+is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
+approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
+in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
+
+intensity Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
+values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
+the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
+must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
+
+antibanding Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
+the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
+the histogram. Possible values are none, weak or
+strong. It defaults to none.
+
+
+
+
28.45 histogram# TOC
+
+
Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
+
+
The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
+distribution in an image.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Set histogram mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘levels ’
+Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
+image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
+the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
+current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
+
+‘color ’
+Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
+graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
+vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
+(i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
+the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
+side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
+with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
+
+The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
+a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
+(color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
+the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
+square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
+color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
+colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
+the edge of the square.
+
+‘color2 ’
+Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as color but actual chroma values
+are displayed.
+
+‘waveform ’
+Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
+represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
+In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
+side represents value = 255.
+
+Default value is levels.
+
+level_height Set height of level in levels. Default value is 200.
+Allowed range is [50, 2048].
+
+scale_height Set height of color scale in levels. Default value is 12.
+Allowed range is [0, 40].
+
+step Set step for waveform mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
+many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
+Default value is 10. Allowed range is [1, 255].
+
+waveform_mode Set mode for waveform. Can be either row, or column.
+Default is row.
+
+waveform_mirror Set mirroring mode for waveform. 0 means unmirrored, 1
+means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
+side for row mode and at the top for column mode. Default is
+0 (unmirrored).
+
+display_mode Set display mode for waveform and levels.
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘parade ’
+Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
+row waveform mode or one below the other in column waveform mode
+for waveform histogram mode. For levels histogram mode,
+per color component graphs are placed below each other.
+
+Using this display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easy to
+spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
+contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
+grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
+and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
+roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
+making level adjustments the three waveforms.
+
+‘overlay ’
+Presents information identical to that in the parade, except
+that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
+over one another.
+
+This display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easier to spot
+relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
+components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
+or blacks.
+
+Default is parade.
+
+levels_mode Set mode for levels. Can be either linear, or logarithmic.
+Default is linear.
+
+
+
+
28.45.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Calculate and draw histogram:
+
+
ffplay -i input -vf histogram
+
+
+
+
28.46 hqdn3d# TOC
+
+
This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
+image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
+still. It should enhance compressibility.
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+luma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
+It defaults to 4.0.
+
+chroma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
+It defaults to 3.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+luma_tmp A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
+6.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+chroma_tmp A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
+luma_tmp *chroma_spatial /luma_spatial .
+
+
+
+
28.47 hqx# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
+was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for hq2x, 3 for
+hq3x and 4 for hq4x.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
28.48 hue# TOC
+
+
Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+h Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
+and defaults to "0".
+
+s Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "1".
+
+H Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
+expression, and defaults to "0".
+
+b Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "0".
+
+
+
h and H are mutually exclusive, and can’t be
+specified at the same time.
+
+
The b , h , H and s option values are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+n frame count of the input frame starting from 0
+
+pts presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
28.48.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.48.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+b s h H Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
28.49 idet# TOC
+
+
Detect video interlacing type.
+
+
This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
+top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
+repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
+
+
Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
+Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
+
+
The filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+single.current_frame Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+single.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.current_frame Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+multiple.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
+
+repeated.current_frame Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of “neither”, “top”, or “bottom”.
+
+repeated.neither Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
+
+repeated.top Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame’s top field.
+
+repeated.bottom Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame’s bottom field.
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+intl_thres Set interlacing threshold.
+
prog_thres Set progressive threshold.
+
repeat_thres Threshold for repeated field detection.
+
half_life Number of frames after which a given frame’s contribution to the
+statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it’s
+classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
+full weight of 1.0 forever.
+
analyze_interlaced_flag When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
+if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
+If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
+computations, if it is found to be inaccuarte it will be cleared without any
+further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
+method to clean up the interlaced flag
+
+
+
+
28.50 il# TOC
+
+
Deinterleave or interleave fields.
+
+
This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
+deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
+fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
+half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
+You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_mode, l chroma_mode, c alpha_mode, a Available values for luma_mode , chroma_mode and
+alpha_mode are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing.
+
+‘deinterleave, d ’
+Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
+
+‘interleave, i ’
+Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
+
+Default value is none.
+
+luma_swap, ls chroma_swap, cs alpha_swap, as Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
28.51 interlace# TOC
+
+
Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
+lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
+halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
+
+
+
Original Original New Frame
+ Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
+ ========== =========== ==================
+ Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
+ Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
+ Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
+ Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
+ ... ... ...
+New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
+
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+scan This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
+(tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
+
+lowpass Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
+interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
+
+
+
+
28.52 kerndeint# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft’s adaptive kernel
+deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
+progressive frames.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+thresh Set the threshold which affects the filter’s tolerance when
+determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
+in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
+applying the process on every pixels.
+
+map Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+order Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
+0. Default is 0.
+
+sharp Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+twoway Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
28.52.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply default values:
+
+
kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
+ Enable additional sharpening:
+
+
+ Paint processed pixels in white:
+
+
+
+
+
28.53 lenscorrection# TOC
+
+
Correct radial lens distortion
+
+
This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
+of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
+one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
+To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
+and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
+
+
Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
+Digikam from the KDE project.
+
+
In contrast to the vignette filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
+this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas vignette corrects the
+brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
+cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
+be applied before or after lens correction.
+
+
+
28.53.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cx Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+width.
+
cy Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+height.
+
k1 Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
k2 Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
+
+
The formula that generates the correction is:
+
+
r_src = r_tgt * (1 + k1 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^2 + k2 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^4)
+
+
where r_0 is halve of the image diagonal and r_src and r_tgt are the
+distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
+
+
+
28.54 lut3d# TOC
+
+
Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+file Set the 3D LUT file name.
+
+Currently supported formats:
+
+‘3dl ’
+AfterEffects
+
‘cube ’
+Iridas
+
‘dat ’
+DaVinci
+
‘m3d ’
+Pandora
+
+interp Select interpolation mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘nearest ’
+Use values from the nearest defined point.
+
‘trilinear ’
+Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
+
‘tetrahedral ’
+Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
+
+
+
+
+
28.55 lut, lutrgb, lutyuv# TOC
+
+
Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
+to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
+
+
lutyuv applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, lutrgb
+to an RGB input video.
+
+
These filters accept the following parameters:
+
+c0 set first pixel component expression
+
c1 set second pixel component expression
+
c2 set third pixel component expression
+
c3 set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
+
+r set red component expression
+
g set green component expression
+
b set blue component expression
+
a alpha component expression
+
+y set Y/luminance component expression
+
u set U/Cb component expression
+
v set V/Cr component expression
+
+
+
Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
+the corresponding pixel component values.
+
+
The exact component associated to each of the c* options depends on the
+format in input.
+
+
The lut filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
+lutrgb requires RGB pixel formats in input, and lutyuv requires YUV.
+
+
The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+w h The input width and height.
+
+val The input value for the pixel component.
+
+clipval The input value, clipped to the minval -maxval range.
+
+maxval The maximum value for the pixel component.
+
+minval The minimum value for the pixel component.
+
+negval The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
+minval -maxval range; it corresponds to the expression
+"maxval-clipval+minval".
+
+clip(val) The computed value in val , clipped to the
+minval -maxval range.
+
+gammaval(gamma) The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
+clipped to the minval -maxval range. It corresponds to the
+expression
+"pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,gamma )*(maxval-minval)+minval"
+
+
+
+
All expressions default to "val".
+
+
+
28.55.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.56 mergeplanes# TOC
+
+
Merge color channel components from several video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
+planes to the output video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mapping Set input to output plane mapping. Default is 0.
+
+The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
+hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. ’Aa’ describes the
+mapping for the first plane of the output stream. ’A’ sets the number of
+the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and ’a’ the plane number of the
+corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
+similar, ’Bb’ describes the mapping for the output stream second
+plane, ’Cc’ describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
+’Dd’ describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
+
+format Set output pixel format. Default is yuva444p.
+
+
+
+
28.56.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
+ Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
+ Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
+
+
format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
+ Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
+
+
format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
+ Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
+
+
format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
+
+
+
+
28.57 mcdeint# TOC
+
+
Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
+
+
It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
+with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mode Set the deinterlacing mode.
+
+It accepts one of the following values:
+
+‘fast ’
+‘medium ’
+‘slow ’
+use iterative motion estimation
+
‘extra_slow ’
+like ‘slow ’, but use multiple reference frames.
+
+Default value is ‘fast ’.
+
+parity Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
+one of the following values:
+
+
+‘0, tff ’
+assume top field first
+
‘1, bff ’
+assume bottom field first
+
+
+Default value is ‘bff ’.
+
+qp Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
+encoder.
+
+Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
+optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
28.58 mp# TOC
+
+
Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
+
+
This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
+MPlayer/MEncoder.
+
+
This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
+may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
+be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
+depending on them when writing portable scripts.
+
+
The filter accepts the parameters:
+filter_name [:=]filter_params
+
+
filter_name is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
+filter_params is a string containing the parameters accepted by
+the named filter.
+
+
The list of the currently supported filters follows:
+
+eq2 eq ilpack softpulldown
+
+
The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
+of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
+the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
+
+
+
28.58.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
+
+
+
+
See also mplayer(1), http://www.mplayerhq.hu/ .
+
+
+
28.59 mpdecimate# TOC
+
+
Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
+order to reduce frame rate.
+
+
The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
+(e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
+fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+max Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
+positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
+negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
+number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+hi lo frac Set the dropping threshold values.
+
+Values for hi and lo are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
+represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
+corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
+out differently over the block.
+
+A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
+than a threshold of hi , and if no more than frac blocks (1
+meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of lo .
+
+Default value for hi is 64*12, default value for lo is
+64*5, and default value for frac is 0.33.
+
+
+
+
+
28.60 negate# TOC
+
+
Negate input video.
+
+
It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
+alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
+
+
+
28.61 noformat# TOC
+
+
Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
+input to the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
28.61.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Force libavfilter to use a format different from yuv420p for the
+input to the vflip filter:
+
+
noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
+ Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
+
+
noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
+
+
+
+
28.62 noise# TOC
+
+
Add noise on video input frame.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+all_seed c0_seed c1_seed c2_seed c3_seed Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_seed . Default value is 123457.
+
+all_strength, alls c0_strength, c0s c1_strength, c1s c2_strength, c2s c3_strength, c3s Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+all_strength . Default value is 0. Allowed range is [0, 100].
+
+all_flags, allf c0_flags, c0f c1_flags, c1f c2_flags, c2f c3_flags, c3f Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if all_flags .
+Available values for component flags are:
+
+‘a ’
+averaged temporal noise (smoother)
+
‘p ’
+mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
+
‘t ’
+temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
+
‘u ’
+uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
+
+
+
+
+
28.62.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
+
+
noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
+
+
+
+
28.63 null# TOC
+
+
Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
28.64 ocv# TOC
+
+
Apply a video transform using libopencv.
+
+
To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libopencv.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
+
+filter_params The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
+values are assumed.
+
+
+
+
Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
+information:
+http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html
+
+
Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
+
+
+
28.64.1 dilate# TOC
+
+
Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvDilate.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el |nb_iterations .
+
+
struct_el represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
+cols xrows +anchor_x xanchor_y /shape
+
+
cols and rows represent the number of columns and rows of
+the structuring element, anchor_x and anchor_y the anchor
+point, and shape the shape for the structuring element. shape
+must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
+
+
If the value for shape is "custom", it must be followed by a
+string of the form "=filename ". The file with name
+filename is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
+printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
+shape is used, cols and rows are ignored, the number
+or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
+
+
The default value for struct_el is "3x3+0x0/rect".
+
+
nb_iterations specifies the number of times the transform is
+applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
# Use the default values
+ocv=dilate
+
+# Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
+ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
+
+# Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
+# The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
+# *
+# ***
+# *****
+# ***
+# *
+# The specified columns and rows are ignored
+# but the anchor point coordinates are not
+ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
+
+
+
+
28.64.2 erode# TOC
+
+
Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvErode.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el :nb_iterations ,
+with the same syntax and semantics as the dilate filter.
+
+
+
28.64.3 smooth# TOC
+
+
Smooth the input video.
+
+
The filter takes the following parameters:
+type |param1 |param2 |param3 |param4 .
+
+
type is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
+the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
+or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
+
+
The meaning of param1 , param2 , param3 , and param4
+depend on the smooth type. param1 and
+param2 accept integer positive values or 0. param3 and
+param4 accept floating point values.
+
+
The default value for param1 is 3. The default value for the
+other parameters is 0.
+
+
These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
+libopencv function cvSmooth.
+
+
+
28.65 overlay# TOC
+
+
Overlay one video on top of another.
+
+
It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
+video on which the second input is overlaid.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+x y Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
+on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
+the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
+overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
+
+eof_action The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
+one of the following values:
+
+
+repeat Repeat the last frame (the default).
+
endall End both streams.
+
pass Pass the main input through.
+
+
+eval Set when the expressions for x , and y are evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
+when a command is processed
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘frame ’.
+
+shortest If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
+terminates. Default value is 0.
+
+format Set the format for the output video.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘yuv420 ’
+force YUV420 output
+
+‘yuv422 ’
+force YUV422 output
+
+‘yuv444 ’
+force YUV444 output
+
+‘rgb ’
+force RGB output
+
+
+Default value is ‘yuv420 ’.
+
+rgb (deprecated) If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
+color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
+format instead.
+
+repeatlast If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
+main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
+behavior. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The x , and y expressions can contain the following
+parameters.
+
+
+main_w, W main_h, H The main input width and height.
+
+overlay_w, w overlay_h, h The overlay input width and height.
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
+format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and
+vsub is 1.
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
Note that the n , pos , t variables are available only
+when evaluation is done per frame , and will evaluate to NAN
+when eval is set to ‘init ’.
+
+
Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
+order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
+to pass the two inputs through a setpts=PTS-STARTPTS filter to
+have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
+the movie filter does.
+
+
You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
+efficiency of such approach.
+
+
+
28.65.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+x y Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
28.65.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.66 owdenoise# TOC
+
+
Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+depth Set depth.
+
+Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
+slow down filtering.
+
+Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is 8.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+
+
+
28.67 pad# TOC
+
+
Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
+provided x , y coordinates.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+width, w height, h Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
+paddings added. If the value for width or height is 0, the
+corresponding input size is used for the output.
+
+The width expression can reference the value set by the
+height expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of width and height is 0.
+
+x y Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
+with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
+
+The x expression can reference the value set by the y
+expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of x and y is 0.
+
+color Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of color is "black".
+
+
+
The value for the width , height , x , and y
+options are expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input video width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
+specified by the width and height expressions.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+x y The x and y offsets as specified by the x and y
+expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
28.67.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.68 perspective# TOC
+
+
Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
+Default values are 0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H with which perspective will remain unchanged.
+If the sense option is set to source, then the specified points will be sent
+to the corners of the destination. If the sense option is set to destination,
+then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+W H the width and height of video frame.
+
+
+interpolation Set interpolation for perspective correction.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘linear ’
+‘cubic ’
+
+
+Default value is ‘linear ’.
+
+sense Set interpretation of coordinate options.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘0, source ’
+
+Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
+the corners of the destination.
+
+
+‘1, destination ’
+
+Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
+by the given coordinates.
+
+Default value is ‘source ’.
+
+
+
+
+
+
28.69 phase# TOC
+
+
Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
+
+
The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
+opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+mode Set phase mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
+Filter will delay the bottom field.
+
+‘b ’
+Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
+Filter will delay the top field.
+
+‘p ’
+Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
+for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
+actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
+
+‘a ’
+Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
+opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ modes on a frame by frame
+basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
+then this works just like ‘u ’.
+
+‘u ’
+Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ on a frame by frame basis by
+analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
+match between the fields.
+
+‘T ’
+Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘B ’
+Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘A ’
+Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using field flags and
+image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
+like ‘U ’. This is the default mode.
+
+‘U ’
+Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis only.
+
+
+
+
+
28.70 pixdesctest# TOC
+
+
Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
+testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
+
+
For example:
+
+
format=monow, pixdesctest
+
+
+
can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
+
+
+
28.71 pp# TOC
+
+
Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
+library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (--enable-gpl).
+Subfilters must be separated by ’/’ and can be disabled by prepending a ’-’.
+Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
+interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+subfilters Set postprocessing subfilters string.
+
+
+
All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
+
+
+a/autoq Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
+
+c/chrom Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
+
+y/nochrom Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
+
+n/noluma Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
+
+
+
These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a ’|’.
+
+
Available subfilters are:
+
+
+hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+
+
The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
+flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
+thresholds.
+
+
+h1/x1hdeblock Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
+
+v1/x1vdeblock Experimental vertical deblocking filter
+
+dr/dering Deringing filter
+
+tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
+threshold1 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold2 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold3 larger -> stronger filtering
+
+
+al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
+f/fullyrange Stretch luminance to 0-255.
+
+
+lb/linblenddeint Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+filtering all lines with a (1 2 1) filter.
+
+li/linipoldeint Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+linearly interpolating every second line.
+
+ci/cubicipoldeint Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
+cubically interpolating every second line.
+
+md/mediandeint Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
+median filter to every second line.
+
+fd/ffmpegdeint FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
+second line with a (-1 4 2 4 -1) filter.
+
+l5/lowpass5 Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
+block by filtering all lines with a (-1 2 6 2 -1) filter.
+
+fq/forceQuant[|quantizer] Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
+specify.
+
+quantizer Quantizer to use
+
+
+de/default Default pp filter combination (hb|a,vb|a,dr|a)
+
+fa/fast Fast pp filter combination (h1|a,v1|a,dr|a)
+
+ac High quality pp filter combination (ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a)
+
+
+
+
28.71.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
+brightness/contrast:
+
+
+ Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
+
+
+ Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
+
+
pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
+ Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
+automatically depending on available CPU time:
+
+
+
+
+
28.72 pp7# TOC
+
Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the spp filter,
+similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
+used after IDCT.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
+0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
+(if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding.
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
‘medium ’
+Set medium thresholding (good results, default).
+
+
+
+
+
28.73 psnr# TOC
+
+
Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
+Ratio) between two input videos.
+
+
This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
+considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
+output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
+the PSNR.
+
+
Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
+this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
+have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
+
+
The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
+
+
The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
+frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
+equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
+
+
+
PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
+
+
+
Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
+image.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+stats_file, f If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
+each individual frame.
+
+
+
The file printed if stats_file is selected, contains a sequence of
+key/value pairs of the form key :value for each compared
+couple of frames.
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
+
+mse_avg Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames, averaged over all the image components.
+
+mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames for the component specified by the suffix.
+
+psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
+specified by the suffix.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
+
+
+
On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
+reference file ref_movie.mpg . The PSNR of each individual frame
+is stored in stats.log .
+
+
+
28.74 pullup# TOC
+
+
Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
+hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
+content.
+
+
The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
+its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
+onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
+fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
+
+
To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
+pullup, use fps=24000/1001 if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
+fps=24 for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+jl jr jt jb These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
+bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
+while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
+The default is 8 pixels on each side.
+
+sb Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
+filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
+excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
+Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
+This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
+the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
+Default value is 0.
+
+mp Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘l ’
+Use luma plane.
+
+‘u ’
+Use chroma blue plane.
+
+‘v ’
+Use chroma red plane.
+
+
+This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
+for doing filter’s computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
+source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
+is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
+The main purpose of setting mp to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
+load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
+
+
+
For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
+necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
+telecine NTSC input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
+
+
+
+
28.75 qp# TOC
+
+
Change video quantization parameters (QP).
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+qp Set expression for quantization parameter.
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
+the following constants:
+
+
+known 1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.
+
+qp Sequentional index starting from -129 to 128.
+
+
+
+
28.75.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Some equation like:
+
+
+
+
+
28.76 removelogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
+pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
+comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
+libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
+video stream being processed.
+
+
+
Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
+considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
+the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
+rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
+recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
+visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
+filter once or twice.
+
+
If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
+logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
+reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
+much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
+the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
+pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
+
+
+
28.77 rotate# TOC
+
+
Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
A description of the optional parameters follows.
+
+angle, a Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
+clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
+result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
+
+This expression is evaluated for each frame.
+
+out_w, ow Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+out_h, oh Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+bilinear Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
+it. Default value is 1.
+
+fillcolor, c Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
+image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
+background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
+
+Default value is "black".
+
+
+
The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
+before the first frame is filtered.
+
+t time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
+configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_w, iw in_h, ih the input video width and height
+
+out_w, ow out_h, oh the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
+specified by the width and height expressions
+
+rotw(a) roth(a) the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
+video rotated by a radians.
+
+These are only available when computing the out_w and
+out_h expressions.
+
+
+
+
28.77.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
+
+
+ Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
+
+
+ Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
+seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
+
+
rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
+ Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
+input video is always completely contained in the output:
+
+
rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
+ Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
+shown:
+
+
rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
+
+
+
+
28.77.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
The filter supports the following commands:
+
+
+a, angle Set the angle expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
28.78 sab# TOC
+
+
Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
+value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
+in slower processing.
+
+luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
+value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
+be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
+greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
+processing.
+
+chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
+must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
+
+
+
Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
+corresponding luma option value.
+
+
+
28.79 scale# TOC
+
+
Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
+
+
The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
+of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
+
+
If the input image format is different from the format requested by
+the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
+requested format.
+
+
+
28.79.1 Options# TOC
+
The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
+supported by the libswscale scaler.
+
+
See (ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for
+the complete list of scaler options.
+
+
+width, w height, h Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
+dimension.
+
+If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
+
+If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
+maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
+other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
+used
+
+If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
+that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
+specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
+dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
+expression.
+
+interl Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+Force interlaced aware scaling.
+
+‘0 ’
+Do not apply interlaced scaling.
+
+‘-1 ’
+Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
+are flagged as interlaced or not.
+
+
+Default value is ‘0 ’.
+
+flags Set libswscale scaling flags. See
+(ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for the
+complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
+the default flags.
+
+size, s Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+in_color_matrix out_color_matrix Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder.
+
+If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
+
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘bt709 ’
+Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
+Recommendation BT.709.
+
+‘fcc ’
+Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
+Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
+
+‘bt601 ’
+Set color space conforming to:
+
+
+ ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
+
+ ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
+
+ Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
+
+
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
+
+
+in_range out_range Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
+range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘jpeg/full/pc ’
+Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+‘mpeg/tv ’
+Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+
+force_original_aspect_ratio Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
+keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘disable ’
+Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
+
+‘decrease ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
+
+‘increase ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
+
+
+
+One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device’s
+maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
+that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
+1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
+decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
+1280x533.
+
+Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for w
+or h , you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
+to work.
+
+
+
+
The values of the w and h options are expressions
+containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (scaled) width and height
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h
+
+a The same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from (iw / ih) * sar.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+ohsub ovsub horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
28.79.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.80 separatefields# TOC
+
+
The separatefields takes a frame-based video input and splits
+each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
+with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
+
+
This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
+of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
+If it gets it wrong use setfield filter before separatefields filter.
+
+
+
28.81 setdar, setsar# TOC
+
+
The setdar filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
+output video.
+
+
This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
+Ratio, according to the following equation:
+
+
DAR = HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION / VERTICAL_RESOLUTION * SAR
+
+
+
Keep in mind that the setdar filter does not modify the pixel
+dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
+this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
+e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
+applied.
+
+
The setsar filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
+the filter output video.
+
+
Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
+output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
+above.
+
+
Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the setsar
+filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
+another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+r, ratio, dar (setdar only), sar (setsar only) Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
+
+The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
+a string of the form num :den , where num and
+den are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
+the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
+In case the form "num :den " is used, the : character
+should be escaped.
+
+max Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
+denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
+Default value is 100.
+
+
+
+
The parameter sar is an expression containing
+the following constants:
+
+
+E, PI, PHI These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
+(Euler’s number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
+
+w, h The input width and height.
+
+a These are the same as w / h .
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
+(w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub, vsub Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
28.81.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
+
+
setdar=dar=1.77777
+setdar=dar=16/9
+setdar=dar=1.77777
+ To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
+
+
+ To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
+1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
+
+
setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
+
+
+
+
28.82 setfield# TOC
+
+
Force field for the output video frame.
+
+
The setfield filter marks the interlace type field for the
+output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
+corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
+following filters (e.g. fieldorder or yadif).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Keep the same field property.
+
+‘bff ’
+Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
+
+‘tff ’
+Mark the frame as top-field-first.
+
+‘prog ’
+Mark the frame as progressive.
+
+
+
+
+
28.83 showinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
+The input video is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
+
+pts_time The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+seconds.
+
+pos The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
+
+fmt The pixel format name.
+
+sar The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
+num /den .
+
+s The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+i The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
+for bottom field first).
+
+iskey This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+type The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
+P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
+Also refer to the documentation of the AVPictureType enum and of
+the av_get_picture_type_char function defined in
+libavutil/avutil.h .
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
+
+plane_checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
+expressed in the form "[c0 c1 c2 c3 ]".
+
+
+
+
28.84 shuffleplanes# TOC
+
+
Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+map0 The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
+
+map1 The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
+
+map2 The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
+
+map3 The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
+
+
+
+
The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
+
+
Swap the second and third planes of the input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
28.85 signalstats# TOC
+
Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
+with the digitization of analog video media.
+
+
By default the filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+YMIN Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YLOW Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YAVG Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+YHIGH Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YMAX Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMIN Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+ULOW Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UAVG Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+UHIGH Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMAX Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMIN Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VLOW Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VAVG Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+VHIGH Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMAX Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+SATMIN Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATLOW Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATAVG Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
+of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATHIGH Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATMAX Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+HUEMED Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+HUEAVG Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+YDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+UDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+VDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+stat out
+stat specify an additional form of image analysis.
+out output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
+
+Both options accept the following values:
+
+
+‘tout ’
+Identify temporal outliers pixels. A temporal outlier is a pixel
+unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
+include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
+
+‘vrep ’
+Identify vertical line repetition . Vertical line repetition includes
+similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
+repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
+analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
+analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
+
+‘brng ’
+Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
+
+
+
+color, c Set the highlight color for the out option. The default color is
+yellow.
+
+
+
+
28.85.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.86 smartblur# TOC
+
+
Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_threshold, lt Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_threshold, ct Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
+is set.
+
+
+
28.87 stereo3d# TOC
+
+
Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+in Set stereoscopic image format of input.
+
+Available values for input image formats are:
+
+‘sbsl ’
+side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbsr ’
+side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘sbs2l ’
+side by side parallel with half width resolution
+(left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbs2r ’
+side by side crosseye with half width resolution
+(right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘abl ’
+above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘abr ’
+above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘ab2l ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘ab2r ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘al ’
+alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
+
+‘ar ’
+alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
+
+Default value is ‘sbsl ’.
+
+
+out Set stereoscopic image format of output.
+
+Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
+
+‘arbg ’
+anaglyph red/blue gray
+(red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘argg ’
+anaglyph red/green gray
+(red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcg ’
+anaglyph red/cyan gray
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arch ’
+anaglyph red/cyan half colored
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcc ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcd ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmg ’
+anaglyph green/magenta gray
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmh ’
+anaglyph green/magenta half colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmc ’
+anaglyph green/magenta colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmd ’
+anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybg ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue gray
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybh ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybc ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybd ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘irl ’
+interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
+
+‘irr ’
+interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
+
+‘ml ’
+mono output (left eye only)
+
+‘mr ’
+mono output (right eye only)
+
+
+Default value is ‘arcd ’.
+
+
+
+
28.87.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
+
+
+ Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
+
+
+
+
+
28.88 spp# TOC
+
+
Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
+at several (or - in the case of quality level 6 - all) shifts
+and average the results.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-6. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 6 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding (default).
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
28.89 subtitles# TOC
+
+
Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libass. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
+libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
+Alpha) subtitles format.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
+
+original_size Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
+was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
+the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
+this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
+changed.
+
+charenc Set subtitles input character encoding. subtitles filter only. Only
+useful if not UTF-8.
+
+stream_index, si Set subtitles stream index. subtitles filter only.
+
+
+
If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
+specifies the filename .
+
+
For example, to render the file sub.srt on top of the input
+video, use the command:
+
+
+
which is equivalent to:
+
+
subtitles=filename=sub.srt
+
+
+
To render the default subtitles stream from file video.mkv , use:
+
+
+
To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
+
+
subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
+
+
+
+
28.90 super2xsai# TOC
+
+
Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
+Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
+
+
Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
+
+
+
28.91 swapuv# TOC
+
Swap U & V plane.
+
+
+
28.92 telecine# TOC
+
+
Apply telecine process to the video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+first_field
+‘top, t ’
+top field first
+
‘bottom, b ’
+bottom field first
+The default value is top.
+
+
+pattern A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
+The default value is 23.
+
+
+
+
Some typical patterns:
+
+NTSC output (30i):
+27.5p: 32222
+24p: 23 (classic)
+24p: 2332 (preferred)
+20p: 33
+18p: 334
+16p: 3444
+
+PAL output (25i):
+27.5p: 12222
+24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
+16.67p: 33
+16p: 33333334
+
+
+
+
28.93 thumbnail# TOC
+
Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of n frames, the filter
+will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of n frames until
+the end. Default is 100.
+
+
+
Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger n
+value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
+
+
+
28.93.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract one picture each 50 frames:
+
+
+ Complete example of a thumbnail creation with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
+
+
+
+
28.94 tile# TOC
+
+
Tile several successive frames together.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+layout Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
+this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+nb_frames Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
+than or equal to w xh . The default value is 0, meaning all
+the area will be used.
+
+margin Set the outer border margin in pixels.
+
+padding Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
+more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
+refer to the pad video filter.
+
+color Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of color
+is "black".
+
+
+
+
28.94.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.95 tinterlace# TOC
+
+
Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
+
+
Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
+considered odd.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
+as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘merge, 0 ’
+Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
+generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘drop_odd, 1 ’
+Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ ‘drop_even, 2 ’
+Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+ ‘pad, 3 ’
+Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
+generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+ ‘interleave_top, 4 ’
+Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘interleave_bottom, 5 ’
+Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+
+Output:
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+ ‘interlacex2, 6 ’
+Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
+containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
+the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
+the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
+field synchronisation.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+
+
+Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
+compatibility reasons.
+
+Default mode is merge.
+
+flags Specify flags influencing the filter process.
+
+Available value for flags is:
+
+
+low_pass_filter, vlfp Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
+Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
+destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
+vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace ’twitter’ and Moire
+patterning.
+
+Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for mode
+interleave_top and interleave_bottom .
+
+
+
+
+
+
28.96 transpose# TOC
+
+
Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+dir Specify the transposition direction.
+
+Can assume the following values:
+
+‘0, 4, cclock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
+
+
L.R L.l
+. . -> . .
+l.r R.r
+ ‘1, 5, clock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R l.L
+. . -> . .
+l.r r.R
+ ‘2, 6, cclock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R R.r
+. . -> . .
+l.r L.l
+ ‘3, 7, clock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
+
+
L.R r.R
+. . -> . .
+l.r l.L
+
+
+For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
+video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
+deprecated, the passthrough option should be used instead.
+
+Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
+symbolic constants.
+
+passthrough Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
+specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Always apply transposition.
+
‘portrait ’
+Preserve portrait geometry (when height >= width ).
+
‘landscape ’
+Preserve landscape geometry (when width >= height ).
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+
+
For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
+layout:
+
+
transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
+
+
+
The command above can also be specified as:
+
+
+
+
28.97 trim# TOC
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
+timestamp start will be the first frame in the output.
+
+end Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
+immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be the last
+frame in the output.
+
+start_pts This is the same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts This is the same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_frame The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
+
+end_frame The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
+frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
+the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
+setpts filter after the trim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
+ Keep only the first second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
+
+
+
+
+
28.98 unsharp# TOC
+
+
Sharpen or blur the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_msize_x, lx Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
+3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_msize_y, ly Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
+and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_amount, la Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_msize_x, cx Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_msize_y, cy Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_amount, ca Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 0.0.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
+string ’5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0’.
+
+
+
28.98.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
+
+
unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
+ Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
+
+
+
+
+
28.99 uspp# TOC
+
+
Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
+the image at several (or - in the case of quality level 8 - all)
+shifts and average the results.
+
+
The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
+decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
+DCT similar to MJPEG.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-8. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 8 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+
+
+
28.100 vidstabdetect# TOC
+
+
Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
+vidstabtransform for pass 2.
+
+
This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
+transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
+the vidstabtransform filter.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+result Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
+Default value is transforms.trf .
+
+shakiness Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
+integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
+value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
+
+accuracy Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
+range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
+accuracy. Default value is 15.
+
+stepsize Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
+scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
+
+mincontrast Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
+discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
+value is 0.3.
+
+tripod Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
+
+If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
+in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
+is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
+the camera view absolutely still.
+
+If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
+
+show Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
+integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
+visualization.
+
+
+
+
28.100.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use default values:
+
+
+ Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
+mytransforms.trf :
+
+
vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
+ Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
+video:
+
+
+ Analyze a video with medium shakiness using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
+
+
+
+
28.101 vidstabtransform# TOC
+
+
Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
+see vidstabdetect for pass 1.
+
+
Read a file with transform information for each frame and
+apply/compensate them. Together with the vidstabdetect
+filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
+http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab . It is important to also use
+the unsharp filter, see below.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
+
28.101.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+input Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
+transforms.trf .
+
+smoothing Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
+camera movements. Default value is 10.
+
+For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
+past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
+larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
+the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
+camera is simulated.
+
+optalgo Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘gauss ’
+gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
+
‘avg ’
+averaging on transformations
+
+
+maxshift Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
+meaning no limit.
+
+maxangle Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
+value is -1, meaning no limit.
+
+crop Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
+compensation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘keep ’
+keep image information from previous frame (default)
+
‘black ’
+fill the border black
+
+
+invert Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
+
+relative Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
+absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
+
+zoom Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
+effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
+zoom).
+
+optzoom Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘0 ’
+disabled
+
‘1 ’
+optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
+will lead to visible borders) (default)
+
‘2 ’
+optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
+visible), see zoomspeed
+
+
+Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
+
+zoomspeed Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
+optzoom is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
+0.25.
+
+interpol Specify type of interpolation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘no ’
+no interpolation
+
‘linear ’
+linear only horizontal
+
‘bilinear ’
+linear in both directions (default)
+
‘bicubic ’
+cubic in both directions (slow)
+
+
+tripod Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
+relative=0:smoothing=0. Default value is 0.
+
+Use also tripod option of vidstabdetect .
+
+debug Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
+are written to the temporary file global_motions.trf . Default
+value is 0.
+
+
+
+
28.101.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
28.102 vflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video vertically.
+
+
For example, to vertically flip a video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
28.103 vignette# TOC
+
+
Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+angle, a Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0,PI/2] range.
+
+Default value: "PI/5"
+
+x0 y0 Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively "w/2" and "h/2"
+by default.
+
+mode Set forward/backward mode.
+
+Available modes are:
+
+‘forward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
+
+‘backward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
+This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
+detection to extract the lens angle and other settings (yet). It can
+also be used to create a burning effect.
+
+
+Default value is ‘forward ’.
+
+eval Set evaluation mode for the expressions (angle , x0 , y0 ).
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
+
+‘frame ’
+Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
+‘init ’ mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
+allows advanced dynamic expressions.
+
+
+Default value is ‘init ’.
+
+dither Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is 1
+(enabled).
+
+aspect Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
+Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
+following the dimensions of the video.
+
+Default is 1/1.
+
+
+
+
28.103.1 Expressions# TOC
+
+
The alpha , x0 and y0 expressions can contain the
+following parameters.
+
+
+w h input width and height
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pts the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
+TB units, NAN if undefined
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
+
28.103.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
+
+
+ Make a flickering vignetting:
+
+
vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
+
+
+
+
28.104 w3fdif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
+Deinterlacing Filter").
+
+
Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
+implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
+Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
+uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
+
+
There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
+and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
+be set by passing an optional parameter:
+
+
+filter Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Simple filter coefficient set.
+
‘complex ’
+More-complex filter coefficient set.
+
+Default value is ‘complex ’.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
+
+
+‘all ’
+Deinterlace all frames,
+
‘interlaced ’
+Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+Default value is ‘all ’.
+
+
+
+
28.105 xbr# TOC
+
Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
+art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
+http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134 .
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for 2xBR, 3 for
+3xBR and 4 for 4xBR.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
28.106 yadif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
+filter").
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+
+mode The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+0, send_frame Output one frame for each frame.
+
1, send_field Output one frame for each field.
+
2, send_frame_nospatial Like send_frame, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
3, send_field_nospatial Like send_field, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
+
+The default value is send_frame.
+
+parity The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
+of the following values:
+
+
+0, tff Assume the top field is first.
+
1, bff Assume the bottom field is first.
+
-1, auto Enable automatic detection of field parity.
+
+
+The default value is auto.
+If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
+top field first will be assumed.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
+values:
+
+
+0, all Deinterlace all frames.
+
1, interlaced Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+The default value is all.
+
+
+
+
28.107 zoompan# TOC
+
+
Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+zoom, z Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
+
+x y Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
+
+d Set the duration expression in number of frames.
+This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
+single input image.
+
+s Set the output image size, default is ’hd720’.
+
+
+
Each expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+in_w, iw Input width.
+
+in_h, ih Input height.
+
+out_w, ow Output width.
+
+out_h, oh Output height.
+
+in Input frame count.
+
+on Output frame count.
+
+x y Last calculated ’x’ and ’y’ position from ’x’ and ’y’ expression
+for current input frame.
+
+px py ’x’ and ’y’ of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
+not yet such frame (first input frame).
+
+zoom Last calculated zoom from ’z’ expression for current input frame.
+
+pzoom Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
+
+duration Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from ’d’ expression
+for each input frame.
+
+pduration number of output frames created for previous input frame
+
+a Rational number: input width / input height
+
+sar sample aspect ratio
+
+dar display aspect ratio
+
+
+
+
+
28.107.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
+
+
zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
+
+
+
+
+
29 Video Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
+
+
+
29.1 buffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+video_size Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
+manual.
+
+width The input video width.
+
+height The input video height.
+
+pix_fmt A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
+It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
+name.
+
+time_base Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
+
+frame_rate Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
+
+pixel_aspect, sar The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
+
+sws_param Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
+is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
+input size or format.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
+with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
+square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
+Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
+(check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in libavutil/pixfmt.h ),
+this example corresponds to:
+
+
buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
+syntax is deprecated:
+
+
width :height :pix_fmt :time_base.num :time_base.den :pixel_aspect.num :pixel_aspect.den [:sws_param ]
+
+
+
29.2 cellauto# TOC
+
+
Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
+
+
The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
+filename , and pattern options. If such options are
+not specified an initial state is created randomly.
+
+
At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
+the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
+frame is filled is defined by the scroll option.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified file.
+In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+file will be ignored.
+
+pattern, p Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified string.
+
+Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+string will be ignored.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
+is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
+1/PHI.
+
+This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
+Default value is 110.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename or pattern is specified, the size is set
+by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
+height is set to width * PHI.
+
+If size is set, it must contain the width of the specified
+pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
+larger row.
+
+If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
+defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
+
+scroll If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
+have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
+written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
+Defaults to 1.
+
+start_full, full If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
+outputting the first frame.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+
+
+
29.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read the initial state from pattern , and specify an output of
+size 200x400.
+
+
cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
+ Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
+ratio of 2/3:
+
+
cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
+centered on an initial row with width 100:
+
+
cellauto=p=@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+ Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
+
+
cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+
+
+
+
29.3 mandelbrot# TOC
+
+
Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
+point specified with start_x and start_y .
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+end_pts Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
+
+end_scale Set the terminal scale value.
+Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
+
+inner Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
+Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
+
+It shall assume one of the following values:
+
+black Set black mode.
+
convergence Show time until convergence.
+
mincol Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
+
period Set period mode.
+
+
+Default value is mincol .
+
+bailout Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
+
+maxiter Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
+algorithm. Default value is 7189.
+
+outer Set outer coloring mode.
+It shall assume one of following values:
+
+iteration_count Set iteration cound mode.
+
normalized_iteration_count set normalized iteration count mode.
+
+Default value is normalized_iteration_count .
+
+rate, r Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
+value is "25".
+
+size, s Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
+size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
+
+start_scale Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
+
+start_x Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
+
+start_y Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
+
+
+
+
29.4 mptestsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
+
+
The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
+This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+test, t
+Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
+
+dc_luma dc_chroma freq_luma freq_chroma amp_luma amp_chroma cbp mv ring1 ring2 all
+
+Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
+
+
+
29.5 frei0r_src# TOC
+
+
Provide a frei0r source.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
This source accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+size The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+framerate The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
+num /den or a frame rate abbreviation.
+
+filter_name The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
+how to set the parameters, read the frei0r section in the video filters
+documentation.
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
+
+
+
+
For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
+and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
+
+
frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
+
+
+
+
29.6 life# TOC
+
+
Generate a life pattern.
+
+
This source is based on a generalization of John Conway’s life game.
+
+
The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
+which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
+interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
+horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
+
+
At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
+which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
+cell stay alive or born. The rule option allows one to specify
+the rule to adopt.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
+each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
+is used to delimit the end of each row.
+
+If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
+randomly.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
+floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
+It is ignored when a file is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the life rule.
+
+A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "SNS /BNB ",
+where NS and NB are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
+NS specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
+live cell stay alive, and NB the number of alive neighbor cells
+which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
+"s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
+
+Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
+high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
+for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
+the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
+higher number of neighbor cells.
+For example the number 6153 = (12<<9)+9 specifies a stay alive
+rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
+
+Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway’s game of life
+rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
+cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
+a dead cell.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename is specified, the size is set by default to the
+same size of the input file. If size is set, it must contain
+the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
+that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
+
+If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
+(used for a randomly generated initial grid).
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
+top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
+
+mold Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from death_color to
+mold_color with a step of mold . mold can have a
+value from 0 to 255.
+
+life_color Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
+
+death_color Set the color of dead cells. If mold is set, this is the first color
+used to represent a dead cell.
+
+mold_color Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
+
+For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+
+
+
29.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read a grid from pattern , and center it on a grid of size
+300x300 pixels:
+
+
life=f=pattern:s=300x300
+ Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
+
+
life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
+
+
+ Full example with slow death effect (mold) using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
+
+
+
+
29.7 color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc# TOC
+
+
The color source provides an uniformly colored input.
+
+
The haldclutsrc source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
+haldclut filter.
+
+
The nullsrc source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
+mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
+source for filters which ignore the input data.
+
+
The rgbtestsrc source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
+detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
+stripe from top to bottom.
+
+
The smptebars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
+
+
The smptehdbars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
+
+
The testsrc source generates a test video pattern, showing a
+color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
+intended for testing purposes.
+
+
The sources accept the following parameters:
+
+
+color, c Specify the color of the source, only available in the color
+source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+level Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the haldclutsrc
+source. A level of N generates a picture of N*N*N by N*N*N
+pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
+coded on a 1/(N*N) scale.
+
+size, s Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
+"320x240".
+
+This option is not available with the haldclutsrc filter.
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+sar Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+decimals, n Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
+testsrc source.
+
+The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
+timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
+value. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For example the following:
+
+
testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
+
+
+
will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
+176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
+
+
The following graph description will generate a red source
+with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
+frames per second.
+
+
color=c=red@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
+
+
+
If the input content is to be ignored, nullsrc can be used. The
+following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
+the geq filter:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
+
+
+
+
29.7.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
The color source supports the following commands:
+
+
+c, color Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
+corresponding color option.
+
+
+
+
+
30 Video Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
+
+
+
30.1 buffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
+graph.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
+
30.2 nullsink# TOC
+
+
Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
31 Multimedia Filters# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
+
+
+
31.1 avectorscope# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
+scope.
+
+
The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
+audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
+signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
+as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
+If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
+indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode, m Set the vectorscope mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘lissajous ’
+Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
+
+‘lissajous_xy ’
+Same as above but not rotated.
+
+
+Default value is ‘lissajous ’.
+
+size, s Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is 400x400.
+
+rate, r Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+rc gc bc Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are 40, 160 and 80.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+rf gf bf Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are 15, 10 and 5.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+zoom Set the zoom factor. Default value is 1. Allowed range is [1, 10].
+
+
+
+
31.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Complete example using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
+
+
+
+
31.2 concat# TOC
+
+
Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
+other.
+
+
The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
+segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
+also be the number of streams at output.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
+
+v Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
+streams in each segment. Default is 1.
+
+a Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
+streams in each segment. Default is 0.
+
+unsafe Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
+
+
+
+
The filter has v +a outputs: first v video outputs, then
+a audio outputs.
+
+
There are n x(v +a ) inputs: first the inputs for the first
+segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
+segment, etc.
+
+
Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
+reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
+related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
+concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
+stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
+audio streams with silence.
+
+
For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
+
+
All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
+filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
+streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
+audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
+explicitly by the user.
+
+
Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
+at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
+
+
+
31.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
31.3 ebur128# TOC
+
+
EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
+it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
+Momentary loudness (identified by M), Short-term loudness (S),
+Integrated loudness (I) and Loudness Range (LRA).
+
+
The filter also has a video output (see the video option) with a real
+time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
+message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
+unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
+short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
+the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
+
+
More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
+http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness .
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+video Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
+option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
+activated. Default is 0.
+
+size Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
+and minimum resolution is 640x480.
+
+meter Set the EBU scale meter. Default is 9. Common values are 9 and
+18, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
+other integer value between this range is allowed.
+
+metadata Set metadata injection. If set to 1, the audio input will be segmented
+into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
+in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with lavfi.r128..
+
+Default is 0.
+
+framelog Force the frame logging level.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘info ’
+information logging level
+
‘verbose ’
+verbose logging level
+
+
+By default, the logging level is set to info . If the video or
+the metadata options are set, it switches to verbose .
+
+peak Set peak mode(s).
+
+Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a flag type). Possible
+values are:
+
+‘none ’
+Disable any peak mode (default).
+
‘sample ’
+Enable sample-peak mode.
+
+Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
+for sample-peak (identified by SPK).
+
‘true ’
+Enable true-peak mode.
+
+If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
+stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
+(identified by TPK) and true-peak per frame (identified by FTPK).
+This mode requires a build with libswresample.
+
+
+
+
+
+
31.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Real-time graph using ffplay, with a EBU scale meter +18:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
+ Run an analysis with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
+
+
+
+
31.4 interleave, ainterleave# TOC
+
+
Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
+
+
interleave works with video inputs, ainterleave with audio.
+
+
These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
+queued frame to the output.
+
+
Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
+timestamp values.
+
+
In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
+at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
+input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
+
+
For example consider the case when one input is a select filter
+which always drop input frames. The interleave filter will keep
+reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
+to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
+
+
Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
+frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
+the queue is already filled.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+
+nb_inputs, n Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
+
+
+
+
31.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Interleave frames belonging to different streams using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
+ Add flickering blur effect:
+
+
select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
+
+
+
+
31.5 perms, aperms# TOC
+
+
Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
+
+
These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
+following filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+mode Select the permissions mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing. This is the default.
+
‘ro ’
+Set all the output frames read-only.
+
‘rw ’
+Set all the output frames directly writable.
+
‘toggle ’
+Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
+
‘random ’
+Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
+
+
+seed Set the seed for the random mode, must be an integer included between
+0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
+-1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
+basis.
+
+
+
Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
+following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
+following filter. Inserting a format or aformat filter before the
+perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
+
+
+
31.6 select, aselect# TOC
+
+
Select frames to pass in output.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
+
+If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
+
+If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
+first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
+ceil(val)-1, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
+
+For example a value of 1.2 corresponds to the output with index
+ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1, that is the second output.
+
+outputs, n Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
+frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+selected_n The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
+
+prev_selected_n The sequential number of the last selected frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+pts The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in TB units. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+t The PTS of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_pts The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_pts The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_t The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_pts The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_t The time of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+pict_type (video only) The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
+values:
+
+I P B S SI SP BI
+
+interlace_type (video only) The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
+
+PROGRESSIVE The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
+
TOPFIRST The frame is top-field-first.
+
BOTTOMFIRST The frame is bottom-field-first.
+
+
+consumed_sample_n (audio only) the number of selected samples before the current frame
+
+samples_n (audio only) the number of samples in the current frame
+
+sample_rate (audio only) the input sample rate
+
+key This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+pos the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
+is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
+
+scene (video only) value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
+probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
+value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
+
+
+
+
The default value of the select expression is "1".
+
+
+
31.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
31.7 sendcmd, asendcmd# TOC
+
+
Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
+filtergraph.
+
+
sendcmd must be inserted between two video filters,
+asendcmd must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
+from that they act the same way.
+
+
The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
+with the commands option, or in a file specified by the
+filename option.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+commands, c Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
+
filename, f Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
+filters.
+
+
+
+
31.7.1 Commands syntax# TOC
+
+
A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
+specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
+particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
+is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
+interval.
+
+
An interval is specified by the following syntax:
+
+
+
The time interval is specified by the START and END times.
+END is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
+
+
The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
+it is included in the interval [START , END ), that is when
+the time is greater or equal to START and is lesser than
+END .
+
+
COMMANDS consists of a sequence of one or more command
+specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
+syntax of a command specification is given by:
+
+
[FLAGS ] TARGET COMMAND ARG
+
+
+
FLAGS is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
+the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
+be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
+enclosed between "[" and "]".
+
+
The following flags are recognized:
+
+enter The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
+current is.
+
+leave The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
+current is not.
+
+
+
If FLAGS is not specified, a default value of [enter] is
+assumed.
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
+the given COMMAND .
+
+
Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
+sequences of characters starting with # until the end of line,
+are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
+
+
A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
+follows:
+
+
COMMAND_FLAG ::= "enter" | "leave"
+COMMAND_FLAGS ::= COMMAND_FLAG [(+|"|")COMMAND_FLAG ]
+COMMAND ::= ["[" COMMAND_FLAGS "]"] TARGET COMMAND [ARG ]
+COMMANDS ::= COMMAND [,COMMANDS ]
+INTERVAL ::= START [-END ] COMMANDS
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [;INTERVALS ]
+
+
+
+
31.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
31.8 setpts, asetpts# TOC
+
+
Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
+
+
setpts works on video frames, asetpts on audio frames.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
+
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
+constants:
+
+
+FRAME_RATE frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
+
+PTS The presentation timestamp in input
+
+N The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
+not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
+
+NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
+audio)
+
+NB_SAMPLES, S The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
+
+SAMPLE_RATE, SR The audio sample rate.
+
+STARTPTS The PTS of the first frame.
+
+STARTT the time in seconds of the first frame
+
+INTERLACED State whether the current frame is interlaced.
+
+T the time in seconds of the current frame
+
+POS original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
+for the current frame
+
+PREV_INPTS The previous input PTS.
+
+PREV_INT previous input time in seconds
+
+PREV_OUTPTS The previous output PTS.
+
+PREV_OUTT previous output time in seconds
+
+RTCTIME The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
+instead.
+
+RTCSTART The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+
+
+
+
31.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Start counting PTS from zero
+
+
+ Apply fast motion effect:
+
+
+ Apply slow motion effect:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
+
+
setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
+ Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
+
+
+ Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
+
+
setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
+ Generate timestamps by counting samples:
+
+
+
+
+
+
31.9 settb, asettb# TOC
+
+
Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
+It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+expr, tb The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
+
+
+
+
The value for tb is an arithmetic expression representing a
+rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
+timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
+audio only). Default value is "intb".
+
+
+
31.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/25:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/10:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 2*intb:
+
+
+ Set the default timebase value:
+
+
+
+
+
31.10 showcqt# TOC
+
Convert input audio to a video output representing
+frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
+Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+volume Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
+variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+a_weighting(f) A-weighting of equal loudness
+
b_weighting(f) B-weighting of equal loudness
+
c_weighting(f) C-weighting of equal loudness
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+tlength Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+Default value is 384/f*tc/(384/f+tc).
+
+timeclamp Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
+accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
+event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
+otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
+(such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is 0.17.
+
+coeffclamp Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
+more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+gamma Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
+makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
+Default value is 3.0.
+
+fontfile Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
+
+fontcolor Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
+integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+midi(f) midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
+
r(x), g(x), b(x) red, green, and blue value of intensity x
+
+Default value is st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
+st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
+r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))
+
+fullhd If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
+if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
+
+fps Specify video fps. Default value is 25.
+
+count Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
+per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
+Default value is 6.
+
+
+
+
+
31.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
+ Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
+ A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
+ B-weighting of equal loudness
+
+
volume=16*b_weighting(f)
+ Lower Q factor
+
+
tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
+ Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
+
+
fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
+
+
+
+
31.11 showspectrum# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
+spectrum.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
+640x512.
+
+slide Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘replace ’
+the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
+
‘scroll ’
+the samples scroll from right to left
+
‘fullframe ’
+frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
+
+
+Default value is replace.
+
+mode Specify display mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘combined ’
+all channels are displayed in the same row
+
‘separate ’
+all channels are displayed in separate rows
+
+
+Default value is ‘combined ’.
+
+color Specify display color mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘channel ’
+each channel is displayed in a separate color
+
‘intensity ’
+each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
+
+
+Default value is ‘channel ’.
+
+scale Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘lin ’
+linear
+
‘sqrt ’
+square root, default
+
‘cbrt ’
+cubic root
+
‘log ’
+logarithmic
+
+
+Default value is ‘sqrt ’.
+
+saturation Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
+alternative color scheme. 0 is no saturation at all.
+Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
+Default value is 1.
+
+win_func Set window function.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
+
‘hann ’
+Hann window
+
‘hamming ’
+Hamming window
+
‘blackman ’
+Blackman window
+
+
+Default value is hann.
+
+
+
The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
+section.
+
+
+
31.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
+
+
showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
+ Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
+
+
+
+
31.12 showwaves# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
+is "600x240".
+
+mode Set display mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘point ’
+Draw a point for each sample.
+
+‘line ’
+Draw a vertical line for each sample.
+
+‘p2p ’
+Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
+
+‘cline ’
+Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
+
+
+Default value is point.
+
+n Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
+larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
+integer. This option can be set only if the value for rate
+is not explicitly specified.
+
+rate, r Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
+option n . Default value is "25".
+
+split_channels Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
31.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
+at the same time:
+
+
amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
+ Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
+frame rate of 30 frames per second:
+
+
aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
+
+
+
+
31.13 split, asplit# TOC
+
+
Split input into several identical outputs.
+
+
asplit works with audio input, split with video.
+
+
The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
+unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+
+
31.13.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input:
+
+
[in] split [out0][out1]
+ To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
+outputs, like in:
+
+
[in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
+one padded:
+
+
[in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
+[splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
+[splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
+ Create 5 copies of the input audio with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
31.14 zmq, azmq# TOC
+
+
Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
+filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
zmq and azmq work as a pass-through filters. zmq
+must be inserted between two video filters, azmq between two
+audio filters.
+
+
To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
+headers and configure FFmpeg with --enable-libzmq.
+
+
For more information about libzmq see:
+http://www.zeromq.org/
+
+
The zmq and azmq filters work as a libzmq server, which
+receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
+bind_address option.
+
+
The received message must be in the form:
+
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
+given COMMAND .
+
+
Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
+is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
+will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
+
+
ERROR_CODE ERROR_REASON
+MESSAGE
+
+
+
MESSAGE is optional.
+
+
+
31.14.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Look at tools/zmqsend for an example of a zmq client which can
+be used to send commands processed by these filters.
+
+
Consider the following filtergraph generated by ffplay
+
+
ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
+color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
+color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
+nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
+[bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
+[bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
+
+
+
To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
+command can be used:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
To change the right side:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
+
+
32 Multimedia Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
+
+
+
32.1 amovie# TOC
+
+
This is the same as movie source, except it selects an audio
+stream by default.
+
+
+
32.2 movie# TOC
+
+
Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filename The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
+device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
+
+format_name, f Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
+the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
+format is guessed from movie_name or by probing.
+
+seek_point, sp Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
+starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
+av_strtod, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
+postfix. The default value is "0".
+
+streams, s Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
+separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
+same order. The syntax is explained in the “Stream specifiers”
+section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
+respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
+is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
+
+stream_index, si Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
+the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
+value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
+audio instead of video.
+
+loop Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
+If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
+Default value is "1".
+
+Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
+changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
+
+
+
It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
+a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
+
+
input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
+ ^
+ |
+movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
+
+
+
32.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
+on top of the input labelled "in":
+
+
movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
+labelled "in":
+
+
movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
+dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
+connected to the pad named "audio":
+
+
movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
+
+
+
+
+
33 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffplay ,
+ffmpeg , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
34 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffplay Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffplay Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffplay [options ] [input_file ]
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
FFplay is a very simple and portable media player using the FFmpeg
+libraries and the SDL library. It is mostly used as a testbed for the
+various FFmpeg APIs.
+
+
+
3 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
3.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
3.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
3.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
3.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-x width Force displayed width.
+
-y height Force displayed height.
+
-s size Set frame size (WxH or abbreviation), needed for videos which do
+not contain a header with the frame size like raw YUV. This option
+has been deprecated in favor of private options, try -video_size.
+
-fs Start in fullscreen mode.
+
-an Disable audio.
+
-vn Disable video.
+
-sn Disable subtitles.
+
-ss pos Seek to a given position in seconds.
+
-t duration play <duration> seconds of audio/video
+
-bytes Seek by bytes.
+
-nodisp Disable graphical display.
+
-f fmt Force format.
+
-window_title title Set window title (default is the input filename).
+
-loop number Loops movie playback <number> times. 0 means forever.
+
-showmode mode Set the show mode to use.
+Available values for mode are:
+
+‘0, video ’
+show video
+
‘1, waves ’
+show audio waves
+
‘2, rdft ’
+show audio frequency band using RDFT ((Inverse) Real Discrete Fourier Transform)
+
+
+Default value is "video", if video is not present or cannot be played
+"rdft" is automatically selected.
+
+You can interactively cycle through the available show modes by
+pressing the key w .
+
+-vf filtergraph Create the filtergraph specified by filtergraph and use it to
+filter the video stream.
+
+filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the stream, and must have a single video input and a single video
+output. In the filtergraph, the input is associated to the label
+in, and the output to the label out. See the
+ffmpeg-filters manual for more information about the filtergraph
+syntax.
+
+You can specify this parameter multiple times and cycle through the specified
+filtergraphs along with the show modes by pressing the key w .
+
+-af filtergraph filtergraph is a description of the filtergraph to apply to
+the input audio.
+Use the option "-filters" to show all the available filters (including
+sources and sinks).
+
+-i input_file Read input_file .
+
+
+
+
3.5 Advanced options# TOC
+
+-pix_fmt format Set pixel format.
+This option has been deprecated in favor of private options, try -pixel_format.
+
+-stats Print several playback statistics, in particular show the stream
+duration, the codec parameters, the current position in the stream and
+the audio/video synchronisation drift. It is on by default, to
+explicitly disable it you need to specify -nostats.
+
+-fast Non-spec-compliant optimizations.
+
-genpts Generate pts.
+
-sync type Set the master clock to audio (type=audio), video
+(type=video) or external (type=ext). Default is audio. The
+master clock is used to control audio-video synchronization. Most media
+players use audio as master clock, but in some cases (streaming or high
+quality broadcast) it is necessary to change that. This option is mainly
+used for debugging purposes.
+
-ast audio_stream_specifier Select the desired audio stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" audio stream is selected in the program of the
+already selected video stream.
+
-vst video_stream_specifier Select the desired video stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" video stream is selected.
+
-sst subtitle_stream_specifier Select the desired subtitle stream using the given stream specifier. The stream
+specifiers are described in the Stream specifiers chapter. If this option
+is not specified, the "best" subtitle stream is selected in the program of the
+already selected video or audio stream.
+
-autoexit Exit when video is done playing.
+
-exitonkeydown Exit if any key is pressed.
+
-exitonmousedown Exit if any mouse button is pressed.
+
+-codec:media_specifier codec_name Force a specific decoder implementation for the stream identified by
+media_specifier , which can assume the values a (audio),
+v (video), and s subtitle.
+
+-acodec codec_name Force a specific audio decoder.
+
+-vcodec codec_name Force a specific video decoder.
+
+-scodec codec_name Force a specific subtitle decoder.
+
+-autorotate Automatically rotate the video according to presentation metadata. Enabled by
+default, use -noautorotate to disable it.
+
+-framedrop Drop video frames if video is out of sync. Enabled by default if the master
+clock is not set to video. Use this option to enable frame dropping for all
+master clock sources, use -noframedrop to disable it.
+
+-infbuf Do not limit the input buffer size, read as much data as possible from the
+input as soon as possible. Enabled by default for realtime streams, where data
+may be dropped if not read in time. Use this option to enable infinite buffers
+for all inputs, use -noinfbuf to disable it.
+
+
+
+
+
3.6 While playing# TOC
+
+
+q, ESC Quit.
+
+f Toggle full screen.
+
+p, SPC Pause.
+
+a Cycle audio channel in the current program.
+
+v Cycle video channel.
+
+t Cycle subtitle channel in the current program.
+
+c Cycle program.
+
+w Cycle video filters or show modes.
+
+s Step to the next frame.
+
+Pause if the stream is not already paused, step to the next video
+frame, and pause.
+
+left/right Seek backward/forward 10 seconds.
+
+down/up Seek backward/forward 1 minute.
+
+page down/page up Seek to the previous/next chapter.
+or if there are no chapters
+Seek backward/forward 10 minutes.
+
+mouse click Seek to percentage in file corresponding to fraction of width.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
4 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg-all ,
+ffmpeg , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
5 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffprobe Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffprobe Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffprobe [options ] [input_file ]
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
ffprobe gathers information from multimedia streams and prints it in
+human- and machine-readable fashion.
+
+
For example it can be used to check the format of the container used
+by a multimedia stream and the format and type of each media stream
+contained in it.
+
+
If a filename is specified in input, ffprobe will try to open and
+probe the file content. If the file cannot be opened or recognized as
+a multimedia file, a positive exit code is returned.
+
+
ffprobe may be employed both as a standalone application or in
+combination with a textual filter, which may perform more
+sophisticated processing, e.g. statistical processing or plotting.
+
+
Options are used to list some of the formats supported by ffprobe or
+for specifying which information to display, and for setting how
+ffprobe will show it.
+
+
ffprobe output is designed to be easily parsable by a textual filter,
+and consists of one or more sections of a form defined by the selected
+writer, which is specified by the print_format option.
+
+
Sections may contain other nested sections, and are identified by a
+name (which may be shared by other sections), and an unique
+name. See the output of sections .
+
+
Metadata tags stored in the container or in the streams are recognized
+and printed in the corresponding "FORMAT", "STREAM" or "PROGRAM_STREAM"
+section.
+
+
+
+
3 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
3.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
3.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
3.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
3.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-f format Force format to use.
+
+-unit Show the unit of the displayed values.
+
+-prefix Use SI prefixes for the displayed values.
+Unless the "-byte_binary_prefix" option is used all the prefixes
+are decimal.
+
+-byte_binary_prefix Force the use of binary prefixes for byte values.
+
+-sexagesimal Use sexagesimal format HH:MM:SS.MICROSECONDS for time values.
+
+-pretty Prettify the format of the displayed values, it corresponds to the
+options "-unit -prefix -byte_binary_prefix -sexagesimal".
+
+-of, -print_format writer_name [=writer_options ] Set the output printing format.
+
+writer_name specifies the name of the writer, and
+writer_options specifies the options to be passed to the writer.
+
+For example for printing the output in JSON format, specify:
+
+
+For more details on the available output printing formats, see the
+Writers section below.
+
+-sections Print sections structure and section information, and exit. The output
+is not meant to be parsed by a machine.
+
+-select_streams stream_specifier Select only the streams specified by stream_specifier . This
+option affects only the options related to streams
+(e.g. show_streams, show_packets, etc.).
+
+For example to show only audio streams, you can use the command:
+
+
ffprobe -show_streams -select_streams a INPUT
+ To show only video packets belonging to the video stream with index 1:
+
+
ffprobe -show_packets -select_streams v:1 INPUT
+ -show_data Show payload data, as a hexadecimal and ASCII dump. Coupled with
+-show_packets , it will dump the packets’ data. Coupled with
+-show_streams , it will dump the codec extradata.
+
+The dump is printed as the "data" field. It may contain newlines.
+
+-show_data_hash algorithm Show a hash of payload data, for packets with -show_packets and for
+codec extradata with -show_streams .
+
+-show_error Show information about the error found when trying to probe the input.
+
+The error information is printed within a section with name "ERROR".
+
+-show_format Show information about the container format of the input multimedia
+stream.
+
+All the container format information is printed within a section with
+name "FORMAT".
+
+-show_format_entry name Like -show_format , but only prints the specified entry of the
+container format information, rather than all. This option may be given more
+than once, then all specified entries will be shown.
+
+This option is deprecated, use show_entries instead.
+
+-show_entries section_entries Set list of entries to show.
+
+Entries are specified according to the following
+syntax. section_entries contains a list of section entries
+separated by :. Each section entry is composed by a section
+name (or unique name), optionally followed by a list of entries local
+to that section, separated by ,.
+
+If section name is specified but is followed by no =, all
+entries are printed to output, together with all the contained
+sections. Otherwise only the entries specified in the local section
+entries list are printed. In particular, if = is specified but
+the list of local entries is empty, then no entries will be shown for
+that section.
+
+Note that the order of specification of the local section entries is
+not honored in the output, and the usual display order will be
+retained.
+
+The formal syntax is given by:
+
+
LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ::= SECTION_ENTRY_NAME [,LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ]
+SECTION_ENTRY ::= SECTION_NAME [=[LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ]]
+SECTION_ENTRIES ::= SECTION_ENTRY [:SECTION_ENTRIES ]
+For example, to show only the index and type of each stream, and the PTS
+time, duration time, and stream index of the packets, you can specify
+the argument:
+
+
packet=pts_time,duration_time,stream_index : stream=index,codec_type
+ To show all the entries in the section "format", but only the codec
+type in the section "stream", specify the argument:
+
+
format : stream=codec_type
+ To show all the tags in the stream and format sections:
+
+
stream_tags : format_tags
+ To show only the title tag (if available) in the stream
+sections:
+
+
+-show_packets Show information about each packet contained in the input multimedia
+stream.
+
+The information for each single packet is printed within a dedicated
+section with name "PACKET".
+
+-show_frames Show information about each frame and subtitle contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+The information for each single frame is printed within a dedicated
+section with name "FRAME" or "SUBTITLE".
+
+-show_streams Show information about each media stream contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+Each media stream information is printed within a dedicated section
+with name "STREAM".
+
+-show_programs Show information about programs and their streams contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+Each media stream information is printed within a dedicated section
+with name "PROGRAM_STREAM".
+
+-show_chapters Show information about chapters stored in the format.
+
+Each chapter is printed within a dedicated section with name "CHAPTER".
+
+-count_frames Count the number of frames per stream and report it in the
+corresponding stream section.
+
+-count_packets Count the number of packets per stream and report it in the
+corresponding stream section.
+
+-read_intervals read_intervals
+Read only the specified intervals. read_intervals must be a
+sequence of interval specifications separated by ",".
+ffprobe will seek to the interval starting point, and will
+continue reading from that.
+
+Each interval is specified by two optional parts, separated by "%".
+
+The first part specifies the interval start position. It is
+interpreted as an abolute position, or as a relative offset from the
+current position if it is preceded by the "+" character. If this first
+part is not specified, no seeking will be performed when reading this
+interval.
+
+The second part specifies the interval end position. It is interpreted
+as an absolute position, or as a relative offset from the current
+position if it is preceded by the "+" character. If the offset
+specification starts with "#", it is interpreted as the number of
+packets to read (not including the flushing packets) from the interval
+start. If no second part is specified, the program will read until the
+end of the input.
+
+Note that seeking is not accurate, thus the actual interval start
+point may be different from the specified position. Also, when an
+interval duration is specified, the absolute end time will be computed
+by adding the duration to the interval start point found by seeking
+the file, rather than to the specified start value.
+
+The formal syntax is given by:
+
+
INTERVAL ::= [START |+START_OFFSET ][%[END |+END_OFFSET ]]
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [,INTERVALS ]
+A few examples follow.
+
+ Seek to time 10, read packets until 20 seconds after the found seek
+point, then seek to position 01:30 (1 minute and thirty
+seconds) and read packets until position 01:45.
+
+
+ Read only 42 packets after seeking to position 01:23:
+
+
+ Read only the first 20 seconds from the start:
+
+
+ Read from the start until position 02:30:
+
+
+
+
+-show_private_data, -private Show private data, that is data depending on the format of the
+particular shown element.
+This option is enabled by default, but you may need to disable it
+for specific uses, for example when creating XSD-compliant XML output.
+
+-show_program_version Show information related to program version.
+
+Version information is printed within a section with name
+"PROGRAM_VERSION".
+
+-show_library_versions Show information related to library versions.
+
+Version information for each library is printed within a section with
+name "LIBRARY_VERSION".
+
+-show_versions Show information related to program and library versions. This is the
+equivalent of setting both -show_program_version and
+-show_library_versions options.
+
+-show_pixel_formats Show information about all pixel formats supported by FFmpeg.
+
+Pixel format information for each format is printed within a section
+with name "PIXEL_FORMAT".
+
+-bitexact Force bitexact output, useful to produce output which is not dependent
+on the specific build.
+
+-i input_file Read input_file .
+
+
+
+
+
4 Writers# TOC
+
+
A writer defines the output format adopted by ffprobe, and will be
+used for printing all the parts of the output.
+
+
A writer may accept one or more arguments, which specify the options
+to adopt. The options are specified as a list of key =value
+pairs, separated by ":".
+
+
All writers support the following options:
+
+
+string_validation, sv Set string validation mode.
+
+The following values are accepted.
+
+‘fail ’
+The writer will fail immediately in case an invalid string (UTF-8)
+sequence or code point is found in the input. This is especially
+useful to validate input metadata.
+
+‘ignore ’
+Any validation error will be ignored. This will result in possibly
+broken output, especially with the json or xml writer.
+
+‘replace ’
+The writer will substitute invalid UTF-8 sequences or code points with
+the string specified with the string_validation_replacement .
+
+
+Default value is ‘replace ’.
+
+string_validation_replacement, svr Set replacement string to use in case string_validation is
+set to ‘replace ’.
+
+In case the option is not specified, the writer will assume the empty
+string, that is it will remove the invalid sequences from the input
+strings.
+
+
+
A description of the currently available writers follows.
+
+
+
4.1 default# TOC
+
Default format.
+
+
Print each section in the form:
+
+
[SECTION]
+key1=val1
+...
+keyN=valN
+[/SECTION]
+
+
+
Metadata tags are printed as a line in the corresponding FORMAT, STREAM or
+PROGRAM_STREAM section, and are prefixed by the string "TAG:".
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+nokey, nk If set to 1 specify not to print the key of each field. Default value
+is 0.
+
+noprint_wrappers, nw If set to 1 specify not to print the section header and footer.
+Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
4.2 compact, csv# TOC
+
Compact and CSV format.
+
+
The csv writer is equivalent to compact, but supports
+different defaults.
+
+
Each section is printed on a single line.
+If no option is specifid, the output has the form:
+
+
section|key1=val1| ... |keyN=valN
+
+
+
Metadata tags are printed in the corresponding "format" or "stream"
+section. A metadata tag key, if printed, is prefixed by the string
+"tag:".
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+item_sep, s Specify the character to use for separating fields in the output line.
+It must be a single printable character, it is "|" by default ("," for
+the csv writer).
+
+nokey, nk If set to 1 specify not to print the key of each field. Its default
+value is 0 (1 for the csv writer).
+
+escape, e Set the escape mode to use, default to "c" ("csv" for the csv
+writer).
+
+It can assume one of the following values:
+
+c Perform C-like escaping. Strings containing a newline (’\n’), carriage
+return (’\r’), a tab (’\t’), a form feed (’\f’), the escaping
+character (’\’) or the item separator character SEP are escaped using C-like fashioned
+escaping, so that a newline is converted to the sequence "\n", a
+carriage return to "\r", ’\’ to "\\" and the separator SEP is
+converted to "\SEP ".
+
+csv Perform CSV-like escaping, as described in RFC4180. Strings
+containing a newline (’\n’), a carriage return (’\r’), a double quote
+(’"’), or SEP are enclosed in double-quotes.
+
+none Perform no escaping.
+
+
+print_section, p Print the section name at the begin of each line if the value is
+1, disable it with value set to 0. Default value is
+1.
+
+
+
+
+
4.3 flat# TOC
+
Flat format.
+
+
A free-form output where each line contains an explicit key=value, such as
+"streams.stream.3.tags.foo=bar". The output is shell escaped, so it can be
+directly embedded in sh scripts as long as the separator character is an
+alphanumeric character or an underscore (see sep_char option).
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+sep_char, s Separator character used to separate the chapter, the section name, IDs and
+potential tags in the printed field key.
+
+Default value is ’.’.
+
+hierarchical, h Specify if the section name specification should be hierarchical. If
+set to 1, and if there is more than one section in the current
+chapter, the section name will be prefixed by the name of the
+chapter. A value of 0 will disable this behavior.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
INI format output.
+
+
Print output in an INI based format.
+
+
The following conventions are adopted:
+
+
+ all key and values are UTF-8
+ ’.’ is the subgroup separator
+ newline, ’\t’, ’\f’, ’\b’ and the following characters are escaped
+ ’\’ is the escape character
+ ’#’ is the comment indicator
+ ’=’ is the key/value separator
+ ’:’ is not used but usually parsed as key/value separator
+
+
+
This writer accepts options as a list of key =value pairs,
+separated by ":".
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+hierarchical, h Specify if the section name specification should be hierarchical. If
+set to 1, and if there is more than one section in the current
+chapter, the section name will be prefixed by the name of the
+chapter. A value of 0 will disable this behavior.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
4.5 json# TOC
+
JSON based format.
+
+
Each section is printed using JSON notation.
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+compact, c If set to 1 enable compact output, that is each section will be
+printed on a single line. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For more information about JSON, see http://www.json.org/ .
+
+
+
+
XML based format.
+
+
The XML output is described in the XML schema description file
+ffprobe.xsd installed in the FFmpeg datadir.
+
+
An updated version of the schema can be retrieved at the url
+http://www.ffmpeg.org/schema/ffprobe.xsd , which redirects to the
+latest schema committed into the FFmpeg development source code tree.
+
+
Note that the output issued will be compliant to the
+ffprobe.xsd schema only when no special global output options
+(unit , prefix , byte_binary_prefix ,
+sexagesimal etc.) are specified.
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+fully_qualified, q If set to 1 specify if the output should be fully qualified. Default
+value is 0.
+This is required for generating an XML file which can be validated
+through an XSD file.
+
+xsd_compliant, x If set to 1 perform more checks for ensuring that the output is XSD
+compliant. Default value is 0.
+This option automatically sets fully_qualified to 1.
+
+
+
For more information about the XML format, see
+http://www.w3.org/XML/ .
+
+
+
5 Timecode# TOC
+
+
ffprobe supports Timecode extraction:
+
+
+ MPEG1/2 timecode is extracted from the GOP, and is available in the video
+stream details (-show_streams , see timecode ).
+
+ MOV timecode is extracted from tmcd track, so is available in the tmcd
+stream metadata (-show_streams , see TAG:timecode ).
+
+ DV, GXF and AVI timecodes are available in format metadata
+(-show_format , see TAG:timecode ).
+
+
+
+
+
6 Syntax# TOC
+
+
This section documents the syntax and formats employed by the FFmpeg
+libraries and tools.
+
+
+
6.1 Quoting and escaping# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg adopts the following quoting and escaping mechanism, unless
+explicitly specified. The following rules are applied:
+
+
+ ' and \ are special characters (respectively used for
+quoting and escaping). In addition to them, there might be other
+special characters depending on the specific syntax where the escaping
+and quoting are employed.
+
+ A special character is escaped by prefixing it with a ’\’.
+
+ All characters enclosed between ” are included literally in the
+parsed string. The quote character ' itself cannot be quoted,
+so you may need to close the quote and escape it.
+
+ Leading and trailing whitespaces, unless escaped or quoted, are
+removed from the parsed string.
+
+
+
Note that you may need to add a second level of escaping when using
+the command line or a script, which depends on the syntax of the
+adopted shell language.
+
+
The function av_get_token defined in
+libavutil/avstring.h can be used to parse a token quoted or
+escaped according to the rules defined above.
+
+
The tool tools/ffescape in the FFmpeg source tree can be used
+to automatically quote or escape a string in a script.
+
+
+
6.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Escape the string Crime d'Amour containing the ' special
+character:
+
+
+ The string above contains a quote, so the ' needs to be escaped
+when quoting it:
+
+
+ Include leading or trailing whitespaces using quoting:
+
+
' this string starts and ends with whitespaces '
+ Escaping and quoting can be mixed together:
+
+
' The string '\'string\'' is a string '
+ To include a literal \ you can use either escaping or quoting:
+
+
'c:\foo' can be written as c:\\foo
+
+
+
+
6.2 Date# TOC
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
[(YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD)[T|t| ]]((HH:MM:SS[.m...]]])|(HHMMSS[.m...]]]))[Z]
+now
+
+
+
If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+
+
Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+interpreted as UTC.
+If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+year-month-day.
+
+
+
6.3 Time duration# TOC
+
+
There are two accepted syntaxes for expressing time duration.
+
+
+
+
HH expresses the number of hours, MM the number of minutes
+for a maximum of 2 digits, and SS the number of seconds for a
+maximum of 2 digits. The m at the end expresses decimal value for
+SS .
+
+
or
+
+
+
+
S expresses the number of seconds, with the optional decimal part
+m .
+
+
In both expressions, the optional ‘- ’ indicates negative duration.
+
+
+
6.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples are all valid time duration:
+
+
+‘55 ’
+55 seconds
+
+‘12:03:45 ’
+12 hours, 03 minutes and 45 seconds
+
+‘23.189 ’
+23.189 seconds
+
+
+
+
6.4 Video size# TOC
+
Specify the size of the sourced video, it may be a string of the form
+width xheight , or the name of a size abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+720x480
+
‘pal ’
+720x576
+
‘qntsc ’
+352x240
+
‘qpal ’
+352x288
+
‘sntsc ’
+640x480
+
‘spal ’
+768x576
+
‘film ’
+352x240
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+352x240
+
‘sqcif ’
+128x96
+
‘qcif ’
+176x144
+
‘cif ’
+352x288
+
‘4cif ’
+704x576
+
‘16cif ’
+1408x1152
+
‘qqvga ’
+160x120
+
‘qvga ’
+320x240
+
‘vga ’
+640x480
+
‘svga ’
+800x600
+
‘xga ’
+1024x768
+
‘uxga ’
+1600x1200
+
‘qxga ’
+2048x1536
+
‘sxga ’
+1280x1024
+
‘qsxga ’
+2560x2048
+
‘hsxga ’
+5120x4096
+
‘wvga ’
+852x480
+
‘wxga ’
+1366x768
+
‘wsxga ’
+1600x1024
+
‘wuxga ’
+1920x1200
+
‘woxga ’
+2560x1600
+
‘wqsxga ’
+3200x2048
+
‘wquxga ’
+3840x2400
+
‘whsxga ’
+6400x4096
+
‘whuxga ’
+7680x4800
+
‘cga ’
+320x200
+
‘ega ’
+640x350
+
‘hd480 ’
+852x480
+
‘hd720 ’
+1280x720
+
‘hd1080 ’
+1920x1080
+
‘2k ’
+2048x1080
+
‘2kflat ’
+1998x1080
+
‘2kscope ’
+2048x858
+
‘4k ’
+4096x2160
+
‘4kflat ’
+3996x2160
+
‘4kscope ’
+4096x1716
+
‘nhd ’
+640x360
+
‘hqvga ’
+240x160
+
‘wqvga ’
+400x240
+
‘fwqvga ’
+432x240
+
‘hvga ’
+480x320
+
‘qhd ’
+960x540
+
+
+
+
6.5 Video rate# TOC
+
+
Specify the frame rate of a video, expressed as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a float
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation.
+
+
The following abbreviations are recognized:
+
+‘ntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘pal ’
+25/1
+
‘qntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘qpal ’
+25/1
+
‘sntsc ’
+30000/1001
+
‘spal ’
+25/1
+
‘film ’
+24/1
+
‘ntsc-film ’
+24000/1001
+
+
+
+
6.6 Ratio# TOC
+
+
A ratio can be expressed as an expression, or in the form
+numerator :denominator .
+
+
Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+want to exclude those values.
+
+
The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+
+
+
6.7 Color# TOC
+
+
It can be the name of a color as defined below (case insensitive match) or a
+[0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence, possibly followed by @ and a string
+representing the alpha component.
+
+
The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+represents the opacity value (‘0x00 ’ or ‘0.0 ’ means completely
+transparent, ‘0xff ’ or ‘1.0 ’ completely opaque). If the alpha
+component is not specified then ‘0xff ’ is assumed.
+
+
The string ‘random ’ will result in a random color.
+
+
The following names of colors are recognized:
+
+‘AliceBlue ’
+0xF0F8FF
+
‘AntiqueWhite ’
+0xFAEBD7
+
‘Aqua ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘Aquamarine ’
+0x7FFFD4
+
‘Azure ’
+0xF0FFFF
+
‘Beige ’
+0xF5F5DC
+
‘Bisque ’
+0xFFE4C4
+
‘Black ’
+0x000000
+
‘BlanchedAlmond ’
+0xFFEBCD
+
‘Blue ’
+0x0000FF
+
‘BlueViolet ’
+0x8A2BE2
+
‘Brown ’
+0xA52A2A
+
‘BurlyWood ’
+0xDEB887
+
‘CadetBlue ’
+0x5F9EA0
+
‘Chartreuse ’
+0x7FFF00
+
‘Chocolate ’
+0xD2691E
+
‘Coral ’
+0xFF7F50
+
‘CornflowerBlue ’
+0x6495ED
+
‘Cornsilk ’
+0xFFF8DC
+
‘Crimson ’
+0xDC143C
+
‘Cyan ’
+0x00FFFF
+
‘DarkBlue ’
+0x00008B
+
‘DarkCyan ’
+0x008B8B
+
‘DarkGoldenRod ’
+0xB8860B
+
‘DarkGray ’
+0xA9A9A9
+
‘DarkGreen ’
+0x006400
+
‘DarkKhaki ’
+0xBDB76B
+
‘DarkMagenta ’
+0x8B008B
+
‘DarkOliveGreen ’
+0x556B2F
+
‘Darkorange ’
+0xFF8C00
+
‘DarkOrchid ’
+0x9932CC
+
‘DarkRed ’
+0x8B0000
+
‘DarkSalmon ’
+0xE9967A
+
‘DarkSeaGreen ’
+0x8FBC8F
+
‘DarkSlateBlue ’
+0x483D8B
+
‘DarkSlateGray ’
+0x2F4F4F
+
‘DarkTurquoise ’
+0x00CED1
+
‘DarkViolet ’
+0x9400D3
+
‘DeepPink ’
+0xFF1493
+
‘DeepSkyBlue ’
+0x00BFFF
+
‘DimGray ’
+0x696969
+
‘DodgerBlue ’
+0x1E90FF
+
‘FireBrick ’
+0xB22222
+
‘FloralWhite ’
+0xFFFAF0
+
‘ForestGreen ’
+0x228B22
+
‘Fuchsia ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Gainsboro ’
+0xDCDCDC
+
‘GhostWhite ’
+0xF8F8FF
+
‘Gold ’
+0xFFD700
+
‘GoldenRod ’
+0xDAA520
+
‘Gray ’
+0x808080
+
‘Green ’
+0x008000
+
‘GreenYellow ’
+0xADFF2F
+
‘HoneyDew ’
+0xF0FFF0
+
‘HotPink ’
+0xFF69B4
+
‘IndianRed ’
+0xCD5C5C
+
‘Indigo ’
+0x4B0082
+
‘Ivory ’
+0xFFFFF0
+
‘Khaki ’
+0xF0E68C
+
‘Lavender ’
+0xE6E6FA
+
‘LavenderBlush ’
+0xFFF0F5
+
‘LawnGreen ’
+0x7CFC00
+
‘LemonChiffon ’
+0xFFFACD
+
‘LightBlue ’
+0xADD8E6
+
‘LightCoral ’
+0xF08080
+
‘LightCyan ’
+0xE0FFFF
+
‘LightGoldenRodYellow ’
+0xFAFAD2
+
‘LightGreen ’
+0x90EE90
+
‘LightGrey ’
+0xD3D3D3
+
‘LightPink ’
+0xFFB6C1
+
‘LightSalmon ’
+0xFFA07A
+
‘LightSeaGreen ’
+0x20B2AA
+
‘LightSkyBlue ’
+0x87CEFA
+
‘LightSlateGray ’
+0x778899
+
‘LightSteelBlue ’
+0xB0C4DE
+
‘LightYellow ’
+0xFFFFE0
+
‘Lime ’
+0x00FF00
+
‘LimeGreen ’
+0x32CD32
+
‘Linen ’
+0xFAF0E6
+
‘Magenta ’
+0xFF00FF
+
‘Maroon ’
+0x800000
+
‘MediumAquaMarine ’
+0x66CDAA
+
‘MediumBlue ’
+0x0000CD
+
‘MediumOrchid ’
+0xBA55D3
+
‘MediumPurple ’
+0x9370D8
+
‘MediumSeaGreen ’
+0x3CB371
+
‘MediumSlateBlue ’
+0x7B68EE
+
‘MediumSpringGreen ’
+0x00FA9A
+
‘MediumTurquoise ’
+0x48D1CC
+
‘MediumVioletRed ’
+0xC71585
+
‘MidnightBlue ’
+0x191970
+
‘MintCream ’
+0xF5FFFA
+
‘MistyRose ’
+0xFFE4E1
+
‘Moccasin ’
+0xFFE4B5
+
‘NavajoWhite ’
+0xFFDEAD
+
‘Navy ’
+0x000080
+
‘OldLace ’
+0xFDF5E6
+
‘Olive ’
+0x808000
+
‘OliveDrab ’
+0x6B8E23
+
‘Orange ’
+0xFFA500
+
‘OrangeRed ’
+0xFF4500
+
‘Orchid ’
+0xDA70D6
+
‘PaleGoldenRod ’
+0xEEE8AA
+
‘PaleGreen ’
+0x98FB98
+
‘PaleTurquoise ’
+0xAFEEEE
+
‘PaleVioletRed ’
+0xD87093
+
‘PapayaWhip ’
+0xFFEFD5
+
‘PeachPuff ’
+0xFFDAB9
+
‘Peru ’
+0xCD853F
+
‘Pink ’
+0xFFC0CB
+
‘Plum ’
+0xDDA0DD
+
‘PowderBlue ’
+0xB0E0E6
+
‘Purple ’
+0x800080
+
‘Red ’
+0xFF0000
+
‘RosyBrown ’
+0xBC8F8F
+
‘RoyalBlue ’
+0x4169E1
+
‘SaddleBrown ’
+0x8B4513
+
‘Salmon ’
+0xFA8072
+
‘SandyBrown ’
+0xF4A460
+
‘SeaGreen ’
+0x2E8B57
+
‘SeaShell ’
+0xFFF5EE
+
‘Sienna ’
+0xA0522D
+
‘Silver ’
+0xC0C0C0
+
‘SkyBlue ’
+0x87CEEB
+
‘SlateBlue ’
+0x6A5ACD
+
‘SlateGray ’
+0x708090
+
‘Snow ’
+0xFFFAFA
+
‘SpringGreen ’
+0x00FF7F
+
‘SteelBlue ’
+0x4682B4
+
‘Tan ’
+0xD2B48C
+
‘Teal ’
+0x008080
+
‘Thistle ’
+0xD8BFD8
+
‘Tomato ’
+0xFF6347
+
‘Turquoise ’
+0x40E0D0
+
‘Violet ’
+0xEE82EE
+
‘Wheat ’
+0xF5DEB3
+
‘White ’
+0xFFFFFF
+
‘WhiteSmoke ’
+0xF5F5F5
+
‘Yellow ’
+0xFFFF00
+
‘YellowGreen ’
+0x9ACD32
+
+
+
+
6.8 Channel Layout# TOC
+
+
A channel layout specifies the spatial disposition of the channels in
+a multi-channel audio stream. To specify a channel layout, FFmpeg
+makes use of a special syntax.
+
+
Individual channels are identified by an id, as given by the table
+below:
+
+‘FL ’
+front left
+
‘FR ’
+front right
+
‘FC ’
+front center
+
‘LFE ’
+low frequency
+
‘BL ’
+back left
+
‘BR ’
+back right
+
‘FLC ’
+front left-of-center
+
‘FRC ’
+front right-of-center
+
‘BC ’
+back center
+
‘SL ’
+side left
+
‘SR ’
+side right
+
‘TC ’
+top center
+
‘TFL ’
+top front left
+
‘TFC ’
+top front center
+
‘TFR ’
+top front right
+
‘TBL ’
+top back left
+
‘TBC ’
+top back center
+
‘TBR ’
+top back right
+
‘DL ’
+downmix left
+
‘DR ’
+downmix right
+
‘WL ’
+wide left
+
‘WR ’
+wide right
+
‘SDL ’
+surround direct left
+
‘SDR ’
+surround direct right
+
‘LFE2 ’
+low frequency 2
+
+
+
Standard channel layout compositions can be specified by using the
+following identifiers:
+
+‘mono ’
+FC
+
‘stereo ’
+FL+FR
+
‘2.1 ’
+FL+FR+LFE
+
‘3.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC
+
‘3.0(back) ’
+FL+FR+BC
+
‘4.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC
+
‘quad ’
+FL+FR+BL+BR
+
‘quad(side) ’
+FL+FR+SL+SR
+
‘3.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE
+
‘5.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR
+
‘5.0(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+SL+SR
+
‘4.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC
+
‘5.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR
+
‘5.1(side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+SL+SR
+
‘6.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘hexagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BC+SL+SR
+
‘6.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+BC
+
‘6.1(front) ’
+FL+FR+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.0 ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.0(front) ’
+FL+FR+FC+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘7.1 ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+SL+SR
+
‘7.1(wide) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+BL+BR+FLC+FRC
+
‘7.1(wide-side) ’
+FL+FR+FC+LFE+FLC+FRC+SL+SR
+
‘octagonal ’
+FL+FR+FC+BL+BR+BC+SL+SR
+
‘downmix ’
+DL+DR
+
+
+
A custom channel layout can be specified as a sequence of terms, separated by
+’+’ or ’|’. Each term can be:
+
+ the name of a standard channel layout (e.g. ‘mono ’,
+‘stereo ’, ‘4.0 ’, ‘quad ’, ‘5.0 ’, etc.)
+
+ the name of a single channel (e.g. ‘FL ’, ‘FR ’, ‘FC ’, ‘LFE ’, etc.)
+
+ a number of channels, in decimal, optionally followed by ’c’, yielding
+the default channel layout for that number of channels (see the
+function av_get_default_channel_layout)
+
+ a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+AV_CH_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
Starting from libavutil version 53 the trailing character "c" to
+specify a number of channels will be required, while a channel layout
+mask could also be specified as a decimal number (if and only if not
+followed by "c").
+
+
See also the function av_get_channel_layout defined in
+libavutil/channel_layout.h .
+
+
+
7 Expression Evaluation# TOC
+
+
When evaluating an arithmetic expression, FFmpeg uses an internal
+formula evaluator, implemented through the libavutil/eval.h
+interface.
+
+
An expression may contain unary, binary operators, constants, and
+functions.
+
+
Two expressions expr1 and expr2 can be combined to form
+another expression "expr1 ;expr2 ".
+expr1 and expr2 are evaluated in turn, and the new
+expression evaluates to the value of expr2 .
+
+
The following binary operators are available: +, -,
+*, /, ^.
+
+
The following unary operators are available: +, -.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+abs(x) Compute absolute value of x .
+
+acos(x) Compute arccosine of x .
+
+asin(x) Compute arcsine of x .
+
+atan(x) Compute arctangent of x .
+
+between(x, min, max) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to min and lesser than or
+equal to max , 0 otherwise.
+
+bitand(x, y) bitor(x, y) Compute bitwise and/or operation on x and y .
+
+The results of the evaluation of x and y are converted to
+integers before executing the bitwise operation.
+
+Note that both the conversion to integer and the conversion back to
+floating point can lose precision. Beware of unexpected results for
+large numbers (usually 2^53 and larger).
+
+ceil(expr) Round the value of expression expr upwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "ceil(1.5)" is "2.0".
+
+clip(x, min, max) Return the value of x clipped between min and max .
+
+cos(x) Compute cosine of x .
+
+cosh(x) Compute hyperbolic cosine of x .
+
+eq(x, y) Return 1 if x and y are equivalent, 0 otherwise.
+
+exp(x) Compute exponential of x (with base e, the Euler’s number).
+
+floor(expr) Round the value of expression expr downwards to the nearest
+integer. For example, "floor(-1.5)" is "-2.0".
+
+gauss(x) Compute Gauss function of x , corresponding to
+exp(-x*x/2) / sqrt(2*PI).
+
+gcd(x, y) Return the greatest common divisor of x and y . If both x and
+y are 0 or either or both are less than zero then behavior is undefined.
+
+gt(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+gte(x, y) Return 1 if x is greater than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+hypot(x, y) This function is similar to the C function with the same name; it returns
+"sqrt(x *x + y *y )", the length of the hypotenuse of a
+right triangle with sides of length x and y , or the distance of the
+point (x , y ) from the origin.
+
+if(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the result of
+the evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+if(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is non-zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+ifnot(x, y) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the result of the
+evaluation of y , return 0 otherwise.
+
+ifnot(x, y, z) Evaluate x , and if the result is zero return the evaluation
+result of y , otherwise the evaluation result of z .
+
+isinf(x) Return 1.0 if x is +/-INFINITY, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+isnan(x) Return 1.0 if x is NAN, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+ld(var) Allow to load the value of the internal variable with number
+var , which was previously stored with st(var , expr ).
+The function returns the loaded value.
+
+log(x) Compute natural logarithm of x .
+
+lt(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than y , 0 otherwise.
+
+lte(x, y) Return 1 if x is lesser than or equal to y , 0 otherwise.
+
+max(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+min(x, y) Return the maximum between x and y .
+
+mod(x, y) Compute the remainder of division of x by y .
+
+not(expr) Return 1.0 if expr is zero, 0.0 otherwise.
+
+pow(x, y) Compute the power of x elevated y , it is equivalent to
+"(x )^(y )".
+
+print(t) print(t, l) Print the value of expression t with loglevel l . If
+l is not specified then a default log level is used.
+Returns the value of the expression printed.
+
+Prints t with loglevel l
+
+random(x) Return a pseudo random value between 0.0 and 1.0. x is the index of the
+internal variable which will be used to save the seed/state.
+
+root(expr, max) Find an input value for which the function represented by expr
+with argument ld(0) is 0 in the interval 0..max .
+
+The expression in expr must denote a continuous function or the
+result is undefined.
+
+ld(0) is used to represent the function input value, which means
+that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times with
+various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(0). When the expression evaluates to 0 then the
+corresponding input value will be returned.
+
+sin(x) Compute sine of x .
+
+sinh(x) Compute hyperbolic sine of x .
+
+sqrt(expr) Compute the square root of expr . This is equivalent to
+"(expr )^.5".
+
+squish(x) Compute expression 1/(1 + exp(4*x)).
+
+st(var, expr) Allow to store the value of the expression expr in an internal
+variable. var specifies the number of the variable where to
+store the value, and it is a value ranging from 0 to 9. The function
+returns the value stored in the internal variable.
+Note, Variables are currently not shared between expressions.
+
+tan(x) Compute tangent of x .
+
+tanh(x) Compute hyperbolic tangent of x .
+
+taylor(expr, x) taylor(expr, x, id) Evaluate a Taylor series at x , given an expression representing
+the ld(id)-th derivative of a function at 0.
+
+When the series does not converge the result is undefined.
+
+ld(id) is used to represent the derivative order in expr ,
+which means that the given expression will be evaluated multiple times
+with various input values that the expression can access through
+ld(id). If id is not specified then 0 is assumed.
+
+Note, when you have the derivatives at y instead of 0,
+taylor(expr, x-y) can be used.
+
+time(0) Return the current (wallclock) time in seconds.
+
+trunc(expr) Round the value of expression expr towards zero to the nearest
+integer. For example, "trunc(-1.5)" is "-1.0".
+
+while(cond, expr) Evaluate expression expr while the expression cond is
+non-zero, and returns the value of the last expr evaluation, or
+NAN if cond was always false.
+
+
+
The following constants are available:
+
+PI area of the unit disc, approximately 3.14
+
E exp(1) (Euler’s number), approximately 2.718
+
PHI golden ratio (1+sqrt(5))/2, approximately 1.618
+
+
+
Assuming that an expression is considered "true" if it has a non-zero
+value, note that:
+
+
* works like AND
+
+
+ works like OR
+
+
For example the construct:
+
+
is equivalent to:
+
+
+
In your C code, you can extend the list of unary and binary functions,
+and define recognized constants, so that they are available for your
+expressions.
+
+
The evaluator also recognizes the International System unit prefixes.
+If ’i’ is appended after the prefix, binary prefixes are used, which
+are based on powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000.
+The ’B’ postfix multiplies the value by 8, and can be appended after a
+unit prefix or used alone. This allows using for example ’KB’, ’MiB’,
+’G’ and ’B’ as number postfix.
+
+
The list of available International System prefixes follows, with
+indication of the corresponding powers of 10 and of 2.
+
+y 10^-24 / 2^-80
+
z 10^-21 / 2^-70
+
a 10^-18 / 2^-60
+
f 10^-15 / 2^-50
+
p 10^-12 / 2^-40
+
n 10^-9 / 2^-30
+
u 10^-6 / 2^-20
+
m 10^-3 / 2^-10
+
c 10^-2
+
d 10^-1
+
h 10^2
+
k 10^3 / 2^10
+
K 10^3 / 2^10
+
M 10^6 / 2^20
+
G 10^9 / 2^30
+
T 10^12 / 2^40
+
P 10^15 / 2^40
+
E 10^18 / 2^50
+
Z 10^21 / 2^60
+
Y 10^24 / 2^70
+
+
+
+
+
8 OpenCL Options# TOC
+
+
When FFmpeg is configured with --enable-opencl, it is possible
+to set the options for the global OpenCL context.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+build_options Set build options used to compile the registered kernels.
+
+See reference "OpenCL Specification Version: 1.2 chapter 5.6.4".
+
+platform_idx Select the index of the platform to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list
+which can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+device_idx Select the index of the device used to run OpenCL code.
+
+The specified index must be one of the indexes in the device list which
+can be obtained with ffmpeg -opencl_bench or av_opencl_get_device_list().
+
+
+
+
+
9 Codec Options# TOC
+
+
libavcodec provides some generic global options, which can be set on
+all the encoders and decoders. In addition each codec may support
+so-called private options, which are specific for a given codec.
+
+
Sometimes, a global option may only affect a specific kind of codec,
+and may be nonsensical or ignored by another, so you need to be aware
+of the meaning of the specified options. Also some options are
+meant only for decoding or encoding.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVCodecContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follow:
+
+
+b integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set bitrate in bits/s. Default value is 200K.
+
+ab integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio bitrate (in bits/s). Default value is 128K.
+
+bt integer (encoding,video ) Set video bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). In 1-pass mode, bitrate
+tolerance specifies how far ratecontrol is willing to deviate from the
+target average bitrate value. This is not related to min/max
+bitrate. Lowering tolerance too much has an adverse effect on quality.
+
+flags flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Set generic flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘mv4 ’
+Use four motion vector by macroblock (mpeg4).
+
‘qpel ’
+Use 1/4 pel motion compensation.
+
‘loop ’
+Use loop filter.
+
‘qscale ’
+Use fixed qscale.
+
‘gmc ’
+Use gmc.
+
‘mv0 ’
+Always try a mb with mv=<0,0>.
+
‘input_preserved ’
+‘pass1 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in first pass mode.
+
‘pass2 ’
+Use internal 2pass ratecontrol in second pass mode.
+
‘gray ’
+Only decode/encode grayscale.
+
‘emu_edge ’
+Do not draw edges.
+
‘psnr ’
+Set error[?] variables during encoding.
+
‘truncated ’
+‘naq ’
+Normalize adaptive quantization.
+
‘ildct ’
+Use interlaced DCT.
+
‘low_delay ’
+Force low delay.
+
‘global_header ’
+Place global headers in extradata instead of every keyframe.
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data. (except (I)DCT).
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
‘aic ’
+Apply H263 advanced intra coding / mpeg4 ac prediction.
+
‘cbp ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘qprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘ilme ’
+Apply interlaced motion estimation.
+
‘cgop ’
+Use closed gop.
+
+
+me_method integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘zero ’
+zero motion estimation (fastest)
+
‘full ’
+full motion estimation (slowest)
+
‘epzs ’
+EPZS motion estimation (default)
+
‘esa ’
+esa motion estimation (alias for full)
+
‘tesa ’
+tesa motion estimation
+
‘dia ’
+dia motion estimation (alias for epzs)
+
‘log ’
+log motion estimation
+
‘phods ’
+phods motion estimation
+
‘x1 ’
+X1 motion estimation
+
‘hex ’
+hex motion estimation
+
‘umh ’
+umh motion estimation
+
‘iter ’
+iter motion estimation
+
+
+extradata_size integer Set extradata size.
+
+time_base rational number Set codec time base.
+
+It is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms of which
+frame timestamps are represented. For fixed-fps content, timebase
+should be 1 / frame_rate and timestamp increments should be
+identically 1.
+
+g integer (encoding,video ) Set the group of picture size. Default value is 12.
+
+ar integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set audio sampling rate (in Hz).
+
+ac integer (decoding/encoding,audio ) Set number of audio channels.
+
+cutoff integer (encoding,audio ) Set cutoff bandwidth.
+
+frame_size integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio frame size.
+
+Each submitted frame except the last must contain exactly frame_size
+samples per channel. May be 0 when the codec has
+CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE set, in that case the frame size is not
+restricted. It is set by some decoders to indicate constant frame
+size.
+
+frame_number integer Set the frame number.
+
+delay integer qcomp float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale compression (VBR). It is used as a constant
+in the ratecontrol equation. Recommended range for default rc_eq:
+0.0-1.0.
+
+qblur float (encoding,video ) Set video quantizer scale blur (VBR).
+
+qmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+69, default value is 2.
+
+qmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max video quantizer scale (VBR). Must be included between -1 and
+1024, default value is 31.
+
+qdiff integer (encoding,video ) Set max difference between the quantizer scale (VBR).
+
+bf integer (encoding,video ) Set max number of B frames between non-B-frames.
+
+Must be an integer between -1 and 16. 0 means that B-frames are
+disabled. If a value of -1 is used, it will choose an automatic value
+depending on the encoder.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+b_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set qp factor between P and B frames.
+
+rc_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set ratecontrol method.
+
+b_strategy integer (encoding,video ) Set strategy to choose between I/P/B-frames.
+
+ps integer (encoding,video ) Set RTP payload size in bytes.
+
+mv_bits integer header_bits integer i_tex_bits integer p_tex_bits integer i_count integer p_count integer skip_count integer misc_bits integer frame_bits integer codec_tag integer bug flags (decoding,video ) Workaround not auto detected encoder bugs.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘autodetect ’
+‘old_msmpeg4 ’
+some old lavc generated msmpeg4v3 files (no autodetection)
+
‘xvid_ilace ’
+Xvid interlacing bug (autodetected if fourcc==XVIX)
+
‘ump4 ’
+(autodetected if fourcc==UMP4)
+
‘no_padding ’
+padding bug (autodetected)
+
‘amv ’
+‘ac_vlc ’
+illegal vlc bug (autodetected per fourcc)
+
‘qpel_chroma ’
+‘std_qpel ’
+old standard qpel (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘qpel_chroma2 ’
+‘direct_blocksize ’
+direct-qpel-blocksize bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘edge ’
+edge padding bug (autodetected per fourcc/version)
+
‘hpel_chroma ’
+‘dc_clip ’
+‘ms ’
+Workaround various bugs in microsoft broken decoders.
+
‘trunc ’
+trancated frames
+
+
+lelim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for luminance (negative
+values also consider DC coefficient).
+
+celim integer (encoding,video ) Set single coefficient elimination threshold for chrominance (negative
+values also consider dc coefficient)
+
+strict integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) Specify how strictly to follow the standards.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘very ’
+strictly conform to a older more strict version of the spec or reference software
+
‘strict ’
+strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences
+
‘normal ’
+‘unofficial ’
+allow unofficial extensions
+
‘experimental ’
+allow non standardized experimental things, experimental
+(unfinished/work in progress/not well tested) decoders and encoders.
+Note: experimental decoders can pose a security risk, do not use this for
+decoding untrusted input.
+
+
+b_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and B frames.
+
+err_detect flags (decoding,audio,video ) Set error detection flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+verify embedded CRCs
+
‘bitstream ’
+detect bitstream specification deviations
+
‘buffer ’
+detect improper bitstream length
+
‘explode ’
+abort decoding on minor error detection
+
‘ignore_err ’
+ignore decoding errors, and continue decoding.
+This is useful if you want to analyze the content of a video and thus want
+everything to be decoded no matter what. This option will not result in a video
+that is pleasing to watch in case of errors.
+
‘careful ’
+consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+
‘compliant ’
+consider all spec non compliancies as errors
+
‘aggressive ’
+consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error
+
+
+has_b_frames integer block_align integer mpeg_quant integer (encoding,video ) Use MPEG quantizers instead of H.263.
+
+qsquish float (encoding,video ) How to keep quantizer between qmin and qmax (0 = clip, 1 = use
+differentiable function).
+
+rc_qmod_amp float (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_qmod_freq integer (encoding,video ) Set experimental quantizer modulation.
+
+rc_override_count integer rc_eq string (encoding,video ) Set rate control equation. When computing the expression, besides the
+standard functions defined in the section ’Expression Evaluation’, the
+following functions are available: bits2qp(bits), qp2bits(qp). Also
+the following constants are available: iTex pTex tex mv fCode iCount
+mcVar var isI isP isB avgQP qComp avgIITex avgPITex avgPPTex avgBPTex
+avgTex.
+
+maxrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set max bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Requires bufsize to be set.
+
+minrate integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set min bitrate tolerance (in bits/s). Most useful in setting up a CBR
+encode. It is of little use elsewise.
+
+bufsize integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set ratecontrol buffer size (in bits).
+
+rc_buf_aggressivity float (encoding,video ) Currently useless.
+
+i_qfactor float (encoding,video ) Set QP factor between P and I frames.
+
+i_qoffset float (encoding,video ) Set QP offset between P and I frames.
+
+rc_init_cplx float (encoding,video ) Set initial complexity for 1-pass encoding.
+
+dct integer (encoding,video ) Set DCT algorithm.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+autoselect a good one (default)
+
‘fastint ’
+fast integer
+
‘int ’
+accurate integer
+
‘mmx ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘faan ’
+floating point AAN DCT
+
+
+lumi_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress bright areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+tcplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set temporal complexity masking.
+
+scplx_mask float (encoding,video ) Set spatial complexity masking.
+
+p_mask float (encoding,video ) Set inter masking.
+
+dark_mask float (encoding,video ) Compress dark areas stronger than medium ones.
+
+idct integer (decoding/encoding,video ) Select IDCT implementation.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+‘int ’
+‘simple ’
+‘simplemmx ’
+‘simpleauto ’
+Automatically pick a IDCT compatible with the simple one
+
+‘arm ’
+‘altivec ’
+‘sh4 ’
+‘simplearm ’
+‘simplearmv5te ’
+‘simplearmv6 ’
+‘simpleneon ’
+‘simplealpha ’
+‘ipp ’
+‘xvidmmx ’
+‘faani ’
+floating point AAN IDCT
+
+
+slice_count integer ec flags (decoding,video ) Set error concealment strategy.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘guess_mvs ’
+iterative motion vector (MV) search (slow)
+
‘deblock ’
+use strong deblock filter for damaged MBs
+
‘favor_inter ’
+favor predicting from the previous frame instead of the current
+
+
+bits_per_coded_sample integer pred integer (encoding,video ) Set prediction method.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘left ’
+‘plane ’
+‘median ’
+
+
+aspect rational number (encoding,video ) Set sample aspect ratio.
+
+debug flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video,subtitles ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pict ’
+picture info
+
‘rc ’
+rate control
+
‘bitstream ’
+‘mb_type ’
+macroblock (MB) type
+
‘qp ’
+per-block quantization parameter (QP)
+
‘mv ’
+motion vector
+
‘dct_coeff ’
+‘skip ’
+‘startcode ’
+‘pts ’
+‘er ’
+error recognition
+
‘mmco ’
+memory management control operations (H.264)
+
‘bugs ’
+‘vis_qp ’
+visualize quantization parameter (QP), lower QP are tinted greener
+
‘vis_mb_type ’
+visualize block types
+
‘buffers ’
+picture buffer allocations
+
‘thread_ops ’
+threading operations
+
‘nomc ’
+skip motion compensation
+
+
+vismv integer (decoding,video ) Visualize motion vectors (MVs).
+
+This option is deprecated, see the codecview filter instead.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+cmp integer (encoding,video ) Set full pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+subcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel me compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+mbcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+ildctcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set interlaced dct compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation.
+
+last_pred integer (encoding,video ) Set amount of motion predictors from the previous frame.
+
+preme integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation.
+
+precmp integer (encoding,video ) Set pre motion estimation compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+pre_dia_size integer (encoding,video ) Set diamond type & size for motion estimation pre-pass.
+
+subq integer (encoding,video ) Set sub pel motion estimation quality.
+
+dtg_active_format integer me_range integer (encoding,video ) Set limit motion vectors range (1023 for DivX player).
+
+ibias integer (encoding,video ) Set intra quant bias.
+
+pbias integer (encoding,video ) Set inter quant bias.
+
+color_table_id integer global_quality integer (encoding,audio,video ) coder integer (encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘vlc ’
+variable length coder / huffman coder
+
‘ac ’
+arithmetic coder
+
‘raw ’
+raw (no encoding)
+
‘rle ’
+run-length coder
+
‘deflate ’
+deflate-based coder
+
+
+
+context integer (encoding,video ) Set context model.
+
+slice_flags integer xvmc_acceleration integer mbd integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock decision algorithm (high quality mode).
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘simple ’
+use mbcmp (default)
+
‘bits ’
+use fewest bits
+
‘rd ’
+use best rate distortion
+
+
+stream_codec_tag integer sc_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set scene change threshold.
+
+lmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+lmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+nr integer (encoding,video ) Set noise reduction.
+
+rc_init_occupancy integer (encoding,video ) Set number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before
+decoding starts.
+
+flags2 flags (decoding/encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘fast ’
+Allow non spec compliant speedup tricks.
+
‘sgop ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘noout ’
+Skip bitstream encoding.
+
‘ignorecrop ’
+Ignore cropping information from sps.
+
‘local_header ’
+Place global headers at every keyframe instead of in extradata.
+
‘chunks ’
+Frame data might be split into multiple chunks.
+
‘showall ’
+Show all frames before the first keyframe.
+
‘skiprd ’
+Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
‘export_mvs ’
+Export motion vectors into frame side-data (see AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS)
+for codecs that support it. See also doc/examples/export_mvs.c .
+
+
+
+error integer (encoding,video ) qns integer (encoding,video ) Deprecated, use mpegvideo private options instead.
+
+threads integer (decoding/encoding,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘auto ’
+detect a good number of threads
+
+
+
+me_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation threshold.
+
+mb_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set macroblock threshold.
+
+dc integer (encoding,video ) Set intra_dc_precision.
+
+nssew integer (encoding,video ) Set nsse weight.
+
+skip_top integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the top which are skipped.
+
+skip_bottom integer (decoding,video ) Set number of macroblock rows at the bottom which are skipped.
+
+profile integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+‘aac_main ’
+‘aac_low ’
+‘aac_ssr ’
+‘aac_ltp ’
+‘aac_he ’
+‘aac_he_v2 ’
+‘aac_ld ’
+‘aac_eld ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_low ’
+‘mpeg2_aac_he ’
+‘mpeg4_sp ’
+‘mpeg4_core ’
+‘mpeg4_main ’
+‘mpeg4_asp ’
+‘dts ’
+‘dts_es ’
+‘dts_96_24 ’
+‘dts_hd_hra ’
+‘dts_hd_ma ’
+
+
+
+level integer (encoding,audio,video )
+Possible values:
+
+‘unknown ’
+
+
+
+lowres integer (decoding,audio,video ) Decode at 1= 1/2, 2=1/4, 3=1/8 resolutions.
+
+skip_threshold integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip threshold.
+
+skip_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip factor.
+
+skip_exp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip exponent.
+Negative values behave identical to the corresponding positive ones, except
+that the score is normalized.
+Positive values exist primarily for compatibility reasons and are not so useful.
+
+skipcmp integer (encoding,video ) Set frame skip compare function.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘sad ’
+sum of absolute differences, fast (default)
+
‘sse ’
+sum of squared errors
+
‘satd ’
+sum of absolute Hadamard transformed differences
+
‘dct ’
+sum of absolute DCT transformed differences
+
‘psnr ’
+sum of squared quantization errors (avoid, low quality)
+
‘bit ’
+number of bits needed for the block
+
‘rd ’
+rate distortion optimal, slow
+
‘zero ’
+0
+
‘vsad ’
+sum of absolute vertical differences
+
‘vsse ’
+sum of squared vertical differences
+
‘nsse ’
+noise preserving sum of squared differences
+
‘w53 ’
+5/3 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘w97 ’
+9/7 wavelet, only used in snow
+
‘dctmax ’
+‘chroma ’
+
+
+border_mask float (encoding,video ) Increase the quantizer for macroblocks close to borders.
+
+mblmin integer (encoding,video ) Set min macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mblmax integer (encoding,video ) Set max macroblock lagrange factor (VBR).
+
+mepc integer (encoding,video ) Set motion estimation bitrate penalty compensation (1.0 = 256).
+
+skip_loop_filter integer (decoding,video ) skip_idct integer (decoding,video ) skip_frame integer (decoding,video )
+Make decoder discard processing depending on the frame type selected
+by the option value.
+
+skip_loop_filter skips frame loop filtering, skip_idct
+skips frame IDCT/dequantization, skip_frame skips decoding.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘none ’
+Discard no frame.
+
+‘default ’
+Discard useless frames like 0-sized frames.
+
+‘noref ’
+Discard all non-reference frames.
+
+‘bidir ’
+Discard all bidirectional frames.
+
+‘nokey ’
+Discard all frames excepts keyframes.
+
+‘all ’
+Discard all frames.
+
+
+Default value is ‘default ’.
+
+
+bidir_refine integer (encoding,video ) Refine the two motion vectors used in bidirectional macroblocks.
+
+brd_scale integer (encoding,video ) Downscale frames for dynamic B-frame decision.
+
+keyint_min integer (encoding,video ) Set minimum interval between IDR-frames.
+
+refs integer (encoding,video ) Set reference frames to consider for motion compensation.
+
+chromaoffset integer (encoding,video ) Set chroma qp offset from luma.
+
+trellis integer (encoding,audio,video ) Set rate-distortion optimal quantization.
+
+sc_factor integer (encoding,video ) Set value multiplied by qscale for each frame and added to
+scene_change_score.
+
+mv0_threshold integer (encoding,video ) b_sensitivity integer (encoding,video ) Adjust sensitivity of b_frame_strategy 1.
+
+compression_level integer (encoding,audio,video ) min_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) max_prediction_order integer (encoding,audio ) timecode_frame_start integer (encoding,video ) Set GOP timecode frame start number, in non drop frame format.
+
+request_channels integer (decoding,audio ) Set desired number of audio channels.
+
+bits_per_raw_sample integer channel_layout integer (decoding/encoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+request_channel_layout integer (decoding,audio )
+Possible values:
+
+rc_max_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) rc_min_vbv_use float (encoding,video ) ticks_per_frame integer (decoding/encoding,audio,video ) color_primaries integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_trc integer (decoding/encoding,video ) colorspace integer (decoding/encoding,video ) color_range integer (decoding/encoding,video ) chroma_sample_location integer (decoding/encoding,video ) log_level_offset integer Set the log level offset.
+
+slices integer (encoding,video ) Number of slices, used in parallelized encoding.
+
+thread_type flags (decoding/encoding,video ) Select which multithreading methods to use.
+
+Use of ‘frame ’ will increase decoding delay by one frame per
+thread, so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use
+it.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘slice ’
+Decode more than one part of a single frame at once.
+
+Multithreading using slices works only when the video was encoded with
+slices.
+
+‘frame ’
+Decode more than one frame at once.
+
+
+Default value is ‘slice+frame ’.
+
+audio_service_type integer (encoding,audio ) Set audio service type.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ma ’
+Main Audio Service
+
‘ef ’
+Effects
+
‘vi ’
+Visually Impaired
+
‘hi ’
+Hearing Impaired
+
‘di ’
+Dialogue
+
‘co ’
+Commentary
+
‘em ’
+Emergency
+
‘vo ’
+Voice Over
+
‘ka ’
+Karaoke
+
+
+request_sample_fmt sample_fmt (decoding,audio ) Set sample format audio decoders should prefer. Default value is
+none.
+
+pkt_timebase rational number sub_charenc encoding (decoding,subtitles ) Set the input subtitles character encoding.
+
+field_order field_order (video ) Set/override the field order of the video.
+Possible values:
+
+‘progressive ’
+Progressive video
+
‘tt ’
+Interlaced video, top field coded and displayed first
+
‘bb ’
+Interlaced video, bottom field coded and displayed first
+
‘tb ’
+Interlaced video, top coded first, bottom displayed first
+
‘bt ’
+Interlaced video, bottom coded first, top displayed first
+
+
+skip_alpha integer (decoding,video ) Set to 1 to disable processing alpha (transparency). This works like the
+‘gray ’ flag in the flags option which skips chroma information
+instead of alpha. Default is 0.
+
+codec_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed decoders. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
10 Decoders# TOC
+
+
Decoders are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow the decoding of
+multimedia streams.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported native decoders
+are enabled by default. Decoders requiring an external library must be enabled
+manually via the corresponding --enable-lib option. You can list all
+available decoders using the configure option --list-decoders.
+
+
You can disable all the decoders with the configure option
+--disable-decoders and selectively enable / disable single decoders
+with the options --enable-decoder=DECODER /
+--disable-decoder=DECODER .
+
+
The option -decoders of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled decoders.
+
+
+
+
11 Video Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available video decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
11.1 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video decoder.
+
+
This decoder decodes rawvideo streams.
+
+
+
11.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+top top_field_first Specify the assumed field type of the input video.
+
+-1 the video is assumed to be progressive (default)
+
0 bottom-field-first is assumed
+
1 top-field-first is assumed
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
12 Audio Decoders# TOC
+
+
A description of some of the currently available audio decoders
+follows.
+
+
+
12.1 ac3# TOC
+
+
AC-3 audio decoder.
+
+
This decoder implements part of ATSC A/52:2010 and ETSI TS 102 366, as well as
+the undocumented RealAudio 3 (a.k.a. dnet).
+
+
+
12.1.1 AC-3 Decoder Options# TOC
+
+
+-drc_scale value Dynamic Range Scale Factor. The factor to apply to dynamic range values
+from the AC-3 stream. This factor is applied exponentially.
+There are 3 notable scale factor ranges:
+
+drc_scale == 0 DRC disabled. Produces full range audio.
+
0 < drc_scale <= 1 DRC enabled. Applies a fraction of the stream DRC value.
+Audio reproduction is between full range and full compression.
+
drc_scale > 1 DRC enabled. Applies drc_scale asymmetrically.
+Loud sounds are fully compressed. Soft sounds are enhanced.
+
+
+
+
+
+
12.2 ffwavesynth# TOC
+
+
Internal wave synthetizer.
+
+
This decoder generates wave patterns according to predefined sequences. Its
+use is purely internal and the format of the data it accepts is not publicly
+documented.
+
+
+
12.3 libcelt# TOC
+
+
libcelt decoder wrapper.
+
+
libcelt allows libavcodec to decode the Xiph CELT ultra-low delay audio codec.
+Requires the presence of the libcelt headers and library during configuration.
+You need to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libcelt.
+
+
+
12.4 libgsm# TOC
+
+
libgsm decoder wrapper.
+
+
libgsm allows libavcodec to decode the GSM full rate audio codec. Requires
+the presence of the libgsm headers and library during configuration. You need
+to explicitly configure the build with --enable-libgsm.
+
+
This decoder supports both the ordinary GSM and the Microsoft variant.
+
+
+
12.5 libilbc# TOC
+
+
libilbc decoder wrapper.
+
+
libilbc allows libavcodec to decode the Internet Low Bitrate Codec (iLBC)
+audio codec. Requires the presence of the libilbc headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libilbc.
+
+
+
12.5.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The following option is supported by the libilbc wrapper.
+
+
+enhance
+Enable the enhancement of the decoded audio when set to 1. The default
+value is 0 (disabled).
+
+
+
+
+
+
12.6 libopencore-amrnb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrnb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrnb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Narrowband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrnb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrnb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-NB exists, so users can decode AMR-NB
+without this library.
+
+
+
12.7 libopencore-amrwb# TOC
+
+
libopencore-amrwb decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopencore-amrwb allows libavcodec to decode the Adaptive Multi-Rate
+Wideband audio codec. Using it requires the presence of the
+libopencore-amrwb headers and library during configuration. You need to
+explicitly configure the build with --enable-libopencore-amrwb.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for AMR-WB exists, so users can decode AMR-WB
+without this library.
+
+
+
12.8 libopus# TOC
+
+
libopus decoder wrapper.
+
+
libopus allows libavcodec to decode the Opus Interactive Audio Codec.
+Requires the presence of the libopus headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libopus.
+
+
An FFmpeg native decoder for Opus exists, so users can decode Opus
+without this library.
+
+
+
+
13 Subtitles Decoders# TOC
+
+
+
13.1 dvdsub# TOC
+
+
This codec decodes the bitmap subtitles used in DVDs; the same subtitles can
+also be found in VobSub file pairs and in some Matroska files.
+
+
+
13.1.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+palette Specify the global palette used by the bitmaps. When stored in VobSub, the
+palette is normally specified in the index file; in Matroska, the palette is
+stored in the codec extra-data in the same format as in VobSub. In DVDs, the
+palette is stored in the IFO file, and therefore not available when reading
+from dumped VOB files.
+
+The format for this option is a string containing 16 24-bits hexadecimal
+numbers (without 0x prefix) separated by comas, for example 0d00ee,
+ee450d, 101010, eaeaea, 0ce60b, ec14ed, ebff0b, 0d617a, 7b7b7b, d1d1d1,
+7b2a0e, 0d950c, 0f007b, cf0dec, cfa80c, 7c127b.
+
+ifo_palette Specify the IFO file from which the global palette is obtained.
+(experimental)
+
+forced_subs_only Only decode subtitle entries marked as forced. Some titles have forced
+and non-forced subtitles in the same track. Setting this flag to 1
+will only keep the forced subtitles. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
13.2 libzvbi-teletext# TOC
+
+
Libzvbi allows libavcodec to decode DVB teletext pages and DVB teletext
+subtitles. Requires the presence of the libzvbi headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+--enable-libzvbi.
+
+
+
13.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+txt_page List of teletext page numbers to decode. You may use the special * string to
+match all pages. Pages that do not match the specified list are dropped.
+Default value is *.
+
txt_chop_top Discards the top teletext line. Default value is 1.
+
txt_format Specifies the format of the decoded subtitles. The teletext decoder is capable
+of decoding the teletext pages to bitmaps or to simple text, you should use
+"bitmap" for teletext pages, because certain graphics and colors cannot be
+expressed in simple text. You might use "text" for teletext based subtitles if
+your application can handle simple text based subtitles. Default value is
+bitmap.
+
txt_left X offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_top Y offset of generated bitmaps, default is 0.
+
txt_chop_spaces Chops leading and trailing spaces and removes empty lines from the generated
+text. This option is useful for teletext based subtitles where empty spaces may
+be present at the start or at the end of the lines or empty lines may be
+present between the subtitle lines because of double-sized teletext charactes.
+Default value is 1.
+
txt_duration Sets the display duration of the decoded teletext pages or subtitles in
+miliseconds. Default value is 30000 which is 30 seconds.
+
txt_transparent Force transparent background of the generated teletext bitmaps. Default value
+is 0 which means an opaque (black) background.
+
+
+
+
14 Bitstream Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported bitstream
+filters are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using
+the configure option --list-bsfs.
+
+
You can disable all the bitstream filters using the configure option
+--disable-bsfs, and selectively enable any bitstream filter using
+the option --enable-bsf=BSF, or you can disable a particular
+bitstream filter using the option --disable-bsf=BSF.
+
+
The option -bsfs of the ff* tools will display the list of
+all the supported bitstream filters included in your build.
+
+
The ff* tools have a -bsf option applied per stream, taking a
+comma-separated list of filters, whose parameters follow the filter
+name after a ’=’.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c:v copy -bsf:v filter1[=opt1=str1/opt2=str2][,filter2] OUTPUT
+
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available bitstream filters,
+with their parameters, if any.
+
+
+
14.1 aac_adtstoasc# TOC
+
+
Convert MPEG-2/4 AAC ADTS to MPEG-4 Audio Specific Configuration
+bitstream filter.
+
+
This filter creates an MPEG-4 AudioSpecificConfig from an MPEG-2/4
+ADTS header and removes the ADTS header.
+
+
This is required for example when copying an AAC stream from a raw
+ADTS AAC container to a FLV or a MOV/MP4 file.
+
+
+
14.2 chomp# TOC
+
+
Remove zero padding at the end of a packet.
+
+
+
14.3 dump_extra# TOC
+
+
Add extradata to the beginning of the filtered packets.
+
+
The additional argument specifies which packets should be filtered.
+It accepts the values:
+
+‘a ’
+add extradata to all key packets, but only if local_header is
+set in the flags2 codec context field
+
+‘k ’
+add extradata to all key packets
+
+‘e ’
+add extradata to all packets
+
+
+
If not specified it is assumed ‘k ’.
+
+
For example the following ffmpeg command forces a global
+header (thus disabling individual packet headers) in the H.264 packets
+generated by the libx264 encoder, but corrects them by adding
+the header stored in extradata to the key packets:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -map 0 -flags:v +global_header -c:v libx264 -bsf:v dump_extra out.ts
+
+
+
+
14.4 h264_mp4toannexb# TOC
+
+
Convert an H.264 bitstream from length prefixed mode to start code
+prefixed mode (as defined in the Annex B of the ITU-T H.264
+specification).
+
+
This is required by some streaming formats, typically the MPEG-2
+transport stream format ("mpegts").
+
+
For example to remux an MP4 file containing an H.264 stream to mpegts
+format with ffmpeg, you can use the command:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT.mp4 -codec copy -bsf:v h264_mp4toannexb OUTPUT.ts
+
+
+
+
14.5 imxdump# TOC
+
+
Modifies the bitstream to fit in MOV and to be usable by the Final Cut
+Pro decoder. This filter only applies to the mpeg2video codec, and is
+likely not needed for Final Cut Pro 7 and newer with the appropriate
+-tag:v .
+
+
For example, to remux 30 MB/sec NTSC IMX to MOV:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mxf -c copy -bsf:v imxdump -tag:v mx3n output.mov
+
+
+
+
14.6 mjpeg2jpeg# TOC
+
+
Convert MJPEG/AVI1 packets to full JPEG/JFIF packets.
+
+
MJPEG is a video codec wherein each video frame is essentially a
+JPEG image. The individual frames can be extracted without loss,
+e.g. by
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i ../some_mjpeg.avi -c:v copy frames_%d.jpg
+
+
+
Unfortunately, these chunks are incomplete JPEG images, because
+they lack the DHT segment required for decoding. Quoting from
+http://www.digitalpreservation.gov/formats/fdd/fdd000063.shtml :
+
+
Avery Lee, writing in the rec.video.desktop newsgroup in 2001,
+commented that "MJPEG, or at least the MJPEG in AVIs having the
+MJPG fourcc, is restricted JPEG with a fixed – and *omitted* –
+Huffman table. The JPEG must be YCbCr colorspace, it must be 4:2:2,
+and it must use basic Huffman encoding, not arithmetic or
+progressive. . . . You can indeed extract the MJPEG frames and
+decode them with a regular JPEG decoder, but you have to prepend
+the DHT segment to them, or else the decoder won’t have any idea
+how to decompress the data. The exact table necessary is given in
+the OpenDML spec."
+
+
This bitstream filter patches the header of frames extracted from an MJPEG
+stream (carrying the AVI1 header ID and lacking a DHT segment) to
+produce fully qualified JPEG images.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i mjpeg-movie.avi -c:v copy -bsf:v mjpeg2jpeg frame_%d.jpg
+exiftran -i -9 frame*.jpg
+ffmpeg -i frame_%d.jpg -c:v copy rotated.avi
+
+
+
+
14.7 mjpega_dump_header# TOC
+
+
+
14.8 movsub# TOC
+
+
+
14.9 mp3_header_decompress# TOC
+
+
+
14.10 noise# TOC
+
+
Damages the contents of packets without damaging the container. Can be
+used for fuzzing or testing error resilience/concealment.
+
+
Parameters:
+A numeral string, whose value is related to how often output bytes will
+be modified. Therefore, values below or equal to 0 are forbidden, and
+the lower the more frequent bytes will be modified, with 1 meaning
+every byte is modified.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -c copy -bsf noise[=1] output.mkv
+
+
applies the modification to every byte.
+
+
+
14.11 remove_extra# TOC
+
+
+
15 Format Options# TOC
+
+
The libavformat library provides some generic global options, which
+can be set on all the muxers and demuxers. In addition each muxer or
+demuxer may support so-called private options, which are specific for
+that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
The list of supported options follows:
+
+
+avioflags flags (input/output ) Possible values:
+
+‘direct ’
+Reduce buffering.
+
+
+probesize integer (input ) Set probing size in bytes, i.e. the size of the data to analyze to get
+stream information. A higher value will allow to detect more
+information in case it is dispersed into the stream, but will increase
+latency. Must be an integer not lesser than 32. It is 5000000 by default.
+
+packetsize integer (output ) Set packet size.
+
+fflags flags (input/output ) Set format flags.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ignidx ’
+Ignore index.
+
‘genpts ’
+Generate PTS.
+
‘nofillin ’
+Do not fill in missing values that can be exactly calculated.
+
‘noparse ’
+Disable AVParsers, this needs +nofillin too.
+
‘igndts ’
+Ignore DTS.
+
‘discardcorrupt ’
+Discard corrupted frames.
+
‘sortdts ’
+Try to interleave output packets by DTS.
+
‘keepside ’
+Do not merge side data.
+
‘latm ’
+Enable RTP MP4A-LATM payload.
+
‘nobuffer ’
+Reduce the latency introduced by optional buffering
+
‘bitexact ’
+Only write platform-, build- and time-independent data.
+This ensures that file and data checksums are reproducible and match between
+platforms. Its primary use is for regression testing.
+
+
+seek2any integer (input ) Allow seeking to non-keyframes on demuxer level when supported if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+analyzeduration integer (input ) Specify how many microseconds are analyzed to probe the input. A
+higher value will allow to detect more accurate information, but will
+increase latency. It defaults to 5,000,000 microseconds = 5 seconds.
+
+cryptokey hexadecimal string (input ) Set decryption key.
+
+indexmem integer (input ) Set max memory used for timestamp index (per stream).
+
+rtbufsize integer (input ) Set max memory used for buffering real-time frames.
+
+fdebug flags (input/output ) Print specific debug info.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘ts ’
+
+
+max_delay integer (input/output ) Set maximum muxing or demuxing delay in microseconds.
+
+fpsprobesize integer (input ) Set number of frames used to probe fps.
+
+audio_preload integer (output ) Set microseconds by which audio packets should be interleaved earlier.
+
+chunk_duration integer (output ) Set microseconds for each chunk.
+
+chunk_size integer (output ) Set size in bytes for each chunk.
+
+err_detect, f_err_detect flags (input ) Set error detection flags. f_err_detect is deprecated and
+should be used only via the ffmpeg tool.
+
+Possible values:
+
+‘crccheck ’
+Verify embedded CRCs.
+
‘bitstream ’
+Detect bitstream specification deviations.
+
‘buffer ’
+Detect improper bitstream length.
+
‘explode ’
+Abort decoding on minor error detection.
+
‘careful ’
+Consider things that violate the spec and have not been seen in the
+wild as errors.
+
‘compliant ’
+Consider all spec non compliancies as errors.
+
‘aggressive ’
+Consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error.
+
+
+use_wallclock_as_timestamps integer (input ) Use wallclock as timestamps.
+
+avoid_negative_ts integer (output )
+Possible values:
+
+‘make_non_negative ’
+Shift timestamps to make them non-negative.
+Also note that this affects only leading negative timestamps, and not
+non-monotonic negative timestamps.
+
‘make_zero ’
+Shift timestamps so that the first timestamp is 0.
+
‘auto (default) ’
+Enables shifting when required by the target format.
+
‘disabled ’
+Disables shifting of timestamp.
+
+
+When shifting is enabled, all output timestamps are shifted by the
+same amount. Audio, video, and subtitles desynching and relative
+timestamp differences are preserved compared to how they would have
+been without shifting.
+
+
+skip_initial_bytes integer (input ) Set number of bytes to skip before reading header and frames if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+correct_ts_overflow integer (input ) Correct single timestamp overflows if set to 1. Default is 1.
+
+flush_packets integer (output ) Flush the underlying I/O stream after each packet. Default 1 enables it, and
+has the effect of reducing the latency; 0 disables it and may slightly
+increase performance in some cases.
+
+output_ts_offset offset (output ) Set the output time offset.
+
+offset must be a time duration specification,
+see (ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+The offset is added by the muxer to the output timestamps.
+
+Specifying a positive offset means that the corresponding streams are
+delayed bt the time duration specified in offset . Default value
+is 0 (meaning that no offset is applied).
+
+format_whitelist list (input ) "," separated List of allowed demuxers. By default all are allowed.
+
+dump_separator string (input ) Separator used to separate the fields printed on the command line about the
+Stream parameters.
+For example to separate the fields with newlines and indention:
+
+
ffprobe -dump_separator "
+ " -i ~/videos/matrixbench_mpeg2.mpg
+
+
+
+
+
15.1 Format stream specifiers# TOC
+
+
Format stream specifiers allow selection of one or more streams that
+match specific properties.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index.
+
+stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio,
+’s’ for subtitle, ’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If
+stream_index is given, then it matches the stream number
+stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all streams of
+this type.
+
+p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number
+stream_index in the program with the id
+program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the program.
+
+#stream_id Matches the stream by a format-specific ID.
+
+
+
The exact semantics of stream specifiers is defined by the
+avformat_match_stream_specifier() function declared in the
+libavformat/avformat.h header.
+
+
+
16 Demuxers# TOC
+
+
Demuxers are configured elements in FFmpeg that can read the
+multimedia streams from a particular type of file.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported demuxers
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option --list-demuxers.
+
+
You can disable all the demuxers using the configure option
+--disable-demuxers, and selectively enable a single demuxer with
+the option --enable-demuxer=DEMUXER , or disable it
+with the option --disable-demuxer=DEMUXER .
+
+
The option -formats of the ff* tools will display the list of
+enabled demuxers.
+
+
The description of some of the currently available demuxers follows.
+
+
+
16.1 applehttp# TOC
+
+
Apple HTTP Live Streaming demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer presents all AVStreams from all variant streams.
+The id field is set to the bitrate variant index number. By setting
+the discard flags on AVStreams (by pressing ’a’ or ’v’ in ffplay),
+the caller can decide which variant streams to actually receive.
+The total bitrate of the variant that the stream belongs to is
+available in a metadata key named "variant_bitrate".
+
+
+
16.2 apng# TOC
+
+
Animated Portable Network Graphics demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux APNG files.
+All headers, but the PNG signature, up to (but not including) the first
+fcTL chunk are transmitted as extradata.
+Frames are then split as being all the chunks between two fcTL ones, or
+between the last fcTL and IEND chunks.
+
+
+-ignore_loop bool Ignore the loop variable in the file if set.
+
-max_fps int Maximum framerate in frames per second (0 for no limit).
+
-default_fps int Default framerate in frames per second when none is specified in the file
+(0 meaning as fast as possible).
+
+
+
+
16.3 asf# TOC
+
+
Advanced Systems Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux ASF files and MMS network streams.
+
+
+-no_resync_search bool Do not try to resynchronize by looking for a certain optional start code.
+
+
+
+
16.4 concat# TOC
+
+
Virtual concatenation script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads a list of files and other directives from a text file and
+demuxes them one after the other, as if all their packet had been muxed
+together.
+
+
The timestamps in the files are adjusted so that the first file starts at 0
+and each next file starts where the previous one finishes. Note that it is
+done globally and may cause gaps if all streams do not have exactly the same
+length.
+
+
All files must have the same streams (same codecs, same time base, etc.).
+
+
The duration of each file is used to adjust the timestamps of the next file:
+if the duration is incorrect (because it was computed using the bit-rate or
+because the file is truncated, for example), it can cause artifacts. The
+duration directive can be used to override the duration stored in
+each file.
+
+
+
16.4.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
The script is a text file in extended-ASCII, with one directive per line.
+Empty lines, leading spaces and lines starting with ’#’ are ignored. The
+following directive is recognized:
+
+
+file path Path to a file to read; special characters and spaces must be escaped with
+backslash or single quotes.
+
+All subsequent file-related directives apply to that file.
+
+ffconcat version 1.0Identify the script type and version. It also sets the safe option
+to 1 if it was to its default -1.
+
+To make FFmpeg recognize the format automatically, this directive must
+appears exactly as is (no extra space or byte-order-mark) on the very first
+line of the script.
+
+duration dur Duration of the file. This information can be specified from the file;
+specifying it here may be more efficient or help if the information from the
+file is not available or accurate.
+
+If the duration is set for all files, then it is possible to seek in the
+whole concatenated video.
+
+streamIntroduce a stream in the virtual file.
+All subsequent stream-related directives apply to the last introduced
+stream.
+Some streams properties must be set in order to allow identifying the
+matching streams in the subfiles.
+If no streams are defined in the script, the streams from the first file are
+copied.
+
+exact_stream_id id Set the id of the stream.
+If this directive is given, the string with the corresponding id in the
+subfiles will be used.
+This is especially useful for MPEG-PS (VOB) files, where the order of the
+streams is not reliable.
+
+
+
+
+
16.4.2 Options# TOC
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+
+safe If set to 1, reject unsafe file paths. A file path is considered safe if it
+does not contain a protocol specification and is relative and all components
+only contain characters from the portable character set (letters, digits,
+period, underscore and hyphen) and have no period at the beginning of a
+component.
+
+If set to 0, any file name is accepted.
+
+The default is -1, it is equivalent to 1 if the format was automatically
+probed and 0 otherwise.
+
+auto_convert If set to 1, try to perform automatic conversions on packet data to make the
+streams concatenable.
+
+Currently, the only conversion is adding the h264_mp4toannexb bitstream
+filter to H.264 streams in MP4 format. This is necessary in particular if
+there are resolution changes.
+
+
+
+
+
16.5 flv# TOC
+
+
Adobe Flash Video Format demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer is used to demux FLV files and RTMP network streams.
+
+
+-flv_metadata bool Allocate the streams according to the onMetaData array content.
+
+
+
+
16.6 libgme# TOC
+
+
The Game Music Emu library is a collection of video game music file emulators.
+
+
See http://code.google.com/p/game-music-emu/ for more information.
+
+
Some files have multiple tracks. The demuxer will pick the first track by
+default. The track_index option can be used to select a different
+track. Track indexes start at 0. The demuxer exports the number of tracks as
+tracks meta data entry.
+
+
For very large files, the max_size option may have to be adjusted.
+
+
+
16.7 libquvi# TOC
+
+
Play media from Internet services using the quvi project.
+
+
The demuxer accepts a format option to request a specific quality. It
+is by default set to best .
+
+
See http://quvi.sourceforge.net/ for more information.
+
+
FFmpeg needs to be built with --enable-libquvi for this demuxer to be
+enabled.
+
+
+
16.8 gif# TOC
+
+
Animated GIF demuxer.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+min_delay Set the minimum valid delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 2.
+
+default_delay Set the default delay between frames in hundredths of seconds.
+Range is 0 to 6000. Default value is 10.
+
+ignore_loop GIF files can contain information to loop a certain number of times (or
+infinitely). If ignore_loop is set to 1, then the loop setting
+from the input will be ignored and looping will not occur. If set to 0,
+then looping will occur and will cycle the number of times according to
+the GIF. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, with the overlay filter, place an infinitely looping GIF
+over another video:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -ignore_loop 0 -i input.gif -filter_complex overlay=shortest=1 out.mkv
+
+
+
Note that in the above example the shortest option for overlay filter is
+used to end the output video at the length of the shortest input file,
+which in this case is input.mp4 as the GIF in this example loops
+infinitely.
+
+
+
16.9 image2# TOC
+
+
Image file demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads from a list of image files specified by a pattern.
+The syntax and meaning of the pattern is specified by the
+option pattern_type .
+
+
The pattern may contain a suffix which is used to automatically
+determine the format of the images contained in the files.
+
+
The size, the pixel format, and the format of each image must be the
+same for all the files in the sequence.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set the frame rate for the video stream. It defaults to 25.
+
loop If set to 1, loop over the input. Default value is 0.
+
pattern_type Select the pattern type used to interpret the provided filename.
+
+pattern_type accepts one of the following values.
+
+sequence Select a sequence pattern type, used to specify a sequence of files
+indexed by sequential numbers.
+
+A sequence pattern may contain the string "%d" or "%0N d", which
+specifies the position of the characters representing a sequential
+number in each filename matched by the pattern. If the form
+"%d0N d" is used, the string representing the number in each
+filename is 0-padded and N is the total number of 0-padded
+digits representing the number. The literal character ’%’ can be
+specified in the pattern with the string "%%".
+
+If the sequence pattern contains "%d" or "%0N d", the first filename of
+the file list specified by the pattern must contain a number
+inclusively contained between start_number and
+start_number +start_number_range -1, and all the following
+numbers must be sequential.
+
+For example the pattern "img-%03d.bmp" will match a sequence of
+filenames of the form img-001.bmp , img-002.bmp , ...,
+img-010.bmp , etc.; the pattern "i%%m%%g-%d.jpg" will match a
+sequence of filenames of the form i%m%g-1.jpg ,
+i%m%g-2.jpg , ..., i%m%g-10.jpg , etc.
+
+Note that the pattern must not necessarily contain "%d" or
+"%0N d", for example to convert a single image file
+img.jpeg you can employ the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i img.jpeg img.png
+ glob Select a glob wildcard pattern type.
+
+The pattern is interpreted like a glob() pattern. This is only
+selectable if libavformat was compiled with globbing support.
+
+glob_sequence (deprecated, will be removed) Select a mixed glob wildcard/sequence pattern.
+
+If your version of libavformat was compiled with globbing support, and
+the provided pattern contains at least one glob meta character among
+%*?[]{} that is preceded by an unescaped "%", the pattern is
+interpreted like a glob() pattern, otherwise it is interpreted
+like a sequence pattern.
+
+All glob special characters %*?[]{} must be prefixed
+with "%". To escape a literal "%" you shall use "%%".
+
+For example the pattern foo-%*.jpeg will match all the
+filenames prefixed by "foo-" and terminating with ".jpeg", and
+foo-%?%?%?.jpeg will match all the filenames prefixed with
+"foo-", followed by a sequence of three characters, and terminating
+with ".jpeg".
+
+This pattern type is deprecated in favor of glob and
+sequence .
+
+
+Default value is glob_sequence .
+
pixel_format Set the pixel format of the images to read. If not specified the pixel
+format is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
start_number Set the index of the file matched by the image file pattern to start
+to read from. Default value is 0.
+
start_number_range Set the index interval range to check when looking for the first image
+file in the sequence, starting from start_number . Default value
+is 5.
+
ts_from_file If set to 1, will set frame timestamp to modification time of image file. Note
+that monotonity of timestamps is not provided: images go in the same order as
+without this option. Default value is 0.
+If set to 2, will set frame timestamp to the modification time of the image file in
+nanosecond precision.
+
video_size Set the video size of the images to read. If not specified the video
+size is guessed from the first image file in the sequence.
+
+
+
+
16.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg for creating a video from the images in the file
+sequence img-001.jpeg , img-002.jpeg , ..., assuming an
+input frame rate of 10 frames per second:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ As above, but start by reading from a file with index 100 in the sequence:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -start_number 100 -i 'img-%03d.jpeg' out.mkv
+ Read images matching the "*.png" glob pattern , that is all the files
+terminating with the ".png" suffix:
+
+
ffmpeg -framerate 10 -pattern_type glob -i "*.png" out.mkv
+
+
+
+
16.10 mpegts# TOC
+
+
MPEG-2 transport stream demuxer.
+
+
+fix_teletext_pts Overrides teletext packet PTS and DTS values with the timestamps calculated
+from the PCR of the first program which the teletext stream is part of and is
+not discarded. Default value is 1, set this option to 0 if you want your
+teletext packet PTS and DTS values untouched.
+
+
+
+
16.11 rawvideo# TOC
+
+
Raw video demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer allows one to read raw video data. Since there is no header
+specifying the assumed video parameters, the user must specify them
+in order to be able to decode the data correctly.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following options:
+
+framerate Set input video frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+pixel_format Set the input video pixel format. Default value is yuv420p.
+
+video_size Set the input video size. This value must be specified explicitly.
+
+
+
For example to read a rawvideo file input.raw with
+ffplay, assuming a pixel format of rgb24, a video
+size of 320x240, and a frame rate of 10 images per second, use
+the command:
+
+
ffplay -f rawvideo -pixel_format rgb24 -video_size 320x240 -framerate 10 input.raw
+
+
+
+
16.12 sbg# TOC
+
+
SBaGen script demuxer.
+
+
This demuxer reads the script language used by SBaGen
+http://uazu.net/sbagen/ to generate binaural beats sessions. A SBG
+script looks like that:
+
+
-SE
+a: 300-2.5/3 440+4.5/0
+b: 300-2.5/0 440+4.5/3
+off: -
+NOW == a
++0:07:00 == b
++0:14:00 == a
++0:21:00 == b
++0:30:00 off
+
+
+
A SBG script can mix absolute and relative timestamps. If the script uses
+either only absolute timestamps (including the script start time) or only
+relative ones, then its layout is fixed, and the conversion is
+straightforward. On the other hand, if the script mixes both kind of
+timestamps, then the NOW reference for relative timestamps will be
+taken from the current time of day at the time the script is read, and the
+script layout will be frozen according to that reference. That means that if
+the script is directly played, the actual times will match the absolute
+timestamps up to the sound controller’s clock accuracy, but if the user
+somehow pauses the playback or seeks, all times will be shifted accordingly.
+
+
+
16.13 tedcaptions# TOC
+
+
JSON captions used for TED Talks .
+
+
TED does not provide links to the captions, but they can be guessed from the
+page. The file tools/bookmarklets.html from the FFmpeg source tree
+contains a bookmarklet to expose them.
+
+
This demuxer accepts the following option:
+
+start_time Set the start time of the TED talk, in milliseconds. The default is 15000
+(15s). It is used to sync the captions with the downloadable videos, because
+they include a 15s intro.
+
+
+
Example: convert the captions to a format most players understand:
+
+
ffmpeg -i http://www.ted.com/talks/subtitles/id/1/lang/en talk1-en.srt
+
+
+
+
17 Metadata# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg is able to dump metadata from media files into a simple UTF-8-encoded
+INI-like text file and then load it back using the metadata muxer/demuxer.
+
+
The file format is as follows:
+
+ A file consists of a header and a number of metadata tags divided into sections,
+each on its own line.
+
+ The header is a ’;FFMETADATA’ string, followed by a version number (now 1).
+
+ Metadata tags are of the form ’key=value’
+
+ Immediately after header follows global metadata
+
+ After global metadata there may be sections with per-stream/per-chapter
+metadata.
+
+ A section starts with the section name in uppercase (i.e. STREAM or CHAPTER) in
+brackets (’[’, ’]’) and ends with next section or end of file.
+
+ At the beginning of a chapter section there may be an optional timebase to be
+used for start/end values. It must be in form ’TIMEBASE=num/den’, where num and
+den are integers. If the timebase is missing then start/end times are assumed to
+be in milliseconds.
+Next a chapter section must contain chapter start and end times in form
+’START=num’, ’END=num’, where num is a positive integer.
+
+ Empty lines and lines starting with ’;’ or ’#’ are ignored.
+
+ Metadata keys or values containing special characters (’=’, ’;’, ’#’, ’\’ and a
+newline) must be escaped with a backslash ’\’.
+
+ Note that whitespace in metadata (e.g. foo = bar) is considered to be a part of
+the tag (in the example above key is ’foo ’, value is ’ bar’).
+
+
+
A ffmetadata file might look like this:
+
+
;FFMETADATA1
+title=bike\\shed
+;this is a comment
+artist=FFmpeg troll team
+
+[CHAPTER]
+TIMEBASE=1/1000
+START=0
+#chapter ends at 0:01:00
+END=60000
+title=chapter \#1
+[STREAM]
+title=multi\
+line
+
+
+
By using the ffmetadata muxer and demuxer it is possible to extract
+metadata from an input file to an ffmetadata file, and then transcode
+the file into an output file with the edited ffmetadata file.
+
+
Extracting an ffmetadata file with ffmpeg goes as follows:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -f ffmetadata FFMETADATAFILE
+
+
+
Reinserting edited metadata information from the FFMETADATAFILE file can
+be done as:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -i FFMETADATAFILE -map_metadata 1 -codec copy OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
18 Protocols# TOC
+
+
Protocols are configured elements in FFmpeg that enable access to
+resources that require specific protocols.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported protocols are
+enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-protocols".
+
+
You can disable all the protocols using the configure option
+"–disable-protocols", and selectively enable a protocol using the
+option "–enable-protocol=PROTOCOL ", or you can disable a
+particular protocol using the option
+"–disable-protocol=PROTOCOL ".
+
+
The option "-protocols" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported protocols.
+
+
A description of the currently available protocols follows.
+
+
+
18.1 bluray# TOC
+
+
Read BluRay playlist.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+angle BluRay angle
+
+chapter Start chapter (1...N)
+
+playlist Playlist to read (BDMV/PLAYLIST/?????.mpls)
+
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Read longest playlist from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray:
+
+
+
Read angle 2 of playlist 4 from BluRay mounted to /mnt/bluray, start from chapter 2:
+
+
-playlist 4 -angle 2 -chapter 2 bluray:/mnt/bluray
+
+
+
+
18.2 cache# TOC
+
+
Caching wrapper for input stream.
+
+
Cache the input stream to temporary file. It brings seeking capability to live streams.
+
+
+
+
+
18.3 concat# TOC
+
+
Physical concatenation protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and seek from many resource in sequence as if they were
+a unique resource.
+
+
A URL accepted by this protocol has the syntax:
+
+
concat:URL1 |URL2 |...|URLN
+
+
+
where URL1 , URL2 , ..., URLN are the urls of the
+resource to be concatenated, each one possibly specifying a distinct
+protocol.
+
+
For example to read a sequence of files split1.mpeg ,
+split2.mpeg , split3.mpeg with ffplay use the
+command:
+
+
ffplay concat:split1.mpeg\|split2.mpeg\|split3.mpeg
+
+
+
Note that you may need to escape the character "|" which is special for
+many shells.
+
+
+
18.4 crypto# TOC
+
+
AES-encrypted stream reading protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+key Set the AES decryption key binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+iv Set the AES decryption initialization vector binary block from given hexadecimal representation.
+
+
+
Accepted URL formats:
+
+
crypto:URL
+crypto+URL
+
+
+
+
18.5 data# TOC
+
+
Data in-line in the URI. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_URI_scheme .
+
+
For example, to convert a GIF file given inline with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i "data:image/gif;base64,R0lGODdhCAAIAMIEAAAAAAAA//8AAP//AP///////////////ywAAAAACAAIAAADF0gEDLojDgdGiJdJqUX02iB4E8Q9jUMkADs=" smiley.png
+
+
+
+
18.6 file# TOC
+
+
File access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read from or write to a file.
+
+
A file URL can have the form:
+
+
+
where filename is the path of the file to read.
+
+
An URL that does not have a protocol prefix will be assumed to be a
+file URL. Depending on the build, an URL that looks like a Windows
+path with the drive letter at the beginning will also be assumed to be
+a file URL (usually not the case in builds for unix-like systems).
+
+
For example to read from a file input.mpeg with ffmpeg
+use the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -i file:input.mpeg output.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable for files on slow medium.
+
+
+
+
18.7 ftp# TOC
+
+
FTP (File Transfer Protocol).
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using FTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
ftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+ftp-anonymous-password Password used when login as anonymous user. Typically an e-mail address
+should be used.
+
+ftp-write-seekable Control seekability of connection during encoding. If set to 1 the
+resource is supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not
+to be seekable. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
NOTE: Protocol can be used as output, but it is recommended to not do
+it, unless special care is taken (tests, customized server configuration
+etc.). Different FTP servers behave in different way during seek
+operation. ff* tools may produce incomplete content due to server limitations.
+
+
+
18.8 gopher# TOC
+
+
Gopher protocol.
+
+
+
18.9 hls# TOC
+
+
Read Apple HTTP Live Streaming compliant segmented stream as
+a uniform one. The M3U8 playlists describing the segments can be
+remote HTTP resources or local files, accessed using the standard
+file protocol.
+The nested protocol is declared by specifying
+"+proto " after the hls URI scheme name, where proto
+is either "file" or "http".
+
+
+
hls+http://host/path/to/remote/resource.m3u8
+hls+file://path/to/local/resource.m3u8
+
+
+
Using this protocol is discouraged - the hls demuxer should work
+just as well (if not, please report the issues) and is more complete.
+To use the hls demuxer instead, simply use the direct URLs to the
+m3u8 files.
+
+
+
18.10 http# TOC
+
+
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol).
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+seekable Control seekability of connection. If set to 1 the resource is
+supposed to be seekable, if set to 0 it is assumed not to be seekable,
+if set to -1 it will try to autodetect if it is seekable. Default
+value is -1.
+
+chunked_post If set to 1 use chunked Transfer-Encoding for posts, default is 1.
+
+content_type Set a specific content type for the POST messages.
+
+headers Set custom HTTP headers, can override built in default headers. The
+value must be a string encoding the headers.
+
+multiple_requests Use persistent connections if set to 1, default is 0.
+
+post_data Set custom HTTP post data.
+
+user-agent user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified the protocol will use a
+string describing the libavformat build. ("Lavf/<version>")
+
+timeout Set timeout in microseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout is
+not specified.
+
+mime_type Export the MIME type.
+
+icy If set to 1 request ICY (SHOUTcast) metadata from the server. If the server
+supports this, the metadata has to be retrieved by the application by reading
+the icy_metadata_headers and icy_metadata_packet options.
+The default is 1.
+
+icy_metadata_headers If the server supports ICY metadata, this contains the ICY-specific HTTP reply
+headers, separated by newline characters.
+
+icy_metadata_packet If the server supports ICY metadata, and icy was set to 1, this
+contains the last non-empty metadata packet sent by the server. It should be
+polled in regular intervals by applications interested in mid-stream metadata
+updates.
+
+cookies Set the cookies to be sent in future requests. The format of each cookie is the
+same as the value of a Set-Cookie HTTP response field. Multiple cookies can be
+delimited by a newline character.
+
+offset Set initial byte offset.
+
+end_offset Try to limit the request to bytes preceding this offset.
+
+
+
+
18.10.1 HTTP Cookies# TOC
+
+
Some HTTP requests will be denied unless cookie values are passed in with the
+request. The cookies option allows these cookies to be specified. At
+the very least, each cookie must specify a value along with a path and domain.
+HTTP requests that match both the domain and path will automatically include the
+cookie value in the HTTP Cookie header field. Multiple cookies can be delimited
+by a newline.
+
+
The required syntax to play a stream specifying a cookie is:
+
+
ffplay -cookies "nlqptid=nltid=tsn; path=/; domain=somedomain.com;" http://somedomain.com/somestream.m3u8
+
+
+
+
18.11 Icecast# TOC
+
+
Icecast protocol (stream to Icecast servers)
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+ice_genre Set the stream genre.
+
+ice_name Set the stream name.
+
+ice_description Set the stream description.
+
+ice_url Set the stream website URL.
+
+ice_public Set if the stream should be public.
+The default is 0 (not public).
+
+user_agent Override the User-Agent header. If not specified a string of the form
+"Lavf/<version>" will be used.
+
+password Set the Icecast mountpoint password.
+
+content_type Set the stream content type. This must be set if it is different from
+audio/mpeg.
+
+legacy_icecast This enables support for Icecast versions < 2.4.0, that do not support the
+HTTP PUT method but the SOURCE method.
+
+
+
+
+
icecast://[username [:password ]@]server :port /mountpoint
+
+
+
+
18.12 mmst# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over TCP.
+
+
+
18.13 mmsh# TOC
+
+
MMS (Microsoft Media Server) protocol over HTTP.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
mmsh://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
+
18.14 md5# TOC
+
+
MD5 output protocol.
+
+
Computes the MD5 hash of the data to be written, and on close writes
+this to the designated output or stdout if none is specified. It can
+be used to test muxers without writing an actual file.
+
+
Some examples follow.
+
+
# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to the file output.avi.md5.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:output.avi.md5
+
+# Write the MD5 hash of the encoded AVI file to stdout.
+ffmpeg -i input.flv -f avi -y md5:
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV) require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the MD5 output protocol.
+
+
+
18.15 pipe# TOC
+
+
UNIX pipe access protocol.
+
+
Allow to read and write from UNIX pipes.
+
+
The accepted syntax is:
+
+
+
number is the number corresponding to the file descriptor of the
+pipe (e.g. 0 for stdin, 1 for stdout, 2 for stderr). If number
+is not specified, by default the stdout file descriptor will be used
+for writing, stdin for reading.
+
+
For example to read from stdin with ffmpeg:
+
+
cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:0
+# ...this is the same as...
+cat test.wav | ffmpeg -i pipe:
+
+
+
For writing to stdout with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe:1 | cat > test.avi
+# ...this is the same as...
+ffmpeg -i test.wav -f avi pipe: | cat > test.avi
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options:
+
+
+blocksize Set I/O operation maximum block size, in bytes. Default value is
+INT_MAX, which results in not limiting the requested block size.
+Setting this value reasonably low improves user termination request reaction
+time, which is valuable if data transmission is slow.
+
+
+
Note that some formats (typically MOV), require the output protocol to
+be seekable, so they will fail with the pipe output protocol.
+
+
+
18.16 rtmp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) is used for streaming multimedia
+content across a TCP/IP network.
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp://[username :password @]server [:port ][/app ][/instance ][/playpath ]
+
+
+
The accepted parameters are:
+
+username An optional username (mostly for publishing).
+
+password An optional password (mostly for publishing).
+
+server The address of the RTMP server.
+
+port The number of the TCP port to use (by default is 1935).
+
+app It is the name of the application to access. It usually corresponds to
+the path where the application is installed on the RTMP server
+(e.g. /ondemand/ , /flash/live/ , etc.). You can override
+the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_app option, too.
+
+playpath It is the path or name of the resource to play with reference to the
+application specified in app , may be prefixed by "mp4:". You
+can override the value parsed from the URI through the rtmp_playpath
+option, too.
+
+listen Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
+timeout Maximum time to wait for the incoming connection. Implies listen.
+
+
+
Additionally, the following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+rtmp_app Name of application to connect on the RTMP server. This option
+overrides the parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_buffer Set the client buffer time in milliseconds. The default is 3000.
+
+rtmp_conn Extra arbitrary AMF connection parameters, parsed from a string,
+e.g. like B:1 S:authMe O:1 NN:code:1.23 NS:flag:ok O:0.
+Each value is prefixed by a single character denoting the type,
+B for Boolean, N for number, S for string, O for object, or Z for null,
+followed by a colon. For Booleans the data must be either 0 or 1 for
+FALSE or TRUE, respectively. Likewise for Objects the data must be 0 or
+1 to end or begin an object, respectively. Data items in subobjects may
+be named, by prefixing the type with ’N’ and specifying the name before
+the value (i.e. NB:myFlag:1). This option may be used multiple
+times to construct arbitrary AMF sequences.
+
+rtmp_flashver Version of the Flash plugin used to run the SWF player. The default
+is LNX 9,0,124,2. (When publishing, the default is FMLE/3.0 (compatible;
+<libavformat version>).)
+
+rtmp_flush_interval Number of packets flushed in the same request (RTMPT only). The default
+is 10.
+
+rtmp_live Specify that the media is a live stream. No resuming or seeking in
+live streams is possible. The default value is any, which means the
+subscriber first tries to play the live stream specified in the
+playpath. If a live stream of that name is not found, it plays the
+recorded stream. The other possible values are live and
+recorded.
+
+rtmp_pageurl URL of the web page in which the media was embedded. By default no
+value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_playpath Stream identifier to play or to publish. This option overrides the
+parameter specified in the URI.
+
+rtmp_subscribe Name of live stream to subscribe to. By default no value will be sent.
+It is only sent if the option is specified or if rtmp_live
+is set to live.
+
+rtmp_swfhash SHA256 hash of the decompressed SWF file (32 bytes).
+
+rtmp_swfsize Size of the decompressed SWF file, required for SWFVerification.
+
+rtmp_swfurl URL of the SWF player for the media. By default no value will be sent.
+
+rtmp_swfverify URL to player swf file, compute hash/size automatically.
+
+rtmp_tcurl URL of the target stream. Defaults to proto://host[:port]/app.
+
+
+
+
For example to read with ffplay a multimedia resource named
+"sample" from the application "vod" from an RTMP server "myserver":
+
+
ffplay rtmp://myserver/vod/sample
+
+
+
To publish to a password protected server, passing the playpath and
+app names separately:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i <input> -f flv -rtmp_playpath some/long/path -rtmp_app long/app/name rtmp://username:password@myserver/
+
+
+
+
18.17 rtmpe# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPE) is used for
+streaming multimedia content within standard cryptographic primitives,
+consisting of Diffie-Hellman key exchange and HMACSHA256, generating
+a pair of RC4 keys.
+
+
+
18.18 rtmps# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol over a secure SSL connection.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol (RTMPS) is used for streaming
+multimedia content across an encrypted connection.
+
+
+
18.19 rtmpt# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPT) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
18.20 rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP.
+
+
The Encrypted Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTP (RTMPTE)
+is used for streaming multimedia content within HTTP requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
18.21 rtmpts# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS.
+
+
The Real-Time Messaging Protocol tunneled through HTTPS (RTMPTS) is used
+for streaming multimedia content within HTTPS requests to traverse
+firewalls.
+
+
+
18.22 libsmbclient# TOC
+
+
libsmbclient permits one to manipulate CIFS/SMB network resources.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
smb://[[domain:]user[:password@]]server[/share[/path[/file]]]
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout in miliseconds of socket I/O operations used by the underlying
+low level operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+workgroup Set the workgroup used for making connections. By default workgroup is not specified.
+
+
+
+
For more information see: http://www.samba.org/ .
+
+
+
18.23 libssh# TOC
+
+
Secure File Transfer Protocol via libssh
+
+
Allow to read from or write to remote resources using SFTP protocol.
+
+
Following syntax is required.
+
+
+
sftp://[user[:password]@]server[:port]/path/to/remote/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
This protocol accepts the following options.
+
+
+timeout Set timeout of socket I/O operations used by the underlying low level
+operation. By default it is set to -1, which means that the timeout
+is not specified.
+
+truncate Truncate existing files on write, if set to 1. A value of 0 prevents
+truncating. Default value is 1.
+
+private_key Specify the path of the file containing private key to use during authorization.
+By default libssh searches for keys in the ~/.ssh/ directory.
+
+
+
+
Example: Play a file stored on remote server.
+
+
+
ffplay sftp://user:password@server_address:22/home/user/resource.mpeg
+
+
+
+
18.24 librtmp rtmp, rtmpe, rtmps, rtmpt, rtmpte# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Messaging Protocol and its variants supported through
+librtmp.
+
+
Requires the presence of the librtmp headers and library during
+configuration. You need to explicitly configure the build with
+"–enable-librtmp". If enabled this will replace the native RTMP
+protocol.
+
+
This protocol provides most client functions and a few server
+functions needed to support RTMP, RTMP tunneled in HTTP (RTMPT),
+encrypted RTMP (RTMPE), RTMP over SSL/TLS (RTMPS) and tunneled
+variants of these encrypted types (RTMPTE, RTMPTS).
+
+
The required syntax is:
+
+
rtmp_proto ://server [:port ][/app ][/playpath ] options
+
+
+
where rtmp_proto is one of the strings "rtmp", "rtmpt", "rtmpe",
+"rtmps", "rtmpte", "rtmpts" corresponding to each RTMP variant, and
+server , port , app and playpath have the same
+meaning as specified for the RTMP native protocol.
+options contains a list of space-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
See the librtmp manual page (man 3 librtmp) for more information.
+
+
For example, to stream a file in real-time to an RTMP server using
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i myfile -f flv rtmp://myserver/live/mystream
+
+
+
To play the same stream using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay "rtmp://myserver/live/mystream live=1"
+
+
+
+
18.25 rtp# TOC
+
+
Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an RTP URL is:
+rtp://hostname [:port ][?option =val ...]
+
+
port specifies the RTP port to use.
+
+
The following URL options are supported:
+
+
+ttl=n Set the TTL (Time-To-Live) value (for multicast only).
+
+rtcpport=n Set the remote RTCP port to n .
+
+localrtpport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+localrtcpport=n ' Set the local RTCP port to n .
+
+pkt_size=n Set max packet size (in bytes) to n .
+
+connect=0|1 Do a connect() on the UDP socket (if set to 1) or not (if set
+to 0).
+
+sources=ip [,ip ] List allowed source IP addresses.
+
+block=ip [,ip ] List disallowed (blocked) source IP addresses.
+
+write_to_source=0|1 Send packets to the source address of the latest received packet (if
+set to 1) or to a default remote address (if set to 0).
+
+localport=n Set the local RTP port to n .
+
+This is a deprecated option. Instead, localrtpport should be
+used.
+
+
+
+
Important notes:
+
+
+ If rtcpport is not set the RTCP port will be set to the RTP
+port value plus 1.
+
+ If localrtpport (the local RTP port) is not set any available
+port will be used for the local RTP and RTCP ports.
+
+ If localrtcpport (the local RTCP port) is not set it will be
+set to the local RTP port value plus 1.
+
+
+
+
18.26 rtsp# TOC
+
+
Real-Time Streaming Protocol.
+
+
RTSP is not technically a protocol handler in libavformat, it is a demuxer
+and muxer. The demuxer supports both normal RTSP (with data transferred
+over RTP; this is used by e.g. Apple and Microsoft) and Real-RTSP (with
+data transferred over RDT).
+
+
The muxer can be used to send a stream using RTSP ANNOUNCE to a server
+supporting it (currently Darwin Streaming Server and Mischa Spiegelmock’s
+RTSP server ).
+
+
The required syntax for a RTSP url is:
+
+
rtsp://hostname [:port ]/path
+
+
+
Options can be set on the ffmpeg/ffplay command
+line, or set in code via AVOptions or in
+avformat_open_input.
+
+
The following options are supported.
+
+
+initial_pause Do not start playing the stream immediately if set to 1. Default value
+is 0.
+
+rtsp_transport Set RTSP transport protocols.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘udp ’
+Use UDP as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘tcp ’
+Use TCP (interleaving within the RTSP control channel) as lower
+transport protocol.
+
+‘udp_multicast ’
+Use UDP multicast as lower transport protocol.
+
+‘http ’
+Use HTTP tunneling as lower transport protocol, which is useful for
+passing proxies.
+
+
+Multiple lower transport protocols may be specified, in that case they are
+tried one at a time (if the setup of one fails, the next one is tried).
+For the muxer, only the ‘tcp ’ and ‘udp ’ options are supported.
+
+rtsp_flags Set RTSP flags.
+
+The following values are accepted:
+
+‘filter_src ’
+Accept packets only from negotiated peer address and port.
+
‘listen ’
+Act as a server, listening for an incoming connection.
+
‘prefer_tcp ’
+Try TCP for RTP transport first, if TCP is available as RTSP RTP transport.
+
+
+Default value is ‘none ’.
+
+allowed_media_types Set media types to accept from the server.
+
+The following flags are accepted:
+
+‘video ’
+‘audio ’
+‘data ’
+
+
+By default it accepts all media types.
+
+min_port Set minimum local UDP port. Default value is 5000.
+
+max_port Set maximum local UDP port. Default value is 65000.
+
+timeout Set maximum timeout (in seconds) to wait for incoming connections.
+
+A value of -1 means infinite (default). This option implies the
+rtsp_flags set to ‘listen ’.
+
+reorder_queue_size Set number of packets to buffer for handling of reordered packets.
+
+stimeout Set socket TCP I/O timeout in microseconds.
+
+user-agent Override User-Agent header. If not specified, it defaults to the
+libavformat identifier string.
+
+
+
When receiving data over UDP, the demuxer tries to reorder received packets
+(since they may arrive out of order, or packets may get lost totally). This
+can be disabled by setting the maximum demuxing delay to zero (via
+the max_delay field of AVFormatContext).
+
+
When watching multi-bitrate Real-RTSP streams with ffplay, the
+streams to display can be chosen with -vst n and
+-ast n for video and audio respectively, and can be switched
+on the fly by pressing v and a.
+
+
+
18.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
The following examples all make use of the ffplay and
+ffmpeg tools.
+
+
+ Watch a stream over UDP, with a max reordering delay of 0.5 seconds:
+
+
ffplay -max_delay 500000 -rtsp_transport udp rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Watch a stream tunneled over HTTP:
+
+
ffplay -rtsp_transport http rtsp://server/video.mp4
+ Send a stream in realtime to a RTSP server, for others to watch:
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f rtsp -muxdelay 0.1 rtsp://server/live.sdp
+ Receive a stream in realtime:
+
+
ffmpeg -rtsp_flags listen -i rtsp://ownaddress/live.sdp output
+
+
+
+
18.27 sap# TOC
+
+
Session Announcement Protocol (RFC 2974). This is not technically a
+protocol handler in libavformat, it is a muxer and demuxer.
+It is used for signalling of RTP streams, by announcing the SDP for the
+streams regularly on a separate port.
+
+
+
18.27.1 Muxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the muxer is:
+
+
sap://destination [:port ][?options ]
+
+
+
The RTP packets are sent to destination on port port ,
+or to port 5004 if no port is specified.
+options is a &-separated list. The following options
+are supported:
+
+
+announce_addr=address Specify the destination IP address for sending the announcements to.
+If omitted, the announcements are sent to the commonly used SAP
+announcement multicast address 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net), or
+ff0e::2:7ffe if destination is an IPv6 address.
+
+announce_port=port Specify the port to send the announcements on, defaults to
+9875 if not specified.
+
+ttl=ttl Specify the time to live value for the announcements and RTP packets,
+defaults to 255.
+
+same_port=0|1 If set to 1, send all RTP streams on the same port pair. If zero (the
+default), all streams are sent on unique ports, with each stream on a
+port 2 numbers higher than the previous.
+VLC/Live555 requires this to be set to 1, to be able to receive the stream.
+The RTP stack in libavformat for receiving requires all streams to be sent
+on unique ports.
+
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To broadcast a stream on the local subnet, for watching in VLC:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255?same_port=1
+
+
+
Similarly, for watching in ffplay:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://224.0.0.255
+
+
+
And for watching in ffplay, over IPv6:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -re -i input -f sap sap://[ff0e::1:2:3:4]
+
+
+
+
18.27.2 Demuxer# TOC
+
+
The syntax for a SAP url given to the demuxer is:
+
+
sap://[address ][:port ]
+
+
+
address is the multicast address to listen for announcements on,
+if omitted, the default 224.2.127.254 (sap.mcast.net) is used. port
+is the port that is listened on, 9875 if omitted.
+
+
The demuxers listens for announcements on the given address and port.
+Once an announcement is received, it tries to receive that particular stream.
+
+
Example command lines follow.
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on the normal SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
+
To play back the first stream announced on one the default IPv6 SAP multicast address:
+
+
+
ffplay sap://[ff0e::2:7ffe]
+
+
+
+
18.28 sctp# TOC
+
+
Stream Control Transmission Protocol.
+
+
The accepted URL syntax is:
+
+
sctp://host :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The protocol accepts the following options:
+
+listen If set to any value, listen for an incoming connection. Outgoing connection is done by default.
+
+max_streams Set the maximum number of streams. By default no limit is set.
+
+
+
+
18.29 srtp# TOC
+
+
Secure Real-time Transport Protocol.
+
+
The accepted options are:
+
+srtp_in_suite srtp_out_suite Select input and output encoding suites.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80 ’
+‘AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+‘SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32 ’
+
+
+srtp_in_params srtp_out_params Set input and output encoding parameters, which are expressed by a
+base64-encoded representation of a binary block. The first 16 bytes of
+this binary block are used as master key, the following 14 bytes are
+used as master salt.
+
+
+
+
18.30 subfile# TOC
+
+
Virtually extract a segment of a file or another stream.
+The underlying stream must be seekable.
+
+
Accepted options:
+
+start Start offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
end End offset of the extracted segment, in bytes.
+
+
+
Examples:
+
+
Extract a chapter from a DVD VOB file (start and end sectors obtained
+externally and multiplied by 2048):
+
+
subfile,,start,153391104,end,268142592,,:/media/dvd/VIDEO_TS/VTS_08_1.VOB
+
+
+
Play an AVI file directly from a TAR archive:
+subfile,,start,183241728,end,366490624,,:archive.tar
+
+
+
18.31 tcp# TOC
+
+
Transmission Control Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for a TCP url is:
+
+
tcp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form
+key =val .
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+listen=1|0 Listen for an incoming connection. Default value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+listen_timeout=microseconds Set listen timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+
+
The following example shows how to setup a listening TCP connection
+with ffmpeg, which is then accessed with ffplay:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tcp://hostname :port ?listen
+ffplay tcp://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
18.32 tls# TOC
+
+
Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
+
+
The required syntax for a TLS/SSL url is:
+
+
tls://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+ca_file, cafile=filename A file containing certificate authority (CA) root certificates to treat
+as trusted. If the linked TLS library contains a default this might not
+need to be specified for verification to work, but not all libraries and
+setups have defaults built in.
+The file must be in OpenSSL PEM format.
+
+tls_verify=1|0 If enabled, try to verify the peer that we are communicating with.
+Note, if using OpenSSL, this currently only makes sure that the
+peer certificate is signed by one of the root certificates in the CA
+database, but it does not validate that the certificate actually
+matches the host name we are trying to connect to. (With GnuTLS,
+the host name is validated as well.)
+
+This is disabled by default since it requires a CA database to be
+provided by the caller in many cases.
+
+cert_file, cert=filename A file containing a certificate to use in the handshake with the peer.
+(When operating as server, in listen mode, this is more often required
+by the peer, while client certificates only are mandated in certain
+setups.)
+
+key_file, key=filename A file containing the private key for the certificate.
+
+listen=1|0 If enabled, listen for connections on the provided port, and assume
+the server role in the handshake instead of the client role.
+
+
+
+
Example command lines:
+
+
To create a TLS/SSL server that serves an input stream.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format tls://hostname :port ?listen&cert=server.crt &key=server.key
+
+
+
To play back a stream from the TLS/SSL server using ffplay:
+
+
+
ffplay tls://hostname :port
+
+
+
+
18.33 udp# TOC
+
+
User Datagram Protocol.
+
+
The required syntax for an UDP URL is:
+
+
udp://hostname :port [?options ]
+
+
+
options contains a list of &-separated options of the form key =val .
+
+
In case threading is enabled on the system, a circular buffer is used
+to store the incoming data, which allows one to reduce loss of data due to
+UDP socket buffer overruns. The fifo_size and
+overrun_nonfatal options are related to this buffer.
+
+
The list of supported options follows.
+
+
+buffer_size=size Set the UDP maximum socket buffer size in bytes. This is used to set either
+the receive or send buffer size, depending on what the socket is used for.
+Default is 64KB. See also fifo_size .
+
+localport=port Override the local UDP port to bind with.
+
+localaddr=addr Choose the local IP address. This is useful e.g. if sending multicast
+and the host has multiple interfaces, where the user can choose
+which interface to send on by specifying the IP address of that interface.
+
+pkt_size=size Set the size in bytes of UDP packets.
+
+reuse=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow reusing UDP sockets.
+
+ttl=ttl Set the time to live value (for multicast only).
+
+connect=1|0 Initialize the UDP socket with connect(). In this case, the
+destination address can’t be changed with ff_udp_set_remote_url later.
+If the destination address isn’t known at the start, this option can
+be specified in ff_udp_set_remote_url, too.
+This allows finding out the source address for the packets with getsockname,
+and makes writes return with AVERROR(ECONNREFUSED) if "destination
+unreachable" is received.
+For receiving, this gives the benefit of only receiving packets from
+the specified peer address/port.
+
+sources=address [,address ] Only receive packets sent to the multicast group from one of the
+specified sender IP addresses.
+
+block=address [,address ] Ignore packets sent to the multicast group from the specified
+sender IP addresses.
+
+fifo_size=units Set the UDP receiving circular buffer size, expressed as a number of
+packets with size of 188 bytes. If not specified defaults to 7*4096.
+
+overrun_nonfatal=1|0 Survive in case of UDP receiving circular buffer overrun. Default
+value is 0.
+
+timeout=microseconds Set raise error timeout, expressed in microseconds.
+
+This option is only relevant in read mode: if no data arrived in more
+than this time interval, raise error.
+
+broadcast=1|0 Explicitly allow or disallow UDP broadcasting.
+
+Note that broadcasting may not work properly on networks having
+a broadcast storm protection.
+
+
+
+
18.33.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to stream over UDP to a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f format udp://hostname :port
+ Use ffmpeg to stream in mpegts format over UDP using 188
+sized UDP packets, using a large input buffer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -f mpegts udp://hostname :port ?pkt_size=188&buffer_size=65535
+ Use ffmpeg to receive over UDP from a remote endpoint:
+
+
ffmpeg -i udp://[multicast-address ]:port ...
+
+
+
+
18.34 unix# TOC
+
+
Unix local socket
+
+
The required syntax for a Unix socket URL is:
+
+
+
+
The following parameters can be set via command line options
+(or in code via AVOptions):
+
+
+timeout Timeout in ms.
+
listen Create the Unix socket in listening mode.
+
+
+
+
19 Device Options# TOC
+
+
The libavdevice library provides the same interface as
+libavformat. Namely, an input device is considered like a demuxer, and
+an output device like a muxer, and the interface and generic device
+options are the same provided by libavformat (see the ffmpeg-formats
+manual).
+
+
In addition each input or output device may support so-called private
+options, which are specific for that component.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, or by setting the value explicitly in the device
+AVFormatContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API
+for programmatic use.
+
+
+
+
20 Input Devices# TOC
+
+
Input devices are configured elements in FFmpeg which allow to access
+the data coming from a multimedia device attached to your system.
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, all the supported input devices
+are enabled by default. You can list all available ones using the
+configure option "–list-indevs".
+
+
You can disable all the input devices using the configure option
+"–disable-indevs", and selectively enable an input device using the
+option "–enable-indev=INDEV ", or you can disable a particular
+input device using the option "–disable-indev=INDEV ".
+
+
The option "-devices" of the ff* tools will display the list of
+supported input devices.
+
+
A description of the currently available input devices follows.
+
+
+
20.1 alsa# TOC
+
+
ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture) input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libasound
+installed on your system.
+
+
This device allows capturing from an ALSA device. The name of the
+device to capture has to be an ALSA card identifier.
+
+
An ALSA identifier has the syntax:
+
+
hw:CARD [,DEV [,SUBDEV ]]
+
+
+
where the DEV and SUBDEV components are optional.
+
+
The three arguments (in order: CARD ,DEV ,SUBDEV )
+specify card number or identifier, device number and subdevice number
+(-1 means any).
+
+
To see the list of cards currently recognized by your system check the
+files /proc/asound/cards and /proc/asound/devices .
+
+
For example to capture with ffmpeg from an ALSA device with
+card id 0, you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f alsa -i hw:0 alsaout.wav
+
+
+
For more information see:
+http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/alsa-lib/pcm.html
+
+
+
20.2 avfoundation# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation input device.
+
+
AVFoundation is the currently recommended framework by Apple for streamgrabbing on OSX >= 10.7 as well as on iOS.
+The older QTKit framework has been marked deprecated since OSX version 10.7.
+
+
The input filename has to be given in the following syntax:
+
+
-i "[[VIDEO]:[AUDIO]]"
+
+
The first entry selects the video input while the latter selects the audio input.
+The stream has to be specified by the device name or the device index as shown by the device list.
+Alternatively, the video and/or audio input device can be chosen by index using the
+
+ -video_device_index <INDEX>
+
+and/or
+
+ -audio_device_index <INDEX>
+
+, overriding any
+device name or index given in the input filename.
+
+
All available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices true , listing
+all device names and corresponding indices.
+
+
There are two device name aliases:
+
+defaultSelect the AVFoundation default device of the corresponding type.
+
+noneDo not record the corresponding media type.
+This is equivalent to specifying an empty device name or index.
+
+
+
+
+
20.2.1 Options# TOC
+
+
AVFoundation supports the following options:
+
+
+-list_devices <TRUE|FALSE> If set to true, a list of all available input devices is given showing all
+device names and indices.
+
+-video_device_index <INDEX> Specify the video device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-audio_device_index <INDEX> Specify the audio device by its index. Overrides anything given in the input filename.
+
+-pixel_format <FORMAT> Request the video device to use a specific pixel format.
+If the specified format is not supported, a list of available formats is given
+und the first one in this list is used instead. Available pixel formats are:
+monob, rgb555be, rgb555le, rgb565be, rgb565le, rgb24, bgr24, 0rgb, bgr0, 0bgr, rgb0,
+ bgr48be, uyvy422, yuva444p, yuva444p16le, yuv444p, yuv422p16, yuv422p10, yuv444p10,
+ yuv420p, nv12, yuyv422, gray
+
+
+
+
+
20.2.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of AVFoundation supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -list_devices true -i ""
+ Record video from video device 0 and audio from audio device 0 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -i "0:0" out.avi
+ Record video from video device 2 and audio from audio device 1 into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -video_device_index 2 -i ":1" out.avi
+ Record video from the system default video device using the pixel format bgr0 and do not record any audio into out.avi:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f avfoundation -pixel_format bgr0 -i "default:none" out.avi
+
+
+
+
20.3 bktr# TOC
+
+
BSD video input device.
+
+
+
20.4 dshow# TOC
+
+
Windows DirectShow input device.
+
+
DirectShow support is enabled when FFmpeg is built with the mingw-w64 project.
+Currently only audio and video devices are supported.
+
+
Multiple devices may be opened as separate inputs, but they may also be
+opened on the same input, which should improve synchronism between them.
+
+
The input name should be in the format:
+
+
+
+
where TYPE can be either audio or video ,
+and NAME is the device’s name.
+
+
+
20.4.1 Options# TOC
+
+
If no options are specified, the device’s defaults are used.
+If the device does not support the requested options, it will
+fail to open.
+
+
+video_size Set the video size in the captured video.
+
+framerate Set the frame rate in the captured video.
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio.
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio.
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+
+list_options If set to true , print a list of selected device’s options
+and exit.
+
+video_device_number Set video device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+audio_device_number Set audio device number for devices with same name (starts at 0,
+defaults to 0).
+
+pixel_format Select pixel format to be used by DirectShow. This may only be set when
+the video codec is not set or set to rawvideo.
+
+audio_buffer_size Set audio device buffer size in milliseconds (which can directly
+impact latency, depending on the device).
+Defaults to using the audio device’s
+default buffer size (typically some multiple of 500ms).
+Setting this value too low can degrade performance.
+See also
+http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/dd377582(v=vs.85).aspx
+
+
+
+
+
20.4.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Print the list of DirectShow supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f dshow -i dummy
+ Open video device Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+ Open second video device with name Camera :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -video_device_number 1 -i video="Camera"
+ Open video device Camera and audio device Microphone :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f dshow -i video="Camera":audio="Microphone"
+ Print the list of supported options in selected device and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_options true -f dshow -i video="Camera"
+
+
+
+
20.5 dv1394# TOC
+
+
Linux DV 1394 input device.
+
+
+
20.6 fbdev# TOC
+
+
Linux framebuffer input device.
+
+
The Linux framebuffer is a graphic hardware-independent abstraction
+layer to show graphics on a computer monitor, typically on the
+console. It is accessed through a file device node, usually
+/dev/fb0 .
+
+
For more detailed information read the file
+Documentation/fb/framebuffer.txt included in the Linux source tree.
+
+
To record from the framebuffer device /dev/fb0 with
+ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -r 10 -i /dev/fb0 out.avi
+
+
+
You can take a single screenshot image with the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f fbdev -frames:v 1 -r 1 -i /dev/fb0 screenshot.jpeg
+
+
+
See also http://linux-fbdev.sourceforge.net/ , and fbset(1).
+
+
+
20.7 gdigrab# TOC
+
+
Win32 GDI-based screen capture device.
+
+
This device allows you to capture a region of the display on Windows.
+
+
There are two options for the input filename:
+
+
or
+
+
+
The first option will capture the entire desktop, or a fixed region of the
+desktop. The second option will instead capture the contents of a single
+window, regardless of its position on the screen.
+
+
For example, to grab the entire desktop using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab a 640x480 region at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -video_size vga -i desktop out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab the contents of the window named "Calculator"
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -framerate 6 -i title=Calculator out.mpg
+
+
+
+
20.7.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. Use the value 0 to
+not draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+Note that show_region is incompatible with grabbing the contents
+of a single window.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f gdigrab -show_region 1 -framerate 6 -video_size cif -offset_x 10 -offset_y 20 -i desktop out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. The default is to capture the full screen if desktop is selected, or the full window size if title=window_title is selected.
+
+offset_x When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the left edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned to the left of your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_x value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+offset_y When capturing a region with video_size , set the distance from the top edge of the screen or desktop.
+
+Note that the offset calculation is from the top left corner of the primary monitor on Windows. If you have a monitor positioned above your primary monitor, you will need to use a negative offset_y value to move the region to that monitor.
+
+
+
+
+
20.8 iec61883# TOC
+
+
FireWire DV/HDV input device using libiec61883.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need libiec61883, libraw1394 and
+libavc1394 installed on your system. Use the configure option
+--enable-libiec61883 to compile with the device enabled.
+
+
The iec61883 capture device supports capturing from a video device
+connected via IEEE1394 (FireWire), using libiec61883 and the new Linux
+FireWire stack (juju). This is the default DV/HDV input method in Linux
+Kernel 2.6.37 and later, since the old FireWire stack was removed.
+
+
Specify the FireWire port to be used as input file, or "auto"
+to choose the first port connected.
+
+
+
20.8.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+dvtype Override autodetection of DV/HDV. This should only be used if auto
+detection does not work, or if usage of a different device type
+should be prohibited. Treating a DV device as HDV (or vice versa) will
+not work and result in undefined behavior.
+The values auto , dv and hdv are supported.
+
+dvbuffer Set maximum size of buffer for incoming data, in frames. For DV, this
+is an exact value. For HDV, it is not frame exact, since HDV does
+not have a fixed frame size.
+
+dvguid Select the capture device by specifying it’s GUID. Capturing will only
+be performed from the specified device and fails if no device with the
+given GUID is found. This is useful to select the input if multiple
+devices are connected at the same time.
+Look at /sys/bus/firewire/devices to find out the GUIDs.
+
+
+
+
+
20.8.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Grab and show the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device.
+
+
ffplay -f iec61883 -i auto
+ Grab and record the input of a FireWire DV/HDV device,
+using a packet buffer of 100000 packets if the source is HDV.
+
+
ffmpeg -f iec61883 -i auto -hdvbuffer 100000 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
20.9 jack# TOC
+
+
JACK input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libjack
+installed on your system.
+
+
A JACK input device creates one or more JACK writable clients, one for
+each audio channel, with name client_name :input_N , where
+client_name is the name provided by the application, and N
+is a number which identifies the channel.
+Each writable client will send the acquired data to the FFmpeg input
+device.
+
+
Once you have created one or more JACK readable clients, you need to
+connect them to one or more JACK writable clients.
+
+
To connect or disconnect JACK clients you can use the jack_connect
+and jack_disconnect programs, or do it through a graphical interface,
+for example with qjackctl.
+
+
To list the JACK clients and their properties you can invoke the command
+jack_lsp.
+
+
Follows an example which shows how to capture a JACK readable client
+with ffmpeg.
+
+
# Create a JACK writable client with name "ffmpeg".
+$ ffmpeg -f jack -i ffmpeg -y out.wav
+
+# Start the sample jack_metro readable client.
+$ jack_metro -b 120 -d 0.2 -f 4000
+
+# List the current JACK clients.
+$ jack_lsp -c
+system:capture_1
+system:capture_2
+system:playback_1
+system:playback_2
+ffmpeg:input_1
+metro:120_bpm
+
+# Connect metro to the ffmpeg writable client.
+$ jack_connect metro:120_bpm ffmpeg:input_1
+
+
+
For more information read:
+http://jackaudio.org/
+
+
+
20.10 lavfi# TOC
+
+
Libavfilter input virtual device.
+
+
This input device reads data from the open output pads of a libavfilter
+filtergraph.
+
+
For each filtergraph open output, the input device will create a
+corresponding stream which is mapped to the generated output. Currently
+only video data is supported. The filtergraph is specified through the
+option graph .
+
+
+
20.10.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+graph Specify the filtergraph to use as input. Each video open output must be
+labelled by a unique string of the form "outN ", where N is a
+number starting from 0 corresponding to the mapped input stream
+generated by the device.
+The first unlabelled output is automatically assigned to the "out0"
+label, but all the others need to be specified explicitly.
+
+The suffix "+subcc" can be appended to the output label to create an extra
+stream with the closed captions packets attached to that output
+(experimental; only for EIA-608 / CEA-708 for now).
+The subcc streams are created after all the normal streams, in the order of
+the corresponding stream.
+For example, if there is "out19+subcc", "out7+subcc" and up to "out42", the
+stream #43 is subcc for stream #7 and stream #44 is subcc for stream #19.
+
+If not specified defaults to the filename specified for the input
+device.
+
+graph_file Set the filename of the filtergraph to be read and sent to the other
+filters. Syntax of the filtergraph is the same as the one specified by
+the option graph .
+
+
+
+
+
20.10.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create a color video stream and play it back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "color=c=pink [out0]" dummy
+ As the previous example, but use filename for specifying the graph
+description, and omit the "out0" label:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi color=c=pink
+ Create three different video test filtered sources and play them:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -graph "testsrc [out0]; testsrc,hflip [out1]; testsrc,negate [out2]" test3
+ Read an audio stream from a file using the amovie source and play it
+back with ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "amovie=test.wav"
+ Read an audio stream and a video stream and play it back with
+ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi "movie=test.avi[out0];amovie=test.wav[out1]"
+ Dump decoded frames to images and closed captions to a file (experimental):
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i "movie=test.ts[out0+subcc]" -map v frame%08d.png -map s -c copy -f rawvideo subcc.bin
+
+
+
+
20.11 libcdio# TOC
+
+
Audio-CD input device based on cdio.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libcdio
+installed on your system. Requires the configure option
+--enable-libcdio.
+
+
This device allows playing and grabbing from an Audio-CD.
+
+
For example to copy with ffmpeg the entire Audio-CD in /dev/sr0,
+you may run the command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f libcdio -i /dev/sr0 cd.wav
+
+
+
+
20.12 libdc1394# TOC
+
+
IIDC1394 input device, based on libdc1394 and libraw1394.
+
+
Requires the configure option --enable-libdc1394.
+
+
+
20.13 openal# TOC
+
+
The OpenAL input device provides audio capture on all systems with a
+working OpenAL 1.1 implementation.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration, you need OpenAL
+headers and libraries installed on your system, and need to configure
+FFmpeg with --enable-openal.
+
+
OpenAL headers and libraries should be provided as part of your OpenAL
+implementation, or as an additional download (an SDK). Depending on your
+installation you may need to specify additional flags via the
+--extra-cflags and --extra-ldflags for allowing the build
+system to locate the OpenAL headers and libraries.
+
+
An incomplete list of OpenAL implementations follows:
+
+
+Creative The official Windows implementation, providing hardware acceleration
+with supported devices and software fallback.
+See http://openal.org/ .
+
OpenAL Soft Portable, open source (LGPL) software implementation. Includes
+backends for the most common sound APIs on the Windows, Linux,
+Solaris, and BSD operating systems.
+See http://kcat.strangesoft.net/openal.html .
+
Apple OpenAL is part of Core Audio, the official Mac OS X Audio interface.
+See http://developer.apple.com/technologies/mac/audio-and-video.html
+
+
+
This device allows one to capture from an audio input device handled
+through OpenAL.
+
+
You need to specify the name of the device to capture in the provided
+filename. If the empty string is provided, the device will
+automatically select the default device. You can get the list of the
+supported devices by using the option list_devices .
+
+
+
20.13.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+channels Set the number of channels in the captured audio. Only the values
+1 (monaural) and 2 (stereo) are currently supported.
+Defaults to 2 .
+
+sample_size Set the sample size (in bits) of the captured audio. Only the values
+8 and 16 are currently supported. Defaults to
+16 .
+
+sample_rate Set the sample rate (in Hz) of the captured audio.
+Defaults to 44.1k .
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
20.13.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Print the list of OpenAL supported devices and exit:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -list_devices true -f openal -i dummy out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the OpenAL device DR-BT101 via PulseAudio :
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from the default device (note the empty string ” as filename):
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i '' out.ogg
+
+
+
Capture from two devices simultaneously, writing to two different files,
+within the same ffmpeg command:
+
+
$ ffmpeg -f openal -i 'DR-BT101 via PulseAudio' out1.ogg -f openal -i 'ALSA Default' out2.ogg
+
+
Note: not all OpenAL implementations support multiple simultaneous capture -
+try the latest OpenAL Soft if the above does not work.
+
+
+
20.14 oss# TOC
+
+
Open Sound System input device.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the OSS input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/dsp .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/dsp using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f oss -i /dev/dsp /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
For more information about OSS see:
+http://manuals.opensound.com/usersguide/dsp.html
+
+
+
20.15 pulse# TOC
+
+
PulseAudio input device.
+
+
To enable this output device you need to configure FFmpeg with --enable-libpulse.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is a source device or the
+string "default"
+
+
To list the PulseAudio source devices and their properties you can invoke
+the command pactl list sources.
+
+
More information about PulseAudio can be found on http://www.pulseaudio.org .
+
+
+
20.15.1 Options# TOC
+
+server Connect to a specific PulseAudio server, specified by an IP address.
+Default server is used when not provided.
+
+name Specify the application name PulseAudio will use when showing active clients,
+by default it is the LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT string.
+
+stream_name Specify the stream name PulseAudio will use when showing active streams,
+by default it is "record".
+
+sample_rate Specify the samplerate in Hz, by default 48kHz is used.
+
+channels Specify the channels in use, by default 2 (stereo) is set.
+
+frame_size Specify the number of bytes per frame, by default it is set to 1024.
+
+fragment_size Specify the minimal buffering fragment in PulseAudio, it will affect the
+audio latency. By default it is unset.
+
+
+
+
20.15.2 Examples# TOC
+
Record a stream from default device:
+
+
ffmpeg -f pulse -i default /tmp/pulse.wav
+
+
+
+
20.16 qtkit# TOC
+
+
QTKit input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is parsed to contain either a device name or index.
+The device index can also be given by using -video_device_index.
+A given device index will override any given device name.
+If the desired device consists of numbers only, use -video_device_index to identify it.
+The default device will be chosen if an empty string or the device name "default" is given.
+The available devices can be enumerated by using -list_devices.
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "0" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -video_device_index 0 -i "" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -i "default" out.mpg
+
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f qtkit -list_devices true -i ""
+
+
+
+
20.17 sndio# TOC
+
+
sndio input device.
+
+
To enable this input device during configuration you need libsndio
+installed on your system.
+
+
The filename to provide to the input device is the device node
+representing the sndio input device, and is usually set to
+/dev/audio0 .
+
+
For example to grab from /dev/audio0 using ffmpeg use the
+command:
+
+
ffmpeg -f sndio -i /dev/audio0 /tmp/oss.wav
+
+
+
+
20.18 video4linux2, v4l2# TOC
+
+
Video4Linux2 input video device.
+
+
"v4l2" can be used as alias for "video4linux2".
+
+
If FFmpeg is built with v4l-utils support (by using the
+--enable-libv4l2 configure option), it is possible to use it with the
+-use_libv4l2 input device option.
+
+
The name of the device to grab is a file device node, usually Linux
+systems tend to automatically create such nodes when the device
+(e.g. an USB webcam) is plugged into the system, and has a name of the
+kind /dev/videoN , where N is a number associated to
+the device.
+
+
Video4Linux2 devices usually support a limited set of
+width xheight sizes and frame rates. You can check which are
+supported using -list_formats all for Video4Linux2 devices.
+Some devices, like TV cards, support one or more standards. It is possible
+to list all the supported standards using -list_standards all.
+
+
The time base for the timestamps is 1 microsecond. Depending on the kernel
+version and configuration, the timestamps may be derived from the real time
+clock (origin at the Unix Epoch) or the monotonic clock (origin usually at
+boot time, unaffected by NTP or manual changes to the clock). The
+-timestamps abs or -ts abs option can be used to force
+conversion into the real time clock.
+
+
Some usage examples of the video4linux2 device with ffmpeg
+and ffplay:
+
+ Grab and show the input of a video4linux2 device:
+
+
ffplay -f video4linux2 -framerate 30 -video_size hd720 /dev/video0
+ Grab and record the input of a video4linux2 device, leave the
+frame rate and size as previously set:
+
+
ffmpeg -f video4linux2 -input_format mjpeg -i /dev/video0 out.mpeg
+
+
+
For more information about Video4Linux, check http://linuxtv.org/ .
+
+
+
20.18.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+standard Set the standard. Must be the name of a supported standard. To get a
+list of the supported standards, use the list_standards
+option.
+
+channel Set the input channel number. Default to -1, which means using the
+previously selected channel.
+
+video_size Set the video frame size. The argument must be a string in the form
+WIDTH xHEIGHT or a valid size abbreviation.
+
+pixel_format Select the pixel format (only valid for raw video input).
+
+input_format Set the preferred pixel format (for raw video) or a codec name.
+This option allows one to select the input format, when several are
+available.
+
+framerate Set the preferred video frame rate.
+
+list_formats List available formats (supported pixel formats, codecs, and frame
+sizes) and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all available (compressed and non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘raw ’
+Show only raw video (non-compressed) formats.
+
+‘compressed ’
+Show only compressed formats.
+
+
+list_standards List supported standards and exit.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘all ’
+Show all supported standards.
+
+
+timestamps, ts Set type of timestamps for grabbed frames.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘default ’
+Use timestamps from the kernel.
+
+‘abs ’
+Use absolute timestamps (wall clock).
+
+‘mono2abs ’
+Force conversion from monotonic to absolute timestamps.
+
+
+Default value is default.
+
+
+
+
20.19 vfwcap# TOC
+
+
VfW (Video for Windows) capture input device.
+
+
The filename passed as input is the capture driver number, ranging from
+0 to 9. You may use "list" as filename to print a list of drivers. Any
+other filename will be interpreted as device number 0.
+
+
+
20.20 x11grab# TOC
+
+
X11 video input device.
+
+
Depends on X11, Xext, and Xfixes. Requires the configure option
+--enable-x11grab.
+
+
This device allows one to capture a region of an X11 display.
+
+
The filename passed as input has the syntax:
+
+
[hostname ]:display_number .screen_number [+x_offset ,y_offset ]
+
+
+
hostname :display_number .screen_number specifies the
+X11 display name of the screen to grab from. hostname can be
+omitted, and defaults to "localhost". The environment variable
+DISPLAY contains the default display name.
+
+
x_offset and y_offset specify the offsets of the grabbed
+area with respect to the top-left border of the X11 screen. They
+default to 0.
+
+
Check the X11 documentation (e.g. man X) for more detailed information.
+
+
Use the dpyinfo program for getting basic information about the
+properties of your X11 display (e.g. grep for "name" or "dimensions").
+
+
For example to grab from :0.0 using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+
+
+
Grab at position 10,20:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+
+
+
+
20.20.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+draw_mouse Specify whether to draw the mouse pointer. A value of 0 specify
+not to draw the pointer. Default value is 1.
+
+follow_mouse Make the grabbed area follow the mouse. The argument can be
+centered or a number of pixels PIXELS .
+
+When it is specified with "centered", the grabbing region follows the mouse
+pointer and keeps the pointer at the center of region; otherwise, the region
+follows only when the mouse pointer reaches within PIXELS (greater than
+zero) to the edge of region.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ To follow only when the mouse pointer reaches within 100 pixels to edge:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse 100 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ framerate Set the grabbing frame rate. Default value is ntsc,
+corresponding to a frame rate of 30000/1001.
+
+show_region Show grabbed region on screen.
+
+If show_region is specified with 1, then the grabbing
+region will be indicated on screen. With this option, it is easy to
+know what is being grabbed if only a portion of the screen is grabbed.
+
+For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0+10,20 out.mpg
+ With follow_mouse :
+
+
ffmpeg -f x11grab -follow_mouse centered -show_region 1 -framerate 25 -video_size cif -i :0.0 out.mpg
+ video_size Set the video frame size. Default value is vga.
+
+use_shm Use the MIT-SHM extension for shared memory. Default value is 1.
+It may be necessary to disable it for remote displays.
+
+
+
+
20.21 decklink# TOC
+
+
The decklink input device provides capture capabilities for Blackmagic
+DeckLink devices.
+
+
To enable this input device, you need the Blackmagic DeckLink SDK and you
+need to configure with the appropriate --extra-cflags
+and --extra-ldflags.
+On Windows, you need to run the IDL files through widl.
+
+
DeckLink is very picky about the formats it supports. Pixel format is always
+uyvy422, framerate and video size must be determined for your device with
+-list_formats 1. Audio sample rate is always 48 kHz and the number
+of channels currently is limited to 2 (stereo).
+
+
+
20.21.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+list_devices If set to true , print a list of devices and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+list_formats If set to true , print a list of supported formats and exit.
+Defaults to false .
+
+
+
+
+
20.21.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List input devices:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_devices 1 -i dummy
+ List supported formats:
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -list_formats 1 -i 'Intensity Pro'
+ Capture video clip at 1080i50 (format 11):
+
+
ffmpeg -f decklink -i 'Intensity Pro@11' -acodec copy -vcodec copy output.avi
+
+
+
+
+
21 Resampler Options# TOC
+
+
The audio resampler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools, option =value for the aresample filter,
+by setting the value explicitly in the
+SwrContext options or using the libavutil/opt.h API for
+programmatic use.
+
+
+ich, in_channel_count Set the number of input channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+in_channel_layout is set.
+
+och, out_channel_count Set the number of output channels. Default value is 0. Setting this
+value is not mandatory if the corresponding channel layout
+out_channel_layout is set.
+
+uch, used_channel_count Set the number of used input channels. Default value is 0. This option is
+only used for special remapping.
+
+isr, in_sample_rate Set the input sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+osr, out_sample_rate Set the output sample rate. Default value is 0.
+
+isf, in_sample_fmt Specify the input sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+osf, out_sample_fmt Specify the output sample format. It is set by default to none.
+
+tsf, internal_sample_fmt Set the internal sample format. Default value is none.
+This will automatically be chosen when it is not explicitly set.
+
+icl, in_channel_layout ocl, out_channel_layout Set the input/output channel layout.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+clev, center_mix_level Set the center mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must be
+in the interval [-32,32].
+
+slev, surround_mix_level Set the surround mix level. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+lfe_mix_level Set LFE mix into non LFE level. It is used when there is a LFE input but no
+LFE output. It is a value expressed in deciBel, and must
+be in the interval [-32,32].
+
+rmvol, rematrix_volume Set rematrix volume. Default value is 1.0.
+
+rematrix_maxval Set maximum output value for rematrixing.
+This can be used to prevent clipping vs. preventing volumn reduction
+A value of 1.0 prevents cliping.
+
+flags, swr_flags Set flags used by the converter. Default value is 0.
+
+It supports the following individual flags:
+
+res force resampling, this flag forces resampling to be used even when the
+input and output sample rates match.
+
+
+dither_scale Set the dither scale. Default value is 1.
+
+dither_method Set dither method. Default value is 0.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘rectangular ’
+select rectangular dither
+
‘triangular ’
+select triangular dither
+
‘triangular_hp ’
+select triangular dither with high pass
+
‘lipshitz ’
+select lipshitz noise shaping dither
+
‘shibata ’
+select shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘low_shibata ’
+select low shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘high_shibata ’
+select high shibata noise shaping dither
+
‘f_weighted ’
+select f-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘modified_e_weighted ’
+select modified-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
‘improved_e_weighted ’
+select improved-e-weighted noise shaping dither
+
+
+
+resampler Set resampling engine. Default value is swr.
+
+Supported values:
+
+‘swr ’
+select the native SW Resampler; filter options precision and cheby are not
+applicable in this case.
+
‘soxr ’
+select the SoX Resampler (where available); compensation, and filter options
+filter_size, phase_shift, filter_type & kaiser_beta, are not applicable in this
+case.
+
+
+filter_size For swr only, set resampling filter size, default value is 32.
+
+phase_shift For swr only, set resampling phase shift, default value is 10, and must be in
+the interval [0,30].
+
+linear_interp Use Linear Interpolation if set to 1, default value is 0.
+
+cutoff Set cutoff frequency (swr: 6dB point; soxr: 0dB point) ratio; must be a float
+value between 0 and 1. Default value is 0.97 with swr, and 0.91 with soxr
+(which, with a sample-rate of 44100, preserves the entire audio band to 20kHz).
+
+precision For soxr only, the precision in bits to which the resampled signal will be
+calculated. The default value of 20 (which, with suitable dithering, is
+appropriate for a destination bit-depth of 16) gives SoX’s ’High Quality’; a
+value of 28 gives SoX’s ’Very High Quality’.
+
+cheby For soxr only, selects passband rolloff none (Chebyshev) & higher-precision
+approximation for ’irrational’ ratios. Default value is 0.
+
+async For swr only, simple 1 parameter audio sync to timestamps using stretching,
+squeezing, filling and trimming. Setting this to 1 will enable filling and
+trimming, larger values represent the maximum amount in samples that the data
+may be stretched or squeezed for each second.
+Default value is 0, thus no compensation is applied to make the samples match
+the audio timestamps.
+
+first_pts For swr only, assume the first pts should be this value. The time unit is 1 / sample rate.
+This allows for padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no
+assumption is made about the first frame’s expected pts, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative pts due to encoder delay.
+
+min_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger stretching/squeezing/filling or trimming of the
+data to make it match the timestamps. The default is that
+stretching/squeezing/filling and trimming is disabled
+(min_comp = FLT_MAX).
+
+min_hard_comp For swr only, set the minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in
+seconds) to trigger adding/dropping samples to make it match the
+timestamps. This option effectively is a threshold to select between
+hard (trim/fill) and soft (squeeze/stretch) compensation. Note that
+all compensation is by default disabled through min_comp .
+The default is 0.1.
+
+comp_duration For swr only, set duration (in seconds) over which data is stretched/squeezed
+to make it match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value,
+default value is 1.0.
+
+max_soft_comp For swr only, set maximum factor by which data is stretched/squeezed to make it
+match the timestamps. Must be a non-negative double float value, default value
+is 0.
+
+matrix_encoding Select matrixed stereo encoding.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+select none
+
‘dolby ’
+select Dolby
+
‘dplii ’
+select Dolby Pro Logic II
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+filter_type For swr only, select resampling filter type. This only affects resampling
+operations.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘cubic ’
+select cubic
+
‘blackman_nuttall ’
+select Blackman Nuttall Windowed Sinc
+
‘kaiser ’
+select Kaiser Windowed Sinc
+
+
+kaiser_beta For swr only, set Kaiser Window Beta value. Must be an integer in the
+interval [2,16], default value is 9.
+
+output_sample_bits For swr only, set number of used output sample bits for dithering. Must be an integer in the
+interval [0,64], default value is 0, which means it’s not used.
+
+
+
+
+
22 Scaler Options# TOC
+
+
The video scaler supports the following named options.
+
+
Options may be set by specifying -option value in the
+FFmpeg tools. For programmatic use, they can be set explicitly in the
+SwsContext options or through the libavutil/opt.h API.
+
+
+
+
+sws_flags Set the scaler flags. This is also used to set the scaling
+algorithm. Only a single algorithm should be selected.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘fast_bilinear ’
+Select fast bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bilinear ’
+Select bilinear scaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicubic ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm.
+
+‘experimental ’
+Select experimental scaling algorithm.
+
+‘neighbor ’
+Select nearest neighbor rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘area ’
+Select averaging area rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘bicublin ’
+Select bicubic scaling algorithm for the luma component, bilinear for
+chroma components.
+
+‘gauss ’
+Select Gaussian rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘sinc ’
+Select sinc rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘lanczos ’
+Select lanczos rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘spline ’
+Select natural bicubic spline rescaling algorithm.
+
+‘print_info ’
+Enable printing/debug logging.
+
+‘accurate_rnd ’
+Enable accurate rounding.
+
+‘full_chroma_int ’
+Enable full chroma interpolation.
+
+‘full_chroma_inp ’
+Select full chroma input.
+
+‘bitexact ’
+Enable bitexact output.
+
+
+srcw Set source width.
+
+srch Set source height.
+
+dstw Set destination width.
+
+dsth Set destination height.
+
+src_format Set source pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+dst_format Set destination pixel format (must be expressed as an integer).
+
+src_range Select source range.
+
+dst_range Select destination range.
+
+param0, param1 Set scaling algorithm parameters. The specified values are specific of
+some scaling algorithms and ignored by others. The specified values
+are floating point number values.
+
+sws_dither Set the dithering algorithm. Accepts one of the following
+values. Default value is ‘auto ’.
+
+
+‘auto ’
+automatic choice
+
+‘none ’
+no dithering
+
+‘bayer ’
+bayer dither
+
+‘ed ’
+error diffusion dither
+
+‘a_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using addition
+
+‘x_dither ’
+arithmetic dither, based using xor (more random/less apparent patterning that
+a_dither).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
23 Filtering Introduction# TOC
+
+
Filtering in FFmpeg is enabled through the libavfilter library.
+
+
In libavfilter, a filter can have multiple inputs and multiple
+outputs.
+To illustrate the sorts of things that are possible, we consider the
+following filtergraph.
+
+
+
[main]
+input --> split ---------------------> overlay --> output
+ | ^
+ |[tmp] [flip]|
+ +-----> crop --> vflip -------+
+
+
+
This filtergraph splits the input stream in two streams, then sends one
+stream through the crop filter and the vflip filter, before merging it
+back with the other stream by overlaying it on top. You can use the
+following command to achieve this:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf "split [main][tmp]; [tmp] crop=iw:ih/2:0:0, vflip [flip]; [main][flip] overlay=0:H/2" OUTPUT
+
+
+
The result will be that the top half of the video is mirrored
+onto the bottom half of the output video.
+
+
Filters in the same linear chain are separated by commas, and distinct
+linear chains of filters are separated by semicolons. In our example,
+crop,vflip are in one linear chain, split and
+overlay are separately in another. The points where the linear
+chains join are labelled by names enclosed in square brackets. In the
+example, the split filter generates two outputs that are associated to
+the labels [main] and [tmp] .
+
+
The stream sent to the second output of split , labelled as
+[tmp] , is processed through the crop filter, which crops
+away the lower half part of the video, and then vertically flipped. The
+overlay filter takes in input the first unchanged output of the
+split filter (which was labelled as [main] ), and overlay on its
+lower half the output generated by the crop,vflip filterchain.
+
+
Some filters take in input a list of parameters: they are specified
+after the filter name and an equal sign, and are separated from each other
+by a colon.
+
+
There exist so-called source filters that do not have an
+audio/video input, and sink filters that will not have audio/video
+output.
+
+
+
+
24 graph2dot# TOC
+
+
The graph2dot program included in the FFmpeg tools
+directory can be used to parse a filtergraph description and issue a
+corresponding textual representation in the dot language.
+
+
Invoke the command:
+
+
+
to see how to use graph2dot .
+
+
You can then pass the dot description to the dot program (from
+the graphviz suite of programs) and obtain a graphical representation
+of the filtergraph.
+
+
For example the sequence of commands:
+
+
echo GRAPH_DESCRIPTION | \
+tools/graph2dot -o graph.tmp && \
+dot -Tpng graph.tmp -o graph.png && \
+display graph.png
+
+
+
can be used to create and display an image representing the graph
+described by the GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string. Note that this string must be
+a complete self-contained graph, with its inputs and outputs explicitly defined.
+For example if your command line is of the form:
+
+
ffmpeg -i infile -vf scale=640:360 outfile
+
+
your GRAPH_DESCRIPTION string will need to be of the form:
+
+
nullsrc,scale=640:360,nullsink
+
+
you may also need to set the nullsrc parameters and add a format
+filter in order to simulate a specific input file.
+
+
+
+
25 Filtergraph description# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph is a directed graph of connected filters. It can contain
+cycles, and there can be multiple links between a pair of
+filters. Each link has one input pad on one side connecting it to one
+filter from which it takes its input, and one output pad on the other
+side connecting it to one filter accepting its output.
+
+
Each filter in a filtergraph is an instance of a filter class
+registered in the application, which defines the features and the
+number of input and output pads of the filter.
+
+
A filter with no input pads is called a "source", and a filter with no
+output pads is called a "sink".
+
+
+
25.1 Filtergraph syntax# TOC
+
+
A filtergraph has a textual representation, which is
+recognized by the -filter /-vf and -filter_complex
+options in ffmpeg and -vf in ffplay, and by the
+avfilter_graph_parse()/avfilter_graph_parse2() functions defined in
+libavfilter/avfilter.h .
+
+
A filterchain consists of a sequence of connected filters, each one
+connected to the previous one in the sequence. A filterchain is
+represented by a list of ","-separated filter descriptions.
+
+
A filtergraph consists of a sequence of filterchains. A sequence of
+filterchains is represented by a list of ";"-separated filterchain
+descriptions.
+
+
A filter is represented by a string of the form:
+[in_link_1 ]...[in_link_N ]filter_name =arguments [out_link_1 ]...[out_link_M ]
+
+
filter_name is the name of the filter class of which the
+described filter is an instance of, and has to be the name of one of
+the filter classes registered in the program.
+The name of the filter class is optionally followed by a string
+"=arguments ".
+
+
arguments is a string which contains the parameters used to
+initialize the filter instance. It may have one of two forms:
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of key=value pairs.
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of value . In this case, the keys are assumed to be
+the option names in the order they are declared. E.g. the fade filter
+declares three options in this order – type , start_frame and
+nb_frames . Then the parameter list in:0:30 means that the value
+in is assigned to the option type , 0 to
+start_frame and 30 to nb_frames .
+
+ A ’:’-separated list of mixed direct value and long key=value
+pairs. The direct value must precede the key=value pairs, and
+follow the same constraints order of the previous point. The following
+key=value pairs can be set in any preferred order.
+
+
+
+
If the option value itself is a list of items (e.g. the format filter
+takes a list of pixel formats), the items in the list are usually separated by
+’|’.
+
+
The list of arguments can be quoted using the character "’" as initial
+and ending mark, and the character ’\’ for escaping the characters
+within the quoted text; otherwise the argument string is considered
+terminated when the next special character (belonging to the set
+"[]=;,") is encountered.
+
+
The name and arguments of the filter are optionally preceded and
+followed by a list of link labels.
+A link label allows one to name a link and associate it to a filter output
+or input pad. The preceding labels in_link_1
+... in_link_N , are associated to the filter input pads,
+the following labels out_link_1 ... out_link_M , are
+associated to the output pads.
+
+
When two link labels with the same name are found in the
+filtergraph, a link between the corresponding input and output pad is
+created.
+
+
If an output pad is not labelled, it is linked by default to the first
+unlabelled input pad of the next filter in the filterchain.
+For example in the filterchain
+
+
nullsrc, split[L1], [L2]overlay, nullsink
+
+
the split filter instance has two output pads, and the overlay filter
+instance two input pads. The first output pad of split is labelled
+"L1", the first input pad of overlay is labelled "L2", and the second
+output pad of split is linked to the second input pad of overlay,
+which are both unlabelled.
+
+
In a complete filterchain all the unlabelled filter input and output
+pads must be connected. A filtergraph is considered valid if all the
+filter input and output pads of all the filterchains are connected.
+
+
Libavfilter will automatically insert scale filters where format
+conversion is required. It is possible to specify swscale flags
+for those automatically inserted scalers by prepending
+sws_flags=flags ;
+to the filtergraph description.
+
+
Here is a BNF description of the filtergraph syntax:
+
+
NAME ::= sequence of alphanumeric characters and '_'
+LINKLABEL ::= "[" NAME "]"
+LINKLABELS ::= LINKLABEL [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTER_ARGUMENTS ::= sequence of chars (possibly quoted)
+FILTER ::= [LINKLABELS ] NAME ["=" FILTER_ARGUMENTS ] [LINKLABELS ]
+FILTERCHAIN ::= FILTER [,FILTERCHAIN ]
+FILTERGRAPH ::= [sws_flags=flags ;] FILTERCHAIN [;FILTERGRAPH ]
+
+
+
+
25.2 Notes on filtergraph escaping# TOC
+
+
Filtergraph description composition entails several levels of
+escaping. See (ffmpeg-utils)the "Quoting and escaping"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual for more
+information about the employed escaping procedure.
+
+
A first level escaping affects the content of each filter option
+value, which may contain the special character : used to
+separate values, or one of the escaping characters \'.
+
+
A second level escaping affects the whole filter description, which
+may contain the escaping characters \' or the special
+characters [],; used by the filtergraph description.
+
+
Finally, when you specify a filtergraph on a shell commandline, you
+need to perform a third level escaping for the shell special
+characters contained within it.
+
+
For example, consider the following string to be embedded in
+the drawtext filter description text value:
+
+
this is a 'string': may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
This string contains the ' special escaping character, and the
+: special character, so it needs to be escaped in this way:
+
+
text=this is a \'string\'\: may contain one, or more, special characters
+
+
+
A second level of escaping is required when embedding the filter
+description in a filtergraph description, in order to escape all the
+filtergraph special characters. Thus the example above becomes:
+
+
drawtext=text=this is a \\\'string\\\'\\: may contain one\, or more\, special characters
+
+
(note that in addition to the \' escaping special characters,
+also , needs to be escaped).
+
+
Finally an additional level of escaping is needed when writing the
+filtergraph description in a shell command, which depends on the
+escaping rules of the adopted shell. For example, assuming that
+\ is special and needs to be escaped with another \, the
+previous string will finally result in:
+
+
-vf "drawtext=text=this is a \\\\\\'string\\\\\\'\\\\: may contain one\\, or more\\, special characters"
+
+
+
+
26 Timeline editing# TOC
+
+
Some filters support a generic enable option. For the filters
+supporting timeline editing, this option can be set to an expression which is
+evaluated before sending a frame to the filter. If the evaluation is non-zero,
+the filter will be enabled, otherwise the frame will be sent unchanged to the
+next filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The expression accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+‘n ’
+sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0
+
+‘pos ’
+the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+‘w ’
+‘h ’
+width and height of the input frame if video
+
+
+
Additionally, these filters support an enable command that can be used
+to re-define the expression.
+
+
Like any other filtering option, the enable option follows the same
+rules.
+
+
For example, to enable a blur filter (smartblur ) from 10 seconds to 3
+minutes, and a curves filter starting at 3 seconds:
+
+
smartblur = enable='between(t,10,3*60)',
+curves = enable='gte(t,3)' : preset=cross_process
+
+
+
+
+
27 Audio Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the audio filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio filters.
+
+
+
27.1 adelay# TOC
+
+
Delay one or more audio channels.
+
+
Samples in delayed channel are filled with silence.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+delays Set list of delays in milliseconds for each channel separated by ’|’.
+At least one delay greater than 0 should be provided.
+Unused delays will be silently ignored. If number of given delays is
+smaller than number of channels all remaining channels will not be delayed.
+
+
+
+
27.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Delay first channel by 1.5 seconds, the third channel by 0.5 seconds and leave
+the second channel (and any other channels that may be present) unchanged.
+
+
+
+
+
27.2 aecho# TOC
+
+
Apply echoing to the input audio.
+
+
Echoes are reflected sound and can occur naturally amongst mountains
+(and sometimes large buildings) when talking or shouting; digital echo
+effects emulate this behaviour and are often used to help fill out the
+sound of a single instrument or vocal. The time difference between the
+original signal and the reflection is the delay, and the
+loudness of the reflected signal is the decay.
+Multiple echoes can have different delays and decays.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.6.
+
+out_gain Set output gain of reflected signal. Default is 0.3.
+
+delays Set list of time intervals in milliseconds between original signal and reflections
+separated by ’|’. Allowed range for each delay is (0 - 90000.0].
+Default is 1000.
+
+decays Set list of loudnesses of reflected signals separated by ’|’.
+Allowed range for each decay is (0 - 1.0].
+Default is 0.5.
+
+
+
+
27.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make it sound as if there are twice as many instruments as are actually playing:
+
+
+ If delay is very short, then it sound like a (metallic) robot playing music:
+
+
+ A longer delay will sound like an open air concert in the mountains:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000:0.3
+ Same as above but with one more mountain:
+
+
aecho=0.8:0.9:1000|1800:0.3|0.25
+
+
+
+
27.3 aeval# TOC
+
+
Modify an audio signal according to the specified expressions.
+
+
This filter accepts one or more expressions (one for each channel),
+which are evaluated and used to modify a corresponding audio signal.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. If
+the number of input channels is greater than the number of
+expressions, the last specified expression is used for the remaining
+output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set output channel layout. If not specified, the channel layout is
+specified by the number of expressions. If set to ‘same ’, it will
+use by default the same input channel layout.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+ch channel number of the current expression
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds
+
+nb_in_channels nb_out_channels input and output number of channels
+
+val(CH) the value of input channel with number CH
+
+
+
Note: this filter is slow. For faster processing you should use a
+dedicated filter.
+
+
+
27.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Half volume:
+
+
aeval=val(ch)/2:c=same
+ Invert phase of the second channel:
+
+
+
+
+
27.4 afade# TOC
+
+
Apply fade-in/out effect to input audio.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+type, t Specify the effect type, can be either in for fade-in, or
+out for a fade-out effect. Default is in.
+
+start_sample, ss Specify the number of the start sample for starting to apply the fade
+effect. Default is 0.
+
+nb_samples, ns Specify the number of samples for which the fade effect has to last. At
+the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence. Default is 44100.
+
+start_time, st Specify the start time of the fade effect. Default is 0.
+The value must be specified as a time duration; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+If set this option is used instead of start_sample .
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the fade effect. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+At the end of the fade-in effect the output audio will have the same
+volume as the input audio, at the end of the fade-out transition
+the output audio will be silence.
+By default the duration is determined by nb_samples .
+If set this option is used instead of nb_samples .
+
+curve Set curve for fade transition.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+tri select triangular, linear slope (default)
+
qsin select quarter of sine wave
+
hsin select half of sine wave
+
esin select exponential sine wave
+
log select logarithmic
+
par select inverted parabola
+
qua select quadratic
+
cub select cubic
+
squ select square root
+
cbr select cubic root
+
+
+
+
+
27.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Fade in first 15 seconds of audio:
+
+
+ Fade out last 25 seconds of a 900 seconds audio:
+
+
afade=t=out:st=875:d=25
+
+
+
+
27.5 aformat# TOC
+
+
Set output format constraints for the input audio. The framework will
+negotiate the most appropriate format to minimize conversions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+sample_fmts A ’|’-separated list of requested sample formats.
+
+sample_rates A ’|’-separated list of requested sample rates.
+
+channel_layouts A ’|’-separated list of requested channel layouts.
+
+See (ffmpeg-utils)the Channel Layout section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the required syntax.
+
+
+
If a parameter is omitted, all values are allowed.
+
+
Force the output to either unsigned 8-bit or signed 16-bit stereo
+
+
aformat=sample_fmts=u8|s16:channel_layouts=stereo
+
+
+
+
27.6 allpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole all-pass filter with central frequency (in Hz)
+frequency , and filter-width width .
+An all-pass filter changes the audio’s frequency to phase relationship
+without changing its frequency to amplitude relationship.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
27.7 amerge# TOC
+
+
Merge two or more audio streams into a single multi-channel stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+inputs Set the number of inputs. Default is 2.
+
+
+
+
If the channel layouts of the inputs are disjoint, and therefore compatible,
+the channel layout of the output will be set accordingly and the channels
+will be reordered as necessary. If the channel layouts of the inputs are not
+disjoint, the output will have all the channels of the first input then all
+the channels of the second input, in that order, and the channel layout of
+the output will be the default value corresponding to the total number of
+channels.
+
+
For example, if the first input is in 2.1 (FL+FR+LF) and the second input
+is FC+BL+BR, then the output will be in 5.1, with the channels in the
+following order: a1, a2, b1, a3, b2, b3 (a1 is the first channel of the
+first input, b1 is the first channel of the second input).
+
+
On the other hand, if both input are in stereo, the output channels will be
+in the default order: a1, a2, b1, b2, and the channel layout will be
+arbitrarily set to 4.0, which may or may not be the expected value.
+
+
All inputs must have the same sample rate, and format.
+
+
If inputs do not have the same duration, the output will stop with the
+shortest.
+
+
+
27.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge two mono files into a stereo stream:
+
+
amovie=left.wav [l] ; amovie=right.mp3 [r] ; [l] [r] amerge
+ Multiple merges assuming 1 video stream and 6 audio streams in input.mkv :
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mkv -filter_complex "[0:1][0:2][0:3][0:4][0:5][0:6] amerge=inputs=6" -c:a pcm_s16le output.mkv
+
+
+
+
27.8 amix# TOC
+
+
Mixes multiple audio inputs into a single output.
+
+
Note that this filter only supports float samples (the amerge
+and pan audio filters support many formats). If the amix
+input has integer samples then aresample will be automatically
+inserted to perform the conversion to float samples.
+
+
For example
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex amix=inputs=3:duration=first:dropout_transition=3 OUTPUT
+
+
will mix 3 input audio streams to a single output with the same duration as the
+first input and a dropout transition time of 3 seconds.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of inputs. If unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+duration How to determine the end-of-stream.
+
+longest The duration of the longest input. (default)
+
+shortest The duration of the shortest input.
+
+first The duration of the first input.
+
+
+
+dropout_transition The transition time, in seconds, for volume renormalization when an input
+stream ends. The default value is 2 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
27.9 anull# TOC
+
+
Pass the audio source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
27.10 apad# TOC
+
+
Pad the end of an audio stream with silence.
+
+
This can be used together with ffmpeg -shortest to
+extend audio streams to the same length as the video stream.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+packet_size Set silence packet size. Default value is 4096.
+
+pad_len Set the number of samples of silence to add to the end. After the
+value is reached, the stream is terminated. This option is mutually
+exclusive with whole_len .
+
+whole_len Set the minimum total number of samples in the output audio stream. If
+the value is longer than the input audio length, silence is added to
+the end, until the value is reached. This option is mutually exclusive
+with pad_len .
+
+
+
If neither the pad_len nor the whole_len option is
+set, the filter will add silence to the end of the input stream
+indefinitely.
+
+
+
27.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add 1024 samples of silence to the end of the input:
+
+
+ Make sure the audio output will contain at least 10000 samples, pad
+the input with silence if required:
+
+
+ Use ffmpeg to pad the audio input with silence, so that the
+video stream will always result the shortest and will be converted
+until the end in the output file when using the shortest
+option:
+
+
ffmpeg -i VIDEO -i AUDIO -filter_complex "[1:0]apad" -shortest OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
27.11 aphaser# TOC
+
Add a phasing effect to the input audio.
+
+
A phaser filter creates series of peaks and troughs in the frequency spectrum.
+The position of the peaks and troughs are modulated so that they vary over time, creating a sweeping effect.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+in_gain Set input gain. Default is 0.4.
+
+out_gain Set output gain. Default is 0.74
+
+delay Set delay in milliseconds. Default is 3.0.
+
+decay Set decay. Default is 0.4.
+
+speed Set modulation speed in Hz. Default is 0.5.
+
+type Set modulation type. Default is triangular.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘triangular, t ’
+‘sinusoidal, s ’
+
+
+
+
+
27.12 aresample# TOC
+
+
Resample the input audio to the specified parameters, using the
+libswresample library. If none are specified then the filter will
+automatically convert between its input and output.
+
+
This filter is also able to stretch/squeeze the audio data to make it match
+the timestamps or to inject silence / cut out audio to make it match the
+timestamps, do a combination of both or do neither.
+
+
The filter accepts the syntax
+[sample_rate :]resampler_options , where sample_rate
+expresses a sample rate and resampler_options is a list of
+key =value pairs, separated by ":". See the
+ffmpeg-resampler manual for the complete list of supported options.
+
+
+
27.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Resample the input audio to 44100Hz:
+
+
+ Stretch/squeeze samples to the given timestamps, with a maximum of 1000
+samples per second compensation:
+
+
+
+
+
27.13 asetnsamples# TOC
+
+
Set the number of samples per each output audio frame.
+
+
The last output packet may contain a different number of samples, as
+the filter will flush all the remaining samples when the input audio
+signal its end.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+nb_out_samples, n Set the number of frames per each output audio frame. The number is
+intended as the number of samples per each channel .
+Default value is 1024.
+
+pad, p If set to 1, the filter will pad the last audio frame with zeroes, so
+that the last frame will contain the same number of samples as the
+previous ones. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
For example, to set the number of per-frame samples to 1234 and
+disable padding for the last frame, use:
+
+
asetnsamples=n=1234:p=0
+
+
+
+
27.14 asetrate# TOC
+
+
Set the sample rate without altering the PCM data.
+This will result in a change of speed and pitch.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sample_rate, r Set the output sample rate. Default is 44100 Hz.
+
+
+
+
27.15 ashowinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input audio frame.
+The input audio is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The presentation timestamp of the input frame, in time base units; the time base
+depends on the filter input pad, and is usually 1/sample_rate .
+
+pts_time The presentation timestamp of the input frame in seconds.
+
+pos position of the frame in the input stream, -1 if this information in
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic audio)
+
+fmt The sample format.
+
+chlayout The channel layout.
+
+rate The sample rate for the audio frame.
+
+nb_samples The number of samples (per channel) in the frame.
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of the audio data. For planar
+audio, the data is treated as if all the planes were concatenated.
+
+plane_checksums A list of Adler-32 checksums for each data plane.
+
+
+
+
27.16 astats# TOC
+
+
Display time domain statistical information about the audio channels.
+Statistics are calculated and displayed for each audio channel and,
+where applicable, an overall figure is also given.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+length Short window length in seconds, used for peak and trough RMS measurement.
+Default is 0.05 (50 milliseconds). Allowed range is [0.1 - 10].
+
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+DC offset Mean amplitude displacement from zero.
+
+Min level Minimal sample level.
+
+Max level Maximal sample level.
+
+Peak level dB RMS level dB Standard peak and RMS level measured in dBFS.
+
+RMS peak dB RMS trough dB Peak and trough values for RMS level measured over a short window.
+
+Crest factor Standard ratio of peak to RMS level (note: not in dB).
+
+Flat factor Flatness (i.e. consecutive samples with the same value) of the signal at its peak levels
+(i.e. either Min level or Max level ).
+
+Peak count Number of occasions (not the number of samples) that the signal attained either
+Min level or Max level .
+
+
+
+
27.17 astreamsync# TOC
+
+
Forward two audio streams and control the order the buffers are forwarded.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set the expression deciding which stream should be
+forwarded next: if the result is negative, the first stream is forwarded; if
+the result is positive or zero, the second stream is forwarded. It can use
+the following variables:
+
+
+b1 b2 number of buffers forwarded so far on each stream
+
s1 s2 number of samples forwarded so far on each stream
+
t1 t2 current timestamp of each stream
+
+
+The default value is t1-t2, which means to always forward the stream
+that has a smaller timestamp.
+
+
+
+
27.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Stress-test amerge by randomly sending buffers on the wrong
+input, while avoiding too much of a desynchronization:
+
+
amovie=file.ogg [a] ; amovie=file.mp3 [b] ;
+[a] [b] astreamsync=(2*random(1))-1+tanh(5*(t1-t2)) [a2] [b2] ;
+[a2] [b2] amerge
+
+
+
+
27.18 asyncts# TOC
+
+
Synchronize audio data with timestamps by squeezing/stretching it and/or
+dropping samples/adding silence when needed.
+
+
This filter is not built by default, please use aresample to do squeezing/stretching.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+compensate Enable stretching/squeezing the data to make it match the timestamps. Disabled
+by default. When disabled, time gaps are covered with silence.
+
+min_delta The minimum difference between timestamps and audio data (in seconds) to trigger
+adding/dropping samples. The default value is 0.1. If you get an imperfect
+sync with this filter, try setting this parameter to 0.
+
+max_comp The maximum compensation in samples per second. Only relevant with compensate=1.
+The default value is 500.
+
+first_pts Assume that the first PTS should be this value. The time base is 1 / sample
+rate. This allows for padding/trimming at the start of the stream. By default,
+no assumption is made about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or
+trimming is done. For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with
+silence if an audio stream starts after the video stream or to trim any samples
+with a negative PTS due to encoder delay.
+
+
+
+
+
27.19 atempo# TOC
+
+
Adjust audio tempo.
+
+
The filter accepts exactly one parameter, the audio tempo. If not
+specified then the filter will assume nominal 1.0 tempo. Tempo must
+be in the [0.5, 2.0] range.
+
+
+
27.19.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Slow down audio to 80% tempo:
+
+
+ To speed up audio to 125% tempo:
+
+
+
+
+
27.20 atrim# TOC
+
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Timestamp (in seconds) of the start of the section to keep. I.e. the audio
+sample with the timestamp start will be the first sample in the output.
+
+end Specify time of the first audio sample that will be dropped, i.e. the
+audio sample immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be
+the last sample in the output.
+
+start_pts Same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp in samples
+instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts Same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp in samples instead
+of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_sample The number of the first sample that should be output.
+
+end_sample The number of the first sample that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual .
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _sample options simply count the
+samples that pass through the filter. So start/end_pts and start/end_sample will
+give different results when the timestamps are wrong, inexact or do not start at
+zero. Also note that this filter does not modify the timestamps. If you wish
+to have the output timestamps start at zero, insert the asetpts filter after the
+atrim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all samples that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple atrim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=60:120
+ Keep only the first 1000 samples:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -af atrim=end_sample=1000
+
+
+
+
27.21 bandpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-pass filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width.
+The csg option selects a constant skirt gain (peak gain = Q)
+instead of the default: constant 0dB peak gain.
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+csg Constant skirt gain if set to 1. Defaults to 0.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
27.22 bandreject# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole Butterworth band-reject filter with central
+frequency frequency , and (3dB-point) band-width width .
+The filter roll off at 6dB per octave (20dB per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency. Default is 3000.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+
+
+
27.23 bass# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut the bass (lower) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at 0 Hz. Its useful range is about -20
+(for a large cut) to +20 (for a large boost).
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 100 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
27.24 biquad# TOC
+
+
Apply a biquad IIR filter with the given coefficients.
+Where b0 , b1 , b2 and a0 , a1 , a2
+are the numerator and denominator coefficients respectively.
+
+
+
27.25 bs2b# TOC
+
Bauer stereo to binaural transformation, which improves headphone listening of
+stereo audio records.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+profile Pre-defined crossfeed level.
+
+default Default level (fcut=700, feed=50).
+
+cmoy Chu Moy circuit (fcut=700, feed=60).
+
+jmeier Jan Meier circuit (fcut=650, feed=95).
+
+
+
+fcut Cut frequency (in Hz).
+
+feed Feed level (in Hz).
+
+
+
+
+
27.26 channelmap# TOC
+
+
Remap input channels to new locations.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the output stream.
+
+map Map channels from input to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the in_channel -out_channel in_channel form. in_channel can be either the name of the input
+channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its index in the input channel layout.
+out_channel is the name of the output channel or its index in the output
+channel layout. If out_channel is not given then it is implicitly an
+index, starting with zero and increasing by one for each mapping.
+
+
+
If no mapping is present, the filter will implicitly map input channels to
+output channels, preserving indices.
+
+
For example, assuming a 5.1+downmix input MOV file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mov -filter 'channelmap=map=DL-FL|DR-FR' out.wav
+
+
will create an output WAV file tagged as stereo from the downmix channels of
+the input.
+
+
To fix a 5.1 WAV improperly encoded in AAC’s native channel order
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter 'channelmap=1|2|0|5|3|4:channel_layout=5.1' out.wav
+
+
+
+
27.27 channelsplit# TOC
+
+
Split each channel from an input audio stream into a separate output stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the input stream. The default is "stereo".
+
+
+
For example, assuming a stereo input MP3 file,
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.mp3 -filter_complex channelsplit out.mkv
+
+
will create an output Matroska file with two audio streams, one containing only
+the left channel and the other the right channel.
+
+
Split a 5.1 WAV file into per-channel files:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.wav -filter_complex
+'channelsplit=channel_layout=5.1[FL][FR][FC][LFE][SL][SR]'
+-map '[FL]' front_left.wav -map '[FR]' front_right.wav -map '[FC]'
+front_center.wav -map '[LFE]' lfe.wav -map '[SL]' side_left.wav -map '[SR]'
+side_right.wav
+
+
+
+
27.28 compand# TOC
+
Compress or expand the audio’s dynamic range.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+attacks decays A list of times in seconds for each channel over which the instantaneous level
+of the input signal is averaged to determine its volume. attacks refers to
+increase of volume and decays refers to decrease of volume. For most
+situations, the attack time (response to the audio getting louder) should be
+shorter than the decay time, because the human ear is more sensitive to sudden
+loud audio than sudden soft audio. A typical value for attack is 0.3 seconds and
+a typical value for decay is 0.8 seconds.
+
+points A list of points for the transfer function, specified in dB relative to the
+maximum possible signal amplitude. Each key points list must be defined using
+the following syntax: x0/y0|x1/y1|x2/y2|.... or
+x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+The input values must be in strictly increasing order but the transfer function
+does not have to be monotonically rising. The point 0/0 is assumed but
+may be overridden (by 0/out-dBn). Typical values for the transfer
+function are -70/-70|-60/-20.
+
+soft-knee Set the curve radius in dB for all joints. It defaults to 0.01.
+
+gain Set the additional gain in dB to be applied at all points on the transfer
+function. This allows for easy adjustment of the overall gain.
+It defaults to 0.
+
+volume Set an initial volume, in dB, to be assumed for each channel when filtering
+starts. This permits the user to supply a nominal level initially, so that, for
+example, a very large gain is not applied to initial signal levels before the
+companding has begun to operate. A typical value for audio which is initially
+quiet is -90 dB. It defaults to 0.
+
+delay Set a delay, in seconds. The input audio is analyzed immediately, but audio is
+delayed before being fed to the volume adjuster. Specifying a delay
+approximately equal to the attack/decay times allows the filter to effectively
+operate in predictive rather than reactive mode. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
+
+
27.28.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make music with both quiet and loud passages suitable for listening to in a
+noisy environment:
+
+
compand=.3|.3:1|1:-90/-60|-60/-40|-40/-30|-20/-20:6:0:-90:0.2
+ A noise gate for when the noise is at a lower level than the signal:
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.2|.2:-900/-900|-50.1/-900|-50/-50:.01:0:-90:.1
+ Here is another noise gate, this time for when the noise is at a higher level
+than the signal (making it, in some ways, similar to squelch):
+
+
compand=.1|.1:.1|.1:-45.1/-45.1|-45/-900|0/-900:.01:45:-90:.1
+
+
+
+
27.29 earwax# TOC
+
+
Make audio easier to listen to on headphones.
+
+
This filter adds ‘cues’ to 44.1kHz stereo (i.e. audio CD format) audio
+so that when listened to on headphones the stereo image is moved from
+inside your head (standard for headphones) to outside and in front of
+the listener (standard for speakers).
+
+
Ported from SoX.
+
+
+
27.30 equalizer# TOC
+
+
Apply a two-pole peaking equalisation (EQ) filter. With this
+filter, the signal-level at and around a selected frequency can
+be increased or decreased, whilst (unlike bandpass and bandreject
+filters) that at all other frequencies is unchanged.
+
+
In order to produce complex equalisation curves, this filter can
+be given several times, each with a different central frequency.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency in Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+
+gain, g Set the required gain or attenuation in dB.
+Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+
+
+
27.30.1 Examples# TOC
+
+ Attenuate 10 dB at 1000 Hz, with a bandwidth of 200 Hz:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=h:width=200:g=-10
+ Apply 2 dB gain at 1000 Hz with Q 1 and attenuate 5 dB at 100 Hz with Q 2:
+
+
equalizer=f=1000:width_type=q:width=1:g=2,equalizer=f=100:width_type=q:width=2:g=-5
+
+
+
+
27.31 flanger# TOC
+
Apply a flanging effect to the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+delay Set base delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 30. Default value is 0.
+
+depth Set added swep delay in milliseconds. Range from 0 to 10. Default value is 2.
+
+regen Set percentage regeneration (delayed signal feedback). Range from -95 to 95.
+Default value is 0.
+
+width Set percentage of delayed signal mixed with original. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 71.
+
+speed Set sweeps per second (Hz). Range from 0.1 to 10. Default value is 0.5.
+
+shape Set swept wave shape, can be triangular or sinusoidal .
+Default value is sinusoidal .
+
+phase Set swept wave percentage-shift for multi channel. Range from 0 to 100.
+Default value is 25.
+
+interp Set delay-line interpolation, linear or quadratic .
+Default is linear .
+
+
+
+
27.32 highpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole, or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 3000.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
27.33 join# TOC
+
+
Join multiple input streams into one multi-channel stream.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+inputs The number of input streams. It defaults to 2.
+
+channel_layout The desired output channel layout. It defaults to stereo.
+
+map Map channels from inputs to output. The argument is a ’|’-separated list of
+mappings, each in the input_idx .in_channel -out_channel input_idx is the 0-based index of the input stream. in_channel
+can be either the name of the input channel (e.g. FL for front left) or its
+index in the specified input stream. out_channel is the name of the output
+channel.
+
+
+
The filter will attempt to guess the mappings when they are not specified
+explicitly. It does so by first trying to find an unused matching input channel
+and if that fails it picks the first unused input channel.
+
+
Join 3 inputs (with properly set channel layouts):
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT1 -i INPUT2 -i INPUT3 -filter_complex join=inputs=3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
Build a 5.1 output from 6 single-channel streams:
+
+
ffmpeg -i fl -i fr -i fc -i sl -i sr -i lfe -filter_complex
+'join=inputs=6:channel_layout=5.1:map=0.0-FL|1.0-FR|2.0-FC|3.0-SL|4.0-SR|5.0-LFE'
+out
+
+
+
+
27.34 ladspa# TOC
+
+
Load a LADSPA (Linux Audio Developer’s Simple Plugin API) plugin.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-ladspa.
+
+
+file, f Specifies the name of LADSPA plugin library to load. If the environment
+variable LADSPA_PATH is defined, the LADSPA plugin is searched in
+each one of the directories specified by the colon separated list in
+LADSPA_PATH, otherwise in the standard LADSPA paths, which are in
+this order: HOME/.ladspa/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/ladspa/ ,
+/usr/lib/ladspa/ .
+
+plugin, p Specifies the plugin within the library. Some libraries contain only
+one plugin, but others contain many of them. If this is not set filter
+will list all available plugins within the specified library.
+
+controls, c Set the ’|’ separated list of controls which are zero or more floating point
+values that determine the behavior of the loaded plugin (for example delay,
+threshold or gain).
+Controls need to be defined using the following syntax:
+c0=value0 |c1=value1 |c2=value2 |..., where
+valuei is the value set on the i -th control.
+If controls is set to help, all available controls and
+their valid ranges are printed.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100. Only used if plugin have
+zero inputs.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame, default
+is 1024. Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified duration,
+as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a complete frame.
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+Only used if plugin have zero inputs.
+
+
+
+
+
27.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ List all available plugins within amp (LADSPA example plugin) library:
+
+
+ List all available controls and their valid ranges for vcf_notch
+plugin from VCF library:
+
+
ladspa=f=vcf:p=vcf_notch:c=help
+ Simulate low quality audio equipment using Computer Music Toolkit (CMT)
+plugin library:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:plugin=lofi:controls=c0=22|c1=12|c2=12
+ Add reverberation to the audio using TAP-plugins
+(Tom’s Audio Processing plugins):
+
+
ladspa=file=tap_reverb:tap_reverb
+ Generate white noise, with 0.2 amplitude:
+
+
ladspa=file=cmt:noise_source_white:c=c0=.2
+ Generate 20 bpm clicks using plugin C* Click - Metronome from the
+C* Audio Plugin Suite (CAPS) library:
+
+
ladspa=file=caps:Click:c=c1=20'
+ Apply C* Eq10X2 - Stereo 10-band equaliser effect:
+
+
ladspa=caps:Eq10X2:c=c0=-48|c9=-24|c3=12|c4=2
+
+
+
+
27.34.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+cN Modify the N -th control value.
+
+If the specified value is not valid, it is ignored and prior one is kept.
+
+
+
+
27.35 lowpass# TOC
+
+
Apply a low-pass filter with 3dB point frequency.
+The filter can be either single-pole or double-pole (the default).
+The filter roll off at 6dB per pole per octave (20dB per pole per decade).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set frequency in Hz. Default is 500.
+
+poles, p Set number of poles. Default is 2.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Specify the band-width of a filter in width_type units.
+Applies only to double-pole filter.
+The default is 0.707q and gives a Butterworth response.
+
+
+
+
27.36 pan# TOC
+
+
Mix channels with specific gain levels. The filter accepts the output
+channel layout followed by a set of channels definitions.
+
+
This filter is also designed to efficiently remap the channels of an audio
+stream.
+
+
The filter accepts parameters of the form:
+"l |outdef |outdef |..."
+
+
+l output channel layout or number of channels
+
+outdef output channel specification, of the form:
+"out_name =[gain *]in_name [+[gain *]in_name ...]"
+
+out_name output channel to define, either a channel name (FL, FR, etc.) or a channel
+number (c0, c1, etc.)
+
+gain multiplicative coefficient for the channel, 1 leaving the volume unchanged
+
+in_name input channel to use, see out_name for details; it is not possible to mix
+named and numbered input channels
+
+
+
If the ‘=’ in a channel specification is replaced by ‘<’, then the gains for
+that specification will be renormalized so that the total is 1, thus
+avoiding clipping noise.
+
+
+
27.36.1 Mixing examples# TOC
+
+
For example, if you want to down-mix from stereo to mono, but with a bigger
+factor for the left channel:
+
+
pan=1c|c0=0.9*c0+0.1*c1
+
+
+
A customized down-mix to stereo that works automatically for 3-, 4-, 5- and
+7-channels surround:
+
+
pan=stereo| FL < FL + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BL + 0.6*SL | FR < FR + 0.5*FC + 0.6*BR + 0.6*SR
+
+
+
Note that ffmpeg integrates a default down-mix (and up-mix) system
+that should be preferred (see "-ac" option) unless you have very specific
+needs.
+
+
+
27.36.2 Remapping examples# TOC
+
+
The channel remapping will be effective if, and only if:
+
+
+ gain coefficients are zeroes or ones,
+ only one input per channel output,
+
+
+
If all these conditions are satisfied, the filter will notify the user ("Pure
+channel mapping detected"), and use an optimized and lossless method to do the
+remapping.
+
+
For example, if you have a 5.1 source and want a stereo audio stream by
+dropping the extra channels:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FL | c1=FR"
+
+
+
Given the same source, you can also switch front left and front right channels
+and keep the input channel layout:
+
+
pan="5.1| c0=c1 | c1=c0 | c2=c2 | c3=c3 | c4=c4 | c5=c5"
+
+
+
If the input is a stereo audio stream, you can mute the front left channel (and
+still keep the stereo channel layout) with:
+
+
+
Still with a stereo audio stream input, you can copy the right channel in both
+front left and right:
+
+
pan="stereo| c0=FR | c1=FR"
+
+
+
+
27.37 replaygain# TOC
+
+
ReplayGain scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as an input and
+outputs it unchanged.
+At end of filtering it displays track_gain and track_peak.
+
+
+
27.38 resample# TOC
+
+
Convert the audio sample format, sample rate and channel layout. It is
+not meant to be used directly.
+
+
+
27.39 silencedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect silence in an audio stream.
+
+
This filter logs a message when it detects that the input audio volume is less
+or equal to a noise tolerance value for a duration greater or equal to the
+minimum detected noise duration.
+
+
The printed times and duration are expressed in seconds.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+duration, d Set silence duration until notification (default is 2 seconds).
+
+noise, n Set noise tolerance. Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the
+specified value) or amplitude ratio. Default is -60dB, or 0.001.
+
+
+
+
27.39.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Detect 5 seconds of silence with -50dB noise tolerance:
+
+
silencedetect=n=-50dB:d=5
+ Complete example with ffmpeg to detect silence with 0.0001 noise
+tolerance in silence.mp3 :
+
+
ffmpeg -i silence.mp3 -af silencedetect=noise=0.0001 -f null -
+
+
+
+
27.40 silenceremove# TOC
+
+
Remove silence from the beginning, middle or end of the audio.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+start_periods This value is used to indicate if audio should be trimmed at beginning of
+the audio. A value of zero indicates no silence should be trimmed from the
+beginning. When specifying a non-zero value, it trims audio up until it
+finds non-silence. Normally, when trimming silence from beginning of audio
+the start_periods will be 1 but it can be increased to higher
+values to trim all audio up to specific count of non-silence periods.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_duration Specify the amount of time that non-silence must be detected before it stops
+trimming audio. By increasing the duration, bursts of noises can be treated
+as silence and trimmed off. Default value is 0.
+
+start_threshold This indicates what sample value should be treated as silence. For digital
+audio, a value of 0 may be fine but for audio recorded from analog,
+you may wish to increase the value to account for background noise.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+stop_periods Set the count for trimming silence from the end of audio.
+To remove silence from the middle of a file, specify a stop_periods
+that is negative. This value is then treated as a positive value and is
+used to indicate the effect should restart processing as specified by
+start_periods , making it suitable for removing periods of silence
+in the middle of the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_duration Specify a duration of silence that must exist before audio is not copied any
+more. By specifying a higher duration, silence that is wanted can be left in
+the audio.
+Default value is 0.
+
+stop_threshold This is the same as start_threshold but for trimming silence from
+the end of audio.
+Can be specified in dB (in case "dB" is appended to the specified value)
+or amplitude ratio. Default value is 0.
+
+leave_silence This indicate that stop_duration length of audio should be left intact
+at the beginning of each period of silence.
+For example, if you want to remove long pauses between words but do not want
+to remove the pauses completely. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
27.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ The following example shows how this filter can be used to start a recording
+that does not contain the delay at the start which usually occurs between
+pressing the record button and the start of the performance:
+
+
silenceremove=1:5:0.02
+
+
+
+
27.41 treble# TOC
+
+
Boost or cut treble (upper) frequencies of the audio using a two-pole
+shelving filter with a response similar to that of a standard
+hi-fi’s tone-controls. This is also known as shelving equalisation (EQ).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+gain, g Give the gain at whichever is the lower of ~22 kHz and the
+Nyquist frequency. Its useful range is about -20 (for a large cut)
+to +20 (for a large boost). Beware of clipping when using a positive gain.
+
+frequency, f Set the filter’s central frequency and so can be used
+to extend or reduce the frequency range to be boosted or cut.
+The default value is 3000 Hz.
+
+width_type Set method to specify band-width of filter.
+
+h Hz
+
q Q-Factor
+
o octave
+
s slope
+
+
+width, w Determine how steep is the filter’s shelf transition.
+
+
+
+
27.42 volume# TOC
+
+
Adjust the input audio volume.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+volume Set audio volume expression.
+
+Output values are clipped to the maximum value.
+
+The output audio volume is given by the relation:
+
+
output_volume = volume * input_volume
+The default value for volume is "1.0".
+
+precision This parameter represents the mathematical precision.
+
+It determines which input sample formats will be allowed, which affects the
+precision of the volume scaling.
+
+
+fixed 8-bit fixed-point; this limits input sample format to U8, S16, and S32.
+
float 32-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to FLT. (default)
+
double 64-bit floating-point; this limits input sample format to DBL.
+
+
+replaygain Choose the behaviour on encountering ReplayGain side data in input frames.
+
+
+drop Remove ReplayGain side data, ignoring its contents (the default).
+
+ignore Ignore ReplayGain side data, but leave it in the frame.
+
+track Prefer the track gain, if present.
+
+album Prefer the album gain, if present.
+
+
+replaygain_preamp Pre-amplification gain in dB to apply to the selected replaygain gain.
+
+Default value for replaygain_preamp is 0.0.
+
+eval Set when the volume expression is evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘once ’
+only evaluate expression once during the filter initialization, or
+when the ‘volume ’ command is sent
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expression for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘once ’.
+
+
+
The volume expression can contain the following parameters.
+
+
+n frame number (starting at zero)
+
nb_channels number of channels
+
nb_consumed_samples number of samples consumed by the filter
+
nb_samples number of samples in the current frame
+
pos original frame position in the file
+
pts frame PTS
+
sample_rate sample rate
+
startpts PTS at start of stream
+
startt time at start of stream
+
t frame time
+
tb timestamp timebase
+
volume last set volume value
+
+
+
Note that when eval is set to ‘once ’ only the
+sample_rate and tb variables are available, all other
+variables will evaluate to NAN.
+
+
+
27.42.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+volume Modify the volume expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
replaygain_noclip Prevent clipping by limiting the gain applied.
+
+Default value for replaygain_noclip is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
27.42.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
27.43 volumedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect the volume of the input video.
+
+
The filter has no parameters. The input is not modified. Statistics about
+the volume will be printed in the log when the input stream end is reached.
+
+
In particular it will show the mean volume (root mean square), maximum
+volume (on a per-sample basis), and the beginning of a histogram of the
+registered volume values (from the maximum value to a cumulated 1/1000 of
+the samples).
+
+
All volumes are in decibels relative to the maximum PCM value.
+
+
+
27.43.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Here is an excerpt of the output:
+
+
[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] mean_volume: -27 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] max_volume: -4 dB
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_4db: 6
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_5db: 62
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_6db: 286
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_7db: 1042
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_8db: 2551
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_9db: 4609
+[Parsed_volumedetect_0 0xa23120] histogram_10db: 8409
+
+
+
It means that:
+
+ The mean square energy is approximately -27 dB, or 10^-2.7.
+ The largest sample is at -4 dB, or more precisely between -4 dB and -5 dB.
+ There are 6 samples at -4 dB, 62 at -5 dB, 286 at -6 dB, etc.
+
+
+
In other words, raising the volume by +4 dB does not cause any clipping,
+raising it by +5 dB causes clipping for 6 samples, etc.
+
+
+
+
28 Audio Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sources.
+
+
+
28.1 abuffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+time_base The timebase which will be used for timestamps of submitted frames. It must be
+either a floating-point number or in numerator /denominator form.
+
+sample_rate The sample rate of the incoming audio buffers.
+
+sample_fmt The sample format of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a sample format name or its corresponding integer representation from
+the enum AVSampleFormat in libavutil/samplefmt.h
+
+channel_layout The channel layout of the incoming audio buffers.
+Either a channel layout name from channel_layout_map in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c or its corresponding integer representation
+from the AV_CH_LAYOUT_* macros in libavutil/channel_layout.h
+
+channels The number of channels of the incoming audio buffers.
+If both channels and channel_layout are specified, then they
+must be consistent.
+
+
+
+
+
28.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=s16p:channel_layout=stereo
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept planar 16bit signed stereo at 44100Hz.
+Since the sample format with name "s16p" corresponds to the number
+6 and the "stereo" channel layout corresponds to the value 0x3, this is
+equivalent to:
+
+
abuffer=sample_rate=44100:sample_fmt=6:channel_layout=0x3
+
+
+
+
28.2 aevalsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal specified by an expression.
+
+
This source accepts in input one or more expressions (one for each
+channel), which are evaluated and used to generate a corresponding
+audio signal.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+exprs Set the ’|’-separated expressions list for each separate channel. In case the
+channel_layout option is not specified, the selected channel layout
+depends on the number of provided expressions. Otherwise the last
+specified expression is applied to the remaining output channels.
+
+channel_layout, c Set the channel layout. The number of channels in the specified layout
+must be equal to the number of specified expressions.
+
+duration, d Set the minimum duration of the sourced audio. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+Note that the resulting duration may be greater than the specified
+duration, as the generated audio is always cut at the end of a
+complete frame.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the audio is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per channel per each output frame,
+default to 1024.
+
+sample_rate, s Specify the sample rate, default to 44100.
+
+
+
Each expression in exprs can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n number of the evaluated sample, starting from 0
+
+t time of the evaluated sample expressed in seconds, starting from 0
+
+s sample rate
+
+
+
+
+
28.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate silence:
+
+
+ Generate a sin signal with frequency of 440 Hz, set sample rate to
+8000 Hz:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(440*2*PI*t):s=8000"
+ Generate a two channels signal, specify the channel layout (Front
+Center + Back Center) explicitly:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(420*2*PI*t)|cos(430*2*PI*t):c=FC|BC"
+ Generate white noise:
+
+
aevalsrc="-2+random(0)"
+ Generate an amplitude modulated signal:
+
+
aevalsrc="sin(10*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t)"
+ Generate 2.5 Hz binaural beats on a 360 Hz carrier:
+
+
aevalsrc="0.1*sin(2*PI*(360-2.5/2)*t) | 0.1*sin(2*PI*(360+2.5/2)*t)"
+
+
+
+
28.3 anullsrc# TOC
+
+
The null audio source, return unprocessed audio frames. It is mainly useful
+as a template and to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as
+the source for filters which ignore the input data (for example the sox
+synth filter).
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+channel_layout, cl
+Specifies the channel layout, and can be either an integer or a string
+representing a channel layout. The default value of channel_layout
+is "stereo".
+
+Check the channel_layout_map definition in
+libavutil/channel_layout.c for the mapping between strings and
+channel layout values.
+
+
+sample_rate, r Specifies the sample rate, and defaults to 44100.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the number of samples per requested frames.
+
+
+
+
+
28.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the sample rate to 48000 Hz and the channel layout to AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO.
+
+
+ Do the same operation with a more obvious syntax:
+
+
anullsrc=r=48000:cl=mono
+
+
+
All the parameters need to be explicitly defined.
+
+
+
28.4 flite# TOC
+
+
Synthesize a voice utterance using the libflite library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libflite.
+
+
Note that the flite library is not thread-safe.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+list_voices If set to 1, list the names of the available voices and exit
+immediately. Default value is 0.
+
+nb_samples, n Set the maximum number of samples per frame. Default value is 512.
+
+textfile Set the filename containing the text to speak.
+
+text Set the text to speak.
+
+voice, v Set the voice to use for the speech synthesis. Default value is
+kal. See also the list_voices option.
+
+
+
+
28.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read from file speech.txt , and synthesize the text using the
+standard flite voice:
+
+
flite=textfile=speech.txt
+ Read the specified text selecting the slt voice:
+
+
flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Input text to ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i flite=text='So fare thee well, poor devil of a Sub-Sub, whose commentator I am':voice=slt
+ Make ffplay speak the specified text, using flite and
+the lavfi device:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi flite=text='No more be grieved for which that thou hast done.'
+
+
+
For more information about libflite, check:
+http://www.speech.cs.cmu.edu/flite/
+
+
+
28.5 sine# TOC
+
+
Generate an audio signal made of a sine wave with amplitude 1/8.
+
+
The audio signal is bit-exact.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+frequency, f Set the carrier frequency. Default is 440 Hz.
+
+beep_factor, b Enable a periodic beep every second with frequency beep_factor times
+the carrier frequency. Default is 0, meaning the beep is disabled.
+
+sample_rate, r Specify the sample rate, default is 44100.
+
+duration, d Specify the duration of the generated audio stream.
+
+samples_per_frame Set the number of samples per output frame, default is 1024.
+
+
+
+
28.5.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Generate a simple 440 Hz sine wave:
+
+
+ Generate a 220 Hz sine wave with a 880 Hz beep each second, for 5 seconds:
+
+
sine=220:4:d=5
+sine=f=220:b=4:d=5
+sine=frequency=220:beep_factor=4:duration=5
+
+
+
+
+
29 Audio Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available audio sinks.
+
+
+
29.1 abuffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer audio frames, and make them available to the end of filter chain.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVABufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
29.2 anullsink# TOC
+
+
Null audio sink; do absolutely nothing with the input audio. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
30 Video Filters# TOC
+
+
When you configure your FFmpeg build, you can disable any of the
+existing filters using --disable-filters.
+The configure output will show the video filters included in your
+build.
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video filters.
+
+
+
30.1 alphaextract# TOC
+
+
Extract the alpha component from the input as a grayscale video. This
+is especially useful with the alphamerge filter.
+
+
+
30.2 alphamerge# TOC
+
+
Add or replace the alpha component of the primary input with the
+grayscale value of a second input. This is intended for use with
+alphaextract to allow the transmission or storage of frame
+sequences that have alpha in a format that doesn’t support an alpha
+channel.
+
+
For example, to reconstruct full frames from a normal YUV-encoded video
+and a separate video created with alphaextract , you might use:
+
+
movie=in_alpha.mkv [alpha]; [in][alpha] alphamerge [out]
+
+
+
Since this filter is designed for reconstruction, it operates on frame
+sequences without considering timestamps, and terminates when either
+input reaches end of stream. This will cause problems if your encoding
+pipeline drops frames. If you’re trying to apply an image as an
+overlay to a video stream, consider the overlay filter instead.
+
+
+
30.3 ass# TOC
+
+
Same as the subtitles filter, except that it doesn’t require libavcodec
+and libavformat to work. On the other hand, it is limited to ASS (Advanced
+Substation Alpha) subtitles files.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option in addition to the common options from
+the subtitles filter:
+
+
+shaping Set the shaping engine
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘auto ’
+The default libass shaping engine, which is the best available.
+
‘simple ’
+Fast, font-agnostic shaper that can do only substitutions
+
‘complex ’
+Slower shaper using OpenType for substitutions and positioning
+
+
+The default is auto.
+
+
+
+
30.4 bbox# TOC
+
+
Compute the bounding box for the non-black pixels in the input frame
+luminance plane.
+
+
This filter computes the bounding box containing all the pixels with a
+luminance value greater than the minimum allowed value.
+The parameters describing the bounding box are printed on the filter
+log.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+min_val Set the minimal luminance value. Default is 16.
+
+
+
+
30.5 blackdetect# TOC
+
+
Detect video intervals that are (almost) completely black. Can be
+useful to detect chapter transitions, commercials, or invalid
+recordings. Output lines contains the time for the start, end and
+duration of the detected black interval expressed in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+black_min_duration, d Set the minimum detected black duration expressed in seconds. It must
+be a non-negative floating point number.
+
+Default value is 2.0.
+
+picture_black_ratio_th, pic_th Set the threshold for considering a picture "black".
+Express the minimum value for the ratio:
+
+
nb_black_pixels / nb_pixels
+for which a picture is considered black.
+Default value is 0.98.
+
+pixel_black_th, pix_th Set the threshold for considering a pixel "black".
+
+The threshold expresses the maximum pixel luminance value for which a
+pixel is considered "black". The provided value is scaled according to
+the following equation:
+
+
absolute_threshold = luminance_minimum_value + pixel_black_th * luminance_range_size
+luminance_range_size and luminance_minimum_value depend on
+the input video format, the range is [0-255] for YUV full-range
+formats and [16-235] for YUV non full-range formats.
+
+Default value is 0.10.
+
+
+
The following example sets the maximum pixel threshold to the minimum
+value, and detects only black intervals of 2 or more seconds:
+
+
blackdetect=d=2:pix_th=0.00
+
+
+
+
30.6 blackframe# TOC
+
+
Detect frames that are (almost) completely black. Can be useful to
+detect chapter transitions or commercials. Output lines consist of
+the frame number of the detected frame, the percentage of blackness,
+the position in the file if known or -1 and the timestamp in seconds.
+
+
In order to display the output lines, you need to set the loglevel at
+least to the AV_LOG_INFO value.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+amount The percentage of the pixels that have to be below the threshold; it defaults to
+98.
+
+threshold, thresh The threshold below which a pixel value is considered black; it defaults to
+32.
+
+
+
+
+
30.7 blend, tblend# TOC
+
+
Blend two video frames into each other.
+
+
The blend filter takes two input streams and outputs one
+stream, the first input is the "top" layer and second input is
+"bottom" layer. Output terminates when shortest input terminates.
+
+
The tblend (time blend) filter takes two consecutive frames
+from one single stream, and outputs the result obtained by blending
+the new frame on top of the old frame.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+c0_mode c1_mode c2_mode c3_mode all_mode Set blend mode for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_mode . Default value is normal.
+
+Available values for component modes are:
+
+‘addition ’
+‘and ’
+‘average ’
+‘burn ’
+‘darken ’
+‘difference ’
+‘difference128 ’
+‘divide ’
+‘dodge ’
+‘exclusion ’
+‘hardlight ’
+‘lighten ’
+‘multiply ’
+‘negation ’
+‘normal ’
+‘or ’
+‘overlay ’
+‘phoenix ’
+‘pinlight ’
+‘reflect ’
+‘screen ’
+‘softlight ’
+‘subtract ’
+‘vividlight ’
+‘xor ’
+
+
+c0_opacity c1_opacity c2_opacity c3_opacity all_opacity Set blend opacity for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_opacity . Only used in combination with pixel component blend modes.
+
+c0_expr c1_expr c2_expr c3_expr all_expr Set blend expression for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_expr . Note that related mode options will be ignored if those are set.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y the coordinates of the current sample
+
+W H the width and height of currently filtered plane
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+TOP, A Value of pixel component at current location for first video frame (top layer).
+
+BOTTOM, B Value of pixel component at current location for second video frame (bottom layer).
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is
+0. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+repeatlast Continue applying the last bottom frame after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the bottom layer is reached.
+Default is 1. This option is only defined for the blend filter.
+
+
+
+
30.7.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply transition from bottom layer to top layer in first 10 seconds:
+
+
blend=all_expr='A*(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10))+B*(1-(if(gte(T,10),1,T/10)))'
+ Apply 1x1 checkerboard effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(eq(mod(X,2),mod(Y,2)),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(N*SW+X,W),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover down effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(Y-N*SH,0),A,B)'
+ Apply uncover up-left effect:
+
+
blend=all_expr='if(gte(T*SH*40+Y,H)*gte((T*40*SW+X)*W/H,W),A,B)'
+ Display differences between the current and the previous frame:
+
+
tblend=all_mode=difference128
+
+
+
+
30.8 boxblur# TOC
+
+
Apply a boxblur algorithm to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr luma_power, lp chroma_radius, cr chroma_power, cp alpha_radius, ar alpha_power, ap
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+luma_radius, lr chroma_radius, cr alpha_radius, ar Set an expression for the box radius in pixels used for blurring the
+corresponding input plane.
+
+The radius value must be a non-negative number, and must not be
+greater than the value of the expression min(w,h)/2 for the
+luma and alpha planes, and of min(cw,ch)/2 for the chroma
+planes.
+
+Default value for luma_radius is "2". If not specified,
+chroma_radius and alpha_radius default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_radius .
+
+The expressions can contain the following constants:
+
+w h The input width and height in pixels.
+
+cw ch The input chroma image width and height in pixels.
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p", hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+luma_power, lp chroma_power, cp alpha_power, ap Specify how many times the boxblur filter is applied to the
+corresponding plane.
+
+Default value for luma_power is 2. If not specified,
+chroma_power and alpha_power default to the
+corresponding value set for luma_power .
+
+A value of 0 will disable the effect.
+
+
+
+
30.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply a boxblur filter with the luma, chroma, and alpha radii
+set to 2:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=2:luma_power=1
+boxblur=2:1
+ Set the luma radius to 2, and alpha and chroma radius to 0:
+
+
+ Set the luma and chroma radii to a fraction of the video dimension:
+
+
boxblur=luma_radius=min(h\,w)/10:luma_power=1:chroma_radius=min(cw\,ch)/10:chroma_power=1
+
+
+
+
30.9 codecview# TOC
+
+
Visualize information exported by some codecs.
+
+
Some codecs can export information through frames using side-data or other
+means. For example, some MPEG based codecs export motion vectors through the
+export_mvs flag in the codec flags2 option.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+mv Set motion vectors to visualize.
+
+Available flags for mv are:
+
+
+‘pf ’
+forward predicted MVs of P-frames
+
‘bf ’
+forward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
‘bb ’
+backward predicted MVs of B-frames
+
+
+
+
+
30.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Visualizes multi-directionals MVs from P and B-Frames using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -flags2 +export_mvs input.mpg -vf codecview=mv=pf+bf+bb
+
+
+
+
30.10 colorbalance# TOC
+
Modify intensity of primary colors (red, green and blue) of input frames.
+
+
The filter allows an input frame to be adjusted in the shadows, midtones or highlights
+regions for the red-cyan, green-magenta or blue-yellow balance.
+
+
A positive adjustment value shifts the balance towards the primary color, a negative
+value towards the complementary color.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rs gs bs Adjust red, green and blue shadows (darkest pixels).
+
+rm gm bm Adjust red, green and blue midtones (medium pixels).
+
+rh gh bh Adjust red, green and blue highlights (brightest pixels).
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+
+
+
30.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Add red color cast to shadows:
+
+
+
+
+
30.11 colorlevels# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames using levels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rimin gimin bimin aimin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+rimax gimax bimax aimax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha input white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [-1.0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Input levels are used to lighten highlights (bright tones), darken shadows
+(dark tones), change the balance of bright and dark tones.
+
+romin gomin bomin aomin Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output black point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 0.
+
+romax gomax bomax aomax Adjust red, green, blue and alpha output white point.
+Allowed ranges for options are [0, 1.0]. Defaults are 1.
+
+Output levels allows manual selection of a constrained output level range.
+
+
+
+
30.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Make video output darker:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.058:gimin=0.058:bimin=0.058
+ Increase contrast:
+
+
colorlevels=rimin=0.039:gimin=0.039:bimin=0.039:rimax=0.96:gimax=0.96:bimax=0.96
+ Make video output lighter:
+
+
colorlevels=rimax=0.902:gimax=0.902:bimax=0.902
+ Increase brightness:
+
+
colorlevels=romin=0.5:gomin=0.5:bomin=0.5
+
+
+
+
30.12 colorchannelmixer# TOC
+
+
Adjust video input frames by re-mixing color channels.
+
+
This filter modifies a color channel by adding the values associated to
+the other channels of the same pixels. For example if the value to
+modify is red, the output value will be:
+
+
red =red *rr + blue *rb + green *rg + alpha *ra
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+rr rg rb ra Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output red channel.
+Default is 1 for rr , and 0 for rg , rb and ra .
+
+gr gg gb ga Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output green channel.
+Default is 1 for gg , and 0 for gr , gb and ga .
+
+br bg bb ba Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output blue channel.
+Default is 1 for bb , and 0 for br , bg and ba .
+
+ar ag ab aa Adjust contribution of input red, green, blue and alpha channels for output alpha channel.
+Default is 1 for aa , and 0 for ar , ag and ab .
+
+Allowed ranges for options are [-2.0, 2.0].
+
+
+
+
30.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert source to grayscale:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3:0:.3:.4:.3
+ Simulate sepia tones:
+
+
colorchannelmixer=.393:.769:.189:0:.349:.686:.168:0:.272:.534:.131
+
+
+
+
30.13 colormatrix# TOC
+
+
Convert color matrix.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+src dst Specify the source and destination color matrix. Both values must be
+specified.
+
+The accepted values are:
+
+‘bt709 ’
+BT.709
+
+‘bt601 ’
+BT.601
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+SMPTE-240M
+
+‘fcc ’
+FCC
+
+
+
+
For example to convert from BT.601 to SMPTE-240M, use the command:
+
+
colormatrix=bt601:smpte240m
+
+
+
+
30.14 copy# TOC
+
+
Copy the input source unchanged to the output. This is mainly useful for
+testing purposes.
+
+
+
30.15 crop# TOC
+
+
Crop the input video to given dimensions.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+w, out_w The width of the output video. It defaults to iw.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+h, out_h The height of the output video. It defaults to ih.
+This expression is evaluated only once during the filter
+configuration.
+
+x The horizontal position, in the input video, of the left edge of the output
+video. It defaults to (in_w-out_w)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+y The vertical position, in the input video, of the top edge of the output video.
+It defaults to (in_h-out_h)/2.
+This expression is evaluated per-frame.
+
+keep_aspect If set to 1 will force the output display aspect ratio
+to be the same of the input, by changing the output sample aspect
+ratio. It defaults to 0.
+
+
+
The out_w , out_h , x , y parameters are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (cropped) width and height.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+n The number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
The expression for out_w may depend on the value of out_h ,
+and the expression for out_h may depend on out_w , but they
+cannot depend on x and y , as x and y are
+evaluated after out_w and out_h .
+
+
The x and y parameters specify the expressions for the
+position of the top-left corner of the output (non-cropped) area. They
+are evaluated for each frame. If the evaluated value is not valid, it
+is approximated to the nearest valid value.
+
+
The expression for x may depend on y , and the expression
+for y may depend on x .
+
+
+
30.15.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.16 cropdetect# TOC
+
+
Auto-detect the crop size.
+
+
It calculates the necessary cropping parameters and prints the
+recommended parameters via the logging system. The detected dimensions
+correspond to the non-black area of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+limit Set higher black value threshold, which can be optionally specified
+from nothing (0) to everything (255 for 8bit based formats). An intensity
+value greater to the set value is considered non-black. It defaults to 24.
+You can also specify a value between 0.0 and 1.0 which will be scaled depending
+on the bitdepth of the pixel format.
+
+round The value which the width/height should be divisible by. It defaults to
+16. The offset is automatically adjusted to center the video. Use 2 to
+get only even dimensions (needed for 4:2:2 video). 16 is best when
+encoding to most video codecs.
+
+reset_count, reset Set the counter that determines after how many frames cropdetect will
+reset the previously detected largest video area and start over to
+detect the current optimal crop area. Default value is 0.
+
+This can be useful when channel logos distort the video area. 0
+indicates ’never reset’, and returns the largest area encountered during
+playback.
+
+
+
+
30.17 curves# TOC
+
+
Apply color adjustments using curves.
+
+
This filter is similar to the Adobe Photoshop and GIMP curves tools. Each
+component (red, green and blue) has its values defined by N key points
+tied from each other using a smooth curve. The x-axis represents the pixel
+values from the input frame, and the y-axis the new pixel values to be set for
+the output frame.
+
+
By default, a component curve is defined by the two points (0;0) and
+(1;1) . This creates a straight line where each original pixel value is
+"adjusted" to its own value, which means no change to the image.
+
+
The filter allows you to redefine these two points and add some more. A new
+curve (using a natural cubic spline interpolation) will be define to pass
+smoothly through all these new coordinates. The new defined points needs to be
+strictly increasing over the x-axis, and their x and y values must
+be in the [0;1] interval. If the computed curves happened to go outside
+the vector spaces, the values will be clipped accordingly.
+
+
If there is no key point defined in x=0, the filter will automatically
+insert a (0;0) point. In the same way, if there is no key point defined
+in x=1, the filter will automatically insert a (1;1) point.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+preset Select one of the available color presets. This option can be used in addition
+to the r , g , b parameters; in this case, the later
+options takes priority on the preset values.
+Available presets are:
+
+‘none ’
+‘color_negative ’
+‘cross_process ’
+‘darker ’
+‘increase_contrast ’
+‘lighter ’
+‘linear_contrast ’
+‘medium_contrast ’
+‘negative ’
+‘strong_contrast ’
+‘vintage ’
+
+Default is none.
+
master, m Set the master key points. These points will define a second pass mapping. It
+is sometimes called a "luminance" or "value" mapping. It can be used with
+r , g , b or all since it acts like a
+post-processing LUT.
+
red, r Set the key points for the red component.
+
green, g Set the key points for the green component.
+
blue, b Set the key points for the blue component.
+
all Set the key points for all components (not including master).
+Can be used in addition to the other key points component
+options. In this case, the unset component(s) will fallback on this
+all setting.
+
psfile Specify a Photoshop curves file (.asv) to import the settings from.
+
+
+
To avoid some filtergraph syntax conflicts, each key points list need to be
+defined using the following syntax: x0/y0 x1/y1 x2/y2 ....
+
+
+
30.17.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.18 dctdnoiz# TOC
+
+
Denoise frames using 2D DCT (frequency domain filtering).
+
+
This filter is not designed for real time.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+sigma, s Set the noise sigma constant.
+
+This sigma defines a hard threshold of 3 * sigma; every DCT
+coefficient (absolute value) below this threshold with be dropped.
+
+If you need a more advanced filtering, see expr .
+
+Default is 0.
+
+overlap Set number overlapping pixels for each block. Since the filter can be slow, you
+may want to reduce this value, at the cost of a less effective filter and the
+risk of various artefacts.
+
+If the overlapping value doesn’t allow to process the whole input width or
+height, a warning will be displayed and according borders won’t be denoised.
+
+Default value is blocksize -1, which is the best possible setting.
+
+expr, e Set the coefficient factor expression.
+
+For each coefficient of a DCT block, this expression will be evaluated as a
+multiplier value for the coefficient.
+
+If this is option is set, the sigma option will be ignored.
+
+The absolute value of the coefficient can be accessed through the c
+variable.
+
+n Set the blocksize using the number of bits. 1<<n defines the
+blocksize , which is the width and height of the processed blocks.
+
+The default value is 3 (8x8) and can be raised to 4 for a
+blocksize of 16x16. Note that changing this setting has huge consequences
+on the speed processing. Also, a larger block size does not necessarily means a
+better de-noising.
+
+
+
+
30.18.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Apply a denoise with a sigma of 4.5:
+
+
+
The same operation can be achieved using the expression system:
+
+
dctdnoiz=e='gte(c, 4.5*3)'
+
+
+
Violent denoise using a block size of 16x16:
+
+
+
+
30.19 decimate# TOC
+
+
Drop duplicated frames at regular intervals.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cycle Set the number of frames from which one will be dropped. Setting this to
+N means one frame in every batch of N frames will be dropped.
+Default is 5.
+
+dupthresh Set the threshold for duplicate detection. If the difference metric for a frame
+is less than or equal to this value, then it is declared as duplicate. Default
+is 1.1
+
+scthresh Set scene change threshold. Default is 15.
+
+blockx blocky Set the size of the x and y-axis blocks used during metric calculations.
+Larger blocks give better noise suppression, but also give worse detection of
+small movements. Must be a power of two. Default is 32.
+
+ppsrc Mark main input as a pre-processed input and activate clean source input
+stream. This allows the input to be pre-processed with various filters to help
+the metrics calculation while keeping the frame selection lossless. When set to
+1, the first stream is for the pre-processed input, and the second
+stream is the clean source from where the kept frames are chosen. Default is
+0.
+
+chroma Set whether or not chroma is considered in the metric calculations. Default is
+1.
+
+
+
+
30.20 dejudder# TOC
+
+
Remove judder produced by partially interlaced telecined content.
+
+
Judder can be introduced, for instance, by pullup filter. If the original
+source was partially telecined content then the output of pullup,dejudder
+will have a variable frame rate. May change the recorded frame rate of the
+container. Aside from that change, this filter will not affect constant frame
+rate video.
+
+
The option available in this filter is:
+
+cycle Specify the length of the window over which the judder repeats.
+
+Accepts any integer greater than 1. Useful values are:
+
+‘4 ’
+If the original was telecined from 24 to 30 fps (Film to NTSC).
+
+‘5 ’
+If the original was telecined from 25 to 30 fps (PAL to NTSC).
+
+‘20 ’
+If a mixture of the two.
+
+
+The default is ‘4 ’.
+
+
+
+
30.21 delogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo by a simple interpolation of the surrounding
+pixels. Just set a rectangle covering the logo and watch it disappear
+(and sometimes something even uglier appear - your mileage may vary).
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+x y Specify the top left corner coordinates of the logo. They must be
+specified.
+
+w h Specify the width and height of the logo to clear. They must be
+specified.
+
+band, t Specify the thickness of the fuzzy edge of the rectangle (added to
+w and h ). The default value is 4.
+
+show When set to 1, a green rectangle is drawn on the screen to simplify
+finding the right x , y , w , and h parameters.
+The default value is 0.
+
+The rectangle is drawn on the outermost pixels which will be (partly)
+replaced with interpolated values. The values of the next pixels
+immediately outside this rectangle in each direction will be used to
+compute the interpolated pixel values inside the rectangle.
+
+
+
+
+
30.21.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set a rectangle covering the area with top left corner coordinates 0,0
+and size 100x77, and a band of size 10:
+
+
delogo=x=0:y=0:w=100:h=77:band=10
+
+
+
+
30.22 deshake# TOC
+
+
Attempt to fix small changes in horizontal and/or vertical shift. This
+filter helps remove camera shake from hand-holding a camera, bumping a
+tripod, moving on a vehicle, etc.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+x y w h Specify a rectangular area where to limit the search for motion
+vectors.
+If desired the search for motion vectors can be limited to a
+rectangular area of the frame defined by its top left corner, width
+and height. These parameters have the same meaning as the drawbox
+filter which can be used to visualise the position of the bounding
+box.
+
+This is useful when simultaneous movement of subjects within the frame
+might be confused for camera motion by the motion vector search.
+
+If any or all of x , y , w and h are set to -1
+then the full frame is used. This allows later options to be set
+without specifying the bounding box for the motion vector search.
+
+Default - search the whole frame.
+
+rx ry Specify the maximum extent of movement in x and y directions in the
+range 0-64 pixels. Default 16.
+
+edge Specify how to generate pixels to fill blanks at the edge of the
+frame. Available values are:
+
+‘blank, 0 ’
+Fill zeroes at blank locations
+
‘original, 1 ’
+Original image at blank locations
+
‘clamp, 2 ’
+Extruded edge value at blank locations
+
‘mirror, 3 ’
+Mirrored edge at blank locations
+
+Default value is ‘mirror ’.
+
+blocksize Specify the blocksize to use for motion search. Range 4-128 pixels,
+default 8.
+
+contrast Specify the contrast threshold for blocks. Only blocks with more than
+the specified contrast (difference between darkest and lightest
+pixels) will be considered. Range 1-255, default 125.
+
+search Specify the search strategy. Available values are:
+
+‘exhaustive, 0 ’
+Set exhaustive search
+
‘less, 1 ’
+Set less exhaustive search.
+
+Default value is ‘exhaustive ’.
+
+filename If set then a detailed log of the motion search is written to the
+specified file.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
30.23 drawbox# TOC
+
+
Draw a colored box on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the top left corner coordinates of the box. It defaults to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the box; if 0 they are interpreted as
+the input width and height. It defaults to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the box to write. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the box edge color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the box edge. Default value is 3.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y offset coordinates where the box is drawn.
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn box.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn box.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
30.23.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.24 drawgrid# TOC
+
+
Draw a grid on the input image.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+x y The expressions which specify the coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset). Both default to 0.
+
+width, w height, h The expressions which specify the width and height of the grid cell, if 0 they are interpreted as the
+input width and height, respectively, minus thickness, so image gets
+framed. Default to 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the grid. For the general syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special
+value invert is used, the grid color is the same as the
+video with inverted luma.
+
+thickness, t The expression which sets the thickness of the grid line. Default value is 1.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants.
+
+
+
The parameters for x , y , w and h and t are expressions containing the
+following constants:
+
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_h, ih in_w, iw The input grid cell width and height.
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+x y The x and y coordinates of some point of grid intersection (meant to configure offset).
+
+w h The width and height of the drawn cell.
+
+t The thickness of the drawn cell.
+
+These constants allow the x , y , w , h and t expressions to refer to
+each other, so you may for example specify y=x/dar or h=w/dar.
+
+
+
+
+
30.24.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Draw a grid with cell 100x100 pixels, thickness 2 pixels, with color red and an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=width=100:height=100:thickness=2:color=red@0.5
+ Draw a white 3x3 grid with an opacity of 50%:
+
+
drawgrid=w=iw/3:h=ih/3:t=2:c=white@0.5
+
+
+
+
30.25 drawtext# TOC
+
+
Draw a text string or text from a specified file on top of a video, using the
+libfreetype library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfreetype.
+To enable default font fallback and the font option you need to
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libfontconfig.
+To enable the text_shaping option, you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libfribidi.
+
+
+
30.25.1 Syntax# TOC
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+box Used to draw a box around text using the background color.
+The value must be either 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
+The default value of box is 0.
+
+boxcolor The color to be used for drawing box around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of boxcolor is "white".
+
+borderw Set the width of the border to be drawn around the text using bordercolor .
+The default value of borderw is 0.
+
+bordercolor Set the color to be used for drawing border around text. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of bordercolor is "black".
+
+expansion Select how the text is expanded. Can be either none,
+strftime (deprecated) or
+normal (default). See the Text expansion section
+below for details.
+
+fix_bounds If true, check and fix text coords to avoid clipping.
+
+fontcolor The color to be used for drawing fonts. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of fontcolor is "black".
+
+fontcolor_expr String which is expanded the same way as text to obtain dynamic
+fontcolor value. By default this option has empty value and is not
+processed. When this option is set, it overrides fontcolor option.
+
+font The font family to be used for drawing text. By default Sans.
+
+fontfile The font file to be used for drawing text. The path must be included.
+This parameter is mandatory if the fontconfig support is disabled.
+
+fontsize The font size to be used for drawing text.
+The default value of fontsize is 16.
+
+text_shaping If set to 1, attempt to shape the text (for example, reverse the order of
+right-to-left text and join Arabic characters) before drawing it.
+Otherwise, just draw the text exactly as given.
+By default 1 (if supported).
+
+ft_load_flags The flags to be used for loading the fonts.
+
+The flags map the corresponding flags supported by libfreetype, and are
+a combination of the following values:
+
+default no_scale no_hinting render no_bitmap vertical_layout force_autohint crop_bitmap pedantic ignore_global_advance_width no_recurse ignore_transform monochrome linear_design no_autohint
+
+Default value is "default".
+
+For more information consult the documentation for the FT_LOAD_*
+libfreetype flags.
+
+shadowcolor The color to be used for drawing a shadow behind the drawn text. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of shadowcolor is "black".
+
+shadowx shadowy The x and y offsets for the text shadow position with respect to the
+position of the text. They can be either positive or negative
+values. The default value for both is "0".
+
+start_number The starting frame number for the n/frame_num variable. The default value
+is "0".
+
+tabsize The size in number of spaces to use for rendering the tab.
+Default value is 4.
+
+timecode Set the initial timecode representation in "hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff"
+format. It can be used with or without text parameter. timecode_rate
+option must be specified.
+
+timecode_rate, rate, r Set the timecode frame rate (timecode only).
+
+text The text string to be drawn. The text must be a sequence of UTF-8
+encoded characters.
+This parameter is mandatory if no file is specified with the parameter
+textfile .
+
+textfile A text file containing text to be drawn. The text must be a sequence
+of UTF-8 encoded characters.
+
+This parameter is mandatory if no text string is specified with the
+parameter text .
+
+If both text and textfile are specified, an error is thrown.
+
+reload If set to 1, the textfile will be reloaded before each frame.
+Be sure to update it atomically, or it may be read partially, or even fail.
+
+x y The expressions which specify the offsets where text will be drawn
+within the video frame. They are relative to the top/left border of the
+output image.
+
+The default value of x and y is "0".
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants and functions.
+
+
+
The parameters for x and y are expressions containing the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (w / h ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+line_h, lh the height of each text line
+
+main_h, h, H the input height
+
+main_w, w, W the input width
+
+max_glyph_a, ascent the maximum distance from the baseline to the highest/upper grid
+coordinate used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered
+glyphs.
+It is a positive value, due to the grid’s orientation with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_d, descent the maximum distance from the baseline to the lowest grid coordinate
+used to place a glyph outline point, for all the rendered glyphs.
+This is a negative value, due to the grid’s orientation, with the Y axis
+upwards.
+
+max_glyph_h maximum glyph height, that is the maximum height for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text, it is equivalent to ascent -
+descent .
+
+max_glyph_w maximum glyph width, that is the maximum width for all the glyphs
+contained in the rendered text
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+rand(min, max) return a random number included between min and max
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+text_h, th the height of the rendered text
+
+text_w, tw the width of the rendered text
+
+x y the x and y offset coordinates where the text is drawn.
+
+These parameters allow the x and y expressions to refer
+each other, so you can for example specify y=x/dar.
+
+
+
+
30.25.2 Text expansion# TOC
+
+
If expansion is set to strftime,
+the filter recognizes strftime() sequences in the provided text and
+expands them accordingly. Check the documentation of strftime(). This
+feature is deprecated.
+
+
If expansion is set to none, the text is printed verbatim.
+
+
If expansion is set to normal (which is the default),
+the following expansion mechanism is used.
+
+
The backslash character ’\’, followed by any character, always expands to
+the second character.
+
+
Sequence of the form %{...} are expanded. The text between the
+braces is a function name, possibly followed by arguments separated by ’:’.
+If the arguments contain special characters or delimiters (’:’ or ’}’),
+they should be escaped.
+
+
Note that they probably must also be escaped as the value for the
+text option in the filter argument string and as the filter
+argument in the filtergraph description, and possibly also for the shell,
+that makes up to four levels of escaping; using a text file avoids these
+problems.
+
+
The following functions are available:
+
+
+expr, eThe expression evaluation result.
+
+It must take one argument specifying the expression to be evaluated,
+which accepts the same constants and functions as the x and
+y values. Note that not all constants should be used, for
+example the text size is not known when evaluating the expression, so
+the constants text_w and text_h will have an undefined
+value.
+
+expr_int_format, eifEvaluate the expression’s value and output as formatted integer.
+
+The first argument is the expression to be evaluated, just as for the expr function.
+The second argument specifies the output format. Allowed values are ’x’, ’X’, ’d’ and
+’u’. They are treated exactly as in the printf function.
+The third parameter is optional and sets the number of positions taken by the output.
+It can be used to add padding with zeros from the left.
+
+gmtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in UTC.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+localtimeThe time at which the filter is running, expressed in the local time zone.
+It can accept an argument: a strftime() format string.
+
+metadataFrame metadata. It must take one argument specifying metadata key.
+
+n, frame_numThe frame number, starting from 0.
+
+pict_typeA 1 character description of the current picture type.
+
+ptsThe timestamp of the current frame.
+It can take up to two arguments.
+
+The first argument is the format of the timestamp; it defaults to flt
+for seconds as a decimal number with microsecond accuracy; hms stands
+for a formatted [-]HH:MM:SS.mmm timestamp with millisecond accuracy.
+
+The second argument is an offset added to the timestamp.
+
+
+
+
+
30.25.3 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
For more information about libfreetype, check:
+http://www.freetype.org/ .
+
+
For more information about fontconfig, check:
+http://freedesktop.org/software/fontconfig/fontconfig-user.html .
+
+
For more information about libfribidi, check:
+http://fribidi.org/ .
+
+
+
30.26 edgedetect# TOC
+
+
Detect and draw edges. The filter uses the Canny Edge Detection algorithm.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+low high Set low and high threshold values used by the Canny thresholding
+algorithm.
+
+The high threshold selects the "strong" edge pixels, which are then
+connected through 8-connectivity with the "weak" edge pixels selected
+by the low threshold.
+
+low and high threshold values must be chosen in the range
+[0,1], and low should be lesser or equal to high .
+
+Default value for low is 20/255, and default value for high
+is 50/255.
+
+mode Define the drawing mode.
+
+
+‘wires ’
+Draw white/gray wires on black background.
+
+‘colormix ’
+Mix the colors to create a paint/cartoon effect.
+
+
+Default value is wires .
+
+
+
+
30.26.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Standard edge detection with custom values for the hysteresis thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=low=0.1:high=0.4
+ Painting effect without thresholding:
+
+
edgedetect=mode=colormix:high=0
+
+
+
+
30.27 extractplanes# TOC
+
+
Extract color channel components from input video stream into
+separate grayscale video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+planes Set plane(s) to extract.
+
+Available values for planes are:
+
+‘y ’
+‘u ’
+‘v ’
+‘a ’
+‘r ’
+‘g ’
+‘b ’
+
+
+Choosing planes not available in the input will result in an error.
+That means you cannot select r, g, b planes
+with y, u, v planes at same time.
+
+
+
+
30.27.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract luma, u and v color channel component from input video frame
+into 3 grayscale outputs:
+
+
ffmpeg -i video.avi -filter_complex 'extractplanes=y+u+v[y][u][v]' -map '[y]' y.avi -map '[u]' u.avi -map '[v]' v.avi
+
+
+
+
30.28 elbg# TOC
+
+
Apply a posterize effect using the ELBG (Enhanced LBG) algorithm.
+
+
For each input image, the filter will compute the optimal mapping from
+the input to the output given the codebook length, that is the number
+of distinct output colors.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options.
+
+
+codebook_length, l Set codebook length. The value must be a positive integer, and
+represents the number of distinct output colors. Default value is 256.
+
+nb_steps, n Set the maximum number of iterations to apply for computing the optimal
+mapping. The higher the value the better the result and the higher the
+computation time. Default value is 1.
+
+seed, s Set a random seed, must be an integer included between 0 and
+UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to -1, the filter
+will try to use a good random seed on a best effort basis.
+
+
+
+
30.29 fade# TOC
+
+
Apply a fade-in/out effect to the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+type, t The effect type can be either "in" for a fade-in, or "out" for a fade-out
+effect.
+Default is in.
+
+start_frame, s Specify the number of the frame to start applying the fade
+effect at. Default is 0.
+
+nb_frames, n The number of frames that the fade effect lasts. At the end of the
+fade-in effect, the output video will have the same intensity as the input video.
+At the end of the fade-out transition, the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+Default is 25.
+
+alpha If set to 1, fade only alpha channel, if one exists on the input.
+Default value is 0.
+
+start_time, st Specify the timestamp (in seconds) of the frame to start to apply the fade
+effect. If both start_frame and start_time are specified, the fade will start at
+whichever comes last. Default is 0.
+
+duration, d The number of seconds for which the fade effect has to last. At the end of the
+fade-in effect the output video will have the same intensity as the input video,
+at the end of the fade-out transition the output video will be filled with the
+selected color .
+If both duration and nb_frames are specified, duration is used. Default is 0.
+
+color, c Specify the color of the fade. Default is "black".
+
+
+
+
30.29.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.30 field# TOC
+
+
Extract a single field from an interlaced image using stride
+arithmetic to avoid wasting CPU time. The output frames are marked as
+non-interlaced.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+type Specify whether to extract the top (if the value is 0 or
+top) or the bottom field (if the value is 1 or
+bottom).
+
+
+
+
30.31 fieldmatch# TOC
+
+
Field matching filter for inverse telecine. It is meant to reconstruct the
+progressive frames from a telecined stream. The filter does not drop duplicated
+frames, so to achieve a complete inverse telecine fieldmatch needs to be
+followed by a decimation filter such as decimate in the filtergraph.
+
+
The separation of the field matching and the decimation is notably motivated by
+the possibility of inserting a de-interlacing filter fallback between the two.
+If the source has mixed telecined and real interlaced content,
+fieldmatch will not be able to match fields for the interlaced parts.
+But these remaining combed frames will be marked as interlaced, and thus can be
+de-interlaced by a later filter such as yadif before decimation.
+
+
In addition to the various configuration options, fieldmatch can take an
+optional second stream, activated through the ppsrc option. If
+enabled, the frames reconstruction will be based on the fields and frames from
+this second stream. This allows the first input to be pre-processed in order to
+help the various algorithms of the filter, while keeping the output lossless
+(assuming the fields are matched properly). Typically, a field-aware denoiser,
+or brightness/contrast adjustments can help.
+
+
Note that this filter uses the same algorithms as TIVTC/TFM (AviSynth project)
+and VIVTC/VFM (VapourSynth project). The later is a light clone of TFM from
+which fieldmatch is based on. While the semantic and usage are very
+close, some behaviour and options names can differ.
+
+
The decimate filter currently only works for constant frame rate input.
+Do not use fieldmatch and decimate if your input has mixed
+telecined and progressive content with changing framerate.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+order Specify the assumed field order of the input stream. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Auto detect parity (use FFmpeg’s internal parity value).
+
‘bff ’
+Assume bottom field first.
+
‘tff ’
+Assume top field first.
+
+
+Note that it is sometimes recommended not to trust the parity announced by the
+stream.
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mode Set the matching mode or strategy to use. pc mode is the safest in the
+sense that it won’t risk creating jerkiness due to duplicate frames when
+possible, but if there are bad edits or blended fields it will end up
+outputting combed frames when a good match might actually exist. On the other
+hand, pcn_ub mode is the most risky in terms of creating jerkiness,
+but will almost always find a good frame if there is one. The other values are
+all somewhere in between pc and pcn_ub in terms of risking
+jerkiness and creating duplicate frames versus finding good matches in sections
+with bad edits, orphaned fields, blended fields, etc.
+
+More details about p/c/n/u/b are available in p/c/n/u/b meaning section.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘pc ’
+2-way matching (p/c)
+
‘pc_n ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match if still combed (p/c + n)
+
‘pc_u ’
+2-way matching, and trying 3rd match (same order) if still combed (p/c + u)
+
‘pc_n_ub ’
+2-way matching, trying 3rd match if still combed, and trying 4th/5th matches if
+still combed (p/c + n + u/b)
+
‘pcn ’
+3-way matching (p/c/n)
+
‘pcn_ub ’
+3-way matching, and trying 4th/5th matches if all 3 of the original matches are
+detected as combed (p/c/n + u/b)
+
+
+The parenthesis at the end indicate the matches that would be used for that
+mode assuming order =tff (and field on auto or
+top ).
+
+In terms of speed pc mode is by far the fastest and pcn_ub is
+the slowest.
+
+Default value is pc_n .
+
+ppsrc Mark the main input stream as a pre-processed input, and enable the secondary
+input stream as the clean source to pick the fields from. See the filter
+introduction for more details. It is similar to the clip2 feature from
+VFM/TFM.
+
+Default value is 0 (disabled).
+
+field Set the field to match from. It is recommended to set this to the same value as
+order unless you experience matching failures with that setting. In
+certain circumstances changing the field that is used to match from can have a
+large impact on matching performance. Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Automatic (same value as order ).
+
‘bottom ’
+Match from the bottom field.
+
‘top ’
+Match from the top field.
+
+
+Default value is auto .
+
+mchroma Set whether or not chroma is included during the match comparisons. In most
+cases it is recommended to leave this enabled. You should set this to 0
+only if your clip has bad chroma problems such as heavy rainbowing or other
+artifacts. Setting this to 0 could also be used to speed things up at
+the cost of some accuracy.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+y0 y1 These define an exclusion band which excludes the lines between y0 and
+y1 from being included in the field matching decision. An exclusion
+band can be used to ignore subtitles, a logo, or other things that may
+interfere with the matching. y0 sets the starting scan line and
+y1 sets the ending line; all lines in between y0 and
+y1 (including y0 and y1 ) will be ignored. Setting
+y0 and y1 to the same value will disable the feature.
+y0 and y1 defaults to 0.
+
+scthresh Set the scene change detection threshold as a percentage of maximum change on
+the luma plane. Good values are in the [8.0, 14.0] range. Scene change
+detection is only relevant in case combmatch =sc . The range for
+scthresh is [0.0, 100.0].
+
+Default value is 12.0.
+
+combmatch When combatch is not none , fieldmatch will take into
+account the combed scores of matches when deciding what match to use as the
+final match. Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No final matching based on combed scores.
+
‘sc ’
+Combed scores are only used when a scene change is detected.
+
‘full ’
+Use combed scores all the time.
+
+
+Default is sc .
+
+combdbg Force fieldmatch to calculate the combed metrics for certain matches and
+print them. This setting is known as micout in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+No forced calculation.
+
‘pcn ’
+Force p/c/n calculations.
+
‘pcnub ’
+Force p/c/n/u/b calculations.
+
+
+Default value is none .
+
+cthresh This is the area combing threshold used for combed frame detection. This
+essentially controls how "strong" or "visible" combing must be to be detected.
+Larger values mean combing must be more visible and smaller values mean combing
+can be less visible or strong and still be detected. Valid settings are from
+-1 (every pixel will be detected as combed) to 255 (no pixel will
+be detected as combed). This is basically a pixel difference value. A good
+range is [8, 12].
+
+Default value is 9.
+
+chroma Sets whether or not chroma is considered in the combed frame decision. Only
+disable this if your source has chroma problems (rainbowing, etc.) that are
+causing problems for the combed frame detection with chroma enabled. Actually,
+using chroma =0 is usually more reliable, except for the case
+where there is chroma only combing in the source.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+blockx blocky Respectively set the x-axis and y-axis size of the window used during combed
+frame detection. This has to do with the size of the area in which
+combpel pixels are required to be detected as combed for a frame to be
+declared combed. See the combpel parameter description for more info.
+Possible values are any number that is a power of 2 starting at 4 and going up
+to 512.
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+combpel The number of combed pixels inside any of the blocky by
+blockx size blocks on the frame for the frame to be detected as
+combed. While cthresh controls how "visible" the combing must be, this
+setting controls "how much" combing there must be in any localized area (a
+window defined by the blockx and blocky settings) on the
+frame. Minimum value is 0 and maximum is blocky x blockx (at
+which point no frames will ever be detected as combed). This setting is known
+as MI in TFM/VFM vocabulary.
+
+Default value is 80.
+
+
+
+
30.31.1 p/c/n/u/b meaning# TOC
+
+
+
30.31.1.1 p/c/n# TOC
+
+
We assume the following telecined stream:
+
+
+
Top fields: 1 2 2 3 4
+Bottom fields: 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
The numbers correspond to the progressive frame the fields relate to. Here, the
+first two frames are progressive, the 3rd and 4th are combed, and so on.
+
+
When fieldmatch is configured to run a matching from bottom
+(field =bottom ) this is how this input stream get transformed:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4 <-- matching reference
+
+Matches: c c n n c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 3 4 4
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+
+
As a result of the field matching, we can see that some frames get duplicated.
+To perform a complete inverse telecine, you need to rely on a decimation filter
+after this operation. See for instance the decimate filter.
+
+
The same operation now matching from top fields (field =top )
+looks like this:
+
+
+
Input stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4 <-- matching reference
+ B 1 2 3 4 4
+
+Matches: c c p p c
+
+Output stream:
+ T 1 2 2 3 4
+ B 1 2 2 3 4
+
+
+
In these examples, we can see what p , c and n mean;
+basically, they refer to the frame and field of the opposite parity:
+
+
+ p matches the field of the opposite parity in the previous frame
+ c matches the field of the opposite parity in the current frame
+ n matches the field of the opposite parity in the next frame
+
+
+
+
30.31.1.2 u/b# TOC
+
+
The u and b matching are a bit special in the sense that they match
+from the opposite parity flag. In the following examples, we assume that we are
+currently matching the 2nd frame (Top:2, bottom:2). According to the match, a
+’x’ is placed above and below each matched fields.
+
+
With bottom matching (field =bottom ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 1 2 2 2
+ 2 2 2 1 3
+
+
+
With top matching (field =top ):
+
+
Match: c p n b u
+
+ x x x x x
+ Top 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
+ Bottom 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
+ x x x x x
+
+Output frames:
+ 2 2 2 1 2
+ 2 1 3 2 2
+
+
+
+
30.31.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
Simple IVTC of a top field first telecined stream:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=none, decimate
+
+
+
Advanced IVTC, with fallback on yadif for still combed frames:
+
+
fieldmatch=order=tff:combmatch=full, yadif=deint=interlaced, decimate
+
+
+
+
30.32 fieldorder# TOC
+
+
Transform the field order of the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+order The output field order. Valid values are tff for top field first or bff
+for bottom field first.
+
+
+
The default value is ‘tff ’.
+
+
The transformation is done by shifting the picture content up or down
+by one line, and filling the remaining line with appropriate picture content.
+This method is consistent with most broadcast field order converters.
+
+
If the input video is not flagged as being interlaced, or it is already
+flagged as being of the required output field order, then this filter does
+not alter the incoming video.
+
+
It is very useful when converting to or from PAL DV material,
+which is bottom field first.
+
+
For example:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.vob -vf "fieldorder=bff" out.dv
+
+
+
+
30.33 fifo# TOC
+
+
Buffer input images and send them when they are requested.
+
+
It is mainly useful when auto-inserted by the libavfilter
+framework.
+
+
It does not take parameters.
+
+
+
30.34 format# TOC
+
+
Convert the input video to one of the specified pixel formats.
+Libavfilter will try to pick one that is suitable as input to
+the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+"pix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
30.34.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.35 fps# TOC
+
+
Convert the video to specified constant frame rate by duplicating or dropping
+frames as necessary.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+fps The desired output frame rate. The default is 25.
+
+round Rounding method.
+
+Possible values are:
+
+zero zero round towards 0
+
inf round away from 0
+
down round towards -infinity
+
up round towards +infinity
+
near round to nearest
+
+The default is near.
+
+start_time Assume the first PTS should be the given value, in seconds. This allows for
+padding/trimming at the start of stream. By default, no assumption is made
+about the first frame’s expected PTS, so no padding or trimming is done.
+For example, this could be set to 0 to pad the beginning with duplicates of
+the first frame if a video stream starts after the audio stream or to trim any
+frames with a negative PTS.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+fps [:round ].
+
+
See also the setpts filter.
+
+
+
30.35.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ A typical usage in order to set the fps to 25:
+
+
+ Sets the fps to 24, using abbreviation and rounding method to round to nearest:
+
+
fps=fps=film:round=near
+
+
+
+
30.36 framepack# TOC
+
+
Pack two different video streams into a stereoscopic video, setting proper
+metadata on supported codecs. The two views should have the same size and
+framerate and processing will stop when the shorter video ends. Please note
+that you may conveniently adjust view properties with the scale and
+fps filters.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+format The desired packing format. Supported values are:
+
+
+sbs The views are next to each other (default).
+
+tab The views are on top of each other.
+
+lines The views are packed by line.
+
+columns The views are packed by column.
+
+frameseq The views are temporally interleaved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
# Convert left and right views into a frame-sequential video
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex framepack=frameseq OUTPUT
+
+# Convert views into a side-by-side video with the same output resolution as the input
+ffmpeg -i LEFT -i RIGHT -filter_complex [0:v]scale=w=iw/2[left],[1:v]scale=w=iw/2[right],[left][right]framepack=sbs OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
30.37 framestep# TOC
+
+
Select one frame every N-th frame.
+
+
This filter accepts the following option:
+
+step Select frame after every step frames.
+Allowed values are positive integers higher than 0. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
30.38 frei0r# TOC
+
+
Apply a frei0r effect to the input video.
+
+
To enable the compilation of this filter, you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the frei0r effect to load. If the environment variable
+FREI0R_PATH is defined, the frei0r effect is searched for in each of the
+directories specified by the colon-separated list in FREIOR_PATH.
+Otherwise, the standard frei0r paths are searched, in this order:
+HOME/.frei0r-1/lib/ , /usr/local/lib/frei0r-1/ ,
+/usr/lib/frei0r-1/ .
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r effect.
+
+
+
+
A frei0r effect parameter can be a boolean (its value is either
+"y" or "n"), a double, a color (specified as
+R /G /B , where R , G , and B are floating point
+numbers between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive) or by a color description specified in the "Color"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual), a position (specified as X /Y , where
+X and Y are floating point numbers) and/or a string.
+
+
The number and types of parameters depend on the loaded effect. If an
+effect parameter is not specified, the default value is set.
+
+
+
30.38.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the distort0r effect, setting the first two double parameters:
+
+
frei0r=filter_name=distort0r:filter_params=0.5|0.01
+ Apply the colordistance effect, taking a color as the first parameter:
+
+
frei0r=colordistance:0.2/0.3/0.4
+frei0r=colordistance:violet
+frei0r=colordistance:0x112233
+ Apply the perspective effect, specifying the top left and top right image
+positions:
+
+
frei0r=perspective:0.2/0.2|0.8/0.2
+
+
+
For more information, see
+http://frei0r.dyne.org
+
+
+
30.39 fspp# TOC
+
+
Apply fast and simple postprocessing. It is a faster version of spp .
+
+
It splits (I)DCT into horizontal/vertical passes. Unlike the simple post-
+processing filter, one of them is performed once per block, not per pixel.
+This allows for much higher speed.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 4-5. Default value is 4.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range 0-63.
+If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream (if available).
+
+strength Set filter strength. It accepts an integer in range -15 to 32. Lower values mean
+more details but also more artifacts, while higher values make the image smoother
+but also blurrier. Default value is 0 − PSNR optimal.
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
+
30.40 geq# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+lum_expr, lum Set the luminance expression.
+
cb_expr, cb Set the chrominance blue expression.
+
cr_expr, cr Set the chrominance red expression.
+
alpha_expr, a Set the alpha expression.
+
red_expr, r Set the red expression.
+
green_expr, g Set the green expression.
+
blue_expr, b Set the blue expression.
+
+
+
The colorspace is selected according to the specified options. If one
+of the lum_expr , cb_expr , or cr_expr
+options is specified, the filter will automatically select a YCbCr
+colorspace. If one of the red_expr , green_expr , or
+blue_expr options is specified, it will select an RGB
+colorspace.
+
+
If one of the chrominance expression is not defined, it falls back on the other
+one. If no alpha expression is specified it will evaluate to opaque value.
+If none of chrominance expressions are specified, they will evaluate
+to the luminance expression.
+
+
The expressions can use the following variables and functions:
+
+
+N The sequential number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+X Y The coordinates of the current sample.
+
+W H The width and height of the image.
+
+SW SH Width and height scale depending on the currently filtered plane. It is the
+ratio between the corresponding luma plane number of pixels and the current
+plane ones. E.g. for YUV4:2:0 the values are 1,1 for the luma plane, and
+0.5,0.5 for chroma planes.
+
+T Time of the current frame, expressed in seconds.
+
+p(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the current
+plane.
+
+lum(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the luminance
+plane.
+
+cb(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+blue-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+cr(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red-difference chroma plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+r(x, y) g(x, y) b(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the
+red/green/blue component. Return 0 if there is no such component.
+
+alpha(x, y) Return the value of the pixel at location (x ,y ) of the alpha
+plane. Return 0 if there is no such plane.
+
+
+
For functions, if x and y are outside the area, the value will be
+automatically clipped to the closer edge.
+
+
+
30.40.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Flip the image horizontally:
+
+
+ Generate a bidimensional sine wave, with angle PI/3 and a
+wavelength of 100 pixels:
+
+
geq=128 + 100*sin(2*(PI/100)*(cos(PI/3)*(X-50*T) + sin(PI/3)*Y)):128:128
+ Generate a fancy enigmatic moving light:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256,geq=random(1)/hypot(X-cos(N*0.07)*W/2-W/2\,Y-sin(N*0.09)*H/2-H/2)^2*1000000*sin(N*0.02):128:128
+ Generate a quick emboss effect:
+
+
format=gray,geq=lum_expr='(p(X,Y)+(256-p(X-4,Y-4)))/2'
+ Modify RGB components depending on pixel position:
+
+
geq=r='X/W*r(X,Y)':g='(1-X/W)*g(X,Y)':b='(H-Y)/H*b(X,Y)'
+ Create a radial gradient that is the same size as the input (also see
+the vignette filter):
+
+
geq=lum=255*gauss((X/W-0.5)*3)*gauss((Y/H-0.5)*3)/gauss(0)/gauss(0),format=gray
+ Create a linear gradient to use as a mask for another filter, then
+compose with overlay . In this example the video will gradually
+become more blurry from the top to the bottom of the y-axis as defined
+by the linear gradient:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.mp4 -filter_complex "geq=lum=255*(Y/H),format=gray[grad];[0:v]boxblur=4[blur];[blur][grad]alphamerge[alpha];[0:v][alpha]overlay" output.mp4
+
+
+
+
30.41 gradfun# TOC
+
+
Fix the banding artifacts that are sometimes introduced into nearly flat
+regions by truncation to 8bit color depth.
+Interpolate the gradients that should go where the bands are, and
+dither them.
+
+
It is designed for playback only. Do not use it prior to
+lossy compression, because compression tends to lose the dither and
+bring back the bands.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+strength The maximum amount by which the filter will change any one pixel. This is also
+the threshold for detecting nearly flat regions. Acceptable values range from
+.51 to 64; the default value is 1.2. Out-of-range values will be clipped to the
+valid range.
+
+radius The neighborhood to fit the gradient to. A larger radius makes for smoother
+gradients, but also prevents the filter from modifying the pixels near detailed
+regions. Acceptable values are 8-32; the default value is 16. Out-of-range
+values will be clipped to the valid range.
+
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string:
+strength [:radius ]
+
+
+
30.41.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply the filter with a 3.5 strength and radius of 8:
+
+
+ Specify radius, omitting the strength (which will fall-back to the default
+value):
+
+
+
+
+
+
30.42 haldclut# TOC
+
+
Apply a Hald CLUT to a video stream.
+
+
First input is the video stream to process, and second one is the Hald CLUT.
+The Hald CLUT input can be a simple picture or a complete video stream.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+shortest Force termination when the shortest input terminates. Default is 0.
+
repeatlast Continue applying the last CLUT after the end of the stream. A value of
+0 disable the filter after the last frame of the CLUT is reached.
+Default is 1.
+
+
+
haldclut also has the same interpolation options as lut3d (both
+filters share the same internals).
+
+
More information about the Hald CLUT can be found on Eskil Steenberg’s website
+(Hald CLUT author) at http://www.quelsolaar.com/technology/clut.html .
+
+
+
30.42.1 Workflow examples# TOC
+
+
+
30.42.1.1 Hald CLUT video stream# TOC
+
+
Generate an identity Hald CLUT stream altered with various effects:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "hue=H=2*PI*t:s=sin(2*PI*t)+1, curves=cross_process" -t 10 -c:v ffv1 clut.nut
+
+
+
Note: make sure you use a lossless codec.
+
+
Then use it with haldclut to apply it on some random stream:
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i mandelbrot -i clut.nut -filter_complex '[0][1] haldclut' -t 20 mandelclut.mkv
+
+
+
The Hald CLUT will be applied to the 10 first seconds (duration of
+clut.nut ), then the latest picture of that CLUT stream will be applied
+to the remaining frames of the mandelbrot stream.
+
+
+
30.42.1.2 Hald CLUT with preview# TOC
+
+
A Hald CLUT is supposed to be a squared image of Level*Level*Level by
+Level*Level*Level pixels. For a given Hald CLUT, FFmpeg will select the
+biggest possible square starting at the top left of the picture. The remaining
+padding pixels (bottom or right) will be ignored. This area can be used to add
+a preview of the Hald CLUT.
+
+
Typically, the following generated Hald CLUT will be supported by the
+haldclut filter:
+
+
+
ffmpeg -f lavfi -i haldclutsrc =8 -vf "
+ pad=iw+320 [padded_clut];
+ smptebars=s=320x256, split [a][b];
+ [padded_clut][a] overlay=W-320:h, curves=color_negative [main];
+ [main][b] overlay=W-320" -frames:v 1 clut.png
+
+
+
It contains the original and a preview of the effect of the CLUT: SMPTE color
+bars are displayed on the right-top, and below the same color bars processed by
+the color changes.
+
+
Then, the effect of this Hald CLUT can be visualized with:
+
+
ffplay input.mkv -vf "movie=clut.png, [in] haldclut"
+
+
+
+
30.43 hflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video horizontally.
+
+
For example, to horizontally flip the input video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "hflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
30.44 histeq# TOC
+
This filter applies a global color histogram equalization on a
+per-frame basis.
+
+
It can be used to correct video that has a compressed range of pixel
+intensities. The filter redistributes the pixel intensities to
+equalize their distribution across the intensity range. It may be
+viewed as an "automatically adjusting contrast filter". This filter is
+useful only for correcting degraded or poorly captured source
+video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+strength Determine the amount of equalization to be applied. As the strength
+is reduced, the distribution of pixel intensities more-and-more
+approaches that of the input frame. The value must be a float number
+in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.200.
+
+intensity Set the maximum intensity that can generated and scale the output
+values appropriately. The strength should be set as desired and then
+the intensity can be limited if needed to avoid washing-out. The value
+must be a float number in the range [0,1] and defaults to 0.210.
+
+antibanding Set the antibanding level. If enabled the filter will randomly vary
+the luminance of output pixels by a small amount to avoid banding of
+the histogram. Possible values are none, weak or
+strong. It defaults to none.
+
+
+
+
30.45 histogram# TOC
+
+
Compute and draw a color distribution histogram for the input video.
+
+
The computed histogram is a representation of the color component
+distribution in an image.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Set histogram mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘levels ’
+Standard histogram that displays the color components distribution in an
+image. Displays color graph for each color component. Shows distribution of
+the Y, U, V, A or R, G, B components, depending on input format, in the
+current frame. Below each graph a color component scale meter is shown.
+
+‘color ’
+Displays chroma values (U/V color placement) in a two dimensional
+graph (which is called a vectorscope). The brighter a pixel in the
+vectorscope, the more pixels of the input frame correspond to that pixel
+(i.e., more pixels have this chroma value). The V component is displayed on
+the horizontal (X) axis, with the leftmost side being V = 0 and the rightmost
+side being V = 255. The U component is displayed on the vertical (Y) axis,
+with the top representing U = 0 and the bottom representing U = 255.
+
+The position of a white pixel in the graph corresponds to the chroma value of
+a pixel of the input clip. The graph can therefore be used to read the hue
+(color flavor) and the saturation (the dominance of the hue in the color). As
+the hue of a color changes, it moves around the square. At the center of the
+square the saturation is zero, which means that the corresponding pixel has no
+color. If the amount of a specific color is increased (while leaving the other
+colors unchanged) the saturation increases, and the indicator moves towards
+the edge of the square.
+
+‘color2 ’
+Chroma values in vectorscope, similar as color but actual chroma values
+are displayed.
+
+‘waveform ’
+Per row/column color component graph. In row mode, the graph on the left side
+represents color component value 0 and the right side represents value = 255.
+In column mode, the top side represents color component value = 0 and bottom
+side represents value = 255.
+
+Default value is levels.
+
+level_height Set height of level in levels. Default value is 200.
+Allowed range is [50, 2048].
+
+scale_height Set height of color scale in levels. Default value is 12.
+Allowed range is [0, 40].
+
+step Set step for waveform mode. Smaller values are useful to find out how
+many values of the same luminance are distributed across input rows/columns.
+Default value is 10. Allowed range is [1, 255].
+
+waveform_mode Set mode for waveform. Can be either row, or column.
+Default is row.
+
+waveform_mirror Set mirroring mode for waveform. 0 means unmirrored, 1
+means mirrored. In mirrored mode, higher values will be represented on the left
+side for row mode and at the top for column mode. Default is
+0 (unmirrored).
+
+display_mode Set display mode for waveform and levels.
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘parade ’
+Display separate graph for the color components side by side in
+row waveform mode or one below the other in column waveform mode
+for waveform histogram mode. For levels histogram mode,
+per color component graphs are placed below each other.
+
+Using this display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easy to
+spot color casts in the highlights and shadows of an image, by comparing the
+contours of the top and the bottom graphs of each waveform. Since whites,
+grays, and blacks are characterized by exactly equal amounts of red, green,
+and blue, neutral areas of the picture should display three waveforms of
+roughly equal width/height. If not, the correction is easy to perform by
+making level adjustments the three waveforms.
+
+‘overlay ’
+Presents information identical to that in the parade, except
+that the graphs representing color components are superimposed directly
+over one another.
+
+This display mode in waveform histogram mode makes it easier to spot
+relative differences or similarities in overlapping areas of the color
+components that are supposed to be identical, such as neutral whites, grays,
+or blacks.
+
+Default is parade.
+
+levels_mode Set mode for levels. Can be either linear, or logarithmic.
+Default is linear.
+
+
+
+
30.45.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Calculate and draw histogram:
+
+
ffplay -i input -vf histogram
+
+
+
+
30.46 hqdn3d# TOC
+
+
This is a high precision/quality 3d denoise filter. It aims to reduce
+image noise, producing smooth images and making still images really
+still. It should enhance compressibility.
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+luma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial luma strength.
+It defaults to 4.0.
+
+chroma_spatial A non-negative floating point number which specifies spatial chroma strength.
+It defaults to 3.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+luma_tmp A floating point number which specifies luma temporal strength. It defaults to
+6.0*luma_spatial /4.0.
+
+chroma_tmp A floating point number which specifies chroma temporal strength. It defaults to
+luma_tmp *chroma_spatial /luma_spatial .
+
+
+
+
30.47 hqx# TOC
+
+
Apply a high-quality magnification filter designed for pixel art. This filter
+was originally created by Maxim Stepin.
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for hq2x, 3 for
+hq3x and 4 for hq4x.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
30.48 hue# TOC
+
+
Modify the hue and/or the saturation of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+h Specify the hue angle as a number of degrees. It accepts an expression,
+and defaults to "0".
+
+s Specify the saturation in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "1".
+
+H Specify the hue angle as a number of radians. It accepts an
+expression, and defaults to "0".
+
+b Specify the brightness in the [-10,10] range. It accepts an expression and
+defaults to "0".
+
+
+
h and H are mutually exclusive, and can’t be
+specified at the same time.
+
+
The b , h , H and s option values are
+expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+n frame count of the input frame starting from 0
+
+pts presentation timestamp of the input frame expressed in time base units
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t timestamp expressed in seconds, NAN if the input timestamp is unknown
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
30.48.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.48.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+b s h H Modify the hue and/or the saturation and/or brightness of the input video.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
30.49 idet# TOC
+
+
Detect video interlacing type.
+
+
This filter tries to detect if the input frames as interlaced, progressive,
+top or bottom field first. It will also try and detect fields that are
+repeated between adjacent frames (a sign of telecine).
+
+
Single frame detection considers only immediately adjacent frames when classifying each frame.
+Multiple frame detection incorporates the classification history of previous frames.
+
+
The filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+single.current_frame Detected type of current frame using single-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+single.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.tff Cumulative number of frames detected as top field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.current_frame Detected type of current frame using multiple-frame detection. One of:
+“tff” (top field first), “bff” (bottom field first),
+“progressive”, or “undetermined”
+
+multiple.bff Cumulative number of frames detected as bottom field first using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.progressive Cumulative number of frames detected as progressive using multiple-frame detection.
+
+single.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using single-frame detection.
+
+multiple.undetermined Cumulative number of frames that could not be classified using multiple-frame detection.
+
+repeated.current_frame Which field in the current frame is repeated from the last. One of “neither”, “top”, or “bottom”.
+
+repeated.neither Cumulative number of frames with no repeated field.
+
+repeated.top Cumulative number of frames with the top field repeated from the previous frame’s top field.
+
+repeated.bottom Cumulative number of frames with the bottom field repeated from the previous frame’s bottom field.
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+intl_thres Set interlacing threshold.
+
prog_thres Set progressive threshold.
+
repeat_thres Threshold for repeated field detection.
+
half_life Number of frames after which a given frame’s contribution to the
+statistics is halved (i.e., it contributes only 0.5 to it’s
+classification). The default of 0 means that all frames seen are given
+full weight of 1.0 forever.
+
analyze_interlaced_flag When this is not 0 then idet will use the specified number of frames to determine
+if the interlaced flag is accurate, it will not count undetermined frames.
+If the flag is found to be accurate it will be used without any further
+computations, if it is found to be inaccuarte it will be cleared without any
+further computations. This allows inserting the idet filter as a low computational
+method to clean up the interlaced flag
+
+
+
+
30.50 il# TOC
+
+
Deinterleave or interleave fields.
+
+
This filter allows one to process interlaced images fields without
+deinterlacing them. Deinterleaving splits the input frame into 2
+fields (so called half pictures). Odd lines are moved to the top
+half of the output image, even lines to the bottom half.
+You can process (filter) them independently and then re-interleave them.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_mode, l chroma_mode, c alpha_mode, a Available values for luma_mode , chroma_mode and
+alpha_mode are:
+
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing.
+
+‘deinterleave, d ’
+Deinterleave fields, placing one above the other.
+
+‘interleave, i ’
+Interleave fields. Reverse the effect of deinterleaving.
+
+Default value is none.
+
+luma_swap, ls chroma_swap, cs alpha_swap, as Swap luma/chroma/alpha fields. Exchange even & odd lines. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
30.51 interlace# TOC
+
+
Simple interlacing filter from progressive contents. This interleaves upper (or
+lower) lines from odd frames with lower (or upper) lines from even frames,
+halving the frame rate and preserving image height.
+
+
+
Original Original New Frame
+ Frame 'j' Frame 'j+1' (tff)
+ ========== =========== ==================
+ Line 0 --------------------> Frame 'j' Line 0
+ Line 1 Line 1 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 1
+ Line 2 ---------------------> Frame 'j' Line 2
+ Line 3 Line 3 ----> Frame 'j+1' Line 3
+ ... ... ...
+New Frame + 1 will be generated by Frame 'j+2' and Frame 'j+3' and so on
+
+
+
It accepts the following optional parameters:
+
+
+scan This determines whether the interlaced frame is taken from the even
+(tff - default) or odd (bff) lines of the progressive frame.
+
+lowpass Enable (default) or disable the vertical lowpass filter to avoid twitter
+interlacing and reduce moire patterns.
+
+
+
+
30.52 kerndeint# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace input video by applying Donald Graft’s adaptive kernel
+deinterling. Work on interlaced parts of a video to produce
+progressive frames.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+thresh Set the threshold which affects the filter’s tolerance when
+determining if a pixel line must be processed. It must be an integer
+in the range [0,255] and defaults to 10. A value of 0 will result in
+applying the process on every pixels.
+
+map Paint pixels exceeding the threshold value to white if set to 1.
+Default is 0.
+
+order Set the fields order. Swap fields if set to 1, leave fields alone if
+0. Default is 0.
+
+sharp Enable additional sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+twoway Enable twoway sharpening if set to 1. Default is 0.
+
+
+
+
30.52.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply default values:
+
+
kerndeint=thresh=10:map=0:order=0:sharp=0:twoway=0
+ Enable additional sharpening:
+
+
+ Paint processed pixels in white:
+
+
+
+
+
30.53 lenscorrection# TOC
+
+
Correct radial lens distortion
+
+
This filter can be used to correct for radial distortion as can result from the use
+of wide angle lenses, and thereby re-rectify the image. To find the right parameters
+one can use tools available for example as part of opencv or simply trial-and-error.
+To use opencv use the calibration sample (under samples/cpp) from the opencv sources
+and extract the k1 and k2 coefficients from the resulting matrix.
+
+
Note that effectively the same filter is available in the open-source tools Krita and
+Digikam from the KDE project.
+
+
In contrast to the vignette filter, which can also be used to compensate lens errors,
+this filter corrects the distortion of the image, whereas vignette corrects the
+brightness distribution, so you may want to use both filters together in certain
+cases, though you will have to take care of ordering, i.e. whether vignetting should
+be applied before or after lens correction.
+
+
+
30.53.1 Options# TOC
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+cx Relative x-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+width.
+
cy Relative y-coordinate of the focal point of the image, and thereby the center of the
+distortion. This value has a range [0,1] and is expressed as fractions of the image
+height.
+
k1 Coefficient of the quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
k2 Coefficient of the double quadratic correction term. 0.5 means no correction.
+
+
+
The formula that generates the correction is:
+
+
r_src = r_tgt * (1 + k1 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^2 + k2 * (r_tgt / r_0 )^4)
+
+
where r_0 is halve of the image diagonal and r_src and r_tgt are the
+distances from the focal point in the source and target images, respectively.
+
+
+
30.54 lut3d# TOC
+
+
Apply a 3D LUT to an input video.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+file Set the 3D LUT file name.
+
+Currently supported formats:
+
+‘3dl ’
+AfterEffects
+
‘cube ’
+Iridas
+
‘dat ’
+DaVinci
+
‘m3d ’
+Pandora
+
+interp Select interpolation mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘nearest ’
+Use values from the nearest defined point.
+
‘trilinear ’
+Interpolate values using the 8 points defining a cube.
+
‘tetrahedral ’
+Interpolate values using a tetrahedron.
+
+
+
+
+
30.55 lut, lutrgb, lutyuv# TOC
+
+
Compute a look-up table for binding each pixel component input value
+to an output value, and apply it to the input video.
+
+
lutyuv applies a lookup table to a YUV input video, lutrgb
+to an RGB input video.
+
+
These filters accept the following parameters:
+
+c0 set first pixel component expression
+
c1 set second pixel component expression
+
c2 set third pixel component expression
+
c3 set fourth pixel component expression, corresponds to the alpha component
+
+r set red component expression
+
g set green component expression
+
b set blue component expression
+
a alpha component expression
+
+y set Y/luminance component expression
+
u set U/Cb component expression
+
v set V/Cr component expression
+
+
+
Each of them specifies the expression to use for computing the lookup table for
+the corresponding pixel component values.
+
+
The exact component associated to each of the c* options depends on the
+format in input.
+
+
The lut filter requires either YUV or RGB pixel formats in input,
+lutrgb requires RGB pixel formats in input, and lutyuv requires YUV.
+
+
The expressions can contain the following constants and functions:
+
+
+w h The input width and height.
+
+val The input value for the pixel component.
+
+clipval The input value, clipped to the minval -maxval range.
+
+maxval The maximum value for the pixel component.
+
+minval The minimum value for the pixel component.
+
+negval The negated value for the pixel component value, clipped to the
+minval -maxval range; it corresponds to the expression
+"maxval-clipval+minval".
+
+clip(val) The computed value in val , clipped to the
+minval -maxval range.
+
+gammaval(gamma) The computed gamma correction value of the pixel component value,
+clipped to the minval -maxval range. It corresponds to the
+expression
+"pow((clipval-minval)/(maxval-minval)\,gamma )*(maxval-minval)+minval"
+
+
+
+
All expressions default to "val".
+
+
+
30.55.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.56 mergeplanes# TOC
+
+
Merge color channel components from several video streams.
+
+
The filter accepts up to 4 input streams, and merge selected input
+planes to the output video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mapping Set input to output plane mapping. Default is 0.
+
+The mappings is specified as a bitmap. It should be specified as a
+hexadecimal number in the form 0xAa[Bb[Cc[Dd]]]. ’Aa’ describes the
+mapping for the first plane of the output stream. ’A’ sets the number of
+the input stream to use (from 0 to 3), and ’a’ the plane number of the
+corresponding input to use (from 0 to 3). The rest of the mappings is
+similar, ’Bb’ describes the mapping for the output stream second
+plane, ’Cc’ describes the mapping for the output stream third plane and
+’Dd’ describes the mapping for the output stream fourth plane.
+
+format Set output pixel format. Default is yuva444p.
+
+
+
+
30.56.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Merge three gray video streams of same width and height into single video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1][a2]mergeplanes=0x001020:yuv444p
+ Merge 1st yuv444p stream and 2nd gray video stream into yuva444p video stream:
+
+
[a0][a1]mergeplanes=0x00010210:yuva444p
+ Swap Y and A plane in yuva444p stream:
+
+
format=yuva444p,mergeplanes=0x03010200:yuva444p
+ Swap U and V plane in yuv420p stream:
+
+
format=yuv420p,mergeplanes=0x000201:yuv420p
+ Cast a rgb24 clip to yuv444p:
+
+
format=rgb24,mergeplanes=0x000102:yuv444p
+
+
+
+
30.57 mcdeint# TOC
+
+
Apply motion-compensation deinterlacing.
+
+
It needs one field per frame as input and must thus be used together
+with yadif=1/3 or equivalent.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+mode Set the deinterlacing mode.
+
+It accepts one of the following values:
+
+‘fast ’
+‘medium ’
+‘slow ’
+use iterative motion estimation
+
‘extra_slow ’
+like ‘slow ’, but use multiple reference frames.
+
+Default value is ‘fast ’.
+
+parity Set the picture field parity assumed for the input video. It must be
+one of the following values:
+
+
+‘0, tff ’
+assume top field first
+
‘1, bff ’
+assume bottom field first
+
+
+Default value is ‘bff ’.
+
+qp Set per-block quantization parameter (QP) used by the internal
+encoder.
+
+Higher values should result in a smoother motion vector field but less
+optimal individual vectors. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
30.58 mp# TOC
+
+
Apply an MPlayer filter to the input video.
+
+
This filter provides a wrapper around some of the filters of
+MPlayer/MEncoder.
+
+
This wrapper is considered experimental. Some of the wrapped filters
+may not work properly and we may drop support for them, as they will
+be implemented natively into FFmpeg. Thus you should avoid
+depending on them when writing portable scripts.
+
+
The filter accepts the parameters:
+filter_name [:=]filter_params
+
+
filter_name is the name of a supported MPlayer filter,
+filter_params is a string containing the parameters accepted by
+the named filter.
+
+
The list of the currently supported filters follows:
+
+eq2 eq ilpack softpulldown
+
+
The parameter syntax and behavior for the listed filters are the same
+of the corresponding MPlayer filters. For detailed instructions check
+the "VIDEO FILTERS" section in the MPlayer manual.
+
+
+
30.58.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Adjust gamma, brightness, contrast:
+
+
+
+
See also mplayer(1), http://www.mplayerhq.hu/ .
+
+
+
30.59 mpdecimate# TOC
+
+
Drop frames that do not differ greatly from the previous frame in
+order to reduce frame rate.
+
+
The main use of this filter is for very-low-bitrate encoding
+(e.g. streaming over dialup modem), but it could in theory be used for
+fixing movies that were inverse-telecined incorrectly.
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+max Set the maximum number of consecutive frames which can be dropped (if
+positive), or the minimum interval between dropped frames (if
+negative). If the value is 0, the frame is dropped unregarding the
+number of previous sequentially dropped frames.
+
+Default value is 0.
+
+hi lo frac Set the dropping threshold values.
+
+Values for hi and lo are for 8x8 pixel blocks and
+represent actual pixel value differences, so a threshold of 64
+corresponds to 1 unit of difference for each pixel, or the same spread
+out differently over the block.
+
+A frame is a candidate for dropping if no 8x8 blocks differ by more
+than a threshold of hi , and if no more than frac blocks (1
+meaning the whole image) differ by more than a threshold of lo .
+
+Default value for hi is 64*12, default value for lo is
+64*5, and default value for frac is 0.33.
+
+
+
+
+
30.60 negate# TOC
+
+
Negate input video.
+
+
It accepts an integer in input; if non-zero it negates the
+alpha component (if available). The default value in input is 0.
+
+
+
30.61 noformat# TOC
+
+
Force libavfilter not to use any of the specified pixel formats for the
+input to the next filter.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+pix_fmts A ’|’-separated list of pixel format names, such as
+apix_fmts=yuv420p|monow|rgb24".
+
+
+
+
+
30.61.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Force libavfilter to use a format different from yuv420p for the
+input to the vflip filter:
+
+
noformat=pix_fmts=yuv420p,vflip
+ Convert the input video to any of the formats not contained in the list:
+
+
noformat=yuv420p|yuv444p|yuv410p
+
+
+
+
30.62 noise# TOC
+
+
Add noise on video input frame.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+all_seed c0_seed c1_seed c2_seed c3_seed Set noise seed for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+of all_seed . Default value is 123457.
+
+all_strength, alls c0_strength, c0s c1_strength, c1s c2_strength, c2s c3_strength, c3s Set noise strength for specific pixel component or all pixel components in case
+all_strength . Default value is 0. Allowed range is [0, 100].
+
+all_flags, allf c0_flags, c0f c1_flags, c1f c2_flags, c2f c3_flags, c3f Set pixel component flags or set flags for all components if all_flags .
+Available values for component flags are:
+
+‘a ’
+averaged temporal noise (smoother)
+
‘p ’
+mix random noise with a (semi)regular pattern
+
‘t ’
+temporal noise (noise pattern changes between frames)
+
‘u ’
+uniform noise (gaussian otherwise)
+
+
+
+
+
30.62.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Add temporal and uniform noise to input video:
+
+
noise=alls=20:allf=t+u
+
+
+
+
30.63 null# TOC
+
+
Pass the video source unchanged to the output.
+
+
+
30.64 ocv# TOC
+
+
Apply a video transform using libopencv.
+
+
To enable this filter, install the libopencv library and headers and
+configure FFmpeg with --enable-libopencv.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filter_name The name of the libopencv filter to apply.
+
+filter_params The parameters to pass to the libopencv filter. If not specified, the default
+values are assumed.
+
+
+
+
Refer to the official libopencv documentation for more precise
+information:
+http://docs.opencv.org/master/modules/imgproc/doc/filtering.html
+
+
Several libopencv filters are supported; see the following subsections.
+
+
+
30.64.1 dilate# TOC
+
+
Dilate an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvDilate.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el |nb_iterations .
+
+
struct_el represents a structuring element, and has the syntax:
+cols xrows +anchor_x xanchor_y /shape
+
+
cols and rows represent the number of columns and rows of
+the structuring element, anchor_x and anchor_y the anchor
+point, and shape the shape for the structuring element. shape
+must be "rect", "cross", "ellipse", or "custom".
+
+
If the value for shape is "custom", it must be followed by a
+string of the form "=filename ". The file with name
+filename is assumed to represent a binary image, with each
+printable character corresponding to a bright pixel. When a custom
+shape is used, cols and rows are ignored, the number
+or columns and rows of the read file are assumed instead.
+
+
The default value for struct_el is "3x3+0x0/rect".
+
+
nb_iterations specifies the number of times the transform is
+applied to the image, and defaults to 1.
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
# Use the default values
+ocv=dilate
+
+# Dilate using a structuring element with a 5x5 cross, iterating two times
+ocv=filter_name=dilate:filter_params=5x5+2x2/cross|2
+
+# Read the shape from the file diamond.shape, iterating two times.
+# The file diamond.shape may contain a pattern of characters like this
+# *
+# ***
+# *****
+# ***
+# *
+# The specified columns and rows are ignored
+# but the anchor point coordinates are not
+ocv=dilate:0x0+2x2/custom=diamond.shape|2
+
+
+
+
30.64.2 erode# TOC
+
+
Erode an image by using a specific structuring element.
+It corresponds to the libopencv function cvErode.
+
+
It accepts the parameters: struct_el :nb_iterations ,
+with the same syntax and semantics as the dilate filter.
+
+
+
30.64.3 smooth# TOC
+
+
Smooth the input video.
+
+
The filter takes the following parameters:
+type |param1 |param2 |param3 |param4 .
+
+
type is the type of smooth filter to apply, and must be one of
+the following values: "blur", "blur_no_scale", "median", "gaussian",
+or "bilateral". The default value is "gaussian".
+
+
The meaning of param1 , param2 , param3 , and param4
+depend on the smooth type. param1 and
+param2 accept integer positive values or 0. param3 and
+param4 accept floating point values.
+
+
The default value for param1 is 3. The default value for the
+other parameters is 0.
+
+
These parameters correspond to the parameters assigned to the
+libopencv function cvSmooth.
+
+
+
30.65 overlay# TOC
+
+
Overlay one video on top of another.
+
+
It takes two inputs and has one output. The first input is the "main"
+video on which the second input is overlaid.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+x y Set the expression for the x and y coordinates of the overlaid video
+on the main video. Default value is "0" for both expressions. In case
+the expression is invalid, it is set to a huge value (meaning that the
+overlay will not be displayed within the output visible area).
+
+eof_action The action to take when EOF is encountered on the secondary input; it accepts
+one of the following values:
+
+
+repeat Repeat the last frame (the default).
+
endall End both streams.
+
pass Pass the main input through.
+
+
+eval Set when the expressions for x , and y are evaluated.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+only evaluate expressions once during the filter initialization or
+when a command is processed
+
+‘frame ’
+evaluate expressions for each incoming frame
+
+
+Default value is ‘frame ’.
+
+shortest If set to 1, force the output to terminate when the shortest input
+terminates. Default value is 0.
+
+format Set the format for the output video.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘yuv420 ’
+force YUV420 output
+
+‘yuv422 ’
+force YUV422 output
+
+‘yuv444 ’
+force YUV444 output
+
+‘rgb ’
+force RGB output
+
+
+Default value is ‘yuv420 ’.
+
+rgb (deprecated) If set to 1, force the filter to accept inputs in the RGB
+color space. Default value is 0. This option is deprecated, use
+format instead.
+
+repeatlast If set to 1, force the filter to draw the last overlay frame over the
+main input until the end of the stream. A value of 0 disables this
+behavior. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The x , and y expressions can contain the following
+parameters.
+
+
+main_w, W main_h, H The main input width and height.
+
+overlay_w, w overlay_h, h The overlay input width and height.
+
+x y The computed values for x and y . They are evaluated for
+each new frame.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values of the output
+format. For example for the pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and
+vsub is 1.
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pos the position in the file of the input frame, NAN if unknown
+
+t The timestamp, expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if the input timestamp is unknown.
+
+
+
+
Note that the n , pos , t variables are available only
+when evaluation is done per frame , and will evaluate to NAN
+when eval is set to ‘init ’.
+
+
Be aware that frames are taken from each input video in timestamp
+order, hence, if their initial timestamps differ, it is a good idea
+to pass the two inputs through a setpts=PTS-STARTPTS filter to
+have them begin in the same zero timestamp, as the example for
+the movie filter does.
+
+
You can chain together more overlays but you should test the
+efficiency of such approach.
+
+
+
30.65.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
This filter supports the following commands:
+
+x y Modify the x and y of the overlay input.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
30.65.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.66 owdenoise# TOC
+
+
Apply Overcomplete Wavelet denoiser.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+depth Set depth.
+
+Larger depth values will denoise lower frequency components more, but
+slow down filtering.
+
+Must be an int in the range 8-16, default is 8.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma strength.
+
+Must be a double value in the range 0-1000, default is 1.0.
+
+
+
+
30.67 pad# TOC
+
+
Add paddings to the input image, and place the original input at the
+provided x , y coordinates.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+width, w height, h Specify an expression for the size of the output image with the
+paddings added. If the value for width or height is 0, the
+corresponding input size is used for the output.
+
+The width expression can reference the value set by the
+height expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of width and height is 0.
+
+x y Specify the offsets to place the input image at within the padded area,
+with respect to the top/left border of the output image.
+
+The x expression can reference the value set by the y
+expression, and vice versa.
+
+The default value of x and y is 0.
+
+color Specify the color of the padded area. For the syntax of this option,
+check the "Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+The default value of color is "black".
+
+
+
The value for the width , height , x , and y
+options are expressions containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input video width and height.
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output width and height (the size of the padded area), as
+specified by the width and height expressions.
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h .
+
+x y The x and y offsets as specified by the x and y
+expressions, or NAN if not yet specified.
+
+a same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar input display aspect ratio, it is the same as (iw / ih ) * sar
+
+hsub vsub The horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
30.67.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.68 perspective# TOC
+
+
Correct perspective of video not recorded perpendicular to the screen.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+x0 y0 x1 y1 x2 y2 x3 y3 Set coordinates expression for top left, top right, bottom left and bottom right corners.
+Default values are 0:0:W:0:0:H:W:H with which perspective will remain unchanged.
+If the sense option is set to source, then the specified points will be sent
+to the corners of the destination. If the sense option is set to destination,
+then the corners of the source will be sent to the specified coordinates.
+
+The expressions can use the following variables:
+
+
+W H the width and height of video frame.
+
+
+interpolation Set interpolation for perspective correction.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘linear ’
+‘cubic ’
+
+
+Default value is ‘linear ’.
+
+sense Set interpretation of coordinate options.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘0, source ’
+
+Send point in the source specified by the given coordinates to
+the corners of the destination.
+
+
+‘1, destination ’
+
+Send the corners of the source to the point in the destination specified
+by the given coordinates.
+
+Default value is ‘source ’.
+
+
+
+
+
+
30.69 phase# TOC
+
+
Delay interlaced video by one field time so that the field order changes.
+
+
The intended use is to fix PAL movies that have been captured with the
+opposite field order to the film-to-video transfer.
+
+
A description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+mode Set phase mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘t ’
+Capture field order top-first, transfer bottom-first.
+Filter will delay the bottom field.
+
+‘b ’
+Capture field order bottom-first, transfer top-first.
+Filter will delay the top field.
+
+‘p ’
+Capture and transfer with the same field order. This mode only exists
+for the documentation of the other options to refer to, but if you
+actually select it, the filter will faithfully do nothing.
+
+‘a ’
+Capture field order determined automatically by field flags, transfer
+opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ modes on a frame by frame
+basis using field flags. If no field information is available,
+then this works just like ‘u ’.
+
+‘u ’
+Capture unknown or varying, transfer opposite.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘b ’ on a frame by frame basis by
+analyzing the images and selecting the alternative that produces best
+match between the fields.
+
+‘T ’
+Capture top-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘B ’
+Capture bottom-first, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis.
+
+‘A ’
+Capture determined by field flags, transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using field flags and
+image analysis. If no field information is available, then this works just
+like ‘U ’. This is the default mode.
+
+‘U ’
+Both capture and transfer unknown or varying.
+Filter selects among ‘t ’, ‘b ’ and ‘p ’ using image analysis only.
+
+
+
+
+
30.70 pixdesctest# TOC
+
+
Pixel format descriptor test filter, mainly useful for internal
+testing. The output video should be equal to the input video.
+
+
For example:
+
+
format=monow, pixdesctest
+
+
+
can be used to test the monowhite pixel format descriptor definition.
+
+
+
30.71 pp# TOC
+
+
Enable the specified chain of postprocessing subfilters using libpostproc. This
+library should be automatically selected with a GPL build (--enable-gpl).
+Subfilters must be separated by ’/’ and can be disabled by prepending a ’-’.
+Each subfilter and some options have a short and a long name that can be used
+interchangeably, i.e. dr/dering are the same.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+subfilters Set postprocessing subfilters string.
+
+
+
All subfilters share common options to determine their scope:
+
+
+a/autoq Honor the quality commands for this subfilter.
+
+c/chrom Do chrominance filtering, too (default).
+
+y/nochrom Do luminance filtering only (no chrominance).
+
+n/noluma Do chrominance filtering only (no luminance).
+
+
+
These options can be appended after the subfilter name, separated by a ’|’.
+
+
Available subfilters are:
+
+
+hb/hdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+vb/vdeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+ha/hadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate horizontal deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+va/vadeblock[|difference[|flatness]] Accurate vertical deblocking filter
+
+difference Difference factor where higher values mean more deblocking (default: 32).
+
flatness Flatness threshold where lower values mean more deblocking (default: 39).
+
+
+
+
The horizontal and vertical deblocking filters share the difference and
+flatness values so you cannot set different horizontal and vertical
+thresholds.
+
+
+h1/x1hdeblock Experimental horizontal deblocking filter
+
+v1/x1vdeblock Experimental vertical deblocking filter
+
+dr/dering Deringing filter
+
+tn/tmpnoise[|threshold1[|threshold2[|threshold3]]], temporal noise reducer
+threshold1 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold2 larger -> stronger filtering
+
threshold3 larger -> stronger filtering
+
+
+al/autolevels[:f/fullyrange], automatic brightness / contrast correction
+f/fullyrange Stretch luminance to 0-255.
+
+
+lb/linblenddeint Linear blend deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+filtering all lines with a (1 2 1) filter.
+
+li/linipoldeint Linear interpolating deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by
+linearly interpolating every second line.
+
+ci/cubicipoldeint Cubic interpolating deinterlacing filter deinterlaces the given block by
+cubically interpolating every second line.
+
+md/mediandeint Median deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by applying a
+median filter to every second line.
+
+fd/ffmpegdeint FFmpeg deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given block by filtering every
+second line with a (-1 4 2 4 -1) filter.
+
+l5/lowpass5 Vertically applied FIR lowpass deinterlacing filter that deinterlaces the given
+block by filtering all lines with a (-1 2 6 2 -1) filter.
+
+fq/forceQuant[|quantizer] Overrides the quantizer table from the input with the constant quantizer you
+specify.
+
+quantizer Quantizer to use
+
+
+de/default Default pp filter combination (hb|a,vb|a,dr|a)
+
+fa/fast Fast pp filter combination (h1|a,v1|a,dr|a)
+
+ac High quality pp filter combination (ha|a|128|7,va|a,dr|a)
+
+
+
+
30.71.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply horizontal and vertical deblocking, deringing and automatic
+brightness/contrast:
+
+
+ Apply default filters without brightness/contrast correction:
+
+
+ Apply default filters and temporal denoiser:
+
+
pp=default/tmpnoise|1|2|3
+ Apply deblocking on luminance only, and switch vertical deblocking on or off
+automatically depending on available CPU time:
+
+
+
+
+
30.72 pp7# TOC
+
Apply Postprocessing filter 7. It is variant of the spp filter,
+similar to spp = 6 with 7 point DCT, where only the center sample is
+used after IDCT.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. It accepts an integer in range
+0 to 63. If not set, the filter will use the QP from the video stream
+(if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding.
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
‘medium ’
+Set medium thresholding (good results, default).
+
+
+
+
+
30.73 psnr# TOC
+
+
Obtain the average, maximum and minimum PSNR (Peak Signal to Noise
+Ratio) between two input videos.
+
+
This filter takes in input two input videos, the first input is
+considered the "main" source and is passed unchanged to the
+output. The second input is used as a "reference" video for computing
+the PSNR.
+
+
Both video inputs must have the same resolution and pixel format for
+this filter to work correctly. Also it assumes that both inputs
+have the same number of frames, which are compared one by one.
+
+
The obtained average PSNR is printed through the logging system.
+
+
The filter stores the accumulated MSE (mean squared error) of each
+frame, and at the end of the processing it is averaged across all frames
+equally, and the following formula is applied to obtain the PSNR:
+
+
+
PSNR = 10*log10(MAX^2/MSE)
+
+
+
Where MAX is the average of the maximum values of each component of the
+image.
+
+
The description of the accepted parameters follows.
+
+
+stats_file, f If specified the filter will use the named file to save the PSNR of
+each individual frame.
+
+
+
The file printed if stats_file is selected, contains a sequence of
+key/value pairs of the form key :value for each compared
+couple of frames.
+
+
A description of each shown parameter follows:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 1
+
+mse_avg Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames, averaged over all the image components.
+
+mse_y, mse_u, mse_v, mse_r, mse_g, mse_g, mse_a Mean Square Error pixel-by-pixel average difference of the compared
+frames for the component specified by the suffix.
+
+psnr_y, psnr_u, psnr_v, psnr_r, psnr_g, psnr_b, psnr_a Peak Signal to Noise ratio of the compared frames for the component
+specified by the suffix.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
movie=ref_movie.mpg, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][ref] psnr="stats_file=stats.log" [out]
+
+
+
On this example the input file being processed is compared with the
+reference file ref_movie.mpg . The PSNR of each individual frame
+is stored in stats.log .
+
+
+
30.74 pullup# TOC
+
+
Pulldown reversal (inverse telecine) filter, capable of handling mixed
+hard-telecine, 24000/1001 fps progressive, and 30000/1001 fps progressive
+content.
+
+
The pullup filter is designed to take advantage of future context in making
+its decisions. This filter is stateless in the sense that it does not lock
+onto a pattern to follow, but it instead looks forward to the following
+fields in order to identify matches and rebuild progressive frames.
+
+
To produce content with an even framerate, insert the fps filter after
+pullup, use fps=24000/1001 if the input frame rate is 29.97fps,
+fps=24 for 30fps and the (rare) telecined 25fps input.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+jl jr jt jb These options set the amount of "junk" to ignore at the left, right, top, and
+bottom of the image, respectively. Left and right are in units of 8 pixels,
+while top and bottom are in units of 2 lines.
+The default is 8 pixels on each side.
+
+sb Set the strict breaks. Setting this option to 1 will reduce the chances of
+filter generating an occasional mismatched frame, but it may also cause an
+excessive number of frames to be dropped during high motion sequences.
+Conversely, setting it to -1 will make filter match fields more easily.
+This may help processing of video where there is slight blurring between
+the fields, but may also cause there to be interlaced frames in the output.
+Default value is 0.
+
+mp Set the metric plane to use. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘l ’
+Use luma plane.
+
+‘u ’
+Use chroma blue plane.
+
+‘v ’
+Use chroma red plane.
+
+
+This option may be set to use chroma plane instead of the default luma plane
+for doing filter’s computations. This may improve accuracy on very clean
+source material, but more likely will decrease accuracy, especially if there
+is chroma noise (rainbow effect) or any grayscale video.
+The main purpose of setting mp to a chroma plane is to reduce CPU
+load and make pullup usable in realtime on slow machines.
+
+
+
For best results (without duplicated frames in the output file) it is
+necessary to change the output frame rate. For example, to inverse
+telecine NTSC input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf pullup -r 24000/1001 ...
+
+
+
+
30.75 qp# TOC
+
+
Change video quantization parameters (QP).
+
+
The filter accepts the following option:
+
+
+qp Set expression for quantization parameter.
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain, among others,
+the following constants:
+
+
+known 1 if index is not 129, 0 otherwise.
+
+qp Sequentional index starting from -129 to 128.
+
+
+
+
30.75.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Some equation like:
+
+
+
+
+
30.76 removelogo# TOC
+
+
Suppress a TV station logo, using an image file to determine which
+pixels comprise the logo. It works by filling in the pixels that
+comprise the logo with neighboring pixels.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filter bitmap file, which can be any image format supported by
+libavformat. The width and height of the image file must match those of the
+video stream being processed.
+
+
+
Pixels in the provided bitmap image with a value of zero are not
+considered part of the logo, non-zero pixels are considered part of
+the logo. If you use white (255) for the logo and black (0) for the
+rest, you will be safe. For making the filter bitmap, it is
+recommended to take a screen capture of a black frame with the logo
+visible, and then using a threshold filter followed by the erode
+filter once or twice.
+
+
If needed, little splotches can be fixed manually. Remember that if
+logo pixels are not covered, the filter quality will be much
+reduced. Marking too many pixels as part of the logo does not hurt as
+much, but it will increase the amount of blurring needed to cover over
+the image and will destroy more information than necessary, and extra
+pixels will slow things down on a large logo.
+
+
+
30.77 rotate# TOC
+
+
Rotate video by an arbitrary angle expressed in radians.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
A description of the optional parameters follows.
+
+angle, a Set an expression for the angle by which to rotate the input video
+clockwise, expressed as a number of radians. A negative value will
+result in a counter-clockwise rotation. By default it is set to "0".
+
+This expression is evaluated for each frame.
+
+out_w, ow Set the output width expression, default value is "iw".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+out_h, oh Set the output height expression, default value is "ih".
+This expression is evaluated just once during configuration.
+
+bilinear Enable bilinear interpolation if set to 1, a value of 0 disables
+it. Default value is 1.
+
+fillcolor, c Set the color used to fill the output area not covered by the rotated
+image. For the general syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual. If the special value "none" is selected then no
+background is printed (useful for example if the background is never shown).
+
+Default value is "black".
+
+
+
The expressions for the angle and the output size can contain the
+following constants and functions:
+
+
+n sequential number of the input frame, starting from 0. It is always NAN
+before the first frame is filtered.
+
+t time in seconds of the input frame, it is set to 0 when the filter is
+configured. It is always NAN before the first frame is filtered.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+in_w, iw in_h, ih the input video width and height
+
+out_w, ow out_h, oh the output width and height, that is the size of the padded area as
+specified by the width and height expressions
+
+rotw(a) roth(a) the minimal width/height required for completely containing the input
+video rotated by a radians.
+
+These are only available when computing the out_w and
+out_h expressions.
+
+
+
+
30.77.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by PI/6 radians counter-clockwise:
+
+
+ Rotate the input by 45 degrees clockwise:
+
+
+ Apply a constant rotation with period T, starting from an angle of PI/3:
+
+
+ Make the input video rotation oscillating with a period of T
+seconds and an amplitude of A radians:
+
+
rotate=A*sin(2*PI/T*t)
+ Rotate the video, output size is chosen so that the whole rotating
+input video is always completely contained in the output:
+
+
rotate='2*PI*t:ow=hypot(iw,ih):oh=ow'
+ Rotate the video, reduce the output size so that no background is ever
+shown:
+
+
rotate=2*PI*t:ow='min(iw,ih)/sqrt(2)':oh=ow:c=none
+
+
+
+
30.77.2 Commands# TOC
+
+
The filter supports the following commands:
+
+
+a, angle Set the angle expression.
+The command accepts the same syntax of the corresponding option.
+
+If the specified expression is not valid, it is kept at its current
+value.
+
+
+
+
30.78 sab# TOC
+
+
Apply Shape Adaptive Blur.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set luma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0, default
+value is 1.0. A greater value will result in a more blurred image, and
+in slower processing.
+
+luma_pre_filter_radius, lpfr Set luma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range, default
+value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set luma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered, must
+be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range, default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set chroma blur filter strength, must be a value in range 0.1-4.0. A
+greater value will result in a more blurred image, and in slower
+processing.
+
+chroma_pre_filter_radius, cpfr Set chroma pre-filter radius, must be a value in the 0.1-2.0 range.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set chroma maximum difference between pixels to still be considered,
+must be a value in the 0.1-100.0 range.
+
+
+
Each chroma option value, if not explicitly specified, is set to the
+corresponding luma option value.
+
+
+
30.79 scale# TOC
+
+
Scale (resize) the input video, using the libswscale library.
+
+
The scale filter forces the output display aspect ratio to be the same
+of the input, by changing the output sample aspect ratio.
+
+
If the input image format is different from the format requested by
+the next filter, the scale filter will convert the input to the
+requested format.
+
+
+
30.79.1 Options# TOC
+
The filter accepts the following options, or any of the options
+supported by the libswscale scaler.
+
+
See (ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for
+the complete list of scaler options.
+
+
+width, w height, h Set the output video dimension expression. Default value is the input
+dimension.
+
+If the value is 0, the input width is used for the output.
+
+If one of the values is -1, the scale filter will use a value that
+maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the
+other specified dimension. If both of them are -1, the input size is
+used
+
+If one of the values is -n with n > 1, the scale filter will also use a value
+that maintains the aspect ratio of the input image, calculated from the other
+specified dimension. After that it will, however, make sure that the calculated
+dimension is divisible by n and adjust the value if necessary.
+
+See below for the list of accepted constants for use in the dimension
+expression.
+
+interl Set the interlacing mode. It accepts the following values:
+
+
+‘1 ’
+Force interlaced aware scaling.
+
+‘0 ’
+Do not apply interlaced scaling.
+
+‘-1 ’
+Select interlaced aware scaling depending on whether the source frames
+are flagged as interlaced or not.
+
+
+Default value is ‘0 ’.
+
+flags Set libswscale scaling flags. See
+(ffmpeg-scaler)the ffmpeg-scaler manual for the
+complete list of values. If not explicitly specified the filter applies
+the default flags.
+
+size, s Set the video size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+in_color_matrix out_color_matrix Set in/output YCbCr color space type.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder.
+
+If not specified, the color space type depends on the pixel format.
+
+Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘bt709 ’
+Format conforming to International Telecommunication Union (ITU)
+Recommendation BT.709.
+
+‘fcc ’
+Set color space conforming to the United States Federal Communications
+Commission (FCC) Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 47 (2003) 73.682 (a).
+
+‘bt601 ’
+Set color space conforming to:
+
+
+ ITU Radiocommunication Sector (ITU-R) Recommendation BT.601
+
+ ITU-R Rec. BT.470-6 (1998) Systems B, B1, and G
+
+ Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE) ST 170:2004
+
+
+
+‘smpte240m ’
+Set color space conforming to SMPTE ST 240:1999.
+
+
+in_range out_range Set in/output YCbCr sample range.
+
+This allows the autodetected value to be overridden as well as allows forcing
+a specific value used for the output and encoder. If not specified, the
+range depends on the pixel format. Possible values:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Choose automatically.
+
+‘jpeg/full/pc ’
+Set full range (0-255 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+‘mpeg/tv ’
+Set "MPEG" range (16-235 in case of 8-bit luma).
+
+
+force_original_aspect_ratio Enable decreasing or increasing output video width or height if necessary to
+keep the original aspect ratio. Possible values:
+
+
+‘disable ’
+Scale the video as specified and disable this feature.
+
+‘decrease ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be decreased if needed.
+
+‘increase ’
+The output video dimensions will automatically be increased if needed.
+
+
+
+One useful instance of this option is that when you know a specific device’s
+maximum allowed resolution, you can use this to limit the output video to
+that, while retaining the aspect ratio. For example, device A allows
+1280x720 playback, and your video is 1920x800. Using this option (set it to
+decrease) and specifying 1280x720 to the command line makes the output
+1280x533.
+
+Please note that this is a different thing than specifying -1 for w
+or h , you still need to specify the output resolution for this option
+to work.
+
+
+
+
The values of the w and h options are expressions
+containing the following constants:
+
+
+in_w in_h The input width and height
+
+iw ih These are the same as in_w and in_h .
+
+out_w out_h The output (scaled) width and height
+
+ow oh These are the same as out_w and out_h
+
+a The same as iw / ih
+
+sar input sample aspect ratio
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. Calculated from (iw / ih) * sar.
+
+hsub vsub horizontal and vertical input chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+ohsub ovsub horizontal and vertical output chroma subsample values. For example for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
30.79.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.80 separatefields# TOC
+
+
The separatefields takes a frame-based video input and splits
+each frame into its components fields, producing a new half height clip
+with twice the frame rate and twice the frame count.
+
+
This filter use field-dominance information in frame to decide which
+of each pair of fields to place first in the output.
+If it gets it wrong use setfield filter before separatefields filter.
+
+
+
30.81 setdar, setsar# TOC
+
+
The setdar filter sets the Display Aspect Ratio for the filter
+output video.
+
+
This is done by changing the specified Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect
+Ratio, according to the following equation:
+
+
DAR = HORIZONTAL_RESOLUTION / VERTICAL_RESOLUTION * SAR
+
+
+
Keep in mind that the setdar filter does not modify the pixel
+dimensions of the video frame. Also, the display aspect ratio set by
+this filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain,
+e.g. in case of scaling or if another "setdar" or a "setsar" filter is
+applied.
+
+
The setsar filter sets the Sample (aka Pixel) Aspect Ratio for
+the filter output video.
+
+
Note that as a consequence of the application of this filter, the
+output display aspect ratio will change according to the equation
+above.
+
+
Keep in mind that the sample aspect ratio set by the setsar
+filter may be changed by later filters in the filterchain, e.g. if
+another "setsar" or a "setdar" filter is applied.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+r, ratio, dar (setdar only), sar (setsar only) Set the aspect ratio used by the filter.
+
+The parameter can be a floating point number string, an expression, or
+a string of the form num :den , where num and
+den are the numerator and denominator of the aspect ratio. If
+the parameter is not specified, it is assumed the value "0".
+In case the form "num :den " is used, the : character
+should be escaped.
+
+max Set the maximum integer value to use for expressing numerator and
+denominator when reducing the expressed aspect ratio to a rational.
+Default value is 100.
+
+
+
+
The parameter sar is an expression containing
+the following constants:
+
+
+E, PI, PHI These are approximated values for the mathematical constants e
+(Euler’s number), pi (Greek pi), and phi (the golden ratio).
+
+w, h The input width and height.
+
+a These are the same as w / h .
+
+sar The input sample aspect ratio.
+
+dar The input display aspect ratio. It is the same as
+(w / h ) * sar .
+
+hsub, vsub Horizontal and vertical chroma subsample values. For example, for the
+pixel format "yuv422p" hsub is 2 and vsub is 1.
+
+
+
+
30.81.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ To change the display aspect ratio to 16:9, specify one of the following:
+
+
setdar=dar=1.77777
+setdar=dar=16/9
+setdar=dar=1.77777
+ To change the sample aspect ratio to 10:11, specify:
+
+
+ To set a display aspect ratio of 16:9, and specify a maximum integer value of
+1000 in the aspect ratio reduction, use the command:
+
+
setdar=ratio=16/9:max=1000
+
+
+
+
30.82 setfield# TOC
+
+
Force field for the output video frame.
+
+
The setfield filter marks the interlace type field for the
+output frames. It does not change the input frame, but only sets the
+corresponding property, which affects how the frame is treated by
+following filters (e.g. fieldorder or yadif).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Available values are:
+
+
+‘auto ’
+Keep the same field property.
+
+‘bff ’
+Mark the frame as bottom-field-first.
+
+‘tff ’
+Mark the frame as top-field-first.
+
+‘prog ’
+Mark the frame as progressive.
+
+
+
+
+
30.83 showinfo# TOC
+
+
Show a line containing various information for each input video frame.
+The input video is not modified.
+
+
The shown line contains a sequence of key/value pairs of the form
+key :value .
+
+
The following values are shown in the output:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the input frame, starting from 0.
+
+pts The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+time base units. The time base unit depends on the filter input pad.
+
+pts_time The Presentation TimeStamp of the input frame, expressed as a number of
+seconds.
+
+pos The position of the frame in the input stream, or -1 if this information is
+unavailable and/or meaningless (for example in case of synthetic video).
+
+fmt The pixel format name.
+
+sar The sample aspect ratio of the input frame, expressed in the form
+num /den .
+
+s The size of the input frame. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+i The type of interlaced mode ("P" for "progressive", "T" for top field first, "B"
+for bottom field first).
+
+iskey This is 1 if the frame is a key frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+type The picture type of the input frame ("I" for an I-frame, "P" for a
+P-frame, "B" for a B-frame, or "?" for an unknown type).
+Also refer to the documentation of the AVPictureType enum and of
+the av_get_picture_type_char function defined in
+libavutil/avutil.h .
+
+checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of all the planes of the input frame.
+
+plane_checksum The Adler-32 checksum (printed in hexadecimal) of each plane of the input frame,
+expressed in the form "[c0 c1 c2 c3 ]".
+
+
+
+
30.84 shuffleplanes# TOC
+
+
Reorder and/or duplicate video planes.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+map0 The index of the input plane to be used as the first output plane.
+
+map1 The index of the input plane to be used as the second output plane.
+
+map2 The index of the input plane to be used as the third output plane.
+
+map3 The index of the input plane to be used as the fourth output plane.
+
+
+
+
The first plane has the index 0. The default is to keep the input unchanged.
+
+
Swap the second and third planes of the input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf shuffleplanes=0:2:1:3 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
30.85 signalstats# TOC
+
Evaluate various visual metrics that assist in determining issues associated
+with the digitization of analog video media.
+
+
By default the filter will log these metadata values:
+
+
+YMIN Display the minimal Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YLOW Display the Y value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YAVG Display the average Y value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+YHIGH Display the Y value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+YMAX Display the maximum Y value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMIN Display the minimal U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+ULOW Display the U value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UAVG Display the average U value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+UHIGH Display the U value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+UMAX Display the maximum U value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMIN Display the minimal V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VLOW Display the V value at the 10% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VAVG Display the average V value within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-255].
+
+VHIGH Display the V value at the 90% percentile within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+VMAX Display the maximum V value contained within the input frame. Expressed in
+range of [0-255].
+
+SATMIN Display the minimal saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATLOW Display the saturation value at the 10% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATAVG Display the average saturation value within the input frame. Expressed in range
+of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATHIGH Display the saturation value at the 90% percentile within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+SATMAX Display the maximum saturation value contained within the input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-~181.02].
+
+HUEMED Display the median value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+HUEAVG Display the average value for hue within the input frame. Expressed in range of
+[0-360].
+
+YDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the Y
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+UDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the U
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+VDIF Display the average of sample value difference between all values of the V
+plane in the current frame and corresponding values of the previous input frame.
+Expressed in range of [0-255].
+
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+stat out
+stat specify an additional form of image analysis.
+out output video with the specified type of pixel highlighted.
+
+Both options accept the following values:
+
+
+‘tout ’
+Identify temporal outliers pixels. A temporal outlier is a pixel
+unlike the neighboring pixels of the same field. Examples of temporal outliers
+include the results of video dropouts, head clogs, or tape tracking issues.
+
+‘vrep ’
+Identify vertical line repetition . Vertical line repetition includes
+similar rows of pixels within a frame. In born-digital video vertical line
+repetition is common, but this pattern is uncommon in video digitized from an
+analog source. When it occurs in video that results from the digitization of an
+analog source it can indicate concealment from a dropout compensator.
+
+‘brng ’
+Identify pixels that fall outside of legal broadcast range.
+
+
+
+color, c Set the highlight color for the out option. The default color is
+yellow.
+
+
+
+
30.85.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.86 smartblur# TOC
+
+
Blur the input video without impacting the outlines.
+
+
It accepts the following options:
+
+
+luma_radius, lr Set the luma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_strength, ls Set the luma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+luma_threshold, lt Set the luma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+chroma_radius, cr Set the chroma radius. The option value must be a float number in
+the range [0.1,5.0] that specifies the variance of the gaussian filter
+used to blur the image (slower if larger). Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_strength, cs Set the chroma strength. The option value must be a float number
+in the range [-1.0,1.0] that configures the blurring. A value included
+in [0.0,1.0] will blur the image whereas a value included in
+[-1.0,0.0] will sharpen the image. Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_threshold, ct Set the chroma threshold used as a coefficient to determine
+whether a pixel should be blurred or not. The option value must be an
+integer in the range [-30,30]. A value of 0 will filter all the image,
+a value included in [0,30] will filter flat areas and a value included
+in [-30,0] will filter edges. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
If a chroma option is not explicitly set, the corresponding luma value
+is set.
+
+
+
30.87 stereo3d# TOC
+
+
Convert between different stereoscopic image formats.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+in Set stereoscopic image format of input.
+
+Available values for input image formats are:
+
+‘sbsl ’
+side by side parallel (left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbsr ’
+side by side crosseye (right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘sbs2l ’
+side by side parallel with half width resolution
+(left eye left, right eye right)
+
+‘sbs2r ’
+side by side crosseye with half width resolution
+(right eye left, left eye right)
+
+‘abl ’
+above-below (left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘abr ’
+above-below (right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘ab2l ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(left eye above, right eye below)
+
+‘ab2r ’
+above-below with half height resolution
+(right eye above, left eye below)
+
+‘al ’
+alternating frames (left eye first, right eye second)
+
+‘ar ’
+alternating frames (right eye first, left eye second)
+
+Default value is ‘sbsl ’.
+
+
+out Set stereoscopic image format of output.
+
+Available values for output image formats are all the input formats as well as:
+
+‘arbg ’
+anaglyph red/blue gray
+(red filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘argg ’
+anaglyph red/green gray
+(red filter on left eye, green filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcg ’
+anaglyph red/cyan gray
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arch ’
+anaglyph red/cyan half colored
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcc ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘arcd ’
+anaglyph red/cyan color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(red filter on left eye, cyan filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmg ’
+anaglyph green/magenta gray
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmh ’
+anaglyph green/magenta half colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmc ’
+anaglyph green/magenta colored
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘agmd ’
+anaglyph green/magenta color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(green filter on left eye, magenta filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybg ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue gray
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybh ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue half colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybc ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue colored
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘aybd ’
+anaglyph yellow/blue color optimized with the least squares projection of dubois
+(yellow filter on left eye, blue filter on right eye)
+
+‘irl ’
+interleaved rows (left eye has top row, right eye starts on next row)
+
+‘irr ’
+interleaved rows (right eye has top row, left eye starts on next row)
+
+‘ml ’
+mono output (left eye only)
+
+‘mr ’
+mono output (right eye only)
+
+
+Default value is ‘arcd ’.
+
+
+
+
30.87.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Convert input video from side by side parallel to anaglyph yellow/blue dubois:
+
+
+ Convert input video from above bellow (left eye above, right eye below) to side by side crosseye.
+
+
+
+
+
30.88 spp# TOC
+
+
Apply a simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses the image
+at several (or - in the case of quality level 6 - all) shifts
+and average the results.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-6. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 6 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+mode Set thresholding mode. Available modes are:
+
+
+‘hard ’
+Set hard thresholding (default).
+
‘soft ’
+Set soft thresholding (better de-ringing effect, but likely blurrier).
+
+
+use_bframe_qp Enable the use of the QP from the B-Frames if set to 1. Using this
+option may cause flicker since the B-Frames have often larger QP. Default is
+0 (not enabled).
+
+
+
+
30.89 subtitles# TOC
+
+
Draw subtitles on top of input video using the libass library.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libass. This filter also requires a build with libavcodec and
+libavformat to convert the passed subtitles file to ASS (Advanced Substation
+Alpha) subtitles format.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the filename of the subtitle file to read. It must be specified.
+
+original_size Specify the size of the original video, the video for which the ASS file
+was composed. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in
+the ffmpeg-utils manual. Due to a misdesign in ASS aspect ratio arithmetic,
+this is necessary to correctly scale the fonts if the aspect ratio has been
+changed.
+
+charenc Set subtitles input character encoding. subtitles filter only. Only
+useful if not UTF-8.
+
+stream_index, si Set subtitles stream index. subtitles filter only.
+
+
+
If the first key is not specified, it is assumed that the first value
+specifies the filename .
+
+
For example, to render the file sub.srt on top of the input
+video, use the command:
+
+
+
which is equivalent to:
+
+
subtitles=filename=sub.srt
+
+
+
To render the default subtitles stream from file video.mkv , use:
+
+
+
To render the second subtitles stream from that file, use:
+
+
subtitles=video.mkv:si=1
+
+
+
+
30.90 super2xsai# TOC
+
+
Scale the input by 2x and smooth using the Super2xSaI (Scale and
+Interpolate) pixel art scaling algorithm.
+
+
Useful for enlarging pixel art images without reducing sharpness.
+
+
+
30.91 swapuv# TOC
+
Swap U & V plane.
+
+
+
30.92 telecine# TOC
+
+
Apply telecine process to the video.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+first_field
+‘top, t ’
+top field first
+
‘bottom, b ’
+bottom field first
+The default value is top.
+
+
+pattern A string of numbers representing the pulldown pattern you wish to apply.
+The default value is 23.
+
+
+
+
Some typical patterns:
+
+NTSC output (30i):
+27.5p: 32222
+24p: 23 (classic)
+24p: 2332 (preferred)
+20p: 33
+18p: 334
+16p: 3444
+
+PAL output (25i):
+27.5p: 12222
+24p: 222222222223 ("Euro pulldown")
+16.67p: 33
+16p: 33333334
+
+
+
+
30.93 thumbnail# TOC
+
Select the most representative frame in a given sequence of consecutive frames.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the frames batch size to analyze; in a set of n frames, the filter
+will pick one of them, and then handle the next batch of n frames until
+the end. Default is 100.
+
+
+
Since the filter keeps track of the whole frames sequence, a bigger n
+value will result in a higher memory usage, so a high value is not recommended.
+
+
+
30.93.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Extract one picture each 50 frames:
+
+
+ Complete example of a thumbnail creation with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf thumbnail,scale=300:200 -frames:v 1 out.png
+
+
+
+
30.94 tile# TOC
+
+
Tile several successive frames together.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+layout Set the grid size (i.e. the number of lines and columns). For the syntax of
+this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+nb_frames Set the maximum number of frames to render in the given area. It must be less
+than or equal to w xh . The default value is 0, meaning all
+the area will be used.
+
+margin Set the outer border margin in pixels.
+
+padding Set the inner border thickness (i.e. the number of pixels between frames). For
+more advanced padding options (such as having different values for the edges),
+refer to the pad video filter.
+
+color Specify the color of the unused area. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Color" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value of color
+is "black".
+
+
+
+
30.94.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.95 tinterlace# TOC
+
+
Perform various types of temporal field interlacing.
+
+
Frames are counted starting from 1, so the first input frame is
+considered odd.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode Specify the mode of the interlacing. This option can also be specified
+as a value alone. See below for a list of values for this option.
+
+Available values are:
+
+
+‘merge, 0 ’
+Move odd frames into the upper field, even into the lower field,
+generating a double height frame at half frame rate.
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘drop_odd, 1 ’
+Only output even frames, odd frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ 22222 44444
+ ‘drop_even, 2 ’
+Only output odd frames, even frames are dropped, generating a frame with
+unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+11111 33333
+ ‘pad, 3 ’
+Expand each frame to full height, but pad alternate lines with black,
+generating a frame with double height at the same input frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+11111 ..... 33333 .....
+..... 22222 ..... 44444
+ ‘interleave_top, 4 ’
+Interleave the upper field from odd frames with the lower field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+
+Output:
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+ ‘interleave_bottom, 5 ’
+Interleave the lower field from odd frames with the upper field from
+even frames, generating a frame with unchanged height at half frame rate.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+11111 22222<- 33333 44444<-
+11111<- 22222 33333<- 44444
+
+Output:
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+22222 44444
+11111 33333
+ ‘interlacex2, 6 ’
+Double frame rate with unchanged height. Frames are inserted each
+containing the second temporal field from the previous input frame and
+the first temporal field from the next input frame. This mode relies on
+the top_field_first flag. Useful for interlaced video displays with no
+field synchronisation.
+
+
+
------> time
+Input:
+Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3 Frame 4
+
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+11111 22222 33333 44444
+ 11111 22222 33333 44444
+
+Output:
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444 44444
+ 11111 11111 22222 22222 33333 33333 44444
+
+
+Numeric values are deprecated but are accepted for backward
+compatibility reasons.
+
+Default mode is merge.
+
+flags Specify flags influencing the filter process.
+
+Available value for flags is:
+
+
+low_pass_filter, vlfp Enable vertical low-pass filtering in the filter.
+Vertical low-pass filtering is required when creating an interlaced
+destination from a progressive source which contains high-frequency
+vertical detail. Filtering will reduce interlace ’twitter’ and Moire
+patterning.
+
+Vertical low-pass filtering can only be enabled for mode
+interleave_top and interleave_bottom .
+
+
+
+
+
+
30.96 transpose# TOC
+
+
Transpose rows with columns in the input video and optionally flip it.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+dir Specify the transposition direction.
+
+Can assume the following values:
+
+‘0, 4, cclock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise and vertically flip (default), that is:
+
+
L.R L.l
+. . -> . .
+l.r R.r
+ ‘1, 5, clock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R l.L
+. . -> . .
+l.r r.R
+ ‘2, 6, cclock ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees counterclockwise, that is:
+
+
L.R R.r
+. . -> . .
+l.r L.l
+ ‘3, 7, clock_flip ’
+Rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and vertically flip, that is:
+
+
L.R r.R
+. . -> . .
+l.r l.L
+
+
+For values between 4-7, the transposition is only done if the input
+video geometry is portrait and not landscape. These values are
+deprecated, the passthrough option should be used instead.
+
+Numerical values are deprecated, and should be dropped in favor of
+symbolic constants.
+
+passthrough Do not apply the transposition if the input geometry matches the one
+specified by the specified value. It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Always apply transposition.
+
‘portrait ’
+Preserve portrait geometry (when height >= width ).
+
‘landscape ’
+Preserve landscape geometry (when width >= height ).
+
+
+Default value is none.
+
+
+
For example to rotate by 90 degrees clockwise and preserve portrait
+layout:
+
+
transpose=dir=1:passthrough=portrait
+
+
+
The command above can also be specified as:
+
+
+
+
30.97 trim# TOC
+
Trim the input so that the output contains one continuous subpart of the input.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+start Specify the time of the start of the kept section, i.e. the frame with the
+timestamp start will be the first frame in the output.
+
+end Specify the time of the first frame that will be dropped, i.e. the frame
+immediately preceding the one with the timestamp end will be the last
+frame in the output.
+
+start_pts This is the same as start , except this option sets the start timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+end_pts This is the same as end , except this option sets the end timestamp
+in timebase units instead of seconds.
+
+duration The maximum duration of the output in seconds.
+
+start_frame The number of the first frame that should be passed to the output.
+
+end_frame The number of the first frame that should be dropped.
+
+
+
start , end , and duration are expressed as time
+duration specifications; see
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+
Note that the first two sets of the start/end options and the duration
+option look at the frame timestamp, while the _frame variants simply count the
+frames that pass through the filter. Also note that this filter does not modify
+the timestamps. If you wish for the output timestamps to start at zero, insert a
+setpts filter after the trim filter.
+
+
If multiple start or end options are set, this filter tries to be greedy and
+keep all the frames that match at least one of the specified constraints. To keep
+only the part that matches all the constraints at once, chain multiple trim
+filters.
+
+
The defaults are such that all the input is kept. So it is possible to set e.g.
+just the end values to keep everything before the specified time.
+
+
Examples:
+
+ Drop everything except the second minute of input:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=60:120
+ Keep only the first second:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -vf trim=duration=1
+
+
+
+
+
30.98 unsharp# TOC
+
+
Sharpen or blur the input video.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+luma_msize_x, lx Set the luma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer between
+3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_msize_y, ly Set the luma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer between 3
+and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+luma_amount, la Set the luma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+chroma_msize_x, cx Set the chroma matrix horizontal size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_msize_y, cy Set the chroma matrix vertical size. It must be an odd integer
+between 3 and 63. The default value is 5.
+
+chroma_amount, ca Set the chroma effect strength. It must be a floating point number, reasonable
+values lay between -1.5 and 1.5.
+
+Negative values will blur the input video, while positive values will
+sharpen it, a value of zero will disable the effect.
+
+Default value is 0.0.
+
+opencl If set to 1, specify using OpenCL capabilities, only available if
+FFmpeg was configured with --enable-opencl. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
All parameters are optional and default to the equivalent of the
+string ’5:5:1.0:5:5:0.0’.
+
+
+
30.98.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply strong luma sharpen effect:
+
+
unsharp=luma_msize_x=7:luma_msize_y=7:luma_amount=2.5
+ Apply a strong blur of both luma and chroma parameters:
+
+
+
+
+
30.99 uspp# TOC
+
+
Apply ultra slow/simple postprocessing filter that compresses and decompresses
+the image at several (or - in the case of quality level 8 - all)
+shifts and average the results.
+
+
The way this differs from the behavior of spp is that uspp actually encodes &
+decodes each case with libavcodec Snow, whereas spp uses a simplified intra only 8x8
+DCT similar to MJPEG.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+quality Set quality. This option defines the number of levels for averaging. It accepts
+an integer in the range 0-8. If set to 0, the filter will have no
+effect. A value of 8 means the higher quality. For each increment of
+that value the speed drops by a factor of approximately 2. Default value is
+3.
+
+qp Force a constant quantization parameter. If not set, the filter will use the QP
+from the video stream (if available).
+
+
+
+
30.100 vidstabdetect# TOC
+
+
Analyze video stabilization/deshaking. Perform pass 1 of 2, see
+vidstabtransform for pass 2.
+
+
This filter generates a file with relative translation and rotation
+transform information about subsequent frames, which is then used by
+the vidstabtransform filter.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+result Set the path to the file used to write the transforms information.
+Default value is transforms.trf .
+
+shakiness Set how shaky the video is and how quick the camera is. It accepts an
+integer in the range 1-10, a value of 1 means little shakiness, a
+value of 10 means strong shakiness. Default value is 5.
+
+accuracy Set the accuracy of the detection process. It must be a value in the
+range 1-15. A value of 1 means low accuracy, a value of 15 means high
+accuracy. Default value is 15.
+
+stepsize Set stepsize of the search process. The region around minimum is
+scanned with 1 pixel resolution. Default value is 6.
+
+mincontrast Set minimum contrast. Below this value a local measurement field is
+discarded. Must be a floating point value in the range 0-1. Default
+value is 0.3.
+
+tripod Set reference frame number for tripod mode.
+
+If enabled, the motion of the frames is compared to a reference frame
+in the filtered stream, identified by the specified number. The idea
+is to compensate all movements in a more-or-less static scene and keep
+the camera view absolutely still.
+
+If set to 0, it is disabled. The frames are counted starting from 1.
+
+show Show fields and transforms in the resulting frames. It accepts an
+integer in the range 0-2. Default value is 0, which disables any
+visualization.
+
+
+
+
30.100.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Use default values:
+
+
+ Analyze strongly shaky movie and put the results in file
+mytransforms.trf :
+
+
vidstabdetect=shakiness=10:accuracy=15:result="mytransforms.trf"
+ Visualize the result of internal transformations in the resulting
+video:
+
+
+ Analyze a video with medium shakiness using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input -vf vidstabdetect=shakiness=5:show=1 dummy.avi
+
+
+
+
30.101 vidstabtransform# TOC
+
+
Video stabilization/deshaking: pass 2 of 2,
+see vidstabdetect for pass 1.
+
+
Read a file with transform information for each frame and
+apply/compensate them. Together with the vidstabdetect
+filter this can be used to deshake videos. See also
+http://public.hronopik.de/vid.stab . It is important to also use
+the unsharp filter, see below.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to configure FFmpeg with
+--enable-libvidstab.
+
+
+
30.101.1 Options# TOC
+
+
+input Set path to the file used to read the transforms. Default value is
+transforms.trf .
+
+smoothing Set the number of frames (value*2 + 1) used for lowpass filtering the
+camera movements. Default value is 10.
+
+For example a number of 10 means that 21 frames are used (10 in the
+past and 10 in the future) to smoothen the motion in the video. A
+larger value leads to a smoother video, but limits the acceleration of
+the camera (pan/tilt movements). 0 is a special case where a static
+camera is simulated.
+
+optalgo Set the camera path optimization algorithm.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘gauss ’
+gaussian kernel low-pass filter on camera motion (default)
+
‘avg ’
+averaging on transformations
+
+
+maxshift Set maximal number of pixels to translate frames. Default value is -1,
+meaning no limit.
+
+maxangle Set maximal angle in radians (degree*PI/180) to rotate frames. Default
+value is -1, meaning no limit.
+
+crop Specify how to deal with borders that may be visible due to movement
+compensation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘keep ’
+keep image information from previous frame (default)
+
‘black ’
+fill the border black
+
+
+invert Invert transforms if set to 1. Default value is 0.
+
+relative Consider transforms as relative to previous frame if set to 1,
+absolute if set to 0. Default value is 0.
+
+zoom Set percentage to zoom. A positive value will result in a zoom-in
+effect, a negative value in a zoom-out effect. Default value is 0 (no
+zoom).
+
+optzoom Set optimal zooming to avoid borders.
+
+Accepted values are:
+
+‘0 ’
+disabled
+
‘1 ’
+optimal static zoom value is determined (only very strong movements
+will lead to visible borders) (default)
+
‘2 ’
+optimal adaptive zoom value is determined (no borders will be
+visible), see zoomspeed
+
+
+Note that the value given at zoom is added to the one calculated here.
+
+zoomspeed Set percent to zoom maximally each frame (enabled when
+optzoom is set to 2). Range is from 0 to 5, default value is
+0.25.
+
+interpol Specify type of interpolation.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘no ’
+no interpolation
+
‘linear ’
+linear only horizontal
+
‘bilinear ’
+linear in both directions (default)
+
‘bicubic ’
+cubic in both directions (slow)
+
+
+tripod Enable virtual tripod mode if set to 1, which is equivalent to
+relative=0:smoothing=0. Default value is 0.
+
+Use also tripod option of vidstabdetect .
+
+debug Increase log verbosity if set to 1. Also the detected global motions
+are written to the temporary file global_motions.trf . Default
+value is 0.
+
+
+
+
30.101.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
30.102 vflip# TOC
+
+
Flip the input video vertically.
+
+
For example, to vertically flip a video with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i in.avi -vf "vflip" out.avi
+
+
+
+
30.103 vignette# TOC
+
+
Make or reverse a natural vignetting effect.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+angle, a Set lens angle expression as a number of radians.
+
+The value is clipped in the [0,PI/2] range.
+
+Default value: "PI/5"
+
+x0 y0 Set center coordinates expressions. Respectively "w/2" and "h/2"
+by default.
+
+mode Set forward/backward mode.
+
+Available modes are:
+
+‘forward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the darker the image becomes.
+
+‘backward ’
+The larger the distance from the central point, the brighter the image becomes.
+This can be used to reverse a vignette effect, though there is no automatic
+detection to extract the lens angle and other settings (yet). It can
+also be used to create a burning effect.
+
+
+Default value is ‘forward ’.
+
+eval Set evaluation mode for the expressions (angle , x0 , y0 ).
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘init ’
+Evaluate expressions only once during the filter initialization.
+
+‘frame ’
+Evaluate expressions for each incoming frame. This is way slower than the
+‘init ’ mode since it requires all the scalers to be re-computed, but it
+allows advanced dynamic expressions.
+
+
+Default value is ‘init ’.
+
+dither Set dithering to reduce the circular banding effects. Default is 1
+(enabled).
+
+aspect Set vignette aspect. This setting allows one to adjust the shape of the vignette.
+Setting this value to the SAR of the input will make a rectangular vignetting
+following the dimensions of the video.
+
+Default is 1/1.
+
+
+
+
30.103.1 Expressions# TOC
+
+
The alpha , x0 and y0 expressions can contain the
+following parameters.
+
+
+w h input width and height
+
+n the number of input frame, starting from 0
+
+pts the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) time of the filtered video frame, expressed in
+TB units, NAN if undefined
+
+r frame rate of the input video, NAN if the input frame rate is unknown
+
+t the PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds, NAN if undefined
+
+tb time base of the input video
+
+
+
+
+
30.103.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Apply simple strong vignetting effect:
+
+
+ Make a flickering vignetting:
+
+
vignette='PI/4+random(1)*PI/50':eval=frame
+
+
+
+
30.104 w3fdif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("w3fdif" stands for "Weston 3 Field
+Deinterlacing Filter").
+
+
Based on the process described by Martin Weston for BBC R&D, and
+implemented based on the de-interlace algorithm written by Jim
+Easterbrook for BBC R&D, the Weston 3 field deinterlacing filter
+uses filter coefficients calculated by BBC R&D.
+
+
There are two sets of filter coefficients, so called "simple":
+and "complex". Which set of filter coefficients is used can
+be set by passing an optional parameter:
+
+
+filter Set the interlacing filter coefficients. Accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+‘simple ’
+Simple filter coefficient set.
+
‘complex ’
+More-complex filter coefficient set.
+
+Default value is ‘complex ’.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following values:
+
+
+‘all ’
+Deinterlace all frames,
+
‘interlaced ’
+Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+Default value is ‘all ’.
+
+
+
+
30.105 xbr# TOC
+
Apply the xBR high-quality magnification filter which is designed for pixel
+art. It follows a set of edge-detection rules, see
+http://www.libretro.com/forums/viewtopic.php?f=6&t=134 .
+
+
It accepts the following option:
+
+
+n Set the scaling dimension: 2 for 2xBR, 3 for
+3xBR and 4 for 4xBR.
+Default is 3.
+
+
+
+
30.106 yadif# TOC
+
+
Deinterlace the input video ("yadif" means "yet another deinterlacing
+filter").
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+
+mode The interlacing mode to adopt. It accepts one of the following values:
+
+
+0, send_frame Output one frame for each frame.
+
1, send_field Output one frame for each field.
+
2, send_frame_nospatial Like send_frame, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
3, send_field_nospatial Like send_field, but it skips the spatial interlacing check.
+
+
+The default value is send_frame.
+
+parity The picture field parity assumed for the input interlaced video. It accepts one
+of the following values:
+
+
+0, tff Assume the top field is first.
+
1, bff Assume the bottom field is first.
+
-1, auto Enable automatic detection of field parity.
+
+
+The default value is auto.
+If the interlacing is unknown or the decoder does not export this information,
+top field first will be assumed.
+
+deint Specify which frames to deinterlace. Accept one of the following
+values:
+
+
+0, all Deinterlace all frames.
+
1, interlaced Only deinterlace frames marked as interlaced.
+
+
+The default value is all.
+
+
+
+
30.107 zoompan# TOC
+
+
Apply Zoom & Pan effect.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+zoom, z Set the zoom expression. Default is 1.
+
+x y Set the x and y expression. Default is 0.
+
+d Set the duration expression in number of frames.
+This sets for how many number of frames effect will last for
+single input image.
+
+s Set the output image size, default is ’hd720’.
+
+
+
Each expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+in_w, iw Input width.
+
+in_h, ih Input height.
+
+out_w, ow Output width.
+
+out_h, oh Output height.
+
+in Input frame count.
+
+on Output frame count.
+
+x y Last calculated ’x’ and ’y’ position from ’x’ and ’y’ expression
+for current input frame.
+
+px py ’x’ and ’y’ of last output frame of previous input frame or 0 when there was
+not yet such frame (first input frame).
+
+zoom Last calculated zoom from ’z’ expression for current input frame.
+
+pzoom Last calculated zoom of last output frame of previous input frame.
+
+duration Number of output frames for current input frame. Calculated from ’d’ expression
+for each input frame.
+
+pduration number of output frames created for previous input frame
+
+a Rational number: input width / input height
+
+sar sample aspect ratio
+
+dar display aspect ratio
+
+
+
+
+
30.107.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Zoom-in up to 1.5 and pan at same time to some spot near center of picture:
+
+
zoompan=z='min(zoom+0.0015,1.5)':d=700:x='if(gte(zoom,1.5),x,x+1/a)':y='if(gte(zoom,1.5),y,y+1)':s=640x360
+
+
+
+
+
31 Video Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sources.
+
+
+
31.1 buffer# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the filter chain.
+
+
This source is mainly intended for a programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/vsrc_buffer.h .
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+video_size Specify the size (width and height) of the buffered video frames. For the
+syntax of this option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils
+manual.
+
+width The input video width.
+
+height The input video height.
+
+pix_fmt A string representing the pixel format of the buffered video frames.
+It may be a number corresponding to a pixel format, or a pixel format
+name.
+
+time_base Specify the timebase assumed by the timestamps of the buffered frames.
+
+frame_rate Specify the frame rate expected for the video stream.
+
+pixel_aspect, sar The sample (pixel) aspect ratio of the input video.
+
+sws_param Specify the optional parameters to be used for the scale filter which
+is automatically inserted when an input change is detected in the
+input size or format.
+
+
+
For example:
+
+
buffer=width=320:height=240:pix_fmt=yuv410p:time_base=1/24:sar=1
+
+
+
will instruct the source to accept video frames with size 320x240 and
+with format "yuv410p", assuming 1/24 as the timestamps timebase and
+square pixels (1:1 sample aspect ratio).
+Since the pixel format with name "yuv410p" corresponds to the number 6
+(check the enum AVPixelFormat definition in libavutil/pixfmt.h ),
+this example corresponds to:
+
+
buffer=size=320x240:pixfmt=6:time_base=1/24:pixel_aspect=1/1
+
+
+
Alternatively, the options can be specified as a flat string, but this
+syntax is deprecated:
+
+
width :height :pix_fmt :time_base.num :time_base.den :pixel_aspect.num :pixel_aspect.den [:sws_param ]
+
+
+
31.2 cellauto# TOC
+
+
Create a pattern generated by an elementary cellular automaton.
+
+
The initial state of the cellular automaton can be defined through the
+filename , and pattern options. If such options are
+not specified an initial state is created randomly.
+
+
At each new frame a new row in the video is filled with the result of
+the cellular automaton next generation. The behavior when the whole
+frame is filled is defined by the scroll option.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified file.
+In the file, each non-whitespace character is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+file will be ignored.
+
+pattern, p Read the initial cellular automaton state, i.e. the starting row, from
+the specified string.
+
+Each non-whitespace character in the string is considered an alive
+cell, a newline will terminate the row, and further characters in the
+string will be ignored.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial cellular automaton row. It
+is a floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to
+1/PHI.
+
+This option is ignored when a file or a pattern is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling randomly the initial row, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the cellular automaton rule, it is a number ranging from 0 to 255.
+Default value is 110.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename or pattern is specified, the size is set
+by default to the width of the specified initial state row, and the
+height is set to width * PHI.
+
+If size is set, it must contain the width of the specified
+pattern string, and the specified pattern will be centered in the
+larger row.
+
+If a filename or a pattern string is not specified, the size value
+defaults to "320x518" (used for a randomly generated initial state).
+
+scroll If set to 1, scroll the output upward when all the rows in the output
+have been already filled. If set to 0, the new generated row will be
+written over the top row just after the bottom row is filled.
+Defaults to 1.
+
+start_full, full If set to 1, completely fill the output with generated rows before
+outputting the first frame.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right row edges together.
+This is the default behavior, for disabling set the value to 0.
+
+
+
+
31.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read the initial state from pattern , and specify an output of
+size 200x400.
+
+
cellauto=f=pattern:s=200x400
+ Generate a random initial row with a width of 200 cells, with a fill
+ratio of 2/3:
+
+
cellauto=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Create a pattern generated by rule 18 starting by a single alive cell
+centered on an initial row with width 100:
+
+
cellauto=p=@:s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+ Specify a more elaborated initial pattern:
+
+
cellauto=p='@@ @ @@':s=100x400:full=0:rule=18
+
+
+
+
31.3 mandelbrot# TOC
+
+
Generate a Mandelbrot set fractal, and progressively zoom towards the
+point specified with start_x and start_y .
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+end_pts Set the terminal pts value. Default value is 400.
+
+end_scale Set the terminal scale value.
+Must be a floating point value. Default value is 0.3.
+
+inner Set the inner coloring mode, that is the algorithm used to draw the
+Mandelbrot fractal internal region.
+
+It shall assume one of the following values:
+
+black Set black mode.
+
convergence Show time until convergence.
+
mincol Set color based on point closest to the origin of the iterations.
+
period Set period mode.
+
+
+Default value is mincol .
+
+bailout Set the bailout value. Default value is 10.0.
+
+maxiter Set the maximum of iterations performed by the rendering
+algorithm. Default value is 7189.
+
+outer Set outer coloring mode.
+It shall assume one of following values:
+
+iteration_count Set iteration cound mode.
+
normalized_iteration_count set normalized iteration count mode.
+
+Default value is normalized_iteration_count .
+
+rate, r Set frame rate, expressed as number of frames per second. Default
+value is "25".
+
+size, s Set frame size. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video
+size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is "640x480".
+
+start_scale Set the initial scale value. Default value is 3.0.
+
+start_x Set the initial x position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.743643887037158704752191506114774.
+
+start_y Set the initial y position. Must be a floating point value between
+-100 and 100. Default value is -0.131825904205311970493132056385139.
+
+
+
+
31.4 mptestsrc# TOC
+
+
Generate various test patterns, as generated by the MPlayer test filter.
+
+
The size of the generated video is fixed, and is 256x256.
+This source is useful in particular for testing encoding features.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+test, t
+Set the number or the name of the test to perform. Supported tests are:
+
+dc_luma dc_chroma freq_luma freq_chroma amp_luma amp_chroma cbp mv ring1 ring2 all
+
+Default value is "all", which will cycle through the list of all tests.
+
+
+
+
Some examples:
+
+
+
will generate a "dc_luma" test pattern.
+
+
+
31.5 frei0r_src# TOC
+
+
Provide a frei0r source.
+
+
To enable compilation of this filter you need to install the frei0r
+header and configure FFmpeg with --enable-frei0r.
+
+
This source accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+size The size of the video to generate. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+framerate The framerate of the generated video. It may be a string of the form
+num /den or a frame rate abbreviation.
+
+filter_name The name to the frei0r source to load. For more information regarding frei0r and
+how to set the parameters, read the frei0r section in the video filters
+documentation.
+
+filter_params A ’|’-separated list of parameters to pass to the frei0r source.
+
+
+
+
For example, to generate a frei0r partik0l source with size 200x200
+and frame rate 10 which is overlaid on the overlay filter main input:
+
+
frei0r_src=size=200x200:framerate=10:filter_name=partik0l:filter_params=1234 [overlay]; [in][overlay] overlay
+
+
+
+
31.6 life# TOC
+
+
Generate a life pattern.
+
+
This source is based on a generalization of John Conway’s life game.
+
+
The sourced input represents a life grid, each pixel represents a cell
+which can be in one of two possible states, alive or dead. Every cell
+interacts with its eight neighbours, which are the cells that are
+horizontally, vertically, or diagonally adjacent.
+
+
At each interaction the grid evolves according to the adopted rule,
+which specifies the number of neighbor alive cells which will make a
+cell stay alive or born. The rule option allows one to specify
+the rule to adopt.
+
+
This source accepts the following options:
+
+
+filename, f Set the file from which to read the initial grid state. In the file,
+each non-whitespace character is considered an alive cell, and newline
+is used to delimit the end of each row.
+
+If this option is not specified, the initial grid is generated
+randomly.
+
+rate, r Set the video rate, that is the number of frames generated per second.
+Default is 25.
+
+random_fill_ratio, ratio Set the random fill ratio for the initial random grid. It is a
+floating point number value ranging from 0 to 1, defaults to 1/PHI.
+It is ignored when a file is specified.
+
+random_seed, seed Set the seed for filling the initial random grid, must be an integer
+included between 0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly
+set to -1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best
+effort basis.
+
+rule Set the life rule.
+
+A rule can be specified with a code of the kind "SNS /BNB ",
+where NS and NB are sequences of numbers in the range 0-8,
+NS specifies the number of alive neighbor cells which make a
+live cell stay alive, and NB the number of alive neighbor cells
+which make a dead cell to become alive (i.e. to "born").
+"s" and "b" can be used in place of "S" and "B", respectively.
+
+Alternatively a rule can be specified by an 18-bits integer. The 9
+high order bits are used to encode the next cell state if it is alive
+for each number of neighbor alive cells, the low order bits specify
+the rule for "borning" new cells. Higher order bits encode for an
+higher number of neighbor cells.
+For example the number 6153 = (12<<9)+9 specifies a stay alive
+rule of 12 and a born rule of 9, which corresponds to "S23/B03".
+
+Default value is "S23/B3", which is the original Conway’s game of life
+rule, and will keep a cell alive if it has 2 or 3 neighbor alive
+cells, and will born a new cell if there are three alive cells around
+a dead cell.
+
+size, s Set the size of the output video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+If filename is specified, the size is set by default to the
+same size of the input file. If size is set, it must contain
+the size specified in the input file, and the initial grid defined in
+that file is centered in the larger resulting area.
+
+If a filename is not specified, the size value defaults to "320x240"
+(used for a randomly generated initial grid).
+
+stitch If set to 1, stitch the left and right grid edges together, and the
+top and bottom edges also. Defaults to 1.
+
+mold Set cell mold speed. If set, a dead cell will go from death_color to
+mold_color with a step of mold . mold can have a
+value from 0 to 255.
+
+life_color Set the color of living (or new born) cells.
+
+death_color Set the color of dead cells. If mold is set, this is the first color
+used to represent a dead cell.
+
+mold_color Set mold color, for definitely dead and moldy cells.
+
+For the syntax of these 3 color options, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+
+
+
31.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Read a grid from pattern , and center it on a grid of size
+300x300 pixels:
+
+
life=f=pattern:s=300x300
+ Generate a random grid of size 200x200, with a fill ratio of 2/3:
+
+
life=ratio=2/3:s=200x200
+ Specify a custom rule for evolving a randomly generated grid:
+
+
+ Full example with slow death effect (mold) using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi life=s=300x200:mold=10:r=60:ratio=0.1:death_color=#C83232:life_color=#00ff00,scale=1200:800:flags=16
+
+
+
+
31.7 color, haldclutsrc, nullsrc, rgbtestsrc, smptebars, smptehdbars, testsrc# TOC
+
+
The color source provides an uniformly colored input.
+
+
The haldclutsrc source provides an identity Hald CLUT. See also
+haldclut filter.
+
+
The nullsrc source returns unprocessed video frames. It is
+mainly useful to be employed in analysis / debugging tools, or as the
+source for filters which ignore the input data.
+
+
The rgbtestsrc source generates an RGB test pattern useful for
+detecting RGB vs BGR issues. You should see a red, green and blue
+stripe from top to bottom.
+
+
The smptebars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE Engineering Guideline EG 1-1990.
+
+
The smptehdbars source generates a color bars pattern, based on
+the SMPTE RP 219-2002.
+
+
The testsrc source generates a test video pattern, showing a
+color pattern, a scrolling gradient and a timestamp. This is mainly
+intended for testing purposes.
+
+
The sources accept the following parameters:
+
+
+color, c Specify the color of the source, only available in the color
+source. For the syntax of this option, check the "Color" section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual.
+
+level Specify the level of the Hald CLUT, only available in the haldclutsrc
+source. A level of N generates a picture of N*N*N by N*N*N
+pixels to be used as identity matrix for 3D lookup tables. Each component is
+coded on a 1/(N*N) scale.
+
+size, s Specify the size of the sourced video. For the syntax of this option, check the
+"Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. The default value is
+"320x240".
+
+This option is not available with the haldclutsrc filter.
+
+rate, r Specify the frame rate of the sourced video, as the number of frames
+generated per second. It has to be a string in the format
+frame_rate_num /frame_rate_den , an integer number, a floating point
+number or a valid video frame rate abbreviation. The default value is
+"25".
+
+sar Set the sample aspect ratio of the sourced video.
+
+duration, d Set the duration of the sourced video. See
+(ffmpeg-utils)the Time duration section in the ffmpeg-utils(1) manual
+for the accepted syntax.
+
+If not specified, or the expressed duration is negative, the video is
+supposed to be generated forever.
+
+decimals, n Set the number of decimals to show in the timestamp, only available in the
+testsrc source.
+
+The displayed timestamp value will correspond to the original
+timestamp value multiplied by the power of 10 of the specified
+value. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For example the following:
+
+
testsrc=duration=5.3:size=qcif:rate=10
+
+
+
will generate a video with a duration of 5.3 seconds, with size
+176x144 and a frame rate of 10 frames per second.
+
+
The following graph description will generate a red source
+with an opacity of 0.2, with size "qcif" and a frame rate of 10
+frames per second.
+
+
color=c=red@0.2:s=qcif:r=10
+
+
+
If the input content is to be ignored, nullsrc can be used. The
+following command generates noise in the luminance plane by employing
+the geq filter:
+
+
nullsrc=s=256x256, geq=random(1)*255:128:128
+
+
+
+
31.7.1 Commands# TOC
+
+
The color source supports the following commands:
+
+
+c, color Set the color of the created image. Accepts the same syntax of the
+corresponding color option.
+
+
+
+
+
32 Video Sinks# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available video sinks.
+
+
+
32.1 buffersink# TOC
+
+
Buffer video frames, and make them available to the end of the filter
+graph.
+
+
This sink is mainly intended for programmatic use, in particular
+through the interface defined in libavfilter/buffersink.h
+or the options system.
+
+
It accepts a pointer to an AVBufferSinkContext structure, which
+defines the incoming buffers’ formats, to be passed as the opaque
+parameter to avfilter_init_filter for initialization.
+
+
+
32.2 nullsink# TOC
+
+
Null video sink: do absolutely nothing with the input video. It is
+mainly useful as a template and for use in analysis / debugging
+tools.
+
+
+
+
33 Multimedia Filters# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia filters.
+
+
+
33.1 avectorscope# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio vector
+scope.
+
+
The filter is used to measure the difference between channels of stereo
+audio stream. A monoaural signal, consisting of identical left and right
+signal, results in straight vertical line. Any stereo separation is visible
+as a deviation from this line, creating a Lissajous figure.
+If the straight (or deviation from it) but horizontal line appears this
+indicates that the left and right channels are out of phase.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+mode, m Set the vectorscope mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘lissajous ’
+Lissajous rotated by 45 degrees.
+
+‘lissajous_xy ’
+Same as above but not rotated.
+
+
+Default value is ‘lissajous ’.
+
+size, s Set the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check the "Video size"
+section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is 400x400.
+
+rate, r Set the output frame rate. Default value is 25.
+
+rc gc bc Specify the red, green and blue contrast. Default values are 40, 160 and 80.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+rf gf bf Specify the red, green and blue fade. Default values are 15, 10 and 5.
+Allowed range is [0, 255].
+
+zoom Set the zoom factor. Default value is 1. Allowed range is [1, 10].
+
+
+
+
33.1.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Complete example using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] avectorscope=zoom=1.3:rc=2:gc=200:bc=10:rf=1:gf=8:bf=7 [out0]'
+
+
+
+
33.2 concat# TOC
+
+
Concatenate audio and video streams, joining them together one after the
+other.
+
+
The filter works on segments of synchronized video and audio streams. All
+segments must have the same number of streams of each type, and that will
+also be the number of streams at output.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+n Set the number of segments. Default is 2.
+
+v Set the number of output video streams, that is also the number of video
+streams in each segment. Default is 1.
+
+a Set the number of output audio streams, that is also the number of audio
+streams in each segment. Default is 0.
+
+unsafe Activate unsafe mode: do not fail if segments have a different format.
+
+
+
+
The filter has v +a outputs: first v video outputs, then
+a audio outputs.
+
+
There are n x(v +a ) inputs: first the inputs for the first
+segment, in the same order as the outputs, then the inputs for the second
+segment, etc.
+
+
Related streams do not always have exactly the same duration, for various
+reasons including codec frame size or sloppy authoring. For that reason,
+related synchronized streams (e.g. a video and its audio track) should be
+concatenated at once. The concat filter will use the duration of the longest
+stream in each segment (except the last one), and if necessary pad shorter
+audio streams with silence.
+
+
For this filter to work correctly, all segments must start at timestamp 0.
+
+
All corresponding streams must have the same parameters in all segments; the
+filtering system will automatically select a common pixel format for video
+streams, and a common sample format, sample rate and channel layout for
+audio streams, but other settings, such as resolution, must be converted
+explicitly by the user.
+
+
Different frame rates are acceptable but will result in variable frame rate
+at output; be sure to configure the output file to handle it.
+
+
+
33.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
33.3 ebur128# TOC
+
+
EBU R128 scanner filter. This filter takes an audio stream as input and outputs
+it unchanged. By default, it logs a message at a frequency of 10Hz with the
+Momentary loudness (identified by M), Short-term loudness (S),
+Integrated loudness (I) and Loudness Range (LRA).
+
+
The filter also has a video output (see the video option) with a real
+time graph to observe the loudness evolution. The graphic contains the logged
+message mentioned above, so it is not printed anymore when this option is set,
+unless the verbose logging is set. The main graphing area contains the
+short-term loudness (3 seconds of analysis), and the gauge on the right is for
+the momentary loudness (400 milliseconds).
+
+
More information about the Loudness Recommendation EBU R128 on
+http://tech.ebu.ch/loudness .
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+video Activate the video output. The audio stream is passed unchanged whether this
+option is set or no. The video stream will be the first output stream if
+activated. Default is 0.
+
+size Set the video size. This option is for video only. For the syntax of this
+option, check the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default
+and minimum resolution is 640x480.
+
+meter Set the EBU scale meter. Default is 9. Common values are 9 and
+18, respectively for EBU scale meter +9 and EBU scale meter +18. Any
+other integer value between this range is allowed.
+
+metadata Set metadata injection. If set to 1, the audio input will be segmented
+into 100ms output frames, each of them containing various loudness information
+in metadata. All the metadata keys are prefixed with lavfi.r128..
+
+Default is 0.
+
+framelog Force the frame logging level.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘info ’
+information logging level
+
‘verbose ’
+verbose logging level
+
+
+By default, the logging level is set to info . If the video or
+the metadata options are set, it switches to verbose .
+
+peak Set peak mode(s).
+
+Available modes can be cumulated (the option is a flag type). Possible
+values are:
+
+‘none ’
+Disable any peak mode (default).
+
‘sample ’
+Enable sample-peak mode.
+
+Simple peak mode looking for the higher sample value. It logs a message
+for sample-peak (identified by SPK).
+
‘true ’
+Enable true-peak mode.
+
+If enabled, the peak lookup is done on an over-sampled version of the input
+stream for better peak accuracy. It logs a message for true-peak.
+(identified by TPK) and true-peak per frame (identified by FTPK).
+This mode requires a build with libswresample.
+
+
+
+
+
+
33.3.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Real-time graph using ffplay, with a EBU scale meter +18:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi -i "amovie=input.mp3,ebur128=video=1:meter=18 [out0][out1]"
+ Run an analysis with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -nostats -i input.mp3 -filter_complex ebur128 -f null -
+
+
+
+
33.4 interleave, ainterleave# TOC
+
+
Temporally interleave frames from several inputs.
+
+
interleave works with video inputs, ainterleave with audio.
+
+
These filters read frames from several inputs and send the oldest
+queued frame to the output.
+
+
Input streams must have a well defined, monotonically increasing frame
+timestamp values.
+
+
In order to submit one frame to output, these filters need to enqueue
+at least one frame for each input, so they cannot work in case one
+input is not yet terminated and will not receive incoming frames.
+
+
For example consider the case when one input is a select filter
+which always drop input frames. The interleave filter will keep
+reading from that input, but it will never be able to send new frames
+to output until the input will send an end-of-stream signal.
+
+
Also, depending on inputs synchronization, the filters will drop
+frames in case one input receives more frames than the other ones, and
+the queue is already filled.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+
+nb_inputs, n Set the number of different inputs, it is 2 by default.
+
+
+
+
33.4.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Interleave frames belonging to different streams using ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i bambi.avi -i pr0n.mkv -filter_complex "[0:v][1:v] interleave" out.avi
+ Add flickering blur effect:
+
+
select='if(gt(random(0), 0.2), 1, 2)':n=2 [tmp], boxblur=2:2, [tmp] interleave
+
+
+
+
33.5 perms, aperms# TOC
+
+
Set read/write permissions for the output frames.
+
+
These filters are mainly aimed at developers to test direct path in the
+following filter in the filtergraph.
+
+
The filters accept the following options:
+
+
+mode Select the permissions mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+Do nothing. This is the default.
+
‘ro ’
+Set all the output frames read-only.
+
‘rw ’
+Set all the output frames directly writable.
+
‘toggle ’
+Make the frame read-only if writable, and writable if read-only.
+
‘random ’
+Set each output frame read-only or writable randomly.
+
+
+seed Set the seed for the random mode, must be an integer included between
+0 and UINT32_MAX. If not specified, or if explicitly set to
+-1, the filter will try to use a good random seed on a best effort
+basis.
+
+
+
Note: in case of auto-inserted filter between the permission filter and the
+following one, the permission might not be received as expected in that
+following filter. Inserting a format or aformat filter before the
+perms/aperms filter can avoid this problem.
+
+
+
33.6 select, aselect# TOC
+
+
Select frames to pass in output.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr, e Set expression, which is evaluated for each input frame.
+
+If the expression is evaluated to zero, the frame is discarded.
+
+If the evaluation result is negative or NaN, the frame is sent to the
+first output; otherwise it is sent to the output with index
+ceil(val)-1, assuming that the input index starts from 0.
+
+For example a value of 1.2 corresponds to the output with index
+ceil(1.2)-1 = 2-1 = 1, that is the second output.
+
+outputs, n Set the number of outputs. The output to which to send the selected
+frame is based on the result of the evaluation. Default value is 1.
+
+
+
The expression can contain the following constants:
+
+
+n The (sequential) number of the filtered frame, starting from 0.
+
+selected_n The (sequential) number of the selected frame, starting from 0.
+
+prev_selected_n The sequential number of the last selected frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+pts The PTS (Presentation TimeStamp) of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in TB units. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+t The PTS of the filtered video frame,
+expressed in seconds. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_pts The PTS of the previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_pts The PTS of the last previously filtered video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+prev_selected_t The PTS of the last previously selected video frame. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_pts The PTS of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+start_t The time of the first video frame in the video. It’s NAN if undefined.
+
+pict_type (video only) The type of the filtered frame. It can assume one of the following
+values:
+
+I P B S SI SP BI
+
+interlace_type (video only) The frame interlace type. It can assume one of the following values:
+
+PROGRESSIVE The frame is progressive (not interlaced).
+
TOPFIRST The frame is top-field-first.
+
BOTTOMFIRST The frame is bottom-field-first.
+
+
+consumed_sample_n (audio only) the number of selected samples before the current frame
+
+samples_n (audio only) the number of samples in the current frame
+
+sample_rate (audio only) the input sample rate
+
+key This is 1 if the filtered frame is a key-frame, 0 otherwise.
+
+pos the position in the file of the filtered frame, -1 if the information
+is not available (e.g. for synthetic video)
+
+scene (video only) value between 0 and 1 to indicate a new scene; a low value reflects a low
+probability for the current frame to introduce a new scene, while a higher
+value means the current frame is more likely to be one (see the example below)
+
+
+
+
The default value of the select expression is "1".
+
+
+
33.6.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
33.7 sendcmd, asendcmd# TOC
+
+
Send commands to filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
These filters read commands to be sent to other filters in the
+filtergraph.
+
+
sendcmd must be inserted between two video filters,
+asendcmd must be inserted between two audio filters, but apart
+from that they act the same way.
+
+
The specification of commands can be provided in the filter arguments
+with the commands option, or in a file specified by the
+filename option.
+
+
These filters accept the following options:
+
+commands, c Set the commands to be read and sent to the other filters.
+
filename, f Set the filename of the commands to be read and sent to the other
+filters.
+
+
+
+
33.7.1 Commands syntax# TOC
+
+
A commands description consists of a sequence of interval
+specifications, comprising a list of commands to be executed when a
+particular event related to that interval occurs. The occurring event
+is typically the current frame time entering or leaving a given time
+interval.
+
+
An interval is specified by the following syntax:
+
+
+
The time interval is specified by the START and END times.
+END is optional and defaults to the maximum time.
+
+
The current frame time is considered within the specified interval if
+it is included in the interval [START , END ), that is when
+the time is greater or equal to START and is lesser than
+END .
+
+
COMMANDS consists of a sequence of one or more command
+specifications, separated by ",", relating to that interval. The
+syntax of a command specification is given by:
+
+
[FLAGS ] TARGET COMMAND ARG
+
+
+
FLAGS is optional and specifies the type of events relating to
+the time interval which enable sending the specified command, and must
+be a non-null sequence of identifier flags separated by "+" or "|" and
+enclosed between "[" and "]".
+
+
The following flags are recognized:
+
+enter The command is sent when the current frame timestamp enters the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was not in the given interval, and the
+current is.
+
+leave The command is sent when the current frame timestamp leaves the
+specified interval. In other words, the command is sent when the
+previous frame timestamp was in the given interval, and the
+current is not.
+
+
+
If FLAGS is not specified, a default value of [enter] is
+assumed.
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional list of argument for
+the given COMMAND .
+
+
Between one interval specification and another, whitespaces, or
+sequences of characters starting with # until the end of line,
+are ignored and can be used to annotate comments.
+
+
A simplified BNF description of the commands specification syntax
+follows:
+
+
COMMAND_FLAG ::= "enter" | "leave"
+COMMAND_FLAGS ::= COMMAND_FLAG [(+|"|")COMMAND_FLAG ]
+COMMAND ::= ["[" COMMAND_FLAGS "]"] TARGET COMMAND [ARG ]
+COMMANDS ::= COMMAND [,COMMANDS ]
+INTERVAL ::= START [-END ] COMMANDS
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [;INTERVALS ]
+
+
+
+
33.7.2 Examples# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
33.8 setpts, asetpts# TOC
+
+
Change the PTS (presentation timestamp) of the input frames.
+
+
setpts works on video frames, asetpts on audio frames.
+
+
This filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+expr The expression which is evaluated for each frame to construct its timestamp.
+
+
+
+
The expression is evaluated through the eval API and can contain the following
+constants:
+
+
+FRAME_RATE frame rate, only defined for constant frame-rate video
+
+PTS The presentation timestamp in input
+
+N The count of the input frame for video or the number of consumed samples,
+not including the current frame for audio, starting from 0.
+
+NB_CONSUMED_SAMPLES The number of consumed samples, not including the current frame (only
+audio)
+
+NB_SAMPLES, S The number of samples in the current frame (only audio)
+
+SAMPLE_RATE, SR The audio sample rate.
+
+STARTPTS The PTS of the first frame.
+
+STARTT the time in seconds of the first frame
+
+INTERLACED State whether the current frame is interlaced.
+
+T the time in seconds of the current frame
+
+POS original position in the file of the frame, or undefined if undefined
+for the current frame
+
+PREV_INPTS The previous input PTS.
+
+PREV_INT previous input time in seconds
+
+PREV_OUTPTS The previous output PTS.
+
+PREV_OUTT previous output time in seconds
+
+RTCTIME The wallclock (RTC) time in microseconds. This is deprecated, use time(0)
+instead.
+
+RTCSTART The wallclock (RTC) time at the start of the movie in microseconds.
+
+TB The timebase of the input timestamps.
+
+
+
+
+
33.8.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Start counting PTS from zero
+
+
+ Apply fast motion effect:
+
+
+ Apply slow motion effect:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate of 25 frames per second:
+
+
+ Set fixed rate 25 fps with some jitter:
+
+
setpts='1/(25*TB) * (N + 0.05 * sin(N*2*PI/25))'
+ Apply an offset of 10 seconds to the input PTS:
+
+
+ Generate timestamps from a "live source" and rebase onto the current timebase:
+
+
setpts='(RTCTIME - RTCSTART) / (TB * 1000000)'
+ Generate timestamps by counting samples:
+
+
+
+
+
+
33.9 settb, asettb# TOC
+
+
Set the timebase to use for the output frames timestamps.
+It is mainly useful for testing timebase configuration.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+expr, tb The expression which is evaluated into the output timebase.
+
+
+
+
The value for tb is an arithmetic expression representing a
+rational. The expression can contain the constants "AVTB" (the default
+timebase), "intb" (the input timebase) and "sr" (the sample rate,
+audio only). Default value is "intb".
+
+
+
33.9.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/25:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1/10:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 1001/1000:
+
+
+ Set the timebase to 2*intb:
+
+
+ Set the default timebase value:
+
+
+
+
+
33.10 showcqt# TOC
+
Convert input audio to a video output representing
+frequency spectrum logarithmically (using constant Q transform with
+Brown-Puckette algorithm), with musical tone scale, from E0 to D#10 (10 octaves).
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+volume Specify transform volume (multiplier) expression. The expression can contain
+variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+a_weighting(f) A-weighting of equal loudness
+
b_weighting(f) B-weighting of equal loudness
+
c_weighting(f) C-weighting of equal loudness
+
+Default value is 16.
+
+tlength Specify transform length expression. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+Default value is 384/f*tc/(384/f+tc).
+
+timeclamp Specify the transform timeclamp. At low frequency, there is trade-off between
+accuracy in time domain and frequency domain. If timeclamp is lower,
+event in time domain is represented more accurately (such as fast bass drum),
+otherwise event in frequency domain is represented more accurately
+(such as bass guitar). Acceptable value is [0.1, 1.0]. Default value is 0.17.
+
+coeffclamp Specify the transform coeffclamp. If coeffclamp is lower, transform is
+more accurate, otherwise transform is faster. Acceptable value is [0.1, 10.0].
+Default value is 1.0.
+
+gamma Specify gamma. Lower gamma makes the spectrum more contrast, higher gamma
+makes the spectrum having more range. Acceptable value is [1.0, 7.0].
+Default value is 3.0.
+
+fontfile Specify font file for use with freetype. If not specified, use embedded font.
+
+fontcolor Specify font color expression. This is arithmetic expression that should return
+integer value 0xRRGGBB. The expression can contain variables:
+
+frequency, freq, f the frequency where transform is evaluated
+
timeclamp, tc value of timeclamp option
+
+and functions:
+
+midi(f) midi number of frequency f, some midi numbers: E0(16), C1(24), C2(36), A4(69)
+
r(x), g(x), b(x) red, green, and blue value of intensity x
+
+Default value is st(0, (midi(f)-59.5)/12);
+st(1, if(between(ld(0),0,1), 0.5-0.5*cos(2*PI*ld(0)), 0));
+r(1-ld(1)) + b(ld(1))
+
+fullhd If set to 1 (the default), the video size is 1920x1080 (full HD),
+if set to 0, the video size is 960x540. Use this option to make CPU usage lower.
+
+fps Specify video fps. Default value is 25.
+
+count Specify number of transform per frame, so there are fps*count transforms
+per second. Note that audio data rate must be divisible by fps*count.
+Default value is 6.
+
+
+
+
+
33.10.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Playing audio while showing the spectrum:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with frame rate 30 fps:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fps=30:count=5 [out0]'
+ Playing at 960x540 and lower CPU usage:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=a.mp3, asplit [a][out1]; [a] showcqt=fullhd=0:count=3 [out0]'
+ A1 and its harmonics: A1, A2, (near)E3, A3:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt [out0]'
+ Same as above, but with more accuracy in frequency domain (and slower):
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'aevalsrc=0.1*sin(2*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(4*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(6*PI*55*t)+0.1*sin(8*PI*55*t),
+ asplit[a][out1]; [a] showcqt=timeclamp=0.5 [out0]'
+ B-weighting of equal loudness
+
+
volume=16*b_weighting(f)
+ Lower Q factor
+
+
tlength=100/f*tc/(100/f+tc)
+ Custom fontcolor, C-note is colored green, others are colored blue
+
+
fontcolor='if(mod(floor(midi(f)+0.5),12), 0x0000FF, g(1))'
+
+
+
+
33.11 showspectrum# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the audio frequency
+spectrum.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value is
+640x512.
+
+slide Specify how the spectrum should slide along the window.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘replace ’
+the samples start again on the left when they reach the right
+
‘scroll ’
+the samples scroll from right to left
+
‘fullframe ’
+frames are only produced when the samples reach the right
+
+
+Default value is replace.
+
+mode Specify display mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘combined ’
+all channels are displayed in the same row
+
‘separate ’
+all channels are displayed in separate rows
+
+
+Default value is ‘combined ’.
+
+color Specify display color mode.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘channel ’
+each channel is displayed in a separate color
+
‘intensity ’
+each channel is is displayed using the same color scheme
+
+
+Default value is ‘channel ’.
+
+scale Specify scale used for calculating intensity color values.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘lin ’
+linear
+
‘sqrt ’
+square root, default
+
‘cbrt ’
+cubic root
+
‘log ’
+logarithmic
+
+
+Default value is ‘sqrt ’.
+
+saturation Set saturation modifier for displayed colors. Negative values provide
+alternative color scheme. 0 is no saturation at all.
+Saturation must be in [-10.0, 10.0] range.
+Default value is 1.
+
+win_func Set window function.
+
+It accepts the following values:
+
+‘none ’
+No samples pre-processing (do not expect this to be faster)
+
‘hann ’
+Hann window
+
‘hamming ’
+Hamming window
+
‘blackman ’
+Blackman window
+
+
+Default value is hann.
+
+
+
The usage is very similar to the showwaves filter; see the examples in that
+section.
+
+
+
33.11.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Large window with logarithmic color scaling:
+
+
showspectrum=s=1280x480:scale=log
+ Complete example for a colored and sliding spectrum per channel using ffplay:
+
+
ffplay -f lavfi 'amovie=input.mp3, asplit [a][out1];
+ [a] showspectrum=mode=separate:color=intensity:slide=1:scale=cbrt [out0]'
+
+
+
+
33.12 showwaves# TOC
+
+
Convert input audio to a video output, representing the samples waves.
+
+
The filter accepts the following options:
+
+
+size, s Specify the video size for the output. For the syntax of this option, check
+the "Video size" section in the ffmpeg-utils manual. Default value
+is "600x240".
+
+mode Set display mode.
+
+Available values are:
+
+‘point ’
+Draw a point for each sample.
+
+‘line ’
+Draw a vertical line for each sample.
+
+‘p2p ’
+Draw a point for each sample and a line between them.
+
+‘cline ’
+Draw a centered vertical line for each sample.
+
+
+Default value is point.
+
+n Set the number of samples which are printed on the same column. A
+larger value will decrease the frame rate. Must be a positive
+integer. This option can be set only if the value for rate
+is not explicitly specified.
+
+rate, r Set the (approximate) output frame rate. This is done by setting the
+option n . Default value is "25".
+
+split_channels Set if channels should be drawn separately or overlap. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
+
33.12.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Output the input file audio and the corresponding video representation
+at the same time:
+
+
amovie=a.mp3,asplit[out0],showwaves[out1]
+ Create a synthetic signal and show it with showwaves, forcing a
+frame rate of 30 frames per second:
+
+
aevalsrc=sin(1*2*PI*t)*sin(880*2*PI*t):cos(2*PI*200*t),asplit[out0],showwaves=r=30[out1]
+
+
+
+
33.13 split, asplit# TOC
+
+
Split input into several identical outputs.
+
+
asplit works with audio input, split with video.
+
+
The filter accepts a single parameter which specifies the number of outputs. If
+unspecified, it defaults to 2.
+
+
+
33.13.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input:
+
+
[in] split [out0][out1]
+ To create 3 or more outputs, you need to specify the number of
+outputs, like in:
+
+
[in] asplit=3 [out0][out1][out2]
+ Create two separate outputs from the same input, one cropped and
+one padded:
+
+
[in] split [splitout1][splitout2];
+[splitout1] crop=100:100:0:0 [cropout];
+[splitout2] pad=200:200:100:100 [padout];
+ Create 5 copies of the input audio with ffmpeg:
+
+
ffmpeg -i INPUT -filter_complex asplit=5 OUTPUT
+
+
+
+
33.14 zmq, azmq# TOC
+
+
Receive commands sent through a libzmq client, and forward them to
+filters in the filtergraph.
+
+
zmq and azmq work as a pass-through filters. zmq
+must be inserted between two video filters, azmq between two
+audio filters.
+
+
To enable these filters you need to install the libzmq library and
+headers and configure FFmpeg with --enable-libzmq.
+
+
For more information about libzmq see:
+http://www.zeromq.org/
+
+
The zmq and azmq filters work as a libzmq server, which
+receives messages sent through a network interface defined by the
+bind_address option.
+
+
The received message must be in the form:
+
+
+
TARGET specifies the target of the command, usually the name of
+the filter class or a specific filter instance name.
+
+
COMMAND specifies the name of the command for the target filter.
+
+
ARG is optional and specifies the optional argument list for the
+given COMMAND .
+
+
Upon reception, the message is processed and the corresponding command
+is injected into the filtergraph. Depending on the result, the filter
+will send a reply to the client, adopting the format:
+
+
ERROR_CODE ERROR_REASON
+MESSAGE
+
+
+
MESSAGE is optional.
+
+
+
33.14.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
Look at tools/zmqsend for an example of a zmq client which can
+be used to send commands processed by these filters.
+
+
Consider the following filtergraph generated by ffplay
+
+
ffplay -dumpgraph 1 -f lavfi "
+color=s=100x100:c=red [l];
+color=s=100x100:c=blue [r];
+nullsrc=s=200x100, zmq [bg];
+[bg][l] overlay [bg+l];
+[bg+l][r] overlay=x=100 "
+
+
+
To change the color of the left side of the video, the following
+command can be used:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_0 c yellow | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
To change the right side:
+
+
echo Parsed_color_1 c pink | tools/zmqsend
+
+
+
+
+
34 Multimedia Sources# TOC
+
+
Below is a description of the currently available multimedia sources.
+
+
+
34.1 amovie# TOC
+
+
This is the same as movie source, except it selects an audio
+stream by default.
+
+
+
34.2 movie# TOC
+
+
Read audio and/or video stream(s) from a movie container.
+
+
It accepts the following parameters:
+
+
+filename The name of the resource to read (not necessarily a file; it can also be a
+device or a stream accessed through some protocol).
+
+format_name, f Specifies the format assumed for the movie to read, and can be either
+the name of a container or an input device. If not specified, the
+format is guessed from movie_name or by probing.
+
+seek_point, sp Specifies the seek point in seconds. The frames will be output
+starting from this seek point. The parameter is evaluated with
+av_strtod, so the numerical value may be suffixed by an IS
+postfix. The default value is "0".
+
+streams, s Specifies the streams to read. Several streams can be specified,
+separated by "+". The source will then have as many outputs, in the
+same order. The syntax is explained in the “Stream specifiers”
+section in the ffmpeg manual. Two special names, "dv" and "da" specify
+respectively the default (best suited) video and audio stream. Default
+is "dv", or "da" if the filter is called as "amovie".
+
+stream_index, si Specifies the index of the video stream to read. If the value is -1,
+the most suitable video stream will be automatically selected. The default
+value is "-1". Deprecated. If the filter is called "amovie", it will select
+audio instead of video.
+
+loop Specifies how many times to read the stream in sequence.
+If the value is less than 1, the stream will be read again and again.
+Default value is "1".
+
+Note that when the movie is looped the source timestamps are not
+changed, so it will generate non monotonically increasing timestamps.
+
+
+
It allows overlaying a second video on top of the main input of
+a filtergraph, as shown in this graph:
+
+
input -----------> deltapts0 --> overlay --> output
+ ^
+ |
+movie --> scale--> deltapts1 -------+
+
+
+
34.2.1 Examples# TOC
+
+
+ Skip 3.2 seconds from the start of the AVI file in.avi, and overlay it
+on top of the input labelled "in":
+
+
movie=in.avi:seek_point=3.2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read from a video4linux2 device, and overlay it on top of the input
+labelled "in":
+
+
movie=/dev/video0:f=video4linux2, scale=180:-1, setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [over];
+[in] setpts=PTS-STARTPTS [main];
+[main][over] overlay=16:16 [out]
+ Read the first video stream and the audio stream with id 0x81 from
+dvd.vob; the video is connected to the pad named "video" and the audio is
+connected to the pad named "audio":
+
+
movie=dvd.vob:s=v:0+#0x81 [video] [audio]
+
+
+
+
+
35 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffprobe ,
+ffmpeg , ffplay , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
36 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ ffprobe Documentation
+
+
+
+ ffprobe Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Synopsis# TOC
+
+
ffprobe [options ] [input_file ]
+
+
+
2 Description# TOC
+
+
ffprobe gathers information from multimedia streams and prints it in
+human- and machine-readable fashion.
+
+
For example it can be used to check the format of the container used
+by a multimedia stream and the format and type of each media stream
+contained in it.
+
+
If a filename is specified in input, ffprobe will try to open and
+probe the file content. If the file cannot be opened or recognized as
+a multimedia file, a positive exit code is returned.
+
+
ffprobe may be employed both as a standalone application or in
+combination with a textual filter, which may perform more
+sophisticated processing, e.g. statistical processing or plotting.
+
+
Options are used to list some of the formats supported by ffprobe or
+for specifying which information to display, and for setting how
+ffprobe will show it.
+
+
ffprobe output is designed to be easily parsable by a textual filter,
+and consists of one or more sections of a form defined by the selected
+writer, which is specified by the print_format option.
+
+
Sections may contain other nested sections, and are identified by a
+name (which may be shared by other sections), and an unique
+name. See the output of sections .
+
+
Metadata tags stored in the container or in the streams are recognized
+and printed in the corresponding "FORMAT", "STREAM" or "PROGRAM_STREAM"
+section.
+
+
+
+
3 Options# TOC
+
+
All the numerical options, if not specified otherwise, accept a string
+representing a number as input, which may be followed by one of the SI
+unit prefixes, for example: ’K’, ’M’, or ’G’.
+
+
If ’i’ is appended to the SI unit prefix, the complete prefix will be
+interpreted as a unit prefix for binary multiples, which are based on
+powers of 1024 instead of powers of 1000. Appending ’B’ to the SI unit
+prefix multiplies the value by 8. This allows using, for example:
+’KB’, ’MiB’, ’G’ and ’B’ as number suffixes.
+
+
Options which do not take arguments are boolean options, and set the
+corresponding value to true. They can be set to false by prefixing
+the option name with "no". For example using "-nofoo"
+will set the boolean option with name "foo" to false.
+
+
+
3.1 Stream specifiers# TOC
+
Some options are applied per-stream, e.g. bitrate or codec. Stream specifiers
+are used to precisely specify which stream(s) a given option belongs to.
+
+
A stream specifier is a string generally appended to the option name and
+separated from it by a colon. E.g. -codec:a:1 ac3 contains the
+a:1 stream specifier, which matches the second audio stream. Therefore, it
+would select the ac3 codec for the second audio stream.
+
+
A stream specifier can match several streams, so that the option is applied to all
+of them. E.g. the stream specifier in -b:a 128k matches all audio
+streams.
+
+
An empty stream specifier matches all streams. For example, -codec copy
+or -codec: copy would copy all the streams without reencoding.
+
+
Possible forms of stream specifiers are:
+
+stream_index Matches the stream with this index. E.g. -threads:1 4 would set the
+thread count for the second stream to 4.
+
stream_type [:stream_index ]stream_type is one of following: ’v’ for video, ’a’ for audio, ’s’ for subtitle,
+’d’ for data, and ’t’ for attachments. If stream_index is given, then it matches
+stream number stream_index of this type. Otherwise, it matches all
+streams of this type.
+
p:program_id [:stream_index ] If stream_index is given, then it matches the stream with number stream_index
+in the program with the id program_id . Otherwise, it matches all streams in the
+program.
+
#stream_id or i:stream_id Match the stream by stream id (e.g. PID in MPEG-TS container).
+
m:key [:value ] Matches streams with the metadata tag key having the specified value. If
+value is not given, matches streams that contain the given tag with any
+value.
+
+Note that in ffmpeg, matching by metadata will only work properly for
+input files.
+
+
+
+
3.2 Generic options# TOC
+
+
These options are shared amongst the ff* tools.
+
+
+-L Show license.
+
+-h, -?, -help, --help [arg ] Show help. An optional parameter may be specified to print help about a specific
+item. If no argument is specified, only basic (non advanced) tool
+options are shown.
+
+Possible values of arg are:
+
+long Print advanced tool options in addition to the basic tool options.
+
+full Print complete list of options, including shared and private options
+for encoders, decoders, demuxers, muxers, filters, etc.
+
+decoder=decoder_name Print detailed information about the decoder named decoder_name . Use the
+-decoders option to get a list of all decoders.
+
+encoder=encoder_name Print detailed information about the encoder named encoder_name . Use the
+-encoders option to get a list of all encoders.
+
+demuxer=demuxer_name Print detailed information about the demuxer named demuxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all demuxers and muxers.
+
+muxer=muxer_name Print detailed information about the muxer named muxer_name . Use the
+-formats option to get a list of all muxers and demuxers.
+
+filter=filter_name Print detailed information about the filter name filter_name . Use the
+-filters option to get a list of all filters.
+
+
+-version Show version.
+
+-formats Show available formats (including devices).
+
+-devices Show available devices.
+
+-codecs Show all codecs known to libavcodec.
+
+Note that the term ’codec’ is used throughout this documentation as a shortcut
+for what is more correctly called a media bitstream format.
+
+-decoders Show available decoders.
+
+-encoders Show all available encoders.
+
+-bsfs Show available bitstream filters.
+
+-protocols Show available protocols.
+
+-filters Show available libavfilter filters.
+
+-pix_fmts Show available pixel formats.
+
+-sample_fmts Show available sample formats.
+
+-layouts Show channel names and standard channel layouts.
+
+-colors Show recognized color names.
+
+-sources device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sources of the intput device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent source names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sources pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -sinks device [,opt1 =val1 [,opt2 =val2 ]...] Show autodetected sinks of the output device.
+Some devices may provide system-dependent sink names that cannot be autodetected.
+The returned list cannot be assumed to be always complete.
+
+
ffmpeg -sinks pulse,server=192.168.0.4
+ -loglevel [repeat+]loglevel | -v [repeat+]loglevel Set the logging level used by the library.
+Adding "repeat+" indicates that repeated log output should not be compressed
+to the first line and the "Last message repeated n times" line will be
+omitted. "repeat" can also be used alone.
+If "repeat" is used alone, and with no prior loglevel set, the default
+loglevel will be used. If multiple loglevel parameters are given, using
+’repeat’ will not change the loglevel.
+loglevel is a string or a number containing one of the following values:
+
+‘quiet, -8 ’
+Show nothing at all; be silent.
+
‘panic, 0 ’
+Only show fatal errors which could lead the process to crash, such as
+and assert failure. This is not currently used for anything.
+
‘fatal, 8 ’
+Only show fatal errors. These are errors after which the process absolutely
+cannot continue after.
+
‘error, 16 ’
+Show all errors, including ones which can be recovered from.
+
‘warning, 24 ’
+Show all warnings and errors. Any message related to possibly
+incorrect or unexpected events will be shown.
+
‘info, 32 ’
+Show informative messages during processing. This is in addition to
+warnings and errors. This is the default value.
+
‘verbose, 40 ’
+Same as info, except more verbose.
+
‘debug, 48 ’
+Show everything, including debugging information.
+
+
+By default the program logs to stderr, if coloring is supported by the
+terminal, colors are used to mark errors and warnings. Log coloring
+can be disabled setting the environment variable
+AV_LOG_FORCE_NOCOLOR or NO_COLOR, or can be forced setting
+the environment variable AV_LOG_FORCE_COLOR.
+The use of the environment variable NO_COLOR is deprecated and
+will be dropped in a following FFmpeg version.
+
+-report Dump full command line and console output to a file named
+program -YYYYMMDD -HHMMSS .log-loglevel verbose.
+
+Setting the environment variable FFREPORT to any value has the
+same effect. If the value is a ’:’-separated key=value sequence, these
+options will affect the report; option values must be escaped if they
+contain special characters or the options delimiter ’:’ (see the
+“Quoting and escaping” section in the ffmpeg-utils manual).
+
+The following options are recognized:
+
+file set the file name to use for the report; %p is expanded to the name
+of the program, %t is expanded to a timestamp, %% is expanded
+to a plain %
+
level set the log verbosity level using a numerical value (see -loglevel).
+
+
+For example, to output a report to a file named ffreport.log
+using a log level of 32 (alias for log level info):
+
+
+
FFREPORT=file=ffreport.log:level=32 ffmpeg -i input output
+ Errors in parsing the environment variable are not fatal, and will not
+appear in the report.
+
+-hide_banner Suppress printing banner.
+
+All FFmpeg tools will normally show a copyright notice, build options
+and library versions. This option can be used to suppress printing
+this information.
+
+-cpuflags flags (global ) Allows setting and clearing cpu flags. This option is intended
+for testing. Do not use it unless you know what you’re doing.
+
+
ffmpeg -cpuflags -sse+mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags mmx ...
+ffmpeg -cpuflags 0 ...
+ Possible flags for this option are:
+
+‘x86 ’
+
+‘mmx ’
+‘mmxext ’
+‘sse ’
+‘sse2 ’
+‘sse2slow ’
+‘sse3 ’
+‘sse3slow ’
+‘ssse3 ’
+‘atom ’
+‘sse4.1 ’
+‘sse4.2 ’
+‘avx ’
+‘xop ’
+‘fma4 ’
+‘3dnow ’
+‘3dnowext ’
+‘cmov ’
+
+‘ARM ’
+
+‘armv5te ’
+‘armv6 ’
+‘armv6t2 ’
+‘vfp ’
+‘vfpv3 ’
+‘neon ’
+
+‘PowerPC ’
+
+‘altivec ’
+
+‘Specific Processors ’
+
+‘pentium2 ’
+‘pentium3 ’
+‘pentium4 ’
+‘k6 ’
+‘k62 ’
+‘athlon ’
+‘athlonxp ’
+‘k8 ’
+
+
+
+-opencl_bench Benchmark all available OpenCL devices and show the results. This option
+is only available when FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+-opencl_options options (global ) Set OpenCL environment options. This option is only available when
+FFmpeg has been compiled with --enable-opencl.
+
+options must be a list of key =value option pairs
+separated by ’:’. See the “OpenCL Options” section in the
+ffmpeg-utils manual for the list of supported options.
+
+
+
+
3.3 AVOptions# TOC
+
+
These options are provided directly by the libavformat, libavdevice and
+libavcodec libraries. To see the list of available AVOptions, use the
+-help option. They are separated into two categories:
+
+generic These options can be set for any container, codec or device. Generic options
+are listed under AVFormatContext options for containers/devices and under
+AVCodecContext options for codecs.
+
private These options are specific to the given container, device or codec. Private
+options are listed under their corresponding containers/devices/codecs.
+
+
+
For example to write an ID3v2.3 header instead of a default ID3v2.4 to
+an MP3 file, use the id3v2_version private option of the MP3
+muxer:
+
+
ffmpeg -i input.flac -id3v2_version 3 out.mp3
+
+
+
All codec AVOptions are per-stream, and thus a stream specifier
+should be attached to them.
+
+
Note: the -nooption syntax cannot be used for boolean
+AVOptions, use -option 0 /-option 1 .
+
+
Note: the old undocumented way of specifying per-stream AVOptions by
+prepending v/a/s to the options name is now obsolete and will be
+removed soon.
+
+
+
3.4 Main options# TOC
+
+
+-f format Force format to use.
+
+-unit Show the unit of the displayed values.
+
+-prefix Use SI prefixes for the displayed values.
+Unless the "-byte_binary_prefix" option is used all the prefixes
+are decimal.
+
+-byte_binary_prefix Force the use of binary prefixes for byte values.
+
+-sexagesimal Use sexagesimal format HH:MM:SS.MICROSECONDS for time values.
+
+-pretty Prettify the format of the displayed values, it corresponds to the
+options "-unit -prefix -byte_binary_prefix -sexagesimal".
+
+-of, -print_format writer_name [=writer_options ] Set the output printing format.
+
+writer_name specifies the name of the writer, and
+writer_options specifies the options to be passed to the writer.
+
+For example for printing the output in JSON format, specify:
+
+
+For more details on the available output printing formats, see the
+Writers section below.
+
+-sections Print sections structure and section information, and exit. The output
+is not meant to be parsed by a machine.
+
+-select_streams stream_specifier Select only the streams specified by stream_specifier . This
+option affects only the options related to streams
+(e.g. show_streams, show_packets, etc.).
+
+For example to show only audio streams, you can use the command:
+
+
ffprobe -show_streams -select_streams a INPUT
+ To show only video packets belonging to the video stream with index 1:
+
+
ffprobe -show_packets -select_streams v:1 INPUT
+ -show_data Show payload data, as a hexadecimal and ASCII dump. Coupled with
+-show_packets , it will dump the packets’ data. Coupled with
+-show_streams , it will dump the codec extradata.
+
+The dump is printed as the "data" field. It may contain newlines.
+
+-show_data_hash algorithm Show a hash of payload data, for packets with -show_packets and for
+codec extradata with -show_streams .
+
+-show_error Show information about the error found when trying to probe the input.
+
+The error information is printed within a section with name "ERROR".
+
+-show_format Show information about the container format of the input multimedia
+stream.
+
+All the container format information is printed within a section with
+name "FORMAT".
+
+-show_format_entry name Like -show_format , but only prints the specified entry of the
+container format information, rather than all. This option may be given more
+than once, then all specified entries will be shown.
+
+This option is deprecated, use show_entries instead.
+
+-show_entries section_entries Set list of entries to show.
+
+Entries are specified according to the following
+syntax. section_entries contains a list of section entries
+separated by :. Each section entry is composed by a section
+name (or unique name), optionally followed by a list of entries local
+to that section, separated by ,.
+
+If section name is specified but is followed by no =, all
+entries are printed to output, together with all the contained
+sections. Otherwise only the entries specified in the local section
+entries list are printed. In particular, if = is specified but
+the list of local entries is empty, then no entries will be shown for
+that section.
+
+Note that the order of specification of the local section entries is
+not honored in the output, and the usual display order will be
+retained.
+
+The formal syntax is given by:
+
+
LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ::= SECTION_ENTRY_NAME [,LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ]
+SECTION_ENTRY ::= SECTION_NAME [=[LOCAL_SECTION_ENTRIES ]]
+SECTION_ENTRIES ::= SECTION_ENTRY [:SECTION_ENTRIES ]
+For example, to show only the index and type of each stream, and the PTS
+time, duration time, and stream index of the packets, you can specify
+the argument:
+
+
packet=pts_time,duration_time,stream_index : stream=index,codec_type
+ To show all the entries in the section "format", but only the codec
+type in the section "stream", specify the argument:
+
+
format : stream=codec_type
+ To show all the tags in the stream and format sections:
+
+
stream_tags : format_tags
+ To show only the title tag (if available) in the stream
+sections:
+
+
+-show_packets Show information about each packet contained in the input multimedia
+stream.
+
+The information for each single packet is printed within a dedicated
+section with name "PACKET".
+
+-show_frames Show information about each frame and subtitle contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+The information for each single frame is printed within a dedicated
+section with name "FRAME" or "SUBTITLE".
+
+-show_streams Show information about each media stream contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+Each media stream information is printed within a dedicated section
+with name "STREAM".
+
+-show_programs Show information about programs and their streams contained in the input
+multimedia stream.
+
+Each media stream information is printed within a dedicated section
+with name "PROGRAM_STREAM".
+
+-show_chapters Show information about chapters stored in the format.
+
+Each chapter is printed within a dedicated section with name "CHAPTER".
+
+-count_frames Count the number of frames per stream and report it in the
+corresponding stream section.
+
+-count_packets Count the number of packets per stream and report it in the
+corresponding stream section.
+
+-read_intervals read_intervals
+Read only the specified intervals. read_intervals must be a
+sequence of interval specifications separated by ",".
+ffprobe will seek to the interval starting point, and will
+continue reading from that.
+
+Each interval is specified by two optional parts, separated by "%".
+
+The first part specifies the interval start position. It is
+interpreted as an abolute position, or as a relative offset from the
+current position if it is preceded by the "+" character. If this first
+part is not specified, no seeking will be performed when reading this
+interval.
+
+The second part specifies the interval end position. It is interpreted
+as an absolute position, or as a relative offset from the current
+position if it is preceded by the "+" character. If the offset
+specification starts with "#", it is interpreted as the number of
+packets to read (not including the flushing packets) from the interval
+start. If no second part is specified, the program will read until the
+end of the input.
+
+Note that seeking is not accurate, thus the actual interval start
+point may be different from the specified position. Also, when an
+interval duration is specified, the absolute end time will be computed
+by adding the duration to the interval start point found by seeking
+the file, rather than to the specified start value.
+
+The formal syntax is given by:
+
+
INTERVAL ::= [START |+START_OFFSET ][%[END |+END_OFFSET ]]
+INTERVALS ::= INTERVAL [,INTERVALS ]
+A few examples follow.
+
+ Seek to time 10, read packets until 20 seconds after the found seek
+point, then seek to position 01:30 (1 minute and thirty
+seconds) and read packets until position 01:45.
+
+
+ Read only 42 packets after seeking to position 01:23:
+
+
+ Read only the first 20 seconds from the start:
+
+
+ Read from the start until position 02:30:
+
+
+
+
+-show_private_data, -private Show private data, that is data depending on the format of the
+particular shown element.
+This option is enabled by default, but you may need to disable it
+for specific uses, for example when creating XSD-compliant XML output.
+
+-show_program_version Show information related to program version.
+
+Version information is printed within a section with name
+"PROGRAM_VERSION".
+
+-show_library_versions Show information related to library versions.
+
+Version information for each library is printed within a section with
+name "LIBRARY_VERSION".
+
+-show_versions Show information related to program and library versions. This is the
+equivalent of setting both -show_program_version and
+-show_library_versions options.
+
+-show_pixel_formats Show information about all pixel formats supported by FFmpeg.
+
+Pixel format information for each format is printed within a section
+with name "PIXEL_FORMAT".
+
+-bitexact Force bitexact output, useful to produce output which is not dependent
+on the specific build.
+
+-i input_file Read input_file .
+
+
+
+
+
4 Writers# TOC
+
+
A writer defines the output format adopted by ffprobe, and will be
+used for printing all the parts of the output.
+
+
A writer may accept one or more arguments, which specify the options
+to adopt. The options are specified as a list of key =value
+pairs, separated by ":".
+
+
All writers support the following options:
+
+
+string_validation, sv Set string validation mode.
+
+The following values are accepted.
+
+‘fail ’
+The writer will fail immediately in case an invalid string (UTF-8)
+sequence or code point is found in the input. This is especially
+useful to validate input metadata.
+
+‘ignore ’
+Any validation error will be ignored. This will result in possibly
+broken output, especially with the json or xml writer.
+
+‘replace ’
+The writer will substitute invalid UTF-8 sequences or code points with
+the string specified with the string_validation_replacement .
+
+
+Default value is ‘replace ’.
+
+string_validation_replacement, svr Set replacement string to use in case string_validation is
+set to ‘replace ’.
+
+In case the option is not specified, the writer will assume the empty
+string, that is it will remove the invalid sequences from the input
+strings.
+
+
+
A description of the currently available writers follows.
+
+
+
4.1 default# TOC
+
Default format.
+
+
Print each section in the form:
+
+
[SECTION]
+key1=val1
+...
+keyN=valN
+[/SECTION]
+
+
+
Metadata tags are printed as a line in the corresponding FORMAT, STREAM or
+PROGRAM_STREAM section, and are prefixed by the string "TAG:".
+
+
A description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+nokey, nk If set to 1 specify not to print the key of each field. Default value
+is 0.
+
+noprint_wrappers, nw If set to 1 specify not to print the section header and footer.
+Default value is 0.
+
+
+
+
4.2 compact, csv# TOC
+
Compact and CSV format.
+
+
The csv writer is equivalent to compact, but supports
+different defaults.
+
+
Each section is printed on a single line.
+If no option is specifid, the output has the form:
+
+
section|key1=val1| ... |keyN=valN
+
+
+
Metadata tags are printed in the corresponding "format" or "stream"
+section. A metadata tag key, if printed, is prefixed by the string
+"tag:".
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+item_sep, s Specify the character to use for separating fields in the output line.
+It must be a single printable character, it is "|" by default ("," for
+the csv writer).
+
+nokey, nk If set to 1 specify not to print the key of each field. Its default
+value is 0 (1 for the csv writer).
+
+escape, e Set the escape mode to use, default to "c" ("csv" for the csv
+writer).
+
+It can assume one of the following values:
+
+c Perform C-like escaping. Strings containing a newline (’\n’), carriage
+return (’\r’), a tab (’\t’), a form feed (’\f’), the escaping
+character (’\’) or the item separator character SEP are escaped using C-like fashioned
+escaping, so that a newline is converted to the sequence "\n", a
+carriage return to "\r", ’\’ to "\\" and the separator SEP is
+converted to "\SEP ".
+
+csv Perform CSV-like escaping, as described in RFC4180. Strings
+containing a newline (’\n’), a carriage return (’\r’), a double quote
+(’"’), or SEP are enclosed in double-quotes.
+
+none Perform no escaping.
+
+
+print_section, p Print the section name at the begin of each line if the value is
+1, disable it with value set to 0. Default value is
+1.
+
+
+
+
+
4.3 flat# TOC
+
Flat format.
+
+
A free-form output where each line contains an explicit key=value, such as
+"streams.stream.3.tags.foo=bar". The output is shell escaped, so it can be
+directly embedded in sh scripts as long as the separator character is an
+alphanumeric character or an underscore (see sep_char option).
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+sep_char, s Separator character used to separate the chapter, the section name, IDs and
+potential tags in the printed field key.
+
+Default value is ’.’.
+
+hierarchical, h Specify if the section name specification should be hierarchical. If
+set to 1, and if there is more than one section in the current
+chapter, the section name will be prefixed by the name of the
+chapter. A value of 0 will disable this behavior.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
+
INI format output.
+
+
Print output in an INI based format.
+
+
The following conventions are adopted:
+
+
+ all key and values are UTF-8
+ ’.’ is the subgroup separator
+ newline, ’\t’, ’\f’, ’\b’ and the following characters are escaped
+ ’\’ is the escape character
+ ’#’ is the comment indicator
+ ’=’ is the key/value separator
+ ’:’ is not used but usually parsed as key/value separator
+
+
+
This writer accepts options as a list of key =value pairs,
+separated by ":".
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+hierarchical, h Specify if the section name specification should be hierarchical. If
+set to 1, and if there is more than one section in the current
+chapter, the section name will be prefixed by the name of the
+chapter. A value of 0 will disable this behavior.
+
+Default value is 1.
+
+
+
+
4.5 json# TOC
+
JSON based format.
+
+
Each section is printed using JSON notation.
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+compact, c If set to 1 enable compact output, that is each section will be
+printed on a single line. Default value is 0.
+
+
+
For more information about JSON, see http://www.json.org/ .
+
+
+
+
XML based format.
+
+
The XML output is described in the XML schema description file
+ffprobe.xsd installed in the FFmpeg datadir.
+
+
An updated version of the schema can be retrieved at the url
+http://www.ffmpeg.org/schema/ffprobe.xsd , which redirects to the
+latest schema committed into the FFmpeg development source code tree.
+
+
Note that the output issued will be compliant to the
+ffprobe.xsd schema only when no special global output options
+(unit , prefix , byte_binary_prefix ,
+sexagesimal etc.) are specified.
+
+
The description of the accepted options follows.
+
+
+fully_qualified, q If set to 1 specify if the output should be fully qualified. Default
+value is 0.
+This is required for generating an XML file which can be validated
+through an XSD file.
+
+xsd_compliant, x If set to 1 perform more checks for ensuring that the output is XSD
+compliant. Default value is 0.
+This option automatically sets fully_qualified to 1.
+
+
+
For more information about the XML format, see
+http://www.w3.org/XML/ .
+
+
+
5 Timecode# TOC
+
+
ffprobe supports Timecode extraction:
+
+
+ MPEG1/2 timecode is extracted from the GOP, and is available in the video
+stream details (-show_streams , see timecode ).
+
+ MOV timecode is extracted from tmcd track, so is available in the tmcd
+stream metadata (-show_streams , see TAG:timecode ).
+
+ DV, GXF and AVI timecodes are available in format metadata
+(-show_format , see TAG:timecode ).
+
+
+
+
+
+
6 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffprobe-all ,
+ffmpeg , ffplay , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+ffmpeg-codecs ,
+ffmpeg-bitstream-filters ,
+ffmpeg-formats ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+ffmpeg-protocols ,
+ffmpeg-filters
+
+
+
+
7 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ General Documentation
+
+
+
+ General Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 External libraries# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can be hooked up with a number of external libraries to add support
+for more formats. None of them are used by default, their use has to be
+explicitly requested by passing the appropriate flags to
+./configure.
+
+
+
1.1 OpenJPEG# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can use the OpenJPEG libraries for encoding/decoding J2K videos. Go to
+http://www.openjpeg.org/ to get the libraries and follow the installation
+instructions. To enable using OpenJPEG in FFmpeg, pass --enable-libopenjpeg to
+./configure .
+
+
+
+
1.2 OpenCORE, VisualOn, and Fraunhofer libraries# TOC
+
+
Spun off Google Android sources, OpenCore, VisualOn and Fraunhofer
+libraries provide encoders for a number of audio codecs.
+
+
+
OpenCORE and VisualOn libraries are under the Apache License 2.0
+(see http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 for details), which is
+incompatible to the LGPL version 2.1 and GPL version 2. You have to
+upgrade FFmpeg’s license to LGPL version 3 (or if you have enabled
+GPL components, GPL version 3) by passing --enable-version3 to configure in
+order to use it.
+
+
The Fraunhofer AAC library is licensed under a license incompatible to the GPL
+and is not known to be compatible to the LGPL. Therefore, you have to pass
+--enable-nonfree to configure to use it.
+
+
+
1.2.1 OpenCORE AMR# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the OpenCORE libraries for AMR-NB
+decoding/encoding and AMR-WB decoding.
+
+
Go to http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the libraries.
+Then pass --enable-libopencore-amrnb and/or
+--enable-libopencore-amrwb to configure to enable them.
+
+
+
1.2.2 VisualOn AAC encoder library# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the VisualOn AACenc library for AAC encoding.
+
+
Go to http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the library.
+Then pass --enable-libvo-aacenc to configure to enable it.
+
+
+
1.2.3 VisualOn AMR-WB encoder library# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the VisualOn AMR-WBenc library for AMR-WB encoding.
+
+
Go to http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the library.
+Then pass --enable-libvo-amrwbenc to configure to enable it.
+
+
+
1.2.4 Fraunhofer AAC library# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the Fraunhofer AAC library for AAC encoding.
+
+
Go to http://sourceforge.net/projects/opencore-amr/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the library.
+Then pass --enable-libfdk-aac to configure to enable it.
+
+
+
1.3 LAME# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the LAME library for MP3 encoding.
+
+
Go to http://lame.sourceforge.net/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the library.
+Then pass --enable-libmp3lame to configure to enable it.
+
+
+
1.4 TwoLAME# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the TwoLAME library for MP2 encoding.
+
+
Go to http://www.twolame.org/ and follow the
+instructions for installing the library.
+Then pass --enable-libtwolame to configure to enable it.
+
+
+
1.5 libvpx# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the libvpx library for VP8/VP9 encoding.
+
+
Go to http://www.webmproject.org/ and follow the instructions for
+installing the library. Then pass --enable-libvpx to configure to
+enable it.
+
+
+
1.6 libwavpack# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the libwavpack library for WavPack encoding.
+
+
Go to http://www.wavpack.com/ and follow the instructions for
+installing the library. Then pass --enable-libwavpack to configure to
+enable it.
+
+
+
1.7 OpenH264# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the OpenH264 library for H.264 encoding.
+
+
Go to http://www.openh264.org/ and follow the instructions for
+installing the library. Then pass --enable-libopenh264 to configure to
+enable it.
+
+
+
1.8 x264# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the x264 library for H.264 encoding.
+
+
Go to http://www.videolan.org/developers/x264.html and follow the
+instructions for installing the library. Then pass --enable-libx264 to
+configure to enable it.
+
+
+
+
1.9 x265# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can make use of the x265 library for HEVC encoding.
+
+
Go to http://x265.org/developers.html and follow the instructions
+for installing the library. Then pass --enable-libx265 to configure
+to enable it.
+
+
+
+
1.10 libilbc# TOC
+
+
iLBC is a narrowband speech codec that has been made freely available
+by Google as part of the WebRTC project. libilbc is a packaging friendly
+copy of the iLBC codec. FFmpeg can make use of the libilbc library for
+iLBC encoding and decoding.
+
+
Go to https://github.com/TimothyGu/libilbc and follow the instructions for
+installing the library. Then pass --enable-libilbc to configure to
+enable it.
+
+
+
1.11 libzvbi# TOC
+
+
libzvbi is a VBI decoding library which can be used by FFmpeg to decode DVB
+teletext pages and DVB teletext subtitles.
+
+
Go to http://sourceforge.net/projects/zapping/ and follow the instructions for
+installing the library. Then pass --enable-libzvbi to configure to
+enable it.
+
+
+
+
1.12 AviSynth# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can read AviSynth scripts as input. To enable support, pass
+--enable-avisynth to configure. The correct headers are
+included in compat/avisynth/, which allows the user to enable support
+without needing to search for these headers themselves.
+
+
For Windows, supported AviSynth variants are
+AviSynth 2.5 or 2.6 for 32-bit builds and
+AviSynth+ 0.1 for 32-bit and 64-bit builds.
+
+
For Linux and OS X, the supported AviSynth variant is
+AvxSynth .
+
+
+
AviSynth and AvxSynth are loaded dynamically. Distributors can build FFmpeg
+with --enable-avisynth, and the binaries will work regardless of the
+end user having AviSynth or AvxSynth installed - they’ll only need to be
+installed to use AviSynth scripts (obviously).
+
+
+
+
2 Supported File Formats, Codecs or Features# TOC
+
+
You can use the -formats and -codecs options to have an exhaustive list.
+
+
+
2.1 File Formats# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg supports the following file formats through the libavformat
+library:
+
+
+Name Encoding Decoding Comments 4xm X 4X Technologies format, used in some games. 8088flex TMV X ACT Voice X contains G.729 audio Adobe Filmstrip X X Audio IFF (AIFF) X X American Laser Games MM X Multimedia format used in games like Mad Dog McCree. 3GPP AMR X X Amazing Studio Packed Animation File X Multimedia format used in game Heart Of Darkness. Apple HTTP Live Streaming X Artworx Data Format X ADP X Audio format used on the Nintendo Gamecube. AFC X Audio format used on the Nintendo Gamecube. ASF X X AST X X Audio format used on the Nintendo Wii. AVI X X AviSynth X AVR X Audio format used on Mac. AVS X Multimedia format used by the Creature Shock game. Beam Software SIFF X Audio and video format used in some games by Beam Software. Bethesda Softworks VID X Used in some games from Bethesda Softworks. Binary text X Bink X Multimedia format used by many games. Bitmap Brothers JV X Used in Z and Z95 games. Brute Force & Ignorance X Used in the game Flash Traffic: City of Angels. BRSTM X Audio format used on the Nintendo Wii. BWF X X CRI ADX X X Audio-only format used in console video games. Discworld II BMV X Interplay C93 X Used in the game Cyberia from Interplay. Delphine Software International CIN X Multimedia format used by Delphine Software games. CD+G X Video format used by CD+G karaoke disks Phantom Cine X Commodore CDXL X Amiga CD video format Core Audio Format X X Apple Core Audio Format CRC testing format X Creative Voice X X Created for the Sound Blaster Pro. CRYO APC X Audio format used in some games by CRYO Interactive Entertainment. D-Cinema audio X X Deluxe Paint Animation X DFA X This format is used in Chronomaster game DSD Stream File (DSF) X DV video X X DXA X This format is used in the non-Windows version of the Feeble Files
+ game and different game cutscenes repacked for use with ScummVM. Electronic Arts cdata X Electronic Arts Multimedia X Used in various EA games; files have extensions like WVE and UV2. Ensoniq Paris Audio File X FFM (FFserver live feed) X X Flash (SWF) X X Flash 9 (AVM2) X X Only embedded audio is decoded. FLI/FLC/FLX animation X .fli/.flc files Flash Video (FLV) X X Macromedia Flash video files framecrc testing format X FunCom ISS X Audio format used in various games from FunCom like The Longest Journey. G.723.1 X X G.729 BIT X X G.729 raw X GIF Animation X X GXF X X General eXchange Format SMPTE 360M, used by Thomson Grass Valley
+ playout servers. HNM X Only version 4 supported, used in some games from Cryo Interactive iCEDraw File X ICO X X Microsoft Windows ICO id Quake II CIN video X id RoQ X X Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2 and other computer games. IEC61937 encapsulation X X IFF X Interchange File Format iLBC X X Interplay MVE X Format used in various Interplay computer games. IV8 X A format generated by IndigoVision 8000 video server. IVF (On2) X X A format used by libvpx IRCAM X X LATM X X LMLM4 X Used by Linux Media Labs MPEG-4 PCI boards LOAS X contains LATM multiplexed AAC audio LRC X X LVF X LXF X VR native stream format, used by Leitch/Harris’ video servers. Magic Lantern Video (MLV) X Matroska X X Matroska audio X FFmpeg metadata X X Metadata in text format. MAXIS XA X Used in Sim City 3000; file extension .xa. MD Studio X Metal Gear Solid: The Twin Snakes X Megalux Frame X Used by Megalux Ultimate Paint Mobotix .mxg X Monkey’s Audio X Motion Pixels MVI X MOV/QuickTime/MP4 X X 3GP, 3GP2, PSP, iPod variants supported MP2 X X MP3 X X MPEG-1 System X X muxed audio and video, VCD format supported MPEG-PS (program stream) X X also known as VOB file, SVCD and DVD format supported MPEG-TS (transport stream) X X also known as DVB Transport Stream MPEG-4 X X MPEG-4 is a variant of QuickTime. Mirillis FIC video X No cursor rendering. MIME multipart JPEG X MSN TCP webcam X Used by MSN Messenger webcam streams. MTV X Musepack X Musepack SV8 X Material eXchange Format (MXF) X X SMPTE 377M, used by D-Cinema, broadcast industry. Material eXchange Format (MXF), D-10 Mapping X X SMPTE 386M, D-10/IMX Mapping. NC camera feed X NC (AVIP NC4600) camera streams NIST SPeech HEader REsources X NTT TwinVQ (VQF) X Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation TwinVQ. Nullsoft Streaming Video X NuppelVideo X NUT X X NUT Open Container Format Ogg X X Playstation Portable PMP X Portable Voice Format X TechnoTrend PVA X Used by TechnoTrend DVB PCI boards. QCP X raw ADTS (AAC) X X raw AC-3 X X raw Chinese AVS video X X raw CRI ADX X X raw Dirac X X raw DNxHD X X raw DTS X X raw DTS-HD X raw E-AC-3 X X raw FLAC X X raw GSM X raw H.261 X X raw H.263 X X raw H.264 X X raw HEVC X X raw Ingenient MJPEG X raw MJPEG X X raw MLP X raw MPEG X raw MPEG-1 X raw MPEG-2 X raw MPEG-4 X X raw NULL X raw video X X raw id RoQ X raw Shorten X raw TAK X raw TrueHD X X raw VC-1 X X raw PCM A-law X X raw PCM mu-law X X raw PCM signed 8 bit X X raw PCM signed 16 bit big-endian X X raw PCM signed 16 bit little-endian X X raw PCM signed 24 bit big-endian X X raw PCM signed 24 bit little-endian X X raw PCM signed 32 bit big-endian X X raw PCM signed 32 bit little-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 8 bit X X raw PCM unsigned 16 bit big-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 16 bit little-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 24 bit big-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 24 bit little-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 32 bit big-endian X X raw PCM unsigned 32 bit little-endian X X raw PCM floating-point 32 bit big-endian X X raw PCM floating-point 32 bit little-endian X X raw PCM floating-point 64 bit big-endian X X raw PCM floating-point 64 bit little-endian X X RDT X REDCODE R3D X File format used by RED Digital cameras, contains JPEG 2000 frames and PCM audio. RealMedia X X Redirector X RedSpark X Renderware TeXture Dictionary X RL2 X Audio and video format used in some games by Entertainment Software Partners. RPL/ARMovie X Lego Mindstorms RSO X X RSD X RTMP X X Output is performed by publishing stream to RTMP server RTP X X RTSP X X SAP X X SBG X SDP X Sega FILM/CPK X Used in many Sega Saturn console games. Silicon Graphics Movie X Sierra SOL X .sol files used in Sierra Online games. Sierra VMD X Used in Sierra CD-ROM games. Smacker X Multimedia format used by many games. SMJPEG X X Used in certain Loki game ports. Smush X Multimedia format used in some LucasArts games. Sony OpenMG (OMA) X X Audio format used in Sony Sonic Stage and Sony Vegas. Sony PlayStation STR X Sony Wave64 (W64) X X SoX native format X X SUN AU format X X SUP raw PGS subtitles X Text files X THP X Used on the Nintendo GameCube. Tiertex Limited SEQ X Tiertex .seq files used in the DOS CD-ROM version of the game Flashback. True Audio X VC-1 test bitstream X X Vivo X WAV X X WavPack X X WebM X X Windows Televison (WTV) X X Wing Commander III movie X Multimedia format used in Origin’s Wing Commander III computer game. Westwood Studios audio X Multimedia format used in Westwood Studios games. Westwood Studios VQA X Multimedia format used in Westwood Studios games. XMV X Microsoft video container used in Xbox games. xWMA X Microsoft audio container used by XAudio 2. eXtended BINary text (XBIN) X YUV4MPEG pipe X X Psygnosis YOP X
+
+
X means that encoding (resp. decoding) is supported.
+
+
+
2.2 Image Formats# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can read and write images for each frame of a video sequence. The
+following image formats are supported:
+
+
+Name Encoding Decoding Comments .Y.U.V X X one raw file per component Alias PIX X X Alias/Wavefront PIX image format animated GIF X X BMP X X Microsoft BMP image BRender PIX X Argonaut BRender 3D engine image format. DPX X X Digital Picture Exchange EXR X OpenEXR JPEG X X Progressive JPEG is not supported. JPEG 2000 X X JPEG-LS X X LJPEG X Lossless JPEG PAM X X PAM is a PNM extension with alpha support. PBM X X Portable BitMap image PCX X X PC Paintbrush PGM X X Portable GrayMap image PGMYUV X X PGM with U and V components in YUV 4:2:0 PIC X Pictor/PC Paint PNG X X PPM X X Portable PixelMap image PTX X V.Flash PTX format SGI X X SGI RGB image format Sun Rasterfile X X Sun RAS image format TIFF X X YUV, JPEG and some extension is not supported yet. Truevision Targa X X Targa (.TGA) image format WebP E X WebP image format, encoding supported through external library libwebp XBM X X X BitMap image format XFace X X X-Face image format XWD X X X Window Dump image format
+
+
X means that encoding (resp. decoding) is supported.
+
+
E means that support is provided through an external library.
+
+
+
2.3 Video Codecs# TOC
+
+
+Name Encoding Decoding Comments 4X Movie X Used in certain computer games. 8088flex TMV X A64 multicolor X Creates video suitable to be played on a commodore 64 (multicolor mode). Amazing Studio PAF Video X American Laser Games MM X Used in games like Mad Dog McCree. AMV Video X X Used in Chinese MP3 players. ANSI/ASCII art X Apple Intermediate Codec X Apple MJPEG-B X Apple ProRes X X Apple QuickDraw X fourcc: qdrw Asus v1 X X fourcc: ASV1 Asus v2 X X fourcc: ASV2 ATI VCR1 X fourcc: VCR1 ATI VCR2 X fourcc: VCR2 Auravision Aura X Auravision Aura 2 X Autodesk Animator Flic video X Autodesk RLE X fourcc: AASC Avid 1:1 10-bit RGB Packer X X fourcc: AVrp AVS (Audio Video Standard) video X Video encoding used by the Creature Shock game. AYUV X X Microsoft uncompressed packed 4:4:4:4 Beam Software VB X Bethesda VID video X Used in some games from Bethesda Softworks. Bink Video X Bitmap Brothers JV video X y41p Brooktree uncompressed 4:1:1 12-bit X X Brute Force & Ignorance X Used in the game Flash Traffic: City of Angels. C93 video X Codec used in Cyberia game. CamStudio X fourcc: CSCD CD+G X Video codec for CD+G karaoke disks CDXL X Amiga CD video codec Chinese AVS video E X AVS1-P2, JiZhun profile, encoding through external library libxavs Delphine Software International CIN video X Codec used in Delphine Software International games. Discworld II BMV Video X Canopus Lossless Codec X Cinepak X Cirrus Logic AccuPak X X fourcc: CLJR CPiA Video Format X Creative YUV (CYUV) X DFA X Codec used in Chronomaster game. Dirac E X supported through external library libschroedinger Deluxe Paint Animation X DNxHD X X aka SMPTE VC3 Duck TrueMotion 1.0 X fourcc: DUCK Duck TrueMotion 2.0 X fourcc: TM20 DV (Digital Video) X X Dxtory capture format X Feeble Files/ScummVM DXA X Codec originally used in Feeble Files game. Electronic Arts CMV video X Used in NHL 95 game. Electronic Arts Madcow video X Electronic Arts TGV video X Electronic Arts TGQ video X Electronic Arts TQI video X Escape 124 X Escape 130 X FFmpeg video codec #1 X X lossless codec (fourcc: FFV1) Flash Screen Video v1 X X fourcc: FSV1 Flash Screen Video v2 X X Flash Video (FLV) X X Sorenson H.263 used in Flash Forward Uncompressed X Fraps X Go2Webinar X fourcc: G2M4 H.261 X X H.263 / H.263-1996 X X H.263+ / H.263-1998 / H.263 version 2 X X H.264 / AVC / MPEG-4 AVC / MPEG-4 part 10 E X encoding supported through external library libx264 and OpenH264 HEVC X X encoding supported through the external library libx265 HNM version 4 X HuffYUV X X HuffYUV FFmpeg variant X X IBM Ultimotion X fourcc: ULTI id Cinematic video X Used in Quake II. id RoQ video X X Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2, other computer games. IFF ILBM X IFF interleaved bitmap IFF ByteRun1 X IFF run length encoded bitmap Intel H.263 X Intel Indeo 2 X Intel Indeo 3 X Intel Indeo 4 X Intel Indeo 5 X Interplay C93 X Used in the game Cyberia from Interplay. Interplay MVE video X Used in Interplay .MVE files. J2K X X Karl Morton’s video codec X Codec used in Worms games. Kega Game Video (KGV1) X Kega emulator screen capture codec. Lagarith X LCL (LossLess Codec Library) MSZH X LCL (LossLess Codec Library) ZLIB E E LOCO X LucasArts SANM/Smush X Used in LucasArts games / SMUSH animations. lossless MJPEG X X Microsoft ATC Screen X Also known as Microsoft Screen 3. Microsoft Expression Encoder Screen X Also known as Microsoft Titanium Screen 2. Microsoft RLE X Microsoft Screen 1 X Also known as Windows Media Video V7 Screen. Microsoft Screen 2 X Also known as Windows Media Video V9 Screen. Microsoft Video 1 X Mimic X Used in MSN Messenger Webcam streams. Miro VideoXL X fourcc: VIXL MJPEG (Motion JPEG) X X Mobotix MxPEG video X Motion Pixels video X MPEG-1 video X X MPEG-2 video X X MPEG-4 part 2 X X libxvidcore can be used alternatively for encoding. MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 1 X MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 2 X X MPEG-4 part 2 Microsoft variant version 3 X X Nintendo Gamecube THP video X NuppelVideo/RTjpeg X Video encoding used in NuppelVideo files. On2 VP3 X still experimental On2 VP5 X fourcc: VP50 On2 VP6 X fourcc: VP60,VP61,VP62 On2 VP7 X fourcc: VP70,VP71 VP8 E X fourcc: VP80, encoding supported through external library libvpx VP9 E X encoding supported through external library libvpx Pinnacle TARGA CineWave YUV16 X fourcc: Y216 Prores X fourcc: apch,apcn,apcs,apco Q-team QPEG X fourccs: QPEG, Q1.0, Q1.1 QuickTime 8BPS video X QuickTime Animation (RLE) video X X fourcc: ’rle ’ QuickTime Graphics (SMC) X fourcc: ’smc ’ QuickTime video (RPZA) X fourcc: rpza R10K AJA Kona 10-bit RGB Codec X X R210 Quicktime Uncompressed RGB 10-bit X X Raw Video X X RealVideo 1.0 X X RealVideo 2.0 X X RealVideo 3.0 X still far from ideal RealVideo 4.0 X Renderware TXD (TeXture Dictionary) X Texture dictionaries used by the Renderware Engine. RL2 video X used in some games by Entertainment Software Partners Sierra VMD video X Used in Sierra VMD files. Silicon Graphics Motion Video Compressor 1 (MVC1) X Silicon Graphics Motion Video Compressor 2 (MVC2) X Silicon Graphics RLE 8-bit video X Smacker video X Video encoding used in Smacker. SMPTE VC-1 X Snow X X experimental wavelet codec (fourcc: SNOW) Sony PlayStation MDEC (Motion DECoder) X Sorenson Vector Quantizer 1 X X fourcc: SVQ1 Sorenson Vector Quantizer 3 X fourcc: SVQ3 Sunplus JPEG (SP5X) X fourcc: SP5X TechSmith Screen Capture Codec X fourcc: TSCC TechSmith Screen Capture Codec 2 X fourcc: TSC2 Theora E X encoding supported through external library libtheora Tiertex Limited SEQ video X Codec used in DOS CD-ROM FlashBack game. Ut Video X X v210 QuickTime uncompressed 4:2:2 10-bit X X v308 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4 X X v408 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4:4 X X v410 QuickTime uncompressed 4:4:4 10-bit X X VBLE Lossless Codec X VMware Screen Codec / VMware Video X Codec used in videos captured by VMware. Westwood Studios VQA (Vector Quantized Animation) video X Windows Media Image X Windows Media Video 7 X X Windows Media Video 8 X X Windows Media Video 9 X not completely working Wing Commander III / Xan X Used in Wing Commander III .MVE files. Wing Commander IV / Xan X Used in Wing Commander IV. Winnov WNV1 X WMV7 X X YAMAHA SMAF X X Psygnosis YOP Video X yuv4 X X libquicktime uncompressed packed 4:2:0 ZeroCodec Lossless Video X ZLIB X X part of LCL, encoder experimental Zip Motion Blocks Video X X Encoder works only in PAL8.
+
+
X means that encoding (resp. decoding) is supported.
+
+
E means that support is provided through an external library.
+
+
+
2.4 Audio Codecs# TOC
+
+
+Name Encoding Decoding Comments 8SVX exponential X 8SVX fibonacci X AAC+ E X encoding supported through external library libaacplus AAC E X encoding supported through external library libfaac and libvo-aacenc AC-3 IX IX ADPCM 4X Movie X ADPCM CDROM XA X ADPCM Creative Technology X 16 -> 4, 8 -> 4, 8 -> 3, 8 -> 2 ADPCM Electronic Arts X Used in various EA titles. ADPCM Electronic Arts Maxis CDROM XS X Used in Sim City 3000. ADPCM Electronic Arts R1 X ADPCM Electronic Arts R2 X ADPCM Electronic Arts R3 X ADPCM Electronic Arts XAS X ADPCM G.722 X X ADPCM G.726 X X ADPCM IMA AMV X Used in AMV files ADPCM IMA Electronic Arts EACS X ADPCM IMA Electronic Arts SEAD X ADPCM IMA Funcom X ADPCM IMA QuickTime X X ADPCM IMA Loki SDL MJPEG X ADPCM IMA WAV X X ADPCM IMA Westwood X ADPCM ISS IMA X Used in FunCom games. ADPCM IMA Dialogic X ADPCM IMA Duck DK3 X Used in some Sega Saturn console games. ADPCM IMA Duck DK4 X Used in some Sega Saturn console games. ADPCM IMA Radical X ADPCM Microsoft X X ADPCM MS IMA X X ADPCM Nintendo Gamecube AFC X ADPCM Nintendo Gamecube DTK X ADPCM Nintendo Gamecube THP X ADPCM QT IMA X X ADPCM SEGA CRI ADX X X Used in Sega Dreamcast games. ADPCM Shockwave Flash X X ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 2-bit X ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 2.6-bit X ADPCM Sound Blaster Pro 4-bit X ADPCM VIMA Used in LucasArts SMUSH animations. ADPCM Westwood Studios IMA X Used in Westwood Studios games like Command and Conquer. ADPCM Yamaha X X AMR-NB E X encoding supported through external library libopencore-amrnb AMR-WB E X encoding supported through external library libvo-amrwbenc Amazing Studio PAF Audio X Apple lossless audio X X QuickTime fourcc ’alac’ ATRAC1 X ATRAC3 X ATRAC3+ X Bink Audio X Used in Bink and Smacker files in many games. CELT E decoding supported through external library libcelt Delphine Software International CIN audio X Codec used in Delphine Software International games. Discworld II BMV Audio X COOK X All versions except 5.1 are supported. DCA (DTS Coherent Acoustics) X X DPCM id RoQ X X Used in Quake III, Jedi Knight 2 and other computer games. DPCM Interplay X Used in various Interplay computer games. DPCM Sierra Online X Used in Sierra Online game audio files. DPCM Sol X DPCM Xan X Used in Origin’s Wing Commander IV AVI files. DSD (Direct Stream Digitial), least significant bit first X DSD (Direct Stream Digitial), most significant bit first X DSD (Direct Stream Digitial), least significant bit first, planar X DSD (Direct Stream Digitial), most significant bit first, planar X DSP Group TrueSpeech X DV audio X Enhanced AC-3 X X EVRC (Enhanced Variable Rate Codec) X FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) X IX G.723.1 X X G.729 X GSM E X encoding supported through external library libgsm GSM Microsoft variant E X encoding supported through external library libgsm IAC (Indeo Audio Coder) X iLBC (Internet Low Bitrate Codec) E E encoding and decoding supported through external library libilbc IMC (Intel Music Coder) X MACE (Macintosh Audio Compression/Expansion) 3:1 X MACE (Macintosh Audio Compression/Expansion) 6:1 X MLP (Meridian Lossless Packing) X Used in DVD-Audio discs. Monkey’s Audio X MP1 (MPEG audio layer 1) IX MP2 (MPEG audio layer 2) IX IX encoding supported also through external library TwoLAME MP3 (MPEG audio layer 3) E IX encoding supported through external library LAME, ADU MP3 and MP3onMP4 also supported MPEG-4 Audio Lossless Coding (ALS) X Musepack SV7 X Musepack SV8 X Nellymoser Asao X X On2 AVC (Audio for Video Codec) X Opus E E supported through external library libopus PCM A-law X X PCM mu-law X X PCM signed 8-bit planar X X PCM signed 16-bit big-endian planar X X PCM signed 16-bit little-endian planar X X PCM signed 24-bit little-endian planar X X PCM signed 32-bit little-endian planar X X PCM 32-bit floating point big-endian X X PCM 32-bit floating point little-endian X X PCM 64-bit floating point big-endian X X PCM 64-bit floating point little-endian X X PCM D-Cinema audio signed 24-bit X X PCM signed 8-bit X X PCM signed 16-bit big-endian X X PCM signed 16-bit little-endian X X PCM signed 24-bit big-endian X X PCM signed 24-bit little-endian X X PCM signed 32-bit big-endian X X PCM signed 32-bit little-endian X X PCM signed 16/20/24-bit big-endian in MPEG-TS X PCM unsigned 8-bit X X PCM unsigned 16-bit big-endian X X PCM unsigned 16-bit little-endian X X PCM unsigned 24-bit big-endian X X PCM unsigned 24-bit little-endian X X PCM unsigned 32-bit big-endian X X PCM unsigned 32-bit little-endian X X PCM Zork X QCELP / PureVoice X QDesign Music Codec 2 X There are still some distortions. RealAudio 1.0 (14.4K) X X Real 14400 bit/s codec RealAudio 2.0 (28.8K) X Real 28800 bit/s codec RealAudio 3.0 (dnet) IX X Real low bitrate AC-3 codec RealAudio Lossless X RealAudio SIPR / ACELP.NET X Shorten X Sierra VMD audio X Used in Sierra VMD files. Smacker audio X SMPTE 302M AES3 audio X X Sonic X X experimental codec Sonic lossless X X experimental codec Speex E E supported through external library libspeex TAK (Tom’s lossless Audio Kompressor) X True Audio (TTA) X X TrueHD X Used in HD-DVD and Blu-Ray discs. TwinVQ (VQF flavor) X VIMA X Used in LucasArts SMUSH animations. Vorbis E X A native but very primitive encoder exists. Voxware MetaSound X WavPack X X Westwood Audio (SND1) X Windows Media Audio 1 X X Windows Media Audio 2 X X Windows Media Audio Lossless X Windows Media Audio Pro X Windows Media Audio Voice X
+
+
X means that encoding (resp. decoding) is supported.
+
+
E means that support is provided through an external library.
+
+
I means that an integer-only version is available, too (ensures high
+performance on systems without hardware floating point support).
+
+
+
2.5 Subtitle Formats# TOC
+
+
+Name Muxing Demuxing Encoding Decoding 3GPP Timed Text X X AQTitle X X DVB X X X X DVB teletext X E DVD X X X X JACOsub X X X MicroDVD X X X MPL2 X X MPsub (MPlayer) X X PGS X PJS (Phoenix) X X RealText X X SAMI X X Spruce format (STL) X X SSA/ASS X X X X SubRip (SRT) X X X X SubViewer v1 X X SubViewer X X TED Talks captions X X VobSub (IDX+SUB) X X VPlayer X X WebVTT X X X X XSUB X X
+
+
X means that the feature is supported.
+
+
E means that support is provided through an external library.
+
+
+
2.6 Network Protocols# TOC
+
+
+Name Support file X FTP X Gopher X HLS X HTTP X HTTPS X Icecast X MMSH X MMST X pipe X RTMP X RTMPE X RTMPS X RTMPT X RTMPTE X RTMPTS X RTP X SAMBA E SCTP X SFTP E TCP X TLS X UDP X
+
+
X means that the protocol is supported.
+
+
E means that support is provided through an external library.
+
+
+
+
2.7 Input/Output Devices# TOC
+
+
+Name Input Output ALSA X X BKTR X caca X DV1394 X Lavfi virtual device X Linux framebuffer X X JACK X LIBCDIO X LIBDC1394 X OpenAL X OpenGL X OSS X X PulseAudio X X SDL X Video4Linux2 X X VfW capture X X11 grabbing X Win32 grabbing X
+
+
X means that input/output is supported.
+
+
+
2.8 Timecode# TOC
+
+
+Codec/format Read Write AVI X X DV X X GXF X X MOV X X MPEG1/2 X X MXF X X
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Using git to develop FFmpeg
+
+
+
+ Using git to develop FFmpeg
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Introduction# TOC
+
+
This document aims in giving some quick references on a set of useful git
+commands. You should always use the extensive and detailed documentation
+provided directly by git:
+
+
+
+
shows you the available subcommands,
+
+
+
git <command> --help
+man git-<command>
+
+
+
shows information about the subcommand <command>.
+
+
Additional information could be found on the
+Git Reference website
+
+
For more information about the Git project, visit the
+
+
Git website
+
+
Consult these resources whenever you have problems, they are quite exhaustive.
+
+
What follows now is a basic introduction to Git and some FFmpeg-specific
+guidelines to ease the contribution to the project
+
+
+
2 Basics Usage# TOC
+
+
+
2.1 Get GIT# TOC
+
+
You can get git from http://git-scm.com/
+Most distribution and operating system provide a package for it.
+
+
+
+
2.2 Cloning the source tree# TOC
+
+
+
git clone git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg <target>
+
+
+
This will put the FFmpeg sources into the directory <target> .
+
+
+
git clone git@source.ffmpeg.org:ffmpeg <target>
+
+
+
This will put the FFmpeg sources into the directory <target> and let
+you push back your changes to the remote repository.
+
+
Make sure that you do not have Windows line endings in your checkouts,
+otherwise you may experience spurious compilation failures. One way to
+achieve this is to run
+
+
+
git config --global core.autocrlf false
+
+
+
+
+
2.3 Updating the source tree to the latest revision# TOC
+
+
+
+
pulls in the latest changes from the tracked branch. The tracked branch
+can be remote. By default the master branch tracks the branch master in
+the remote origin.
+
+
+
--rebase (see below) is recommended.
+
+
+
2.4 Rebasing your local branches# TOC
+
+
+
+
fetches the changes from the main repository and replays your local commits
+over it. This is required to keep all your local changes at the top of
+FFmpeg’s master tree. The master tree will reject pushes with merge commits.
+
+
+
+
2.5 Adding/removing files/directories# TOC
+
+
+
git add [-A] <filename/dirname>
+git rm [-r] <filename/dirname>
+
+
+
GIT needs to get notified of all changes you make to your working
+directory that makes files appear or disappear.
+Line moves across files are automatically tracked.
+
+
+
+
2.6 Showing modifications# TOC
+
+
+
git diff <filename(s)>
+
+
+
will show all local modifications in your working directory as unified diff.
+
+
+
+
2.7 Inspecting the changelog# TOC
+
+
+
+
You may also use the graphical tools like gitview or gitk or the web
+interface available at http://source.ffmpeg.org/
+
+
+
2.8 Checking source tree status# TOC
+
+
+
+
detects all the changes you made and lists what actions will be taken in case
+of a commit (additions, modifications, deletions, etc.).
+
+
+
+
2.9 Committing# TOC
+
+
+
+
to double check your changes before committing them to avoid trouble later
+on. All experienced developers do this on each and every commit, no matter
+how small.
+Every one of them has been saved from looking like a fool by this many times.
+It’s very easy for stray debug output or cosmetic modifications to slip in,
+please avoid problems through this extra level of scrutiny.
+
+
For cosmetics-only commits you should get (almost) empty output from
+
+
+
git diff -w -b <filename(s)>
+
+
+
Also check the output of
+
+
+
+
to make sure you don’t have untracked files or deletions.
+
+
+
git add [-i|-p|-A] <filenames/dirnames>
+
+
+
Make sure you have told git your name and email address
+
+
+
git config --global user.name "My Name"
+git config --global user.email my@email.invalid
+
+
+
Use –global to set the global configuration for all your git checkouts.
+
+
Git will select the changes to the files for commit. Optionally you can use
+the interactive or the patch mode to select hunk by hunk what should be
+added to the commit.
+
+
+
+
+
Git will commit the selected changes to your current local branch.
+
+
You will be prompted for a log message in an editor, which is either
+set in your personal configuration file through
+
+
+
git config --global core.editor
+
+
+
or set by one of the following environment variables:
+GIT_EDITOR , VISUAL or EDITOR .
+
+
Log messages should be concise but descriptive. Explain why you made a change,
+what you did will be obvious from the changes themselves most of the time.
+Saying just "bug fix" or "10l" is bad. Remember that people of varying skill
+levels look at and educate themselves while reading through your code. Don’t
+include filenames in log messages, Git provides that information.
+
+
Possibly make the commit message have a terse, descriptive first line, an
+empty line and then a full description. The first line will be used to name
+the patch by git format-patch.
+
+
+
2.10 Preparing a patchset# TOC
+
+
+
git format-patch <commit> [-o directory]
+
+
+
will generate a set of patches for each commit between <commit> and
+current HEAD . E.g.
+
+
+
git format-patch origin/master
+
+
+
will generate patches for all commits on current branch which are not
+present in upstream.
+A useful shortcut is also
+
+
+
+
which will generate patches from last n commits.
+By default the patches are created in the current directory.
+
+
+
2.11 Sending patches for review# TOC
+
+
+
git send-email <commit list|directory>
+
+
+
will send the patches created by git format-patch or directly
+generates them. All the email fields can be configured in the global/local
+configuration or overridden by command line.
+Note that this tool must often be installed separately (e.g. git-email
+package on Debian-based distros).
+
+
+
+
2.12 Renaming/moving/copying files or contents of files# TOC
+
+
Git automatically tracks such changes, making those normal commits.
+
+
+
mv/cp path/file otherpath/otherfile
+git add [-A] .
+git commit
+
+
+
+
+
3 Git configuration# TOC
+
+
In order to simplify a few workflows, it is advisable to configure both
+your personal Git installation and your local FFmpeg repository.
+
+
+
3.1 Personal Git installation# TOC
+
+
Add the following to your ~/.gitconfig to help git send-email
+and git format-patch detect renames:
+
+
+
[diff]
+ renames = copy
+
+
+
+
3.2 Repository configuration# TOC
+
+
In order to have git send-email automatically send patches
+to the ffmpeg-devel mailing list, add the following stanza
+to /path/to/ffmpeg/repository/.git/config :
+
+
+
[sendemail]
+ to = ffmpeg-devel@ffmpeg.org
+
+
+
+
4 FFmpeg specific# TOC
+
+
+
4.1 Reverting broken commits# TOC
+
+
+
+
git reset will uncommit the changes till <commit> rewriting
+the current branch history.
+
+
+
+
allows one to amend the last commit details quickly.
+
+
+
git rebase -i origin/master
+
+
+
will replay local commits over the main repository allowing to edit, merge
+or remove some of them in the process.
+
+
+
git reset, git commit --amend and git rebase
+rewrite history, so you should use them ONLY on your local or topic branches.
+The main repository will reject those changes.
+
+
+
+
git revert will generate a revert commit. This will not make the
+faulty commit disappear from the history.
+
+
+
4.2 Pushing changes to remote trees# TOC
+
+
+
+
Will push the changes to the default remote (origin ).
+Git will prevent you from pushing changes if the local and remote trees are
+out of sync. Refer to and to sync the local tree.
+
+
+
git remote add <name> <url>
+
+
+
Will add additional remote with a name reference, it is useful if you want
+to push your local branch for review on a remote host.
+
+
+
git push <remote> <refspec>
+
+
+
Will push the changes to the <remote> repository.
+Omitting <refspec> makes git push update all the remote
+branches matching the local ones.
+
+
+
4.3 Finding a specific svn revision# TOC
+
+
Since version 1.7.1 git supports :/foo syntax for specifying commits
+based on a regular expression. see man gitrevisions
+
+
+
git show :/'as revision 23456'
+
+
+
will show the svn changeset r23456 . With older git versions searching in
+the git log output is the easiest option (especially if a pager with
+search capabilities is used).
+This commit can be checked out with
+
+
+
git checkout -b svn_23456 :/'as revision 23456'
+
+
+
or for git < 1.7.1 with
+
+
+
git checkout -b svn_23456 $SHA1
+
+
+
where $SHA1 is the commit hash from the git log output.
+
+
+
+
5 pre-push checklist# TOC
+
+
Once you have a set of commits that you feel are ready for pushing,
+work through the following checklist to doublecheck everything is in
+proper order. This list tries to be exhaustive. In case you are just
+pushing a typo in a comment, some of the steps may be unnecessary.
+Apply your common sense, but if in doubt, err on the side of caution.
+
+
First, make sure that the commits and branches you are going to push
+match what you want pushed and that nothing is missing, extraneous or
+wrong. You can see what will be pushed by running the git push command
+with –dry-run first. And then inspecting the commits listed with
+git log -p 1234567..987654. The git status command
+may help in finding local changes that have been forgotten to be added.
+
+
Next let the code pass through a full run of our testsuite.
+
+
+ make distclean
+ /path/to/ffmpeg/configure
+ make check
+ if fate fails due to missing samples run make fate-rsync and retry
+
+
+
Make sure all your changes have been checked before pushing them, the
+testsuite only checks against regressions and that only to some extend. It does
+obviously not check newly added features/code to be working unless you have
+added a test for that (which is recommended).
+
+
Also note that every single commit should pass the test suite, not just
+the result of a series of patches.
+
+
Once everything passed, push the changes to your public ffmpeg clone and post a
+merge request to ffmpeg-devel. You can also push them directly but this is not
+recommended.
+
+
+
6 Server Issues# TOC
+
+
Contact the project admins root@ffmpeg.org if you have technical
+problems with the GIT server.
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libavcodec Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libavcodec Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libavcodec library provides a generic encoding/decoding framework
+and contains multiple decoders and encoders for audio, video and
+subtitle streams, and several bitstream filters.
+
+
The shared architecture provides various services ranging from bit
+stream I/O to DSP optimizations, and makes it suitable for
+implementing robust and fast codecs as well as for experimentation.
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-codecs , bitstream-filters ,
+libavutil
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libavdevice Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libavdevice Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libavdevice library provides a generic framework for grabbing from
+and rendering to many common multimedia input/output devices, and
+supports several input and output devices, including Video4Linux2,
+VfW, DShow, and ALSA.
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-devices ,
+libavutil , libavcodec , libavformat
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libavfilter Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libavfilter Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libavfilter library provides a generic audio/video filtering
+framework containing several filters, sources and sinks.
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-filters ,
+libavutil , libswscale , libswresample ,
+libavcodec , libavformat , libavdevice
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libavformat Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libavformat Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libavformat library provides a generic framework for multiplexing
+and demultiplexing (muxing and demuxing) audio, video and subtitle
+streams. It encompasses multiple muxers and demuxers for multimedia
+container formats.
+
+
It also supports several input and output protocols to access a media
+resource.
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-formats , ffmpeg-protocols ,
+libavutil , libavcodec
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libavutil Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libavutil Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libavutil library is a utility library to aid portable
+multimedia programming. It contains safe portable string functions,
+random number generators, data structures, additional mathematics
+functions, cryptography and multimedia related functionality (like
+enumerations for pixel and sample formats). It is not a library for
+code needed by both libavcodec and libavformat.
+
+
The goals for this library is to be:
+
+
+Modular It should have few interdependencies and the possibility of disabling individual
+parts during ./configure.
+
+Small Both sources and objects should be small.
+
+Efficient It should have low CPU and memory usage.
+
+Useful It should avoid useless features that almost no one needs.
+
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-utils
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libswresample Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libswresample Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libswresample library performs highly optimized audio resampling,
+rematrixing and sample format conversion operations.
+
+
Specifically, this library performs the following conversions:
+
+
+ Resampling : is the process of changing the audio rate, for
+example from a high sample rate of 44100Hz to 8000Hz. Audio
+conversion from high to low sample rate is a lossy process. Several
+resampling options and algorithms are available.
+
+ Format conversion : is the process of converting the type of
+samples, for example from 16-bit signed samples to unsigned 8-bit or
+float samples. It also handles packing conversion, when passing from
+packed layout (all samples belonging to distinct channels interleaved
+in the same buffer), to planar layout (all samples belonging to the
+same channel stored in a dedicated buffer or "plane").
+
+ Rematrixing : is the process of changing the channel layout, for
+example from stereo to mono. When the input channels cannot be mapped
+to the output streams, the process is lossy, since it involves
+different gain factors and mixing.
+
+
+
Various other audio conversions (e.g. stretching and padding) are
+enabled through dedicated options.
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-resampler ,
+libavutil
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Libswscale Documentation
+
+
+
+ Libswscale Documentation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
+
The libswscale library performs highly optimized image scaling and
+colorspace and pixel format conversion operations.
+
+
Specifically, this library performs the following conversions:
+
+
+
+
+
+
2 See Also# TOC
+
+
ffmpeg , ffplay , ffprobe , ffserver ,
+ffmpeg-scaler ,
+libavutil
+
+
+
+
3 Authors# TOC
+
+
The FFmpeg developers.
+
+
For details about the authorship, see the Git history of the project
+(git://source.ffmpeg.org/ffmpeg), e.g. by typing the command
+git log in the FFmpeg source directory, or browsing the
+online repository at http://source.ffmpeg.org .
+
+
Maintainers for the specific components are listed in the file
+MAINTAINERS in the source code tree.
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ NUT
+
+
+
+ NUT
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Description# TOC
+
NUT is a low overhead generic container format. It stores audio, video,
+subtitle and user-defined streams in a simple, yet efficient, way.
+
+
It was created by a group of FFmpeg and MPlayer developers in 2003
+and was finalized in 2008.
+
+
The official nut specification is at svn://svn.mplayerhq.hu/nut
+In case of any differences between this text and the official specification,
+the official specification shall prevail.
+
+
+
+
NUT has some variants signaled by using the flags field in its main header.
+
+
+BROADCAST Extend the syncpoint to report the sender wallclock PIPE Omit completely the syncpoint
+
+
+
2.1 BROADCAST# TOC
+
+
The BROADCAST variant provides a secondary time reference to facilitate
+detecting endpoint latency and network delays.
+It assumes all the endpoint clocks are syncronized.
+To be used in real-time scenarios.
+
+
+
2.2 PIPE# TOC
+
+
The PIPE variant assumes NUT is used as non-seekable intermediate container,
+by not using syncpoint removes unneeded overhead and reduces the overall
+memory usage.
+
+
+
3 Container-specific codec tags# TOC
+
+
+
3.1 Generic raw YUVA formats# TOC
+
+
Since many exotic planar YUVA pixel formats are not considered by
+the AVI/QuickTime FourCC lists, the following scheme is adopted for
+representing them.
+
+
The first two bytes can contain the values:
+Y1 = only Y
+Y2 = Y+A
+Y3 = YUV
+Y4 = YUVA
+
+
The third byte represents the width and height chroma subsampling
+values for the UV planes, that is the amount to shift the luma
+width/height right to find the chroma width/height.
+
+
The fourth byte is the number of bits used (8, 16, ...).
+
+
If the order of bytes is inverted, that means that each component has
+to be read big-endian.
+
+
+
3.2 Raw Audio# TOC
+
+
+ALAW A-LAW ULAW MU-LAW P<type><interleaving><bits> little-endian PCM <bits><interleaving><type>P big-endian PCM
+
+
<type> is S for signed integer, U for unsigned integer, F for IEEE float
+<interleaving> is D for default, P is for planar.
+<bits> is 8/16/24/32
+
+
+
PFD[32] would for example be signed 32 bit little-endian IEEE float
+
+
+
+
3.3 Subtitles# TOC
+
+
+UTF8 Raw UTF-8 SSA[0] SubStation Alpha DVDS DVD subtitles DVBS DVB subtitles
+
+
+
3.4 Raw Data# TOC
+
+
+
+
+
3.5 Codecs# TOC
+
+
+3IV1 non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by old 3ivx ASV1 Asus Video ASV2 Asus Video 2 CVID Cinepak CYUV Creative YUV DIVX non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by old DivX DUCK Truemotion 1 FFV1 FFmpeg video 1 FFVH FFmpeg Huffyuv H261 ITU H.261 H262 ITU H.262 H263 ITU H.263 H264 ITU H.264 HFYU Huffyuv I263 Intel H.263 IV31 Indeo 3.1 IV32 Indeo 3.2 IV50 Indeo 5.0 LJPG ITU JPEG (lossless) MJLS ITU JPEG-LS MJPG ITU JPEG MPG4 MS MPEG-4v1 (not ISO MPEG-4) MP42 MS MPEG-4v2 MP43 MS MPEG-4v3 MP4V ISO MPEG-4 Part 2 Video (from old encoders) mpg1 ISO MPEG-1 Video mpg2 ISO MPEG-2 Video MRLE MS RLE MSVC MS Video 1 RT21 Indeo 2.1 RV10 RealVideo 1.0 RV20 RealVideo 2.0 RV30 RealVideo 3.0 RV40 RealVideo 4.0 SNOW FFmpeg Snow SVQ1 Sorenson Video 1 SVQ3 Sorenson Video 3 theo Xiph Theora TM20 Truemotion 2.0 UMP4 non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by UB Video MPEG-4 VCR1 ATI VCR1 VP30 VP 3.0 VP31 VP 3.1 VP50 VP 5.0 VP60 VP 6.0 VP61 VP 6.1 VP62 VP 6.2 VP70 VP 7.0 WMV1 MS WMV7 WMV2 MS WMV8 WMV3 MS WMV9 WV1F non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by ? WVC1 VC-1 XVID non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by old Xvid XVIX non-compliant MPEG-4 generated by old Xvid with interlacing bug
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+ Platform Specific Information
+
+
+
+ Platform Specific Information
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Table of Contents
+
+
+
+
+
+
1 Unix-like# TOC
+
+
Some parts of FFmpeg cannot be built with version 2.15 of the GNU
+assembler which is still provided by a few AMD64 distributions. To
+make sure your compiler really uses the required version of gas
+after a binutils upgrade, run:
+
+
+
$(gcc -print-prog-name=as) --version
+
+
+
If not, then you should install a different compiler that has no
+hard-coded path to gas. In the worst case pass --disable-asm
+to configure.
+
+
+
1.1 Advanced linking configuration# TOC
+
+
If you compiled FFmpeg libraries statically and you want to use them to
+build your own shared library, you may need to force PIC support (with
+--enable-pic during FFmpeg configure) and add the following option
+to your project LDFLAGS:
+
+
+
+
If your target platform requires position independent binaries, you should
+pass the correct linking flag (e.g. -pie) to --extra-ldexeflags.
+
+
+
+
+
BSD make will not build FFmpeg, you need to install and use GNU Make
+(gmake).
+
+
+
1.3 (Open)Solaris# TOC
+
+
GNU Make is required to build FFmpeg, so you have to invoke (gmake),
+standard Solaris Make will not work. When building with a non-c99 front-end
+(gcc, generic suncc) add either --extra-libs=/usr/lib/values-xpg6.o
+or --extra-libs=/usr/lib/64/values-xpg6.o to the configure options
+since the libc is not c99-compliant by default. The probes performed by
+configure may raise an exception leading to the death of configure itself
+due to a bug in the system shell. Simply invoke a different shell such as
+bash directly to work around this:
+
+
+
+
+
1.4 Darwin (Mac OS X, iPhone)# TOC
+
+
The toolchain provided with Xcode is sufficient to build the basic
+unacelerated code.
+
+
Mac OS X on PowerPC or ARM (iPhone) requires a preprocessor from
+https://github.com/FFmpeg/gas-preprocessor or
+https://github.com/yuvi/gas-preprocessor (currently outdated) to build the optimized
+assembly functions. Put the Perl script somewhere
+in your PATH, FFmpeg’s configure will pick it up automatically.
+
+
Mac OS X on amd64 and x86 requires yasm to build most of the
+optimized assembly functions. Fink ,
+Gentoo Prefix ,
+Homebrew
+or MacPorts can easily provide it.
+
+
+
+
+
+
Using a cross-compiler is preferred for various reasons.
+http://www.delorie.com/howto/djgpp/linux-x-djgpp.html
+
+
+
+
+
+
For information about compiling FFmpeg on OS/2 see
+http://www.edm2.com/index.php/FFmpeg .
+
+
+
+
4 Windows# TOC
+
+
To get help and instructions for building FFmpeg under Windows, check out
+the FFmpeg Windows Help Forum at http://ffmpeg.zeranoe.com/forum/ .
+
+
+
4.1 Native Windows compilation using MinGW or MinGW-w64# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can be built to run natively on Windows using the MinGW or MinGW-w64
+toolchains. Install the latest versions of MSYS and MinGW or MinGW-w64 from
+http://www.mingw.org/ or http://mingw-w64.sourceforge.net/ .
+You can find detailed installation instructions in the download section and
+the FAQ.
+
+
Notes:
+
+
+ Building natively using MSYS can be sped up by disabling implicit rules
+in the Makefile by calling make -r instead of plain make. This
+speed up is close to non-existent for normal one-off builds and is only
+noticeable when running make for a second time (for example during
+make install).
+
+ In order to compile FFplay, you must have the MinGW development library
+of SDL and pkg-config installed.
+
+ By using ./configure --enable-shared when configuring FFmpeg,
+you can build the FFmpeg libraries (e.g. libavutil, libavcodec,
+libavformat) as DLLs.
+
+
+
+
+
4.2 Microsoft Visual C++ or Intel C++ Compiler for Windows# TOC
+
+
FFmpeg can be built with MSVC 2012 or earlier using a C99-to-C89 conversion utility
+and wrapper, or with MSVC 2013 and ICL natively.
+
+
You will need the following prerequisites:
+
+
+
+
To set up a proper environment in MSYS, you need to run msys.bat from
+the Visual Studio or Intel Compiler command prompt.
+
+
Place yasm.exe somewhere in your PATH. If using MSVC 2012 or
+earlier, place c99wrap.exe and c99conv.exe somewhere in your
+PATH as well.
+
+
Next, make sure any other headers and libs you want to use, such as zlib, are
+located in a spot that the compiler can see. Do so by modifying the LIB
+and INCLUDE environment variables to include the Windows-style
+paths to these directories. Alternatively, you can try and use the
+--extra-cflags/--extra-ldflags configure options. If using MSVC
+2012 or earlier, place inttypes.h somewhere the compiler can see too.
+
+
Finally, run:
+
+
+
For MSVC:
+./configure --toolchain=msvc
+
+For ICL:
+./configure --toolchain=icl
+
+make
+make install
+
+
+
If you wish to compile shared libraries, add --enable-shared to your
+configure options. Note that due to the way MSVC and ICL handle DLL imports and
+exports, you cannot compile static and shared libraries at the same time, and
+enabling shared libraries will automatically disable the static ones.
+
+
Notes:
+
+
+
+
+
4.2.1 Linking to FFmpeg with Microsoft Visual C++# TOC
+
+
If you plan to link with MSVC-built static libraries, you will need
+to make sure you have Runtime Library set to
+Multi-threaded (/MT) in your project’s settings.
+
+
You will need to define inline to something MSVC understands:
+
+
#define inline __inline
+
+
+
Also note, that as stated in Microsoft Visual C++ , you will need
+an MSVC-compatible inttypes.h .
+
+
If you plan on using import libraries created by dlltool, you must
+set References to No (/OPT:NOREF) under the linker optimization
+settings, otherwise the resulting binaries will fail during runtime.
+This is not required when using import libraries generated by lib.exe.
+This issue is reported upstream at
+http://sourceware.org/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=12633 .
+
+
To create import libraries that work with the /OPT:REF option
+(which is enabled by default in Release mode), follow these steps:
+
+
+ Open the Visual Studio Command Prompt .
+
+Alternatively, in a normal command line prompt, call vcvars32.bat
+which sets up the environment variables for the Visual C++ tools
+(the standard location for this file is something like
+C:\Program Files (x86_\Microsoft Visual Studio 10.0\VC\bin\vcvars32.bat ).
+
+ Enter the bin directory where the created LIB and DLL files
+are stored.
+
+ Generate new import libraries with lib.exe:
+
+
+
lib /machine:i386 /def:..\lib\foo-version.def /out:foo.lib
+ Replace foo-version and foo with the respective library names.
+
+
+
+
+
4.3 Cross compilation for Windows with Linux# TOC
+
+
You must use the MinGW cross compilation tools available at
+http://www.mingw.org/ .
+
+
Then configure FFmpeg with the following options:
+
+
./configure --target-os=mingw32 --cross-prefix=i386-mingw32msvc-
+
+
(you can change the cross-prefix according to the prefix chosen for the
+MinGW tools).
+
+
Then you can easily test FFmpeg with Wine .
+
+
+
4.4 Compilation under Cygwin# TOC
+
+
Please use Cygwin 1.7.x as the obsolete 1.5.x Cygwin versions lack
+llrint() in its C library.
+
+
Install your Cygwin with all the "Base" packages, plus the
+following "Devel" ones:
+
+
binutils, gcc4-core, make, git, mingw-runtime, texinfo
+
+
+
In order to run FATE you will also need the following "Utils" packages:
+
+
+
If you want to build FFmpeg with additional libraries, download Cygwin
+"Devel" packages for Ogg and Vorbis from any Cygwin packages repository:
+
+
libogg-devel, libvorbis-devel
+
+
+
These library packages are only available from
+Cygwin Ports :
+
+
+
yasm, libSDL-devel, libfaac-devel, libaacplus-devel, libgsm-devel, libmp3lame-devel,
+libschroedinger1.0-devel, speex-devel, libtheora-devel, libxvidcore-devel
+
+
+
The recommendation for x264 is to build it from source, as it evolves too
+quickly for Cygwin Ports to be up to date.
+
+
+
4.5 Crosscompilation for Windows under Cygwin# TOC
+
+
With Cygwin you can create Windows binaries that do not need the cygwin1.dll.
+
+
Just install your Cygwin as explained before, plus these additional
+"Devel" packages:
+
+
gcc-mingw-core, mingw-runtime, mingw-zlib
+
+
+
and add some special flags to your configure invocation.
+
+
For a static build run
+
+
./configure --target-os=mingw32 --extra-cflags=-mno-cygwin --extra-libs=-mno-cygwin
+
+
+
and for a build with shared libraries
+
+
./configure --target-os=mingw32 --enable-shared --disable-static --extra-cflags=-mno-cygwin --extra-libs=-mno-cygwin
+
+
+
+
5 Plan 9# TOC
+
+
The native Plan 9 compiler
+does not implement all the C99 features needed by FFmpeg so the gcc
+port must be used. Furthermore, a few items missing from the C
+library and shell environment need to be fixed.
+
+
+ GNU awk, grep, make, and sed
+
+Working packages of these tools can be found at
+ports2plan9 .
+They can be installed with 9front’s pkg
+utility by setting pkgpath to
+http://ports2plan9.googlecode.com/files/.
+
+ Missing/broken head and printf commands
+
+Replacements adequate for building FFmpeg can be found in the
+compat/plan9 directory. Place these somewhere they will be
+found by the shell. These are not full implementations of the
+commands and are not suitable for general use.
+
+ Missing C99 stdint.h and inttypes.h
+
+Replacement headers are available from
+http://code.google.com/p/plan9front/issues/detail?id=152 .
+
+ Missing or non-standard library functions
+
+Some functions in the C library are missing or incomplete. The
+gcc-apelibs-1207 ports2plan9
+includes an updated C library, but installing the full package gives
+unusable executables. Instead, keep the files from gccbin.tgz
+under /386/lib/gnu. From the libc.a archive in the
+gcc-apelibs-1207 package, extract the following object files and
+turn them into a library:
+
+
+ strerror.o
+ strtoll.o
+ snprintf.o
+ vsnprintf.o
+ vfprintf.o
+ _IO_getc.o
+ _IO_putc.o
+
+
+Use the --extra-libs option of configure to inform the
+build system of this library.
+
+ FPU exceptions enabled by default
+
+Unlike most other systems, Plan 9 enables FPU exceptions by default.
+These must be disabled before calling any FFmpeg functions. While the
+included tools will do this automatically, other users of the
+libraries must do it themselves.
+
+
+
+
+
+ This document was generated on January 14, 2015 using makeinfo
+
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/buffer.h"
+#include "libavutil/cpu.h"
+#include "libavutil/channel_layout.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libavc Encoding/Decoding Library
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_decoding Decoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_encoding Encoding
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_native Native Codecs
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_wrappers External library wrappers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel Hardware Accelerators bridge
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavc_internal Internal
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ *
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_core Core functions/structures.
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Basic definitions, functions for querying libavcodec capabilities,
+ * allocating core structures, etc.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Identify the syntax and semantics of the bitstream.
+ * The principle is roughly:
+ * Two decoders with the same ID can decode the same streams.
+ * Two encoders with the same ID can encode compatible streams.
+ * There may be slight deviations from the principle due to implementation
+ * details.
+ *
+ * If you add a codec ID to this list, add it so that
+ * 1. no value of a existing codec ID changes (that would break ABI),
+ * 2. Give it a value which when taken as ASCII is recognized uniquely by a human as this specific codec.
+ * This ensures that 2 forks can independently add AVCodecIDs without producing conflicts.
+ *
+ * After adding new codec IDs, do not forget to add an entry to the codec
+ * descriptor list and bump libavcodec minor version.
+ */
+enum AVCodecID {
+ AV_CODEC_ID_NONE,
+
+ /* video codecs */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG1VIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG2VIDEO, ///< preferred ID for MPEG-1/2 video decoding
+#if FF_API_XVMC
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG2VIDEO_XVMC,
+#endif /* FF_API_XVMC */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_H261,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_H263,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RV10,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RV20,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MJPEG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MJPEGB,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_LJPEG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SP5X,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_JPEGLS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RAWVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMV2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_H263P,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_H263I,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FLV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SVQ1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SVQ3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_HUFFYUV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CYUV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_H264,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_THEORA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ASV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ASV2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FFV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_4XM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VCR1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CLJR,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MDEC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ROQ,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_VIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_WC3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_WC4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RPZA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CINEPAK,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WS_VQA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSRLE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSVIDEO1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IDCIN,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_8BPS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FLIC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VMDVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSZH,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ZLIB,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QTRLE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TSCC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ULTI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QDRAW,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VIXL,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QPEG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PNG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PPM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PBM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PGM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PGMYUV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PAM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FFVHUFF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RV30,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RV40,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VC1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMV3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_LOCO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WNV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AASC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FRAPS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BMP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CSCD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MMVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ZMBV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AVS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMACKVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_NUV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_KMVC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FLASHSV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CAVS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_JPEG2000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VMNC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP5,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP6,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP6F,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TARGA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSICINVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TIERTEXSEQVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TIFF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_GIF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DXA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DNXHD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_THP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SGI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_C93,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BETHSOFTVID,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PTX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TXD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP6A,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AMV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VB,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SUNRAST,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INDEO5,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MIMIC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RL2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ESCAPE124,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DIRAC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BFI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CMV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MOTIONPIXELS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TGV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TGQ,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TQI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AURA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AURA2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_V210X,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TMV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_V210,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DPX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MAD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FRWU,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FLASHSV2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CDGRAPHICS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_R210,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ANM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BINKVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IFF_ILBM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IFF_BYTERUN1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_KGV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_YOP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP8,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PICTOR,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ANSI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI5,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_R10K,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MXPEG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_LAGARITH,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PRORES,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_JV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DFA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMV3IMAGE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VC1IMAGE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_UTVIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BMV_VIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VBLE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DXTORY,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_V410,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XWD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CDXL,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XBM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ZEROCODEC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSS1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSA1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TSCC2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MTS2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CLLC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MSS2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP9,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AIC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ESCAPE130_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_G2M_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WEBP_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_HNM4_VIDEO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_HEVC_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FIC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ALIAS_PIX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BRENDER_PIX_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_VIDEO_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_EXR_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP7_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SANM_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SGIRLE_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MVC1_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MVC2_DEPRECATED,
+
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BRENDER_PIX= MKBETAG('B','P','I','X'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_Y41P = MKBETAG('Y','4','1','P'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ESCAPE130 = MKBETAG('E','1','3','0'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_EXR = MKBETAG('0','E','X','R'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AVRP = MKBETAG('A','V','R','P'),
+
+ AV_CODEC_ID_012V = MKBETAG('0','1','2','V'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_G2M = MKBETAG( 0 ,'G','2','M'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AVUI = MKBETAG('A','V','U','I'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AYUV = MKBETAG('A','Y','U','V'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TARGA_Y216 = MKBETAG('T','2','1','6'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_V308 = MKBETAG('V','3','0','8'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_V408 = MKBETAG('V','4','0','8'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_YUV4 = MKBETAG('Y','U','V','4'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SANM = MKBETAG('S','A','N','M'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_VIDEO = MKBETAG('P','A','F','V'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AVRN = MKBETAG('A','V','R','n'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CPIA = MKBETAG('C','P','I','A'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XFACE = MKBETAG('X','F','A','C'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SGIRLE = MKBETAG('S','G','I','R'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MVC1 = MKBETAG('M','V','C','1'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MVC2 = MKBETAG('M','V','C','2'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SNOW = MKBETAG('S','N','O','W'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WEBP = MKBETAG('W','E','B','P'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMVJPEG = MKBETAG('S','M','V','J'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_HEVC = MKBETAG('H','2','6','5'),
+#define AV_CODEC_ID_H265 AV_CODEC_ID_HEVC
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VP7 = MKBETAG('V','P','7','0'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_APNG = MKBETAG('A','P','N','G'),
+
+ /* various PCM "codecs" */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_AUDIO = 0x10000, ///< A dummy id pointing at the start of audio codecs
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE = 0x10000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U16LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U16BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S8,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U8,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_MULAW,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_ALAW,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U32LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U32BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U24LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_U24BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24DAUD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_ZORK,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE_PLANAR,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_DVD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F32BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F32LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F64BE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_F64LE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_BLURAY,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_LXF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_S302M,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S8_PLANAR,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE_PLANAR_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE_PLANAR_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE_PLANAR = MKBETAG(24,'P','S','P'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE_PLANAR = MKBETAG(32,'P','S','P'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_S16BE_PLANAR = MKBETAG('P','S','P',16),
+
+ /* various ADPCM codecs */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_QT = 0x11000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WAV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_SMJPEG,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_MS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_4XM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_XA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_ADX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G726,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_CT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SWF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_YAMAHA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_THP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_AMV,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_SEAD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_EACS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_XAS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_MAXIS_XA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_ISS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G722,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_APC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_VIMA_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_VIMA = MKBETAG('V','I','M','A'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VIMA = MKBETAG('V','I','M','A'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_AFC = MKBETAG('A','F','C',' '),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_OKI = MKBETAG('O','K','I',' '),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_DTK = MKBETAG('D','T','K',' '),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_RAD = MKBETAG('R','A','D',' '),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G726LE = MKBETAG('6','2','7','G'),
+
+ /* AMR */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AMR_NB = 0x12000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AMR_WB,
+
+ /* RealAudio codecs*/
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RA_144 = 0x13000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RA_288,
+
+ /* various DPCM codecs */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ROQ_DPCM = 0x14000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_DPCM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XAN_DPCM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SOL_DPCM,
+
+ /* audio codecs */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP2 = 0x15000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP3, ///< preferred ID for decoding MPEG audio layer 1, 2 or 3
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AAC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AC3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DTS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VORBIS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVAUDIO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMAV1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMAV2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MACE3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MACE6,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VMDAUDIO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FLAC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP3ADU,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP3ON4,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SHORTEN,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ALAC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WESTWOOD_SND1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_GSM, ///< as in Berlin toast format
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QDM2,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_COOK,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TRUESPEECH,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TTA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMACKAUDIO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QCELP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WAVPACK,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSICINAUDIO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IMC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK7,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MLP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_GSM_MS, /* as found in WAV */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3,
+#if FF_API_VOXWARE
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VOXWARE,
+#endif
+ AV_CODEC_ID_APE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_NELLYMOSER,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK8,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SPEEX,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMAVOICE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMAPRO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WMALOSSLESS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC3P,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_EAC3,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SIPR,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TWINVQ,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TRUEHD,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MP4ALS,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ATRAC1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_RDFT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_DCT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_AAC_LATM,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_QDMC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_CELT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_G723_1,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_G729,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_8SVX_EXP,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_8SVX_FIB,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BMV_AUDIO,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_RALF,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IAC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ILBC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_OPUS_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_COMFORT_NOISE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TAK_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_METASOUND,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_AUDIO_DEPRECATED,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ON2AVC,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FFWAVESYNTH = MKBETAG('F','F','W','S'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SONIC = MKBETAG('S','O','N','C'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SONIC_LS = MKBETAG('S','O','N','L'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PAF_AUDIO = MKBETAG('P','A','F','A'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_OPUS = MKBETAG('O','P','U','S'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TAK = MKBETAG('t','B','a','K'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_EVRC = MKBETAG('s','e','v','c'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMV = MKBETAG('s','s','m','v'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_LSBF = MKBETAG('D','S','D','L'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_MSBF = MKBETAG('D','S','D','M'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_LSBF_PLANAR = MKBETAG('D','S','D','1'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DSD_MSBF_PLANAR = MKBETAG('D','S','D','8'),
+
+ /* subtitle codecs */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_SUBTITLE = 0x17000, ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of subtitle codecs.
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVD_SUBTITLE = 0x17000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVB_SUBTITLE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TEXT, ///< raw UTF-8 text
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XSUB,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SSA,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MOV_TEXT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_HDMV_PGS_SUBTITLE,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVB_TELETEXT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SRT,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MICRODVD = MKBETAG('m','D','V','D'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_EIA_608 = MKBETAG('c','6','0','8'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_JACOSUB = MKBETAG('J','S','U','B'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SAMI = MKBETAG('S','A','M','I'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_REALTEXT = MKBETAG('R','T','X','T'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_STL = MKBETAG('S','p','T','L'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SUBVIEWER1 = MKBETAG('S','b','V','1'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SUBVIEWER = MKBETAG('S','u','b','V'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SUBRIP = MKBETAG('S','R','i','p'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_WEBVTT = MKBETAG('W','V','T','T'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPL2 = MKBETAG('M','P','L','2'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_VPLAYER = MKBETAG('V','P','l','r'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PJS = MKBETAG('P','h','J','S'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_ASS = MKBETAG('A','S','S',' '), ///< ASS as defined in Matroska
+
+ /* other specific kind of codecs (generally used for attachments) */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FIRST_UNKNOWN = 0x18000, ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of various fake codecs.
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TTF = 0x18000,
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BINTEXT = MKBETAG('B','T','X','T'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_XBIN = MKBETAG('X','B','I','N'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_IDF = MKBETAG( 0 ,'I','D','F'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_OTF = MKBETAG( 0 ,'O','T','F'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_SMPTE_KLV = MKBETAG('K','L','V','A'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_DVD_NAV = MKBETAG('D','N','A','V'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_TIMED_ID3 = MKBETAG('T','I','D','3'),
+ AV_CODEC_ID_BIN_DATA = MKBETAG('D','A','T','A'),
+
+
+ AV_CODEC_ID_PROBE = 0x19000, ///< codec_id is not known (like AV_CODEC_ID_NONE) but lavf should attempt to identify it
+
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG2TS = 0x20000, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a raw MPEG-2 TS
+ * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_MPEG4SYSTEMS = 0x20001, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a MPEG-4 Systems
+ * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+ AV_CODEC_ID_FFMETADATA = 0x21000, ///< Dummy codec for streams containing only metadata information.
+
+#if FF_API_CODEC_ID
+#include "old_codec_ids.h"
+#endif
+};
+
+/**
+ * This struct describes the properties of a single codec described by an
+ * AVCodecID.
+ * @see avcodec_descriptor_get()
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodecDescriptor {
+ enum AVCodecID id;
+ enum AVMediaType type;
+ /**
+ * Name of the codec described by this descriptor. It is non-empty and
+ * unique for each codec descriptor. It should contain alphanumeric
+ * characters and '_' only.
+ */
+ const char *name;
+ /**
+ * A more descriptive name for this codec. May be NULL.
+ */
+ const char *long_name;
+ /**
+ * Codec properties, a combination of AV_CODEC_PROP_* flags.
+ */
+ int props;
+
+ /**
+ * MIME type(s) associated with the codec.
+ * May be NULL; if not, a NULL-terminated array of MIME types.
+ * The first item is always non-NULL and is the preferred MIME type.
+ */
+ const char *const *mime_types;
+} AVCodecDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Codec uses only intra compression.
+ * Video codecs only.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_INTRA_ONLY (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Codec supports lossy compression. Audio and video codecs only.
+ * @note a codec may support both lossy and lossless
+ * compression modes
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_LOSSY (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * Codec supports lossless compression. Audio and video codecs only.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_LOSSLESS (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Codec supports frame reordering. That is, the coded order (the order in which
+ * the encoded packets are output by the encoders / stored / input to the
+ * decoders) may be different from the presentation order of the corresponding
+ * frames.
+ *
+ * For codecs that do not have this property set, PTS and DTS should always be
+ * equal.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_REORDER (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * Subtitle codec is bitmap based
+ * Decoded AVSubtitle data can be read from the AVSubtitleRect->pict field.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_BITMAP_SUB (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * Subtitle codec is text based.
+ * Decoded AVSubtitle data can be read from the AVSubtitleRect->ass field.
+ */
+#define AV_CODEC_PROP_TEXT_SUB (1 << 17)
+
+/**
+ * @ingroup lavc_decoding
+ * Required number of additionally allocated bytes at the end of the input bitstream for decoding.
+ * This is mainly needed because some optimized bitstream readers read
+ * 32 or 64 bit at once and could read over the end. of what can be used without an underflow.
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused.
+ */
+ float rc_max_available_vbv_use;
+
+ /**
+ * Ratecontrol attempt to use, at least, times the amount needed to prevent a vbv overflow.
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused.
+ */
+ float rc_min_vbv_overflow_use;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of bits which should be loaded into the rc buffer before decoding starts.
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int rc_initial_buffer_occupancy;
+
+#define FF_CODER_TYPE_VLC 0
+#define FF_CODER_TYPE_AC 1
+#define FF_CODER_TYPE_RAW 2
+#define FF_CODER_TYPE_RLE 3
+#if FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS
+#define FF_CODER_TYPE_DEFLATE 4
+#endif /* FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS */
+ /**
+ * coder type
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int coder_type;
+
+ /**
+ * context model
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int context_model;
+
+#if FF_API_MPV_OPT
+ /**
+ * @deprecated use encoder private options instead
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int lmin;
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated use encoder private options instead
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int lmax;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * frame skip threshold
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int frame_skip_threshold;
+
+ /**
+ * frame skip factor
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int frame_skip_factor;
+
+ /**
+ * frame skip exponent
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int frame_skip_exp;
+
+ /**
+ * frame skip comparison function
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int frame_skip_cmp;
+
+ /**
+ * trellis RD quantization
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int trellis;
+
+ /**
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int min_prediction_order;
+
+ /**
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int max_prediction_order;
+
+ /**
+ * GOP timecode frame start number
+ * - encoding: Set by user, in non drop frame format
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec (timecode in the 25 bits format, -1 if unset)
+ */
+ int64_t timecode_frame_start;
+
+ /* The RTP callback: This function is called */
+ /* every time the encoder has a packet to send. */
+ /* It depends on the encoder if the data starts */
+ /* with a Start Code (it should). H.263 does. */
+ /* mb_nb contains the number of macroblocks */
+ /* encoded in the RTP payload. */
+ void (*rtp_callback)(struct AVCodecContext *avctx, void *data, int size, int mb_nb);
+
+ int rtp_payload_size; /* The size of the RTP payload: the coder will */
+ /* do its best to deliver a chunk with size */
+ /* below rtp_payload_size, the chunk will start */
+ /* with a start code on some codecs like H.263. */
+ /* This doesn't take account of any particular */
+ /* headers inside the transmitted RTP payload. */
+
+ /* statistics, used for 2-pass encoding */
+ int mv_bits;
+ int header_bits;
+ int i_tex_bits;
+ int p_tex_bits;
+ int i_count;
+ int p_count;
+ int skip_count;
+ int misc_bits;
+
+ /**
+ * number of bits used for the previously encoded frame
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int frame_bits;
+
+ /**
+ * pass1 encoding statistics output buffer
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ char *stats_out;
+
+ /**
+ * pass2 encoding statistics input buffer
+ * Concatenated stuff from stats_out of pass1 should be placed here.
+ * - encoding: Allocated/set/freed by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ char *stats_in;
+
+ /**
+ * Work around bugs in encoders which sometimes cannot be detected automatically.
+ * - encoding: Set by user
+ * - decoding: Set by user
+ */
+ int workaround_bugs;
+#define FF_BUG_AUTODETECT 1 ///< autodetection
+#if FF_API_OLD_MSMPEG4
+#define FF_BUG_OLD_MSMPEG4 2
+#endif
+#define FF_BUG_XVID_ILACE 4
+#define FF_BUG_UMP4 8
+#define FF_BUG_NO_PADDING 16
+#define FF_BUG_AMV 32
+#if FF_API_AC_VLC
+#define FF_BUG_AC_VLC 0 ///< Will be removed, libavcodec can now handle these non-compliant files by default.
+#endif
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA 64
+#define FF_BUG_STD_QPEL 128
+#define FF_BUG_QPEL_CHROMA2 256
+#define FF_BUG_DIRECT_BLOCKSIZE 512
+#define FF_BUG_EDGE 1024
+#define FF_BUG_HPEL_CHROMA 2048
+#define FF_BUG_DC_CLIP 4096
+#define FF_BUG_MS 8192 ///< Work around various bugs in Microsoft's broken decoders.
+#define FF_BUG_TRUNCATED 16384
+
+ /**
+ * strictly follow the standard (MPEG4, ...).
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ * Setting this to STRICT or higher means the encoder and decoder will
+ * generally do stupid things, whereas setting it to unofficial or lower
+ * will mean the encoder might produce output that is not supported by all
+ * spec-compliant decoders. Decoders don't differentiate between normal,
+ * unofficial and experimental (that is, they always try to decode things
+ * when they can) unless they are explicitly asked to behave stupidly
+ * (=strictly conform to the specs)
+ */
+ int strict_std_compliance;
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_VERY_STRICT 2 ///< Strictly conform to an older more strict version of the spec or reference software.
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_STRICT 1 ///< Strictly conform to all the things in the spec no matter what consequences.
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_NORMAL 0
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_UNOFFICIAL -1 ///< Allow unofficial extensions
+#define FF_COMPLIANCE_EXPERIMENTAL -2 ///< Allow nonstandardized experimental things.
+
+ /**
+ * error concealment flags
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int error_concealment;
+#define FF_EC_GUESS_MVS 1
+#define FF_EC_DEBLOCK 2
+#define FF_EC_FAVOR_INTER 256
+
+ /**
+ * debug
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int debug;
+#define FF_DEBUG_PICT_INFO 1
+#define FF_DEBUG_RC 2
+#define FF_DEBUG_BITSTREAM 4
+#define FF_DEBUG_MB_TYPE 8
+#define FF_DEBUG_QP 16
+#if FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+/**
+ * @deprecated this option does nothing
+ */
+#define FF_DEBUG_MV 32
+#endif
+#define FF_DEBUG_DCT_COEFF 0x00000040
+#define FF_DEBUG_SKIP 0x00000080
+#define FF_DEBUG_STARTCODE 0x00000100
+#if FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS
+#define FF_DEBUG_PTS 0x00000200
+#endif /* FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS */
+#define FF_DEBUG_ER 0x00000400
+#define FF_DEBUG_MMCO 0x00000800
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUGS 0x00001000
+#if FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_QP 0x00002000 ///< only access through AVOptions from outside libavcodec
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MB_TYPE 0x00004000 ///< only access through AVOptions from outside libavcodec
+#endif
+#define FF_DEBUG_BUFFERS 0x00008000
+#define FF_DEBUG_THREADS 0x00010000
+#define FF_DEBUG_NOMC 0x01000000
+
+#if FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+ /**
+ * debug
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using AVOptions
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int debug_mv;
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_P_FOR 0x00000001 //visualize forward predicted MVs of P frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_FOR 0x00000002 //visualize forward predicted MVs of B frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_BACK 0x00000004 //visualize backward predicted MVs of B frames
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Error recognition; may misdetect some more or less valid parts as errors.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int err_recognition;
+
+/**
+ * Verify checksums embedded in the bitstream (could be of either encoded or
+ * decoded data, depending on the codec) and print an error message on mismatch.
+ * If AV_EF_EXPLODE is also set, a mismatching checksum will result in the
+ * decoder returning an error.
+ */
+#define AV_EF_CRCCHECK (1<<0)
+#define AV_EF_BITSTREAM (1<<1) ///< detect bitstream specification deviations
+#define AV_EF_BUFFER (1<<2) ///< detect improper bitstream length
+#define AV_EF_EXPLODE (1<<3) ///< abort decoding on minor error detection
+
+#define AV_EF_IGNORE_ERR (1<<15) ///< ignore errors and continue
+#define AV_EF_CAREFUL (1<<16) ///< consider things that violate the spec, are fast to calculate and have not been seen in the wild as errors
+#define AV_EF_COMPLIANT (1<<17) ///< consider all spec non compliances as errors
+#define AV_EF_AGGRESSIVE (1<<18) ///< consider things that a sane encoder should not do as an error
+
+
+ /**
+ * opaque 64bit number (generally a PTS) that will be reordered and
+ * output in AVFrame.reordered_opaque
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int64_t reordered_opaque;
+
+ /**
+ * Hardware accelerator in use
+ * - encoding: unused.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ struct AVHWAccel *hwaccel;
+
+ /**
+ * Hardware accelerator context.
+ * For some hardware accelerators, a global context needs to be
+ * provided by the user. In that case, this holds display-dependent
+ * data FFmpeg cannot instantiate itself. Please refer to the
+ * FFmpeg HW accelerator documentation to know how to fill this
+ * is. e.g. for VA API, this is a struct vaapi_context.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user
+ */
+ void *hwaccel_context;
+
+ /**
+ * error
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec if flags&CODEC_FLAG_PSNR.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ uint64_t error[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+ /**
+ * DCT algorithm, see FF_DCT_* below
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int dct_algo;
+#define FF_DCT_AUTO 0
+#define FF_DCT_FASTINT 1
+#if FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS
+#define FF_DCT_INT 2
+#endif /* FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS */
+#define FF_DCT_MMX 3
+#define FF_DCT_ALTIVEC 5
+#define FF_DCT_FAAN 6
+
+ /**
+ * IDCT algorithm, see FF_IDCT_* below.
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int idct_algo;
+#define FF_IDCT_AUTO 0
+#define FF_IDCT_INT 1
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLE 2
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEMMX 3
+#define FF_IDCT_ARM 7
+#define FF_IDCT_ALTIVEC 8
+#if FF_API_ARCH_SH4
+#define FF_IDCT_SH4 9
+#endif
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARM 10
+#if FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS
+#define FF_IDCT_IPP 13
+#endif /* FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS */
+#define FF_IDCT_XVID 14
+#if FF_API_IDCT_XVIDMMX
+#define FF_IDCT_XVIDMMX 14
+#endif /* FF_API_IDCT_XVIDMMX */
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV5TE 16
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEARMV6 17
+#if FF_API_ARCH_SPARC
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEVIS 18
+#endif
+#define FF_IDCT_FAAN 20
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLENEON 22
+#if FF_API_ARCH_ALPHA
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEALPHA 23
+#endif
+#define FF_IDCT_SIMPLEAUTO 128
+
+ /**
+ * bits per sample/pixel from the demuxer (needed for huffyuv).
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int bits_per_coded_sample;
+
+ /**
+ * Bits per sample/pixel of internal libavcodec pixel/sample format.
+ * - encoding: set by user.
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ int bits_per_raw_sample;
+
+#if FF_API_LOWRES
+ /**
+ * low resolution decoding, 1-> 1/2 size, 2->1/4 size
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_codec_{get,set}_lowres(avctx)
+ */
+ int lowres;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * the picture in the bitstream
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ AVFrame *coded_frame;
+
+ /**
+ * thread count
+ * is used to decide how many independent tasks should be passed to execute()
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int thread_count;
+
+ /**
+ * Which multithreading methods to use.
+ * Use of FF_THREAD_FRAME will increase decoding delay by one frame per thread,
+ * so clients which cannot provide future frames should not use it.
+ *
+ * - encoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+ * - decoding: Set by user, otherwise the default is used.
+ */
+ int thread_type;
+#define FF_THREAD_FRAME 1 ///< Decode more than one frame at once
+#define FF_THREAD_SLICE 2 ///< Decode more than one part of a single frame at once
+
+ /**
+ * Which multithreading methods are in use by the codec.
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ int active_thread_type;
+
+ /**
+ * Set by the client if its custom get_buffer() callback can be called
+ * synchronously from another thread, which allows faster multithreaded decoding.
+ * draw_horiz_band() will be called from other threads regardless of this setting.
+ * Ignored if the default get_buffer() is used.
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int thread_safe_callbacks;
+
+ /**
+ * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+ * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+ * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+ * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+ * @param count the number of things to execute
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+ */
+ int (*execute)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg), void *arg2, int *ret, int count, int size);
+
+ /**
+ * The codec may call this to execute several independent things.
+ * It will return only after finishing all tasks.
+ * The user may replace this with some multithreaded implementation,
+ * the default implementation will execute the parts serially.
+ * Also see avcodec_thread_init and e.g. the --enable-pthread configure option.
+ * @param c context passed also to func
+ * @param count the number of things to execute
+ * @param arg2 argument passed unchanged to func
+ * @param ret return values of executed functions, must have space for "count" values. May be NULL.
+ * @param func function that will be called count times, with jobnr from 0 to count-1.
+ * threadnr will be in the range 0 to c->thread_count-1 < MAX_THREADS and so that no
+ * two instances of func executing at the same time will have the same threadnr.
+ * @return always 0 currently, but code should handle a future improvement where when any call to func
+ * returns < 0 no further calls to func may be done and < 0 is returned.
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec, user can override.
+ */
+ int (*execute2)(struct AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(struct AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg, int jobnr, int threadnr), void *arg2, int *ret, int count);
+
+#if FF_API_THREAD_OPAQUE
+ /**
+ * @deprecated this field should not be used from outside of lavc
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ void *thread_opaque;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * noise vs. sse weight for the nsse comparison function
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int nsse_weight;
+
+ /**
+ * profile
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ int profile;
+#define FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN -99
+#define FF_PROFILE_RESERVED -100
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_MAIN 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LOW 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_SSR 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LTP 3
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE 4
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_HE_V2 28
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_LD 22
+#define FF_PROFILE_AAC_ELD 38
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_LOW 128
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_AAC_HE 131
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS 20
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_ES 30
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_96_24 40
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_HRA 50
+#define FF_PROFILE_DTS_HD_MA 60
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_422 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_HIGH 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SS 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SNR_SCALABLE 3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_MAIN 4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG2_SIMPLE 5
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED (1<<9) // 8+1; constraint_set1_flag
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA (1<<11) // 8+3; constraint_set3_flag
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_BASELINE 66
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED_BASELINE (66|FF_PROFILE_H264_CONSTRAINED)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_MAIN 77
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_EXTENDED 88
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH 100
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10 110
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_10_INTRA (110|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422 122
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_422_INTRA (122|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444 144
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_PREDICTIVE 244
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_HIGH_444_INTRA (244|FF_PROFILE_H264_INTRA)
+#define FF_PROFILE_H264_CAVLC_444 44
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_SIMPLE 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_MAIN 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_COMPLEX 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_VC1_ADVANCED 3
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_SCALABLE 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_MAIN 3
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_N_BIT 4
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SCALABLE_TEXTURE 5
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_FACE_ANIMATION 6
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_BASIC_ANIMATED_TEXTURE 7
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_HYBRID 8
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_REAL_TIME 9
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_CORE_SCALABLE 10
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CODING 11
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_CORE 12
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SCALABLE_TEXTURE 13
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_SIMPLE_STUDIO 14
+#define FF_PROFILE_MPEG4_ADVANCED_SIMPLE 15
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_0 0
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_RESTRICTION_1 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_CSTREAM_NO_RESTRICTION 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_2K 3
+#define FF_PROFILE_JPEG2000_DCINEMA_4K 4
+
+
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN 1
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_10 2
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_MAIN_STILL_PICTURE 3
+#define FF_PROFILE_HEVC_REXT 4
+
+ /**
+ * level
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ int level;
+#define FF_LEVEL_UNKNOWN -99
+
+ /**
+ * Skip loop filtering for selected frames.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVDiscard skip_loop_filter;
+
+ /**
+ * Skip IDCT/dequantization for selected frames.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVDiscard skip_idct;
+
+ /**
+ * Skip decoding for selected frames.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVDiscard skip_frame;
+
+ /**
+ * Header containing style information for text subtitles.
+ * For SUBTITLE_ASS subtitle type, it should contain the whole ASS
+ * [Script Info] and [V4+ Styles] section, plus the [Events] line and
+ * the Format line following. It shouldn't include any Dialogue line.
+ * - encoding: Set/allocated/freed by user (before avcodec_open2())
+ * - decoding: Set/allocated/freed by libavcodec (by avcodec_open2())
+ */
+ uint8_t *subtitle_header;
+ int subtitle_header_size;
+
+#if FF_API_ERROR_RATE
+ /**
+ * @deprecated use the 'error_rate' private AVOption of the mpegvideo
+ * encoders
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int error_rate;
+#endif
+
+#if FF_API_CODEC_PKT
+ /**
+ * @deprecated this field is not supposed to be accessed from outside lavc
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ AVPacket *pkt;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * VBV delay coded in the last frame (in periods of a 27 MHz clock).
+ * Used for compliant TS muxing.
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ * - decoding: unused.
+ */
+ uint64_t vbv_delay;
+
+ /**
+ * Encoding only. Allow encoders to output packets that do not contain any
+ * encoded data, only side data.
+ *
+ * Some encoders need to output such packets, e.g. to update some stream
+ * parameters at the end of encoding.
+ *
+ * All callers are strongly recommended to set this option to 1 and update
+ * their code to deal with such packets, since this behaviour may become
+ * always enabled in the future (then this option will be deprecated and
+ * later removed). To avoid ABI issues when this happens, the callers should
+ * use AVOptions to set this field.
+ */
+ int side_data_only_packets;
+
+ /**
+ * Audio only. The number of "priming" samples (padding) inserted by the
+ * encoder at the beginning of the audio. I.e. this number of leading
+ * decoded samples must be discarded by the caller to get the original audio
+ * without leading padding.
+ *
+ * - decoding: unused
+ * - encoding: Set by libavcodec. The timestamps on the output packets are
+ * adjusted by the encoder so that they always refer to the
+ * first sample of the data actually contained in the packet,
+ * including any added padding. E.g. if the timebase is
+ * 1/samplerate and the timestamp of the first input sample is
+ * 0, the timestamp of the first output packet will be
+ * -initial_padding.
+ */
+ int initial_padding;
+
+ /**
+ * - decoding: For codecs that store a framerate value in the compressed
+ * bitstream, the decoder may export it here. { 0, 1} when
+ * unknown.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ */
+ AVRational framerate;
+
+ /**
+ * Nominal unaccelerated pixel format, see AV_PIX_FMT_xxx.
+ * - encoding: unused.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec before calling get_format()
+ */
+ enum AVPixelFormat sw_pix_fmt;
+
+ /**
+ * Timebase in which pkt_dts/pts and AVPacket.dts/pts are.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_codec_{get,set}_pkt_timebase(avctx)
+ * - encoding unused.
+ * - decoding set by user.
+ */
+ AVRational pkt_timebase;
+
+ /**
+ * AVCodecDescriptor
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_codec_{get,set}_codec_descriptor(avctx)
+ * - encoding: unused.
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ const AVCodecDescriptor *codec_descriptor;
+
+#if !FF_API_LOWRES
+ /**
+ * low resolution decoding, 1-> 1/2 size, 2->1/4 size
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_codec_{get,set}_lowres(avctx)
+ */
+ int lowres;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Current statistics for PTS correction.
+ * - decoding: maintained and used by libavcodec, not intended to be used by user apps
+ * - encoding: unused
+ */
+ int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_pts; /// Number of incorrect PTS values so far
+ int64_t pts_correction_num_faulty_dts; /// Number of incorrect DTS values so far
+ int64_t pts_correction_last_pts; /// PTS of the last frame
+ int64_t pts_correction_last_dts; /// DTS of the last frame
+
+ /**
+ * Character encoding of the input subtitles file.
+ * - decoding: set by user
+ * - encoding: unused
+ */
+ char *sub_charenc;
+
+ /**
+ * Subtitles character encoding mode. Formats or codecs might be adjusting
+ * this setting (if they are doing the conversion themselves for instance).
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec
+ * - encoding: unused
+ */
+ int sub_charenc_mode;
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_DO_NOTHING -1 ///< do nothing (demuxer outputs a stream supposed to be already in UTF-8, or the codec is bitmap for instance)
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_AUTOMATIC 0 ///< libavcodec will select the mode itself
+#define FF_SUB_CHARENC_MODE_PRE_DECODER 1 ///< the AVPacket data needs to be recoded to UTF-8 before being fed to the decoder, requires iconv
+
+ /**
+ * Skip processing alpha if supported by codec.
+ * Note that if the format uses pre-multiplied alpha (common with VP6,
+ * and recommended due to better video quality/compression)
+ * the image will look as if alpha-blended onto a black background.
+ * However for formats that do not use pre-multiplied alpha
+ * there might be serious artefacts (though e.g. libswscale currently
+ * assumes pre-multiplied alpha anyway).
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using AVOptions
+ *
+ * - decoding: set by user
+ * - encoding: unused
+ */
+ int skip_alpha;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of samples to skip after a discontinuity
+ * - decoding: unused
+ * - encoding: set by libavcodec
+ */
+ int seek_preroll;
+
+#if !FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+ /**
+ * debug motion vectors
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using AVOptions
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int debug_mv;
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_P_FOR 0x00000001 //visualize forward predicted MVs of P frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_FOR 0x00000002 //visualize forward predicted MVs of B frames
+#define FF_DEBUG_VIS_MV_B_BACK 0x00000004 //visualize backward predicted MVs of B frames
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * custom intra quantization matrix
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using av_codec_g/set_chroma_intra_matrix()
+ * - encoding: Set by user, can be NULL.
+ * - decoding: unused.
+ */
+ uint16_t *chroma_intra_matrix;
+
+ /**
+ * dump format separator.
+ * can be ", " or "\n " or anything else
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using AVOptions
+ * (NO direct access).
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ uint8_t *dump_separator;
+
+ /**
+ * ',' separated list of allowed decoders.
+ * If NULL then all are allowed
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by user through AVOPtions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ char *codec_whitelist;
+} AVCodecContext;
+
+AVRational av_codec_get_pkt_timebase (const AVCodecContext *avctx);
+void av_codec_set_pkt_timebase (AVCodecContext *avctx, AVRational val);
+
+const AVCodecDescriptor *av_codec_get_codec_descriptor(const AVCodecContext *avctx);
+void av_codec_set_codec_descriptor(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVCodecDescriptor *desc);
+
+int av_codec_get_lowres(const AVCodecContext *avctx);
+void av_codec_set_lowres(AVCodecContext *avctx, int val);
+
+int av_codec_get_seek_preroll(const AVCodecContext *avctx);
+void av_codec_set_seek_preroll(AVCodecContext *avctx, int val);
+
+uint16_t *av_codec_get_chroma_intra_matrix(const AVCodecContext *avctx);
+void av_codec_set_chroma_intra_matrix(AVCodecContext *avctx, uint16_t *val);
+
+/**
+ * AVProfile.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProfile {
+ int profile;
+ const char *name; ///< short name for the profile
+} AVProfile;
+
+typedef struct AVCodecDefault AVCodecDefault;
+
+struct AVSubtitle;
+
+/**
+ * AVCodec.
+ */
+typedef struct AVCodec {
+ /**
+ * Name of the codec implementation.
+ * The name is globally unique among encoders and among decoders (but an
+ * encoder and a decoder can share the same name).
+ * This is the primary way to find a codec from the user perspective.
+ */
+ const char *name;
+ /**
+ * Descriptive name for the codec, meant to be more human readable than name.
+ * You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro to define it.
+ */
+ const char *long_name;
+ enum AVMediaType type;
+ enum AVCodecID id;
+ /**
+ * Codec capabilities.
+ * see CODEC_CAP_*
+ */
+ int capabilities;
+ const AVRational *supported_framerates; ///< array of supported framerates, or NULL if any, array is terminated by {0,0}
+ const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmts; ///< array of supported pixel formats, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by -1
+ const int *supported_samplerates; ///< array of supported audio samplerates, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by 0
+ const enum AVSampleFormat *sample_fmts; ///< array of supported sample formats, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by -1
+ const uint64_t *channel_layouts; ///< array of support channel layouts, or NULL if unknown. array is terminated by 0
+#if FF_API_LOWRES
+ uint8_t max_lowres; ///< maximum value for lowres supported by the decoder, no direct access, use av_codec_get_max_lowres()
+#endif
+ const AVClass *priv_class; ///< AVClass for the private context
+ const AVProfile *profiles; ///< array of recognized profiles, or NULL if unknown, array is terminated by {FF_PROFILE_UNKNOWN}
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavcodec and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ int priv_data_size;
+ struct AVCodec *next;
+ /**
+ * @name Frame-level threading support functions
+ * @{
+ */
+ /**
+ * If defined, called on thread contexts when they are created.
+ * If the codec allocates writable tables in init(), re-allocate them here.
+ * priv_data will be set to a copy of the original.
+ */
+ int (*init_thread_copy)(AVCodecContext *);
+ /**
+ * Copy necessary context variables from a previous thread context to the current one.
+ * If not defined, the next thread will start automatically; otherwise, the codec
+ * must call ff_thread_finish_setup().
+ *
+ * dst and src will (rarely) point to the same context, in which case memcpy should be skipped.
+ */
+ int (*update_thread_context)(AVCodecContext *dst, const AVCodecContext *src);
+ /** @} */
+
+ /**
+ * Private codec-specific defaults.
+ */
+ const AVCodecDefault *defaults;
+
+ /**
+ * Initialize codec static data, called from avcodec_register().
+ */
+ void (*init_static_data)(struct AVCodec *codec);
+
+ int (*init)(AVCodecContext *);
+ int (*encode_sub)(AVCodecContext *, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ const struct AVSubtitle *sub);
+ /**
+ * Encode data to an AVPacket.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param avpkt output AVPacket (may contain a user-provided buffer)
+ * @param[in] frame AVFrame containing the raw data to be encoded
+ * @param[out] got_packet_ptr encoder sets to 0 or 1 to indicate that a
+ * non-empty packet was returned in avpkt.
+ * @return 0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ */
+ int (*encode2)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVPacket *avpkt, const AVFrame *frame,
+ int *got_packet_ptr);
+ int (*decode)(AVCodecContext *, void *outdata, int *outdata_size, AVPacket *avpkt);
+ int (*close)(AVCodecContext *);
+ /**
+ * Flush buffers.
+ * Will be called when seeking
+ */
+ void (*flush)(AVCodecContext *);
+} AVCodec;
+
+int av_codec_get_max_lowres(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+struct MpegEncContext;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_hwaccel AVHWAccel
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVHWAccel {
+ /**
+ * Name of the hardware accelerated codec.
+ * The name is globally unique among encoders and among decoders (but an
+ * encoder and a decoder can share the same name).
+ */
+ const char *name;
+
+ /**
+ * Type of codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+ *
+ * See AVMEDIA_TYPE_xxx
+ */
+ enum AVMediaType type;
+
+ /**
+ * Codec implemented by the hardware accelerator.
+ *
+ * See AV_CODEC_ID_xxx
+ */
+ enum AVCodecID id;
+
+ /**
+ * Supported pixel format.
+ *
+ * Only hardware accelerated formats are supported here.
+ */
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt;
+
+ /**
+ * Hardware accelerated codec capabilities.
+ * see FF_HWACCEL_CODEC_CAP_*
+ */
+ int capabilities;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavcodec and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ struct AVHWAccel *next;
+
+ /**
+ * Allocate a custom buffer
+ */
+ int (*alloc_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+ /**
+ * Called at the beginning of each frame or field picture.
+ *
+ * Meaningful frame information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+ * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+ *
+ * Note that buf can be NULL along with buf_size set to 0.
+ * Otherwise, this means the whole frame is available at this point.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param buf the frame data buffer base
+ * @param buf_size the size of the frame in bytes
+ * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+ */
+ int (*start_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+ /**
+ * Callback for each slice.
+ *
+ * Meaningful slice information (codec specific) is guaranteed to
+ * be parsed at this point. This function is mandatory.
+ * The only exception is XvMC, that works on MB level.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param buf the slice data buffer base
+ * @param buf_size the size of the slice in bytes
+ * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+ */
+ int (*decode_slice)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, uint32_t buf_size);
+
+ /**
+ * Called at the end of each frame or field picture.
+ *
+ * The whole picture is parsed at this point and can now be sent
+ * to the hardware accelerator. This function is mandatory.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @return zero if successful, a negative value otherwise
+ */
+ int (*end_frame)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Size of per-frame hardware accelerator private data.
+ *
+ * Private data is allocated with av_mallocz() before
+ * AVCodecContext.get_buffer() and deallocated after
+ * AVCodecContext.release_buffer().
+ */
+ int frame_priv_data_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Called for every Macroblock in a slice.
+ *
+ * XvMC uses it to replace the ff_mpv_decode_mb().
+ * Instead of decoding to raw picture, MB parameters are
+ * stored in an array provided by the video driver.
+ *
+ * @param s the mpeg context
+ */
+ void (*decode_mb)(struct MpegEncContext *s);
+
+ /**
+ * Initialize the hwaccel private data.
+ *
+ * This will be called from ff_get_format(), after hwaccel and
+ * hwaccel_context are set and the hwaccel private data in AVCodecInternal
+ * is allocated.
+ */
+ int (*init)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Uninitialize the hwaccel private data.
+ *
+ * This will be called from get_format() or avcodec_close(), after hwaccel
+ * and hwaccel_context are already uninitialized.
+ */
+ int (*uninit)(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Size of the private data to allocate in
+ * AVCodecInternal.hwaccel_priv_data.
+ */
+ int priv_data_size;
+} AVHWAccel;
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration should be used for decoding even if the codec level
+ * used is unknown or higher than the maximum supported level reported by the
+ * hardware driver.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_IGNORE_LEVEL (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Hardware acceleration can output YUV pixel formats with a different chroma
+ * sampling than 4:2:0 and/or other than 8 bits per component.
+ */
+#define AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_ALLOW_HIGH_DEPTH (1 << 1)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_picture AVPicture
+ *
+ * Functions for working with AVPicture
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Picture data structure.
+ *
+ * Up to four components can be stored into it, the last component is
+ * alpha.
+ */
+typedef struct AVPicture {
+ uint8_t *data[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS]; ///< pointers to the image data planes
+ int linesize[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS]; ///< number of bytes per line
+} AVPicture;
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+enum AVSubtitleType {
+ SUBTITLE_NONE,
+
+ SUBTITLE_BITMAP, ///< A bitmap, pict will be set
+
+ /**
+ * Plain text, the text field must be set by the decoder and is
+ * authoritative. ass and pict fields may contain approximations.
+ */
+ SUBTITLE_TEXT,
+
+ /**
+ * Formatted text, the ass field must be set by the decoder and is
+ * authoritative. pict and text fields may contain approximations.
+ */
+ SUBTITLE_ASS,
+};
+
+#define AV_SUBTITLE_FLAG_FORCED 0x00000001
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitleRect {
+ int x; ///< top left corner of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+ int y; ///< top left corner of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+ int w; ///< width of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+ int h; ///< height of pict, undefined when pict is not set
+ int nb_colors; ///< number of colors in pict, undefined when pict is not set
+
+ /**
+ * data+linesize for the bitmap of this subtitle.
+ * can be set for text/ass as well once they are rendered
+ */
+ AVPicture pict;
+ enum AVSubtitleType type;
+
+ char *text; ///< 0 terminated plain UTF-8 text
+
+ /**
+ * 0 terminated ASS/SSA compatible event line.
+ * The presentation of this is unaffected by the other values in this
+ * struct.
+ */
+ char *ass;
+
+ int flags;
+} AVSubtitleRect;
+
+typedef struct AVSubtitle {
+ uint16_t format; /* 0 = graphics */
+ uint32_t start_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+ uint32_t end_display_time; /* relative to packet pts, in ms */
+ unsigned num_rects;
+ AVSubtitleRect **rects;
+ int64_t pts; ///< Same as packet pts, in AV_TIME_BASE
+} AVSubtitle;
+
+/**
+ * If c is NULL, returns the first registered codec,
+ * if c is non-NULL, returns the next registered codec after c,
+ * or NULL if c is the last one.
+ */
+AVCodec *av_codec_next(const AVCodec *c);
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avcodec_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavcodec license.
+ */
+const char *avcodec_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Register the codec codec and initialize libavcodec.
+ *
+ * @warning either this function or avcodec_register_all() must be called
+ * before any other libavcodec functions.
+ *
+ * @see avcodec_register_all()
+ */
+void avcodec_register(AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Register all the codecs, parsers and bitstream filters which were enabled at
+ * configuration time. If you do not call this function you can select exactly
+ * which formats you want to support, by using the individual registration
+ * functions.
+ *
+ * @see avcodec_register
+ * @see av_register_codec_parser
+ * @see av_register_bitstream_filter
+ */
+void avcodec_register_all(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVCodecContext and set its fields to default values. The
+ * resulting struct should be freed with avcodec_free_context().
+ *
+ * @param codec if non-NULL, allocate private data and initialize defaults
+ * for the given codec. It is illegal to then call avcodec_open2()
+ * with a different codec.
+ * If NULL, then the codec-specific defaults won't be initialized,
+ * which may result in suboptimal default settings (this is
+ * important mainly for encoders, e.g. libx264).
+ *
+ * @return An AVCodecContext filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ * @see avcodec_get_context_defaults
+ */
+AVCodecContext *avcodec_alloc_context3(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Free the codec context and everything associated with it and write NULL to
+ * the provided pointer.
+ */
+void avcodec_free_context(AVCodecContext **avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Set the fields of the given AVCodecContext to default values corresponding
+ * to the given codec (defaults may be codec-dependent).
+ *
+ * Do not call this function if a non-NULL codec has been passed
+ * to avcodec_alloc_context3() that allocated this AVCodecContext.
+ * If codec is non-NULL, it is illegal to call avcodec_open2() with a
+ * different codec on this AVCodecContext.
+ */
+int avcodec_get_context_defaults3(AVCodecContext *s, const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVCodecContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVFrame. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_frame_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVSubtitleRect. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avcodec_get_subtitle_rect_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the settings of the source AVCodecContext into the destination
+ * AVCodecContext. The resulting destination codec context will be
+ * unopened, i.e. you are required to call avcodec_open2() before you
+ * can use this AVCodecContext to decode/encode video/audio data.
+ *
+ * @param dest target codec context, should be initialized with
+ * avcodec_alloc_context3(NULL), but otherwise uninitialized
+ * @param src source codec context
+ * @return AVERROR() on error (e.g. memory allocation error), 0 on success
+ */
+int avcodec_copy_context(AVCodecContext *dest, const AVCodecContext *src);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+/**
+ * @deprecated use av_frame_alloc()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFrame *avcodec_alloc_frame(void);
+
+/**
+ * Set the fields of the given AVFrame to default values.
+ *
+ * @param frame The AVFrame of which the fields should be set to default values.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_frame_unref()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avcodec_get_frame_defaults(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Free the frame and any dynamically allocated objects in it,
+ * e.g. extended_data.
+ *
+ * @param frame frame to be freed. The pointer will be set to NULL.
+ *
+ * @warning this function does NOT free the data buffers themselves
+ * (it does not know how, since they might have been allocated with
+ * a custom get_buffer()).
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_frame_free()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avcodec_free_frame(AVFrame **frame);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the AVCodecContext to use the given AVCodec. Prior to using this
+ * function the context has to be allocated with avcodec_alloc_context3().
+ *
+ * The functions avcodec_find_decoder_by_name(), avcodec_find_encoder_by_name(),
+ * avcodec_find_decoder() and avcodec_find_encoder() provide an easy way for
+ * retrieving a codec.
+ *
+ * @warning This function is not thread safe!
+ *
+ * @code
+ * avcodec_register_all();
+ * av_dict_set(&opts, "b", "2.5M", 0);
+ * codec = avcodec_find_decoder(AV_CODEC_ID_H264);
+ * if (!codec)
+ * exit(1);
+ *
+ * context = avcodec_alloc_context3(codec);
+ *
+ * if (avcodec_open2(context, codec, opts) < 0)
+ * exit(1);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @param avctx The context to initialize.
+ * @param codec The codec to open this context for. If a non-NULL codec has been
+ * previously passed to avcodec_alloc_context3() or
+ * avcodec_get_context_defaults3() for this context, then this
+ * parameter MUST be either NULL or equal to the previously passed
+ * codec.
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with AVCodecContext and codec-private options.
+ * On return this object will be filled with options that were not found.
+ *
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value on error
+ * @see avcodec_alloc_context3(), avcodec_find_decoder(), avcodec_find_encoder(),
+ * av_dict_set(), av_opt_find().
+ */
+int avcodec_open2(AVCodecContext *avctx, const AVCodec *codec, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Close a given AVCodecContext and free all the data associated with it
+ * (but not the AVCodecContext itself).
+ *
+ * Calling this function on an AVCodecContext that hasn't been opened will free
+ * the codec-specific data allocated in avcodec_alloc_context3() /
+ * avcodec_get_context_defaults3() with a non-NULL codec. Subsequent calls will
+ * do nothing.
+ */
+int avcodec_close(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free all allocated data in the given subtitle struct.
+ *
+ * @param sub AVSubtitle to free.
+ */
+void avsubtitle_free(AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_packet
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if FF_API_DESTRUCT_PACKET
+/**
+ * Default packet destructor.
+ * @deprecated use the AVBuffer API instead
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_destruct_packet(AVPacket *pkt);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Initialize optional fields of a packet with default values.
+ *
+ * Note, this does not touch the data and size members, which have to be
+ * initialized separately.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ */
+void av_init_packet(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate the payload of a packet and initialize its fields with
+ * default values.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size wanted payload size
+ * @return 0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise
+ */
+int av_new_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Reduce packet size, correctly zeroing padding
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size new size
+ */
+void av_shrink_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Increase packet size, correctly zeroing padding
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param grow_by number of bytes by which to increase the size of the packet
+ */
+int av_grow_packet(AVPacket *pkt, int grow_by);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a reference-counted packet from av_malloc()ed data.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet to be initialized. This function will set the data, size,
+ * buf and destruct fields, all others are left untouched.
+ * @param data Data allocated by av_malloc() to be used as packet data. If this
+ * function returns successfully, the data is owned by the underlying AVBuffer.
+ * The caller may not access the data through other means.
+ * @param size size of data in bytes, without the padding. I.e. the full buffer
+ * size is assumed to be size + FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+int av_packet_from_data(AVPacket *pkt, uint8_t *data, int size);
+
+/**
+ * @warning This is a hack - the packet memory allocation stuff is broken. The
+ * packet is allocated if it was not really allocated.
+ */
+int av_dup_packet(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Copy packet, including contents
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative AVERROR on fail
+ */
+int av_copy_packet(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy packet side data
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative AVERROR on fail
+ */
+int av_copy_packet_side_data(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Free a packet.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet to free
+ */
+void av_free_packet(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate new information of a packet.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param size side information size
+ * @return pointer to fresh allocated data or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t* av_packet_new_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+ int size);
+
+/**
+ * Shrink the already allocated side data buffer
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type side information type
+ * @param size new side information size
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 on failure
+ */
+int av_packet_shrink_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+ int size);
+
+/**
+ * Get side information from packet.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param type desired side information type
+ * @param size pointer for side information size to store (optional)
+ * @return pointer to data if present or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t* av_packet_get_side_data(AVPacket *pkt, enum AVPacketSideDataType type,
+ int *size);
+
+int av_packet_merge_side_data(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+int av_packet_split_side_data(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Pack a dictionary for use in side_data.
+ *
+ * @param dict The dictionary to pack.
+ * @param size pointer to store the size of the returned data
+ * @return pointer to data if successful, NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t *av_packet_pack_dictionary(AVDictionary *dict, int *size);
+/**
+ * Unpack a dictionary from side_data.
+ *
+ * @param data data from side_data
+ * @param size size of the data
+ * @param dict the metadata storage dictionary
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 on failure
+ */
+int av_packet_unpack_dictionary(const uint8_t *data, int size, AVDictionary **dict);
+
+
+/**
+ * Convenience function to free all the side data stored.
+ * All the other fields stay untouched.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet
+ */
+void av_packet_free_side_data(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Setup a new reference to the data described by a given packet
+ *
+ * If src is reference-counted, setup dst as a new reference to the
+ * buffer in src. Otherwise allocate a new buffer in dst and copy the
+ * data from src into it.
+ *
+ * All the other fields are copied from src.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ *
+ * @param dst Destination packet
+ * @param src Source packet
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_packet_ref(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Wipe the packet.
+ *
+ * Unreference the buffer referenced by the packet and reset the
+ * remaining packet fields to their default values.
+ *
+ * @param pkt The packet to be unreferenced.
+ */
+void av_packet_unref(AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Move every field in src to dst and reset src.
+ *
+ * @see av_packet_unref
+ *
+ * @param src Source packet, will be reset
+ * @param dst Destination packet
+ */
+void av_packet_move_ref(AVPacket *dst, AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy only "properties" fields from src to dst.
+ *
+ * Properties for the purpose of this function are all the fields
+ * beside those related to the packet data (buf, data, size)
+ *
+ * @param dst Destination packet
+ * @param src Source packet
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ */
+int av_packet_copy_props(AVPacket *dst, const AVPacket *src);
+
+/**
+ * Convert valid timing fields (timestamps / durations) in a packet from one
+ * timebase to another. Timestamps with unknown values (AV_NOPTS_VALUE) will be
+ * ignored.
+ *
+ * @param pkt packet on which the conversion will be performed
+ * @param tb_src source timebase, in which the timing fields in pkt are
+ * expressed
+ * @param tb_dst destination timebase, to which the timing fields will be
+ * converted
+ */
+void av_packet_rescale_ts(AVPacket *pkt, AVRational tb_src, AVRational tb_dst);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered decoder with a matching codec ID.
+ *
+ * @param id AVCodecID of the requested decoder
+ * @return A decoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+AVCodec *avcodec_find_decoder(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered decoder with the specified name.
+ *
+ * @param name name of the requested decoder
+ * @return A decoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+AVCodec *avcodec_find_decoder_by_name(const char *name);
+
+#if FF_API_GET_BUFFER
+attribute_deprecated int avcodec_default_get_buffer(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *pic);
+attribute_deprecated void avcodec_default_release_buffer(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *pic);
+attribute_deprecated int avcodec_default_reget_buffer(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *pic);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The default callback for AVCodecContext.get_buffer2(). It is made public so
+ * it can be called by custom get_buffer2() implementations for decoders without
+ * CODEC_CAP_DR1 set.
+ */
+int avcodec_default_get_buffer2(AVCodecContext *s, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+#if FF_API_EMU_EDGE
+/**
+ * Return the amount of padding in pixels which the get_buffer callback must
+ * provide around the edge of the image for codecs which do not have the
+ * CODEC_FLAG_EMU_EDGE flag.
+ *
+ * @return Required padding in pixels.
+ *
+ * @deprecated CODEC_FLAG_EMU_EDGE is deprecated, so this function is no longer
+ * needed
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+unsigned avcodec_get_edge_width(void);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you do not use any horizontal
+ * padding.
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height);
+
+/**
+ * Modify width and height values so that they will result in a memory
+ * buffer that is acceptable for the codec if you also ensure that all
+ * line sizes are a multiple of the respective linesize_align[i].
+ *
+ * May only be used if a codec with CODEC_CAP_DR1 has been opened.
+ */
+void avcodec_align_dimensions2(AVCodecContext *s, int *width, int *height,
+ int linesize_align[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS]);
+
+/**
+ * Converts AVChromaLocation to swscale x/y chroma position.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos vertical chroma sample position
+ */
+int avcodec_enum_to_chroma_pos(int *xpos, int *ypos, enum AVChromaLocation pos);
+
+/**
+ * Converts swscale x/y chroma position to AVChromaLocation.
+ *
+ * The positions represent the chroma (0,0) position in a coordinates system
+ * with luma (0,0) representing the origin and luma(1,1) representing 256,256
+ *
+ * @param xpos horizontal chroma sample position
+ * @param ypos vertical chroma sample position
+ */
+enum AVChromaLocation avcodec_chroma_pos_to_enum(int xpos, int ypos);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_DECODE_AUDIO
+/**
+ * Wrapper function which calls avcodec_decode_audio4.
+ *
+ * @deprecated Use avcodec_decode_audio4 instead.
+ *
+ * Decode the audio frame of size avpkt->size from avpkt->data into samples.
+ * Some decoders may support multiple frames in a single AVPacket, such
+ * decoders would then just decode the first frame. In this case,
+ * avcodec_decode_audio3 has to be called again with an AVPacket that contains
+ * the remaining data in order to decode the second frame etc.
+ * If no frame
+ * could be outputted, frame_size_ptr is zero. Otherwise, it is the
+ * decompressed frame size in bytes.
+ *
+ * @warning You must set frame_size_ptr to the allocated size of the
+ * output buffer before calling avcodec_decode_audio3().
+ *
+ * @warning The input buffer must be FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE larger than
+ * the actual read bytes because some optimized bitstream readers read 32 or 64
+ * bits at once and could read over the end.
+ *
+ * @warning The end of the input buffer avpkt->data should be set to 0 to ensure that
+ * no overreading happens for damaged MPEG streams.
+ *
+ * @warning You must not provide a custom get_buffer() when using
+ * avcodec_decode_audio3(). Doing so will override it with
+ * avcodec_default_get_buffer. Use avcodec_decode_audio4() instead,
+ * which does allow the application to provide a custom get_buffer().
+ *
+ * @note You might have to align the input buffer avpkt->data and output buffer
+ * samples. The alignment requirements depend on the CPU: On some CPUs it isn't
+ * necessary at all, on others it won't work at all if not aligned and on others
+ * it will work but it will have an impact on performance.
+ *
+ * In practice, avpkt->data should have 4 byte alignment at minimum and
+ * samples should be 16 byte aligned unless the CPU doesn't need it
+ * (AltiVec and SSE do).
+ *
+ * @note Codecs which have the CODEC_CAP_DELAY capability set have a delay
+ * between input and output, these need to be fed with avpkt->data=NULL,
+ * avpkt->size=0 at the end to return the remaining frames.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] samples the output buffer, sample type in avctx->sample_fmt
+ * If the sample format is planar, each channel plane will
+ * be the same size, with no padding between channels.
+ * @param[in,out] frame_size_ptr the output buffer size in bytes
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ * You can create such packet with av_init_packet() and by then setting
+ * data and size, some decoders might in addition need other fields.
+ * All decoders are designed to use the least fields possible though.
+ * @return On error a negative value is returned, otherwise the number of bytes
+ * used or zero if no frame data was decompressed (used) from the input AVPacket.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated int avcodec_decode_audio3(AVCodecContext *avctx, int16_t *samples,
+ int *frame_size_ptr,
+ AVPacket *avpkt);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Decode the audio frame of size avpkt->size from avpkt->data into frame.
+ *
+ * Some decoders may support multiple frames in a single AVPacket. Such
+ * decoders would then just decode the first frame and the return value would be
+ * less than the packet size. In this case, avcodec_decode_audio4 has to be
+ * called again with an AVPacket containing the remaining data in order to
+ * decode the second frame, etc... Even if no frames are returned, the packet
+ * needs to be fed to the decoder with remaining data until it is completely
+ * consumed or an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Some decoders (those marked with CODEC_CAP_DELAY) have a delay between input
+ * and output. This means that for some packets they will not immediately
+ * produce decoded output and need to be flushed at the end of decoding to get
+ * all the decoded data. Flushing is done by calling this function with packets
+ * with avpkt->data set to NULL and avpkt->size set to 0 until it stops
+ * returning samples. It is safe to flush even those decoders that are not
+ * marked with CODEC_CAP_DELAY, then no samples will be returned.
+ *
+ * @warning The input buffer, avpkt->data must be FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE
+ * larger than the actual read bytes because some optimized bitstream
+ * readers read 32 or 64 bits at once and could read over the end.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] frame The AVFrame in which to store decoded audio samples.
+ * The decoder will allocate a buffer for the decoded frame by
+ * calling the AVCodecContext.get_buffer2() callback.
+ * When AVCodecContext.refcounted_frames is set to 1, the frame is
+ * reference counted and the returned reference belongs to the
+ * caller. The caller must release the frame using av_frame_unref()
+ * when the frame is no longer needed. The caller may safely write
+ * to the frame if av_frame_is_writable() returns 1.
+ * When AVCodecContext.refcounted_frames is set to 0, the returned
+ * reference belongs to the decoder and is valid only until the
+ * next call to this function or until closing or flushing the
+ * decoder. The caller may not write to it.
+ * @param[out] got_frame_ptr Zero if no frame could be decoded, otherwise it is
+ * non-zero. Note that this field being set to zero
+ * does not mean that an error has occurred. For
+ * decoders with CODEC_CAP_DELAY set, no given decode
+ * call is guaranteed to produce a frame.
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ * At least avpkt->data and avpkt->size should be set. Some
+ * decoders might also require additional fields to be set.
+ * @return A negative error code is returned if an error occurred during
+ * decoding, otherwise the number of bytes consumed from the input
+ * AVPacket is returned.
+ */
+int avcodec_decode_audio4(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *frame,
+ int *got_frame_ptr, const AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Decode the video frame of size avpkt->size from avpkt->data into picture.
+ * Some decoders may support multiple frames in a single AVPacket, such
+ * decoders would then just decode the first frame.
+ *
+ * @warning The input buffer must be FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE larger than
+ * the actual read bytes because some optimized bitstream readers read 32 or 64
+ * bits at once and could read over the end.
+ *
+ * @warning The end of the input buffer buf should be set to 0 to ensure that
+ * no overreading happens for damaged MPEG streams.
+ *
+ * @note Codecs which have the CODEC_CAP_DELAY capability set have a delay
+ * between input and output, these need to be fed with avpkt->data=NULL,
+ * avpkt->size=0 at the end to return the remaining frames.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] picture The AVFrame in which the decoded video frame will be stored.
+ * Use av_frame_alloc() to get an AVFrame. The codec will
+ * allocate memory for the actual bitmap by calling the
+ * AVCodecContext.get_buffer2() callback.
+ * When AVCodecContext.refcounted_frames is set to 1, the frame is
+ * reference counted and the returned reference belongs to the
+ * caller. The caller must release the frame using av_frame_unref()
+ * when the frame is no longer needed. The caller may safely write
+ * to the frame if av_frame_is_writable() returns 1.
+ * When AVCodecContext.refcounted_frames is set to 0, the returned
+ * reference belongs to the decoder and is valid only until the
+ * next call to this function or until closing or flushing the
+ * decoder. The caller may not write to it.
+ *
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ * You can create such packet with av_init_packet() and by then setting
+ * data and size, some decoders might in addition need other fields like
+ * flags&AV_PKT_FLAG_KEY. All decoders are designed to use the least
+ * fields possible.
+ * @param[in,out] got_picture_ptr Zero if no frame could be decompressed, otherwise, it is nonzero.
+ * @return On error a negative value is returned, otherwise the number of bytes
+ * used or zero if no frame could be decompressed.
+ */
+int avcodec_decode_video2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVFrame *picture,
+ int *got_picture_ptr,
+ const AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * Decode a subtitle message.
+ * Return a negative value on error, otherwise return the number of bytes used.
+ * If no subtitle could be decompressed, got_sub_ptr is zero.
+ * Otherwise, the subtitle is stored in *sub.
+ * Note that CODEC_CAP_DR1 is not available for subtitle codecs. This is for
+ * simplicity, because the performance difference is expect to be negligible
+ * and reusing a get_buffer written for video codecs would probably perform badly
+ * due to a potentially very different allocation pattern.
+ *
+ * Some decoders (those marked with CODEC_CAP_DELAY) have a delay between input
+ * and output. This means that for some packets they will not immediately
+ * produce decoded output and need to be flushed at the end of decoding to get
+ * all the decoded data. Flushing is done by calling this function with packets
+ * with avpkt->data set to NULL and avpkt->size set to 0 until it stops
+ * returning subtitles. It is safe to flush even those decoders that are not
+ * marked with CODEC_CAP_DELAY, then no subtitles will be returned.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] sub The Preallocated AVSubtitle in which the decoded subtitle will be stored,
+ * must be freed with avsubtitle_free if *got_sub_ptr is set.
+ * @param[in,out] got_sub_ptr Zero if no subtitle could be decompressed, otherwise, it is nonzero.
+ * @param[in] avpkt The input AVPacket containing the input buffer.
+ */
+int avcodec_decode_subtitle2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVSubtitle *sub,
+ int *got_sub_ptr,
+ AVPacket *avpkt);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_parsing Frame parsing
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVPictureStructure {
+ AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_UNKNOWN, //< unknown
+ AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD, //< coded as top field
+ AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_BOTTOM_FIELD, //< coded as bottom field
+ AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME, //< coded as frame
+};
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParserContext {
+ void *priv_data;
+ struct AVCodecParser *parser;
+ int64_t frame_offset; /* offset of the current frame */
+ int64_t cur_offset; /* current offset
+ (incremented by each av_parser_parse()) */
+ int64_t next_frame_offset; /* offset of the next frame */
+ /* video info */
+ int pict_type; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+ /**
+ * This field is used for proper frame duration computation in lavf.
+ * It signals, how much longer the frame duration of the current frame
+ * is compared to normal frame duration.
+ *
+ * frame_duration = (1 + repeat_pict) * time_base
+ *
+ * It is used by codecs like H.264 to display telecined material.
+ */
+ int repeat_pict; /* XXX: Put it back in AVCodecContext. */
+ int64_t pts; /* pts of the current frame */
+ int64_t dts; /* dts of the current frame */
+
+ /* private data */
+ int64_t last_pts;
+ int64_t last_dts;
+ int fetch_timestamp;
+
+#define AV_PARSER_PTS_NB 4
+ int cur_frame_start_index;
+ int64_t cur_frame_offset[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+ int64_t cur_frame_pts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+ int64_t cur_frame_dts[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+ int flags;
+#define PARSER_FLAG_COMPLETE_FRAMES 0x0001
+#define PARSER_FLAG_ONCE 0x0002
+/// Set if the parser has a valid file offset
+#define PARSER_FLAG_FETCHED_OFFSET 0x0004
+#define PARSER_FLAG_USE_CODEC_TS 0x1000
+
+ int64_t offset; ///< byte offset from starting packet start
+ int64_t cur_frame_end[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+ /**
+ * Set by parser to 1 for key frames and 0 for non-key frames.
+ * It is initialized to -1, so if the parser doesn't set this flag,
+ * old-style fallback using AV_PICTURE_TYPE_I picture type as key frames
+ * will be used.
+ */
+ int key_frame;
+
+ /**
+ * Time difference in stream time base units from the pts of this
+ * packet to the point at which the output from the decoder has converged
+ * independent from the availability of previous frames. That is, the
+ * frames are virtually identical no matter if decoding started from
+ * the very first frame or from this keyframe.
+ * Is AV_NOPTS_VALUE if unknown.
+ * This field is not the display duration of the current frame.
+ * This field has no meaning if the packet does not have AV_PKT_FLAG_KEY
+ * set.
+ *
+ * The purpose of this field is to allow seeking in streams that have no
+ * keyframes in the conventional sense. It corresponds to the
+ * recovery point SEI in H.264 and match_time_delta in NUT. It is also
+ * essential for some types of subtitle streams to ensure that all
+ * subtitles are correctly displayed after seeking.
+ */
+ int64_t convergence_duration;
+
+ // Timestamp generation support:
+ /**
+ * Synchronization point for start of timestamp generation.
+ *
+ * Set to >0 for sync point, 0 for no sync point and <0 for undefined
+ * (default).
+ *
+ * For example, this corresponds to presence of H.264 buffering period
+ * SEI message.
+ */
+ int dts_sync_point;
+
+ /**
+ * Offset of the current timestamp against last timestamp sync point in
+ * units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+ *
+ * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+ * contain a valid timestamp offset.
+ *
+ * Note that the timestamp of sync point has usually a nonzero
+ * dts_ref_dts_delta, which refers to the previous sync point. Offset of
+ * the next frame after timestamp sync point will be usually 1.
+ *
+ * For example, this corresponds to H.264 cpb_removal_delay.
+ */
+ int dts_ref_dts_delta;
+
+ /**
+ * Presentation delay of current frame in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+ *
+ * Set to INT_MIN when dts_sync_point unused. Otherwise, it must
+ * contain valid non-negative timestamp delta (presentation time of a frame
+ * must not lie in the past).
+ *
+ * This delay represents the difference between decoding and presentation
+ * time of the frame.
+ *
+ * For example, this corresponds to H.264 dpb_output_delay.
+ */
+ int pts_dts_delta;
+
+ /**
+ * Position of the packet in file.
+ *
+ * Analogous to cur_frame_pts/dts
+ */
+ int64_t cur_frame_pos[AV_PARSER_PTS_NB];
+
+ /**
+ * Byte position of currently parsed frame in stream.
+ */
+ int64_t pos;
+
+ /**
+ * Previous frame byte position.
+ */
+ int64_t last_pos;
+
+ /**
+ * Duration of the current frame.
+ * For audio, this is in units of 1 / AVCodecContext.sample_rate.
+ * For all other types, this is in units of AVCodecContext.time_base.
+ */
+ int duration;
+
+ enum AVFieldOrder field_order;
+
+ /**
+ * Indicate whether a picture is coded as a frame, top field or bottom field.
+ *
+ * For example, H.264 field_pic_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+ * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_FRAME. An H.264 picture with field_pic_flag
+ * equal to 1 and bottom_field_flag equal to 0 corresponds to
+ * AV_PICTURE_STRUCTURE_TOP_FIELD.
+ */
+ enum AVPictureStructure picture_structure;
+
+ /**
+ * Picture number incremented in presentation or output order.
+ * This field may be reinitialized at the first picture of a new sequence.
+ *
+ * For example, this corresponds to H.264 PicOrderCnt.
+ */
+ int output_picture_number;
+} AVCodecParserContext;
+
+typedef struct AVCodecParser {
+ int codec_ids[5]; /* several codec IDs are permitted */
+ int priv_data_size;
+ int (*parser_init)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+ /* This callback never returns an error, a negative value means that
+ * the frame start was in a previous packet. */
+ int (*parser_parse)(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+ AVCodecContext *avctx,
+ const uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+ const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+ void (*parser_close)(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+ int (*split)(AVCodecContext *avctx, const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+ struct AVCodecParser *next;
+} AVCodecParser;
+
+AVCodecParser *av_parser_next(const AVCodecParser *c);
+
+void av_register_codec_parser(AVCodecParser *parser);
+AVCodecParserContext *av_parser_init(int codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Parse a packet.
+ *
+ * @param s parser context.
+ * @param avctx codec context.
+ * @param poutbuf set to pointer to parsed buffer or NULL if not yet finished.
+ * @param poutbuf_size set to size of parsed buffer or zero if not yet finished.
+ * @param buf input buffer.
+ * @param buf_size input length, to signal EOF, this should be 0 (so that the last frame can be output).
+ * @param pts input presentation timestamp.
+ * @param dts input decoding timestamp.
+ * @param pos input byte position in stream.
+ * @return the number of bytes of the input bitstream used.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ * @code
+ * while(in_len){
+ * len = av_parser_parse2(myparser, AVCodecContext, &data, &size,
+ * in_data, in_len,
+ * pts, dts, pos);
+ * in_data += len;
+ * in_len -= len;
+ *
+ * if(size)
+ * decode_frame(data, size);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ */
+int av_parser_parse2(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+ AVCodecContext *avctx,
+ uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+ const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ int64_t pts, int64_t dts,
+ int64_t pos);
+
+/**
+ * @return 0 if the output buffer is a subset of the input, 1 if it is allocated and must be freed
+ * @deprecated use AVBitStreamFilter
+ */
+int av_parser_change(AVCodecParserContext *s,
+ AVCodecContext *avctx,
+ uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+ const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size, int keyframe);
+void av_parser_close(AVCodecParserContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered encoder with a matching codec ID.
+ *
+ * @param id AVCodecID of the requested encoder
+ * @return An encoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+AVCodec *avcodec_find_encoder(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Find a registered encoder with the specified name.
+ *
+ * @param name name of the requested encoder
+ * @return An encoder if one was found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+AVCodec *avcodec_find_encoder_by_name(const char *name);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_AUDIO
+/**
+ * Encode an audio frame from samples into buf.
+ *
+ * @deprecated Use avcodec_encode_audio2 instead.
+ *
+ * @note The output buffer should be at least FF_MIN_BUFFER_SIZE bytes large.
+ * However, for codecs with avctx->frame_size equal to 0 (e.g. PCM) the user
+ * will know how much space is needed because it depends on the value passed
+ * in buf_size as described below. In that case a lower value can be used.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] buf the output buffer
+ * @param[in] buf_size the output buffer size
+ * @param[in] samples the input buffer containing the samples
+ * The number of samples read from this buffer is frame_size*channels,
+ * both of which are defined in avctx.
+ * For codecs which have avctx->frame_size equal to 0 (e.g. PCM) the number of
+ * samples read from samples is equal to:
+ * buf_size * 8 / (avctx->channels * av_get_bits_per_sample(avctx->codec_id))
+ * This also implies that av_get_bits_per_sample() must not return 0 for these
+ * codecs.
+ * @return On error a negative value is returned, on success zero or the number
+ * of bytes used to encode the data read from the input buffer.
+ */
+int attribute_deprecated avcodec_encode_audio(AVCodecContext *avctx,
+ uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ const short *samples);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Encode a frame of audio.
+ *
+ * Takes input samples from frame and writes the next output packet, if
+ * available, to avpkt. The output packet does not necessarily contain data for
+ * the most recent frame, as encoders can delay, split, and combine input frames
+ * internally as needed.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param avpkt output AVPacket.
+ * The user can supply an output buffer by setting
+ * avpkt->data and avpkt->size prior to calling the
+ * function, but if the size of the user-provided data is not
+ * large enough, encoding will fail. If avpkt->data and
+ * avpkt->size are set, avpkt->destruct must also be set. All
+ * other AVPacket fields will be reset by the encoder using
+ * av_init_packet(). If avpkt->data is NULL, the encoder will
+ * allocate it. The encoder will set avpkt->size to the size
+ * of the output packet.
+ *
+ * If this function fails or produces no output, avpkt will be
+ * freed using av_free_packet() (i.e. avpkt->destruct will be
+ * called to free the user supplied buffer).
+ * @param[in] frame AVFrame containing the raw audio data to be encoded.
+ * May be NULL when flushing an encoder that has the
+ * CODEC_CAP_DELAY capability set.
+ * If CODEC_CAP_VARIABLE_FRAME_SIZE is set, then each frame
+ * can have any number of samples.
+ * If it is not set, frame->nb_samples must be equal to
+ * avctx->frame_size for all frames except the last.
+ * The final frame may be smaller than avctx->frame_size.
+ * @param[out] got_packet_ptr This field is set to 1 by libavcodec if the
+ * output packet is non-empty, and to 0 if it is
+ * empty. If the function returns an error, the
+ * packet can be assumed to be invalid, and the
+ * value of got_packet_ptr is undefined and should
+ * not be used.
+ * @return 0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ */
+int avcodec_encode_audio2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVPacket *avpkt,
+ const AVFrame *frame, int *got_packet_ptr);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_VIDEO
+/**
+ * @deprecated use avcodec_encode_video2() instead.
+ *
+ * Encode a video frame from pict into buf.
+ * The input picture should be
+ * stored using a specific format, namely avctx.pix_fmt.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context
+ * @param[out] buf the output buffer for the bitstream of encoded frame
+ * @param[in] buf_size the size of the output buffer in bytes
+ * @param[in] pict the input picture to encode
+ * @return On error a negative value is returned, on success zero or the number
+ * of bytes used from the output buffer.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avcodec_encode_video(AVCodecContext *avctx, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ const AVFrame *pict);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Encode a frame of video.
+ *
+ * Takes input raw video data from frame and writes the next output packet, if
+ * available, to avpkt. The output packet does not necessarily contain data for
+ * the most recent frame, as encoders can delay and reorder input frames
+ * internally as needed.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param avpkt output AVPacket.
+ * The user can supply an output buffer by setting
+ * avpkt->data and avpkt->size prior to calling the
+ * function, but if the size of the user-provided data is not
+ * large enough, encoding will fail. All other AVPacket fields
+ * will be reset by the encoder using av_init_packet(). If
+ * avpkt->data is NULL, the encoder will allocate it.
+ * The encoder will set avpkt->size to the size of the
+ * output packet. The returned data (if any) belongs to the
+ * caller, he is responsible for freeing it.
+ *
+ * If this function fails or produces no output, avpkt will be
+ * freed using av_free_packet() (i.e. avpkt->destruct will be
+ * called to free the user supplied buffer).
+ * @param[in] frame AVFrame containing the raw video data to be encoded.
+ * May be NULL when flushing an encoder that has the
+ * CODEC_CAP_DELAY capability set.
+ * @param[out] got_packet_ptr This field is set to 1 by libavcodec if the
+ * output packet is non-empty, and to 0 if it is
+ * empty. If the function returns an error, the
+ * packet can be assumed to be invalid, and the
+ * value of got_packet_ptr is undefined and should
+ * not be used.
+ * @return 0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ */
+int avcodec_encode_video2(AVCodecContext *avctx, AVPacket *avpkt,
+ const AVFrame *frame, int *got_packet_ptr);
+
+int avcodec_encode_subtitle(AVCodecContext *avctx, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ const AVSubtitle *sub);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#if FF_API_AVCODEC_RESAMPLE
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_resample Audio resampling
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * @deprecated use libswresample instead
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+struct ReSampleContext;
+struct AVResampleContext;
+
+typedef struct ReSampleContext ReSampleContext;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize audio resampling context.
+ *
+ * @param output_channels number of output channels
+ * @param input_channels number of input channels
+ * @param output_rate output sample rate
+ * @param input_rate input sample rate
+ * @param sample_fmt_out requested output sample format
+ * @param sample_fmt_in input sample format
+ * @param filter_length length of each FIR filter in the filterbank relative to the cutoff frequency
+ * @param log2_phase_count log2 of the number of entries in the polyphase filterbank
+ * @param linear if 1 then the used FIR filter will be linearly interpolated
+ between the 2 closest, if 0 the closest will be used
+ * @param cutoff cutoff frequency, 1.0 corresponds to half the output sampling rate
+ * @return allocated ReSampleContext, NULL if error occurred
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+ReSampleContext *av_audio_resample_init(int output_channels, int input_channels,
+ int output_rate, int input_rate,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt_out,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt_in,
+ int filter_length, int log2_phase_count,
+ int linear, double cutoff);
+
+attribute_deprecated
+int audio_resample(ReSampleContext *s, short *output, short *input, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Free resample context.
+ *
+ * @param s a non-NULL pointer to a resample context previously
+ * created with av_audio_resample_init()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void audio_resample_close(ReSampleContext *s);
+
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an audio resampler.
+ * Note, if either rate is not an integer then simply scale both rates up so they are.
+ * @param filter_length length of each FIR filter in the filterbank relative to the cutoff freq
+ * @param log2_phase_count log2 of the number of entries in the polyphase filterbank
+ * @param linear If 1 then the used FIR filter will be linearly interpolated
+ between the 2 closest, if 0 the closest will be used
+ * @param cutoff cutoff frequency, 1.0 corresponds to half the output sampling rate
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+struct AVResampleContext *av_resample_init(int out_rate, int in_rate, int filter_length, int log2_phase_count, int linear, double cutoff);
+
+/**
+ * Resample an array of samples using a previously configured context.
+ * @param src an array of unconsumed samples
+ * @param consumed the number of samples of src which have been consumed are returned here
+ * @param src_size the number of unconsumed samples available
+ * @param dst_size the amount of space in samples available in dst
+ * @param update_ctx If this is 0 then the context will not be modified, that way several channels can be resampled with the same context.
+ * @return the number of samples written in dst or -1 if an error occurred
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_resample(struct AVResampleContext *c, short *dst, short *src, int *consumed, int src_size, int dst_size, int update_ctx);
+
+
+/**
+ * Compensate samplerate/timestamp drift. The compensation is done by changing
+ * the resampler parameters, so no audible clicks or similar distortions occur
+ * @param compensation_distance distance in output samples over which the compensation should be performed
+ * @param sample_delta number of output samples which should be output less
+ *
+ * example: av_resample_compensate(c, 10, 500)
+ * here instead of 510 samples only 500 samples would be output
+ *
+ * note, due to rounding the actual compensation might be slightly different,
+ * especially if the compensation_distance is large and the in_rate used during init is small
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_resample_compensate(struct AVResampleContext *c, int sample_delta, int compensation_distance);
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_resample_close(struct AVResampleContext *c);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavc_picture
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Allocate memory for the pixels of a picture and setup the AVPicture
+ * fields for it.
+ *
+ * Call avpicture_free() to free it.
+ *
+ * @param picture the picture structure to be filled in
+ * @param pix_fmt the pixel format of the picture
+ * @param width the width of the picture
+ * @param height the height of the picture
+ * @return zero if successful, a negative error code otherwise
+ *
+ * @see av_image_alloc(), avpicture_fill()
+ */
+int avpicture_alloc(AVPicture *picture, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Free a picture previously allocated by avpicture_alloc().
+ * The data buffer used by the AVPicture is freed, but the AVPicture structure
+ * itself is not.
+ *
+ * @param picture the AVPicture to be freed
+ */
+void avpicture_free(AVPicture *picture);
+
+/**
+ * Setup the picture fields based on the specified image parameters
+ * and the provided image data buffer.
+ *
+ * The picture fields are filled in by using the image data buffer
+ * pointed to by ptr.
+ *
+ * If ptr is NULL, the function will fill only the picture linesize
+ * array and return the required size for the image buffer.
+ *
+ * To allocate an image buffer and fill the picture data in one call,
+ * use avpicture_alloc().
+ *
+ * @param picture the picture to be filled in
+ * @param ptr buffer where the image data is stored, or NULL
+ * @param pix_fmt the pixel format of the image
+ * @param width the width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height the height of the image in pixels
+ * @return the size in bytes required for src, a negative error code
+ * in case of failure
+ *
+ * @see av_image_fill_arrays()
+ */
+int avpicture_fill(AVPicture *picture, const uint8_t *ptr,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Copy pixel data from an AVPicture into a buffer.
+ *
+ * avpicture_get_size() can be used to compute the required size for
+ * the buffer to fill.
+ *
+ * @param src source picture with filled data
+ * @param pix_fmt picture pixel format
+ * @param width picture width
+ * @param height picture height
+ * @param dest destination buffer
+ * @param dest_size destination buffer size in bytes
+ * @return the number of bytes written to dest, or a negative value
+ * (error code) on error, for example if the destination buffer is not
+ * big enough
+ *
+ * @see av_image_copy_to_buffer()
+ */
+int avpicture_layout(const AVPicture *src, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt,
+ int width, int height,
+ unsigned char *dest, int dest_size);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the size in bytes that a picture of the given width and height
+ * would occupy if stored in the given picture format.
+ *
+ * @param pix_fmt picture pixel format
+ * @param width picture width
+ * @param height picture height
+ * @return the computed picture buffer size or a negative error code
+ * in case of error
+ *
+ * @see av_image_get_buffer_size().
+ */
+int avpicture_get_size(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+#if FF_API_DEINTERLACE
+/**
+ * deinterlace - if not supported return -1
+ *
+ * @deprecated - use yadif (in libavfilter) instead
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avpicture_deinterlace(AVPicture *dst, const AVPicture *src,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+#endif
+/**
+ * Copy image src to dst. Wraps av_image_copy().
+ */
+void av_picture_copy(AVPicture *dst, const AVPicture *src,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Crop image top and left side.
+ */
+int av_picture_crop(AVPicture *dst, const AVPicture *src,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int top_band, int left_band);
+
+/**
+ * Pad image.
+ */
+int av_picture_pad(AVPicture *dst, const AVPicture *src, int height, int width, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt,
+ int padtop, int padbottom, int padleft, int padright, int *color);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc Utility functions
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ *
+ * Miscellaneous utility functions related to both encoding and decoding
+ * (or neither).
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_misc_pixfmt Pixel formats
+ *
+ * Functions for working with pixel formats.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Utility function to access log2_chroma_w log2_chroma_h from
+ * the pixel format AVPixFmtDescriptor.
+ *
+ * This function asserts that pix_fmt is valid. See av_pix_fmt_get_chroma_sub_sample
+ * for one that returns a failure code and continues in case of invalid
+ * pix_fmts.
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt the pixel format
+ * @param[out] h_shift store log2_chroma_w
+ * @param[out] v_shift store log2_chroma_h
+ *
+ * @see av_pix_fmt_get_chroma_sub_sample
+ */
+
+void avcodec_get_chroma_sub_sample(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int *h_shift, int *v_shift);
+
+/**
+ * Return a value representing the fourCC code associated to the
+ * pixel format pix_fmt, or 0 if no associated fourCC code can be
+ * found.
+ */
+unsigned int avcodec_pix_fmt_to_codec_tag(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @deprecated see av_get_pix_fmt_loss()
+ */
+int avcodec_get_pix_fmt_loss(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt, enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+ int has_alpha);
+
+/**
+ * Find the best pixel format to convert to given a certain source pixel
+ * format. When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss
+ * may occur. For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color
+ * information will be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from
+ * some formats to other formats. avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2() searches which of
+ * the given pixel formats should be used to suffer the least amount of loss.
+ * The pixel formats from which it chooses one, are determined by the
+ * pix_fmt_list parameter.
+ *
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt_list AV_PIX_FMT_NONE terminated array of pixel formats to choose from
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @param[out] loss_ptr Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur.
+ * @return The best pixel format to convert to or -1 if none was found.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_list(const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmt_list,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+ int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+/**
+ * @deprecated see av_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2()
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt1, enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt2,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt, int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+attribute_deprecated
+#if AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt2(const enum AVPixelFormat *pix_fmt_list,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+ int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+#else
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt2(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt1, enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt2,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt, int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+#endif
+
+
+enum AVPixelFormat avcodec_default_get_format(struct AVCodecContext *s, const enum AVPixelFormat * fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#if FF_API_SET_DIMENSIONS
+/**
+ * @deprecated this function is not supposed to be used from outside of lavc
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avcodec_set_dimensions(AVCodecContext *s, int width, int height);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Put a string representing the codec tag codec_tag in buf.
+ *
+ * @param buf buffer to place codec tag in
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of buf
+ * @param codec_tag codec tag to assign
+ * @return the length of the string that would have been generated if
+ * enough space had been available, excluding the trailing null
+ */
+size_t av_get_codec_tag_string(char *buf, size_t buf_size, unsigned int codec_tag);
+
+void avcodec_string(char *buf, int buf_size, AVCodecContext *enc, int encode);
+
+/**
+ * Return a name for the specified profile, if available.
+ *
+ * @param codec the codec that is searched for the given profile
+ * @param profile the profile value for which a name is requested
+ * @return A name for the profile if found, NULL otherwise.
+ */
+const char *av_get_profile_name(const AVCodec *codec, int profile);
+
+int avcodec_default_execute(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2),void *arg, int *ret, int count, int size);
+int avcodec_default_execute2(AVCodecContext *c, int (*func)(AVCodecContext *c2, void *arg2, int, int),void *arg, int *ret, int count);
+//FIXME func typedef
+
+/**
+ * Fill AVFrame audio data and linesize pointers.
+ *
+ * The buffer buf must be a preallocated buffer with a size big enough
+ * to contain the specified samples amount. The filled AVFrame data
+ * pointers will point to this buffer.
+ *
+ * AVFrame extended_data channel pointers are allocated if necessary for
+ * planar audio.
+ *
+ * @param frame the AVFrame
+ * frame->nb_samples must be set prior to calling the
+ * function. This function fills in frame->data,
+ * frame->extended_data, frame->linesize[0].
+ * @param nb_channels channel count
+ * @param sample_fmt sample format
+ * @param buf buffer to use for frame data
+ * @param buf_size size of buffer
+ * @param align plane size sample alignment (0 = default)
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return the size in bytes required to store the samples in
+ * case of success, at the next libavutil bump
+ */
+int avcodec_fill_audio_frame(AVFrame *frame, int nb_channels,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, const uint8_t *buf,
+ int buf_size, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the internal decoder state / flush internal buffers. Should be called
+ * e.g. when seeking or when switching to a different stream.
+ *
+ * @note when refcounted frames are not used (i.e. avctx->refcounted_frames is 0),
+ * this invalidates the frames previously returned from the decoder. When
+ * refcounted frames are used, the decoder just releases any references it might
+ * keep internally, but the caller's reference remains valid.
+ */
+void avcodec_flush_buffers(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * Return codec bits per sample.
+ *
+ * @param[in] codec_id the codec
+ * @return Number of bits per sample or zero if unknown for the given codec.
+ */
+int av_get_bits_per_sample(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Return the PCM codec associated with a sample format.
+ * @param be endianness, 0 for little, 1 for big,
+ * -1 (or anything else) for native
+ * @return AV_CODEC_ID_PCM_* or AV_CODEC_ID_NONE
+ */
+enum AVCodecID av_get_pcm_codec(enum AVSampleFormat fmt, int be);
+
+/**
+ * Return codec bits per sample.
+ * Only return non-zero if the bits per sample is exactly correct, not an
+ * approximation.
+ *
+ * @param[in] codec_id the codec
+ * @return Number of bits per sample or zero if unknown for the given codec.
+ */
+int av_get_exact_bits_per_sample(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Return audio frame duration.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param frame_bytes size of the frame, or 0 if unknown
+ * @return frame duration, in samples, if known. 0 if not able to
+ * determine.
+ */
+int av_get_audio_frame_duration(AVCodecContext *avctx, int frame_bytes);
+
+
+typedef struct AVBitStreamFilterContext {
+ void *priv_data;
+ struct AVBitStreamFilter *filter;
+ AVCodecParserContext *parser;
+ struct AVBitStreamFilterContext *next;
+} AVBitStreamFilterContext;
+
+
+typedef struct AVBitStreamFilter {
+ const char *name;
+ int priv_data_size;
+ int (*filter)(AVBitStreamFilterContext *bsfc,
+ AVCodecContext *avctx, const char *args,
+ uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+ const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size, int keyframe);
+ void (*close)(AVBitStreamFilterContext *bsfc);
+ struct AVBitStreamFilter *next;
+} AVBitStreamFilter;
+
+/**
+ * Register a bitstream filter.
+ *
+ * The filter will be accessible to the application code through
+ * av_bitstream_filter_next() or can be directly initialized with
+ * av_bitstream_filter_init().
+ *
+ * @see avcodec_register_all()
+ */
+void av_register_bitstream_filter(AVBitStreamFilter *bsf);
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialize a bitstream filter context given a bitstream
+ * filter name.
+ *
+ * The returned context must be freed with av_bitstream_filter_close().
+ *
+ * @param name the name of the bitstream filter
+ * @return a bitstream filter context if a matching filter was found
+ * and successfully initialized, NULL otherwise
+ */
+AVBitStreamFilterContext *av_bitstream_filter_init(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Filter bitstream.
+ *
+ * This function filters the buffer buf with size buf_size, and places the
+ * filtered buffer in the buffer pointed to by poutbuf.
+ *
+ * The output buffer must be freed by the caller.
+ *
+ * @param bsfc bitstream filter context created by av_bitstream_filter_init()
+ * @param avctx AVCodecContext accessed by the filter, may be NULL.
+ * If specified, this must point to the encoder context of the
+ * output stream the packet is sent to.
+ * @param args arguments which specify the filter configuration, may be NULL
+ * @param poutbuf pointer which is updated to point to the filtered buffer
+ * @param poutbuf_size pointer which is updated to the filtered buffer size in bytes
+ * @param buf buffer containing the data to filter
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of buf
+ * @param keyframe set to non-zero if the buffer to filter corresponds to a key-frame packet data
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, or a negative error code in case of failure
+ *
+ * If the return value is positive, an output buffer is allocated and
+ * is available in *poutbuf, and is distinct from the input buffer.
+ *
+ * If the return value is 0, the output buffer is not allocated and
+ * should be considered identical to the input buffer, or in case
+ * *poutbuf was set it points to the input buffer (not necessarily to
+ * its starting address).
+ */
+int av_bitstream_filter_filter(AVBitStreamFilterContext *bsfc,
+ AVCodecContext *avctx, const char *args,
+ uint8_t **poutbuf, int *poutbuf_size,
+ const uint8_t *buf, int buf_size, int keyframe);
+
+/**
+ * Release bitstream filter context.
+ *
+ * @param bsf the bitstream filter context created with
+ * av_bitstream_filter_init(), can be NULL
+ */
+void av_bitstream_filter_close(AVBitStreamFilterContext *bsf);
+
+/**
+ * If f is NULL, return the first registered bitstream filter,
+ * if f is non-NULL, return the next registered bitstream filter
+ * after f, or NULL if f is the last one.
+ *
+ * This function can be used to iterate over all registered bitstream
+ * filters.
+ */
+AVBitStreamFilter *av_bitstream_filter_next(const AVBitStreamFilter *f);
+
+/* memory */
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_malloc but the buffer has additional
+ * FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE at the end which will always be 0.
+ *
+ * In addition the whole buffer will initially and after resizes
+ * be 0-initialized so that no uninitialized data will ever appear.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_malloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Same behaviour av_fast_padded_malloc except that buffer will always
+ * be 0-initialized after call.
+ */
+void av_fast_padded_mallocz(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Encode extradata length to a buffer. Used by xiph codecs.
+ *
+ * @param s buffer to write to; must be at least (v/255+1) bytes long
+ * @param v size of extradata in bytes
+ * @return number of bytes written to the buffer.
+ */
+unsigned int av_xiphlacing(unsigned char *s, unsigned int v);
+
+#if FF_API_MISSING_SAMPLE
+/**
+ * Log a generic warning message about a missing feature. This function is
+ * intended to be used internally by FFmpeg (libavcodec, libavformat, etc.)
+ * only, and would normally not be used by applications.
+ * @param[in] avc a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is
+ * a pointer to an AVClass struct
+ * @param[in] feature string containing the name of the missing feature
+ * @param[in] want_sample indicates if samples are wanted which exhibit this feature.
+ * If want_sample is non-zero, additional verbage will be added to the log
+ * message which tells the user how to report samples to the development
+ * mailing list.
+ * @deprecated Use avpriv_report_missing_feature() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_log_missing_feature(void *avc, const char *feature, int want_sample);
+
+/**
+ * Log a generic warning message asking for a sample. This function is
+ * intended to be used internally by FFmpeg (libavcodec, libavformat, etc.)
+ * only, and would normally not be used by applications.
+ * @param[in] avc a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is
+ * a pointer to an AVClass struct
+ * @param[in] msg string containing an optional message, or NULL if no message
+ * @deprecated Use avpriv_request_sample() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_log_ask_for_sample(void *avc, const char *msg, ...) av_printf_format(2, 3);
+#endif /* FF_API_MISSING_SAMPLE */
+
+/**
+ * Register the hardware accelerator hwaccel.
+ */
+void av_register_hwaccel(AVHWAccel *hwaccel);
+
+/**
+ * If hwaccel is NULL, returns the first registered hardware accelerator,
+ * if hwaccel is non-NULL, returns the next registered hardware accelerator
+ * after hwaccel, or NULL if hwaccel is the last one.
+ */
+AVHWAccel *av_hwaccel_next(const AVHWAccel *hwaccel);
+
+
+/**
+ * Lock operation used by lockmgr
+ */
+enum AVLockOp {
+ AV_LOCK_CREATE, ///< Create a mutex
+ AV_LOCK_OBTAIN, ///< Lock the mutex
+ AV_LOCK_RELEASE, ///< Unlock the mutex
+ AV_LOCK_DESTROY, ///< Free mutex resources
+};
+
+/**
+ * Register a user provided lock manager supporting the operations
+ * specified by AVLockOp. The "mutex" argument to the function points
+ * to a (void *) where the lockmgr should store/get a pointer to a user
+ * allocated mutex. It is NULL upon AV_LOCK_CREATE and equal to the
+ * value left by the last call for all other ops. If the lock manager is
+ * unable to perform the op then it should leave the mutex in the same
+ * state as when it was called and return a non-zero value. However,
+ * when called with AV_LOCK_DESTROY the mutex will always be assumed to
+ * have been successfully destroyed. If av_lockmgr_register succeeds
+ * it will return a non-negative value, if it fails it will return a
+ * negative value and destroy all mutex and unregister all callbacks.
+ * av_lockmgr_register is not thread-safe, it must be called from a
+ * single thread before any calls which make use of locking are used.
+ *
+ * @param cb User defined callback. av_lockmgr_register invokes calls
+ * to this callback and the previously registered callback.
+ * The callback will be used to create more than one mutex
+ * each of which must be backed by its own underlying locking
+ * mechanism (i.e. do not use a single static object to
+ * implement your lock manager). If cb is set to NULL the
+ * lockmgr will be unregistered.
+ */
+int av_lockmgr_register(int (*cb)(void **mutex, enum AVLockOp op));
+
+/**
+ * Get the type of the given codec.
+ */
+enum AVMediaType avcodec_get_type(enum AVCodecID codec_id);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a codec.
+ * @return a static string identifying the codec; never NULL
+ */
+const char *avcodec_get_name(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * @return a positive value if s is open (i.e. avcodec_open2() was called on it
+ * with no corresponding avcodec_close()), 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int avcodec_is_open(AVCodecContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @return a non-zero number if codec is an encoder, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_codec_is_encoder(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * @return a non-zero number if codec is a decoder, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_codec_is_decoder(const AVCodec *codec);
+
+/**
+ * @return descriptor for given codec ID or NULL if no descriptor exists.
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_get(enum AVCodecID id);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all codec descriptors known to libavcodec.
+ *
+ * @param prev previous descriptor. NULL to get the first descriptor.
+ *
+ * @return next descriptor or NULL after the last descriptor
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_next(const AVCodecDescriptor *prev);
+
+/**
+ * @return codec descriptor with the given name or NULL if no such descriptor
+ * exists.
+ */
+const AVCodecDescriptor *avcodec_descriptor_get_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVCODEC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/avfft.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/avfft.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c0f9b8d8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/avfft.h
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_AVFFT_H
+#define AVCODEC_AVFFT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_fft
+ * FFT functions
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_fft FFT functions
+ * @ingroup lavc_misc
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef float FFTSample;
+
+typedef struct FFTComplex {
+ FFTSample re, im;
+} FFTComplex;
+
+typedef struct FFTContext FFTContext;
+
+/**
+ * Set up a complex FFT.
+ * @param nbits log2 of the length of the input array
+ * @param inverse if 0 perform the forward transform, if 1 perform the inverse
+ */
+FFTContext *av_fft_init(int nbits, int inverse);
+
+/**
+ * Do the permutation needed BEFORE calling ff_fft_calc().
+ */
+void av_fft_permute(FFTContext *s, FFTComplex *z);
+
+/**
+ * Do a complex FFT with the parameters defined in av_fft_init(). The
+ * input data must be permuted before. No 1.0/sqrt(n) normalization is done.
+ */
+void av_fft_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTComplex *z);
+
+void av_fft_end(FFTContext *s);
+
+FFTContext *av_mdct_init(int nbits, int inverse, double scale);
+void av_imdct_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_imdct_half(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_mdct_calc(FFTContext *s, FFTSample *output, const FFTSample *input);
+void av_mdct_end(FFTContext *s);
+
+/* Real Discrete Fourier Transform */
+
+enum RDFTransformType {
+ DFT_R2C,
+ IDFT_C2R,
+ IDFT_R2C,
+ DFT_C2R,
+};
+
+typedef struct RDFTContext RDFTContext;
+
+/**
+ * Set up a real FFT.
+ * @param nbits log2 of the length of the input array
+ * @param trans the type of transform
+ */
+RDFTContext *av_rdft_init(int nbits, enum RDFTransformType trans);
+void av_rdft_calc(RDFTContext *s, FFTSample *data);
+void av_rdft_end(RDFTContext *s);
+
+/* Discrete Cosine Transform */
+
+typedef struct DCTContext DCTContext;
+
+enum DCTTransformType {
+ DCT_II = 0,
+ DCT_III,
+ DCT_I,
+ DST_I,
+};
+
+/**
+ * Set up DCT.
+ *
+ * @param nbits size of the input array:
+ * (1 << nbits) for DCT-II, DCT-III and DST-I
+ * (1 << nbits) + 1 for DCT-I
+ * @param type the type of transform
+ *
+ * @note the first element of the input of DST-I is ignored
+ */
+DCTContext *av_dct_init(int nbits, enum DCTTransformType type);
+void av_dct_calc(DCTContext *s, FFTSample *data);
+void av_dct_end (DCTContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_AVFFT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d22ad2663f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dv_profile.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H
+#define AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+#include "avcodec.h"
+
+/* minimum number of bytes to read from a DV stream in order to
+ * determine the profile */
+#define DV_PROFILE_BYTES (6 * 80) /* 6 DIF blocks */
+
+
+/*
+ * AVDVProfile is used to express the differences between various
+ * DV flavors. For now it's primarily used for differentiating
+ * 525/60 and 625/50, but the plans are to use it for various
+ * DV specs as well (e.g. SMPTE314M vs. IEC 61834).
+ */
+typedef struct AVDVProfile {
+ int dsf; /* value of the dsf in the DV header */
+ int video_stype; /* stype for VAUX source pack */
+ int frame_size; /* total size of one frame in bytes */
+ int difseg_size; /* number of DIF segments per DIF channel */
+ int n_difchan; /* number of DIF channels per frame */
+ AVRational time_base; /* 1/framerate */
+ int ltc_divisor; /* FPS from the LTS standpoint */
+ int height; /* picture height in pixels */
+ int width; /* picture width in pixels */
+ AVRational sar[2]; /* sample aspect ratios for 4:3 and 16:9 */
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt; /* picture pixel format */
+ int bpm; /* blocks per macroblock */
+ const uint8_t *block_sizes; /* AC block sizes, in bits */
+ int audio_stride; /* size of audio_shuffle table */
+ int audio_min_samples[3]; /* min amount of audio samples */
+ /* for 48kHz, 44.1kHz and 32kHz */
+ int audio_samples_dist[5]; /* how many samples are supposed to be */
+ /* in each frame in a 5 frames window */
+ const uint8_t (*audio_shuffle)[9]; /* PCM shuffling table */
+} AVDVProfile;
+
+#if FF_API_DV_FRAME_PROFILE
+/**
+ * @deprecated use av_dv_frame_profile()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+const AVDVProfile* avpriv_dv_frame_profile2(AVCodecContext* codec, const AVDVProfile *sys,
+ const uint8_t* frame, unsigned buf_size);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided compressed frame.
+ *
+ * @param sys the profile used for the previous frame, may be NULL
+ * @param frame the compressed data buffer
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer in bytes
+ * @return the DV profile for the supplied data or NULL on failure
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_frame_profile(const AVDVProfile *sys,
+ const uint8_t *frame, unsigned buf_size);
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided stream parameters.
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_codec_profile(int width, int height, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get a DV profile for the provided stream parameters.
+ * The frame rate is used as a best-effort parameter.
+ */
+const AVDVProfile *av_dv_codec_profile2(int width, int height, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, AVRational frame_rate);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_DV_PROFILE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..be246d7198
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/dxva2.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+ * DXVA2 HW acceleration
+ *
+ * copyright (c) 2009 Laurent Aimar
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_DXVA_H
+#define AVCODEC_DXVA_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_dxva2
+ * Public libavcodec DXVA2 header.
+ */
+
+#if !defined(_WIN32_WINNT) || _WIN32_WINNT < 0x0600
+#undef _WIN32_WINNT
+#define _WIN32_WINNT 0x0600
+#endif
+
+#include
+#include
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_dxva2 DXVA2
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_SCALING_LIST_ZIGZAG 1 ///< Work around for DXVA2 and old UVD/UVD+ ATI video cards
+#define FF_DXVA2_WORKAROUND_INTEL_CLEARVIDEO 2 ///< Work around for DXVA2 and old Intel GPUs with ClearVideo interface
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to provides the necessary configurations and data
+ * to the DXVA2 FFmpeg HWAccel implementation.
+ *
+ * The application must make it available as AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context.
+ */
+struct dxva_context {
+ /**
+ * DXVA2 decoder object
+ */
+ IDirectXVideoDecoder *decoder;
+
+ /**
+ * DXVA2 configuration used to create the decoder
+ */
+ const DXVA2_ConfigPictureDecode *cfg;
+
+ /**
+ * The number of surface in the surface array
+ */
+ unsigned surface_count;
+
+ /**
+ * The array of Direct3D surfaces used to create the decoder
+ */
+ LPDIRECT3DSURFACE9 *surface;
+
+ /**
+ * A bit field configuring the workarounds needed for using the decoder
+ */
+ uint64_t workaround;
+
+ /**
+ * Private to the FFmpeg AVHWAccel implementation
+ */
+ unsigned report_id;
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_DXVA_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/old_codec_ids.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/old_codec_ids.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c7aa0e0a12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/old_codec_ids.h
@@ -0,0 +1,397 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_OLD_CODEC_IDS_H
+#define AVCODEC_OLD_CODEC_IDS_H
+
+/*
+ * This header exists to prevent new codec IDs from being accidentally added to
+ * the deprecated list.
+ * Do not include it directly. It will be removed on next major bump
+ *
+ * Do not add new items to this list. Use the AVCodecID enum instead.
+ */
+
+ CODEC_ID_NONE = AV_CODEC_ID_NONE,
+
+ /* video codecs */
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG1VIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG2VIDEO, ///< preferred ID for MPEG-1/2 video decoding
+#if FF_API_XVMC
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG2VIDEO_XVMC,
+#endif
+ CODEC_ID_H261,
+ CODEC_ID_H263,
+ CODEC_ID_RV10,
+ CODEC_ID_RV20,
+ CODEC_ID_MJPEG,
+ CODEC_ID_MJPEGB,
+ CODEC_ID_LJPEG,
+ CODEC_ID_SP5X,
+ CODEC_ID_JPEGLS,
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG4,
+ CODEC_ID_RAWVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V1,
+ CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V2,
+ CODEC_ID_MSMPEG4V3,
+ CODEC_ID_WMV1,
+ CODEC_ID_WMV2,
+ CODEC_ID_H263P,
+ CODEC_ID_H263I,
+ CODEC_ID_FLV1,
+ CODEC_ID_SVQ1,
+ CODEC_ID_SVQ3,
+ CODEC_ID_DVVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_HUFFYUV,
+ CODEC_ID_CYUV,
+ CODEC_ID_H264,
+ CODEC_ID_INDEO3,
+ CODEC_ID_VP3,
+ CODEC_ID_THEORA,
+ CODEC_ID_ASV1,
+ CODEC_ID_ASV2,
+ CODEC_ID_FFV1,
+ CODEC_ID_4XM,
+ CODEC_ID_VCR1,
+ CODEC_ID_CLJR,
+ CODEC_ID_MDEC,
+ CODEC_ID_ROQ,
+ CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_VIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_XAN_WC3,
+ CODEC_ID_XAN_WC4,
+ CODEC_ID_RPZA,
+ CODEC_ID_CINEPAK,
+ CODEC_ID_WS_VQA,
+ CODEC_ID_MSRLE,
+ CODEC_ID_MSVIDEO1,
+ CODEC_ID_IDCIN,
+ CODEC_ID_8BPS,
+ CODEC_ID_SMC,
+ CODEC_ID_FLIC,
+ CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION1,
+ CODEC_ID_VMDVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_MSZH,
+ CODEC_ID_ZLIB,
+ CODEC_ID_QTRLE,
+ CODEC_ID_TSCC,
+ CODEC_ID_ULTI,
+ CODEC_ID_QDRAW,
+ CODEC_ID_VIXL,
+ CODEC_ID_QPEG,
+ CODEC_ID_PNG,
+ CODEC_ID_PPM,
+ CODEC_ID_PBM,
+ CODEC_ID_PGM,
+ CODEC_ID_PGMYUV,
+ CODEC_ID_PAM,
+ CODEC_ID_FFVHUFF,
+ CODEC_ID_RV30,
+ CODEC_ID_RV40,
+ CODEC_ID_VC1,
+ CODEC_ID_WMV3,
+ CODEC_ID_LOCO,
+ CODEC_ID_WNV1,
+ CODEC_ID_AASC,
+ CODEC_ID_INDEO2,
+ CODEC_ID_FRAPS,
+ CODEC_ID_TRUEMOTION2,
+ CODEC_ID_BMP,
+ CODEC_ID_CSCD,
+ CODEC_ID_MMVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_ZMBV,
+ CODEC_ID_AVS,
+ CODEC_ID_SMACKVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_NUV,
+ CODEC_ID_KMVC,
+ CODEC_ID_FLASHSV,
+ CODEC_ID_CAVS,
+ CODEC_ID_JPEG2000,
+ CODEC_ID_VMNC,
+ CODEC_ID_VP5,
+ CODEC_ID_VP6,
+ CODEC_ID_VP6F,
+ CODEC_ID_TARGA,
+ CODEC_ID_DSICINVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_TIERTEXSEQVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_TIFF,
+ CODEC_ID_GIF,
+ CODEC_ID_DXA,
+ CODEC_ID_DNXHD,
+ CODEC_ID_THP,
+ CODEC_ID_SGI,
+ CODEC_ID_C93,
+ CODEC_ID_BETHSOFTVID,
+ CODEC_ID_PTX,
+ CODEC_ID_TXD,
+ CODEC_ID_VP6A,
+ CODEC_ID_AMV,
+ CODEC_ID_VB,
+ CODEC_ID_PCX,
+ CODEC_ID_SUNRAST,
+ CODEC_ID_INDEO4,
+ CODEC_ID_INDEO5,
+ CODEC_ID_MIMIC,
+ CODEC_ID_RL2,
+ CODEC_ID_ESCAPE124,
+ CODEC_ID_DIRAC,
+ CODEC_ID_BFI,
+ CODEC_ID_CMV,
+ CODEC_ID_MOTIONPIXELS,
+ CODEC_ID_TGV,
+ CODEC_ID_TGQ,
+ CODEC_ID_TQI,
+ CODEC_ID_AURA,
+ CODEC_ID_AURA2,
+ CODEC_ID_V210X,
+ CODEC_ID_TMV,
+ CODEC_ID_V210,
+ CODEC_ID_DPX,
+ CODEC_ID_MAD,
+ CODEC_ID_FRWU,
+ CODEC_ID_FLASHSV2,
+ CODEC_ID_CDGRAPHICS,
+ CODEC_ID_R210,
+ CODEC_ID_ANM,
+ CODEC_ID_BINKVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_IFF_ILBM,
+ CODEC_ID_IFF_BYTERUN1,
+ CODEC_ID_KGV1,
+ CODEC_ID_YOP,
+ CODEC_ID_VP8,
+ CODEC_ID_PICTOR,
+ CODEC_ID_ANSI,
+ CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI,
+ CODEC_ID_A64_MULTI5,
+ CODEC_ID_R10K,
+ CODEC_ID_MXPEG,
+ CODEC_ID_LAGARITH,
+ CODEC_ID_PRORES,
+ CODEC_ID_JV,
+ CODEC_ID_DFA,
+ CODEC_ID_WMV3IMAGE,
+ CODEC_ID_VC1IMAGE,
+ CODEC_ID_UTVIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_BMV_VIDEO,
+ CODEC_ID_VBLE,
+ CODEC_ID_DXTORY,
+ CODEC_ID_V410,
+ CODEC_ID_XWD,
+ CODEC_ID_CDXL,
+ CODEC_ID_XBM,
+ CODEC_ID_ZEROCODEC,
+ CODEC_ID_MSS1,
+ CODEC_ID_MSA1,
+ CODEC_ID_TSCC2,
+ CODEC_ID_MTS2,
+ CODEC_ID_CLLC,
+ CODEC_ID_Y41P = MKBETAG('Y','4','1','P'),
+ CODEC_ID_ESCAPE130 = MKBETAG('E','1','3','0'),
+ CODEC_ID_EXR = MKBETAG('0','E','X','R'),
+ CODEC_ID_AVRP = MKBETAG('A','V','R','P'),
+
+ CODEC_ID_G2M = MKBETAG( 0 ,'G','2','M'),
+ CODEC_ID_AVUI = MKBETAG('A','V','U','I'),
+ CODEC_ID_AYUV = MKBETAG('A','Y','U','V'),
+ CODEC_ID_V308 = MKBETAG('V','3','0','8'),
+ CODEC_ID_V408 = MKBETAG('V','4','0','8'),
+ CODEC_ID_YUV4 = MKBETAG('Y','U','V','4'),
+ CODEC_ID_SANM = MKBETAG('S','A','N','M'),
+ CODEC_ID_PAF_VIDEO = MKBETAG('P','A','F','V'),
+ CODEC_ID_SNOW = AV_CODEC_ID_SNOW,
+
+ /* various PCM "codecs" */
+ CODEC_ID_FIRST_AUDIO = 0x10000, ///< A dummy id pointing at the start of audio codecs
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE = 0x10000,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S16BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U16LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U16BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S8,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U8,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_MULAW,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_ALAW,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S32LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S32BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U32LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U32BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S24LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S24BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U24LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_U24BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S24DAUD,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_ZORK,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S16LE_PLANAR,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_DVD,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_F32BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_F32LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_F64BE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_F64LE,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_BLURAY,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_LXF,
+ CODEC_ID_S302M,
+ CODEC_ID_PCM_S8_PLANAR,
+
+ /* various ADPCM codecs */
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_QT = 0x11000,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WAV,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK3,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_DK4,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_WS,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_SMJPEG,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_MS,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_4XM,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_XA,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_ADX,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G726,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_CT,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SWF,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_YAMAHA,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_4,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_3,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_SBPRO_2,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_THP,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_AMV,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R1,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R3,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_R2,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_SEAD,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_EA_EACS,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_XAS,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_EA_MAXIS_XA,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_ISS,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_G722,
+ CODEC_ID_ADPCM_IMA_APC,
+ CODEC_ID_VIMA = MKBETAG('V','I','M','A'),
+
+ /* AMR */
+ CODEC_ID_AMR_NB = 0x12000,
+ CODEC_ID_AMR_WB,
+
+ /* RealAudio codecs*/
+ CODEC_ID_RA_144 = 0x13000,
+ CODEC_ID_RA_288,
+
+ /* various DPCM codecs */
+ CODEC_ID_ROQ_DPCM = 0x14000,
+ CODEC_ID_INTERPLAY_DPCM,
+ CODEC_ID_XAN_DPCM,
+ CODEC_ID_SOL_DPCM,
+
+ /* audio codecs */
+ CODEC_ID_MP2 = 0x15000,
+ CODEC_ID_MP3, ///< preferred ID for decoding MPEG audio layer 1, 2 or 3
+ CODEC_ID_AAC,
+ CODEC_ID_AC3,
+ CODEC_ID_DTS,
+ CODEC_ID_VORBIS,
+ CODEC_ID_DVAUDIO,
+ CODEC_ID_WMAV1,
+ CODEC_ID_WMAV2,
+ CODEC_ID_MACE3,
+ CODEC_ID_MACE6,
+ CODEC_ID_VMDAUDIO,
+ CODEC_ID_FLAC,
+ CODEC_ID_MP3ADU,
+ CODEC_ID_MP3ON4,
+ CODEC_ID_SHORTEN,
+ CODEC_ID_ALAC,
+ CODEC_ID_WESTWOOD_SND1,
+ CODEC_ID_GSM, ///< as in Berlin toast format
+ CODEC_ID_QDM2,
+ CODEC_ID_COOK,
+ CODEC_ID_TRUESPEECH,
+ CODEC_ID_TTA,
+ CODEC_ID_SMACKAUDIO,
+ CODEC_ID_QCELP,
+ CODEC_ID_WAVPACK,
+ CODEC_ID_DSICINAUDIO,
+ CODEC_ID_IMC,
+ CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK7,
+ CODEC_ID_MLP,
+ CODEC_ID_GSM_MS, /* as found in WAV */
+ CODEC_ID_ATRAC3,
+ CODEC_ID_VOXWARE,
+ CODEC_ID_APE,
+ CODEC_ID_NELLYMOSER,
+ CODEC_ID_MUSEPACK8,
+ CODEC_ID_SPEEX,
+ CODEC_ID_WMAVOICE,
+ CODEC_ID_WMAPRO,
+ CODEC_ID_WMALOSSLESS,
+ CODEC_ID_ATRAC3P,
+ CODEC_ID_EAC3,
+ CODEC_ID_SIPR,
+ CODEC_ID_MP1,
+ CODEC_ID_TWINVQ,
+ CODEC_ID_TRUEHD,
+ CODEC_ID_MP4ALS,
+ CODEC_ID_ATRAC1,
+ CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_RDFT,
+ CODEC_ID_BINKAUDIO_DCT,
+ CODEC_ID_AAC_LATM,
+ CODEC_ID_QDMC,
+ CODEC_ID_CELT,
+ CODEC_ID_G723_1,
+ CODEC_ID_G729,
+ CODEC_ID_8SVX_EXP,
+ CODEC_ID_8SVX_FIB,
+ CODEC_ID_BMV_AUDIO,
+ CODEC_ID_RALF,
+ CODEC_ID_IAC,
+ CODEC_ID_ILBC,
+ CODEC_ID_FFWAVESYNTH = MKBETAG('F','F','W','S'),
+ CODEC_ID_SONIC = MKBETAG('S','O','N','C'),
+ CODEC_ID_SONIC_LS = MKBETAG('S','O','N','L'),
+ CODEC_ID_PAF_AUDIO = MKBETAG('P','A','F','A'),
+ CODEC_ID_OPUS = MKBETAG('O','P','U','S'),
+
+ /* subtitle codecs */
+ CODEC_ID_FIRST_SUBTITLE = 0x17000, ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of subtitle codecs.
+ CODEC_ID_DVD_SUBTITLE = 0x17000,
+ CODEC_ID_DVB_SUBTITLE,
+ CODEC_ID_TEXT, ///< raw UTF-8 text
+ CODEC_ID_XSUB,
+ CODEC_ID_SSA,
+ CODEC_ID_MOV_TEXT,
+ CODEC_ID_HDMV_PGS_SUBTITLE,
+ CODEC_ID_DVB_TELETEXT,
+ CODEC_ID_SRT,
+ CODEC_ID_MICRODVD = MKBETAG('m','D','V','D'),
+ CODEC_ID_EIA_608 = MKBETAG('c','6','0','8'),
+ CODEC_ID_JACOSUB = MKBETAG('J','S','U','B'),
+ CODEC_ID_SAMI = MKBETAG('S','A','M','I'),
+ CODEC_ID_REALTEXT = MKBETAG('R','T','X','T'),
+ CODEC_ID_SUBVIEWER = MKBETAG('S','u','b','V'),
+
+ /* other specific kind of codecs (generally used for attachments) */
+ CODEC_ID_FIRST_UNKNOWN = 0x18000, ///< A dummy ID pointing at the start of various fake codecs.
+ CODEC_ID_TTF = 0x18000,
+ CODEC_ID_BINTEXT = MKBETAG('B','T','X','T'),
+ CODEC_ID_XBIN = MKBETAG('X','B','I','N'),
+ CODEC_ID_IDF = MKBETAG( 0 ,'I','D','F'),
+ CODEC_ID_OTF = MKBETAG( 0 ,'O','T','F'),
+
+ CODEC_ID_PROBE = 0x19000, ///< codec_id is not known (like CODEC_ID_NONE) but lavf should attempt to identify it
+
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG2TS = 0x20000, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a raw MPEG-2 TS
+ * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+ CODEC_ID_MPEG4SYSTEMS = 0x20001, /**< _FAKE_ codec to indicate a MPEG-4 Systems
+ * stream (only used by libavformat) */
+ CODEC_ID_FFMETADATA = 0x21000, ///< Dummy codec for streams containing only metadata information.
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_OLD_CODEC_IDS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vaapi.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vaapi.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..815a27e226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vaapi.h
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/*
+ * Video Acceleration API (shared data between FFmpeg and the video player)
+ * HW decode acceleration for MPEG-2, MPEG-4, H.264 and VC-1
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2008-2009 Splitted-Desktop Systems
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VAAPI_H
+#define AVCODEC_VAAPI_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vaapi
+ * Public libavcodec VA API header.
+ */
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vaapi VA API Decoding
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to share data between the FFmpeg library and
+ * the client video application.
+ * This shall be zero-allocated and available as
+ * AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context. All user members can be set once
+ * during initialization or through each AVCodecContext.get_buffer()
+ * function call. In any case, they must be valid prior to calling
+ * decoding functions.
+ */
+struct vaapi_context {
+ /**
+ * Window system dependent data
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user
+ */
+ void *display;
+
+ /**
+ * Configuration ID
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user
+ */
+ uint32_t config_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Context ID (video decode pipeline)
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user
+ */
+ uint32_t context_id;
+
+ /**
+ * VAPictureParameterBuffer ID
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ uint32_t pic_param_buf_id;
+
+ /**
+ * VAIQMatrixBuffer ID
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ uint32_t iq_matrix_buf_id;
+
+ /**
+ * VABitPlaneBuffer ID (for VC-1 decoding)
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ uint32_t bitplane_buf_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Slice parameter/data buffer IDs
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ uint32_t *slice_buf_ids;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of effective slice buffer IDs to send to the HW
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ unsigned int n_slice_buf_ids;
+
+ /**
+ * Size of pre-allocated slice_buf_ids
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ unsigned int slice_buf_ids_alloc;
+
+ /**
+ * Pointer to VASliceParameterBuffers
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ void *slice_params;
+
+ /**
+ * Size of a VASliceParameterBuffer element
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ unsigned int slice_param_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Size of pre-allocated slice_params
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ unsigned int slice_params_alloc;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of slices currently filled in
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ unsigned int slice_count;
+
+ /**
+ * Pointer to slice data buffer base
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ const uint8_t *slice_data;
+
+ /**
+ * Current size of slice data
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ uint32_t slice_data_size;
+};
+
+/* @} */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VAAPI_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vda.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vda.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..12330aa363
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vda.h
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+/*
+ * VDA HW acceleration
+ *
+ * copyright (c) 2011 Sebastien Zwickert
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VDA_H
+#define AVCODEC_VDA_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vda
+ * Public libavcodec VDA header.
+ */
+
+#include "libavcodec/avcodec.h"
+
+#include
+
+// emmintrin.h is unable to compile with -std=c99 -Werror=missing-prototypes
+// http://openradar.appspot.com/8026390
+#undef __GNUC_STDC_INLINE__
+
+#define Picture QuickdrawPicture
+#include
+#undef Picture
+
+#include "libavcodec/version.h"
+
+// extra flags not defined in VDADecoder.h
+enum {
+ kVDADecodeInfo_Asynchronous = 1UL << 0,
+ kVDADecodeInfo_FrameDropped = 1UL << 1
+};
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vda VDA
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to provide the necessary configurations and data
+ * to the VDA FFmpeg HWAccel implementation.
+ *
+ * The application must make it available as AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context.
+ */
+struct vda_context {
+ /**
+ * VDA decoder object.
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set/Unset by libavcodec.
+ */
+ VDADecoder decoder;
+
+ /**
+ * The Core Video pixel buffer that contains the current image data.
+ *
+ * encoding: unused
+ * decoding: Set by libavcodec. Unset by user.
+ */
+ CVPixelBufferRef cv_buffer;
+
+ /**
+ * Use the hardware decoder in synchronous mode.
+ *
+ * encoding: unused
+ * decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int use_sync_decoding;
+
+ /**
+ * The frame width.
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set/Unset by user.
+ */
+ int width;
+
+ /**
+ * The frame height.
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set/Unset by user.
+ */
+ int height;
+
+ /**
+ * The frame format.
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set/Unset by user.
+ */
+ int format;
+
+ /**
+ * The pixel format for output image buffers.
+ *
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set/Unset by user.
+ */
+ OSType cv_pix_fmt_type;
+
+ /**
+ * unused
+ */
+ uint8_t *priv_bitstream;
+
+ /**
+ * unused
+ */
+ int priv_bitstream_size;
+
+ /**
+ * unused
+ */
+ int priv_allocated_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Use av_buffer to manage buffer.
+ * When the flag is set, the CVPixelBuffers returned by the decoder will
+ * be released automatically, so you have to retain them if necessary.
+ * Not setting this flag may cause memory leak.
+ *
+ * encoding: unused
+ * decoding: Set by user.
+ */
+ int use_ref_buffer;
+};
+
+/** Create the video decoder. */
+int ff_vda_create_decoder(struct vda_context *vda_ctx,
+ uint8_t *extradata,
+ int extradata_size);
+
+/** Destroy the video decoder. */
+int ff_vda_destroy_decoder(struct vda_context *vda_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * This struct holds all the information that needs to be passed
+ * between the caller and libavcodec for initializing VDA decoding.
+ * Its size is not a part of the public ABI, it must be allocated with
+ * av_vda_alloc_context() and freed with av_free().
+ */
+typedef struct AVVDAContext {
+ /**
+ * VDA decoder object. Created and freed by the caller.
+ */
+ VDADecoder decoder;
+
+ /**
+ * The output callback that must be passed to VDADecoderCreate.
+ * Set by av_vda_alloc_context().
+ */
+ VDADecoderOutputCallback output_callback;
+} AVVDAContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a VDA context.
+ *
+ * This function should be called from the get_format() callback when the caller
+ * selects the AV_PIX_FMT_VDA format. The caller must then create the decoder
+ * object (using the output callback provided by libavcodec) that will be used
+ * for VDA-accelerated decoding.
+ *
+ * When decoding with VDA is finished, the caller must destroy the decoder
+ * object and free the VDA context using av_free().
+ *
+ * @return the newly allocated context or NULL on failure
+ */
+AVVDAContext *av_vda_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * This is a convenience function that creates and sets up the VDA context using
+ * an internal implementation.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the corresponding codec context
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_vda_default_init(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * This function must be called to free the VDA context initialized with
+ * av_vda_default_init().
+ *
+ * @param avctx the corresponding codec context
+ */
+void av_vda_default_free(AVCodecContext *avctx);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VDA_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a42ca013f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vdpau.h
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+/*
+ * The Video Decode and Presentation API for UNIX (VDPAU) is used for
+ * hardware-accelerated decoding of MPEG-1/2, H.264 and VC-1.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2008 NVIDIA
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VDPAU_H
+#define AVCODEC_VDPAU_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vdpau
+ * Public libavcodec VDPAU header.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_vdpau VDPAU Decoder and Renderer
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * VDPAU hardware acceleration has two modules
+ * - VDPAU decoding
+ * - VDPAU presentation
+ *
+ * The VDPAU decoding module parses all headers using FFmpeg
+ * parsing mechanisms and uses VDPAU for the actual decoding.
+ *
+ * As per the current implementation, the actual decoding
+ * and rendering (API calls) are done as part of the VDPAU
+ * presentation (vo_vdpau.c) module.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+
+#include "avcodec.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+#if FF_API_BUFS_VDPAU
+union AVVDPAUPictureInfo {
+ VdpPictureInfoH264 h264;
+ VdpPictureInfoMPEG1Or2 mpeg;
+ VdpPictureInfoVC1 vc1;
+ VdpPictureInfoMPEG4Part2 mpeg4;
+};
+#endif
+
+struct AVCodecContext;
+struct AVFrame;
+
+typedef int (*AVVDPAU_Render2)(struct AVCodecContext *, struct AVFrame *,
+ const VdpPictureInfo *, uint32_t,
+ const VdpBitstreamBuffer *);
+
+/**
+ * This structure is used to share data between the libavcodec library and
+ * the client video application.
+ * The user shall allocate the structure via the av_alloc_vdpau_hwaccel
+ * function and make it available as
+ * AVCodecContext.hwaccel_context. Members can be set by the user once
+ * during initialization or through each AVCodecContext.get_buffer()
+ * function call. In any case, they must be valid prior to calling
+ * decoding functions.
+ *
+ * The size of this structure is not a part of the public ABI and must not
+ * be used outside of libavcodec. Use av_vdpau_alloc_context() to allocate an
+ * AVVDPAUContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVVDPAUContext {
+ /**
+ * VDPAU decoder handle
+ *
+ * Set by user.
+ */
+ VdpDecoder decoder;
+
+ /**
+ * VDPAU decoder render callback
+ *
+ * Set by the user.
+ */
+ VdpDecoderRender *render;
+
+#if FF_API_BUFS_VDPAU
+ /**
+ * VDPAU picture information
+ *
+ * Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ union AVVDPAUPictureInfo info;
+
+ /**
+ * Allocated size of the bitstream_buffers table.
+ *
+ * Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int bitstream_buffers_allocated;
+
+ /**
+ * Useful bitstream buffers in the bitstream buffers table.
+ *
+ * Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int bitstream_buffers_used;
+
+ /**
+ * Table of bitstream buffers.
+ * The user is responsible for freeing this buffer using av_freep().
+ *
+ * Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ VdpBitstreamBuffer *bitstream_buffers;
+#endif
+ AVVDPAU_Render2 render2;
+} AVVDPAUContext;
+
+/**
+ * @brief allocation function for AVVDPAUContext
+ *
+ * Allows extending the struct without breaking API/ABI
+ */
+AVVDPAUContext *av_alloc_vdpaucontext(void);
+
+AVVDPAU_Render2 av_vdpau_hwaccel_get_render2(const AVVDPAUContext *);
+void av_vdpau_hwaccel_set_render2(AVVDPAUContext *, AVVDPAU_Render2);
+
+/**
+ * Associate a VDPAU device with a codec context for hardware acceleration.
+ * This function is meant to be called from the get_format() codec callback,
+ * or earlier. It can also be called after avcodec_flush_buffers() to change
+ * the underlying VDPAU device mid-stream (e.g. to recover from non-transparent
+ * display preemption).
+ *
+ * @note get_format() must return AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU if this function completes
+ * successfully.
+ *
+ * @param avctx decoding context whose get_format() callback is invoked
+ * @param device VDPAU device handle to use for hardware acceleration
+ * @param get_proc_address VDPAU device driver
+ * @param flags zero of more OR'd AV_HWACCEL_FLAG_* flags
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_vdpau_bind_context(AVCodecContext *avctx, VdpDevice device,
+ VdpGetProcAddress *get_proc_address, unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Gets the parameters to create an adequate VDPAU video surface for the codec
+ * context using VDPAU hardware decoding acceleration.
+ *
+ * @note Behavior is undefined if the context was not successfully bound to a
+ * VDPAU device using av_vdpau_bind_context().
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context being used for decoding the stream
+ * @param type storage space for the VDPAU video surface chroma type
+ * (or NULL to ignore)
+ * @param width storage space for the VDPAU video surface pixel width
+ * (or NULL to ignore)
+ * @param height storage space for the VDPAU video surface pixel height
+ * (or NULL to ignore)
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR code on failure.
+ */
+int av_vdpau_get_surface_parameters(AVCodecContext *avctx, VdpChromaType *type,
+ uint32_t *width, uint32_t *height);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVVDPAUContext.
+ *
+ * @return Newly-allocated AVVDPAUContext or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVVDPAUContext *av_vdpau_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get a decoder profile that should be used for initializing a VDPAU decoder.
+ * Should be called from the AVCodecContext.get_format() callback.
+ *
+ * @param avctx the codec context being used for decoding the stream
+ * @param profile a pointer into which the result will be written on success.
+ * The contents of profile are undefined if this function returns
+ * an error.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success (non-negative), a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int av_vdpau_get_profile(AVCodecContext *avctx, VdpDecoderProfile *profile);
+
+#if FF_API_CAP_VDPAU
+/** @brief The videoSurface is used for rendering. */
+#define FF_VDPAU_STATE_USED_FOR_RENDER 1
+
+/**
+ * @brief The videoSurface is needed for reference/prediction.
+ * The codec manipulates this.
+ */
+#define FF_VDPAU_STATE_USED_FOR_REFERENCE 2
+
+/**
+ * @brief This structure is used as a callback between the FFmpeg
+ * decoder (vd_) and presentation (vo_) module.
+ * This is used for defining a video frame containing surface,
+ * picture parameter, bitstream information etc which are passed
+ * between the FFmpeg decoder and its clients.
+ */
+struct vdpau_render_state {
+ VdpVideoSurface surface; ///< Used as rendered surface, never changed.
+
+ int state; ///< Holds FF_VDPAU_STATE_* values.
+
+#if AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI
+ /** picture parameter information for all supported codecs */
+ union AVVDPAUPictureInfo info;
+#endif
+
+ /** Describe size/location of the compressed video data.
+ Set to 0 when freeing bitstream_buffers. */
+ int bitstream_buffers_allocated;
+ int bitstream_buffers_used;
+ /** The user is responsible for freeing this buffer using av_freep(). */
+ VdpBitstreamBuffer *bitstream_buffers;
+
+#if !AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI
+ /** picture parameter information for all supported codecs */
+ union AVVDPAUPictureInfo info;
+#endif
+};
+#endif
+
+/* @}*/
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VDPAU_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7e51f3b39e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VERSION_H
+#define AVCODEC_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavc
+ * Libavcodec version macros.
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR 56
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR 20
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVCODEC_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVCODEC_BUILD LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVCODEC_IDENT "Lavc" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVCODEC_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#ifndef FF_API_REQUEST_CHANNELS
+#define FF_API_REQUEST_CHANNELS (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_DECODE_AUDIO
+#define FF_API_OLD_DECODE_AUDIO (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_AUDIO
+#define FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_AUDIO (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_VIDEO
+#define FF_API_OLD_ENCODE_VIDEO (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CODEC_ID
+#define FF_API_CODEC_ID (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AUDIO_CONVERT
+#define FF_API_AUDIO_CONVERT (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVCODEC_RESAMPLE
+#define FF_API_AVCODEC_RESAMPLE FF_API_AUDIO_CONVERT
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_DEINTERLACE
+#define FF_API_DEINTERLACE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_DESTRUCT_PACKET
+#define FF_API_DESTRUCT_PACKET (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_GET_BUFFER
+#define FF_API_GET_BUFFER (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_MISSING_SAMPLE
+#define FF_API_MISSING_SAMPLE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_LOWRES
+#define FF_API_LOWRES (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CAP_VDPAU
+#define FF_API_CAP_VDPAU (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_BUFS_VDPAU
+#define FF_API_BUFS_VDPAU (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_VOXWARE
+#define FF_API_VOXWARE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_SET_DIMENSIONS
+#define FF_API_SET_DIMENSIONS (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_DEBUG_MV
+#define FF_API_DEBUG_MV (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AC_VLC
+#define FF_API_AC_VLC (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_MSMPEG4
+#define FF_API_OLD_MSMPEG4 (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ASPECT_EXTENDED
+#define FF_API_ASPECT_EXTENDED (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_THREAD_OPAQUE
+#define FF_API_THREAD_OPAQUE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CODEC_PKT
+#define FF_API_CODEC_PKT (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ARCH_ALPHA
+#define FF_API_ARCH_ALPHA (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_XVMC
+#define FF_API_XVMC (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ERROR_RATE
+#define FF_API_ERROR_RATE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_QSCALE_TYPE
+#define FF_API_QSCALE_TYPE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_MB_TYPE
+#define FF_API_MB_TYPE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_MAX_BFRAMES
+#define FF_API_MAX_BFRAMES (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_NEG_LINESIZES
+#define FF_API_NEG_LINESIZES (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_EMU_EDGE
+#define FF_API_EMU_EDGE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ARCH_SH4
+#define FF_API_ARCH_SH4 (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ARCH_SPARC
+#define FF_API_ARCH_SPARC (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS
+#define FF_API_UNUSED_MEMBERS (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_IDCT_XVIDMMX
+#define FF_API_IDCT_XVIDMMX (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_INPUT_PRESERVED
+#define FF_API_INPUT_PRESERVED (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_NORMALIZE_AQP
+#define FF_API_NORMALIZE_AQP (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_GMC
+#define FF_API_GMC (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_MV0
+#define FF_API_MV0 (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CODEC_NAME
+#define FF_API_CODEC_NAME (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AFD
+#define FF_API_AFD (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_VISMV
+/* XXX: don't forget to drop the -vismv documentation */
+#define FF_API_VISMV (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_DV_FRAME_PROFILE
+#define FF_API_DV_FRAME_PROFILE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AUDIOENC_DELAY
+#define FF_API_AUDIOENC_DELAY (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 58)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVCTX_TIMEBASE
+#define FF_API_AVCTX_TIMEBASE (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 59)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_MPV_OPT
+#define FF_API_MPV_OPT (LIBAVCODEC_VERSION_MAJOR < 59)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0f73537ae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/vorbis_parser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * A public API for Vorbis parsing
+ *
+ * Determines the duration for each packet.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSE_H
+#define AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSE_H
+
+#include
+
+typedef struct AVVorbisParseContext AVVorbisParseContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize the Vorbis parser using headers in the extradata.
+ *
+ * @param avctx codec context
+ * @param s Vorbis parser context
+ */
+AVVorbisParseContext *av_vorbis_parse_init(const uint8_t *extradata,
+ int extradata_size);
+
+/**
+ * Free the parser and everything associated with it.
+ */
+void av_vorbis_parse_free(AVVorbisParseContext **s);
+
+#define VORBIS_FLAG_HEADER 0x00000001
+#define VORBIS_FLAG_COMMENT 0x00000002
+
+/**
+ * Get the duration for a Vorbis packet.
+ *
+ * If @p flags is @c NULL,
+ * special frames are considered invalid.
+ *
+ * @param s Vorbis parser context
+ * @param buf buffer containing a Vorbis frame
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer
+ * @param flags flags for special frames
+ */
+int av_vorbis_parse_frame_flags(AVVorbisParseContext *s, const uint8_t *buf,
+ int buf_size, int *flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get the duration for a Vorbis packet.
+ *
+ * @param s Vorbis parser context
+ * @param buf buffer containing a Vorbis frame
+ * @param buf_size size of the buffer
+ */
+int av_vorbis_parse_frame(AVVorbisParseContext *s, const uint8_t *buf,
+ int buf_size);
+
+void av_vorbis_parse_reset(AVVorbisParseContext *s);
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_VORBIS_PARSE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2e187cc16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavcodec/xvmc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2003 Ivan Kalvachev
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVCODEC_XVMC_H
+#define AVCODEC_XVMC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_xvmc
+ * Public libavcodec XvMC header.
+ */
+
+#include
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+#include "avcodec.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavc_codec_hwaccel_xvmc XvMC
+ * @ingroup lavc_codec_hwaccel
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_XVMC_ID 0x1DC711C0 /**< special value to ensure that regular pixel routines haven't corrupted the struct
+ the number is 1337 speak for the letters IDCT MCo (motion compensation) */
+
+attribute_deprecated struct xvmc_pix_fmt {
+ /** The field contains the special constant value AV_XVMC_ID.
+ It is used as a test that the application correctly uses the API,
+ and that there is no corruption caused by pixel routines.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int xvmc_id;
+
+ /** Pointer to the block array allocated by XvMCCreateBlocks().
+ The array has to be freed by XvMCDestroyBlocks().
+ Each group of 64 values represents one data block of differential
+ pixel information (in MoCo mode) or coefficients for IDCT.
+ - application - set the pointer during initialization
+ - libavcodec - fills coefficients/pixel data into the array
+ */
+ short* data_blocks;
+
+ /** Pointer to the macroblock description array allocated by
+ XvMCCreateMacroBlocks() and freed by XvMCDestroyMacroBlocks().
+ - application - set the pointer during initialization
+ - libavcodec - fills description data into the array
+ */
+ XvMCMacroBlock* mv_blocks;
+
+ /** Number of macroblock descriptions that can be stored in the mv_blocks
+ array.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int allocated_mv_blocks;
+
+ /** Number of blocks that can be stored at once in the data_blocks array.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int allocated_data_blocks;
+
+ /** Indicate that the hardware would interpret data_blocks as IDCT
+ coefficients and perform IDCT on them.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int idct;
+
+ /** In MoCo mode it indicates that intra macroblocks are assumed to be in
+ unsigned format; same as the XVMC_INTRA_UNSIGNED flag.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int unsigned_intra;
+
+ /** Pointer to the surface allocated by XvMCCreateSurface().
+ It has to be freed by XvMCDestroySurface() on application exit.
+ It identifies the frame and its state on the video hardware.
+ - application - set during initialization
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ XvMCSurface* p_surface;
+
+/** Set by the decoder before calling ff_draw_horiz_band(),
+ needed by the XvMCRenderSurface function. */
+//@{
+ /** Pointer to the surface used as past reference
+ - application - unchanged
+ - libavcodec - set
+ */
+ XvMCSurface* p_past_surface;
+
+ /** Pointer to the surface used as future reference
+ - application - unchanged
+ - libavcodec - set
+ */
+ XvMCSurface* p_future_surface;
+
+ /** top/bottom field or frame
+ - application - unchanged
+ - libavcodec - set
+ */
+ unsigned int picture_structure;
+
+ /** XVMC_SECOND_FIELD - 1st or 2nd field in the sequence
+ - application - unchanged
+ - libavcodec - set
+ */
+ unsigned int flags;
+//}@
+
+ /** Number of macroblock descriptions in the mv_blocks array
+ that have already been passed to the hardware.
+ - application - zeroes it on get_buffer().
+ A successful ff_draw_horiz_band() may increment it
+ with filled_mb_block_num or zero both.
+ - libavcodec - unchanged
+ */
+ int start_mv_blocks_num;
+
+ /** Number of new macroblock descriptions in the mv_blocks array (after
+ start_mv_blocks_num) that are filled by libavcodec and have to be
+ passed to the hardware.
+ - application - zeroes it on get_buffer() or after successful
+ ff_draw_horiz_band().
+ - libavcodec - increment with one of each stored MB
+ */
+ int filled_mv_blocks_num;
+
+ /** Number of the next free data block; one data block consists of
+ 64 short values in the data_blocks array.
+ All blocks before this one have already been claimed by placing their
+ position into the corresponding block description structure field,
+ that are part of the mv_blocks array.
+ - application - zeroes it on get_buffer().
+ A successful ff_draw_horiz_band() may zero it together
+ with start_mb_blocks_num.
+ - libavcodec - each decoded macroblock increases it by the number
+ of coded blocks it contains.
+ */
+ int next_free_data_block_num;
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVCODEC_XVMC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/avdevice.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/avdevice.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2d675b012d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/avdevice.h
@@ -0,0 +1,509 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVDEVICE_AVDEVICE_H
+#define AVDEVICE_AVDEVICE_H
+
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavd
+ * Main libavdevice API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavd Special devices muxing/demuxing library
+ * @{
+ * Libavdevice is a complementary library to @ref libavf "libavformat". It
+ * provides various "special" platform-specific muxers and demuxers, e.g. for
+ * grabbing devices, audio capture and playback etc. As a consequence, the
+ * (de)muxers in libavdevice are of the AVFMT_NOFILE type (they use their own
+ * I/O functions). The filename passed to avformat_open_input() often does not
+ * refer to an actually existing file, but has some special device-specific
+ * meaning - e.g. for x11grab it is the display name.
+ *
+ * To use libavdevice, simply call avdevice_register_all() to register all
+ * compiled muxers and demuxers. They all use standard libavformat API.
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/opt.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavformat/avformat.h"
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avdevice_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavdevice build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avdevice_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavdevice license.
+ */
+const char *avdevice_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize libavdevice and register all the input and output devices.
+ * @warning This function is not thread safe.
+ */
+void avdevice_register_all(void);
+
+/**
+ * Audio input devices iterator.
+ *
+ * If d is NULL, returns the first registered input audio/video device,
+ * if d is non-NULL, returns the next registered input audio/video device after d
+ * or NULL if d is the last one.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_input_audio_device_next(AVInputFormat *d);
+
+/**
+ * Video input devices iterator.
+ *
+ * If d is NULL, returns the first registered input audio/video device,
+ * if d is non-NULL, returns the next registered input audio/video device after d
+ * or NULL if d is the last one.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_input_video_device_next(AVInputFormat *d);
+
+/**
+ * Audio output devices iterator.
+ *
+ * If d is NULL, returns the first registered output audio/video device,
+ * if d is non-NULL, returns the next registered output audio/video device after d
+ * or NULL if d is the last one.
+ */
+AVOutputFormat *av_output_audio_device_next(AVOutputFormat *d);
+
+/**
+ * Video output devices iterator.
+ *
+ * If d is NULL, returns the first registered output audio/video device,
+ * if d is non-NULL, returns the next registered output audio/video device after d
+ * or NULL if d is the last one.
+ */
+AVOutputFormat *av_output_video_device_next(AVOutputFormat *d);
+
+typedef struct AVDeviceRect {
+ int x; /**< x coordinate of top left corner */
+ int y; /**< y coordinate of top left corner */
+ int width; /**< width */
+ int height; /**< height */
+} AVDeviceRect;
+
+/**
+ * Message types used by avdevice_app_to_dev_control_message().
+ */
+enum AVAppToDevMessageType {
+ /**
+ * Dummy message.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_NONE = MKBETAG('N','O','N','E'),
+
+ /**
+ * Window size change message.
+ *
+ * Message is sent to the device every time the application changes the size
+ * of the window device renders to.
+ * Message should also be sent right after window is created.
+ *
+ * data: AVDeviceRect: new window size.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_SIZE = MKBETAG('G','E','O','M'),
+
+ /**
+ * Repaint request message.
+ *
+ * Message is sent to the device when window has to be repainted.
+ *
+ * data: AVDeviceRect: area required to be repainted.
+ * NULL: whole area is required to be repainted.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_REPAINT = MKBETAG('R','E','P','A'),
+
+ /**
+ * Request pause/play.
+ *
+ * Application requests pause/unpause playback.
+ * Mostly usable with devices that have internal buffer.
+ * By default devices are not paused.
+ *
+ * data: NULL
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_PAUSE = MKBETAG('P', 'A', 'U', ' '),
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_PLAY = MKBETAG('P', 'L', 'A', 'Y'),
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_TOGGLE_PAUSE = MKBETAG('P', 'A', 'U', 'T'),
+
+ /**
+ * Volume control message.
+ *
+ * Set volume level. It may be device-dependent if volume
+ * is changed per stream or system wide. Per stream volume
+ * change is expected when possible.
+ *
+ * data: double: new volume with range of 0.0 - 1.0.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_SET_VOLUME = MKBETAG('S', 'V', 'O', 'L'),
+
+ /**
+ * Mute control messages.
+ *
+ * Change mute state. It may be device-dependent if mute status
+ * is changed per stream or system wide. Per stream mute status
+ * change is expected when possible.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_MUTE = MKBETAG(' ', 'M', 'U', 'T'),
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_UNMUTE = MKBETAG('U', 'M', 'U', 'T'),
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_TOGGLE_MUTE = MKBETAG('T', 'M', 'U', 'T'),
+
+ /**
+ * Get volume/mute messages.
+ *
+ * Force the device to send AV_DEV_TO_APP_VOLUME_LEVEL_CHANGED or
+ * AV_DEV_TO_APP_MUTE_STATE_CHANGED command respectively.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_GET_VOLUME = MKBETAG('G', 'V', 'O', 'L'),
+ AV_APP_TO_DEV_GET_MUTE = MKBETAG('G', 'M', 'U', 'T'),
+};
+
+/**
+ * Message types used by avdevice_dev_to_app_control_message().
+ */
+enum AVDevToAppMessageType {
+ /**
+ * Dummy message.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_NONE = MKBETAG('N','O','N','E'),
+
+ /**
+ * Create window buffer message.
+ *
+ * Device requests to create a window buffer. Exact meaning is device-
+ * and application-dependent. Message is sent before rendering first
+ * frame and all one-shot initializations should be done here.
+ * Application is allowed to ignore preferred window buffer size.
+ *
+ * @note: Application is obligated to inform about window buffer size
+ * with AV_APP_TO_DEV_WINDOW_SIZE message.
+ *
+ * data: AVDeviceRect: preferred size of the window buffer.
+ * NULL: no preferred size of the window buffer.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_CREATE_WINDOW_BUFFER = MKBETAG('B','C','R','E'),
+
+ /**
+ * Prepare window buffer message.
+ *
+ * Device requests to prepare a window buffer for rendering.
+ * Exact meaning is device- and application-dependent.
+ * Message is sent before rendering of each frame.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_PREPARE_WINDOW_BUFFER = MKBETAG('B','P','R','E'),
+
+ /**
+ * Display window buffer message.
+ *
+ * Device requests to display a window buffer.
+ * Message is sent when new frame is ready to be displayed.
+ * Usually buffers need to be swapped in handler of this message.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_DISPLAY_WINDOW_BUFFER = MKBETAG('B','D','I','S'),
+
+ /**
+ * Destroy window buffer message.
+ *
+ * Device requests to destroy a window buffer.
+ * Message is sent when device is about to be destroyed and window
+ * buffer is not required anymore.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_DESTROY_WINDOW_BUFFER = MKBETAG('B','D','E','S'),
+
+ /**
+ * Buffer fullness status messages.
+ *
+ * Device signals buffer overflow/underflow.
+ *
+ * data: NULL.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_BUFFER_OVERFLOW = MKBETAG('B','O','F','L'),
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_BUFFER_UNDERFLOW = MKBETAG('B','U','F','L'),
+
+ /**
+ * Buffer readable/writable.
+ *
+ * Device informs that buffer is readable/writable.
+ * When possible, device informs how many bytes can be read/write.
+ *
+ * @warning Device may not inform when number of bytes than can be read/write changes.
+ *
+ * data: int64_t: amount of bytes available to read/write.
+ * NULL: amount of bytes available to read/write is not known.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_BUFFER_READABLE = MKBETAG('B','R','D',' '),
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_BUFFER_WRITABLE = MKBETAG('B','W','R',' '),
+
+ /**
+ * Mute state change message.
+ *
+ * Device informs that mute state has changed.
+ *
+ * data: int: 0 for not muted state, non-zero for muted state.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_MUTE_STATE_CHANGED = MKBETAG('C','M','U','T'),
+
+ /**
+ * Volume level change message.
+ *
+ * Device informs that volume level has changed.
+ *
+ * data: double: new volume with range of 0.0 - 1.0.
+ */
+ AV_DEV_TO_APP_VOLUME_LEVEL_CHANGED = MKBETAG('C','V','O','L'),
+};
+
+/**
+ * Send control message from application to device.
+ *
+ * @param s device context.
+ * @param type message type.
+ * @param data message data. Exact type depends on message type.
+ * @param data_size size of message data.
+ * @return >= 0 on success, negative on error.
+ * AVERROR(ENOSYS) when device doesn't implement handler of the message.
+ */
+int avdevice_app_to_dev_control_message(struct AVFormatContext *s,
+ enum AVAppToDevMessageType type,
+ void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+/**
+ * Send control message from device to application.
+ *
+ * @param s device context.
+ * @param type message type.
+ * @param data message data. Can be NULL.
+ * @param data_size size of message data.
+ * @return >= 0 on success, negative on error.
+ * AVERROR(ENOSYS) when application doesn't implement handler of the message.
+ */
+int avdevice_dev_to_app_control_message(struct AVFormatContext *s,
+ enum AVDevToAppMessageType type,
+ void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+/**
+ * Following API allows user to probe device capabilities (supported codecs,
+ * pixel formats, sample formats, resolutions, channel counts, etc).
+ * It is build on top op AVOption API.
+ * Queried capabilities allows to set up converters of video or audio
+ * parameters that fit to the device.
+ *
+ * List of capabilities that can be queried:
+ * - Capabilities valid for both audio and video devices:
+ * - codec: supported audio/video codecs.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT (AVCodecID value)
+ * - Capabilities valid for audio devices:
+ * - sample_format: supported sample formats.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT (AVSampleFormat value)
+ * - sample_rate: supported sample rates.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT
+ * - channels: supported number of channels.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT
+ * - channel_layout: supported channel layouts.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT64
+ * - Capabilities valid for video devices:
+ * - pixel_format: supported pixel formats.
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_INT (AVPixelFormat value)
+ * - window_size: supported window sizes (describes size of the window size presented to the user).
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE
+ * - frame_size: supported frame sizes (describes size of provided video frames).
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE
+ * - fps: supported fps values
+ * type: AV_OPT_TYPE_RATIONAL
+ *
+ * Value of the capability may be set by user using av_opt_set() function
+ * and AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery object. Following queries will
+ * limit results to the values matching already set capabilities.
+ * For example, setting a codec may impact number of formats or fps values
+ * returned during next query. Setting invalid value may limit results to zero.
+ *
+ * Example of the usage basing on opengl output device:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * AVFormatContext *oc = NULL;
+ * AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery *caps = NULL;
+ * AVOptionRanges *ranges;
+ * int ret;
+ *
+ * if ((ret = avformat_alloc_output_context2(&oc, NULL, "opengl", NULL)) < 0)
+ * goto fail;
+ * if (avdevice_capabilities_create(&caps, oc, NULL) < 0)
+ * goto fail;
+ *
+ * //query codecs
+ * if (av_opt_query_ranges(&ranges, caps, "codec", AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE)) < 0)
+ * goto fail;
+ * //pick codec here and set it
+ * av_opt_set(caps, "codec", AV_CODEC_ID_RAWVIDEO, 0);
+ *
+ * //query format
+ * if (av_opt_query_ranges(&ranges, caps, "pixel_format", AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE)) < 0)
+ * goto fail;
+ * //pick format here and set it
+ * av_opt_set(caps, "pixel_format", AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P, 0);
+ *
+ * //query and set more capabilities
+ *
+ * fail:
+ * //clean up code
+ * avdevice_capabilities_free(&query, oc);
+ * avformat_free_context(oc);
+ * @endcode
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Structure describes device capabilities.
+ *
+ * It is used by devices in conjunction with av_device_capabilities AVOption table
+ * to implement capabilities probing API based on AVOption API. Should not be used directly.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery {
+ const AVClass *av_class;
+ AVFormatContext *device_context;
+ enum AVCodecID codec;
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_format;
+ enum AVPixelFormat pixel_format;
+ int sample_rate;
+ int channels;
+ int64_t channel_layout;
+ int window_width;
+ int window_height;
+ int frame_width;
+ int frame_height;
+ AVRational fps;
+} AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery;
+
+/**
+ * AVOption table used by devices to implement device capabilities API. Should not be used by a user.
+ */
+extern const AVOption av_device_capabilities[];
+
+/**
+ * Initialize capabilities probing API based on AVOption API.
+ *
+ * avdevice_capabilities_free() must be called when query capabilities API is
+ * not used anymore.
+ *
+ * @param[out] caps Device capabilities data. Pointer to a NULL pointer must be passed.
+ * @param s Context of the device.
+ * @param device_options An AVDictionary filled with device-private options.
+ * On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dict
+ * containing options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ * The same options must be passed later to avformat_write_header() for output
+ * devices or avformat_open_input() for input devices, or at any other place
+ * that affects device-private options.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, negative otherwise.
+ */
+int avdevice_capabilities_create(AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery **caps, AVFormatContext *s,
+ AVDictionary **device_options);
+
+/**
+ * Free resources created by avdevice_capabilities_create()
+ *
+ * @param caps Device capabilities data to be freed.
+ * @param s Context of the device.
+ */
+void avdevice_capabilities_free(AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery **caps, AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Structure describes basic parameters of the device.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDeviceInfo {
+ char *device_name; /**< device name, format depends on device */
+ char *device_description; /**< human friendly name */
+} AVDeviceInfo;
+
+/**
+ * List of devices.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDeviceInfoList {
+ AVDeviceInfo **devices; /**< list of autodetected devices */
+ int nb_devices; /**< number of autodetected devices */
+ int default_device; /**< index of default device or -1 if no default */
+} AVDeviceInfoList;
+
+/**
+ * List devices.
+ *
+ * Returns available device names and their parameters.
+ *
+ * @note: Some devices may accept system-dependent device names that cannot be
+ * autodetected. The list returned by this function cannot be assumed to
+ * be always completed.
+ *
+ * @param s device context.
+ * @param[out] device_list list of autodetected devices.
+ * @return count of autodetected devices, negative on error.
+ */
+int avdevice_list_devices(struct AVFormatContext *s, AVDeviceInfoList **device_list);
+
+/**
+ * Convenient function to free result of avdevice_list_devices().
+ *
+ * @param devices device list to be freed.
+ */
+void avdevice_free_list_devices(AVDeviceInfoList **device_list);
+
+/**
+ * List devices.
+ *
+ * Returns available device names and their parameters.
+ * These are convinient wrappers for avdevice_list_devices().
+ * Device context is allocated and deallocated internally.
+ *
+ * @param device device format. May be NULL if device name is set.
+ * @param device_name device name. May be NULL if device format is set.
+ * @param device_options An AVDictionary filled with device-private options. May be NULL.
+ * The same options must be passed later to avformat_write_header() for output
+ * devices or avformat_open_input() for input devices, or at any other place
+ * that affects device-private options.
+ * @param[out] device_list list of autodetected devices
+ * @return count of autodetected devices, negative on error.
+ * @note device argument takes precedence over device_name when both are set.
+ */
+int avdevice_list_input_sources(struct AVInputFormat *device, const char *device_name,
+ AVDictionary *device_options, AVDeviceInfoList **device_list);
+int avdevice_list_output_sinks(struct AVOutputFormat *device, const char *device_name,
+ AVDictionary *device_options, AVDeviceInfoList **device_list);
+
+#endif /* AVDEVICE_AVDEVICE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8de07f08b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavdevice/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVDEVICE_VERSION_H
+#define AVDEVICE_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavd
+ * Libavdevice version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MAJOR 56
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MINOR 4
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_BUILD LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVDEVICE_IDENT "Lavd" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVDEVICE_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVDEVICE_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aa3446166f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/asrc_abuffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_ASRC_ABUFFER_H
+#define AVFILTER_ASRC_ABUFFER_H
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * memory buffer source for audio
+ *
+ * @deprecated use buffersrc.h instead.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Queue an audio buffer to the audio buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param abuffersrc audio source buffer context
+ * @param data pointers to the samples planes
+ * @param linesize linesizes of each audio buffer plane
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples per channel
+ * @param sample_fmt sample format of the audio data
+ * @param ch_layout channel layout of the audio data
+ * @param planar flag to indicate if audio data is planar or packed
+ * @param pts presentation timestamp of the audio buffer
+ * @param flags unused
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_buffersrc_add_ref() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_asrc_buffer_add_samples(AVFilterContext *abuffersrc,
+ uint8_t *data[8], int linesize[8],
+ int nb_samples, int sample_rate,
+ int sample_fmt, int64_t ch_layout, int planar,
+ int64_t pts, int av_unused flags);
+
+/**
+ * Queue an audio buffer to the audio buffer source.
+ *
+ * This is similar to av_asrc_buffer_add_samples(), but the samples
+ * are stored in a buffer with known size.
+ *
+ * @param abuffersrc audio source buffer context
+ * @param buf pointer to the samples data, packed is assumed
+ * @param size the size in bytes of the buffer, it must contain an
+ * integer number of samples
+ * @param sample_fmt sample format of the audio data
+ * @param ch_layout channel layout of the audio data
+ * @param pts presentation timestamp of the audio buffer
+ * @param flags unused
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_buffersrc_add_ref() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_asrc_buffer_add_buffer(AVFilterContext *abuffersrc,
+ uint8_t *buf, int buf_size,
+ int sample_rate,
+ int sample_fmt, int64_t ch_layout, int planar,
+ int64_t pts, int av_unused flags);
+
+/**
+ * Queue an audio buffer to the audio buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param abuffersrc audio source buffer context
+ * @param samplesref buffer ref to queue
+ * @param flags unused
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_buffersrc_add_ref() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_asrc_buffer_add_audio_buffer_ref(AVFilterContext *abuffersrc,
+ AVFilterBufferRef *samplesref,
+ int av_unused flags);
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_ASRC_ABUFFER_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avcodec.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avcodec.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d3d0e20e71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avcodec.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_AVCODEC_H
+#define AVFILTER_AVCODEC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * libavcodec/libavfilter gluing utilities
+ *
+ * This should be included in an application ONLY if the installed
+ * libavfilter has been compiled with libavcodec support, otherwise
+ * symbols defined below will not be available.
+ */
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * Create and return a picref reference from the data and properties
+ * contained in frame.
+ *
+ * @param perms permissions to assign to the new buffer reference
+ * @deprecated avfilter APIs work natively with AVFrame instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_get_video_buffer_ref_from_frame(const AVFrame *frame, int perms);
+
+
+/**
+ * Create and return a picref reference from the data and properties
+ * contained in frame.
+ *
+ * @param perms permissions to assign to the new buffer reference
+ * @deprecated avfilter APIs work natively with AVFrame instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_frame(const AVFrame *frame,
+ int perms);
+
+/**
+ * Create and return a buffer reference from the data and properties
+ * contained in frame.
+ *
+ * @param perms permissions to assign to the new buffer reference
+ * @deprecated avfilter APIs work natively with AVFrame instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_get_buffer_ref_from_frame(enum AVMediaType type,
+ const AVFrame *frame,
+ int perms);
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_AVCODEC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b5220b96d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfilter.h
@@ -0,0 +1,1531 @@
+/*
+ * filter layer
+ * Copyright (c) 2007 Bobby Bingham
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H
+#define AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * Main libavfilter public API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi Libavfilter - graph-based frame editing library
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include
+
+#include "libavutil/attributes.h"
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "libavutil/rational.h"
+
+#include "libavfilter/version.h"
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avfilter_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavfilter build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avfilter_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavfilter license.
+ */
+const char *avfilter_license(void);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterContext AVFilterContext;
+typedef struct AVFilterLink AVFilterLink;
+typedef struct AVFilterPad AVFilterPad;
+typedef struct AVFilterFormats AVFilterFormats;
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * A reference-counted buffer data type used by the filter system. Filters
+ * should not store pointers to this structure directly, but instead use the
+ * AVFilterBufferRef structure below.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterBuffer {
+ uint8_t *data[8]; ///< buffer data for each plane/channel
+
+ /**
+ * pointers to the data planes/channels.
+ *
+ * For video, this should simply point to data[].
+ *
+ * For planar audio, each channel has a separate data pointer, and
+ * linesize[0] contains the size of each channel buffer.
+ * For packed audio, there is just one data pointer, and linesize[0]
+ * contains the total size of the buffer for all channels.
+ *
+ * Note: Both data and extended_data will always be set, but for planar
+ * audio with more channels that can fit in data, extended_data must be used
+ * in order to access all channels.
+ */
+ uint8_t **extended_data;
+ int linesize[8]; ///< number of bytes per line
+
+ /** private data to be used by a custom free function */
+ void *priv;
+ /**
+ * A pointer to the function to deallocate this buffer if the default
+ * function is not sufficient. This could, for example, add the memory
+ * back into a memory pool to be reused later without the overhead of
+ * reallocating it from scratch.
+ */
+ void (*free)(struct AVFilterBuffer *buf);
+
+ int format; ///< media format
+ int w, h; ///< width and height of the allocated buffer
+ unsigned refcount; ///< number of references to this buffer
+} AVFilterBuffer;
+
+#define AV_PERM_READ 0x01 ///< can read from the buffer
+#define AV_PERM_WRITE 0x02 ///< can write to the buffer
+#define AV_PERM_PRESERVE 0x04 ///< nobody else can overwrite the buffer
+#define AV_PERM_REUSE 0x08 ///< can output the buffer multiple times, with the same contents each time
+#define AV_PERM_REUSE2 0x10 ///< can output the buffer multiple times, modified each time
+#define AV_PERM_NEG_LINESIZES 0x20 ///< the buffer requested can have negative linesizes
+#define AV_PERM_ALIGN 0x40 ///< the buffer must be aligned
+
+#define AVFILTER_ALIGN 16 //not part of ABI
+
+/**
+ * Audio specific properties in a reference to an AVFilterBuffer. Since
+ * AVFilterBufferRef is common to different media formats, audio specific
+ * per reference properties must be separated out.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterBufferRefAudioProps {
+ uint64_t channel_layout; ///< channel layout of audio buffer
+ int nb_samples; ///< number of audio samples per channel
+ int sample_rate; ///< audio buffer sample rate
+ int channels; ///< number of channels (do not access directly)
+} AVFilterBufferRefAudioProps;
+
+/**
+ * Video specific properties in a reference to an AVFilterBuffer. Since
+ * AVFilterBufferRef is common to different media formats, video specific
+ * per reference properties must be separated out.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterBufferRefVideoProps {
+ int w; ///< image width
+ int h; ///< image height
+ AVRational sample_aspect_ratio; ///< sample aspect ratio
+ int interlaced; ///< is frame interlaced
+ int top_field_first; ///< field order
+ enum AVPictureType pict_type; ///< picture type of the frame
+ int key_frame; ///< 1 -> keyframe, 0-> not
+ int qp_table_linesize; ///< qp_table stride
+ int qp_table_size; ///< qp_table size
+ int8_t *qp_table; ///< array of Quantization Parameters
+} AVFilterBufferRefVideoProps;
+
+/**
+ * A reference to an AVFilterBuffer. Since filters can manipulate the origin of
+ * a buffer to, for example, crop image without any memcpy, the buffer origin
+ * and dimensions are per-reference properties. Linesize is also useful for
+ * image flipping, frame to field filters, etc, and so is also per-reference.
+ *
+ * TODO: add anything necessary for frame reordering
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterBufferRef {
+ AVFilterBuffer *buf; ///< the buffer that this is a reference to
+ uint8_t *data[8]; ///< picture/audio data for each plane
+ /**
+ * pointers to the data planes/channels.
+ *
+ * For video, this should simply point to data[].
+ *
+ * For planar audio, each channel has a separate data pointer, and
+ * linesize[0] contains the size of each channel buffer.
+ * For packed audio, there is just one data pointer, and linesize[0]
+ * contains the total size of the buffer for all channels.
+ *
+ * Note: Both data and extended_data will always be set, but for planar
+ * audio with more channels that can fit in data, extended_data must be used
+ * in order to access all channels.
+ */
+ uint8_t **extended_data;
+ int linesize[8]; ///< number of bytes per line
+
+ AVFilterBufferRefVideoProps *video; ///< video buffer specific properties
+ AVFilterBufferRefAudioProps *audio; ///< audio buffer specific properties
+
+ /**
+ * presentation timestamp. The time unit may change during
+ * filtering, as it is specified in the link and the filter code
+ * may need to rescale the PTS accordingly.
+ */
+ int64_t pts;
+ int64_t pos; ///< byte position in stream, -1 if unknown
+
+ int format; ///< media format
+
+ int perms; ///< permissions, see the AV_PERM_* flags
+
+ enum AVMediaType type; ///< media type of buffer data
+
+ AVDictionary *metadata; ///< dictionary containing metadata key=value tags
+} AVFilterBufferRef;
+
+/**
+ * Copy properties of src to dst, without copying the actual data
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avfilter_copy_buffer_ref_props(AVFilterBufferRef *dst, const AVFilterBufferRef *src);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new reference to a buffer.
+ *
+ * @param ref an existing reference to the buffer
+ * @param pmask a bitmask containing the allowable permissions in the new
+ * reference
+ * @return a new reference to the buffer with the same properties as the
+ * old, excluding any permissions denied by pmask
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_ref_buffer(AVFilterBufferRef *ref, int pmask);
+
+/**
+ * Remove a reference to a buffer. If this is the last reference to the
+ * buffer, the buffer itself is also automatically freed.
+ *
+ * @param ref reference to the buffer, may be NULL
+ *
+ * @note it is recommended to use avfilter_unref_bufferp() instead of this
+ * function
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avfilter_unref_buffer(AVFilterBufferRef *ref);
+
+/**
+ * Remove a reference to a buffer and set the pointer to NULL.
+ * If this is the last reference to the buffer, the buffer itself
+ * is also automatically freed.
+ *
+ * @param ref pointer to the buffer reference
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avfilter_unref_bufferp(AVFilterBufferRef **ref);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of channels of a buffer reference.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_ref_get_channels(AVFilterBufferRef *ref);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERPAD_PUBLIC
+/**
+ * A filter pad used for either input or output.
+ *
+ * See doc/filter_design.txt for details on how to implement the methods.
+ *
+ * @warning this struct might be removed from public API.
+ * users should call avfilter_pad_get_name() and avfilter_pad_get_type()
+ * to access the name and type fields; there should be no need to access
+ * any other fields from outside of libavfilter.
+ */
+struct AVFilterPad {
+ /**
+ * Pad name. The name is unique among inputs and among outputs, but an
+ * input may have the same name as an output. This may be NULL if this
+ * pad has no need to ever be referenced by name.
+ */
+ const char *name;
+
+ /**
+ * AVFilterPad type.
+ */
+ enum AVMediaType type;
+
+ /**
+ * Input pads:
+ * Minimum required permissions on incoming buffers. Any buffer with
+ * insufficient permissions will be automatically copied by the filter
+ * system to a new buffer which provides the needed access permissions.
+ *
+ * Output pads:
+ * Guaranteed permissions on outgoing buffers. Any buffer pushed on the
+ * link must have at least these permissions; this fact is checked by
+ * asserts. It can be used to optimize buffer allocation.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated int min_perms;
+
+ /**
+ * Input pads:
+ * Permissions which are not accepted on incoming buffers. Any buffer
+ * which has any of these permissions set will be automatically copied
+ * by the filter system to a new buffer which does not have those
+ * permissions. This can be used to easily disallow buffers with
+ * AV_PERM_REUSE.
+ *
+ * Output pads:
+ * Permissions which are automatically removed on outgoing buffers. It
+ * can be used to optimize buffer allocation.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated int rej_perms;
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated unused
+ */
+ int (*start_frame)(AVFilterLink *link, AVFilterBufferRef *picref);
+
+ /**
+ * Callback function to get a video buffer. If NULL, the filter system will
+ * use ff_default_get_video_buffer().
+ *
+ * Input video pads only.
+ */
+ AVFrame *(*get_video_buffer)(AVFilterLink *link, int w, int h);
+
+ /**
+ * Callback function to get an audio buffer. If NULL, the filter system will
+ * use ff_default_get_audio_buffer().
+ *
+ * Input audio pads only.
+ */
+ AVFrame *(*get_audio_buffer)(AVFilterLink *link, int nb_samples);
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated unused
+ */
+ int (*end_frame)(AVFilterLink *link);
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated unused
+ */
+ int (*draw_slice)(AVFilterLink *link, int y, int height, int slice_dir);
+
+ /**
+ * Filtering callback. This is where a filter receives a frame with
+ * audio/video data and should do its processing.
+ *
+ * Input pads only.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error. This function
+ * must ensure that frame is properly unreferenced on error if it
+ * hasn't been passed on to another filter.
+ */
+ int (*filter_frame)(AVFilterLink *link, AVFrame *frame);
+
+ /**
+ * Frame poll callback. This returns the number of immediately available
+ * samples. It should return a positive value if the next request_frame()
+ * is guaranteed to return one frame (with no delay).
+ *
+ * Defaults to just calling the source poll_frame() method.
+ *
+ * Output pads only.
+ */
+ int (*poll_frame)(AVFilterLink *link);
+
+ /**
+ * Frame request callback. A call to this should result in at least one
+ * frame being output over the given link. This should return zero on
+ * success, and another value on error.
+ * See ff_request_frame() for the error codes with a specific
+ * meaning.
+ *
+ * Output pads only.
+ */
+ int (*request_frame)(AVFilterLink *link);
+
+ /**
+ * Link configuration callback.
+ *
+ * For output pads, this should set the following link properties:
+ * video: width, height, sample_aspect_ratio, time_base
+ * audio: sample_rate.
+ *
+ * This should NOT set properties such as format, channel_layout, etc which
+ * are negotiated between filters by the filter system using the
+ * query_formats() callback before this function is called.
+ *
+ * For input pads, this should check the properties of the link, and update
+ * the filter's internal state as necessary.
+ *
+ * For both input and output pads, this should return zero on success,
+ * and another value on error.
+ */
+ int (*config_props)(AVFilterLink *link);
+
+ /**
+ * The filter expects a fifo to be inserted on its input link,
+ * typically because it has a delay.
+ *
+ * input pads only.
+ */
+ int needs_fifo;
+
+ /**
+ * The filter expects writable frames from its input link,
+ * duplicating data buffers if needed.
+ *
+ * input pads only.
+ */
+ int needs_writable;
+};
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of elements in a NULL-terminated array of AVFilterPads (e.g.
+ * AVFilter.inputs/outputs).
+ */
+int avfilter_pad_count(const AVFilterPad *pads);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of an AVFilterPad.
+ *
+ * @param pads an array of AVFilterPads
+ * @param pad_idx index of the pad in the array it; is the caller's
+ * responsibility to ensure the index is valid
+ *
+ * @return name of the pad_idx'th pad in pads
+ */
+const char *avfilter_pad_get_name(const AVFilterPad *pads, int pad_idx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the type of an AVFilterPad.
+ *
+ * @param pads an array of AVFilterPads
+ * @param pad_idx index of the pad in the array; it is the caller's
+ * responsibility to ensure the index is valid
+ *
+ * @return type of the pad_idx'th pad in pads
+ */
+enum AVMediaType avfilter_pad_get_type(const AVFilterPad *pads, int pad_idx);
+
+/**
+ * The number of the filter inputs is not determined just by AVFilter.inputs.
+ * The filter might add additional inputs during initialization depending on the
+ * options supplied to it.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_INPUTS (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * The number of the filter outputs is not determined just by AVFilter.outputs.
+ * The filter might add additional outputs during initialization depending on
+ * the options supplied to it.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_OUTPUTS (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * The filter supports multithreading by splitting frames into multiple parts
+ * and processing them concurrently.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SLICE_THREADS (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Some filters support a generic "enable" expression option that can be used
+ * to enable or disable a filter in the timeline. Filters supporting this
+ * option have this flag set. When the enable expression is false, the default
+ * no-op filter_frame() function is called in place of the filter_frame()
+ * callback defined on each input pad, thus the frame is passed unchanged to
+ * the next filters.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC (1 << 16)
+/**
+ * Same as AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC, except that the filter will
+ * have its filter_frame() callback(s) called as usual even when the enable
+ * expression is false. The filter will disable filtering within the
+ * filter_frame() callback(s) itself, for example executing code depending on
+ * the AVFilterContext->is_disabled value.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_INTERNAL (1 << 17)
+/**
+ * Handy mask to test whether the filter supports or no the timeline feature
+ * (internally or generically).
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE (AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_GENERIC | AVFILTER_FLAG_SUPPORT_TIMELINE_INTERNAL)
+
+/**
+ * Filter definition. This defines the pads a filter contains, and all the
+ * callback functions used to interact with the filter.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilter {
+ /**
+ * Filter name. Must be non-NULL and unique among filters.
+ */
+ const char *name;
+
+ /**
+ * A description of the filter. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro to define it.
+ */
+ const char *description;
+
+ /**
+ * List of inputs, terminated by a zeroed element.
+ *
+ * NULL if there are no (static) inputs. Instances of filters with
+ * AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_INPUTS set may have more inputs than present in
+ * this list.
+ */
+ const AVFilterPad *inputs;
+ /**
+ * List of outputs, terminated by a zeroed element.
+ *
+ * NULL if there are no (static) outputs. Instances of filters with
+ * AVFILTER_FLAG_DYNAMIC_OUTPUTS set may have more outputs than present in
+ * this list.
+ */
+ const AVFilterPad *outputs;
+
+ /**
+ * A class for the private data, used to declare filter private AVOptions.
+ * This field is NULL for filters that do not declare any options.
+ *
+ * If this field is non-NULL, the first member of the filter private data
+ * must be a pointer to AVClass, which will be set by libavfilter generic
+ * code to this class.
+ */
+ const AVClass *priv_class;
+
+ /**
+ * A combination of AVFILTER_FLAG_*
+ */
+ int flags;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavfilter and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * Filter initialization function.
+ *
+ * This callback will be called only once during the filter lifetime, after
+ * all the options have been set, but before links between filters are
+ * established and format negotiation is done.
+ *
+ * Basic filter initialization should be done here. Filters with dynamic
+ * inputs and/or outputs should create those inputs/outputs here based on
+ * provided options. No more changes to this filter's inputs/outputs can be
+ * done after this callback.
+ *
+ * This callback must not assume that the filter links exist or frame
+ * parameters are known.
+ *
+ * @ref AVFilter.uninit "uninit" is guaranteed to be called even if
+ * initialization fails, so this callback does not have to clean up on
+ * failure.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+ */
+ int (*init)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Should be set instead of @ref AVFilter.init "init" by the filters that
+ * want to pass a dictionary of AVOptions to nested contexts that are
+ * allocated during init.
+ *
+ * On return, the options dict should be freed and replaced with one that
+ * contains all the options which could not be processed by this filter (or
+ * with NULL if all the options were processed).
+ *
+ * Otherwise the semantics is the same as for @ref AVFilter.init "init".
+ */
+ int (*init_dict)(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVDictionary **options);
+
+ /**
+ * Filter uninitialization function.
+ *
+ * Called only once right before the filter is freed. Should deallocate any
+ * memory held by the filter, release any buffer references, etc. It does
+ * not need to deallocate the AVFilterContext.priv memory itself.
+ *
+ * This callback may be called even if @ref AVFilter.init "init" was not
+ * called or failed, so it must be prepared to handle such a situation.
+ */
+ void (*uninit)(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Query formats supported by the filter on its inputs and outputs.
+ *
+ * This callback is called after the filter is initialized (so the inputs
+ * and outputs are fixed), shortly before the format negotiation. This
+ * callback may be called more than once.
+ *
+ * This callback must set AVFilterLink.out_formats on every input link and
+ * AVFilterLink.in_formats on every output link to a list of pixel/sample
+ * formats that the filter supports on that link. For audio links, this
+ * filter must also set @ref AVFilterLink.in_samplerates "in_samplerates" /
+ * @ref AVFilterLink.out_samplerates "out_samplerates" and
+ * @ref AVFilterLink.in_channel_layouts "in_channel_layouts" /
+ * @ref AVFilterLink.out_channel_layouts "out_channel_layouts" analogously.
+ *
+ * This callback may be NULL for filters with one input, in which case
+ * libavfilter assumes that it supports all input formats and preserves
+ * them on output.
+ *
+ * @return zero on success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+ int (*query_formats)(AVFilterContext *);
+
+ int priv_size; ///< size of private data to allocate for the filter
+
+ /**
+ * Used by the filter registration system. Must not be touched by any other
+ * code.
+ */
+ struct AVFilter *next;
+
+ /**
+ * Make the filter instance process a command.
+ *
+ * @param cmd the command to process, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+ * @param arg the argument for the command
+ * @param res a buffer with size res_size where the filter(s) can return a response. This must not change when the command is not supported.
+ * @param flags if AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_FAST is set and the command would be
+ * time consuming then a filter should treat it like an unsupported command
+ *
+ * @returns >=0 on success otherwise an error code.
+ * AVERROR(ENOSYS) on unsupported commands
+ */
+ int (*process_command)(AVFilterContext *, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+ /**
+ * Filter initialization function, alternative to the init()
+ * callback. Args contains the user-supplied parameters, opaque is
+ * used for providing binary data.
+ */
+ int (*init_opaque)(AVFilterContext *ctx, void *opaque);
+} AVFilter;
+
+/**
+ * Process multiple parts of the frame concurrently.
+ */
+#define AVFILTER_THREAD_SLICE (1 << 0)
+
+typedef struct AVFilterInternal AVFilterInternal;
+
+/** An instance of a filter */
+struct AVFilterContext {
+ const AVClass *av_class; ///< needed for av_log() and filters common options
+
+ const AVFilter *filter; ///< the AVFilter of which this is an instance
+
+ char *name; ///< name of this filter instance
+
+ AVFilterPad *input_pads; ///< array of input pads
+ AVFilterLink **inputs; ///< array of pointers to input links
+#if FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+ attribute_deprecated unsigned input_count; ///< @deprecated use nb_inputs
+#endif
+ unsigned nb_inputs; ///< number of input pads
+
+ AVFilterPad *output_pads; ///< array of output pads
+ AVFilterLink **outputs; ///< array of pointers to output links
+#if FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+ attribute_deprecated unsigned output_count; ///< @deprecated use nb_outputs
+#endif
+ unsigned nb_outputs; ///< number of output pads
+
+ void *priv; ///< private data for use by the filter
+
+ struct AVFilterGraph *graph; ///< filtergraph this filter belongs to
+
+ /**
+ * Type of multithreading being allowed/used. A combination of
+ * AVFILTER_THREAD_* flags.
+ *
+ * May be set by the caller before initializing the filter to forbid some
+ * or all kinds of multithreading for this filter. The default is allowing
+ * everything.
+ *
+ * When the filter is initialized, this field is combined using bit AND with
+ * AVFilterGraph.thread_type to get the final mask used for determining
+ * allowed threading types. I.e. a threading type needs to be set in both
+ * to be allowed.
+ *
+ * After the filter is initialized, libavfilter sets this field to the
+ * threading type that is actually used (0 for no multithreading).
+ */
+ int thread_type;
+
+ /**
+ * An opaque struct for libavfilter internal use.
+ */
+ AVFilterInternal *internal;
+
+ struct AVFilterCommand *command_queue;
+
+ char *enable_str; ///< enable expression string
+ void *enable; ///< parsed expression (AVExpr*)
+ double *var_values; ///< variable values for the enable expression
+ int is_disabled; ///< the enabled state from the last expression evaluation
+};
+
+/**
+ * A link between two filters. This contains pointers to the source and
+ * destination filters between which this link exists, and the indexes of
+ * the pads involved. In addition, this link also contains the parameters
+ * which have been negotiated and agreed upon between the filter, such as
+ * image dimensions, format, etc.
+ */
+struct AVFilterLink {
+ AVFilterContext *src; ///< source filter
+ AVFilterPad *srcpad; ///< output pad on the source filter
+
+ AVFilterContext *dst; ///< dest filter
+ AVFilterPad *dstpad; ///< input pad on the dest filter
+
+ enum AVMediaType type; ///< filter media type
+
+ /* These parameters apply only to video */
+ int w; ///< agreed upon image width
+ int h; ///< agreed upon image height
+ AVRational sample_aspect_ratio; ///< agreed upon sample aspect ratio
+ /* These parameters apply only to audio */
+ uint64_t channel_layout; ///< channel layout of current buffer (see libavutil/channel_layout.h)
+ int sample_rate; ///< samples per second
+
+ int format; ///< agreed upon media format
+
+ /**
+ * Define the time base used by the PTS of the frames/samples
+ * which will pass through this link.
+ * During the configuration stage, each filter is supposed to
+ * change only the output timebase, while the timebase of the
+ * input link is assumed to be an unchangeable property.
+ */
+ AVRational time_base;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavfilter and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ /**
+ * Lists of formats and channel layouts supported by the input and output
+ * filters respectively. These lists are used for negotiating the format
+ * to actually be used, which will be loaded into the format and
+ * channel_layout members, above, when chosen.
+ *
+ */
+ AVFilterFormats *in_formats;
+ AVFilterFormats *out_formats;
+
+ /**
+ * Lists of channel layouts and sample rates used for automatic
+ * negotiation.
+ */
+ AVFilterFormats *in_samplerates;
+ AVFilterFormats *out_samplerates;
+ struct AVFilterChannelLayouts *in_channel_layouts;
+ struct AVFilterChannelLayouts *out_channel_layouts;
+
+ /**
+ * Audio only, the destination filter sets this to a non-zero value to
+ * request that buffers with the given number of samples should be sent to
+ * it. AVFilterPad.needs_fifo must also be set on the corresponding input
+ * pad.
+ * Last buffer before EOF will be padded with silence.
+ */
+ int request_samples;
+
+ /** stage of the initialization of the link properties (dimensions, etc) */
+ enum {
+ AVLINK_UNINIT = 0, ///< not started
+ AVLINK_STARTINIT, ///< started, but incomplete
+ AVLINK_INIT ///< complete
+ } init_state;
+
+ struct AVFilterPool *pool;
+
+ /**
+ * Graph the filter belongs to.
+ */
+ struct AVFilterGraph *graph;
+
+ /**
+ * Current timestamp of the link, as defined by the most recent
+ * frame(s), in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ */
+ int64_t current_pts;
+
+ /**
+ * Index in the age array.
+ */
+ int age_index;
+
+ /**
+ * Frame rate of the stream on the link, or 1/0 if unknown;
+ * if left to 0/0, will be automatically be copied from the first input
+ * of the source filter if it exists.
+ *
+ * Sources should set it to the best estimation of the real frame rate.
+ * Filters should update it if necessary depending on their function.
+ * Sinks can use it to set a default output frame rate.
+ * It is similar to the r_frame_rate field in AVStream.
+ */
+ AVRational frame_rate;
+
+ /**
+ * Buffer partially filled with samples to achieve a fixed/minimum size.
+ */
+ AVFrame *partial_buf;
+
+ /**
+ * Size of the partial buffer to allocate.
+ * Must be between min_samples and max_samples.
+ */
+ int partial_buf_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Minimum number of samples to filter at once. If filter_frame() is
+ * called with fewer samples, it will accumulate them in partial_buf.
+ * This field and the related ones must not be changed after filtering
+ * has started.
+ * If 0, all related fields are ignored.
+ */
+ int min_samples;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum number of samples to filter at once. If filter_frame() is
+ * called with more samples, it will split them.
+ */
+ int max_samples;
+
+ /**
+ * The buffer reference currently being received across the link by the
+ * destination filter. This is used internally by the filter system to
+ * allow automatic copying of buffers which do not have sufficient
+ * permissions for the destination. This should not be accessed directly
+ * by the filters.
+ */
+ AVFilterBufferRef *cur_buf_copy;
+
+ /**
+ * True if the link is closed.
+ * If set, all attempts of start_frame, filter_frame or request_frame
+ * will fail with AVERROR_EOF, and if necessary the reference will be
+ * destroyed.
+ * If request_frame returns AVERROR_EOF, this flag is set on the
+ * corresponding link.
+ * It can be set also be set by either the source or the destination
+ * filter.
+ */
+ int closed;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of channels.
+ */
+ int channels;
+
+ /**
+ * True if a frame is being requested on the link.
+ * Used internally by the framework.
+ */
+ unsigned frame_requested;
+
+ /**
+ * Link processing flags.
+ */
+ unsigned flags;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of past frames sent through the link.
+ */
+ int64_t frame_count;
+};
+
+/**
+ * Link two filters together.
+ *
+ * @param src the source filter
+ * @param srcpad index of the output pad on the source filter
+ * @param dst the destination filter
+ * @param dstpad index of the input pad on the destination filter
+ * @return zero on success
+ */
+int avfilter_link(AVFilterContext *src, unsigned srcpad,
+ AVFilterContext *dst, unsigned dstpad);
+
+/**
+ * Free the link in *link, and set its pointer to NULL.
+ */
+void avfilter_link_free(AVFilterLink **link);
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of channels of a link.
+ */
+int avfilter_link_get_channels(AVFilterLink *link);
+
+/**
+ * Set the closed field of a link.
+ */
+void avfilter_link_set_closed(AVFilterLink *link, int closed);
+
+/**
+ * Negotiate the media format, dimensions, etc of all inputs to a filter.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to negotiate the properties for its inputs
+ * @return zero on successful negotiation
+ */
+int avfilter_config_links(AVFilterContext *filter);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * Create a buffer reference wrapped around an already allocated image
+ * buffer.
+ *
+ * @param data pointers to the planes of the image to reference
+ * @param linesize linesizes for the planes of the image to reference
+ * @param perms the required access permissions
+ * @param w the width of the image specified by the data and linesize arrays
+ * @param h the height of the image specified by the data and linesize arrays
+ * @param format the pixel format of the image specified by the data and linesize arrays
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *
+avfilter_get_video_buffer_ref_from_arrays(uint8_t * const data[4], const int linesize[4], int perms,
+ int w, int h, enum AVPixelFormat format);
+
+/**
+ * Create an audio buffer reference wrapped around an already
+ * allocated samples buffer.
+ *
+ * See avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_arrays_channels() for a version
+ * that can handle unknown channel layouts.
+ *
+ * @param data pointers to the samples plane buffers
+ * @param linesize linesize for the samples plane buffers
+ * @param perms the required access permissions
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples per channel
+ * @param sample_fmt the format of each sample in the buffer to allocate
+ * @param channel_layout the channel layout of the buffer
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_arrays(uint8_t **data,
+ int linesize,
+ int perms,
+ int nb_samples,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt,
+ uint64_t channel_layout);
+/**
+ * Create an audio buffer reference wrapped around an already
+ * allocated samples buffer.
+ *
+ * @param data pointers to the samples plane buffers
+ * @param linesize linesize for the samples plane buffers
+ * @param perms the required access permissions
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples per channel
+ * @param sample_fmt the format of each sample in the buffer to allocate
+ * @param channels the number of channels of the buffer
+ * @param channel_layout the channel layout of the buffer,
+ * must be either 0 or consistent with channels
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilterBufferRef *avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_arrays_channels(uint8_t **data,
+ int linesize,
+ int perms,
+ int nb_samples,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt,
+ int channels,
+ uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+#endif
+
+
+#define AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_ONE 1 ///< Stop once a filter understood the command (for target=all for example), fast filters are favored automatically
+#define AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_FAST 2 ///< Only execute command when its fast (like a video out that supports contrast adjustment in hw)
+
+/**
+ * Make the filter instance process a command.
+ * It is recommended to use avfilter_graph_send_command().
+ */
+int avfilter_process_command(AVFilterContext *filter, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+/** Initialize the filter system. Register all builtin filters. */
+void avfilter_register_all(void);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_FILTER_REGISTER
+/** Uninitialize the filter system. Unregister all filters. */
+attribute_deprecated
+void avfilter_uninit(void);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Register a filter. This is only needed if you plan to use
+ * avfilter_get_by_name later to lookup the AVFilter structure by name. A
+ * filter can still by instantiated with avfilter_graph_alloc_filter even if it
+ * is not registered.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to register
+ * @return 0 if the registration was successful, a negative value
+ * otherwise
+ */
+int avfilter_register(AVFilter *filter);
+
+/**
+ * Get a filter definition matching the given name.
+ *
+ * @param name the filter name to find
+ * @return the filter definition, if any matching one is registered.
+ * NULL if none found.
+ */
+#if !FF_API_NOCONST_GET_NAME
+const
+#endif
+AVFilter *avfilter_get_by_name(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all registered filters.
+ * @return If prev is non-NULL, next registered filter after prev or NULL if
+ * prev is the last filter. If prev is NULL, return the first registered filter.
+ */
+const AVFilter *avfilter_next(const AVFilter *prev);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_FILTER_REGISTER
+/**
+ * If filter is NULL, returns a pointer to the first registered filter pointer,
+ * if filter is non-NULL, returns the next pointer after filter.
+ * If the returned pointer points to NULL, the last registered filter
+ * was already reached.
+ * @deprecated use avfilter_next()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+AVFilter **av_filter_next(AVFilter **filter);
+#endif
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTER_OPEN
+/**
+ * Create a filter instance.
+ *
+ * @param filter_ctx put here a pointer to the created filter context
+ * on success, NULL on failure
+ * @param filter the filter to create an instance of
+ * @param inst_name Name to give to the new instance. Can be NULL for none.
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative error code otherwise
+ * @deprecated use avfilter_graph_alloc_filter() instead
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_open(AVFilterContext **filter_ctx, AVFilter *filter, const char *inst_name);
+#endif
+
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTER_INIT_FILTER
+/**
+ * Initialize a filter.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to initialize
+ * @param args A string of parameters to use when initializing the filter.
+ * The format and meaning of this string varies by filter.
+ * @param opaque Any extra non-string data needed by the filter. The meaning
+ * of this parameter varies by filter.
+ * @return zero on success
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_init_filter(AVFilterContext *filter, const char *args, void *opaque);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a filter with the supplied parameters.
+ *
+ * @param ctx uninitialized filter context to initialize
+ * @param args Options to initialize the filter with. This must be a
+ * ':'-separated list of options in the 'key=value' form.
+ * May be NULL if the options have been set directly using the
+ * AVOptions API or there are no options that need to be set.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+ */
+int avfilter_init_str(AVFilterContext *ctx, const char *args);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a filter with the supplied dictionary of options.
+ *
+ * @param ctx uninitialized filter context to initialize
+ * @param options An AVDictionary filled with options for this filter. On
+ * return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with
+ * a dict containing options that were not found. This dictionary
+ * must be freed by the caller.
+ * May be NULL, then this function is equivalent to
+ * avfilter_init_str() with the second parameter set to NULL.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure
+ *
+ * @note This function and avfilter_init_str() do essentially the same thing,
+ * the difference is in manner in which the options are passed. It is up to the
+ * calling code to choose whichever is more preferable. The two functions also
+ * behave differently when some of the provided options are not declared as
+ * supported by the filter. In such a case, avfilter_init_str() will fail, but
+ * this function will leave those extra options in the options AVDictionary and
+ * continue as usual.
+ */
+int avfilter_init_dict(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Free a filter context. This will also remove the filter from its
+ * filtergraph's list of filters.
+ *
+ * @param filter the filter to free
+ */
+void avfilter_free(AVFilterContext *filter);
+
+/**
+ * Insert a filter in the middle of an existing link.
+ *
+ * @param link the link into which the filter should be inserted
+ * @param filt the filter to be inserted
+ * @param filt_srcpad_idx the input pad on the filter to connect
+ * @param filt_dstpad_idx the output pad on the filter to connect
+ * @return zero on success
+ */
+int avfilter_insert_filter(AVFilterLink *link, AVFilterContext *filt,
+ unsigned filt_srcpad_idx, unsigned filt_dstpad_idx);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * Copy the frame properties of src to dst, without copying the actual
+ * image data.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative number on error.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_copy_frame_props(AVFilterBufferRef *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the frame properties and data pointers of src to dst, without copying
+ * the actual data.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative number on error.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_copy_buf_props(AVFrame *dst, const AVFilterBufferRef *src);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @return AVClass for AVFilterContext.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avfilter_get_class(void);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterGraphInternal AVFilterGraphInternal;
+
+/**
+ * A function pointer passed to the @ref AVFilterGraph.execute callback to be
+ * executed multiple times, possibly in parallel.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the filter context the job belongs to
+ * @param arg an opaque parameter passed through from @ref
+ * AVFilterGraph.execute
+ * @param jobnr the index of the job being executed
+ * @param nb_jobs the total number of jobs
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+typedef int (avfilter_action_func)(AVFilterContext *ctx, void *arg, int jobnr, int nb_jobs);
+
+/**
+ * A function executing multiple jobs, possibly in parallel.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the filter context to which the jobs belong
+ * @param func the function to be called multiple times
+ * @param arg the argument to be passed to func
+ * @param ret a nb_jobs-sized array to be filled with return values from each
+ * invocation of func
+ * @param nb_jobs the number of jobs to execute
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+typedef int (avfilter_execute_func)(AVFilterContext *ctx, avfilter_action_func *func,
+ void *arg, int *ret, int nb_jobs);
+
+typedef struct AVFilterGraph {
+ const AVClass *av_class;
+#if FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+ attribute_deprecated
+ unsigned filter_count_unused;
+#endif
+ AVFilterContext **filters;
+#if !FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+ unsigned nb_filters;
+#endif
+
+ char *scale_sws_opts; ///< sws options to use for the auto-inserted scale filters
+ char *resample_lavr_opts; ///< libavresample options to use for the auto-inserted resample filters
+#if FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+ unsigned nb_filters;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Type of multithreading allowed for filters in this graph. A combination
+ * of AVFILTER_THREAD_* flags.
+ *
+ * May be set by the caller at any point, the setting will apply to all
+ * filters initialized after that. The default is allowing everything.
+ *
+ * When a filter in this graph is initialized, this field is combined using
+ * bit AND with AVFilterContext.thread_type to get the final mask used for
+ * determining allowed threading types. I.e. a threading type needs to be
+ * set in both to be allowed.
+ */
+ int thread_type;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum number of threads used by filters in this graph. May be set by
+ * the caller before adding any filters to the filtergraph. Zero (the
+ * default) means that the number of threads is determined automatically.
+ */
+ int nb_threads;
+
+ /**
+ * Opaque object for libavfilter internal use.
+ */
+ AVFilterGraphInternal *internal;
+
+ /**
+ * Opaque user data. May be set by the caller to an arbitrary value, e.g. to
+ * be used from callbacks like @ref AVFilterGraph.execute.
+ * Libavfilter will not touch this field in any way.
+ */
+ void *opaque;
+
+ /**
+ * This callback may be set by the caller immediately after allocating the
+ * graph and before adding any filters to it, to provide a custom
+ * multithreading implementation.
+ *
+ * If set, filters with slice threading capability will call this callback
+ * to execute multiple jobs in parallel.
+ *
+ * If this field is left unset, libavfilter will use its internal
+ * implementation, which may or may not be multithreaded depending on the
+ * platform and build options.
+ */
+ avfilter_execute_func *execute;
+
+ char *aresample_swr_opts; ///< swr options to use for the auto-inserted aresample filters, Access ONLY through AVOptions
+
+ /**
+ * Private fields
+ *
+ * The following fields are for internal use only.
+ * Their type, offset, number and semantic can change without notice.
+ */
+
+ AVFilterLink **sink_links;
+ int sink_links_count;
+
+ unsigned disable_auto_convert;
+} AVFilterGraph;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a filter graph.
+ */
+AVFilterGraph *avfilter_graph_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new filter instance in a filter graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph graph in which the new filter will be used
+ * @param filter the filter to create an instance of
+ * @param name Name to give to the new instance (will be copied to
+ * AVFilterContext.name). This may be used by the caller to identify
+ * different filters, libavfilter itself assigns no semantics to
+ * this parameter. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return the context of the newly created filter instance (note that it is
+ * also retrievable directly through AVFilterGraph.filters or with
+ * avfilter_graph_get_filter()) on success or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVFilterContext *avfilter_graph_alloc_filter(AVFilterGraph *graph,
+ const AVFilter *filter,
+ const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Get a filter instance identified by instance name from graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph filter graph to search through.
+ * @param name filter instance name (should be unique in the graph).
+ * @return the pointer to the found filter instance or NULL if it
+ * cannot be found.
+ */
+AVFilterContext *avfilter_graph_get_filter(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *name);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTER_OPEN
+/**
+ * Add an existing filter instance to a filter graph.
+ *
+ * @param graphctx the filter graph
+ * @param filter the filter to be added
+ *
+ * @deprecated use avfilter_graph_alloc_filter() to allocate a filter in a
+ * filter graph
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_graph_add_filter(AVFilterGraph *graphctx, AVFilterContext *filter);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Create and add a filter instance into an existing graph.
+ * The filter instance is created from the filter filt and inited
+ * with the parameters args and opaque.
+ *
+ * In case of success put in *filt_ctx the pointer to the created
+ * filter instance, otherwise set *filt_ctx to NULL.
+ *
+ * @param name the instance name to give to the created filter instance
+ * @param graph_ctx the filter graph
+ * @return a negative AVERROR error code in case of failure, a non
+ * negative value otherwise
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_create_filter(AVFilterContext **filt_ctx, const AVFilter *filt,
+ const char *name, const char *args, void *opaque,
+ AVFilterGraph *graph_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Enable or disable automatic format conversion inside the graph.
+ *
+ * Note that format conversion can still happen inside explicitly inserted
+ * scale and aresample filters.
+ *
+ * @param flags any of the AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_* constants
+ */
+void avfilter_graph_set_auto_convert(AVFilterGraph *graph, unsigned flags);
+
+enum {
+ AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_ALL = 0, /**< all automatic conversions enabled */
+ AVFILTER_AUTO_CONVERT_NONE = -1, /**< all automatic conversions disabled */
+};
+
+/**
+ * Check validity and configure all the links and formats in the graph.
+ *
+ * @param graphctx the filter graph
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_config(AVFilterGraph *graphctx, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Free a graph, destroy its links, and set *graph to NULL.
+ * If *graph is NULL, do nothing.
+ */
+void avfilter_graph_free(AVFilterGraph **graph);
+
+/**
+ * A linked-list of the inputs/outputs of the filter chain.
+ *
+ * This is mainly useful for avfilter_graph_parse() / avfilter_graph_parse2(),
+ * where it is used to communicate open (unlinked) inputs and outputs from and
+ * to the caller.
+ * This struct specifies, per each not connected pad contained in the graph, the
+ * filter context and the pad index required for establishing a link.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFilterInOut {
+ /** unique name for this input/output in the list */
+ char *name;
+
+ /** filter context associated to this input/output */
+ AVFilterContext *filter_ctx;
+
+ /** index of the filt_ctx pad to use for linking */
+ int pad_idx;
+
+ /** next input/input in the list, NULL if this is the last */
+ struct AVFilterInOut *next;
+} AVFilterInOut;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a single AVFilterInOut entry.
+ * Must be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return allocated AVFilterInOut on success, NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVFilterInOut *avfilter_inout_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free the supplied list of AVFilterInOut and set *inout to NULL.
+ * If *inout is NULL, do nothing.
+ */
+void avfilter_inout_free(AVFilterInOut **inout);
+
+#if AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI || !FF_API_OLD_GRAPH_PARSE
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @note The caller must provide the lists of inputs and outputs,
+ * which therefore must be known before calling the function.
+ *
+ * @note The inputs parameter describes inputs of the already existing
+ * part of the graph; i.e. from the point of view of the newly created
+ * part, they are outputs. Similarly the outputs parameter describes
+ * outputs of the already existing filters, which are provided as
+ * inputs to the parsed filters.
+ *
+ * @param graph the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param filters string to be parsed
+ * @param inputs linked list to the inputs of the graph
+ * @param outputs linked list to the outputs of the graph
+ * @return zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+ AVFilterInOut *inputs, AVFilterInOut *outputs,
+ void *log_ctx);
+#else
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param filters string to be parsed
+ * @param inputs pointer to a linked list to the inputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ * If non-NULL, *inputs is updated to contain the list of open inputs
+ * after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @param outputs pointer to a linked list to the outputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ * If non-NULL, *outputs is updated to contain the list of open outputs
+ * after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return non negative on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ * @deprecated Use avfilter_graph_parse_ptr() instead.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int avfilter_graph_parse(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+ AVFilterInOut **inputs, AVFilterInOut **outputs,
+ void *log_ctx);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @param graph the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param filters string to be parsed
+ * @param inputs pointer to a linked list to the inputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ * If non-NULL, *inputs is updated to contain the list of open inputs
+ * after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @param outputs pointer to a linked list to the outputs of the graph, may be NULL.
+ * If non-NULL, *outputs is updated to contain the list of open outputs
+ * after the parsing, should be freed with avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return non negative on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse_ptr(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+ AVFilterInOut **inputs, AVFilterInOut **outputs,
+ void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Add a graph described by a string to a graph.
+ *
+ * @param[in] graph the filter graph where to link the parsed graph context
+ * @param[in] filters string to be parsed
+ * @param[out] inputs a linked list of all free (unlinked) inputs of the
+ * parsed graph will be returned here. It is to be freed
+ * by the caller using avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @param[out] outputs a linked list of all free (unlinked) outputs of the
+ * parsed graph will be returned here. It is to be freed by the
+ * caller using avfilter_inout_free().
+ * @return zero on success, a negative AVERROR code on error
+ *
+ * @note This function returns the inputs and outputs that are left
+ * unlinked after parsing the graph and the caller then deals with
+ * them.
+ * @note This function makes no reference whatsoever to already
+ * existing parts of the graph and the inputs parameter will on return
+ * contain inputs of the newly parsed part of the graph. Analogously
+ * the outputs parameter will contain outputs of the newly created
+ * filters.
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_parse2(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *filters,
+ AVFilterInOut **inputs,
+ AVFilterInOut **outputs);
+
+/**
+ * Send a command to one or more filter instances.
+ *
+ * @param graph the filter graph
+ * @param target the filter(s) to which the command should be sent
+ * "all" sends to all filters
+ * otherwise it can be a filter or filter instance name
+ * which will send the command to all matching filters.
+ * @param cmd the command to send, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+ * @param arg the argument for the command
+ * @param res a buffer with size res_size where the filter(s) can return a response.
+ *
+ * @returns >=0 on success otherwise an error code.
+ * AVERROR(ENOSYS) on unsupported commands
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_send_command(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *target, const char *cmd, const char *arg, char *res, int res_len, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Queue a command for one or more filter instances.
+ *
+ * @param graph the filter graph
+ * @param target the filter(s) to which the command should be sent
+ * "all" sends to all filters
+ * otherwise it can be a filter or filter instance name
+ * which will send the command to all matching filters.
+ * @param cmd the command to sent, for handling simplicity all commands must be alphanumeric only
+ * @param arg the argument for the command
+ * @param ts time at which the command should be sent to the filter
+ *
+ * @note As this executes commands after this function returns, no return code
+ * from the filter is provided, also AVFILTER_CMD_FLAG_ONE is not supported.
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_queue_command(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *target, const char *cmd, const char *arg, int flags, double ts);
+
+
+/**
+ * Dump a graph into a human-readable string representation.
+ *
+ * @param graph the graph to dump
+ * @param options formatting options; currently ignored
+ * @return a string, or NULL in case of memory allocation failure;
+ * the string must be freed using av_free
+ */
+char *avfilter_graph_dump(AVFilterGraph *graph, const char *options);
+
+/**
+ * Request a frame on the oldest sink link.
+ *
+ * If the request returns AVERROR_EOF, try the next.
+ *
+ * Note that this function is not meant to be the sole scheduling mechanism
+ * of a filtergraph, only a convenience function to help drain a filtergraph
+ * in a balanced way under normal circumstances.
+ *
+ * Also note that AVERROR_EOF does not mean that frames did not arrive on
+ * some of the sinks during the process.
+ * When there are multiple sink links, in case the requested link
+ * returns an EOF, this may cause a filter to flush pending frames
+ * which are sent to another sink link, although unrequested.
+ *
+ * @return the return value of ff_request_frame(),
+ * or AVERROR_EOF if all links returned AVERROR_EOF
+ */
+int avfilter_graph_request_oldest(AVFilterGraph *graph);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_AVFILTER_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfiltergraph.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfiltergraph.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b31d581ca0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/avfiltergraph.h
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+/*
+ * Filter graphs
+ * copyright (c) 2007 Bobby Bingham
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_AVFILTERGRAPH_H
+#define AVFILTER_AVFILTERGRAPH_H
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_AVFILTERGRAPH_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..24cd2feac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersink.h
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H
+#define AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi_buffersink
+ * memory buffer sink API for audio and video
+ */
+
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi_buffersink Buffer sink API
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * Get an audio/video buffer data from buffer_sink and put it in bufref.
+ *
+ * This function works with both audio and video buffer sinks.
+ *
+ * @param buffer_sink pointer to a buffersink or abuffersink context
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_* flags
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code in case of
+ * failure
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref(AVFilterContext *buffer_sink,
+ AVFilterBufferRef **bufref, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of immediately available frames.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_buffersink_poll_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get a buffer with filtered data from sink and put it in buf.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of a buffersink or abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param buf pointer to the buffer will be written here if buf is non-NULL. buf
+ * must be freed by the caller using avfilter_unref_buffer().
+ * Buf may also be NULL to query whether a buffer is ready to be
+ * output.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code in case of
+ * failure.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_buffersink_read(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFilterBufferRef **buf);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_buffersink_read, but with the ability to specify the number of
+ * samples read. This function is less efficient than av_buffersink_read(),
+ * because it copies the data around.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of the abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param buf pointer to the buffer will be written here if buf is non-NULL. buf
+ * must be freed by the caller using avfilter_unref_buffer(). buf
+ * will contain exactly nb_samples audio samples, except at the end
+ * of stream, when it can contain less than nb_samples.
+ * Buf may also be NULL to query whether a buffer is ready to be
+ * output.
+ *
+ * @warning do not mix this function with av_buffersink_read(). Use only one or
+ * the other with a single sink, not both.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_buffersink_read_samples(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFilterBufferRef **buf,
+ int nb_samples);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame with filtered data from sink and put it in frame.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a buffersink or abuffersink filter context.
+ * @param frame pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ * The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_* flags
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 in for success, a negative AVERROR code for failure.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_frame_flags(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Tell av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref() to read video/samples buffer
+ * reference, but not remove it from the buffer. This is useful if you
+ * need only to read a video/samples buffer, without to fetch it.
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_PEEK 1
+
+/**
+ * Tell av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref() not to request a frame from its input.
+ * If a frame is already buffered, it is read (and removed from the buffer),
+ * but if no frame is present, return AVERROR(EAGAIN).
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFERSINK_FLAG_NO_REQUEST 2
+
+/**
+ * Struct to use for initializing a buffersink context.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ const enum AVPixelFormat *pixel_fmts; ///< list of allowed pixel formats, terminated by AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+} AVBufferSinkParams;
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVBufferSinkParams structure.
+ *
+ * Must be freed with av_free().
+ */
+AVBufferSinkParams *av_buffersink_params_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Struct to use for initializing an abuffersink context.
+ */
+typedef struct {
+ const enum AVSampleFormat *sample_fmts; ///< list of allowed sample formats, terminated by AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE
+ const int64_t *channel_layouts; ///< list of allowed channel layouts, terminated by -1
+ const int *channel_counts; ///< list of allowed channel counts, terminated by -1
+ int all_channel_counts; ///< if not 0, accept any channel count or layout
+ int *sample_rates; ///< list of allowed sample rates, terminated by -1
+} AVABufferSinkParams;
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVABufferSinkParams structure.
+ *
+ * Must be freed with av_free().
+ */
+AVABufferSinkParams *av_abuffersink_params_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Set the frame size for an audio buffer sink.
+ *
+ * All calls to av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref will return a buffer with
+ * exactly the specified number of samples, or AVERROR(EAGAIN) if there is
+ * not enough. The last buffer at EOF will be padded with 0.
+ */
+void av_buffersink_set_frame_size(AVFilterContext *ctx, unsigned frame_size);
+
+/**
+ * Get the frame rate of the input.
+ */
+AVRational av_buffersink_get_frame_rate(AVFilterContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame with filtered data from sink and put it in frame.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of a buffersink or abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param frame pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ * The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ *
+ * @return
+ * - >= 0 if a frame was successfully returned.
+ * - AVERROR(EAGAIN) if no frames are available at this point; more
+ * input frames must be added to the filtergraph to get more output.
+ * - AVERROR_EOF if there will be no more output frames on this sink.
+ * - A different negative AVERROR code in other failure cases.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_buffersink_get_frame(), but with the ability to specify the number
+ * of samples read. This function is less efficient than
+ * av_buffersink_get_frame(), because it copies the data around.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to a context of the abuffersink AVFilter.
+ * @param frame pointer to an allocated frame that will be filled with data.
+ * The data must be freed using av_frame_unref() / av_frame_free()
+ * frame will contain exactly nb_samples audio samples, except at
+ * the end of stream, when it can contain less than nb_samples.
+ *
+ * @return The return codes have the same meaning as for
+ * av_buffersink_get_samples().
+ *
+ * @warning do not mix this function with av_buffersink_get_frame(). Use only one or
+ * the other with a single sink, not both.
+ */
+int av_buffersink_get_samples(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_BUFFERSINK_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ea34c04ee9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/buffersrc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H
+#define AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi_buffersrc
+ * Memory buffer source API.
+ */
+
+#include "libavcodec/avcodec.h"
+#include "avfilter.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavfi_buffersrc Buffer source API
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum {
+
+ /**
+ * Do not check for format changes.
+ */
+ AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_NO_CHECK_FORMAT = 1,
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+ /**
+ * Ignored
+ */
+ AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_NO_COPY = 2,
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Immediately push the frame to the output.
+ */
+ AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_PUSH = 4,
+
+ /**
+ * Keep a reference to the frame.
+ * If the frame if reference-counted, create a new reference; otherwise
+ * copy the frame data.
+ */
+ AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF = 8,
+
+};
+
+/**
+ * Add buffer data in picref to buffer_src.
+ *
+ * @param buffer_src pointer to a buffer source context
+ * @param picref a buffer reference, or NULL to mark EOF
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_*
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code
+ * in case of failure
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_add_ref(AVFilterContext *buffer_src,
+ AVFilterBufferRef *picref, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get the number of failed requests.
+ *
+ * A failed request is when the request_frame method is called while no
+ * frame is present in the buffer.
+ * The number is reset when a frame is added.
+ */
+unsigned av_buffersrc_get_nb_failed_requests(AVFilterContext *buffer_src);
+
+#if FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+/**
+ * Add a buffer to a filtergraph.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an instance of the buffersrc filter
+ * @param buf buffer containing frame data to be passed down the filtergraph.
+ * This function will take ownership of buf, the user must not free it.
+ * A NULL buf signals EOF -- i.e. no more frames will be sent to this filter.
+ *
+ * @deprecated use av_buffersrc_write_frame() or av_buffersrc_add_frame()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_buffersrc_buffer(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFilterBufferRef *buf);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an instance of the buffersrc filter
+ * @param frame frame to be added. If the frame is reference counted, this
+ * function will make a new reference to it. Otherwise the frame data will be
+ * copied.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags() with the
+ * AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF flag.
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_write_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, const AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an instance of the buffersrc filter
+ * @param frame frame to be added. If the frame is reference counted, this
+ * function will take ownership of the reference(s) and reset the frame.
+ * Otherwise the frame data will be copied. If this function returns an error,
+ * the input frame is not touched.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ *
+ * @note the difference between this function and av_buffersrc_write_frame() is
+ * that av_buffersrc_write_frame() creates a new reference to the input frame,
+ * while this function takes ownership of the reference passed to it.
+ *
+ * This function is equivalent to av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags() without the
+ * AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_KEEP_REF flag.
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_add_frame(AVFilterContext *ctx, AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Add a frame to the buffer source.
+ *
+ * By default, if the frame is reference-counted, this function will take
+ * ownership of the reference(s) and reset the frame. This can be controlled
+ * using the flags.
+ *
+ * If this function returns an error, the input frame is not touched.
+ *
+ * @param buffer_src pointer to a buffer source context
+ * @param frame a frame, or NULL to mark EOF
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_BUFFERSRC_FLAG_*
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code
+ * in case of failure
+ */
+int av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags(AVFilterContext *buffer_src,
+ AVFrame *frame, int flags);
+
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_BUFFERSRC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..383eb55ef4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavfilter/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFILTER_VERSION_H
+#define AVFILTER_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavfi
+ * Libavfilter version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR 5
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR 7
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO 101
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFILTER_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFILTER_BUILD LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVFILTER_IDENT "Lavfi" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVFILTER_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#ifndef FF_API_AVFILTERPAD_PUBLIC
+#define FF_API_AVFILTERPAD_PUBLIC (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_FOO_COUNT
+#define FF_API_FOO_COUNT (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER
+#define FF_API_AVFILTERBUFFER (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_FILTER_OPTS
+#define FF_API_OLD_FILTER_OPTS (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVFILTER_OPEN
+#define FF_API_AVFILTER_OPEN (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVFILTER_INIT_FILTER
+#define FF_API_AVFILTER_INIT_FILTER (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_FILTER_REGISTER
+#define FF_API_OLD_FILTER_REGISTER (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_GRAPH_PARSE
+#define FF_API_OLD_GRAPH_PARSE (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 5)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_NOCONST_GET_NAME
+#define FF_API_NOCONST_GET_NAME (LIBAVFILTER_VERSION_MAJOR < 6)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVFILTER_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/avformat.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/avformat.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a62a9ef5a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/avformat.h
@@ -0,0 +1,2687 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2001 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_AVFORMAT_H
+#define AVFORMAT_AVFORMAT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * Main libavformat public API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libavf I/O and Muxing/Demuxing Library
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Libavformat (lavf) is a library for dealing with various media container
+ * formats. Its main two purposes are demuxing - i.e. splitting a media file
+ * into component streams, and the reverse process of muxing - writing supplied
+ * data in a specified container format. It also has an @ref lavf_io
+ * "I/O module" which supports a number of protocols for accessing the data (e.g.
+ * file, tcp, http and others). Before using lavf, you need to call
+ * av_register_all() to register all compiled muxers, demuxers and protocols.
+ * Unless you are absolutely sure you won't use libavformat's network
+ * capabilities, you should also call avformat_network_init().
+ *
+ * A supported input format is described by an AVInputFormat struct, conversely
+ * an output format is described by AVOutputFormat. You can iterate over all
+ * registered input/output formats using the av_iformat_next() /
+ * av_oformat_next() functions. The protocols layer is not part of the public
+ * API, so you can only get the names of supported protocols with the
+ * avio_enum_protocols() function.
+ *
+ * Main lavf structure used for both muxing and demuxing is AVFormatContext,
+ * which exports all information about the file being read or written. As with
+ * most Libavformat structures, its size is not part of public ABI, so it cannot be
+ * allocated on stack or directly with av_malloc(). To create an
+ * AVFormatContext, use avformat_alloc_context() (some functions, like
+ * avformat_open_input() might do that for you).
+ *
+ * Most importantly an AVFormatContext contains:
+ * @li the @ref AVFormatContext.iformat "input" or @ref AVFormatContext.oformat
+ * "output" format. It is either autodetected or set by user for input;
+ * always set by user for output.
+ * @li an @ref AVFormatContext.streams "array" of AVStreams, which describe all
+ * elementary streams stored in the file. AVStreams are typically referred to
+ * using their index in this array.
+ * @li an @ref AVFormatContext.pb "I/O context". It is either opened by lavf or
+ * set by user for input, always set by user for output (unless you are dealing
+ * with an AVFMT_NOFILE format).
+ *
+ * @section lavf_options Passing options to (de)muxers
+ * Lavf allows to configure muxers and demuxers using the @ref avoptions
+ * mechanism. Generic (format-independent) libavformat options are provided by
+ * AVFormatContext, they can be examined from a user program by calling
+ * av_opt_next() / av_opt_find() on an allocated AVFormatContext (or its AVClass
+ * from avformat_get_class()). Private (format-specific) options are provided by
+ * AVFormatContext.priv_data if and only if AVInputFormat.priv_class /
+ * AVOutputFormat.priv_class of the corresponding format struct is non-NULL.
+ * Further options may be provided by the @ref AVFormatContext.pb "I/O context",
+ * if its AVClass is non-NULL, and the protocols layer. See the discussion on
+ * nesting in @ref avoptions documentation to learn how to access those.
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_decoding Demuxing
+ * @{
+ * Demuxers read a media file and split it into chunks of data (@em packets). A
+ * @ref AVPacket "packet" contains one or more encoded frames which belongs to a
+ * single elementary stream. In the lavf API this process is represented by the
+ * avformat_open_input() function for opening a file, av_read_frame() for
+ * reading a single packet and finally avformat_close_input(), which does the
+ * cleanup.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_open Opening a media file
+ * The minimum information required to open a file is its URL or filename, which
+ * is passed to avformat_open_input(), as in the following code:
+ * @code
+ * const char *url = "in.mp3";
+ * AVFormatContext *s = NULL;
+ * int ret = avformat_open_input(&s, url, NULL, NULL);
+ * if (ret < 0)
+ * abort();
+ * @endcode
+ * The above code attempts to allocate an AVFormatContext, open the
+ * specified file (autodetecting the format) and read the header, exporting the
+ * information stored there into s. Some formats do not have a header or do not
+ * store enough information there, so it is recommended that you call the
+ * avformat_find_stream_info() function which tries to read and decode a few
+ * frames to find missing information.
+ *
+ * In some cases you might want to preallocate an AVFormatContext yourself with
+ * avformat_alloc_context() and do some tweaking on it before passing it to
+ * avformat_open_input(). One such case is when you want to use custom functions
+ * for reading input data instead of lavf internal I/O layer.
+ * To do that, create your own AVIOContext with avio_alloc_context(), passing
+ * your reading callbacks to it. Then set the @em pb field of your
+ * AVFormatContext to newly created AVIOContext.
+ *
+ * Since the format of the opened file is in general not known until after
+ * avformat_open_input() has returned, it is not possible to set demuxer private
+ * options on a preallocated context. Instead, the options should be passed to
+ * avformat_open_input() wrapped in an AVDictionary:
+ * @code
+ * AVDictionary *options = NULL;
+ * av_dict_set(&options, "video_size", "640x480", 0);
+ * av_dict_set(&options, "pixel_format", "rgb24", 0);
+ *
+ * if (avformat_open_input(&s, url, NULL, &options) < 0)
+ * abort();
+ * av_dict_free(&options);
+ * @endcode
+ * This code passes the private options 'video_size' and 'pixel_format' to the
+ * demuxer. They would be necessary for e.g. the rawvideo demuxer, since it
+ * cannot know how to interpret raw video data otherwise. If the format turns
+ * out to be something different than raw video, those options will not be
+ * recognized by the demuxer and therefore will not be applied. Such unrecognized
+ * options are then returned in the options dictionary (recognized options are
+ * consumed). The calling program can handle such unrecognized options as it
+ * wishes, e.g.
+ * @code
+ * AVDictionaryEntry *e;
+ * if (e = av_dict_get(options, "", NULL, AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX)) {
+ * fprintf(stderr, "Option %s not recognized by the demuxer.\n", e->key);
+ * abort();
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * After you have finished reading the file, you must close it with
+ * avformat_close_input(). It will free everything associated with the file.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_read Reading from an opened file
+ * Reading data from an opened AVFormatContext is done by repeatedly calling
+ * av_read_frame() on it. Each call, if successful, will return an AVPacket
+ * containing encoded data for one AVStream, identified by
+ * AVPacket.stream_index. This packet may be passed straight into the libavcodec
+ * decoding functions avcodec_decode_video2(), avcodec_decode_audio4() or
+ * avcodec_decode_subtitle2() if the caller wishes to decode the data.
+ *
+ * AVPacket.pts, AVPacket.dts and AVPacket.duration timing information will be
+ * set if known. They may also be unset (i.e. AV_NOPTS_VALUE for
+ * pts/dts, 0 for duration) if the stream does not provide them. The timing
+ * information will be in AVStream.time_base units, i.e. it has to be
+ * multiplied by the timebase to convert them to seconds.
+ *
+ * If AVPacket.buf is set on the returned packet, then the packet is
+ * allocated dynamically and the user may keep it indefinitely.
+ * Otherwise, if AVPacket.buf is NULL, the packet data is backed by a
+ * static storage somewhere inside the demuxer and the packet is only valid
+ * until the next av_read_frame() call or closing the file. If the caller
+ * requires a longer lifetime, av_dup_packet() will make an av_malloc()ed copy
+ * of it.
+ * In both cases, the packet must be freed with av_free_packet() when it is no
+ * longer needed.
+ *
+ * @section lavf_decoding_seek Seeking
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_encoding Muxing
+ * @{
+ * Muxers take encoded data in the form of @ref AVPacket "AVPackets" and write
+ * it into files or other output bytestreams in the specified container format.
+ *
+ * The main API functions for muxing are avformat_write_header() for writing the
+ * file header, av_write_frame() / av_interleaved_write_frame() for writing the
+ * packets and av_write_trailer() for finalizing the file.
+ *
+ * At the beginning of the muxing process, the caller must first call
+ * avformat_alloc_context() to create a muxing context. The caller then sets up
+ * the muxer by filling the various fields in this context:
+ *
+ * - The @ref AVFormatContext.oformat "oformat" field must be set to select the
+ * muxer that will be used.
+ * - Unless the format is of the AVFMT_NOFILE type, the @ref AVFormatContext.pb
+ * "pb" field must be set to an opened IO context, either returned from
+ * avio_open2() or a custom one.
+ * - Unless the format is of the AVFMT_NOSTREAMS type, at least one stream must
+ * be created with the avformat_new_stream() function. The caller should fill
+ * the @ref AVStream.codec "stream codec context" information, such as the
+ * codec @ref AVCodecContext.codec_type "type", @ref AVCodecContext.codec_id
+ * "id" and other parameters (e.g. width / height, the pixel or sample format,
+ * etc.) as known. The @ref AVStream.time_base "stream timebase" should
+ * be set to the timebase that the caller desires to use for this stream (note
+ * that the timebase actually used by the muxer can be different, as will be
+ * described later).
+ * - The caller may fill in additional information, such as @ref
+ * AVFormatContext.metadata "global" or @ref AVStream.metadata "per-stream"
+ * metadata, @ref AVFormatContext.chapters "chapters", @ref
+ * AVFormatContext.programs "programs", etc. as described in the
+ * AVFormatContext documentation. Whether such information will actually be
+ * stored in the output depends on what the container format and the muxer
+ * support.
+ *
+ * When the muxing context is fully set up, the caller must call
+ * avformat_write_header() to initialize the muxer internals and write the file
+ * header. Whether anything actually is written to the IO context at this step
+ * depends on the muxer, but this function must always be called. Any muxer
+ * private options must be passed in the options parameter to this function.
+ *
+ * The data is then sent to the muxer by repeatedly calling av_write_frame() or
+ * av_interleaved_write_frame() (consult those functions' documentation for
+ * discussion on the difference between them; only one of them may be used with
+ * a single muxing context, they should not be mixed). Do note that the timing
+ * information on the packets sent to the muxer must be in the corresponding
+ * AVStream's timebase. That timebase is set by the muxer (in the
+ * avformat_write_header() step) and may be different from the timebase
+ * requested by the caller.
+ *
+ * Once all the data has been written, the caller must call av_write_trailer()
+ * to flush any buffered packets and finalize the output file, then close the IO
+ * context (if any) and finally free the muxing context with
+ * avformat_free_context().
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_io I/O Read/Write
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec Demuxers
+ * @{
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec_native Native Demuxers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_codec_wrappers External library wrappers
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_protos I/O Protocols
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup lavf_internal Internal
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ *
+ */
+
+#include
+#include /* FILE */
+#include "libavcodec/avcodec.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+
+#include "avio.h"
+#include "libavformat/version.h"
+
+struct AVFormatContext;
+
+struct AVDeviceInfoList;
+struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup metadata_api Public Metadata API
+ * @{
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * The metadata API allows libavformat to export metadata tags to a client
+ * application when demuxing. Conversely it allows a client application to
+ * set metadata when muxing.
+ *
+ * Metadata is exported or set as pairs of key/value strings in the 'metadata'
+ * fields of the AVFormatContext, AVStream, AVChapter and AVProgram structs
+ * using the @ref lavu_dict "AVDictionary" API. Like all strings in FFmpeg,
+ * metadata is assumed to be UTF-8 encoded Unicode. Note that metadata
+ * exported by demuxers isn't checked to be valid UTF-8 in most cases.
+ *
+ * Important concepts to keep in mind:
+ * - Keys are unique; there can never be 2 tags with the same key. This is
+ * also meant semantically, i.e., a demuxer should not knowingly produce
+ * several keys that are literally different but semantically identical.
+ * E.g., key=Author5, key=Author6. In this example, all authors must be
+ * placed in the same tag.
+ * - Metadata is flat, not hierarchical; there are no subtags. If you
+ * want to store, e.g., the email address of the child of producer Alice
+ * and actor Bob, that could have key=alice_and_bobs_childs_email_address.
+ * - Several modifiers can be applied to the tag name. This is done by
+ * appending a dash character ('-') and the modifier name in the order
+ * they appear in the list below -- e.g. foo-eng-sort, not foo-sort-eng.
+ * - language -- a tag whose value is localized for a particular language
+ * is appended with the ISO 639-2/B 3-letter language code.
+ * For example: Author-ger=Michael, Author-eng=Mike
+ * The original/default language is in the unqualified "Author" tag.
+ * A demuxer should set a default if it sets any translated tag.
+ * - sorting -- a modified version of a tag that should be used for
+ * sorting will have '-sort' appended. E.g. artist="The Beatles",
+ * artist-sort="Beatles, The".
+ * - Some protocols and demuxers support metadata updates. After a successful
+ * call to av_read_packet(), AVFormatContext.event_flags or AVStream.event_flags
+ * will be updated to indicate if metadata changed. In order to detect metadata
+ * changes on a stream, you need to loop through all streams in the AVFormatContext
+ * and check their individual event_flags.
+ *
+ * - Demuxers attempt to export metadata in a generic format, however tags
+ * with no generic equivalents are left as they are stored in the container.
+ * Follows a list of generic tag names:
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ album -- name of the set this work belongs to
+ album_artist -- main creator of the set/album, if different from artist.
+ e.g. "Various Artists" for compilation albums.
+ artist -- main creator of the work
+ comment -- any additional description of the file.
+ composer -- who composed the work, if different from artist.
+ copyright -- name of copyright holder.
+ creation_time-- date when the file was created, preferably in ISO 8601.
+ date -- date when the work was created, preferably in ISO 8601.
+ disc -- number of a subset, e.g. disc in a multi-disc collection.
+ encoder -- name/settings of the software/hardware that produced the file.
+ encoded_by -- person/group who created the file.
+ filename -- original name of the file.
+ genre -- .
+ language -- main language in which the work is performed, preferably
+ in ISO 639-2 format. Multiple languages can be specified by
+ separating them with commas.
+ performer -- artist who performed the work, if different from artist.
+ E.g for "Also sprach Zarathustra", artist would be "Richard
+ Strauss" and performer "London Philharmonic Orchestra".
+ publisher -- name of the label/publisher.
+ service_name -- name of the service in broadcasting (channel name).
+ service_provider -- name of the service provider in broadcasting.
+ title -- name of the work.
+ track -- number of this work in the set, can be in form current/total.
+ variant_bitrate -- the total bitrate of the bitrate variant that the current stream is part of
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ * Look in the examples section for an application example how to use the Metadata API.
+ *
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/* packet functions */
+
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and read the payload of a packet and initialize its
+ * fields with default values.
+ *
+ * @param s associated IO context
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size desired payload size
+ * @return >0 (read size) if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise
+ */
+int av_get_packet(AVIOContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+
+/**
+ * Read data and append it to the current content of the AVPacket.
+ * If pkt->size is 0 this is identical to av_get_packet.
+ * Note that this uses av_grow_packet and thus involves a realloc
+ * which is inefficient. Thus this function should only be used
+ * when there is no reasonable way to know (an upper bound of)
+ * the final size.
+ *
+ * @param s associated IO context
+ * @param pkt packet
+ * @param size amount of data to read
+ * @return >0 (read size) if OK, AVERROR_xxx otherwise, previous data
+ * will not be lost even if an error occurs.
+ */
+int av_append_packet(AVIOContext *s, AVPacket *pkt, int size);
+
+#if FF_API_LAVF_FRAC
+/*************************************************/
+/* fractional numbers for exact pts handling */
+
+/**
+ * The exact value of the fractional number is: 'val + num / den'.
+ * num is assumed to be 0 <= num < den.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFrac {
+ int64_t val, num, den;
+} AVFrac;
+#endif
+
+/*************************************************/
+/* input/output formats */
+
+struct AVCodecTag;
+
+/**
+ * This structure contains the data a format has to probe a file.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProbeData {
+ const char *filename;
+ unsigned char *buf; /**< Buffer must have AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE of extra allocated bytes filled with zero. */
+ int buf_size; /**< Size of buf except extra allocated bytes */
+ const char *mime_type; /**< mime_type, when known. */
+} AVProbeData;
+
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_RETRY (AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX/4)
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_STREAM_RETRY (AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX/4-1)
+
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_EXTENSION 50 ///< score for file extension
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_MIME 75 ///< score for file mime type
+#define AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX 100 ///< maximum score
+
+#define AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE 32 ///< extra allocated bytes at the end of the probe buffer
+
+/// Demuxer will use avio_open, no opened file should be provided by the caller.
+#define AVFMT_NOFILE 0x0001
+#define AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER 0x0002 /**< Needs '%d' in filename. */
+#define AVFMT_SHOW_IDS 0x0008 /**< Show format stream IDs numbers. */
+#define AVFMT_RAWPICTURE 0x0020 /**< Format wants AVPicture structure for
+ raw picture data. */
+#define AVFMT_GLOBALHEADER 0x0040 /**< Format wants global header. */
+#define AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS 0x0080 /**< Format does not need / have any timestamps. */
+#define AVFMT_GENERIC_INDEX 0x0100 /**< Use generic index building code. */
+#define AVFMT_TS_DISCONT 0x0200 /**< Format allows timestamp discontinuities. Note, muxers always require valid (monotone) timestamps */
+#define AVFMT_VARIABLE_FPS 0x0400 /**< Format allows variable fps. */
+#define AVFMT_NODIMENSIONS 0x0800 /**< Format does not need width/height */
+#define AVFMT_NOSTREAMS 0x1000 /**< Format does not require any streams */
+#define AVFMT_NOBINSEARCH 0x2000 /**< Format does not allow to fall back on binary search via read_timestamp */
+#define AVFMT_NOGENSEARCH 0x4000 /**< Format does not allow to fall back on generic search */
+#define AVFMT_NO_BYTE_SEEK 0x8000 /**< Format does not allow seeking by bytes */
+#define AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH 0x10000 /**< Format allows flushing. If not set, the muxer will not receive a NULL packet in the write_packet function. */
+#if LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR <= 54
+#define AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT 0x8020000 //we try to be compatible to the ABIs of ffmpeg and major forks
+#else
+#define AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT 0x20000
+#endif
+ /**< Format does not require strictly
+ increasing timestamps, but they must
+ still be monotonic */
+#define AVFMT_TS_NEGATIVE 0x40000 /**< Format allows muxing negative
+ timestamps. If not set the timestamp
+ will be shifted in av_write_frame and
+ av_interleaved_write_frame so they
+ start from 0.
+ The user or muxer can override this through
+ AVFormatContext.avoid_negative_ts
+ */
+
+#define AVFMT_SEEK_TO_PTS 0x4000000 /**< Seeking is based on PTS */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVOutputFormat {
+ const char *name;
+ /**
+ * Descriptive name for the format, meant to be more human-readable
+ * than name. You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro
+ * to define it.
+ */
+ const char *long_name;
+ const char *mime_type;
+ const char *extensions; /**< comma-separated filename extensions */
+ /* output support */
+ enum AVCodecID audio_codec; /**< default audio codec */
+ enum AVCodecID video_codec; /**< default video codec */
+ enum AVCodecID subtitle_codec; /**< default subtitle codec */
+ /**
+ * can use flags: AVFMT_NOFILE, AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER, AVFMT_RAWPICTURE,
+ * AVFMT_GLOBALHEADER, AVFMT_NOTIMESTAMPS, AVFMT_VARIABLE_FPS,
+ * AVFMT_NODIMENSIONS, AVFMT_NOSTREAMS, AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH,
+ * AVFMT_TS_NONSTRICT
+ */
+ int flags;
+
+ /**
+ * List of supported codec_id-codec_tag pairs, ordered by "better
+ * choice first". The arrays are all terminated by AV_CODEC_ID_NONE.
+ */
+ const struct AVCodecTag * const *codec_tag;
+
+
+ const AVClass *priv_class; ///< AVClass for the private context
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ struct AVOutputFormat *next;
+ /**
+ * size of private data so that it can be allocated in the wrapper
+ */
+ int priv_data_size;
+
+ int (*write_header)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+ /**
+ * Write a packet. If AVFMT_ALLOW_FLUSH is set in flags,
+ * pkt can be NULL in order to flush data buffered in the muxer.
+ * When flushing, return 0 if there still is more data to flush,
+ * or 1 if everything was flushed and there is no more buffered
+ * data.
+ */
+ int (*write_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *, AVPacket *pkt);
+ int (*write_trailer)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+ /**
+ * Currently only used to set pixel format if not YUV420P.
+ */
+ int (*interleave_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *, AVPacket *out,
+ AVPacket *in, int flush);
+ /**
+ * Test if the given codec can be stored in this container.
+ *
+ * @return 1 if the codec is supported, 0 if it is not.
+ * A negative number if unknown.
+ * MKTAG('A', 'P', 'I', 'C') if the codec is only supported as AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC
+ */
+ int (*query_codec)(enum AVCodecID id, int std_compliance);
+
+ void (*get_output_timestamp)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream,
+ int64_t *dts, int64_t *wall);
+ /**
+ * Allows sending messages from application to device.
+ */
+ int (*control_message)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int type,
+ void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+ /**
+ * Write an uncoded AVFrame.
+ *
+ * See av_write_uncoded_frame() for details.
+ *
+ * The library will free *frame afterwards, but the muxer can prevent it
+ * by setting the pointer to NULL.
+ */
+ int (*write_uncoded_frame)(struct AVFormatContext *, int stream_index,
+ AVFrame **frame, unsigned flags);
+ /**
+ * Returns device list with it properties.
+ * @see avdevice_list_devices() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*get_device_list)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceInfoList *device_list);
+ /**
+ * Initialize device capabilities submodule.
+ * @see avdevice_capabilities_create() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*create_device_capabilities)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery *caps);
+ /**
+ * Free device capabilities submodule.
+ * @see avdevice_capabilities_free() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*free_device_capabilities)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery *caps);
+} AVOutputFormat;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+typedef struct AVInputFormat {
+ /**
+ * A comma separated list of short names for the format. New names
+ * may be appended with a minor bump.
+ */
+ const char *name;
+
+ /**
+ * Descriptive name for the format, meant to be more human-readable
+ * than name. You should use the NULL_IF_CONFIG_SMALL() macro
+ * to define it.
+ */
+ const char *long_name;
+
+ /**
+ * Can use flags: AVFMT_NOFILE, AVFMT_NEEDNUMBER, AVFMT_SHOW_IDS,
+ * AVFMT_GENERIC_INDEX, AVFMT_TS_DISCONT, AVFMT_NOBINSEARCH,
+ * AVFMT_NOGENSEARCH, AVFMT_NO_BYTE_SEEK, AVFMT_SEEK_TO_PTS.
+ */
+ int flags;
+
+ /**
+ * If extensions are defined, then no probe is done. You should
+ * usually not use extension format guessing because it is not
+ * reliable enough
+ */
+ const char *extensions;
+
+ const struct AVCodecTag * const *codec_tag;
+
+ const AVClass *priv_class; ///< AVClass for the private context
+
+ /**
+ * Comma-separated list of mime types.
+ * It is used check for matching mime types while probing.
+ * @see av_probe_input_format2
+ */
+ const char *mime_type;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * No fields below this line are part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ struct AVInputFormat *next;
+
+ /**
+ * Raw demuxers store their codec ID here.
+ */
+ int raw_codec_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Size of private data so that it can be allocated in the wrapper.
+ */
+ int priv_data_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Tell if a given file has a chance of being parsed as this format.
+ * The buffer provided is guaranteed to be AVPROBE_PADDING_SIZE bytes
+ * big so you do not have to check for that unless you need more.
+ */
+ int (*read_probe)(AVProbeData *);
+
+ /**
+ * Read the format header and initialize the AVFormatContext
+ * structure. Return 0 if OK. 'avformat_new_stream' should be
+ * called to create new streams.
+ */
+ int (*read_header)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+ /**
+ * Read one packet and put it in 'pkt'. pts and flags are also
+ * set. 'avformat_new_stream' can be called only if the flag
+ * AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is used and only in the calling thread (not in a
+ * background thread).
+ * @return 0 on success, < 0 on error.
+ * When returning an error, pkt must not have been allocated
+ * or must be freed before returning
+ */
+ int (*read_packet)(struct AVFormatContext *, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+ /**
+ * Close the stream. The AVFormatContext and AVStreams are not
+ * freed by this function
+ */
+ int (*read_close)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+ /**
+ * Seek to a given timestamp relative to the frames in
+ * stream component stream_index.
+ * @param stream_index Must not be -1.
+ * @param flags Selects which direction should be preferred if no exact
+ * match is available.
+ * @return >= 0 on success (but not necessarily the new offset)
+ */
+ int (*read_seek)(struct AVFormatContext *,
+ int stream_index, int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+
+ /**
+ * Get the next timestamp in stream[stream_index].time_base units.
+ * @return the timestamp or AV_NOPTS_VALUE if an error occurred
+ */
+ int64_t (*read_timestamp)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index,
+ int64_t *pos, int64_t pos_limit);
+
+ /**
+ * Start/resume playing - only meaningful if using a network-based format
+ * (RTSP).
+ */
+ int (*read_play)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+ /**
+ * Pause playing - only meaningful if using a network-based format
+ * (RTSP).
+ */
+ int (*read_pause)(struct AVFormatContext *);
+
+ /**
+ * Seek to timestamp ts.
+ * Seeking will be done so that the point from which all active streams
+ * can be presented successfully will be closest to ts and within min/max_ts.
+ * Active streams are all streams that have AVStream.discard < AVDISCARD_ALL.
+ */
+ int (*read_seek2)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t min_ts, int64_t ts, int64_t max_ts, int flags);
+
+ /**
+ * Returns device list with it properties.
+ * @see avdevice_list_devices() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*get_device_list)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceInfoList *device_list);
+
+ /**
+ * Initialize device capabilities submodule.
+ * @see avdevice_capabilities_create() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*create_device_capabilities)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery *caps);
+
+ /**
+ * Free device capabilities submodule.
+ * @see avdevice_capabilities_free() for more details.
+ */
+ int (*free_device_capabilities)(struct AVFormatContext *s, struct AVDeviceCapabilitiesQuery *caps);
+} AVInputFormat;
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+enum AVStreamParseType {
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_NONE,
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL, /**< full parsing and repack */
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_HEADERS, /**< Only parse headers, do not repack. */
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_TIMESTAMPS, /**< full parsing and interpolation of timestamps for frames not starting on a packet boundary */
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL_ONCE, /**< full parsing and repack of the first frame only, only implemented for H.264 currently */
+ AVSTREAM_PARSE_FULL_RAW=MKTAG(0,'R','A','W'), /**< full parsing and repack with timestamp and position generation by parser for raw
+ this assumes that each packet in the file contains no demuxer level headers and
+ just codec level data, otherwise position generation would fail */
+};
+
+typedef struct AVIndexEntry {
+ int64_t pos;
+ int64_t timestamp; /**<
+ * Timestamp in AVStream.time_base units, preferably the time from which on correctly decoded frames are available
+ * when seeking to this entry. That means preferable PTS on keyframe based formats.
+ * But demuxers can choose to store a different timestamp, if it is more convenient for the implementation or nothing better
+ * is known
+ */
+#define AVINDEX_KEYFRAME 0x0001
+ int flags:2;
+ int size:30; //Yeah, trying to keep the size of this small to reduce memory requirements (it is 24 vs. 32 bytes due to possible 8-byte alignment).
+ int min_distance; /**< Minimum distance between this and the previous keyframe, used to avoid unneeded searching. */
+} AVIndexEntry;
+
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DEFAULT 0x0001
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DUB 0x0002
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_ORIGINAL 0x0004
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_COMMENT 0x0008
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_LYRICS 0x0010
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_KARAOKE 0x0020
+
+/**
+ * Track should be used during playback by default.
+ * Useful for subtitle track that should be displayed
+ * even when user did not explicitly ask for subtitles.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_FORCED 0x0040
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_HEARING_IMPAIRED 0x0080 /**< stream for hearing impaired audiences */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_VISUAL_IMPAIRED 0x0100 /**< stream for visual impaired audiences */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_CLEAN_EFFECTS 0x0200 /**< stream without voice */
+/**
+ * The stream is stored in the file as an attached picture/"cover art" (e.g.
+ * APIC frame in ID3v2). The single packet associated with it will be returned
+ * among the first few packets read from the file unless seeking takes place.
+ * It can also be accessed at any time in AVStream.attached_pic.
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC 0x0400
+
+/**
+ * To specify text track kind (different from subtitles default).
+ */
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_CAPTIONS 0x10000
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_DESCRIPTIONS 0x20000
+#define AV_DISPOSITION_METADATA 0x40000
+
+/**
+ * Options for behavior on timestamp wrap detection.
+ */
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_IGNORE 0 ///< ignore the wrap
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_ADD_OFFSET 1 ///< add the format specific offset on wrap detection
+#define AV_PTS_WRAP_SUB_OFFSET -1 ///< subtract the format specific offset on wrap detection
+
+/**
+ * Stream structure.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVStream) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVStream {
+ int index; /**< stream index in AVFormatContext */
+ /**
+ * Format-specific stream ID.
+ * decoding: set by libavformat
+ * encoding: set by the user, replaced by libavformat if left unset
+ */
+ int id;
+ /**
+ * Codec context associated with this stream. Allocated and freed by
+ * libavformat.
+ *
+ * - decoding: The demuxer exports codec information stored in the headers
+ * here.
+ * - encoding: The user sets codec information, the muxer writes it to the
+ * output. Mandatory fields as specified in AVCodecContext
+ * documentation must be set even if this AVCodecContext is
+ * not actually used for encoding.
+ */
+ AVCodecContext *codec;
+ void *priv_data;
+
+#if FF_API_LAVF_FRAC
+ /**
+ * @deprecated this field is unused
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ struct AVFrac pts;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * This is the fundamental unit of time (in seconds) in terms
+ * of which frame timestamps are represented.
+ *
+ * decoding: set by libavformat
+ * encoding: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header() to
+ * provide a hint to the muxer about the desired timebase. In
+ * avformat_write_header(), the muxer will overwrite this field
+ * with the timebase that will actually be used for the timestamps
+ * written into the file (which may or may not be related to the
+ * user-provided one, depending on the format).
+ */
+ AVRational time_base;
+
+ /**
+ * Decoding: pts of the first frame of the stream in presentation order, in stream time base.
+ * Only set this if you are absolutely 100% sure that the value you set
+ * it to really is the pts of the first frame.
+ * This may be undefined (AV_NOPTS_VALUE).
+ * @note The ASF header does NOT contain a correct start_time the ASF
+ * demuxer must NOT set this.
+ */
+ int64_t start_time;
+
+ /**
+ * Decoding: duration of the stream, in stream time base.
+ * If a source file does not specify a duration, but does specify
+ * a bitrate, this value will be estimated from bitrate and file size.
+ */
+ int64_t duration;
+
+ int64_t nb_frames; ///< number of frames in this stream if known or 0
+
+ int disposition; /**< AV_DISPOSITION_* bit field */
+
+ enum AVDiscard discard; ///< Selects which packets can be discarded at will and do not need to be demuxed.
+
+ /**
+ * sample aspect ratio (0 if unknown)
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavformat.
+ */
+ AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+ /**
+ * Average framerate
+ *
+ * - demuxing: May be set by libavformat when creating the stream or in
+ * avformat_find_stream_info().
+ * - muxing: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+ */
+ AVRational avg_frame_rate;
+
+ /**
+ * For streams with AV_DISPOSITION_ATTACHED_PIC disposition, this packet
+ * will contain the attached picture.
+ *
+ * decoding: set by libavformat, must not be modified by the caller.
+ * encoding: unused
+ */
+ AVPacket attached_pic;
+
+ /**
+ * An array of side data that applies to the whole stream (i.e. the
+ * container does not allow it to change between packets).
+ *
+ * There may be no overlap between the side data in this array and side data
+ * in the packets. I.e. a given side data is either exported by the muxer
+ * (demuxing) / set by the caller (muxing) in this array, then it never
+ * appears in the packets, or the side data is exported / sent through
+ * the packets (always in the first packet where the value becomes known or
+ * changes), then it does not appear in this array.
+ *
+ * - demuxing: Set by libavformat when the stream is created.
+ * - muxing: May be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+ *
+ * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+ *
+ * @see av_format_inject_global_side_data()
+ */
+ AVPacketSideData *side_data;
+ /**
+ * The number of elements in the AVStream.side_data array.
+ */
+ int nb_side_data;
+
+ /**
+ * Flags for the user to detect events happening on the stream. Flags must
+ * be cleared by the user once the event has been handled.
+ * A combination of AVSTREAM_EVENT_FLAG_*.
+ */
+ int event_flags;
+#define AVSTREAM_EVENT_FLAG_METADATA_UPDATED 0x0001 ///< The call resulted in updated metadata.
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * Stream information used internally by av_find_stream_info()
+ */
+#define MAX_STD_TIMEBASES (30*12+7+6)
+ struct {
+ int64_t last_dts;
+ int64_t duration_gcd;
+ int duration_count;
+ int64_t rfps_duration_sum;
+ double (*duration_error)[2][MAX_STD_TIMEBASES];
+ int64_t codec_info_duration;
+ int64_t codec_info_duration_fields;
+
+ /**
+ * 0 -> decoder has not been searched for yet.
+ * >0 -> decoder found
+ * <0 -> decoder with codec_id == -found_decoder has not been found
+ */
+ int found_decoder;
+
+ int64_t last_duration;
+
+ /**
+ * Those are used for average framerate estimation.
+ */
+ int64_t fps_first_dts;
+ int fps_first_dts_idx;
+ int64_t fps_last_dts;
+ int fps_last_dts_idx;
+
+ } *info;
+
+ int pts_wrap_bits; /**< number of bits in pts (used for wrapping control) */
+
+ // Timestamp generation support:
+ /**
+ * Timestamp corresponding to the last dts sync point.
+ *
+ * Initialized when AVCodecParserContext.dts_sync_point >= 0 and
+ * a DTS is received from the underlying container. Otherwise set to
+ * AV_NOPTS_VALUE by default.
+ */
+ int64_t first_dts;
+ int64_t cur_dts;
+ int64_t last_IP_pts;
+ int last_IP_duration;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of packets to buffer for codec probing
+ */
+#define MAX_PROBE_PACKETS 2500
+ int probe_packets;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of frames that have been demuxed during av_find_stream_info()
+ */
+ int codec_info_nb_frames;
+
+ /* av_read_frame() support */
+ enum AVStreamParseType need_parsing;
+ struct AVCodecParserContext *parser;
+
+ /**
+ * last packet in packet_buffer for this stream when muxing.
+ */
+ struct AVPacketList *last_in_packet_buffer;
+ AVProbeData probe_data;
+#define MAX_REORDER_DELAY 16
+ int64_t pts_buffer[MAX_REORDER_DELAY+1];
+
+ AVIndexEntry *index_entries; /**< Only used if the format does not
+ support seeking natively. */
+ int nb_index_entries;
+ unsigned int index_entries_allocated_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Real base framerate of the stream.
+ * This is the lowest framerate with which all timestamps can be
+ * represented accurately (it is the least common multiple of all
+ * framerates in the stream). Note, this value is just a guess!
+ * For example, if the time base is 1/90000 and all frames have either
+ * approximately 3600 or 1800 timer ticks, then r_frame_rate will be 50/1.
+ *
+ * Code outside avformat should access this field using:
+ * av_stream_get/set_r_frame_rate(stream)
+ */
+ AVRational r_frame_rate;
+
+ /**
+ * Stream Identifier
+ * This is the MPEG-TS stream identifier +1
+ * 0 means unknown
+ */
+ int stream_identifier;
+
+ int64_t interleaver_chunk_size;
+ int64_t interleaver_chunk_duration;
+
+ /**
+ * stream probing state
+ * -1 -> probing finished
+ * 0 -> no probing requested
+ * rest -> perform probing with request_probe being the minimum score to accept.
+ * NOT PART OF PUBLIC API
+ */
+ int request_probe;
+ /**
+ * Indicates that everything up to the next keyframe
+ * should be discarded.
+ */
+ int skip_to_keyframe;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of samples to skip at the start of the frame decoded from the next packet.
+ */
+ int skip_samples;
+
+ /**
+ * If not 0, the first audio sample that should be discarded from the stream.
+ * This is broken by design (needs global sample count), but can't be
+ * avoided for broken by design formats such as mp3 with ad-hoc gapless
+ * audio support.
+ */
+ int64_t first_discard_sample;
+
+ /**
+ * The sample after last sample that is intended to be discarded after
+ * first_discard_sample. Works on frame boundaries only. Used to prevent
+ * early EOF if the gapless info is broken (considered concatenated mp3s).
+ */
+ int64_t last_discard_sample;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of internally decoded frames, used internally in libavformat, do not access
+ * its lifetime differs from info which is why it is not in that structure.
+ */
+ int nb_decoded_frames;
+
+ /**
+ * Timestamp offset added to timestamps before muxing
+ * NOT PART OF PUBLIC API
+ */
+ int64_t mux_ts_offset;
+
+ /**
+ * Internal data to check for wrapping of the time stamp
+ */
+ int64_t pts_wrap_reference;
+
+ /**
+ * Options for behavior, when a wrap is detected.
+ *
+ * Defined by AV_PTS_WRAP_ values.
+ *
+ * If correction is enabled, there are two possibilities:
+ * If the first time stamp is near the wrap point, the wrap offset
+ * will be subtracted, which will create negative time stamps.
+ * Otherwise the offset will be added.
+ */
+ int pts_wrap_behavior;
+
+ /**
+ * Internal data to prevent doing update_initial_durations() twice
+ */
+ int update_initial_durations_done;
+
+ /**
+ * Internal data to generate dts from pts
+ */
+ int64_t pts_reorder_error[MAX_REORDER_DELAY+1];
+ uint8_t pts_reorder_error_count[MAX_REORDER_DELAY+1];
+
+ /**
+ * Internal data to analyze DTS and detect faulty mpeg streams
+ */
+ int64_t last_dts_for_order_check;
+ uint8_t dts_ordered;
+ uint8_t dts_misordered;
+
+ /**
+ * Internal data to inject global side data
+ */
+ int inject_global_side_data;
+
+ /**
+ * String containing paris of key and values describing recommended encoder configuration.
+ * Paris are separated by ','.
+ * Keys are separated from values by '='.
+ */
+ char *recommended_encoder_configuration;
+
+ /**
+ * display aspect ratio (0 if unknown)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by libavformat to calculate sample_aspect_ratio internally
+ */
+ AVRational display_aspect_ratio;
+} AVStream;
+
+AVRational av_stream_get_r_frame_rate(const AVStream *s);
+void av_stream_set_r_frame_rate(AVStream *s, AVRational r);
+struct AVCodecParserContext *av_stream_get_parser(const AVStream *s);
+char* av_stream_get_recommended_encoder_configuration(const AVStream *s);
+void av_stream_set_recommended_encoder_configuration(AVStream *s, char *configuration);
+
+/**
+ * Returns the pts of the last muxed packet + its duration
+ *
+ * the retuned value is undefined when used with a demuxer.
+ */
+int64_t av_stream_get_end_pts(const AVStream *st);
+
+#define AV_PROGRAM_RUNNING 1
+
+/**
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVProgram) must not be used outside libav*.
+ */
+typedef struct AVProgram {
+ int id;
+ int flags;
+ enum AVDiscard discard; ///< selects which program to discard and which to feed to the caller
+ unsigned int *stream_index;
+ unsigned int nb_stream_indexes;
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+ int program_num;
+ int pmt_pid;
+ int pcr_pid;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+ int64_t start_time;
+ int64_t end_time;
+
+ int64_t pts_wrap_reference; ///< reference dts for wrap detection
+ int pts_wrap_behavior; ///< behavior on wrap detection
+} AVProgram;
+
+#define AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER 0x0001 /**< signal that no header is present
+ (streams are added dynamically) */
+
+typedef struct AVChapter {
+ int id; ///< unique ID to identify the chapter
+ AVRational time_base; ///< time base in which the start/end timestamps are specified
+ int64_t start, end; ///< chapter start/end time in time_base units
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+} AVChapter;
+
+
+/**
+ * Callback used by devices to communicate with application.
+ */
+typedef int (*av_format_control_message)(struct AVFormatContext *s, int type,
+ void *data, size_t data_size);
+
+
+/**
+ * The duration of a video can be estimated through various ways, and this enum can be used
+ * to know how the duration was estimated.
+ */
+enum AVDurationEstimationMethod {
+ AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_PTS, ///< Duration accurately estimated from PTSes
+ AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_STREAM, ///< Duration estimated from a stream with a known duration
+ AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_BITRATE ///< Duration estimated from bitrate (less accurate)
+};
+
+typedef struct AVFormatInternal AVFormatInternal;
+
+/**
+ * Format I/O context.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVFormatContext) must not be used outside libav*, use
+ * avformat_alloc_context() to create an AVFormatContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFormatContext {
+ /**
+ * A class for logging and @ref avoptions. Set by avformat_alloc_context().
+ * Exports (de)muxer private options if they exist.
+ */
+ const AVClass *av_class;
+
+ /**
+ * The input container format.
+ *
+ * Demuxing only, set by avformat_open_input().
+ */
+ struct AVInputFormat *iformat;
+
+ /**
+ * The output container format.
+ *
+ * Muxing only, must be set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+ */
+ struct AVOutputFormat *oformat;
+
+ /**
+ * Format private data. This is an AVOptions-enabled struct
+ * if and only if iformat/oformat.priv_class is not NULL.
+ *
+ * - muxing: set by avformat_write_header()
+ * - demuxing: set by avformat_open_input()
+ */
+ void *priv_data;
+
+ /**
+ * I/O context.
+ *
+ * - demuxing: either set by the user before avformat_open_input() (then
+ * the user must close it manually) or set by avformat_open_input().
+ * - muxing: set by the user before avformat_write_header(). The caller must
+ * take care of closing / freeing the IO context.
+ *
+ * Do NOT set this field if AVFMT_NOFILE flag is set in
+ * iformat/oformat.flags. In such a case, the (de)muxer will handle
+ * I/O in some other way and this field will be NULL.
+ */
+ AVIOContext *pb;
+
+ /* stream info */
+ /**
+ * Flags signalling stream properties. A combination of AVFMTCTX_*.
+ * Set by libavformat.
+ */
+ int ctx_flags;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of elements in AVFormatContext.streams.
+ *
+ * Set by avformat_new_stream(), must not be modified by any other code.
+ */
+ unsigned int nb_streams;
+ /**
+ * A list of all streams in the file. New streams are created with
+ * avformat_new_stream().
+ *
+ * - demuxing: streams are created by libavformat in avformat_open_input().
+ * If AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is set in ctx_flags, then new streams may also
+ * appear in av_read_frame().
+ * - muxing: streams are created by the user before avformat_write_header().
+ *
+ * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+ */
+ AVStream **streams;
+
+ /**
+ * input or output filename
+ *
+ * - demuxing: set by avformat_open_input()
+ * - muxing: may be set by the caller before avformat_write_header()
+ */
+ char filename[1024];
+
+ /**
+ * Position of the first frame of the component, in
+ * AV_TIME_BASE fractional seconds. NEVER set this value directly:
+ * It is deduced from the AVStream values.
+ *
+ * Demuxing only, set by libavformat.
+ */
+ int64_t start_time;
+
+ /**
+ * Duration of the stream, in AV_TIME_BASE fractional
+ * seconds. Only set this value if you know none of the individual stream
+ * durations and also do not set any of them. This is deduced from the
+ * AVStream values if not set.
+ *
+ * Demuxing only, set by libavformat.
+ */
+ int64_t duration;
+
+ /**
+ * Total stream bitrate in bit/s, 0 if not
+ * available. Never set it directly if the file_size and the
+ * duration are known as FFmpeg can compute it automatically.
+ */
+ int bit_rate;
+
+ unsigned int packet_size;
+ int max_delay;
+
+ /**
+ * Flags modifying the (de)muxer behaviour. A combination of AVFMT_FLAG_*.
+ * Set by the user before avformat_open_input() / avformat_write_header().
+ */
+ int flags;
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_GENPTS 0x0001 ///< Generate missing pts even if it requires parsing future frames.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_IGNIDX 0x0002 ///< Ignore index.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NONBLOCK 0x0004 ///< Do not block when reading packets from input.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_IGNDTS 0x0008 ///< Ignore DTS on frames that contain both DTS & PTS
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOFILLIN 0x0010 ///< Do not infer any values from other values, just return what is stored in the container
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOPARSE 0x0020 ///< Do not use AVParsers, you also must set AVFMT_FLAG_NOFILLIN as the fillin code works on frames and no parsing -> no frames. Also seeking to frames can not work if parsing to find frame boundaries has been disabled
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_NOBUFFER 0x0040 ///< Do not buffer frames when possible
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_CUSTOM_IO 0x0080 ///< The caller has supplied a custom AVIOContext, don't avio_close() it.
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_DISCARD_CORRUPT 0x0100 ///< Discard frames marked corrupted
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_FLUSH_PACKETS 0x0200 ///< Flush the AVIOContext every packet.
+/**
+ * When muxing, try to avoid writing any random/volatile data to the output.
+ * This includes any random IDs, real-time timestamps/dates, muxer version, etc.
+ *
+ * This flag is mainly intended for testing.
+ */
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_BITEXACT 0x0400
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_MP4A_LATM 0x8000 ///< Enable RTP MP4A-LATM payload
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_SORT_DTS 0x10000 ///< try to interleave outputted packets by dts (using this flag can slow demuxing down)
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_PRIV_OPT 0x20000 ///< Enable use of private options by delaying codec open (this could be made default once all code is converted)
+#define AVFMT_FLAG_KEEP_SIDE_DATA 0x40000 ///< Don't merge side data but keep it separate.
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated deprecated in favor of probesize2
+ */
+ unsigned int probesize;
+
+ /**
+ * @deprecated deprecated in favor of max_analyze_duration2
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int max_analyze_duration;
+
+ const uint8_t *key;
+ int keylen;
+
+ unsigned int nb_programs;
+ AVProgram **programs;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced video codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVCodecID video_codec_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced audio codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVCodecID audio_codec_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced subtitle codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user.
+ */
+ enum AVCodecID subtitle_codec_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for the index of each stream.
+ * If the index exceeds this size, entries will be discarded as
+ * needed to maintain a smaller size. This can lead to slower or less
+ * accurate seeking (depends on demuxer).
+ * Demuxers for which a full in-memory index is mandatory will ignore
+ * this.
+ * - muxing: unused
+ * - demuxing: set by user
+ */
+ unsigned int max_index_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum amount of memory in bytes to use for buffering frames
+ * obtained from realtime capture devices.
+ */
+ unsigned int max_picture_buffer;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of chapters in AVChapter array.
+ * When muxing, chapters are normally written in the file header,
+ * so nb_chapters should normally be initialized before write_header
+ * is called. Some muxers (e.g. mov and mkv) can also write chapters
+ * in the trailer. To write chapters in the trailer, nb_chapters
+ * must be zero when write_header is called and non-zero when
+ * write_trailer is called.
+ * - muxing: set by user
+ * - demuxing: set by libavformat
+ */
+ unsigned int nb_chapters;
+ AVChapter **chapters;
+
+ /**
+ * Metadata that applies to the whole file.
+ *
+ * - demuxing: set by libavformat in avformat_open_input()
+ * - muxing: may be set by the caller before avformat_write_header()
+ *
+ * Freed by libavformat in avformat_free_context().
+ */
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+ /**
+ * Start time of the stream in real world time, in microseconds
+ * since the Unix epoch (00:00 1st January 1970). That is, pts=0 in the
+ * stream was captured at this real world time.
+ * - muxing: Set by the caller before avformat_write_header(). If set to
+ * either 0 or AV_NOPTS_VALUE, then the current wall-time will
+ * be used.
+ * - demuxing: Set by libavformat. AV_NOPTS_VALUE if unknown. Note that
+ * the value may become known after some number of frames
+ * have been received.
+ */
+ int64_t start_time_realtime;
+
+ /**
+ * The number of frames used for determining the framerate in
+ * avformat_find_stream_info().
+ * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_find_stream_info().
+ */
+ int fps_probe_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Error recognition; higher values will detect more errors but may
+ * misdetect some more or less valid parts as errors.
+ * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_open_input().
+ */
+ int error_recognition;
+
+ /**
+ * Custom interrupt callbacks for the I/O layer.
+ *
+ * demuxing: set by the user before avformat_open_input().
+ * muxing: set by the user before avformat_write_header()
+ * (mainly useful for AVFMT_NOFILE formats). The callback
+ * should also be passed to avio_open2() if it's used to
+ * open the file.
+ */
+ AVIOInterruptCB interrupt_callback;
+
+ /**
+ * Flags to enable debugging.
+ */
+ int debug;
+#define FF_FDEBUG_TS 0x0001
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum buffering duration for interleaving.
+ *
+ * To ensure all the streams are interleaved correctly,
+ * av_interleaved_write_frame() will wait until it has at least one packet
+ * for each stream before actually writing any packets to the output file.
+ * When some streams are "sparse" (i.e. there are large gaps between
+ * successive packets), this can result in excessive buffering.
+ *
+ * This field specifies the maximum difference between the timestamps of the
+ * first and the last packet in the muxing queue, above which libavformat
+ * will output a packet regardless of whether it has queued a packet for all
+ * the streams.
+ *
+ * Muxing only, set by the caller before avformat_write_header().
+ */
+ int64_t max_interleave_delta;
+
+ /**
+ * Allow non-standard and experimental extension
+ * @see AVCodecContext.strict_std_compliance
+ */
+ int strict_std_compliance;
+
+ /**
+ * Flags for the user to detect events happening on the file. Flags must
+ * be cleared by the user once the event has been handled.
+ * A combination of AVFMT_EVENT_FLAG_*.
+ */
+ int event_flags;
+#define AVFMT_EVENT_FLAG_METADATA_UPDATED 0x0001 ///< The call resulted in updated metadata.
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum number of packets to read while waiting for the first timestamp.
+ * Decoding only.
+ */
+ int max_ts_probe;
+
+ /**
+ * Avoid negative timestamps during muxing.
+ * Any value of the AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_* constants.
+ * Note, this only works when using av_interleaved_write_frame. (interleave_packet_per_dts is in use)
+ * - muxing: Set by user
+ * - demuxing: unused
+ */
+ int avoid_negative_ts;
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_AUTO -1 ///< Enabled when required by target format
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_MAKE_NON_NEGATIVE 1 ///< Shift timestamps so they are non negative
+#define AVFMT_AVOID_NEG_TS_MAKE_ZERO 2 ///< Shift timestamps so that they start at 0
+
+
+ /**
+ * Transport stream id.
+ * This will be moved into demuxer private options. Thus no API/ABI compatibility
+ */
+ int ts_id;
+
+ /**
+ * Audio preload in microseconds.
+ * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+ * - encoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int audio_preload;
+
+ /**
+ * Max chunk time in microseconds.
+ * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+ * - encoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int max_chunk_duration;
+
+ /**
+ * Max chunk size in bytes
+ * Note, not all formats support this and unpredictable things may happen if it is used when not supported.
+ * - encoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int max_chunk_size;
+
+ /**
+ * forces the use of wallclock timestamps as pts/dts of packets
+ * This has undefined results in the presence of B frames.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int use_wallclock_as_timestamps;
+
+ /**
+ * avio flags, used to force AVIO_FLAG_DIRECT.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int avio_flags;
+
+ /**
+ * The duration field can be estimated through various ways, and this field can be used
+ * to know how the duration was estimated.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Read by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ enum AVDurationEstimationMethod duration_estimation_method;
+
+ /**
+ * Skip initial bytes when opening stream
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int64_t skip_initial_bytes;
+
+ /**
+ * Correct single timestamp overflows
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ unsigned int correct_ts_overflow;
+
+ /**
+ * Force seeking to any (also non key) frames.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int seek2any;
+
+ /**
+ * Flush the I/O context after each packet.
+ * - encoding: Set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ * - decoding: unused
+ */
+ int flush_packets;
+
+ /**
+ * format probing score.
+ * The maximal score is AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX, its set when the demuxer probes
+ * the format.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by avformat, read by user via av_format_get_probe_score() (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int probe_score;
+
+ /**
+ * number of bytes to read maximally to identify format.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by user through AVOPtions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int format_probesize;
+
+ /**
+ * ',' separated list of allowed decoders.
+ * If NULL then all are allowed
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by user through AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ char *codec_whitelist;
+
+ /**
+ * ',' separated list of allowed demuxers.
+ * If NULL then all are allowed
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by user through AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ char *format_whitelist;
+
+ /*****************************************************************
+ * All fields below this line are not part of the public API. They
+ * may not be used outside of libavformat and can be changed and
+ * removed at will.
+ * New public fields should be added right above.
+ *****************************************************************
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * This buffer is only needed when packets were already buffered but
+ * not decoded, for example to get the codec parameters in MPEG
+ * streams.
+ */
+ struct AVPacketList *packet_buffer;
+ struct AVPacketList *packet_buffer_end;
+
+ /* av_seek_frame() support */
+ int64_t data_offset; /**< offset of the first packet */
+
+ /**
+ * Raw packets from the demuxer, prior to parsing and decoding.
+ * This buffer is used for buffering packets until the codec can
+ * be identified, as parsing cannot be done without knowing the
+ * codec.
+ */
+ struct AVPacketList *raw_packet_buffer;
+ struct AVPacketList *raw_packet_buffer_end;
+ /**
+ * Packets split by the parser get queued here.
+ */
+ struct AVPacketList *parse_queue;
+ struct AVPacketList *parse_queue_end;
+ /**
+ * Remaining size available for raw_packet_buffer, in bytes.
+ */
+#define RAW_PACKET_BUFFER_SIZE 2500000
+ int raw_packet_buffer_remaining_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Offset to remap timestamps to be non-negative.
+ * Expressed in timebase units.
+ * @see AVStream.mux_ts_offset
+ */
+ int64_t offset;
+
+ /**
+ * Timebase for the timestamp offset.
+ */
+ AVRational offset_timebase;
+
+ /**
+ * An opaque field for libavformat internal usage.
+ * Must not be accessed in any way by callers.
+ */
+ AVFormatInternal *internal;
+
+ /**
+ * IO repositioned flag.
+ * This is set by avformat when the underlaying IO context read pointer
+ * is repositioned, for example when doing byte based seeking.
+ * Demuxers can use the flag to detect such changes.
+ */
+ int io_repositioned;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced video codec.
+ * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+ * the same codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user via av_format_set_video_codec (NO direct access).
+ */
+ AVCodec *video_codec;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced audio codec.
+ * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+ * the same codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user via av_format_set_audio_codec (NO direct access).
+ */
+ AVCodec *audio_codec;
+
+ /**
+ * Forced subtitle codec.
+ * This allows forcing a specific decoder, even when there are multiple with
+ * the same codec_id.
+ * Demuxing: Set by user via av_format_set_subtitle_codec (NO direct access).
+ */
+ AVCodec *subtitle_codec;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of bytes to be written as padding in a metadata header.
+ * Demuxing: Unused.
+ * Muxing: Set by user via av_format_set_metadata_header_padding.
+ */
+ int metadata_header_padding;
+
+ /**
+ * User data.
+ * This is a place for some private data of the user.
+ * Mostly usable with control_message_cb or any future callbacks in device's context.
+ */
+ void *opaque;
+
+ /**
+ * Callback used by devices to communicate with application.
+ */
+ av_format_control_message control_message_cb;
+
+ /**
+ * Output timestamp offset, in microseconds.
+ * Muxing: set by user via AVOptions (NO direct access)
+ */
+ int64_t output_ts_offset;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum duration (in AV_TIME_BASE units) of the data read
+ * from input in avformat_find_stream_info().
+ * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_find_stream_info()
+ * via AVOptions (NO direct access).
+ * Can be set to 0 to let avformat choose using a heuristic.
+ */
+ int64_t max_analyze_duration2;
+
+ /**
+ * Maximum size of the data read from input for determining
+ * the input container format.
+ * Demuxing only, set by the caller before avformat_open_input()
+ * via AVOptions (NO direct access).
+ */
+ int64_t probesize2;
+
+ /**
+ * dump format separator.
+ * can be ", " or "\n " or anything else
+ * Code outside libavformat should access this field using AVOptions
+ * (NO direct access).
+ * - muxing: Set by user.
+ * - demuxing: Set by user.
+ */
+ uint8_t *dump_separator;
+} AVFormatContext;
+
+int av_format_get_probe_score(const AVFormatContext *s);
+AVCodec * av_format_get_video_codec(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_video_codec(AVFormatContext *s, AVCodec *c);
+AVCodec * av_format_get_audio_codec(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_audio_codec(AVFormatContext *s, AVCodec *c);
+AVCodec * av_format_get_subtitle_codec(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_subtitle_codec(AVFormatContext *s, AVCodec *c);
+int av_format_get_metadata_header_padding(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_metadata_header_padding(AVFormatContext *s, int c);
+void * av_format_get_opaque(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_opaque(AVFormatContext *s, void *opaque);
+av_format_control_message av_format_get_control_message_cb(const AVFormatContext *s);
+void av_format_set_control_message_cb(AVFormatContext *s, av_format_control_message callback);
+
+/**
+ * This function will cause global side data to be injected in the next packet
+ * of each stream as well as after any subsequent seek.
+ */
+void av_format_inject_global_side_data(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Returns the method used to set ctx->duration.
+ *
+ * @return AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_PTS, AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_STREAM, or AVFMT_DURATION_FROM_BITRATE.
+ */
+enum AVDurationEstimationMethod av_fmt_ctx_get_duration_estimation_method(const AVFormatContext* ctx);
+
+typedef struct AVPacketList {
+ AVPacket pkt;
+ struct AVPacketList *next;
+} AVPacketList;
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavf_core Core functions
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ *
+ * Functions for querying libavformat capabilities, allocating core structures,
+ * etc.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avformat_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavformat build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avformat_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavformat license.
+ */
+const char *avformat_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize libavformat and register all the muxers, demuxers and
+ * protocols. If you do not call this function, then you can select
+ * exactly which formats you want to support.
+ *
+ * @see av_register_input_format()
+ * @see av_register_output_format()
+ */
+void av_register_all(void);
+
+void av_register_input_format(AVInputFormat *format);
+void av_register_output_format(AVOutputFormat *format);
+
+/**
+ * Do global initialization of network components. This is optional,
+ * but recommended, since it avoids the overhead of implicitly
+ * doing the setup for each session.
+ *
+ * Calling this function will become mandatory if using network
+ * protocols at some major version bump.
+ */
+int avformat_network_init(void);
+
+/**
+ * Undo the initialization done by avformat_network_init.
+ */
+int avformat_network_deinit(void);
+
+/**
+ * If f is NULL, returns the first registered input format,
+ * if f is non-NULL, returns the next registered input format after f
+ * or NULL if f is the last one.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_iformat_next(const AVInputFormat *f);
+
+/**
+ * If f is NULL, returns the first registered output format,
+ * if f is non-NULL, returns the next registered output format after f
+ * or NULL if f is the last one.
+ */
+AVOutputFormat *av_oformat_next(const AVOutputFormat *f);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFormatContext.
+ * avformat_free_context() can be used to free the context and everything
+ * allocated by the framework within it.
+ */
+AVFormatContext *avformat_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFormatContext and all its streams.
+ * @param s context to free
+ */
+void avformat_free_context(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for AVFormatContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *avformat_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new stream to a media file.
+ *
+ * When demuxing, it is called by the demuxer in read_header(). If the
+ * flag AVFMTCTX_NOHEADER is set in s.ctx_flags, then it may also
+ * be called in read_packet().
+ *
+ * When muxing, should be called by the user before avformat_write_header().
+ *
+ * User is required to call avcodec_close() and avformat_free_context() to
+ * clean up the allocation by avformat_new_stream().
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param c If non-NULL, the AVCodecContext corresponding to the new stream
+ * will be initialized to use this codec. This is needed for e.g. codec-specific
+ * defaults to be set, so codec should be provided if it is known.
+ *
+ * @return newly created stream or NULL on error.
+ */
+AVStream *avformat_new_stream(AVFormatContext *s, const AVCodec *c);
+
+/**
+ * Get side information from stream.
+ *
+ * @param stream stream
+ * @param type desired side information type
+ * @param size pointer for side information size to store (optional)
+ * @return pointer to data if present or NULL otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t *av_stream_get_side_data(AVStream *stream,
+ enum AVPacketSideDataType type, int *size);
+
+AVProgram *av_new_program(AVFormatContext *s, int id);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFormatContext for an output format.
+ * avformat_free_context() can be used to free the context and
+ * everything allocated by the framework within it.
+ *
+ * @param *ctx is set to the created format context, or to NULL in
+ * case of failure
+ * @param oformat format to use for allocating the context, if NULL
+ * format_name and filename are used instead
+ * @param format_name the name of output format to use for allocating the
+ * context, if NULL filename is used instead
+ * @param filename the name of the filename to use for allocating the
+ * context, may be NULL
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative AVERROR code in case of
+ * failure
+ */
+int avformat_alloc_output_context2(AVFormatContext **ctx, AVOutputFormat *oformat,
+ const char *format_name, const char *filename);
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_decoding
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Find AVInputFormat based on the short name of the input format.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_find_input_format(const char *short_name);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param pd data to be probed
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ * demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format(AVProbeData *pd, int is_opened);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param pd data to be probed
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ * demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ * @param score_max A probe score larger that this is required to accept a
+ * detection, the variable is set to the actual detection
+ * score afterwards.
+ * If the score is <= AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX / 4 it is recommended
+ * to retry with a larger probe buffer.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format2(AVProbeData *pd, int is_opened, int *score_max);
+
+/**
+ * Guess the file format.
+ *
+ * @param is_opened Whether the file is already opened; determines whether
+ * demuxers with or without AVFMT_NOFILE are probed.
+ * @param score_ret The score of the best detection.
+ */
+AVInputFormat *av_probe_input_format3(AVProbeData *pd, int is_opened, int *score_ret);
+
+/**
+ * Probe a bytestream to determine the input format. Each time a probe returns
+ * with a score that is too low, the probe buffer size is increased and another
+ * attempt is made. When the maximum probe size is reached, the input format
+ * with the highest score is returned.
+ *
+ * @param pb the bytestream to probe
+ * @param fmt the input format is put here
+ * @param filename the filename of the stream
+ * @param logctx the log context
+ * @param offset the offset within the bytestream to probe from
+ * @param max_probe_size the maximum probe buffer size (zero for default)
+ * @return the score in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * the maximal score is AVPROBE_SCORE_MAX
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_probe_input_buffer2(AVIOContext *pb, AVInputFormat **fmt,
+ const char *filename, void *logctx,
+ unsigned int offset, unsigned int max_probe_size);
+
+/**
+ * Like av_probe_input_buffer2() but returns 0 on success
+ */
+int av_probe_input_buffer(AVIOContext *pb, AVInputFormat **fmt,
+ const char *filename, void *logctx,
+ unsigned int offset, unsigned int max_probe_size);
+
+/**
+ * Open an input stream and read the header. The codecs are not opened.
+ * The stream must be closed with avformat_close_input().
+ *
+ * @param ps Pointer to user-supplied AVFormatContext (allocated by avformat_alloc_context).
+ * May be a pointer to NULL, in which case an AVFormatContext is allocated by this
+ * function and written into ps.
+ * Note that a user-supplied AVFormatContext will be freed on failure.
+ * @param filename Name of the stream to open.
+ * @param fmt If non-NULL, this parameter forces a specific input format.
+ * Otherwise the format is autodetected.
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with AVFormatContext and demuxer-private options.
+ * On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dict containing
+ * options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @note If you want to use custom IO, preallocate the format context and set its pb field.
+ */
+int avformat_open_input(AVFormatContext **ps, const char *filename, AVInputFormat *fmt, AVDictionary **options);
+
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_demuxer_open(AVFormatContext *ic);
+
+/**
+ * Read packets of a media file to get stream information. This
+ * is useful for file formats with no headers such as MPEG. This
+ * function also computes the real framerate in case of MPEG-2 repeat
+ * frame mode.
+ * The logical file position is not changed by this function;
+ * examined packets may be buffered for later processing.
+ *
+ * @param ic media file handle
+ * @param options If non-NULL, an ic.nb_streams long array of pointers to
+ * dictionaries, where i-th member contains options for
+ * codec corresponding to i-th stream.
+ * On return each dictionary will be filled with options that were not found.
+ * @return >=0 if OK, AVERROR_xxx on error
+ *
+ * @note this function isn't guaranteed to open all the codecs, so
+ * options being non-empty at return is a perfectly normal behavior.
+ *
+ * @todo Let the user decide somehow what information is needed so that
+ * we do not waste time getting stuff the user does not need.
+ */
+int avformat_find_stream_info(AVFormatContext *ic, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Find the programs which belong to a given stream.
+ *
+ * @param ic media file handle
+ * @param last the last found program, the search will start after this
+ * program, or from the beginning if it is NULL
+ * @param s stream index
+ * @return the next program which belongs to s, NULL if no program is found or
+ * the last program is not among the programs of ic.
+ */
+AVProgram *av_find_program_from_stream(AVFormatContext *ic, AVProgram *last, int s);
+
+/**
+ * Find the "best" stream in the file.
+ * The best stream is determined according to various heuristics as the most
+ * likely to be what the user expects.
+ * If the decoder parameter is non-NULL, av_find_best_stream will find the
+ * default decoder for the stream's codec; streams for which no decoder can
+ * be found are ignored.
+ *
+ * @param ic media file handle
+ * @param type stream type: video, audio, subtitles, etc.
+ * @param wanted_stream_nb user-requested stream number,
+ * or -1 for automatic selection
+ * @param related_stream try to find a stream related (eg. in the same
+ * program) to this one, or -1 if none
+ * @param decoder_ret if non-NULL, returns the decoder for the
+ * selected stream
+ * @param flags flags; none are currently defined
+ * @return the non-negative stream number in case of success,
+ * AVERROR_STREAM_NOT_FOUND if no stream with the requested type
+ * could be found,
+ * AVERROR_DECODER_NOT_FOUND if streams were found but no decoder
+ * @note If av_find_best_stream returns successfully and decoder_ret is not
+ * NULL, then *decoder_ret is guaranteed to be set to a valid AVCodec.
+ */
+int av_find_best_stream(AVFormatContext *ic,
+ enum AVMediaType type,
+ int wanted_stream_nb,
+ int related_stream,
+ AVCodec **decoder_ret,
+ int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Return the next frame of a stream.
+ * This function returns what is stored in the file, and does not validate
+ * that what is there are valid frames for the decoder. It will split what is
+ * stored in the file into frames and return one for each call. It will not
+ * omit invalid data between valid frames so as to give the decoder the maximum
+ * information possible for decoding.
+ *
+ * If pkt->buf is NULL, then the packet is valid until the next
+ * av_read_frame() or until avformat_close_input(). Otherwise the packet
+ * is valid indefinitely. In both cases the packet must be freed with
+ * av_free_packet when it is no longer needed. For video, the packet contains
+ * exactly one frame. For audio, it contains an integer number of frames if each
+ * frame has a known fixed size (e.g. PCM or ADPCM data). If the audio frames
+ * have a variable size (e.g. MPEG audio), then it contains one frame.
+ *
+ * pkt->pts, pkt->dts and pkt->duration are always set to correct
+ * values in AVStream.time_base units (and guessed if the format cannot
+ * provide them). pkt->pts can be AV_NOPTS_VALUE if the video format
+ * has B-frames, so it is better to rely on pkt->dts if you do not
+ * decompress the payload.
+ *
+ * @return 0 if OK, < 0 on error or end of file
+ */
+int av_read_frame(AVFormatContext *s, AVPacket *pkt);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to the keyframe at timestamp.
+ * 'timestamp' in 'stream_index'.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param stream_index If stream_index is (-1), a default
+ * stream is selected, and timestamp is automatically converted
+ * from AV_TIME_BASE units to the stream specific time_base.
+ * @param timestamp Timestamp in AVStream.time_base units
+ * or, if no stream is specified, in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * @param flags flags which select direction and seeking mode
+ * @return >= 0 on success
+ */
+int av_seek_frame(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t timestamp,
+ int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to timestamp ts.
+ * Seeking will be done so that the point from which all active streams
+ * can be presented successfully will be closest to ts and within min/max_ts.
+ * Active streams are all streams that have AVStream.discard < AVDISCARD_ALL.
+ *
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE, then all timestamps are in bytes and
+ * are the file position (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME, then all timestamps are in frames
+ * in the stream with stream_index (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * Otherwise all timestamps are in units of the stream selected by stream_index
+ * or if stream_index is -1, in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY, then non-keyframes are treated as
+ * keyframes (this may not be supported by all demuxers).
+ * If flags contain AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD, it is ignored.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param stream_index index of the stream which is used as time base reference
+ * @param min_ts smallest acceptable timestamp
+ * @param ts target timestamp
+ * @param max_ts largest acceptable timestamp
+ * @param flags flags
+ * @return >=0 on success, error code otherwise
+ *
+ * @note This is part of the new seek API which is still under construction.
+ * Thus do not use this yet. It may change at any time, do not expect
+ * ABI compatibility yet!
+ */
+int avformat_seek_file(AVFormatContext *s, int stream_index, int64_t min_ts, int64_t ts, int64_t max_ts, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Start playing a network-based stream (e.g. RTSP stream) at the
+ * current position.
+ */
+int av_read_play(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Pause a network-based stream (e.g. RTSP stream).
+ *
+ * Use av_read_play() to resume it.
+ */
+int av_read_pause(AVFormatContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Close an opened input AVFormatContext. Free it and all its contents
+ * and set *s to NULL.
+ */
+void avformat_close_input(AVFormatContext **s);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD 1 ///< seek backward
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE 2 ///< seeking based on position in bytes
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY 4 ///< seek to any frame, even non-keyframes
+#define AVSEEK_FLAG_FRAME 8 ///< seeking based on frame number
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavf_encoding
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * Allocate the stream private data and write the stream header to
+ * an output media file.
+ *
+ * @param s Media file handle, must be allocated with avformat_alloc_context().
+ * Its oformat field must be set to the desired output format;
+ * Its pb field must be set to an already opened AVIOContext.
+ * @param options An AVDictionary filled with AVFormatContext and muxer-private options.
+ * On return this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dict containing
+ * options that were not found. May be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find, av_dict_set, avio_open, av_oformat_next.
+ */
+int avformat_write_header(AVFormatContext *s, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Write a packet to an output media file.
+ *
+ * This function passes the packet directly to the muxer, without any buffering
+ * or reordering. The caller is responsible for correctly interleaving the
+ * packets if the format requires it. Callers that want libavformat to handle
+ * the interleaving should call av_interleaved_write_frame() instead of this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * @param s media file handle
+ * @param pkt The packet containing the data to be written. Note that unlike
+ * av_interleaved_write_frame(), this function does not take
+ * ownership of the packet passed to it (though some muxers may make
+ * an internal reference to the input packet).
+ *
+
+#include "libavutil/common.h"
+#include "libavutil/dict.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+
+#include "libavformat/version.h"
+
+
+#define AVIO_SEEKABLE_NORMAL 0x0001 /**< Seeking works like for a local file */
+
+/**
+ * Callback for checking whether to abort blocking functions.
+ * AVERROR_EXIT is returned in this case by the interrupted
+ * function. During blocking operations, callback is called with
+ * opaque as parameter. If the callback returns 1, the
+ * blocking operation will be aborted.
+ *
+ * No members can be added to this struct without a major bump, if
+ * new elements have been added after this struct in AVFormatContext
+ * or AVIOContext.
+ */
+typedef struct AVIOInterruptCB {
+ int (*callback)(void*);
+ void *opaque;
+} AVIOInterruptCB;
+
+/**
+ * Bytestream IO Context.
+ * New fields can be added to the end with minor version bumps.
+ * Removal, reordering and changes to existing fields require a major
+ * version bump.
+ * sizeof(AVIOContext) must not be used outside libav*.
+ *
+ * @note None of the function pointers in AVIOContext should be called
+ * directly, they should only be set by the client application
+ * when implementing custom I/O. Normally these are set to the
+ * function pointers specified in avio_alloc_context()
+ */
+typedef struct AVIOContext {
+ /**
+ * A class for private options.
+ *
+ * If this AVIOContext is created by avio_open2(), av_class is set and
+ * passes the options down to protocols.
+ *
+ * If this AVIOContext is manually allocated, then av_class may be set by
+ * the caller.
+ *
+ * warning -- this field can be NULL, be sure to not pass this AVIOContext
+ * to any av_opt_* functions in that case.
+ */
+ const AVClass *av_class;
+ unsigned char *buffer; /**< Start of the buffer. */
+ int buffer_size; /**< Maximum buffer size */
+ unsigned char *buf_ptr; /**< Current position in the buffer */
+ unsigned char *buf_end; /**< End of the data, may be less than
+ buffer+buffer_size if the read function returned
+ less data than requested, e.g. for streams where
+ no more data has been received yet. */
+ void *opaque; /**< A private pointer, passed to the read/write/seek/...
+ functions. */
+ int (*read_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+ int (*write_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size);
+ int64_t (*seek)(void *opaque, int64_t offset, int whence);
+ int64_t pos; /**< position in the file of the current buffer */
+ int must_flush; /**< true if the next seek should flush */
+ int eof_reached; /**< true if eof reached */
+ int write_flag; /**< true if open for writing */
+ int max_packet_size;
+ unsigned long checksum;
+ unsigned char *checksum_ptr;
+ unsigned long (*update_checksum)(unsigned long checksum, const uint8_t *buf, unsigned int size);
+ int error; /**< contains the error code or 0 if no error happened */
+ /**
+ * Pause or resume playback for network streaming protocols - e.g. MMS.
+ */
+ int (*read_pause)(void *opaque, int pause);
+ /**
+ * Seek to a given timestamp in stream with the specified stream_index.
+ * Needed for some network streaming protocols which don't support seeking
+ * to byte position.
+ */
+ int64_t (*read_seek)(void *opaque, int stream_index,
+ int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+ /**
+ * A combination of AVIO_SEEKABLE_ flags or 0 when the stream is not seekable.
+ */
+ int seekable;
+
+ /**
+ * max filesize, used to limit allocations
+ * This field is internal to libavformat and access from outside is not allowed.
+ */
+ int64_t maxsize;
+
+ /**
+ * avio_read and avio_write should if possible be satisfied directly
+ * instead of going through a buffer, and avio_seek will always
+ * call the underlying seek function directly.
+ */
+ int direct;
+
+ /**
+ * Bytes read statistic
+ * This field is internal to libavformat and access from outside is not allowed.
+ */
+ int64_t bytes_read;
+
+ /**
+ * seek statistic
+ * This field is internal to libavformat and access from outside is not allowed.
+ */
+ int seek_count;
+
+ /**
+ * writeout statistic
+ * This field is internal to libavformat and access from outside is not allowed.
+ */
+ int writeout_count;
+
+ /**
+ * Original buffer size
+ * used internally after probing and ensure seekback to reset the buffer size
+ * This field is internal to libavformat and access from outside is not allowed.
+ */
+ int orig_buffer_size;
+} AVIOContext;
+
+/* unbuffered I/O */
+
+/**
+ * Return the name of the protocol that will handle the passed URL.
+ *
+ * NULL is returned if no protocol could be found for the given URL.
+ *
+ * @return Name of the protocol or NULL.
+ */
+const char *avio_find_protocol_name(const char *url);
+
+/**
+ * Return AVIO_FLAG_* access flags corresponding to the access permissions
+ * of the resource in url, or a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure. The returned access flags are
+ * masked by the value in flags.
+ *
+ * @note This function is intrinsically unsafe, in the sense that the
+ * checked resource may change its existence or permission status from
+ * one call to another. Thus you should not trust the returned value,
+ * unless you are sure that no other processes are accessing the
+ * checked resource.
+ */
+int avio_check(const char *url, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize an AVIOContext for buffered I/O. It must be later
+ * freed with av_free().
+ *
+ * @param buffer Memory block for input/output operations via AVIOContext.
+ * The buffer must be allocated with av_malloc() and friends.
+ * It may be freed and replaced with a new buffer by libavformat.
+ * AVIOContext.buffer holds the buffer currently in use,
+ * which must be later freed with av_free().
+ * @param buffer_size The buffer size is very important for performance.
+ * For protocols with fixed blocksize it should be set to this blocksize.
+ * For others a typical size is a cache page, e.g. 4kb.
+ * @param write_flag Set to 1 if the buffer should be writable, 0 otherwise.
+ * @param opaque An opaque pointer to user-specific data.
+ * @param read_packet A function for refilling the buffer, may be NULL.
+ * @param write_packet A function for writing the buffer contents, may be NULL.
+ * The function may not change the input buffers content.
+ * @param seek A function for seeking to specified byte position, may be NULL.
+ *
+ * @return Allocated AVIOContext or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVIOContext *avio_alloc_context(
+ unsigned char *buffer,
+ int buffer_size,
+ int write_flag,
+ void *opaque,
+ int (*read_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size),
+ int (*write_packet)(void *opaque, uint8_t *buf, int buf_size),
+ int64_t (*seek)(void *opaque, int64_t offset, int whence));
+
+void avio_w8(AVIOContext *s, int b);
+void avio_write(AVIOContext *s, const unsigned char *buf, int size);
+void avio_wl64(AVIOContext *s, uint64_t val);
+void avio_wb64(AVIOContext *s, uint64_t val);
+void avio_wl32(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb32(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wl24(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb24(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wl16(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+void avio_wb16(AVIOContext *s, unsigned int val);
+
+/**
+ * Write a NULL-terminated string.
+ * @return number of bytes written.
+ */
+int avio_put_str(AVIOContext *s, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an UTF-8 string to UTF-16LE and write it.
+ * @return number of bytes written.
+ */
+int avio_put_str16le(AVIOContext *s, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Passing this as the "whence" parameter to a seek function causes it to
+ * return the filesize without seeking anywhere. Supporting this is optional.
+ * If it is not supported then the seek function will return <0.
+ */
+#define AVSEEK_SIZE 0x10000
+
+/**
+ * Oring this flag as into the "whence" parameter to a seek function causes it to
+ * seek by any means (like reopening and linear reading) or other normally unreasonable
+ * means that can be extremely slow.
+ * This may be ignored by the seek code.
+ */
+#define AVSEEK_FORCE 0x20000
+
+/**
+ * fseek() equivalent for AVIOContext.
+ * @return new position or AVERROR.
+ */
+int64_t avio_seek(AVIOContext *s, int64_t offset, int whence);
+
+/**
+ * Skip given number of bytes forward
+ * @return new position or AVERROR.
+ */
+int64_t avio_skip(AVIOContext *s, int64_t offset);
+
+/**
+ * ftell() equivalent for AVIOContext.
+ * @return position or AVERROR.
+ */
+static av_always_inline int64_t avio_tell(AVIOContext *s)
+{
+ return avio_seek(s, 0, SEEK_CUR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the filesize.
+ * @return filesize or AVERROR
+ */
+int64_t avio_size(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * feof() equivalent for AVIOContext.
+ * @return non zero if and only if end of file
+ */
+int avio_feof(AVIOContext *s);
+#if FF_API_URL_FEOF
+/**
+ * @deprecated use avio_feof()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int url_feof(AVIOContext *s);
+#endif
+
+/** @warning currently size is limited */
+int avio_printf(AVIOContext *s, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(2, 3);
+
+/**
+ * Force flushing of buffered data.
+ *
+ * For write streams, force the buffered data to be immediately written to the output,
+ * without to wait to fill the internal buffer.
+ *
+ * For read streams, discard all currently buffered data, and advance the
+ * reported file position to that of the underlying stream. This does not
+ * read new data, and does not perform any seeks.
+ */
+void avio_flush(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Read size bytes from AVIOContext into buf.
+ * @return number of bytes read or AVERROR
+ */
+int avio_read(AVIOContext *s, unsigned char *buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * @name Functions for reading from AVIOContext
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @note return 0 if EOF, so you cannot use it if EOF handling is
+ * necessary
+ */
+int avio_r8 (AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl16(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl24(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rl32(AVIOContext *s);
+uint64_t avio_rl64(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb16(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb24(AVIOContext *s);
+unsigned int avio_rb32(AVIOContext *s);
+uint64_t avio_rb64(AVIOContext *s);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Read a string from pb into buf. The reading will terminate when either
+ * a NULL character was encountered, maxlen bytes have been read, or nothing
+ * more can be read from pb. The result is guaranteed to be NULL-terminated, it
+ * will be truncated if buf is too small.
+ * Note that the string is not interpreted or validated in any way, it
+ * might get truncated in the middle of a sequence for multi-byte encodings.
+ *
+ * @return number of bytes read (is always <= maxlen).
+ * If reading ends on EOF or error, the return value will be one more than
+ * bytes actually read.
+ */
+int avio_get_str(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+
+/**
+ * Read a UTF-16 string from pb and convert it to UTF-8.
+ * The reading will terminate when either a null or invalid character was
+ * encountered or maxlen bytes have been read.
+ * @return number of bytes read (is always <= maxlen)
+ */
+int avio_get_str16le(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+int avio_get_str16be(AVIOContext *pb, int maxlen, char *buf, int buflen);
+
+
+/**
+ * @name URL open modes
+ * The flags argument to avio_open must be one of the following
+ * constants, optionally ORed with other flags.
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_READ 1 /**< read-only */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_WRITE 2 /**< write-only */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_READ_WRITE (AVIO_FLAG_READ|AVIO_FLAG_WRITE) /**< read-write pseudo flag */
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Use non-blocking mode.
+ * If this flag is set, operations on the context will return
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN) if they can not be performed immediately.
+ * If this flag is not set, operations on the context will never return
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN).
+ * Note that this flag does not affect the opening/connecting of the
+ * context. Connecting a protocol will always block if necessary (e.g. on
+ * network protocols) but never hang (e.g. on busy devices).
+ * Warning: non-blocking protocols is work-in-progress; this flag may be
+ * silently ignored.
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_NONBLOCK 8
+
+/**
+ * Use direct mode.
+ * avio_read and avio_write should if possible be satisfied directly
+ * instead of going through a buffer, and avio_seek will always
+ * call the underlying seek function directly.
+ */
+#define AVIO_FLAG_DIRECT 0x8000
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialize a AVIOContext for accessing the
+ * resource indicated by url.
+ * @note When the resource indicated by url has been opened in
+ * read+write mode, the AVIOContext can be used only for writing.
+ *
+ * @param s Used to return the pointer to the created AVIOContext.
+ * In case of failure the pointed to value is set to NULL.
+ * @param url resource to access
+ * @param flags flags which control how the resource indicated by url
+ * is to be opened
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure
+ */
+int avio_open(AVIOContext **s, const char *url, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Create and initialize a AVIOContext for accessing the
+ * resource indicated by url.
+ * @note When the resource indicated by url has been opened in
+ * read+write mode, the AVIOContext can be used only for writing.
+ *
+ * @param s Used to return the pointer to the created AVIOContext.
+ * In case of failure the pointed to value is set to NULL.
+ * @param url resource to access
+ * @param flags flags which control how the resource indicated by url
+ * is to be opened
+ * @param int_cb an interrupt callback to be used at the protocols level
+ * @param options A dictionary filled with protocol-private options. On return
+ * this parameter will be destroyed and replaced with a dict containing options
+ * that were not found. May be NULL.
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of failure
+ */
+int avio_open2(AVIOContext **s, const char *url, int flags,
+ const AVIOInterruptCB *int_cb, AVDictionary **options);
+
+/**
+ * Close the resource accessed by the AVIOContext s and free it.
+ * This function can only be used if s was opened by avio_open().
+ *
+ * The internal buffer is automatically flushed before closing the
+ * resource.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR < 0 on error.
+ * @see avio_closep
+ */
+int avio_close(AVIOContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Close the resource accessed by the AVIOContext *s, free it
+ * and set the pointer pointing to it to NULL.
+ * This function can only be used if s was opened by avio_open().
+ *
+ * The internal buffer is automatically flushed before closing the
+ * resource.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, an AVERROR < 0 on error.
+ * @see avio_close
+ */
+int avio_closep(AVIOContext **s);
+
+
+/**
+ * Open a write only memory stream.
+ *
+ * @param s new IO context
+ * @return zero if no error.
+ */
+int avio_open_dyn_buf(AVIOContext **s);
+
+/**
+ * Return the written size and a pointer to the buffer. The buffer
+ * must be freed with av_free().
+ * Padding of FF_INPUT_BUFFER_PADDING_SIZE is added to the buffer.
+ *
+ * @param s IO context
+ * @param pbuffer pointer to a byte buffer
+ * @return the length of the byte buffer
+ */
+int avio_close_dyn_buf(AVIOContext *s, uint8_t **pbuffer);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate through names of available protocols.
+ *
+ * @param opaque A private pointer representing current protocol.
+ * It must be a pointer to NULL on first iteration and will
+ * be updated by successive calls to avio_enum_protocols.
+ * @param output If set to 1, iterate over output protocols,
+ * otherwise over input protocols.
+ *
+ * @return A static string containing the name of current protocol or NULL
+ */
+const char *avio_enum_protocols(void **opaque, int output);
+
+/**
+ * Pause and resume playing - only meaningful if using a network streaming
+ * protocol (e.g. MMS).
+ *
+ * @param h IO context from which to call the read_pause function pointer
+ * @param pause 1 for pause, 0 for resume
+ */
+int avio_pause(AVIOContext *h, int pause);
+
+/**
+ * Seek to a given timestamp relative to some component stream.
+ * Only meaningful if using a network streaming protocol (e.g. MMS.).
+ *
+ * @param h IO context from which to call the seek function pointers
+ * @param stream_index The stream index that the timestamp is relative to.
+ * If stream_index is (-1) the timestamp should be in AV_TIME_BASE
+ * units from the beginning of the presentation.
+ * If a stream_index >= 0 is used and the protocol does not support
+ * seeking based on component streams, the call will fail.
+ * @param timestamp timestamp in AVStream.time_base units
+ * or if there is no stream specified then in AV_TIME_BASE units.
+ * @param flags Optional combination of AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD, AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE
+ * and AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY. The protocol may silently ignore
+ * AVSEEK_FLAG_BACKWARD and AVSEEK_FLAG_ANY, but AVSEEK_FLAG_BYTE will
+ * fail if used and not supported.
+ * @return >= 0 on success
+ * @see AVInputFormat::read_seek
+ */
+int64_t avio_seek_time(AVIOContext *h, int stream_index,
+ int64_t timestamp, int flags);
+
+/* Avoid a warning. The header can not be included because it breaks c++. */
+struct AVBPrint;
+
+/**
+ * Read contents of h into print buffer, up to max_size bytes, or up to EOF.
+ *
+ * @return 0 for success (max_size bytes read or EOF reached), negative error
+ * code otherwise
+ */
+int avio_read_to_bprint(AVIOContext *h, struct AVBPrint *pb, size_t max_size);
+
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_AVIO_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5e449bb510
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavformat/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVFORMAT_VERSION_H
+#define AVFORMAT_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libavf
+ * Libavformat version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR 56
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR 18
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO 101
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_BUILD LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVFORMAT_IDENT "Lavf" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+#ifndef FF_API_LAVF_BITEXACT
+#define FF_API_LAVF_BITEXACT (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_LAVF_FRAC
+#define FF_API_LAVF_FRAC (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_LAVF_CODEC_TB
+#define FF_API_LAVF_CODEC_TB (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_URL_FEOF
+#define FF_API_URL_FEOF (LIBAVFORMAT_VERSION_MAJOR < 57)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FF_API_R_FRAME_RATE
+#define FF_API_R_FRAME_RATE 1
+#endif
+#endif /* AVFORMAT_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/adler32.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/adler32.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0dc69ec0a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/adler32.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ADLER32_H
+#define AVUTIL_ADLER32_H
+
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Public header for libavutil Adler32 hasher
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_adler32 Adler32
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the Adler32 checksum of a buffer.
+ *
+ * Passing the return value to a subsequent av_adler32_update() call
+ * allows the checksum of multiple buffers to be calculated as though
+ * they were concatenated.
+ *
+ * @param adler initial checksum value
+ * @param buf pointer to input buffer
+ * @param len size of input buffer
+ * @return updated checksum
+ */
+unsigned long av_adler32_update(unsigned long adler, const uint8_t *buf,
+ unsigned int len) av_pure;
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ADLER32_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/aes.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/aes.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..09efbda107
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/aes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2007 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AES_H
+#define AVUTIL_AES_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_aes AES
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_aes_size;
+
+struct AVAES;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVAES context.
+ */
+struct AVAES *av_aes_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVAES context.
+ * @param key_bits 128, 192 or 256
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+int av_aes_init(struct AVAES *a, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ * @param count number of 16 byte blocks
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_aes_crypt(struct AVAES *a, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AES_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/attributes.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/attributes.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7d3f4a91cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/attributes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Macro definitions for various function/variable attributes
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H
+#define AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H
+
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+# define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(x,y) (__GNUC__ > x || __GNUC__ == x && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= y)
+#else
+# define AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(x,y) 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_always_inline
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+# define av_always_inline __attribute__((always_inline)) inline
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+# define av_always_inline __forceinline
+#else
+# define av_always_inline inline
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_extern_inline
+#if defined(__ICL) && __ICL >= 1210 || defined(__GNUC_STDC_INLINE__)
+# define av_extern_inline extern inline
+#else
+# define av_extern_inline inline
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+# define av_noinline __attribute__((noinline))
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+# define av_noinline __declspec(noinline)
+#else
+# define av_noinline
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+# define av_pure __attribute__((pure))
+#else
+# define av_pure
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(2,6)
+# define av_const __attribute__((const))
+#else
+# define av_const
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,3)
+# define av_cold __attribute__((cold))
+#else
+# define av_cold
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,1) && !defined(__llvm__)
+# define av_flatten __attribute__((flatten))
+#else
+# define av_flatten
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+# define attribute_deprecated __attribute__((deprecated))
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+# define attribute_deprecated __declspec(deprecated)
+#else
+# define attribute_deprecated
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Disable warnings about deprecated features
+ * This is useful for sections of code kept for backward compatibility and
+ * scheduled for removal.
+ */
+#ifndef AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,6)
+# define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) \
+ _Pragma("GCC diagnostic push") \
+ _Pragma("GCC diagnostic ignored \"-Wdeprecated-declarations\"") \
+ code \
+ _Pragma("GCC diagnostic pop")
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+# define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) \
+ __pragma(warning(push)) \
+ __pragma(warning(disable : 4996)) \
+ code; \
+ __pragma(warning(pop))
+#else
+# define AV_NOWARN_DEPRECATED(code) code
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__)
+# define av_unused __attribute__((unused))
+#else
+# define av_unused
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Mark a variable as used and prevent the compiler from optimizing it
+ * away. This is useful for variables accessed only from inline
+ * assembler without the compiler being aware.
+ */
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+# define av_used __attribute__((used))
+#else
+# define av_used
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,3)
+# define av_alias __attribute__((may_alias))
+#else
+# define av_alias
+#endif
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && !defined(__clang__)
+# define av_uninit(x) x=x
+#else
+# define av_uninit(x) x
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __GNUC__
+# define av_builtin_constant_p __builtin_constant_p
+# define av_printf_format(fmtpos, attrpos) __attribute__((__format__(__printf__, fmtpos, attrpos)))
+#else
+# define av_builtin_constant_p(x) 0
+# define av_printf_format(fmtpos, attrpos)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(2,5)
+# define av_noreturn __attribute__((noreturn))
+#else
+# define av_noreturn
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ATTRIBUTES_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d21e6a1318
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audio_fifo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+/*
+ * Audio FIFO
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Justin Ruggles
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Audio FIFO Buffer
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "fifo.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_audiofifo Audio FIFO Buffer
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Context for an Audio FIFO Buffer.
+ *
+ * - Operates at the sample level rather than the byte level.
+ * - Supports multiple channels with either planar or packed sample format.
+ * - Automatic reallocation when writing to a full buffer.
+ */
+typedef struct AVAudioFifo AVAudioFifo;
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to free
+ */
+void av_audio_fifo_free(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt sample format
+ * @param channels number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples initial allocation size, in samples
+ * @return newly allocated AVAudioFifo, or NULL on error
+ */
+AVAudioFifo *av_audio_fifo_alloc(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int channels,
+ int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to reallocate
+ * @param nb_samples new allocation size, in samples
+ * @return 0 if OK, or negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_realloc(AVAudioFifo *af, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Write data to an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * The AVAudioFifo will be reallocated automatically if the available space
+ * is less than nb_samples.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to write to
+ * @param data audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to write
+ * @return number of samples actually written, or negative AVERROR
+ * code on failure. If successful, the number of samples
+ * actually written will always be nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_write(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Read data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to read from
+ * @param data audio data plane pointers
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to read
+ * @return number of samples actually read, or negative AVERROR code
+ * on failure. The number of samples actually read will not
+ * be greater than nb_samples, and will only be less than
+ * nb_samples if av_audio_fifo_size is less than nb_samples.
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_read(AVAudioFifo *af, void **data, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Drain data from an AVAudioFifo.
+ *
+ * Removes the data without reading it.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to drain
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to drain
+ * @return 0 if OK, or negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_drain(AVAudioFifo *af, int nb_samples);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the AVAudioFifo buffer.
+ *
+ * This empties all data in the buffer.
+ *
+ * @param af AVAudioFifo to reset
+ */
+void av_audio_fifo_reset(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current number of samples in the AVAudioFifo available for reading.
+ *
+ * @param af the AVAudioFifo to query
+ * @return number of samples available for reading
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_size(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current number of samples in the AVAudioFifo available for writing.
+ *
+ * @param af the AVAudioFifo to query
+ * @return number of samples available for writing
+ */
+int av_audio_fifo_space(AVAudioFifo *af);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AUDIO_FIFO_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audioconvert.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audioconvert.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..300a67cd3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/audioconvert.h
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+#include "version.h"
+
+#if FF_API_AUDIOCONVERT
+#include "channel_layout.h"
+#endif
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avassert.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avassert.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..41f5e0eea7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avassert.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2010 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * simple assert() macros that are a bit more flexible than ISO C assert().
+ * @author Michael Niedermayer
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H
+
+#include
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "log.h"
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that is always enabled.
+ */
+#define av_assert0(cond) do { \
+ if (!(cond)) { \
+ av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_PANIC, "Assertion %s failed at %s:%d\n", \
+ AV_STRINGIFY(cond), __FILE__, __LINE__); \
+ abort(); \
+ } \
+} while (0)
+
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that does not lie in speed critical code.
+ * These asserts() thus can be enabled without fearing speedloss.
+ */
+#if defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL > 0
+#define av_assert1(cond) av_assert0(cond)
+#else
+#define av_assert1(cond) ((void)0)
+#endif
+
+
+/**
+ * assert() equivalent, that does lie in speed critical code.
+ */
+#if defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL > 1
+#define av_assert2(cond) av_assert0(cond)
+#else
+#define av_assert2(cond) ((void)0)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVASSERT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avconfig.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avconfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..36a8cd14da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avconfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+/* Generated by ffconf */
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H
+#define AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN 0
+#define AV_HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED 1
+#define AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI 0
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVCONFIG_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avstring.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avstring.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ffb7aa6bfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avstring.h
@@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2007 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_string
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return non-zero if pfx is a prefix of str. If it is, *ptr is set to
+ * the address of the first character in str after the prefix.
+ *
+ * @param str input string
+ * @param pfx prefix to test
+ * @param ptr updated if the prefix is matched inside str
+ * @return non-zero if the prefix matches, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_strstart(const char *str, const char *pfx, const char **ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Return non-zero if pfx is a prefix of str independent of case. If
+ * it is, *ptr is set to the address of the first character in str
+ * after the prefix.
+ *
+ * @param str input string
+ * @param pfx prefix to test
+ * @param ptr updated if the prefix is matched inside str
+ * @return non-zero if the prefix matches, zero otherwise
+ */
+int av_stristart(const char *str, const char *pfx, const char **ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Locate the first case-independent occurrence in the string haystack
+ * of the string needle. A zero-length string needle is considered to
+ * match at the start of haystack.
+ *
+ * This function is a case-insensitive version of the standard strstr().
+ *
+ * @param haystack string to search in
+ * @param needle string to search for
+ * @return pointer to the located match within haystack
+ * or a null pointer if no match
+ */
+char *av_stristr(const char *haystack, const char *needle);
+
+/**
+ * Locate the first occurrence of the string needle in the string haystack
+ * where not more than hay_length characters are searched. A zero-length
+ * string needle is considered to match at the start of haystack.
+ *
+ * This function is a length-limited version of the standard strstr().
+ *
+ * @param haystack string to search in
+ * @param needle string to search for
+ * @param hay_length length of string to search in
+ * @return pointer to the located match within haystack
+ * or a null pointer if no match
+ */
+char *av_strnstr(const char *haystack, const char *needle, size_t hay_length);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the string src to dst, but no more than size - 1 bytes, and
+ * null-terminate dst.
+ *
+ * This function is the same as BSD strlcpy().
+ *
+ * @param dst destination buffer
+ * @param src source string
+ * @param size size of destination buffer
+ * @return the length of src
+ *
+ * @warning since the return value is the length of src, src absolutely
+ * _must_ be a properly 0-terminated string, otherwise this will read beyond
+ * the end of the buffer and possibly crash.
+ */
+size_t av_strlcpy(char *dst, const char *src, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Append the string src to the string dst, but to a total length of
+ * no more than size - 1 bytes, and null-terminate dst.
+ *
+ * This function is similar to BSD strlcat(), but differs when
+ * size <= strlen(dst).
+ *
+ * @param dst destination buffer
+ * @param src source string
+ * @param size size of destination buffer
+ * @return the total length of src and dst
+ *
+ * @warning since the return value use the length of src and dst, these
+ * absolutely _must_ be a properly 0-terminated strings, otherwise this
+ * will read beyond the end of the buffer and possibly crash.
+ */
+size_t av_strlcat(char *dst, const char *src, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Append output to a string, according to a format. Never write out of
+ * the destination buffer, and always put a terminating 0 within
+ * the buffer.
+ * @param dst destination buffer (string to which the output is
+ * appended)
+ * @param size total size of the destination buffer
+ * @param fmt printf-compatible format string, specifying how the
+ * following parameters are used
+ * @return the length of the string that would have been generated
+ * if enough space had been available
+ */
+size_t av_strlcatf(char *dst, size_t size, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(3, 4);
+
+/**
+ * Get the count of continuous non zero chars starting from the beginning.
+ *
+ * @param len maximum number of characters to check in the string, that
+ * is the maximum value which is returned by the function
+ */
+static inline size_t av_strnlen(const char *s, size_t len)
+{
+ size_t i;
+ for (i = 0; i < len && s[i]; i++)
+ ;
+ return i;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Print arguments following specified format into a large enough auto
+ * allocated buffer. It is similar to GNU asprintf().
+ * @param fmt printf-compatible format string, specifying how the
+ * following parameters are used.
+ * @return the allocated string
+ * @note You have to free the string yourself with av_free().
+ */
+char *av_asprintf(const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(1, 2);
+
+/**
+ * Convert a number to a av_malloced string.
+ */
+char *av_d2str(double d);
+
+/**
+ * Unescape the given string until a non escaped terminating char,
+ * and return the token corresponding to the unescaped string.
+ *
+ * The normal \ and ' escaping is supported. Leading and trailing
+ * whitespaces are removed, unless they are escaped with '\' or are
+ * enclosed between ''.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer to parse, buf will be updated to point to the
+ * terminating char
+ * @param term a 0-terminated list of terminating chars
+ * @return the malloced unescaped string, which must be av_freed by
+ * the user, NULL in case of allocation failure
+ */
+char *av_get_token(const char **buf, const char *term);
+
+/**
+ * Split the string into several tokens which can be accessed by
+ * successive calls to av_strtok().
+ *
+ * A token is defined as a sequence of characters not belonging to the
+ * set specified in delim.
+ *
+ * On the first call to av_strtok(), s should point to the string to
+ * parse, and the value of saveptr is ignored. In subsequent calls, s
+ * should be NULL, and saveptr should be unchanged since the previous
+ * call.
+ *
+ * This function is similar to strtok_r() defined in POSIX.1.
+ *
+ * @param s the string to parse, may be NULL
+ * @param delim 0-terminated list of token delimiters, must be non-NULL
+ * @param saveptr user-provided pointer which points to stored
+ * information necessary for av_strtok() to continue scanning the same
+ * string. saveptr is updated to point to the next character after the
+ * first delimiter found, or to NULL if the string was terminated
+ * @return the found token, or NULL when no token is found
+ */
+char *av_strtok(char *s, const char *delim, char **saveptr);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isdigit.
+ */
+av_const int av_isdigit(int c);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isgraph.
+ */
+av_const int av_isgraph(int c);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isspace.
+ */
+av_const int av_isspace(int c);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII characters to uppercase.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_toupper(int c)
+{
+ if (c >= 'a' && c <= 'z')
+ c ^= 0x20;
+ return c;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII characters to lowercase.
+ */
+static inline av_const int av_tolower(int c)
+{
+ if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z')
+ c ^= 0x20;
+ return c;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent conversion of ASCII isxdigit.
+ */
+av_const int av_isxdigit(int c);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent case-insensitive compare.
+ * @note This means only ASCII-range characters are case-insensitive
+ */
+int av_strcasecmp(const char *a, const char *b);
+
+/**
+ * Locale-independent case-insensitive compare.
+ * @note This means only ASCII-range characters are case-insensitive
+ */
+int av_strncasecmp(const char *a, const char *b, size_t n);
+
+
+/**
+ * Thread safe basename.
+ * @param path the path, on DOS both \ and / are considered separators.
+ * @return pointer to the basename substring.
+ */
+const char *av_basename(const char *path);
+
+/**
+ * Thread safe dirname.
+ * @param path the path, on DOS both \ and / are considered separators.
+ * @return the path with the separator replaced by the string terminator or ".".
+ * @note the function may change the input string.
+ */
+const char *av_dirname(char *path);
+
+/**
+ * Match instances of a name in a comma-separated list of names.
+ * @param name Name to look for.
+ * @param names List of names.
+ * @return 1 on match, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int av_match_name(const char *name, const char *names);
+
+enum AVEscapeMode {
+ AV_ESCAPE_MODE_AUTO, ///< Use auto-selected escaping mode.
+ AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, ///< Use backslash escaping.
+ AV_ESCAPE_MODE_QUOTE, ///< Use single-quote escaping.
+};
+
+/**
+ * Consider spaces special and escape them even in the middle of the
+ * string.
+ *
+ * This is equivalent to adding the whitespace characters to the special
+ * characters lists, except it is guaranteed to use the exact same list
+ * of whitespace characters as the rest of libavutil.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_WHITESPACE 0x01
+
+/**
+ * Escape only specified special characters.
+ * Without this flag, escape also any characters that may be considered
+ * special by av_get_token(), such as the single quote.
+ */
+#define AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_STRICT 0x02
+
+/**
+ * Escape string in src, and put the escaped string in an allocated
+ * string in *dst, which must be freed with av_free().
+ *
+ * @param dst pointer where an allocated string is put
+ * @param src string to escape, must be non-NULL
+ * @param special_chars string containing the special characters which
+ * need to be escaped, can be NULL
+ * @param mode escape mode to employ, see AV_ESCAPE_MODE_* macros.
+ * Any unknown value for mode will be considered equivalent to
+ * AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, but this behaviour can change without
+ * notice.
+ * @param flags flags which control how to escape, see AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_ macros
+ * @return the length of the allocated string, or a negative error code in case of error
+ * @see av_bprint_escape()
+ */
+int av_escape(char **dst, const char *src, const char *special_chars,
+ enum AVEscapeMode mode, int flags);
+
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_INVALID_BIG_CODES 1 ///< accept codepoints over 0x10FFFF
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_NON_CHARACTERS 2 ///< accept non-characters - 0xFFFE and 0xFFFF
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_SURROGATES 4 ///< accept UTF-16 surrogates codes
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_EXCLUDE_XML_INVALID_CONTROL_CODES 8 ///< exclude control codes not accepted by XML
+
+#define AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_ALL \
+ AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_INVALID_BIG_CODES|AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_NON_CHARACTERS|AV_UTF8_FLAG_ACCEPT_SURROGATES
+
+/**
+ * Read and decode a single UTF-8 code point (character) from the
+ * buffer in *buf, and update *buf to point to the next byte to
+ * decode.
+ *
+ * In case of an invalid byte sequence, the pointer will be updated to
+ * the next byte after the invalid sequence and the function will
+ * return an error code.
+ *
+ * Depending on the specified flags, the function will also fail in
+ * case the decoded code point does not belong to a valid range.
+ *
+ * @note For speed-relevant code a carefully implemented use of
+ * GET_UTF8() may be preferred.
+ *
+ * @param codep pointer used to return the parsed code in case of success.
+ * The value in *codep is set even in case the range check fails.
+ * @param bufp pointer to the address the first byte of the sequence
+ * to decode, updated by the function to point to the
+ * byte next after the decoded sequence
+ * @param buf_end pointer to the end of the buffer, points to the next
+ * byte past the last in the buffer. This is used to
+ * avoid buffer overreads (in case of an unfinished
+ * UTF-8 sequence towards the end of the buffer).
+ * @param flags a collection of AV_UTF8_FLAG_* flags
+ * @return >= 0 in case a sequence was successfully read, a negative
+ * value in case of invalid sequence
+ */
+int av_utf8_decode(int32_t *codep, const uint8_t **bufp, const uint8_t *buf_end,
+ unsigned int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Check if a name is in a list.
+ * @returns 0 if not found, or the 1 based index where it has been found in the
+ * list.
+ */
+int av_match_list(const char *name, const char *list, char separator);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_AVSTRING_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avutil.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avutil.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e6ebb6c43c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/avutil.h
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_AVUTIL_H
+#define AVUTIL_AVUTIL_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * external API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @mainpage
+ *
+ * @section ffmpeg_intro Introduction
+ *
+ * This document describes the usage of the different libraries
+ * provided by FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * @li @ref libavc "libavcodec" encoding/decoding library
+ * @li @ref lavfi "libavfilter" graph-based frame editing library
+ * @li @ref libavf "libavformat" I/O and muxing/demuxing library
+ * @li @ref lavd "libavdevice" special devices muxing/demuxing library
+ * @li @ref lavu "libavutil" common utility library
+ * @li @ref lswr "libswresample" audio resampling, format conversion and mixing
+ * @li @ref lpp "libpostproc" post processing library
+ * @li @ref libsws "libswscale" color conversion and scaling library
+ *
+ * @section ffmpeg_versioning Versioning and compatibility
+ *
+ * Each of the FFmpeg libraries contains a version.h header, which defines a
+ * major, minor and micro version number with the
+ * LIBRARYNAME_VERSION_{MAJOR,MINOR,MICRO} macros. The major version
+ * number is incremented with backward incompatible changes - e.g. removing
+ * parts of the public API, reordering public struct members, etc. The minor
+ * version number is incremented for backward compatible API changes or major
+ * new features - e.g. adding a new public function or a new decoder. The micro
+ * version number is incremented for smaller changes that a calling program
+ * might still want to check for - e.g. changing behavior in a previously
+ * unspecified situation.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg guarantees backward API and ABI compatibility for each library as long
+ * as its major version number is unchanged. This means that no public symbols
+ * will be removed or renamed. Types and names of the public struct members and
+ * values of public macros and enums will remain the same (unless they were
+ * explicitly declared as not part of the public API). Documented behavior will
+ * not change.
+ *
+ * In other words, any correct program that works with a given FFmpeg snapshot
+ * should work just as well without any changes with any later snapshot with the
+ * same major versions. This applies to both rebuilding the program against new
+ * FFmpeg versions or to replacing the dynamic FFmpeg libraries that a program
+ * links against.
+ *
+ * However, new public symbols may be added and new members may be appended to
+ * public structs whose size is not part of public ABI (most public structs in
+ * FFmpeg). New macros and enum values may be added. Behavior in undocumented
+ * situations may change slightly (and be documented). All those are accompanied
+ * by an entry in doc/APIchanges and incrementing either the minor or micro
+ * version number.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu Common utility functions
+ *
+ * @brief
+ * libavutil contains the code shared across all the other FFmpeg
+ * libraries
+ *
+ * @note In order to use the functions provided by avutil you must include
+ * the specific header.
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_crypto Crypto and Hashing
+ *
+ * @{
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_math Maths
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_string String Manipulation
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_mem Memory Management
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_data Data Structures
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_audio Audio related
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_error Error Codes
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_log Logging Facility
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_misc Other
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_internal Internal
+ *
+ * Not exported functions, for internal usage only
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup preproc_misc Preprocessor String Macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup version_utils Library Version Macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_ver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned avutil_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavutil build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *avutil_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libavutil license.
+ */
+const char *avutil_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_media Media Type
+ * @brief Media Type
+ */
+
+enum AVMediaType {
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_UNKNOWN = -1, ///< Usually treated as AVMEDIA_TYPE_DATA
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_VIDEO,
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_AUDIO,
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_DATA, ///< Opaque data information usually continuous
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_SUBTITLE,
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_ATTACHMENT, ///< Opaque data information usually sparse
+ AVMEDIA_TYPE_NB
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return a string describing the media_type enum, NULL if media_type
+ * is unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_get_media_type_string(enum AVMediaType media_type);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_const Constants
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_enc Encoding specific
+ *
+ * @note those definition should move to avcodec
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define FF_LAMBDA_SHIFT 7
+#define FF_LAMBDA_SCALE (1<
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_base64 Base64
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Decode a base64-encoded string.
+ *
+ * @param out buffer for decoded data
+ * @param in null-terminated input string
+ * @param out_size size in bytes of the out buffer, must be at
+ * least 3/4 of the length of in
+ * @return number of bytes written, or a negative value in case of
+ * invalid input
+ */
+int av_base64_decode(uint8_t *out, const char *in, int out_size);
+
+/**
+ * Encode data to base64 and null-terminate.
+ *
+ * @param out buffer for encoded data
+ * @param out_size size in bytes of the out buffer (including the
+ * null terminator), must be at least AV_BASE64_SIZE(in_size)
+ * @param in input buffer containing the data to encode
+ * @param in_size size in bytes of the in buffer
+ * @return out or NULL in case of error
+ */
+char *av_base64_encode(char *out, int out_size, const uint8_t *in, int in_size);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the output size needed to base64-encode x bytes to a
+ * null-terminated string.
+ */
+#define AV_BASE64_SIZE(x) (((x)+2) / 3 * 4 + 1)
+
+ /**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BASE64_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/blowfish.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/blowfish.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0b004532de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/blowfish.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+ * Blowfish algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Samuel Pitoiset
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H
+#define AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_blowfish Blowfish
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_BF_ROUNDS 16
+
+typedef struct AVBlowfish {
+ uint32_t p[AV_BF_ROUNDS + 2];
+ uint32_t s[4][256];
+} AVBlowfish;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVBlowfish context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param key a key
+ * @param key_len length of the key
+ */
+void av_blowfish_init(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_len);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param xl left four bytes halves of input to be encrypted
+ * @param xr right four bytes halves of input to be encrypted
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_blowfish_crypt_ecb(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, uint32_t *xl, uint32_t *xr,
+ int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVBlowfish context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_blowfish_crypt(struct AVBlowfish *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+ int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BLOWFISH_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bprint.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bprint.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c09b1ac1e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bprint.h
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Nicolas George
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BPRINT_H
+#define AVUTIL_BPRINT_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "avstring.h"
+
+/**
+ * Define a structure with extra padding to a fixed size
+ * This helps ensuring binary compatibility with future versions.
+ */
+
+#define FF_PAD_STRUCTURE(name, size, ...) \
+struct ff_pad_helper_##name { __VA_ARGS__ }; \
+typedef struct name { \
+ __VA_ARGS__ \
+ char reserved_padding[size - sizeof(struct ff_pad_helper_##name)]; \
+} name;
+
+/**
+ * Buffer to print data progressively
+ *
+ * The string buffer grows as necessary and is always 0-terminated.
+ * The content of the string is never accessed, and thus is
+ * encoding-agnostic and can even hold binary data.
+ *
+ * Small buffers are kept in the structure itself, and thus require no
+ * memory allocation at all (unless the contents of the buffer is needed
+ * after the structure goes out of scope). This is almost as lightweight as
+ * declaring a local "char buf[512]".
+ *
+ * The length of the string can go beyond the allocated size: the buffer is
+ * then truncated, but the functions still keep account of the actual total
+ * length.
+ *
+ * In other words, buf->len can be greater than buf->size and records the
+ * total length of what would have been to the buffer if there had been
+ * enough memory.
+ *
+ * Append operations do not need to be tested for failure: if a memory
+ * allocation fails, data stop being appended to the buffer, but the length
+ * is still updated. This situation can be tested with
+ * av_bprint_is_complete().
+ *
+ * The size_max field determines several possible behaviours:
+ *
+ * size_max = -1 (= UINT_MAX) or any large value will let the buffer be
+ * reallocated as necessary, with an amortized linear cost.
+ *
+ * size_max = 0 prevents writing anything to the buffer: only the total
+ * length is computed. The write operations can then possibly be repeated in
+ * a buffer with exactly the necessary size
+ * (using size_init = size_max = len + 1).
+ *
+ * size_max = 1 is automatically replaced by the exact size available in the
+ * structure itself, thus ensuring no dynamic memory allocation. The
+ * internal buffer is large enough to hold a reasonable paragraph of text,
+ * such as the current paragraph.
+ */
+
+FF_PAD_STRUCTURE(AVBPrint, 1024,
+ char *str; /**< string so far */
+ unsigned len; /**< length so far */
+ unsigned size; /**< allocated memory */
+ unsigned size_max; /**< maximum allocated memory */
+ char reserved_internal_buffer[1];
+)
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macros for special values for av_bprint_init() size_max
+ * parameter.
+ */
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_UNLIMITED ((unsigned)-1)
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_AUTOMATIC 1
+#define AV_BPRINT_SIZE_COUNT_ONLY 0
+
+/**
+ * Init a print buffer.
+ *
+ * @param buf buffer to init
+ * @param size_init initial size (including the final 0)
+ * @param size_max maximum size;
+ * 0 means do not write anything, just count the length;
+ * 1 is replaced by the maximum value for automatic storage;
+ * any large value means that the internal buffer will be
+ * reallocated as needed up to that limit; -1 is converted to
+ * UINT_MAX, the largest limit possible.
+ * Check also AV_BPRINT_SIZE_* macros.
+ */
+void av_bprint_init(AVBPrint *buf, unsigned size_init, unsigned size_max);
+
+/**
+ * Init a print buffer using a pre-existing buffer.
+ *
+ * The buffer will not be reallocated.
+ *
+ * @param buf buffer structure to init
+ * @param buffer byte buffer to use for the string data
+ * @param size size of buffer
+ */
+void av_bprint_init_for_buffer(AVBPrint *buf, char *buffer, unsigned size);
+
+/**
+ * Append a formatted string to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_bprintf(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(2, 3);
+
+/**
+ * Append a formatted string to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_vbprintf(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, va_list vl_arg);
+
+/**
+ * Append char c n times to a print buffer.
+ */
+void av_bprint_chars(AVBPrint *buf, char c, unsigned n);
+
+/**
+ * Append data to a print buffer.
+ *
+ * param buf bprint buffer to use
+ * param data pointer to data
+ * param size size of data
+ */
+void av_bprint_append_data(AVBPrint *buf, const char *data, unsigned size);
+
+struct tm;
+/**
+ * Append a formatted date and time to a print buffer.
+ *
+ * param buf bprint buffer to use
+ * param fmt date and time format string, see strftime()
+ * param tm broken-down time structure to translate
+ *
+ * @note due to poor design of the standard strftime function, it may
+ * produce poor results if the format string expands to a very long text and
+ * the bprint buffer is near the limit stated by the size_max option.
+ */
+void av_bprint_strftime(AVBPrint *buf, const char *fmt, const struct tm *tm);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate bytes in the buffer for external use.
+ *
+ * @param[in] buf buffer structure
+ * @param[in] size required size
+ * @param[out] mem pointer to the memory area
+ * @param[out] actual_size size of the memory area after allocation;
+ * can be larger or smaller than size
+ */
+void av_bprint_get_buffer(AVBPrint *buf, unsigned size,
+ unsigned char **mem, unsigned *actual_size);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the string to "" but keep internal allocated data.
+ */
+void av_bprint_clear(AVBPrint *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Test if the print buffer is complete (not truncated).
+ *
+ * It may have been truncated due to a memory allocation failure
+ * or the size_max limit (compare size and size_max if necessary).
+ */
+static inline int av_bprint_is_complete(const AVBPrint *buf)
+{
+ return buf->len < buf->size;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a print buffer.
+ *
+ * The print buffer can no longer be used afterwards,
+ * but the len and size fields are still valid.
+ *
+ * @arg[out] ret_str if not NULL, used to return a permanent copy of the
+ * buffer contents, or NULL if memory allocation fails;
+ * if NULL, the buffer is discarded and freed
+ * @return 0 for success or error code (probably AVERROR(ENOMEM))
+ */
+int av_bprint_finalize(AVBPrint *buf, char **ret_str);
+
+/**
+ * Escape the content in src and append it to dstbuf.
+ *
+ * @param dstbuf already inited destination bprint buffer
+ * @param src string containing the text to escape
+ * @param special_chars string containing the special characters which
+ * need to be escaped, can be NULL
+ * @param mode escape mode to employ, see AV_ESCAPE_MODE_* macros.
+ * Any unknown value for mode will be considered equivalent to
+ * AV_ESCAPE_MODE_BACKSLASH, but this behaviour can change without
+ * notice.
+ * @param flags flags which control how to escape, see AV_ESCAPE_FLAG_* macros
+ */
+void av_bprint_escape(AVBPrint *dstbuf, const char *src, const char *special_chars,
+ enum AVEscapeMode mode, int flags);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BPRINT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bswap.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bswap.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..91cb79538d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/bswap.h
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * byte swapping routines
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BSWAP_H
+#define AVUTIL_BSWAP_H
+
+#include
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+
+#include "config.h"
+
+#if ARCH_AARCH64
+# include "aarch64/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_ARM
+# include "arm/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_AVR32
+# include "avr32/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_SH4
+# include "sh4/bswap.h"
+#elif ARCH_X86
+# include "x86/bswap.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+#define AV_BSWAP16C(x) (((x) << 8 & 0xff00) | ((x) >> 8 & 0x00ff))
+#define AV_BSWAP32C(x) (AV_BSWAP16C(x) << 16 | AV_BSWAP16C((x) >> 16))
+#define AV_BSWAP64C(x) (AV_BSWAP32C(x) << 32 | AV_BSWAP32C((x) >> 32))
+
+#define AV_BSWAPC(s, x) AV_BSWAP##s##C(x)
+
+#ifndef av_bswap16
+static av_always_inline av_const uint16_t av_bswap16(uint16_t x)
+{
+ x= (x>>8) | (x<<8);
+ return x;
+}
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_bswap32
+static av_always_inline av_const uint32_t av_bswap32(uint32_t x)
+{
+ return AV_BSWAP32C(x);
+}
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_bswap64
+static inline uint64_t av_const av_bswap64(uint64_t x)
+{
+ return (uint64_t)av_bswap32(x) << 32 | av_bswap32(x >> 32);
+}
+#endif
+
+// be2ne ... big-endian to native-endian
+// le2ne ... little-endian to native-endian
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+#define av_be2ne16(x) (x)
+#define av_be2ne32(x) (x)
+#define av_be2ne64(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne16(x) av_bswap16(x)
+#define av_le2ne32(x) av_bswap32(x)
+#define av_le2ne64(x) av_bswap64(x)
+#define AV_BE2NEC(s, x) (x)
+#define AV_LE2NEC(s, x) AV_BSWAPC(s, x)
+#else
+#define av_be2ne16(x) av_bswap16(x)
+#define av_be2ne32(x) av_bswap32(x)
+#define av_be2ne64(x) av_bswap64(x)
+#define av_le2ne16(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne32(x) (x)
+#define av_le2ne64(x) (x)
+#define AV_BE2NEC(s, x) AV_BSWAPC(s, x)
+#define AV_LE2NEC(s, x) (x)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_BE2NE16C(x) AV_BE2NEC(16, x)
+#define AV_BE2NE32C(x) AV_BE2NEC(32, x)
+#define AV_BE2NE64C(x) AV_BE2NEC(64, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE16C(x) AV_LE2NEC(16, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE32C(x) AV_LE2NEC(32, x)
+#define AV_LE2NE64C(x) AV_LE2NEC(64, x)
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BSWAP_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/buffer.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/buffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b4399fd39f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/buffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_buffer
+ * refcounted data buffer API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_BUFFER_H
+#define AVUTIL_BUFFER_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_buffer AVBuffer
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVBuffer is an API for reference-counted data buffers.
+ *
+ * There are two core objects in this API -- AVBuffer and AVBufferRef. AVBuffer
+ * represents the data buffer itself; it is opaque and not meant to be accessed
+ * by the caller directly, but only through AVBufferRef. However, the caller may
+ * e.g. compare two AVBuffer pointers to check whether two different references
+ * are describing the same data buffer. AVBufferRef represents a single
+ * reference to an AVBuffer and it is the object that may be manipulated by the
+ * caller directly.
+ *
+ * There are two functions provided for creating a new AVBuffer with a single
+ * reference -- av_buffer_alloc() to just allocate a new buffer, and
+ * av_buffer_create() to wrap an existing array in an AVBuffer. From an existing
+ * reference, additional references may be created with av_buffer_ref().
+ * Use av_buffer_unref() to free a reference (this will automatically free the
+ * data once all the references are freed).
+ *
+ * The convention throughout this API and the rest of FFmpeg is such that the
+ * buffer is considered writable if there exists only one reference to it (and
+ * it has not been marked as read-only). The av_buffer_is_writable() function is
+ * provided to check whether this is true and av_buffer_make_writable() will
+ * automatically create a new writable buffer when necessary.
+ * Of course nothing prevents the calling code from violating this convention,
+ * however that is safe only when all the existing references are under its
+ * control.
+ *
+ * @note Referencing and unreferencing the buffers is thread-safe and thus
+ * may be done from multiple threads simultaneously without any need for
+ * additional locking.
+ *
+ * @note Two different references to the same buffer can point to different
+ * parts of the buffer (i.e. their AVBufferRef.data will not be equal).
+ */
+
+/**
+ * A reference counted buffer type. It is opaque and is meant to be used through
+ * references (AVBufferRef).
+ */
+typedef struct AVBuffer AVBuffer;
+
+/**
+ * A reference to a data buffer.
+ *
+ * The size of this struct is not a part of the public ABI and it is not meant
+ * to be allocated directly.
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferRef {
+ AVBuffer *buffer;
+
+ /**
+ * The data buffer. It is considered writable if and only if
+ * this is the only reference to the buffer, in which case
+ * av_buffer_is_writable() returns 1.
+ */
+ uint8_t *data;
+ /**
+ * Size of data in bytes.
+ */
+ int size;
+} AVBufferRef;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVBuffer of the given size using av_malloc().
+ *
+ * @return an AVBufferRef of given size or NULL when out of memory
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_alloc(int size);
+
+/**
+ * Same as av_buffer_alloc(), except the returned buffer will be initialized
+ * to zero.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_allocz(int size);
+
+/**
+ * Always treat the buffer as read-only, even when it has only one
+ * reference.
+ */
+#define AV_BUFFER_FLAG_READONLY (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Create an AVBuffer from an existing array.
+ *
+ * If this function is successful, data is owned by the AVBuffer. The caller may
+ * only access data through the returned AVBufferRef and references derived from
+ * it.
+ * If this function fails, data is left untouched.
+ * @param data data array
+ * @param size size of data in bytes
+ * @param free a callback for freeing this buffer's data
+ * @param opaque parameter to be got for processing or passed to free
+ * @param flags a combination of AV_BUFFER_FLAG_*
+ *
+ * @return an AVBufferRef referring to data on success, NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_create(uint8_t *data, int size,
+ void (*free)(void *opaque, uint8_t *data),
+ void *opaque, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Default free callback, which calls av_free() on the buffer data.
+ * This function is meant to be passed to av_buffer_create(), not called
+ * directly.
+ */
+void av_buffer_default_free(void *opaque, uint8_t *data);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new reference to an AVBuffer.
+ *
+ * @return a new AVBufferRef referring to the same AVBuffer as buf or NULL on
+ * failure.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_ref(AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Free a given reference and automatically free the buffer if there are no more
+ * references to it.
+ *
+ * @param buf the reference to be freed. The pointer is set to NULL on return.
+ */
+void av_buffer_unref(AVBufferRef **buf);
+
+/**
+ * @return 1 if the caller may write to the data referred to by buf (which is
+ * true if and only if buf is the only reference to the underlying AVBuffer).
+ * Return 0 otherwise.
+ * A positive answer is valid until av_buffer_ref() is called on buf.
+ */
+int av_buffer_is_writable(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * @return the opaque parameter set by av_buffer_create.
+ */
+void *av_buffer_get_opaque(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+int av_buffer_get_ref_count(const AVBufferRef *buf);
+
+/**
+ * Create a writable reference from a given buffer reference, avoiding data copy
+ * if possible.
+ *
+ * @param buf buffer reference to make writable. On success, buf is either left
+ * untouched, or it is unreferenced and a new writable AVBufferRef is
+ * written in its place. On failure, buf is left untouched.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int av_buffer_make_writable(AVBufferRef **buf);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate a given buffer.
+ *
+ * @param buf a buffer reference to reallocate. On success, buf will be
+ * unreferenced and a new reference with the required size will be
+ * written in its place. On failure buf will be left untouched. *buf
+ * may be NULL, then a new buffer is allocated.
+ * @param size required new buffer size.
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on failure.
+ *
+ * @note the buffer is actually reallocated with av_realloc() only if it was
+ * initially allocated through av_buffer_realloc(NULL) and there is only one
+ * reference to it (i.e. the one passed to this function). In all other cases
+ * a new buffer is allocated and the data is copied.
+ */
+int av_buffer_realloc(AVBufferRef **buf, int size);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_bufferpool AVBufferPool
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVBufferPool is an API for a lock-free thread-safe pool of AVBuffers.
+ *
+ * Frequently allocating and freeing large buffers may be slow. AVBufferPool is
+ * meant to solve this in cases when the caller needs a set of buffers of the
+ * same size (the most obvious use case being buffers for raw video or audio
+ * frames).
+ *
+ * At the beginning, the user must call av_buffer_pool_init() to create the
+ * buffer pool. Then whenever a buffer is needed, call av_buffer_pool_get() to
+ * get a reference to a new buffer, similar to av_buffer_alloc(). This new
+ * reference works in all aspects the same way as the one created by
+ * av_buffer_alloc(). However, when the last reference to this buffer is
+ * unreferenced, it is returned to the pool instead of being freed and will be
+ * reused for subsequent av_buffer_pool_get() calls.
+ *
+ * When the caller is done with the pool and no longer needs to allocate any new
+ * buffers, av_buffer_pool_uninit() must be called to mark the pool as freeable.
+ * Once all the buffers are released, it will automatically be freed.
+ *
+ * Allocating and releasing buffers with this API is thread-safe as long as
+ * either the default alloc callback is used, or the user-supplied one is
+ * thread-safe.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The buffer pool. This structure is opaque and not meant to be accessed
+ * directly. It is allocated with av_buffer_pool_init() and freed with
+ * av_buffer_pool_uninit().
+ */
+typedef struct AVBufferPool AVBufferPool;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and initialize a buffer pool.
+ *
+ * @param size size of each buffer in this pool
+ * @param alloc a function that will be used to allocate new buffers when the
+ * pool is empty. May be NULL, then the default allocator will be used
+ * (av_buffer_alloc()).
+ * @return newly created buffer pool on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVBufferPool *av_buffer_pool_init(int size, AVBufferRef* (*alloc)(int size));
+
+/**
+ * Mark the pool as being available for freeing. It will actually be freed only
+ * once all the allocated buffers associated with the pool are released. Thus it
+ * is safe to call this function while some of the allocated buffers are still
+ * in use.
+ *
+ * @param pool pointer to the pool to be freed. It will be set to NULL.
+ * @see av_buffer_pool_can_uninit()
+ */
+void av_buffer_pool_uninit(AVBufferPool **pool);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new AVBuffer, reusing an old buffer from the pool when available.
+ * This function may be called simultaneously from multiple threads.
+ *
+ * @return a reference to the new buffer on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_buffer_pool_get(AVBufferPool *pool);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_BUFFER_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/camellia.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/camellia.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e674c9b9a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/camellia.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+ * An implementation of the CAMELLIA algorithm as mentioned in RFC3713
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Supraja Meedinti
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H
+#define AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H
+
+#include
+
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @brief Public header for libavutil CAMELLIA algorithm
+ * @defgroup lavu_camellia CAMELLIA
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_camellia_size;
+
+struct AVCAMELLIA;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVCAMELLIA context
+ * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+ */
+struct AVCAMELLIA *av_camellia_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVCAMELLIA context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVCAMELLIA context
+ * @param key a key of 16, 24, 32 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+ * @param key_bits number of keybits: possible are 128, 192, 256
+ */
+int av_camellia_init(struct AVCAMELLIA *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVCAMELLIA context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 16 byte blocks
+ * @paran iv initialization vector for CBC mode, NULL for ECB mode
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_camellia_crypt(struct AVCAMELLIA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t* iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CAMELLIA_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cast5.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cast5.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e5cc8b1102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cast5.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+ * An implementation of the CAST128 algorithm as mentioned in RFC2144
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Supraja Meedinti
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CAST5_H
+#define AVUTIL_CAST5_H
+
+#include
+
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @brief Public header for libavutil CAST5 algorithm
+ * @defgroup lavu_cast5 CAST5
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_cast5_size;
+
+struct AVCAST5;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVCAST5 context
+ * To free the struct: av_free(ptr)
+ */
+struct AVCAST5 *av_cast5_alloc(void);
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVCAST5 context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+ * @param key a key of 5,6,...16 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+ * @param key_bits number of keybits: possible are 40,48,...,128
+ */
+int av_cast5_init(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, const uint8_t *key, int key_bits);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context, ECB mode only
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_cast5_crypt(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVCAST5 context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, NULL for ECB mode
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_cast5_crypt2(struct AVCAST5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CAST5_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dea4d6093d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/channel_layout.h
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ * Copyright (c) 2008 Peter Ross
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H
+#define AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * audio channel layout utility functions
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup channel_masks Audio channel masks
+ *
+ * A channel layout is a 64-bits integer with a bit set for every channel.
+ * The number of bits set must be equal to the number of channels.
+ * The value 0 means that the channel layout is not known.
+ * @note this data structure is not powerful enough to handle channels
+ * combinations that have the same channel multiple times, such as
+ * dual-mono.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT 0x00000001
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT 0x00000002
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER 0x00000004
+#define AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY 0x00000008
+#define AV_CH_BACK_LEFT 0x00000010
+#define AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT 0x00000020
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER 0x00000040
+#define AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER 0x00000080
+#define AV_CH_BACK_CENTER 0x00000100
+#define AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT 0x00000200
+#define AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT 0x00000400
+#define AV_CH_TOP_CENTER 0x00000800
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_LEFT 0x00001000
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_CENTER 0x00002000
+#define AV_CH_TOP_FRONT_RIGHT 0x00004000
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_LEFT 0x00008000
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_CENTER 0x00010000
+#define AV_CH_TOP_BACK_RIGHT 0x00020000
+#define AV_CH_STEREO_LEFT 0x20000000 ///< Stereo downmix.
+#define AV_CH_STEREO_RIGHT 0x40000000 ///< See AV_CH_STEREO_LEFT.
+#define AV_CH_WIDE_LEFT 0x0000000080000000ULL
+#define AV_CH_WIDE_RIGHT 0x0000000100000000ULL
+#define AV_CH_SURROUND_DIRECT_LEFT 0x0000000200000000ULL
+#define AV_CH_SURROUND_DIRECT_RIGHT 0x0000000400000000ULL
+#define AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY_2 0x0000000800000000ULL
+
+/** Channel mask value used for AVCodecContext.request_channel_layout
+ to indicate that the user requests the channel order of the decoder output
+ to be the native codec channel order. */
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_NATIVE 0x8000000000000000ULL
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @defgroup channel_mask_c Audio channel layouts
+ * @{
+ * */
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_MONO (AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO (AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_FRONT_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_3POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT0 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_4POINT0|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_2 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_QUAD (AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_SIDE_LEFT|AV_CH_SIDE_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK (AV_CH_LAYOUT_SURROUND|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT (AV_CH_LAYOUT_2_2|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_HEXAGONAL (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0_BACK|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_BACK (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT1_FRONT (AV_CH_LAYOUT_6POINT0_FRONT|AV_CH_LOW_FREQUENCY)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT0_FRONT (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1 (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_7POINT1_WIDE_BACK (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1_BACK|AV_CH_FRONT_LEFT_OF_CENTER|AV_CH_FRONT_RIGHT_OF_CENTER)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_OCTAGONAL (AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT0|AV_CH_BACK_LEFT|AV_CH_BACK_CENTER|AV_CH_BACK_RIGHT)
+#define AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO_DOWNMIX (AV_CH_STEREO_LEFT|AV_CH_STEREO_RIGHT)
+
+enum AVMatrixEncoding {
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_NONE,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBY,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLII,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLIIX,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DPLIIZ,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBYEX,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_DOLBYHEADPHONE,
+ AV_MATRIX_ENCODING_NB
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return a channel layout id that matches name, or 0 if no match is found.
+ *
+ * name can be one or several of the following notations,
+ * separated by '+' or '|':
+ * - the name of an usual channel layout (mono, stereo, 4.0, quad, 5.0,
+ * 5.0(side), 5.1, 5.1(side), 7.1, 7.1(wide), downmix);
+ * - the name of a single channel (FL, FR, FC, LFE, BL, BR, FLC, FRC, BC,
+ * SL, SR, TC, TFL, TFC, TFR, TBL, TBC, TBR, DL, DR);
+ * - a number of channels, in decimal, optionally followed by 'c', yielding
+ * the default channel layout for that number of channels (@see
+ * av_get_default_channel_layout);
+ * - a channel layout mask, in hexadecimal starting with "0x" (see the
+ * AV_CH_* macros).
+ *
+ * @warning Starting from the next major bump the trailing character
+ * 'c' to specify a number of channels will be required, while a
+ * channel layout mask could also be specified as a decimal number
+ * (if and only if not followed by "c").
+ *
+ * Example: "stereo+FC" = "2c+FC" = "2c+1c" = "0x7"
+ */
+uint64_t av_get_channel_layout(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return a description of a channel layout.
+ * If nb_channels is <= 0, it is guessed from the channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @param buf put here the string containing the channel layout
+ * @param buf_size size in bytes of the buffer
+ */
+void av_get_channel_layout_string(char *buf, int buf_size, int nb_channels, uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+struct AVBPrint;
+/**
+ * Append a description of a channel layout to a bprint buffer.
+ */
+void av_bprint_channel_layout(struct AVBPrint *bp, int nb_channels, uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of channels in the channel layout.
+ */
+int av_get_channel_layout_nb_channels(uint64_t channel_layout);
+
+/**
+ * Return default channel layout for a given number of channels.
+ */
+int64_t av_get_default_channel_layout(int nb_channels);
+
+/**
+ * Get the index of a channel in channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @param channel a channel layout describing exactly one channel which must be
+ * present in channel_layout.
+ *
+ * @return index of channel in channel_layout on success, a negative AVERROR
+ * on error.
+ */
+int av_get_channel_layout_channel_index(uint64_t channel_layout,
+ uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the channel with the given index in channel_layout.
+ */
+uint64_t av_channel_layout_extract_channel(uint64_t channel_layout, int index);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a given channel.
+ *
+ * @return channel name on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+const char *av_get_channel_name(uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the description of a given channel.
+ *
+ * @param channel a channel layout with a single channel
+ * @return channel description on success, NULL on error
+ */
+const char *av_get_channel_description(uint64_t channel);
+
+/**
+ * Get the value and name of a standard channel layout.
+ *
+ * @param[in] index index in an internal list, starting at 0
+ * @param[out] layout channel layout mask
+ * @param[out] name name of the layout
+ * @return 0 if the layout exists,
+ * <0 if index is beyond the limits
+ */
+int av_get_standard_channel_layout(unsigned index, uint64_t *layout,
+ const char **name);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/common.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/common.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c82a3a6240
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/common.h
@@ -0,0 +1,469 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * common internal and external API header
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_COMMON_H
+#define AVUTIL_COMMON_H
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS) && !defined(UINT64_C)
+#error missing -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS / #define __STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+#endif
+
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+# define AV_NE(be, le) (be)
+#else
+# define AV_NE(be, le) (le)
+#endif
+
+//rounded division & shift
+#define RSHIFT(a,b) ((a) > 0 ? ((a) + ((1<<(b))>>1))>>(b) : ((a) + ((1<<(b))>>1)-1)>>(b))
+/* assume b>0 */
+#define ROUNDED_DIV(a,b) (((a)>0 ? (a) + ((b)>>1) : (a) - ((b)>>1))/(b))
+/* assume a>0 and b>0 */
+#define FF_CEIL_RSHIFT(a,b) (!av_builtin_constant_p(b) ? -((-(a)) >> (b)) \
+ : ((a) + (1<<(b)) - 1) >> (b))
+#define FFUDIV(a,b) (((a)>0 ?(a):(a)-(b)+1) / (b))
+#define FFUMOD(a,b) ((a)-(b)*FFUDIV(a,b))
+#define FFABS(a) ((a) >= 0 ? (a) : (-(a)))
+#define FFSIGN(a) ((a) > 0 ? 1 : -1)
+
+#define FFMAX(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b))
+#define FFMAX3(a,b,c) FFMAX(FFMAX(a,b),c)
+#define FFMIN(a,b) ((a) > (b) ? (b) : (a))
+#define FFMIN3(a,b,c) FFMIN(FFMIN(a,b),c)
+
+#define FFSWAP(type,a,b) do{type SWAP_tmp= b; b= a; a= SWAP_tmp;}while(0)
+#define FF_ARRAY_ELEMS(a) (sizeof(a) / sizeof((a)[0]))
+#define FFALIGN(x, a) (((x)+(a)-1)&~((a)-1))
+
+/* misc math functions */
+
+/**
+ * Reverse the order of the bits of an 8-bits unsigned integer.
+ */
+#if FF_API_AV_REVERSE
+extern attribute_deprecated const uint8_t av_reverse[256];
+#endif
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+# include "config.h"
+# include "intmath.h"
+#endif
+
+/* Pull in unguarded fallback defines at the end of this file. */
+#include "common.h"
+
+#ifndef av_log2
+av_const int av_log2(unsigned v);
+#endif
+
+#ifndef av_log2_16bit
+av_const int av_log2_16bit(unsigned v);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the amin-amax range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_clip_c(int a, int amin, int amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+ if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+ if (a < amin) return amin;
+ else if (a > amax) return amax;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed 64bit integer value into the amin-amax range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int64_t av_clip64_c(int64_t a, int64_t amin, int64_t amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+ if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+ if (a < amin) return amin;
+ else if (a > amax) return amax;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the 0-255 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const uint8_t av_clip_uint8_c(int a)
+{
+ if (a&(~0xFF)) return (-a)>>31;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the -128,127 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int8_t av_clip_int8_c(int a)
+{
+ if ((a+0x80) & ~0xFF) return (a>>31) ^ 0x7F;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the 0-65535 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const uint16_t av_clip_uint16_c(int a)
+{
+ if (a&(~0xFFFF)) return (-a)>>31;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer value into the -32768,32767 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int16_t av_clip_int16_c(int a)
+{
+ if ((a+0x8000) & ~0xFFFF) return (a>>31) ^ 0x7FFF;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed 64-bit integer value into the -2147483648,2147483647 range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int32_t av_clipl_int32_c(int64_t a)
+{
+ if ((a+0x80000000u) & ~UINT64_C(0xFFFFFFFF)) return (int32_t)((a>>63) ^ 0x7FFFFFFF);
+ else return (int32_t)a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a signed integer to an unsigned power of two range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param p bit position to clip at
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const unsigned av_clip_uintp2_c(int a, int p)
+{
+ if (a & ~((1<> 31 & ((1<= 2
+ if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+ if (a < amin) return amin;
+ else if (a > amax) return amax;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Clip a double value into the amin-amax range.
+ * @param a value to clip
+ * @param amin minimum value of the clip range
+ * @param amax maximum value of the clip range
+ * @return clipped value
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const double av_clipd_c(double a, double amin, double amax)
+{
+#if defined(HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H) && defined(ASSERT_LEVEL) && ASSERT_LEVEL >= 2
+ if (amin > amax) abort();
+#endif
+ if (a < amin) return amin;
+ else if (a > amax) return amax;
+ else return a;
+}
+
+/** Compute ceil(log2(x)).
+ * @param x value used to compute ceil(log2(x))
+ * @return computed ceiling of log2(x)
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_ceil_log2_c(int x)
+{
+ return av_log2((x - 1) << 1);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Count number of bits set to one in x
+ * @param x value to count bits of
+ * @return the number of bits set to one in x
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_popcount_c(uint32_t x)
+{
+ x -= (x >> 1) & 0x55555555;
+ x = (x & 0x33333333) + ((x >> 2) & 0x33333333);
+ x = (x + (x >> 4)) & 0x0F0F0F0F;
+ x += x >> 8;
+ return (x + (x >> 16)) & 0x3F;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Count number of bits set to one in x
+ * @param x value to count bits of
+ * @return the number of bits set to one in x
+ */
+static av_always_inline av_const int av_popcount64_c(uint64_t x)
+{
+ return av_popcount((uint32_t)x) + av_popcount((uint32_t)(x >> 32));
+}
+
+#define MKTAG(a,b,c,d) ((a) | ((b) << 8) | ((c) << 16) | ((unsigned)(d) << 24))
+#define MKBETAG(a,b,c,d) ((d) | ((c) << 8) | ((b) << 16) | ((unsigned)(a) << 24))
+
+/**
+ * Convert a UTF-8 character (up to 4 bytes) to its 32-bit UCS-4 encoded form.
+ *
+ * @param val Output value, must be an lvalue of type uint32_t.
+ * @param GET_BYTE Expression reading one byte from the input.
+ * Evaluated up to 7 times (4 for the currently
+ * assigned Unicode range). With a memory buffer
+ * input, this could be *ptr++.
+ * @param ERROR Expression to be evaluated on invalid input,
+ * typically a goto statement.
+ *
+ * @warning ERROR should not contain a loop control statement which
+ * could interact with the internal while loop, and should force an
+ * exit from the macro code (e.g. through a goto or a return) in order
+ * to prevent undefined results.
+ */
+#define GET_UTF8(val, GET_BYTE, ERROR)\
+ val= GET_BYTE;\
+ {\
+ uint32_t top = (val & 128) >> 1;\
+ if ((val & 0xc0) == 0x80 || val >= 0xFE)\
+ ERROR\
+ while (val & top) {\
+ int tmp= GET_BYTE - 128;\
+ if(tmp>>6)\
+ ERROR\
+ val= (val<<6) + tmp;\
+ top <<= 5;\
+ }\
+ val &= (top << 1) - 1;\
+ }
+
+/**
+ * Convert a UTF-16 character (2 or 4 bytes) to its 32-bit UCS-4 encoded form.
+ *
+ * @param val Output value, must be an lvalue of type uint32_t.
+ * @param GET_16BIT Expression returning two bytes of UTF-16 data converted
+ * to native byte order. Evaluated one or two times.
+ * @param ERROR Expression to be evaluated on invalid input,
+ * typically a goto statement.
+ */
+#define GET_UTF16(val, GET_16BIT, ERROR)\
+ val = GET_16BIT;\
+ {\
+ unsigned int hi = val - 0xD800;\
+ if (hi < 0x800) {\
+ val = GET_16BIT - 0xDC00;\
+ if (val > 0x3FFU || hi > 0x3FFU)\
+ ERROR\
+ val += (hi<<10) + 0x10000;\
+ }\
+ }\
+
+/**
+ * @def PUT_UTF8(val, tmp, PUT_BYTE)
+ * Convert a 32-bit Unicode character to its UTF-8 encoded form (up to 4 bytes long).
+ * @param val is an input-only argument and should be of type uint32_t. It holds
+ * a UCS-4 encoded Unicode character that is to be converted to UTF-8. If
+ * val is given as a function it is executed only once.
+ * @param tmp is a temporary variable and should be of type uint8_t. It
+ * represents an intermediate value during conversion that is to be
+ * output by PUT_BYTE.
+ * @param PUT_BYTE writes the converted UTF-8 bytes to any proper destination.
+ * It could be a function or a statement, and uses tmp as the input byte.
+ * For example, PUT_BYTE could be "*output++ = tmp;" PUT_BYTE will be
+ * executed up to 4 times for values in the valid UTF-8 range and up to
+ * 7 times in the general case, depending on the length of the converted
+ * Unicode character.
+ */
+#define PUT_UTF8(val, tmp, PUT_BYTE)\
+ {\
+ int bytes, shift;\
+ uint32_t in = val;\
+ if (in < 0x80) {\
+ tmp = in;\
+ PUT_BYTE\
+ } else {\
+ bytes = (av_log2(in) + 4) / 5;\
+ shift = (bytes - 1) * 6;\
+ tmp = (256 - (256 >> bytes)) | (in >> shift);\
+ PUT_BYTE\
+ while (shift >= 6) {\
+ shift -= 6;\
+ tmp = 0x80 | ((in >> shift) & 0x3f);\
+ PUT_BYTE\
+ }\
+ }\
+ }
+
+/**
+ * @def PUT_UTF16(val, tmp, PUT_16BIT)
+ * Convert a 32-bit Unicode character to its UTF-16 encoded form (2 or 4 bytes).
+ * @param val is an input-only argument and should be of type uint32_t. It holds
+ * a UCS-4 encoded Unicode character that is to be converted to UTF-16. If
+ * val is given as a function it is executed only once.
+ * @param tmp is a temporary variable and should be of type uint16_t. It
+ * represents an intermediate value during conversion that is to be
+ * output by PUT_16BIT.
+ * @param PUT_16BIT writes the converted UTF-16 data to any proper destination
+ * in desired endianness. It could be a function or a statement, and uses tmp
+ * as the input byte. For example, PUT_BYTE could be "*output++ = tmp;"
+ * PUT_BYTE will be executed 1 or 2 times depending on input character.
+ */
+#define PUT_UTF16(val, tmp, PUT_16BIT)\
+ {\
+ uint32_t in = val;\
+ if (in < 0x10000) {\
+ tmp = in;\
+ PUT_16BIT\
+ } else {\
+ tmp = 0xD800 | ((in - 0x10000) >> 10);\
+ PUT_16BIT\
+ tmp = 0xDC00 | ((in - 0x10000) & 0x3FF);\
+ PUT_16BIT\
+ }\
+ }\
+
+
+
+#include "mem.h"
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+# include "internal.h"
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_COMMON_H */
+
+/*
+ * The following definitions are outside the multiple inclusion guard
+ * to ensure they are immediately available in intmath.h.
+ */
+
+#ifndef av_ceil_log2
+# define av_ceil_log2 av_ceil_log2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip
+# define av_clip av_clip_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip64
+# define av_clip64 av_clip64_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uint8
+# define av_clip_uint8 av_clip_uint8_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_int8
+# define av_clip_int8 av_clip_int8_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uint16
+# define av_clip_uint16 av_clip_uint16_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_int16
+# define av_clip_int16 av_clip_int16_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipl_int32
+# define av_clipl_int32 av_clipl_int32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clip_uintp2
+# define av_clip_uintp2 av_clip_uintp2_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_add32
+# define av_sat_add32 av_sat_add32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_sat_dadd32
+# define av_sat_dadd32 av_sat_dadd32_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipf
+# define av_clipf av_clipf_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_clipd
+# define av_clipd av_clipd_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_popcount
+# define av_popcount av_popcount_c
+#endif
+#ifndef av_popcount64
+# define av_popcount64 av_popcount64_c
+#endif
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cpu.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cpu.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..277e489788
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/cpu.h
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2002 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CPU_H
+#define AVUTIL_CPU_H
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FORCE 0x80000000 /* force usage of selected flags (OR) */
+
+ /* lower 16 bits - CPU features */
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMX 0x0001 ///< standard MMX
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMXEXT 0x0002 ///< SSE integer functions or AMD MMX ext
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_MMX2 0x0002 ///< SSE integer functions or AMD MMX ext
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_3DNOW 0x0004 ///< AMD 3DNOW
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE 0x0008 ///< SSE functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE2 0x0010 ///< PIV SSE2 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE2SLOW 0x40000000 ///< SSE2 supported, but usually not faster
+ ///< than regular MMX/SSE (e.g. Core1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_3DNOWEXT 0x0020 ///< AMD 3DNowExt
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE3 0x0040 ///< Prescott SSE3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE3SLOW 0x20000000 ///< SSE3 supported, but usually not faster
+ ///< than regular MMX/SSE (e.g. Core1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSSE3 0x0080 ///< Conroe SSSE3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ATOM 0x10000000 ///< Atom processor, some SSSE3 instructions are slower
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE4 0x0100 ///< Penryn SSE4.1 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SSE42 0x0200 ///< Nehalem SSE4.2 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX 0x4000 ///< AVX functions: requires OS support even if YMM registers aren't used
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_XOP 0x0400 ///< Bulldozer XOP functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FMA4 0x0800 ///< Bulldozer FMA4 functions
+// #if LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR <52
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_CMOV 0x1001000 ///< supports cmov instruction
+// #else
+// #define AV_CPU_FLAG_CMOV 0x1000 ///< supports cmov instruction
+// #endif
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_AVX2 0x8000 ///< AVX2 functions: requires OS support even if YMM registers aren't used
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_FMA3 0x10000 ///< Haswell FMA3 functions
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_BMI1 0x20000 ///< Bit Manipulation Instruction Set 1
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_BMI2 0x40000 ///< Bit Manipulation Instruction Set 2
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ALTIVEC 0x0001 ///< standard
+
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV5TE (1 << 0)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV6 (1 << 1)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV6T2 (1 << 2)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VFP (1 << 3)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_VFPV3 (1 << 4)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_NEON (1 << 5)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_ARMV8 (1 << 6)
+#define AV_CPU_FLAG_SETEND (1 <<16)
+
+/**
+ * Return the flags which specify extensions supported by the CPU.
+ * The returned value is affected by av_force_cpu_flags() if that was used
+ * before. So av_get_cpu_flags() can easily be used in a application to
+ * detect the enabled cpu flags.
+ */
+int av_get_cpu_flags(void);
+
+/**
+ * Disables cpu detection and forces the specified flags.
+ * -1 is a special case that disables forcing of specific flags.
+ */
+void av_force_cpu_flags(int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set a mask on flags returned by av_get_cpu_flags().
+ * This function is mainly useful for testing.
+ * Please use av_force_cpu_flags() and av_get_cpu_flags() instead which are more flexible
+ *
+ * @warning this function is not thread safe.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated void av_set_cpu_flags_mask(int mask);
+
+/**
+ * Parse CPU flags from a string.
+ *
+ * The returned flags contain the specified flags as well as related unspecified flags.
+ *
+ * This function exists only for compatibility with libav.
+ * Please use av_parse_cpu_caps() when possible.
+ * @return a combination of AV_CPU_* flags, negative on error.
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_parse_cpu_flags(const char *s);
+
+/**
+ * Parse CPU caps from a string and update the given AV_CPU_* flags based on that.
+ *
+ * @return negative on error.
+ */
+int av_parse_cpu_caps(unsigned *flags, const char *s);
+
+/**
+ * @return the number of logical CPU cores present.
+ */
+int av_cpu_count(void);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CPU_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/crc.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/crc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e86bf1deba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/crc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_CRC_H
+#define AVUTIL_CRC_H
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_crc32 CRC32
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef uint32_t AVCRC;
+
+typedef enum {
+ AV_CRC_8_ATM,
+ AV_CRC_16_ANSI,
+ AV_CRC_16_CCITT,
+ AV_CRC_32_IEEE,
+ AV_CRC_32_IEEE_LE, /*< reversed bitorder version of AV_CRC_32_IEEE */
+ AV_CRC_16_ANSI_LE, /*< reversed bitorder version of AV_CRC_16_ANSI */
+ AV_CRC_24_IEEE = 12,
+ AV_CRC_MAX, /*< Not part of public API! Do not use outside libavutil. */
+}AVCRCId;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a CRC table.
+ * @param ctx must be an array of size sizeof(AVCRC)*257 or sizeof(AVCRC)*1024
+ * @param le If 1, the lowest bit represents the coefficient for the highest
+ * exponent of the corresponding polynomial (both for poly and
+ * actual CRC).
+ * If 0, you must swap the CRC parameter and the result of av_crc
+ * if you need the standard representation (can be simplified in
+ * most cases to e.g. bswap16):
+ * av_bswap32(crc << (32-bits))
+ * @param bits number of bits for the CRC
+ * @param poly generator polynomial without the x**bits coefficient, in the
+ * representation as specified by le
+ * @param ctx_size size of ctx in bytes
+ * @return <0 on failure
+ */
+int av_crc_init(AVCRC *ctx, int le, int bits, uint32_t poly, int ctx_size);
+
+/**
+ * Get an initialized standard CRC table.
+ * @param crc_id ID of a standard CRC
+ * @return a pointer to the CRC table or NULL on failure
+ */
+const AVCRC *av_crc_get_table(AVCRCId crc_id);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the CRC of a block.
+ * @param crc CRC of previous blocks if any or initial value for CRC
+ * @return CRC updated with the data from the given block
+ *
+ * @see av_crc_init() "le" parameter
+ */
+uint32_t av_crc(const AVCRC *ctx, uint32_t crc,
+ const uint8_t *buffer, size_t length) av_pure;
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_CRC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/dict.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/dict.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f2df687c03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/dict.h
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Public dictionary API.
+ * @deprecated
+ * AVDictionary is provided for compatibility with libav. It is both in
+ * implementation as well as API inefficient. It does not scale and is
+ * extremely slow with large dictionaries.
+ * It is recommended that new code uses our tree container from tree.c/h
+ * where applicable, which uses AVL trees to achieve O(log n) performance.
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DICT_H
+#define AVUTIL_DICT_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_dict AVDictionary
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @brief Simple key:value store
+ *
+ * @{
+ * Dictionaries are used for storing key:value pairs. To create
+ * an AVDictionary, simply pass an address of a NULL pointer to
+ * av_dict_set(). NULL can be used as an empty dictionary wherever
+ * a pointer to an AVDictionary is required.
+ * Use av_dict_get() to retrieve an entry or iterate over all
+ * entries and finally av_dict_free() to free the dictionary
+ * and all its contents.
+ *
+ @code
+ AVDictionary *d = NULL; // "create" an empty dictionary
+ AVDictionaryEntry *t = NULL;
+
+ av_dict_set(&d, "foo", "bar", 0); // add an entry
+
+ char *k = av_strdup("key"); // if your strings are already allocated,
+ char *v = av_strdup("value"); // you can avoid copying them like this
+ av_dict_set(&d, k, v, AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY | AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL);
+
+ while (t = av_dict_get(d, "", t, AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX)) {
+ <....> // iterate over all entries in d
+ }
+ av_dict_free(&d);
+ @endcode
+ *
+ */
+
+#define AV_DICT_MATCH_CASE 1 /**< Only get an entry with exact-case key match. Only relevant in av_dict_get(). */
+#define AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX 2 /**< Return first entry in a dictionary whose first part corresponds to the search key,
+ ignoring the suffix of the found key string. Only relevant in av_dict_get(). */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY 4 /**< Take ownership of a key that's been
+ allocated with av_malloc() or another memory allocation function. */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL 8 /**< Take ownership of a value that's been
+ allocated with av_malloc() or another memory allocation function. */
+#define AV_DICT_DONT_OVERWRITE 16 ///< Don't overwrite existing entries.
+#define AV_DICT_APPEND 32 /**< If the entry already exists, append to it. Note that no
+ delimiter is added, the strings are simply concatenated. */
+
+typedef struct AVDictionaryEntry {
+ char *key;
+ char *value;
+} AVDictionaryEntry;
+
+typedef struct AVDictionary AVDictionary;
+
+/**
+ * Get a dictionary entry with matching key.
+ *
+ * The returned entry key or value must not be changed, or it will
+ * cause undefined behavior.
+ *
+ * To iterate through all the dictionary entries, you can set the matching key
+ * to the null string "" and set the AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX flag.
+ *
+ * @param prev Set to the previous matching element to find the next.
+ * If set to NULL the first matching element is returned.
+ * @param key matching key
+ * @param flags a collection of AV_DICT_* flags controlling how the entry is retrieved
+ * @return found entry or NULL in case no matching entry was found in the dictionary
+ */
+AVDictionaryEntry *av_dict_get(const AVDictionary *m, const char *key,
+ const AVDictionaryEntry *prev, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Get number of entries in dictionary.
+ *
+ * @param m dictionary
+ * @return number of entries in dictionary
+ */
+int av_dict_count(const AVDictionary *m);
+
+/**
+ * Set the given entry in *pm, overwriting an existing entry.
+ *
+ * Note: If AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY or AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL is set,
+ * these arguments will be freed on error.
+ *
+ * @param pm pointer to a pointer to a dictionary struct. If *pm is NULL
+ * a dictionary struct is allocated and put in *pm.
+ * @param key entry key to add to *pm (will be av_strduped depending on flags)
+ * @param value entry value to add to *pm (will be av_strduped depending on flags).
+ * Passing a NULL value will cause an existing entry to be deleted.
+ * @return >= 0 on success otherwise an error code <0
+ */
+int av_dict_set(AVDictionary **pm, const char *key, const char *value, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Convenience wrapper for av_dict_set that converts the value to a string
+ * and stores it.
+ *
+ * Note: If AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY is set, key will be freed on error.
+ */
+int av_dict_set_int(AVDictionary **pm, const char *key, int64_t value, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key/value pairs list and add the parsed entries to a dictionary.
+ *
+ * In case of failure, all the successfully set entries are stored in
+ * *pm. You may need to manually free the created dictionary.
+ *
+ * @param key_val_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * key from value
+ * @param pairs_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * two pairs from each other
+ * @param flags flags to use when adding to dictionary.
+ * AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_KEY and AV_DICT_DONT_STRDUP_VAL
+ * are ignored since the key/value tokens will always
+ * be duplicated.
+ * @return 0 on success, negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int av_dict_parse_string(AVDictionary **pm, const char *str,
+ const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep,
+ int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Copy entries from one AVDictionary struct into another.
+ * @param dst pointer to a pointer to a AVDictionary struct. If *dst is NULL,
+ * this function will allocate a struct for you and put it in *dst
+ * @param src pointer to source AVDictionary struct
+ * @param flags flags to use when setting entries in *dst
+ * @note metadata is read using the AV_DICT_IGNORE_SUFFIX flag
+ */
+void av_dict_copy(AVDictionary **dst, const AVDictionary *src, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Free all the memory allocated for an AVDictionary struct
+ * and all keys and values.
+ */
+void av_dict_free(AVDictionary **m);
+
+/**
+ * Get dictionary entries as a string.
+ *
+ * Create a string containing dictionary's entries.
+ * Such string may be passed back to av_dict_parse_string().
+ * @note String is escaped with backslashes ('\').
+ *
+ * @param[in] m dictionary
+ * @param[out] buffer Pointer to buffer that will be allocated with string containg entries.
+ * Buffer must be freed by the caller when is no longer needed.
+ * @param[in] key_val_sep character used to separate key from value
+ * @param[in] pairs_sep character used to separate two pairs from each other
+ * @return >= 0 on success, negative on error
+ * @warning Separators cannot be neither '\\' nor '\0'. They also cannot be the same.
+ */
+int av_dict_get_string(const AVDictionary *m, char **buffer,
+ const char key_val_sep, const char pairs_sep);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DICT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/display.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/display.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2cb930dde1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/display.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Vittorio Giovara
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H
+#define AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * The display transformation matrix specifies an affine transformation that
+ * should be applied to video frames for correct presentation. It is compatible
+ * with the matrices stored in the ISO/IEC 14496-12 container format.
+ *
+ * The data is a 3x3 matrix represented as a 9-element array:
+ *
+ * | a b u |
+ * (a, b, u, c, d, v, x, y, w) -> | c d v |
+ * | x y w |
+ *
+ * All numbers are stored in native endianness, as 16.16 fixed-point values,
+ * except for u, v and w, which are stored as 2.30 fixed-point values.
+ *
+ * The transformation maps a point (p, q) in the source (pre-transformation)
+ * frame to the point (p', q') in the destination (post-transformation) frame as
+ * follows:
+ * | a b u |
+ * (p, q, 1) . | c d v | = z * (p', q', 1)
+ * | x y w |
+ *
+ * The transformation can also be more explicitly written in components as
+ * follows:
+ * p' = (a * p + c * q + x) / z;
+ * q' = (b * p + d * q + y) / z;
+ * z = u * p + v * q + w
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Extract the rotation component of the transformation matrix.
+ *
+ * @param matrix the transformation matrix
+ * @return the angle (in degrees) by which the transformation rotates the frame.
+ * The angle will be in range [-180.0, 180.0], or NaN if the matrix is
+ * singular.
+ *
+ * @note floating point numbers are inherently inexact, so callers are
+ * recommended to round the return value to nearest integer before use.
+ */
+double av_display_rotation_get(const int32_t matrix[9]);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize a transformation matrix describing a pure rotation by the
+ * specified angle (in degrees).
+ *
+ * @param matrix an allocated transformation matrix (will be fully overwritten
+ * by this function)
+ * @param angle rotation angle in degrees.
+ */
+void av_display_rotation_set(int32_t matrix[9], double angle);
+
+/**
+ * Flip the input matrix horizontally and/or vertically.
+ *
+ * @param matrix an allocated transformation matrix
+ * @param hflip whether the matrix should be flipped horizontally
+ * @param vflip whether the matrix should be flipped vertically
+ */
+void av_display_matrix_flip(int32_t matrix[9], int hflip, int vflip);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DISPLAY_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..221cf5bf9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/downmix_info.h
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2014 Tim Walker
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * audio downmix medatata
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup downmix_info Audio downmix metadata
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Possible downmix types.
+ */
+enum AVDownmixType {
+ AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_UNKNOWN, /**< Not indicated. */
+ AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_LORO, /**< Lo/Ro 2-channel downmix (Stereo). */
+ AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_LTRT, /**< Lt/Rt 2-channel downmix, Dolby Surround compatible. */
+ AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_DPLII, /**< Lt/Rt 2-channel downmix, Dolby Pro Logic II compatible. */
+ AV_DOWNMIX_TYPE_NB /**< Number of downmix types. Not part of ABI. */
+};
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes optional metadata relevant to a downmix procedure.
+ *
+ * All fields are set by the decoder to the value indicated in the audio
+ * bitstream (if present), or to a "sane" default otherwise.
+ */
+typedef struct AVDownmixInfo {
+ /**
+ * Type of downmix preferred by the mastering engineer.
+ */
+ enum AVDownmixType preferred_downmix_type;
+
+ /**
+ * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the center
+ * channel during a regular downmix.
+ */
+ double center_mix_level;
+
+ /**
+ * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the center
+ * channel during an Lt/Rt compatible downmix.
+ */
+ double center_mix_level_ltrt;
+
+ /**
+ * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the surround
+ * channels during a regular downmix.
+ */
+ double surround_mix_level;
+
+ /**
+ * Absolute scale factor representing the nominal level of the surround
+ * channels during an Lt/Rt compatible downmix.
+ */
+ double surround_mix_level_ltrt;
+
+ /**
+ * Absolute scale factor representing the level at which the LFE data is
+ * mixed into L/R channels during downmixing.
+ */
+ double lfe_mix_level;
+} AVDownmixInfo;
+
+/**
+ * Get a frame's AV_FRAME_DATA_DOWNMIX_INFO side data for editing.
+ *
+ * If the side data is absent, it is created and added to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame the frame for which the side data is to be obtained or created
+ *
+ * @return the AVDownmixInfo structure to be edited by the caller, or NULL if
+ * the structure cannot be allocated.
+ */
+AVDownmixInfo *av_downmix_info_update_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_DOWNMIX_INFO_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/error.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/error.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71df4da353
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/error.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * error code definitions
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_ERROR_H
+#define AVUTIL_ERROR_H
+
+#include
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_error
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/* error handling */
+#if EDOM > 0
+#define AVERROR(e) (-(e)) ///< Returns a negative error code from a POSIX error code, to return from library functions.
+#define AVUNERROR(e) (-(e)) ///< Returns a POSIX error code from a library function error return value.
+#else
+/* Some platforms have E* and errno already negated. */
+#define AVERROR(e) (e)
+#define AVUNERROR(e) (e)
+#endif
+
+#define FFERRTAG(a, b, c, d) (-(int)MKTAG(a, b, c, d))
+
+#define AVERROR_BSF_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'B','S','F') ///< Bitstream filter not found
+#define AVERROR_BUG FFERRTAG( 'B','U','G','!') ///< Internal bug, also see AVERROR_BUG2
+#define AVERROR_BUFFER_TOO_SMALL FFERRTAG( 'B','U','F','S') ///< Buffer too small
+#define AVERROR_DECODER_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'D','E','C') ///< Decoder not found
+#define AVERROR_DEMUXER_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'D','E','M') ///< Demuxer not found
+#define AVERROR_ENCODER_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'E','N','C') ///< Encoder not found
+#define AVERROR_EOF FFERRTAG( 'E','O','F',' ') ///< End of file
+#define AVERROR_EXIT FFERRTAG( 'E','X','I','T') ///< Immediate exit was requested; the called function should not be restarted
+#define AVERROR_EXTERNAL FFERRTAG( 'E','X','T',' ') ///< Generic error in an external library
+#define AVERROR_FILTER_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'F','I','L') ///< Filter not found
+#define AVERROR_INVALIDDATA FFERRTAG( 'I','N','D','A') ///< Invalid data found when processing input
+#define AVERROR_MUXER_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'M','U','X') ///< Muxer not found
+#define AVERROR_OPTION_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'O','P','T') ///< Option not found
+#define AVERROR_PATCHWELCOME FFERRTAG( 'P','A','W','E') ///< Not yet implemented in FFmpeg, patches welcome
+#define AVERROR_PROTOCOL_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'P','R','O') ///< Protocol not found
+
+#define AVERROR_STREAM_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'S','T','R') ///< Stream not found
+/**
+ * This is semantically identical to AVERROR_BUG
+ * it has been introduced in Libav after our AVERROR_BUG and with a modified value.
+ */
+#define AVERROR_BUG2 FFERRTAG( 'B','U','G',' ')
+#define AVERROR_UNKNOWN FFERRTAG( 'U','N','K','N') ///< Unknown error, typically from an external library
+#define AVERROR_EXPERIMENTAL (-0x2bb2afa8) ///< Requested feature is flagged experimental. Set strict_std_compliance if you really want to use it.
+#define AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED (-0x636e6701) ///< Input changed between calls. Reconfiguration is required. (can be OR-ed with AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED)
+#define AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED (-0x636e6702) ///< Output changed between calls. Reconfiguration is required. (can be OR-ed with AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED)
+/* HTTP & RTSP errors */
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_BAD_REQUEST FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','0')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_UNAUTHORIZED FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','1')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_FORBIDDEN FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','3')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_NOT_FOUND FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','0','4')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_OTHER_4XX FFERRTAG(0xF8,'4','X','X')
+#define AVERROR_HTTP_SERVER_ERROR FFERRTAG(0xF8,'5','X','X')
+
+#define AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE 64
+
+/**
+ * Put a description of the AVERROR code errnum in errbuf.
+ * In case of failure the global variable errno is set to indicate the
+ * error. Even in case of failure av_strerror() will print a generic
+ * error message indicating the errnum provided to errbuf.
+ *
+ * @param errnum error code to describe
+ * @param errbuf buffer to which description is written
+ * @param errbuf_size the size in bytes of errbuf
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative value if a description for errnum
+ * cannot be found
+ */
+int av_strerror(int errnum, char *errbuf, size_t errbuf_size);
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing an error string
+ * corresponding to the AVERROR code errnum.
+ *
+ * @param errbuf a buffer
+ * @param errbuf_size size in bytes of errbuf
+ * @param errnum error code to describe
+ * @return the buffer in input, filled with the error description
+ * @see av_strerror()
+ */
+static inline char *av_make_error_string(char *errbuf, size_t errbuf_size, int errnum)
+{
+ av_strerror(errnum, errbuf, errbuf_size);
+ return errbuf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_err2str(errnum) \
+ av_make_error_string((char[AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, AV_ERROR_MAX_STRING_SIZE, errnum)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_ERROR_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/eval.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/eval.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6159b0fe58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/eval.h
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2002 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * simple arithmetic expression evaluator
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_EVAL_H
+#define AVUTIL_EVAL_H
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+
+typedef struct AVExpr AVExpr;
+
+/**
+ * Parse and evaluate an expression.
+ * Note, this is significantly slower than av_expr_eval().
+ *
+ * @param res a pointer to a double where is put the result value of
+ * the expression, or NAN in case of error
+ * @param s expression as a zero terminated string, for example "1+2^3+5*5+sin(2/3)"
+ * @param const_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of constant identifiers, for example {"PI", "E", 0}
+ * @param const_values a zero terminated array of values for the identifiers from const_names
+ * @param func1_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs1 identifiers
+ * @param funcs1 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 1 argument
+ * @param func2_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs2 identifiers
+ * @param funcs2 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 2 arguments
+ * @param opaque a pointer which will be passed to all functions from funcs1 and funcs2
+ * @param log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_expr_parse_and_eval(double *res, const char *s,
+ const char * const *const_names, const double *const_values,
+ const char * const *func1_names, double (* const *funcs1)(void *, double),
+ const char * const *func2_names, double (* const *funcs2)(void *, double, double),
+ void *opaque, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Parse an expression.
+ *
+ * @param expr a pointer where is put an AVExpr containing the parsed
+ * value in case of successful parsing, or NULL otherwise.
+ * The pointed to AVExpr must be freed with av_expr_free() by the user
+ * when it is not needed anymore.
+ * @param s expression as a zero terminated string, for example "1+2^3+5*5+sin(2/3)"
+ * @param const_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of constant identifiers, for example {"PI", "E", 0}
+ * @param func1_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs1 identifiers
+ * @param funcs1 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 1 argument
+ * @param func2_names NULL terminated array of zero terminated strings of funcs2 identifiers
+ * @param funcs2 NULL terminated array of function pointers for functions which take 2 arguments
+ * @param log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_expr_parse(AVExpr **expr, const char *s,
+ const char * const *const_names,
+ const char * const *func1_names, double (* const *funcs1)(void *, double),
+ const char * const *func2_names, double (* const *funcs2)(void *, double, double),
+ int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Evaluate a previously parsed expression.
+ *
+ * @param const_values a zero terminated array of values for the identifiers from av_expr_parse() const_names
+ * @param opaque a pointer which will be passed to all functions from funcs1 and funcs2
+ * @return the value of the expression
+ */
+double av_expr_eval(AVExpr *e, const double *const_values, void *opaque);
+
+/**
+ * Free a parsed expression previously created with av_expr_parse().
+ */
+void av_expr_free(AVExpr *e);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the string in numstr and return its value as a double. If
+ * the string is empty, contains only whitespaces, or does not contain
+ * an initial substring that has the expected syntax for a
+ * floating-point number, no conversion is performed. In this case,
+ * returns a value of zero and the value returned in tail is the value
+ * of numstr.
+ *
+ * @param numstr a string representing a number, may contain one of
+ * the International System number postfixes, for example 'K', 'M',
+ * 'G'. If 'i' is appended after the postfix, powers of 2 are used
+ * instead of powers of 10. The 'B' postfix multiplies the value for
+ * 8, and can be appended after another postfix or used alone. This
+ * allows using for example 'KB', 'MiB', 'G' and 'B' as postfix.
+ * @param tail if non-NULL puts here the pointer to the char next
+ * after the last parsed character
+ */
+double av_strtod(const char *numstr, char **tail);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_EVAL_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ffversion.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ffversion.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..15f077f414
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ffversion.h
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H
+#define AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H
+#define FFMPEG_VERSION "N-69060-gcd960c8"
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FFVERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/fifo.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/fifo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f3bdcbceb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/fifo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,158 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * a very simple circular buffer FIFO implementation
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FIFO_H
+#define AVUTIL_FIFO_H
+
+#include
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+typedef struct AVFifoBuffer {
+ uint8_t *buffer;
+ uint8_t *rptr, *wptr, *end;
+ uint32_t rndx, wndx;
+} AVFifoBuffer;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param size of FIFO
+ * @return AVFifoBuffer or NULL in case of memory allocation failure
+ */
+AVFifoBuffer *av_fifo_alloc(unsigned int size);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param nmemb number of elements
+ * @param size size of the single element
+ * @return AVFifoBuffer or NULL in case of memory allocation failure
+ */
+AVFifoBuffer *av_fifo_alloc_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to free
+ */
+void av_fifo_free(AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVFifoBuffer and reset pointer to NULL.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to free
+ */
+void av_fifo_freep(AVFifoBuffer **f);
+
+/**
+ * Reset the AVFifoBuffer to the state right after av_fifo_alloc, in particular it is emptied.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to reset
+ */
+void av_fifo_reset(AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Return the amount of data in bytes in the AVFifoBuffer, that is the
+ * amount of data you can read from it.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @return size
+ */
+int av_fifo_size(const AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Return the amount of space in bytes in the AVFifoBuffer, that is the
+ * amount of data you can write into it.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to write into
+ * @return size
+ */
+int av_fifo_space(const AVFifoBuffer *f);
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from an AVFifoBuffer to a user-supplied callback.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param buf_size number of bytes to read
+ * @param func generic read function
+ * @param dest data destination
+ */
+int av_fifo_generic_read(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *dest, int buf_size, void (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Feed data from a user-supplied callback to an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to write to
+ * @param src data source; non-const since it may be used as a
+ * modifiable context by the function defined in func
+ * @param size number of bytes to write
+ * @param func generic write function; the first parameter is src,
+ * the second is dest_buf, the third is dest_buf_size.
+ * func must return the number of bytes written to dest_buf, or <= 0 to
+ * indicate no more data available to write.
+ * If func is NULL, src is interpreted as a simple byte array for source data.
+ * @return the number of bytes written to the FIFO
+ */
+int av_fifo_generic_write(AVFifoBuffer *f, void *src, int size, int (*func)(void*, void*, int));
+
+/**
+ * Resize an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * In case of reallocation failure, the old FIFO is kept unchanged.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to resize
+ * @param size new AVFifoBuffer size in bytes
+ * @return <0 for failure, >=0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_fifo_realloc2(AVFifoBuffer *f, unsigned int size);
+
+/**
+ * Enlarge an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * In case of reallocation failure, the old FIFO is kept unchanged.
+ * The new fifo size may be larger than the requested size.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to resize
+ * @param additional_space the amount of space in bytes to allocate in addition to av_fifo_size()
+ * @return <0 for failure, >=0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_fifo_grow(AVFifoBuffer *f, unsigned int additional_space);
+
+/**
+ * Read and discard the specified amount of data from an AVFifoBuffer.
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to read from
+ * @param size amount of data to read in bytes
+ */
+void av_fifo_drain(AVFifoBuffer *f, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Return a pointer to the data stored in a FIFO buffer at a certain offset.
+ * The FIFO buffer is not modified.
+ *
+ * @param f AVFifoBuffer to peek at, f must be non-NULL
+ * @param offs an offset in bytes, its absolute value must be less
+ * than the used buffer size or the returned pointer will
+ * point outside to the buffer data.
+ * The used buffer size can be checked with av_fifo_size().
+ */
+static inline uint8_t *av_fifo_peek2(const AVFifoBuffer *f, int offs)
+{
+ uint8_t *ptr = f->rptr + offs;
+ if (ptr >= f->end)
+ ptr = f->buffer + (ptr - f->end);
+ else if (ptr < f->buffer)
+ ptr = f->end - (f->buffer - ptr);
+ return ptr;
+}
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FIFO_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/file.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/file.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1cae2951be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/file.h
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FILE_H
+#define AVUTIL_FILE_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Misc file utilities.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Read the file with name filename, and put its content in a newly
+ * allocated buffer or map it with mmap() when available.
+ * In case of success set *bufptr to the read or mmapped buffer, and
+ * *size to the size in bytes of the buffer in *bufptr.
+ * The returned buffer must be released with av_file_unmap().
+ *
+ * @param log_offset loglevel offset used for logging
+ * @param log_ctx context used for logging
+ * @return a non negative number in case of success, a negative value
+ * corresponding to an AVERROR error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_file_map(const char *filename, uint8_t **bufptr, size_t *size,
+ int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Unmap or free the buffer bufptr created by av_file_map().
+ *
+ * @param size size in bytes of bufptr, must be the same as returned
+ * by av_file_map()
+ */
+void av_file_unmap(uint8_t *bufptr, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Wrapper to work around the lack of mkstemp() on mingw.
+ * Also, tries to create file in /tmp first, if possible.
+ * *prefix can be a character constant; *filename will be allocated internally.
+ * @return file descriptor of opened file (or negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code on error)
+ * and opened file name in **filename.
+ * @note On very old libcs it is necessary to set a secure umask before
+ * calling this, av_tempfile() can't call umask itself as it is used in
+ * libraries and could interfere with the calling application.
+ */
+int av_tempfile(const char *prefix, char **filename, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FILE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/frame.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/frame.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d335bee831
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/frame.h
@@ -0,0 +1,771 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu_frame
+ * reference-counted frame API
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_FRAME_H
+#define AVUTIL_FRAME_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "buffer.h"
+#include "dict.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_frame AVFrame
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ *
+ * @{
+ * AVFrame is an abstraction for reference-counted raw multimedia data.
+ */
+
+enum AVFrameSideDataType {
+ /**
+ * The data is the AVPanScan struct defined in libavcodec.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_PANSCAN,
+ /**
+ * ATSC A53 Part 4 Closed Captions.
+ * A53 CC bitstream is stored as uint8_t in AVFrameSideData.data.
+ * The number of bytes of CC data is AVFrameSideData.size.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_A53_CC,
+ /**
+ * Stereoscopic 3d metadata.
+ * The data is the AVStereo3D struct defined in libavutil/stereo3d.h.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_STEREO3D,
+ /**
+ * The data is the AVMatrixEncoding enum defined in libavutil/channel_layout.h.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_MATRIXENCODING,
+ /**
+ * Metadata relevant to a downmix procedure.
+ * The data is the AVDownmixInfo struct defined in libavutil/downmix_info.h.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_DOWNMIX_INFO,
+ /**
+ * ReplayGain information in the form of the AVReplayGain struct.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_REPLAYGAIN,
+ /**
+ * This side data contains a 3x3 transformation matrix describing an affine
+ * transformation that needs to be applied to the frame for correct
+ * presentation.
+ *
+ * See libavutil/display.h for a detailed description of the data.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_DISPLAYMATRIX,
+ /**
+ * Active Format Description data consisting of a single byte as specified
+ * in ETSI TS 101 154 using AVActiveFormatDescription enum.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_AFD,
+ /**
+ * Motion vectors exported by some codecs (on demand through the export_mvs
+ * flag set in the libavcodec AVCodecContext flags2 option).
+ * The data is the AVMotionVector struct defined in
+ * libavutil/motion_vector.h.
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_MOTION_VECTORS,
+ /**
+ * Recommmends skipping the specified number of samples. This is exported
+ * only if the "skip_manual" AVOption is set in libavcodec.
+ * This has the same format as AV_PKT_DATA_SKIP_SAMPLES.
+ * @code
+ * u32le number of samples to skip from start of this packet
+ * u32le number of samples to skip from end of this packet
+ * u8 reason for start skip
+ * u8 reason for end skip (0=padding silence, 1=convergence)
+ * @endcode
+ */
+ AV_FRAME_DATA_SKIP_SAMPLES,
+};
+
+enum AVActiveFormatDescription {
+ AV_AFD_SAME = 8,
+ AV_AFD_4_3 = 9,
+ AV_AFD_16_9 = 10,
+ AV_AFD_14_9 = 11,
+ AV_AFD_4_3_SP_14_9 = 13,
+ AV_AFD_16_9_SP_14_9 = 14,
+ AV_AFD_SP_4_3 = 15,
+};
+
+typedef struct AVFrameSideData {
+ enum AVFrameSideDataType type;
+ uint8_t *data;
+ int size;
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+} AVFrameSideData;
+
+/**
+ * This structure describes decoded (raw) audio or video data.
+ *
+ * AVFrame must be allocated using av_frame_alloc(). Note that this only
+ * allocates the AVFrame itself, the buffers for the data must be managed
+ * through other means (see below).
+ * AVFrame must be freed with av_frame_free().
+ *
+ * AVFrame is typically allocated once and then reused multiple times to hold
+ * different data (e.g. a single AVFrame to hold frames received from a
+ * decoder). In such a case, av_frame_unref() will free any references held by
+ * the frame and reset it to its original clean state before it
+ * is reused again.
+ *
+ * The data described by an AVFrame is usually reference counted through the
+ * AVBuffer API. The underlying buffer references are stored in AVFrame.buf /
+ * AVFrame.extended_buf. An AVFrame is considered to be reference counted if at
+ * least one reference is set, i.e. if AVFrame.buf[0] != NULL. In such a case,
+ * every single data plane must be contained in one of the buffers in
+ * AVFrame.buf or AVFrame.extended_buf.
+ * There may be a single buffer for all the data, or one separate buffer for
+ * each plane, or anything in between.
+ *
+ * sizeof(AVFrame) is not a part of the public ABI, so new fields may be added
+ * to the end with a minor bump.
+ * Similarly fields that are marked as to be only accessed by
+ * av_opt_ptr() can be reordered. This allows 2 forks to add fields
+ * without breaking compatibility with each other.
+ */
+typedef struct AVFrame {
+#define AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS 8
+ /**
+ * pointer to the picture/channel planes.
+ * This might be different from the first allocated byte
+ *
+ * Some decoders access areas outside 0,0 - width,height, please
+ * see avcodec_align_dimensions2(). Some filters and swscale can read
+ * up to 16 bytes beyond the planes, if these filters are to be used,
+ * then 16 extra bytes must be allocated.
+ */
+ uint8_t *data[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+ /**
+ * For video, size in bytes of each picture line.
+ * For audio, size in bytes of each plane.
+ *
+ * For audio, only linesize[0] may be set. For planar audio, each channel
+ * plane must be the same size.
+ *
+ * For video the linesizes should be multiples of the CPUs alignment
+ * preference, this is 16 or 32 for modern desktop CPUs.
+ * Some code requires such alignment other code can be slower without
+ * correct alignment, for yet other it makes no difference.
+ *
+ * @note The linesize may be larger than the size of usable data -- there
+ * may be extra padding present for performance reasons.
+ */
+ int linesize[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+ /**
+ * pointers to the data planes/channels.
+ *
+ * For video, this should simply point to data[].
+ *
+ * For planar audio, each channel has a separate data pointer, and
+ * linesize[0] contains the size of each channel buffer.
+ * For packed audio, there is just one data pointer, and linesize[0]
+ * contains the total size of the buffer for all channels.
+ *
+ * Note: Both data and extended_data should always be set in a valid frame,
+ * but for planar audio with more channels that can fit in data,
+ * extended_data must be used in order to access all channels.
+ */
+ uint8_t **extended_data;
+
+ /**
+ * width and height of the video frame
+ */
+ int width, height;
+
+ /**
+ * number of audio samples (per channel) described by this frame
+ */
+ int nb_samples;
+
+ /**
+ * format of the frame, -1 if unknown or unset
+ * Values correspond to enum AVPixelFormat for video frames,
+ * enum AVSampleFormat for audio)
+ */
+ int format;
+
+ /**
+ * 1 -> keyframe, 0-> not
+ */
+ int key_frame;
+
+ /**
+ * Picture type of the frame.
+ */
+ enum AVPictureType pict_type;
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+ attribute_deprecated
+ uint8_t *base[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Sample aspect ratio for the video frame, 0/1 if unknown/unspecified.
+ */
+ AVRational sample_aspect_ratio;
+
+ /**
+ * Presentation timestamp in time_base units (time when frame should be shown to user).
+ */
+ int64_t pts;
+
+ /**
+ * PTS copied from the AVPacket that was decoded to produce this frame.
+ */
+ int64_t pkt_pts;
+
+ /**
+ * DTS copied from the AVPacket that triggered returning this frame. (if frame threading isn't used)
+ * This is also the Presentation time of this AVFrame calculated from
+ * only AVPacket.dts values without pts values.
+ */
+ int64_t pkt_dts;
+
+ /**
+ * picture number in bitstream order
+ */
+ int coded_picture_number;
+ /**
+ * picture number in display order
+ */
+ int display_picture_number;
+
+ /**
+ * quality (between 1 (good) and FF_LAMBDA_MAX (bad))
+ */
+ int quality;
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int reference;
+
+ /**
+ * QP table
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int8_t *qscale_table;
+ /**
+ * QP store stride
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int qstride;
+
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int qscale_type;
+
+ /**
+ * mbskip_table[mb]>=1 if MB didn't change
+ * stride= mb_width = (width+15)>>4
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ uint8_t *mbskip_table;
+
+ /**
+ * motion vector table
+ * @code
+ * example:
+ * int mv_sample_log2= 4 - motion_subsample_log2;
+ * int mb_width= (width+15)>>4;
+ * int mv_stride= (mb_width << mv_sample_log2) + 1;
+ * motion_val[direction][x + y*mv_stride][0->mv_x, 1->mv_y];
+ * @endcode
+ */
+ int16_t (*motion_val[2])[2];
+
+ /**
+ * macroblock type table
+ * mb_type_base + mb_width + 2
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ uint32_t *mb_type;
+
+ /**
+ * DCT coefficients
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ short *dct_coeff;
+
+ /**
+ * motion reference frame index
+ * the order in which these are stored can depend on the codec.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int8_t *ref_index[2];
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * for some private data of the user
+ */
+ void *opaque;
+
+ /**
+ * error
+ */
+ uint64_t error[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int type;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * When decoding, this signals how much the picture must be delayed.
+ * extra_delay = repeat_pict / (2*fps)
+ */
+ int repeat_pict;
+
+ /**
+ * The content of the picture is interlaced.
+ */
+ int interlaced_frame;
+
+ /**
+ * If the content is interlaced, is top field displayed first.
+ */
+ int top_field_first;
+
+ /**
+ * Tell user application that palette has changed from previous frame.
+ */
+ int palette_has_changed;
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+ attribute_deprecated
+ int buffer_hints;
+
+ /**
+ * Pan scan.
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated
+ struct AVPanScan *pan_scan;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * reordered opaque 64bit (generally an integer or a double precision float
+ * PTS but can be anything).
+ * The user sets AVCodecContext.reordered_opaque to represent the input at
+ * that time,
+ * the decoder reorders values as needed and sets AVFrame.reordered_opaque
+ * to exactly one of the values provided by the user through AVCodecContext.reordered_opaque
+ * @deprecated in favor of pkt_pts
+ */
+ int64_t reordered_opaque;
+
+#if FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+ /**
+ * @deprecated this field is unused
+ */
+ attribute_deprecated void *hwaccel_picture_private;
+
+ attribute_deprecated
+ struct AVCodecContext *owner;
+ attribute_deprecated
+ void *thread_opaque;
+
+ /**
+ * log2 of the size of the block which a single vector in motion_val represents:
+ * (4->16x16, 3->8x8, 2-> 4x4, 1-> 2x2)
+ */
+ uint8_t motion_subsample_log2;
+#endif
+
+ /**
+ * Sample rate of the audio data.
+ */
+ int sample_rate;
+
+ /**
+ * Channel layout of the audio data.
+ */
+ uint64_t channel_layout;
+
+ /**
+ * AVBuffer references backing the data for this frame. If all elements of
+ * this array are NULL, then this frame is not reference counted.
+ *
+ * There may be at most one AVBuffer per data plane, so for video this array
+ * always contains all the references. For planar audio with more than
+ * AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS channels, there may be more buffers than can fit in
+ * this array. Then the extra AVBufferRef pointers are stored in the
+ * extended_buf array.
+ */
+ AVBufferRef *buf[AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS];
+
+ /**
+ * For planar audio which requires more than AV_NUM_DATA_POINTERS
+ * AVBufferRef pointers, this array will hold all the references which
+ * cannot fit into AVFrame.buf.
+ *
+ * Note that this is different from AVFrame.extended_data, which always
+ * contains all the pointers. This array only contains the extra pointers,
+ * which cannot fit into AVFrame.buf.
+ *
+ * This array is always allocated using av_malloc() by whoever constructs
+ * the frame. It is freed in av_frame_unref().
+ */
+ AVBufferRef **extended_buf;
+ /**
+ * Number of elements in extended_buf.
+ */
+ int nb_extended_buf;
+
+ AVFrameSideData **side_data;
+ int nb_side_data;
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_frame_flags AV_FRAME_FLAGS
+ * Flags describing additional frame properties.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The frame data may be corrupted, e.g. due to decoding errors.
+ */
+#define AV_FRAME_FLAG_CORRUPT (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * Frame flags, a combination of @ref lavu_frame_flags
+ */
+ int flags;
+
+ /**
+ * MPEG vs JPEG YUV range.
+ * It must be accessed using av_frame_get_color_range() and
+ * av_frame_set_color_range().
+ * - encoding: Set by user
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ enum AVColorRange color_range;
+
+ enum AVColorPrimaries color_primaries;
+
+ enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic color_trc;
+
+ /**
+ * YUV colorspace type.
+ * It must be accessed using av_frame_get_colorspace() and
+ * av_frame_set_colorspace().
+ * - encoding: Set by user
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec
+ */
+ enum AVColorSpace colorspace;
+
+ enum AVChromaLocation chroma_location;
+
+ /**
+ * frame timestamp estimated using various heuristics, in stream time base
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_best_effort_timestamp(frame)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+ */
+ int64_t best_effort_timestamp;
+
+ /**
+ * reordered pos from the last AVPacket that has been input into the decoder
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_pkt_pos(frame)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Read by user.
+ */
+ int64_t pkt_pos;
+
+ /**
+ * duration of the corresponding packet, expressed in
+ * AVStream->time_base units, 0 if unknown.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_pkt_duration(frame)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Read by user.
+ */
+ int64_t pkt_duration;
+
+ /**
+ * metadata.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_metadata(frame)
+ * - encoding: Set by user.
+ * - decoding: Set by libavcodec.
+ */
+ AVDictionary *metadata;
+
+ /**
+ * decode error flags of the frame, set to a combination of
+ * FF_DECODE_ERROR_xxx flags if the decoder produced a frame, but there
+ * were errors during the decoding.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_decode_error_flags(frame)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+ */
+ int decode_error_flags;
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_INVALID_BITSTREAM 1
+#define FF_DECODE_ERROR_MISSING_REFERENCE 2
+
+ /**
+ * number of audio channels, only used for audio.
+ * Code outside libavcodec should access this field using:
+ * av_frame_get_channels(frame)
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: Read by user.
+ */
+ int channels;
+
+ /**
+ * size of the corresponding packet containing the compressed
+ * frame. It must be accessed using av_frame_get_pkt_size() and
+ * av_frame_set_pkt_size().
+ * It is set to a negative value if unknown.
+ * - encoding: unused
+ * - decoding: set by libavcodec, read by user.
+ */
+ int pkt_size;
+
+ /**
+ * Not to be accessed directly from outside libavutil
+ */
+ AVBufferRef *qp_table_buf;
+} AVFrame;
+
+/**
+ * Accessors for some AVFrame fields.
+ * The position of these field in the structure is not part of the ABI,
+ * they should not be accessed directly outside libavcodec.
+ */
+int64_t av_frame_get_best_effort_timestamp(const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_best_effort_timestamp(AVFrame *frame, int64_t val);
+int64_t av_frame_get_pkt_duration (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_pkt_duration (AVFrame *frame, int64_t val);
+int64_t av_frame_get_pkt_pos (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_pkt_pos (AVFrame *frame, int64_t val);
+int64_t av_frame_get_channel_layout (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_channel_layout (AVFrame *frame, int64_t val);
+int av_frame_get_channels (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_channels (AVFrame *frame, int val);
+int av_frame_get_sample_rate (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_sample_rate (AVFrame *frame, int val);
+AVDictionary *av_frame_get_metadata (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_metadata (AVFrame *frame, AVDictionary *val);
+int av_frame_get_decode_error_flags (const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_decode_error_flags (AVFrame *frame, int val);
+int av_frame_get_pkt_size(const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_pkt_size(AVFrame *frame, int val);
+AVDictionary **avpriv_frame_get_metadatap(AVFrame *frame);
+int8_t *av_frame_get_qp_table(AVFrame *f, int *stride, int *type);
+int av_frame_set_qp_table(AVFrame *f, AVBufferRef *buf, int stride, int type);
+enum AVColorSpace av_frame_get_colorspace(const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_colorspace(AVFrame *frame, enum AVColorSpace val);
+enum AVColorRange av_frame_get_color_range(const AVFrame *frame);
+void av_frame_set_color_range(AVFrame *frame, enum AVColorRange val);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a colorspace.
+ * @return a static string identifying the colorspace; can be NULL.
+ */
+const char *av_get_colorspace_name(enum AVColorSpace val);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVFrame and set its fields to default values. The resulting
+ * struct must be freed using av_frame_free().
+ *
+ * @return An AVFrame filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * @note this only allocates the AVFrame itself, not the data buffers. Those
+ * must be allocated through other means, e.g. with av_frame_get_buffer() or
+ * manually.
+ */
+AVFrame *av_frame_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Free the frame and any dynamically allocated objects in it,
+ * e.g. extended_data. If the frame is reference counted, it will be
+ * unreferenced first.
+ *
+ * @param frame frame to be freed. The pointer will be set to NULL.
+ */
+void av_frame_free(AVFrame **frame);
+
+/**
+ * Set up a new reference to the data described by the source frame.
+ *
+ * Copy frame properties from src to dst and create a new reference for each
+ * AVBufferRef from src.
+ *
+ * If src is not reference counted, new buffers are allocated and the data is
+ * copied.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error
+ */
+int av_frame_ref(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Create a new frame that references the same data as src.
+ *
+ * This is a shortcut for av_frame_alloc()+av_frame_ref().
+ *
+ * @return newly created AVFrame on success, NULL on error.
+ */
+AVFrame *av_frame_clone(const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Unreference all the buffers referenced by frame and reset the frame fields.
+ */
+void av_frame_unref(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Move everythnig contained in src to dst and reset src.
+ */
+void av_frame_move_ref(AVFrame *dst, AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate new buffer(s) for audio or video data.
+ *
+ * The following fields must be set on frame before calling this function:
+ * - format (pixel format for video, sample format for audio)
+ * - width and height for video
+ * - nb_samples and channel_layout for audio
+ *
+ * This function will fill AVFrame.data and AVFrame.buf arrays and, if
+ * necessary, allocate and fill AVFrame.extended_data and AVFrame.extended_buf.
+ * For planar formats, one buffer will be allocated for each plane.
+ *
+ * @param frame frame in which to store the new buffers.
+ * @param align required buffer size alignment
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_frame_get_buffer(AVFrame *frame, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the frame data is writable.
+ *
+ * @return A positive value if the frame data is writable (which is true if and
+ * only if each of the underlying buffers has only one reference, namely the one
+ * stored in this frame). Return 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * If 1 is returned the answer is valid until av_buffer_ref() is called on any
+ * of the underlying AVBufferRefs (e.g. through av_frame_ref() or directly).
+ *
+ * @see av_frame_make_writable(), av_buffer_is_writable()
+ */
+int av_frame_is_writable(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Ensure that the frame data is writable, avoiding data copy if possible.
+ *
+ * Do nothing if the frame is writable, allocate new buffers and copy the data
+ * if it is not.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ *
+ * @see av_frame_is_writable(), av_buffer_is_writable(),
+ * av_buffer_make_writable()
+ */
+int av_frame_make_writable(AVFrame *frame);
+
+/**
+ * Copy the frame data from src to dst.
+ *
+ * This function does not allocate anything, dst must be already initialized and
+ * allocated with the same parameters as src.
+ *
+ * This function only copies the frame data (i.e. the contents of the data /
+ * extended data arrays), not any other properties.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative AVERROR on error.
+ */
+int av_frame_copy(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Copy only "metadata" fields from src to dst.
+ *
+ * Metadata for the purpose of this function are those fields that do not affect
+ * the data layout in the buffers. E.g. pts, sample rate (for audio) or sample
+ * aspect ratio (for video), but not width/height or channel layout.
+ * Side data is also copied.
+ */
+int av_frame_copy_props(AVFrame *dst, const AVFrame *src);
+
+/**
+ * Get the buffer reference a given data plane is stored in.
+ *
+ * @param plane index of the data plane of interest in frame->extended_data.
+ *
+ * @return the buffer reference that contains the plane or NULL if the input
+ * frame is not valid.
+ */
+AVBufferRef *av_frame_get_plane_buffer(AVFrame *frame, int plane);
+
+/**
+ * Add a new side data to a frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame a frame to which the side data should be added
+ * @param type type of the added side data
+ * @param size size of the side data
+ *
+ * @return newly added side data on success, NULL on error
+ */
+AVFrameSideData *av_frame_new_side_data(AVFrame *frame,
+ enum AVFrameSideDataType type,
+ int size);
+
+/**
+ * @return a pointer to the side data of a given type on success, NULL if there
+ * is no side data with such type in this frame.
+ */
+AVFrameSideData *av_frame_get_side_data(const AVFrame *frame,
+ enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * If side data of the supplied type exists in the frame, free it and remove it
+ * from the frame.
+ */
+void av_frame_remove_side_data(AVFrame *frame, enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * @return a string identifying the side data type
+ */
+const char *av_frame_side_data_name(enum AVFrameSideDataType type);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_FRAME_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hash.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hash.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d4bcbf8cc8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hash.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 Reimar Döffinger
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HASH_H
+#define AVUTIL_HASH_H
+
+#include
+
+struct AVHashContext;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a hash context for the algorithm specified by name.
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 for success, a negative error code for failure
+ * @note The context is not initialized, you must call av_hash_init().
+ */
+int av_hash_alloc(struct AVHashContext **ctx, const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Get the names of available hash algorithms.
+ *
+ * This function can be used to enumerate the algorithms.
+ *
+ * @param i index of the hash algorithm, starting from 0
+ * @return a pointer to a static string or NULL if i is out of range
+ */
+const char *av_hash_names(int i);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of the algorithm corresponding to the given hash context.
+ */
+const char *av_hash_get_name(const struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Maximum value that av_hash_get_size will currently return.
+ *
+ * You can use this if you absolutely want or need to use static allocation
+ * and are fine with not supporting hashes newly added to libavutil without
+ * recompilation.
+ * Note that you still need to check against av_hash_get_size, adding new hashes
+ * with larger sizes will not be considered an ABI change and should not cause
+ * your code to overflow a buffer.
+ */
+#define AV_HASH_MAX_SIZE 64
+
+/**
+ * Get the size of the resulting hash value in bytes.
+ *
+ * The pointer passed to av_hash_final have space for at least this many bytes.
+ */
+int av_hash_get_size(const struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize or reset a hash context.
+ */
+void av_hash_init(struct AVHashContext *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Update a hash context with additional data.
+ */
+void av_hash_update(struct AVHashContext *ctx, const uint8_t *src, int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and compute the actual hash value.
+ */
+void av_hash_final(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and compute the actual hash value.
+ * If size is smaller than the hash size, the hash is truncated;
+ * if size is larger, the buffer is padded with 0.
+ */
+void av_hash_final_bin(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and compute the actual hash value as a hex string.
+ * The string is always 0-terminated.
+ * If size is smaller than 2 * hash_size + 1, the hex string is truncated.
+ */
+void av_hash_final_hex(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Finalize a hash context and compute the actual hash value as a base64 string.
+ * The string is always 0-terminated.
+ * If size is smaller than AV_BASE64_SIZE(hash_size), the base64 string is
+ * truncated.
+ */
+void av_hash_final_b64(struct AVHashContext *ctx, uint8_t *dst, int size);
+
+/**
+ * Free hash context.
+ */
+void av_hash_freep(struct AVHashContext **ctx);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HASH_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hmac.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hmac.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d36d4de19e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/hmac.h
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2012 Martin Storsjo
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_HMAC_H
+#define AVUTIL_HMAC_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_hmac HMAC
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+enum AVHMACType {
+ AV_HMAC_MD5,
+ AV_HMAC_SHA1,
+ AV_HMAC_SHA224 = 10,
+ AV_HMAC_SHA256,
+ AV_HMAC_SHA384,
+ AV_HMAC_SHA512,
+};
+
+typedef struct AVHMAC AVHMAC;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVHMAC context.
+ * @param type The hash function used for the HMAC.
+ */
+AVHMAC *av_hmac_alloc(enum AVHMACType type);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVHMAC context.
+ * @param ctx The context to free, may be NULL
+ */
+void av_hmac_free(AVHMAC *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVHMAC context with an authentication key.
+ * @param ctx The HMAC context
+ * @param key The authentication key
+ * @param keylen The length of the key, in bytes
+ */
+void av_hmac_init(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *key, unsigned int keylen);
+
+/**
+ * Hash data with the HMAC.
+ * @param ctx The HMAC context
+ * @param data The data to hash
+ * @param len The length of the data, in bytes
+ */
+void av_hmac_update(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *data, unsigned int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output the HMAC digest.
+ * @param ctx The HMAC context
+ * @param out The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param outlen The length of the out buffer, in bytes
+ * @return The number of bytes written to out, or a negative error code.
+ */
+int av_hmac_final(AVHMAC *ctx, uint8_t *out, unsigned int outlen);
+
+/**
+ * Hash an array of data with a key.
+ * @param ctx The HMAC context
+ * @param data The data to hash
+ * @param len The length of the data, in bytes
+ * @param key The authentication key
+ * @param keylen The length of the key, in bytes
+ * @param out The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param outlen The length of the out buffer, in bytes
+ * @return The number of bytes written to out, or a negative error code.
+ */
+int av_hmac_calc(AVHMAC *ctx, const uint8_t *data, unsigned int len,
+ const uint8_t *key, unsigned int keylen,
+ uint8_t *out, unsigned int outlen);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_HMAC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/imgutils.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/imgutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2ec246aa48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/imgutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * misc image utilities
+ *
+ * @addtogroup lavu_picture
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "pixdesc.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * Compute the max pixel step for each plane of an image with a
+ * format described by pixdesc.
+ *
+ * The pixel step is the distance in bytes between the first byte of
+ * the group of bytes which describe a pixel component and the first
+ * byte of the successive group in the same plane for the same
+ * component.
+ *
+ * @param max_pixsteps an array which is filled with the max pixel step
+ * for each plane. Since a plane may contain different pixel
+ * components, the computed max_pixsteps[plane] is relative to the
+ * component in the plane with the max pixel step.
+ * @param max_pixstep_comps an array which is filled with the component
+ * for each plane which has the max pixel step. May be NULL.
+ */
+void av_image_fill_max_pixsteps(int max_pixsteps[4], int max_pixstep_comps[4],
+ const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * Compute the size of an image line with format pix_fmt and width
+ * width for the plane plane.
+ *
+ * @return the computed size in bytes
+ */
+int av_image_get_linesize(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int plane);
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane linesizes for an image with pixel format pix_fmt and
+ * width width.
+ *
+ * @param linesizes array to be filled with the linesize for each plane
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_fill_linesizes(int linesizes[4], enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width);
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane data pointers for an image with pixel format pix_fmt and
+ * height height.
+ *
+ * @param data pointers array to be filled with the pointer for each image plane
+ * @param ptr the pointer to a buffer which will contain the image
+ * @param linesizes the array containing the linesize for each
+ * plane, should be filled by av_image_fill_linesizes()
+ * @return the size in bytes required for the image buffer, a negative
+ * error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_fill_pointers(uint8_t *data[4], enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int height,
+ uint8_t *ptr, const int linesizes[4]);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an image with size w and h and pixel format pix_fmt, and
+ * fill pointers and linesizes accordingly.
+ * The allocated image buffer has to be freed by using
+ * av_freep(&pointers[0]).
+ *
+ * @param align the value to use for buffer size alignment
+ * @return the size in bytes required for the image buffer, a negative
+ * error code in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_alloc(uint8_t *pointers[4], int linesizes[4],
+ int w, int h, enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image plane from src to dst.
+ * That is, copy "height" number of lines of "bytewidth" bytes each.
+ * The first byte of each successive line is separated by *_linesize
+ * bytes.
+ *
+ * bytewidth must be contained by both absolute values of dst_linesize
+ * and src_linesize, otherwise the function behavior is undefined.
+ *
+ * @param dst_linesize linesize for the image plane in dst
+ * @param src_linesize linesize for the image plane in src
+ */
+void av_image_copy_plane(uint8_t *dst, int dst_linesize,
+ const uint8_t *src, int src_linesize,
+ int bytewidth, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image in src_data to dst_data.
+ *
+ * @param dst_linesizes linesizes for the image in dst_data
+ * @param src_linesizes linesizes for the image in src_data
+ */
+void av_image_copy(uint8_t *dst_data[4], int dst_linesizes[4],
+ const uint8_t *src_data[4], const int src_linesizes[4],
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height);
+
+/**
+ * Setup the data pointers and linesizes based on the specified image
+ * parameters and the provided array.
+ *
+ * The fields of the given image are filled in by using the src
+ * address which points to the image data buffer. Depending on the
+ * specified pixel format, one or multiple image data pointers and
+ * line sizes will be set. If a planar format is specified, several
+ * pointers will be set pointing to the different picture planes and
+ * the line sizes of the different planes will be stored in the
+ * lines_sizes array. Call with !src to get the required
+ * size for the src buffer.
+ *
+ * To allocate the buffer and fill in the dst_data and dst_linesize in
+ * one call, use av_image_alloc().
+ *
+ * @param dst_data data pointers to be filled in
+ * @param dst_linesizes linesizes for the image in dst_data to be filled in
+ * @param src buffer which will contain or contains the actual image data, can be NULL
+ * @param pix_fmt the pixel format of the image
+ * @param width the width of the image in pixels
+ * @param height the height of the image in pixels
+ * @param align the value used in src for linesize alignment
+ * @return the size in bytes required for src, a negative error code
+ * in case of failure
+ */
+int av_image_fill_arrays(uint8_t *dst_data[4], int dst_linesize[4],
+ const uint8_t *src,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Return the size in bytes of the amount of data required to store an
+ * image with the given parameters.
+ *
+ * @param[in] align the assumed linesize alignment
+ */
+int av_image_get_buffer_size(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy image data from an image into a buffer.
+ *
+ * av_image_get_buffer_size() can be used to compute the required size
+ * for the buffer to fill.
+ *
+ * @param dst a buffer into which picture data will be copied
+ * @param dst_size the size in bytes of dst
+ * @param src_data pointers containing the source image data
+ * @param src_linesizes linesizes for the image in src_data
+ * @param pix_fmt the pixel format of the source image
+ * @param width the width of the source image in pixels
+ * @param height the height of the source image in pixels
+ * @param align the assumed linesize alignment for dst
+ * @return the number of bytes written to dst, or a negative value
+ * (error code) on error
+ */
+int av_image_copy_to_buffer(uint8_t *dst, int dst_size,
+ const uint8_t * const src_data[4], const int src_linesize[4],
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt, int width, int height, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the given dimension of an image is valid, meaning that all
+ * bytes of the image can be addressed with a signed int.
+ *
+ * @param w the width of the picture
+ * @param h the height of the picture
+ * @param log_offset the offset to sum to the log level for logging with log_ctx
+ * @param log_ctx the parent logging context, it may be NULL
+ * @return >= 0 if valid, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_check_size(unsigned int w, unsigned int h, int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the given sample aspect ratio of an image is valid.
+ *
+ * It is considered invalid if the denominator is 0 or if applying the ratio
+ * to the image size would make the smaller dimension less than 1. If the
+ * sar numerator is 0, it is considered unknown and will return as valid.
+ *
+ * @param w width of the image
+ * @param h height of the image
+ * @param sar sample aspect ratio of the image
+ * @return 0 if valid, a negative AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_image_check_sar(unsigned int w, unsigned int h, AVRational sar);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_IMGUTILS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intfloat.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intfloat.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fe3d7ec4a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intfloat.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2011 Mans Rullgard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H
+#define AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H
+
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+union av_intfloat32 {
+ uint32_t i;
+ float f;
+};
+
+union av_intfloat64 {
+ uint64_t i;
+ double f;
+};
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a 32-bit integer as a float.
+ */
+static av_always_inline float av_int2float(uint32_t i)
+{
+ union av_intfloat32 v;
+ v.i = i;
+ return v.f;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a float as a 32-bit integer.
+ */
+static av_always_inline uint32_t av_float2int(float f)
+{
+ union av_intfloat32 v;
+ v.f = f;
+ return v.i;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a 64-bit integer as a double.
+ */
+static av_always_inline double av_int2double(uint64_t i)
+{
+ union av_intfloat64 v;
+ v.i = i;
+ return v.f;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reinterpret a double as a 64-bit integer.
+ */
+static av_always_inline uint64_t av_double2int(double f)
+{
+ union av_intfloat64 v;
+ v.f = f;
+ return v.i;
+}
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_INTFLOAT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..51fbe30a23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/intreadwrite.h
@@ -0,0 +1,629 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H
+#define AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H
+
+#include
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "bswap.h"
+
+typedef union {
+ uint64_t u64;
+ uint32_t u32[2];
+ uint16_t u16[4];
+ uint8_t u8 [8];
+ double f64;
+ float f32[2];
+} av_alias av_alias64;
+
+typedef union {
+ uint32_t u32;
+ uint16_t u16[2];
+ uint8_t u8 [4];
+ float f32;
+} av_alias av_alias32;
+
+typedef union {
+ uint16_t u16;
+ uint8_t u8 [2];
+} av_alias av_alias16;
+
+/*
+ * Arch-specific headers can provide any combination of
+ * AV_[RW][BLN](16|24|32|48|64) and AV_(COPY|SWAP|ZERO)(64|128) macros.
+ * Preprocessor symbols must be defined, even if these are implemented
+ * as inline functions.
+ *
+ * R/W means read/write, B/L/N means big/little/native endianness.
+ * The following macros require aligned access, compared to their
+ * unaligned variants: AV_(COPY|SWAP|ZERO)(64|128), AV_[RW]N[8-64]A.
+ * Incorrect usage may range from abysmal performance to crash
+ * depending on the platform.
+ *
+ * The unaligned variants are AV_[RW][BLN][8-64] and AV_COPY*U.
+ */
+
+#ifdef HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H
+
+#include "config.h"
+
+#if ARCH_ARM
+# include "arm/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_AVR32
+# include "avr32/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_MIPS
+# include "mips/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_PPC
+# include "ppc/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_TOMI
+# include "tomi/intreadwrite.h"
+#elif ARCH_X86
+# include "x86/intreadwrite.h"
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_AV_CONFIG_H */
+
+/*
+ * Map AV_RNXX <-> AV_R[BL]XX for all variants provided by per-arch headers.
+ */
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+
+# if defined(AV_RN16) && !defined(AV_RB16)
+# define AV_RB16(p) AV_RN16(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN16) && defined(AV_RB16)
+# define AV_RN16(p) AV_RB16(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN16) && !defined(AV_WB16)
+# define AV_WB16(p, v) AV_WN16(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN16) && defined(AV_WB16)
+# define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WB16(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN24) && !defined(AV_RB24)
+# define AV_RB24(p) AV_RN24(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN24) && defined(AV_RB24)
+# define AV_RN24(p) AV_RB24(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN24) && !defined(AV_WB24)
+# define AV_WB24(p, v) AV_WN24(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN24) && defined(AV_WB24)
+# define AV_WN24(p, v) AV_WB24(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN32) && !defined(AV_RB32)
+# define AV_RB32(p) AV_RN32(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN32) && defined(AV_RB32)
+# define AV_RN32(p) AV_RB32(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN32) && !defined(AV_WB32)
+# define AV_WB32(p, v) AV_WN32(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN32) && defined(AV_WB32)
+# define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WB32(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN48) && !defined(AV_RB48)
+# define AV_RB48(p) AV_RN48(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN48) && defined(AV_RB48)
+# define AV_RN48(p) AV_RB48(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN48) && !defined(AV_WB48)
+# define AV_WB48(p, v) AV_WN48(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN48) && defined(AV_WB48)
+# define AV_WN48(p, v) AV_WB48(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN64) && !defined(AV_RB64)
+# define AV_RB64(p) AV_RN64(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN64) && defined(AV_RB64)
+# define AV_RN64(p) AV_RB64(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN64) && !defined(AV_WB64)
+# define AV_WB64(p, v) AV_WN64(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN64) && defined(AV_WB64)
+# define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WB64(p, v)
+# endif
+
+#else /* AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN */
+
+# if defined(AV_RN16) && !defined(AV_RL16)
+# define AV_RL16(p) AV_RN16(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN16) && defined(AV_RL16)
+# define AV_RN16(p) AV_RL16(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN16) && !defined(AV_WL16)
+# define AV_WL16(p, v) AV_WN16(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN16) && defined(AV_WL16)
+# define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WL16(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN24) && !defined(AV_RL24)
+# define AV_RL24(p) AV_RN24(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN24) && defined(AV_RL24)
+# define AV_RN24(p) AV_RL24(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN24) && !defined(AV_WL24)
+# define AV_WL24(p, v) AV_WN24(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN24) && defined(AV_WL24)
+# define AV_WN24(p, v) AV_WL24(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN32) && !defined(AV_RL32)
+# define AV_RL32(p) AV_RN32(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN32) && defined(AV_RL32)
+# define AV_RN32(p) AV_RL32(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN32) && !defined(AV_WL32)
+# define AV_WL32(p, v) AV_WN32(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN32) && defined(AV_WL32)
+# define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WL32(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN48) && !defined(AV_RL48)
+# define AV_RL48(p) AV_RN48(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN48) && defined(AV_RL48)
+# define AV_RN48(p) AV_RL48(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN48) && !defined(AV_WL48)
+# define AV_WL48(p, v) AV_WN48(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN48) && defined(AV_WL48)
+# define AV_WN48(p, v) AV_WL48(p, v)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_RN64) && !defined(AV_RL64)
+# define AV_RL64(p) AV_RN64(p)
+# elif !defined(AV_RN64) && defined(AV_RL64)
+# define AV_RN64(p) AV_RL64(p)
+# endif
+
+# if defined(AV_WN64) && !defined(AV_WL64)
+# define AV_WL64(p, v) AV_WN64(p, v)
+# elif !defined(AV_WN64) && defined(AV_WL64)
+# define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WL64(p, v)
+# endif
+
+#endif /* !AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN */
+
+/*
+ * Define AV_[RW]N helper macros to simplify definitions not provided
+ * by per-arch headers.
+ */
+
+#if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__)
+
+union unaligned_64 { uint64_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+union unaligned_32 { uint32_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+union unaligned_16 { uint16_t l; } __attribute__((packed)) av_alias;
+
+# define AV_RN(s, p) (((const union unaligned_##s *) (p))->l)
+# define AV_WN(s, p, v) ((((union unaligned_##s *) (p))->l) = (v))
+
+#elif defined(__DECC)
+
+# define AV_RN(s, p) (*((const __unaligned uint##s##_t*)(p)))
+# define AV_WN(s, p, v) (*((__unaligned uint##s##_t*)(p)) = (v))
+
+#elif AV_HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED
+
+# define AV_RN(s, p) (((const av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s)
+# define AV_WN(s, p, v) (((av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s = (v))
+
+#else
+
+#ifndef AV_RB16
+# define AV_RB16(x) \
+ ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[1])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB16
+# define AV_WB16(p, darg) do { \
+ unsigned d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>8; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL16
+# define AV_RL16(x) \
+ ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL16
+# define AV_WL16(p, darg) do { \
+ unsigned d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB32
+# define AV_RB32(x) \
+ (((uint32_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 24) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 16) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[3])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB32
+# define AV_WB32(p, darg) do { \
+ unsigned d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>24; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL32
+# define AV_RL32(x) \
+ (((uint32_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL32
+# define AV_WL32(p, darg) do { \
+ unsigned d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB64
+# define AV_RB64(x) \
+ (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 56) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 48) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 40) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 32) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 24) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 16) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[6] << 8) | \
+ (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[7])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB64
+# define AV_WB64(p, darg) do { \
+ uint64_t d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[7] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[6] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>24; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>32; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>40; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>48; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>56; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL64
+# define AV_RL64(x) \
+ (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[7] << 56) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[6] << 48) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 40) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 32) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL64
+# define AV_WL64(p, darg) do { \
+ uint64_t d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>32; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>40; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[6] = (d)>>48; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[7] = (d)>>56; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+# define AV_RN(s, p) AV_RB##s(p)
+# define AV_WN(s, p, v) AV_WB##s(p, v)
+#else
+# define AV_RN(s, p) AV_RL##s(p)
+# define AV_WN(s, p, v) AV_WL##s(p, v)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* HAVE_FAST_UNALIGNED */
+
+#ifndef AV_RN16
+# define AV_RN16(p) AV_RN(16, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN32
+# define AV_RN32(p) AV_RN(32, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN64
+# define AV_RN64(p) AV_RN(64, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN16
+# define AV_WN16(p, v) AV_WN(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN32
+# define AV_WN32(p, v) AV_WN(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN64
+# define AV_WN64(p, v) AV_WN(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+# define AV_RB(s, p) AV_RN##s(p)
+# define AV_WB(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, v)
+# define AV_RL(s, p) av_bswap##s(AV_RN##s(p))
+# define AV_WL(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, av_bswap##s(v))
+#else
+# define AV_RB(s, p) av_bswap##s(AV_RN##s(p))
+# define AV_WB(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, av_bswap##s(v))
+# define AV_RL(s, p) AV_RN##s(p)
+# define AV_WL(s, p, v) AV_WN##s(p, v)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_RB8(x) (((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#define AV_WB8(p, d) do { ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); } while(0)
+
+#define AV_RL8(x) AV_RB8(x)
+#define AV_WL8(p, d) AV_WB8(p, d)
+
+#ifndef AV_RB16
+# define AV_RB16(p) AV_RB(16, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB16
+# define AV_WB16(p, v) AV_WB(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL16
+# define AV_RL16(p) AV_RL(16, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL16
+# define AV_WL16(p, v) AV_WL(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB32
+# define AV_RB32(p) AV_RB(32, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB32
+# define AV_WB32(p, v) AV_WB(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL32
+# define AV_RL32(p) AV_RL(32, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL32
+# define AV_WL32(p, v) AV_WL(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB64
+# define AV_RB64(p) AV_RB(64, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB64
+# define AV_WB64(p, v) AV_WB(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL64
+# define AV_RL64(p) AV_RL(64, p)
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL64
+# define AV_WL64(p, v) AV_WL(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB24
+# define AV_RB24(x) \
+ ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 16) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[2])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB24
+# define AV_WB24(p, d) do { \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>16; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL24
+# define AV_RL24(x) \
+ ((((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) | \
+ (((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ ((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL24
+# define AV_WL24(p, d) do { \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RB48
+# define AV_RB48(x) \
+ (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0] << 40) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 32) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 24) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 16) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 8) | \
+ (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WB48
+# define AV_WB48(p, darg) do { \
+ uint64_t d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>24; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>32; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d)>>40; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RL48
+# define AV_RL48(x) \
+ (((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[5] << 40) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[4] << 32) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[3] << 24) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[2] << 16) | \
+ ((uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[1] << 8) | \
+ (uint64_t)((const uint8_t*)(x))[0])
+#endif
+#ifndef AV_WL48
+# define AV_WL48(p, darg) do { \
+ uint64_t d = (darg); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[0] = (d); \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[1] = (d)>>8; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[2] = (d)>>16; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[3] = (d)>>24; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[4] = (d)>>32; \
+ ((uint8_t*)(p))[5] = (d)>>40; \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The AV_[RW]NA macros access naturally aligned data
+ * in a type-safe way.
+ */
+
+#define AV_RNA(s, p) (((const av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s)
+#define AV_WNA(s, p, v) (((av_alias##s*)(p))->u##s = (v))
+
+#ifndef AV_RN16A
+# define AV_RN16A(p) AV_RNA(16, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN32A
+# define AV_RN32A(p) AV_RNA(32, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_RN64A
+# define AV_RN64A(p) AV_RNA(64, p)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN16A
+# define AV_WN16A(p, v) AV_WNA(16, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN32A
+# define AV_WN32A(p, v) AV_WNA(32, p, v)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_WN64A
+# define AV_WN64A(p, v) AV_WNA(64, p, v)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The AV_COPYxxU macros are suitable for copying data to/from unaligned
+ * memory locations.
+ */
+
+#define AV_COPYU(n, d, s) AV_WN##n(d, AV_RN##n(s));
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY16U
+# define AV_COPY16U(d, s) AV_COPYU(16, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY32U
+# define AV_COPY32U(d, s) AV_COPYU(32, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY64U
+# define AV_COPY64U(d, s) AV_COPYU(64, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY128U
+# define AV_COPY128U(d, s) \
+ do { \
+ AV_COPY64U(d, s); \
+ AV_COPY64U((char *)(d) + 8, (const char *)(s) + 8); \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+/* Parameters for AV_COPY*, AV_SWAP*, AV_ZERO* must be
+ * naturally aligned. They may be implemented using MMX,
+ * so emms_c() must be called before using any float code
+ * afterwards.
+ */
+
+#define AV_COPY(n, d, s) \
+ (((av_alias##n*)(d))->u##n = ((const av_alias##n*)(s))->u##n)
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY16
+# define AV_COPY16(d, s) AV_COPY(16, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY32
+# define AV_COPY32(d, s) AV_COPY(32, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY64
+# define AV_COPY64(d, s) AV_COPY(64, d, s)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_COPY128
+# define AV_COPY128(d, s) \
+ do { \
+ AV_COPY64(d, s); \
+ AV_COPY64((char*)(d)+8, (char*)(s)+8); \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_SWAP(n, a, b) FFSWAP(av_alias##n, *(av_alias##n*)(a), *(av_alias##n*)(b))
+
+#ifndef AV_SWAP64
+# define AV_SWAP64(a, b) AV_SWAP(64, a, b)
+#endif
+
+#define AV_ZERO(n, d) (((av_alias##n*)(d))->u##n = 0)
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO16
+# define AV_ZERO16(d) AV_ZERO(16, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO32
+# define AV_ZERO32(d) AV_ZERO(32, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO64
+# define AV_ZERO64(d) AV_ZERO(64, d)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef AV_ZERO128
+# define AV_ZERO128(d) \
+ do { \
+ AV_ZERO64(d); \
+ AV_ZERO64((char*)(d)+8); \
+ } while(0)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_INTREADWRITE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lfg.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lfg.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec90562cf2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lfg.h
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/*
+ * Lagged Fibonacci PRNG
+ * Copyright (c) 2008 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LFG_H
+#define AVUTIL_LFG_H
+
+typedef struct AVLFG {
+ unsigned int state[64];
+ int index;
+} AVLFG;
+
+void av_lfg_init(AVLFG *c, unsigned int seed);
+
+/**
+ * Get the next random unsigned 32-bit number using an ALFG.
+ *
+ * Please also consider a simple LCG like state= state*1664525+1013904223,
+ * it may be good enough and faster for your specific use case.
+ */
+static inline unsigned int av_lfg_get(AVLFG *c){
+ c->state[c->index & 63] = c->state[(c->index-24) & 63] + c->state[(c->index-55) & 63];
+ return c->state[c->index++ & 63];
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the next random unsigned 32-bit number using a MLFG.
+ *
+ * Please also consider av_lfg_get() above, it is faster.
+ */
+static inline unsigned int av_mlfg_get(AVLFG *c){
+ unsigned int a= c->state[(c->index-55) & 63];
+ unsigned int b= c->state[(c->index-24) & 63];
+ return c->state[c->index++ & 63] = 2*a*b+a+b;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Get the next two numbers generated by a Box-Muller Gaussian
+ * generator using the random numbers issued by lfg.
+ *
+ * @param out array where the two generated numbers are placed
+ */
+void av_bmg_get(AVLFG *lfg, double out[2]);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LFG_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/log.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/log.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e1ff09bc65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/log.h
@@ -0,0 +1,350 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LOG_H
+#define AVUTIL_LOG_H
+
+#include
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+typedef enum {
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_NA = 0,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_INPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_OUTPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_MUXER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEMUXER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_ENCODER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DECODER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_FILTER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_BITSTREAM_FILTER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_SWSCALER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_SWRESAMPLER,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_OUTPUT = 40,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_INPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_OUTPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_INPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_OUTPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_INPUT,
+ AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_NB, ///< not part of ABI/API
+}AVClassCategory;
+
+#define AV_IS_INPUT_DEVICE(category) \
+ (((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_INPUT) || \
+ ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_INPUT) || \
+ ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_INPUT))
+
+#define AV_IS_OUTPUT_DEVICE(category) \
+ (((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_VIDEO_OUTPUT) || \
+ ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_AUDIO_OUTPUT) || \
+ ((category) == AV_CLASS_CATEGORY_DEVICE_OUTPUT))
+
+struct AVOptionRanges;
+
+/**
+ * Describe the class of an AVClass context structure. That is an
+ * arbitrary struct of which the first field is a pointer to an
+ * AVClass struct (e.g. AVCodecContext, AVFormatContext etc.).
+ */
+typedef struct AVClass {
+ /**
+ * The name of the class; usually it is the same name as the
+ * context structure type to which the AVClass is associated.
+ */
+ const char* class_name;
+
+ /**
+ * A pointer to a function which returns the name of a context
+ * instance ctx associated with the class.
+ */
+ const char* (*item_name)(void* ctx);
+
+ /**
+ * a pointer to the first option specified in the class if any or NULL
+ *
+ * @see av_set_default_options()
+ */
+ const struct AVOption *option;
+
+ /**
+ * LIBAVUTIL_VERSION with which this structure was created.
+ * This is used to allow fields to be added without requiring major
+ * version bumps everywhere.
+ */
+
+ int version;
+
+ /**
+ * Offset in the structure where log_level_offset is stored.
+ * 0 means there is no such variable
+ */
+ int log_level_offset_offset;
+
+ /**
+ * Offset in the structure where a pointer to the parent context for
+ * logging is stored. For example a decoder could pass its AVCodecContext
+ * to eval as such a parent context, which an av_log() implementation
+ * could then leverage to display the parent context.
+ * The offset can be NULL.
+ */
+ int parent_log_context_offset;
+
+ /**
+ * Return next AVOptions-enabled child or NULL
+ */
+ void* (*child_next)(void *obj, void *prev);
+
+ /**
+ * Return an AVClass corresponding to the next potential
+ * AVOptions-enabled child.
+ *
+ * The difference between child_next and this is that
+ * child_next iterates over _already existing_ objects, while
+ * child_class_next iterates over _all possible_ children.
+ */
+ const struct AVClass* (*child_class_next)(const struct AVClass *prev);
+
+ /**
+ * Category used for visualization (like color)
+ * This is only set if the category is equal for all objects using this class.
+ * available since version (51 << 16 | 56 << 8 | 100)
+ */
+ AVClassCategory category;
+
+ /**
+ * Callback to return the category.
+ * available since version (51 << 16 | 59 << 8 | 100)
+ */
+ AVClassCategory (*get_category)(void* ctx);
+
+ /**
+ * Callback to return the supported/allowed ranges.
+ * available since version (52.12)
+ */
+ int (*query_ranges)(struct AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+} AVClass;
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_log
+ *
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_log_constants Logging Constants
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Print no output.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_QUIET -8
+
+/**
+ * Something went really wrong and we will crash now.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_PANIC 0
+
+/**
+ * Something went wrong and recovery is not possible.
+ * For example, no header was found for a format which depends
+ * on headers or an illegal combination of parameters is used.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_FATAL 8
+
+/**
+ * Something went wrong and cannot losslessly be recovered.
+ * However, not all future data is affected.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_ERROR 16
+
+/**
+ * Something somehow does not look correct. This may or may not
+ * lead to problems. An example would be the use of '-vstrict -2'.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_WARNING 24
+
+/**
+ * Standard information.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_INFO 32
+
+/**
+ * Detailed information.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_VERBOSE 40
+
+/**
+ * Stuff which is only useful for libav* developers.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_DEBUG 48
+
+#define AV_LOG_MAX_OFFSET (AV_LOG_DEBUG - AV_LOG_QUIET)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Sets additional colors for extended debugging sessions.
+ * @code
+ av_log(ctx, AV_LOG_DEBUG|AV_LOG_C(134), "Message in purple\n");
+ @endcode
+ * Requires 256color terminal support. Uses outside debugging is not
+ * recommended.
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_C(x) (x << 8)
+
+/**
+ * Send the specified message to the log if the level is less than or equal
+ * to the current av_log_level. By default, all logging messages are sent to
+ * stderr. This behavior can be altered by setting a different logging callback
+ * function.
+ * @see av_log_set_callback
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ * lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ * subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ */
+void av_log(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt, ...) av_printf_format(3, 4);
+
+
+/**
+ * Send the specified message to the log if the level is less than or equal
+ * to the current av_log_level. By default, all logging messages are sent to
+ * stderr. This behavior can be altered by setting a different logging callback
+ * function.
+ * @see av_log_set_callback
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ * lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ * subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ * @param vl The arguments referenced by the format string.
+ */
+void av_vlog(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt, va_list vl);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current log level
+ *
+ * @see lavu_log_constants
+ *
+ * @return Current log level
+ */
+int av_log_get_level(void);
+
+/**
+ * Set the log level
+ *
+ * @see lavu_log_constants
+ *
+ * @param level Logging level
+ */
+void av_log_set_level(int level);
+
+/**
+ * Set the logging callback
+ *
+ * @note The callback must be thread safe, even if the application does not use
+ * threads itself as some codecs are multithreaded.
+ *
+ * @see av_log_default_callback
+ *
+ * @param callback A logging function with a compatible signature.
+ */
+void av_log_set_callback(void (*callback)(void*, int, const char*, va_list));
+
+/**
+ * Default logging callback
+ *
+ * It prints the message to stderr, optionally colorizing it.
+ *
+ * @param avcl A pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct.
+ * @param level The importance level of the message expressed using a @ref
+ * lavu_log_constants "Logging Constant".
+ * @param fmt The format string (printf-compatible) that specifies how
+ * subsequent arguments are converted to output.
+ * @param vl The arguments referenced by the format string.
+ */
+void av_log_default_callback(void *avcl, int level, const char *fmt,
+ va_list vl);
+
+/**
+ * Return the context name
+ *
+ * @param ctx The AVClass context
+ *
+ * @return The AVClass class_name
+ */
+const char* av_default_item_name(void* ctx);
+AVClassCategory av_default_get_category(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Format a line of log the same way as the default callback.
+ * @param line buffer to receive the formated line
+ * @param line_size size of the buffer
+ * @param print_prefix used to store whether the prefix must be printed;
+ * must point to a persistent integer initially set to 1
+ */
+void av_log_format_line(void *ptr, int level, const char *fmt, va_list vl,
+ char *line, int line_size, int *print_prefix);
+
+/**
+ * av_dlog macros
+ * Useful to print debug messages that shouldn't get compiled in normally.
+ */
+
+#ifdef DEBUG
+# define av_dlog(pctx, ...) av_log(pctx, AV_LOG_DEBUG, __VA_ARGS__)
+#else
+# define av_dlog(pctx, ...) do { if (0) av_log(pctx, AV_LOG_DEBUG, __VA_ARGS__); } while (0)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Skip repeated messages, this requires the user app to use av_log() instead of
+ * (f)printf as the 2 would otherwise interfere and lead to
+ * "Last message repeated x times" messages below (f)printf messages with some
+ * bad luck.
+ * Also to receive the last, "last repeated" line if any, the user app must
+ * call av_log(NULL, AV_LOG_QUIET, "%s", ""); at the end
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_SKIP_REPEATED 1
+
+/**
+ * Include the log severity in messages originating from codecs.
+ *
+ * Results in messages such as:
+ * [rawvideo @ 0xDEADBEEF] [error] encode did not produce valid pts
+ */
+#define AV_LOG_PRINT_LEVEL 2
+
+void av_log_set_flags(int arg);
+int av_log_get_flags(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LOG_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lzo.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lzo.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c03403992d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/lzo.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+ * LZO 1x decompression
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Reimar Doeffinger
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_LZO_H
+#define AVUTIL_LZO_H
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_lzo LZO
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include
+
+/** @name Error flags returned by av_lzo1x_decode
+ * @{ */
+/// end of the input buffer reached before decoding finished
+#define AV_LZO_INPUT_DEPLETED 1
+/// decoded data did not fit into output buffer
+#define AV_LZO_OUTPUT_FULL 2
+/// a reference to previously decoded data was wrong
+#define AV_LZO_INVALID_BACKPTR 4
+/// a non-specific error in the compressed bitstream
+#define AV_LZO_ERROR 8
+/** @} */
+
+#define AV_LZO_INPUT_PADDING 8
+#define AV_LZO_OUTPUT_PADDING 12
+
+/**
+ * @brief Decodes LZO 1x compressed data.
+ * @param out output buffer
+ * @param outlen size of output buffer, number of bytes left are returned here
+ * @param in input buffer
+ * @param inlen size of input buffer, number of bytes left are returned here
+ * @return 0 on success, otherwise a combination of the error flags above
+ *
+ * Make sure all buffers are appropriately padded, in must provide
+ * AV_LZO_INPUT_PADDING, out must provide AV_LZO_OUTPUT_PADDING additional bytes.
+ */
+int av_lzo1x_decode(void *out, int *outlen, const void *in, int *inlen);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_LZO_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/macros.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/macros.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..446532377a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/macros.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu
+ * Utility Preprocessor macros
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MACROS_H
+#define AVUTIL_MACROS_H
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup preproc_misc Preprocessor String Macros
+ *
+ * String manipulation macros
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_STRINGIFY(s) AV_TOSTRING(s)
+#define AV_TOSTRING(s) #s
+
+#define AV_GLUE(a, b) a ## b
+#define AV_JOIN(a, b) AV_GLUE(a, b)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AV_PRAGMA(s) _Pragma(#s)
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MACROS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mathematics.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mathematics.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ac94488729
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mathematics.h
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2005-2012 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H
+#define AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "intfloat.h"
+
+#ifndef M_E
+#define M_E 2.7182818284590452354 /* e */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LN2
+#define M_LN2 0.69314718055994530942 /* log_e 2 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LN10
+#define M_LN10 2.30258509299404568402 /* log_e 10 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_LOG2_10
+#define M_LOG2_10 3.32192809488736234787 /* log_2 10 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PHI
+#define M_PHI 1.61803398874989484820 /* phi / golden ratio */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PI
+#define M_PI 3.14159265358979323846 /* pi */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_PI_2
+#define M_PI_2 1.57079632679489661923 /* pi/2 */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_SQRT1_2
+#define M_SQRT1_2 0.70710678118654752440 /* 1/sqrt(2) */
+#endif
+#ifndef M_SQRT2
+#define M_SQRT2 1.41421356237309504880 /* sqrt(2) */
+#endif
+#ifndef NAN
+#define NAN av_int2float(0x7fc00000)
+#endif
+#ifndef INFINITY
+#define INFINITY av_int2float(0x7f800000)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_math
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+enum AVRounding {
+ AV_ROUND_ZERO = 0, ///< Round toward zero.
+ AV_ROUND_INF = 1, ///< Round away from zero.
+ AV_ROUND_DOWN = 2, ///< Round toward -infinity.
+ AV_ROUND_UP = 3, ///< Round toward +infinity.
+ AV_ROUND_NEAR_INF = 5, ///< Round to nearest and halfway cases away from zero.
+ AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX = 8192, ///< Flag to pass INT64_MIN/MAX through instead of rescaling, this avoids special cases for AV_NOPTS_VALUE
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return the greatest common divisor of a and b.
+ * If both a and b are 0 or either or both are <0 then behavior is
+ * undefined.
+ */
+int64_t av_const av_gcd(int64_t a, int64_t b);
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer with rounding to nearest.
+ * A simple a*b/c isn't possible as it can overflow.
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale(int64_t a, int64_t b, int64_t c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer with specified rounding.
+ * A simple a*b/c isn't possible as it can overflow.
+ *
+ * @return rescaled value a, or if AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX is set and a is
+ * INT64_MIN or INT64_MAX then a is passed through unchanged.
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_rnd(int64_t a, int64_t b, int64_t c, enum AVRounding) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer by 2 rational numbers.
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_q(int64_t a, AVRational bq, AVRational cq) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a 64-bit integer by 2 rational numbers with specified rounding.
+ *
+ * @return rescaled value a, or if AV_ROUND_PASS_MINMAX is set and a is
+ * INT64_MIN or INT64_MAX then a is passed through unchanged.
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_q_rnd(int64_t a, AVRational bq, AVRational cq,
+ enum AVRounding) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Compare 2 timestamps each in its own timebases.
+ * The result of the function is undefined if one of the timestamps
+ * is outside the int64_t range when represented in the others timebase.
+ * @return -1 if ts_a is before ts_b, 1 if ts_a is after ts_b or 0 if they represent the same position
+ */
+int av_compare_ts(int64_t ts_a, AVRational tb_a, int64_t ts_b, AVRational tb_b);
+
+/**
+ * Compare 2 integers modulo mod.
+ * That is we compare integers a and b for which only the least
+ * significant log2(mod) bits are known.
+ *
+ * @param mod must be a power of 2
+ * @return a negative value if a is smaller than b
+ * a positive value if a is greater than b
+ * 0 if a equals b
+ */
+int64_t av_compare_mod(uint64_t a, uint64_t b, uint64_t mod);
+
+/**
+ * Rescale a timestamp while preserving known durations.
+ *
+ * @param in_ts Input timestamp
+ * @param in_tb Input timebase
+ * @param fs_tb Duration and *last timebase
+ * @param duration duration till the next call
+ * @param out_tb Output timebase
+ */
+int64_t av_rescale_delta(AVRational in_tb, int64_t in_ts, AVRational fs_tb, int duration, int64_t *last, AVRational out_tb);
+
+/**
+ * Add a value to a timestamp.
+ *
+ * This function guarantees that when the same value is repeatly added that
+ * no accumulation of rounding errors occurs.
+ *
+ * @param ts Input timestamp
+ * @param ts_tb Input timestamp timebase
+ * @param inc value to add to ts
+ * @param inc_tb inc timebase
+ */
+int64_t av_add_stable(AVRational ts_tb, int64_t ts, AVRational inc_tb, int64_t inc);
+
+
+ /**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MATHEMATICS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/md5.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/md5.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..79702c88c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/md5.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MD5_H
+#define AVUTIL_MD5_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_md5 MD5
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_md5_size;
+
+struct AVMD5;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVMD5 context.
+ */
+struct AVMD5 *av_md5_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize MD5 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param ctx pointer to the function context (of size av_md5_size)
+ */
+void av_md5_init(struct AVMD5 *ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param ctx hash function context
+ * @param src input data to update hash with
+ * @param len input data length
+ */
+void av_md5_update(struct AVMD5 *ctx, const uint8_t *src, int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param ctx hash function context
+ * @param dst buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_md5_final(struct AVMD5 *ctx, uint8_t *dst);
+
+/**
+ * Hash an array of data.
+ *
+ * @param dst The output buffer to write the digest into
+ * @param src The data to hash
+ * @param len The length of the data, in bytes
+ */
+void av_md5_sum(uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src, const int len);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MD5_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mem.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mem.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a1e36d69f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/mem.h
@@ -0,0 +1,389 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * memory handling functions
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MEM_H
+#define AVUTIL_MEM_H
+
+#include
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "error.h"
+#include "avutil.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_mem
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+#if defined(__INTEL_COMPILER) && __INTEL_COMPILER < 1110 || defined(__SUNPRO_C)
+ #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v) t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+ #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v) const t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+#elif defined(__TI_COMPILER_VERSION__)
+ #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v) \
+ AV_PRAGMA(DATA_ALIGN(v,n)) \
+ t __attribute__((aligned(n))) v
+ #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v) \
+ AV_PRAGMA(DATA_ALIGN(v,n)) \
+ static const t __attribute__((aligned(n))) v
+#elif defined(__GNUC__)
+ #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v) t __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+ #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v) static const t av_used __attribute__ ((aligned (n))) v
+#elif defined(_MSC_VER)
+ #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v) __declspec(align(n)) t v
+ #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v) __declspec(align(n)) static const t v
+#else
+ #define DECLARE_ALIGNED(n,t,v) t v
+ #define DECLARE_ASM_CONST(n,t,v) static const t v
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(3,1)
+ #define av_malloc_attrib __attribute__((__malloc__))
+#else
+ #define av_malloc_attrib
+#endif
+
+#if AV_GCC_VERSION_AT_LEAST(4,3)
+ #define av_alloc_size(...) __attribute__((alloc_size(__VA_ARGS__)))
+#else
+ #define av_alloc_size(...)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a block of size bytes with alignment suitable for all
+ * memory accesses (including vectors if available on the CPU).
+ * @param size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated.
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, NULL if the block cannot
+ * be allocated.
+ * @see av_mallocz()
+ */
+void *av_malloc(size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a block of size * nmemb bytes with av_malloc().
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param size Size of the single element
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, NULL if the block cannot
+ * be allocated.
+ * @see av_malloc()
+ */
+av_alloc_size(1, 2) static inline void *av_malloc_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size)
+{
+ if (!size || nmemb >= INT_MAX / size)
+ return NULL;
+ return av_malloc(nmemb * size);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Allocate or reallocate a block of memory.
+ * If ptr is NULL and size > 0, allocate a new block. If
+ * size is zero, free the memory block pointed to by ptr.
+ * @param ptr Pointer to a memory block already allocated with
+ * av_realloc() or NULL.
+ * @param size Size in bytes of the memory block to be allocated or
+ * reallocated.
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-reallocated block or NULL if the block
+ * cannot be reallocated or the function is used to free the memory block.
+ * @warning Pointers originating from the av_malloc() family of functions must
+ * not be passed to av_realloc(). The former can be implemented using
+ * memalign() (or other functions), and there is no guarantee that
+ * pointers from such functions can be passed to realloc() at all.
+ * The situation is undefined according to POSIX and may crash with
+ * some libc implementations.
+ * @see av_fast_realloc()
+ */
+void *av_realloc(void *ptr, size_t size) av_alloc_size(2);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate or reallocate a block of memory.
+ * This function does the same thing as av_realloc, except:
+ * - It takes two arguments and checks the result of the multiplication for
+ * integer overflow.
+ * - It frees the input block in case of failure, thus avoiding the memory
+ * leak with the classic "buf = realloc(buf); if (!buf) return -1;".
+ */
+void *av_realloc_f(void *ptr, size_t nelem, size_t elsize);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate or reallocate a block of memory.
+ * If *ptr is NULL and size > 0, allocate a new block. If
+ * size is zero, free the memory block pointed to by ptr.
+ * @param ptr Pointer to a pointer to a memory block already allocated
+ * with av_realloc(), or pointer to a pointer to NULL.
+ * The pointer is updated on success, or freed on failure.
+ * @param size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated or
+ * reallocated
+ * @return Zero on success, an AVERROR error code on failure.
+ * @warning Pointers originating from the av_malloc() family of functions must
+ * not be passed to av_reallocp(). The former can be implemented using
+ * memalign() (or other functions), and there is no guarantee that
+ * pointers from such functions can be passed to realloc() at all.
+ * The situation is undefined according to POSIX and may crash with
+ * some libc implementations.
+ */
+int av_reallocp(void *ptr, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate or reallocate an array.
+ * If ptr is NULL and nmemb > 0, allocate a new block. If
+ * nmemb is zero, free the memory block pointed to by ptr.
+ * @param ptr Pointer to a memory block already allocated with
+ * av_realloc() or NULL.
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param size Size of the single element
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-reallocated block or NULL if the block
+ * cannot be reallocated or the function is used to free the memory block.
+ * @warning Pointers originating from the av_malloc() family of functions must
+ * not be passed to av_realloc(). The former can be implemented using
+ * memalign() (or other functions), and there is no guarantee that
+ * pointers from such functions can be passed to realloc() at all.
+ * The situation is undefined according to POSIX and may crash with
+ * some libc implementations.
+ */
+av_alloc_size(2, 3) void *av_realloc_array(void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate or reallocate an array through a pointer to a pointer.
+ * If *ptr is NULL and nmemb > 0, allocate a new block. If
+ * nmemb is zero, free the memory block pointed to by ptr.
+ * @param ptr Pointer to a pointer to a memory block already allocated
+ * with av_realloc(), or pointer to a pointer to NULL.
+ * The pointer is updated on success, or freed on failure.
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param size Size of the single element
+ * @return Zero on success, an AVERROR error code on failure.
+ * @warning Pointers originating from the av_malloc() family of functions must
+ * not be passed to av_realloc(). The former can be implemented using
+ * memalign() (or other functions), and there is no guarantee that
+ * pointers from such functions can be passed to realloc() at all.
+ * The situation is undefined according to POSIX and may crash with
+ * some libc implementations.
+ */
+av_alloc_size(2, 3) int av_reallocp_array(void *ptr, size_t nmemb, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Free a memory block which has been allocated with av_malloc(z)() or
+ * av_realloc().
+ * @param ptr Pointer to the memory block which should be freed.
+ * @note ptr = NULL is explicitly allowed.
+ * @note It is recommended that you use av_freep() instead.
+ * @see av_freep()
+ */
+void av_free(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a block of size bytes with alignment suitable for all
+ * memory accesses (including vectors if available on the CPU) and
+ * zero all the bytes of the block.
+ * @param size Size in bytes for the memory block to be allocated.
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, NULL if it cannot be allocated.
+ * @see av_malloc()
+ */
+void *av_mallocz(size_t size) av_malloc_attrib av_alloc_size(1);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a block of nmemb * size bytes with alignment suitable for all
+ * memory accesses (including vectors if available on the CPU) and
+ * zero all the bytes of the block.
+ * The allocation will fail if nmemb * size is greater than or equal
+ * to INT_MAX.
+ * @param nmemb
+ * @param size
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, NULL if it cannot be allocated.
+ */
+void *av_calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size) av_malloc_attrib;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a block of size * nmemb bytes with av_mallocz().
+ * @param nmemb Number of elements
+ * @param size Size of the single element
+ * @return Pointer to the allocated block, NULL if the block cannot
+ * be allocated.
+ * @see av_mallocz()
+ * @see av_malloc_array()
+ */
+av_alloc_size(1, 2) static inline void *av_mallocz_array(size_t nmemb, size_t size)
+{
+ if (!size || nmemb >= INT_MAX / size)
+ return NULL;
+ return av_mallocz(nmemb * size);
+}
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate the string s.
+ * @param s string to be duplicated
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-allocated string containing a
+ * copy of s or NULL if the string cannot be allocated.
+ */
+char *av_strdup(const char *s) av_malloc_attrib;
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate a substring of the string s.
+ * @param s string to be duplicated
+ * @param len the maximum length of the resulting string (not counting the
+ * terminating byte).
+ * @return Pointer to a newly-allocated string containing a
+ * copy of s or NULL if the string cannot be allocated.
+ */
+char *av_strndup(const char *s, size_t len) av_malloc_attrib;
+
+/**
+ * Duplicate the buffer p.
+ * @param p buffer to be duplicated
+ * @return Pointer to a newly allocated buffer containing a
+ * copy of p or NULL if the buffer cannot be allocated.
+ */
+void *av_memdup(const void *p, size_t size);
+
+/**
+ * Free a memory block which has been allocated with av_malloc(z)() or
+ * av_realloc() and set the pointer pointing to it to NULL.
+ * @param ptr Pointer to the pointer to the memory block which should
+ * be freed.
+ * @note passing a pointer to a NULL pointer is safe and leads to no action.
+ * @see av_free()
+ */
+void av_freep(void *ptr);
+
+/**
+ * Add an element to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * The array to grow is supposed to be an array of pointers to
+ * structures, and the element to add must be a pointer to an already
+ * allocated structure.
+ *
+ * The array is reallocated when its size reaches powers of 2.
+ * Therefore, the amortized cost of adding an element is constant.
+ *
+ * In case of success, the pointer to the array is updated in order to
+ * point to the new grown array, and the number pointed to by nb_ptr
+ * is incremented.
+ * In case of failure, the array is freed, *tab_ptr is set to NULL and
+ * *nb_ptr is set to 0.
+ *
+ * @param tab_ptr pointer to the array to grow
+ * @param nb_ptr pointer to the number of elements in the array
+ * @param elem element to add
+ * @see av_dynarray_add_nofree(), av_dynarray2_add()
+ */
+void av_dynarray_add(void *tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, void *elem);
+
+/**
+ * Add an element to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * Function has the same functionality as av_dynarray_add(),
+ * but it doesn't free memory on fails. It returns error code
+ * instead and leave current buffer untouched.
+ *
+ * @param tab_ptr pointer to the array to grow
+ * @param nb_ptr pointer to the number of elements in the array
+ * @param elem element to add
+ * @return >=0 on success, negative otherwise.
+ * @see av_dynarray_add(), av_dynarray2_add()
+ */
+int av_dynarray_add_nofree(void *tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, void *elem);
+
+/**
+ * Add an element of size elem_size to a dynamic array.
+ *
+ * The array is reallocated when its number of elements reaches powers of 2.
+ * Therefore, the amortized cost of adding an element is constant.
+ *
+ * In case of success, the pointer to the array is updated in order to
+ * point to the new grown array, and the number pointed to by nb_ptr
+ * is incremented.
+ * In case of failure, the array is freed, *tab_ptr is set to NULL and
+ * *nb_ptr is set to 0.
+ *
+ * @param tab_ptr pointer to the array to grow
+ * @param nb_ptr pointer to the number of elements in the array
+ * @param elem_size size in bytes of the elements in the array
+ * @param elem_data pointer to the data of the element to add. If NULL, the space of
+ * the new added element is not filled.
+ * @return pointer to the data of the element to copy in the new allocated space.
+ * If NULL, the new allocated space is left uninitialized."
+ * @see av_dynarray_add(), av_dynarray_add_nofree()
+ */
+void *av_dynarray2_add(void **tab_ptr, int *nb_ptr, size_t elem_size,
+ const uint8_t *elem_data);
+
+/**
+ * Multiply two size_t values checking for overflow.
+ * @return 0 if success, AVERROR(EINVAL) if overflow.
+ */
+static inline int av_size_mult(size_t a, size_t b, size_t *r)
+{
+ size_t t = a * b;
+ /* Hack inspired from glibc: only try the division if nelem and elsize
+ * are both greater than sqrt(SIZE_MAX). */
+ if ((a | b) >= ((size_t)1 << (sizeof(size_t) * 4)) && a && t / a != b)
+ return AVERROR(EINVAL);
+ *r = t;
+ return 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Set the maximum size that may me allocated in one block.
+ */
+void av_max_alloc(size_t max);
+
+/**
+ * deliberately overlapping memcpy implementation
+ * @param dst destination buffer
+ * @param back how many bytes back we start (the initial size of the overlapping window), must be > 0
+ * @param cnt number of bytes to copy, must be >= 0
+ *
+ * cnt > back is valid, this will copy the bytes we just copied,
+ * thus creating a repeating pattern with a period length of back.
+ */
+void av_memcpy_backptr(uint8_t *dst, int back, int cnt);
+
+/**
+ * Reallocate the given block if it is not large enough, otherwise do nothing.
+ *
+ * @see av_realloc
+ */
+void *av_fast_realloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a buffer, reusing the given one if large enough.
+ *
+ * Contrary to av_fast_realloc the current buffer contents might not be
+ * preserved and on error the old buffer is freed, thus no special
+ * handling to avoid memleaks is necessary.
+ *
+ * @param ptr pointer to pointer to already allocated buffer, overwritten with pointer to new buffer
+ * @param size size of the buffer *ptr points to
+ * @param min_size minimum size of *ptr buffer after returning, *ptr will be NULL and
+ * *size 0 if an error occurred.
+ */
+void av_fast_malloc(void *ptr, unsigned int *size, size_t min_size);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MEM_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..30cfb994b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/motion_vector.h
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H
+#define AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H
+
+#include
+
+typedef struct AVMotionVector {
+ /**
+ * Where the current macroblock comes from; negative value when it comes
+ * from the past, positive value when it comes from the future.
+ * XXX: set exact relative ref frame reference instead of a +/- 1 "direction".
+ */
+ int32_t source;
+ /**
+ * Width and height of the block.
+ */
+ uint8_t w, h;
+ /**
+ * Absolute source position. Can be outside the frame area.
+ */
+ int16_t src_x, src_y;
+ /**
+ * Absolute destination position. Can be outside the frame area.
+ */
+ int16_t dst_x, dst_y;
+ /**
+ * Extra flag information.
+ * Currently unused.
+ */
+ uint64_t flags;
+} AVMotionVector;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MOTION_VECTOR_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/murmur3.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/murmur3.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f29ed973e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/murmur3.h
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 Reimar Döffinger
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H
+#define AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H
+
+#include
+
+struct AVMurMur3 *av_murmur3_alloc(void);
+void av_murmur3_init_seeded(struct AVMurMur3 *c, uint64_t seed);
+void av_murmur3_init(struct AVMurMur3 *c);
+void av_murmur3_update(struct AVMurMur3 *c, const uint8_t *src, int len);
+void av_murmur3_final(struct AVMurMur3 *c, uint8_t dst[16]);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_MURMUR3_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/old_pix_fmts.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/old_pix_fmts.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cd1ed7c19f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/old_pix_fmts.h
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2006-2012 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_OLD_PIX_FMTS_H
+#define AVUTIL_OLD_PIX_FMTS_H
+
+/*
+ * This header exists to prevent new pixel formats from being accidentally added
+ * to the deprecated list.
+ * Do not include it directly. It will be removed on next major bump
+ *
+ * Do not add new items to this list. Use the AVPixelFormat enum instead.
+ */
+ PIX_FMT_NONE = AV_PIX_FMT_NONE,
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUYV422, ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Y0 Cb Y1 Cr
+ PIX_FMT_RGB24, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, RGBRGB...
+ PIX_FMT_BGR24, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, BGRBGR...
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUV410P, ///< planar YUV 4:1:0, 9bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x4 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUV411P, ///< planar YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x1 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_GRAY8, ///< Y , 8bpp
+ PIX_FMT_MONOWHITE, ///< Y , 1bpp, 0 is white, 1 is black, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+ PIX_FMT_MONOBLACK, ///< Y , 1bpp, 0 is black, 1 is white, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+ PIX_FMT_PAL8, ///< 8 bit with PIX_FMT_RGB32 palette
+ PIX_FMT_YUVJ420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV420P and setting color_range
+ PIX_FMT_YUVJ422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV422P and setting color_range
+ PIX_FMT_YUVJ444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV444P and setting color_range
+#if FF_API_XVMC
+ PIX_FMT_XVMC_MPEG2_MC,///< XVideo Motion Acceleration via common packet passing
+ PIX_FMT_XVMC_MPEG2_IDCT,
+#endif /* FF_API_XVMC */
+ PIX_FMT_UYVY422, ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Cb Y0 Cr Y1
+ PIX_FMT_UYYVYY411, ///< packed YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, Cb Y0 Y1 Cr Y2 Y3
+ PIX_FMT_BGR8, ///< packed RGB 3:3:2, 8bpp, (msb)2B 3G 3R(lsb)
+ PIX_FMT_BGR4, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream, 4bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+ PIX_FMT_BGR4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1, 8bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb)
+ PIX_FMT_RGB8, ///< packed RGB 3:3:2, 8bpp, (msb)2R 3G 3B(lsb)
+ PIX_FMT_RGB4, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream, 4bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+ PIX_FMT_RGB4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1, 8bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb)
+ PIX_FMT_NV12, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, 1 plane for Y and 1 plane for the UV components, which are interleaved (first byte U and the following byte V)
+ PIX_FMT_NV21, ///< as above, but U and V bytes are swapped
+
+ PIX_FMT_ARGB, ///< packed ARGB 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ARGBARGB...
+ PIX_FMT_RGBA, ///< packed RGBA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, RGBARGBA...
+ PIX_FMT_ABGR, ///< packed ABGR 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ABGRABGR...
+ PIX_FMT_BGRA, ///< packed BGRA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, BGRABGRA...
+
+ PIX_FMT_GRAY16BE, ///< Y , 16bpp, big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_GRAY16LE, ///< Y , 16bpp, little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV440P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUVJ440P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV440P and setting color_range
+ PIX_FMT_YUVA420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples)
+#if FF_API_VDPAU
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_H264,///< H.264 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG1,///< MPEG-1 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG2,///< MPEG-2 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_WMV3,///< WMV3 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_VC1, ///< VC-1 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+#endif
+ PIX_FMT_RGB48BE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_RGB48LE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+ PIX_FMT_RGB565BE, ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5R 6G 5B(lsb), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_RGB565LE, ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5R 6G 5B(lsb), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_RGB555BE, ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5R 5G 5B(lsb), big-endian, most significant bit to 0
+ PIX_FMT_RGB555LE, ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5R 5G 5B(lsb), little-endian, most significant bit to 0
+
+ PIX_FMT_BGR565BE, ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5B 6G 5R(lsb), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGR565LE, ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5B 6G 5R(lsb), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGR555BE, ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5B 5G 5R(lsb), big-endian, most significant bit to 1
+ PIX_FMT_BGR555LE, ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5B 5G 5R(lsb), little-endian, most significant bit to 1
+
+ PIX_FMT_VAAPI_MOCO, ///< HW acceleration through VA API at motion compensation entry-point, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains macroblocks as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VAAPI_IDCT, ///< HW acceleration through VA API at IDCT entry-point, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains fields extracted from headers
+ PIX_FMT_VAAPI_VLD, ///< HW decoding through VA API, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+#if FF_API_VDPAU
+ PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG4, ///< MPEG4 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+#endif
+ PIX_FMT_DXVA2_VLD, ///< HW decoding through DXVA2, Picture.data[3] contains a LPDIRECT3DSURFACE9 pointer
+
+ PIX_FMT_RGB444LE, ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4R 4G 4B(lsb), little-endian, most significant bits to 0
+ PIX_FMT_RGB444BE, ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4R 4G 4B(lsb), big-endian, most significant bits to 0
+ PIX_FMT_BGR444LE, ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4B 4G 4R(lsb), little-endian, most significant bits to 1
+ PIX_FMT_BGR444BE, ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4B 4G 4R(lsb), big-endian, most significant bits to 1
+ PIX_FMT_GRAY8A, ///< 8bit gray, 8bit alpha
+ PIX_FMT_BGR48BE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGR48LE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+ //the following 10 formats have the disadvantage of needing 1 format for each bit depth, thus
+ //If you want to support multiple bit depths, then using PIX_FMT_YUV420P16* with the bpp stored separately
+ //is better
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_VDA_VLD, ///< hardware decoding through VDA
+
+#ifdef AV_PIX_FMT_ABI_GIT_MASTER
+ PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+#endif
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 24bpp
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP9BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, big endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP9LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, little endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP10BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, big endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP10LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, little endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP16BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, big endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP16LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, little endian
+
+#ifndef AV_PIX_FMT_ABI_GIT_MASTER
+ PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE=0x123, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+#endif
+ PIX_FMT_0RGB=0x123+4, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, 0RGB0RGB...
+ PIX_FMT_RGB0, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, RGB0RGB0...
+ PIX_FMT_0BGR, ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, 0BGR0BGR...
+ PIX_FMT_BGR0, ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, BGR0BGR0...
+ PIX_FMT_YUVA444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples)
+ PIX_FMT_YUVA422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples)
+
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV420P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV422P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ PIX_FMT_YUV444P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP12BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, big endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP12LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, little endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP14BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, big endian
+ PIX_FMT_GBRP14LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, little endian
+
+ PIX_FMT_NB, ///< number of pixel formats, DO NOT USE THIS if you want to link with shared libav* because the number of formats might differ between versions
+#endif /* AVUTIL_OLD_PIX_FMTS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/opt.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/opt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5fc8a9b58a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/opt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,901 @@
+/*
+ * AVOptions
+ * copyright (c) 2005 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_OPT_H
+#define AVUTIL_OPT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * AVOptions
+ */
+
+#include "rational.h"
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "dict.h"
+#include "log.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+#include "samplefmt.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup avoptions AVOptions
+ * @ingroup lavu_data
+ * @{
+ * AVOptions provide a generic system to declare options on arbitrary structs
+ * ("objects"). An option can have a help text, a type and a range of possible
+ * values. Options may then be enumerated, read and written to.
+ *
+ * @section avoptions_implement Implementing AVOptions
+ * This section describes how to add AVOptions capabilities to a struct.
+ *
+ * All AVOptions-related information is stored in an AVClass. Therefore
+ * the first member of the struct should be a pointer to an AVClass describing it.
+ * The option field of the AVClass must be set to a NULL-terminated static array
+ * of AVOptions. Each AVOption must have a non-empty name, a type, a default
+ * value and for number-type AVOptions also a range of allowed values. It must
+ * also declare an offset in bytes from the start of the struct, where the field
+ * associated with this AVOption is located. Other fields in the AVOption struct
+ * should also be set when applicable, but are not required.
+ *
+ * The following example illustrates an AVOptions-enabled struct:
+ * @code
+ * typedef struct test_struct {
+ * AVClass *class;
+ * int int_opt;
+ * char *str_opt;
+ * uint8_t *bin_opt;
+ * int bin_len;
+ * } test_struct;
+ *
+ * static const AVOption test_options[] = {
+ * { "test_int", "This is a test option of int type.", offsetof(test_struct, int_opt),
+ * AV_OPT_TYPE_INT, { .i64 = -1 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX },
+ * { "test_str", "This is a test option of string type.", offsetof(test_struct, str_opt),
+ * AV_OPT_TYPE_STRING },
+ * { "test_bin", "This is a test option of binary type.", offsetof(test_struct, bin_opt),
+ * AV_OPT_TYPE_BINARY },
+ * { NULL },
+ * };
+ *
+ * static const AVClass test_class = {
+ * .class_name = "test class",
+ * .item_name = av_default_item_name,
+ * .option = test_options,
+ * .version = LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT,
+ * };
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * Next, when allocating your struct, you must ensure that the AVClass pointer
+ * is set to the correct value. Then, av_opt_set_defaults() can be called to
+ * initialize defaults. After that the struct is ready to be used with the
+ * AVOptions API.
+ *
+ * When cleaning up, you may use the av_opt_free() function to automatically
+ * free all the allocated string and binary options.
+ *
+ * Continuing with the above example:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * test_struct *alloc_test_struct(void)
+ * {
+ * test_struct *ret = av_malloc(sizeof(*ret));
+ * ret->class = &test_class;
+ * av_opt_set_defaults(ret);
+ * return ret;
+ * }
+ * void free_test_struct(test_struct **foo)
+ * {
+ * av_opt_free(*foo);
+ * av_freep(foo);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_implement_nesting Nesting
+ * It may happen that an AVOptions-enabled struct contains another
+ * AVOptions-enabled struct as a member (e.g. AVCodecContext in
+ * libavcodec exports generic options, while its priv_data field exports
+ * codec-specific options). In such a case, it is possible to set up the
+ * parent struct to export a child's options. To do that, simply
+ * implement AVClass.child_next() and AVClass.child_class_next() in the
+ * parent struct's AVClass.
+ * Assuming that the test_struct from above now also contains a
+ * child_struct field:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * typedef struct child_struct {
+ * AVClass *class;
+ * int flags_opt;
+ * } child_struct;
+ * static const AVOption child_opts[] = {
+ * { "test_flags", "This is a test option of flags type.",
+ * offsetof(child_struct, flags_opt), AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS, { .i64 = 0 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX },
+ * { NULL },
+ * };
+ * static const AVClass child_class = {
+ * .class_name = "child class",
+ * .item_name = av_default_item_name,
+ * .option = child_opts,
+ * .version = LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT,
+ * };
+ *
+ * void *child_next(void *obj, void *prev)
+ * {
+ * test_struct *t = obj;
+ * if (!prev && t->child_struct)
+ * return t->child_struct;
+ * return NULL
+ * }
+ * const AVClass child_class_next(const AVClass *prev)
+ * {
+ * return prev ? NULL : &child_class;
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ * Putting child_next() and child_class_next() as defined above into
+ * test_class will now make child_struct's options accessible through
+ * test_struct (again, proper setup as described above needs to be done on
+ * child_struct right after it is created).
+ *
+ * From the above example it might not be clear why both child_next()
+ * and child_class_next() are needed. The distinction is that child_next()
+ * iterates over actually existing objects, while child_class_next()
+ * iterates over all possible child classes. E.g. if an AVCodecContext
+ * was initialized to use a codec which has private options, then its
+ * child_next() will return AVCodecContext.priv_data and finish
+ * iterating. OTOH child_class_next() on AVCodecContext.av_class will
+ * iterate over all available codecs with private options.
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_implement_named_constants Named constants
+ * It is possible to create named constants for options. Simply set the unit
+ * field of the option the constants should apply to a string and
+ * create the constants themselves as options of type AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST
+ * with their unit field set to the same string.
+ * Their default_val field should contain the value of the named
+ * constant.
+ * For example, to add some named constants for the test_flags option
+ * above, put the following into the child_opts array:
+ * @code
+ * { "test_flags", "This is a test option of flags type.",
+ * offsetof(child_struct, flags_opt), AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS, { .i64 = 0 }, INT_MIN, INT_MAX, "test_unit" },
+ * { "flag1", "This is a flag with value 16", 0, AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST, { .i64 = 16 }, 0, 0, "test_unit" },
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * @section avoptions_use Using AVOptions
+ * This section deals with accessing options in an AVOptions-enabled struct.
+ * Such structs in FFmpeg are e.g. AVCodecContext in libavcodec or
+ * AVFormatContext in libavformat.
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_use_examine Examining AVOptions
+ * The basic functions for examining options are av_opt_next(), which iterates
+ * over all options defined for one object, and av_opt_find(), which searches
+ * for an option with the given name.
+ *
+ * The situation is more complicated with nesting. An AVOptions-enabled struct
+ * may have AVOptions-enabled children. Passing the AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN flag
+ * to av_opt_find() will make the function search children recursively.
+ *
+ * For enumerating there are basically two cases. The first is when you want to
+ * get all options that may potentially exist on the struct and its children
+ * (e.g. when constructing documentation). In that case you should call
+ * av_opt_child_class_next() recursively on the parent struct's AVClass. The
+ * second case is when you have an already initialized struct with all its
+ * children and you want to get all options that can be actually written or read
+ * from it. In that case you should call av_opt_child_next() recursively (and
+ * av_opt_next() on each result).
+ *
+ * @subsection avoptions_use_get_set Reading and writing AVOptions
+ * When setting options, you often have a string read directly from the
+ * user. In such a case, simply passing it to av_opt_set() is enough. For
+ * non-string type options, av_opt_set() will parse the string according to the
+ * option type.
+ *
+ * Similarly av_opt_get() will read any option type and convert it to a string
+ * which will be returned. Do not forget that the string is allocated, so you
+ * have to free it with av_free().
+ *
+ * In some cases it may be more convenient to put all options into an
+ * AVDictionary and call av_opt_set_dict() on it. A specific case of this
+ * are the format/codec open functions in lavf/lavc which take a dictionary
+ * filled with option as a parameter. This allows to set some options
+ * that cannot be set otherwise, since e.g. the input file format is not known
+ * before the file is actually opened.
+ */
+
+enum AVOptionType{
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_INT,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_INT64,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_DOUBLE,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_FLOAT,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_STRING,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_RATIONAL,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_BINARY, ///< offset must point to a pointer immediately followed by an int for the length
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_DICT,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_CONST = 128,
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE = MKBETAG('S','I','Z','E'), ///< offset must point to two consecutive integers
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_PIXEL_FMT = MKBETAG('P','F','M','T'),
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_SAMPLE_FMT = MKBETAG('S','F','M','T'),
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_VIDEO_RATE = MKBETAG('V','R','A','T'), ///< offset must point to AVRational
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_DURATION = MKBETAG('D','U','R',' '),
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_COLOR = MKBETAG('C','O','L','R'),
+ AV_OPT_TYPE_CHANNEL_LAYOUT = MKBETAG('C','H','L','A'),
+#if FF_API_OLD_AVOPTIONS
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_FLAGS = 0,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_INT,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_INT64,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_DOUBLE,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_FLOAT,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_STRING,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_RATIONAL,
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_BINARY, ///< offset must point to a pointer immediately followed by an int for the length
+ FF_OPT_TYPE_CONST=128,
+#endif
+};
+
+/**
+ * AVOption
+ */
+typedef struct AVOption {
+ const char *name;
+
+ /**
+ * short English help text
+ * @todo What about other languages?
+ */
+ const char *help;
+
+ /**
+ * The offset relative to the context structure where the option
+ * value is stored. It should be 0 for named constants.
+ */
+ int offset;
+ enum AVOptionType type;
+
+ /**
+ * the default value for scalar options
+ */
+ union {
+ int64_t i64;
+ double dbl;
+ const char *str;
+ /* TODO those are unused now */
+ AVRational q;
+ } default_val;
+ double min; ///< minimum valid value for the option
+ double max; ///< maximum valid value for the option
+
+ int flags;
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_ENCODING_PARAM 1 ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for muxing or encoding
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_DECODING_PARAM 2 ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for demuxing or decoding
+#if FF_API_OPT_TYPE_METADATA
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_METADATA 4 ///< some data extracted or inserted into the file like title, comment, ...
+#endif
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_AUDIO_PARAM 8
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_VIDEO_PARAM 16
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_SUBTITLE_PARAM 32
+/**
+ * The option is inteded for exporting values to the caller.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_EXPORT 64
+/**
+ * The option may not be set through the AVOptions API, only read.
+ * This flag only makes sense when AV_OPT_FLAG_EXPORT is also set.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_READONLY 128
+#define AV_OPT_FLAG_FILTERING_PARAM (1<<16) ///< a generic parameter which can be set by the user for filtering
+//FIXME think about enc-audio, ... style flags
+
+ /**
+ * The logical unit to which the option belongs. Non-constant
+ * options and corresponding named constants share the same
+ * unit. May be NULL.
+ */
+ const char *unit;
+} AVOption;
+
+/**
+ * A single allowed range of values, or a single allowed value.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOptionRange {
+ const char *str;
+ /**
+ * Value range.
+ * For string ranges this represents the min/max length.
+ * For dimensions this represents the min/max pixel count or width/height in multi-component case.
+ */
+ double value_min, value_max;
+ /**
+ * Value's component range.
+ * For string this represents the unicode range for chars, 0-127 limits to ASCII.
+ */
+ double component_min, component_max;
+ /**
+ * Range flag.
+ * If set to 1 the struct encodes a range, if set to 0 a single value.
+ */
+ int is_range;
+} AVOptionRange;
+
+/**
+ * List of AVOptionRange structs.
+ */
+typedef struct AVOptionRanges {
+ /**
+ * Array of option ranges.
+ *
+ * Most of option types use just one component.
+ * Following describes multi-component option types:
+ *
+ * AV_OPT_TYPE_IMAGE_SIZE:
+ * component index 0: range of pixel count (width * height).
+ * component index 1: range of width.
+ * component index 2: range of height.
+ *
+ * @note To obtain multi-component version of this structure, user must
+ * provide AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE to av_opt_query_ranges or
+ * av_opt_query_ranges_default function.
+ *
+ * Multi-component range can be read as in following example:
+ *
+ * @code
+ * int range_index, component_index;
+ * AVOptionRanges *ranges;
+ * AVOptionRange *range[3]; //may require more than 3 in the future.
+ * av_opt_query_ranges(&ranges, obj, key, AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE);
+ * for (range_index = 0; range_index < ranges->nb_ranges; range_index++) {
+ * for (component_index = 0; component_index < ranges->nb_components; component_index++)
+ * range[component_index] = ranges->range[ranges->nb_ranges * component_index + range_index];
+ * //do something with range here.
+ * }
+ * av_opt_freep_ranges(&ranges);
+ * @endcode
+ */
+ AVOptionRange **range;
+ /**
+ * Number of ranges per component.
+ */
+ int nb_ranges;
+ /**
+ * Number of componentes.
+ */
+ int nb_components;
+} AVOptionRanges;
+
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_AVOPTIONS
+/**
+ * Set the field of obj with the given name to value.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A struct whose first element is a pointer to an
+ * AVClass.
+ * @param[in] name the name of the field to set
+ * @param[in] val The value to set. If the field is not of a string
+ * type, then the given string is parsed.
+ * SI postfixes and some named scalars are supported.
+ * If the field is of a numeric type, it has to be a numeric or named
+ * scalar. Behavior with more than one scalar and +- infix operators
+ * is undefined.
+ * If the field is of a flags type, it has to be a sequence of numeric
+ * scalars or named flags separated by '+' or '-'. Prefixing a flag
+ * with '+' causes it to be set without affecting the other flags;
+ * similarly, '-' unsets a flag.
+ * @param[out] o_out if non-NULL put here a pointer to the AVOption
+ * found
+ * @param alloc this parameter is currently ignored
+ * @return 0 if the value has been set, or an AVERROR code in case of
+ * error:
+ * AVERROR_OPTION_NOT_FOUND if no matching option exists
+ * AVERROR(ERANGE) if the value is out of range
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if the value is not valid
+ * @deprecated use av_opt_set()
+ */
+attribute_deprecated
+int av_set_string3(void *obj, const char *name, const char *val, int alloc, const AVOption **o_out);
+
+attribute_deprecated const AVOption *av_set_double(void *obj, const char *name, double n);
+attribute_deprecated const AVOption *av_set_q(void *obj, const char *name, AVRational n);
+attribute_deprecated const AVOption *av_set_int(void *obj, const char *name, int64_t n);
+
+double av_get_double(void *obj, const char *name, const AVOption **o_out);
+AVRational av_get_q(void *obj, const char *name, const AVOption **o_out);
+int64_t av_get_int(void *obj, const char *name, const AVOption **o_out);
+attribute_deprecated const char *av_get_string(void *obj, const char *name, const AVOption **o_out, char *buf, int buf_len);
+attribute_deprecated const AVOption *av_next_option(FF_CONST_AVUTIL55 void *obj, const AVOption *last);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Show the obj options.
+ *
+ * @param req_flags requested flags for the options to show. Show only the
+ * options for which it is opt->flags & req_flags.
+ * @param rej_flags rejected flags for the options to show. Show only the
+ * options for which it is !(opt->flags & req_flags).
+ * @param av_log_obj log context to use for showing the options
+ */
+int av_opt_show2(void *obj, void *av_log_obj, int req_flags, int rej_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set the values of all AVOption fields to their default values.
+ *
+ * @param s an AVOption-enabled struct (its first member must be a pointer to AVClass)
+ */
+void av_opt_set_defaults(void *s);
+
+#if FF_API_OLD_AVOPTIONS
+attribute_deprecated
+void av_opt_set_defaults2(void *s, int mask, int flags);
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key/value pairs list in opts. For each key/value pair
+ * found, stores the value in the field in ctx that is named like the
+ * key. ctx must be an AVClass context, storing is done using
+ * AVOptions.
+ *
+ * @param opts options string to parse, may be NULL
+ * @param key_val_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to
+ * separate key from value
+ * @param pairs_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * two pairs from each other
+ * @return the number of successfully set key/value pairs, or a negative
+ * value corresponding to an AVERROR code in case of error:
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if opts cannot be parsed,
+ * the error code issued by av_opt_set() if a key/value pair
+ * cannot be set
+ */
+int av_set_options_string(void *ctx, const char *opts,
+ const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the key-value pairs list in opts. For each key=value pair found,
+ * set the value of the corresponding option in ctx.
+ *
+ * @param ctx the AVClass object to set options on
+ * @param opts the options string, key-value pairs separated by a
+ * delimiter
+ * @param shorthand a NULL-terminated array of options names for shorthand
+ * notation: if the first field in opts has no key part,
+ * the key is taken from the first element of shorthand;
+ * then again for the second, etc., until either opts is
+ * finished, shorthand is finished or a named option is
+ * found; after that, all options must be named
+ * @param key_val_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * key from value, for example '='
+ * @param pairs_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * two pairs from each other, for example ':' or ','
+ * @return the number of successfully set key=value pairs, or a negative
+ * value corresponding to an AVERROR code in case of error:
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if opts cannot be parsed,
+ * the error code issued by av_set_string3() if a key/value pair
+ * cannot be set
+ *
+ * Options names must use only the following characters: a-z A-Z 0-9 - . / _
+ * Separators must use characters distinct from option names and from each
+ * other.
+ */
+int av_opt_set_from_string(void *ctx, const char *opts,
+ const char *const *shorthand,
+ const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep);
+/**
+ * Free all allocated objects in obj.
+ */
+void av_opt_free(void *obj);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether a particular flag is set in a flags field.
+ *
+ * @param field_name the name of the flag field option
+ * @param flag_name the name of the flag to check
+ * @return non-zero if the flag is set, zero if the flag isn't set,
+ * isn't of the right type, or the flags field doesn't exist.
+ */
+int av_opt_flag_is_set(void *obj, const char *field_name, const char *flag_name);
+
+/**
+ * Set all the options from a given dictionary on an object.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass
+ * @param options options to process. This dictionary will be freed and replaced
+ * by a new one containing all options not found in obj.
+ * Of course this new dictionary needs to be freed by caller
+ * with av_dict_free().
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR if some option was found in obj,
+ * but could not be set.
+ *
+ * @see av_dict_copy()
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict(void *obj, struct AVDictionary **options);
+
+
+/**
+ * Set all the options from a given dictionary on an object.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass
+ * @param options options to process. This dictionary will be freed and replaced
+ * by a new one containing all options not found in obj.
+ * Of course this new dictionary needs to be freed by caller
+ * with av_dict_free().
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative AVERROR if some option was found in obj,
+ * but could not be set.
+ *
+ * @see av_dict_copy()
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict2(void *obj, struct AVDictionary **options, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Extract a key-value pair from the beginning of a string.
+ *
+ * @param ropts pointer to the options string, will be updated to
+ * point to the rest of the string (one of the pairs_sep
+ * or the final NUL)
+ * @param key_val_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * key from value, for example '='
+ * @param pairs_sep a 0-terminated list of characters used to separate
+ * two pairs from each other, for example ':' or ','
+ * @param flags flags; see the AV_OPT_FLAG_* values below
+ * @param rkey parsed key; must be freed using av_free()
+ * @param rval parsed value; must be freed using av_free()
+ *
+ * @return >=0 for success, or a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code in case of error; in particular:
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if no key is present
+ *
+ */
+int av_opt_get_key_value(const char **ropts,
+ const char *key_val_sep, const char *pairs_sep,
+ unsigned flags,
+ char **rkey, char **rval);
+
+enum {
+
+ /**
+ * Accept to parse a value without a key; the key will then be returned
+ * as NULL.
+ */
+ AV_OPT_FLAG_IMPLICIT_KEY = 1,
+};
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_eval_funcs Evaluating option strings
+ * @{
+ * This group of functions can be used to evaluate option strings
+ * and get numbers out of them. They do the same thing as av_opt_set(),
+ * except the result is written into the caller-supplied pointer.
+ *
+ * @param obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to AVClass.
+ * @param o an option for which the string is to be evaluated.
+ * @param val string to be evaluated.
+ * @param *_out value of the string will be written here.
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, a negative number on failure.
+ */
+int av_opt_eval_flags (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int *flags_out);
+int av_opt_eval_int (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int *int_out);
+int av_opt_eval_int64 (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, int64_t *int64_out);
+int av_opt_eval_float (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, float *float_out);
+int av_opt_eval_double(void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, double *double_out);
+int av_opt_eval_q (void *obj, const AVOption *o, const char *val, AVRational *q_out);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#define AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN 0x0001 /**< Search in possible children of the
+ given object first. */
+/**
+ * The obj passed to av_opt_find() is fake -- only a double pointer to AVClass
+ * instead of a required pointer to a struct containing AVClass. This is
+ * useful for searching for options without needing to allocate the corresponding
+ * object.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ 0x0002
+
+/**
+ * Allows av_opt_query_ranges and av_opt_query_ranges_default to return more than
+ * one component for certain option types.
+ * @see AVOptionRanges for details.
+ */
+#define AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE 0x1000
+
+/**
+ * Look for an option in an object. Consider only options which
+ * have all the specified flags set.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A pointer to a struct whose first element is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass.
+ * Alternatively a double pointer to an AVClass, if
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ search flag is set.
+ * @param[in] name The name of the option to look for.
+ * @param[in] unit When searching for named constants, name of the unit
+ * it belongs to.
+ * @param opt_flags Find only options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG).
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ *
+ * @return A pointer to the option found, or NULL if no option
+ * was found.
+ *
+ * @note Options found with AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN flag may not be settable
+ * directly with av_opt_set(). Use special calls which take an options
+ * AVDictionary (e.g. avformat_open_input()) to set options found with this
+ * flag.
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_find(void *obj, const char *name, const char *unit,
+ int opt_flags, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Look for an option in an object. Consider only options which
+ * have all the specified flags set.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A pointer to a struct whose first element is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass.
+ * Alternatively a double pointer to an AVClass, if
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ search flag is set.
+ * @param[in] name The name of the option to look for.
+ * @param[in] unit When searching for named constants, name of the unit
+ * it belongs to.
+ * @param opt_flags Find only options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG).
+ * @param search_flags A combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*.
+ * @param[out] target_obj if non-NULL, an object to which the option belongs will be
+ * written here. It may be different from obj if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN is present
+ * in search_flags. This parameter is ignored if search_flags contain
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ.
+ *
+ * @return A pointer to the option found, or NULL if no option
+ * was found.
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_find2(void *obj, const char *name, const char *unit,
+ int opt_flags, int search_flags, void **target_obj);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all AVOptions belonging to obj.
+ *
+ * @param obj an AVOptions-enabled struct or a double pointer to an
+ * AVClass describing it.
+ * @param prev result of the previous call to av_opt_next() on this object
+ * or NULL
+ * @return next AVOption or NULL
+ */
+const AVOption *av_opt_next(FF_CONST_AVUTIL55 void *obj, const AVOption *prev);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over AVOptions-enabled children of obj.
+ *
+ * @param prev result of a previous call to this function or NULL
+ * @return next AVOptions-enabled child or NULL
+ */
+void *av_opt_child_next(void *obj, void *prev);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over potential AVOptions-enabled children of parent.
+ *
+ * @param prev result of a previous call to this function or NULL
+ * @return AVClass corresponding to next potential child or NULL
+ */
+const AVClass *av_opt_child_class_next(const AVClass *parent, const AVClass *prev);
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_set_funcs Option setting functions
+ * @{
+ * Those functions set the field of obj with the given name to value.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj A struct whose first element is a pointer to an AVClass.
+ * @param[in] name the name of the field to set
+ * @param[in] val The value to set. In case of av_opt_set() if the field is not
+ * of a string type, then the given string is parsed.
+ * SI postfixes and some named scalars are supported.
+ * If the field is of a numeric type, it has to be a numeric or named
+ * scalar. Behavior with more than one scalar and +- infix operators
+ * is undefined.
+ * If the field is of a flags type, it has to be a sequence of numeric
+ * scalars or named flags separated by '+' or '-'. Prefixing a flag
+ * with '+' causes it to be set without affecting the other flags;
+ * similarly, '-' unsets a flag.
+ * @param search_flags flags passed to av_opt_find2. I.e. if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN
+ * is passed here, then the option may be set on a child of obj.
+ *
+ * @return 0 if the value has been set, or an AVERROR code in case of
+ * error:
+ * AVERROR_OPTION_NOT_FOUND if no matching option exists
+ * AVERROR(ERANGE) if the value is out of range
+ * AVERROR(EINVAL) if the value is not valid
+ */
+int av_opt_set (void *obj, const char *name, const char *val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_int (void *obj, const char *name, int64_t val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_double (void *obj, const char *name, double val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_q (void *obj, const char *name, AVRational val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_bin (void *obj, const char *name, const uint8_t *val, int size, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_image_size(void *obj, const char *name, int w, int h, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_pixel_fmt (void *obj, const char *name, enum AVPixelFormat fmt, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_sample_fmt(void *obj, const char *name, enum AVSampleFormat fmt, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_video_rate(void *obj, const char *name, AVRational val, int search_flags);
+int av_opt_set_channel_layout(void *obj, const char *name, int64_t ch_layout, int search_flags);
+/**
+ * @note Any old dictionary present is discarded and replaced with a copy of the new one. The
+ * caller still owns val is and responsible for freeing it.
+ */
+int av_opt_set_dict_val(void *obj, const char *name, const AVDictionary *val, int search_flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set a binary option to an integer list.
+ *
+ * @param obj AVClass object to set options on
+ * @param name name of the binary option
+ * @param val pointer to an integer list (must have the correct type with
+ * regard to the contents of the list)
+ * @param term list terminator (usually 0 or -1)
+ * @param flags search flags
+ */
+#define av_opt_set_int_list(obj, name, val, term, flags) \
+ (av_int_list_length(val, term) > INT_MAX / sizeof(*(val)) ? \
+ AVERROR(EINVAL) : \
+ av_opt_set_bin(obj, name, (const uint8_t *)(val), \
+ av_int_list_length(val, term) * sizeof(*(val)), flags))
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup opt_get_funcs Option getting functions
+ * @{
+ * Those functions get a value of the option with the given name from an object.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj a struct whose first element is a pointer to an AVClass.
+ * @param[in] name name of the option to get.
+ * @param[in] search_flags flags passed to av_opt_find2. I.e. if AV_OPT_SEARCH_CHILDREN
+ * is passed here, then the option may be found in a child of obj.
+ * @param[out] out_val value of the option will be written here
+ * @return >=0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+/**
+ * @note the returned string will be av_malloc()ed and must be av_free()ed by the caller
+ */
+int av_opt_get (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, uint8_t **out_val);
+int av_opt_get_int (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int64_t *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_double (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, double *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_q (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVRational *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_image_size(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int *w_out, int *h_out);
+int av_opt_get_pixel_fmt (void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, enum AVPixelFormat *out_fmt);
+int av_opt_get_sample_fmt(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, enum AVSampleFormat *out_fmt);
+int av_opt_get_video_rate(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVRational *out_val);
+int av_opt_get_channel_layout(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, int64_t *ch_layout);
+/**
+ * @param[out] out_val The returned dictionary is a copy of the actual value and must
+ * be freed with av_dict_free() by the caller
+ */
+int av_opt_get_dict_val(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags, AVDictionary **out_val);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/**
+ * Gets a pointer to the requested field in a struct.
+ * This function allows accessing a struct even when its fields are moved or
+ * renamed since the application making the access has been compiled,
+ *
+ * @returns a pointer to the field, it can be cast to the correct type and read
+ * or written to.
+ */
+void *av_opt_ptr(const AVClass *avclass, void *obj, const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Free an AVOptionRanges struct and set it to NULL.
+ */
+void av_opt_freep_ranges(AVOptionRanges **ranges);
+
+/**
+ * Get a list of allowed ranges for the given option.
+ *
+ * The returned list may depend on other fields in obj like for example profile.
+ *
+ * @param flags is a bitmask of flags, undefined flags should not be set and should be ignored
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ indicates that the obj is a double pointer to a AVClass instead of a full instance
+ * AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE indicates that function may return more than one component, @see AVOptionRanges
+ *
+ * The result must be freed with av_opt_freep_ranges.
+ *
+ * @return number of compontents returned on success, a negative errro code otherwise
+ */
+int av_opt_query_ranges(AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Copy options from src object into dest object.
+ *
+ * Options that require memory allocation (e.g. string or binary) are malloc'ed in dest object.
+ * Original memory allocated for such options is freed unless both src and dest options points to the same memory.
+ *
+ * @param dest Object to copy from
+ * @param src Object to copy into
+ * @return 0 on success, negative on error
+ */
+int av_opt_copy(void *dest, FF_CONST_AVUTIL55 void *src);
+
+/**
+ * Get a default list of allowed ranges for the given option.
+ *
+ * This list is constructed without using the AVClass.query_ranges() callback
+ * and can be used as fallback from within the callback.
+ *
+ * @param flags is a bitmask of flags, undefined flags should not be set and should be ignored
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ indicates that the obj is a double pointer to a AVClass instead of a full instance
+ * AV_OPT_MULTI_COMPONENT_RANGE indicates that function may return more than one component, @see AVOptionRanges
+ *
+ * The result must be freed with av_opt_free_ranges.
+ *
+ * @return number of compontents returned on success, a negative errro code otherwise
+ */
+int av_opt_query_ranges_default(AVOptionRanges **, void *obj, const char *key, int flags);
+
+/**
+ * Check if given option is set to its default value.
+ *
+ * Options o must belong to the obj. This function must not be called to check child's options state.
+ * @see av_opt_is_set_to_default_by_name().
+ *
+ * @param obj AVClass object to check option on
+ * @param o option to be checked
+ * @return >0 when option is set to its default,
+ * 0 when option is not set its default,
+ * <0 on error
+ */
+int av_opt_is_set_to_default(void *obj, const AVOption *o);
+
+/**
+ * Check if given option is set to its default value.
+ *
+ * @param obj AVClass object to check option on
+ * @param name option name
+ * @param search_flags combination of AV_OPT_SEARCH_*
+ * @return >0 when option is set to its default,
+ * 0 when option is not set its default,
+ * <0 on error
+ */
+int av_opt_is_set_to_default_by_name(void *obj, const char *name, int search_flags);
+
+
+#define AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_SKIP_DEFAULTS 0x00000001 ///< Serialize options that are not set to default values only.
+#define AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_OPT_FLAGS_EXACT 0x00000002 ///< Serialize options that exactly match opt_flags only.
+
+/**
+ * Serialize object's options.
+ *
+ * Create a string containing object's serialized options.
+ * Such string may be passed back to av_opt_set_from_string() in order to restore option values.
+ * A key/value or pairs separator occurring in the serialized value or
+ * name string are escaped through the av_escape() function.
+ *
+ * @param[in] obj AVClass object to serialize
+ * @param[in] opt_flags serialize options with all the specified flags set (AV_OPT_FLAG)
+ * @param[in] flags combination of AV_OPT_SERIALIZE_* flags
+ * @param[out] buffer Pointer to buffer that will be allocated with string containg serialized options.
+ * Buffer must be freed by the caller when is no longer needed.
+ * @param[in] key_val_sep character used to separate key from value
+ * @param[in] pairs_sep character used to separate two pairs from each other
+ * @return >= 0 on success, negative on error
+ * @warning Separators cannot be neither '\\' nor '\0'. They also cannot be the same.
+ */
+int av_opt_serialize(void *obj, int opt_flags, int flags, char **buffer,
+ const char key_val_sep, const char pairs_sep);
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_OPT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/parseutils.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/parseutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c80f0de3de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/parseutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,187 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "rational.h"
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * misc parsing utilities
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and store the parsed ratio in q.
+ *
+ * Note that a ratio with infinite (1/0) or negative value is
+ * considered valid, so you should check on the returned value if you
+ * want to exclude those values.
+ *
+ * The undefined value can be expressed using the "0:0" string.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] q pointer to the AVRational which will contain the ratio
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * num:den, a float number or an expression
+ * @param[in] max the maximum allowed numerator and denominator
+ * @param[in] log_offset log level offset which is applied to the log
+ * level of log_ctx
+ * @param[in] log_ctx parent logging context
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_ratio(AVRational *q, const char *str, int max,
+ int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+#define av_parse_ratio_quiet(rate, str, max) \
+ av_parse_ratio(rate, str, max, AV_LOG_MAX_OFFSET, NULL)
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and put in width_ptr and height_ptr the detected values.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] width_ptr pointer to the variable which will contain the detected
+ * width value
+ * @param[in,out] height_ptr pointer to the variable which will contain the detected
+ * height value
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * width x height or a valid video size abbreviation.
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_video_size(int *width_ptr, int *height_ptr, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Parse str and store the detected values in *rate.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] rate pointer to the AVRational which will contain the detected
+ * frame rate
+ * @param[in] str the string to parse: it has to be a string in the format
+ * rate_num / rate_den, a float number or a valid video rate abbreviation
+ * @return >= 0 on success, a negative error code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_video_rate(AVRational *rate, const char *str);
+
+/**
+ * Put the RGBA values that correspond to color_string in rgba_color.
+ *
+ * @param color_string a string specifying a color. It can be the name of
+ * a color (case insensitive match) or a [0x|#]RRGGBB[AA] sequence,
+ * possibly followed by "@" and a string representing the alpha
+ * component.
+ * The alpha component may be a string composed by "0x" followed by an
+ * hexadecimal number or a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0, which
+ * represents the opacity value (0x00/0.0 means completely transparent,
+ * 0xff/1.0 completely opaque).
+ * If the alpha component is not specified then 0xff is assumed.
+ * The string "random" will result in a random color.
+ * @param slen length of the initial part of color_string containing the
+ * color. It can be set to -1 if color_string is a null terminated string
+ * containing nothing else than the color.
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value in case of
+ * failure (for example if color_string cannot be parsed).
+ */
+int av_parse_color(uint8_t *rgba_color, const char *color_string, int slen,
+ void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Get the name of a color from the internal table of hard-coded named
+ * colors.
+ *
+ * This function is meant to enumerate the color names recognized by
+ * av_parse_color().
+ *
+ * @param color_idx index of the requested color, starting from 0
+ * @param rgbp if not NULL, will point to a 3-elements array with the color value in RGB
+ * @return the color name string or NULL if color_idx is not in the array
+ */
+const char *av_get_known_color_name(int color_idx, const uint8_t **rgb);
+
+/**
+ * Parse timestr and return in *time a corresponding number of
+ * microseconds.
+ *
+ * @param timeval puts here the number of microseconds corresponding
+ * to the string in timestr. If the string represents a duration, it
+ * is the number of microseconds contained in the time interval. If
+ * the string is a date, is the number of microseconds since 1st of
+ * January, 1970 up to the time of the parsed date. If timestr cannot
+ * be successfully parsed, set *time to INT64_MIN.
+
+ * @param timestr a string representing a date or a duration.
+ * - If a date the syntax is:
+ * @code
+ * [{YYYY-MM-DD|YYYYMMDD}[T|t| ]]{{HH:MM:SS[.m...]]]}|{HHMMSS[.m...]]]}}[Z]
+ * now
+ * @endcode
+ * If the value is "now" it takes the current time.
+ * Time is local time unless Z is appended, in which case it is
+ * interpreted as UTC.
+ * If the year-month-day part is not specified it takes the current
+ * year-month-day.
+ * - If a duration the syntax is:
+ * @code
+ * [-][HH:]MM:SS[.m...]
+ * [-]S+[.m...]
+ * @endcode
+ * @param duration flag which tells how to interpret timestr, if not
+ * zero timestr is interpreted as a duration, otherwise as a date
+ * @return >= 0 in case of success, a negative value corresponding to an
+ * AVERROR code otherwise
+ */
+int av_parse_time(int64_t *timeval, const char *timestr, int duration);
+
+/**
+ * Parse the input string p according to the format string fmt and
+ * store its results in the structure dt.
+ * This implementation supports only a subset of the formats supported
+ * by the standard strptime().
+ *
+ * In particular it actually supports the parameters:
+ * - %H: the hour as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ * range '00' through '23'
+ * - %J: hours as a decimal number, in the range '0' through INT_MAX
+ * - %M: the minute as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ * range '00' through '59'
+ * - %S: the second as a decimal number, using a 24-hour clock, in the
+ * range '00' through '59'
+ * - %Y: the year as a decimal number, using the Gregorian calendar
+ * - %m: the month as a decimal number, in the range '1' through '12'
+ * - %d: the day of the month as a decimal number, in the range '1'
+ * through '31'
+ * - %%: a literal '%'
+ *
+ * @return a pointer to the first character not processed in this
+ * function call, or NULL in case the function fails to match all of
+ * the fmt string and therefore an error occurred
+ */
+char *av_small_strptime(const char *p, const char *fmt, struct tm *dt);
+
+/**
+ * Attempt to find a specific tag in a URL.
+ *
+ * syntax: '?tag1=val1&tag2=val2...'. Little URL decoding is done.
+ * Return 1 if found.
+ */
+int av_find_info_tag(char *arg, int arg_size, const char *tag1, const char *info);
+
+/**
+ * Convert the decomposed UTC time in tm to a time_t value.
+ */
+time_t av_timegm(struct tm *tm);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PARSEUTILS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a4376b2c0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixdesc.h
@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@
+/*
+ * pixel format descriptor
+ * Copyright (c) 2009 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "pixfmt.h"
+
+typedef struct AVComponentDescriptor {
+ /**
+ * Which of the 4 planes contains the component.
+ */
+ uint16_t plane : 2;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of elements between 2 horizontally consecutive pixels minus 1.
+ * Elements are bits for bitstream formats, bytes otherwise.
+ */
+ uint16_t step_minus1 : 3;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of elements before the component of the first pixel plus 1.
+ * Elements are bits for bitstream formats, bytes otherwise.
+ */
+ uint16_t offset_plus1 : 3;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of least significant bits that must be shifted away
+ * to get the value.
+ */
+ uint16_t shift : 3;
+
+ /**
+ * Number of bits in the component minus 1.
+ */
+ uint16_t depth_minus1 : 4;
+} AVComponentDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Descriptor that unambiguously describes how the bits of a pixel are
+ * stored in the up to 4 data planes of an image. It also stores the
+ * subsampling factors and number of components.
+ *
+ * @note This is separate of the colorspace (RGB, YCbCr, YPbPr, JPEG-style YUV
+ * and all the YUV variants) AVPixFmtDescriptor just stores how values
+ * are stored not what these values represent.
+ */
+typedef struct AVPixFmtDescriptor {
+ const char *name;
+ uint8_t nb_components; ///< The number of components each pixel has, (1-4)
+
+ /**
+ * Amount to shift the luma width right to find the chroma width.
+ * For YV12 this is 1 for example.
+ * chroma_width = -((-luma_width) >> log2_chroma_w)
+ * The note above is needed to ensure rounding up.
+ * This value only refers to the chroma components.
+ */
+ uint8_t log2_chroma_w; ///< chroma_width = -((-luma_width )>>log2_chroma_w)
+
+ /**
+ * Amount to shift the luma height right to find the chroma height.
+ * For YV12 this is 1 for example.
+ * chroma_height= -((-luma_height) >> log2_chroma_h)
+ * The note above is needed to ensure rounding up.
+ * This value only refers to the chroma components.
+ */
+ uint8_t log2_chroma_h;
+ uint8_t flags;
+
+ /**
+ * Parameters that describe how pixels are packed.
+ * If the format has 2 or 4 components, then alpha is last.
+ * If the format has 1 or 2 components, then luma is 0.
+ * If the format has 3 or 4 components,
+ * if the RGB flag is set then 0 is red, 1 is green and 2 is blue;
+ * otherwise 0 is luma, 1 is chroma-U and 2 is chroma-V.
+ */
+ AVComponentDescriptor comp[4];
+
+ /**
+ * Alternative comma-separated names.
+ */
+ const char *alias;
+} AVPixFmtDescriptor;
+
+/**
+ * Pixel format is big-endian.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BE (1 << 0)
+/**
+ * Pixel format has a palette in data[1], values are indexes in this palette.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PAL (1 << 1)
+/**
+ * All values of a component are bit-wise packed end to end.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BITSTREAM (1 << 2)
+/**
+ * Pixel format is an HW accelerated format.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_HWACCEL (1 << 3)
+/**
+ * At least one pixel component is not in the first data plane.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PLANAR (1 << 4)
+/**
+ * The pixel format contains RGB-like data (as opposed to YUV/grayscale).
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_RGB (1 << 5)
+/**
+ * The pixel format is "pseudo-paletted". This means that FFmpeg treats it as
+ * paletted internally, but the palette is generated by the decoder and is not
+ * stored in the file.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PSEUDOPAL (1 << 6)
+/**
+ * The pixel format has an alpha channel.
+ */
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_ALPHA (1 << 7)
+
+#if FF_API_PIX_FMT
+/**
+ * @deprecated use the AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_* flags
+ */
+#define PIX_FMT_BE AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BE
+#define PIX_FMT_PAL AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PAL
+#define PIX_FMT_BITSTREAM AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_BITSTREAM
+#define PIX_FMT_HWACCEL AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_HWACCEL
+#define PIX_FMT_PLANAR AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PLANAR
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_RGB
+#define PIX_FMT_PSEUDOPAL AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_PSEUDOPAL
+#define PIX_FMT_ALPHA AV_PIX_FMT_FLAG_ALPHA
+#endif
+
+#if FF_API_PIX_FMT_DESC
+/**
+ * The array of all the pixel format descriptors.
+ */
+extern attribute_deprecated const AVPixFmtDescriptor av_pix_fmt_descriptors[];
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Read a line from an image, and write the values of the
+ * pixel format component c to dst.
+ *
+ * @param data the array containing the pointers to the planes of the image
+ * @param linesize the array containing the linesizes of the image
+ * @param desc the pixel format descriptor for the image
+ * @param x the horizontal coordinate of the first pixel to read
+ * @param y the vertical coordinate of the first pixel to read
+ * @param w the width of the line to read, that is the number of
+ * values to write to dst
+ * @param read_pal_component if not zero and the format is a paletted
+ * format writes the values corresponding to the palette
+ * component c in data[1] to dst, rather than the palette indexes in
+ * data[0]. The behavior is undefined if the format is not paletted.
+ */
+void av_read_image_line(uint16_t *dst, const uint8_t *data[4],
+ const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+ int x, int y, int c, int w, int read_pal_component);
+
+/**
+ * Write the values from src to the pixel format component c of an
+ * image line.
+ *
+ * @param src array containing the values to write
+ * @param data the array containing the pointers to the planes of the
+ * image to write into. It is supposed to be zeroed.
+ * @param linesize the array containing the linesizes of the image
+ * @param desc the pixel format descriptor for the image
+ * @param x the horizontal coordinate of the first pixel to write
+ * @param y the vertical coordinate of the first pixel to write
+ * @param w the width of the line to write, that is the number of
+ * values to write to the image line
+ */
+void av_write_image_line(const uint16_t *src, uint8_t *data[4],
+ const int linesize[4], const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc,
+ int x, int y, int c, int w);
+
+/**
+ * Return the pixel format corresponding to name.
+ *
+ * If there is no pixel format with name name, then looks for a
+ * pixel format with the name corresponding to the native endian
+ * format of name.
+ * For example in a little-endian system, first looks for "gray16",
+ * then for "gray16le".
+ *
+ * Finally if no pixel format has been found, returns AV_PIX_FMT_NONE.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_get_pix_fmt(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return the short name for a pixel format, NULL in case pix_fmt is
+ * unknown.
+ *
+ * @see av_get_pix_fmt(), av_get_pix_fmt_string()
+ */
+const char *av_get_pix_fmt_name(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Print in buf the string corresponding to the pixel format with
+ * number pix_fmt, or a header if pix_fmt is negative.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer where to write the string
+ * @param buf_size the size of buf
+ * @param pix_fmt the number of the pixel format to print the
+ * corresponding info string, or a negative value to print the
+ * corresponding header.
+ */
+char *av_get_pix_fmt_string(char *buf, int buf_size,
+ enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of bits per pixel used by the pixel format
+ * described by pixdesc. Note that this is not the same as the number
+ * of bits per sample.
+ *
+ * The returned number of bits refers to the number of bits actually
+ * used for storing the pixel information, that is padding bits are
+ * not counted.
+ */
+int av_get_bits_per_pixel(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * Return the number of bits per pixel for the pixel format
+ * described by pixdesc, including any padding or unused bits.
+ */
+int av_get_padded_bits_per_pixel(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *pixdesc);
+
+/**
+ * @return a pixel format descriptor for provided pixel format or NULL if
+ * this pixel format is unknown.
+ */
+const AVPixFmtDescriptor *av_pix_fmt_desc_get(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Iterate over all pixel format descriptors known to libavutil.
+ *
+ * @param prev previous descriptor. NULL to get the first descriptor.
+ *
+ * @return next descriptor or NULL after the last descriptor
+ */
+const AVPixFmtDescriptor *av_pix_fmt_desc_next(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *prev);
+
+/**
+ * @return an AVPixelFormat id described by desc, or AV_PIX_FMT_NONE if desc
+ * is not a valid pointer to a pixel format descriptor.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_pix_fmt_desc_get_id(const AVPixFmtDescriptor *desc);
+
+/**
+ * Utility function to access log2_chroma_w log2_chroma_h from
+ * the pixel format AVPixFmtDescriptor.
+ *
+ * See av_get_chroma_sub_sample() for a function that asserts a
+ * valid pixel format instead of returning an error code.
+ * Its recommended that you use avcodec_get_chroma_sub_sample unless
+ * you do check the return code!
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt the pixel format
+ * @param[out] h_shift store log2_chroma_w
+ * @param[out] v_shift store log2_chroma_h
+ *
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR(ENOSYS) on invalid or unknown pixel format
+ */
+int av_pix_fmt_get_chroma_sub_sample(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt,
+ int *h_shift, int *v_shift);
+
+/**
+ * @return number of planes in pix_fmt, a negative AVERROR if pix_fmt is not a
+ * valid pixel format.
+ */
+int av_pix_fmt_count_planes(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+void ff_check_pixfmt_descriptors(void);
+
+/**
+ * Utility function to swap the endianness of a pixel format.
+ *
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt the pixel format
+ *
+ * @return pixel format with swapped endianness if it exists,
+ * otherwise AV_PIX_FMT_NONE
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_pix_fmt_swap_endianness(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+#define FF_LOSS_RESOLUTION 0x0001 /**< loss due to resolution change */
+#define FF_LOSS_DEPTH 0x0002 /**< loss due to color depth change */
+#define FF_LOSS_COLORSPACE 0x0004 /**< loss due to color space conversion */
+#define FF_LOSS_ALPHA 0x0008 /**< loss of alpha bits */
+#define FF_LOSS_COLORQUANT 0x0010 /**< loss due to color quantization */
+#define FF_LOSS_CHROMA 0x0020 /**< loss of chroma (e.g. RGB to gray conversion) */
+
+/**
+ * Compute what kind of losses will occur when converting from one specific
+ * pixel format to another.
+ * When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss may occur.
+ * For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color information will
+ * be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from some formats to
+ * other formats. These losses can involve loss of chroma, but also loss of
+ * resolution, loss of color depth, loss due to the color space conversion, loss
+ * of the alpha bits or loss due to color quantization.
+ * av_get_fix_fmt_loss() informs you about the various types of losses
+ * which will occur when converting from one pixel format to another.
+ *
+ * @param[in] dst_pix_fmt destination pixel format
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @return Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur
+ * (maximum loss for an invalid dst_pix_fmt).
+ */
+int av_get_pix_fmt_loss(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt,
+ int has_alpha);
+
+/**
+ * Compute what kind of losses will occur when converting from one specific
+ * pixel format to another.
+ * When converting from one pixel format to another, information loss may occur.
+ * For example, when converting from RGB24 to GRAY, the color information will
+ * be lost. Similarly, other losses occur when converting from some formats to
+ * other formats. These losses can involve loss of chroma, but also loss of
+ * resolution, loss of color depth, loss due to the color space conversion, loss
+ * of the alpha bits or loss due to color quantization.
+ * av_get_fix_fmt_loss() informs you about the various types of losses
+ * which will occur when converting from one pixel format to another.
+ *
+ * @param[in] dst_pix_fmt destination pixel format
+ * @param[in] src_pix_fmt source pixel format
+ * @param[in] has_alpha Whether the source pixel format alpha channel is used.
+ * @return Combination of flags informing you what kind of losses will occur
+ * (maximum loss for an invalid dst_pix_fmt).
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat av_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2(enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt1, enum AVPixelFormat dst_pix_fmt2,
+ enum AVPixelFormat src_pix_fmt, int has_alpha, int *loss_ptr);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color range or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_range_name(enum AVColorRange range);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color primaries or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_primaries_name(enum AVColorPrimaries primaries);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color transfer or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_transfer_name(enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic transfer);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided color space or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_color_space_name(enum AVColorSpace space);
+
+/**
+ * @return the name for provided chroma location or NULL if unknown.
+ */
+const char *av_chroma_location_name(enum AVChromaLocation location);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PIXDESC_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a8dbc157e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/pixelutils.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXELUTILS_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXELUTILS_H
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "common.h"
+
+/**
+ * Sum of abs(src1[x] - src2[x])
+ */
+typedef int (*av_pixelutils_sad_fn)(const uint8_t *src1, ptrdiff_t stride1,
+ const uint8_t *src2, ptrdiff_t stride2);
+
+/**
+ * Get a potentially optimized pointer to a Sum-of-absolute-differences
+ * function (see the av_pixelutils_sad_fn prototype).
+ *
+ * @param w_bits 1<
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H
+#define AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * pixel format definitions
+ *
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/avconfig.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+#define AVPALETTE_SIZE 1024
+#define AVPALETTE_COUNT 256
+
+/**
+ * Pixel format.
+ *
+ * @note
+ * AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 is handled in an endian-specific manner. An RGBA
+ * color is put together as:
+ * (A << 24) | (R << 16) | (G << 8) | B
+ * This is stored as BGRA on little-endian CPU architectures and ARGB on
+ * big-endian CPUs.
+ *
+ * @par
+ * When the pixel format is palettized RGB (AV_PIX_FMT_PAL8), the palettized
+ * image data is stored in AVFrame.data[0]. The palette is transported in
+ * AVFrame.data[1], is 1024 bytes long (256 4-byte entries) and is
+ * formatted the same as in AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 described above (i.e., it is
+ * also endian-specific). Note also that the individual RGB palette
+ * components stored in AVFrame.data[1] should be in the range 0..255.
+ * This is important as many custom PAL8 video codecs that were designed
+ * to run on the IBM VGA graphics adapter use 6-bit palette components.
+ *
+ * @par
+ * For all the 8bit per pixel formats, an RGB32 palette is in data[1] like
+ * for pal8. This palette is filled in automatically by the function
+ * allocating the picture.
+ *
+ * @note
+ * Make sure that all newly added big-endian formats have (pix_fmt & 1) == 1
+ * and that all newly added little-endian formats have (pix_fmt & 1) == 0.
+ * This allows simpler detection of big vs little-endian.
+ */
+enum AVPixelFormat {
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NONE = -1,
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUYV422, ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Y0 Cb Y1 Cr
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB24, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, RGBRGB...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR24, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 24bpp, BGRBGR...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV410P, ///< planar YUV 4:1:0, 9bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x4 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV411P, ///< planar YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x1 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY8, ///< Y , 8bpp
+ AV_PIX_FMT_MONOWHITE, ///< Y , 1bpp, 0 is white, 1 is black, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+ AV_PIX_FMT_MONOBLACK, ///< Y , 1bpp, 0 is black, 1 is white, in each byte pixels are ordered from the msb to the lsb
+ AV_PIX_FMT_PAL8, ///< 8 bit with PIX_FMT_RGB32 palette
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV420P and setting color_range
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV422P and setting color_range
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 24bpp, full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV444P and setting color_range
+#if FF_API_XVMC
+ AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC_MPEG2_MC,///< XVideo Motion Acceleration via common packet passing
+ AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC_MPEG2_IDCT,
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC_MPEG2_IDCT
+#endif /* FF_API_XVMC */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_UYVY422, ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Cb Y0 Cr Y1
+ AV_PIX_FMT_UYYVYY411, ///< packed YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, Cb Y0 Y1 Cr Y2 Y3
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR8, ///< packed RGB 3:3:2, 8bpp, (msb)2B 3G 3R(lsb)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR4, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream, 4bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1, 8bpp, (msb)1B 2G 1R(lsb)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB8, ///< packed RGB 3:3:2, 8bpp, (msb)2R 3G 3B(lsb)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB4, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1 bitstream, 4bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb), a byte contains two pixels, the first pixel in the byte is the one composed by the 4 msb bits
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB4_BYTE, ///< packed RGB 1:2:1, 8bpp, (msb)1R 2G 1B(lsb)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NV12, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 12bpp, 1 plane for Y and 1 plane for the UV components, which are interleaved (first byte U and the following byte V)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NV21, ///< as above, but U and V bytes are swapped
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_ARGB, ///< packed ARGB 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ARGBARGB...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA, ///< packed RGBA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, RGBARGBA...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_ABGR, ///< packed ABGR 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, ABGRABGR...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA, ///< packed BGRA 8:8:8:8, 32bpp, BGRABGRA...
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16BE, ///< Y , 16bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16LE, ///< Y , 16bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV440P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x2 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ440P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:0 full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV440P and setting color_range
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples)
+#if FF_API_VDPAU
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_H264,///< H.264 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG1,///< MPEG-1 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG2,///< MPEG-2 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_WMV3,///< WMV3 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_VC1, ///< VC-1 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+#endif
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48BE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48LE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565BE, ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5R 6G 5B(lsb), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565LE, ///< packed RGB 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5R 6G 5B(lsb), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555BE, ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5R 5G 5B(lsb), big-endian, most significant bit to 0
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555LE, ///< packed RGB 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5R 5G 5B(lsb), little-endian, most significant bit to 0
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565BE, ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5B 6G 5R(lsb), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565LE, ///< packed BGR 5:6:5, 16bpp, (msb) 5B 6G 5R(lsb), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555BE, ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5B 5G 5R(lsb), big-endian, most significant bit to 1
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555LE, ///< packed BGR 5:5:5, 16bpp, (msb)1A 5B 5G 5R(lsb), little-endian, most significant bit to 1
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VAAPI_MOCO, ///< HW acceleration through VA API at motion compensation entry-point, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains macroblocks as well as various fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VAAPI_IDCT, ///< HW acceleration through VA API at IDCT entry-point, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains fields extracted from headers
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VAAPI_VLD, ///< HW decoding through VA API, Picture.data[3] contains a vaapi_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+#if FF_API_VDPAU
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU_MPEG4, ///< MPEG4 HW decoding with VDPAU, data[0] contains a vdpau_render_state struct which contains the bitstream of the slices as well as various fields extracted from headers
+#endif
+ AV_PIX_FMT_DXVA2_VLD, ///< HW decoding through DXVA2, Picture.data[3] contains a LPDIRECT3DSURFACE9 pointer
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444LE, ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4R 4G 4B(lsb), little-endian, most significant bits to 0
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444BE, ///< packed RGB 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4R 4G 4B(lsb), big-endian, most significant bits to 0
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444LE, ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4B 4G 4R(lsb), little-endian, most significant bits to 1
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444BE, ///< packed BGR 4:4:4, 16bpp, (msb)4A 4B 4G 4R(lsb), big-endian, most significant bits to 1
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YA8, ///< 8bit gray, 8bit alpha
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_Y400A = AV_PIX_FMT_YA8, ///< alias for AV_PIX_FMT_YA8
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY8A= AV_PIX_FMT_YA8, ///< alias for AV_PIX_FMT_YA8
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48BE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48LE, ///< packed RGB 16:16:16, 48bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B component is stored as little-endian
+
+ /**
+ * The following 12 formats have the disadvantage of needing 1 format for each bit depth.
+ * Notice that each 9/10 bits sample is stored in 16 bits with extra padding.
+ * If you want to support multiple bit depths, then using AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16* with the bpp stored separately is better.
+ */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 13.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:0, 15bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10BE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10LE,///< planar YUV 4:4:4, 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2, 18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDA_VLD, ///< hardware decoding through VDA
+
+#ifdef AV_PIX_FMT_ABI_GIT_MASTER
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+#endif
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 24bpp
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 27bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 30bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 48bpp, little-endian
+
+ /**
+ * duplicated pixel formats for compatibility with libav.
+ * FFmpeg supports these formats since May 8 2012 and Jan 28 2012 (commits f9ca1ac7 and 143a5c55)
+ * Libav added them Oct 12 2012 with incompatible values (commit 6d5600e85)
+ */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P_LIBAV, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P_LIBAV, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples)
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 22.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 22.5bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 27bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 25bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 25bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 30bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0 40bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 48bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 64bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 64bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples, little-endian)
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDPAU, ///< HW acceleration through VDPAU, Picture.data[3] contains a VdpVideoSurface
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12LE, ///< packed XYZ 4:4:4, 36 bpp, (msb) 12X, 12Y, 12Z (lsb), the 2-byte value for each X/Y/Z is stored as little-endian, the 4 lower bits are set to 0
+ AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12BE, ///< packed XYZ 4:4:4, 36 bpp, (msb) 12X, 12Y, 12Z (lsb), the 2-byte value for each X/Y/Z is stored as big-endian, the 4 lower bits are set to 0
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NV16, ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NV20LE, ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NV20BE, ///< interleaved chroma YUV 4:2:2, 20bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+
+ /**
+ * duplicated pixel formats for compatibility with libav.
+ * FFmpeg supports these formats since Sat Sep 24 06:01:45 2011 +0200 (commits 9569a3c9f41387a8c7d1ce97d8693520477a66c3)
+ * also see Fri Nov 25 01:38:21 2011 +0100 92afb431621c79155fcb7171d26f137eb1bee028
+ * Libav added them Sun Mar 16 23:05:47 2014 +0100 with incompatible values (commit 1481d24c3a0abf81e1d7a514547bd5305232be30)
+ */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE_LIBAV, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE_LIBAV, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE_LIBAV, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE_LIBAV, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YVYU422, ///< packed YUV 4:2:2, 16bpp, Y0 Cr Y1 Cb
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_VDA, ///< HW acceleration through VDA, data[3] contains a CVPixelBufferRef
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YA16BE, ///< 16bit gray, 16bit alpha (big-endian)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YA16LE, ///< 16bit gray, 16bit alpha (little-endian)
+
+
+#ifndef AV_PIX_FMT_ABI_GIT_MASTER
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE=0x123, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16R, 16G, 16B, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE, ///< packed RGBA 16:16:16:16, 64bpp, 16B, 16G, 16R, 16A, the 2-byte value for each R/G/B/A component is stored as little-endian
+#endif
+ AV_PIX_FMT_0RGB=0x123+4, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, 0RGB0RGB...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_RGB0, ///< packed RGB 8:8:8, 32bpp, RGB0RGB0...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_0BGR, ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, 0BGR0BGR...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BGR0, ///< packed BGR 8:8:8, 32bpp, BGR0BGR0...
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4 32bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y & A samples)
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2 24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y & A samples)
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,18bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:0,21bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x2 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,24bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:2:2,28bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 2x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,36bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14BE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14LE, ///< planar YUV 4:4:4,42bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 1x1 Y samples), little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 36bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14BE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14LE, ///< planar GBR 4:4:4 42bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP, ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 32bpp
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16BE, ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 64bpp, big-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16LE, ///< planar GBRA 4:4:4:4 64bpp, little-endian
+ AV_PIX_FMT_YUVJ411P, ///< planar YUV 4:1:1, 12bpp, (1 Cr & Cb sample per 4x1 Y samples) full scale (JPEG), deprecated in favor of PIX_FMT_YUV411P and setting color_range
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR8, ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 8-bit samples */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB8, ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 8-bit samples */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG8, ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 8-bit samples */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG8, ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 8-bit samples */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16LE, ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16BE, ///< bayer, BGBG..(odd line), GRGR..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16LE, ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16BE, ///< bayer, RGRG..(odd line), GBGB..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16LE, ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16BE, ///< bayer, GBGB..(odd line), RGRG..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16LE, ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 16-bit samples, little-endian */
+ AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16BE, ///< bayer, GRGR..(odd line), BGBG..(even line), 16-bit samples, big-endian */
+#if !FF_API_XVMC
+ AV_PIX_FMT_XVMC,///< XVideo Motion Acceleration via common packet passing
+#endif /* !FF_API_XVMC */
+
+ AV_PIX_FMT_NB, ///< number of pixel formats, DO NOT USE THIS if you want to link with shared libav* because the number of formats might differ between versions
+
+#if FF_API_PIX_FMT
+#include "old_pix_fmts.h"
+#endif
+};
+
+#if AV_HAVE_INCOMPATIBLE_LIBAV_ABI
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P_LIBAV
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P_LIBAV
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64BE_LIBAV
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64LE_LIBAV
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64BE_LIBAV
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64LE_LIBAV
+#endif
+
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_Y400A AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY8A
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBR24P AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP
+
+#if AV_HAVE_BIGENDIAN
+# define AV_PIX_FMT_NE(be, le) AV_PIX_FMT_##be
+#else
+# define AV_PIX_FMT_NE(be, le) AV_PIX_FMT_##le
+#endif
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(ARGB, BGRA)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBA, ABGR)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(ABGR, RGBA)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGRA, ARGB)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_0RGB32 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(0RGB, BGR0)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_0BGR32 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(0BGR, RGB0)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GRAY16BE, GRAY16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YA16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YA16BE, YA16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB48BE, RGB48LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB565BE, RGB565LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB555BE, RGB555LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGB444BE, RGB444LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(RGBA64BE, RGBA64LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR48BE, BGR48LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR565BE, BGR565LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR555BE, BGR555LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGR444BE, BGR444LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BGRA64BE, BGRA64LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P9BE , YUV420P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P9BE , YUV422P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P9BE , YUV444P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P10BE, YUV420P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P10BE, YUV422P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P10BE, YUV444P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P12BE, YUV420P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P12BE, YUV422P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P12BE, YUV444P12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P14BE, YUV420P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P14BE, YUV422P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P14BE, YUV444P14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV420P16BE, YUV420P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV422P16BE, YUV422P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUV444P16BE, YUV444P16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP9BE , GBRP9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP10BE, GBRP10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP12BE, GBRP12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP14BE, GBRP14LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRP16BE, GBRP16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_GBRAP16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(GBRAP16BE, GBRAP16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_BGGR16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_BGGR16BE, BAYER_BGGR16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_RGGB16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_RGGB16BE, BAYER_RGGB16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GBRG16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_GBRG16BE, BAYER_GBRG16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_BAYER_GRBG16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(BAYER_GRBG16BE, BAYER_GRBG16LE)
+
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P9BE , YUVA420P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P9BE , YUVA422P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P9 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P9BE , YUVA444P9LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P10BE, YUVA420P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P10BE, YUVA422P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P10 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P10BE, YUVA444P10LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA420P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA420P16BE, YUVA420P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA422P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA422P16BE, YUVA422P16LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_YUVA444P16 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(YUVA444P16BE, YUVA444P16LE)
+
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_XYZ12 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(XYZ12BE, XYZ12LE)
+#define AV_PIX_FMT_NV20 AV_PIX_FMT_NE(NV20BE, NV20LE)
+
+
+#if FF_API_PIX_FMT
+#define PixelFormat AVPixelFormat
+
+#define PIX_FMT_Y400A AV_PIX_FMT_Y400A
+#define PIX_FMT_GBR24P AV_PIX_FMT_GBR24P
+
+#define PIX_FMT_NE(be, le) AV_PIX_FMT_NE(be, le)
+
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB32 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB32_1
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR32 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR32_1 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR32_1
+#define PIX_FMT_0RGB32 AV_PIX_FMT_0RGB32
+#define PIX_FMT_0BGR32 AV_PIX_FMT_0BGR32
+
+#define PIX_FMT_GRAY16 AV_PIX_FMT_GRAY16
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB48 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB48
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB565 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB565
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB555 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB555
+#define PIX_FMT_RGB444 AV_PIX_FMT_RGB444
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR48 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR48
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR565 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR565
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR555 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR555
+#define PIX_FMT_BGR444 AV_PIX_FMT_BGR444
+
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV420P9 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P9
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV422P9 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P9
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV444P9 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P9
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV420P10 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P10
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV422P10 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P10
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV444P10 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P10
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV420P12 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P12
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV422P12 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P12
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV444P12 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P12
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV420P14 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P14
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV422P14 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P14
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV444P14 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P14
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV420P16 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV420P16
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV422P16 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV422P16
+#define PIX_FMT_YUV444P16 AV_PIX_FMT_YUV444P16
+
+#define PIX_FMT_RGBA64 AV_PIX_FMT_RGBA64
+#define PIX_FMT_BGRA64 AV_PIX_FMT_BGRA64
+#define PIX_FMT_GBRP9 AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP9
+#define PIX_FMT_GBRP10 AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP10
+#define PIX_FMT_GBRP12 AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP12
+#define PIX_FMT_GBRP14 AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP14
+#define PIX_FMT_GBRP16 AV_PIX_FMT_GBRP16
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Chromaticity coordinates of the source primaries.
+ */
+enum AVColorPrimaries {
+ AVCOL_PRI_RESERVED0 = 0,
+ AVCOL_PRI_BT709 = 1, ///< also ITU-R BT1361 / IEC 61966-2-4 / SMPTE RP177 Annex B
+ AVCOL_PRI_UNSPECIFIED = 2,
+ AVCOL_PRI_RESERVED = 3,
+ AVCOL_PRI_BT470M = 4, ///< also FCC Title 47 Code of Federal Regulations 73.682 (a)(20)
+
+ AVCOL_PRI_BT470BG = 5, ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 625 / ITU-R BT1358 625 / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM
+ AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE170M = 6, ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 / ITU-R BT1358 525 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC
+ AVCOL_PRI_SMPTE240M = 7, ///< functionally identical to above
+ AVCOL_PRI_FILM = 8, ///< colour filters using Illuminant C
+ AVCOL_PRI_BT2020 = 9, ///< ITU-R BT2020
+ AVCOL_PRI_NB, ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Color Transfer Characteristic.
+ */
+enum AVColorTransferCharacteristic {
+ AVCOL_TRC_RESERVED0 = 0,
+ AVCOL_TRC_BT709 = 1, ///< also ITU-R BT1361
+ AVCOL_TRC_UNSPECIFIED = 2,
+ AVCOL_TRC_RESERVED = 3,
+ AVCOL_TRC_GAMMA22 = 4, ///< also ITU-R BT470M / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM
+ AVCOL_TRC_GAMMA28 = 5, ///< also ITU-R BT470BG
+ AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE170M = 6, ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 or 625 / ITU-R BT1358 525 or 625 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC
+ AVCOL_TRC_SMPTE240M = 7,
+ AVCOL_TRC_LINEAR = 8, ///< "Linear transfer characteristics"
+ AVCOL_TRC_LOG = 9, ///< "Logarithmic transfer characteristic (100:1 range)"
+ AVCOL_TRC_LOG_SQRT = 10, ///< "Logarithmic transfer characteristic (100 * Sqrt(10) : 1 range)"
+ AVCOL_TRC_IEC61966_2_4 = 11, ///< IEC 61966-2-4
+ AVCOL_TRC_BT1361_ECG = 12, ///< ITU-R BT1361 Extended Colour Gamut
+ AVCOL_TRC_IEC61966_2_1 = 13, ///< IEC 61966-2-1 (sRGB or sYCC)
+ AVCOL_TRC_BT2020_10 = 14, ///< ITU-R BT2020 for 10 bit system
+ AVCOL_TRC_BT2020_12 = 15, ///< ITU-R BT2020 for 12 bit system
+ AVCOL_TRC_NB, ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * YUV colorspace type.
+ */
+enum AVColorSpace {
+ AVCOL_SPC_RGB = 0, ///< order of coefficients is actually GBR, also IEC 61966-2-1 (sRGB)
+ AVCOL_SPC_BT709 = 1, ///< also ITU-R BT1361 / IEC 61966-2-4 xvYCC709 / SMPTE RP177 Annex B
+ AVCOL_SPC_UNSPECIFIED = 2,
+ AVCOL_SPC_RESERVED = 3,
+ AVCOL_SPC_FCC = 4, ///< FCC Title 47 Code of Federal Regulations 73.682 (a)(20)
+ AVCOL_SPC_BT470BG = 5, ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 625 / ITU-R BT1358 625 / ITU-R BT1700 625 PAL & SECAM / IEC 61966-2-4 xvYCC601
+ AVCOL_SPC_SMPTE170M = 6, ///< also ITU-R BT601-6 525 / ITU-R BT1358 525 / ITU-R BT1700 NTSC / functionally identical to above
+ AVCOL_SPC_SMPTE240M = 7,
+ AVCOL_SPC_YCOCG = 8, ///< Used by Dirac / VC-2 and H.264 FRext, see ITU-T SG16
+ AVCOL_SPC_BT2020_NCL = 9, ///< ITU-R BT2020 non-constant luminance system
+ AVCOL_SPC_BT2020_CL = 10, ///< ITU-R BT2020 constant luminance system
+ AVCOL_SPC_NB, ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+#define AVCOL_SPC_YCGCO AVCOL_SPC_YCOCG
+
+
+/**
+ * MPEG vs JPEG YUV range.
+ */
+enum AVColorRange {
+ AVCOL_RANGE_UNSPECIFIED = 0,
+ AVCOL_RANGE_MPEG = 1, ///< the normal 219*2^(n-8) "MPEG" YUV ranges
+ AVCOL_RANGE_JPEG = 2, ///< the normal 2^n-1 "JPEG" YUV ranges
+ AVCOL_RANGE_NB, ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+/**
+ * Location of chroma samples.
+ *
+ * X X 3 4 X X are luma samples,
+ * 1 2 1-6 are possible chroma positions
+ * X X 5 6 X 0 is undefined/unknown position
+ */
+enum AVChromaLocation {
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_UNSPECIFIED = 0,
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_LEFT = 1, ///< mpeg2/4, h264 default
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_CENTER = 2, ///< mpeg1, jpeg, h263
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_TOPLEFT = 3, ///< DV
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_TOP = 4,
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_BOTTOMLEFT = 5,
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_BOTTOM = 6,
+ AVCHROMA_LOC_NB, ///< Not part of ABI
+};
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_PIXFMT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/random_seed.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/random_seed.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0462a048e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/random_seed.h
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2009 Baptiste Coudurier
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H
+#define AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H
+
+#include
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Get a seed to use in conjunction with random functions.
+ * This function tries to provide a good seed at a best effort bases.
+ * Its possible to call this function multiple times if more bits are needed.
+ * It can be quite slow, which is why it should only be used as seed for a faster
+ * PRNG. The quality of the seed depends on the platform.
+ */
+uint32_t av_get_random_seed(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RANDOM_SEED_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/rational.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/rational.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7439701db2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/rational.h
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/*
+ * rational numbers
+ * Copyright (c) 2003 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * rational numbers
+ * @author Michael Niedermayer
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H
+#define AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H
+
+#include
+#include
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_math
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * rational number numerator/denominator
+ */
+typedef struct AVRational{
+ int num; ///< numerator
+ int den; ///< denominator
+} AVRational;
+
+/**
+ * Create a rational.
+ * Useful for compilers that do not support compound literals.
+ * @note The return value is not reduced.
+ */
+static inline AVRational av_make_q(int num, int den)
+{
+ AVRational r = { num, den };
+ return r;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Compare two rationals.
+ * @param a first rational
+ * @param b second rational
+ * @return 0 if a==b, 1 if a>b, -1 if a>63)|1;
+ else if(b.den && a.den) return 0;
+ else if(a.num && b.num) return (a.num>>31) - (b.num>>31);
+ else return INT_MIN;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convert rational to double.
+ * @param a rational to convert
+ * @return (double) a
+ */
+static inline double av_q2d(AVRational a){
+ return a.num / (double) a.den;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Reduce a fraction.
+ * This is useful for framerate calculations.
+ * @param dst_num destination numerator
+ * @param dst_den destination denominator
+ * @param num source numerator
+ * @param den source denominator
+ * @param max the maximum allowed for dst_num & dst_den
+ * @return 1 if exact, 0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_reduce(int *dst_num, int *dst_den, int64_t num, int64_t den, int64_t max);
+
+/**
+ * Multiply two rationals.
+ * @param b first rational
+ * @param c second rational
+ * @return b*c
+ */
+AVRational av_mul_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Divide one rational by another.
+ * @param b first rational
+ * @param c second rational
+ * @return b/c
+ */
+AVRational av_div_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Add two rationals.
+ * @param b first rational
+ * @param c second rational
+ * @return b+c
+ */
+AVRational av_add_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Subtract one rational from another.
+ * @param b first rational
+ * @param c second rational
+ * @return b-c
+ */
+AVRational av_sub_q(AVRational b, AVRational c) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * Invert a rational.
+ * @param q value
+ * @return 1 / q
+ */
+static av_always_inline AVRational av_inv_q(AVRational q)
+{
+ AVRational r = { q.den, q.num };
+ return r;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convert a double precision floating point number to a rational.
+ * inf is expressed as {1,0} or {-1,0} depending on the sign.
+ *
+ * @param d double to convert
+ * @param max the maximum allowed numerator and denominator
+ * @return (AVRational) d
+ */
+AVRational av_d2q(double d, int max) av_const;
+
+/**
+ * @return 1 if q1 is nearer to q than q2, -1 if q2 is nearer
+ * than q1, 0 if they have the same distance.
+ */
+int av_nearer_q(AVRational q, AVRational q1, AVRational q2);
+
+/**
+ * Find the nearest value in q_list to q.
+ * @param q_list an array of rationals terminated by {0, 0}
+ * @return the index of the nearest value found in the array
+ */
+int av_find_nearest_q_idx(AVRational q, const AVRational* q_list);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RATIONAL_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/replaygain.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/replaygain.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5c03e1993d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/replaygain.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H
+#define AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * ReplayGain information (see
+ * http://wiki.hydrogenaudio.org/index.php?title=ReplayGain_1.0_specification).
+ * The size of this struct is a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVReplayGain {
+ /**
+ * Track replay gain in microbels (divide by 100000 to get the value in dB).
+ * Should be set to INT32_MIN when unknown.
+ */
+ int32_t track_gain;
+ /**
+ * Peak track amplitude, with 100000 representing full scale (but values
+ * may overflow). 0 when unknown.
+ */
+ uint32_t track_peak;
+ /**
+ * Same as track_gain, but for the whole album.
+ */
+ int32_t album_gain;
+ /**
+ * Same as track_peak, but for the whole album,
+ */
+ uint32_t album_peak;
+} AVReplayGain;
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_REPLAYGAIN_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ripemd.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ripemd.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b0c8bc89c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/ripemd.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 James Almer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H
+#define AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_ripemd RIPEMD
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_ripemd_size;
+
+struct AVRIPEMD;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVRIPEMD context.
+ */
+struct AVRIPEMD *av_ripemd_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize RIPEMD hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_ripemd_size)
+ * @param bits number of bits in digest (128, 160, 256 or 320 bits)
+ * @return zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_ripemd_init(struct AVRIPEMD* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param data input data to update hash with
+ * @param len input data length
+ */
+void av_ripemd_update(struct AVRIPEMD* context, const uint8_t* data, unsigned int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_ripemd_final(struct AVRIPEMD* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_RIPEMD_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6a8a031c02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/samplefmt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H
+#define AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "avutil.h"
+#include "attributes.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup lavu_audio
+ * @{
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_sampfmts Audio sample formats
+ *
+ * Audio sample format enumeration and related convenience functions.
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Audio sample formats
+ *
+ * - The data described by the sample format is always in native-endian order.
+ * Sample values can be expressed by native C types, hence the lack of a signed
+ * 24-bit sample format even though it is a common raw audio data format.
+ *
+ * - The floating-point formats are based on full volume being in the range
+ * [-1.0, 1.0]. Any values outside this range are beyond full volume level.
+ *
+ * - The data layout as used in av_samples_fill_arrays() and elsewhere in FFmpeg
+ * (such as AVFrame in libavcodec) is as follows:
+ *
+ * @par
+ * For planar sample formats, each audio channel is in a separate data plane,
+ * and linesize is the buffer size, in bytes, for a single plane. All data
+ * planes must be the same size. For packed sample formats, only the first data
+ * plane is used, and samples for each channel are interleaved. In this case,
+ * linesize is the buffer size, in bytes, for the 1 plane.
+ *
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat {
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE = -1,
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_U8, ///< unsigned 8 bits
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, ///< signed 16 bits
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S32, ///< signed 32 bits
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLT, ///< float
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_DBL, ///< double
+
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_U8P, ///< unsigned 8 bits, planar
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16P, ///< signed 16 bits, planar
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S32P, ///< signed 32 bits, planar
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP, ///< float, planar
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_DBLP, ///< double, planar
+
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NB ///< Number of sample formats. DO NOT USE if linking dynamically
+};
+
+/**
+ * Return the name of sample_fmt, or NULL if sample_fmt is not
+ * recognized.
+ */
+const char *av_get_sample_fmt_name(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return a sample format corresponding to name, or AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE
+ * on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_sample_fmt(const char *name);
+
+/**
+ * Return the planar<->packed alternative form of the given sample format, or
+ * AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error. If the passed sample_fmt is already in the
+ * requested planar/packed format, the format returned is the same as the
+ * input.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_alt_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int planar);
+
+/**
+ * Get the packed alternative form of the given sample format.
+ *
+ * If the passed sample_fmt is already in packed format, the format returned is
+ * the same as the input.
+ *
+ * @return the packed alternative form of the given sample format or
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_packed_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get the planar alternative form of the given sample format.
+ *
+ * If the passed sample_fmt is already in planar format, the format returned is
+ * the same as the input.
+ *
+ * @return the planar alternative form of the given sample format or
+ AV_SAMPLE_FMT_NONE on error.
+ */
+enum AVSampleFormat av_get_planar_sample_fmt(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Generate a string corresponding to the sample format with
+ * sample_fmt, or a header if sample_fmt is negative.
+ *
+ * @param buf the buffer where to write the string
+ * @param buf_size the size of buf
+ * @param sample_fmt the number of the sample format to print the
+ * corresponding info string, or a negative value to print the
+ * corresponding header.
+ * @return the pointer to the filled buffer or NULL if sample_fmt is
+ * unknown or in case of other errors
+ */
+char *av_get_sample_fmt_string(char *buf, int buf_size, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return number of bytes per sample.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format
+ * @return number of bytes per sample or zero if unknown for the given
+ * sample format
+ */
+int av_get_bytes_per_sample(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the sample format is planar.
+ *
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format to inspect
+ * @return 1 if the sample format is planar, 0 if it is interleaved
+ */
+int av_sample_fmt_is_planar(enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Get the required buffer size for the given audio parameters.
+ *
+ * @param[out] linesize calculated linesize, may be NULL
+ * @param nb_channels the number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples the number of samples in a single channel
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format
+ * @param align buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return required buffer size, or negative error code on failure
+ */
+int av_samples_get_buffer_size(int *linesize, int nb_channels, int nb_samples,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup lavu_sampmanip Samples manipulation
+ *
+ * Functions that manipulate audio samples
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Fill plane data pointers and linesize for samples with sample
+ * format sample_fmt.
+ *
+ * The audio_data array is filled with the pointers to the samples data planes:
+ * for planar, set the start point of each channel's data within the buffer,
+ * for packed, set the start point of the entire buffer only.
+ *
+ * The value pointed to by linesize is set to the aligned size of each
+ * channel's data buffer for planar layout, or to the aligned size of the
+ * buffer for all channels for packed layout.
+ *
+ * The buffer in buf must be big enough to contain all the samples
+ * (use av_samples_get_buffer_size() to compute its minimum size),
+ * otherwise the audio_data pointers will point to invalid data.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param[out] audio_data array to be filled with the pointer for each channel
+ * @param[out] linesize calculated linesize, may be NULL
+ * @param buf the pointer to a buffer containing the samples
+ * @param nb_channels the number of channels
+ * @param nb_samples the number of samples in a single channel
+ * @param sample_fmt the sample format
+ * @param align buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return >=0 on success or a negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return minimum size in bytes required for the buffer in case
+ * of success at the next bump
+ */
+int av_samples_fill_arrays(uint8_t **audio_data, int *linesize,
+ const uint8_t *buf,
+ int nb_channels, int nb_samples,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a samples buffer for nb_samples samples, and fill data pointers and
+ * linesize accordingly.
+ * The allocated samples buffer can be freed by using av_freep(&audio_data[0])
+ * Allocated data will be initialized to silence.
+ *
+ * @see enum AVSampleFormat
+ * The documentation for AVSampleFormat describes the data layout.
+ *
+ * @param[out] audio_data array to be filled with the pointer for each channel
+ * @param[out] linesize aligned size for audio buffer(s), may be NULL
+ * @param nb_channels number of audio channels
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples per channel
+ * @param align buffer size alignment (0 = default, 1 = no alignment)
+ * @return >=0 on success or a negative error code on failure
+ * @todo return the size of the allocated buffer in case of success at the next bump
+ * @see av_samples_fill_arrays()
+ * @see av_samples_alloc_array_and_samples()
+ */
+int av_samples_alloc(uint8_t **audio_data, int *linesize, int nb_channels,
+ int nb_samples, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a data pointers array, samples buffer for nb_samples
+ * samples, and fill data pointers and linesize accordingly.
+ *
+ * This is the same as av_samples_alloc(), but also allocates the data
+ * pointers array.
+ *
+ * @see av_samples_alloc()
+ */
+int av_samples_alloc_array_and_samples(uint8_t ***audio_data, int *linesize, int nb_channels,
+ int nb_samples, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt, int align);
+
+/**
+ * Copy samples from src to dst.
+ *
+ * @param dst destination array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param src source array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param dst_offset offset in samples at which the data will be written to dst
+ * @param src_offset offset in samples at which the data will be read from src
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to be copied
+ * @param nb_channels number of audio channels
+ * @param sample_fmt audio sample format
+ */
+int av_samples_copy(uint8_t **dst, uint8_t * const *src, int dst_offset,
+ int src_offset, int nb_samples, int nb_channels,
+ enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Fill an audio buffer with silence.
+ *
+ * @param audio_data array of pointers to data planes
+ * @param offset offset in samples at which to start filling
+ * @param nb_samples number of samples to fill
+ * @param nb_channels number of audio channels
+ * @param sample_fmt audio sample format
+ */
+int av_samples_set_silence(uint8_t **audio_data, int offset, int nb_samples,
+ int nb_channels, enum AVSampleFormat sample_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SAMPLEFMT_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bf4377e51b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha.h
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SHA_H
+#define AVUTIL_SHA_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_sha SHA
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_sha_size;
+
+struct AVSHA;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVSHA context.
+ */
+struct AVSHA *av_sha_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize SHA-1 or SHA-2 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_sha_size)
+ * @param bits number of bits in digest (SHA-1 - 160 bits, SHA-2 224 or 256 bits)
+ * @return zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_sha_init(struct AVSHA* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param data input data to update hash with
+ * @param len input data length
+ */
+void av_sha_update(struct AVSHA* context, const uint8_t* data, unsigned int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_sha_final(struct AVSHA* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SHA_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha512.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha512.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b08701477
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/sha512.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2007 Michael Niedermayer
+ * Copyright (C) 2013 James Almer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_SHA512_H
+#define AVUTIL_SHA512_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "attributes.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_sha512 SHA512
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+extern const int av_sha512_size;
+
+struct AVSHA512;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVSHA512 context.
+ */
+struct AVSHA512 *av_sha512_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize SHA-2 512 hashing.
+ *
+ * @param context pointer to the function context (of size av_sha512_size)
+ * @param bits number of bits in digest (224, 256, 384 or 512 bits)
+ * @return zero if initialization succeeded, -1 otherwise
+ */
+int av_sha512_init(struct AVSHA512* context, int bits);
+
+/**
+ * Update hash value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param data input data to update hash with
+ * @param len input data length
+ */
+void av_sha512_update(struct AVSHA512* context, const uint8_t* data, unsigned int len);
+
+/**
+ * Finish hashing and output digest value.
+ *
+ * @param context hash function context
+ * @param digest buffer where output digest value is stored
+ */
+void av_sha512_final(struct AVSHA512* context, uint8_t *digest);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_SHA512_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1135dc9ddc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/stereo3d.h
@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2013 Vittorio Giovara
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H
+#define AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H
+
+#include
+
+#include "frame.h"
+
+/**
+ * List of possible 3D Types
+ */
+enum AVStereo3DType {
+ /**
+ * Video is not stereoscopic (and metadata has to be there).
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_2D,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are next to each other.
+ *
+ * LLLLRRRR
+ * LLLLRRRR
+ * LLLLRRRR
+ * ...
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_SIDEBYSIDE,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are on top of each other.
+ *
+ * LLLLLLLL
+ * LLLLLLLL
+ * RRRRRRRR
+ * RRRRRRRR
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_TOPBOTTOM,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are alternated temporally.
+ *
+ * frame0 frame1 frame2 ...
+ * LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+ * LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+ * LLLLLLLL RRRRRRRR LLLLLLLL
+ * ... ... ...
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_FRAMESEQUENCE,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are packed in a checkerboard-like structure per pixel.
+ *
+ * LRLRLRLR
+ * RLRLRLRL
+ * LRLRLRLR
+ * ...
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_CHECKERBOARD,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are next to each other, but when upscaling
+ * apply a checkerboard pattern.
+ *
+ * LLLLRRRR L L L L R R R R
+ * LLLLRRRR => L L L L R R R R
+ * LLLLRRRR L L L L R R R R
+ * LLLLRRRR L L L L R R R R
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_SIDEBYSIDE_QUINCUNX,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are packed per line, as if interlaced.
+ *
+ * LLLLLLLL
+ * RRRRRRRR
+ * LLLLLLLL
+ * ...
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_LINES,
+
+ /**
+ * Views are packed per column.
+ *
+ * LRLRLRLR
+ * LRLRLRLR
+ * LRLRLRLR
+ * ...
+ */
+ AV_STEREO3D_COLUMNS,
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * Inverted views, Right/Bottom represents the left view.
+ */
+#define AV_STEREO3D_FLAG_INVERT (1 << 0)
+
+/**
+ * Stereo 3D type: this structure describes how two videos are packed
+ * within a single video surface, with additional information as needed.
+ *
+ * @note The struct must be allocated with av_stereo3d_alloc() and
+ * its size is not a part of the public ABI.
+ */
+typedef struct AVStereo3D {
+ /**
+ * How views are packed within the video.
+ */
+ enum AVStereo3DType type;
+
+ /**
+ * Additional information about the frame packing.
+ */
+ int flags;
+} AVStereo3D;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an AVStereo3D structure and set its fields to default values.
+ * The resulting struct can be freed using av_freep().
+ *
+ * @return An AVStereo3D filled with default values or NULL on failure.
+ */
+AVStereo3D *av_stereo3d_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a complete AVFrameSideData and add it to the frame.
+ *
+ * @param frame The frame which side data is added to.
+ *
+ * @return The AVStereo3D structure to be filled by caller.
+ */
+AVStereo3D *av_stereo3d_create_side_data(AVFrame *frame);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_STEREO3D_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a8481d8ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/threadmessage.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+ * as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+ * along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ * 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H
+#define AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H
+
+typedef struct AVThreadMessageQueue AVThreadMessageQueue;
+
+typedef enum AVThreadMessageFlags {
+
+ /**
+ * Perform non-blocking operation.
+ * If this flag is set, send and recv operations are non-blocking and
+ * return AVERROR(EAGAIN) immediately if they can not proceed.
+ */
+ AV_THREAD_MESSAGE_NONBLOCK = 1,
+
+} AVThreadMessageFlags;
+
+/**
+ * Allocate a new message queue.
+ *
+ * @param mq pointer to the message queue
+ * @param nelem maximum number of elements in the queue
+ * @param elsize size of each element in the queue
+ * @return >=0 for success; <0 for error, in particular AVERROR(ENOSYS) if
+ * lavu was built without thread support
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_alloc(AVThreadMessageQueue **mq,
+ unsigned nelem,
+ unsigned elsize);
+
+/**
+ * Free a message queue.
+ *
+ * The message queue must no longer be in use by another thread.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_free(AVThreadMessageQueue **mq);
+
+/**
+ * Send a message on the queue.
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_send(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+ void *msg,
+ unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Receive a message from the queue.
+ */
+int av_thread_message_queue_recv(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+ void *msg,
+ unsigned flags);
+
+/**
+ * Set the sending error code.
+ *
+ * If the error code is set to non-zero, av_thread_message_queue_recv() will
+ * return it immediately when there are no longer available messages.
+ * Conventional values, such as AVERROR_EOF or AVERROR(EAGAIN), can be used
+ * to cause the receiving thread to stop or suspend its operation.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_set_err_send(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+ int err);
+
+/**
+ * Set the receiving error code.
+ *
+ * If the error code is set to non-zero, av_thread_message_queue_send() will
+ * return it immediately. Conventional values, such as AVERROR_EOF or
+ * AVERROR(EAGAIN), can be used to cause the sending thread to stop or
+ * suspend its operation.
+ */
+void av_thread_message_queue_set_err_recv(AVThreadMessageQueue *mq,
+ int err);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_THREADMESSAGE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/time.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/time.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc169b064a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/time.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2000-2003 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIME_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIME_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * Get the current time in microseconds.
+ */
+int64_t av_gettime(void);
+
+/**
+ * Get the current time in microseconds since some unspecified starting point.
+ * On platforms that support it, the time comes from a monotonic clock
+ * This property makes this time source ideal for measuring relative time.
+ * The returned values may not be monotonic on platforms where a monotonic
+ * clock is not available.
+ */
+int64_t av_gettime_relative(void);
+
+/**
+ * Indicates with a boolean result if the av_gettime_relative() time source
+ * is monotonic.
+ */
+int av_gettime_relative_is_monotonic(void);
+
+/**
+ * Sleep for a period of time. Although the duration is expressed in
+ * microseconds, the actual delay may be rounded to the precision of the
+ * system timer.
+ *
+ * @param usec Number of microseconds to sleep.
+ * @return zero on success or (negative) error code.
+ */
+int av_usleep(unsigned usec);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIME_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timecode.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timecode.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..56e3975fd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timecode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2006 Smartjog S.A.S, Baptiste Coudurier
+ * Copyright (c) 2011-2012 Smartjog S.A.S, Clément Bœsch
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Timecode helpers header
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H
+
+#include
+#include "rational.h"
+
+#define AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE 16
+
+enum AVTimecodeFlag {
+ AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_DROPFRAME = 1<<0, ///< timecode is drop frame
+ AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_24HOURSMAX = 1<<1, ///< timecode wraps after 24 hours
+ AV_TIMECODE_FLAG_ALLOWNEGATIVE = 1<<2, ///< negative time values are allowed
+};
+
+typedef struct {
+ int start; ///< timecode frame start (first base frame number)
+ uint32_t flags; ///< flags such as drop frame, +24 hours support, ...
+ AVRational rate; ///< frame rate in rational form
+ unsigned fps; ///< frame per second; must be consistent with the rate field
+} AVTimecode;
+
+/**
+ * Adjust frame number for NTSC drop frame time code.
+ *
+ * @param framenum frame number to adjust
+ * @param fps frame per second, 30 or 60
+ * @return adjusted frame number
+ * @warning adjustment is only valid in NTSC 29.97 and 59.94
+ */
+int av_timecode_adjust_ntsc_framenum2(int framenum, int fps);
+
+/**
+ * Convert frame number to SMPTE 12M binary representation.
+ *
+ * @param tc timecode data correctly initialized
+ * @param framenum frame number
+ * @return the SMPTE binary representation
+ *
+ * @note Frame number adjustment is automatically done in case of drop timecode,
+ * you do NOT have to call av_timecode_adjust_ntsc_framenum2().
+ * @note The frame number is relative to tc->start.
+ * @note Color frame (CF), binary group flags (BGF) and biphase mark polarity
+ * correction (PC) bits are set to zero.
+ */
+uint32_t av_timecode_get_smpte_from_framenum(const AVTimecode *tc, int framenum);
+
+/**
+ * Load timecode string in buf.
+ *
+ * @param buf destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tc timecode data correctly initialized
+ * @param framenum frame number
+ * @return the buf parameter
+ *
+ * @note Timecode representation can be a negative timecode and have more than
+ * 24 hours, but will only be honored if the flags are correctly set.
+ * @note The frame number is relative to tc->start.
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_string(const AVTimecode *tc, char *buf, int framenum);
+
+/**
+ * Get the timecode string from the SMPTE timecode format.
+ *
+ * @param buf destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tcsmpte the 32-bit SMPTE timecode
+ * @param prevent_df prevent the use of a drop flag when it is known the DF bit
+ * is arbitrary
+ * @return the buf parameter
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_smpte_tc_string(char *buf, uint32_t tcsmpte, int prevent_df);
+
+/**
+ * Get the timecode string from the 25-bit timecode format (MPEG GOP format).
+ *
+ * @param buf destination buffer, must be at least AV_TIMECODE_STR_SIZE long
+ * @param tc25bit the 25-bits timecode
+ * @return the buf parameter
+ */
+char *av_timecode_make_mpeg_tc_string(char *buf, uint32_t tc25bit);
+
+/**
+ * Init a timecode struct with the passed parameters.
+ *
+ * @param log_ctx a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field
+ * is a pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log)
+ * @param tc pointer to an allocated AVTimecode
+ * @param rate frame rate in rational form
+ * @param flags miscellaneous flags such as drop frame, +24 hours, ...
+ * (see AVTimecodeFlag)
+ * @param frame_start the first frame number
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_init(AVTimecode *tc, AVRational rate, int flags, int frame_start, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Parse timecode representation (hh:mm:ss[:;.]ff).
+ *
+ * @param log_ctx a pointer to an arbitrary struct of which the first field is a
+ * pointer to an AVClass struct (used for av_log).
+ * @param tc pointer to an allocated AVTimecode
+ * @param rate frame rate in rational form
+ * @param str timecode string which will determine the frame start
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_init_from_string(AVTimecode *tc, AVRational rate, const char *str, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * Check if the timecode feature is available for the given frame rate
+ *
+ * @return 0 if supported, <0 otherwise
+ */
+int av_timecode_check_frame_rate(AVRational rate);
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIMECODE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timestamp.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timestamp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f010a7ee38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/timestamp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * timestamp utils, mostly useful for debugging/logging purposes
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H
+#define AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H
+
+#include "common.h"
+
+#if defined(__cplusplus) && !defined(__STDC_FORMAT_MACROS) && !defined(PRId64)
+#error missing -D__STDC_FORMAT_MACROS / #define __STDC_FORMAT_MACROS
+#endif
+
+#define AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE 32
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing a timestamp
+ * representation.
+ *
+ * @param buf a buffer with size in bytes of at least AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE
+ * @param ts the timestamp to represent
+ * @return the buffer in input
+ */
+static inline char *av_ts_make_string(char *buf, int64_t ts)
+{
+ if (ts == AV_NOPTS_VALUE) snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "NOPTS");
+ else snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "%"PRId64, ts);
+ return buf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_ts2str(ts) av_ts_make_string((char[AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, ts)
+
+/**
+ * Fill the provided buffer with a string containing a timestamp time
+ * representation.
+ *
+ * @param buf a buffer with size in bytes of at least AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE
+ * @param ts the timestamp to represent
+ * @param tb the timebase of the timestamp
+ * @return the buffer in input
+ */
+static inline char *av_ts_make_time_string(char *buf, int64_t ts, AVRational *tb)
+{
+ if (ts == AV_NOPTS_VALUE) snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "NOPTS");
+ else snprintf(buf, AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE, "%.6g", av_q2d(*tb) * ts);
+ return buf;
+}
+
+/**
+ * Convenience macro, the return value should be used only directly in
+ * function arguments but never stand-alone.
+ */
+#define av_ts2timestr(ts, tb) av_ts_make_time_string((char[AV_TS_MAX_STRING_SIZE]){0}, ts, tb)
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_TIMESTAMP_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1ed502016
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+ * copyright (c) 2003 Fabrice Bellard
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_VERSION_H
+#define AVUTIL_VERSION_H
+
+#include "macros.h"
+
+/**
+ * @addtogroup version_utils
+ *
+ * Useful to check and match library version in order to maintain
+ * backward compatibility.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define AV_VERSION_INT(a, b, c) (a<<16 | b<<8 | c)
+#define AV_VERSION_DOT(a, b, c) a ##.## b ##.## c
+#define AV_VERSION(a, b, c) AV_VERSION_DOT(a, b, c)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lavu
+ * Libavutil version macros
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lavu_ver Version and Build diagnostics
+ *
+ * Macros and function useful to check at compiletime and at runtime
+ * which version of libavutil is in use.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR 54
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR 16
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVUTIL_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBAVUTIL_BUILD LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBAVUTIL_IDENT "Lavu" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBAVUTIL_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @defgroup depr_guards Deprecation guards
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#ifndef FF_API_OLD_AVOPTIONS
+#define FF_API_OLD_AVOPTIONS (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_PIX_FMT
+#define FF_API_PIX_FMT (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CONTEXT_SIZE
+#define FF_API_CONTEXT_SIZE (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_PIX_FMT_DESC
+#define FF_API_PIX_FMT_DESC (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AV_REVERSE
+#define FF_API_AV_REVERSE (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AUDIOCONVERT
+#define FF_API_AUDIOCONVERT (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_CPU_FLAG_MMX2
+#define FF_API_CPU_FLAG_MMX2 (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_LLS_PRIVATE
+#define FF_API_LLS_PRIVATE (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC
+#define FF_API_AVFRAME_LAVC (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_VDPAU
+#define FF_API_VDPAU (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_GET_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_COMPAT
+#define FF_API_GET_CHANNEL_LAYOUT_COMPAT (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_XVMC
+#define FF_API_XVMC (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_OPT_TYPE_METADATA
+#define FF_API_OPT_TYPE_METADATA (LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR < 55)
+#endif
+
+#ifndef FF_CONST_AVUTIL55
+#if LIBAVUTIL_VERSION_MAJOR >= 55
+#define FF_CONST_AVUTIL55 const
+#else
+#define FF_CONST_AVUTIL55
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_VERSION_H */
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/xtea.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/xtea.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6f1e71e345
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libavutil/xtea.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+ * A 32-bit implementation of the XTEA algorithm
+ * Copyright (c) 2012 Samuel Pitoiset
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef AVUTIL_XTEA_H
+#define AVUTIL_XTEA_H
+
+#include
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @brief Public header for libavutil XTEA algorithm
+ * @defgroup lavu_xtea XTEA
+ * @ingroup lavu_crypto
+ * @{
+ */
+
+typedef struct AVXTEA {
+ uint32_t key[16];
+} AVXTEA;
+
+/**
+ * Initialize an AVXTEA context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param key a key of 16 bytes used for encryption/decryption
+ */
+void av_xtea_init(struct AVXTEA *ctx, const uint8_t key[16]);
+
+/**
+ * Encrypt or decrypt a buffer using a previously initialized context.
+ *
+ * @param ctx an AVXTEA context
+ * @param dst destination array, can be equal to src
+ * @param src source array, can be equal to dst
+ * @param count number of 8 byte blocks
+ * @param iv initialization vector for CBC mode, if NULL then ECB will be used
+ * @param decrypt 0 for encryption, 1 for decryption
+ */
+void av_xtea_crypt(struct AVXTEA *ctx, uint8_t *dst, const uint8_t *src,
+ int count, uint8_t *iv, int decrypt);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* AVUTIL_XTEA_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e00ed968d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/postprocess.h
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2001-2003 Michael Niedermayer (michaelni@gmx.at)
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ * (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ * GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H
+#define POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lpp
+ * external API header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lpp Libpostproc
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#include "libpostproc/version.h"
+
+/**
+ * Return the LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned postproc_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libpostproc build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *postproc_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libpostproc license.
+ */
+const char *postproc_license(void);
+
+#define PP_QUALITY_MAX 6
+
+#define QP_STORE_T int8_t
+
+#include
+
+typedef void pp_context;
+typedef void pp_mode;
+
+#if LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT < (52<<16)
+typedef pp_context pp_context_t;
+typedef pp_mode pp_mode_t;
+extern const char *const pp_help; ///< a simple help text
+#else
+extern const char pp_help[]; ///< a simple help text
+#endif
+
+void pp_postprocess(const uint8_t * src[3], const int srcStride[3],
+ uint8_t * dst[3], const int dstStride[3],
+ int horizontalSize, int verticalSize,
+ const QP_STORE_T *QP_store, int QP_stride,
+ pp_mode *mode, pp_context *ppContext, int pict_type);
+
+
+/**
+ * Return a pp_mode or NULL if an error occurred.
+ *
+ * @param name the string after "-pp" on the command line
+ * @param quality a number from 0 to PP_QUALITY_MAX
+ */
+pp_mode *pp_get_mode_by_name_and_quality(const char *name, int quality);
+void pp_free_mode(pp_mode *mode);
+
+pp_context *pp_get_context(int width, int height, int flags);
+void pp_free_context(pp_context *ppContext);
+
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_MMX 0x80000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_MMX2 0x20000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_3DNOW 0x40000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_ALTIVEC 0x10000000
+#define PP_CPU_CAPS_AUTO 0x00080000
+
+#define PP_FORMAT 0x00000008
+#define PP_FORMAT_420 (0x00000011|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_422 (0x00000001|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_411 (0x00000002|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_444 (0x00000000|PP_FORMAT)
+#define PP_FORMAT_440 (0x00000010|PP_FORMAT)
+
+#define PP_PICT_TYPE_QP2 0x00000010 ///< MPEG2 style QScale
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..59c24660f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libpostproc/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_VERSION_H
+#define POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libpostproc version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR 53
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR 3
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_BUILD LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBPOSTPROC_IDENT "postproc" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBPOSTPROC_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* POSTPROC_POSTPROCESS_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/swresample.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/swresample.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..37656a667d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/swresample.h
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2011-2013 Michael Niedermayer (michaelni@gmx.at)
+ *
+ * This file is part of libswresample
+ *
+ * libswresample is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * libswresample is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with libswresample; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H
+#define SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup lswr
+ * libswresample public header
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup lswr Libswresample
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Libswresample (lswr) is a library that handles audio resampling, sample
+ * format conversion and mixing.
+ *
+ * Interaction with lswr is done through SwrContext, which is
+ * allocated with swr_alloc() or swr_alloc_set_opts(). It is opaque, so all parameters
+ * must be set with the @ref avoptions API.
+ *
+ * The first thing you will need to do in order to use lswr is to allocate
+ * SwrContext. This can be done with swr_alloc() or swr_alloc_set_opts(). If you
+ * are using the former, you must set options through the @ref avoptions API.
+ * The latter function provides the same feature, but it allows you to set some
+ * common options in the same statement.
+ *
+ * For example the following code will setup conversion from planar float sample
+ * format to interleaved signed 16-bit integer, downsampling from 48kHz to
+ * 44.1kHz and downmixing from 5.1 channels to stereo (using the default mixing
+ * matrix). This is using the swr_alloc() function.
+ * @code
+ * SwrContext *swr = swr_alloc();
+ * av_opt_set_channel_layout(swr, "in_channel_layout", AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_channel_layout(swr, "out_channel_layout", AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_int(swr, "in_sample_rate", 48000, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_int(swr, "out_sample_rate", 44100, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_sample_fmt(swr, "in_sample_fmt", AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP, 0);
+ * av_opt_set_sample_fmt(swr, "out_sample_fmt", AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, 0);
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * The same job can be done using swr_alloc_set_opts() as well:
+ * @code
+ * SwrContext *swr = swr_alloc_set_opts(NULL, // we're allocating a new context
+ * AV_CH_LAYOUT_STEREO, // out_ch_layout
+ * AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, // out_sample_fmt
+ * 44100, // out_sample_rate
+ * AV_CH_LAYOUT_5POINT1, // in_ch_layout
+ * AV_SAMPLE_FMT_FLTP, // in_sample_fmt
+ * 48000, // in_sample_rate
+ * 0, // log_offset
+ * NULL); // log_ctx
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * Once all values have been set, it must be initialized with swr_init(). If
+ * you need to change the conversion parameters, you can change the parameters
+ * using @ref AVOptions, as described above in the first example; or by using
+ * swr_alloc_set_opts(), but with the first argument the allocated context.
+ * You must then call swr_init() again.
+ *
+ * The conversion itself is done by repeatedly calling swr_convert().
+ * Note that the samples may get buffered in swr if you provide insufficient
+ * output space or if sample rate conversion is done, which requires "future"
+ * samples. Samples that do not require future input can be retrieved at any
+ * time by using swr_convert() (in_count can be set to 0).
+ * At the end of conversion the resampling buffer can be flushed by calling
+ * swr_convert() with NULL in and 0 in_count.
+ *
+ * The samples used in the conversion process can be managed with the libavutil
+ * @ref lavu_sampmanip "samples manipulation" API, including av_samples_alloc()
+ * function used in the following example.
+ *
+ * The delay between input and output, can at any time be found by using
+ * swr_get_delay().
+ *
+ * The following code demonstrates the conversion loop assuming the parameters
+ * from above and caller-defined functions get_input() and handle_output():
+ * @code
+ * uint8_t **input;
+ * int in_samples;
+ *
+ * while (get_input(&input, &in_samples)) {
+ * uint8_t *output;
+ * int out_samples = av_rescale_rnd(swr_get_delay(swr, 48000) +
+ * in_samples, 44100, 48000, AV_ROUND_UP);
+ * av_samples_alloc(&output, NULL, 2, out_samples,
+ * AV_SAMPLE_FMT_S16, 0);
+ * out_samples = swr_convert(swr, &output, out_samples,
+ * input, in_samples);
+ * handle_output(output, out_samples);
+ * av_freep(&output);
+ * }
+ * @endcode
+ *
+ * When the conversion is finished, the conversion
+ * context and everything associated with it must be freed with swr_free().
+ * A swr_close() function is also available, but it exists mainly for
+ * compatibility with libavresample, and is not required to be called.
+ *
+ * There will be no memory leak if the data is not completely flushed before
+ * swr_free().
+ */
+
+#include
+#include "libavutil/frame.h"
+#include "libavutil/samplefmt.h"
+
+#include "libswresample/version.h"
+
+#if LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR < 1
+#define SWR_CH_MAX 32 ///< Maximum number of channels
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * @name Option constants
+ * These constants are used for the @ref avoptions interface for lswr.
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+#define SWR_FLAG_RESAMPLE 1 ///< Force resampling even if equal sample rate
+//TODO use int resample ?
+//long term TODO can we enable this dynamically?
+
+/** Dithering algorithms */
+enum SwrDitherType {
+ SWR_DITHER_NONE = 0,
+ SWR_DITHER_RECTANGULAR,
+ SWR_DITHER_TRIANGULAR,
+ SWR_DITHER_TRIANGULAR_HIGHPASS,
+
+ SWR_DITHER_NS = 64, ///< not part of API/ABI
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_LIPSHITZ,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_F_WEIGHTED,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_MODIFIED_E_WEIGHTED,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_IMPROVED_E_WEIGHTED,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_SHIBATA,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_LOW_SHIBATA,
+ SWR_DITHER_NS_HIGH_SHIBATA,
+ SWR_DITHER_NB, ///< not part of API/ABI
+};
+
+/** Resampling Engines */
+enum SwrEngine {
+ SWR_ENGINE_SWR, /**< SW Resampler */
+ SWR_ENGINE_SOXR, /**< SoX Resampler */
+ SWR_ENGINE_NB, ///< not part of API/ABI
+};
+
+/** Resampling Filter Types */
+enum SwrFilterType {
+ SWR_FILTER_TYPE_CUBIC, /**< Cubic */
+ SWR_FILTER_TYPE_BLACKMAN_NUTTALL, /**< Blackman Nuttall Windowed Sinc */
+ SWR_FILTER_TYPE_KAISER, /**< Kaiser Windowed Sinc */
+};
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The libswresample context. Unlike libavcodec and libavformat, this structure
+ * is opaque. This means that if you would like to set options, you must use
+ * the @ref avoptions API and cannot directly set values to members of the
+ * structure.
+ */
+typedef struct SwrContext SwrContext;
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for SwrContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ * @return the AVClass of SwrContext
+ */
+const AVClass *swr_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * @name SwrContext constructor functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Allocate SwrContext.
+ *
+ * If you use this function you will need to set the parameters (manually or
+ * with swr_alloc_set_opts()) before calling swr_init().
+ *
+ * @see swr_alloc_set_opts(), swr_init(), swr_free()
+ * @return NULL on error, allocated context otherwise
+ */
+struct SwrContext *swr_alloc(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize context after user parameters have been set.
+ * @note The context must be configured using the AVOption API.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_set_int()
+ * @see av_opt_set_dict()
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s Swr context to initialize
+ * @return AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_init(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Check whether an swr context has been initialized or not.
+ *
+ * @param[in] s Swr context to check
+ * @see swr_init()
+ * @return positive if it has been initialized, 0 if not initialized
+ */
+int swr_is_initialized(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate SwrContext if needed and set/reset common parameters.
+ *
+ * This function does not require s to be allocated with swr_alloc(). On the
+ * other hand, swr_alloc() can use swr_alloc_set_opts() to set the parameters
+ * on the allocated context.
+ *
+ * @param s existing Swr context if available, or NULL if not
+ * @param out_ch_layout output channel layout (AV_CH_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param out_sample_fmt output sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param out_sample_rate output sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param in_ch_layout input channel layout (AV_CH_LAYOUT_*)
+ * @param in_sample_fmt input sample format (AV_SAMPLE_FMT_*).
+ * @param in_sample_rate input sample rate (frequency in Hz)
+ * @param log_offset logging level offset
+ * @param log_ctx parent logging context, can be NULL
+ *
+ * @see swr_init(), swr_free()
+ * @return NULL on error, allocated context otherwise
+ */
+struct SwrContext *swr_alloc_set_opts(struct SwrContext *s,
+ int64_t out_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat out_sample_fmt, int out_sample_rate,
+ int64_t in_ch_layout, enum AVSampleFormat in_sample_fmt, int in_sample_rate,
+ int log_offset, void *log_ctx);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name SwrContext destructor functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Free the given SwrContext and set the pointer to NULL.
+ *
+ * @param[in] s a pointer to a pointer to Swr context
+ */
+void swr_free(struct SwrContext **s);
+
+/**
+ * Closes the context so that swr_is_initialized() returns 0.
+ *
+ * The context can be brought back to life by running swr_init(),
+ * swr_init() can also be used without swr_close().
+ * This function is mainly provided for simplifying the usecase
+ * where one tries to support libavresample and libswresample.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s Swr context to be closed
+ */
+void swr_close(struct SwrContext *s);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Core conversion functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** Convert audio.
+ *
+ * in and in_count can be set to 0 to flush the last few samples out at the
+ * end.
+ *
+ * If more input is provided than output space then the input will be buffered.
+ * You can avoid this buffering by providing more output space than input.
+ * Conversion will run directly without copying whenever possible.
+ *
+ * @param s allocated Swr context, with parameters set
+ * @param out output buffers, only the first one need be set in case of packed audio
+ * @param out_count amount of space available for output in samples per channel
+ * @param in input buffers, only the first one need to be set in case of packed audio
+ * @param in_count number of input samples available in one channel
+ *
+ * @return number of samples output per channel, negative value on error
+ */
+int swr_convert(struct SwrContext *s, uint8_t **out, int out_count,
+ const uint8_t **in , int in_count);
+
+/**
+ * Convert the next timestamp from input to output
+ * timestamps are in 1/(in_sample_rate * out_sample_rate) units.
+ *
+ * @note There are 2 slightly differently behaving modes.
+ * @li When automatic timestamp compensation is not used, (min_compensation >= FLT_MAX)
+ * in this case timestamps will be passed through with delays compensated
+ * @li When automatic timestamp compensation is used, (min_compensation < FLT_MAX)
+ * in this case the output timestamps will match output sample numbers.
+ * See ffmpeg-resampler(1) for the two modes of compensation.
+ *
+ * @param s[in] initialized Swr context
+ * @param pts[in] timestamp for the next input sample, INT64_MIN if unknown
+ * @see swr_set_compensation(), swr_drop_output(), and swr_inject_silence() are
+ * function used internally for timestamp compensation.
+ * @return the output timestamp for the next output sample
+ */
+int64_t swr_next_pts(struct SwrContext *s, int64_t pts);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Low-level option setting functions
+ * These functons provide a means to set low-level options that is not possible
+ * with the AVOption API.
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Activate resampling compensation ("soft" compensation). This function is
+ * internally called when needed in swr_next_pts().
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s allocated Swr context. If it is not initialized,
+ * or SWR_FLAG_RESAMPLE is not set, swr_init() is
+ * called with the flag set.
+ * @param[in] sample_delta delta in PTS per sample
+ * @param[in] compensation_distance number of samples to compensate for
+ * @return >= 0 on success, AVERROR error codes if:
+ * @li @c s is NULL,
+ * @li @c compensation_distance is less than 0,
+ * @li @c compensation_distance is 0 but sample_delta is not,
+ * @li compensation unsupported by resampler, or
+ * @li swr_init() fails when called.
+ */
+int swr_set_compensation(struct SwrContext *s, int sample_delta, int compensation_distance);
+
+/**
+ * Set a customized input channel mapping.
+ *
+ * @param[in,out] s allocated Swr context, not yet initialized
+ * @param[in] channel_map customized input channel mapping (array of channel
+ * indexes, -1 for a muted channel)
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_set_channel_mapping(struct SwrContext *s, const int *channel_map);
+
+/**
+ * Set a customized remix matrix.
+ *
+ * @param s allocated Swr context, not yet initialized
+ * @param matrix remix coefficients; matrix[i + stride * o] is
+ * the weight of input channel i in output channel o
+ * @param stride offset between lines of the matrix
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or AVERROR error code in case of failure.
+ */
+int swr_set_matrix(struct SwrContext *s, const double *matrix, int stride);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Sample handling functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Drops the specified number of output samples.
+ *
+ * This function, along with swr_inject_silence(), is called by swr_next_pts()
+ * if needed for "hard" compensation.
+ *
+ * @param s allocated Swr context
+ * @param count number of samples to be dropped
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int swr_drop_output(struct SwrContext *s, int count);
+
+/**
+ * Injects the specified number of silence samples.
+ *
+ * This function, along with swr_drop_output(), is called by swr_next_pts()
+ * if needed for "hard" compensation.
+ *
+ * @param s allocated Swr context
+ * @param count number of samples to be dropped
+ *
+ * @return >= 0 on success, or a negative AVERROR code on failure
+ */
+int swr_inject_silence(struct SwrContext *s, int count);
+
+/**
+ * Gets the delay the next input sample will experience relative to the next output sample.
+ *
+ * Swresample can buffer data if more input has been provided than available
+ * output space, also converting between sample rates needs a delay.
+ * This function returns the sum of all such delays.
+ * The exact delay is not necessarily an integer value in either input or
+ * output sample rate. Especially when downsampling by a large value, the
+ * output sample rate may be a poor choice to represent the delay, similarly
+ * for upsampling and the input sample rate.
+ *
+ * @param s swr context
+ * @param base timebase in which the returned delay will be:
+ * @li if it's set to 1 the returned delay is in seconds
+ * @li if it's set to 1000 the returned delay is in milliseconds
+ * @li if it's set to the input sample rate then the returned
+ * delay is in input samples
+ * @li if it's set to the output sample rate then the returned
+ * delay is in output samples
+ * @li if it's the least common multiple of in_sample_rate and
+ * out_sample_rate then an exact rounding-free delay will be
+ * returned
+ * @returns the delay in 1 / @c base units.
+ */
+int64_t swr_get_delay(struct SwrContext *s, int64_t base);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name Configuration accessors
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Return the @ref LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT constant.
+ *
+ * This is useful to check if the build-time libswresample has the same version
+ * as the run-time one.
+ *
+ * @returns the unsigned int-typed version
+ */
+unsigned swresample_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the swr build-time configuration.
+ *
+ * @returns the build-time @c ./configure flags
+ */
+const char *swresample_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the swr license.
+ *
+ * @returns the license of libswresample, determined at build-time
+ */
+const char *swresample_license(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ *
+ * @name AVFrame based API
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Convert the samples in the input AVFrame and write them to the output AVFrame.
+ *
+ * Input and output AVFrames must have channel_layout, sample_rate and format set.
+ *
+ * If the output AVFrame does not have the data pointers allocated the nb_samples
+ * field will be set using av_frame_get_buffer()
+ * is called to allocate the frame.
+ *
+ * The output AVFrame can be NULL or have fewer allocated samples than required.
+ * In this case, any remaining samples not written to the output will be added
+ * to an internal FIFO buffer, to be returned at the next call to this function
+ * or to swr_convert().
+ *
+ * If converting sample rate, there may be data remaining in the internal
+ * resampling delay buffer. swr_get_delay() tells the number of
+ * remaining samples. To get this data as output, call this function or
+ * swr_convert() with NULL input.
+ *
+ * If the SwrContext configuration does not match the output and
+ * input AVFrame settings the conversion does not take place and depending on
+ * which AVFrame is not matching AVERROR_OUTPUT_CHANGED, AVERROR_INPUT_CHANGED
+ * or the result of a bitwise-OR of them is returned.
+ *
+ * @see swr_delay()
+ * @see swr_convert()
+ * @see swr_get_delay()
+ *
+ * @param swr audio resample context
+ * @param output output AVFrame
+ * @param input input AVFrame
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR on failure or nonmatching
+ * configuration.
+ */
+int swr_convert_frame(SwrContext *swr,
+ AVFrame *output, const AVFrame *input);
+
+/**
+ * Configure or reconfigure the SwrContext using the information
+ * provided by the AVFrames.
+ *
+ * The original resampling context is reset even on failure.
+ * The function calls swr_close() internally if the context is open.
+ *
+ * @see swr_close();
+ *
+ * @param swr audio resample context
+ * @param output output AVFrame
+ * @param input input AVFrame
+ * @return 0 on success, AVERROR on failure.
+ */
+int swr_config_frame(SwrContext *swr, const AVFrame *out, const AVFrame *in);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* SWRESAMPLE_SWRESAMPLE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..61c76fa2f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswresample/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+/*
+ * Version macros.
+ *
+ * This file is part of libswresample
+ *
+ * libswresample is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * libswresample is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with libswresample; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWR_VERSION_H
+#define SWR_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * Libswresample version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR 1
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR 1
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO 100
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_BUILD LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBSWRESAMPLE_IDENT "SwR" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBSWRESAMPLE_VERSION)
+
+#endif /* SWR_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/swscale.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/swscale.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..903e1203fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/swscale.h
@@ -0,0 +1,359 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (C) 2001-2011 Michael Niedermayer
+ *
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H
+#define SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * @ingroup libsws
+ * external API header
+ */
+
+#include
+
+#include "libavutil/avutil.h"
+#include "libavutil/log.h"
+#include "libavutil/pixfmt.h"
+#include "version.h"
+
+/**
+ * @defgroup libsws Color conversion and scaling
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Return the LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT constant.
+ */
+unsigned swscale_version(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libswscale build-time configuration.
+ */
+const char *swscale_configuration(void);
+
+/**
+ * Return the libswscale license.
+ */
+const char *swscale_license(void);
+
+/* values for the flags, the stuff on the command line is different */
+#define SWS_FAST_BILINEAR 1
+#define SWS_BILINEAR 2
+#define SWS_BICUBIC 4
+#define SWS_X 8
+#define SWS_POINT 0x10
+#define SWS_AREA 0x20
+#define SWS_BICUBLIN 0x40
+#define SWS_GAUSS 0x80
+#define SWS_SINC 0x100
+#define SWS_LANCZOS 0x200
+#define SWS_SPLINE 0x400
+
+#define SWS_SRC_V_CHR_DROP_MASK 0x30000
+#define SWS_SRC_V_CHR_DROP_SHIFT 16
+
+#define SWS_PARAM_DEFAULT 123456
+
+#define SWS_PRINT_INFO 0x1000
+
+//the following 3 flags are not completely implemented
+//internal chrominace subsampling info
+#define SWS_FULL_CHR_H_INT 0x2000
+//input subsampling info
+#define SWS_FULL_CHR_H_INP 0x4000
+#define SWS_DIRECT_BGR 0x8000
+#define SWS_ACCURATE_RND 0x40000
+#define SWS_BITEXACT 0x80000
+#define SWS_ERROR_DIFFUSION 0x800000
+
+#if FF_API_SWS_CPU_CAPS
+/**
+ * CPU caps are autodetected now, those flags
+ * are only provided for API compatibility.
+ */
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_MMX 0x80000000
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_MMXEXT 0x20000000
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_MMX2 0x20000000
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_3DNOW 0x40000000
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_ALTIVEC 0x10000000
+#if FF_API_ARCH_BFIN
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_BFIN 0x01000000
+#endif
+#define SWS_CPU_CAPS_SSE2 0x02000000
+#endif
+
+#define SWS_MAX_REDUCE_CUTOFF 0.002
+
+#define SWS_CS_ITU709 1
+#define SWS_CS_FCC 4
+#define SWS_CS_ITU601 5
+#define SWS_CS_ITU624 5
+#define SWS_CS_SMPTE170M 5
+#define SWS_CS_SMPTE240M 7
+#define SWS_CS_DEFAULT 5
+
+/**
+ * Return a pointer to yuv<->rgb coefficients for the given colorspace
+ * suitable for sws_setColorspaceDetails().
+ *
+ * @param colorspace One of the SWS_CS_* macros. If invalid,
+ * SWS_CS_DEFAULT is used.
+ */
+const int *sws_getCoefficients(int colorspace);
+
+// when used for filters they must have an odd number of elements
+// coeffs cannot be shared between vectors
+typedef struct SwsVector {
+ double *coeff; ///< pointer to the list of coefficients
+ int length; ///< number of coefficients in the vector
+} SwsVector;
+
+// vectors can be shared
+typedef struct SwsFilter {
+ SwsVector *lumH;
+ SwsVector *lumV;
+ SwsVector *chrH;
+ SwsVector *chrV;
+} SwsFilter;
+
+struct SwsContext;
+
+/**
+ * Return a positive value if pix_fmt is a supported input format, 0
+ * otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedInput(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Return a positive value if pix_fmt is a supported output format, 0
+ * otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedOutput(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * @param[in] pix_fmt the pixel format
+ * @return a positive value if an endianness conversion for pix_fmt is
+ * supported, 0 otherwise.
+ */
+int sws_isSupportedEndiannessConversion(enum AVPixelFormat pix_fmt);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate an empty SwsContext. This must be filled and passed to
+ * sws_init_context(). For filling see AVOptions, options.c and
+ * sws_setColorspaceDetails().
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_alloc_context(void);
+
+/**
+ * Initialize the swscaler context sws_context.
+ *
+ * @return zero or positive value on success, a negative value on
+ * error
+ */
+int sws_init_context(struct SwsContext *sws_context, SwsFilter *srcFilter, SwsFilter *dstFilter);
+
+/**
+ * Free the swscaler context swsContext.
+ * If swsContext is NULL, then does nothing.
+ */
+void sws_freeContext(struct SwsContext *swsContext);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return an SwsContext. You need it to perform
+ * scaling/conversion operations using sws_scale().
+ *
+ * @param srcW the width of the source image
+ * @param srcH the height of the source image
+ * @param srcFormat the source image format
+ * @param dstW the width of the destination image
+ * @param dstH the height of the destination image
+ * @param dstFormat the destination image format
+ * @param flags specify which algorithm and options to use for rescaling
+ * @return a pointer to an allocated context, or NULL in case of error
+ * @note this function is to be removed after a saner alternative is
+ * written
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_getContext(int srcW, int srcH, enum AVPixelFormat srcFormat,
+ int dstW, int dstH, enum AVPixelFormat dstFormat,
+ int flags, SwsFilter *srcFilter,
+ SwsFilter *dstFilter, const double *param);
+
+/**
+ * Scale the image slice in srcSlice and put the resulting scaled
+ * slice in the image in dst. A slice is a sequence of consecutive
+ * rows in an image.
+ *
+ * Slices have to be provided in sequential order, either in
+ * top-bottom or bottom-top order. If slices are provided in
+ * non-sequential order the behavior of the function is undefined.
+ *
+ * @param c the scaling context previously created with
+ * sws_getContext()
+ * @param srcSlice the array containing the pointers to the planes of
+ * the source slice
+ * @param srcStride the array containing the strides for each plane of
+ * the source image
+ * @param srcSliceY the position in the source image of the slice to
+ * process, that is the number (counted starting from
+ * zero) in the image of the first row of the slice
+ * @param srcSliceH the height of the source slice, that is the number
+ * of rows in the slice
+ * @param dst the array containing the pointers to the planes of
+ * the destination image
+ * @param dstStride the array containing the strides for each plane of
+ * the destination image
+ * @return the height of the output slice
+ */
+int sws_scale(struct SwsContext *c, const uint8_t *const srcSlice[],
+ const int srcStride[], int srcSliceY, int srcSliceH,
+ uint8_t *const dst[], const int dstStride[]);
+
+/**
+ * @param dstRange flag indicating the while-black range of the output (1=jpeg / 0=mpeg)
+ * @param srcRange flag indicating the while-black range of the input (1=jpeg / 0=mpeg)
+ * @param table the yuv2rgb coefficients describing the output yuv space, normally ff_yuv2rgb_coeffs[x]
+ * @param inv_table the yuv2rgb coefficients describing the input yuv space, normally ff_yuv2rgb_coeffs[x]
+ * @param brightness 16.16 fixed point brightness correction
+ * @param contrast 16.16 fixed point contrast correction
+ * @param saturation 16.16 fixed point saturation correction
+ * @return -1 if not supported
+ */
+int sws_setColorspaceDetails(struct SwsContext *c, const int inv_table[4],
+ int srcRange, const int table[4], int dstRange,
+ int brightness, int contrast, int saturation);
+
+/**
+ * @return -1 if not supported
+ */
+int sws_getColorspaceDetails(struct SwsContext *c, int **inv_table,
+ int *srcRange, int **table, int *dstRange,
+ int *brightness, int *contrast, int *saturation);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return an uninitialized vector with length coefficients.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_allocVec(int length);
+
+/**
+ * Return a normalized Gaussian curve used to filter stuff
+ * quality = 3 is high quality, lower is lower quality.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_getGaussianVec(double variance, double quality);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return a vector with length coefficients, all
+ * with the same value c.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_getConstVec(double c, int length);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return a vector with just one coefficient, with
+ * value 1.0.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_getIdentityVec(void);
+
+/**
+ * Scale all the coefficients of a by the scalar value.
+ */
+void sws_scaleVec(SwsVector *a, double scalar);
+
+/**
+ * Scale all the coefficients of a so that their sum equals height.
+ */
+void sws_normalizeVec(SwsVector *a, double height);
+void sws_convVec(SwsVector *a, SwsVector *b);
+void sws_addVec(SwsVector *a, SwsVector *b);
+void sws_subVec(SwsVector *a, SwsVector *b);
+void sws_shiftVec(SwsVector *a, int shift);
+
+/**
+ * Allocate and return a clone of the vector a, that is a vector
+ * with the same coefficients as a.
+ */
+SwsVector *sws_cloneVec(SwsVector *a);
+
+/**
+ * Print with av_log() a textual representation of the vector a
+ * if log_level <= av_log_level.
+ */
+void sws_printVec2(SwsVector *a, AVClass *log_ctx, int log_level);
+
+void sws_freeVec(SwsVector *a);
+
+SwsFilter *sws_getDefaultFilter(float lumaGBlur, float chromaGBlur,
+ float lumaSharpen, float chromaSharpen,
+ float chromaHShift, float chromaVShift,
+ int verbose);
+void sws_freeFilter(SwsFilter *filter);
+
+/**
+ * Check if context can be reused, otherwise reallocate a new one.
+ *
+ * If context is NULL, just calls sws_getContext() to get a new
+ * context. Otherwise, checks if the parameters are the ones already
+ * saved in context. If that is the case, returns the current
+ * context. Otherwise, frees context and gets a new context with
+ * the new parameters.
+ *
+ * Be warned that srcFilter and dstFilter are not checked, they
+ * are assumed to remain the same.
+ */
+struct SwsContext *sws_getCachedContext(struct SwsContext *context,
+ int srcW, int srcH, enum AVPixelFormat srcFormat,
+ int dstW, int dstH, enum AVPixelFormat dstFormat,
+ int flags, SwsFilter *srcFilter,
+ SwsFilter *dstFilter, const double *param);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an 8-bit paletted frame into a frame with a color depth of 32 bits.
+ *
+ * The output frame will have the same packed format as the palette.
+ *
+ * @param src source frame buffer
+ * @param dst destination frame buffer
+ * @param num_pixels number of pixels to convert
+ * @param palette array with [256] entries, which must match color arrangement (RGB or BGR) of src
+ */
+void sws_convertPalette8ToPacked32(const uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dst, int num_pixels, const uint8_t *palette);
+
+/**
+ * Convert an 8-bit paletted frame into a frame with a color depth of 24 bits.
+ *
+ * With the palette format "ABCD", the destination frame ends up with the format "ABC".
+ *
+ * @param src source frame buffer
+ * @param dst destination frame buffer
+ * @param num_pixels number of pixels to convert
+ * @param palette array with [256] entries, which must match color arrangement (RGB or BGR) of src
+ */
+void sws_convertPalette8ToPacked24(const uint8_t *src, uint8_t *dst, int num_pixels, const uint8_t *palette);
+
+/**
+ * Get the AVClass for swsContext. It can be used in combination with
+ * AV_OPT_SEARCH_FAKE_OBJ for examining options.
+ *
+ * @see av_opt_find().
+ */
+const AVClass *sws_get_class(void);
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+#endif /* SWSCALE_SWSCALE_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/version.h b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/version.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..228c5770eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/include/libswscale/version.h
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/*
+ * This file is part of FFmpeg.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ * version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * FFmpeg is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ * Lesser General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ * License along with FFmpeg; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ */
+
+#ifndef SWSCALE_VERSION_H
+#define SWSCALE_VERSION_H
+
+/**
+ * @file
+ * swscale version macros
+ */
+
+#include "libavutil/version.h"
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR 3
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR 1
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO 101
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT AV_VERSION_INT(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWSCALE_VERSION AV_VERSION(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR, \
+ LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MINOR, \
+ LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MICRO)
+#define LIBSWSCALE_BUILD LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_INT
+
+#define LIBSWSCALE_IDENT "SwS" AV_STRINGIFY(LIBSWSCALE_VERSION)
+
+/**
+ * FF_API_* defines may be placed below to indicate public API that will be
+ * dropped at a future version bump. The defines themselves are not part of
+ * the public API and may change, break or disappear at any time.
+ */
+
+#ifndef FF_API_SWS_CPU_CAPS
+#define FF_API_SWS_CPU_CAPS (LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR < 4)
+#endif
+#ifndef FF_API_ARCH_BFIN
+#define FF_API_ARCH_BFIN (LIBSWSCALE_VERSION_MAJOR < 4)
+#endif
+
+#endif /* SWSCALE_VERSION_H */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec-56.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec-56.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..962bd0f5e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec-56.def
@@ -0,0 +1,219 @@
+EXPORTS
+ audio_resample
+ audio_resample_close
+ av_audio_convert
+ av_audio_convert_alloc
+ av_audio_convert_free
+ av_audio_resample_init
+ av_bitstream_filter_close
+ av_bitstream_filter_filter
+ av_bitstream_filter_init
+ av_bitstream_filter_next
+ av_codec_ffversion DATA
+ av_codec_get_chroma_intra_matrix
+ av_codec_get_codec_descriptor
+ av_codec_get_lowres
+ av_codec_get_max_lowres
+ av_codec_get_pkt_timebase
+ av_codec_get_seek_preroll
+ av_codec_is_decoder
+ av_codec_is_encoder
+ av_codec_next
+ av_codec_set_chroma_intra_matrix
+ av_codec_set_codec_descriptor
+ av_codec_set_lowres
+ av_codec_set_pkt_timebase
+ av_codec_set_seek_preroll
+ av_copy_packet
+ av_copy_packet_side_data
+ av_dct_calc
+ av_dct_end
+ av_dct_init
+ av_destruct_packet
+ av_dup_packet
+ av_dv_codec_profile
+ av_dv_codec_profile2
+ av_dv_frame_profile
+ av_fast_padded_malloc
+ av_fast_padded_mallocz
+ av_fft_calc
+ av_fft_end
+ av_fft_init
+ av_fft_permute
+ av_free_packet
+ av_get_audio_frame_duration
+ av_get_bits_per_sample
+ av_get_codec_tag_string
+ av_get_exact_bits_per_sample
+ av_get_pcm_codec
+ av_get_profile_name
+ av_grow_packet
+ av_hwaccel_next
+ av_imdct_calc
+ av_imdct_half
+ av_init_packet
+ av_lockmgr_register
+ av_log_ask_for_sample
+ av_log_missing_feature
+ av_mdct_calc
+ av_mdct_end
+ av_mdct_init
+ av_new_packet
+ av_packet_copy_props
+ av_packet_free_side_data
+ av_packet_from_data
+ av_packet_get_side_data
+ av_packet_merge_side_data
+ av_packet_move_ref
+ av_packet_new_side_data
+ av_packet_pack_dictionary
+ av_packet_ref
+ av_packet_rescale_ts
+ av_packet_shrink_side_data
+ av_packet_split_side_data
+ av_packet_unpack_dictionary
+ av_packet_unref
+ av_parser_change
+ av_parser_close
+ av_parser_init
+ av_parser_next
+ av_parser_parse2
+ av_picture_copy
+ av_picture_crop
+ av_picture_pad
+ av_rdft_calc
+ av_rdft_end
+ av_rdft_init
+ av_register_bitstream_filter
+ av_register_codec_parser
+ av_register_hwaccel
+ av_resample
+ av_resample_close
+ av_resample_compensate
+ av_resample_init
+ av_shrink_packet
+ av_vorbis_parse_frame
+ av_vorbis_parse_frame_flags
+ av_vorbis_parse_free
+ av_vorbis_parse_init
+ av_vorbis_parse_reset
+ av_xiphlacing
+ available_bits
+ avcodec_align_dimensions
+ avcodec_align_dimensions2
+ avcodec_alloc_context3
+ avcodec_alloc_frame
+ avcodec_chroma_pos_to_enum
+ avcodec_close
+ avcodec_configuration
+ avcodec_copy_context
+ avcodec_dct_alloc
+ avcodec_dct_get_class
+ avcodec_dct_init
+ avcodec_decode_audio3
+ avcodec_decode_audio4
+ avcodec_decode_subtitle2
+ avcodec_decode_video2
+ avcodec_default_execute
+ avcodec_default_execute2
+ avcodec_default_get_buffer
+ avcodec_default_get_buffer2
+ avcodec_default_get_format
+ avcodec_default_reget_buffer
+ avcodec_default_release_buffer
+ avcodec_descriptor_get
+ avcodec_descriptor_get_by_name
+ avcodec_descriptor_next
+ avcodec_encode_audio
+ avcodec_encode_audio2
+ avcodec_encode_subtitle
+ avcodec_encode_video
+ avcodec_encode_video2
+ avcodec_enum_to_chroma_pos
+ avcodec_fill_audio_frame
+ avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt2
+ avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2
+ avcodec_find_best_pix_fmt_of_list
+ avcodec_find_decoder
+ avcodec_find_decoder_by_name
+ avcodec_find_encoder
+ avcodec_find_encoder_by_name
+ avcodec_flush_buffers
+ avcodec_free_context
+ avcodec_free_frame
+ avcodec_get_chroma_sub_sample
+ avcodec_get_class
+ avcodec_get_context_defaults3
+ avcodec_get_edge_width
+ avcodec_get_frame_class
+ avcodec_get_frame_defaults
+ avcodec_get_name
+ avcodec_get_pix_fmt_loss
+ avcodec_get_subtitle_rect_class
+ avcodec_get_type
+ avcodec_is_open
+ avcodec_license
+ avcodec_open2
+ avcodec_pix_fmt_to_codec_tag
+ avcodec_register
+ avcodec_register_all
+ avcodec_set_dimensions
+ avcodec_string
+ avcodec_version
+ aver_isf_history
+ avpicture_alloc
+ avpicture_deinterlace
+ avpicture_fill
+ avpicture_free
+ avpicture_get_size
+ avpicture_layout
+ avpriv_aac_parse_header
+ avpriv_ac3_channel_layout_tab DATA
+ avpriv_ac3_parse_header
+ avpriv_ac3_parse_header2
+ avpriv_align_put_bits
+ avpriv_bprint_to_extradata
+ avpriv_color_frame
+ avpriv_copy_bits
+ avpriv_copy_pce_data
+ avpriv_dca_convert_bitstream
+ avpriv_dca_sample_rates DATA
+ avpriv_dirac_parse_sequence_header
+ avpriv_dnxhd_get_frame_size
+ avpriv_do_elbg
+ avpriv_dv_frame_profile2
+ avpriv_exif_decode_ifd
+ avpriv_find_pix_fmt
+ avpriv_find_start_code
+ avpriv_flac_is_extradata_valid
+ avpriv_flac_parse_streaminfo
+ avpriv_get_raw_pix_fmt_tags
+ avpriv_h264_has_num_reorder_frames
+ avpriv_init_elbg
+ avpriv_lock_avformat
+ avpriv_mjpeg_bits_ac_chrominance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_bits_ac_luminance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_bits_dc_chrominance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_bits_dc_luminance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_val_ac_chrominance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_val_ac_luminance DATA
+ avpriv_mjpeg_val_dc DATA
+ avpriv_mpa_bitrate_tab DATA
+ avpriv_mpa_decode_header
+ avpriv_mpa_decode_header2
+ avpriv_mpa_freq_tab DATA
+ avpriv_mpeg4audio_get_config
+ avpriv_mpeg4audio_sample_rates DATA
+ avpriv_mpegaudio_decode_header
+ avpriv_pix_fmt_bps_avi DATA
+ avpriv_pix_fmt_bps_mov DATA
+ avpriv_put_string
+ avpriv_split_xiph_headers
+ avpriv_tak_parse_streaminfo
+ avpriv_toupper4
+ avpriv_unlock_avformat
+ avpriv_vorbis_parse_extradata
+ avpriv_vorbis_parse_frame
+ avpriv_vorbis_parse_frame_flags
+ avpriv_vorbis_parse_reset
+ avsubtitle_free
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..563ea96305
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avcodec.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice-56.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice-56.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f453187e60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice-56.def
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+EXPORTS
+ av_device_capabilities DATA
+ av_device_ffversion DATA
+ av_input_audio_device_next
+ av_input_video_device_next
+ av_output_audio_device_next
+ av_output_video_device_next
+ avdevice_app_to_dev_control_message
+ avdevice_capabilities_create
+ avdevice_capabilities_free
+ avdevice_configuration
+ avdevice_dev_to_app_control_message
+ avdevice_free_list_devices
+ avdevice_license
+ avdevice_list_devices
+ avdevice_list_input_sources
+ avdevice_list_output_sinks
+ avdevice_register_all
+ avdevice_version
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..600f7b636c
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avdevice.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter-5.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter-5.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7268f51bbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter-5.def
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+EXPORTS
+ av_abuffersink_params_alloc
+ av_buffersink_get_buffer_ref
+ av_buffersink_get_frame
+ av_buffersink_get_frame_flags
+ av_buffersink_get_frame_rate
+ av_buffersink_get_samples
+ av_buffersink_params_alloc
+ av_buffersink_poll_frame
+ av_buffersink_read
+ av_buffersink_read_samples
+ av_buffersink_set_frame_size
+ av_buffersrc_add_frame
+ av_buffersrc_add_frame_flags
+ av_buffersrc_add_ref
+ av_buffersrc_buffer
+ av_buffersrc_get_nb_failed_requests
+ av_buffersrc_write_frame
+ av_filter_ffversion DATA
+ av_filter_next
+ avfilter_add_matrix
+ avfilter_all_channel_layouts DATA
+ avfilter_config_links
+ avfilter_configuration
+ avfilter_copy_buf_props
+ avfilter_copy_buffer_ref_props
+ avfilter_copy_frame_props
+ avfilter_free
+ avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_arrays
+ avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_arrays_channels
+ avfilter_get_audio_buffer_ref_from_frame
+ avfilter_get_buffer_ref_from_frame
+ avfilter_get_by_name
+ avfilter_get_class
+ avfilter_get_matrix
+ avfilter_get_video_buffer_ref_from_arrays
+ avfilter_get_video_buffer_ref_from_frame
+ avfilter_graph_add_filter
+ avfilter_graph_alloc
+ avfilter_graph_alloc_filter
+ avfilter_graph_config
+ avfilter_graph_create_filter
+ avfilter_graph_dump
+ avfilter_graph_free
+ avfilter_graph_get_filter
+ avfilter_graph_parse
+ avfilter_graph_parse2
+ avfilter_graph_parse_ptr
+ avfilter_graph_queue_command
+ avfilter_graph_request_oldest
+ avfilter_graph_send_command
+ avfilter_graph_set_auto_convert
+ avfilter_init_dict
+ avfilter_init_filter
+ avfilter_init_str
+ avfilter_inout_alloc
+ avfilter_inout_free
+ avfilter_insert_filter
+ avfilter_license
+ avfilter_link
+ avfilter_link_free
+ avfilter_link_get_channels
+ avfilter_link_set_closed
+ avfilter_make_format64_list
+ avfilter_mul_matrix
+ avfilter_next
+ avfilter_open
+ avfilter_pad_count
+ avfilter_pad_get_name
+ avfilter_pad_get_type
+ avfilter_process_command
+ avfilter_ref_buffer
+ avfilter_ref_get_channels
+ avfilter_register
+ avfilter_register_all
+ avfilter_sub_matrix
+ avfilter_transform
+ avfilter_uninit
+ avfilter_unref_buffer
+ avfilter_unref_bufferp
+ avfilter_version
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..46b6cd509d
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avfilter.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat-56.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat-56.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dfce181ede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat-56.def
@@ -0,0 +1,161 @@
+EXPORTS
+ av_add_index_entry
+ av_append_packet
+ av_codec_get_id
+ av_codec_get_tag
+ av_codec_get_tag2
+ av_convert_lang_to
+ av_demuxer_open
+ av_dump_format
+ av_filename_number_test
+ av_find_best_stream
+ av_find_default_stream_index
+ av_find_input_format
+ av_find_program_from_stream
+ av_fmt_ctx_get_duration_estimation_method
+ av_format_ffversion DATA
+ av_format_get_audio_codec
+ av_format_get_control_message_cb
+ av_format_get_metadata_header_padding
+ av_format_get_opaque
+ av_format_get_probe_score
+ av_format_get_subtitle_codec
+ av_format_get_video_codec
+ av_format_inject_global_side_data
+ av_format_set_audio_codec
+ av_format_set_control_message_cb
+ av_format_set_metadata_header_padding
+ av_format_set_opaque
+ av_format_set_subtitle_codec
+ av_format_set_video_codec
+ av_get_frame_filename
+ av_get_output_timestamp
+ av_get_packet
+ av_guess_codec
+ av_guess_format
+ av_guess_frame_rate
+ av_guess_sample_aspect_ratio
+ av_hex_dump
+ av_hex_dump_log
+ av_iformat_next
+ av_index_search_timestamp
+ av_interleaved_write_frame
+ av_interleaved_write_uncoded_frame
+ av_match_ext
+ av_new_program
+ av_oformat_next
+ av_pkt_dump2
+ av_pkt_dump_log2
+ av_probe_input_buffer
+ av_probe_input_buffer2
+ av_probe_input_format
+ av_probe_input_format2
+ av_probe_input_format3
+ av_read_frame
+ av_read_pause
+ av_read_play
+ av_register_all
+ av_register_input_format
+ av_register_output_format
+ av_sdp_create
+ av_seek_frame
+ av_stream_get_end_pts
+ av_stream_get_parser
+ av_stream_get_r_frame_rate
+ av_stream_get_recommended_encoder_configuration
+ av_stream_get_side_data
+ av_stream_set_r_frame_rate
+ av_stream_set_recommended_encoder_configuration
+ av_url_split
+ av_write_frame
+ av_write_trailer
+ av_write_uncoded_frame
+ av_write_uncoded_frame_query
+ avformat_alloc_context
+ avformat_alloc_output_context2
+ avformat_close_input
+ avformat_configuration
+ avformat_find_stream_info
+ avformat_free_context
+ avformat_get_class
+ avformat_get_mov_audio_tags
+ avformat_get_mov_video_tags
+ avformat_get_riff_audio_tags
+ avformat_get_riff_video_tags
+ avformat_license
+ avformat_match_stream_specifier
+ avformat_network_deinit
+ avformat_network_init
+ avformat_new_stream
+ avformat_open_input
+ avformat_query_codec
+ avformat_queue_attached_pictures
+ avformat_seek_file
+ avformat_version
+ avformat_write_header
+ avio_alloc_context
+ avio_check
+ avio_close
+ avio_close_dyn_buf
+ avio_closep
+ avio_enum_protocols
+ avio_feof
+ avio_find_protocol_name
+ avio_flush
+ avio_get_str
+ avio_get_str16be
+ avio_get_str16le
+ avio_open
+ avio_open2
+ avio_open_dyn_buf
+ avio_pause
+ avio_printf
+ avio_put_str
+ avio_put_str16le
+ avio_r8
+ avio_rb16
+ avio_rb24
+ avio_rb32
+ avio_rb64
+ avio_read
+ avio_read_to_bprint
+ avio_rl16
+ avio_rl24
+ avio_rl32
+ avio_rl64
+ avio_seek
+ avio_seek_time
+ avio_size
+ avio_skip
+ avio_w8
+ avio_wb16
+ avio_wb24
+ avio_wb32
+ avio_wb64
+ avio_wl16
+ avio_wl24
+ avio_wl32
+ avio_wl64
+ avio_write
+ avpriv_dv_get_packet
+ avpriv_dv_init_demux
+ avpriv_dv_produce_packet
+ avpriv_mpegts_parse_close
+ avpriv_mpegts_parse_open
+ avpriv_mpegts_parse_packet
+ avpriv_new_chapter
+ avpriv_set_pts_info
+ ff_inet_aton
+ ff_rtp_get_local_rtcp_port
+ ff_rtp_get_local_rtp_port
+ ff_rtsp_parse_line
+ ff_socket_nonblock
+ ffio_open_dyn_packet_buf
+ ffio_set_buf_size
+ ffurl_close
+ ffurl_open
+ ffurl_read_complete
+ ffurl_seek
+ ffurl_size
+ ffurl_write
+ url_feof
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a29a9cbd1a
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avformat.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil-54.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil-54.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e02e465fe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil-54.def
@@ -0,0 +1,441 @@
+EXPORTS
+ av_add_q
+ av_add_stable
+ av_adler32_update
+ av_aes_alloc
+ av_aes_crypt
+ av_aes_init
+ av_aes_size DATA
+ av_asprintf
+ av_audio_fifo_alloc
+ av_audio_fifo_drain
+ av_audio_fifo_free
+ av_audio_fifo_read
+ av_audio_fifo_realloc
+ av_audio_fifo_reset
+ av_audio_fifo_size
+ av_audio_fifo_space
+ av_audio_fifo_write
+ av_base64_decode
+ av_base64_encode
+ av_basename
+ av_blowfish_crypt
+ av_blowfish_crypt_ecb
+ av_blowfish_init
+ av_bmg_get
+ av_bprint_append_data
+ av_bprint_channel_layout
+ av_bprint_chars
+ av_bprint_clear
+ av_bprint_escape
+ av_bprint_finalize
+ av_bprint_get_buffer
+ av_bprint_init
+ av_bprint_init_for_buffer
+ av_bprint_strftime
+ av_bprintf
+ av_buffer_alloc
+ av_buffer_allocz
+ av_buffer_create
+ av_buffer_default_free
+ av_buffer_get_opaque
+ av_buffer_get_ref_count
+ av_buffer_is_writable
+ av_buffer_make_writable
+ av_buffer_pool_get
+ av_buffer_pool_init
+ av_buffer_pool_uninit
+ av_buffer_realloc
+ av_buffer_ref
+ av_buffer_unref
+ av_calloc
+ av_camellia_alloc
+ av_camellia_crypt
+ av_camellia_init
+ av_camellia_size DATA
+ av_cast5_alloc
+ av_cast5_crypt
+ av_cast5_crypt2
+ av_cast5_init
+ av_cast5_size DATA
+ av_channel_layout_extract_channel
+ av_chroma_location_name
+ av_color_primaries_name
+ av_color_range_name
+ av_color_space_name
+ av_color_transfer_name
+ av_compare_mod
+ av_compare_ts
+ av_cpu_count
+ av_crc
+ av_crc_get_table
+ av_crc_init
+ av_ctz
+ av_d2q
+ av_d2str
+ av_default_get_category
+ av_default_item_name
+ av_des_crypt
+ av_des_init
+ av_des_mac
+ av_dict_copy
+ av_dict_count
+ av_dict_free
+ av_dict_get
+ av_dict_get_string
+ av_dict_parse_string
+ av_dict_set
+ av_dict_set_int
+ av_dirname
+ av_display_matrix_flip
+ av_display_rotation_get
+ av_display_rotation_set
+ av_div_q
+ av_downmix_info_update_side_data
+ av_dynarray2_add
+ av_dynarray_add
+ av_dynarray_add_nofree
+ av_escape
+ av_expr_eval
+ av_expr_free
+ av_expr_parse
+ av_expr_parse_and_eval
+ av_fast_malloc
+ av_fast_realloc
+ av_fifo_alloc
+ av_fifo_alloc_array
+ av_fifo_drain
+ av_fifo_free
+ av_fifo_freep
+ av_fifo_generic_read
+ av_fifo_generic_write
+ av_fifo_grow
+ av_fifo_realloc2
+ av_fifo_reset
+ av_fifo_size
+ av_fifo_space
+ av_file_map
+ av_file_unmap
+ av_find_best_pix_fmt_of_2
+ av_find_info_tag
+ av_find_nearest_q_idx
+ av_fopen_utf8
+ av_force_cpu_flags
+ av_frame_alloc
+ av_frame_clone
+ av_frame_copy
+ av_frame_copy_props
+ av_frame_free
+ av_frame_get_best_effort_timestamp
+ av_frame_get_buffer
+ av_frame_get_channel_layout
+ av_frame_get_channels
+ av_frame_get_color_range
+ av_frame_get_colorspace
+ av_frame_get_decode_error_flags
+ av_frame_get_metadata
+ av_frame_get_pkt_duration
+ av_frame_get_pkt_pos
+ av_frame_get_pkt_size
+ av_frame_get_plane_buffer
+ av_frame_get_qp_table
+ av_frame_get_sample_rate
+ av_frame_get_side_data
+ av_frame_is_writable
+ av_frame_make_writable
+ av_frame_move_ref
+ av_frame_new_side_data
+ av_frame_ref
+ av_frame_remove_side_data
+ av_frame_set_best_effort_timestamp
+ av_frame_set_channel_layout
+ av_frame_set_channels
+ av_frame_set_color_range
+ av_frame_set_colorspace
+ av_frame_set_decode_error_flags
+ av_frame_set_metadata
+ av_frame_set_pkt_duration
+ av_frame_set_pkt_pos
+ av_frame_set_pkt_size
+ av_frame_set_qp_table
+ av_frame_set_sample_rate
+ av_frame_side_data_name
+ av_frame_unref
+ av_free
+ av_freep
+ av_gcd
+ av_get_alt_sample_fmt
+ av_get_bits_per_pixel
+ av_get_bytes_per_sample
+ av_get_channel_description
+ av_get_channel_layout
+ av_get_channel_layout_channel_index
+ av_get_channel_layout_nb_channels
+ av_get_channel_layout_string
+ av_get_channel_name
+ av_get_colorspace_name
+ av_get_cpu_flags
+ av_get_default_channel_layout
+ av_get_double
+ av_get_int
+ av_get_known_color_name
+ av_get_media_type_string
+ av_get_packed_sample_fmt
+ av_get_padded_bits_per_pixel
+ av_get_picture_type_char
+ av_get_pix_fmt
+ av_get_pix_fmt_loss
+ av_get_pix_fmt_name
+ av_get_pix_fmt_string
+ av_get_planar_sample_fmt
+ av_get_q
+ av_get_random_seed
+ av_get_sample_fmt
+ av_get_sample_fmt_name
+ av_get_sample_fmt_string
+ av_get_standard_channel_layout
+ av_get_string
+ av_get_time_base_q
+ av_get_token
+ av_gettime
+ av_gettime_relative
+ av_gettime_relative_is_monotonic
+ av_hash_alloc
+ av_hash_final
+ av_hash_final_b64
+ av_hash_final_bin
+ av_hash_final_hex
+ av_hash_freep
+ av_hash_get_name
+ av_hash_get_size
+ av_hash_init
+ av_hash_names
+ av_hash_update
+ av_hmac_alloc
+ av_hmac_calc
+ av_hmac_final
+ av_hmac_free
+ av_hmac_init
+ av_hmac_update
+ av_image_alloc
+ av_image_check_sar
+ av_image_check_size
+ av_image_copy
+ av_image_copy_plane
+ av_image_copy_to_buffer
+ av_image_fill_arrays
+ av_image_fill_linesizes
+ av_image_fill_max_pixsteps
+ av_image_fill_pointers
+ av_image_get_buffer_size
+ av_image_get_linesize
+ av_int_list_length_for_size
+ av_isdigit
+ av_isgraph
+ av_isspace
+ av_isxdigit
+ av_lfg_init
+ av_log
+ av_log2
+ av_log2_16bit
+ av_log_default_callback
+ av_log_format_line
+ av_log_get_flags
+ av_log_get_level
+ av_log_set_callback
+ av_log_set_flags
+ av_log_set_level
+ av_lzo1x_decode
+ av_malloc
+ av_mallocz
+ av_match_list
+ av_match_name
+ av_max_alloc
+ av_md5_alloc
+ av_md5_final
+ av_md5_init
+ av_md5_size DATA
+ av_md5_sum
+ av_md5_update
+ av_memcpy_backptr
+ av_memdup
+ av_mul_q
+ av_murmur3_alloc
+ av_murmur3_final
+ av_murmur3_init
+ av_murmur3_init_seeded
+ av_murmur3_update
+ av_nearer_q
+ av_next_option
+ av_opt_child_class_next
+ av_opt_child_next
+ av_opt_copy
+ av_opt_eval_double
+ av_opt_eval_flags
+ av_opt_eval_float
+ av_opt_eval_int
+ av_opt_eval_int64
+ av_opt_eval_q
+ av_opt_find
+ av_opt_find2
+ av_opt_flag_is_set
+ av_opt_free
+ av_opt_freep_ranges
+ av_opt_get
+ av_opt_get_channel_layout
+ av_opt_get_dict_val
+ av_opt_get_double
+ av_opt_get_image_size
+ av_opt_get_int
+ av_opt_get_key_value
+ av_opt_get_pixel_fmt
+ av_opt_get_q
+ av_opt_get_sample_fmt
+ av_opt_get_video_rate
+ av_opt_is_set_to_default
+ av_opt_is_set_to_default_by_name
+ av_opt_next
+ av_opt_ptr
+ av_opt_query_ranges
+ av_opt_query_ranges_default
+ av_opt_serialize
+ av_opt_set
+ av_opt_set_bin
+ av_opt_set_channel_layout
+ av_opt_set_defaults
+ av_opt_set_defaults2
+ av_opt_set_dict
+ av_opt_set_dict2
+ av_opt_set_dict_val
+ av_opt_set_double
+ av_opt_set_from_string
+ av_opt_set_image_size
+ av_opt_set_int
+ av_opt_set_pixel_fmt
+ av_opt_set_q
+ av_opt_set_sample_fmt
+ av_opt_set_video_rate
+ av_opt_show2
+ av_parse_color
+ av_parse_cpu_caps
+ av_parse_cpu_flags
+ av_parse_ratio
+ av_parse_time
+ av_parse_video_rate
+ av_parse_video_size
+ av_pix_fmt_count_planes
+ av_pix_fmt_desc_get
+ av_pix_fmt_desc_get_id
+ av_pix_fmt_desc_next
+ av_pix_fmt_descriptors DATA
+ av_pix_fmt_get_chroma_sub_sample
+ av_pix_fmt_swap_endianness
+ av_pixelutils_get_sad_fn
+ av_rc4_crypt
+ av_rc4_init
+ av_read_image_line
+ av_realloc
+ av_realloc_array
+ av_realloc_f
+ av_reallocp
+ av_reallocp_array
+ av_reduce
+ av_rescale
+ av_rescale_delta
+ av_rescale_q
+ av_rescale_q_rnd
+ av_rescale_rnd
+ av_reverse DATA
+ av_ripemd_alloc
+ av_ripemd_final
+ av_ripemd_init
+ av_ripemd_size DATA
+ av_ripemd_update
+ av_sample_fmt_is_planar
+ av_samples_alloc
+ av_samples_alloc_array_and_samples
+ av_samples_copy
+ av_samples_fill_arrays
+ av_samples_get_buffer_size
+ av_samples_set_silence
+ av_set_cpu_flags_mask
+ av_set_double
+ av_set_int
+ av_set_options_string
+ av_set_q
+ av_set_string3
+ av_sha512_alloc
+ av_sha512_final
+ av_sha512_init
+ av_sha512_size DATA
+ av_sha512_update
+ av_sha_alloc
+ av_sha_final
+ av_sha_init
+ av_sha_size DATA
+ av_sha_update
+ av_small_strptime
+ av_stereo3d_alloc
+ av_stereo3d_create_side_data
+ av_strcasecmp
+ av_strdup
+ av_strerror
+ av_stristart
+ av_stristr
+ av_strlcat
+ av_strlcatf
+ av_strlcpy
+ av_strncasecmp
+ av_strndup
+ av_strnstr
+ av_strstart
+ av_strtod
+ av_strtok
+ av_sub_q
+ av_tempfile
+ av_thread_message_queue_alloc
+ av_thread_message_queue_free
+ av_thread_message_queue_recv
+ av_thread_message_queue_send
+ av_thread_message_queue_set_err_recv
+ av_thread_message_queue_set_err_send
+ av_timecode_adjust_ntsc_framenum2
+ av_timecode_check_frame_rate
+ av_timecode_get_smpte_from_framenum
+ av_timecode_init
+ av_timecode_init_from_string
+ av_timecode_make_mpeg_tc_string
+ av_timecode_make_smpte_tc_string
+ av_timecode_make_string
+ av_timegm
+ av_tree_destroy
+ av_tree_enumerate
+ av_tree_find
+ av_tree_insert
+ av_tree_node_alloc
+ av_tree_node_size DATA
+ av_usleep
+ av_utf8_decode
+ av_util_ffversion DATA
+ av_vbprintf
+ av_vlog
+ av_write_image_line
+ av_xtea_crypt
+ av_xtea_init
+ avpriv_alloc_fixed_dsp
+ avpriv_cga_font DATA
+ avpriv_emms_yasm DATA
+ avpriv_float_dsp_alloc
+ avpriv_float_dsp_init
+ avpriv_frame_get_metadatap
+ avpriv_init_lls
+ avpriv_open
+ avpriv_report_missing_feature
+ avpriv_request_sample
+ avpriv_scalarproduct_float_c
+ avpriv_set_systematic_pal2
+ avpriv_solve_lls
+ avpriv_vga16_font DATA
+ avutil_configuration
+ avutil_license
+ avutil_version
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a009c124c4
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/avutil.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavcodec.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavcodec.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4eaadfc46f
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavcodec.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavdevice.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavdevice.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5a8f4bd651
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavdevice.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavfilter.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavfilter.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cf8577a906
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavfilter.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavformat.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavformat.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..720c267654
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavformat.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavutil.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavutil.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0220047180
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libavutil.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libpostproc.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libpostproc.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c7b8ba266a
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libpostproc.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswresample.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswresample.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..999ec7f7ae
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswresample.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswscale.dll.a b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswscale.dll.a
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1dafa6ed2e
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/libswscale.dll.a differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc-53.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc-53.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..62c4c69d7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc-53.def
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+EXPORTS
+ postproc_configuration
+ postproc_ffversion DATA
+ postproc_license
+ postproc_version
+ pp_free_context
+ pp_free_mode
+ pp_get_context
+ pp_get_mode_by_name_and_quality
+ pp_help DATA
+ pp_postprocess
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1425faa559
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/postproc.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample-1.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample-1.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a4aedce94a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample-1.def
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+EXPORTS
+ swr_alloc
+ swr_alloc_set_opts
+ swr_close
+ swr_config_frame
+ swr_convert
+ swr_convert_frame
+ swr_drop_output
+ swr_ffversion DATA
+ swr_free
+ swr_get_class
+ swr_get_delay
+ swr_init
+ swr_inject_silence
+ swr_is_initialized
+ swr_next_pts
+ swr_set_channel_mapping
+ swr_set_compensation
+ swr_set_matrix
+ swresample_configuration
+ swresample_license
+ swresample_version
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eedf4a8c75
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swresample.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale-3.def b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale-3.def
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d6330d95f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale-3.def
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+EXPORTS
+ sws_addVec
+ sws_allocVec
+ sws_alloc_context
+ sws_cloneVec
+ sws_context_class DATA
+ sws_convVec
+ sws_convertPalette8ToPacked24
+ sws_convertPalette8ToPacked32
+ sws_freeContext
+ sws_freeFilter
+ sws_freeVec
+ sws_getCachedContext
+ sws_getCoefficients
+ sws_getColorspaceDetails
+ sws_getConstVec
+ sws_getContext
+ sws_getDefaultFilter
+ sws_getGaussianVec
+ sws_getIdentityVec
+ sws_get_class
+ sws_init_context
+ sws_isSupportedEndiannessConversion
+ sws_isSupportedInput
+ sws_isSupportedOutput
+ sws_normalizeVec
+ sws_printVec2
+ sws_rgb2rgb_init
+ sws_scale
+ sws_scaleVec
+ sws_setColorspaceDetails
+ sws_shiftVec
+ sws_subVec
+ swscale_configuration
+ swscale_license
+ swscale_version
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale.lib b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale.lib
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9138a602d6
Binary files /dev/null and b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/lib/swscale.lib differ
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/bzip2.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/bzip2.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cc614178cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/bzip2.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+This program, "bzip2", the associated library "libbzip2", and all
+documentation, are copyright (C) 1996-2010 Julian R Seward. All
+rights reserved.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
+1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must
+ not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this
+ software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
+ documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
+
+3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must
+ not be misrepresented as being the original software.
+
+4. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ products derived from this software without specific prior written
+ permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+Julian Seward, jseward@bzip.org
+bzip2/libbzip2 version 1.0.6 of 6 September 2010
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/fontconfig.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/fontconfig.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a5d777ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/fontconfig.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+fontconfig/COPYING
+
+Copyright © 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007 Keith Packard
+Copyright © 2005 Patrick Lam
+Copyright © 2009 Roozbeh Pournader
+Copyright © 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc.
+Copyright © 2008 Danilo Šegan
+
+
+Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
+documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
+the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting
+documentation, and that the name of the author(s) not be used in
+advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without
+specific, written prior permission. The authors make no
+representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It
+is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
+
+THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
+INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
+EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
+DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
+TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
+PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/freetype.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/freetype.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bbaba33f47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/freetype.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+ The FreeType Project LICENSE
+ ----------------------------
+
+ 2006-Jan-27
+
+ Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
+ David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
+
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+ The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;
+ some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,
+ various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
+ FreeType Project.
+
+ This license applies to all files found in such packages, and
+ which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license
+ affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs,
+ documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
+
+ This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
+ (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion
+ and use of free software in commercial and freeware products
+ alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
+
+ o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be
+ interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
+
+ o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or
+ full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)
+
+ o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use
+ it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge
+ somewhere in your documentation that you have used the
+ FreeType code. (`credits')
+
+ We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this
+ software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.
+ We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and
+ assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
+
+
+ Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a
+ credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus
+ encourage you to use the following text:
+
+ """
+ Portions of this software are copyright © The FreeType
+ Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
+ """
+
+ Please replace with the value from the FreeType version you
+ actually use.
+
+
+Legal Terms
+===========
+
+0. Definitions
+--------------
+
+ Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project',
+ and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally
+ distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
+ Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha,
+ beta or final release.
+
+ `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where
+ `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source
+ code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.
+ This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType
+ engine'.
+
+ This license applies to all files distributed in the original
+ FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and
+ documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its
+ original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.
+ If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by
+ this license, you must contact us to verify this.
+
+ The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
+ Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
+ specified below.
+
+1. No Warranty
+--------------
+
+ THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+ KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+ WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+ PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
+ BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
+ USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
+
+2. Redistribution
+-----------------
+
+ This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and
+ irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,
+ display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and
+ sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code
+ forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to
+ authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted
+ herein, subject to the following conditions:
+
+ o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file
+ (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to
+ the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
+ documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered,
+ original files must be preserved in all copies of source
+ files.
+
+ o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that
+ states that the software is based in part of the work of the
+ FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also
+ encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your
+ documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
+
+ These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on
+ the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use
+ our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid
+ to us.
+
+3. Advertising
+--------------
+
+ Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use
+ the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional
+ purposes without specific prior written permission.
+
+ We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the
+ following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation
+ or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
+ `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
+
+ As you have not signed this license, you are not required to
+ accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted
+ material, only this license, or another one contracted with the
+ authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
+ Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
+ Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms
+ of this license.
+
+4. Contacts
+-----------
+
+ There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
+
+ o freetype@nongnu.org
+
+ Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as
+ future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.
+ If you are looking for support, start in this list if you
+ haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
+
+ o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
+
+ Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,
+ specific licenses, porting, etc.
+
+ Our home page can be found at
+
+ http://www.freetype.org
+
+
+--- end of FTL.TXT ---
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/frei0r.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/frei0r.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..623b6258a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/frei0r.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gme.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ab7695ab8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,504 @@
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2.1, February 1999
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
+ as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
+ the version number 2.1.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the
+Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You
+can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether
+this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better
+strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,
+not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
+you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
+for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
+it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
+it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do
+these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
+rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
+you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
+with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
+library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
+there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
+modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
+that what they have is not the original version, so that the original
+author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
+introduced by others.
+
+ Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of
+any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
+effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
+restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that
+any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
+consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
+ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and
+is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
+this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
+libraries into non-free programs.
+
+ When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using
+a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
+combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
+General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
+entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
+Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with
+the library.
+
+ We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it
+does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General
+Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
+of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages
+are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
+libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
+special circumstances.
+
+ For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
+encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes
+a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
+allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
+library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
+case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
+software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
+
+ In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
+programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
+free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
+non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
+operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
+system.
+
+ Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
+users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is
+linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run
+that program using a modified version of the Library.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
+be combined with the library in order to run.
+
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
+program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
+other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
+this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
+Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+ Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
+ copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
+ rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2)
+ will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if
+ the user installs one, as long as the modified version is
+ interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
+
+ c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
+normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with
+this License.
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ Lesser General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+ library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1990
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+That's all there is to it!
+
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gnutls.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gnutls.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..94a9ed024d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/gnutls.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program. If not, see Copyright (C)
+ This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+ You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/lame.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/lame.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f5030495bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/lame.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,481 @@
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+ The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+ Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+ However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+ Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
+addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ Library General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+ library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1990
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+That's all there is to it!
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libass.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libass.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8351a30e3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libass.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any
+purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
+copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
+WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
+ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
+WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
+ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
+OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbluray.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbluray.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..20fb9c7da2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbluray.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,458 @@
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2.1, February 1999
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
+ as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
+ the version number 2.1.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the
+Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You
+can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether
+this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better
+strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,
+not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
+you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
+for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
+it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
+it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do
+these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
+rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
+you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
+with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
+library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
+there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
+modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
+that what they have is not the original version, so that the original
+author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
+introduced by others.
+
+ Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of
+any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
+effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
+restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that
+any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
+consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
+ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and
+is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
+this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
+libraries into non-free programs.
+
+ When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using
+a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
+combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
+General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
+entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
+Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with
+the library.
+
+ We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it
+does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General
+Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
+of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages
+are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
+libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
+special circumstances.
+
+ For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
+encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes
+a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
+allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
+library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
+case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
+software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
+
+ In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
+programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
+free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
+non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
+operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
+system.
+
+ Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
+users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is
+linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run
+that program using a modified version of the Library.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
+be combined with the library in order to run.
+
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
+program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
+other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
+this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
+Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+ Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
+ copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
+ rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2)
+ will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if
+ the user installs one, as long as the modified version is
+ interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
+
+ c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
+normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with
+this License.
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbs2b.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbs2b.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cbf26a0226
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libbs2b.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+Copyright (c) 2005 Boris Mikhaylov
+
+Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
+a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
+"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
+without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
+distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
+permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
+the following conditions:
+
+The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
+included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+
+THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
+EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
+IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
+TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
+SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libcaca.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libcaca.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2978491d0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libcaca.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+ DO WHAT THE FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, December 2004
+
+ Copyright (C) 2004 Sam Hocevar
+ 14 rue de Plaisance, 75014 Paris, France
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim or modified
+ copies of this license document, and changing it is allowed as long
+ as the name is changed.
+
+ DO WHAT THE FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. You just DO WHAT THE FUCK YOU WANT TO.
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libgsm.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libgsm.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..28fbb3ce15
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libgsm.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Copyright 1992, 1993, 1994 by Jutta Degener and Carsten Bormann,
+Technische Universitaet Berlin
+
+Any use of this software is permitted provided that this notice is not
+removed and that neither the authors nor the Technische Universitaet Berlin
+are deemed to have made any representations as to the suitability of this
+software for any purpose nor are held responsible for any defects of
+this software. THERE IS ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY FOR THIS SOFTWARE.
+
+As a matter of courtesy, the authors request to be informed about uses
+this software has found, about bugs in this software, and about any
+improvements that may be of general interest.
+
+Berlin, 28.11.1994
+Jutta Degener
+Carsten Bormann
+
+ oOo
+
+Since the original terms of 15 years ago maybe do not make our
+intentions completely clear given today's refined usage of the legal
+terms, we append this additional permission:
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted,
+ provided that this notice is not removed and that neither
+ the authors nor the Technische Universitaet Berlin are
+ deemed to have made any representations as to the suitability
+ of this software for any purpose nor are held responsible
+ for any defects of this software. THERE IS ABSOLUTELY NO
+ WARRANTY FOR THIS SOFTWARE.
+
+Berkeley/Bremen, 05.04.2009
+Jutta Degener
+Carsten Bormann
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libiconv.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libiconv.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..94a9ed024d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libiconv.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program. If not, see Copyright (C)
+ This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+ You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libilbc.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libilbc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c41b7b251
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libilbc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All rights reserved.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
+met:
+
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+ * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
+ the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
+ distribution.
+
+ * Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may
+ be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libmodplug.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libmodplug.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..59fbf826c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libmodplug.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+ModPlug-XMMS and libmodplug are now in the public domain.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libtheora.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libtheora.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c8ccce4ffb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libtheora.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Copyright (C) 2002-2009 Xiph.org Foundation
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
+- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
+- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
+contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
+this software without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION
+OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvorbis.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvorbis.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..28de72a970
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvorbis.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+Copyright (c) 2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
+- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
+- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
+contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
+this software without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION
+OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvpx.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvpx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1ce44343c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libvpx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All rights reserved.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
+met:
+
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+ * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
+ the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
+ distribution.
+
+ * Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM Project, nor the names
+ of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
+ derived from this software without specific prior written
+ permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libwebp.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libwebp.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a6f99547d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/libwebp.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+Copyright (c) 2010, Google Inc. All rights reserved.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
+met:
+
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+ * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
+ the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
+ distribution.
+
+ * Neither the name of Google nor the names of its contributors may
+ be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
+SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opencore-amr.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opencore-amr.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ec4bf01e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opencore-amr.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+Apache License
+Version 2.0, January 2004
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
+
+1. Definitions.
+
+"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
+distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
+
+"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
+copyright owner that is granting the License.
+
+"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other
+entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with
+that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
+power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
+entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
+percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
+ownership of such entity.
+
+"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising
+permissions granted by this License.
+
+"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
+including but not limited to software source code, documentation source,
+and configuration files.
+
+"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation
+or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled
+object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
+
+"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form,
+made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that
+is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the
+Appendix below).
+
+"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form,
+that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial
+revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as
+a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
+Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or
+merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative
+Works thereof.
+
+"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original
+version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
+Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for
+inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
+Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
+purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
+verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
+representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
+mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that
+are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing
+and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously
+marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
+Contribution."
+
+"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on
+behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
+subsequently incorporated within the Work.
+
+2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
+reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
+sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
+Object form.
+
+3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in
+this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
+import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to
+those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
+infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
+Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
+If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
+cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
+Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or
+contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You
+under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such
+litigation is filed.
+
+4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
+Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and
+in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
+
+ 1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a
+copy of this License; and
+
+ 2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating
+that You changed the files; and
+
+ 3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You
+distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from
+the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to
+any part of the Derivative Works; and
+
+ 4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
+distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a
+readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
+excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
+Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
+distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
+documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a
+display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
+notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for
+informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your
+own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute,
+alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that
+such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
+License.
+
+You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may
+provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use,
+reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
+Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and
+distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in
+this License.
+
+5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
+Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to
+the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,
+without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above,
+nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license
+agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
+
+6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
+names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except
+as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of
+the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
+
+7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
+in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its
+Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any
+warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for
+determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and
+assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
+License.
+
+8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether
+in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by
+applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to
+in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including
+any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
+character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or
+inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
+goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
+other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
+advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the
+Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee
+for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
+obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in
+accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your
+sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
+You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
+liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by
+reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
+
+To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate
+notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own
+identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
+enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also
+recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included
+on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
+identification within third-party archives.
+
+ Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
+
+ Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may
+ not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
+ copy of the License at
+
+ http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+ Unless required by applicable
+ law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
+ distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+ KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language
+ governing permissions and limitations under the License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/openjpeg.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/openjpeg.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f578e33a30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/openjpeg.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2002-2012, Communications and Remote Sensing Laboratory, Universite catholique de Louvain (UCL), Belgium
+ * Copyright (c) 2002-2012, Professor Benoit Macq
+ * Copyright (c) 2003-2012, Antonin Descampe
+ * Copyright (c) 2003-2009, Francois-Olivier Devaux
+ * Copyright (c) 2005, Herve Drolon, FreeImage Team
+ * Copyright (c) 2002-2003, Yannick Verschueren
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, David Janssens
+ * Copyright (c) 2011-2012, Centre National d'Etudes Spatiales (CNES), France
+ * Copyright (c) 2012, CS Systemes d'Information, France
+ *
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS `AS IS'
+ * AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
+ * LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
+ * CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
+ * SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
+ * CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
+ * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
+ * POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ */
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opus.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opus.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f4159e675a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/opus.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+Copyright 2001-2011 Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic,
+ Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy B. Terriberry,
+ CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell, Mark Borgerding,
+ Erik de Castro Lopo
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
+- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
+- Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF Trust, nor the
+names of specific contributors, may be used to endorse or promote
+products derived from this software without specific prior written
+permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
+OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
+PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+
+Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses which are
+specified at:
+
+Xiph.Org Foundation:
+https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1524/
+
+Microsoft Corporation:
+https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1914/
+
+Broadcom Corporation:
+https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1526/
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/rtmpdump.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/rtmpdump.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d511905c16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/rtmpdump.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/schroedinger.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/schroedinger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8a68a0d959
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/schroedinger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,467 @@
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is
+ numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Library General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated Free Software Foundation software, and to any
+other libraries whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
+your libraries, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if
+you distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link a program with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them
+with the library, after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ Our method of protecting your rights has two steps: (1) copyright
+the library, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+library. If the library is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original
+version, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on
+the original authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that companies distributing free
+software will individually obtain patent licenses, thus in effect
+transforming the program into proprietary software. To prevent this,
+we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's
+free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary
+GNU General Public License, which was designed for utility programs. This
+license, the GNU Library General Public License, applies to certain
+designated libraries. This license is quite different from the ordinary
+one; be sure to read it in full, and don't assume that anything in it is
+the same as in the ordinary license.
+
+ The reason we have a separate public license for some libraries is that
+they blur the distinction we usually make between modifying or adding to a
+program and simply using it. Linking a program with a library, without
+changing the library, is in some sense simply using the library, and is
+analogous to running a utility program or application program. However, in
+a textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a combined work, a
+derivative of the original library, and the ordinary General Public License
+treats it as such.
+
+ Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary General
+Public License for libraries did not effectively promote software
+sharing, because most developers did not use the libraries. We
+concluded that weaker conditions might promote sharing better.
+
+ However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs would deprive the
+users of those programs of all benefit from the free status of the
+libraries themselves. This Library General Public License is intended to
+permit developers of non-free programs to use free libraries, while
+preserving your freedom as a user of such programs to change the free
+libraries that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how to achieve
+this as regards changes in header files, but we have achieved it as regards
+changes in the actual functions of the Library.) The hope is that this
+will lead to faster development of free libraries.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, while the latter only
+works together with the library.
+
+ Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by the ordinary
+General Public License rather than by this special one.
+
+ GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library which
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
+party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Library
+General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is
+addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also compile or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ c) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
+distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Library General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ Appendix: How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ Library General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU Library General Public
+ License along with this library; if not, write to the Free
+ Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/soxr.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/soxr.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1c618785e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/soxr.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+SoX Resampler Library Copyright (c) 2007-13 robs@users.sourceforge.net
+
+This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by
+the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at
+your option) any later version.
+
+This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser
+General Public License for more details.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
+Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
+
+
+Notes
+
+1. Re software in the `examples' directory: works that are not resampling
+examples but are based on the given examples -- for example, applications using
+the library -- shall not be considered to be derivative works of the examples.
+
+2. If building with pffft.c, see the licence embedded in that file.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/speex.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/speex.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..de6fbe2c91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/speex.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+Copyright 2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation
+Copyright 2002-2008 Jean-Marc Valin
+Copyright 2005-2007 Analog Devices Inc.
+Copyright 2005-2008 Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
+ Organisation (CSIRO)
+Copyright 1993, 2002, 2006 David Rowe
+Copyright 2003 EpicGames
+Copyright 1992-1994 Jutta Degener, Carsten Bormann
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+are met:
+
+- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+
+- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+
+- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its
+contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from
+this software without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
+``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
+LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
+A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
+CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
+EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
+PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
+LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/twolame.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/twolame.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b1e3f5a263
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/twolame.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,504 @@
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2.1, February 1999
+
+ Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts
+ as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence
+ the version number 2.1.]
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change
+free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
+
+ This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some
+specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the
+Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You
+can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether
+this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better
+strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use,
+not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that
+you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge
+for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get
+it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of
+it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do
+these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these
+rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for
+you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis
+or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave
+you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source
+code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide
+complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them
+with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling
+it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the
+library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal
+permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
+
+ To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that
+there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
+modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know
+that what they have is not the original version, so that the original
+author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be
+introduced by others.
+
+ Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of
+any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot
+effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
+restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that
+any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be
+consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
+
+ Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
+ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and
+is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use
+this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those
+libraries into non-free programs.
+
+ When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using
+a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a
+combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
+General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
+entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General
+Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with
+the library.
+
+ We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it
+does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General
+Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less
+of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages
+are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many
+libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
+special circumstances.
+
+ For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to
+encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes
+a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
+allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
+library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this
+case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free
+software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
+
+ In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free
+programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of
+free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in
+non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU
+operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
+system.
+
+ Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the
+users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is
+linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run
+that program using a modified version of the Library.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a
+"work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
+former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must
+be combined with the library in order to run.
+
+ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other
+program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or
+other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of
+this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License").
+Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+ A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data
+prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs
+(which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
+
+ The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work
+which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the
+Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under
+copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a
+portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
+straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
+included without limitation in the term "modification".)
+
+ "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means
+all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated
+interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
+and installation of the library.
+
+ Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from
+such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based
+on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for
+writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does
+and what the program that uses the Library does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's
+complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that
+you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an
+appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact
+all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
+warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
+Library.
+
+ You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy,
+and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
+fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
+
+ b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no
+ charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a
+ table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses
+ the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility
+ is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
+ in the event an application does not supply such function or
+ table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of
+ its purpose remains meaningful.
+
+ (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has
+ a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the
+ application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
+ application-supplied function or table used by this function must
+ be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square
+ root function must still compute square roots.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote
+it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Library.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library
+with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public
+License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do
+this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so
+that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2,
+instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the
+ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify
+that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in
+these notices.
+
+ Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for
+that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all
+subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
+
+ This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of
+the Library into a program that is not a library.
+
+ 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or
+derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
+under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany
+it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
+must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
+medium customarily used for software interchange.
+
+ If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy
+from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the
+source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
+distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the
+Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or
+linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
+work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and
+therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
+
+ However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library
+creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it
+contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
+library". The executable is therefore covered by this License.
+Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
+
+ When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file
+that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a
+derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not.
+Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be
+linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The
+threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
+
+ If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
+structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline
+functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object
+file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
+work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the
+Library will still fall under Section 6.)
+
+ Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
+distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6.
+Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6,
+whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
+
+ 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or
+link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a
+work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work
+under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit
+modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications.
+
+ You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the
+Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by
+this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
+during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the
+copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference
+directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one
+of these things:
+
+ a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
+ machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever
+ changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under
+ Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked
+ with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that
+ uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the
+ user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
+ executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood
+ that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the
+ Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application
+ to use the modified definitions.)
+
+ b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+ Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a
+ copy of the library already present on the user's computer system,
+ rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2)
+ will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if
+ the user installs one, as long as the modified version is
+ interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
+
+ c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at
+ least three years, to give the same user the materials
+ specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more
+ than the cost of performing this distribution.
+
+ d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy
+ from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above
+ specified materials from the same place.
+
+ e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
+ materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
+
+ For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the
+Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for
+reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
+the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
+normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
+components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
+which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
+the executable.
+
+ It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license
+restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
+accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot
+use both them and the Library together in an executable that you
+distribute.
+
+ 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library
+facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined
+library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on
+the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
+permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
+
+ a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
+ based on the Library, uncombined with any other library
+ facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the
+ Sections above.
+
+ b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact
+ that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining
+ where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+ 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
+the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any
+attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
+distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your
+rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies,
+or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
+terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Library or works based on it.
+
+ 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the
+Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
+subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with
+this License.
+
+ 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any
+particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply,
+and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add
+an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries,
+so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus
+excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if
+written in the body of this License.
+
+ 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
+versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time.
+Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
+but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
+"any later version", you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that version or of any later version published by
+the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
+license version number, you may choose any version ever published by
+the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these,
+write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is
+copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
+Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our
+decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status
+of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
+and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
+WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
+EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
+OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
+KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
+LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
+THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
+WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
+AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
+FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
+CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
+LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
+RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
+FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
+SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
+
+ If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that
+everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting
+redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the
+ordinary General Public License).
+
+ To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is
+safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
+"copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+ modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
+ version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+ Lesser General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+ License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the
+ library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1990
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+That's all there is to it!
+
+
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vid.stab.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vid.stab.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a09e1dc74d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vid.stab.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+In this project is open source in the sense of the GPL.
+
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify *
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by *
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or *
+ * (at your option) any later version. *
+ * *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License *
+ * along with this program; if not, write to the *
+ * Free Software Foundation, Inc., *
+ * 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. *
+ * *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, *
+ * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of *
+ * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the *
+ * GNU General Public License for more details. *
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-aacenc.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-aacenc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ec4bf01e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-aacenc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+Apache License
+Version 2.0, January 2004
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
+
+1. Definitions.
+
+"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
+distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
+
+"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
+copyright owner that is granting the License.
+
+"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other
+entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with
+that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
+power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
+entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
+percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
+ownership of such entity.
+
+"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising
+permissions granted by this License.
+
+"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
+including but not limited to software source code, documentation source,
+and configuration files.
+
+"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation
+or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled
+object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
+
+"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form,
+made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that
+is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the
+Appendix below).
+
+"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form,
+that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial
+revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as
+a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
+Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or
+merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative
+Works thereof.
+
+"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original
+version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
+Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for
+inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
+Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
+purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
+verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
+representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
+mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that
+are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing
+and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously
+marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
+Contribution."
+
+"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on
+behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
+subsequently incorporated within the Work.
+
+2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
+reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
+sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
+Object form.
+
+3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in
+this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
+import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to
+those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
+infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
+Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
+If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
+cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
+Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or
+contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You
+under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such
+litigation is filed.
+
+4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
+Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and
+in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
+
+ 1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a
+copy of this License; and
+
+ 2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating
+that You changed the files; and
+
+ 3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You
+distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from
+the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to
+any part of the Derivative Works; and
+
+ 4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
+distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a
+readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
+excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
+Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
+distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
+documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a
+display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
+notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for
+informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your
+own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute,
+alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that
+such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
+License.
+
+You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may
+provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use,
+reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
+Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and
+distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in
+this License.
+
+5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
+Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to
+the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,
+without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above,
+nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license
+agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
+
+6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
+names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except
+as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of
+the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
+
+7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
+in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its
+Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any
+warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for
+determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and
+assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
+License.
+
+8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether
+in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by
+applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to
+in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including
+any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
+character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or
+inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
+goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
+other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
+advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the
+Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee
+for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
+obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in
+accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your
+sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
+You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
+liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by
+reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
+
+To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate
+notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own
+identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
+enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also
+recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included
+on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
+identification within third-party archives.
+
+ Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
+
+ Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may
+ not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
+ copy of the License at
+
+ http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+ Unless required by applicable
+ law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
+ distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+ KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language
+ governing permissions and limitations under the License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-amrwbenc.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-amrwbenc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ec4bf01e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/vo-amrwbenc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+Apache License
+Version 2.0, January 2004
+http://www.apache.org/licenses/
+
+TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
+
+1. Definitions.
+
+"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and
+distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
+
+"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the
+copyright owner that is granting the License.
+
+"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other
+entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with
+that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
+power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such
+entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
+percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
+ownership of such entity.
+
+"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising
+permissions granted by this License.
+
+"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications,
+including but not limited to software source code, documentation source,
+and configuration files.
+
+"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation
+or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled
+object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
+
+"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form,
+made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that
+is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the
+Appendix below).
+
+"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form,
+that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial
+revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as
+a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License,
+Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or
+merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative
+Works thereof.
+
+"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original
+version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or
+Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for
+inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal
+Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
+purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
+verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
+representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic
+mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that
+are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing
+and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously
+marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
+Contribution."
+
+"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on
+behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and
+subsequently incorporated within the Work.
+
+2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
+reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform,
+sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
+Object form.
+
+3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this
+License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
+non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in
+this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
+import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to
+those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
+infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
+Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
+If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
+cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
+Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or
+contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You
+under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such
+litigation is filed.
+
+4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
+Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and
+in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
+
+ 1. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a
+copy of this License; and
+
+ 2. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating
+that You changed the files; and
+
+ 3. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You
+distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from
+the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to
+any part of the Derivative Works; and
+
+ 4. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
+distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a
+readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
+excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
+Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file
+distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or
+documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a
+display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
+notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for
+informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your
+own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute,
+alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that
+such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
+License.
+
+You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may
+provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use,
+reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
+Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and
+distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in
+this License.
+
+5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
+Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to
+the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,
+without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above,
+nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license
+agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
+
+6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade
+names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except
+as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of
+the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
+
+7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to
+in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its
+Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any
+warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for
+determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and
+assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this
+License.
+
+8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether
+in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by
+applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to
+in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including
+any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any
+character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or
+inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of
+goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all
+other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
+advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the
+Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee
+for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
+obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in
+accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your
+sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
+You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
+liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by
+reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
+
+END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
+
+To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate
+notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets "[]" replaced with your own
+identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
+enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also
+recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included
+on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
+identification within third-party archives.
+
+ Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
+
+ Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may
+ not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a
+ copy of the License at
+
+ http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
+
+ Unless required by applicable
+ law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is
+ distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
+ KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language
+ governing permissions and limitations under the License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/wavpack.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/wavpack.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6ffc23b932
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/wavpack.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+ Copyright (c) 1998 - 2009 Conifer Software
+ All rights reserved.
+
+Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
+
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
+ this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
+ this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * Neither the name of Conifer Software nor the names of its contributors
+ may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ without specific prior written permission.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS"
+AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
+ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
+SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
+CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
+OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
+OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x264.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x264.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d60c31a97a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x264.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x265.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x265.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..18c946f707
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/x265.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,343 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+
+ Copyright (C)
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
+
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ , 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
+Public License instead of this License.
+
+This program is also available under a commercial proprietary license.
+For more information, contact us at licensing@multicorewareinc.com.
diff --git a/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/xavs.txt b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/xavs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..94a9ed024d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Externals/ffmpeg/dev/licenses/xavs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,674 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.